M€m wmmMQER mimomm
^,
r"^
HANDBOOK
GEAMMAE OF THE GEEEK TESTAMENT.
I y
y
HANDBOOK
lO
THE GEAMMAK
or THE
GREEK TESTAMENT
TOGETHER WITH
A COMPLETE VOCABULARY, AND AN EXAMINATION OF THE
CHIEF NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
ILLUSTRATED BY NUMEROUS EXAMPLES AND COMMENTS.
LONDON :
THE RELIGIOUS TRACT SOCIETY,
66, PATERNOSTER ROW; 65, ST. PAUL'S CHURCHYARD;
AND 164, PICCADILLY.
[All rights reserved.]
* . ^ « . t <
743 :■
PEEFACE.
That a knowledge of tlie New Testament in its original tongue is a
tiling to be desired by intelligent Christians none will question. No
book can be tboroughly known in a translation only ; and tke Bible,
although. " the most translatable of books," is no exception.
Many, who would gladly undertake the study, are deterred by the
manifold and unquestionable difficulties of the Greek Language. It
seems worth while to ask whether this obstacle cannot, in some
measure, be removed.
Undoubtedly, the Greek of the New Testament, as a later dialect
of an elaborate and polished language, can most eflfectively be studied
through the medium of the elder forms of the tongue. This method,
accordingly, is in general chosen ; and the historians and orators, the
philosophers and poets of Greece, have led the way to the Evangelists
and the Apostles.
Yet many persons have no opportunity for Studies so extended
and difficult. Are they, therefore, to be forbidden all access, save
through translators, critics, and interpreters, to the words of the
Divine revelation ?
In attempting to reply, we note that the Greek of Scripture
is, for most purposes, a language complete in itself. Its forms and
rules are definite, its usages in general precise. Its peculiarities,
though best approached from the classic side, may be reached by a
shorter way, and be almost as well comprehended.
Many circumstances, again, facilitate the special study of the New
Testament tongue. The language of orators and philosophers had
descended to men of simpler mind and less artificial speech. Com-
paring the Sacred Volume with Greek literature generally, we find
A36325
IV PREFACE.
a smaller vocabulaty, fewer graminatical forms, less intricate etymo-
logical rules, with scantier lists of exceptions, and a far less elaborate
syntax ; wkile the student has the advantage of being confined for
the time to one limited, but intensely interesting, field.
The following pages are then intended as a sufficient guide to
Biblical Grreek for English students, that is, for those who have not
studied the classical languages'. It may also be of service to those
who have made some progress in classical studies, but who wish to
concentrate their chief regards upon the language and syntax of the
New Testament.
The plan of the volume, and the method recommended for its study,
are sufficiently set forth in the Introduction. To specify all the
sources, English and German, from which valuable aid has been
derived, would be unnecessary. Winer's comprehensive work (Sixth
Edition, Leipsic, 1855 ; Edinburgh, T. & T. Clark, 1859, by Masson)
has of course been consulted throughout. Scarcely less useful
have been the researches and discussions of the late Dr. Donaldson.
The New Testament Grammars of the Bev. W. Webster, and of
the Eev. T. S. Green, have afi'orded some very valuable hints.
On Greek Testament Lexicography, it will suffice to name the
admirable Clavis Novi Testamenti recently published at Leipsic by
Dr. 0. L. W. Grimm.
The work has been carefully revised throughout in MS. by the
Eev. Dr. Jacob, late Head Master of Christ's Hospital, author of
the Bromsgrove Greek Grammar ^ and other classical works; and, in
the proof sheets, by the Eev. E. B. Girdlestone, M.A., Editorial
Superintendent of the British and Foreign Bible Society. To the
important suggestions of these gentlemen the volume in its present
state owes very much. It is now commended to attentive students
of the New Testament, in the hope that it may lead not a few
to the better understanding, and therefore to the higher appreciation
of the Divine oracles.
SAMUEL G. GEEEN.
Eawdon College.
INTEODIICTION.
The following work so far differs from other manuals of the
Greek language, both in its method and in the persons for
whom it is intended, that some preliminary words on the
plan by which its several parts should be studied will not be
out of place.
On Orthography, the sections should be thoroughly
mastered, not only for the sake of facility in reading, but
because most of the difficulties and so-called irregularities
in the inflection of substantives, adjectives, and verbs depend
on letter- changes, of which the rules are comparatively few,
and really simple. To know these laws at the outset is to be
provided with a key to varieties and intricacies which might
otherwise prove hopelessly bewildering. It will be advisable
that no student should advance beyond this portion of the
work before being able to read the lessons on pages 11, 12
with fluency, and accurately to transcribe the paragraph on
page 13. Great attention should be paid at this stage to
pronunciation, especially to the distinction between the long
and short vowels ; and those who may be studying the work
by themselves are strongly recommended to take an oppor-
tunity of reading a chapter or two in Greek to some scholar
who can criticise and correct their mistakes.
In Etymology, the forms must be carefully and completely
learned. Everything in the student's further progress
depends upon this. It is believed that the systematic and
VI INTRODUCTION.
progressive plan on which the substantives and verbs, as
the groundwork of the whole, have been discussed, will
but lightly burden the memory, while the judgment will
be kept constantly at work. The chief point to be noted
is the place and power of the stem in Greek words. The
first and second declensions of Substantives will be seen to
be mainly reducible to the same law ; the third declension,
instead of perplexing the learner by countless varieties, will
exhibit one normal form. The inflection of Adjectives will
appear but a repetition of that of the Substantives ; while the
Pronouns only slightly differ. Of the Verbs, the termina-
tions should in the first instance be carefully learned. The
first Paradigm will be found to exhibit the simplest way in
which these terminations can be combined with the verbal
root ; those that follow being but variations on the same
model, according to the character of the Stem. The Verbs
in fit, or of the Second Conjugation,* are classified in a way
which, it is believed, will give no serious difficulty to the
student.
The Exercises up to this point are simply for practice
in declension and conjugation, consisting almost exclusively
of words occurring in the " Sermon on the Mount : " they
are fair specimens of the ordinary vocabulary of the
language ; and the learner is strongly recommended to
write them out in all their forms, not neglecting the accents,
which, by the help of the rules given under the several
heads, will present but little difficulty.
A stock of words will thus have been acquired, with a
* In strictness, of course the First. The normal forms of the Verb are
really to be foimd here ; and the terminations of Verbs in a might be
deduced from these, by the aid of "the connective vowels." See especially
Professor Greenwood's Greek Orammar. It has not, however, been thought
necessary, in the present work, to carry analysis so far.
INTRODUCTION. VU
knowledge of forms of inflection quite sufficient for ordinary-
cases. Some chapters of greater difficulty follow, treating
of the Yerbs, tense by tense, and exhibiting the chief
variations and anomalies in particular words. These
sections may be omitted on a first study of the volume,
but it will be important to read them carefully afterwards.
The aim has been, so to classify the verbal forms that most
apparent irregularities may be seen to be only exemplifica-
tions of some more extended rule ; and, without trespassing
on the more extended field of classical literature, to leave
no word in the New Testament without the means of ready
analysis and explanation.
The Exercises which succeed these sections are for still
further test. Here for the first time some easy sentences
are introduced for translation. Logically, these should no
doubt have been deferred until some rules of Syntax
had been laid down ; but the interest and utility of such
Exercises may be held a sufficient defence of the irregu-
larity, especially as they contain scarcely any usages but
such as are already familiar to those who have gram-
matically studied any language. Here, a Greek Testament
Lexicon or Vocabulary will be found necessary.
The chapters on the indeclinable Parts of Speech call for
no remark. Their complete discussion belongs to Syntax:
but it was held necessary to the completeness of the Ety-
mology to give at least a general view of their formation and
meaning. So far as they extend, these sections should be
closely studied.
The reader will then be prepared for the Syntax, the
study of the intermediate chapters being postponed, if pre-
ferred, to a subsequent stage. These sections, on the difierent
Languages of which the New Testament contains the trace,
and on New Testament Proper Names, will suggest topics of
VUl INTRODUCTION.
interesting inquiry, which, in a manual like the present,
could be pursued only for a very little way.
The Syntax embodies the simplest laws of concord,
government, and the connection of sentences, as well as
others of a more special and less obvious kind. The doc-
trines of the Article, of the Preposition, and of the Tenses,
have received careful attention, as throwing light on many
obscure or misunderstood passages. The arrangement of the
Syntax has been adopted with a view to the learner's con-
venience, and for the most part follows the order of the Parts
of Speech.
The student is specially and strongly recommended to
study the order of the whole work, and especially of this
part, in the Analytical Table of Contents. To this
Table much care has been devoted, in the hope that it might
be convenient not only for ordinary reference, but as an out-
line and conspectus of the volume ; suggesting at one view
the leading principles of the language, and especially useful
in recapitulatory examinations.
The sentences from the Greek Testament, so numerous in
this division of the work, are intended partly to exemplify
the rules to which they are appended, the illustrative
words being printed in a thicker type; partly also to
form together a series of Preparatory Reading Lessons or
Primer, introductory to the sacred volume.. The student is
therefore earnestly counselled to study these sentences in
order. Most of them, of course, belong to the easier parts of
New Testament Scripture; others again are more difficult
and unusual in their structure; while in very many will
be discovered shades or specialties of meaning which the
English Version does not exhibit, and which perhaps no
translation could reproduce. The study, therefore, of these
sentences will be an introduction to Biblical exegesis,
INTRODUCTION. IX
which may prepare not a few readers for more extended
inquiries.
A YocABULARY to the whole New Testament, and a brief
discussion of the chief New Testament Synonyms, complete
the plan of the work.
The work claims, be it remembered, to be an Introduction
only. By its means, a not inadequate beginning may be
made in what is surely the noblest of studies. Its aim is to
familiarise many readers, who else had despaired of the
possibility, with the words of Christ and of His Apostles.
Should its purpose in any way be accomplished, it will give
access also to those criticisms by which expositors in our
own land and age, as in others, have so variously and nobly
illustrated the "living oracles." The labour followed by
such rewards will have been well spent : and readers of the
New Testament in its own tongue, whether they advance or
not to that high critical discernment which only the few
attain, will have found in the acquisition a pure and life-
long joy.
Note on the Eeferei^ces to Critical Editions of the New Testa-
ment. — Several words and phrases of the New Testament differ in the best
MSS. from the reading of the ordinary text. In a few cases the variations
are of some grammatical importance, and it has been necessary, therefore, to
refer to them. These references have mostly been made by the help of the
Critical Editions of the New Testament published by J. J. Griesbach (1796-
1806); by Dr. Tischendorf, Leipsic, seventh ed., 1859; by Dr. Lachmann,
Berlin (1842-1850) ; and by Dr. S. P. Tregelles (including as yet only the
Gospels, the Acts, and the General Epistles), 1844-1861.
MALYTICAL TAELE OF COISTTENTS.
PART I.
ORTHOGRAPHY.
BECT. PAGE
I. THE ALPHABET. Names, forms, and nmneral values of the
letters 1
a. Notes on the Alphabet 2
3. The Vowels : (a) their pronunciation, long and short ... 2
(6) The diphthongs (regularly long) 2
(c) The "breathings" of initial vowels 3
(fZ) The "breathings "of initial p 3
(e) The lengthening of vowels in inflection 3
(/) Tae contraction of vowels. Table.
Exercise 1. Vowel Contractions .... 4
{g) Diaeresis 4
(A) Hiatus, and the ways of avoiding it —
1. The nu sufifixed {v ecpeKKvorriKSy) 4
2. Elision (apostrophe) ....... 4
3. Crasis 5
4. The Consonants 5
(a) Division into mutes and liquids 5
(6) Classification of mutes 5
(c) The sibilant a; and its combinations . - ... 6
{d) Rules of consonant combination —
1. Labials or gutturals, with c 6
2. Labials or gutturals, with a dental .... 6
3. Dentals before <r 6
4. Mutes before /a 6
6. Combinations of v with other consonants ... 6
6. A sharp mute before an aspirated vowel ... 7
7. Consecutive syllables not to begin with an aspirate . 7
8. Consonants that may be final 7
Exercise 2. On the Combinations of Consonants . 7
5. Changes of Consonants by assimilation, duplication, transposition,
omission, or insertion , 7
xu
ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
SBOT.
THE ACCENTS """""s
(a) Use of the accents ........ 8
{b) The different accents .8
(c) Rules of accentuation 9
{d, e) Enclitics and proclitics . 9
On the transference of Greek words into English . . , .10
Latin the usual medium 10
Equivalents of k, v, ai, oi, €i, ov, initial I and 'P . . . .10
Punctuation 11
Marks of pause, interrogation, quotation, and for **&c." . .11
Reading Lessons —
1. Acts ii. 1-13 11
2. Romans iv. 1-16 12
3. Matt. V. 1-16, in Roman characters 13
PART II.
ETYMOLOar.
CHAPTER L— INTRODUCTION.
9. The "Parts of Speech" 16
10. THE ROOT and STEM 15
Pure and (impure) liquid or mute stems 15
(The stem to be marked by thick letters) 15
CHAPTER IL-THE NOUN OR SUBSTANTIVE.
II. GENDER, NUMBER, and CASE .
General sio;nificance of the Cases
I*, 13. The Definite Article and Indefinite Pronoun
Types of Substantive and Adjective Declension .
14. Characteristics of all declensions of Nouns
(a) Neuter ^Jominatives and Accusatives alike .
Their plural termination always a
(6) The Dative Singular in i ("iota subscript") .
(c) The Genitive Plural in »i' .
{d) Masculine like the Neuter in Genitive and Dative
15. Rides for determining the Gender of Nouns .
(a) Masculine : names of males, rivers, winds .
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
ETYMOLOGY. XUl
SECT. . , , , ^^®^
i£. (b) Feminine: names of females, trees, countries, islands, and
abstract nouns 18
(c) Neuter: diminutives, indeclinables, and the verbal noun
(infinitive) 18
(Note on common and epicoene words) 18
1 6. DECLENSI N OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE . . 18
Three leading types . . . 18
Illustrations : iri\r], &v6poiyiros, irais ...... 19
Resemblances between the first and second . . . .19
The A and O declensions (parisyllabic) 20
The Separable declension (imparisy liable) . . . .20
17. The Fiest Declension (A) 20
18. Feminine Paradigms {vH-^pa, SJ|o, rifi-f], ffKia) and Remarks . . 20
19. Masculine Paradigms (/ta0rjTTJs, veoWos) and Remarks . . .22
Exercises. Nouns of the First Declension . . 22
20. Irregular forms of the First Declension 23
21. The Second Declension (O) 23
22. Masculine {\6yos) and Feminine {6B6s) Paradigms, and Remarks . 23
23. Neuter Paradigm {avKov) and Remarks 24
24. Paradigm of Contracted Nouns in eo-, oo-, vovs, offrovv ('AiroAAcis) 25
25. Declension of 'l-qcrovs 25
Exercise 4. Nouns of the Second Declension . . 25
26. The Third Declension (imparisyllabic) 26
Importance of knowing the stem 26
27. General Paradigms : al<£V, ftrifxa. 26
28. Terminations of this Declension 27
29. Varieties according to stem-endings , , ... 27
Consonants and vowels that may be stem-endings . . .27
Rules for the Nominative 27
1. s added to the stem 27
2. The stem lengthened , 28
3. Digammated stems (eu-, «w-, ov-) 29
4. Neuter stems in es- (os) 29
5. Stem unchanged 29
30. Paradigms illustrating these five rules ... . . .30
1. "Apa^'j K^pw|, Ix'^vs, nShis 30
2. TTOifiiif, \4wv, aiSus, Trar-ijp, avfip 31
3. ^affiKevs, fiovs .,..,.,,. 32
4. yeuos , . , .32
5. Referred to § 26 32
Exercises. Nouns of the Third Declension . . 33
3 1 . Irregular Nouns of the Third Declension 33
32. Substantives of Variable Declension . . . . . 34
XIV ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
SECT.
32. (a) Interchanges between the second and third ,
(6) The word adPfiarov, Sabbath . . .
(c) Proper names, especially Moses, Jerusalem, .
Hebrew indeclinables
Exercise 6. Promiscuous List of Nouns
PAGE
34
34
34
34
35
CHAPTER IIL— ADJECTIVES.
33. THREE FORMS, correspondent with substantive declensions . 36
34. FiEST Form 36
Paradigms of dyafiiJs, Sf/catos, fxiKpSs, and Remarks . . .36
35. Contracted Adjectives, xP'^'^o''^ ; Remarks 37
36. Second Form 38
General Remarks 38
37. Paradigms of d^vs, iray, ckJov 38
38. Participles of this class (declension of iffrd^s) . . . .39
39. Adjectives of double form : /ieyos, fl-oAus, 7r/)oiJs .... 40
40. Third Form 41
General Remarks 41
41. Paradigms of oAtjA^s, (rdxppoov ....... 41
COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES .... 42
42. First Method 42
Comparison of iriffros, oKriOiis, (ro<p4s, v4os 42
43. Second Method 43
Comparison of Tax(>s, cua^pSs, Ka\6s, fidyas ... .43
44. Declension of comparatives in -icov (fielCwv) 43
45. Irregular and alternative comparisons 44
a.ya66s, koucSs, fiiKpSs, iroXvs ....... 44
46. Defective Comparatives and Superlatives .... 44
47. Emphatic Methods of Comparison 44
Exercise 7. Adjectives for Practice .... 45
NUMERALS 46
48. The Cardinal Numbers . 46
(a) Signs of numeration ^ . . 46
(6) Disused letters as numeral signs 46
{c) Composite numerical expressions 46
49. Declension of the cardinal numbers 46
elr, S60, rpels, reaaapes 46
50. The Ordinal Numbers 47
51. Table of Cardinals and Ordinals, and Remark . . 47
Distributive Numbers 49
Exercise 8. Numbers : Numerical symbols, and phrases
for translation . • 50
5»
ETYMOLOGY. XV
CHAPTER IV.— PRONOUNS.
8ECf. PAOB
53. PERSONAL PRONOUNS 51
1. Substantive-personal ("personal") 51
First person, iydl>, rjixels ; second, <tv, vfieTs . . . ,51
54. Third person, by avrSs, -l], 6 51
55. 2. Reflexive . 52
First person, i/uavrov ; second, ffeawov ... . . 52
Third, iavrov {avrov) ........ 52
56. 3. Adjective-personal (possessive) , . . . . .52
(a) ifiSs, ■^/AeTepos, aros, vfi^Tepos . . . . . » 52
(6, c) Genitive of the personal ])ronouus as possessives . 63
57- DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 63
Framed upon the model of the Article 53
(a, 6, c, d) ohe, ouToj, iK€ivo<i, 8avT6s> . . . . .5.3
(e) toioDtos, roTovTOSy rr}\iKovTos . . . . ..54
58. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN .54
(a, b) OS, t}, 8 ; (c, d) offris, oa-irep, Haye 54
(e) Relatives of quality, quantity, number, degree . . .55
59. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 55
(a) The simple Interrogative, ris ; ri; 55
(6) Correlatives of quality, q\xantity, number, degree . . .55
(c) Direct interrogatives in indirect construction . . .56
(d) Interrogatives properly indirect 56
60. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS . . . . . .56
(a, b) The ordinary Indefinite, ns, and negative compound . . 56
(c) The old Indefinite, 6 Selya 56
61. DISTRIBUTIVE PRONOUNS 56
(a) &\\os, (6) trepos, (c) aAArjAwj/, {d) (Kaaros . . . .56
62. Table of Correlative Pronouns 67
CHAPTER v.— THE VERB.
THE VOICES 58
Four things predicated by the Verb 68
Threefold modification of the verbal stem- 58
Active, Middle, Passive ......... 58
THE MOODS 58
Four Modes or Moods 58
J. The Indicative, and its use 58
2. The Imperative .. . . .. . . . , . 58
The Subjunctive . . . . . . . . 69
6
>*
XVI ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTEN'l'S.
8F.CT. PAOF
64.. 4. The Optative (properly a division of the Subjunctive) . 59
5. Interrogative Forms 59
0. The Infinitive, \ ^ ,. . . ,
7. The Participles, 1 Pa^icipiah ..... 59
^5- THE TENSES .60
Time and State jointly expressed 60
Nine possible Tenses. Scheme 60
Seven actual Tenses (in common use, six) . . . . .60
"Principal" and "Historical" Tenses 60
Arrangement of Tenses. Tenses oi Xl'ca 60
66. NUMBER AND PERSON 61
Gj. The Two Conjugations .61
Remark on the Greek and English typical forms . . . .61
68. The Verbal Stem . . 61
How ascertained : affixes and suffixes 61
69. Augment and Reduplication 62
(a) Augment in the historical tenses, indicative . . . .62
1. The syllabic augment — with initial consonants . . 62
2. The temporal augment — with initial vowels . . .62
(6) Reduplication in the perfect tenses throughout . . .62
An initial consonant repeated, with e 62
An initial vowel lengthened (like temporal augment) . . 62
(c) Augment and reduplication in compound verbs . . .62
70. Inflexional Terivhnations 6.1
{a) Denoting voice, mood, tense, number, and person . . . G.'{
(6) Personal endings originally fragments of pronouns . . 63
Normal forms 63
71. Tense-characteristics (consonant) 63
Active Future and First Aorist, <r 63
,, Perfect and Pluperfect, k 64
Passive Future and First Aorist, 9 64
7z. Modal Vowels 64
Subjunctive— lengthened indicative vowels 64
Optative — diphthongal forms 64
'3. Terminations of all the Moods and Tenses. . 64
74. Paradigm of the Fihst Conjugation : pure uncontractcd . 64
iriffrevca. Principal parts 69
Conjugation throughout 70
75. All other forma variations of this type 78
Exercise 0. On pure, uncontracted Verba . . 78
76. Verbs of the pure uncontracted class 73
77. Possible stem-endings 79
Pure, mute, aud liquid verbs 79
ETYMOLOGY. XVll
SF-CT. PAGE
78. PuEE Verbs. Special Rules 72
(a) The stem-vowels 72
{b) Contraction with a, f, or . . . . . .72
(c) Contraction confined to Present and Imperfect Tenses . 72
((/) Peculiarities of contraction. Compare §3,/. . . 80
79. Paradigms of n^aco, <pi\((a, StjaJw, Present and Imperfect . 80
80. Note on remaining Tenses 83
Exercise 10. On pure, contracted Verbs ... 83
81. Mute Verbs. Special llules 84
S^. Stem unaffected by a following vowel . . . . . .84
83. (a) Tense-characteristics (§ 71) and terminations beginning
with a consonant modify the stem 84
(b) Pules of modification 84
1. As caused by -cr after the verbal stem . . .84
2. „ by -9 „ „ ... 84
3. „ by-T „ „ ... 84
4. ,, by -fi „ „ ... 85
5. „ by -0-9 „ „ ... 85
6. ,, by -VT ,, ,, ... 85
7. „ by-/c ,, „ ... 85
8+. Paradigms of the Mute Verbs. Remarks (a, b, c) . . .85
Conjugation of rpifiw, fi7u>, ireldu 86
85. Modification of the Present (and Imperfect) 90
(a) The stem of the Present not always the stem of the Verb . 90
1. Labial verbal stems, that add t 90
2. Guttural verbal stems, that change the stem-consonant
to (TO- or C • • . . . . . . .90
3. Dental verbal stems, that change the stem-consonant to C CO
(ft) All other tenses formed from the verbal stem . . .90
(c) Vowels changed to diphthongs in short stem-syllables . . 91
Here the Future and Perfect formed from the Present stem 91
85. The Secondary Tenses of modified Verbs 91
In these Tenses, the simple verbal-stem always appears . .91
87. The Second Aorist .91
Conjugated like the Imperfect Indicative (in other moods as
Present) 92
Ilhistrations from (pvy- {(pevyw), rvir- [rinrroo) . . .92
Active, Middle, and Passive 92
Note on Accentuation 92
88. The Second Future (Passive) 93
Illustration from tutt- {tvtttw) 93
89. The Second Perfect (Active) > . 93
Illustration from irpay- (irpdaaw) 93
ft 2
•lu
AJ^ALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
SECT.
90.
92.
93-
94.
95-
96.
97-
98.
PAOB
General Rules for the Second Tenses 93
1. In what verbs they do not occur 93
2, 3. Seldom found in First Tenses in the same verb, except in
Passive 93
4. First and Second Perfects, Active 94
Exercise 11. On mute Verbs . . . . .94
Liquid Verbs. Special Rules 94
(a) Present stem mostly modified 95
(6) Future Active and Middle, contracted 95
(c) First Aorist Active and Middle 95
{d) Perfect Active, variations 95
(e) Perfect passive, variations . 95
Paradigms of Liquid Verbs 96
d77cAXo>, Kpivu), aipw . . . . . . . . . 96
Exercise 12. On liquid Verbs 100
Notes on the Tenses. [These Sections, to the close o/§ 99, dealing
chiejly with minute variations and seeming irregularities in par-
ticular verbs, may be omitted in the first study of the book.^ . . 101
The Present and Imperfect. I. The Present .... 101
1-4. Details of modification, as § 85 101
5. Modifications of pure and impure stems by v, ye, av . . 101
6. Alternative stems, consonant and e- 102
7. Inchoative forms in aK- or ktk- 102
8. Reduplicated stems 102
II. The Imperfect 103
Peculiarities of Augment 108
Double p-. Double augment. Attic augment in ^- . , 103
The Second Aorist, Active and Middle 103
Contains the simple verbal stem 103
(Reduplicated Second Aorist. Change of short stem-vowel) . 103
The Vowel Aorist, as of Second Conjugation .... 103
The Future, Active and Middle 104
(a) Lengthening or otherwise of pure stems .... 104
(6) The Attic Future of Verbs in -iS {iCa>) 105
(c) The digammated future of verbs in «f- (ew) . . . . 105
{d) Future in middle form, with active meaning .... 105
The First Aorist, Active and Middle 106
(a) Connection of Aorist with Future stem .... 106
(1) In pure and mute ; (2) in liquid verbs . . . .106
(6) Peculiarities of Augment 106
Note on Accentuation 107
The Aorists and Futures Pa.ssive 107
{a) Modified like the Perfect Passive 107
ETYMOLOGY.
XIX
SECT.
98.
99.
103,
[O4,
[O5,
106
107
108
[O9.
St
(6) Vowel stem-endings, lengthened, shortened, or with a
(c) Transposition of vowel and liquids in short roots
{d) Change of a weak vowel into a . . .
(e) First and Second Tenses seldom in the same verb
Notes on Irregularities of Augment, and on Accentuation
Perfect and Pluperfect ....
(a) Varieties in reduplication
1. e- before a double consonant
2. itXficpa from \a3- (Ao^jSaVcu) .
3. Double reduplication and augment
4. Pluperfect generally omits augment
(6) Third person plural Perfect Active in -av
(c) The Second Perfect active : its special sense
{d) The Pertect Passive : its peculiarities .
(e) The Future Perfect passive (or mid. )
Note on accentuation
DEPONENT VERBS ....
Active and Passive, as determined by the Aor:
IMPERSONAL VERBS .
Their use ......
List and usual forms of the chief Impersonals
DEFECTIVE VERBS
Originally caused by redundancy
Principal Defective Verbs and their Paradigms
aipew, epxo/J-ai, iadiw, Spdw, rpext^, <p^p(>>, (iirov .
Exercise 13. On the Detective Verbs
THE SECOND CONJUGATION, or Verbs in -^t
The chief peculiarity of these Verbs
Future, First Aori^t, and Perfect like Verbs in -w
Modifications of the Verbal Stem ....
(a) Vowel of a pure stem lengthened
[h) Eeduplication prefixed ....
(c) The syllable -w- [-vw-) affixed .
{d) Two classes thus formed . . . .
First Class— Paradigms in two divisions .
First divmon—rQg\x\a,Y forms . . • .
Paradigms of 'iffTnixi, ridijixi, Si8«/At
Eemarks on the Paradigms ....
1. First Aorist Active, with -«- {riBujixi, SiScc/xi)
2. Peculiarities in augment of iVttj/xj
3. Active Aorists of 'iarriixi — their diJBference
4. The verb crr'fjKca .....
List of Verbs in this division .
XX
>\nai:ytical tahle of contents.
BECT.
109.
III.
112.
113.
114.
116.
J 1 7.
A-stems : a. Active ; h. Deponent
E-stems : I)e])onent only ....
Second Division— Stems ca- (cifii), <(67^t), i{'irifMi)
Conjugation of ilfil ((hai), to be .
i, 6*/i' (^f *'«*)> io go
,, 'hn-i in its compound a<f>lr)ixi
Second Class — Verbs in -vu/j.i or -vw^i
liemarks .......
Paradigms of hdKWjxi and (jcwufxi
Ilemarks on Paradigms
New Testament Verbs like SfiKuvjui .
New Testament Verbs like '^uvvvfii
A-stems
E-stems
O-stems
Exercise 14. On the Verbs in -^i
Exercise 15. General, on the Verbs (from
Exercise 16. Short Sentences
i. The Beatitudes .....
ii. Parts of John i. . ....
iii. Selected Sentences ....
r\GE
. 124
. 125
. 125
. 126
. 127
. 128
. 130
. 130
. 130
. 134
. 134
. 134
. 134
. 135
. 1.35
. 135
2Thess.). 136
. 136
. 137
. 138
. 139
CHAPTER VI.— PKEPOSITIONS.
118. THE THREE CASES: general relations of place, &c. . 140
Prei^ositious extend these relations indefinitely . . . 140
They may govern the Genitive, Dative, or Accusative ; one,
two, or all 140
119. Prepositions Governing the Genitive only, avri, airS, ^k
{H), T^pi 140
120. Prepositions Govehning the Dative only, cV, avv . . 141
121. Prepositions Governing the Accusative only, avd, ds. . 141
122. Prepositions Governing the Genitive and Accusativk, 5ia,
KOT(£, /iCTCt, vep'i, VVfp, vwo . . . . . . .141
123. Prepositions Governing the Genitive, Dative, and Accu-
sative, ivi, irapd, -rpSs ]42
124. Synoptical Table of the Prepositions . . . .142
125. Note on the various meanings of the Prepositions . . . . 143
CHAPTER VII.— ADVERBS.
12O. Adverbs in their Origlnal Form, from SuBSTAyxivEs
144
ETYMOLOGY.
XXI
SPTT.
126.
127.
128.
129.
13c.
133-
134.
(«) As an Accusative Noun, Adjective, or Pronoun.
(b) As a Dative ,, ,,
(c) As a Genitive ,, ,,
{d) As a Preposition, with its Case ....
(e) Old Case-eudings in -dev, -61, and -Se .
Adverbs from Adjectives (in -us) ....
Comparison of Adverbs
Peonominal Adverbs. Table, with Correlatives
NuMEEAL Adverbs (in -kis or -aKts ....
Adverbs from Verbs
Ancient verbal forms, S^vpa, SeSre ....
Derivatives from Verbs in t'fw
Adverbs from Prepositions (or in -u)) .
Prepositive Adverbs (" improper Prepositions
Negative Adverbs, ov and fx-f} .
List
PAG«
144
144
144
144
144
145
145
14G
147
147
147
147
147
147
148
135-
36.
137-
138.
CHAPTER VIII.— CONJUNCTIONS AND PARTICLES.
Meaning of the word Particles . '. 150
Classification of Conjunctive Particles 150
1. Conjunctions of Aknexation 150
Comparison 150
Disjunction 151
Antithesis 151
Condition 151
Cause 151
iNiS-ERENCE 151
Intention or Result . . . .151
(a) Particles of Emphasis, ye, 5e, -vep, -toi ..... 151
(6) Particles of Interrogation, €<, ij, S.pa 151
Interjections 152
(a) Natural instinctive sounds 152
(6) The Interjection rSe, iSotJ! 6e7iO?(£./ 152
CHAPTER IX.— ON THE FORMATION OF WORDS.
[CJiapters IX., X., XL, XII., may be omitted in the first reading o/tJtebook]
139. 1. ROOTS, with primary, tei-tiary, &c., formations . . . 153
2. Classes of Words .153
3. Modification of Stem -endings 154
XXll ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
SECT. , PAOK
140. Classes of Substantives 154
(a) First Declension 154
1. Masculine, in -ttjs 154
2. Feminine, in -'a, -ouvvn 154
(6) Second Declension 154
1. Masculine, in -1x05 154
2. Neuter, in -rpov, -iov {-dpiov, -iliov) .... 155
3. Masculine and Feminine Diminutives, -ktkos, icTKr] . 155
(c) Third Declension 155
1. Masculine, -cvs, rip, Tcep ...... 155
2. Feminine, -<ris, -ttjs 155
3. Neuter, -/ua, -os 156
14.1. Scheme of Terminations of Derivative Nouns. . 156
142. Classes of Adjectives 157
1. First Form 157
(a) In -los (-/a), -lov 157
{h) In -tKos, -T], -ov . . . . . . . . 157
(c) In -ivos, -ivT\, -ivov . . . . . . . 157
(So -fos, contr., -ovy, -ovv) ..... 157
{(1) In •p6s, -pa, pov 157
(e) In •{(r}ifios, -ov 158
(/) Verbals in -tos and -rios 158
2. Second and Third Forms 158
(a) In --qs, -4s . . . . . . . • . . 158
{b) In -fjLwv, -fiov 158
143. Scheme of Terminations of Derivative Adjectives. 158
144. Classes of Verbs 159
(a) Verbs from subst. or adj. roots ("denominative") . . 159
Their principal terminations 159
(&) Verbs from verbal stems ( " Inceptives, " "Frequentatives"
(or emphatic), " Causatives," &c .... 159
145. General remark on Derivation ..,..,. 159
CHAPTER X.— ON THE FORMATION OF COMPOUND WORDS.
146. "Parathetic" and "Synthetic" Compounds . . . .161
147. PiSJiATHETic Compounds 161
The former element a Particle 161
(a) Significance of the Preposition in Composition . .162
(6) „ Adverbs „ . . 162
(c) ,, /nse;?ara6Ze Par^ic^ea in Composition 163
(o, Compound Nouns and Adjectives generally from Verbs) . 163
ETYMOLOGY.
XXUl
SECT.
147.
148.
[49.
(b, (, Adverbs and Inseparable Particles not found -with Verbs,
except a-) 163
[d, Combination of Prepositions) 163
Synthetic Compounds 163
The former element a Noun or Verb 163
Connective vowels -0-, -i- 164
Compound Verbs usually from Compound Nouns . . . 164
The chief significance, in the latter element . . . .164
Illustrations 164
Derivation and Composition illustrated by the Varia-
tions and Combinations in the New Testament of the root
Kpi; verbal stem, Kpiv-, to separate, to judge . . . .164
50
51
15-
^53
154,
CHAPTER XI.— FOREIGN WORDS IN NEW TESTAMENT
GREEK.
Languages of Palestine : Hebrew 167
What was the "Hebrew tongue " in New Testament times ? . 167
Question as to St. Matthew's Gospel 167
The introduction of Greek 167
Various influences contributing to this 167
Greek the usual language of our Lord ..... 168
The Dialect of Galilee 168
Difference of New Testament writers in style .... 168
Infusion of Latin 168
Influences contributory to this 168
Classes of words derived from Latin 168
Aramaic (Hebrew) Words and Phrases . . .169
(a) Assimilated words 169
{b) Indeclinable words 169
1. Proper Names 169
2. Common Nouns 170
3. Special Phrases 170
Latin Words 171
(a) Names of Coins 171
(b) Judicial terms 171
(c) Military terms 171
{d) Political terms 171
{e) Articles of Dress 171
{/) General terms 171
XXIV ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
CHAPTER XII.— NEW TESTAMENT PROPER NAMES.
SECT. r^OP.
135. These Names from the three languages (Chapter XL) . . .173
156. Hebrew Names 173
(a) Indeclinable Hebrew forms 173
{I) Indeclinable and assimilated . . . . .- .173
(c) Assimilated, Hebrew, -ah; Greek, -as . . . .174
{d) Later forms, Hebrew, -a; Greek, -as . . . .174
157. Double Names 174
(a) Greek the <rarwZa<io» of the Hebrew 174
(b) ,, vocal imitation „ 174
(c) Name and Surname . .174
1. The latter being characteristic . . . . .174
2. ,, patronymic 174
3. „ local 174
{d) DiflFerent names of the same man among Jews and Greeks . 174
15S. Greek Names 175
(a) Pure Greek— "The Seven" 175
(6) Contracted forms . . . . , . . .175
159. Latin Names 176
(a) In connexion with Rome .176
(6) Names of the Emperors 176
(c) The name of " Paul" 176
(d) Contractions, **i/w^c," **^ito«," &c 176
PART III.
SYNTAX.
CHAPTER I.— CONSTRUCTION OF THE SIMPLK SENTENCE.
161. The Sentence — as consisting of Propositions . . . .177
162. The Proposition— Subject and Predicate 177
163. The Subject — a Substantive or its equivalent .... 177
164. The Predicate— a Substantive, Adjective, or equivalent . . 177
165. The Copula— a tense of the verb "to be" 178
166. Omission of the Copula 178
167. The Verbal Predicate 178
168. The Substantive verb as Predicate 179
SECT
169.
170.
171.
172.
173.
174.
175-
176.
177.
178.
179.
180.
181.
182.
183.
184.
185.
186.
187.
188.
189.
190.
191.
192.
SYNTAX. XXV
P^GK
Omission of the Pronominal Subject 179
Its insertion for emphasis. Examjiles 179
Omitted in third person plural, ".generalized assertion" . 180
Omitted in third person singular, " impersonals " . . . ISO
The Nominative the case of the Subject ..... 180
THiil FIRST CONCORD 181
Exceptions, (i) Neuter plural Nominative with singular Verb 181
Variations in this idiom, o., b, c, d 181
(2) "Rational Concord." Collective singular Subject
with plural Verb, a, b 182
Combined Nominatives, a, b . 182
Agreement of substantival Pi-edicate with the Subject . . .183
Law of Apposition 184
Agreement of adjective Predicate with the Subject . . .184
THE SECOND CONCORD 185
"Rational Concord," (i) Collective singular Subject with
plural Adjective 185
(2) Masculine or Feminine Subject with neuter Adjective . 185
liulefor Copulative Verbs 185
Complements of the simple Sentence 185
Extension of the Subject 186
,, Substantival Predicate .... 186
,, Adjective-Predicate 186
,, Verbal Predicate 186
Accessory Clauses 186
Co-ordinate 187
Subordinate 187
Methods of introducing subordinate Sentences . .187
Difficulties in the resolution of Sentences — illustrated . . .187
Rule for the resolution of Compound Sentences . , , .188
CHAPTER II.— THE ARTICLE.
193.
195.
196.
197.
198.
199.
Construction of the Article .
Employed with Substantives ; by the Second Concord
Originally a Demonstrative Pronoun .
Shown by its often standing alone
By its being followed by a Genitive
Or by a Preposition and its Case
By its construction with Adverbs.
The Article with Adjectives
With Participles
Often equivalent to a Relative and Verb
. 189
. 189
. 189
. 189
.190
. 190
. 191
. 191
. 192
. 192
XXVi ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
SECT. p^gp:
20 1. With tlie Infinitive, in all the Cases 192
"Note on the yerhalin ing (Lskt., geruTul) . . . 192
20Z. With Phrases or Sentences 192
203. With Pronouns. (See § 220) 19.3
204. Substantivized Words or Phrases 193
Significance of the Article : its insertion or omission . 193
205. The Article strictly definite 193
206. The Article marks the Subject 194
207. Definition of the Predicate by the Article 194
208. (The Article may be omitted before words already defined) . . 195
209. Use of the Article with Monadic Substantives . . . .195
210. For individual emphasis 195
211. In collective expressions 196
212. To make renewed mention 197
(This sometimes implicit) 197
213. Passages where the Article, omitted in our Version, should be
supplied from the original 200
214. The Article with Abstract Substantives, a, b, c . . . 200
215. The Article as an Unemphatic Possessive 201
216. The Article with Proper Names 201
217. With the Divine Names 202
(a) 06<5y, God 202
(&) Kvpios, Lord 203
(c) v'ibs (dirov. Son of God 204
(d) 'iTjcroCs, Jesus 204
(e) Xpi<TT6s, Anointed, Christ 205
(/) Uucvfia i&yiov), Holy Spirit 206
218. Monadic Nouns (as Proper Names) without the Article . . 207
2 1 9. Prepositional Phrases without the Article 207
220. The Article with Demonstrative Pronouns .... 208
221. Omitted with iKaTros, roaovros 208
222. The Article with avrSs, (he same 209
223. With Possessive Pronouns 209
224. With iras, TTctj/Tcy, all 209
225. With 2Ao9, whole 211
226. With &\\os, Hrepos, other 211
227. With iroAu, much; iroWol, many 212
228. With the Nominative for "Vocative 213
229. The Article separated from its Substantive by qualifying words . 213
(a) A Preposition with its Case 213
(6) An Adverb 213
130. Repeated after its Substantive for empJuisis .... 213
(6) Sometimes where uo Article precedes .... 214
SECT.
231.
232.
^33-
234.
SYNTAX. XXVll
PAGK
The Article with Participles 215
The Article in Enumerations 215
{a) Combined Enumeration 215
(6) Separate Enumeration 216
The Omission of the Article marks Indefiuiteness .... 217
The Article with i/J/xos, toif;— illustrations 217
CHAPTER III. -THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE.
235-
236.
237.
238.
239-
240.
241.
242.
243.
244.
245.
246.
247.
248.
249.
250.
251.
252.
NUMBER
Singular and Plural used as in other languages
Singular Nouns for a whole class .
Nouns predicated of several individuals (as crw/xa, /cop5i«)
Abstract Substantives in the Plural
The Plural, by a speaker of himself
Plural to denote a single agent or object
(a) As viewing it in its constituent parts .
{b) As generalizing the statement, (1), (2)
CASE . ' .
The Nominative and Vocative
Nominative as Subject and Predicate
The Suspended Nominative .
The Elliptical Nominative
(a) After iSou, behold
{b) ,, ovofxa, name
(c) The phrase, 6 &)v Ka\ 6 ?iv koX 6 ipx6fifyos
Nominative for Vocative : an elliptical usage
The Vocative, with and without S>
The Genitive ....
Primarily signifying motion from .
Moditications, 1 — 7
I, Genitive of origin
After Substantives, to denote the source, or author
After Verbs of sense, or mental affection
(1) Of sense, as hearing, taste, touch
(2) Of affection, as desire, caring for, despising
(3) Of remembrance a,nd forgetting .
After Verbs of accusation, condemnation, &c
After Verbs and Adjectives oi plenty, want, fulnes,
II. Genitive of separation or ablation
After Verbs of separation, removal^ hindrance, &c
&c
219
219
219
219
219
219
220
220
221
221
222
222
223
223
223
224
224
224
224
225
225
225
225
225
226
226
227
228
228
228
229
229
XXviii ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
BE(,T. , PARE
*53* Gemtive ot comparison 229
(1) After Verbs . .229
(2) After Adjectives in the Comparative Degree . . 230
254. III. Genitive of Possession 230
After Substantives, " the Possessive Case " . . . . 230
jrr The Genitive Personal Pronouns so used . . . 231
2r6. Words of kindred, &c., omitted before Possessive, i — 7 231
257. Attributive Possessive Genitive . . . . . 232
258. Special Possessive phrases 232
259. The Genitive of Apposition 233
260. Position of the Genitive 233
(a) Generally after the governing Substantive . . 233
(b) Instances where the Genitive j^recedes . . . 234
261. IV. Genitive of Partition 234
262. After Partitive -4 c^/eciivea 234
Pronouns 235
Nmnerals . . . 235
Superlatives 235
263. Aiter Verba oi partaking , 235
264. After Verbs of taking hold of, attaining, &c. . . . 235
Different usage of Active and Middle .... 235
265. Aiiev Adverbs of time 230
266. Partitive Phrases of Time or Place 230
267. Partitive Genitive after Verb, to he 236
268. V. Genitive of Objoet 237
May be expressed by various Prepositions ; Illustrations . 237
269. Phrases that may be Possessive or Objective . . . 238
270. VI. Genitive of Relation 239
In respect of, as shown by the context ; Illustrations . . 239
271. After -4 c//ec<we5, generally 240
272. Specially after Adjectives of tfor^/t/>je.s5, 7i<wes.f, &c. . . 240
273. QenxtiwQ oi pricp, penalty, &LC 240
274. Genitives of different relations with ihe same Substantive . 241
275. VIT. The Genitive Absolute 241
Origiually causal 241
The Dative 242
276. Primarily signifying j*aa;to/3o«j7io;i 242
Modifications, 1 — 4 242
277. I. Dative of Association 242
(a) After Verbs of intercourse, companionship, &c. . . 242
(6) After Verbs and Adjectives of ii/;ene.s«, yt^/JCA^, &c. , . 242
(c) After the Substantive Verb : to express property . . 242
Verb sometimes omitted 212
SYNTAX. XXIX
SECT. Page
278. II. Dative of Transmission 243
(a) After Vei'bs of giving (indirect Object) .... 243
{b) ,, infoimation, command, &c. . . . 244
(c) ,, sticcour, assidance, &c 244
{(1) ,, mental affection, obedience, faith , . 244
Distinction from Genitive 244
279. III. Dative of Referee CO . . • • . . .245
May be expressed in English hy for (or against) . . . 245
280. iV. Dative of Accessory Circumstance . . . . 24G
(a) Expressing the modes of an action 246
(b) Sometimes repeating the notion of the Verb (Hebraism) . 246
(c) Dative of cause or motiue 246
{d) ,, instrument 247
Dative after xp°-op-^h to use 247
(e) Dative of agent (rare) 247
(/) , , sjjhere, that in which a quality inheres . . 248
ig) „ Time 249
(1) A space of time : for 249
(2) A point of time : at, on . . . . . 249
281. The Accusative 249
Primarily signifying motion towards 249
Hence used as the Object of Transitive Verbs . . 250
(a) Verbs intransitive in English, transitive in Greek . . 250
(6) The same Verbs sometimes transitive and intransitive . 250
(c) Especially those denoting faculty 250
{d) The direct Object omitted after certain Verbs . . 251
282. The internal Object of Verbs, or " cognate Accusative" . . 251
28 3. Accxissitive oi Definition 252
Dative of Accessory more common ..... 252
284. The Double Accusative, " nearer" and "remoter Object" . . 252
285. The Accusative as Subject of Infinitive Verbs . . .253
To be rendered as Nominative with that .... 253
Generally different from the Subject of the principal Verb . 253
Accusative with the substantivized Infinitive . . . 253
286. Accusative of Time and Space 254
(a) Space : Distance 254
(b) Time: (1) a Point; (2) Duration; or (3) Succession . 254
287. The Accusative in ^7^/pf/ca^, or unusual constructions . . . 255
288. THE CASES WITH PREPOSITIONS . . . 255
Two elements to be considered, the Preposition and the Case . 255
Variety of combinations hence resulting .... 255
2? 9. Interchangeable Vre-positions I not identical . . . ^ . 256
290. Note on the correspondence of words in different languages . . 256
XXX ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
BECT. PAOE
290. Prepositions with the Genitive only .... 257
291. ct^/T/, over a<7amsi ; opposition as an equivalent .... 257
Hence, instead of, for ; adverbial phrase, avff &y . . . 257
292. a.Tr6, from tlie exterior 258
Hence, {\) from; (2) of; (3) on account of, (4) elliptical vise;
(5) use with Adverbs 258
293. iK, i^, from the interior 259
Hence, (1) out of; (2) from; (3) hy ; (4) made of; (5)
belonging to ; (6) springing /row ; (7) temporal use . 259
294. iTp6, in front of 260
Hence, before in (l)time; (2) place; (3) degree . . . 260
Prepositions with the Dative only 260
295. cV, m 261
Hence, (1) in, of place; (2) among; (3) '^the ip of in-
vestiture;" (4) in "the sphere;" (5) special uses, by;
(6) adverbial phrases ; (7) temporal use ; (8) "constructio
praegnans" 261
296. evv, in conjunction with (co-operation) 263
Hence, with, together with (beside) 263
Prepositions with the Accusative only » . . . 264
297. avd, up to, up by 264
Only in special phrases in the New Testament . . . 264
298. els, to the interior 264
Hence (1) of place, into; (2) unto, to; (3) towards, against;
(4) in order to, for; (5) into, a state; {Q) for, as, of
equivalence ; (7) of time, during, or up to ; (8) ' ' con-
structio prsegnans " , » 264
Prepositions with the Genitive and Accusative . . 268
299. Zid, through 268
o. Genitive : (1) through, of place ; (2) of agency ; (3) of
time, during or after 268
)8. Accusative : on account of 269
300. Kara, doion 270
a. Genitive: (1) dovm from; (2) against; (3) by; (4)
throughout, as Accusative 270
j8. Accusative: {!) throughout ; {2) over agaimt ; {S) at the
tim£ of; (4) distributive uee ; (5) according to; (6)
adverbial phrases . . 271
301. ufTo, in association with 272
a. Genitive: {\) witlu, among ; (2) togetJier with ; (3) "with
and on behalf of" 272
/3. Accusative : after (beyond) 273
302. •JTfpt, around . . . . • 273
SYNTAX. XXXI
SECT. PAoas
302. a. Genitive: about, concerning 273
)8. Accusative: [l] around ; (2) ahout^ of time; {^) about,
in reference to 274
303. vjrep, over 274
a. Genitive : {\)on behalf of; (2) for the sake of: (3) in
reference to 274
i3. Accusative : beyond, above 276
304. viro, under 276
o. Genitive : by, of the Agent 276
)8. Accusative: {1) under ; {2) close upon .... 277
Prepositions with the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative 277
305. iiri, Upon ... 277
o. Genitive : (1) on, oi basis ; (2) over, of superintendence ;
(3) upon, fig.; (4) before; (5) in the time of; (6) "con-
structio prsegnans" 277
$. Dative : (1) on, of basis ; (2) over, of superintendence ;
(3) upon, fig.; (5) in addition to; (6) "constructio
prsegnans" 279
7. Accusative: (1) upon, motion implied; (2) over ; (3) to
(for, against) ; (4) with regard to ; (5) up to, of quantity ;
(6) during, of tinae . 280
306. Trapd, beside . 282
o. Genitive : from, of persons only ..... 282
j8. Dative : (1) with, near ; (2) in the esteem or power oi . 282
7. Accusative : (1) by, near ; (2) contrary to; (3) above; (4)
consequence 282
307. vp6s, towards 283
a. Genitive : conducive to , , 283
fi. Dative : near . 283
7. Accusative: {!) to ; {2) with ; (3) mental direction; (4)
estimate ; (5) intention . 284
On the Intebghange of Certain Prepositions . . . 285
308. Mutual approach in meaning ; real distinction .... 285
309. Interchange of bid with iK, aird, iv [ds, iiri, xard) . . . . 285
Interchange of ck and airS 287
, , eV and the simple Dative 287
31a. ,, els with. Trp6s, e7r( and Dative (also e;«) . . . 287
Note on 2 Cor. iv. 17 . . ► . . 288
„ irepi with Sid and inrdp 289
310.
31
313-
314. Repetition or otherwise of Prepositions governing several words . 289
xxxu
ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
SECT.
3^5-
316.
317.
318.
319.
320.
321.
322.
323.
324.
325.
326.
327.
3z3.
329.
330.
331-
CHAPTER IV.— ADJECTIVES.
SECOND CONCORD, re-stated
Omission of Substantives ....
Occasional ambiguities
List of Substantives frequently omitted
''Rational Concord" in Number and Gender
Adjectives referring to several Substantives
Adjectives in adverbial relations .
The Degrees of Comparison .
The Comparative
Followed by a Genitive of Object
Or by ^, than, as a Conjunction .
Employed in special cases, 1, 2, 3
Omitted before Numerals after more, less
(liaKKov) ^ after the Positive, sometimes after a Substantive
or Verb ....
Comparative strengthened by xnrfp or vapi.
Emphatic Comparatives, as in § 51
Comparative without expressed Object
(1) Where the context supplies it
(2) Where the Comparative is a familiar phrase
(3) Where the Object may be supplied mentally
The Superlative
General significance
Emphatic Superlatives
Followed by irivTwv, preceded by «y, 2ti
Use of irpuiTos
Hebraistic Superlatives
(1) By Preposition h after simple Adjective
(2) By Adjective repeated in the Genitive .
Other so-called Hebraisms to be rejected
The Numerals
Special uses of the Cardinal cTs, one
(1) As an Indefinite Pronoun (Indefinite Article)
(2) For the Correlatives, one ... otJier .
(3) Its proper Negative combined with the Predicate
(4) Ordinal ^rsi instead of it
Adverbial Particles with Numerals
Omission of Names of Quantity after Numerals
The Ordinals in Enumerations
PAOR
291
296
296
296
296
296
297
297
298
298
299
299
299
299
299
299
299
300
300
300
300
301
301
301
301
302
SYNTAX. XXXlll
CHAPTER v.— THE PRONOUNS.
BECr. PAGE
331. The Personal Pronouns ....... 303
332. Subject to the rules for Substantives 303
Omission of Pronominal Subject ...... 303
333. Possessive Genitive of Pronouns instead of the Adjective . . 303
Possessive Adjective Pronoun instead of the Genitive . . 303
334. Redundaut or repeated Personal Pronoun ..... 304
335. Use of auT($s, self, in apposition 304
As a Nominative, always emphatic . . . . 304
[The reflexive kavrov for the Second Person .... 305
,, kavTuv for First and Second] .... 305
"Rational Concord," with uuTos — Gender — Number . . . 305
The Possessive Pronouns . ' . . . . .306
336. Their various uses exemplified 306
In apposition with a Genitive Substantive .... 307
337. Unemphatic Possessive Pronouns by the Article .... 307
Emphatic Possessive Pronouns by XZios, own . . . • . 307
The Demonstrative Pronouns 307
338. Use of owTos, this [nQdiY), axvdi iKilvos, that 307
339. Use of 0^6, i!/m' (here) 307
340. Exceptions to the ordinary use of olros, iKe'ivos . , . . 308
cKeTpos, the Emphatic Demonstrative 308
341. Emphatic (or redundant) Demonstrative Constructions . . 308
342. Special uses of tovto, ravra ........ 309
The Relative Pronoun .309
343. Agreement of the Relative. THE THIRD CONCORD . 309
344. A clause as Neuter Antecedent 310
345. " Rational Concord" with the Relative— Gender — Number. . 310
346. Attraction 310
(a) Attraction of the Relative to the Predicate . . . 310
(6) Attraction of the Relative to the Antecedent . . . 311
Inverse Attraction (transposed Antecedent) . . . 311
347. Demonstrative Antecedent omitted 312
348. avrSs complementary to the Relative (a Hebraism) . . . 312
349. The Compound Relative, oans, strictly Indefinite .... 313
But also explicative, and logical 313
Used often with Proper Names 313
The Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns . . 314
350. Various uses of the Interrogative, ris ; ..... 314
(1) Simply, with or without a Substantive ..... 314
(2) Elliptically, as iVoTt, Wi?/.? 314
XXXIV
AISALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENl-S.
8£CT.
350.
,52.
(3) Adverbially, how!
(4) In alternative questions .
The Interrogative in indirect questions
Transition from the Interrogative to the Indefinite
Uses of the Indefinite, ris ....
(1) Simply, with or without a Substantive
(2) Emphaticall}'-, somebody!
(3) As "a kind of" ....
(4) "Some" approximately with numbers
(5) In alternative expressions
[Negatives of rts, i.e., oi/beis, ftTjSets]
PA OK
314
315
315
315
316
316
316
317
317
317
317
353-
354-
355-
356.
357-
358.
359-
360.
i6i.
CHAPTER VI.— THE VERB.
VOICE 318
Voice : the distinction in /orm and sii/wi^ance . . . .318
The Active Voice 318
Intransitives used as Transitives 318
Variations in meaning according to form (SxrTTj/ii) . . .319
Special use of ex** 319
The Middle Voice : its three senses 319
1. ^f/eccire (the " Accusative Middle") . . . . 319
But Pronouns generally employed with Active . .319
2. ^p^'^ojona^iw (the "Dative Middle") .... 320
The direct Object of the Active retained . . . 320
3. Causative (nearly resembling the Passive) . . . 321
This meaning sometimes becomes reciprocal . . . 321
The Passive Voice 322
Its Subject. The primary or secondary Object of the Active 322
(In the latter case, the primary Object remains in the Ace.) 322
Agent after Passive Verbs 322
Frequent difficulty of distinguishing Passive and Middle . 322
THE MOODS AND TENSES 323
Significance of the Moods 323
The Indicative — Declarative and Interrogative . . 324
The Tenser. The six employed (the., three others essential to
completeness) "Historical" and "principal" Tenses . 324
The Present Tense 324
General meaning, and Illustrations 324
(a) A state as now existing, a process 324
(6) An habitual or usual act 325
SYNTAX. XXXV
SECT. PAOB
361. (c) Past time, in vivid narration (the Historical Present) . 325
{(l) Certain futurity 325
362. The Imperfect Tense 326
General meaning, with Illustrations 326
(a) An act uniinished at a past time 326
(b) An act statedly repeated 326
(c) To be distinguished from the Aorist .... 326
{d) An inchoative act 328
(e) The "resolved Imperfect" 328
363. The Future Tense . 329
General meaning, with Illustrations 329
(a) Indefinite futurity 329
(b) Command, especially in prohibitions .... 329
(c) General truths or maxims, "Ethical Future" . . 329
{(l) Future with ov, fii) (see § 377) 330
(e) The "resolved Future," or Future Imperfect. . . 330
[/) The Future Auxiliary, yixeAXw 330
Use of d€\(a, to loill, emphatic ; with Examples . . 331
364-. The Aorist Tenses . . .• 331
General meaning, with Illustrations 331
(a) The absolutely past, " Preterite " 331
Distinction between Aorist, Imperfect, and Perfect . 331
(6) The Aorist, as Pluperfect 332
(c) The "Epistolary Aorist" 333
{d) Sometimes equivalent to our Present Indicative . . 333
(e) Marking the completeness of an act .... 333
365. The Perfect Tense 333
General meaning, and Illustrations ...... 333
(a) A completed action, or one whose consequences remain . 333
(&) Distinction between the Perfect and Aorist . . . 334
366. The Pluperfect Tense - . 334
Rare in the New Testament : an act repeated in the past . 334
367. The " Perfect Present, " and corresponding Pluperfect . . 335
368. Interrogative Forms 335
With or without interrogative words 335
Elliptic questions . . . 336
369. Peculiar forms of affirmative reply 336
370. Negative questions 336
(a) With 01'/ ; (6) with fii] ; (c) with iii]Ti. . . , .337
The Imperative Mood 337
Used for command or entreaty 337
u-t] its proper negative Adverb ' . 337
372. Employed in simple permission 338
XXXVl ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
SKCT. PAGE
373. Tenses of the Imperative 338
(a) The Present — generality, continuity, repetition . . 338
(6) The Aorist— instantaneousness, completeness . . . 338
(c) The Perfect (very rare) 338
Contrast between Present and Aorist illustrated . . 338
374. The Subjunctive Mood 339
Always really dependent. Elliptical forms .... 339
375. The Subjunctive in independent sentences .... 340
1. As a hortatory Imperative — First Person . . . 340
2. As the Imperative in prohibitions 340
376. 3. In questioning or doubt, "Deliberative Subjunctive" . 341
377. 4. In strong denial (Aorist), with oy, ^^ .... 341
0. For the Future Perfect (Aorist) 341
378. The Optative Mood 342
A Iways really dependent 342
The Optative in independent sentences .... 342
1. To express a wish 342
So with jx-f] {jx^ yevoLTo ! ) 342
2. With &y for Potential ....... 343
The Moods in Dependext Clauses 343
379. Different kinds of Subordinate Clauses 343
Mood and Tense in such Clauses . . . . . 343
The Subjunctive after words compounded with 6,v . 343
380. Object Sentences 343
'6ti with the Indicative 344
381. (a) Direct quotation : Pleonastic Srt ...... 344
382. (6) Indirect quotation : * * Oratio obliqua " 344
(c) Indirect interrogation 345
Use of the Indicative, the Subjunctive, and the Optative . 345
(d) Object and Objective Sejitence after some Verbs . . . 346
383. Conditional Sentences 346
The "Protasis" and "Apodosis" 346
Four forms of the Conditional Sentence .... 347
a. The supposition of a, fact (ci, Indicative) . . . 347
0. The supposition of a possibility [Hv, Subjunctive) . 347
7. Entire uncertainty (ci. Optative) .... 348
8. A condition unfulfilled (««, Indicative past ... 4i',
Indicative past) 348
38+. Intentional Clauses : expressive of purpose or design . . 349
The Intentional Particles ('/m, Sjrwy, /i^) . . . .349
(a) With the Subjunctive, to express intention .... .350
(Distinction between Intentional and Object Sentences) . 350
Does tva ever mean so that ^ . • . . . 350
SYNTAX. XXXVn
SKCT. PACK
384. Passages relating to Scripture prophecy . . . 351
The negative intentional particle 352
{h) With the Indicative Future (infrequent), conveying emphasis,
force .353
An apparent Indicative Present in Intentional Sentences . 353
385. The Infinitive 354
(a) Properly a Verbal Substantive 354
(6) Negative Adverbs with the Infinitive 354
(c) The Infinitive governs the same cases as the Verb . . 354
386. Tenses of the Infinitive 354
Present, Aorist, Future, Perfect 354
387. Subject of the Infinitive (compare § 285) 355
388. The Infinitive as Subject (substantivized) .... 355
389. The Infinitive as Object 356
(a) After Verbs denoting faculty, act, assertion, &c. . 356
(6) To denote intention or result 356
(1) After a Verb 356
(2) After a Substantive 357
(3) After an Adjective 357
390. The Infinitive in oblique cases (as Lat., gerund) . . . 357
(a) Genitive, with rod 357
(1) After Substantives ..... 357
(2) After Verbs 357
(3) To express design 357
(6) Dative, with r^, to express cause .... 368
(c) With Prepositions {rod, t^j, t6) . . . . 358
Illustrations : Sid, els, iv, fjierd, irpS, irpSs, avrl . . 358
391. Infinitive of resw?^, with c5(rT6 (so Indicative) .... 359
392. liiG-nitive as Imperative 360
393. I'he Participles 360
Properly verbal Adjectives 360
Negatives with the Participles 360
Subject of a Participle (Genitive Absolute) . . . 360
394. Predicative uses of Participles 361
1. After the Substantive Vei'b: "the resolved Tenses" . 361
2. Complementary to the verbal Predicate . . . 362
3. Adjuncts to the verbal Predicate .... 363
(a) Modal 363
(6) Temporal 363
(1) Contemporaneous (Present Participle) . 364
(2) Preceding (Aorist Participle) . . . 364
(3) Succeeding (Future Participle; . . 364
(c) Relations of cause, condition, &c. , . . 364
XXXVlll AXAI-YTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
SECT. PAOK
(d) Intensive (Hebraistic) 364
394
395"
A Predicative Participle may be modified by wy . . . 365
Attributive use of Participles 365
Epithetic (like Adjectives) 365
^q6. With the Article : like the Relative and a Finite Verb 365
The Temporal reference sometimes lost . . . 366
Usual force of the Present Tense .... 366
397. Participles in broken constructions 367
Anacolouthon (compare § 412) 367
CHAPTER VII.— ADVERBS.
398. Their general use 368
399. Adverbial phrases 368
(a) A Substantive with or without Preposition . . . 368
(&) An Adjective 368
c) A Participle 368
{d) The combination of two Verbs 369
/|.oo. Adverbs as Prepositions (see § 133) 369
Combinations of Adverbs 369
401. The Negative Adverbs, ov sknd fjL'f} 369
Combinations of Negatives 370
Comparison sometimes expressed as denial . , . 370
CHAPTER VIII.— CONJUNCTIONS.
402. Rule for words connected by Conjunctions 372
403. Conjunctions of Annexation : especially koI, and . . . 372
Special uses of Kai 372
(a) For rhetorical emphasis 372
(b) In the enumeration of particulars (with re) . . 373
(c) Marking points of transition 373
(d) Explanatory : " koI epexegeti(J " .... 373
(e) As Also, Even 374
Frequently in comparisons, and in the rising climax 374
404- Conjunctions of Antithesis : especially hwd, S4 . . . 375
1. aWd, but, marks opposition, interruption, transition . 375
(1) To throw emphasis on its clauses .... 375
(2) In the Apodosis of a Conditional Sentence, yet . 375
(3) After the interrogative, &AA' fj, except . , . 376
2. 5«, but, unemphatic adversative 376
SYNTAX.
XXXIX
404.
405.
Often may be rendered, and, then, now, &c.
Koi ...Z4, yea ...moreover . ,
Antithesis with ^ev ... 5€
fjL€v occasionally without 5e (three cases)
The Disjunctives : especially ij, etre .
^ . . . •^. ^Toi ... ^, c'lre . . . 6?T6 .
fj Kai, or even; ij "interrogative"
406. The Inferential Conjunctions : especially &pa, olv
Their distinction. Slighter meanings .
Other Inferential Particles .
407. The Causal Conjunctions : especially 7^^
(a)
(c)
Relative Conjunctions, as '6ti, because
The Demonstrative Causal 7c{p, for
Introduces a direct reason .
Or the reason of some fact implied
Sometimes refers to a suggested thought
(c?) The combination /col 70^, its two senses
408. Asyndeton : or the omission of Conjunctions
(a) Of the Copulative ....
(6) Of Kot, Epexegetic ....
(c) Of the Antithetic ....
(£^) Of the Causal Particle .
PAOB
. 376
. 377
. 377
. 377
. 377
. 377
. 378
. 378
. 378
. 379
. 379
. 379
. 379
. 379
. 379
. 380
. 380
. 381
. 381
. 381
. 381
. 381
CHAPTER IX.— ON SOME PECULIARITIES IN THE STRUCTURE
OF SENTENCES.
409. The Arrangement of Words 382
(a) General rules 382
(6, c) Emphasis gained by variety of arrangement . . 382.
410. Special forms of Ellipsis 383
1. Aposiopesis 383
2. Zeugma 383
3. Inartificial collocation of Clauses ..... 383
411. Apparent Redundancy 384
(a) For special emphasis ; frequently ; in three ways . . 384
(&) Object and Object-sentence (see § 382) . . . .384
412. Anacolouthon 384
(Not to be hastily assumed) 384
(a) Transition from indirect to direct speech . . . 385
(6) Transition from a Participle to a Finite Verb . . 385
(c) Nominative Participles standing alone (see § 397) . . 385
{d) A sudden change of structure 385
Xl ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
BKOT. ^ PAGB
412. (e) The non-completion of a Compound Sentence . . 385
413. Attention to Sound and Rhythm 386
(a) Paronomasia 386
Simple alliteration 386
Alliteration associated with kindred meanings . . 386
(b) Parallelisms, after the manner of Hebrew . . . 386
Christian hymns 387
Rhythmic constructions in passages of strong emotion 387
"Chiasmus" .387
(c) (1) Quotations of Greek poetry in the New Testament . 388
(2) Metrical lines apparently unconsciously introduced . 388
Analytical Exercise on z Thess 389
On some New Testament Synonyms 403
Introductory Remarks 403
List of Words illustrated 405
I. Verbs in ordinary use 408
II. Words chiefly expressive of moral quality .... 412
III. Theological and Ecclesiastical words 415
IV. Miscellaneous 419
VOCABULARY 1—143
PART I.
OETHOGBAPHT.
1. Tlie
Greek
Alphabet contains
twenty-four
letters,
arranged and named as follows : —
Name.
Capital.
Small.
Sound. Numerical value.
Alpha
k
a
a
i
Beta
B
/3or ^
b
2
Gamma
r
y sometimes
r
g (hard)
3
Delta
A
b
d
4
Epsllon
E
€
e (short)
5
Zeta
Z
Cori
z
7
Eta
H
>?
e Gong)
8
Theta
6orS
th
9
Iota
I
L
i
10
Kappa
K
K
k
20
Lambda
A
X
I
30
Mu
M
A*
m
40
Nu
N
V
n
50
Xi
r:
f
X
60
Omicron
O
(short)
70
Pi
n
TT sometimes
ZtT
P
80
Rho
p
pov q
r
100
Sigma
s
a final s
s
200
Tau
T
r sometimes
1
t
300
TJpsIlon
T
V
u
400
Phi
4>
*
ph
500
CM
X
X
Ch (guttural)
600
Psi
<y
f
P^
700
Omeffa
a
(■>
(long)
800
2 notes ox the alphabet — the vowels. [§ 2.
2. Notes on the Alphabet.
a. The word Alphabet is derived from the names of the first
two letters, alpha, beta. The forms of the Greek letters, which, it
will be seen, greatly resemble those of our own language (the
Roman letter), are originally modified from the Phoenician.
h. The second forms of certain letters are used interchangeably
with the first, but less frequently. Those of gamma and tau are
almost obsolete. The final s, besides being always employed at the
end of words, is often used in the middle of compound terms when
a part of the compound ends with sigma. Thus, nposcpepto.
c. For an explanation of the numeral use of letters, and espe-
cially of omissions in the list, see § 48.
3. The Yowels.
The vowels are a, e, rj, l, o, '.", o),
a. In this country they are generally pronounced according to
the English sounds. The Continental pronunciation of a, tj, i, is
undoubtedly the more strictly correct ; but the matter is of little
practical importance. Absolute conformity to the ancient mode is
unattainable, and it is most convenient to adopt the method of
pronunciation current among scholars of our own country.
H and w are long vowels. Care must be taken to distinguish
them from the short c and o. Thus, fxev is pronounced like the
English men ; fxrju, like mean. In tou, the o is prouounced as in
on ; in rcov, as in own ; a, i, v, may be either long or short.
b. The diphthongs are at, av, ei, ev, ot, ou, pronounced as in Eng-
lish ; also a, 77, o) (or, with capitals. At, Ht, Qt), where the t occurs
with a long vowel, and is not pronounced, being, therefore, written
underneath the vowel (excepting in the case of capitals), 8iid
called iota subscript. It will be important to note this in the
declension of nouns and the conjugation of verbs.
Hv is pronounced like ev, eu ; and vi like tM.
§3,(?.] THE VOWELS. 3
c. Every vowel, when standing as the first letter of a word, has
what is called a breathing over it, written as an apostrophe, either
turned outwards, as (') or inwards, as (* ). The former is termed
the soft breathing, and shows that the vowel is simply to have its
own sound ; the latter the hard, and is equivalent to the English
h aspirated. To note the latter is most necessary for correct pro-
nunciation. Thus o, rj must be pronounced ho, he.
The initial v is always aspirated. So vnep, huper.
d. At the beginning of a word, the consonant (or semivowel) p
always takes the aspirate, becoming rh. When two p's come toge-
ther in the middle of a word, the aspirate and soft breathing are
successively employed. Thus peco, rhed ; app-qros, arrhetos. When
a word begins with a diphthong, the breathing is placed upon the
second letter : avrov, auton ; avrov, hauton.
e. In the lengthening of vowels for purposes of inflection or
derivation, a becomes d, or more generally r\ ; € becomes t], or €i ;
T, V, become respectively i, ii ; o becomes «, or ov.
/. Two vowels, or a vowel and a diphthong, occurring together
in different syllables are often contracted into one, according to the
following Table : —
followed by ... a e rj o co at €l r] ot w ov
a becomes aaa(Dcoaqa(aiiLiOi
€ „ a or r] €L f] ov CO rj et rj ol w ov
„ (ti OU 60 ov 0) (O OL* OL OL <p OV
The left perpendicular line in this table gives the former vowel
in each combination, the upper horizontal line the latter, and the
result of the contraction will easily be found. Thus eo gives ov ; ae,
long o ; and so of the rest. It must be noted that where the letter <r
occurs in inflection between two short vowels, it is generally dropped,
and contraction takes place according to the table.
* Or ov, when the e< is the contraction of ee, as in the infinitive of verba
contract in o.
VOWELS — COKTRACTIONS — HIATUS. [^ 3, /.
It will be observed by iuspection of the table that an o sound
always preponderates in contraction with the other vowels; that an
a sound, when first, prevails over an e sound following it, and vice versd.
Some special and exceptional methods of contraction will be found
noticed in Etymology.
Exercise 1.— Vowel Contractions.
Write tlie contracted forms of rt/xaca, ri/xaets, Tifxaet, rifiaojjLfv,
Tifiaere, ^tXeco, ^iXfety, ^tXe«, 0iXeo/iei/, (piXeere, drjXoco, brjXods, 8f/Aofi,
drjXoofiev, drjXoere, (piXerjs, TLfxaoi, drjXoTjTe, voos, voov, yeveos, aiboa, opeUf
^aa-ikees, /Ltet^oa.
g. Diaeresis is the opposite of contraction, and is expressed by-
two dots (** ) over the second of two vowels whicli are to be sepa-
rately pronounced. Thus Kalvau, GoA-nan^ not Cai-nan.
h. Hiatus, and the ways of avoiding it. — The hiatus {i.e. yawning)
caused by the meeting of vowels at the end of one word and the
beginning of the next is often prevented by one or other of the
following ways : —
1. The vv icjieXKva-TiKov, ov nu-suffixed. This v is added to datives
plural ending in i, and to the third persons of verbs ending in c or t,
when the following word begins ^vith a vowel, or at the end of a
sentence. These words will be marked in declension and conju-
gation by a bracketed {y) ; thus, axaxri {v), eiriaTeva-c (v). In a similar
manner, ourco, ixexp''^ ^^^^ ^XPh ^^ ^ ^'^^1® ^^^ s when followed by a
vowel. In the last two words, however, the New Testament text
is not by any means uniform ; and on all three the best MSS.
greatly ditfer.
The negative ov becomes ovk when the next word begins with
a vowel,* and the preposition e/c becomes e£.
2. Elision marked hy an apostrophe. — The following words lose
their final vowel before an initial vowel in the next word : the
• Compare § 4 d, 6.
§3, /i.] VOWELS ELISION AND CRASIS — CONSONANTS. 5
prepositions dno, did, cVi, napd, [xerd, and the conjunction dXXd ; with
(occasionally) the participle 5e and its negative compound ovde; also
(before S)u) the preposition avrL When the initial vowel is aspi-
rated, IT, r, become 4>, 8 (see § 4, b). Thus, diro alrcov becomes cztt'
avTcov, and OTTO eavTa)U, d(j) eavrcov j SO for fjieTo. dXkT]\a)V, fier dXXrjXciiVj
but for fxera rjfxcov, fxed^ rjjxcov ', and for avrX oiu, dvB' hv.
This elision was, in classical Greek poets, used much more fre-
quently in words ending in a, €, i, o ', and hence, in one ])assage of
the New Testament, in a poetical quotation, the adjective xpwt^
suffers this elision (1 Cor. xv. 33), XPW^' oixCklai.
3. Crasis. — An hiatus is sometimes prevented by a Crasis (lit. a
" mixing "), or the union of the two words ; the vowels forming
a long vowel, or diphthong. This takes place but rarely, and only
when the former word is very short and closely connected with the
latter. The breathing of the vowel in the second word is retained,
to mark the fusion, and is then called a Coronis. Thus, for to.
avrd, the same things, ravrd is sometimes written ; for Kal ey<a, and I,
Kayd) ; for TO evavTLov, the contrary, Tovvavriov y and once for t6 ovofia,
the name, Tovuofxa (Matt, xxvii 57).
4. The Consonants.
a. As in the orthography of other languages, the four con-
sonants, X, IX, V, p, are termed liquids ; the nine consonants, 3, y, S,
TT, K, T, (/), X. ^. are mutes.
h. The mutes may be evidently arranged according to the organs
of speech specially concerned in their formation,
Thus, TTj ^j (hy are labials (p-sounds) ;
Kj y? X? ^^^ gutturals (Ar-sounds) ;
T^ ^y 6y are dentals (i-sounds).
Each of these divisions has, it is also plain, a sharp, flat, an«l
aspirate consonant. Hence the highly important classification of
the following Table : —
CONSONANTS.
[§4,i.
1
Sharp.
Flat.
Aspirate.
Labials . .
Gutturals .
Dentals . .
77
T
7
d
X
e
/>-sounds.
^-sounds,
^-sounds.
The guttural -y is pronounced, before a ^-sound or |, like the
nasal ng. Thus, dyyeXos, ang-gelos (the second y, as always, being
Iiard) \ dyKvpoj ang-kura.
c. 2 is the simple sibilant, which, in composition with a j9-sound,
gives >/^ = ir<r, por, or ^<r ; in composition with a /c-sound gives
| = K<r, -yo", x^"; ill composition with 5 gives C=8<r; these three,
C) ^> X) being double letters.
d. The following eight rules must be carefully observed, as they
relate to the changes which are imposed by the necessities of
oi-thography on the conjugation and declension of words, and
will explain much hereafter that would otherwise be found very
perplexing.
1. As above, a labial followed by <r becomes r^i ; a guttural followed
by 0- becomes {.
2. A labial or guttural before a dental must be of the same order,
i.e. must be changed, if not already so, into a sharp, flat, or aspirate,
according to the nature of the dental.
3. A dental, followed by or, -disappears.
4. Before the letter fi, a labial becomes ft ; a guttural becomes 7 ; a
dental becomes w.
5. The letter v becomes f* before labials ; 7 before gtitturah ; before
a liquid is changed into the same liquid ; and before tr or f is dropped.
The combination of v with a dental and the sibilant, as vrcr, becomes
simply <r, with compensation by the lengthening of the preceding vowel;
* becoming €i, and 0, ou. Thus,
•ycyavTcrt becomes yiyaai ;
TUTTTovrdL >» rv-KTOwn.
§4, C?.] COMBINATIONS AND CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 7
6. A sharp mute before an aspirated vowel is changed into the cor-
responding aspirate. Sometimes this change will take place when the
mute occurs at the end of one word, and the vowel at the beginning
of the next. Thus, a(t>' &v for air' &v ; ovx 6pao> for ovk Space.
7. When two consecutive syllables of the same word begin with an
aspirate, the former often loses its aspiration. Thus, Qpixos is changed
into rpixos ; and exf into ex** ^^^* afl&xes generally lose their aspi-
ration in preference to the stem, whether they are placed first or last ;
as Ti-de-ri, for ei-Be-Oi, where the last syllable is a mere adjunct to the
root.
8. No consonant can end a Greek word, except v^ p, tr, f, 4' ; the last two
being compounds of s. The preposition 4k before a consonant, and the
negative adverb ovk before a vowel, are apparent exceptions ; hut, having
no accent, they may be counted as parts of the following words.
Exercise 2.— On the Combination of Consonants.
Bule 1. Write down the proper forms of ypa^a^i, vlttto-o), Xeyaov,
€;(o-cj, (rTp€<f)a-€iS) rpi^aoyL^v, Xeyo-aj, irepTTcrov.
2. Of 7r€id(T(o, ekmSaeLs, adcrovres, dvvTcrei.
3. Of Terpi^Tai, yeypa(l>Tai, \e\eyrai, ^e^pexraij crpi^drjv, irkeKdrjvai,
"kiyO-qvai, eTrepTrdrjv.
4. Of T€Tpt^pai, yeypacjipai, ^e^pexpai, Trenfidpai, r}wrpai, neirXeKpai.
5. Of TravTToXvs, (rvv(f)T}pi, crvvyvcoprj, avvxaipco, (rvvCvyosj (rvvarpa
TioiTTjs '} also of rravTSj Xvovtctl, XvdevraiP,
5. Changes of Consonants.
Some other changes of consonants may be noticed, though they
do not so invariably conform to general rules as the preceding.
1. Assimilation. — The labials ir, p, <}> before (ji, and v before the
other liquids, are regularly assimilated to the following letters;
i. e. changed into the same letter (see § 4 cf, 5). Sometimes a
latter consonant is assimilated to a former one; as, oXXvpi for
ok-vvpi.
2. Duplication. The letter p is regularly doubled when a vowel
is placed before it. Thus, aTro-piWo) becomes anoppiiTTay.
d
8 CONSONANT CHANGES — THE ACCENTS. [§ 5'
Sometimes X is doubled, to compensate for the loss of a vowel ;
as, fjioXXov for fxaXiov, ayyeXXo) for ayytXeco. In Comparatives and in
verbs, <r<r or tt is sometimes put for a guttural k, y, x, with a fol-
lowing vowel ; as, rja-aov for tjkiov, rapda-a-co for Tapaxea>. In some
words, I appears instead of <r<r : as /xeiCi^v for fieyicav.
3. Transposition. — A vowel with a liquid is often transposed ;
as, Bi/rjcrK(o for 6av-aK(o.
4. Omission. — Any consonants which make a harsh sound may
be omitted in the formation or inflexion of words.
5. Insertion. — Sometimes, though rarely, a consonant is inserted
to assist the sound ; as, from dj/^p, gen. (avepos, dv-pos) dvSpbs ; so
avdpcoTTos is from dvr]p a)\^, making av-pcoiros, and, with 8 inserted,
audpconos.
6. The Accents.
a. Every Greek word, except the proclitics and enclitics,
which will be noticed under their respective parts of speech, has
an accent expressed on one of its last three syllables. The accents
are used in writing, but mostly disregarded in pronunciation. Their
use was to mark a certain stress (or "rising" or "falling" inflexion)
on the syllables where they are placed. It is said that they were
invented by Greek grammarians, as a guide to foreigners in pro-
nouncing the language. Some linguists of our own day have
endeavoured to reinstate them as helps in this respect, but without
much success.
b. The accents are the acute ('), the gi-ave ('), and the cir
cumflex (" ).
The accent is marked upon a vowel, and in diphthongs upon
the latter vowel ; as airos, ovTa>s. The acute and grave are placed
a/ter the breathing, and the circumflex over it; as os, ovtos.
The acute on the last syllable becomes grave, unless the word ends
H sentence; except ris the interrogative, which always keeps its
acute. Every unaccented syllable is said to have the grave torie;
? G, b.'] THE ACCENTS. 9
but tlie grave accent is not marked, except where it stands for
a final acute.
c. Words are called, with reference to accent — Oxytone (lit. sharp-
toned), when the acute is on the last syllable, as {kirls ; Paroxytone,
when the acute is on the penultiraa (last but one), as ovtco^ ; Fro-
paroxytone, when the acute is on the antepenultiina (last but two),
as <^tXtof ; Ferispomenon (lit. drawn-out), when the circumflex is
on the last syllable, as avrov ; Froperispomcnon, when the circum-
flex is on the penultima, as ovroi. The circumflex cannot be
farther back than the penultima.
If the last syllable of the word contains a long vowel, the acute
accent must be on the last or last but one, the circumflex only on
the last. Should, therefore, the final syllable of a proparoxytone
be lengthened by declension, the accent is thrown forward, i. e. the
word becomes paroxytone. Thus, avdpconos, au6pa>ir(ov. But if the
final syllable of a properispomenon is lengthened, the accent is
changed to the acute, i.e. the word becomes paroxytone. Thus,
Xi^eprluos, "Ki^fpTivav.
It should be observed that the circumflex accent is always the
result of contraction, i.e. of an acute and grave ( ' '' ) — not of a grave
and acute ( ^' ) — as will be shown under Etymology.
d. Enclitics are words which merge their accent into the word
immediately preceding, which are afiected as follows : — A pro-
paroxytone or properispomenon takes an acute accent on the last
syllable also. Thus, avOpconos ns, oIkos tis An oxytone that would
otherwise (see above) take the grave accent retains the acute. Thus,
fxadrjrrjs ns. Paroxy tones and perispomena show no alteration.
e. Froclitics lose their accent in the words following. In an
emphatic position, a proclitic becomes oxytone. Thus ov with a
verb is not ; ov alone, no ! A proclitic followed by an enclitic is
also oxytoned, as ov ns. The two may be written as one word.
Special rules of accentuation will be given under the sections of
Etymology. The learner is recommended to accentuate from the first,
in writing Greek ; especially as the accent of very many words can only
be known by acquaintance with the words themselves, and if neglected
at first, will be extremely difficult to acquire afterwards.
10 ORTHOGRAPHY, GREEK AND ENGLISH. [§ 7.
7. On THE Transference of Greek Words into English.
Most proper names, and some few other words, are literally
transcribed from the one language into the other. The medium of
transference is almost always the Latin, and therefore the ortho-
graphy conforms to Latin rules. For the most part, the Greek
letters are represented by the equivalents given (§ 1). The fol-
lowing exceptions must, however, be noted : —
K is always c, the letter k not being found in the usual Roman
alphabet. Where the c would be soft in owiinary English pro-
nunciation, it is generally so in Greek names, as Kvprjprj, Gyrene.
In some words of infrequent use, good speakers sometimes deviate
from this rule, saying, e. g. Aceldama, not Aseldama.
The vowel v is represented by y, as ^vpla^ Syria.
The diphthong at becomes ce, as Kaio-ap, Gcesar. Occasionally,
the diphthong is made simply e ; so, Aiyu7rT(off), Egypt; Tpvtpaiva,
Tryphena.
The diphthong oi becomes ce, as #oi/3i;, Phcebe ; sometimes, as
above, only e : thus, ^oivlkt], Phenice,
The diphthong « becomes e or *, as AaodUcia, Laodicea ; evdreipa,
Thyatira : sometimes (in practice) ?, as ^e\evK€ia, Seleucia. But
the i ought really to be long, or long e; so Attalia.
The diphthong ov appears as u^ as Aov*caf, Luke; or, before a
vowel, as v, as, 2tXouai'd$-, Silvanus.
The initial I before a vowel becomes «/, as lovbas, Judas.
The initial P, always aspirated in Greek (§ 3,6^), is generally
without the aspirate in English. Thus, 'Pa/SiSt, Rabbi. But 'Prjyiovj
Rhegium ; *P68r], Rhoda ; and *PdSoy, Rhodes, are exceptions, being
original Greek words.
Changes in the terminations of these transferred words belong to
Etymology. No rule can be given but usage why some should have
their endings changed, while others are exactly transcribed. Occa-
sionally, the same word appears in two forms. Thus, Marcus and
Mark, Lucas and Luke. The learner is recommended to read carefully
parts of the New Testament where many proper names occur, comparing
the English witli the Greek. No better portion for the purpose could
be found than Romans xvL
§ 8.] PUNCTUATION — READING LESSONS. 11
8. Punctuation.
Four marks of punctuation are used for the division of sentences ;
the comma, the colon, the period, and the note of interrogation.
The comma ( , ) and the period ( . ) are like our own.
In modem typography, it is very usual not to begin new sentences
with capital letters; reserving these for proper names, for the com-
mencement of quotations, and for the beginning of paragraphs.
The colon (sometimes called semicolon) is expressed by a point
above the line, thus ( • ).
Interrogation is marked by a sign, after the question, resembling
our semicolon ( ; ).
Inverted commas, as marks of quotation, are sometimes, though
rarely, employed in printed Greek.
The Greek equivalent for &c., et ccetera, is in the initials k. t. X,,
for Koi TCL XotTra, and the rest.
The following sentence exhibits the different marks of punctu-
ation (John ix. 40) : —
Kai iLTTov avTw, Mj) koL fjfjiels rv(j)\oi ecTficv ; enrev avrois 6 'if/croCy, Ei
TvcpXol ^re ovK av el^ere afiapriav' vvv de Xeyere, "Ort jSXeVo/ici'. r] oxr"
ajxapria vficl>v fievei.
READING LESSONS.
I. Acts ii. 1-13.
Write the following in Roman letters, carefully inserting the
initial aspirate wherever it occurs, and discriminating between the
long and the short o and e, as in Lesson III below : —
Kal €V TO) avixirXrjpovcrOaL ttjv* rjixipav rrjs IlevTrjKoarrjs,
2 '^aav airavTes opLodvixabov CTrt to avro.f Kal eyivcro a^vo) €k.
Tov ovpavov ^x^^ axTirep (pepofilvris irvorjs jSiaCas, kol eTrX?/-
3 p(i)(r€V okov TOV oIkov ov '^orav KaO-qiievoi. kol oi<p6r]aav
avTols hiauLepL^ofjievaL yXSm-aai wo-ct irvpos, €KddLai+ re €(f)
* According to what rule is the accent on the final syllable made grave ?
t Why does this accent remain acute ?
\ Why has this word two accents ?
12 HEADING LESSONS. [§§ 1-8.
4 eva (Kaarov avr&v, kol €7r\.T](r6r](Tav airavres Ylv^v}iaTos
AyioVj KoX rjp^avTo kakelv krlpais yXcoa-crais, Ka9Q)s to
5 Tlvcvfjia ebibov avTois airocpO^yyca-OaL. ^Haav be kv '[e-
povcrakriix KaroiKovvTes 'louSatot avbpes evXa/BcXs airo Trar-
6 Tos iOvovs ru>v virb rov ovpavov. revofxivrjs be rfjs ^oavq^
TavrriSf avvijKOe to ttXtjOos kol avvexyOr]' otl tJkovov eh
7 eKao-Tos Tj] ibia biaXeKTOi XaKovvTcav avT(0V' ^E^CaTauTO be
TTavTes KOL edavfiaCov, XeyovTes irpbs aXXi^Xovs, Ovk Ibov
8 TTCLVTes ovToC* elcTiv ol XaXovvTes TaXiXaioL ; kol ttwj ■tj/j.e'is
CLKOvoixev eKaa-Tos Trj ibia biaXeKTia rjfJL(oi> ev f] eyevvrjdrjfjLEV,
9 ndpOoL KOL MrjboL kol 'EAa/xtrat, koI ol KaTOLKOvvTes ttjv
MeaoTTOTapLLav, 'lovbaCav re koI KaiTTraboKiav, Tlovrov Kal
10 T-qv ^kaiav, (i>pvyiav re Kal Ylap.<pvXiav , AtyviTTOv, kol tcl
IxepT] TT]9 Aiftvr]<s TT/j KaTCL Kvprivrjv, kol ol eTTibrnMOvvTei
11 'Pco/zarot, ^lovdaloL* re kol TTpoarriXvTOLy KprJTes kol "ApajBes,
cLKovop^ev XaXovvTdiv avTUiV rats ^jixerepais yXdio-aais tcl fxe-
12 yaXela tov Qeov ; ^E^CaTavTo b^ TiavTes koI birjiTopovVf
aXXo9 TTpos aXXov XeyovTes, Tt hv OeXoi tovto elvai ; erepot
13 8e \Xeva^ovTes eXeyov, "On yXevKov^ /xe/xecrrcojueVot ela-C
11. Romans iv. 1-1 6.
Read the following, carefully attending to the punctuatioriy
which in this passage is marked with unusual decisiveness : —
Ti ovv epovp.EV ^ A^paapL tov iraTepa tjijl&v evprjnevai /cara
2 (TOLpKa ; el yap 'AfBpaap, e( epycav ebiKaMr], e^ei Kavxqpia,
3 dAA' ov TTpbs TOV Qeov. Tt yap rj ypacpr] Xeyet; *'E7rt-
' (TTevae be ^ A^paap, ro) 0e&), koI kXoyia-Br] avT^ et? Si/cato-
4 ' (jvvr]v^ To) 8e epya^op-evia 6 pLtaOos ov XoyCCeTai naTa
5 xapLV, aXXa KaTa to 6(p€LXqp.a' rw 8^ p.rj ipyaCopievia,
TTLorevovTL b^ iirl tov biKaiovvTa tov aa-efirj, XoyC(eTak 17
6 TTtoTtj avTov els biKaioavv-qv. KaOdirep Kal AajSlb Xeyei
TOV pLaKapLorpibv tov av9p(oT70V, o) 6 0eos Xoyt^erat Stxaio-
• Why has this word two accents ?
§§ 1-8.] READING l:kssons. 13
7 (Tvvqv X(}ipls €pycoVy 'MaKOLpLoi o)V a(f)i9r](Tav at avojiiaif
8 ' Kal Stv iTT€Ka\v(p$7]crav at aixapriai. MaKapios avrjp w oi
9 ' /xr) XoyLcrqraL Kvpios apLapr^avJ *0 ftaKapto-juos ovv ovtos,
eiTL TTJV TTBpLTOIJLrjV, TJ Kot M TTjV CLKpO^VCTTiaV ', kiyopieV
yap OTL iXoyCaOr] rw 'AjSpaa/x rj niaTLS etj hiKaLoavvr]v.
10 770)9 ovv eXoyiaOr] ; kv TTcpiTOiJifj ovti, tj kv aKpo^varia ;
11 ovK iv irepLTopifj, dAA.' €V aKpajSvo-rCa' not crqixelov eAa^Qe
irepLTopi^s, (Tcppaylha ttjs hiKaLoavvrjs ttjs iriareois T7]s €V
rrj CLKpo/BvcTTLa' els to elvai avrov Traripa irdvrcdv tqjv
TTLCTTevovTcov hi CLKpo^varias, ets ro XoytaOrjvai kol avrols
12 Tr]v bLKatoorvvrjv koI TTaripa TTCpiTOjjiTjs to'ls ovk. e/c TrepL-
TOjjLTJs plovov, aXXa kclI rot? (rroiyovcn rots X-)(V€cn. rijs kv
13 rfi cLKpo^vaTLa Trto-reco? rod irarpos rjpi&v 'A^paa/x* Ov yap
bia vopLov 7] kirayyeXia ro) ^AjSpaap. rj roj <T7Tipp.aTL avrov,
TO K\r]pov6p.ov avTov elvai tov KocrpLov, aWa bia bLKaioarvvqs
14 TTto-reo)?. Et yap ol €K voptov Kkripov6p.oi, K^KivcoTai rj
15 TTiVrts, Kal KaTrjpyrjTaL rj kirayycXCa' 6 yap vopios opyrjv
KaTepydCeTai* ov yap ovk ecrri v6p.os, ovbe irapafiacns. Ata
16 TOVTO €K TTtorecos, tva Kara yapiv.
The quotation-marks (inverted commas) introduced in verses 3, 7, 8,
are used, as is the practice in some editions of the Greek Testament, to
indicate a citation from the ancient Scriptures.
III. Matthew v. 1-16.
Write the following in Greek characters, punctuating the sen-
tences, inserting the soft and aspirate " breathings,'^ but not
attempting accentuation. The usual marks ( " ) and ( " ) discri-
minate the long and the short vowels. In the diphthongs, the
short and e are to be used. Where an iota is to be subscribed,
the vowel is italicised ; thus, o = co.
1 Idon d§ tons ochlous, anSbe eis t5 5r5s ; kai kathisantSs
2 autou. proselthon auto hoi mathetai autovi ; kai anoixas
3 t(5 stSma hautou, SdidaskSn autous, legon, Makarioi hoi ptO-
14 READING LESSONS. [§§ 1-8.
4 choi to pneumati ; hSti auton gstin he basileia ton ourauon.
5 Makarioi hoi pSnthountSs ; h6ti autoi parakletlies5iitai
Makarioi hoi praeis; h6ti autoi klerSnSmesousi tgn ggn.
6 Makarioi hoi peinontSs kai dipsontgs ten dikaiosunen ; hSti
7 autoi chortasthesQntai. Makarioi hoi €lSemonSs; hoti autoi
8 SleethesSntai. Makarioi hoi katharoi ie kardia : h5ti autoi t(5n
9 ThSon opsSntai. Makarioi hoi eirenSpoioi ; h5ti autoi huioi
10 ThSou klethesontai. Makarioi hoi dgdiogmSnoi hSngkSn dikai-
1 1 osunes ; hSti auton Sstin he basileia ton ouranon. Makarioi
Sst;e, hotan oaeidisosin humas kai dioxosi, kai eiposi pan
p5neron rhema kath' humon pseudSmSnoi, hSnSkSn Smou.
12 ChairStS kai agalliasthS, hSti h6 misthSs humon pSlus 8n tois
ouranois ; houto gar Sdioxan tons prophetas tous pr5 humOn.
13 Humeis SstS t5 halas tes ges ; gan dS t5 halas moranthe, 8n
tini halisthesStai 1 eis oudSn ischuei Sti, ei me blethenai Sxo,
14 kai katapateisthai hup5 ton anthropon. Humeis SstS t5 phos
tou kSsmou ; ou dunatai p51is krubenai epano Srous keimSne ;
15 oudS kaiousi hichnSn kai tithgasin aut5n hupQ ton mSdiSn, all'
16 gpi ten luchnian, kai lampei pasi tois 8n te oiki«. HoutO
larapsato t(5 phos humon Smpr5sth^n ton anthropon, hSpos
idosin humon ta kala Srga, kai doxasosi tSn PatSra humon tSn
gn tois ouranois.
The Greek Testament will furnish many other exercises, which
should be repeated until the learner can read the language with
perfect facility. A little care and time now devoted to this point,
even before the meaning of a single word is understood, will very
greatly contribute to future progi-ess.
16
PART IL
ETYMOLOGY.
Chapter I. INTEODUCTION.
9. Etymology treats of the classification, the derivation,
and the inflection of words.
a. The parts of speech in Greek, and in all other languages, are
substantially the same.
b. More important than any others are the Woun and the Verb.
These, as the necessary elements of a sentence, will first be treated
of, in their various inflections. With the Noun are closely con-
nected the Article, Adjective, and Pronoun. The Yerb also has its
noun, the Infinitive, and its adjective, the Participle. Of these
two the latter only is inflected.
10. The elementary part of every word is called its stem,
as every inflection presupposes it, and branches from it.
The Boot of a word is its yet simpler element in the same or
another language. With this, practical grammar has comparatively
little to do ; but to know the stem is of the utmost importance in
the analysis of any word. Throughout the etymology the stem will
be marked by thick letters, with a hyphen indicating the (general)
incompleteness of the stem until some letter or syllable be added
by way of inflection.
The last letter of a stem is called the stem-ending. If the letter
is a vowel, the stem is called " vowel," or pure. So a stem ending
with a liquid is called a liquid stem ; ending with a mute, a muie
stem. Liquid and mute stems are sometimes called impure.
16 ETYMOLOGY THE NOUN. [M^'
Chapter II. THE NOUN, or SUBSTANTIVE.
11. Nouns liave three genders, Masculine, Feminine , and
Neuter; also three numbers, Singular, Dual, and Plural,
The dual number denotes two, or a pair of anything ; but as
it is not found in the Greek Testament, it will not be noticed
in the forms of declension given.
There are five cases : the Nominative, or case of the
Subject ; the Genitive, or Possessive ; the Dative, or Con-
junctive; the -4 ccwsfl^^Ve, or Objective; the Focfl^/t'^, employed
in direct address.
Strictly speaking, the Nominative and Vocative are not cases :
the word implying dependence. Of the three true cases, often
called oblique,* the Genitive originally signifies motion from, then,
more generally, separation ; the Dative, rest in, hence conjunction
with ; the Accusative, motion towards, hence denoting simply the
object of the transitive verb. This general description of the
three cases, for the further illustration of which see Syntax, will
explain most of their uses.
In the paradigms of Nouns Substantive, a convenient English ren-
dering of the Genitive is by the preposition o/ and of the Dative by to.
It must, however, be remembered that these words are used for the
sake of distinction merely, and not as intimating that such are the most
correct or usual renderings.
12. Before proceeding to the inflection of Nouns, it will be
convenient to give the Definite Article in its numbers, genders,
and cases. This must be thoroughly committed to memory.
There is no indefinite article in Greek, the nearest equivalent
being the Indefinite pronoun ns, any.\ This is also subjoined, chiefly
for the reason that the two words together furnish a model, nearly
complete, of the declension of all substantives and adjectives.
♦ Oblique, or slanting, from the habit among old grammarians of
expressing the forms of the noun by a diagram, the nominative being an
upright stem, from which the cases branched at different angles.
t Or the numeral els, one, as iraiSdotoy tv, a lad (John vi. 9).
§12.]
FORMS OF THE NOXJN.
17
Definite Article,
the.
Stem,
m. n.
TO-y fem.
ra
-
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
M.
F.
N.
M.
F.
N.
N.
6
V
t6
ol
al
rd
G.
TOV
TTJS
TOV
Tcav
T(£)V
tG>v
D.
r(3
TTJ
r(^
rots
rats
rots
A.
TOV
TTIV
TO
TOVS
ras
t6.
Accentuation. — The nominative, masculine and feminine, singular and
plural, is proclitic ; the genitive and dative of both numbers are perispo-
menon; the rest oxytone.
13. Indefinite Pronoun : anyy a certain^ a. Stem, tlv -
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
M. and
F.
N.
M. and F.
N.
N. rts
Tl
rtz^es
TLVa
G. TWOS
TLVOS
TLVCOV
TLVOiV
D. TlVl
TLVl
TLCTL
Ticri
A. rti'a
TL
Tivas
TLVa
Accentuation.— The word is generally enclitic, as here given; the
accent being regarded as transferred to the previous word (§5, d).
When accented, the forms are oxytone, except the genitive plural, which
ia perispomenon. Thus, rivSs, ncri, tivS>v.
14. A comparison of the two forms now given will show
four particulars, applicable to all nouns, adjectives, and pro-
nouns ; and, therefore, at the outset, important to remember.
a. Neuters have but one form in each number for the nomina-
tive and accusative. Perhaps this might have arisen from things
without life being regarded as objects only. Neuters plural,
nominative and accusative, always end in a (short), except when
contracted, as reixr] for Tei'xea (Heb. xi. 30).
b. The dative singular always ends in t ; though, where the
letter preceding is a long vowel, the iota is subscript.
c. The genitive plural always ends in «v.
d. Masculine and neuter forms are always alike in the genitive
and dative.
18 GENDER AND DECLENSION. [§ 15.
15. Gender of Substantives. General Eules,
Many names of inanimate objects ai'e of the masculine or femi-
nine gender. This fact, no doubt, arose from the habit of personi-
fication, common in early ages. The English, indeed, is the only
great language in which masculine and feminine, with almost
undeviating strictness, denote male and female. The French
idiom, in the opposite extreme, entirely rejects the neuter.
Considerable difficulty, therefore, is felt by beginners in deter-
mining the gender of many nouns. In some cases, it will be neces-
sary to consult the Lexicon ; in others, the termination of the
word will be a guide, as is shown under the several declensions.
The following rules, however, are of general application : —
a. The names of males are Masculine* ; so of rivers and winds,
which were regarded by the early Greeks as gods.
b. The names of females are Feminine*; so also of trees,
countries, islands, most towns, and abstract terms.
c. Diminutives in -ov are Neuter, even though the names of
persons. To the class of neuters also belongs the verbal substan-
tive, or infinitive verb, with indeclinable nouns generally.
16. Declension of IToxjns Substantive.
There are three leading types of inflection, under one or other
of which all declinable nouns may be classified. These are called
the Three Declensions, and, as has been stated, the model of each
may be traced in the Article and the Indefinite Pronoun.
The First Declension corresponds with the feminine of the
article, ^. The Second Declension corresponds with the masculine
or neuter of the article, 6, to. The Third Declension corresponds
with the form of the indefinite pronoun, ris, tL
A model of each declension is here given.
• The generic names of animals are sometimes eommoriy i.e., of either maae.
or fern, gender, according to circumstances (so also va7sy child) -^ more fre-
quently epic(Bne, i.e., of one gender, used indififerently for both sexes. Th'ia
in Greek, VHtlfiB always zuasc., fox always fern., even in Luke xiii. 32.
§16.]
LEADING FORMS OF THE DECLENSIONS.
19
First Declension.
ttvXt], a gate.
Stem, irvXa-
t
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
N.
irvXr], a gate (subj.)
irvXaif gates {subj.)
G.
-TT^Ar^j, of a gate
TTvXcav, of gates
D.
TrAr/, to a gate
TrvXats, to gates
A.
TTvX-qv, a gate (obj.)
TTvXaSy gates (obj.)
V.
irvkr], gate !
TTvkaLy gates !
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
Second Declension.
avOpoairoSf a man. Stem, avOpcoiro
SINGULAR.
MpcoTTosj a man (subj.)
avOputirov^ of a man
avdp(aTT(D, to a man
avOpoaiiov, a man {obj.)
avOpcDire, man !
PLURAL.
avOpcoTTOL, men {subj.)
avOpcoTToov, of men
avdpcaTTOLs, to men
avOpcaiTovs, men {obj.)
av6p(OTT0L, men !
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
Accentuation. — The reason why the place of the accent varies in the
genitive and dative is explained, § 6, c.
Third Declension.
TTOLs, a child, boy, servant. Stem, ircuS"
(Accent of this word irregular. )
SINGULAR.
iraiSf a child {subj.)
iraihos, of a child
7rai8t, to a child
iralha, a child {obj.)
TTOL, child !
PLURAL.
TTOibes, children (subj,)
TraibcDv, of children
Trato-t, to children
TTatSas, children {obj.)
iralbes, children !
These three paradigms having been committed to memory, the
several declensions, with their rules of formation, their analogies
and variations, may now be more particularly discussed.
A certain likeness will, on examination, be detected between
the First and Second, especially in the plural number. The
plural terminations may be set side by side, thus : —
20
THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS.
[§16.
N. and V. First Declension, -ou
G. J, -«v
D. „ ais
A. „ as
Second Declension, -oi
„ -«v
„ -OlS
„ -ovs
In the former, the predominant vowel is evidently a; in the
latter, o. So in the singular, the first declension in the dative
has Tj (for a lengthened, § 3, e) ; the second, w (for o lengthened).
In the accusative, the first has av, or tjv ; the second, ov.
The two may accordingly be discriminated as the A declension
and the O declension ; a distinction which the further examination
of their structure makes yet more plain.
Both, again, are distinguished from the third by admitting the
termination which marks the case into the last syllable of the
word ; while the latter adds the termination as a distinct syllable.
The First and Second Declensions are, on account of this last
peculiarity, called the Inseparable^ or JParisyllabic ; the Third, the
Separable, or Imparisyllabic declension.
All three admit, however, of many variations, as will now be
shown in detail.
17. First (inseparable), or A Declension.
This declension includes both masculine and feminine nouns.
The stem invariably ends in a. As the feminine has already been
given as containing the typical form, that may be placed first.
18. Feminine Paradigms. First Declension.
rjyiipa, day.
bo^a, opinion.
Stem, rjfjLepa-
Stem, So^a-
SINQULAR. PLURAL.
SimULAR. PLURAL
N.
r]fxipa 7j/xepat
bo^a bo^ai
G.
rifiipas r)ix€p<ai;
b6^1]i bo^OdV
D.
rifxipa r]fX€paL9
ho^rj bo^aLS
A.
r]^€pav f]pLipa9
lo^av Sofas*
V,
rjiiepa rjjjiipaL
bo^a So'fat
§18.]
THE FIRST DECLENSION.
21
n/xT/,
honour.
(TK16.,
shadow.
Stem
, TLixa-
Stem
aKta-
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL
N.
TLfiri
rtjuat
(TKia
aKLaC
G.
TLjJLrjS
TilxSiV
(TKiaS
(tkl5>v
J).
TLlxfj
Ti/xats
(TKia
CTKLOLS
A.
TLfxriv
rt/xas
(TKldV
o-Kias
V.
TLlll]
rt/xat
(TKtci
(TKLaC
REMARKS.
a. The stem- ending a becomes i] in the nominative and accu-
sative singular whenever preceded hy a consonant ; except by the
liquid p, the double consonants, or <r, sometimes v preceded by a
diphthong or long vowel. In these cases, the a remains, long
after p, sJwrt in the other cases. Preceded by a vowel, the a
remains, generally long. Thus we have the nominatives €VTo\f),
crvvaycoyr], '^v)(r] j but Ovpcij ho^a, yXoiicrara, ^aaiXiaaay Xeaiva, aKia, ^aai-
Xeia, dXrjOeia.
b. In the genitive and dative singular, the stem-ending a, when
not preceded by a vowel or p, becomes i]. After a vowel or p, it
remains. Thus, n. bo^a ; g. 86^r]s j D. 86^t] ; but rj^iepa, J^/Acpay,
fjfxepa, and (TKid, or Kids J (TKia.
c. The plural terminations in all forms of this declension are
exactly alike, the a in -as of the accusative being long.
d. Accentuation. — Whatever syllable is accented in the nominative
retains the accent throughout, so long as the laws in § 6, c, permit.
The only apparent exception is ia the genitive plural, which in this
declension is always perispomenon. This, however, is accounted for by
its being a contraction of -cCwv. Oxytone words become perispomenon
in the genitive and dative of both numbers. For purposes of accentua-
tion, the termination ai in the plural nominative is considered short.
22
THE FIRST DECLENSION.
[§19.
19. Masculine Paradigms. First Declension.
fiaOrjTris, disciple.
veavCas, a youth.
Stem,
fjLa07]Ta-
Stem, veavLa-
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
N. ^adrjTTis
fxaOrjTaC
veavias veaviai
G. fiaOrjTov
lia6r]T(ov
veaviov veaviGtv
D. fxadriTT]
fXadTJTOLi
veavia veavCais
A. ixaOrjnfiv
fiadrjTCLS
veaviav veaviai
V. iJiaOrjTd
IxaOtjraL
veavia veavCai
REMAEKS.
a. All masculine nouns of the first declension form the nomina-
tive from the stem by adding s, lengthening a into tj after all
consonants except the liquid p, and retaining a after vowels and p.
The vowel of the nominative is retained in the dat. and ace. sing.
h. The genitive singular of all masculine nouns of this declen-
sion ends in ov, originally ao. The vocative gives the simple stem.
Other cases conform entirely to the feminine type.
c. Accentuation. — The remarks under the feminine paradigms are
apphcable to masculine also.
Exercise 3.— Nouns of the First Declension, for Practice.
(Selected from the ** Sermon on the Mount.")
1. Masculine.
KpLTrjs, judge
6(f)€L\€Tris, debtor
'npo(p'qT7}5, prophet
T€\(avr]s, tax-gatherer, "pub-
lican "
vTTr]p4T7]s, attendant, servant
2. Feminine.
neipaXri, head
Xvxpia, lampstand
oiKia, house
irirpa, rock
yjrvxri, soul, natural life
^aaiXeCa, kingdom
bLKatoa-vvT], righteousness
€VTok/], commandment
fcuri, life
6vpa, gate
The learner should commit these words to memory, with their mean-
ings, and should then write them down in different numbers and cases,
with and without the corresponding articles, until all the forms are
mastered. So with the otiier Exercises.
§20.]
THE FIRST A.T^D SECOND DECLENSIONS.
23
20. Irregular Forms of the First Declension.
a. Masculine proper names in as of this declension form tlie
genitive in a, excepting when preceded hy a vowel. Thus, 'itoi/as-,
Jonah, gen. *la>va ; Kr)(f)as, Gejjhas, gen. Kjy^a ; Bapm/3as, gen.
Bapvd^a ; 'lovdas, Judah or Judas, gen. 'lovda. The accent of the
genitive corresponds with that of the nominative. But ^Avbpeas,
Andrew, makes 'AvSpeouj 'Haatas, Isaiah, 'Ho-atov. These names
are from the Hebrew, with the exception of 'Avdpeas.
h. In Acts V. 1, we find 2a7r(j)clpr], dative of the proper name
Sapphira ; and in Acts x. 1, a-Trelprjs is used as the genitive of
a-ne'ipa, cohort — in both cases contrary to the rule in § 19, a.
Similar variations from the regular form are found in good MSS.
in the case of other substantives.
21. Second (inseparable), or O -Declension.
This declension contains masculine, feminine, and neuter nouns.
The stem invariably ends in o, to which -s is added to form mascu-
line and feminine nominatives, and -v to form the neuter.
22. Masculine and Feminine Paradigms.
Declension.
Second
\6yos,
word, masc.
Stem, Xoyo-
SINGULAR.
FLURAL.
N.
Xoyos
\6yoL
G.
Xoyov
K6y(t)v
D.
Koyco
XoyoLs
A.
Xoyov
koyovs
V.
Xo'ye
Xoyoi
6b OS,
way, fern.
Stem,
6 do-
SINGULAR.
PL URAL.
obos
oboL
obov
ob&v
66(3
oboLS
6b6v
dboijs
6b4
6boC
24 THE SECOND DECLENSION. [§'22.
EEMAEKS.
a. As before noticed, tliJs paradigm corresponds with that of
the first declension, o- being substituted for a-. The difierences
are, that in the nominative singular the stem-vowel is not
lengthened, and that the vocative singular changes this vowel
into e In the accusative plural, the termination ovs is for -ovs
(§ 4, d, 5), as in the first declension -ds is for -avs; in each case,
s being added to the accusative singular.
Accentuation. — The remarks on the first declensiou are mostly apph-
cable. The syllable accented in the nominative retains the accent
throughout wherever possible ; oxytones becoming perispomena in the
genitive and dative of both numbers. The genitive plural of other
nouns is not, as in the first declension, perispomenon. In the nomina-
tive plural, the termination oi is treated with reference to the accent as
a short syllable.
23. Neuter Paradigm. Second Declension.
(TVKov, fig-tree. Stem, crvKO-
PLURAL.
(TVKa
aijKOiV
(TVKOiS
(TVKa
(TVKa
REMARKS.
The only difference between this paradigm and that of the
masculine and feminine is that already stated, § 14, a. The accu-
sative of all neuters is the same form with the nominative and
vocative ; and in the plural these cases end in a.
Accentiiation, — For the accentual changes in the declension of <rvitop,
see § 6, c.
24. Paradigm of Contracted Nouns. Second Declension.
Nouns of this declension whose stem-vowel o- is preceded by «
or o, generally suffer contraction, according to the scheme in § 3,yi
SINGULAR.
N.
avKov
G.
(TVKOV
D.
CTVK(D
A.
(TVKOV
V.
(TVKOV
§24.1
SECOND DECLENSION CONTRACTED NOUNS.
2^5
Thus, voos, mind, becomes vovs ', oareovy bone, oarovv. The con-
tracted forms of these words are not invariably employed in the
Septuagint or New Testament. On vovs, see Variable Nouns, § 32, «.
To this head may also be referred some nouns in -ojy, like the
proper names, 'ATroXXcoy, Kcos.
oiTTeov, hone, n. Stem, oareo"
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
{dorriov) octtovv (oa-Tia) dora
(da-Teov) dcrrov (dorecor) 6crT(2v
(dcrreo)) doTO) (do-reois) dorots
(dcTriov) oarrovv (oaria) dora
(oariov) oaTOVV (dorea) oara
'AttoXXws, Apollos.
N. 'AttoXAws
G. 'AttoXXo)
D. 'AttoXXo)
A. AttoXX(ov, or 'A7roXX(5 (irreg.)
V. 'AttoXAo)
25. The word 'It^o-oSs, Jesus, is thus declined : —
N. 'Ii/o-oSs A. *lr}(TOVV
G. 'Ir/o-oi; V. 'Iiyo-ov
D. ^Irjaov
vooSf mind, m.
Stem, voo-
oc
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
N.
(VOOS) VOVS
[vool) vol
G.
(voov) VOV
(vOOiv) V(£>V
D.
{void) V(}
[voois) vols
A.
(voov) VOVV
(voovs) vovs
V.
iyoe) VOV
(vool) vol
Exercise 4.— Nouns of the Second Declension, for Practice.
Selected from the *' Sermon on the Mount."
1. Masculine.
ab€\(p6s3 brother \vkos, wolf
^X^pos, enemy
avOpcaiTos, man
tjXlos, sun
a/x/iios, sand
2. Feminine.
vofjLos, law
SipOaXfjLos, eye
iroTafjLos, river
6oKos, beam
26
THE THIRD DECLENSION.
[§26.
3. Neuter.
h(£>pov, gift
€pyov, work
fiirpov, measure
KpCvov, lily
TTpo/BaTov, sheep
T^Kvov, child
26. Third (or Separable) Declension.
Nouns in this declension are masculine, feminine, or neuter.
Their varieties necessitate the giving of several paradigms, although
all are reducible to a simple form, already illustrated in the inde-
finite pronoun tls, and shown in the two nouns declined below.
The one essential thing, in this declension especially, is to know
the stem^ which may end in a consonant (impure, mute or liquid),
or in a vowel (pure). From this the nominative, as well as every
other case, is derived ; but the stem-ending is better seen in the
genitive, which, in Vocabularies and Lexicons, is therefore given
with the nominative.
The termination of the genitive singular in this declension is
always os. Take this away, and the remaining part of the word
is tlie stem.
2i7, General Paradigm of the Third Declension.
M. or F.
N.
al(i)v, age, duration, masc.
prjixa, word
Stem, alcov
Stem,
prjIXOLT^
SINQULAR. PLUJIAT..
SINGULAR,
PLURAL.
N.
alcav alcoves
prjfia
pruiara
G.
aicovos ai(avci)V
prjpLaTos
pTJfxdTOiV
d.
aloiVL aL(io(n(v)
prifiaTL
prip.acn[v)
A.
aloova alcovas
pijfxa
priiiara
V.
aidiv alcoves
prjtia
pT^fiara
§ 28.j the third declension. 27
28. Terminations of this Declension.
These paradigms are essentially alike in termination, setting
aside the invariable differences between neuter and other forms
(§ 14, a).
We thus find that the terminations of the third declension are,
in the singular —
Genitive, os, appended to the stem.
Dative, I, also appended to the stem.
Accusative, a. This, however, is realli/ a substitute for v, which
we find in the first and second declensions, and which in pure
stems often appears in the third also.
Vocative, the stem, subject to necessary modifications (§ 4, d, 8),
or like the nominative.
In the PLURAL —
Nominative, cs, appended to the stem.
Genitive, wv, appended to the stem.
Dative, o-i, added to the stem, with necessary modifications
(§ 4, d, 1, 5). On the v €(})€\kv(ttik6u, see § 3, h, 1.
Accusative, as, the a short or s added to the accusative singular.
Compare the First and Second Declensions, § 22, a.
Vocative, like the nominative.
Accentuation. — The accented syllable of the nominative, as in other
nouns, retains the accent throughout, wherever possible. For a special
rule respecting monosyllables, see § 29. In the above paradigms, aid^y
in the nominative is written for alwv.
29. Varieties in the Third Declension according
TO STEM- endings.
The stem of this declension may end in any consonant (except
(I. and the double consonants, I, |, tj/) and in the vowels i and v.
First Rule. — The most usual termination of the nominative
singular is s added to the stem, in accordance with the orthographic
law, § 4, c.
28 VARIETIES IN THE THIRD DECLENSION. [§ 29.
Thus (1), a labial stem makes the nominative in i|r.
Examples.
"ApayJTf Arabian, from dpap-, gen. apa^os
AWioylr, Ethiopian, „ alOioir-, gen. aWloiros
(2) A guttural stem makes the nominative in g.
Examples.
(jAo^, flame, from <})Xoy-, gen. ^Xo^o's
K77pu^, herald, „ kt^pvk-, gen. KJ]pvKos
vv^, night, „ wkt-, gen. wktos
Bpii, hair, „ Opix-, gen. rpix^s {§i,d,7.)
(3) A dental stem drops the stem-termination before s.
Examples.
Trots, child, from iraiS-, gen. rraidos
opvis, bird, „ 6pvi9-, gen. opvidos
Xapis, favour t „ Xap^^-, gen. xapiros
68ovs, tooth, „ oSovT-, gen. 686vtos (§ 4, d, 5.)
(4) Vowel stems add s simply.
Examples.
7r6\is, city, from iroXi-, gen. noKeas, for 7r6kiog
IxOvsyflsh, „ ixQv-, gen. Ixdvos
Second Rule. — Stems ending in v and vt {generally), in p {almost
always), and in s {invariably, except in neuters), form the nomi-
native, by lengthening the vowel preceding the termination.
Examples.
Troififjv, shepherd, from 'iroi|i€v-, gen. Troifxtvos
Xecoi/, lion, „ XcovT-, gen. Xeovros
pfjTcopt orator, „ ^tjrop-, gen. prjTopog
aldu>s, modesty, „ alSos-, (gen. aiSoVoy)
The genitive of this last word is contracted by dropping the s
between two short vowels, and combining themj alddos, aldovt,
(See § 3,/, Table and Note.)
§ 29.] VARIETIES IN THE THIRD DECLENSION. 29
Certain nouns with the stem-ending p preceded by € are synco-
pated, ^.e., omit this vowel in some of their cases. One, avf}py man^
dvcp-, in omitting €, inserts the letter 8 between v and p. (See ^b^5.)
The dative plural of these nouns also adds a after p. (See the
Paradigms.)
Third Rule. — Stems in €v, av, ov, while adding s in the nomina-
tive singular, according to the first rule, drop the v in the genitive
singular and other cases, thus forming an apparent exception to
the rule that the genitive gives the stem by taking away the
termination os. The irregularity is only apparent, as the v of the
stem is in reality the old consonant v (written in Greek f, and
called, from its shape, digamma)^ which originally belonged to
the genitive, like the other consonant stem-endings. Thus, ^oi}y,
ox, pof-, gen. ^oFos, now written ^o6s. Some of the cases of these
nouns are also contracted, as the paradigm will show. Stems in
eu take a special form of the genitive singular, called the "Attic
Genitive," ending in sws.
Fourth Rule. — Neuter stems in €s change this termination in
the nominative into -os, and suffer contraction in other cases by
§ 3,/.
Example. — opos^ mountain, 5p6s-, gen. {opea-osy opeos) opovs, nomina-
tive and accusative plural {opeaa, opea) oprj. (See Paradigm.)
Fifth Mule. — Other neuter nouns, 'together with those masculines
and feminines which hare liquid stems preceded by a long vowel,
retain the stem in the nominative unchanged, save by the general
orthographic law. Thus, alav, prjfxa, already given. The latter
becomes prjp,a from py\v-o.r-, according to § 4, d, 8.
Accenttuition. — ^Monosyllabic neuters are oxytone in all their dissyl-
labic forms, except the genitive plural, which is perispomenon. Mascu-
line and feminine monosyllables accent the penultimate in the accusative
singular and nominative and accusative plural j in other cases follow
the rule of neuters.
so THIRD DECLENSION — PARADIGMS. [§ 30.
30. Paradigms illustrating the Five foregoing Eules.
I. The letter s affixed to the stem.
a. Consonant Stems {mute\ labial and guttural.
N.
G.
d.
A.
V.
"Apaxjr, Arabian
Stein, 'ApajB-
aiNQULAR.
Apa\lr
"Apa^os
"ApajSi
"Apafia
"Apa^
PLURAL.
"ApafS^s
'Apd^oiv
"Apayj/iiv)
"ApajSas
Krjpv^, herald, masc
Stem; KTjpvK"
SINGULAR.
Kripv^
KtJpVKOS
K-qpVKL
KTipvKa
Kripv£
PLURAL.
K7JpVK€S
KripvuuiV
KTlpV^liv)
KTIpVKaS
KTi]pVK€S
For example of a dental stem (neuter), see Introductory Paradigm
of the Declensions, § 16. The feminine noun ^apts {x'b^*-'^-), favour,
makes ace. x^P'-^f f'^ei's, key, fern. (kXciS-) has ace. sing. KKelda ', ace.
plui*. hy syncope and contraction, kXcis (Matt. xvi. 19 ; Rev. i. 18).
b. YowEL Stems.
ixdvsyfish, masc.
Stem, IxOv
SINGULAR.
N. i)(dvs
i)(dv09
lydvi
lx6i
PLURAL.
ixdvciv
l\6v(n{y)
{iyQyas) lyOvs
IxOvcs
ttoKls, city, fern.
Stem, ttoXl-
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
TToAts (TTO/Vecs) flToAets
TTokccaS (Attic gen.) TTokeUiV
(TToAet) 770 Act '7roAeo-t(r)
ttoKlv (TToAeas) TTokeis
TToAt (TTokees) iroXtti
REMARKS.
One neuter noun, a-ivam, vnustard (singular only), is declined
like TToXts, excepting that the accusative is, of course, like the nom.
Accentuation. — For accentual purposes, the genitive terminatioQ, €«s
or €««/, in these nouns, is considered as one syllable^ and does not, there-
fore, require the acute accent to be thrown forward.
§30.]
THIRD DECLENSION — PARADIGMS.
^31
II. The vowel of the "last syllable stem lengthened.
TTOLixriv, shepherd, masc.
Aecoz;, lion, masc.
Stem, iroLixev-
Stem, Aeoz/r-
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
N.
TTOLlXriV V;0LIJL€V€S
X4(i}V XioVT€9
G.
TTQilxivOS TlOlllivQiV
XiovTos XeovTctiV
D.
TTOLllivL '1T01^€(Tl{v)
XiovTi Xiov(n{v)
A.
TTOLfJiiva TTOLixivas
XiovTa Xeovras
V.
TiOLfXriV 7:0LlJLiv€S
Xi(ov AeWres
albm, modesty, fei
n. Stem, at&y-
SINGULA
R ONLY.
N. alhcos
G. {alb6((T)
os) albovs
D. (ai8o(cr'
t) alboL
A. {aib6{a)
a) at6a)
V. alb(os
Syncopated !N"ou:^
^s OF THIS Form.
iraTrip, father.
avrjp, man.
Stem, Trarep-
Stem, dpep-
SINGULAR, PLURAL.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
N.
irarrip Tiarepes
avrjp avbp€S
G.
'jraTpos iraripwv
avbpos avbpcov
D.
irarpC liarpao-iiv)
avbpC avbpa.(n(v)
A.
TTaripa Tiaripas
avbpa avbpas
V.
ircLTcp TTaripes
avep avbpes
REMARK.
To this class of syncopated nouns belong ii-qrqp, mother ; Svydrrjp,
daughter ; yao-rrjp, belly. Aarrjp, star, has darpdo-i (y) in the dative
plural, but is not syncopated in any other case.
Accentuation. — These words are paroxytone in the cases that retain «,
and throughout the plural (excepting avf)p, which is irregular). The
syncopated cases of the singular are oxytone, and the vocative throws
back its accent as far as possible.
32
THIRD DEC3LENSI0N — ^PARADIGMS.
'.. Nouns in -avs, -cvs, -ovs.
with original digamma.
/3ao-iA.ev9, kincfy masc.
Stem, ^acTLXeF'
S/iV^eZ7ZAR.
PLURAL.
N. ^a(rL\€vs
((Baaikies) /Saa-ikeh
G. jSacnkeais
^acnKioav
I). (fiaa-LXi'C) ^ao-tXet
^a(nk^V(n{y)
A. jSaaiXea
^aa-iXias
V. ^aa-ikev
(j3ao-iA.ees) j8ao-tXet$
^ovs, oXf masc.
Stem, iSof-
S/JTffiZZ^iJ.
PLURAL.
N. ^oi;s
^oes
G. /3oos
jSocoi;
D. ^ot
/3oi;(rt(z;)
A. ^ow
(/3(;a9) ^oiJs
V. /Sou
/i^O€S
REMARK.
C§ 30.
Nouns in -CVS form tlie accusative singular in -€a (the a lorvg) ;
those in -avs and -ovs take v.
AccentiuUion. — Nouns in -f"S are all oxytone in the nominative
singular, and perispomenon in the vocative.
IV. Neuter nouns in -os, from the stem ending €S-
yivos, race.
Stem, yeves'
SINGULAR
PLURAL.
N.
yivo^
{yive(a)a) yivq
G.
[yive{(T)o^) yevovs
y€V€(tiv and yevQv
D.
(yiv€(<r)L) y€V€L
yiv^(n{v)
A.
yivos
{y€ve{(T)a) yivYj
V.
yivos
(y4v€((T)a) yhri
V. The simple stem aa nominative,
given, § 27.
See alo)v and prjfiOf already
§30.] THE THIRD DECLEN.STON. 33
Exercise 5.— Nouns of the Third Doclension, for Practice.
Selected from the " Sermon on the Mount."
»,* The learner should assign each noun to its proper class.
Masculine.
ypa}xiJt,aT€vs, -€(os, scribe
)(^LT(x)v, 'Oivos, vest, inner
garment
bvvajxLs, -€ws, power
6piii Tpi-xos, liair
obovs, obovToSj tooth
6(f)Ls, o^ecos, snake
iOvos, -ovs, nation
6iKr]ixaj -aros, will
Svopia, -aros, name
Feminine.
KpL(TLs, -60)9, judgment
X^^Py X^^P^^j hand, dat. plur.
Neuter.
opos, 'OvSf mountain
TTvpf Tfvpos, fire
(pm, (ficoTos, light
31. Irregular Nouns of the Third Declension.
These are irregular, chiefly in the nominative. Thus, yvvrjy
woman, takes gen. ywaiKos, and forms all its cases from the stem
•ywaiK-, the vocative being yvvai by § 4, d, 8.
Tow, knee, is declined regidarly as from the stem ^ovaT- (neuter),
gen. yovaros, nom. plur. yovara, <fec.
Kixov, dog (masculine, also feminine in singular), is declined as
from KVV-, gen. kwos, &c. ; but voc. sing, kvop, dat. plur. kv(tl{v),
MapTvs, witness (masculiae), is from the stem (xaprvp-, which it
follows throughout, except in dat. plur. pApTX)(n(y).
"Ybcop, water, is declined regularly as from the neuter stem vSar-,
gen. vbaros, nom. plur. {JSara, &c.
Some neuter stems in -ar- form the nominative by changing the
T into s, instead of dropping it. Thus, Kcpar-, horn, nom. sing.
Kepas, nom. plur. Kepara, gen. Kepdrcop', KpiaT -,Jlesh, nom. sing. Kpeas,
nom. plur. Kpea, by syncope from Kpsara ; rcpar-, prodigy, nom. sing.
ripas, nom. plur. re para, dat. Tfpaa-i[v).
34 IRREGULAR AND VARIABLE NOUNS. [§ 31.
The accusative plural form, apvas, lamhsj is once found (Luke x. 3),
and may be referred to the stem dpev-, nom. sing, aprjv, the e dropped
in inflection by syncope.
In one passage, the name of the Greek deity Zeus is found
(nom. Zeus) gen. Aio?, ace. Ala (Acts xiv. 12, 13).
32. Nouns of variable declension in the New Testament.
a. A few substantives in -05 are found with forms both of the
second declension and of the third (neuter stem -€s- like yevos).
Thus, o-KOTos, darkness, is generally neuter of the third, but once
masculine of the second (Heb. xii. 18, (tk6t<o) ; TrXovroy, wealth, is
properly masculine of the second, but is found in good MSS. neuter
of the third ; TKeos, mercy, is also of both declensions in the accu-
sative case only (eXeoi/, Matt. ix. 13, Titus iii. 5, Heb. iv. 16, &c.),
but the genitive is always ikeovs, dat. cXe'et. NoOs, mind (see § 24),
second declension, occasionally takes a genitive and dative as of the
third declension; voos (1 Cor. xiv. 19), vot (Rom. vii. 25; 1 Cor.
i. 10, xiv. 15). So nXoos (Acts xxvii. 9) for ttXov.
b. The word o-d^^aTov, sabbath, is a regular noun, second declen-
sion, neuter, except in the dative plural, which in the New Testa-
ment is o-a/3/3ao-t (as if from o-appar-, crd^^a). But the Septuagint
has also o-a^^drois (1 Chron. xxiii. 31).
c. In proper names much in'egularity exists. Maa-Tjs (or Mavcr^s),
Moses, is thus declined : —
O. MoKreoDf
D. 'M.axTfif or Mo)(r^
A. Moxrea, or Mcdct^i'
V. Uaxrri (LXX).
The name of Jerusalem is found in a threefold form : (1) *Upov'
a-dkrjfi, indeclinable, a transcript of the Hebrew word; (2) ^Upoa-dkvfia,
neuter plural, second declension ; (3) 'UpoaoKvfia, feminine singular
(Matt. ii. 3, only). Many proper names analogous in form to nomi-
natives of the different declensions are indeclinable. So Kava,
BrjOa-aidd, Bij6(f)ayf], ToXyoOd, 'Pa/xa, *A.apaVf 2vfifa>p, KeSpeoi/, 'lfptx&.
32.]
NOUNS OF THE THREE DECLENSIONS.
35
To this class may be referred the indeclinable neuters, irdaxa, pass-
over ; aUepa, Strong drink (Luke i. 15). The last two are, in fact,
but adaptations of Hebrew words, ^lara, jot (Matt. v. 18),''AX0a
and S/zeya (Rev. i. 8), the names of Greek letters, are also treated
as neuter nouns without inflection.
Exercise 6.— Promiscuous List of Nouns, for Practice.
*** The Genitive case is given, to show the Declension and the Stem.
Learners should, wherever possible, infer the gender from the form.
a^Tos, ov, m, eagle
atixa, arcs, blood
av6os, ovs, flower
apviov, ov, lamb
^ovXr\, 7js, counsel
yovevs, eos, parent
boLKpv, vos, tear
bivbpov, ov, tree
bibda-Kakos, ov, teacher
iXiTLs, Cbos,/. hope
kopTYj, ijs, festival
^Hpi^brjs, ov, Herod
I dvyaTrjp, rpos, daughter
KaKia, as, vice
Kiddpa, as, harp
IxdcTTL^, iyos,f. scourge
fiipos, ovs, part
6(f)Ls, €(os, m. serpent
TToXiTrjs, ov, citizen
iroi'os, ov, m. labour
TTpaypia, aros, thing
(jak-Kiy^, lyyos, trumpet
(TTOfxa, aros, mouth
copa, as, hour
36
ADJECTIVES.
[§33.
Chapter III. ADJECTIVES.
33. Adjectives in Greek foUow precisely the inflection
of Substantives. Every declension, almost every form, re-
appears, but in different combinations.
In respect of form, adjectives are divided into three classes : —
1. Those which combine the first and second declensions.
2. Those which combine the first and third.
3. Those which follow exclusively the type of the thii-d
In the first two, the form of the first declension is feminine.
34. First Form.
Paradigms. (Stems, o- m.
a- f. 0- n.
ayaOo-,
-a-, good.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
M.
F.
l!i.
M.
F.
N.
N.
ayaOos
ayadri
ayadov
ayaOoL
ayaOaC
dyaOd
G.
ayaOov
ayaOris
ayaOov
ayaOQv
ayaOQv
dyaOcov
D.
aya6(a
ayaOfj
ayaO^
ayaOoXs
ayaOais
dyaOols
A.
ayadov
ayaOriv
ayaOov
ayaOovs
ayaOds
dyaOd
V.
ayadi
ayaQi]
ayaOov
ayaOoL
ayaOaC
hyaOd
All participles in .\uvos are dec]
ihed like dyaOos.
diKaio-y
-a-. Just.
N.
bUaios
biKaCa
bUaLov
bUaiOL
bUaiai
bUaia
G.
biKaCov
biKaCas
^LKaCov
biKaiiav
biKaCcov
biKaioav
D.
StKato)
biKaia
biKaico
blKaLOLS
biKaCais
blKaCoLS
A.
hUaiov
biKaCav
bUatov
bikatovs
biKaCas
bUaia
V.
bUau
biKaia
biKaie
flLKpO'y H
biKaiOL
a-, little.
bUataL
biKaia
N.
fiLKpos
flLKpd
fJLLKpOV
HLKpoC
[MiKpaC
fJLLKpd
G.
IXLKpOV
fiLKpas
pLLKpOV
jXLKpOiV
[llKp(dV
fJLLKpOiV
D.
iiiKpq
fXLKpa
lllKp^
jLlUpOtS
fJLLKpali
/XlKpOtS
A.
iXLKpOV
yuKp&v
jXLKpOV
fXLKpOVS
[JLLKpds
fXLKpd
V.
liiKpi
fUKpd
IXLKpOV
pLlKpoC
lUKpai
fUKpd
§34.]
ADJECTIVES FIRST FORM.
37
REMARKS.
a. The feminine singular of these adjectives, as will be seen in
the above paradigms, is formed in strict analogy with the usage of
the first declension. The rule is, that where the masculine has -os
preceded by a vowel or p, the feminine ends in a long, which vowel
is preserved through all the cases of the singular.' Os preceded by
a consonant becomes i], which also runs through the singular.
h. Several adjectives belonging to this First Form employ the
masculine terminations for the feminine also, conforming thus
throughout to the second declension. This is especially the case
with polysyllables and compound words. But as there is no
definite rule to distinguish these "Adjectives of Two Termina-
tions " from those of three, it will be necessary in doubtful cases
to consult the Yocabulary or Lexicon.
c. Accentuation. — The rules in § 18 are strictly observed. Observe,
however, that the feminine plural is not, like that of the first declension,
necessarily perispomenon, but like the other cases, follows the stem of
the word. Thus from ZiKaios, f. pi. gen. ^iKaiuv (the accent being thrown
one syllable forward by the terminal long syllable (§ 5, a) ; but fjuKpSs
makes fiiKpuv.
35. Contracted Adjectives of the First Form.
Adjectives in co- and oo- belong to this class. The explanations
given with Contracted Substantives (§ 24), and the scheme in § 3/
will sufficiently show the reason of each contraction.
■)(pvcr€0-, -a-, golden. By contraction, xpvcrovs (eos),
"V i^v)* "ow (eoz;).
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
M. F.
N.
M.
F.
N.
N.
Xpvaovs XP'^^V
Xpvcrovv
Xpvo-o'i
■yjpva-aZ
Xpvo-a
G.
Xpvcrov xpv(ri]s
Xpvo-Qv
Xpva&v
yjivaSiV
\pV(TQiV
d.
XpvcT^ Xpv(T^
XPV(T(?
Xpvo'o'iS
XpvaaLS
Xpyaols
A.
Xpvo-Qvv XP^^^
XPV(T0VV
Xpvcrovs
Xpvo-as
Xpva-a
V.
Xpv(T€e XP^aij
Xpvo-Qvv
XPV(T0L
Xpvo-OL
Xpvcra
38
ADJECTIVES — SECOND FORM.
[§35.
REMARKS.
a. 'Apyupeoff, ^Iver (adjective), occurs in the New Testament in
two forms : ace. plur. dpyvpovs, neut. nom. and ace. plur. dpyvpa.
h. These adjectives occur very infrequently. It will be observed
that the feminine of xp^o-^os is formed irregularly; as -os preceded
by a vowel, according to rule, requires -a. The adjective arepeos,
ed, eovjjlrm, is declined without contraction.
c. Accentuation. — The final syllable in these adjectives, when con-
tracted, is circumflexed throughout. Thus we have, not only air\ovs
from ottAo'os, simple (regular, see § 6, c), but XP"^'^^^ from xP^<^^os, and
apyvpovs from apyvp€os, anomalous.
36. Second Form. General Eemarks.
Masculine. — The nominative is formed from the stem, according
to the methods of the Third Declension. Thus, o|v- gives nom. masc.
o^vs, sharp (§ 29, i. (4) ; iravT- becomes nds, all (§§ 29, i. (3) ; Add);
and Ikovt- gives iK<av, willing (§§ 29, ii. ; 4, d, 8).
Feminine. — The nominative always ends in a; the other cases
in the singular follow the model of the First Declension (§ 18, a).
The stem-ending v becomes -eta, as 6^vs, o^eia ; vr- becomes -era, as
Tray, ndara, and, eKoiv, eKovcra. But stems in -v- insert an i before
that consonant, as peXas, black, (leXav-, f. pikatva ; and or- (originally
for) becomes -via. Thus, XeXuKwy (participle), Iiaving loosened^
XeXvKOT-, f. XeXvKvZa.
Neuter. — The neuter nominative contains the simple stem, altered
only by the general euphonic rules ; as o|u, ttov, ckov, fie}<av, XeXvKos.
37. Paradigms of the Second Form.
o^v, -eta-, sharp.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
M.
F.
N.
M.
F.
N.
N.
o^s
S^ela
diii
S(€LS
ofeiat
diia
G.
o^ios
o^eCas
o^ios
diecov
ofetwy
o^ioav
D.
6f€t
6^€(a
(5fet
6ii(n{v)
ofetats
6i4<Ti(v)
A.
diijv
ofetai
6^6
afety
of etas
6i^a
V.
6iv
dfeia
6&J
dfctj
ductal
6i4a
§37.]
ADJECTIVES — SECOND FORM.
39
Note, The stem-ending v becomes c in the genitive and dative
singular, and throughout the plural : eV, dative singular, being
contracted into ei; and e'ey, e'as, in the plural, into els. But tos-,
genitive singular, and f'a in the neuter plural, are uncontracted.
A very few substantives also change v into e ; the only instance in
the New Testament being irrjxf^v (John xxi. 8; Rev. xxi. 17) for
mjx^cov, from irrjxvs, cubit.
TraPT-, -acra-5 all, every.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
M.
F.
N.
M.
F.
N.
N.
Tras
Tracra
7:av
TTCLVTiS
iraaai
iravra
G.
TTaVTOS
T^daris
TravTos
T^aVTOiV
7Taaru>v
iravTcov
D.
TiaVTi
TTCLO-rj
iravTL
TTaaiiv)
TTCLCraLS
iraai^i;)
A.
TTCLVTa
iraaav
irav
TTCLvras
naaas
TTCLvra
V.
iras
iraaa
irav
TTCLVTeS
Tiao-aL
iravra
Participles in -as are similarly declined (stem, avr-) as Xvoray,
having loosed. The participial stem-ending €vt- makes, nom. -efs,
-€io-a, -^v, gen. -^vtos, -ciotjs, -^vtos, &c. ; as /SovXev^eis, having been
counselled.
Ikovt-, 'ovaa-^ willing.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
M.
F.
N.
M.
F.
N.
N. kKiav
kKOvaa
€k6v
€k6vT€S
kKOvaai
kKOvra
G. kKOVTOS
kKOV(Tr]S
kKOVTOS
kKOVTOiV
kKovcroiiV
kKOVTOiV
D. kKOVTL
€K0V(r7]
€k6vTL
kKovaiiy)
kKOvaais
kKova-L^v)
A. kKovra
€KOvcrav
€k6v
kKOVTas
kKov(Tas
knovTa
V. hK(xiV
kKOVcra
kKOV
kKOVTOS
kKova-ai
kKovra
Participles in -wv, -ov<ra, -ov, are declined on this model.
38. The declension of adjectives like fieXas, fxeKaiva, fieXav, blaclc,
gen. fxeXavos, fieXaLvrjs, fxtXavos, dat. plur., m. and n. /xeXao-i(z/), and
of participles like XeXvKcos, XeXvKvla, XcXvkos, having loosened, gen.
keXvKOTos, XeXvKvtas, XeXvKoros, will not now present any difficulty.
One participle, iarrjKcos, having stood, from the verb larrjixi, takes
the alternative form, iarois, the result of syncope and contraction,
and is thus declined : — f
40
IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES SECOND FORM.
[§38.
SINGULAR.
M.
F.
N.
N.
€(77(0?
eoTcocra
kaTOiS
G.
ecrrcoro?
eo-rcoo-r;?
eo-Tioros
D.
karcoTL
koTcacrr}
eoTcort
A.
eoTcora
kardoo-qv
eoTcoj
PLURAL.
F.
eoT6ocrat
N.
loTcora
The contraction is from icrTaa>s.
M.
kcfTd)T(j>V k(TTb)(TCiiV k(TT(aT(aV
kaT(o<TL(v) eoTcio-ais lo-ra)o-t(i;)
karcoras eorwcras eorcora
(See § 6 c.)
Accentuation. — Oxytones circumflex tlie feminine. Adjectives of the
second class otherwise follow the ordinary rules. It will be observed
that in the genitive and dative singular, masculine and neuter, vas
takes oxytone forms, otherwise accenting the stem-syllable throughout.
39. Two adjectives of common occurrence are irregular in the
singular masculine and neuter, owing to a combination of forms.
Their declension is as follows : —
1. fxeya- {fxeyaXo-, /xeyaXw^ great.
Sing. M. F. N.
N. ixeyas fxcydXr] fiiya
G. fx^ydkov fjieydkrjs fxeydkov
D. fxeydXt^ fJ-^ydkr) /leyaAw
A. [i^yav iJL€ydkT]V l^-^yo.
Plural regular, as if from /xeyaXos.
2. TToXv (ttoAXo-, TToXXa-), mani/.
Sing. M.
F.
N.
N. TTOkvS
TTOkkrj
TTOkv
G. TTokkoV
TTokkijS
TTOkkoV
D. TToXAw
TToAArj
TTOkkio
A. TTokvV
TTokkriv
TTOkv
Plural regular, as if from noXkos.
The adjective Trpavs, or Trpaoy, meek^ is found in different forms of
declension. Thus, in Matt. xi. 29, ve have nom. sing, npaos, some-
times written Trpaos;* in xxi. 5, Trpavs; in 1 Pet. iii. 4, gen. sing.
TTpqeog ; and in Matt. v. 5, nom. plur. 7rpq.€is.
♦ Lachmann and others r*«id iroats here, thus removing the irregularity.
§ 40.] ADJECTIVES — THIRD FORM. 41
40. Third Form. General Remarks.
Adjectives of this class being altogether of the third declension,
have no special form for the feminine, and are, therefore, of two
terminations or (sometimes) of only one. Compare ns, § 13.
For the most part, the declension of these adjectives is without
peculiarity. It should be noted that an adjective in -wv (nominative
singular) may be from one or other of the stem-endings ovt and ov.
If from the latter, it belongs to the third class. Thus, eK<av, from
Ikovt-, has three terminations; but o-axj^poiu, from <r«<J>pov-, only two.
By far the largest and most important class of adjectives in this
division are those in -tjs, neut. -€s, where the stem-ending €s is not
changed into os in the nominative and accusative singular, as in
the corresponding class of substantives (§ 29, iv.), but where similar
contractions to those of nouns take place in the other cases.
41. Paradigms of the Third Form,
akqOes', true.
SINGULAR.
M. and F.
N.
N.
akr]6ris
^XrjOh
G.
{a\7]dios) aXrfOov^
aXrjOovs
D.
(kXr^eil) 6Xr]eei
aXrjOei:
A.
(akneia) akrjerj
iiXrjdis
V.
aXr]6€9
PL URAL.
aXrjdh
M.. and F.
N.
N.
(a\r]0i(s) dXTjeels
(aXrjeia) aXTjOTJ
G.
{aXr]6ioov) aXrjOcov
aXr]do)p
D.
aXr]di(TL{v)
aXr)0€(n(v)
A.
(aXr]6ias) aXTjO^ls
(iiX-neia) d,XTier}
V.
(aXrjdies) aXr^e^is
{&X7jeia) 6,Xrierj
42 ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. [§41
crco(j)pop -, sober-minded.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
M. and F.
N.
M. and F.
K.
N.
(T(0(f)p(t)V
<T(a<l)pov
a-(a(f)pov€S
(T(a(f)poi'a
G.
(T(i>(ppOVOS
a(a(f)povos
(T(i)(pp6v(JiV
(T(0(l}p6v(i)V
D.
acacfypovL
a-<a(f>povL
(r(a(f)po(TL
(T(a(j)poai
A.
(T(i>(^pova
(T(a(f)pOV
a(£i(f)povas
(r(o(f)pova
V.
(jGxPpov
(r(o(f)pov
(r(a(f)pov€9
(raxppova
To this class belong comparatives in a>v. (See § 44.)
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
42. There are two regular methods of forming the Greek
comparative and superlative.
The first and most usual is by adding to the stem of the
positive the further stem-ending T€po- for the comparative,
TttTo- for the superlative. These forms are then declined
exactly like the first form of adjectives.
Thus, from ttco-tos, Jhithjul, stem irwrro-, we have —
Comparative, nom, sing. via-Torepos, nia-TOTepa, maroTepov.
Superlative, nom. sing. Trto-Toraroy, Tna-TOTdrq^ TrioroTaToi/.
From dXrjdfjs, true, stem dXTjOcs-
Comparative, dXr^dfo-Tepos, oKrjdeoTepa, dXrjdea-Tfpov.
Superlative, dXrjdea-TaTOS, dXrjdcarTdTrj, dXrjOeo-Tarov.
Adjectives of the first class which have a short syllable before
the stem- ending o- change this vowel into «.
Thus, aocfios, wise, makes —
Comparative, cro(f)a)T€pos, o-ocfjcoTepa, aocfxiiTepov.
Superlative, o-ocfiaTaTos, a-o<p(OTdTr), (To(\>oiTaTov.
From vios, neWy we have in hke manner —
Comparative, veoirepos, vearepa, Ptar^pov.
Superlative, veararos, vfardTrj, vediTarov.
Accentuation. — Comparatives and superlatives of this form are always
proparoxytone, except when the final syllable is long ; then paroxytone.
In other words, the accent is thrown back as far as possible.
§ 43.] ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. 43
43. The second form of comparison is by adding, generally
to an abbreviated form of the positive stem, -i«v (stem-ending
wv-) for the comparative, and -iotos (stem-ending wrro-) for
the superlative.
Examples.
raxvs, swiftj Taxiav* Ta)(t(TTog
alcrxpos, disgraceful, alo-xicov, a'larxio-Tos
KoXos, J^aiVy KaXXicov, KoXXiaros
fieyas, great, /net^cai/ (for /xeytcoi/), fieyiaros
Accentuation. — In these, as in other comparative and superlative
forms, the accent is thrown back as far as possible.
44. Paradigm of Comparatives in -iwv or -wv.
These follow the third form of adjectives (see o-axfipaiv, § 41), but
are sometimes contracted by the omission of the v before a or e, and
the combination of this vowel with the o of the stem. This con-
traction is, however, infrequent in the New Testament.
fxei^copy fxel^oi^^ greater,
SINGULAR.
M. and F.
N.
N.
jnetfwy
fie'iCov
G.
fxeC(ovos
lx€iCovos
D.
fieCCovL
fl€L(0VL
A.
fieCCovcL or fxeCCio
fJLclCoV
V.
Ijl€lCov
PLURAL
lX€lC0V
M. and F.
N.
N.
Ijl€lCov€s or jjceC^ovs
fjLeCCova or juei^o)
G.
fJL€LC6v(iiV
/aetfoVcoz;
D.
li€CCo(n{v)
lJL€LCo(n{v)
A.
fxciCovas or [i^iCovs
fjieCCova or juetfo
V,
fj.€LCop€s or /xetfoDs
Ijl€lCov€s or fxeiiovs
* See John xx. 4. In classic Greek, OdTTuv is the form generally used.
44 ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. [§ 45.
45. To this form of comparison belong several irregular
comparatives and superlatives, of which the following list
will suffice : —
ayaBos, gOod,
comp.
^eKriav,
sup. ^cXtio-tos
j>
Kpelcracov,
V
KparioTos
KaKos, bad,
i)
KUKLCOV,
V
KaKiaros
fxiKposy little,
>>
p-iKporepos
iXdo-aoiP,
(regul
ar)
iXaxiOTOS
noXvs, many,
T](T(ra)v,
TrXeicou or
TrXecov,
^KKTTOS
nXeiaTos
Some adjectives, it will be seen from the above, have an alterna-
tive comparison, having recourse to different roots for the purpose.
The respective forms are now interchangeable, or nearly so. For
shades of difference between them, see Vocabulary and the Chaptw:
on Synonyms.
46. The following comparatives and superlatives have no
answering positives : —
(From ava>, adv. up) dvarepos, upper ; dvaraTos, topmost.
(From AcarcD, adv. down) KaTdyrepos, lower ; KararaTos, lowest.
(From eo-o), adv. within) ea-atTepos, inner; eVcorarop, inmost
(From Trpd, prep, be/ore) nporepos, former ; npSiTos, first.
Many of these forms are but seldom used.
47. Emphasis in Comparison.
(o) An emphatic comparative is made by the adverb fioKKov,
more. So Mark ix. 42, KaK6v ea-Tiv avr^ piaKXov, " it is far better
for him." The same adverb is sometimes prefixed to a compara-
tive, as in Mark vii. 36, paWop irfpio-aoTepov, " much (lit. more) the
more abundantly." In Phil. i. 23, yet another adverb of intensity
is affixed to paXKov with the comparative, ttoXXg) paXXov Kpeiaaov
(lit. " by much the more better "). Compare " most unkindest
§ 47.] ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON — EXERCISE. 45
cut of all" in Shakspeare (Julius Caesar, iii, 2). So Psa. ix. 2
^Prayer Book version) "0 Thou Most Higlicst."
(6) Another form of securing emphasis is by affixing a compa-
rative termination to a comparative or superlative form. Thus,
from /xetXcDi/, greater (3 Ep. John 4), [xeiCorepav ovk. e^fo x"P"-^) " -'- ^^^^^
no greater (more greater) joy ;" and from iXax^a-Tos, least (Eph. iii. 8),
ra iXaxi-crTOTepa iravToav rSiv ayicov, well rendered in E. Y., ^^ less than
tJie least of all saints."
Exercise 7.— Additional Adjectives, for Practice.
Selected from the "Sermon on the Mount."
First Form.
ayios, holy
abiKos, unjust
apxa'i^os, ancient
Kadapos, pure
TTovrjpos, wicked
TTTcoxps, poor, pauper
arevos, narrow
reAetoy, full-grown, perfect
(f)av€p6<i, evident
(ppovLfios, prudent
Second Form.
&TTa9, airaa-a, airaVf all, altogether
ixikas, [likaLva, p^eXav, black
'nXarvSj TrAareta, TrAarv, broad
Third Form.
&p7ra$, -ayos, rapacious | cXernjLcov, -ovos, merciful
In practising with these forms, they should be combined with the
nouns of the previous Exercises. The adjectives should also be put
into the different forms of the comparative and superlative. Almost
countless combinations will thus result, by which the learner, either
with or without the aid of an instructor, may become versed in these
parts of speech.
46 NUMERALS. [§ 48.
NUMERALS.
48. The Carmnal Numbers.
(a) For the signs of the respective numbers, the lettei*s of the
Alphabet are used, according to the list in § 1. When a letter is
employed numerically, an acute accent is appended. Thus, a', 1 ;
^, 2, and so on. To express thousands, an accent is placed beneath,
,a, 1,000 ; p, 2,000 ; /, 10,000, &c.
(6) It will be seen that the places of some numbers are vacant,
owing to letters having dropped, in very ancient times, out of the
Greek Alphabet : the Digamma (f) having come between e and C;
while the space between tt and p was occupied by Koppa (cp), a
guttural with a hard ^-sound, the original of the Latin and Eng-
lish letter q. As the alphabet ends with o)', 800, another discarded
letter, Sam pi (^) was used for 900.* Three signs have therefore
been added, as follows : r (the sign of a double consonant, sty used
instead of f ), 6 ; p', 90 ; ^', 900.
(c) Combinations of tens and units, or of hundreds, tens, and
units, are expressed, not as in our Arabic numeration, by the
collocation of unit-signs, but by addition. Thus, la, 11; t/3', 12;
Ky', 23 ; pS', 104 ; .afo^r,', 1868 ; x^^' (^ev. xiii. 18), 666. In these
expressions, the numeral accent is only written once, excepting
with thousands.
49. The cardinal numbers, et?, one ; Svo, two ; rpet^, three ;
T€(raap€s, four, are declined as follows. The rest ara inde-
clinable up to two hundred, which, with the other hundreds,
follows the plural of the first form of adjectives in -oi, -ai, -a.
- ets, juta, ^v (stem, €!/-), one.
M.
F.
N.
M.
F.
N.
N.
cts
fjLia
h
D.
kvC
fiLa
hC
G.
€v6s
fJLLCLS
hSs
A.
€va
fxCav
h
* Hebrew students will recollect that these are the places of Vau, Kop\
and Shin respectively.
§50.]
NUMERALS.
47
Like els are declined its compounds, ovdeis, no one (absolutely),
and firjdeiSf no one (hypothetically). The accentuation of all three
is irregular, as seen above.
Sv'o,
tico.
N. G * and A.
bvo j D. bv(ri(v]
rpet?, TpCa, three.
M. and F.
N.
M. and F.
N.
N.
Tpets
Toia
D. Tpi(Ti{y)
TpLa[{v)
G.
rpioiv
TpL(OV
A. rpets
TpCa
riara-apes, ria-a-apa, four.
M. and F.
N.
M. and F.
N.
N.
re^aap^s
rioraapa
D. riacrapcniv)
TicG-ap(Ti
G.
Teaadpcov
Tecraapciiv
A. rio-crafji.'i
riaaapa
50. The Ordinal Numbers.
For first, the superlative form trpccTos (§46), is used. The suc-
ceeding ordinals are derived from the stem of their cardinal num-
bers, and are declined like adjectives of the first form. Cardinal
numbers are sometimes used instead of ordinals in reckoning the
days of the week, &c. (See Syntax.)
51. Table of Cardinals and Ordinals.
CARDINAL.
ORDINAL.
1,
ets, /uta, €V
irpcoTos,
first
2,
bl^O
b^vTepoSi
second
3,
. rpet?, Tpia
TpLTOSf
third
4,
ri(T(Tap€S, riaaapa
TirapTOSy
fourth
5,
irivre
TriinTTOs,
fifth
* In classic Greek the gen. is ivo7if or Svilv (dual forms.) So also the
dative, sometimes.
4S
KUMERILS.
[§51
CARDINAI.
f
ORDINAL.
6,
u
^Tosj sixth
7,
klTTd
^^bofjLos, seventh.
8,
(J/cro;
oyboo9y^ eighth
9,
€vvia
€vvaT09, ninth
10,
Se/ca
^
biKUTosj tenth
11,
€vb€Ka
cvb^Karos etc.
12,
b(ab€Ka, or heKabvo
(Acts xix. 7)
bctibiKaros
13,
TpLCTKaCbeKa
Tpia-KaibiKaTos
14,
Tcaa-apea-KaCbeKaj or beKa-
Teaa-apaKaibeKaTOi
ricraapes (Matt.
i.l7)
15,
TTevTeKaCbeKaf or bcKa irivre
TreireKatSeKaroy
(John xi. 18)
16,
eKKaib^Ka
eKKaibiKaTOS
17,
kirraKaCbeKa
CTTTaKaLbeKaTos
18,
OKTcoKaCbeKa, or 8e/ca Kat
OKTOiKatbiKaTos
oKTd) (Luke xiii
4)
19,
evveuKaibeKa
evveaKaLbeKaros
20,
€tKO(rL(v)
etKooTos
21,
ctKocrt Kal ets", jtxta,
li>
CtKOOTOS Kat TTpa)TOS
22,
etKoo-i Kat 8^0
etKOOTO? Kol b€VT€pOS
30,
rpLCLKOvra
TpiCLKOO-TOS
40,
Tea-crapcLKOvTa
T€(TcrapdKO aro s
50,
TievTriKOVTa
irevTTjKocrTos
60,
((rjKOVTa
€^K0(Tt6s
70,
k^bop.riKovTa
e^bopLrjKoa-Tos
80,
6yboriKOVTa
dyborjKoa-Tos
90,
hevrjKOVTa
lv€VriKO(TTO'S
100,
kKarov
CKaTOOTOS
200,
biaKoa-LOL
biaKoa-LooTos
800,
TpidKOa-LOL
TpiaKoa-ioa-Tos
400,
T^TpaKocrioi
T€(T(rapaKO (tioctto s
500,
TTivraKoa-LOL
irerraKOO-tooTos
§51.]
1
NUMERALS.
CARDINAL.
ORDINAL.
600,
k^aKoa-LOi
k^aKOo-Loa-Tos
700,
klTTdKOa-LOL
klTTaKOaLOCTTOS
800,
OKTCLKOaLOL
OKTaKoaLoaros
900,
IvaKOCTLOl
kvaKOCTLOGTOS
1,000,
XiXioL
XiktOOTOS
2,000,
biox^kiOL
bicrxikioa-Tos
3,000,
Tpiayikioi
TpLcrx^LkioaTos
4,000,
T€TpaKl(T^iklOl
TeTpaKLo-x^ikLoaTos
0,000,
fXVpLOL
IxvpLoa-Tos
49
KEMAEK.
In compound numbers, the largest is placed first,* and the
smaller follow in order, with or without the conjunction koIj and.
The smaller numbers are in many copies treated as enclitics, and
attached to the larger as one word.
Examples. — Tea-a-apaKovra dvo, " forty-two" (Rev. xi. 2, xiii. 5) ;
cKarbv TrevrrjKovTa rpL&v, "of a hundred and fifty-three" (John
xxi. 11); dpovoi etfcoo-4 rea-o-apei, "twenty-four thrones" (Rev. iv. 4);
T€(TarapdKovTa Koi e^ ereaiv, "for forty-six years" (John ii. 20); erav
oydoTjKovTaTea-a-dpcov, " of eighty-four years" (Luke ii. 37) ; St/ca kgl
oKTO) e-nj, "eighteen years" (Luke xiii. 16); ra ivevrjKovTaewea, "the
ninety-nine" (Matt, xviii. 12; Luke xv. 4).
52. Distributive Numbers.
The distribution or repetition of a number is variously expressed.
In Mark vi. 7, the simple cardinal is repeated : bvo Suo, " two and
two ;" Luke x. 1, for the same thing, more classically employs a
preposition, dva 8vo; Mark xiv. 19, and John viii. 9, combine
another preposition with the cardinal : els Kad' eis, " one by one."
♦ The rule in classic Greek is to place the smaller number first, Mrith fcal,
or the larger without koL.
50 NUMERALS. [§ 52.
Exercise 8.— Numbers.
1. Interpret the following numerical symbols : — ^, i?;', /c5', /ir ,
2. [FocaJw^ary. — ©pa, -a?, hour; ^fiepa, -as, day ; a-d^^arov, -ov
(lit sabbath), week, sing, or plur. ; firiv, nrjvosj m. month; eros, -ovs,
n. year ; iT}^eia>u, comp. adj. more; koI, and; ij, or ; iv (prep.,
proclitic), in, governing the dative.]
Translate the following : —
1. iv €T€i TrevreKaibeKaTco.
2. €V TW fJLTJvl ra €KTm.
3. rj (opa f] deKarrj.
4. iv Ta> iv\ Koi e^uKocnoarT^ erei, iv ra Sfurepw [irjvi.
5. f] fxia {riiiipa) rav cra^^drav. (See John XX. 1, &C.)
6. 17 TTparr] aa^^aTov. (See Mark xvi. 9.)
7. T7 TpiTTj ripipa. Supply on, to express the force of the
dative.
8. fjpipai nXeiovs okto) tj dtKa. Supply than, after the com-
parative.
9. hiaKoa-toi i^iopfjKovra e^.
10. €TT) 6y8ofjKovTa riaarapa.
3. Render the following into Greek : —
1. Thirty years.
2. Eleven months.
3. In the fourth month, on the sixth day. (See 7, above.)
4. Twelve hours in the day.
5. On the first day of the week.*
* In what two ways might /r»< and week respectively be expressed? See
5, 6, above.
§53.]
PRONOUNS — ^PERSONAL.
51
Chapter IY. PRONOUNS.
63. Personal Pronouns.
These are divided into (1) the simple substantive-pronoun, (2) the
reflexive, and (3) the adjective-personal or possessive.
The Substantive Pronouns of the first Two Persons.
N.
First person —
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
eyco, I ^/x€tj, we
Second
SINGULAR.
(TV, thou
person —
PLURAL.
vfjLels, you
G.
kixov or fxov
7]fX(oi;
(TOV or (TOV
vixcov
D.
e/uot or ixoL
rjfuv
(TOL or (TOL
VjJUV
A.
e/xe or //e
r)[ias
(ri or (T€
vixas
Accentuation. — In the singular, genitive, dative, and accusative, the
uuemphatic pronoun is enclitic. (See § 6.)
54. For the third personal pronoun, he, she, it, the New
Testament employs the three genders of the adjective-pronoun
avTOs, self (airo-j -a-).
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
M.
F.
N.
M.
F.
N.
N.
avTos
5 /
avTJ]
avTo
aVTOL
avrat
5 r
avTa
G.
avTov
avTTJ^
avrov
avTU>v
avTuiv
avTG>v
D.
avT^
avTj}
avT<2
avTols
amah
avTols
A.
avTov
avTTiv
avTo
avTovs
avTa<i
avrd
The nominative of this pronoun, when used in the personal
sense, is alw^ays emphatic.
52
PRONOUNS — REFLEXIVE AND POSSESSIVE.
[§55.
55. Reflexive Pronouns.
These are formed by the combination of the personal pronouns
■with the oblique cases of avros. In the singular, the two are
written as one word.
SINGULAR.
G. efxavTov, -7]s, of myself
D. e/zauro), -rj, to myself
A. ejxavTov, -rjvj myself (obj.J
siNeniAR.
(T€avT0Vy -rjs, of thyself
aeavT^f -rj, to thyself
aeavTov, -rjv, thyself (obj.]
The plurals of these forms are written separately. Thus, rjfiav
avToiP, of ourselves ; vfiw avTols, to yourselves, &c.
Third person (from the old stem, I-, him), of himself herself,
itself, &c. —
i
'INQVLAR.
PLURAL.
M.
F.
N.
M.
F.
N.
G.
kavTOv.
kavrfis
kavTov
€aVT(JiV
cavTutv
iavT()iv
D.
kaVT(D
kaVTTJ
kavTia
eaurots
iavraXs
iavTols
A.
kavTov
kavTTiv
iavTo
€aVTOVS
iavTOLS
CaVTCL
This reflexive pronoun is sometimes written without the e, as
avTov, avT6v, &c., and is only distinguished from the cases of avrds by
the aspirate. This must be very carefully marked.
Where there is no risk of ambiguity, this reflexive pronoun
may be used for the first and second persons likewise. Thus, iv
iavTois, " in ourselves " (Rom. viii. 23) j ttjp favruv croiTrjptav, " your
own salvation" (Phil. ii. 12.)
56. Possessive, or Adjective-personal Pronouns.
(a) These are declined precisely like adjectives of the first form,
and are as follows : —
First person, €fi6s, ffif], i^iov, my.
„ Tjixerepos, rjiierepa, ^fierepov, our.
Second person, <r6s, afj, <t6v, thy.
ff vpeTfpos, vpLiTtpa, vptTfpov, your.
§56.]
PRONOUNS — iPOSSESSTVE AND DEMONSTRATIVE.
53
(5) There is no possessive pronoun in the New Testament for
the third person singular or plural, the genitive case of avros or of
iavTov being used instead. Thus, vios eavrov, or avrov, his own son,
i.e., the son of the person who is subject of the sentence ; vios avrov,
his son, i.e., the son of another person. In Heb. i. 3, tw pfj^an t^s
dvvdixecos avrov is "by the word of His own power," i.e., that of
Christ himself; avrov, the reading of some editors, would denote
" of His power," i.e., that of God the Father. Again, 1 John iii. 3,
rT)v eXTTida eV avra, " the hope in* Him," i.e,, in Christ, not avrw,
which would have referred the hope to the subject of the sentence,
"every one."
(c) The genitive cases of tlie other personal pronouns are also
used most frequently with the force of the possessive.
57. Demonstrative Pronouns.
The chief original demonstrative was the article, already given
(§ 12), and all other demonstrative pronouns are formed upon its
model.
They are — (a) oSe, rj^e, rode, this (here).
(6) avros, avrr), rovro, this (near),
(c) eKclvos, eKeivT], eKfiuo, that (yonder),
(c?) 6 avros, rj avrrj, ro avro, the Same.
^ (a) oBe is simply the article declined with the enclitic §e.
(b) ovros is thus declined (stem, tovto-).
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
M.
F.
N.
M.
F.
N.
N.
euros
aijT-q
TOVTO
OVTOL
avTat
TavTa
G.
TOVTOV
TavTr]s
TOVTOV
TOVTCOV
TOVTCOV
TOVTCOV
D.
TOVTIO
TavTrj
TOVT(D
TOVTO iS
TavTats
TOVTOLS
A.
TOVTOV
TaVTYjV
TOVTO
TOVTOVS
TavTas
TavTa
Care must be taken to distinguish the feminine of the nomina-
tive singular and plural, avrrj, avrai, from the corresponding cases of
uvros, viz. avTT], avrai.
The preposition employed in this passage further marks this meaning.
64 PRONOUNS— DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE. [§ 57.
(c) cKeiuos is declined exactly like the article.
(d) 6 avTos in all its cases is only alros^ (§ 54), with the definite
article prefixed. The neuter plural, nominative and accusative,
is sometimes written raird, being distinguished by the coronis
over the v (§ 3 A 3), as well as by the accent, from ravra, these,
neuter plural of ovtos.
(e) The demonstrative pronouns of quality, quantity/ (number),
and degree, are declined like (6) preceding : —
Quality, TOIOVTOS, TOiaVTT], TOIOVTO, SUch.
Quantity, too-ovtos, roaavrr], ToaovTo, SO great. )
Number, too-ovtoi Toa-avTai, ToaavTa, 80 many. J
Degree^ rrfKiKovTos, rrfKiKavn], tt]\i.kovto, SO Very great.
The last-mentioned pronoun is found only in 2 Cor. i. 10 j Hob.
ii. 3; James iii. 4; Rev. xvi. 18.
58. The Relative Pronoun.
(a) The relative os, ij, o, who or which, is thus declined :-
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
M.
F.
N.
M.
F.
N.
N.
6s
v
oX
at
6.
G.
at,
rjs
od
wy
Siv
S>v
D.
io
V
oh
ah
oh
A.
6v
iiv
o{;s
h
6.
(b) The similarity between this pronoun and the ai-ticle will be
seen at once. In the nominative singular feminine and the nomi-
native plural masculine and feminine, the only difference is that tlie
article in proclitic. The stem of the relative is 6-, wliile that of tlte
article is to-.
(c) An indefinite relative, wlioever, whatever, is made by com-
bining the enclitic ns with or, i;, o. Both parts of the word are
declined, as follows : —
§58.]
PRONOUNS RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE.
55
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
M.
F.
N.
M.
F.
N.
N.
6(TTLS
TJTLS
6,Tl
OILTLV€S
aLTLV€S
(XTiva
G.
OVTLVOS
rja-TLvos
OVTIVOS
^VTlVOiV
(^VTLVCtiV
(x>VTLl'(iilf
D.
(Etlvl
fJTLVl
(^TLVL
oloTTLOrL
alaTLCTL
OLO-TLCTL
A.
OVTLVa
ijvTLva
6,Ti
ovaTLvas
ao-TLvas
ariva
The nominative and accusative neuter singular is divided as
above (sometimes J)v a space without the comuia), to distinguish
the word from the conjunction on, that.
The genitive masculine singular is sometimes written orov, used
in the New Testament only in the adverbial phrase ecus otov, as
long as, until (Matt. v. 25, &c.).
(d) Sometimes the relative is declined with the particle -irep
(marking emphatic identity), and means the very one who. Thus
(Mark xv. 6) omep rjTovvTo, the very person whom they demanded.
Other indeclinable suflGlxes are often used, e. g., Sayi (Rom. viii. 32),
wSTjiroTe (John v. 4). (See Syntax, on the Particles.) For the
relative adverb ov, consult § 129.
(e) Derivative relative pronouns are employed to express quality,
quantity, and number.
Quality, oins, such as.
Quantity, Sa-os, so great as.
2^ umber, oa-oi, plural of oo-os-, so many as.
Also the relative of degree, -qXiKos, of what a size, used only in
bwo passages (Col. ii. 1 ; James iii. 5).
59. Interrogative Pronouns.
(a) The simple interrogative is rU; tL; vyho ? or what 2 The
declension of this pronoun is identical with that of the indefinite
Tis (§ 13), except that in the interrogative the i of the stem syllable
is accented throughout, the dissyllabic forms being paroxytone.
For the adverbial interrogative form, /m^n, see § 134, c.
(6) Other interrogative forms are employed, correlative to the
9
56 PRONOUNS — INTERROGATIVE, INDEFINITE. [§ 59.
relative pronouns under § 58, e, and, like them, denoting quality,
quantity, number, and degree. They all prefix the letter ir- to the
relative forms.
Quality, Trotoy, of what kind ?
Quantity, noa-os, how great ?
Number, ttoo-oi, how many ?
Degree, nrjXUos, how great ? used in the New Tes-
tament only indirectly: Gal. vi. 11, "with what large letters"
(probably to mark emphasis) ; Heb. vii. 4.
(c) Direct interrogatives are often themselves used in the
indirect construction, as John v. 1 3, " He that was Maled knew
not who (tls) it was."
(d) The properly indirect interrogatives prefix the letter 6- to
the direct forms beginning with the letter it. ^Ottoios, of what
kind? is the only one of these employed in the New Testament.
60. Indefinite Pronouns.
(a) The ordinary indefinite pronoun tls, any, a certain, one, has
been given, § 13. The genitive and dative singular are occa-
sionally Tov, T<p, enclitic.
(6) Compounds of this pronoun ai*e ovtls, fJLrjTis, no one. For
the distinction between them, see § 134, 6, and compare under els,
§49.
(c) The old indefinite pronoun 8eiva, such a one, used with the
article, is once found (Matt. xxvi. 18).
61. Distributive Pronouns.
These are mostly declined like adjectives, and are as follows : —
(a) aWos, uWrj, «XXo, another (numerically).
Plur. aWoi, liXXai, aXXoi, Others.
(b) erepos, trepa^ erepov, other (difierent).
Plur. (Tepoi, €Tcpai, €T€pa, others.
For the force of the article with these pronouns, see Syntax.
§61.]
PRONOUNS —TABLE OF CORRELATIVES.
67
(c) dXXrjXcoVf of each other, only used in the genitive, dative, and
accusative plural.
(d) cKaa-Tos, eKaa-rr], €Ka(TTov, each, used only in the singular; with
doubtful exceptions, in Phil. ii. 4; Rev. vi. 11.
62. The number of the pronouns being so limited, it is
unnecessary to give exercises for further practice. The fore-
going forms and inflections must be very accurately com-
mitted to memory, and the distinctions between similar words
carefully marked.
The following table of correlative pronouns will be found useful
as a summary : —
Demonstra-
tive.
Relative.
Interro-
gative.
Dependent
Interro-
gative.
Inde-
finite.
Simple ....
Qualitj^ ....
Quantity
Degree ....
OVTOS
TOIOVTOS
TOaOVTOS
TrjKLKOVTOS
OS
otos
oaos
rjXUos
TLS
770 1 OS
TTocros
OTTOIOS
tttjXCkos
TLS
....
58 THE VERB — VOICE AND MOOD. [§ 63.
v^ Chapter Y. THE VERB.
63. The Yoices.
There are four principal things which verbs are employed
to predicate concerning a given subject : —
1. Its state.
2. Its action upon an object.
3. Its action upon itself.
4. The action of the object upon it.
Hence arises a fourfold division of verbs : into neuter (or intran-
sitive), active (or transitive), reflexive^ and passive.
The Greek language employs a threefold modification of
the verbal stem to express these varieties of meaning. The
modifications, or ** voices," are named as follows : —
The Active Voice, as Xvo), / loosen.
The Reflexive, or Middle Yoice, as Xvofiai, I loosen myself.
The Passive Yoice, as Xvofiai, I am loosened.
Neuter verbs borrow the Active or the Middle form, as irda-xfo,
I suffer ; ^ovkofiai, I wish.
64. The Moods.
The Greek verb has four modes, or moods ;* the Indicative,
Imperative, Subjunctive, and Infinitive.
1. The Indicative asserts absolutely, as tXvo-a t6v Sto-fjuov, I
loosened the prisoner
2. The Imperative commands, as Xv€Te t6v dea-fiioVf loosen (ye) the
prisoner!
• Compare "Handbook of the English Tongue," § 277.
§ 64.] MOODS OF THE TERB. 59
3. The Subjunctive asserts conditionally, as orav Xvarjre rov
beo-fiLov, when you have loosened the prisoner. A subjunctive
clause, it is evident, requires another to complete its meaning ;
hence the name of the mood, the " subjoined " mood. It is often
also called the " Conjunctive."
4. A division of the Subjunctive is called the Optative Mood,
because sometimes employed to express a wish, as in the frequent
phrase, jxrj yevoiro (rendered E. Y. "God forbid") may it not be !
It is really the subjunctive of the historical tenses. Thus, in the
phrase, He asks if it be so, the verb be, subjoined to the principal
tense "asks" (present), would, in Greek, be subjunctive. Be asked
if it were so, would require were to be in the optative after the
historical tense " asked " (aorist). For further detail, the Syntax
must be consulted.
5. For the Interrogative, either the Indicative or the Subjunctive
•may be employed, according to the nature of the question. (See
Syntax.)
6. The Infinitive expresses the action or state denoted by the
verb, as in itself an object of thought, as Xveiv tov deo-fxiov, to loosen
the prisoner, i.e., "the act of loosening him." The Infinitive, it is
plain, partakes of the nature of a substantive, and is often called
the verbal noun; being, moreover, employed as an uninflected
singular neuter, with the article in all its cases. (See Syntax.)
7. To the Moods must be added the Participles, which are verbal
adjectives, and agree with substantives expressed or understood,
as 6 Searfiios XvOeis, the prisoner, being loosened; 6 XeXovfievos, he who
has been washed.
As the Infinitive " partakes " the nature of the substantive, and
the Participle that of the adjective, they are sometimes both called
participials. It is, however, more common to distinguish them
by the phrase "the infinitive verb," the remaining moods being
known as " the finite verb."
Both the Infinitive and the Participles are used in different
tenses, for which see the paradigm of the Yerb.
60
TENSES OF THE VERB.
[§65.
65. The Tenses.
a. Time is present^ past, and future. In eacli, an action
may be predicated, as indefinite {i.e., having re'gard to tlie
act itself rather than to the time), imperfect {i.e., going on),
or perfect {i.e., finished). Hence nine possible tenses, of
which the Greek language has seven, as follows : —
Present time
Past time ...
Futm-e time.
Indefinite state.
(I write)
Aoriat (I wrote)
Future (I shall
write)
Imperfect state.
Present (I am writ-
ing)
Imperfect (I was
writing)
(I shall
be writing)
Perfect state.
Perfect (I have writ-
ten)
Pluperfect (I had
written)
Future -perfect* (I
shall have written)
h. More detailed exposition of these tenses, the names of which
the table gives in italics, will be found in the Syntax, where it will
also be explained how the meaning of the deficient tenses, the
Present Indefinite and the Future Imperfect, is supplied.
The Aorist {dopia-ros, indefinite) is properly an indefinite past,
but it has other uses, which will also be afterwards explained.
c. Of the above, the Present, Perfect, Future, and Future
Perfect, are called principal tenses;
Pluperfect, historical tetises.
the Imperfect, Aorist, and
The tenses are usually arranged as follows : —
1. Present, as Xu<o, / loosen.
2. Imperfect, as eXvov, I was loosening.
3. Future, as Xva-ay, I shall or vnll loosen.
4. Aorist, as eXva-a, I loosened.
* Very rare. See d, 7.
§ 65.] FORMS OF THE VERB. ' 61
5. Perfect, as XeXvKa, I have loosened.
6. Pluperfect, as (e)XeXuKfii/, I had loosened.
7. Future-perfect, found only in the passive or middle,
'KeXva-ofxaif I shall have been loosened.
Q6, Numbers and Persons.
There are in the Greek verb three persons, corresponding with
those in other languages, and three numbers, the singular, dual,
and plural, of which the dual is disused in the New Testament.
(See § 9.) Only the singular and plural, therefore, are given.
67. Conjugations.
There are two principal forms of conjugation. In the most
ancient, the first person singular, present indicative active of the
verb has the termination fit ; in the later, the termination «. The
latter being the easier, the more symmetrical, and embracing the
far larger number of verbs, is generally given first, and is called
the First Conjugation. The other is termed the Second Conjuga-
tion, or, more generally, the verb in -jii.
REMARK.
The first person singular, present indicative active, is the form of the
verb given in almost all Vocabularies and Lexicons, and is generally
explained by the English infinitive. Thus, Auto, / loosen ; more pro-
perly, / am loosening.
68. The Verbal Stem.
The chief thing necessary to be known in a verb is the s^em,
which is easily found by abstracting from any given verbal form
the adjuncts of mood and tense. Thus, a glance over the forms
of the verb " to loosen " in the preceding section will at once
disclose its stem, Xv-.
Additions to the stem are made either at its beginning or its
end. An addition at the beginning is termed augment or redupli-
62 THE VERB — AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. [§ 68.
cation ; an addition at the end, the infleocional termination. The
former belongs alike to the two conjugations ; in the latter, the
conjugations varj.
69. Augment and Reduplication.
a. The auginent characterises the historical tenses (§ 65, c) in the
indicative mood.
(1) Verbs beginning with a consonant prefix the letter €, called
the syllabic augment. Thus, from Xvw, imperfect Ikvovj aorist
2Xu(7a.
(2) Verbs beginning with a short vowel augment by lengthening
it : Or- into i]-, €- into t\- (in a few cases into €w-), i- into i-, v- into v-,
and o- into «-. This is termed the temporal augment. Verbs
beginning with the (" changeable ") diphthongs at, av, oi, are aug-
mented by changing the former vowel. Thus, at- becomes ij-, av- is
changed to tjv-, and oi- becomes «-. Sometimes, also, ev- is aug-
mented into T]v-. The other diphthongs and the long vowels are
(" unchangeable," i.e.) incapable of augment.
h. The reduplication, i.e., the repetition of the initial consonant
of the stem with €, belongs to those tenses which mark a com-
pleted action (the perfect, pluperfect, and future-perfect), and is
continued through all the moods. It takes place, in general, only
when a verb begins with a single consonant or a mute and a liquid.
Thus \i-\vKaj perf. from Xuoo ; ^-^ovXevKOj from 8ovXevo> ; yi-ypa<f)af
from
In verbs beginning with a vowel, only the Temporal Augment
is employed in these tenses, but it is continued through all the
moods. To distinguish this augment from that of the historical
tenses, it is sometimes called the improper reduplication.
c. Verbs compounded with prepositions almost invariably take
the augment or reduplication after the preposition and at the
beginning of the proper verbal stem. Thus, from ex Xvoj, to set free,
comes the Aorist i^ikvfra (e'/c changed into e^ by § 3, A, 1), and from
dTro-Xuo), to dismiss, the Aorist is dniXvaa, the o disappearing by
§ 69.] THE VERB — ITS INFLECTIOiNS. 63
elision before the augment vowel (§ 3, A, 2). The prepositions
TTcpi and 7rp6, however, do not elide their vowels ; and a few other
exceptions will be noted in their place.
70. Inflexional Terminations.
a. As a verb is distinguished by voice, mood, tense, number,
and person, five different elements will evidently concur in fixing
the termination in any given case. Thus, if the phrase. We were
being loosened, is to be translated into Greek, it will be necessary
to fix " the personal ending " of the first person plural passive, the
" tense-characteristic " of the imperfect, and the " modal vowel "
of the indicative.
6. The Personal endings are no doubt the fragments of ancient
personal pronouns, affixed to the verb ;* but the original forms are
in a great measure disused or lost. The attentive student will
observe the recurrence of -s in the second person singular, and of
-jMv, -Ti, in the first and second persons plural, throughout the
active. It will be seen, also, that in the active principal tenses
the third person plural ends in -o-i (-o-iv before an initial vowel in
the next word), and in the historical tenses in -v. In the passive
and middle, the normal forms are, for the principal tenses —
Sing., -|Jiai, -crai, -rat; Plur., -|Ji€0a, -o-Ge, -vrat; historical tenses —
Sing., -n^v, -0-0, -TO ; Plur., -|ic0a, o-Ge, -vto. The Summaries of
Terminations which follow will suggest other points of comparison.
71. Tense-characteristics.
The Tense-characteristics most important to be noticed are the
following : —
a. The Future and (First) Aorist Active have -<r-. So from the
verbal stem iricrrcv- we have the Future stem irvtrrcixr-. When
the verbal stem ends with a short vowel, it is generally lengthened
in the Future : thus, from Xv- is formed Xvo--; from Ti{ia-, TinT|<r-
(see § 3, e) ; and from StjXo-, 8T]Xw<r-.
* See Muller's "Lectures on the Science of Language," 1st ser., espe-
cially p. 272, seq.
64 THE VERB— ITS INFLECTIOKS. [§ 71.
h. The Perfect and Pluperfect Active take -k-. Thus, irwrrev-
(with the reduplication, § 69, 6), makes ircirKTrevK-. Here also
a final stem-vowel is usually lengthened ; as from rijid-, t€tihtjk->
and from 8t]Xo-, StS-qXwK-. But Xv- makes XcXvk-.
c. The Future and (First) Aorist Passive take -0-, lengthening
the vowel where lengthened in the Perfect Active. Thus, from
the verbal stems already given, irKrrcvO-, XvO-, ti|i,ti9-, StjXwO-.
d. In the Perfect and Pluperfect Middle and Passive, the
normal forms (see § 70, 6) are affixed to the verbal stem without
any connecting letter.
The successive paradigms will show how the tense-characteristics are
modified by the consonants of the verbal stem.
72. Modal Yowels.
The modal vowels will be sufficiently traced in the Summary of
Tei-minations. It will be especially noted how the Subjunctive
throughout lengthens the vowels of the Indicative, and how the
Optative abounds in diphthongal forms. In the third person
plural, it will also be seen that the Subjunctive takes the termina-
tion of the principal tenses, the Optative of the historical.
The Imperfect and Pluperfect tenses occur only in the Indi-
cative Mood ;* the Future, also, is absent from the Imperative and
Subjunctive.
^ 73. Terminations of the Several Moods and Tenses.
The following terminations are, in the simplest foim of verbs in •
-», affixed directly to the verbal stem, and will all be found exem-
plified in the conjugation of TnoTcixo. The preliminary/ study and
comparison of tlie terminations wiU much facilitate tlie acquisition
of the Verb.
* It will be seen under Syntax that the Optative Mood really is the
historical Subjunctive. Hence the Present and Perfect Optative are the
Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive. The ordinary names have, however,
been retained to prevent unnecessary diflBculty to the learner.
I
§ 73.] VERBS IN « : THEIR TERMINATIONS. 65
It will be observed that the Middle and Passive Voices are
alike in four tenses : — Present, Imperfect, Perfect, and Pluperfect.
Accentuation. — The accent of Verbs is generally thrown as far back
as possible. Observe, however, some exceptions in the following
scheme.
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense.
Active —
Sing. -«, -€is, -€i; Plur, -o|x.ev, -ere, -ov<ri(v).
Middle and Passive —
Sing, -ojJLai, -xi"^, -exat ; Plur. -ojxcOa, -c<r0€, -ovrai.
Imperfect, with Augment.
Active —
Sing, -ov, -6$, -€(v) ; Plur. -op.€v, -ere, -ov.
Middle and Passive —
Sing. -oji'HV, -ovt, -«To ; Plur. -cp.€0a, -6<r0c, -ovro.
Future (compare Present).
Active —
Sing. -<r«, -o-eis, -<rei ; Plur. -o-op.£v, -o-erc, -o-ovai(v).
Middle —
Sing, -o-ojiai, -<rr|, -orerai j Plur. -o-djieGa, -<r€o-0e, -o-ovrai.
(Firstt) Aorist, with Augment.
Active —
Sing, -o-a, -<ras, -o'€(v)j Plur. -o-a|i€V, -o-arc, -<rav.
Middle —
Sing. -(rdiiTjv, -o-a)§, -o-aro j Plur. -o-djieOa, -trau-Qi, -o-avro.
Passive —
Sing. -0T]v, -0TJS, -011 ; Plur. -0t](i.€V, -0t|T€, -0Ti<rav.
* Contraction of -eo-oj. The contraction into -et is very iinusuaL
t Contraction of -ecro.
X The consideration of the Second Aorist (and the Second Tenses gene-
rally) is deferred to §§ 85-90.
§ Contraction of -<raao.
66 VERBS IN -« : THEIR TERMINATION'S. [§ 73.
Perfect, with Reduplication.
Active —
Sing. -Ktt, -Ktts, -Ke(v) ; Plur. -Kancv, -Kare, -Kd<ri(v).
Middle and Passive —
Sing. -p.ai, -oral, -rai ; Plur. -|ic9a, -<r0€, -vrav.
Pluperfect, with Reduplication and Augment.*
Active —
Sing. -K€IV, -K€IS, -K€l ; Plur. -KCtfJieV, -K€IT€, -K€(i)<rav.
Middle and Passive —
Sing. -pTjv, -0-0, -TO ; Plur. -jJicOa, -<r6e, -vto.
Imperative Mood.
Present.
Active —
Sing. (2nd pers.) -e, (3rd pers.) -^tw ; Plur. -en, -inaa-av.f
Middle and Passive —
Sing. (2nd pers.) -ovj, (3rd pers.) -ia-Qm ; Plur. -€<r06, -ifrQatrav.
First Aorist, without Augment.
Active —
Sing. -(Tov, -o-drw ; Plur. -o-are, -o"AT«<rttv.
Middle —
Sing. -<rai, -ord<r0« j Plur. -o-acrOe, -(rdorOwo-av.
Passive —
Sing. -OtjTt, -OrJTw ; Plur. -0tjt^ -0^T«<rav.
Perfect, with Reduplication (compare Present).
Active —
Sing. -K€, -K^» ; Plur. -kctc, -K^worav.
Middle and Passive —
Sing, -o-o, -<r8« ; Plur. -a-Qt, -o-doxrav.
* Augment generally omitted in the New Testament.
t There is an alternative form in -vruv, Pass. -cOuv^ seldom used.
X Contracted from -t<ro.
§ 73.] VERBS IN -co : THEIR TERMINATIONS. 67
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
Active —
Sing. -«, -T)s, -T| ; Plur. -«p.€v, -tjt«, -«trt(v).
Middle and Passive —
Sing. -«nai, -XI, -TjTai; Plur. -(*p.€0a, -t]o-06, -wvrat.
First Acrist, without Augment (compare Present).
Active —
Sing. -<r<tf, -OTIS? -o"!! > Plur. -<r«{x,€v, -ot^tc, -<r«o-t(v).
Middle —
Sing. -o-(i)(j,ai, -ff-g, -o-qrai; Plur. -(r(o|jic6a, -o-tjo-Oe, -o-cDVTai.
Passive —
Sing. -0«, -9fjs, -6^; Plur. -0«|i6v, -Ot^rc, -0«<ri(v).
Perfect, with Reduplication (compare Present).
Active —
Sing. -K«, -KT)s, -Kxi ; Plur. -Kwiitv, -ktjtc, -K«<ri(v).
Middle and Passive — Made by Perfect Participle with Auxiliary
Verb.
Optative Mood.
Present.
Active —
Sing. -oi[jit, -ois, -01 j Plur. -oi|iev, -otrc, -oiev.
Middle and Passive —
Sing, -oiji-qv, -010, -oiTo ; Plur. -oifxcOa, -oio-0€, -oivro.
Future (compare Present).
Active —
Sing. -0-oip.t, -o-ois, -o-oi; Plur. -o-oi|i€V, -o-otre, -o-ouv.
Middle —
Sing. -<rol^'r\v, -o-oio, -o-oito ; Plur. -o-oijicOa, -o-oio-06, -coivro.
Sing. -0T]{roffti]v, -0i/io-oio, -0110-oiTo; Plur. -0ijoro{|i€0a -0T]crowr0€, -0P,croivTO.
68 VERBS IN -w : THEIR TERMINATION. [§ 73.
First Aorist, without Augment.
Active —
Sing, -o-aint, -<rais, -<rai; Plur. -<raip.€V, -<raiT€, -<raicv.*
Middle —
Sing. -(raip.T]v, -traio, -o-airo; Plur. -o-aCficOa, -<rai<r0c, -o-aivro.
Passive —
Sing. -0€tT]V, -^ci'-qs, -0€iTj ; Plur. -0€it]ji€v, -OeiriTc, -GciTjcrav.
Perfect, with Reduplication (compare Present).
Active —
Sing. -KOIJJLI, -KOIS, -KOt^ Plur. -K01[J,€V, -K01T6, -KOICV.
Middle and Passive — Perfect Participle with Auxiliary Verb.
Infinitive Mood.
Present.
Active, -6iv ; Middle and Passive, -€<r9ai.
Future.
Active, -<r€iv ; Middle, -o-co-Gai ; Passive, -0^(reo-0ai.
First Aorist, without Augment.
Active, -trai ; Middle, -a-aa-Qai ; Passive, -Oijvcu.
Perfect, with Reduplication.
Active, -K^vai ; Middle and Passim, -<r6ai.
Participles.
Present.
Active, -wv (stem, -ovt-, see § 37); f. -ovo-a ; n. -ov. Middle and
Passive, -<J|ji€vos, -o|jt^vTj, -6y^ov (see § 34).
Future.
Active, -<ra)v, -o-ovcrtt, -<rov ; Middle, -crof4«vos, -o-ojjl^vti, -<r<J|ji<vov ;
Passive, -0T]<r<J(wvos, -^a-o^ivr\, dT)(rop,€vov.
First Aorist, without Augment.
Active, -o-tts ^stem, -o-avr-, see § 37), -<ra<ra,, -<rav ; Middle, -ord|icvo«,
-vaj^^, -<rd|i6vov ; Passive, -0«(« (stem, -0€vt-, see § 37), -Otto-a, -0^v.
♦ The termination -fiav (.^Eolic), for third person plural, is found twice in
the New Testament (Luke vi. 11 ; Acts xvii 27).
§ 73.] VERBS IN « : TTto-revo). 69
Perfect, with Reduplication.
Active, K<as (stem, -for-, see § 38), -Kvla, -kos ; Middle and
Passive, -nc'vos, -p-evT], -jx^vov.
The Verbal Adjectives.
Many verbs have, ia addition to their passive participles, a kind
of participial adjective, to signify capability or duty. The former
is generally expressed by the termination -tos, -ttJ, -rdv, appended to
the verbal stem ; the latter by the^ termination -Wos, -rea, -tcov.
Thus, from \v- may be formed \vt6s, capable of being loosened;
XvTeos, that ought to be loosened.
(/" 74. Paradigm of the First Conjugation,
OR OF "the YeRB in -»."
The verb niaTevco has been chosen as a model, because it is a
characteristic word of the New Testament, and because all its
forms contain the unaltered stem. The verb ^ovXeixo, to' advise,
employed by KUhner and others, only occurs in the New Testa-
ment in the middle voice ; and Xvcd, to loosen, chosen by Professor
Curtius and Principal Greenwood, though easy to conjugate, has
the disadvantage of having the stem long in some forms, and short
in others, although unaltered to the eye.
Stem, TTLCTTev-y to believe or trust ; Mid., to trust one's sclj
or to confide; Pass., to be entrusted.
a. Principal parts.
Present Indicative Active, Tna-Tevco
Future „ „ TnaTevaco
Perfect „ „ TT^iTLa-TevKa
Perfect Indicative, Mid. and Pass., 'n^nLcrr^vixai
(First) Aorist Indicative Passive, kitiaT^vQrjv
To know these five parts thoroughly, with the addition, in many
verbs, of the Second Aorist (§§ 86-88), is to know the verr
70
THE VERB IN -« : ACTIVE VOICE.
[§74.
Active Voice.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. / am helievmg.
SINGULAR
7n(TT€V(t)
7r(.(TT€V€L
PLURAL.
'7TL(rTeV0IJi€V
irL(TT€V€T€
TTLOrTCVOVCrLly)
Imperfect. I was believing.
PLURAL.
^TTLorevofiev
€1TLaT€V0V
I shall or ivill believe.
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
iiTLaTevov
eTTtcrreves
€TrC{TT€Ve(v)
Future.
SINGULAR.
TTLaTevarcD
TTio-rewet?
TTLcrTevaeL
Aorist (First Aorist*]
SINGULAR.
€TTLarT€V(ra
iirCo-T^vaas
€TtC(TT€V(T€{v)
TTLa-Teva-oixev
TTLaTevaere
7naT€V(T0V(TL(v)
PLURAL.
€1TLaT€VCrdlX€V
iTnaT€V(TdT€
Marevorav
Perfect. I have believed.
SING ULA R. PL URAL.
TTCTiCarevKa TTeTnar^vKdixev
7T€TTLaT€VKas ireiTiaTevKUTe
7re7rto-TevKe(r) ireTTicrTevKdcn^j;)
Pluperfect. / had believed.
SINGULAR.
iTreTTLO-TeVKCLV
CTreTrtoTcvKci
PLURAL.
iTT€1TLaT€VK€LIJ.€V
iTT^TnaTevKeiTc
• See§
§74.J
THE VERB IN -w : ACTIVE VOICE.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. Believe (continuously).
PLURAL.
-TTto-revere
Tn(rT€vhaiorav
SINGULAR.
2nd pers. Trto-reue
3rd pers. TrtoreueVto
Aorist. Believe (at once).
SINGULAR.
TTLCTTevcrov
TTLorT^va-droi
PLURAL.
TTto-reware
TTto-revo-droxraz'
Perfect. ITave believed («.<?., remain so).
SINGULAR.
ireiTLarTeuKc
7r€7TL(rTeVK^T(0
PLURAL.
ircina-TevKeTe
TreTrtoref Ker (0 ai'
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. I may believe,
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
TTLOTeVTjS '7TL(TT€Vr]T€
Aorist. / may believe, or shall have believed.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
TTL(TTeV(T(0 7:LCrTeV<T(DfX€V
TTiaT^vcrr]^ 7n(TT€vcn]T€
TTLCTTevaT} J 7n(rT(V(Ta>(TL(v)
Perfect. / may have believed.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
TreTTtore^/cr/re
TreTTtoTevKO) 0-1(2;)
r^
THE VERB IN -« : ACTIVE VOICE.
[% 74.
OPTATIVE MOOD.
{Or, Stbbjunctive of the Historical Tenses.)
Present (or Imperfect). I might believe.
SINGULAR,
TTLO-TeVOLfJLL
7ri(JT€VOt5
TTLcrrevoL
Future.
SINGULAR.
'KLOre'VO'OLflL
71 LOT €"6(7015
TTtorrewot
PLURAL.
in(TT€VOllJL€V
TTLO-TeVOLTC
TILO-T^VOUV
I should believe.
PLURAL.
'nL(TT€VaOLfJL€V
ina-TivaoLTe
'nL(TT€V(rOL€V
Aorist.
SINGULAR.
TTiaTeva-aLixL
TTLorevaaLS
7naTev<TaL
Perfect (or Pluperfect)
SINGULAR. I
TTiTTLO-TeVKOLlJiL
TTCTlLareVKOLS
TTCTTLareVKOL
I might or am to believe.
PLURAL.
inaTevaaLfjLcv
TTLaTcvcraLTe
TTtore water or €iav
I might have believed.
PLURAL.
TT€TlL(Tr€VKOLtX€V
7T€Tncrr€VK0LT€
Tr€TII,aT€VKOL€V
INFINITIVE.
Present, Tna-TeveLv, to believe.
Future, TrioreweiiJ, to be about to believe.
Aorist, TTiarevaai, to believe immediately.
Perfect, TrcTrtorcvKei'ai, to have believed.
PARTICIPLES.
Present nora., ' Triarcvcoi/, TiKmvova-a, Trioretur, believing ;
stem irwrT€vovT-.
Future nom., Trtorcvo-ajr, Trtarcvo-ovcra, TricrTtt^oor, about to
believe ; stem irwrrcvo-ovr-.
§74.]
THE VERB IX -« : MIDDLE AND PASSIVE.
73
Aorist nom., ino-Tevaas, incTTevo-dcra, TTLar^virav, having
believed; stem irwrTcvo-avr-.
Perfect nom., TreiTLcrTevK^s, ireT^La-TevKvla, ireTna-r^vKos, having
now believed; stem ireiriorreuKOT-.
Middle and Passive Voices— Forms common to both.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. I am confiding {trusting myself),
or am being entrusted*
SINGULAR.
TTLCFTeVOIXaL
7TLaT€Vrj
PLURAL.
7:iTT€V€a-d€
Tiia-TevovTai
Imperfect. / teas confiding, or was being entrusted.
SINGULAR.
iiTLcrreijov
PLURAL.
€7n(rT€v6fX€6a
iiTLa-TevovTo
Perfect. / have confided, or have been entrusted.
SINGULAR.
TreTTto-reuo-ai
TTeTTLarevTaL
PLURAL.
7r€TTL(TT€VlJLeOa
7T€TTC(TT€Vad€
TT^TTiaTeVVTaL
Pluperfect. I had confided, or had been entrusted,
SINGULAR.
€7T€TTL(TTeVT0
PLURAL.
iTTCTTLO-T^VfJieOa
eTrCTTLO-TeVVTO
* The collocation am being is doubtlessly inelegant ; but the true force of
the tense could be given in no other way. The Greek language has no
present indefinite.
JA THE VERB IN -to : MIDDLE AND PASSIVE.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present. Cottfide, or be thou entrusted,
SItfGULAR.
2nd pers. inaTevov
3rd pers. Trtoreuea-^o)
L§ 74.
PLURAL.
7TLa-T€v4a-6(aa-av or -icrOoiV
Perfect. JSar^ confided, or Aai'6 6^e/j entrusted (i.e., remain soj.
SINGULAR.
TTeiTLcrT^va-o
T.^TTLO-T^VaO
CO
PLURAL.
7re7rtoT€V(r^Q)o-az; or -a-Ouiv
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present. I may confide^ or he entrusted,
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
TTiorevcojuat
TTLG-TevyjTaL
TTL(TT€Vr](T0€
TTLOTeVCOVTaL
Perfect. / maf/ have confidedy or have been entrusted.
SINGULAR.
TTCTTLOTeVfJiivOS Oi*
TTCTnarevyiivos ys
TreTTtoreujueVo? fi
PLURAL.
1T€TTL(TT€Vll^V0l (OfXClf
tut: Lcmvyiivoi -qrc
'iT€TrL(TT€Vjji.ivoi a>cri(i')
OPTATIVE MOOD.
(07% Subjunctive of tlie Historical Tenses.)
Present. / might confide, or be entrusted,
PLURAL.
TTLaT€VOLIJ.€0a
SINGULAR.
TL<TT€VOLIJLr]V
t:l<tt€voio
TTLO^TeVOiTO
7TL(Tr€V0Lard€
Tna-Tfvoii'To
* These forms are made by the perfect participle, with the substantive
verb •' ^0 6e" as an auxiliary.
§"4.]
THE VERB IN
: MIDDLE AND PASSIVE.
Perfect. / might have confided^ or been entrusted.
SINGULAR.
TreTTtareu/xeVos €.'Lr]V
'TTeTTLarevfJiivos etr/s
TTeTTLCTTeV^ivOS €LTJ
PLURAL.
TTeTTLOTCVfJiivOl dl1T€
TTe-nKTTCVlJ.ivOi ^LTjcrav
INFINITIVE.
Present, irLa-revea-Oai, to confide, or be entrusted.
Perfect, n^.-nidT^vo-dai, to have confided^ or have been entrusted.
PARTICIPLES.
Present, ino-Tevofjievos, TTLcrrevofJievr}, TTKrrevofJLCVov, confiding,
or being entrusted.
Perfect, TreTrtorev/xeyoy, TreinaTevixivr], TreTrtoreu/xeVor, having
confided, or having been entrusted.
Forms peculiar to the Middle.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Future Tense. I shall or will confide.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
'nKTTevaoiiai TTLarcvcrofieOa.
TTLo-Teva-eTai irLaTcvaovraL
(First) Aorist. I confided.
SINGULAR.
iTTLOTevcrai
iina-TevcraTO
PLURAL.
€Tn(TT€V(TdfJL€da
€TTL(TT€V(Ta(r6€
einarTevcravTO
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Aorist. Confide (at once).
SINGULAR.
2nd pers. Trtorevcrat
3rd pers. TTLarevcraado)
PLURAL.
'7TL(TT€V(rdo'6(0(Tav or -daOaav
76
THE VERB IN -co: MIDDLE.
[§74.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Aorist. / may confide, or shall have confided.
SINGULAR.
7n(rT€V(rr}
PLURAL.
7naT€V(T(afX€da
TnaTevcrrjcrde
inaTevaoiVTaL
OPTATIVE MOOD,
(Or, Suhjutictive of the Historical Tenses.)
Future. / should confide.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
'nL(7T€V<T0LlJLr]V 7ncrT€V(TOLlX€6a
TnaTevaoLo ina'TevaoLade
TTtorewoiro TTtorewotin-o
Aorist. / mighty or am to confide,
SINGULAR.
TTKTTevcraLiirjv
TTtcrret/o-ato
TTLOTevcraLTO
PLURAL.
'T:iaT€V(Taiji^6a
Tn(TT€VCraL(TO€
TTLo-Teva-aLVTO
INFINITIVE.
Future, irLcrrevo-ea-Oai, to be ahout to confide.
Aorist, Tnareva-acrdaL, to confide immediately.
PARTICIPLES.
Future, Trtcrreua-ojuei'oj, TTia-Tevaofxivr}, Tnarrevcroixevov, ahout to
confide.
Aorist, TTLo-Teva-dfxevos, Tna-Teva-afxivr], inaTeva-cnievov, having
confided.
Forms peculiar to the Passive.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
(First) Future Tense. / shall be entrusted.
PLURAL.
TTLaTevOyjiTO^eOa
SINGULAR.
TTLO-TCVdrjCTOfXaL
TTKTTevdricrr)
7rtoTct;0r/o-€TOi
'ITLaT€v6ri(r€(Td€
TTtorev^^crovTat
§74.]
THE VERB IN
PASSIVE.
77
(First) Aorist. / was entrusted.
SINGULAR.
€7TL(TTev6r}S
€77iaT€v6ri
PLURAL.
€TTL(TT€vdr]fJL€V
€7naTev6r}T€
iirLa-Tevd-qorav
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Aorist. Be thou entrusted (at once).
SINGULAR. I PLURAL.
2ii(i pers. Tno-TevOrjTL
3rd pers. Trtorev^^ra)
TTLcrTevd-qre
'lTl(TT€vd'qT(0(TaV
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Aorist. I may he, or shall have been entrusted.
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
TTKTTevOcd
Trta-TevOfjs
Tn(rT€v6(bfX€V
TTLo-T^vdrJTe
'TTi(rT€v6(acrL(v]
OPTATIVE MOOD.
Future. / should he entrusted.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
TT.aT€vf^r](T0LiJi7]V 'ni(TTev6r](Toi\x€Qa
'KicmvOricroio TnajevOiqcTOKTOe
7naT€v6^G-OLTO 7naT€v6r)(TOlVTO
Aorist. / might he, or am to he entrusted.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
TTLarrevdeirjV TTL<JT€v6€LrjlX€V
7TL(TT€v6€Lr]9 '7:iCrT€vd€Lr]T€
TTLCTTevOeir] inaTevOelev
INFINITIVE.
Future, TLCTTevOjja-^a-OaL, to he ahout to he entrusted.
Aorist, 'ni(TT€vBrivaiy to he entrusted immediately.
78 THE VERB IN -w : EXERCISE. [§ 74.
PARTICIPLES.
Future, 'iTLaT€v07]a6iJL€voSy -r], -ov, about to he entrusted.
Aorist, TTLorevdiLs, -dcra, -iv, having been entrusted; stem,
irwrrevOcvT-.
VERBAL ADJECTIVE.
TTtoTei'To?, -r?!, 'ToVf capable of entrusting , or of being entrusted;
TTLorevTios, -ria, -riov, that ought to be entrusted,
75. The learner who has thoroughly mastered the different
forms of TTiorevo) now given, is ready to encounter with com-
parative ease the manifold variations of verhs in «. First,
however, let the following Exercises be written : —
Exercise 9.— On Pure Uncontracted Verbs.
1. Write out the whole of the regular verb jSouXevco : active,
to advise; middle, to deliberate, to advise oneself; passive, to be
advised.
2. [Vocabidary of Verbs selected from the ^^ Sermon on the
Mount^'—aKoiKOf to hear ; BovXevcc, to serve ; Xva>, to loosen (com-
pound derivatives, diroXva, to put away ; icaraXvco, to abrogate) ;
trrjoTfva), to/dst ; 7rpo(f>rjT€va), to prophesy ; (f>ov€va), to murder.^
Analyse and translate the following forms : — bovXeveiv, KaraXvo-aiy
Xvajj, r}Kov(TaT€, <f)ov€v(r€iSf (f)ovevcr7j, aTroXvcrrj, aTroXeXvfiemjv, vrjcmxrqTt^
vrjarevovresj 7rpo«f)r]Tcvaafifv.
Also the following : — KareXvdr}, dwokeXvraif vrjoTcva-ov, 7rf<f)ovfVKa<nv,
\c\vKevai, KaTa\(XvKO)i, vrja-Tcvao), 7rpo(f)T]TfV(rov, 7rpo(f)r]T€vovcrai, irpo-
(f)r]Tevi]T€, df8ovX€vKapcv, dovXevovres, edovXcva-eVf dovXeveTaa-av, airoXv-
6evT€s, aTroXeXva-BcUj diriXvovro.
76. The verbs in the foregoing Exercise, as well as the
conjugated verb inarevui, are all distinguished by a voicel
stem-ending, which, in the great majority of cases, is the
letter v in a diphthongal or simple form. They are, there-
fore, called pure verbs ; and inasmuch as the stem appears
throughout without contraction or alteration, they are further
termed uncontracted.
§ 76.] PURE VERBS IN -«. 79
To the class of pure uncontracted verbs belong most with the
stem-ending v or i, but no others. It is, therefore, necessary to see
how the verbal terminations are to be adapted to other kinds of
stem ; and to do this thoroughly in the case of all regular verbs,
little else is needed than the remembrance and application of the
elementary laws of euphony, as stated in § -4.
It must be noted by the learner that, when the terminations of the
voices, moods, and tenses are once known, and a very few simple
general rules of conjugation impressed on the memory, the acquisition
of all the multifarious "classes" and "species" of verbs in-w is a matter
of euphony, and nothing else.
77. Let us take the possible verbal stem-endings according
to the alphabet. It will appear that the stem may terminate
(1) in a vowel or (2) in a consonant ; and that the consonant
may be (1) a mute, (2) a liquid, or (3) a double letter. The
last may be rejected from the account, as no verbal stems, in
fact, do so terminate. "We have, then, three main divisions :
the 7;Mre verbs, the mute, and the liquid,
78. Pure Yerbs. — Special Hules.
a. A verbal stem may end in a, €, i, o, or v ; i.e., in any short
vowel. Those in i and v, the uncontracted, have been considered
already.
h. From the rules and tables given under § 3,y, and the partial
illustrations of them seen in the nouns and adjectives, it has been
seen that when a, €, or o, precedes a vowel, long or short, it is
generally contracted with it into one syllable. Hence, verbal
stems ending in these vowels form a second class of pure verbs —
viz., the contracted.
c. As, however, it appears from the paradigm that the last letter
of the stem precedes a vowel only in the Present and Imperfect
tenses, it follows that the contraction will be confined to these
parts of the verb, and that there will be no deviation in other
parts from the general form of Triarevco.
80
CONTRACTED VERBS IN -«.
[§78.
d. For the Table of Contractions, see § 3,y! Note especially that
with -ov the stem-vowel a- makes a-, while c- and o- disappear
before the diphthong. In the Infinitive, also, the combination
-o€iv becomes -ow.
79. The following paradigms will now present no dlffi«
cultj : —
1. A-stem, rt/icio), to honour.
2. E-stem, (JiLXeco, to love.
3. O-stern, drjXoco, to Tnani/est.
Stem, rl/xa-
(jnXe-
S7)X0'
Active.
Indicative— Present.
~<a
rtjuo)
^tAw
St^Ao)
-€IS
TLfMqs
<^tAets
brjXoh
-€l
rifxa
</)tAet
brjXoL
-0|1€V
TLfJi&fieV
(pLX0V[JL€V
brjXovfjLCV
-€T6
TLfXCLTe
(f)iX€iTe
b7}X0VT€
-ovo-t(v)
TLfX(OCn(v)
(f)LXovaL(v)
Imperfect.
br]Xovcn(v)
1- . . -ov
htlJLCiiV
€(I)lXovv
cbrjXovv
-€S
ertjLias
e^tAets
ibrjXovs
-€
€TLfXa
e(/)tAet
ib^Xov
-ojtev
iTLlJ.(OfJi€V
e(/)iAo{5fxei;
ibrjXovfiev
-€T€
€TLlXaT€
€(pLX€lT€
€br}XovT€
-OV
kriyiOiv
i(j)LXovv
Imperative — Present.
ibrjXovv
-€
rt/xa
c^tAct
brjXov
4r»
TLfXaTO)
(^tActro)
brjXovTO)
-€T€
TLfiare
</)tActre
briXovTe
-^Two-av
7ijuar£0(raj'
(^lAc^rcoo-ai^
br]XoijT(Dcrav
I 79.]
CONTRACTED VERBS IN -a : ACTIVE.
81
Stem, Tiixa-
(jnXe-
StjXo'
i
Subjunctive — Present
-«
rtjuw
® ^tAw
PnVo
-US
TL^ias
1 <|>tA?]s
Sr/Aots
-11
Tiiia
1 </)iAfi
5r;Aot
-«p.€V
TLfJiWfJLiV
d. (f)L\(iilJL€V
SrjAwjuep
-7]T€
TLfJLCLTe '
"^ (()L\t]T€
Sr^Awre
-w<ri(v
TLjxSxTL^v)
;:^ (f)L\(0(TL{v)
Optative— Present.
5r;Aa)(ri(i;)
-OljAl
TLfji^fjiL or
-wrji' ^lAoi/xt or -01J71'
6r;Aot/x6 or ~0i7]v*
-ois
Tijucps or •
-wr;s </)tAots or -otrys
Sr^Aot? or -ot?;?
-01
TLfX(£> or -
j)»7 (piKol or -otT]
St^Aoi or -0677
-Ol[l.€V
rijuwjucy or (Pl\oIijl€v or
SryAotjutez; or
-<j)ry/x€i'
-OLr]fl€V
-otr^/xei;
-OITC
TtfjLioTe or
-(or]T€ ^lAotre or -oLTjre
Sr^Aotre or -oir\T€
-oiev
rt/xwei'
Infin iti ve — Present.
br}koUv
-€IV
rfjuav
Participle — Present.
hrjXovv
-ov
rijuwi'
(^iAwy
hrjKcjv
f. -ov<ra
ri/x6)cra
^tXoutra
btjXovaa
n. -ov
Tf/XWI^
Middle and Passive.
Indicative — Present.
hi]Xovp
-Ofittl
rt/xw/xat
(jyiXovfjiaL
br]Xovfxai
-U, -ct
7t/za
\ \ </>t\^> -et
brjXoL
-erai
rtuSrat
\ . \(f)L\dTaL
br]XovraL
.($p.€ea
Tt/xw/xe^a
\ ^^iXovjjLeOa
brjXovfxeOa
-€<r0€
Tifiaa-Oe
<^tAeto-^fc-
br]Xov(rd€
-ovrai
TLfJ.S>VTaL
(^tAoui^rat
b-qXovvrai.
* The latter are the more usual terminations.
82 (
CONTRACTED
VERBS — MIDDLE AND
PAssi^^. [g 79.
Stem,
rlfxa-
^t'Ae-
597X0-
Indicative— Imperfect.
i- . . -<JftT]v
iTLfJL(a[xr}v
i(f)LXovfJLr]V
chrjXovfxrjv
-ov
erijuw
€(pL\0V
ibr]\ov
-€T0
iTLjlCLTO
€(})Lk€'LTO
ibr)\ovro
-dftcGa
€TLIJL(a[X€$a
i(f)L\ov^€6a
ibrjXovfxeOa
-€<r0e
iTL[xaa6€
€(f)L\€Xa6€
€br]\ovad€
-OVTO
€TLfMS>VTO
€(pL\0VVT0
ibrjkovvTO
Imperati VE — Present.
-ov
TLfJiQ
(f)lX0V
br}kov
-€'0-00)
TLiiacrOui
(})L\€L(rdoi
br]\ov(r6(a
-6o-0e
TLfjiaa-Oe
<5f)iXeto-0e
brjXova-dc
-€o-0ft)o-av
TLixaaObicrav
(^iXucrOina-av
brjXova-dcticray
or -^o-0«v
TLjida-Ocov
<l)LKdard(av
br]Xov(rd(av
Subjunctive — Present
-cDp,ai
TLfX&fJiaL ^
(jyiXSifxai,
bi]X(aixaL
-Tl
Tifxa 1
(})LXfi
brjXoL
-■qTai
Tifxarai "^
(f)L\7JTaL
brjXcaraL
-<«)|X€0a
TLIJi(DlJL€6a 2
(f)iXcofjL€da
brjXdyfJLcOa
-TlO-06
riixacrd^ ^
(\)ikriG6€
br]X(a(Td€
-wvTai
TLIX(j)VTaL \^
(
(piXSiVTat
Dptative — Present.
br]X(avTaL
-O^fiTlV
TLfJiiSlxrjV
(f)i\oLfj.r)v
briXoCfJLrji'
-010
rijuwo
(J)l\olo
brjXolo
-OITO
ri/xwro
</)tXotro
bTjXolTO
-oip,€0a
ri/x(pjue^a
^tXot/Jte^a
brjXoLiJieOa
-oio-0e
n/xojo-^€
(j)L\ol(r6€
brjXo'iadi
-OtVTO
rtfxwiTO
(jyikou'TO
brjXolvTO
Infinitive — Present
-€O-0au
TLfxaa-Oai
(j)t,\€'LCT dai
br)\ov(rd ai
§ 79.] CONTRACTED VERBS.
Stem, TTfia- (fuXe-
SrjXo-
83
m. .<Jft€vos
n. -<Jp.€vov
TLfXCafXEVOS
TLfJicaixivr]
Participle.
(PlXovjjlcvos
(l)Lk0Vll€V0V
br}\0VfJL€V09
br]\oviX€vr]
br]\ovfJL€VOV
80. Note on the Remaining Tenses.
Tliese are regularly formed. The lengthening of the vowel
before the future, aorist, and perfect tense-endings must be
marked.
Principal tenses
of Tifiao),
of (j)i\ecd,
of drjXoo) —
Present active
TlflQ)
(f>i\S>
5j/Xa>
Future active
TifiTjaroi
(j>i\r)cra>
drjXoicrco
Perfect active
TerifirfKn
7r€(f)i\r]Ka
BedrjXoDKa
1st Aor. passive
CTififjBrju
e(f>i\rjdT)v
€8r]Xa>dr]v
Perf , mid., and pass.
TCTlfJiTJIial
ire(f)i\T]fjiat
dedrjXiOfxai
Exercise 10.— On pure Contracted Verbs.
[Vocabulary/ of Verbs, selected from the " Seriiion on the Mount."
— ayaTrao), to love ; alTeo), to ask ; bi^doi, to thirst ; dedofiai, to behold
(dep.*); BefxfXioco, to found; C^riw, to seek; /xerpeo), to measure;
/xicreo), to hate ; otKoSo/xeo), to build ; 6fxoi6<o, to liken ; 7reii/ua>, to
hunger ; Troie'o), to do, make.]
Analyse and translate the following words : — neivavres, diyJAcovres,
TTOiel, dya7rT]aeis, fxtcrrjaeis, dyanTjo-Tjre, dyaTravras, TTOirjcrai, TToiovcrt, iroiUTe,
TToieiv, deadrjvai, ttoitjs, alrria-ai, Cv^elre, fierpeire, alTrja-j], aiTovaiv (dat.
jylur.^, TTOLcocnVy TTOiovp, ofioioxrco, wKodofiTjae, redeixeXiaro, ofioicodrjaerai.
Also the following : — 6ed(raa6ai, reOeaTai, rjydTrrjaev, dyuTra, TjyaTrrj-
fi€VT]v, dyairdp, aWflcrde, tJtovpto, rJTrjfTavTO, alrcoficp, e^rjrovv, (r]Ta)P, ^rjTelTco,
e'^^relro, 6/ioia)^i;/Lifj/, iireipaara (see § 96, a), ndPa, fSiyj/rjo-a, dL-yf/a.
* Deponent, i.e., middle form with active meaning: an active form not
being used. See § 100.
84 mute verbs their conjugation. [§ 81.
7*^ 81. Mute Yerbs. — Special Eules.
Tiie large class of mute verbs conies next in order — i.e., verbs
whose stem-ending (or "characteristic") is either a labial, ir, p, <|) ;
a guttural, ^, y,\] or a dental, t, 8, 9. It will be convenient to
retain the names of (§ 4, 6) ju>- sounds (labials), ^-sounds (gut-
turals), and ^-sounds (dentals). The cross-division, into sJuirp^Jlatj
and aspirate, must also be remembered.
82. Whenever, in the conjugation of a verb, the stem is
followed immediately by a vowel, the mute stem-ending is
unaffected. In the Present and Imperfect tenses, therefore,
the mute verb precisely resembles TTiorevo).
83. a. Many tense forms, however, begin with a conso-
nant : as those of the Future and First Aorist with -o--, that of
the Perfect with -k-, that of the First Aorist passive with -0- ;
while in the different parts of the Perfect middle and
passive, there occur four several consonants immediately fol-
lowing the stem, the terminations being -iiai, -<rai, -rat, -|Ji€0a,
-o-Oe, -vrai. So with the Pluperfect.
h. The rules, therefore, in § 4, d, will be applied to modify the
mute stem-endings.
(1) Thus, with -OP (Fut. act, Fii-st Aorist act. and mid., Perf.
mid. and pass., second person sing., and imper.) —
IT-, P", <|)-, become t|f.
K-, 7-, X-, » i-
T-, 8-, 0-, disappear.
(2) Before -0 (pass. Fut. and First Aor.) —
IT- and p- become <|>.
K- and 7- „ X-
T-, 8-, 0-, „ 0-.
(3) Before -t (mid. and pass., Perf. ind., third pei-son sing.)—
ir-, p-, «^-, become ir
•«-, 7-, X-, „ •«•
T-, 8-, 0-, „ <r.
[§ 83. MUTE VERBS — THEIR CONJUGATION. 85
(4) Before -p. (mid. and pass., Perf., first person sing, and plur., •
and Perf. participle —
ir-, p-, «j>-, become p..
«-> 7-, Xtj » 7.
T-, 8-, e-, „ <r.
(5) Terminations commencing with -o-9 droj) the <r after a
consonant : the remaining affecting the mute according to rule.
Thus, from rpip-, re-Tpt^-ade (mid. and pass., Perf. ind., second
person plur.) becomes first Te-rpi^-de, then TerpicfiOc.
(6) The combination -vt in the terminations of the middle and
passive Perfect (-vrai) and Pluperfect (vto) is impracticable after
a consonant. Hence the form is dropped altogether, and the per-
fect Participle, with the substantive verb, put in its stead, as in
the Perf., subj., and opt. Thus rplp- would regularly give the
combination (3rd pers. plur., Perf., mid. and pas.) rc-rpi/S-j/rai,
which cannot be dealt with by any of the foregoing laws.* The
compound form rerpippeuoi €l(n{v) is therefoi e employed. »
(7) There only remains the -k- of the Perfect active. Before
this letter the dentals t-, 8-, 0-, are dropped. Thus, iri- Trei^- ku
becomes neneiKa. But when the stem-ending is a labial or a
guttural, the k is treated as an aspirate or hard breathing, the
mute being changed into its corresponding aspirate, and k
disappearing. So ay<o gives ^x^ ^^^ rjy-Ka = rjy-aj and rpl^oi gives
re-Tpl-cpa, from re-rpi^-Ka = Ti-rpL^-a.
^ 84. Paradigms of the Mute Verbs.
a. To facilitate comparison, all the tenses are given. It has
not, however, been thought necessary to go through all the
numbers and persons, excepting in the Perf, raid, and pass.
h. It will be seen that the sharp labial, the flat guttural, and the
aspirate dental have been selected. No difficulty will be found in
applying the laws of inflection to mutes of the kindred classes.
* In the older Greek writers, the v is sometimes replaced by the aspirate a.
Thus the word would become Terpf^aToi j but this usage is not confined to
mute verbs or to the Perfect tense.
86
MUTE VERBS ACTIVE.
[§84.
c. The verb aya, beginning with a vowel, takes the temporal
augment instead of the reduplication in the perfect tenses. See
§ 69, b.
LABIAL. GUTTURAL. DENTAL.
j9-sounds. A-sounds. ^-sounds.
Stem, rplfi- ay- ttclO'
Active.
INDICATIVE.
Present, -«
rpt)3a), I rub
ay(o, I lead
iT€C6(o, Ijjersuade
Tniperf. 1- . . -ov
hpi^ov
Tjyov
in^idov
Future, -cr«
TpCy\roi
5fa>
TretVoj
1st Aor. I-. .-<rtt
hpiyj/a
V^o,
CTretcra
Perf. redup. -d*
rirpLc^a
TJXa
TTCTTCtKa
PI up. redup. -€tv
{€)T€TpL(p€iV
7/Xetr
(e)7r€7retK6ti/
IMPERATIVE.
Present, -€
rptySe
aye
TTCt^e
1st Aor. -orov
Tplyj/ov
a^ov
Tl^ZcTOV
Perf. redup. 4
T^TpLCpe
VX^
TTCTretKe
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present, «
Tpi^Oi)
ayo)
77ei^<0
lat Aorist, -o-w
TpC\l/ai
&$a>
ireiVa)
Perf. redup. -w
T€TpC(f>CO
7/xa)
TreTretKu)
OPTATIVE.
Present, -otjit
TpC^OLfJiL
ayot/xt
TTcCdoLfU
Future, -<roi}Jii
TpCyj/oipLi
a^OLjXL
ireCaoLpLL
1st Aor. -o-ai|it
TpLyj/aLflL
^fat/xt
T€i(TaL[lL
Perf redup. -oljjit
T€TpL<PoLpH,
iJXOLfH.
ir€7r€LK0LyLL
INFINITIVE.
Present, -etv
TpC^CLV
&y€iv
ire CO € IV
Future, -«rciv
TpL\j/€LV
afcii^
Ttiicr^iv
1st Aor. -<rai
TpL\j/aL
&$aL
7ret(rat
Perfect, -Ivat
T€TpL(f)€Vai.
rix^vai
TreTretKtWi
In labials and gutturals. (See § 83, 6, 7.)
§ 84.] MUTE VERBS — ACTIVE, MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 87
Stem, rpllS' ay- TretO-
PARTICIPLES.
Present, -wv
TpC^oav
ayoiv
ireiOoov
Future, -o-«v
Tpi\lf(iiV
a$o)V
TTcto-coi;
1st Aor. -o-as
TpLKJ/aS
^fa?
TTetVaj
Perf. redap. -ws
T€Tp'L(pU)S
?ixco9
ireiTeLKca^
Middle and Passive.
INDICATIVE.
Present, -ojAat
Tpi^op.ai
ayopui
TTeCOoiiai
Imperf. c. .djiT]v
€Tpi^6p,y}v
i)y6ii7]v
€7:€L66piT]V
r-}xat
TiTptfifxai
rjyixai
7reTT€L(TpLaL
-crax.
Terpiy^rai
ijiac
•TreTretcrat
Perf.
-Tat
reVptTrrat
iJKTat
ireTT^taTaL
redup.
-fJieea
TerpifxixeOa
Tjyix^da
TT€T:€C(T}X^da
-(<r)0e
Tirpicfyde
^X^€
TreTTeicr^e
^-(vTai)
T€rpLfX}livOL
7]yixivoid(n{v)
TTc-n-eio-jueVot
€L(Tl(v)
€l(ri{v)
r-Rv
{^)T€rpiix}xr]V
i]yix7]V
(e)7re7reicr/oi?7i/
-o-o
{k)TiTpiy\;o
rj^o
{k)i:ii:ei(TO
Plup. (e)
-TO
(e)TeTpi7rT0
IjKTO
(k)lTllT€l(JTO
redup.
-|Ji€6a
[k)TeTpiiiii^Qa
ijyjjLeOa
(€)7r€7f€icrpL€6a
-(o-)06
{€)TiTpi(l)6€
rixde
{k)T:iiTei(T&€
I-(VTO)
TeTOLjJLlXeVOL
7jyiJL€V0L -^crav
TTe-etcrixii'OL
i](rav
ria-av
IMPERATIVE.
Present, ~ov
rpilBov
ayov
ireiOov
'-<ro
Perf. -(o-)e«
TiTpL\l/0
7j^0
'niireia-o
TeTpi(l)6(ti
-nxOca
7riTT€LCr0(O
redup. |-(o-) 06
TeTpLcf)6€
TJxOe
TriireLa-Oe
^-(<r)0a)<rav
T€rpL(f)doii(rav,
or i]x^(£KTav, or
TreTTeCa-Ocaaav, or
T€TpL(j)d0)l>
TjX^diV
TTCTTeiO-OoiT
i
88 MUTE VERBS MIDDLE AND PASSIVE.
Stem, Tpi^- ay- ireiO-
[§ 84.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present, -wfiat
Perf. part, with S
rptjScojoiai ayoipiaL
TeTpLjijiivos oi rjyfjievos o)
OPTATIVE.
TTeCOwfjiaL
7:€7T€L(rpi€V0S tt)
Present ol^-'^v
TpL{3oifX7]v ayoLfxriv
ireidoifjLrjv
Perf. part, with-v
T^Tpiiniivos -qyjxivos a.r}v
etrjv
INFINITIVE.
TreTreicr/xeros etr
Present, -€o-0ai
Perfect, -(<r)0at
Tpi^^crOai ayeadai
PARTICIPLES.
Present, -ojicvos
Perf.'redup. -ji^vos
TpifBofJievos ay6pL€Vos
T€Tpi\x\xivos rjyiJiivos
7T€L66fl€VOS
Future, -<ro|j.ai
lstAor.€-. .<rd|iTiv
1st Aor. -<rai
1st Aor. -o-cojjLai
Future, -a-oi^r\v
1st Aor. -(rai|i.T]V
Future, -<rc<r0ai
1st Aor. -<ra<r0tti
Middle only.
INDICATIVE.
Tpi\\ro\iai a^ofJLai
eTpL-^aixr]v ij^diJirjv
IMPERATIVE.
Tplyj/ai a(ai
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Tpv^oip.ai afo/xat
OPTATIVE.
TpLyj/oCpLT^v aioLfxrjv
TpL\jfaLpir]V a^ai\ir]V
INFINITIVE.
TpCyjr€(r6aL aieaOai
TpCyj/aadat, aiaaOai
TTeLaofxai
TTCKrat
TreiVcD/xat
TT€L(roiixr}v
'n€i(Tai\j.r\v
iriCaaadaL
§ 84.] MUTE VERBS — MIDDLE AND PASSIVE.
Stem, rpIjS- ay- TreiO-
89
Future, -<ro}j,€vos
1st Aor. -ordnevos
Future, -0T)<ro|i.at
1st Aor. €- . .-0T]v
1st Aor. -6t]ti
1st Aor. -QSi
Future, -Q^a■oi^^\v
1st Aor. -0€iTiv
Future, -9r|0-€(r8ai
1st Aor. -0f]vai
Fut. -0T]O-d|l€VOS
1st Aor. -0€ts
-Tos and -Te'os
PARTICIPLE.
TpLxIfdfxeuos a^aixevo'S 7r€L(TdfJi€V0i
Passive only.
INDICATIVE.
TpL<pOi]croixaL dx^O/](To^aL nuaOriaoixai
€rpL(t}9riv VX^^v
IMPERATIVE.
TpicjidrjTi dxOrjTO
SUBJUNCTIVE.
TpL<p6(a axd(B^^
OPPATIVE.
TpL(l)dr](TOLIJL)]V dx6r](Toip.l-]V 7T€L(T6r](T0Lp.riV
TieCaOrjTL
TpKpOeLl-jV
d)(deit)v
7T€L(r6€Lr]V
INFINITIVE.
rpLcpOijcreadai dxOrjoecrdac TT^LaOrja-^o-OaL
TpLcpOrjvaL dx^drjvai TT^LaOrjvai
PARTICIPLES.
TpK^Oiqaoix^vos dx^dqcroiJLevos 7T€L(T6r](r6[Ji€VOS
TpLipOeis dxd^LS TTeLarOeCs
VERBALS.
rpLTTTOS
TpL1TT€0S
aKTOS
TTeiaTos
TreiaTeoj
J^ote.—The Future Perfect, " Paulo-post Future" (see § 65, d, 7),
is once found in the New Testament : KCKpd^ovrai (Luke xix. 40),
from KpdCo (stem, Kpa-y-, § 85, a, 2^ ii.) But as this is the only
instance, the tenso has not been given in the paradigm.
90
MUTE VERBS MODIFIED STEMS. [§ 85.
85. Before treating of the remaining class of consonant-
verbs, i.e., those with a liquid stem-ending, it is necessary to
notice a most important modification to which verj^ many-
mute verbs, as well as those of other classes, are subjected.
a. In the examples given, the stem appears full and unaltered
in the Present tense. TpL^co is from the stem rpip-, ayco from ay-,
and TreiBco from uciG-. There are, however, many verbs in which
the stem is modified in the formation of the Present. It is there-
fore requisite to note two main points ; first, the stem of the Verb,
from which all the tenses are derived ; and secondly, the stem of
the Present, as found in Lexicons and Vocabularies.
(1) Labial stems are modified by the introduction of -t- before
the termination. Thus; — stem rvn--, strike^ Present tuttto) ; stem
pXap-, hurt. Present ^XdirTO} (for /SXa/S-r-o), § 4, d, 3); stem pwj)-,
throw, Present piTTTa (for pl(p-T-(o, § 4, d, 2).
(2) Guttural stems are modified by changing the stem-ending
(i) into -<r<r-, or its equivalent -tt-. Thus from the stem ray-, set
in order, we have Present rao-o-o) or raTTO) ; (ii) into -1-, e.g., stem
Kpa-y-, cry out, Present KpdCco.
(3) Dental stems are modified by changing the stem-ending
into -I- : thus, from the stem (}>pa8-, tell, comes the Present <^paf<a.
It will be seen that, as the I^resent termination -t» may be derived
either from a guttural or a dental stem, a knowledge of the verb will be
required before deciding to which of the two to refer it. *
b. The tenses of these "strengthened" verbs, as they are called,
are formed, from the verbal stem, according to the rules before
sriven. Thus —
* The original modification of guttural and dental stems was probably by
the insertion of a short vowel (i or «) after the characteristic. So raY-,
rayiu, rdaau) ; <|>pa8-, <ppaS^(i>, <ppd^a). Tiie softening occasioned by the vowel
may be compared with the effect of » upon t in the termination -tiotu
§85.]
MODIFIED VERBAL STEMS.
91
TVTrrcB,
to strike
Tvir-
fut.
Tvyj/o}
perf.
T€TV(f)a
^XdlTTCC),
to hurt
pXap-
)>
P\d\j/'(0
J)
^€^Xacf)a
pLTTTCOf
to throw
Pt<|>-
))
piyj/co
5»
cppt(f)a
Taoau),
to arrange
rav-
jj
Ta|u>
>)
reraxo-
KpdCo,
to cry
Kpav-
J5
Kpd^co
5J
KiKpaxa
(j^paCoi,
to tell
<}>pa8-
JJ
(ppdcrco
)}
7r€(ppaKa
c. Every class of mute verbs (as well as others, on which see
hereafter) may receive modification by the insertion of a vowel
in a short stem-syllable, so as to form a diphthong. Thus ^vy-,
Jlee, gives (pevycc, and Xmt-, leave, XeLiro). Only, in this case, the
Future and Perfect are formed from the stem of the Present, as
XeiVcD, Xei>//'co, XeXeiCpa.
86. The most important point connected with the modifi-
cation of the stem is the introduction, into the verbs so
characterized, of a set of "secondary'' tenses, in which the
unmodified stem appears. These tenses, except in special
cases, are of precisely similar meaning to the corresponding
''primary'' tenses. For example, the difierence between the
First and the Second Aorist is a difierence of form only.
The same remark can hardly be applied so unreservedly to
the First and Second Perfect ; but the instances of difierence
belong rather to the Lexicon than to the Grammar, and will
be explained in the Vocabulary.
A few verbs unmodified, as exw, have a Second Aorist, as will be
afterwards noted. Occasionally, too, the Second Aorist differs in
meaning from the First. The above rule, however, is general.
87. Secokd Aorist.
The Second Aorist Active in the Indicative resembles the
Imperfect, in the other moods the Present, except that the
Imperfect is taken from the modified, the Second Aorist from
the original stem.
92
THE SECOND AORTST.
[§87.
Thus from (fxvya) (<i>v7-), fojlee —
Imperfect, €(f)evyov, €({)evy€s, f(})€vy€(v), i(f)€vyofieVf k.t.X.
Sec, Aorist, ecjivyov, ecpvyes, 6<^vye(i/), €(f)vyo[xev, k.t.X.
The augment and the terminations of the two tenses will be
seen to be exactly alike.
In the moods after the Indicative, the Second Aorist drops the
augment and follows the Present in termination, but accentuates
the final syllable of the Infinitive (perispomenon) and Participle
(oxy tone) .
With these explanations, the Second Aorist Active paradigm
will present no difficulty.
TVTTTO), to strike, keCiKo, to leave.
Stem TVTT- Xltt-
Indicative,
irUTTOV iXlTTOV
Imperative,
TV7T€ AtTre
Subjunctive,
TVTTCO AtTTO)
Optative,
TV-nOUll AtTTOt/Xt
Infinitive,
TVTT€lv Xiireiv
Participle,
TVTTIOV, OV(Ta, 6v XlTTO)!'
h. The Second Aorist Middle follows exactly the same analogy.
The Imperative, however.
is perispomenon, the Infinitive
paroxytone.
Indicative,
hvTTOfJL'qv eXLTToixriv
Imperative,
TVTTOV XlTTOV
Subjunctive,
TvircofMat AtTTCo/xat
Optative,
TVTToC^irjv XnToCfirjv
Infinitive,
TV-nicrdai Xntiadai
Participle,
TVTTO/xerOS XiTTOfM^VOS
c. Second Aorist Passive. — Here the mood and tense-endings
are like those of the passive Fii*st Aorist, the difference being that
the unmodified root is used instead of the aspirated form with -0-.
First Aorist, €tv<j>6t]v ; Second Aorist, (Tvmjv. In the Imperative
§ 87.] SECOND AORTST, FUTURE, AND PERFECT. 93
second person, -0t is found instead of -ti. One paradigm of this
tense will suffice : —
Indicative, hvir-qv
Imperative, TvirrjOi, TVirrjrai
Subjunctive, Tvirca
Optative, TvireC-qv
Infinitive, TVTrrjvai
Part. TvneiSi Tvna.cra, rviriv
88. Second Future.
a. In the Passive vbioe, there is a Second Future connected with
the Second Aorist, exactly as the First Future is connected with the
First Aorist. Thus from tvttto) we have, First Aor. pass., eTv(})dr)v ;
First. Fut., Tv^6r)(ToyLaL \ Second Aor., ervTrrjv; Second Fut., tuttjJ-
(Tonai. The paradigm is as follows : —
Indicative, Tvirrjaoiiai
Imperative, Tvirr^a-oCixrjv
Infinitive, TvnricrecrOai
Participle, Tvirrja-ofx^vos
89. Second Perfect.
b. The Second Perfect belongs to the Active voice only, and is
distinguished from the ordinary Perfect of mute verbs by having
the unmodified stem without the aspirate. Thus : rvTrro) (tvtt-).
First Perf., reVu<^aj Second Perf, rervTra. The tense is of rare
occurrence, and its special significance will have to be explained
in individual cases. It occurs in some verbs that do not modify
their stem. The Second Pluperfect accompanies it, where found.
One paradigm here also will be sufficient. Second Perfect of
TTodo-o-G) (-n-pa-y-), to do: —
Indicative, niitpaya
„ Plup. (€)7r677p(iyeii;
Subjunctive, ireTrpdyo)
Optative, 'TreTrpayot/xt
Imperative, iriTrpaye
Infinitive, ircirpayevaL
Participle, ireiTpaycas, -via -6s.
90. GrENERAL EuLES FOR THE SeCOND TeNSES.
(1) These do not occur in the pure verbs, or in verbs having a
dental, t, 8, (t), for their characteristic.
(2) The same verb very seldom takes both First and Second
Aorists in the Active or Middle.
94 MUTE VERBS — EXERCISE. [§ 90.
(3) The Passive may have both First and Second Aorist and
Future.
(4) When both First and Second Perfect active are found, the
former is often transitive, the latter intransitive. Trenpaxa, I have
done; Trenpaya, I have fared (compare Eiiglish, "How do you
do?'').
Kemark. — For the vowel -modifications of the second tenses, see
the sections on Tense-formation, §§ 93 — 99.
Exercise 11.— On Mute Verbs.
[VocahularT/, from the ^'Sermo^i on the Mount" — (1) Labial
Stems: ySXeVco, to see; dXelcfia}, to anoint; BXi^Scoj to straiten;
KpvnTco, to hide ; vIttto), to wash ; o-rpecpai, to tuni ; rpe'^o) (9p6<j>-), to
nourish.
(2) Guttural Stejis : ayo), to lead; 5ta>Kto, to pursue ; e;^a) (Ix),
to Imve ; Xeyco, to say ; 7rpoa€vxop.ai, to pray (dep.).
(3) Dental Stems : ^evbojxai, to lie (dep.); oveiblCo), to reproach;
do^dCcOf to glorify; vopiC(o, to suppose ; vrjOco, to spin ; ayidCoi, to
hallow.
Analyze and translate the following words : — SeSKoy/ieVot, oveidi-
(TodcrtVj Sia)£ou(7t, yJAevSopevoi^ edico^av, Kpv^rjvaiy do^da-cocri, vo/iioT/re, cp^et,
aTpeyj/ov, 7r/30crev;(CCT^e, 8t(oic6uTci)u, '^X^'^^i ^XenaVf irpocrevxjlt ifpocrev^aiy
7rpoaev)(6p€voif dyLaa-BrfTCi}, aXeiyl/ai, vi\lrai, /SXeVcoj/, KkenTOVcrij vrjdeij
Xeyovres, (TTpd<p€VT€S (see § 98, d), TeffKip.pfvq.
Also the following : rjXay^e, f]yia(rp.€VOi, dyidcrat, edlcoKov, KeKpvpfjLfVGf
Xeyopevos, Xe;(^ftp, Trpoa-rjvxeTO, npoaev^dpfvoiy 6piy\t<t>.
91. Liquid Yerbs.
Verbs with the stem-endings X, ji, v or p, present many
variations from the foregoing models, which will be noticed
§ 91.] LIQUID VERBS. 95
in the sections on Tense-formation. It will be sufficient, as
introductory to the paradigm, to observe —
a. The stem of these verbs is generally modified in the Present:
e. (/., stem d7"yeX-, announce^ Present act. ayy/XXcoj <|>av-, appear,
Pres. (pa'ivu),
b. The Future active originally ended in -i<rta, middle -^<ro|iai ;
but the <r being dropped (see a similar case in Nouns, § 30, iv.), two
vowels are brought together, and contraction ensues. Thus, dyyeX-,
Flit. (^dyyeke-a--a), ayyeXe-o)) dyyeX© j middle (a/yyfX-e-cr-o/xai, dyyf\-e-ofxat),
dyyeXoO/xai. The Future, active and middle, of liquid verbs is there-
fore declined like the Present of contracted pure verbs with stem-
ending 6-.
c. The First Aorist active and middle follows the Future in the
omission of the o-, but lengthens the vowel of the preceding
syllable. Thus : —
<j)dv-, fut. (pavo), 1st Aor. e(pT]va
ayyik-, „ dyyeXw, ,, j^'yyeiXa
Kpiv-, judge, „ Kptpw, ,, cKfuva
crtp, drag, „ avpa>, „ eavpa
d. In the Perfect active, as v- and jjl- cannot come before -k,
various expedients are adopted. KptVo), to judge, kXlvco, to bend^
TrXvvco, to wash, drop the v {KeKpiKa, &c.) Other verbs, as (jyalvw,
adopt a Second Perfect, lengthening the vowel as in the Aorist
{Trecprjva). Others, again, form the Perfect as from a pure root in
€-, as /xeVco, to remain, pejievijKa, as if from fieveoj.'
e. In the Perfect passive, v- is changed into <r- or into p- before
-jtat, as, from <j)av-, 7re^ua-/xat instead of Trecfiav^/xat, and from |iipav-,
e^fjpafxfiai instead of e^fjpav-fiai. The three verbs which drop v-
before -Ka in the Perfect active lose it also in the Perfect and First
Aorist passive. Thus, KeKpip.ai, cKpidrjv. Those verbs which assume
a root in €- for the Perfect active, construct the passive Perfect
and First Aorist after the same analogy.
96
LIQriD VERBS — THEIR CONJUGATION.
[§92.
92.
Paradigms.
Stem,
dyyeX-
Kpiv
dp-
Strengthened, dyyeXX-
Kplv
alp-
Active.
indicative.
Present,
ayyiWo)
KpCvCti
aXpoi
Imperfect,
rjyyeXKov
€KpLVOV
7jpov
Future sing.
dyyeAw
KpiVUi
apca
>> if
dyyeAets
KptVUS
d/oeis
»' )}
ayyekel
KpLV€L
ap€L
„ plur.
ayy€\ovfi€v
Kptvovfjiev
apovixev
» »
dyyeAetre
KpLvelre
ap€LT€
>> »
ayy€\ov(TL(i
) Kpivov(n[v)
apovaiiv)
1st Aorist,
riyy^ika
€Kp7va
ripa
Perfect,
jjyyeXKa
miKplKa
flpKa
Pluperfect,
i]yyiXK€LV
{k)K€KpiKeiV
fipKeiv
2nd Aorist,
rjyyeXov
[MPERATIVE.
rjpov
Present,
dyyeAAe
KptVe
alpe
Ist Aorist,
dyyetAoz;
KpivOV
dipov
Perfect,
7;yyeAKe
K^KplKe
ypK€
2nd Aorist,
ayy€\€
ap€
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present,
dyyeAAo)
KpCvOi
atpoj
1st Aorist,
ayyeCkd)
KpCvOi
apo)
Perfect,
riyy^kKGi
K€KpLK(0
fjpKO)
2nd Aorist,
ayyikoi
OPTATIVE.
ap(t)
Present,
ayyikXoLfXL
KpCvOLfXl
atpoipiL
Future,
ayy ekoliML or oLTjv KpivoXiii or oLr]v
apoXixi or oim
Ist. Aorist,
ayyeCkaifiL
KpCvaifJLL
apaifXL
Perfect,
-qyyekKOLixL
K€KpiKOHJ.l
flpKoiiu
2nd Aorist,
ayyikoLiki
apoL^t
^92.]
LIQUID VERBS PARADIGMS.
07
Stem, ayyeX- Kptv
Strengthened, ayyeXk- Kpiv-
Present,
Perfect,
Present,
Perfect,
alp-
INFINITIVE.
Present,
ayyikkeiv
KpLV€LV
a'Lp€W
Future,
ayyekciv
Kpiveiv
apelv
1st Aorist,
ayyelKaL
Kplvai
dipai
Perfect,
riyy€\K€vai
K€KplKivai
^pKivai
2nd Aorist,
ayyeXelv
apeXv
PARTICIPLES.
Present,
ayyiWoiV
KpLVOiV
atp(av
Future,
ayyek&v
KpLVOiV
apSiV
1st Aorist,
ayydXas
Kpivas
&pas
Perfect,
riyy€XK(as
K€KpLK(aS
llpK<os
2nd Aorist,
ayyeXcov
apcav
Middle and Passive.
INDICATIVE.
Present,
ayyiWoixai
KpCvofjiai.
aXpofxaL
Imperfect,
r}yy€W6fJLr]V
eKpiv6[xr]V
flp6lXT]V
Perfect,
TJyyeXfjLaL
KiKpXpiat
ypixau
Pluperfect,
riyyiX^i-qv
{k)K^KpilX7]V
fipp.K]v
IMPERATIVE.
Present,
ayyikkov
Kpivov
atpov
Perfect,
Vyy^Xao, -doi
K.T.X.
SU
BJUNCTIVE.
fipcTO, fipOia
dyyeAAcojtxat KpCvcDpLai
Tjyy^Xp^ivos o) K^Kpipiivos w
OPTATIVE.
ayy€XXoip.r]v Kpivoi\xr]V
-qyy^XpL^vos €Lrjv K^Kpip.ivos ^trjv
aXpoifjLaL
fipfxivos Si
alpoiiir]v
riouivos etnv
LIQUID VERBS — PARADIGMS.
[§92.
Stem, dyyeX-
Strengthened, ayyeAX-
KpLV-
Kplv-
ap"
alp-
INFINITIVE.
Present,
Perfect,
dyyiWea-Oat Kpiveadai
riyyikOaL KeKpiaOai
PARTICIPLES.
atpeadaL
fipdai
Present,
Perfecl,
dyy€\\6pL€vos Kpiv6lX€V0S
riyyeXixivos KeKpifxivos
Middle only.
INDICATIVE.
alp6pL€vos
fipixivos
Future,
1st Aorist,
2nd Aorist,
dyyeAovjuat Kptvovpiai
r]yy€L\dixr]V lKpivdur]V
dyy€K6p.r]V
IMPERATIVE.
dpovfjiai
ripdp.r]v
ripoixi^
1st Aorist,
2nd Aorist,
ayyeikai Kplvai
dyy^Xov
Bpai
dpov
1st Aorist,
2nd Aorist,
Future,
1st Aorist,
2nd Aorist,
Future,
1st Aorist,
2nd Aorist,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
dyy€iX(jDlxaL Kpiv(ji\xai apcapiaL
dyyiKojp.aL apm^iai
OPTATIVE.
dyyeXoCfjirjv, qlo, KpivoCp.7]V, olo, dpoCpLtjv, oio, olto
K.T.X.
dyyuXai\xr]v Kpivaip.r]v dpaCfir]v
dyyekotpirjv dpoCfxriv
INFINITIVE.
dyy€\€L(r6aL KpivelaOa dpelaOai
dyyeCXaa-OaL Kpivaadat. dpaadai
dyyeXiaOaL dpiadai
§92.]
LIQUID VERTiS — PARADIGMS.
99
Stem
, ayyeX- Kpiv-
ap-
Strengthened
L, ayyeAA- Kplv-
alp-
PARTICIPLES,
Future,
1st Aorist,
2nd Aorist,
ayy€Lkdix€Vos KpLvd[jL€vos
dyy€k6}ji€vos
Passive only.
INDICATIVE.
dpOVfJL€VOS
dpdii^vQS
dpofievos
1st Future,
1st Aorist,
2nd Aorist,
2nd Future,
■qyyi\6r]v eKpiOrjV
riyye\7]V
o.yyckrjaofJLaL
IMPERATIVE.
dpOrjaofiac
rip9r]v
7]pr]v
apr]croiJLai
1st Aorist,
2nd Aorist,
dyyik6r]Ti kplOvti
dyyiXriQi
SUBJUNCTIVE.
dp6r]TL
aprjdi
1st Aorist,
2nd Aorist,
dyy^KOd Kpidco
dyy^\Q>
OPTATIVE.
dpO(a
ap(o
1st Future,
1st Aorist,
2nd Aorist,
2nd Future,
dyy€X6riaoLfir]v KptOrjcroifjiriv
dyyekOeirjv KpiOeLrji;
dyyeX^LTjv
dyy€Xri(joL[X7]V
INFINITIVE.
dp6r](roL[jLr]v
dpdeLTjv
dp€L7]U
dpr](TOipiriv
1st Future,
1st Aorist,
2nd Aorist,
2nd Future,
dyyeXOrja-^arOaL KpLOtjaeaOat
dyycXBrjvai KpidijvaL
ayyeXijvaL
ayy^Xria^crOai,
dpOrfcreaOaL
apOfjvaL
dpTJvai
aprjcreaOaL
lUU
LIQUID VEKBS.
[§ ^2.
Stem, ayyeX" Kpiv
ap-
Strengthened, ayyeXX- Kp'iv-
alp^
PARTICIPLES.
1st Future,
1st Aorist,
2nd Aorist,
2nd Future,
ayy€X6r}ar6[Ji€Vos KpiOrjaopievos
ayyekOeis Kpt^ets
dyyeXets
ayy€\r](r6fji€Vos
VERBALS.
apd-qaopievos
ap0€LS
apeCs
aprjo-opievos
ayyeXros Kpiros
ayy€\T€os Kpirios
apTos
aprios
'*^* It is not to be supposed that all tlie above forms are
actually in use. They are given as TropaSfiy/xara, examples, of
words that may occur.
Exercise 12.— On Liquid Verbs.
I. [Vocabularv, from the *^ Sermon on the Mount" — av^duo), to
grow, to increase; /SaXXo), to throw, cast; 6e\(o, to will (augment
with Tj, see § 94, ii.) ; Kpiva, to jlldge; fioipaivco, to corrupt; aneipa,
to sow ; (f>aiv(o, to show (Second Aorist, passive or middle, appear) ;
Xaipo), to rejoice.]
II. Analyze and translate the following forms : — ;(aipfTf, fio)pavd^,
^Xrjdrjvat (see § 98, c), ^Xr]Brj(T7], ^aXe, ^XtjOtj, deXovTi., KpiOrjvai^ <f>av^if
a-ireipovaiv, av^dvei, ^aWofievov, Kpidrjre, KpLdt^crea-de, ^dXrjTe, dfKrjTe,
Also the following : — diKei, rjdikov, fjdiXrjo-a, dfXovres, Kpivet, Kpivei,
Kpivare, (^(opavdrjcrav, efxaipavev, cnrfipcov, (rnapeis, eaTrapfieuov, fcfidvrjy
(paiveade, (fiapeiTai, /3aXf, ^XrjdrjTif ^dWeiv, ^aXelvy /3aXXa), /SoXw.
§ 93.] ON TENSE-FOR^tATlON^^ ' , 101
93. Notes on the Tenses.
The foregoing paradigms have fully given the typical
forms of the First Conjugation, i.e., of the great majority of
verbs, and of most of the tenses in all verbs. Many minute
variations must now be noticed, with apparent irregularities,
which for the most part can themselves be reduced to rule, or
explained by some early usage of the language.
Accentuation. — It may be repeated at tlie outset from § 7.'>, that
verbal forms mostly retract the accent, i.e., throw it back as far as
possible. Exceptions are noted below under the different Tenses.
When the accent falls on the penultimate, e.g., in dissyllables, along
vowel is circumflexed, in certain forms, as has been already shown.
94. The Present and Imperfect : Active, Middle
AND Passive.
I. The Present Indicative Active, first person (the form usually
given in Lexicons, Yocabularies, and Concordances*) contains the
verbal stem, often modified.
The principal forms of modified stem are as follows : —
1. Labial stem-endings, strengthened by t-. (See § 85, a, 1.)
2. Short stem-syllables lengthened. (See § 85, c.)
3. The euphonic o-a-, tt-, for a guttural characteristic; t- for
a dental, or occasionally for y-. (See § 85, a, 2, 3.)
4. XX- for the characteristic X-. (See note, § 85.)
5. The letter v- affixed to the stem-syllable.
This may take place in different ways.
<n. To a pure stem, simply affixed :
Thus from <f)da-, (pdava, to anticipate.
from TTi-, ttivu), to drink.
h. Two consonant stems follow this model :
from Kafi-, Kd/iiuu}, to he weary.
from 5o/c-, SaKva, to bite.
* Bruder's Concordance, 4to (Tauchnitz), gives the Present Infinitive.
102 orr te^se-formation. [§ 94.
c. One affixes vi-, aptK-, a.<piKve6ixat, to arrive.
d. To a pure stem lengthened, two verbs only :
from j8a-, Palva, to go.
from 6A.O-, 4\avvw, to drive.
e. To a consonant stem, with connective a :
from afxapT; ajxaprava}, to sin.
from XojS-, Xafifidva, to take.
In the last-mentioned verb, it will be se^ that p. is also inserted in the
stem-syllable. This is for -v- (made jtt before a labial, § 4, c?, 5). So
IxavQavw, to learn, from pi.a9-, and other verbs. The stem appears in the
Second Aorist, ^fxaprov, i\a^ov, %(xa6ov.
6. An alternative pure stem in c-.
This appears generally in the Future, Aorist, and Perfect.
Thus e'x- and (tx«-, to have, ex(o, e|«, or (rx^o'aj, eo-x^jKct ; Second Aor. , %axov.
0€A- and 0eA6- (also e0eA-), to will, 64ha, Q€Xt](t<£, ideKijaa.
fj,€v- and fiive-, to remain, jUeVcw, fujxiviiKa.
Occasionally the €-stem appears in the Pres. Thus Zok- u,ad hoK^-, 1%,
appear, Sokw (Sowew), 5o'|co, e5o|a.
Some of the verbs under 5, e, have a similar alternative stem. Thus from
afiaprdvco we fiud a/xapTiiaa, 7}/j.dpTr]Ka.
7. The inchoative form (so called because some verbs of this class
denote the beginning of an action), in o-k- or wtk-.
Pure stems add -c/c-, generally lengthening a short stem-voweL So Bpo-,
transposed from dav-, to die, Qvija-Koi, tdavov, Perf. riOvtjKa.
Consonant stems add -ktk-, and often, as in 6, have an alternative stem
in €-. Thus cOp-, cvpe-, to find, evpia-Kfa, evp-f](Ta}, eupriKO, tvpov. vdax^i ^0 *'*{^^^»
(vaQ-, with alternative stem, vivQ-) has Second Aor. eiraOov, Second Perf.
ircTTOpda. SiSdaKQ), to teach, originally from 5a-, assumes a mute guttui-al stem :
Fut., 8i5a|a>; First Aor. pass., iMdxOvf.
Verbs of this class are very various in form, as exhibited in the Lexicon
or Vocabulary.
8. Reduplicated stems, the initial consonant repeated with i.
Four verbs of this class are of very common occurrence.
a. yivofxai (deponent intransitive), to become, stem yfp-, by reduplication
yrytv; shortened into yiyv-, the second 7- being dropped for the sake of
euphony; Impf., 4yiv6iJL7)v; Inf., ylvtaBai; Second Aor., iytvSfirjy, ytvhecu.
§ 94.] ON TENSE-FORMATION. 103
6. yivdcTKo}, to become acquainted with, to know. Stem yvo-, which becomes
yvcoffK-, after the model of class 7 ; then by reduplication yiyvwaK-, when y-
is dropped, as in the last instance; Fut., yvcoaofiai ; Peri, fyvuKa-, Second
Aor., ^yvav {like second conjugation).
c. HiixviiCKoyiai, to remember (deponent), from fifa-, fjivf)(xojxai, ffxviiaerjv,
d. nriirra), to fall. This is not a labial verb strengthened by t-. Its root
is TTCT-, by reduplication vnreT-. The weak vowel -e- is then dropped, leaving
viiTT-. Second Aor., errea-ou, the c- being softened from t- ; Fut., Treo-oCuat ;
Perf., TTciTTWKa. (Compare § 96, d.)
II. The Imperfect Tense always follows the stem of the Present,
the Augment being prefixed.
For the Augment, consult § 69. After the Augment, an initial
-p- is doubled, as from pvofiai; Impf , eppvofirjv; First Aor., ippvcrOr^v.
A few verbs have the Attic double augment tj instead of c. Thus,
/leXXeo, to he about to do a thing, has ep^XXov and ^jxeXXov inter-
changeably. 'Opdco, to see, has a double augment also : Impf.,
fcopcov ; Perf, (oipaKu. (See further, under the Aorist, § 97.)
95. The Second Aorist, Active and Middle.
This is the simplest of the Tenses (see § 87), and in general
contains the exoA^t verbal stem. Hence it is mainly found in verbs
whose Present-stem is modified. So Imperf , ervnTov; Second Aor.,
iTVTTov. In one verb, ayco, to lead, where the Present-stem is un-
modified, the Second Aorist is distinguished from the Imperfect by
a reduplication : Impf, ijyov ; Second Aor., ijyayov; Inf., ayayelv.
Note. — Some short stem-syllables with f- change this into a in the
Second Aorist, as from aneipo}, to sow (o-Tre/j-), %(rirapov.
The Vowel Aorist. — A few pure stems (like the second conjuga-
tion, or " verbs in -jii ") affix the tense-endings to the stem, with
lengthened vowel, rejecting the usual modal vowel.
Thus, yivma-KUi ("yvo-, see § 94, 8, h), eyvcov.
bvvQi, to set, as the sun (8v-), eSuv.
fiaivw, to go (pa-), e^rju.
104 ON TENSE-FORMATION. [§ 95.
For the conjugation of these forms, see paradigms of verbs in
Accentuation. — The Second Aorist active infinitive circumflexes the
final syllable ; rvireii/ ; in the participle accents the stem-syllable -oj't,
with a circumflex on the fern, where possible, tittc^j/, rvnovaa, rvirSv.
In the middle the imperative is perispomenon, rvvov ; the inf.
paroxytone, rvntadai.
96. The Future, Active and Middle.
For the relation between the Future stem and the simple stem
of the verb, consult § 85, b, c.
a. In pure stems, the vowel is lengthened before the Future
characteristic -a--. The stem-endings <i- and €- become r\ ; o- becomes
»- ; t- and v- are made long. Thus, Tifida>, Ttfirja-o) ; (PiXeay, (fjiX^a-a ;
drfKoco, BrjXacra} ', XfO), Xvarco,
Exceptions: (L) a- becomes d- after a vowel or p. Thus : —
ida, to permitf Fut. fdaofiai.
Idofxai, to healy „ ld(rofiai.
ireipdofi-ai, to try^ „ -rreipdcrofiai.
So Treivdcoj to hunger^ „ Tretmo-o).
\aKda)^ to loosen^ „ \akdcra>.
But xpdofiai, to USBy makes )(pf]cropai,
(ii.) The following verbs do not lengthen their stem-endiugs for
the Future : — *
o-forms : yeXciw, to laug\ Fut. yeXda-a.
icXdo}, to breaky ,, KKdaa>.
«-forms : dpKea>, to suffice^ „ op*c<V(o.
firaivfca, to praise^ ,, enaivfaa.
icaXeo), to callj „ Kaktaco.
TeXecOf tojinishf „ rfXeao).
(bopeca, to carri/f „ cjiopea-co.
h. Verbs in i'^od (stem i8-) usually drop tlie -cr- Fut'iJre cliarac-
♦ Some of these verbs are regular in classic Greek-
§ 96.] ON TENSE-FORMATION. 105
teristic, replacing it by a contraction similar to that of the liquid
verbs. This form is called the Attic Future.
Thus ; d<f)opiCa}, to separate, makes Fut. d(fiopta>,
iXTTiCo), to hopCy „ eXzrtw.
KOfML^co, to carry, „ Kofjuco, mid. Koixiovfiai.
Kadapi((ii, to purify, „ Kadapico aiud KaOapiaui.
^aiTTiCco, to baptize, „ /SaTrn'o-o) only.
(raXni^o), to sound a trumpet, „ (xaXniaat only.*
But the verbs of this class which drop -tr- in the Future, resume it in the
First Aorist ; so far diflfering from the liquid verbs.
c. Three verbs in -i<a, originally -^f«, show the digamma (see
§ 29, iii.) in inflection, as v : —
TrXeo), to sail, Fut. nkeva-oiiat
TTJ/ecj, to blow, „ nvciKTco.
p€(o, tojlow, „ peva-oi.
I Another digammated verb, x«««>) io pour, omits the <r altogether,
and conforms to the Attic Future, retaining, however, the € before
the circumflexed final : cKxeS), I will pour /orth (Acts ii. 17.)
In this class the First Aorist characteristic conforms to that of the Future.
So eTTvevaa. From iKX^Co is formed First Aor. e^exeo, uncontracted.
To the digammated verbs may be referred Kaioj, to burn, Fut.
Kav(T(0 ; Kkaico, to weep, Fut. icKav(ra> and K\av(rop.ai (Luke vi. 25 ;
Eev. xviii 9). (See d.)
d. Several active verbs of frequent occurrence have a Future in
the middle form, still with active meaning ; as —
oKovo), to hear, Fut. aKovcropaij or okovctq).
Cda>, to live, ,, (rjcropai or Cw^-
Xap^dvco, to take, „ Xrjyjropai (from Xap-, X-q^r-)
BavpdCa, to wonder, „ davpda-opat, once.
(f)evyco, tojlee, „ cfifv^opat.
TTiVco, to drink, „ Trlopat, -ecrai, -erai (Luke xvii, 8).
* In classic Greek, aaXtriy^eo, from stem aakiriyy-.
106 on tense-formation. [§ 97.
97. The First Aorist, Active and Middle.
a. Connexion of the Aorist stem with that of the Future. — 1. In
the pure and mute verbs, the o- of the Future is retained.
2. In the liquid verbs, the Aorist lengthens a short vowel before
the stem-ending. Thus, o-irep-, to sow; Fut., <nrepa) ; First A or.,
((nreipa; and from ayyeX-, rfyyeCka.
Verbs in aivoj, from the stem -av, generally have o in the Future, a in the
First Aorist. So Aei/zcaiVw, to whiten ; Fut. , Aeu/coj^w ; First Aor. , iKevKciva.
(TTjfjLait'co, to signify ; First Aor. inf., arifiami (Acts xxv. 27). Similarly,
iwKpauai (Luke i. 79), from iiri, (paluw,* to show, appear. But KepSaipco, to
gain, Fut. Kepbauu, makes iKepdrjara, as from an alternative pure root, KfpSa-.
h. Peculiarities of Augment. — The double augment is occasionally
found : avolyoi, to open, avico^a, also fjvoi^a ; similarly, ^oCXofiai, to
will (deponent), rj^ov\r]6r)v (2 John, 12). Compound verbs gene-
rally prefix the augment to the verbal stem ; but where the com-
pound has lost its force, or has usurped the place of the simple
verb, the augment may precede the whole verb. Thus, from
nf)o(l)TjT€V(a, €irpo(f>r}T€V(ra, instead of 7rpo€(f)r]T(V(ra. The prefix, €u, well,
is sometimes augmented into r\v-, sometimes left unaltered. So
from €v8oK€Q), to be well pleased, evboKija-a (Matth. iii. 17), and
TjvdoKria-a (Luke iii. 22). But a verbal stem after ev, beginning
with a, €, o, is itself augmented. So from ewayyeXiXo/xat, to preach
tlie Gospel, we have evrjyyfXia-dprjv, not rivayyiKi<Tdp.rjv.
The root 07-, to break (second conjugation, Htyvvni (with prefix, koto,
makes First Aor. Kariaia (John xix. 32), iustead of Kitri^a. But as the «- is
found in the Future of the same verb («ot6c1{«, Matth. xii. 20), and in the
Second Aor. subj. pass. {.KaTtayuHn, John xix. 30), it may mark a collateral
form of the verb, and not be intended as an augment. f
The Aorist augment of the verb alpta (see § 92) is variously printed ]f or ^.
The latter is correct, as it is the simple stem which is lengthened.
Note. Some verbs in the LXX. have a kind of compound Aorist tense
("Alexandrian"), like the First in termination, but like the Second in teuse-
* The classical First Aor. of fpaivw is i<p^va.
t Or it may be simply to distinguish the forms from those of icarcJ-yw, to
lead down.
§ 97.] ON TENSE-FORMAIIOX. 107
form : i.e., attaching First Aorist terminations to the simple verbal stem.
So in classic Greek, ijveyKov or ijvc/Ka. See § 103 (6). An instance in
the New Testament of the Alexandrian Aorist is Heb. ix. 12, evpafievos.
Many others occur in the most ancient MSS., and have been adopted into
critical editions, as eireaav (compare § 94, 8, d), and e?7ra in different numbers
and persons; in imper,, eliraTwa-av (Acts xxiv. 20).
Accentuation. — The active First Aor. Infinitive accents the penultimate,
circumflexing all diphthongs and long vowels, as <pv\6.^ai, viarevarai.
The act. Optative third pers. sing, has an acute accent on the same
syllable, the at being here regarded as long, as iriarevaai. The same
form again is found in the middle Imperative ; the at, as usual,
being treated as short, and the accent thrown back, as irla-Tevaai. Only
in monosyllabic stems, where the accent must be on the penultima,
a long vowel is circumflexed, as Kva-ai. To present the three cases at
one view :
Act. Opt., 1st Aor., third pers. sing., ma-rfvo-ai Kvaai <pv\d^ai.
Active, 1st Aorist, infinitive, irtcrTevo-at Xva-ai <pi\d^at.
Middle, 1st Aorist, imperative, irlaTeuarai Kvaai <pv\a^ai.
98. The Aorists and Futures Passive.
a. The First Aorist, Future and Perfect (with the Pluperfect),
Passive, have generally the same modification of the verbal root.
Thus, from rip-a-, eTiixrjdrjVj TeTifJirjixaL ; from \v-, iXvdrjv, XvSrjcrofJLai,
XeXv/xai ; and from irciO-, iireldO-qv, 7r€i(Tdr}(70fiai, Treneiaixai. To know
one of these Tenses is, therefore, a help to the knowledge of the
rest. But o-a^co, to save^ makes icri>6rjv and aeo-coo-fiai,
b. The chief variation in the stem-syllable of these tenses from
the ordinary model is in the case of pure verbs. Usually, these
lengthen the vowel stem-ending. In several verbs, however, the
short vowel remains, as in ibeOr^v, iXvdijv, and others. In many,
again, the letter cr is inserted after the stem, as in eTeXea-drju (Perf ,
rereXeo-/Ltat), ixd^acr^rjv (2 Cor. xi. 33), and from pvoixii, to deliver,
ippvaOr^v (2 Tim. iv. 17). Thus, also, from aKova, to hear, rjnovadrjv,
dKOvcrdf}cropaL, ^'/coucr/xac.
c. The transposition of a vowel and liquid, in short monosyl-
labic roots, is very common in these tenses. Thus, paX-, to throio,
becomes pXa-, and gives e^XrjdtjVy ^Xrjd^aoixai, ^e^Xrjfiai, The root
108 ON TENSE-FORMATION. [§ 98.
KoXe-, to call, is treated as koX-, K\a-; First Aor. pass., ckXtjOjiv;
Fut., K\T]6r)<rofiai j Perf., Ace'/cXTy/itat.
d, A weak vowel in a short liquid stem is often changed into a.
This rule generally applies to the Perfects, Active and Passive,
and to the Aorists and Futures Passive (sometimes also to the
Second Aorist active: see § 95, note). Thus, from GTrooreXXa), to
send forth ((rreX-), anioTokKa^ dneoTaXfiaij direoTaXrjv, a.Tro(TTakf](rofxai.
The verb ttiVo), to dririk (Karairivco, to swallow), changes i into o.
So we find TrcVcoKa, KarenodriVy KaTaTToOTja-Ofiai.
e. The First Aorist and Future passive are chiefly found in
pure stems and derivative verbs; the Second in original consonant-
verbs. Where, too, the First would give an inharmonious con-
currence of letters, the Second will usually be employed. Both
are seldom used in the same verb. But a verb that has the First
Aorist in the Active, may have the Second in the Passive, and
vice versd.
For the usage of particular verbs, consult the Vocabulary. vX-fifftrco, vXriy-,
to strike, makes Second Aor. ivXiiyqv ; but in compounds -ri becomes a, as
ilfTrXiyniffav (Luke ii. 48) ; <pvw, to grow, has the Second Aor. participle <pv4v,
(Luke viii. 6, 8).
Irregularities of Augment in the Aorists passive.— Karii\i](\>Q-n, in many
copies of John viii. 4; aireKaTeardOri (e after both prepositions) : Matth. xii. 13.
From avolyca (compare ^ 99, a, 3), we l&nd ^vofx^i?". a.pe({>X^W> V'^^VX^V*' (Rev.
XX. 12); and Second Aor. i)volyTiv, with Second Future, avoiyftaofj-ai.
Accentuation. — The Aorists passive circumflex the Subjunctive mood-
vowel throughout, and the penultimate of the Inf. -rjvai. The participle
accents the stem-syllable -evr throughout, with a circumflex on the
fern., wherever possible.
Thus: XvOfls, \v6fiaa, KvQev,
XvdfVTOs, Xvdelarjs, \v6^vtos, K.r.X.
99. The Perfect and Pluperfect, Active, Middle,
AND Passive.
a. For the Reduplication, see § 69. The following variations
must be noted : —
1. A verb beginning with two consonants, other than a mute
§ 99.] ON TENSE-FORMATION. 109
followed by a liquid, or -with a double consonant, takes €-. Thus,
(TTecPavoco, to crowriy eo-Tecjydvaxaf i(rTe(f>du(Ofxai ; ^ijpalvayj tO wither,
f^T]pafj,iJ,ai. So when v follows -y-, as from 7V0-, tyvaxa.
2. The verb \dfi^ava>, Xap-, takes ct- instead of the reduplication,*
etXjyc^a.
3. Some verbs beginning with a, c, or o, take a double redupli-
cation in the active.
GKouo), to hear, aKrjKoa.
(iXve-), to come, eXrjXvda. See § 103 (2).
The verb dvoiyco (see §§ 97, 98) may have a double augment in
the perf. pass., rjueayfxevr} (Rev. iv. 1).
4. The Pluperfect in the New Testament generally omits the
augment, taking only the reduplication, as redefieXicoTo, it had been
founded (Matt. vii. 25).
b. Termination of the Active Perfect third person j)lur at. — Many
MSS. frequently give this as -av, like the First Aor. In John
xvii. 7, the rec. text reads eyvaxav.
c. The Second Perfect active takes the termination of the
First without the characteristic -k- or aspirate, and often modifies
a vowel in the stem-syllable, preferring o. Thus, XetVo), XeXoma,
ndaxto (alternate stem, irevG-), nmovOa,
This tense is often intransitive ; as from ire'ew, to persuade. First Perf. ,
ireirciKa, I have persuaded ; but Second Perf., tmroiQa, I have confidence, I
folly believe. To the class of Second Perfects belong the forms €oiKa, I am
like (ftK-) ; olSa, / know (ft5-). (See § 103.)
"When the stem-ending of the verb is an aspirate — mute, labial
or guttural — the Perfect is in the Second, or unaltered, form : as
from 7pa4)-, to write, yeypacfya.
d. Some peculiarities of the Perfect Passive have been noted
under the head of the Aorist. Yowel changes in the stem-syllable
are given in the Lexicon or Vocabulary. So, also, the insertion or
otherwise of -o-- after a vowel stem-ending.
* So in classic Greek some other verbs, as Ko.yx^vw, elfAijxO'
110 TENSE -FORMATION — DEPONENT VERBS. [§ 99.
E.g., Tpi<^a}, to nourish (0pe<(>-), Terpoffia, redpafxfxai. Again, Bpavw,
to crush, makes redpavafiaL (Luke iv. 18); but %avo}xai, to cease,
,niTvavp.ai (1 Pet. iv. 10).
c. The Future-Perfect (passive in classic Greek ; called often
the paulo-post Future) is but the middle Future reduplicated.
Luke xix. 40, is the only instance in the New Testament : KeKpd^ovrai,
will immediately cry out.
Accentuation. — The Perfect Infinitive accents the penultimate -hai.
In the active Participle, the stem-syllable, masc. -or, fern, -ut, is accented
all through, the latter circumflexed wherever possible.
AeXwKws, \i\vKvia, \i\vK6s,
\€\vk6tos, \e\vKvias, \€\vk6tos.
In the middle and passive, the Infinitive accents the penult., circumflex
on diphthongs and long vowels, ffe^ovKevadai, T€Tt^7j(r0ot, reTvtpOai. The
participle accents the penultimate ; as \e\vfi4uos, \f\vix4uri, \e\vix4vov.
100. Deponent Yerbs.
Deponent verbs have no active voice, but may be either middle
or passive in form. This is decided by the Aorist.
Thus : Se'xo/iai, to receive; Fii-st Aor., ide^dpLTjv (middle).
/SovXofiai, to wish; First Aor., e^ovXrjdrjv (passive).
alarddvoiiai, to perceive ; Second Aor., yadop-Tju (middle)
Some verbs have both Aorists, active and passive, with the
same meaning; as diTOKplvop.ai, to answer; First A.ov., dneKpivdixriu
And diT€Kpi6r]v, I answered ♦
Deponent transitives often have each tense with its proper force.
Thus : Idopai, to heal; laadfjujv, I healed; Iddrjv, I was healed.
Xoyi(oiJLaL, tO reckon ; fKoyiadfirjv, I reckoned ; eXoyiadrjv, I
was reckoned.
The verb ylyvop.ai, to become (yev-, see 94, 8, a) has the forms,
Fut., yevfjcrop.ai ; First Aor., eyevrjOrjv; Second Aor., fyfvofxrjv ; Perf.,
yiyova (Second Perf); rarely yeyevrjiiai.
Indio. Pres.
5er,
Imperf.
First Aor.
iSel,
Subj.
Inf.
Se'77
Selu,
Part. Pres.
5iou,
§ 101.] tinipersonal and defective veiibs. ill
101. Impersonal Yerbs.
Impersonal verbs are used only in the Third Person singular,
and are generally rendered into English with the pronoun it.
For the grammatical construction of impersonals, see § 171.
The chief impersonal verbs are dei, it is necessary ; one ought;
Xpri, it is expedient, ot fitting ; irpiirei, it becomes; doKu, it seems;
fieXei, it is a care.
Tlxe following forms of these verbs almost all occur in the New Testa-
ment. The participle, it will be observed, is neuter. Some of the verbs ai-e
also found personally : —
^XP^^t e7ifjf7re(j'), e^oK^i,
XPWai,
irpeirov, Sokovv,
From elfjLi, the substantive verb, is formed the impersonal e^ea-ri,
it is lawful ; part., e^ov.
102. Defective Verbs of the First Conjugation.
The explanations given under the several Tenses have suf-
ficiently accounted for most of the so-called " irregularities "
in the conjugation of verbs in -».
Some verbs, however, of very frequent occurrence, are
anomalous in another way.
The ancient Greek tongue, like all early languages, while
destitute of words expressing the more complex ideas, had
a redundancy of terms denoting some of the simplest actions.
Hence arose many synonymous words, some of which, being*
evidently unnecessary, were afterwards dropped. But in.
several instances, of two or three verbs meaning the same
thing, different tenses were discontinued in each, so that
forms of distinct verbs had to be brought together to con-
stitute a whole. Compare in English go, without a Preterite,
and ivent, without a Present, except in some phrases, wend.
112 DEFECTIVE VERBS. [§102.
Occasionally, again, where the same tense of two syno-
nymous verbs has been retained, it expresses two different
shades of meaning.
103. The following are the principal verbs which thus
derive their forms from different roots : —
(1) alp€(o, to fake (in comp., KaBaipeco, to take down ; irpoaipecof to
take beforehand, &c.) ; Mid., alpovpai, to choose ; Principal Tenses,
alpr}(Tco, alprjaofiai, ^prjKa, yprjfiai, rjpedrjv, alpedr)(ro[xai. From stem cX- j
Second Aor. act., elXov ; Inf., fkeiu ; mid., elkofirjv ; Inf., iXeaBai.
(2) tpxop.ai, to go, come; Impf., rjpxoni^v. Other tenses from
stem IXvO-, lengthened into IXcvO- (Fut.), contracted into 1X0- (Second
Aor.) ; Fut., ikcvaofxai ; Perf., eXrjXvda 'j Plup., eXrjXvdciv j Second
Aor., ^\9ov ; in the several moods, eXde, e\6a>, eXdoifii, iXdelv, iXdav.
So many compounds.
(3) ea-dio), to eat ; Impf., ^o-Biov ; Second Aor. from ^ay-, tcjiayov,
(jiayeiv'f Fut , <pdyofiai, (fxiyearai, (fydyerai, K.r.X. So KaTeaOlat, to devour.
(4) opdo), to see ; Impf., eoopav ; Perf., iapaKa. Tenses from stem
iir-, OTTT-: Fut. o-^op,ai, oyjrei, o-^erai; First Aor. subj., 8yf/<ofxai (once,
Luke xiii. 28) ; First Aor. pass., axfyOrjv, ocpdrjvai ; First Fut. pass.,
6(f)6r](rofiai. Tenses from fi8- : 2nd Aor., tJ8ov, tSco, I8eiu, Idwv (l8ov,
an old Imperfect middle used as an interjection, behold 1) j Second
Perf., I know (= haA)e seen) olba, oltas, otbi{v), oUafiev, otdare, otda(Tt{v)
(in Imp., ta-dt, tare ; Subj., elba ; Inf , eldevai ; Part , €l8a)s ; Plup.
ind., / knew, ^8eiv) ; Fut., el8f}(ra>, shall know (Heb. viii. 11).
(5) Tp€x<^i lo run ; Second Aor. from Spcp.-, fbpa\iov ; Fut., bpa-
fiovfiai (LX.X.)
(6) (j)€pa>, to bear ; Fut. from stem ol-, otaca. Tenses from 4vryK-
or ^v€K-: First Aor. act., fjvfyKa; Second Aor., ijveyKov, eveyKflv;
First Aor. pass., tjvexBrjv ; Perf, ivrjvoxa, with double reduplication.
Compare irpoa-cfyepo), €la(liepa>, k.t.X.
(7) etirov ; Second Aor., / said (supplies Present and Imperfect
from (fyrjfjLt, second conjugation) ; stem, lir- ; First Aor., «?7ra. Tenses
from 4p- : Fut, epeco, epSy ; Perf, etpriKa ; Perf. pass., elprjfiau Tenses
from (>t- : First Aor. pass., fppidtjv or epprjdrjv ; Part., prjOeig,
§ 103.]
SUMMARY OF DEFECTIVE VERBS.
113
^ ft ^ • ft
C3
eg-
o
o.
ft
o
w
ft
o
I-
• ?5 (ft
ft u»
C5
^ Si
3 3 ^-§->e^C3 ft ^ S b ;:i i, =i
l-|-> t^t" 3 c^ IS ^ iS 11^ iS
VQ vvy >tQ ""S «VW "VW w o *J^ vw O .^^ vw
. . . ft
r I . o
• • • >*
s |l
'< ^ ^
y< '< '<
3 ;i
^
;i
S»
vw
C^
^«
h
cs
rvy
-e-
C
r^
^
^
x^
^Q.^
"W
ft
I-
C5
a.
-e- -e-
>3 -o
cS.ft
C3 ^
e
=J. ft S
b i.^
C5
o
ft .^
^ f
'■ ^
fH Ci_;
;-! o
DO O
o
114 DEFECTIVE VERBS. [^ 103.
These forms are not all actually found in the New Testament,
though most of them are. Other forms occur in Greek authors,
and, if required, may easily be formed by the usual analogies.
Exercise 13.— On the Defective Verbs.
[The following forms, which should be carefully analyzed, are
all from the " Sermon on the Mount," and illustrate the frequency
with which this class of verbs occurs.
In addition to the meanings of the verbs- given in their para-
digms, and unnecessary, therefore, to repeat, it must be noted that
the prefix els denotes into ; e^, out of; napa, by or aside {napepxofiai,
to pass away) ; and Trpos, in addition to. For further details, see
§ 147, a, 1, and the Vocabulary.]
Forms. — oyjrovrai, tScoo-iv, o?5e, oiSarf, eiTraxn, ippedrj, fiTr?;, epf??,
epovcriy rjkOov, TrapiXdrj, eiaeXBrjTe, €\6a>v, 'e^ekdr^s, eicreX^e, iXderco,
€l(re\$€T€, ela-epxopevoi) ela-eXevcreTat, Trpoarcjieprjs, irp6(T(^epey €l(r€veyKrjs,
f^eXe, (pdyrjTe, (pdycopev.
104. The Second Conjugation, on Yerbs in -jit.
The chief peculiarity of the Second Conjugation is that the
Present and Imperfect tenses, and in many verbs the Second
Aorist active and middle, affix the ancient terminations (see
§ 70)* to the stem, without a connecting vowel. The mood-
vowels, however, of the Subjunctive and Optative are retained.
The old Infinitive ending, -vat, reappears.
The other tenses conform to the paradigm of the First
Conjugation, with occasional exceptions, that will be noted
in their place.
* These terminations are, in the Active, for the Present (as a principal
tense), singular, -/i«, -cri, -n ; plural, -yitv, -re, -vci ; for the Imperfect and
Second Aorist (as historical), singular, -v, -s, -v (generally dropped) ; plural,
-Hfv, -T6, -aav. The ancient Imperative ending, -0», also appears. In several
oases the terminations are slightly modified, as the paradigms will show.
The analogy to the AorUts passive of the i'irst Conjugation will be observed
throughout, in form and accentuation.
§105.] VERBS IN -H-t. 115
105. Modifications of the Stem.
Yerl>s in -^i modify tlie verbal stem in one or more of
three ways.
a. A pure stem lengthens the vowel in the active indicative
singular. Thus from <j>a-, say, we have first person, <\>r)-\i.l\ third
person, (\)r\-(yL
h. Most stems prefix a reduplication in the Present and Imper-
fect tenses. Thus, 8o-, give, first becomes Sw-, as above ; then,
diBoi-fxi. So TiBrjfjii, from 0€-, put. The vowel prefeiTed in this
reduplication is I. The root trra-, place, accordingly makes taTijfxi,
and €-, send, Irjui. Sometimes the stem is reduplicated within
itself (the Attic reduplication, see § 99, a), as, from ova-, profit,
oviurifii. In other cases, a nasal -v- is inserted, modified before
labials into -jt-; thus irpa-, burn, gives nlfjLTrprjfu.
c. Several verbs add the syllable -w- to the stem before the per-
sonal endings in the Present and Imperfect tenses. Pure stems
take -VW-. Thus, SeiK-, show, gives deUvvfii ; and orpo-, strew or
spread (with lengthened vowel, as above), orpcowu/xi.
d. It is convenient, then, to mark two chief classes of verbs
in -fit.
The first exhibits the simple lengthened stem, generally with
reduplication preceding.
The second inserts -w- or -vvu- between the stem and the per-
sonal endings.
106. Paradigms of the First Class.
These also fall into two divisions. The former exhibits the
normal forms ; the latter contains a few verbs, with short mono-
syllabic stems, somewhat irregular in their conjugation, and, from
their importance, requiring separate treatment. To the latter
class belongs the substantive verb : et/ii, / a^^j; flvaij to be.
116
VERBS IN -|ii — FIRST CLASS — ^PARADIGMS. [§107.
107. Regular Forms, Stems A-, E-, 0-.
The tenses conjugated like those of verbs in -« will be given at the
end of the paradigms. The accent throughout is generally thrown back
as far as possible. Exceptions will be noted.
tarrjiiL, to place ; TCOrjfXL, to put ; 6i8(t)/xt, to give.
Stem, o-ra- Oe- do-
Active.
INDICATIVE.
Present,
LO-TrifXL
ridriiiL
bCbcOHL
toT-qs
rCdris
bCbios
L(m](rL{v)
TLdr](n{y)
bLb(t)(Tl(v)
Lardfjiev*
TiOefxcv
biboixev
tardre
HdcTC
bib0T€
t(TTda-L{v)
TLOiaaL(v)
bLb6a(n(v)
Tm perfect.
tarrjv
hier)v
ebCbdiv
Lorrjs
hi6r]s
ibCbois
tcTT]
hidr] or Irie^d
ibCboi or ibCbovt
tcTTdfjiev
€TLd€fieV
€bLbo[Ji€V
tordre
hCdcTc
cbiboTc
to-rdcrav
hCdca-avf
ibiboaav
2nd Aorist,
€(TTrjV
€(TT7]S
€arTrjfX€V
eO^jJLev
eSo/xei;
€(7TriT€
^e€T,
eboT€
€(m](rav
€6€(rav
cboaav
* Rom. iii. 31, has la-rufxev, a doubtful heading, as from a form of the First
Conjugation contracted.
t 2 Cor. iii. 13 ; Acts iii. 2, have iTlBovv, as from a form of the First
Conjugation contracted.
X Matt. XX vi. 2G, &c. As from a form of the First Conj, contracted.
§ 107.] VERBS IN -I" FIRST CLASS — PARADIGMS. 117
Stem, ara- Oe- So-
IMPERATIVE.
Present,
taTT] for ta-radL
Tie^i for TiOen
bChov for UboOi
toraro)
Tl6€T(0
biboTO)
ta-Tare
TiOere
bCb0T€
la-rdTCDaav
TiBirooaav
bLboTdicrav
2x1(1 Aorist,
(TTqdl or (TTOL*
ee<i for eirt
bos for boOi
arrjTCt)
diroi
boTQ)
oT^re
eire
bore
aTriT(oaav
Ohoiaav
boTOio-av
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present,
taro)
tlOQ
bM
laTTJs
TlOfl^
8t8(ris
la-Tjj
riOfi
bM
toTw/xey
riOSiixev
bibcafxev
l(TT7JT€
TiOijre
SiSwre
t(rr&)o-t(r)
Ti$Si(n(v)
bLbS>(n(v)
2nd Aorist,
oTw, K.r.A.
6(0, K.T.X.
b(0, K,T.\.
like Pres.
like Pres.
like Pres.
OPTATIVE.
Present,
iarat-qv
TideC-qv
biboLTJV
laraC-qs
rt^etrys
biboCrjs
loraCri
TLdeir]
btboLV
IcrTOiixev
TiOeiiiev
biboTfjiev
laTOLTe
TiOelre
6t8otT€
iaraiev
TiBeUv
bibolev
2nd Aorist,
o-raC-qv
ddriv
boir]u or 8(i)7;y
a-Taiqs
Oeirjs
boi7]s or bc^ri<s
arairi
eeCrj
boLT] or bdfj
* Only in compound verbs, as aydara (Acts xiL
similar words.
; Eph. V. 14), aad
118 VERBS IN -|ii — FIRST CLASS — PARADIGMS. [§ 107.
Stem, ara- Oe- do-
2nd Aorist,
Present,
2nd Aorist,
Present,
2nd Aorist,
Present,
Imperfect,
Present,
OPTATIVE — continued.
CTTairifiev 6eir]iJ.€V
(TTair]T€ 6€Lr]T€
Lcrravai
arrjvaL
INFINITIVE.
Tidevai
boLrifi€V
boCriT€
boX€V
bibovai
bovvaL
PARTICIPLES.
la-TCLS, -acra, -dv Ti6€Cs,-€La-a,-€V bibovi, -ova-ay
-6v
ards, -aaa, -dv deCs, -elcra, -iv bovs, -ovcra, -6v
Middle and Passive,
INDICATIVE.
I'ora/zat
rCdejJLaL
bibofxai
Xoraa-ai
TiO^aaL or rt^r/
biboaaL
to-rarat
TiOcraL
bCboTUL
lardix^da
Ti6iyi€6a
bibojieda
L(TTacr0e
TL6ea0€
biboaOe
taravTai
TidevTai
bCbovrai
ia-TdfjLYjv
€TLd€lXr]V
(bLb6fxi]v
Xaraao
hid€(To or hidot
ibiboaro or tbCbov
XcrraTO
hiOeTo
ibCboTo
l(Trd^€6a
hLOefieOa
ibiboficOa
taraaOe
€TLd€(Td€
ibiboadc
taravro
hiO^VTO
ibCbovTO
IMPERATIVE.
taraa-o or toro) rtdea-o or tCOov btbocro or bCbov
i(TTd(T9a> TLdiaOui biboa-Ooi
taraa-dc TideaOe bCboo-Oe
iaTda-Oiacrav TiOeaOuiaav 6t6oV^&)<rav
MOT.]
VERBS IN -JJH — FIRST CLASS — PARADIGMS.
119
»tem, crra-
(9e-
So-
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present,
lcrr<S/xat
Tt^co/xat
hibS)\iai
torr/
ri6fi
8t8w
l(TTrJTai
TiOrJTai
hihmai
lG-T(afj.€da
Tiddiix^da
bibiofjieda
laTTJcrOc
TtOija-Oe
bihcaaOc
toTcoz/rat
Tidcdl'Tai
OPT\TIVE.
bLbC)VTaL
Present,
laTaLjxtiv
TLdeiix-qv
biboL[JLr]v
tcrrato
TLOelo
biboLO
laroiTo
tlO^Ito
bibolTO
IdTaiyicOa
TLOeLfxeOa
biboLix^Oa
IcTTaldde
TidelaOe
bLbolade
IcTTaiVTO
TiOelvTo
INFINITIVE.
bibolvTo
Present,
XcrraaOai
PARTICIPLES.
bCboadaL
Present,
\(TTd^^VO^
riOiiievos
SiSo/xei'os
2nd Aorist,
2nd Aorist,
Middle only.
INDICATIVE.
keiixr]v
ebofjLrjv
€6ov {-€(ro)
ebov {-o(ro
iOeTo
iboTo
ieifi^ea
eboiJL^Oa
^Oeo-Oe
€boae€
edeVTO
iboVTO
IMPERATIVE.
6ov {-€oro)
bov {'Oao)
eicrOoi
boarOoi
ei(T6€
boae^
6ia6(jL>(Tav
bocrOooarav
I
120
VERBS IN -jii — FIRST CLASS PARADIGMS. [§ 107.
Stem, 0"ra-
<9€-
5o-
2ad Aorist,
2nd Aorist,
2nd Aorist,
2nd Aorist,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
6S)fiai
dfjrai
OPTATIVE.
Oelo
Oelro
e€iix€6a
INFINITIVE.
Biadai
PARTICIPLES.
6€[X€V0S
6c3/xat
8(1)
b&raL
b(oiJL€6a
bcavTai
b0LfX7]V ^
0010
Sotro
boCix^da
bolcrO^
bolvTo
bocrOai
bofievos
Tenses after the Model of the First Conjugation.
Active.
INDICATIVE.
arrjaci} drjau) bcaao)
€(rTr](ra €dr]Ka (bcoKa
^(rn)Ka re^etxa S/Soo/ca
€(TTr]Kas '
or €(rTafji€V*
Future;
1st Aorist,
Perfect,
• This syncopated or shortened form ia very usual So in Perf., Inf. and
Part.
§ 107.] VERBS IN -Jii— FIRST CLASS — PARADIGMS.
Stem, ora- Oe- So-
121
Perfect,
INDICATIVE — continued,
karriKaTe
or €(TTaT€
•
Pluperfect,
kcrTriKa(TL{v)
or 'i(TTa(n{v)
€i(TTrjK€Li; or (e)re^e^K€«^
IMPERATIVE.
{k)h€h(aK€lV
1st Aorist,
Perfect,
(TTTJa-OV
i(TTr}K€
Ti6€LK€
bib(i)K€
1st Aorist,
Perfect,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
arrjaQ}
8a>o-co*
bebcaKoi
OPTATIVE.
Future,
1st Aorist,
Perfect,
a-TTia-OLfiL
(TTYia-aiixi
kcPT7\K0llXl
Orja-oifjiL
TeOeiKOLiJLi
Swo-oi/xt
bebcaKOifXL
INFINITIVE.
Future,
1st Aorist,
Perfect,
(TT7}<rai
k(TT7]K^VaL,
or ka-rdvaL
BrjaeLV
b(a(T€LV
bebcanivM
PARTICIPLES.
Future,
1st Aorist,
Perfect,
arrfa-aiv
(TTrjcras
k(rTr]K(as,-VLa,
-OS re^et/ccfls
b<aa-(i)v
b€b(*)K(6s
f
or eoTws,
-wcra, -ojjf
* See John xvii.
occurs. The best
t See § 38.
2; E-ev. viii. 3, xiii. 16, in which passages the form Sdlxrp
editors, however, read Baaei, fut. indie.
122 VERBS IN -|xt — FIRST CLASS PARADIGMS. [§ 107-
Stem, crra- Oe- do-
Middle and Passive,
INDICATIVE.
Perfect,
Pluperfect,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect,
karafxivos w TeOeifxivos oj
OPTATIVE.
beboixivos w
Perfect,
karaixivos ctrjv TeOeiixivoi dr]v
INFINITIVE.
bebofxivos dr]v
Perfect,
ko-TaaOai reBda-dat
PARTICIPT-F.S.
SeSoV^ai
Perfect,
karaixivos TeOeijxhos
Middle only.
INDICATIVE.
bebofjih'os
Future,
1st Aorist,
■ (TTrja-oiJiaL Orjo-ofxaL
€(rT7ja-diJir]V
6(oo-o/xai
1st Aorist,
IMPERATIVE.
(TTTjaaL
1st Aorist,
SDBJUNCTIVE.
arrjacoixai
OPTATIVE.
Future,
1st Aorist,
aTrjcTOLixrjv Orja-oCjJirjv
aT-qaaLjJ.'qv
INFINITIVE.
baxToCfirjv
Future,
1st Aorist,
(TTT]<ja(jOai
PARTICIPLES.
b(a(T€(r6ai
Future,
Ist Aorist,
(TTr](j6.\X^V0i
baio-ofxeuos
§ 107.] VERBS IN -jii — FIRST CLASS— PARADIGMS. 123
Stem, crra- 6e- do-
Passive only.
INDICATIVE.
Future,
1st Aorist,
crraOricroiiai T€0ri(ro[xaL
iardd-qv hiOqv
IMPERATIVE.
boOrja-ofiaL
kh66r]v
1st Aorist,
o-rdO-qTL Ti0r]Ti
SUBJUNCTIVE.
h6d7]Tl
1st Aorist,
araOcio redco
OPTATIVE.
hoOoi
Future,
aTa0r)(ToCixr]v TeOrjaoLixrjv
bo6r)(roifJir]V
1st Aorist,
aTaO^Crjv reOeCrjv
INFINITIVE.
boOeCrjv
Future,
aTaOrjaea-OaL T^drjo-eaOaL
bodrj(r€(TOai
1st Aorist,
(TTadfjvaL TeBrjvai
PARTICIPLES.
bodrjvaL
Future,
a-TaOrja-ojxevos TcO-qo-ojievos
boOqadjievos
1st Aorist,
(TTadeCs, -ela-a, re^et?, -eTo-a,
-h -iv
VERBALS.
boOeCs, -eto-a.
oraro? Q^ros
boTos
o-Tarios Oerio^
borios
Note. — It "will be observed that several Aorist forma are omitted: the
alternative tense being in use. For example : in the Active indicative of
Tierjui and Bidwfii, the First Aorist is employed for the singular, the Second
for the plural, while in the Middle throughout '/o-ttj/xz has the First, riertfii
and SiSujfxi the Second. The Active First Aorist of iVrij/itj is tiansitive, the
Second Aorist intratisitivet as will be shown hereafter.
124 VERBS IN -|lt — FIRST CLASS REMARKS. [§ 108.
108. Remarks on the Paradigms.
1. The First Aorist Active of riBrjfxi and dldafii, and, as will be
Been hereafter, of irjui also, takes -k- instead of -a-- for tense-
characteristic. This peculiarity is confined to these three verbs ;
and their First Aorist is found only in the Indicative mood.*
2. The Perfect tenses of lorr^iii, from the stem (rra-, take the
hard breathing, with €- as an " improper reduplication ;" ea-rrjKa.
The augmented tenses have I-, as ea-rrjv ; but the Imperfect retains I.
3. The First Aorist of lorrjfii is transitive, the Second intran-
sitive, in meaning : earrjo-a, I placed; earrjv, I stood.
4. A verb, ot^kco (intransitive), to standi of the First Conjuga-
tion, derived from the Perfect of (rrct-, is found in a few forms in
the New Testament. It must be distinguished from the Perfect
forms of loTTjfii.
109. Yerbs belonging to this Class.
The number of verbs which conform to the above paradigms
is very small. The principal are subjoined.
A-STEMS. — Like to-rT^/At, are conjugated the following : —
a. 1. 6vivr}fj,if to benefit (stem ova-, with Attic reduplication), only
once in the New Testament; Second Aorist, Optative, middle,
ovaifXTjv (Phile. 20), may I have joy /
2. irlfiirprjfii, to huim (stem irpo-, reduplicated, with nasal), only
once in the New Testament, Present Infinitive, passive, irifiirpacrOai
(Acts xxviii. 6), to be bumedf or injiamed.
3. <l>r)iiij to say (stem ^o^). The Present Indicative is usually
enclitic, except second person singular, otherwise oxytone ; third
person singular, (f)rj<ri(v); plural, ^ao-i(i/); Imperfect, e(f>i]v; third
person singular, fcfit], (See § 103, 7).
* To this remark there is one exception if the reading S<&<rp (on which
see note, p. 121) be genuine.
I 109.] VERBS IN -Jit FIRST CLASS REMARKS. 125
4. xp^j *'^ *'^ fitting (stem xp*"^)? impersonal. (See §§ 101, 171.)
Once in the New Testament (James iii. 10).
h. Deponent Verbs. — 1. bvvafiai, to be able (stem Swa-). Present
Indicative, -[xai, -o-ai (or in MSS., dvvrj), -rai, a r.X. ; Imperfect,
fbvvdfxrjv, or (witli double augment) qdwdixijv ; Present Subjunctive,
hvvcojiai] Optative, dwalixTjv ; Infinitive, dvvaa-dai; Participle, dwa-
fxevos'. Verbal, Sui/ards-, possible, capable; Puture, dvvf)croiiai', Pirst
Aorist, edvvfjdrjv, or T]8vvf]6rjv (occasionally in MSS. r]bvvda6r]v).
2. eTriaraiiat, to know, or to /eel sure, i.e., "to take one's stand
upon " (stem em, preposition, and -a-ra-, but without aspiration),
only in Present in New Testament; Indicative, -fiai, -aai, -rai,
-fieda, -a6e, -vrai j Participle, iTno-rdjievos .
3. Kpefxaixai, to hang, neuter (stem Kp€|ia-)j Present Indicative,
third person, KpefMarat ; plural, Kpefxavrai j Participle, Kpeixdjxevos ;
Pirst Aorist, eKpeixda-Bijv ; Subjunctive, Kpefxaa-do) ; Participle, Kpf-
fiao-BeiSt
E-STEMS. Deponent Verbs. — 1. jjnm, to be seated (stem «-),
properly a Perfect middle or Passive, as from ea>, / set, or seat;
eoixai, I seat myself (like eCofiai ; see also KaOi^a) ; ^p.ai, I have seated
myself, and so am now sitting. Only found in the New Testament
compounded with the preposition Kard, dovjn. KaO^fxai, I am
sitting down, second person, Kad^, for KaOri^ai ; Imperative, KdOov,
for Kddrjo-o; Infinitive, KadijaBai; Participle, KaOrjfievos ', Imperfect
Indicative, cKaOrjprjv, properly a Pluperfect.
2. Ke^fiai, to lie down (stem kc-), properly also a Perfect, "I have
laid myself," or " have been laid down ;" Infinitive, Keta-dat ; Par-
ticiple, Keifievos ; Imperfect Indicative, iKciprjv, -ao, -to.
110. The three stems, lo--, 1-, and h, being marked by
special peculiarities, must be placed alone. The first of the
three is by far the most important, as the stem of the sub-
stantive verb, esse, to be. With the personal termination, -p,
the stem (€o--/xt) becomes d^iC, I am ; and with the Infinitive
ending, -vai, etj^at, to be.
126
VERBS IN -(11 — FIRST CLASS — SPECIAL FORMS. [§ 110.
Several tenses are wanting in the conjugation of this verb, which
is as follows : —
Stem, ^cr-
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present, am.
€t for eo-o-t
€Ofl€V
kcrri
ecrrt
€1(tC{v)
Imperfect or Aorist, was.
Tjv or rj}x7]v
rjfjiev or ijfjLcOa
Future, shall be.
eaofJLaL
€(rri
€(TTai (for eo-erat)
^(TOVTai
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Be thou.
taOi
ioTTc
iaro) or tJt(o
ecrrojcray
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
,
Present, mai/ be.
j5
OPTATIVE MOOD.
Present, might be.
€tr)aav
§ 110.] VERBS IN -1*1 — FIRST CLASS SPECIAL FORMS. 127
INFINITIVE.
Present, to he, elvai. Future, to be about to be, eo-ecr^at.
PARTICIPLES.
Present, beinc/, wi', ova-a, ov ; gen. ovros, oiVrys, ovtoSj k-tA..
Future, about to be, ea-oixevos, -t), -ov, -ov, -r]s, -ov, k.t.X.
Note on Accentuation. — In the Present Indicative, with the exception
of the second person singular, this verb is an enclitic, excepting (1)
where it follows a paroxytone, when it retains its accent as above ; and
(2) in the third person, where it is di. predicate, when it becomes paroxy-
tone, as ^(TTi ©eds, there is a God. It is also paroxytone after ws, ovk,
€t Kolf TovT, ciAA,'. Thus, ovK effTt, it is not ; tovt* eari, that is to say.
111. !N^ot unlike tlie substantive verb in conjugation, and
therefore to be carefully distinguished from it, are tlie verbs
et/ut (stem 1-), go, and tryjut (stem I-), send. Neither of them is
found in the ISTew Testament,* except in composition. It
will suffiQC to give a few forms of etfxt, to show the differences
between it and the substantive verb ; while the most impor-
tant compound of tr/jut is subjoined in full.
Forms of et/x6, to go (stem 1-) : —
Ind.-
-Pres.
etjoti
d
elcTL
LfJL€V
LT€
iao-i(i;)
f)
Imp.
fl€LV
fl^LS
y€L
fl€i[Ji€V
fl^LT^
fjecrav
Imper.
Wl
LTCO
ire
LTuxrav
SUBJ.-
-Pres.
tco
trjs
Iv
LODfJieV
XrjT^
tcocniv)
Opt.-
-Pres.
'iOLfJiL
toLS
XoL
L0LIX€V
to ire
LOL€V
Inf.—
-Pres.
Uvai
Part.
—Pres.
I6v
lovaa
lov
* Some MSS. read in John vii. 34, .S6, for tlfxi, I am, elfii, I {will) go.
This present tense has in classic Greek a Future significance, equivalent to
the English idiom, I am going.
128
VERBS IN -|ii — FIRST CLASS.
[§ 112.
112. Conjugation of trjfiiy to send, in its Compound, acpCrjixL.
The stem is I-, which, reduplicated, gives Irjfxi. Prefixed is the
preposition dno, from, away from ; the o being lost before t by-
elision, and the it changed by the aspirate into <J).
Hence d(f>irjni, to send away, let go (permit), forgive.
The tenses which follow the analogy of the First Conjugation are
included, so far as necessary, in the following paradigm, and will
readily be traced.
INDICATIVE.
Active.
-Lr]s or -ets,* -Lr](n{v)
-L€T€ -La<TL[v) ov a(pLOv(n{v)
7](f)L€S r](l)L€
1st Aor., a(l)r]Ka. (See § 108, 1.)
Pluperf., acl)€LK€LV
Pres., sing., ac^i-qiii
„ plur., -i€fJi€V
Impf., sing.,t 7](f)Lov
Fut. , a(pr\(T(ii
Perf., cK^eiKa
2Aor., sing, wanting. Plural, d(/)et/xei' acl)€XTe a(f>€laav
IMPERATIVE.
Pres., a(f)L€L
2 Aor., a(f)€s
acfyUro)
a<p€T(0
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres., a(f)L&, -tf/?, -if}
2 Aor., d^w, -fjs, 'fj
optative.
Pres., acpieCr^v, -r]s, -rj
2 Aor., a<l>d-r]Vi -t;?, -r/
infinitive.
Pres., d<|)teVai
participles.
Pres., d</)tet9, -ilcraf -iv
Plural, a(f)i€T€
a^iiT(£i(Tav
iL(piT(0(rav
a(f)L€X[X€V, -etre, -eUv
&<l)€i[Ji€V, -etre, -etev
2 Aor., d(|)etvat
2 Aor., d<^€^?, -eto-a, '4v
• Rev. ii."20, critical add. f Preposition augmented. Plural wanting.
§ 112.] VERBS IN -|At — FIRST CLASS. 129
Middle and Passive.
INDICATIVE.
I Pres., dffyUfxat, -crat, -rat Plural, acf)L€ii€6a, -aOe, -vrai
Imf., a(})L€[Jir]v, -(TO, -TO „ a4>U[Ji€da, -aOe, -vto
Perf., sing., a(f)€liJiaL a^eiaai , a(^etrat
„ plur., a(f)eLfM€0a acfyeicrde CK^eivTai or d(/)ea)i;rat*
Plup., a(f)€LiJLr]V acpclcro acfyelro, k.t.X,
IMPERATIVE.
Pres., a(f)i€(To or acpCov a^iiaOoi, k.t.X.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres., d(|)ta)/[xat, -irj, -f^rat, k.t.X. -LcafieOa, -CrjaOe, -ioiVTai
OPTATIVE.
Pres., a(pLOLiJ.r]v or cKpi^i^riv, -oio or -eto, -cnro or -etro, k.t.X.
INFINITIVE.
Pres., acpCeo-Oai
PARTICIPLE.
Pres., acf)L£iJi€vos
Middle only.
INDICATIVE.
Put., acfyrja-ofxaL 2 Aor., dc^et/xrjr, as Plup.
IMPERATIVE.
2 Aor., a(f)0Vf a(l)4(T0<ti 6,^€(t6€, a(f)€cr6oi(Tav
SUBJUNCTIVE.
2 Aor., a^S>iiai, -fj, -rJTat, k.t.X.
OPTATIVE.
Put., acprjcroLiJLrjv 2 Aor., acpoifJLrjv, -oio, -otro
INFINITIVE.
Put., a(f)ria-€<jda(. 2 Aor., cKpiaOai
PARTICIPLES.
Put., acprjaoiJL^vos' 2 Aor., d^cjotei^os
Passive only.
INDICATIVE.
Put., a(f)€6ri(ToiJiaL 1 Aor., acfyeOrjv
• Tliia is the more common form, and is taken from the Doric dialect.
130 VERBS IN -|ii — FIRST CLASS. [§ 112.
IMPERATIVE.
1 Aor., acjyeOrjTL
SUBJUNCTIVE.
1 Aor., acpeOca
OPTATIVE.
Fut., a(f)ed7]aoifirjv 1 Aor., a(p€ddr]V
INFINITIVE.
Fut., a({)€6ri(r€(T6aL 1 Aor., dcpeOrivai
PARTICIPLES.
Fut., d(f)€6r](r6ix€vos 1 Aor., dcp^OeCs
VERBALS.
dcperos d(j)€Tios
113. Second Class, Yerbs in -vv[jll or -vvvfXL.
1. These verbs have no Second Aorist.*
2. Most of them have a kindred form of the First Conjugation,
in -vvw or -vvvw. From this form are taken — often, the Indicative
Present and Imperfect, with the Present Infinitive ; generally,
the Present Participle; and always, the Subjunctive and Optative
moods. Thus, from 8€ik-, show, we sometimes find the forms deiKuva,
-cLs, -ei, deiKvveiv, dciKvvcov ; while the only Present Subjunctive recog-
nised is deiKvvo), -r}s, -rj ; and the onlj Present Optative, deiKiruoijJu.
In the paradigms, these forms of the First Conjugation are marked
by a dagger (f).
3. All the tenses but the Present and Imperfect are formed from
the stem (without -w-). These are placed separately for comparison.
114. Paradigms of beUvvfjn, to show, and (cavvvfiL, to gird.
Stem (consonant), SeLK' (vowel), ^-
Active.
INDICATIVE.
Pres., beUvvfiL or fSeiKwo) C<avvvp.L or fC^viwo)
' b€Ui;v(n(v) k.t.A. C^vvv(tl(v) k.t.X.
* With one exception, in classic Greek, (Tfifypv/Mt, to quench; 2nd Aor., ^a0riv.
§ 114.]
VERBS IN -|ii — SECOND CLASS.
131
Stem (consonant), SeiK- (vowel), ^o-
beLKVvTe
beUvvcni^v)
Impf., ibeUvvv or feb^iKwov
ibeLKPvs ibeUvves,
ibeUvv
€b€LKVVIJL€V
ebeLKvvre
ibeUvvaav
K.T.k.
^(xiVVVT€
€((avvvv or feCoiVVVOv
(((ovvvs i^uivvves, k.t.X.
€C(^VVV(TaV
IMPERATIVE.
Pres., beLKvv or beUvvOi
beLKVVTO)
b€LKVVT€
beLKVvToxrav
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres., fbeLKvvco
OPTATIVE.
PreS.,f b€LKVVOL[JLL
INFINITIVE.
Pres., beLKvvvai or '\b^iKVveiv
PARTICIPLES.
Pres., b€iKvvs, -Oo-a, or •\buKvv()iv ^cavvvSi -vaaj or ffcoj-'i'i^'coi'
((iivvv or ((avvvdi
Ccovvvre
^iOVVVTO)(TaV
fC^^VinJOLfJLL
(oivvvvaL or fCoivvveiV
Middle and Passive.
INDICATIVE.
Pres., beiKvvfxai b^iKvv^ieOa
Impf,
b^lKVVCTai
b^iKVvrai
, €b€LKVV[Jir]V
ibeLKVvao
cb^lKVVTO
beiKwaOe
buKvvvrai
ib€LKVV[JL€6a
^b^LKWo-Qe
ib^LKVVVTO
CoovvvfJiaL
CcovvvauL
iCcovvviJLVv
€^(aVVV(TO
IMPERATIVE.
Pres., b€LKvv(To b^UvvcrBe
b€LKvva-d(i) b^LKvvo-Qcoaav
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres., fb€LKvv(i)iJiaL
(ovvvauoo
"fC'^wvoifxaL
CoiVvvfieOa
((.ovvvvrai
k^iovvvvro
CcovvvaBe
^oiVVvarOooaav
132 VERBS IN -|i.i— SECOND CLASS. [§ 114.
Stem (consonant), SetK- (vowel), ^-
OPTATIVE.
Pres.jf b€LKVV0LiJi7}v fC(i)vwoCiJLr}v
INFINITIVE.
Pres., bsLKwa-OaL or fbeLKVvea-Oai ^(avwddai or f fa)z;i/veo-^at
TENSES AFTER THE MODEL OP THE
FIRST CONJUGATION.
Active.
INDICATIVE.
Fut., Se^fo) fwo-o) 1 Aor., iSetfa efcoo-a
Perf., hih^ixa efwKa Plup., (e)6e6€t;(€ti^ €(i)fw/c€tz;
IMPERATIVE.
1 Aor., hei^ov (facrov
SUBJUNCTIVE.
1 Aor., 8etf&) fcoo-o) Perf., 8c8etxa> efaKw
OPTATIVE.
Fut., beC^oLixt ^(acTOiiJLL 1 Aor., Se^^ai/zt C'^a-aifxt
Perf., beb^CxpLfiL kQaKoiiii
INFINITIVE.
Fut., hd^eiv C^a€iv 1 Aor.,8etfat fScrat
Perf., Sedeix^Vat ffo/ceWt
Middle and Passive.
INDICATIVE.
Perf., bibcLyixaL efcoo-juat Plup,, ibcbeCyfirjv ^(t)fa>(rjUT;i;
IMPERATIVE.
Perf., 6e8eifo SeSet^^co, /c.r.A., Ifocro efwo-^co, k.t.A.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perf,, bebeuyixevos Si i^^a-fiivos ca
OPTATIVE.
Perf., 5e5eiyjueW e??7P ^ftotr/x^vos etrjj'
§ 114.] VERBS IN -V-i — SECOND CLASS. 133
Stem (consonant), deiK- (vowel), ^o-
INFimTlVE.
Perf., behelxOcLL cfwo-^a-
Middle only.
INDICATIVE.
Fut., 8et£ojuiat ^(aaoixat 1 Aor., €8etf(i/xr/z^ €C(a(rdfi'i]v
IMPERATIVE.
1 Aor., Set^at fcSo-at
SUBJUNCTIVE.
1 Aor., 8e^fa)/!xat fc5<r&)juiat
OPTATIVE.
Fut., het^oiixriv C^^aoLfx-qv 1 Aor., bet^aCix-qv fwcrat/xr^v
INFINITIVE.
Fut., beC^ecrdaL ^(aa-eaOai 1 Aor., b^t^aa-Qai ^(oa-acrOaL
PARTICIPLES.
Fut., 5ei^o/xeros ^(aaojicvos 1 Aor., beL^dfjievos C^^adixevos
Passive only.
INDICATIVE.
Fut., bu\6ri<joiiai fa)o-^?}a-ojuat 1 Aor., kbei\6r]v k^(a(TOi]v
IMPERATIVE.
1 Aor., b€LxOr}TL
Ccoa-OtjTL
SUBJUNCTIVE.
1 Aor., 8etx^^
icaadSi
OPTATIVE.
Fut., beLx67](Toiii7]v
1 Aor., betxOeLTjv
CcaaO-qa-oCfJi'qv
C(0(T6€Lr]V
Il^i'lNITIVE.
Fut., beixOria-caOai
1 Aor., b€Lx6rjv(^i'
C(iia-dri(T€(T6ai
VERBALS.
beLKTOS 8etKT€0S
(fiixrTos
fctfcrreos
134 verbs in -(ai — second class. [^ 115.
115. Remarks on the Paradigms.
a. The quantity of the v is marked in a sufficient number of
cases to indicate the rest. Where in the first class of verbs in -jxt,
the stem-vowel <x, €, or o, is made long, the v of the second class is
also lengthened. Thus TlBrjyn, Sei/ci/v/xi, but rlBefievj deUvvfiev.
h. Verbs of this class seldom occur in the New Testament, with
the exception of beiKwyn and anokXvixi. (See below.)
116. Yerbs with Consonant-stems, like h^Uwiii.
1. fxiyvvfiif to mix (stem, \>.iy-), only found in the New Testament
in forms like the First Conjugation; First Aorist, efic^a; Perfect
Participle, fxcjiiyiuii.
2. oXXv/xt, to destroy, to lose (stem, 6X-, or -oXc) ; hence oX-wyn,
and with the v assimilated, oKkvfXL), only found in the New Testa-
ment wdth the prefixed preposition, airo. Present Indicative,
aTToXXu/it ; Middle and Passive, oTroXXv/iai. Chiefly found in tenses
derived from collateral stem diroXe-, Active Future, aTroXeVoj, once
aivokai y* First Aorist, oTrciXeo-a ; Perfect, with neuter meaning,
I perish ! diroXoiXa ; Middle Future, a.7r6Xovfxai ; Second Aorist,
aTTcoXo'/LiTyi/ ; Present Participle, ol aTroXKvfxevoi often, tJie perishing.
3. ofivvni, to swear (stem, -6^ or -6}jio-). The forms used in the
New Testament are Present, as of First Conjugation, ofxvvoi, oiivveu
(but in Mark xiv. 71, the best MSS. read ofivvvai) ; First Aorist,
afjioaa \ Infinitive, ofioa-ai, from 6^6-.
4. pTjyvvni, to tear (stem, paY-). Present Passive Indicative, third
person plural, pr)yvvvTai (Matt. ix. 17); but generally with forms as
from prjo-cra, pr]^(i>.
117. Yerbs with Yowel-stems, like C^vwiml.
1. A-STEMS. — Kcpdvuvfiij to mix (stem, K€pd-). Only twice, First
Aorist, (Kepaaa (Rev. xviii. 6) ; Perfect Participle Passive, kckc-
paa-pevos (Rev. xiv. 10).
♦ 1 Cor. I 19, from LXX.
§ 117.] VERBS IN -p — SECOND CLASS. 135
2. E-STEMS. — ej/wfit, to clotJie (stem, fc-), only found with the
preJSxed preposition, ayi(^i, about. Present Active Indicative, third
person singular, a^<^teWuo-t(i/) (Matt. vi. 30 ; Luke xii. 28), and
Perfect Passive Participle, with augment prefixed to the prepo-
sition, TjfKpiea-fifvov (Matt. xi. 8 ; Luke vii. 25).
Kopevpvfxi, to satisfy (stem, Kop€-), First Aorist Passive Participle,
Kop€(r6ds (Acts xxvii. 38); Perfect Passive Participle, Ke<op€(rp,evos
(1 Cor. iv. 8).
a^ivvvpi, to extinguish (stem, o-pe-), Future Active, (t^cVcu ; Future
Passive, o-^eaBrja-opai.
3. 0-STEMS. — po)vpvixi, to strengthen (stem, po-), found only in the
Perfect Middle Imperative, tppaxro ; plural, eppoaade, be strong !
i.e., Farewell.
(TTpoavvvpi, to strew, or spread (stem, oTpo-). Present forms as
from aTpoivvvco ; First Aorist Active, eo-rpaxra ; Perfect Participle
Passive, ea-rpco/ieVo?.
If the ahove verbs, with their significations, are now committed %o
memory, some trouble may be saved at subsequent stages.
Exercise 14.— On the Second Conjugation, or Verbs
in -F.
[The following examples of verbs in -jii occur in the " Sermon
on the Mount," and are here presented for analysis. In addition
to explanations already given (see Exercise 13, on the Defective
Verbs), it must be noted that the prefix utto- {from, away from),
with the verb blboipi, has the sense of return; dnodidcopi, to ^we
back; and eVt-, with the same verb, may be rendered over; ov-n-
signifies against.]
Forms. — eo-nv, eare, ta-rat, laBi, ci, earci, eaeaSe, tj, avra, ovres^
TiBfacTiv, rrpoa-deivai, 7rpo<TTedf)(T€Tai, dvTiarrjvai, 86s, 86to>, dibov, OTJoSaJy^
TTapaSft), ScoTf, eTTtScocrei, dodrjcreTai, didovai, a(p€S, dcpiepev, d(f)^Te, acptrji ft,
bvvaaai, bvvarai, bvvao'de, Keipevi], dnoXijrai, opoaai, opoajjs, prj^ci'TiVf
dp(f)uvvvaip.
m
136 VERBS EXERCISES. [§ 117.
Exercise 15.— General, upon the Verbs.
*^* The learner should now be expert in trackig any verbal
form to its stem. As a test of proficiency, the following list
of verbs is subjoined, taken in order from the Second Epistle
to the Thessalonians. Let the stem,, conjugation, class, voice,
mood, tense, and, when necessary, the number and person, of
every one be written down ; if possible, without reference to
any paradigm. Prefixes not belonging to the root are printed
in thick type. The Yocabulary or Lexicon must be consulted
for the meaning of the words.
CHAPTER I.
3. Ei;(api(rTeif, 6(^eiko}xev, vtvipav^dvei, TrXeovd^ec. 4. Kav^dcrdai (how
do you distinguish in such a word between the First and Second
Conjugations 1), avex^aBe. 5. KaTa^ia)dr]vai, ndax^Te. 6. avTarrodovvai,
OXl^ovctiv (Participle). 7. ffki^o^evois. 8. SiSoi^oy, dboa-i, itraKovovai
(Participle). 9. riaova-iv. 10. eXBrj, Ivbo^ao-dTJvai, Oavfiaa-drjvai, iriarev-
ixciv (Participle), iiricrTevdr]. 11. irpoa-evxofxeOa, d^Kao-rj, Trkqpoicrrj.
12. ivbo^a(T6rj.
CHAPTER II.
1. *Epo)Ta>fiev. 2. aaXevdrjvai, OpoeiaOai, IvearTjKev. 3. ^aTrarrja-Tj,
eXdrjj atroKakv<pd^. 4. avriKeifievos, vTnpaipopevos, Xeyofxevov, KaQiaai,
diroSeiKi/vvra. 5. p.vrip.ovev€Tey eXeyov. 6. Korexov, o'ldare, atroKaXytpdrivai.
7. ivepyeuai, KaT€Xo>v, yevrjrai. 8. atroKaXvcpdrja-eTai, avaXaxrei, Karap-
yT)a€t. 10. atroXXvpevoiSf ide^avro, acoBrivai. 11. nepyJAei, TriareCo-at
(distinguish this from Optative forms, as in ver. 17). 12. KpiBaa-i,
TicTTevcravTes, €v8oKT)(ravT€^, 1 3. oc^eiXpfiei/, ^vxapiarelv, rjyamjpevoi,, elXero
{iCXaro is read by Lachmann and Tischendorf; see § 97, note).
li. €KdXe(T€v, 15. (TTrjKeTe (see § 108, 4), /cparetre, eSibdxBrjTe. 16.
dyaTTTjdas, dovs. 17. irapaKoXeVai (Optative), arrjpL^ai (Optative).
CHAPTER III.
1 . IIpo<reu;(ecr^e, rp^xVi ^o^d^rjrai. 2. pvada>p-€V. 3. aTrjpl^ci, (pvXd^ei.
4. 7r€7roi6ap.ev, 'irapayyeXXopev, iroielTe, Troi^a-ere. 5. Korevdvvat (Opta-
tive). 6. (TTeXXeadai, trtpnraTovvros, trapeXa^e. 7. pip.elcrOai, fjraKTr)-
crapev (from dra/crc'o)). 8. €(f)dyop€v, epya^opevoi, Ivi^apijo-ai. 9. exop.fv,
ba>p,€V, 10. TJixev,Trapr)yyeXXop,ev,deX€i,epyd^e(r6ai,e(T6UTa>. 11. aKovofitp,
§ 117.] EXERCISES. 137
fpya^'o/zeVou?, TTipKepya^ofievovs- 12. irapaicaXovfxev, icrQlwcTLv. 13. cK/ca-
KrjcrrjTe, KoXoTToiovvTes. 14. viraKoveij (TTjfxeiova-de, frvvavafxiyvvade, ivrpaTrt],
15. fjyclo-6ef vovdeTelre. 16. dcorj. 17. ypd<po).
Exercise 16.— Short Sentences.
I. The Beatitudes (Matt. v. 3-10).
These and the following Sentences are given chiefly as practice
in applying the rules of conjugation and declension. As the
clauses are complete in sense, they necessarily involve the princi-
ples of Syntax ; but no difficulties in construction will be found.
For the use of the Cases, see 11. The references in the Notes to
succeeding parts of the work will also be useful.
Observe that throughout the Beatitudes the substantive verb are
must be supplied with the predicate, fiaKapioi, blessed. (See § 166.) ori
is because (§ 136, 6).
1. Mafcuptot ol 7rr<B;(0i ra Tri/eufiart '^ on avrojv^ icrriv f} ^acrCKeia tcov
ovpava>v.
2. pampLOi ol rrevdovvTes '^ on avrol 7rapaK\r}6rj(TOVTai.
3. puKapioL ol irpaels '* on avTo\ KXijpovopr^crovcn ttjv yrjv.
4. fiaKapLoi ol TreivcovTes Koi bi-\lra>vTes^ ttjv diKaioavvrjv ' on avrol X^P'
TacrOrjcrovTai.
5. paKapioL ol iXerjpoves' on avTo\ i\(r]dr)(T0VTai.
6. fiampioL ol Kadapol rrj Kap8ia ' on avrol tov Qeov oyj/ovrai.^
7. paKdf)ioi ol elprjvoTTOioi ' on avrol viol' Qeov Kkrjdrjaourai.
8. fiaKaptoL ol debicoypevoL eveKev° diKaioavvrjs ' on avrav ecrnv rj
jSacTiXeia tS>v ovpavav.
1 Dative : in {the) spirit, as hereafter explained, § 280, /. Compare rr}
Kapdiq,, 6.
2 Of them = theirs.
3 The mourning ones = those who mourn, § 200. Compare the Parti-
ciples in sentences 4, 8.
* See § 39.
5 Hungering and thirsting /or righteousness (ace), § 281, a.
6 See § 103^(4).
7 Nominative after a copulative verb. See § 165, note.
8 For the sake of (gen. ), § 133.
138 EXEKCISES. [§ 117.
II. From John i.
Prepositions,
anoy with Gen., /row, of (a place).
didj „ 6y means of.
e'K, „ out of.
cv, with Dat., in, with plural,
among.
TTapd, with Gen., from (of persons).
npos, with Ace, unto, with (§307,
r,2).
Further details, Ch. VI., and Syntax.
Adverb used as Preposition.
Xtoplsi with Gen., without.
Negative Adverbs.
ov, not.
ov8e, not even.
Conjunctions.
Kai, and (§ 136, 1).
CDS, as (§ 136, 2).
Yerses 1-5.
*'EiV d.p)(rj rjv 6 Xoyos , Ka\ 6 \6yos rjv rrpos tov Qfbv, Koi Geoy rjv 6
"koyos.^ ovTos rjv ev dpxij npos tov Qeop. Tlavra 8i avTov eyevero,^
Koi xoapls avTov eyevero ovdc ev, o ykyovev. iv otrw ^(bj) rfv, Koi tj ^coff
rjv TO (f>S)5 Ta>v dv6pa>Tr<ov, Koi to (fiats ev Tjj (tkotlo, (palvei, koi tj (TKoria
avTo ov KUTtXa^ev.
Yei-se 14.
Kai 6 \6yos (rap^ iyeveTO, Koi eaKfjvaaev ev fip-lv, (jcai eBeatrdpLeOa ttjv
ho^av avTov, bo^av las fiovoyevovs irapa TraTpos ') nXrjprjs ;(a/JiTOf koi
dkrjdelas.
Verses 46, 47.
Evpia-Kci ^iknnros tov NadavaffK, koI Xeyei ai/Tw,^ *0i/* eypayjre Mbia-rjs
(V TO) j/o/xa> Koi oi 7rpo^i]TaL,^ evpf)Kapev, 'lT](rovv^ tov vibv tov 'laxrrjKf)
Tov'^ dnb tia^apeT. koX eiirev auro)^ NadavarjX, *Ek Na^apcr bvvaTai ti
ayadov elvai',^ Xeyei avTa^ ^iXiinros,''Epxov koi i5f.
^ 6 \6yos is the subject, § 206.
2 Singular verb, with plural neuter nominative, § 173.
3 To him, dative after the verb of saying, § 278, b.
* Understand /«*?» as antecedent : "him whom," § 347,
* Understand ^ypai^iav.
« (Namely) Jesus, in apposition (§ 177) with the antecedent (2) above,
? Simply refers to vl6u (§ 230, a), not to be translated.
■ The infinitive dependent on Svvarcu (§ 389, a) : can anything good be.
§ 117.] EXERCISES. 139
III. Selected Sentences.
be, but.
ort, tllCtt,
Prepositions (additional). i Conjunctions,
fls, with Ace, into. \
eVi, „ to. j
fXfTci, with Gen., together with. \
1. ^'Eroifidaare^ ttju 686v Kvpiov.
2. *Ij/cro{), eXerja-ov [xe.
3. Qapcrei^f eyetpot^, (^com (re.
4. H 7rl(rTi9 (Tov aecroiKe ere.
5. *A(fie(ouTaL (tov al afxapTiai.
6. 2vvedpafi€'" irpos avTovs nas 6 Xaos.
7. MereKaXeo-aro tovs Trpea-^VTepovs Trjs iKKXrjatas.
8. MaKapiov ecrri 8i86uaL paXkov rj Xap^dveiv,
9. Knlaapa^ eTnKeKXrjaai, enl Kaicrapa TTopeva-r].
10. *Avd(TTT]di^, KOI arrjOi enl tovs Tro'Say (Tov.
11. *H TTiaris vpoov KaTayyeXXeraL iv oX(o T<5 Koa-pto.
12. ^Ev(ppdvdr]T€^f edinj, pera tov Xaov avTov.
13. *Qs cro(f)6s apx^iTCKTOiV SepeXiov TedeiKa, aXXos 5e eVot/coSo/xet.
14. ^Oelpovcnv rjOrj xpw6*^ opiXiai KaKai.
15. *H dya.TT'q tov XpiiTTOv avvex^i- rjpas.
16. Xa}pf}(raTe ^pas, ovdeua r)bLKr]crapev, ovbeva ecpdelpapev, ovheva
eTrXeoveKTT] crapev.
17. ILdvTa boKipd^eTe ''■ to koXou kutcx^'''^' ^.tto navTos €i8ovs novrjpov^
diT^X€<T6e.
18. IIio-Tos" 6 Xoyos Kal trda-qs dTroboxrjs' a^ios, otl XpccTTos ^Irjaovs
i]X6ev els TOV Kocrpov dpapTmXovs crcdo-aiP
19. ^Hvoiyrj 6 vaos t^s ctktjutjs tov papTvpiov iv r<5 ovpavS.
1 For the sense of the Aorist Imperative, and its distinction from the
Present, § 373 may be consulted.
2 See § 103 (5).
3 To Caesar: prep, implied in verb (§ 281, a). See {^) on the Beatitudes.
< See § 3, A.
5 From every form of evil, 1 Thess. v. 22.
^ Understand i<JTi. Compare on the Beatitudes, prefixed note.
7 Genitive, by &^ios, worthy o/(§ 272).
* Infinitive, expressing purpose, as in English. (See 389, b, I.)
140 PREPOSITIONS. [§ 118.
CiLiPTER yi.— PEEPOSITIOKS.
118. It was stated in § 11 tliat three forms of inflection, or
" cases," in Nouns are used to denote three several relations
of place : the Genitive implying motion from ; the Dative,
rest in, or connexion with ; and the Accusative, motion towards.
The cases thus severally answer the questions, Whence?
Where? Whither?
With this general distinction are connected very many
other relations, which are expressed by the same three cases,
with the aid of Prepositions.
To Syntax it belongs to exhibit the various meanings of the
prepositions, and their place in sentences. For the present, it
will suffice to give a list of the chief of them, with their general
significations. This is necessary, partly because several adverbs
(see § 132) are derived from prepositions ; but chiefly because of
the important place which prepositions hold in the composition of
verbs. (See Chapter X.)
Prepositions may govern —
1. The Genitive only : Whence ?
2. The Dative only : Where 1
3. The Accusative only : Whither ?
4. The Genitive and Accusative : WJience ? Whither ?
5. The Genitive, Dative, and Accusative : Whence ?
Where? Whither 2
119. Prepositions governing the Genitive only.
avri (opposition, equivalent), over against, opposed to, instead of.
aTr6 (motion from the exterior), ^(Wi, a/way from.
§119>] PREPOSITIONS. 141
eK, e^ (motion from the mteiior), from, out of,
npo, before, whether of time or place.
To these may be added most of the "improper" prepositions, as
they are often called ; being really adverbs with a prepositional
government. (For a list of these, see § 133.)
120. Prepositions governing the Dative only.
iv, in, of time, place, or element ; among,
avv (union of co-operation), with.
121. Prepositions governing the Accusative only.
dvd (up in), used in the phrases dva fiea-ov, in the midst of; dva
Hfpos, in turns (1 Cor. xiv. 27).
els (motion to the interior), into, to, untOy with a view to.
122. Prepositions governing the Genitive and
Accusative.
dtd, through. Gen (through, as proceeding from), through, by
mean£ oj. Ace. (through, as tending towards), on account of, or
owing to.
Kara, down. Gen. (down from : so, literally, 1 Cor. xi. 4),
against. Ace. (down towards), according to, throughout, during,
over.
fieTa (union of locality ; compare avp). Gen., together with,
among. Ace, after.
Trepi, around. Gen., about, concerning, on behalf of; once, above
(3 John 2). Ace, about, round about,
virep, over. Gen., above, on behalf ofjor. Ace, beyond.
vno, under. Gen., by (of the agent or efficient cause). Ace,
under, in the power of, close upon (as Acts v. 21, close upon
morning, i.e., " very early").
h2 prepositions. [^ 123.
123. Prepositions governing the Genitive, Dative,
AND Accusative.
eVi (superposition). Gen., wpon (as springing from), over, in the
presence of, in the time of. Dat., wpon (as resting on), in
addition to, on account of Ace, up to (used of place, number,
aim), over (of time, j)lace, extent).
Trapd (juxtaposition). Gen. (from beside), from, used of persons,
as OTTO of places. Dat. (at the side of), near, with, of persons
only, except John xix. 25. Ace. (to, or along the side of), beside,
compared with, i.e., so as to be shown beyond, or cordrary to,
instead of
TTpos (in the direction of). Gen., in favour of, only in Acts
xxvii. 34. Dat., at, close by. Ace, towards, in referen^ce to.
124. Synoptical Table of the Prepositions.
The Prepositions are here exhibited in groups, both because their
meaning may thus be more easily remembered, and because the com-
parison, both in meaning and form, suggests some interesting points of
relationship. For further details the student may consult Dr. Donald-
son's "New Cratylus," Book ii., chapter 2. Only the general meaning
of every preposition is given in the following table ; and the initial
capitals denote the cases governed. Cases found in classic Greek, but
not in the New Testament, with certain prepositions, are bracketed.
G. *A7ro', in reference to the exterior, from.
*Ek, in reference to the interior, ^rom, proclitic.
'Ev, „ „ m, „
*Ets, „ „ to, „
'Az/a, up ; opposite of Kara.
Kara, dovm ; opposite of ava.
*E7ri, superposition, upon.
Uapd, juxtaposition, beside.
Xlpd?, propinquity, towards.
G. (d.) a. Ilfpi, circumvention, entire ; around.
(g. d. a.) 'A/x(/)«', circumvention, partial; ahouL
0.
D.
A.
(D.) A.
G. A.
G. D. A.
G. D. A.
G. D. A.
§ 124.] PREPOSITIONS. 143
{G. A. 'YTr/p, over ; (super).
G. A. 'Ytto, under; {sub).
!G. A. Mera, association, toith, after.
D. 2jJi/, co-operation, with.
{G. ^kvTi, opposition, specific, over against.
G. n/}d, opposition, general, in front of before.
Q. A. Aia, through^ kindred with dvo, and regarding the
object as divided into two parts.
'A/i<^i is not used in the New Testament, except in composition.
In classic Greek, its use is comparatively rare. With all three
cases it means about, or around.
Accentuation. — The Prepositions are all oxytone except the proclitics,
els, in, iv.
125. For further details as to the meaning and use of the
prepositions, see Chapter X., especially the Table, § 147, a ;
also Syntax.
In explanation of the very various significance which may
belong to the same preposition, two points should be noted : (1)
that its meaning will be necessarily modified by the signification
of the verb that it may follow, and by that of the noun which it
governs, as also by the case of the latter; and (2) that as all lan-
guages have a far smaller number of words than there are shades of
thought to express, one word must often have many applications.
Then, as no langiiage is exactly parallel, word for word, with any
other, the variations of meaning included under one Greek term,
for instance, will not be the same as those embraced by the nearest
English equivalent. Thus, vnep may often be translated for / but
the applications of the two words, though perhaps equally various,
are very far from being identical.
] H ad\t:rbs. [§ 126.
Chapter YII.— ADVERBS.
126. The simplest, and perhaps the original form of an
Adverb, is some case of a substantive, a pronoun, or an adjec-
tive agreeing with a noun understood ; fixed absolutely in
that shape to express some quality, manner, place, or time.
a. The Accusative is very often thus employed, as ok/x^v (Matt.
XV. 16), yet, lit., " up to (this) point;" Trepdv, on the otiier side. In
like manner is used the accusative neuter of many adjectives, both
singular and plural ; often with the article : as, t6 \onv6v, further-
more (once, rou XotTrov, Gal. vi. 17) j to. ttoKKo, for the most part.
So, possibly from obsolete adjectives, (rrjfiepov, to-day; avpiov,
to-morrow ; x'^^h yesterday.
h. The Dative (sometimes in an obsolete form) is also frequently
found: as i8ia, privately ; TreCij, by land. Here the iota subscript
is often omitted : navrr), always (Acts xxiv. 3, in some copies,
navTrj) J fiKq, without a causc.
c. The Genitive occurs in avrov, tliere, as well as in other forms,
which will be noticed immediately.
d. In some instances, a preposition with its case written as
one word, is used adverbially, as -napaxprnia, immediately, lit,
"along with the business ;" €^ai(f>vr}s, suddenly, lit., "from a steep
descent;" KaOe^^s, in order, lit., "according to a special course."
e. The older form of the language employed the terminations
-06V, -01, and -Be as case-endings of nouns (Gen., Dai, Ace), and
when they became obsolete in ordinary declension, they were
retained as adverbial terminations to denote whence, where, and
whither. Thus : ovpavoOev, from heaven ; naibiSBev, from child Jiood
(Mark ix. 21); irepvai (the -ai standing for the older -0i), last year
(2 Cor. viii. 10; ix. 2). These terminations are also found in
adverbs derived from prepositions and other adverbs, on which
see § 132.
§ 127.] ADVERBS. 145
127. Adverbs in -«s.
The most common form of adverbs is, however, that in -ws.
This termination, which answers exactly in meaning to our
final syllable -/?/,* is affixed to adjective-stems of all forms,
the stem- ending, where needful, being modified.
For example :
First form (§ 34), diKaios, just, 8iKaio- ; diKaiois, justly.
Second form (§ 37), nds, all, -rravr- ; ndvrcos, wholly.
Third form (§ 41), aXrjdrjS) true, dXT]6€<r-; aXrjdois, truly.
Participles may also yield this adverbial form, as ovrcos (from a>v,
stem 6vT-) really.
Sometimes an adverb formed from an adjective appears in two
forms ; as raxv and raxecos, quickly ; evOvs (probably a corrupt form
of evOv) and evdecos, immediately.
128. Comparison of Adverbs.
The comparative of adverbs is generally the neuter singular
accusative of the corresponding adjective ; the superlative, the
neuter plural. Thus : raxecas (or raxv) quickly ; raxiov, more
quickly (John xx. 4); rdxi-a-Ta, most quickly (Acts xvii. 15); ev,
well (probably from Us, an old equivalent of dya66s) ; ^eXrlov, better
(2 Tim. i. 18). Adverbs of other than adjective derivation con-
form to this model. So from avco (see § 132) is found dvarepov.
Some comparatives take the termination -cos-, as irepiacroTepcoi,
more abundantly.
An irregular comparative and superlative are fiaXkov, more;
fidXiara, most. So, aacrov, nearer (Acts xxvii, 13), attributed to the
adverb (in classic Greek); ayxh near; superlative, ayxtcTTa.
* It is possibly an old dative plural : -ws = -ois. The accentuation
generally follows that of the genitive plural of the adjective; as diKalaVt
biKaiws, a\T)6wv, aXriQus.
146
ADVERBS.
[§129.
129. Pronominal Adverbs, used also as Conjunctions.
Several adverbs are formed indirectly or directly from pro-
nouns ; and, like pronouns, are demonstrative, relative, inter-
rogative, dependent interrogative, and indefinite (enclitic).
The following Table gives the chief pronominal adverbs
found in the New Testament : —
Demonstrative.
Relative.
Interrogative.
Dependent
Interrogative.
Indefinite.
Time...
t6t€, tJien
3t6, wlien
fftJrc; when?
6ir6T€, when
iroTf, some-
vvv, vvvl, now
7]viKa, when,
in parti-
cular
time
Place...
avTov, here
SSe, Jiere
there, thither
ived5€, hither
ov, where
irov'y where?
dtrovy where
irov, some-
wJiere
ivTive^v, hence.
'69ey, whence
ir69ev; whence?
thence
Maimer
o0Tcij(s), thus.
as, as
iTws; how?
Bttus, how
vwis), some-
so
vdnpov, whe-
ther
how
The correlatives in the above Table will be immediately per-
ceived. For further details compare under Pronouns, especially
§62, and Syntax. OiJra), so, becomes oCras before a vowel, and the
indefinite na is always Troas, except in composition.
It will be observed that the scheme of adverbs is incomplete in
the relative and interrogative divisions, by the omission of the
(accusative) form whitlier. Classic Greek supplies the omission by
the words oi, ttoI; ottoi, but these are not found in the New
Testament, the genitive forms oZ, ttoO; ottov being used. Compare
in English the tendency to say ^^ Wliere are you going?" for
" Whither are you going ]"
§ 130.] ADVERBS. 147
130. Numeral Adverbs.
Numeral adverbs end in -is, -kis, or -aKis, as bis, twice ; rpis, thrice;
eTTTaKLs, seven times ; i^dofjLrjKovTdKis, seventh/ times (Matt, xviii. 22) ;
TToWaKis, many times, ana^, once for all, is exceptionally formed ;
ocraKis, as often as (1 Cor. xi. ^b, '2Q>), is from the relative.
131. Adverbs from Yerbs.
Ancient verbal forms, used as adverbs, are bevpo, hither, with
its plural, bevre. These are generally employed as imperatives,
" Come thou (or ye) hither 1" The imperative aye is also employed
as a kind of adverb, Go to ! (James iv. 13 j v. 1.)
Some verbs in -tt«, expressing national peculiarity, form an
adverb in -itrrL. Thus, from iXXrjviCco, we find iXXrjvLorri, in the
Greek language ; similarly, i^paiari, in the Hebrew language.
132. Adverbs from Prepositions.
Many prepositions have a corresponding adverb in -« (par-
oxjiione). Thus, from dvd is formed apa>, upwards; and from
Kardf Kdro), downwards. So, 60-&), within; e'^co, without. The
termination -Qiv is added to these adverbs also, with a genitive
force ; as avcodev, from above ; e^codev, from without.
Once a preposition without change is employed as an adverb
(2 Cor. xi. 23), {mlp eyS, I {am) more.*
133. Prepositive Adverbs, or Improper Prepositions.
Several adverbs may be used like prepositions to govern nouns,
and are then termed "improper" or "spurious" prepositions. The
following is an alphabetical list of the principal found in the New
Testament : —
apa, together with.
av€v, without.
axpi{s), or p€xpt{s), until.
♦ So, vp65, too, often in classical Greek.
148 ADVERBS. [§ 133.
eyyusj near, in time or space.
eyLTvpocrBcVy hefore.
ivavTLov, in front of, ag%lnst.
fvcKa (-ev), for the sake of.
evaniov, before, in the presence of.
e^coj without.
eVai/o), above.
€o-(B, vnthin.
ecoff, as far as.
fieaovf in the midst o/'(Phil. ii. 15, MSS.).
fiera^Vf between.
dnio-Wf oTTcaBev, behind, after.
oyjre, at the end of (Matt, xxviii. 1).
ttXtjv, except.
irXijaiov, near ; TrapairXrio-iov, very near.
vTrepcKciva, beyond (2 Cor. x. 16).
Xapi-V) by favour of, for the sake of.
X«piff, separated from, without.
Some of the above, it is evident, are originally adverbial forms
of adjectives and substantives. All govern the Genitive, except
afia (Matt. xiii. 29), and TrapaTrXrjo-iov (Phil. ii. 27), which take the
Dative ; as does eyyvs sometimes.
134. Negative Adverbs.
a. The negative adverbs are ov (before a vowel, ovk ; before
an aspirated vowel, o^x), not, and firj, not
Accentuation. — ov is proclitic, excepting where emphatic ; as oC, No.'
(John i. 21).
b. For an explanation of the difference between these two words,
see Syntax. It must suffice now to say that ov denies absolutely,
fiT), on some expressed or implied condition. The former is called
the "categorical," or "objective" negative; the latter, the "con-
ditional," or " subjective." Both words are used in composition
§ 134.] ADVERBS. 149
with Tis, Ti (see § 60) ; also with the indefinite adverbs in the
Table, § 129, as ovTrco, not yet; fxrjTTOTe, never in any case.
c, M.r] is also used as an interrogative adverb, expecting the
answer, no ; and, in composition with the interrogative n'?, adds
a kind of appeal to the hearers, as though enlisting their assent to
the negative : thus, /Ajjrt eyw; (Mark xiv. 19), 7s it I ? ^. e., "It is
not I, is it?"
150 CONJUNCTIONS. [§ 135.
Chapter YIII.- CONJUNCTIONS AND OTHER
PARTICLES.
135, Besides the Conjunctions properly so called, used, as in
other languages, to unite words and sentences, there are in Greek
several indeclinable words, employed sometimes separately, often
in combination with other words, for the purpose of emphasis.
These cannot always be translated, the degree of emphasis being
too slight for the words of other languages to convey.
These indeclinable words, together with the conjunctions
themselves (and sometimes the primitive adverbs), are gene-
rally called Particles,
It belongs to Syntax to discuss the place and power of the
particles in a sentence. All, therefore, that is now necessary is, to
classify the chief of them, and to indicate their general meaning.
136. ClASSIFICATION OF THE CONJUNCTIVE PaRTICLES.
The Conjunctions denote (1) annexation, (2) comparison, (3) dis-
junction, (4) antithesis, (5) condition, (6) reason, (7) inference, or
(8) result. The relative forms of the adverbs (see § 129) ai-e also
really conjunctions.
1. Annexation. — The copulative conjunctions are Kal, and^ also,
even; re, and, also. The latter is generally subordinate: re ... »cat,
both . . . and, not only . . . hut ; sometimes koX ... t€, or tc ... re. Very
generally, however, both... and is expressed by /cat... /eat, as in
1 Thess. ii. 14, 15, &c.
2. Comparison. — As conjunctions of comparison, the particles
wy, as ; ucmfp, just as ; Kudas, like as, are used ; generally in cor-
relation with the adverb ovroiSt so. (Compare § 129, Table).
^ 136.] coNJUNCTioxs. lol
3. Disjunction. — The disjunctive particles are ^, or; ^ ... If,
either ...or, (in general); fJTOL...rj, either ...or, (as an exclusive
alternative) ; e'lre ... elVe, whether ... whether.
4. Antithesis. — The antithetic conjunctions are aWd (originally
neuter plural of oXXo?) and be, both signifying hut. The adversative
sense is much stronger in the former than in the latter. With 5e
the particle fxev often stands in the preceding sentence, and may
be rendered indeed or on the one hand {hi, on the other), or, more
frequently, may be left untranslated, marking simply that the two
clauses stand in real or formal antithesis. Etymologically, fi4v is
(probably) "the first thing;" be, "the second thing:" the anti-
thesis is, therefore, often very slight, a distinction rather than
opposition.
5. Condition. — The conditional particles are el, if; etye, if at
least ; emep, if at all; edv {el av), if (possibly). For the important
rules as to their use with verbs, see Syntax.
6. Cause. — Particles expressive of a reason (causal) are, ort, that,
because; ydp,for; bton, because; inei (see § 129), since.
7. hference. — The chief inferential particles are, oZv, there-
fore ; To'ivvv, then ; apa, consequently ; b^o, wherefore ; roiyapovv,
accordingly/.
8. Result. — The "final" conjunctions are Iva, in order that;
wy and oTTcas, so that ; tx-fj, that not, lest.
137. Particles of Emphasis and Interkogation.
a. The chief emphatic particles are ye, at least, hideed (enclitic);
and bi], certainly, now. To these may be added the enclitics irep,
very, verily, and tol, certainly, found in combination with other
words, as eTreibrjnep (Luke i. 1), since verily ; fxevToi, however.
b. As interrogative particles the following are employed : ft, if,
used elliptically, "Tell us if — ;" jj, simply denoting that a question
is asked, and requiring no English equivalent save in the form of
the sentence; and apa (not to be confounded with apa, § 136, 7),
which makes the question emphatic (only in Luke xviii. 8j
n
152 PARTICLES. [U37.
Acts viii. 30; Gal. ii. 17). For the interrogative adverbs, see
§129; and for tlie structure of interrogative sentences, consult
the Syntax.
138. Interjections.
a. An Interjection is generally but the transcript of a natural
instinctive sound, and therefore scarcely ranks among the " paiis
of organized speech." Words of this kind in the New Testament
are «, ! oh ! ea, ah ! expressive of pain and terror (Mark i. 24 ;
Luke iv. 34); ova, ah! expressing scorn and hatred (Mark xv. 29);
ovaij woe I alas! often governing a dative; oval vixiv, woe unto you!
alas for you!
b. The imperative form, tSe, see, is often treated interjectionally,
but still more frequently the old imperative middle of the same
verb is employed, accented as a pattiuie : *Sov, lo ! lehold I
139.] WORD-FORMATION — SUBSTANTIVES. 1 33
Chapter IX.— ON THE FORMATION OF WORDS.
139. 1. Roots. — Words of all kinds are derived from some
Root. For the distinction between root and stem^ see § 10. The
root is that part which remains after taking away from a whole
family of kindred words all the parts which are different in each.
Thus, AK- is the root of aK-ftrj, UK-poSj aK-nv6a.
The root expresses the leading idea, or general meaning, which
runs through all the kindred words, thougli differently modified in
each; thus, AK- expresses the general meaning of "sharpness"
or "pointedness."
In the formation of words, some are derived directly from the
root; as aKfir}, from AK-. Others take as a ("secondary") root
the stem of words already^ formed ; as a^/na^oj, from uKfifj (aK|Aa-).
Hence we find primary, secondary, tertiary, &c., formations.*
Thus :—
Primary. Secondary. Tertiary.
*AK-;ij;, point 'AKjt-a^eo, to flourish
"AK-posy pointed 'AKpi-/3^y, accurate 'AKpipc-m, accuracy.
'AKpip-ws, accurately.
2. Classes of Words. — ^Without attempting here any extended
statement of the methods and laws of derivation, it will be
useful to specify some of the leading terminations which occui' in
the formation of Greek words. Each of these terminations has
a particular force and meaning of its own, whatever be the root
or stem to which it is joined : thus, Kpi-TT]s, Cv^co-rris, KkeTr-Trjs,
TToXi-TTjSj have all the same termination, -ttis, and with the same
meaning. *
Classes of words may thus be formed, by arranging logetlier
* See, for greater detail, the "Bromsgrove Greek Grammar,*' by Dr.
G. A. Jacob, § 78.
151: WORD- FORMATION — SUBSTANTIVES. [§ 139.
those which have the same terminations, and marking their signi-
fication; and this may be done with words of all kinds — sub-
stantives, adjectives, pronouns, verbs, and particles.
3. Modification of Stem-endings. — The final vowel or copsonant
of the root or stem will be affected by the termination according
to the general usages of the language, as illustrated especially in
the inflections of tlie verbs. Thus, iroLij-rrjs, from ttoic- (compare
§ 96, a, &c.), and KaXvjr-ro, KoXvfx-fia (see § 4, d, 4), from koXvit-
or KoXvp-.
140. Classes of Substantives.
a. First Declension. — 1. Masculine nouns in -ttjs express a
niale agent, or pei"son belonging to something. Thus, Kplrrjs, a judge;
TToirjrrjSf a maker, doer, poet. Some nouns of this termination are
formed from the root of simpler nouns : as ttoXItijs (noXts), citizen ;
oiKiTTjs (oiKos), domestic.
Accentuation. — Dissyllables of this class, and polysyllables with short
penultima, throw back the accent as far as possible, except Kptrfis. So
rpevarrjs, Seairdrrjs, if/evo-rat, Stairora (voc.) The rest are oxytone, except
iroXirrjs.
2. Feminine Nouns. — i. The termination -£d (paroxytone) ex-
presses quality. Adjective stems in cs- or oo- give the forms (pro-
paroxytone) -eta, -ota. So, (ro(pia, wisdom (^(ro(f)6s) ', akrjdeia, truth
(d\rj&T]s) ; evvoia, good-will (evvovs). A few nouns in -iia, (paroxy-
tone) are from verbal stems in -€v, and denote the result of action ;
as ^aa-iXcLa, kiTigdom (/Sao-iXeuco) ; TraiBeia, instTtcction {naibevo)).
ii. Substantives in -oo-vvt] connected with adjective stems in ov-,
rarely in o-, also denote quality; as aaxjipoavvij, prudence, from
cr<o(})pa>v, stem ov- ; ekfrjuoavvq, compassion (cXeiiJ/xtaj/) ; diKatoavvT],
righteou^Tiess (dUaioi) ; ayKoavvrj, holiness (dyios), the o- becoming -w,
because of the short preceding syllable. (Compare § 42.)
b. Second Declension. — 1. Masculine Nouns. — The termination
-jtos (oxytone) appended to verbal stems denotes action; as Ironi
6v(o (6v-), to rage, 6vp6sy passion. Sometimes o- intervenes, as in
§ 140.] ^VORD-FORMATION — SUBSTAJ^TIVES. 155
beanos, bond, from Se-, Se'co, to bind ; or 0, as KkavOyios, lamentation,
fi'om KXaf-, /tXa/o), to weep. (See § 96, c)
2. Neuter N'ouns. — i. The ending -rpov, from verbal roots, denotes
instrumefit. Thus, Xv-, Xuco, to release ; Xvrpov^ ransom.
ii. The termination -lov, from substantive stems, is diminutive:
as from -nah (iraiS-), a child ; Traidiov, a little child. To -tov is
sometimes prefixed the syllable ap- or i8- : as Traibdpiov, a little boy;
KkLvldiov, a little bed, from kXIvij, a couch ; da-o-dptov, a farthing, from
Latin as. (See § 154, a.)
Diminutives in -lov must be distinguished from neuters of adjectives
in -toy, used as substantives : e. g., iKaarrifnov, propitiatory.
The masculine and feminine terminations -io-kos, -ia-Kt], are also
occasionally used as diminutives. Thus, veavlas (stem, a-), a youth ;
vcavloTKos, a lad. So Traibiam], a damsel.
Accentuation of Neuters. — Neuter nouns generally retract the accent.
Diminutives in lov are, however, paroxytone, except when a short
syllable precedes this termination.
c. Third Declension. — 1. Masculine Nouns.— i. The suffix -*vs
(oxytone), stem cF-, denotes an agent : as ypap.p,aTevs, a scribe, from
Ypap-jjiaT-, ypdppa, a letter. (For the declension of these substantives,
see § 30, iii.)
ii. The terminations -nqp (oxytone) and -rwp (paroxytone, stem
Top-) also signify an agent : as (pcca-Trjp, luminary, from ^ws-, light ;
pTjTap, an orator, from pc- (in the obsolete verb, pea, to speak).
2. Feminine Nouns. — i. The ending -<ris (gen. -o-cws, root o-i-),
from verbal stems, expresses actio7i. Thus, SiKaio- (diKaioca, to
justify) gives BiKataxris, justification; and irpaY- {-rrpdao-oi, to do),
irpd^is, action. These nouns, a very numerous class, retract the
accent. (For their declension, see § 30, i b.)
ii. The termination -rt^s (gen. -ttitos, root ttit-) denotes quality,
and is attached to adjective stems. Thus, to-os, equal, gives laorrjs,
equality; ayios, holy, dyiorrjs, holiness. These also retract the
accent.
156
WORD-FORMATION — SUBSTANTIVES.
[§ 140.
3. Neuter Nouns. — i. Tlie termination -jjia (stem (xar-) denotes
tlie result of an action, and is affixed to verbal stems. Thus,
7rpda-cr(o, irpa^-, gives npayixaj a thing done, an action; and the
obsolete pew, p€-, forms /5^fia, a thing spoken, a word.
ii. The ending -os (from stem €s-, see § 30, iv.) denotes, from
verbal stems, result; from adjective stems, quality. Thus, from
fi8-. Second Aor. eldov, I saw (see § 103 (4), we have eiSos, an
aiypearance ; and from paGv-, in ^aOvs, deep, ^dOosy depth.
141. The following scheme exhibits at one view the principal
terminations of derivative nouns. The nominative and genitive
endings are given, as in Lexicons and Vocabularies ; but the stem
and declension will easily be traced.
Signification.
Nom. and Gen.
Terminations.
Gender.
Agent
-€<;«,
.^ws
M.
Do.
-TTJS,
-TOV
M.
Do.
-W|p,
-lipos
M.
Do.
-TWp,
-TOpOS
M.
Instrument
-TpOV,
-TpOV
M.
Action
-\i6s*
-V.OV
M.
Do.
-cris.
-o-ws
F.
Eesult
-cCo,
-eCas
F.
Do.
-(Mi,
-fiaros
N.
Do.
-OS,
-CVS
N.
Quality
-TTJS,
-TT]TOS
F.
Do.
-£a,
-Cas
F.
Do.
-OO-VVTI,
-00^lvt|S
F.
Do.
-OS,
-ov«
N.
Diminutive
-lOV,
-£ov
N.
Do.
-lO-KOS,
-lO-KOV
M.
Do.
-{O-KT,,
-£o-Kt|S
F.
Occasionally with prefix -B or -<r.
§ 142.'] WORD-FORMATION ADJECTIVES. 157
142. Classes of Adjectives.
1. The most common derivative Adjectives are of the First
Form, and the usual terminations are the following : —
a. From substantive roots, the ending -los (-fa*), -wv, is posses-
sive, i.e., has the sense " of, or belonging to." Thus, from ovpavo-,
ovpavos, heaven, is derived ovpduios, heavenly ; from tijio-, ti/xj;,
honour, rlfiios, honourable, precious. The i of this termination
sometimes forms a diphthong with a final stem vowel; so from
8iKr) (8iKa-), justice, comes dUaios, just; from dyofja, market-place,
dyopalos, public. To this class also belong the adjectives formed
from the names of cities or countries, and denoting their inha-
bitants. Thus, 'Ecfieaios, Ephesian ("Etj^eo-oy) ; 'lovhalos, Jew ('louSaia).
Accentuation. — The diphthongal forms are 5renem% properispomenon ;
the others are proparoxytone, i.e., retract the accent.
b. The termination -tKos, -i^, -6v (oxytone), from verbal or sub-
stantive roots, marks ability or fitness: as KptriKos, capable of
judging (KpLvo)) ; ^aaiXiKos, royal (^aaiXevs).
c. The ending -ivos, -tj, -ov (proparoxytone), from substantive
roots, expresses the material of which anything is made : as ^CXipos,
wooden (^vXov).
Note. — The same substantive stem may have a derivative of each of
the two last-mentioned forms. Thus, from tropfc- (o-ap|-), Jlesh, are
formed crdfjKiyos, made afresh, "fleshy;" and TapKinds, of the nature of
Jlesh, "fleshly." The former is only found in the received text of the
New Testament in 2 Cor. iii. 3 ; but on the authority of MSS. , many
critics substitute it for the latter in Romans \'ii. 14 ; 1 Cor. iii. 1. The
internal evidence in these passages seems, however, against the alter-
ation.
Sometimes the termination -cos (contr. -ovs) denotes material .
as dpyvpeos, dpyvpovs, of silver {cipyvpos).
d. The termination -pds, -pd, -p6v (oxytone), denotes the complete
* Some of these adjectives are *' of two terminations." (See § 34, &.)
158
WORD-FORMATION — ADJECTIVES
B 142.
possession of a quality, like the English -ful or -able : as, from
l<rxv-, laxvs, strength, laxvpos, powerful.
e. Adjectives ending in -ip.os, -ov, -o-ijios, -ov (proparoxytone), are
occasionally formed from verbal stems, and express ability or
fitness: as 86klixos, receivable, currejit (of coin), so approved, from
8€x-, hixofJ-ai, to receive ; xRWi-t^^^j useful, from xp*-) XP^^f^°h to us^-
Some proper names are of this class, as OvrjcrtiMos (lit. profitable, see
Philem. ii.) .
f The verbals in -t<5s and -tc'os have already been noticed (§73.
p. 69).
2. Second and Third Forms. — Here the derivative stem-endinss
-€s and -|i.ov need only be noticed.
a. Adjectives in -tis (see § 41) are generally correlative to nouns
in -09, the stem of which, it will be remembered, is also in cs-
(§ 30, iv.) So yl/€v8os_ falsehood ; yjrevbrjSy false.
b. Adjectives in -jiwv, derived from verbal stems, attribute the
action of the verb to the person: as €X«-, eXec'o), to pity ; eXfiy/xwj',
compassionate.
143. Scheme of Derivative Adjectives.
Signification.
Terminations of Nom. Sing.
Quality
-•qs, -€S
Do. complete
-pds, -pA, -p<Jv
Attribute, locality
-los (-aios, -€ios, -otos) [-la], lov
Property
-IKOS, -IK'^, -IKOV
Material
-IVOS, -IVT], -IVOV
Do.
(-€0s) -ovs, [-^a], (-€ov) -oOv
Fitness
-(<r)i|ios, -(<r)ijiov
Attribute
-|10)V, -ftov
Possibility (verbal)
-T^S, -T^, -r6y
Obligation (do.)
-rfos, -T^a, -rfov
§ 144.] WORD-FORMATION — VERBS. 159
144. Classes of Verbs.
a. Verbs from substantive or adjective roots ("denominative
verbs") may signify the being, doing, or causing that which the
noun imports. Verbs in -dw, -i<a, -cvw, generally denote simply
state or action ; verbs in -oc*, -aCvw, -vva, causation. Thus, SouAevco,
I am a slave ; dovXoco, I make a slave of another, I enslave. The
distinction is not always observed ; for instance, ttXtjOvvco may be
either / multiply, transitive, or / abound, intransitive. Verbs in
-ttw often have the sense of becoming or acting that which the
noun denotes. Thus, 'lovbahs, a Jew; lovbat^oi, I act the Jew
(Gal. ii. 14).
The principal denominative verbal terminations are as follow : —
-do), as Tifido), to honour {rifirj).
-i(a, „ 7roAf/A€cj, to make war (jroXefios).
-d«, „ SouXoo), to enslave (SoCXos).
-dtw, „ epydCofiai,, tO WOrk (epyov).
-Ct,(a, „ eXniCdy, tO hope (eXnis).
-aivci), „ XevKaivo), tO whiten (XiVKOs).
-€ii(D, „ ^ao-tXevoa, to reign {^aaiXevs).
-vvw, .„ TvXrjOvva), to abound, multiply (nXi]6os/.
h. Verbs from simpler verbal stems are "inceptives" in -otko),
as yrjpd(Tic(o, to grow old; " frequentatives" or "emphatic verbs,"
as /SaTTTt^o), to baptize (^aTrrco) ; and " causatives," as fiedva-KO), to
intoxicate (fieOvco) ; yafxiCo) or yafxio-Ko), to give in marriage (yafieco).
To these, as anomalous derivatives from Perfects, may be added
(TTrjKco, to stand, from the Perfect eo-rijKa; and yprjyopea, to watch,
from eypfjyopa, the reduplicated Second Perfect of eyeipo).
145. General Remark on Derivation.
It often happens that the original of a derivative does not
appear in the language in its simpler form; and still more fre-
quently, that it is not found in the New Testament. On the other
hand, the actual derived forms are far fewer than the possible.
160 WORD-FORMATION VERBS. [§ 145.
The copiousness and fertility of the Greek as a living language
depended especially on the power which it possessed of expressing
new thoughts and shades of thought by words framed according
.to strict analogy, and therefore competent to take their place at
once without question in the vocabulary. The language of science
among ourselves — which, in fact, is borrowed from the Greek — fur-
nishes an illustration of the same power to accompany, with equ^al
step, the progress of knowledge and of thought.
§ 146.] VVORD-FOKMATION COMPOUNDS. 161
Chapter X.— ON THE FOEMATION OF COMPOUND
WORDS.
146. Compound words are either parathetic or synthetic
in their formation.
In parathetic* compounds, both words retain their form
and meaning, subject only to the laws of euphony. They
are, therefore, merely placed side by side, as it were, though
they are written as one word. This is the case with all
verbs compounded with prepositions, as eK/3aA/\£o, from e/c and
fidWo) ; airepx^ofxaL, from airo and epxofJiaL ; Ka^tWr^/xt, from Kara
and larriixL ; o-Dyxatpo), from avv and xaipoa. (The changes in
the terminations of some of the above prepositions need no
explanation.)
In synthetic t compounds, the former word, a noun or a
verb, loses all inflection ; while the latter often takes a form
which it could not have had out of composition. The words
are therefore placed in close unions and really make one word :
as (f)L\6(TO(f)os, from cpikos and do^ia.
147. Parathetic Compounds.
The former word of a parathetic compound is almost always in
the New Testament a particle, i.e.^ a preposition or an adverb ;
never a verb.
The signification of many compounds can be satisfactorily ascertained
only from the Lexicon, as the meaning of the prefix is often modified
by that of the principal word.j: It will, however, be helpful to the
* From irapa and 0e- {rienni), " set side by side."
t From ai)v and 0e-, ^^ set together or corn-posed ^^
J So in English : e.g,, the particle over varies its meaning in the words
overthroio, overtake, overrun, overtime, overhearing ; the fundamental sig-
nification being, however, discernible in all.
162 WORD-FORMATIOK COMPOUNDS. [^ 147.
learner to have at oue view the chief significations of the particles used
m composition. The following table (a) should be compared with that
in § 124; and a little thought will trace the connexion in each case
between the primitive significations (printed in italics) and the
secondary meanings that follow.
a. The Prepositions, as used in Composition.
d[uf>i-, round about.
dva-, up, back again.
avTi-, instead of, against, in return for.
diro-, away from, dismission, completeness.
8ia-, through, thorough, between.
€ls-, into.
€K- (l|- before a vowel, iy- before a guttural), out of, forth, utterly.
Iv- (ky.- before a labial mute, or |t), in, upon, intrinsically,
eirt-, upon, to, in addition.
Kara-, down, downright, against.
jiera-^ with, participation, change,
irapa-, beside, beyond, along,
ircpi-, around, over and above, excess.
irpo-, before, forward,
irpos-, towards, in addition to.
ervv- (crvji- before a labial, mute, or jij <rvy- before a guttural),
with, association, compression,
irircp-, above, excess.
1neo-j under, concealment, repression.
b. Separable Particles (Adverbs) in Composition.
&- (from afxa), together, as anas (-vt-), all together.
dpri-, lately, only in dpnyevprjTos, new-bom (1 Pet. ii. 2).
€<>-, well, prosperously.
iraXiv-, again, only in naKiyyeveaiof regeneration (Matt. xix. 28 ;
Titus iii. 6).
irav-, all (from neuter of iravr-).
TTjXc-, afar off, only in n^Xavywy, distinctly (Mark viii. 25).
§ 147.] WORD-FORMATIOX COMPOUNDS. 163
c Inseparable Particles in Composition.
d- (from ava\ intensive : perhaps only in art i/t^co, to gaze steadfastly.
d- or dv-, not, tlie usual negative prefix, answering to our un-.
8us-, hardly or ill, like our dis-, mis-, or un-.
Tjiii-, half (Latin, semi-), only in fjfiidavfjs, half dead, and Tjfiia>pLov,
Iwlf an hour.
The Prepositions (Table a), when used in the composition of
nouns and adjectives, generally mark a secondary formation, i.e., a
derivation from a compound verb. Thus, aTroo-roXos, aiiostle, is not
from aTTo and (ttoKos, but from aTrooreXXo), to send forth. So
a-rroa-ToXT], apostleship. Again, from eKkeyofxai, to choose out, come
€k\€kt6s, chosen, elect ; and cKKoyrj, election. Some such nouns and
adjectives, however, are found, without any corresponding com-
pound verb.
The Adverbs and Inseparable Particles (Tables b, c) (except
d- negative) are generally used with substantives and adjectives,
not with verbs.
Two Prepositions may be combined in the formation of a word,
the characteristic formative force of each being retained. Thus,
Kadio-TTjixi, to establish, aTroKaQla-T-qixi, to restore; TrapaKoXeofiai, passive,
to be comforted,* arvpirapaKakeoixai, to be comforted together ; dcrdyo),
to introduce, napeiadycd, to introduce by the bye (2 Pet. ii. 1 ) . So
TTiipeia^XBev (Romans v. 20), entered by the way. Again, avriXajj.
^dvop.ai is to help, generally (lit., "to take hold of, over against"),
but (rvvavTi\ap^dvop.ai is to help by coming into association with (as
Luke X. 40 ; Romans viii. 26).
148. Synthetic Compounds.
In synthetic compounds the former word is a noun or a verb,
never a particle.
When the former word is a noun, if its stem does not already
* Literally, to be called to one's side : i.e., for purposes of consolation,
or, it might be, of exhortation, or advocacy. Hence the word UapaKXrjTos
has the threefold meaning of Comforter, Exhorter, Advocate. (See John
xiv. 16, 26; 1 John ii. L)
164 WORD-FORMATION — COMPOUNDS. [§ 148.
end in -o, tlie vowel -o- is commonly added as a connective, when
the latter word begins with a consonant, as, from /capSt'a, Kapdi-o-
yvaonjs.
When the former word is a verb, the connecting vowel is
usually -1-. as from apxay, dpx-i-a-vvaya>yos ; but sometimes -o-, as
fdeX-o-BprjaKela. The form of a verbal noun is often used, as from
Sei'Sco (Seicrts'), ^eia-i-dalpcov.
Compound verbs of this class usually take their form from a
compound noun; the verb thus appearing in a shape which it
cannot have out of composition : as, evxapiarea), to give thanks^
from cvxapiaros, not from ev and x^P'-^^^^ > ^CkoTiiicopai^ to he
ambitious, from (j)i\6Tipos, not from (pCKos and TLp.iop.ai.
In synthetic compounds the latter word generally has the
leading significance, and is defined or modified by the former.
The following compounds illustrate the foregoing remarks : —
oiKo-hecnTorriSf householder.
KaK-ovpyoSy evildoer (<a/cos epyov).
aipaT'€Kxv(ria, bloods/iedding (alpa, eKxyo'is from « and ;^6(f)a)).
Kapdi-o-yvtaanjs, one who knows the heart.
dpx-t-crvvdycoyos, ruler of the synagogue.
paKpo-Ovpos (adjective), paKpodvpia (substantive), long-suffering.
ba}8eicd-({>v\ov (neuter substantive), ten tribes (Acts xxvi. 7).
8evT€p6-7rp(OTos, second-Jirst (Luke vi. 1), probably, *Hhe first
Sahhath in the second year of the Sabbatical cycle (tf seven yeai-s."
See Wieseler's " Chronological Synopsis of the Four Gospels,"
II. ii. 4. Wieseler fixes the year bs 782, A.U.C.
149. Illustration of the Varieties of Deriv^ation and
Composition.
The root Kpi-, verbal stem Kpiv-, primary meaning- ^o separate^
may be taken as illustrating the variations and combinations of a
Greek word.
First, we have simple derivatives, formed as in Chapter IX. : —
Kpivoi, to separate, ot judge.
Kpicrisj the process of separation, ov judgment.
§ 149. J WORD-FOKMATION — COMPOUNPS. 165
KpifMOf the act or result of judgment, sentence.
KpiTTiptov, a standard of judgment, or tribunal.
Kpirrjs, a judge.
KpiTiKos (adjective), able to judge, a discoverer (Heb. iv. 12).
Next, we note the composition of the verb with different
prepositions : —
avaKplvca, to inquire, estimate
biaKplvco, to distinguish, separate, decide ; middle, to hesitate,
eyKpluco, to judge, or reckon, among (2 Cor. x. 12).
fTTLKplvco, to adjudge (Luke xxiii. 24).
KaraKpivo), to give judgment against, condemn.
<TvyKpLv<o, to judge together, compare.
aTTOKpivopai, to answer.
avTanoKpivopai, to awswer against (Luke xiv. 6 ; Rom. ix. 20).
vTTOKpivopai, to dissemble (Luke xx. 20).
(rvvvTroKpivo/xai, to dissemble with any one (Gal. ii. 13).
We may then note the various compound substantives, which
may be compared with the corresponding verbs : —
dvaKpLo-iS) an examination (Acts xxv. 26).
dnoKpio-ts, an answer.
BiaKpiais, the act of distinguishing, discernment.
KaraKpia-is, condemnation.
viroKpiais, dissimidation, hypocrisy.
a.TTOKpip.a, a sentence, as of death, or, response (2 Cor. i. 9).
KaraKpipa, a sentence of condemnation .
TTpoKpipa, Si preijossession, prejudice (1 Tim. v. 21).
vTTOKpiTTjs, lit. a stage-player, a hypocrite.
We now take a group of negative compounds : —
ddiciKpiroS) not subject to distinction, impartial or sincei'e
(James iii. 17).
aKaraKpiToi, uncondemned.
awnoKpiTos, unfeigned
166 WORD-FORMATION — COMPOUNDS. [§ 149.
Finally, the New Testament contains three instances of the
composition of this root with nouns and pronouns : —
avTOKaraKpiTos, self-condemnecl (Titus iii. 11).
eiXiKpLvfjs (from etXr), smishine, cognate with rjXios), judged of in
the sunlight, pure, sincere (Phil. i. 10 ; 2 Pet. iii. 1).
elKiKpiveia (from the above), sincerity.
Many other compounds of this root exist, but these are ail
which the New Testament contains*
§ 150.] LANGUAGES OF PALESTINE. 1G7
Chapter XI.— FOREIGN WORDS IN NEW
TESTAMENT GREEK.
150. Languages of Palestine. — Hebrew.
Two languages were Sf)okeD and understood in Palestine. The
one, called in the New Testament " the Hebrew tongue " (Acta
xxii. 2 ; xxvi. 14), was in reality a very considerable modification
of the Old Testament Hebrew, and is generally now termed "the
Syro-Chaldaic," or " the Aramaic " (from Aram, the Hebrew
word for Syria). This was the language of the people, and,
to some uncertain extent,* remained in colloquial use until the
destruction of Jerusalem.
Some critics believe that St. Matthew's Gospel was originally
written in Aramaic, and that the book as it appears in the New
Testament is a more or less literal translation. In this opinion
we do not concur ; but there can be no doubt that in the days of
our Lord the ancient language was still most fondly cherished by
the people. Expressions that fell from the Saviour's lips in
moments of deep emotion, in the performance of signal miracles,
in Gethsemane, and on the Cross, are carefully recorded ; and other
words of technical character, or religious association, or homely
use, are also found in the native tongue of Israel.
151. Introduction of Greek.
But as a direct result of the conquests of Alexander the Great
and his successors, the Greek tongue had been carried into almost
all the countries of the civilized v.^orld, and had become the
medium of commercial intercourse, the language of the courts,
and, in fact, the universal literary tongue of the provinces after-
* See on the whole subject, Dr. Roberts' "Discussions on the Gospels."
.
168 LANGUAGES OF PALESTINE. [§ 151.
wards absorbed in the Eoman Empire. The natives of Alex-
andria and of Jerusalem, of Ephesus, and even of Rome, alike
adopted it; everywhere with characteristic modifications, but
substantially the same. Hence it had become a necessity to trans-
late the Old Testament Scriptures into Greek ; and as this great
work was executed by Alexandrian Jews, its language not only
shows the influence of the Hebrew original, but contains special
forms and peculiarities of expression indigenous to Egypt. This
translation, or "the Septuagint," * naturally became the basis of
all subsequent Jewish Greek literature, and in particular of the
New Testament, which, however, to the Egyptian superadds
Palestinian influences. It was in the Greek of the Septuagint
thus modified that, in all probability, our Lord and His apostles
generally spoke. The dialect of Galilee (Matt. xxvi. 73) was not
a corrupt Hebrew, but a provincial Greek.
The New Testament writers, it should be noted, difier consi-
derably from one another in style. The Book of Revelation, for
instance, is very unlike the writings of the Apostle Paul. All,
again, vary greatly from classical models, both in vocabulary and
syntax, exchanging the elaborate harmonies of Attic Greek for
simpler constructions and homelier speech.
152. Infusion of Latin.
The Roman conquest and tenure of Palestine may be thought
likely to have stamped some lasting traces on the language.
Such traces undoubtedly appear in the New Testament; but,
considering the might of the dominant people, these are mar-
vellously few. The Romans could impose their laws, their
polity, their military power, upon vanquished nations, but not
their s})eech. Certainly, there are some Latin words in the New
Testament ; but these are almost wholly nouns denoting military
rank or civil authority, coins, or articles of dress ; a valuable
♦ That is "the Seventy" (often quoted as LXX.), from the traditional
number of translators.
§ 152.1 LATIN AND HEBREW IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 169
historic testimony, were there none beside, how " the sceptre had
departed from Judah, aad a lawgiver from between his feet."
By way of illustration to the foregoing remarks, lists are here
appended of the chief Aramaic (or Syro-Chaldaic) and Roman terms
contained in the New Testament.
153. Hebrew and Aramaic Words and Phrases.
The Hebrew root is in a few cases assimilated to the forms of
the Greek language ; but is oftener simply transcribed, and used
without declension or conjugation,
a. Assimilated words are the following : —
Meo-o-irt?, Messiah, " the Anointed." This word occurs only in
John i. 41, iv. 25 ; the Greek equivalent, Xpio-ro's, from xpt'«>) ^o
anoint, being everywhere else employed.
t^apio-atos-, Pharisee, from a Hebrew word, meaning to separate^
and l-ahhovKoios, Sadducee, from another, meaning to he righteous,
are of constant occurrence — " Separatists" and " Moralists."
^ayL}X(ovas (gen. -a, dat. -a), Mammon, riches (Matt, vi. 24 ; Luke
xvi. 9, 11, 13). Its derivation is uncertain; but there is no reason
for supposing that it was anywhere the name of a false deity.
dppa^oiv, -wvos, a pledge, or earnest (2 Cor. i. 22, v. 5).
On (Tci^^aTov, sabbath, see § 32, b.
yeevpa, -rjs, from two words signifying valley of Hinnom ; hence,
metaphorically, for the place of future punishment (see 2 Kings,
xxiii. 10 ; Isa. xxx. 33 ; Jer. vii. 31).
b. Indeclinable words are more numerous, i. The following
may rank among proper names, on which class of words see fur-
ther, § 157 : —
^ KKikha\ia, field of blood (Acts i. 19).
* BeeXCe^ovX, lord of dung (Matt. xii. 24, &c,), a contemptuous
Jewish turn to the name of the Ekronite god Beelzebub, " lord of
flies" (see 2 Kings i. 2, 3). Hence " prince of the demons."
'Qoavepyis, Sons of thunder (Mark iii. 17).
Ta^^a6dy the Pavement, or Tribunal (John xix. 13).
170 HEBREW WORDS IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. [§ 153.
Tokyoda, the Place of a skuU, or of skulls (Matt, xxvii. 33 ;
Mark xv. 22; John xix. 17), called in Greek Kpaviov (Luke
xxiii. 33), where our word Calvary is taken from the Vulgate.
'P€H(f)dv, probably the planet Saturn (Acts vii. 43, from Amos
V. 2G, LXX.)
ii. Other Syro-Chaldaic nouns are as follow : —
'A/3i3a, Father, in confidence, endearment, or entreaty (Mark
xiv. 36 ; Rom. viii. 15 ; Gal. iv. 6).
Kop^av, gift (Mark vii. 11), Kop^avas (decl. Matt, xxvii. 6),
p.dvua, lit. "what is this 1" manna (Exod. xvi. 15 ; John vi. 31,
49, 5S; Heb. ix. 4; Rev. ii. 17).
/lojpe, fool 1 (Matt. V. 22) may be a Greek vocative (/ztupdy), but
is more probably an Aramaic word of similar sound, denoting
utter mental and moral worthlessness.
7racr;^a, PasSOVer.
pa^^i, my master! lit. "my great one!" (Matt, xxiii. 7, &c.)
So pa^^ovi (Mark x. 51), and pa^jSovul (John xx. lb).
paKa, a term of contempt, from a Hebrew root signifying
emptiness, or vanity (Matt v. 22).
(ra^aa>6, hosts, i.e., the hosts of heaven (Rom. ix. 29 ; Jas. v. 4).
(rUepa, strong drink (Luke i. 1 5) .
Xfpov^ifi, cherubim, Hebrew plural of cherub (Heb. ix. 5).
c. Aramaic Phrases. — d\\r}Xoma, praise ye Jehovah! (Rev.
xix. 1, 3, 4, 6.)
dprjv, after ascriptions of praise, so let it be; before assertions.
€(f)(j)add, be opened ! (Mark vii. 34.)
'HXt, *HXt, \apa (xa^axBavi', My God, my God, wliy hast Thou
forsaken me ? (Matt, xxvii. 46,) from Ps. xxii. 1 ; the last word
being the Aramaic equivalent of the original Hebrew verb. *HXt
is my God, from the Hebrew El. Mark xv. 34, reads 'E\m.
fiapavaBd, The Lord cometh ! (1 Cor. xvi. 22 ) (The word pro-
ceding, dvddcpa^ accursed, is pure Greek, and should be followed by
a colon or period.)
§ 153.] HEBREW WOUDS IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 171
ToKida Kovfxi, Maiden, arise! (Mark v. 41.)
wa-avva, Save now ! (Matt. xxi. 9 ; Mark xi. 9, 10 j John xii, 13,^
takeu from Ps. cxviii. '15.
154. Latin Words.
a. Names of Coins. — Ko8pdvTT]s, " quadrans," ybr^AiVi^ " (Matt.
V. 26 ; Mark xii. 42), the fourth part of the
da-o-dpiovy "as," (diminutive term), also rendered /ar^Am^ in E.Y.
(Matt. X. 29 ; Luke xii 6), the sixteenth part of the
drjvdpiov, "denarius," rendered penny (as in Matt, xviii. 28, &c.),
silver coin, worth about 7^d.
b. Judicial. — a-iKaplos, "sicarius," assassin (Acts xxi. 38).
(jjpayeXXiov, </)^ayfXXoa), " flagellum, flagello," scourge (noun and
verb) (John ii. 15; Matt, xxvii. 26 ; Mark xv. 15).
c. Military. — Kevrvplav, "centurio," centurion (Mark xv. 39,
44, 45). Elsewhere the Greek iKaroprapxos (or xv^) i^ employed.
KovaTco8ia, '"custodia," guard (Matt, xxvii. 65, 66; xxviii. 11).
Xeyetoi/, " legio," legion (Matt. xxvi. 53; Mark v. 9, 15; Luke
viii. 30).
TvpaiTcopiov, " prsetorium," officer^ s or governor's quarters, palace
(Matt, xxvii. 27 ; Phil. i. 13, &c.).
(TueKovKaToip, " Speculator," member of the royal guard (Mark
vi. 27).
d. Political. — Ki^vo-oy, " census," tribute (Matt. xvii. 25 ;
xxii. 17).
KcoXcoi/ia, **colonia," colony (Acts xvi. 12).
\i^€pT7voi, "libertini,"yreec?men (Acts vi. 9).
e. Articles of Dress. — XevTiov, "lenteum," towel (John xiii.
4, 5).
(rifjLiKiv6iou, " semicinctium," apron (Acts xix. 12).
aovbdpiov, " sudarium," handkerchief {huke xix. 20, (fee).
/ General. — ^lidviov, "zizanium," wild darnel^ "lolium" (Matt,
xiii. 25-40).
Kpd^^aros, "grabbatus," mattrass or small couch (Mark ii. 4, &c.)
172 LATIN WORDS IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. [^ 154.
fjMKiKXov, "macellum," shambles, meat-market (1 Cor. x. 25).
fiefi^pavT], " Tnemhrsmaj'^ parchment (2 Tim. iv. 13).
fiiXiov, " milliare," mile (Matt. v. 41).
fjLoSios, "modius," a measure (about an English peck, Matt.
V. 15, &c.).
^€(m]s, "sextus, sextarius," a small measure (about an English
pint), pitcher (Mark vii. 4).
pedrj, "rheda," chariot (Rev. xviii. 13).
Ta^epvrj, " tabema," tavern (Acts xxviii. 15).
rirXos, "titulus," title, superscription (John xix. 19, 20).
(f)6pov, "forum," part of the name Appii Forum (Acts 3^xviii. 16).
XapTTjs, " charta," j9aper (2 John 12).
(For Latin Proper Names, see Chapter XII.)
§ 155.] PROPER NAMES. 173
Chapter XII.— NEW TESTAMENT PROPER NAMES.
155. The personal names of the New Testament are in
general derivative or composite words, originally with a
specific meaning. They belong to three languages — Hebrew,
Greek, and Latin (compare Chap. XI.) — a circumstance
which occasions some little difficulty and confusion, especially
since the Hebrew names sometimes appear in the forms of
the Greek declension, sometimes, as in their original shape,
indeclinable. Our translators, too, have occasionally adopted
different renderings of the same Greek name, and in many
cases have made the New Testament English form difierent
from that in the Old.
156. Hebrew Names.
a. The original indeclinable Hebrew forms may end in almost
any letter ; as, e. g , 'A^iovd, *A/3/)aa/i, 'lo-paT^A, 'EXio-a/Ser, ^UcftOae, Nwf,
'Hq-av, *Upixo>. Such forms are generally oxytone. So 'EfxfxauovrjX,
God with us.
b. The following names are found both in indeclinable and
declinable forms : —
'Upova-oKrjiJL and *lepocroXvfia, -wi/,* Jerusalem,
2aov\ and 2av\oSf Saul.f
'laKw/S, Jacob (Old Testament), and 'laKcojSoy, James (New Testa-
ment).
* Once 'Upoa6\vfxa appears as a feminine singular (Matt. ii. 3; so,
perhaps, iii. 5?).
t The Hebrew form occurs only in the accounts of Saul's conversion
(Acts ix., xxii., xxvi., except xiii. 21, in reference to the Old Testament
king).
174 PROPER NAMES. [§ 156.
Sujucwv, Simeon (Old Testament), and S/fioi/, -&)j/oy, Simon* (New
Testament).
Aevt, Levi (Old Testament), and Aevts, Levi (Matthew, New
Testament). Compare § 32.
c. Hebrew names in ah appear in the form -as (see § 20, a).
Those in iah, or jah, a form of the name of the Supreme Being,
Jehovah, are rendered into Greek by -las : as 'HXias, Elijah ;
^Ha-atas, Isaiah. These, however, take a genitive in -ov. (Meaaias,
Anointed J is of a different derivation.)
d. The circumflexed termination -as (gen. -a) marks some names
belonging to the later Hebrew (or Aramaic) : as Kr}(})as, Bapa^^as.
To these must be added, 'lavas, Jonah, Jonas, or Jona.
More frequently, however, -os indicates the contraction of a
Greek or Latin name, as shown §§ 158, b, 159, d.
157. Double Names.
a. When two names are applied to the same person, one is
sometimes the Hebrew (or Aramaic) appellation, the other its
translation into Greek. Thus, Tabitha (Hebrew) and Dorcas
(Greek) both signify " gazelle ; " Thomas (Hebrew) and Didymua
(Greek) both stand for "twin." So also Cephas (Hebrew) is
translated by Peter, " stone."
h. Some Greek names are mere vocal imitations of the Hebrew,
the sound being imperfectly transferred. Thus, Judah, or Judas,
becomes Theudas (Acts v. 36) ; while Levi may have given rise to
the form Lebbceus. Some, again, have thought Alphceios (Matt.
X. 3, &c.), and Clopas (John xix. 25), to be only two forms of the
same Hebrew word. Cleopas (Luke xxiv. 18) is a different name
from the latter. It is possible that Paul, TJaiiXos, may in like
manner have sprung from the Hebrew Said; or it had a Latin
origin; see § 159, c.
0. In many cases, again, where two names are borne, one is
* Twice, however, the Apostle bears the Old Testament name (Acts
rv. 14 ; 2 Pet. i. 1).
§ 157.] PROPER NAMES PIEBREW. 17<5
a surname, eitlier (1) from some characteristic circumstance, as
Cephas or Peter of Simon, and Barnabas of Joses ; or (2) a
patronymic formed by the Aramaic Bar, " son," as Bar-jesus (son
of Joshua, *Ii]aovs) of Elymas, and possibly Bar-tolmai, BapdoXoixaios,
of Nathanael ; or (3) a local appellation, as Iscariot (Hebrew,
" a man of Kerioth," see Josh. xv. 25), and Magdalene (Greek,
*'a woman of Magdala"). Observe that Canaanite, properly
" Kananite," YLavavLTrjs (Matt. x. 4 ; Mark iii. 18), is not a local
name, but probably the Greek form of the Hebrew word for zealot,
rendered (Luke vi. 15; Acts i. 13), ZijXarrjs.
d. When the name of the same person appears in a Grsecised
and a Hebrew style, the former would naturally be employed
among the Gentiles and Hellenists ; the latter among the Pales-
tinian Jews. So Saul becomes Paul, when he starts on his first
missionary tour (Acts xiii. 9), and ever afterwards retains the
name.
158. Greek Names.
a. Pure Greek names are common, whether of Hellenists
{%. e., Greek-speaking, or foreign Jews) or of Gentile converts. It
has often been noticed that the names of all "the seven" (Acts vi.)
are Greek. So throughout most of the Epistles. "Euodias,"
Evobia (Phil. iv. 2), is a feminine form, and should have been
rendered Euodia.
b. Many Greek composite names are contracted into forms
in -as : as Epa.phroditus into Epaphras (Col. i. 7; iv. 12) ; Artemi-
dorus into Artemas (Titus iii 12) ; Nymphodorus into Nymphas
(Col. iv. 15); Zenodorus into Zenas (Titus iii. 13); Olympiodorus
into Olympas (Rom. xvi. 15); Hermodorus into Hennas (Rom.
xvi. 14). The termination dorus is from ba>pov, gift; and the
former parts of these compounds are from the Greek mythology.
Other contractions are, Parmenas for Parmenides (Acts vi. 5) ;
Demas, probably for Demetrius ; Antipas, for Antipater ; Apollos,
for Apollonius. ^oDnarpos (Acts xx. 4) and 'Stoo-LTrarpos (Rom.
xvi. 21) seem to be the same name in different forms.
176
PROPER NAMES— LATIN. [§.159.
159. Latin Names.
a. The Latin names occur chiefly where we might expect them,
in letters written to or from Rome. The chief are Comeliics,
Aquila, Priscilla or Prisca, Caius, ie., Gains, Urban, Rufus,-^- Julia,
Tertiics, Quartus, Fortunatus, Marcus or Mark, Clement {KXrjfirjs,
-evTos), Pudens, Claudia, and perhaps Linus (2 Tim. iv. 21).
Some have thought that the last-mentioned was a Briton, Lin, of
the household of Caractacus.
h. Three names of Roman Emperors are also found in the New
Testament in a Latin form, Augustus, ^Avyova-ros (Luke ii. 1 ; but
the Greek equivalent, Sc/SaoToj, is found, referring to Nero, Acts
XXV. 21, 25); Tiberius, Ti^epios (Luke iii. 1); and Claudius,
KXavdios (as Acts xi. 28). The surname Ccesar, Kaia-ap, is applied
to Augustus (Luke ii 1), to Tiberius (Luke iii 1, &c.), to
Claudius (Acts xi. 28), to Nero (Acts xxv. 8 ; Phil. iv. 22, &c.).
Caligula is not mentioned.
c. If the word TlavXos be not, as is most likely, an imperfect
Greek transcript of the Hebrcjw name Said, it must also be
referred to the class of Latin words, as in Rome it was the name
of a noble house. Some have thought that the Apostle's family,
on receiving the rights of Roman citizenship, had been adopted
into this house ; others, with even less likelihood, connect his
assumption of the name with the conversion of Sergius Paulus
(Acts xiii 7—12).
d. Latin names, like Greek, may be contracted. Thus LukSy
AovKas (rendered Lucas in E.V. ; Philem. 24), is an abbreviated
form of the Latin name hucanu^. Similarly, Silvanus (2tXovavo$-)
and Silas denote one person. Amplias (Rom. xvi. 8) is probably
a contraction of the Roman name Ampliatus.
For the significance of these various names, the Lexicon may be
consulted.
♦ Rom. xvi 9. This name ia written in E.v. "Urbane," but it must be
pronounced as a dissyllable.
k...
§ 161.] SUBJECT — COPULA — PREDICATE. 177
PAET III.
SYNTAX.
Chapter L— CONSTRUCTIOISr OF THE SIMPLE
SENTENCE.
Subject — Copula — Predicate.
Tlie laws of Universal Grammar, with regard to the con-
struction and arrangement of Sentences, should be clearly
borne in mind, that their special exemplifications in the
Grreek language may be understood. For the most part, it
will be convenient to show the application of these laws
under the heading of the parts of speech or forms of inflexion
severally affected by them. A brief summary may, however,
first of all be given, with the essential rules of construction.
161. A Sentence, or "thought expressed in words," consists
of one or more Propositions,
162. The essentials of a Proposition are, the Subject and the
Predicate.
163. The Subject expresses the person or thing of which
something is afHrmed, desired, or asked, and must, therefore, be
a noun substantive, or the equivalent of one.
Equivalents to nouns substantive are (1) personal pronouns, or (2)
substantivized expressions, for which see § 202.
164. The Predicate expresses that which is affirmed, denied,
or asked respecting the subject ; and in its simplest form it is (1)
a noun substantive or its equivalent, or (2) an adjective or its
equivalent.
The equivalent of an adjective is a participle.
178 SUBJECT— COPULA PREDICATE. [§ 165.
165. The simplest form of Proposition is that which connects
Subject and Predicate by a tense of the substantive verb, to 6e,
called the Copula.
Acts xxiii. 6 : eycb ^apio-alos eljiS ^ ^^ ^ Pharisee.
Matt. xvi. 18 : av d nerpos, thou art Feter.
Matt. xiii. 38 : 6 dypos €<rTiv 6 koo-hosj the field is the world.
Phil. iii. 3 : f)p.el.s €(r|iev rj TrepiTOfirj, we are the circumcision.
Acts xix. 15 : vfif2s rives i<rri ; who are ye ?
Eph. V. 16 : at fjpepai irovTjpai dori, the days are evil.
Luke V. I : avros ^v eorcos, he was standing.
Luke xxi. 24 : *lepovcra\rjfi. (i<rrai iraTovp.evrj, Jerusalem shall be
trodden down.
The verb u/xl, to be, is the true copula ; but some other verbs admit
a similar construction, such as {)itapx<^, to he essentUdly ; ylyvofiai, to
become; <paivo/xai, to appear; KaKovfxai, to be called; KaOlarajuai, to be
set down as, or constituted. These are called Copulative Verbs, as they
agree with etV' in their construction, although in reality embodying
part of the predicate. See § 181.
166. The Copula is often omittedy where ambigiiity is not likely
to arise from its absence.
Matt. v. 5 : /xaKapioi ol npaeUj blessed (are) the meek.
2 Tim. ii. 11 : TTto-rop 6 \6yos, faithful (is) the word.
Heb. xiii. 8: ^Irjaovs Xpiaros ... o avTos, Jesus Christ (is) U^e
same.
For the way to distinguish between an attributive adjective and
a predicate in such cases, see § 206.
167. The Copula and Predicate are most generally blended in
a verb, which is then called the Predicate. Thus, eyw 7P<^">
/ vrrite^ is very nearly equivalent to eyto cljjii -ypd^Mcv, / am
writing.
§ 167.] SUBJECT — COPULA — PREDICATE. .179
The careful student will observe that the term predicate is applied to
the adjective and the verb in different senses. In the latter case, it
really means copula and predicate combined. An adjective or sub-
stantive predicate is sometimes called the "complement" of the verb
with which it stands connected.
168. The substantive verb may become itself a Predicate,
involving the notion of existence.
John viii. 58: ... eyd) d\Li, Before Abraham was, / am.
Rev. xxi. 1 : 17 BdXao-aa ovK ta-riv ert, the sea is no more.
But the phrase, ^7:^ elfii, it ts /, occurring in the Gospels (as Matt,
xiv. 27 ; Mark vi. 50 ; John vi. 20, xviii. 5, 6, 8), may mean one of
three things; iyc& being (1) subject or (2) predicate, or (3) the verb
being predicate.
169. The Subject, when a personal pronoun, is generally
omitted, if no special emphasis or distinction is intended ; the
number and person of the verb sufficiently showing its reference.
Thus, Xeyco vfxLv (Matt. V. 18, 20 ; viii. 10, 11, &c.), / say unto
you, is unemphatic ; but in c-ycl) Xeyw v/xli/, / say unto you (v. 22,
28, 32, 39, 44), our Lord pointedly contrasts his own teaching
with that of the Rabbis. So (v. 21) ou cj)ov€va€is, thou shalt not
rifhurder. Had the reading been <rv ov <^..., the meaning would
have been, " thou, in particular," shalt not. In Luke x. 23, 24,
we read, " Blessed are the eyes which see the things that ye see
(iSXeVcTe, unemphatic) : for I tell you that many prophets and
kings have desired to see those things which ye see " (vp.€is /SXeVfre,
emphatic, by way of antithesis to "prophets and kings." Again,
auxrei is lie shall save ; avrbs aaxrei, he (emphatically, and none
other) shall save (Matt. i. 21). See also Mark vi. 45, "until he
(awTos) should send away the people," for no one else could do it.
Observe also the repetition of avroi, they, in the Beatitudes
(Matt. V. 4-8).
The emphasis conveyed by the insertion of the pronominal subject is
often too subtle to be expressed by translation ; but it is always worth
noting. (See Acts iv. 20; 1 Cor. xv. 30, &c.) The emphatic iyd
(1 Cor. ii. 1, 3, iii. 1), is very noticeable. So in many other passages.
180 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. [§ 170.
170. The omitted Subject of the third person plural is often to
be understood generally. Compare the English expressions, They
say, &c.
Matt. V. 1 1 : orav 6v€i8i(r«o-iv v^ias Koi 8i(o|a>(ri, when they reproach
and persecute you, i.e., men in general.
John XX. 2 : •fjpav top Kvpiov, they have taken away the Lord,
i.e., some persons or other have.
See also Matt. viii. 16, Mark x. 13, they were bringing, i.e., from
time to time ; Luke xvii. 23, John xv. 6, where E.Y. reads "men;"
Acts iii. 2, &c.
171. Verbs in the third person singular, without a subject
expressed, frequently imply some necessary or conventionally-
understood Subject of their own.
1 Cor. XV. 52 : o-oXiriVei, lit., he shall sound the trumpet, a clas-
sical expression, implying 6 o-aXTri-yxTiys, the trumpeter, equivalent,
as E.Y., to the trumpet shall sound.
To this head are to be referred many so-called impersonals : as
pp(\ii, it rains (in First Aorist, James v. 17). The Greeks
originally understood and sometimes expressed Zcvs, or Qeos, with
all such words. " He rains, thunders," &c. ; hence passing into
the im2:)ersonal usage. Again, ^r\a-L, X^-yci, he or it says ; once
ftpriKc, he or it hath said (Heb. iv. 4) ; once etirc, he or it said
(1 Cor. XV. 27), are used as formulas of quotation ; 17 ypa(f)rj, the
Scripture, to be supplied (compare Kom. iv. 3, &c.) ; or 6 Qeos, God
(see Matt. xix. 5).
See, for Xiyn, 2 Cor. vi. 2; Gal. iii. 16; Eph. iv. 8, &c. ; for
<|>Tj<ri, 1 Cor. vi. 16; Heb. viii. 5.
Once, <j)Ti<r£ seems to be used in the general sense, as plural ; they
say (2 Cor. x. 10); but many MSS. (and Lachmann) there read
<{>a(rC.
172. The Nominative is the case of the Subject, and the Sub-
ject and Predicate must correspond in number and person ; wheuco
the gmmmatical rule called the
§ 172.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 181
First Concord. A Verb agrees with its nominative ease
in number and person.
For other uses of the Nominative, see §§ 242-244. All these are
connected with its true use as Subject. It cannot be too strongly im-
pressed upon the learner that the key to every proposition, however
complicated, is in the nominative case and verb ; that is, in the Subject
and Predicate. To these all the other words are only adjuncts.
173. The great apparent exception to the First Concord is that
a Neuter Plural nominative often takes a singular verb.
John ix. 3 : tva <j>av€pca0fj toL <ipya rov Qeov, that the worhs of God
may he Tnanifested.
Acts i. 18 : €|€x^9t iravra to. <rrr\a.y\va avTov, all his howels gicshed
out.
2 Pet. ii. 20 : y^^ovcv to. ^crxara x^^po^^^y ^^6 ^"^^ things have
become worse.
So in many other passages.
The reason for this idiom is undoubtedly that, as neuters generally
express things without life, the plural is regarded as one collective mass.
174. Variations in this idiom are as follow : —
a. When the neuter nominative plural denotes animated beings,
the verb is commonly in the plural number.
Matt. X. 21: liravacm^o-ovTat TCKva ... koL 6avaTw<rovo-iv, Children
shall rise up against . . . and kill.
James ii. 19 : ra 8at(ji.ovia irio-Tcvovo-iv koI ^pio-o-outriv, the demons
believe and tremble.
b. The usage, however, is by no means fixed. Thus, things
without life are occasionally associated with a plural verb.
Luke xxiv. 1 1 : €<}>dv!]<rav ...to. pT]{i.aTa, the words appeared.
John xix. 31 : Iva KaTea-ywo-iv to. o-KeX-r], that the legs might he
broken.
c. Living Subjects are also found with a singular verb.
1^'^ SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. [§ 174,
1 John iii. 10 : cfyavepd Icmv ra rUva, jc.r.X., the children of God
and those of the Devil, are manifest.
Luke viii. 30 : hai\i6via noWa cIotjXOcv, rtiany demons went out.
d. In some passages the singular and plural seem used indis-
criminately with the same Subjects.
John X. 4 : ra irpopara avT^ aKoXov0€i on otSaortv, /c.r.X., the sheep
follow him because they know his voice.
Ver. 27 : ra irpcJpaTa ... oIkovci koX dKoXov9ov<rC jioi^ the sheep heat
my voice and follow me.
1 Cor. X. 11 : Tavra irdvra (ruv^Paivov . . . ^ypow})^ ^^ > ^^l these things
happened^ . . . and were written.
The uncertainty of the usage in this matter has been a fruitful
source of various readings. It is often difficult, if not impossible, to
decide whether the singular or the plural is in the original text.
175. a. When the Subject is a collective noun in the singular,
denoting animate objects, the verb may be put in the plural
number. This construction is known as Rational Concord.*
Matt. xxi. 8 : o Sc irKeiaTos ^x^^s ?orTp«<rav, k.tX., tJie greater
part of the multitude strewed their (plural) garments in the way.
Luke xix. 37 : ijp|avTo aTrav TO irXfjeos, K.T.X.j all the multitude
of the disciples began to praise God, rejoicing (also plural).
Rev. xviii 4 : ^gA-Oere, 6 Xa<5s fiov, Comeforthj my people I
b. The Singular and Plural are combined in some passages.
John vi. 2 : ^koXovOci . . . 6xXo$ noXvs on ewpwv, a great multitude
was following ... because they were seeing.
Acts XV. 12 : la-Cyr\a-t nap to irXfjOos Kai iJKovov, tlie whole number
became silent, and were listening.
The singular, however, is the more usual construction.
176. a. When two or more nominatives, united by a copu-
• Constructio ad sensum, or Ex animo loquentis, or Synesis.
g 176.] SUBJECT a:nd predicate. 183
lative conjunction, form the Subject, the verb is generally in the
plural.
If the nominatives are of different persons, the first is preferred
to the second and third, the second to the third ; that is, / (or
we) and you and he are resolved into we ; you and he into you.
Acts iii. 1 : IIcTpos koL 'Iwavvris dv^paivov, Feter and John were
going up.
John X. 30 : l^tl) koL 6 iraxTip ev lo-fiev, I and my Father are one.
1 Cor. ix. 6 : Iyw koI Bapvdpas ovk 'ixoY-^v, k.t.X., have not I and
Barnabas authority *? &c.
1 Cor. XV. 50 : <rap| Koi aljxa ... ov Svvavrai, ^esA and blood cannot
inherit the kingdom of God.
b. The verb, however, often agrees with the nearest Subject.
In this case the Predicate is to be understood as repeated with
the other Subjects, or that with which the verb agrees is thrown
into prominence, the others being subordinate.
It should be observed that in this construction the Greek verb
usually precedes the nominatives.
Acts xvi. 31 : <rw6^<rT| <rv kqi 6 oTkos aov, tlwu shalt be saved and
thy house.
1 Tim. vi. 4 : e^ ^v yCv^Tai ^Q6vos, ?pts, pXa<r<})Tip.iai, k.t.X. from
which comes envy^ strife, railings, &c.
In these two cases the verb is repeated in thought.
John ii. 12 : Kaript] ... avrbs Kin ol p.a0TiTttl aiiTov, He went down,
to Capernaum, himself and his disciples
Here the one Subject is thrown into prominence ; and the construction
is the common one when the principal Subject is placed nearest the
verb. Compare Matt. xii. 3 ; Luke xxii. 14 ; John ii. 2, iv. 53,
viii. 52, xviii. 15, xx. 3 ; Acts xxvi. 30 ; Philemon 23, 24, where the
approved reading is do-ircifeToi.
177. When the Predicate of a simple sentence is a noun or
V
184 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. [§ 177.
pronoun, united to the Subject by tbe copula, it corresponds with
the Subject by the law of apposition^ viz. : —
A substantive employed to explain or describe another,
under the same grammatical regimen, is put in the same
case.
John XV. 1 : 6 IlaTirjp ^lov 6 Ycwp-ybs eWt, my Father is the husband-
man.
It is unnecessary that the substantives should correspond in
gender or number.
2 Cor. i. 14 : Kavx^iK-a v}i(ov eV/xev, we are yov/r boast.
2 Cor. iii. 3 : e'orre liri<rToX'f| Xpiarov, ye are the epistle of Christ.
178. "When the Predicate is an adjective, including adjective
pronouns and participles, its agreement with the Subject comes
under the Second Concord, viz. : —
Adjectives, pronouns, and participles agree with their
substantives in gender, number, and case.
For further exemplification of this concord, see Chapters IV., V.
In simple sentences the case is of course the nominative. The
agreement in gender and number may be illustrated by the
following : —
Matt. vii. 29 : ^v StSdo-Kwv, he was teaching.
Matt. xiii. 31, &c. : 6|xoCtt ea-riv fi pao-iXcCa, k.t.X., tlie kingdom of
heaven is like, &c.
Mark v. 9 : iroXXoi fcr/xci/, we are many.
Luke xiv. 17 : ^oijtd cWt TrAvra, all things are ready.
John iv. 11: to <j>p^ap eori paOu, tlie well is deep.
1 John V. 3 : at IvroXal avTov papctai ovK tla\v, his commonajnents
are not grievous.
Rev. vii. 14 : ovroi elaiv ol lpx6^ivoi, k.t.X., these are tliey that are
co/mna out of the great tribulation.
§ 179.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 185
179. When the Subject is a collective noun, the adjective Pre-
dicate is sometimes plural. (Compare § 173.)
John vii. 49 : 6 fix^o* ovtos ... ^irdpaToC elaw, this multitude, are
accursed.
180. An adjective Predicate is occasionally generalized by
being put in the neuter gender, though the Subject is masculine
or feminine.
1 Cor. vi. 11 : Tavra. Tiv€s ^re, lit., some of you were this (these
things).
1 Cor. vii. 19 : J? TrcpiTop,'^ ovhiv earn, circumcision is nothing.
181. The laws of apposition and concord, as above applied,
may be restated in the form of the following rule : —
Copulative verbs require the Nominative case after as
well as before them.
For the chief copulative verbs, see § 165, note.
John i. 14 : 6 A670S l^lvero o-dp|, tlie Word became flesh.
Acts xvi, 3 : "EXX-qv virfipxcv, he was a Greek.
2 Cor. xiii. 7 ; tva iwuls 8oKip.oi <}>av«n€v, tliat we should appear
approved, or " be manifestly approved."
Matt. V. 9 : viol 0€ov KXTjOrjo-ovrai, they shall he called sons of
God.
Acts X. 32 : ^ificova, 8s eiriKoXetTat II^Tpos, Simeon (accusative),
who is surnamed Feter.
Romans v. 9 : dp.apT«\ol KaTcoTaOrjo-av ol iroXXoi, SfKatot KaraoTa-
0TicrovTai oi iroXXoi, the many were made (lit., st^t down as) sinners,
the many shall be made (lit., set down as) righteous.
182. Hitherto the rules and examples given have been
designed to show the main elements alone of the simple sentence.
Other words, however are very generally added to the Subject to
the Predicate, or to both, for the purpose of further explanation
186 COMPLEMENTS OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. [§ 1S2.
These words are called the complements of the simple sentence,
and are variously said to complete, to extend, or to enlarge the
Subject or the Predicate, as the case may be.
183. The Subject, which is essentially a noun substantive,
may be extended by apposition with another noun, by the
qualifying force of adjectives, pronouns, or the article, by depen-
dent nouns, or by prepositional phrases.
For Apposition, see § 177.
For Adjectives, see Chapter IV.
For the Article, see Chapter II.
For the dependence of nouns one upon another, and for pre-
positional phrases, see Chapter III.
184. The Predicate, when a noun, may be extended in the
same manner as the Subject.
185. Wlien an adjective is Predicate, it may be extended by
dependent nouns, by adverbs, or by prepositional phrases.
186. Verbal Predicates may be variously extended. Any verb
may be qualified by an adverb. Prepositional phrases may be
employed in this connection also. Especially, the meaning of a
verb transitive requires to be completed by the Object or Objects,
direct or indirect.
For the direct Object, see § 281.
For indirect Objects, see on the Genitive and Dative cases,
Chapter III.
187. The complements of a simple sentence cannot include a
verb, as this would introduce a distinct predication. Verbal
clauses, therefore, forming part of a period are termed accessoi'y
clauses, and a sentence with one or more accessory clauses besides
the principal one, is called a compound sentence.
Accessoiy clauses, as related to the principal, are either co
ordinate or subordinate.
§ 188.] COMPOUND SENTENCES. 187
188. Co-ordinate accessory clauses are similar iu construction
to tlie principal, and are often connected with it and with one
another by conjunctions. (See § 402, seq.)
189. Subordinate clauses are dependent upon the principal or
upon the accessory clause-^, or upon single words or phrases in
either.
It is plain that subordinate clauses may be co-ordinate with one
another.
190. The methods of introducing subordinate clauses are very
various. The chief are, by the Relative Pronoun (§§ 343, 344),
by the use of the Participials (participle or infinitive) (§§ 385 —
396), and by the Particles (§§ 383, 384).
Otherwise : subordinate clauses are Substantival^ Adjectival, or Ad-
verbial. A substantival clause expresses the subject or object of a verb,
or stands in apposition, and usually employs the infinitive ; an adjec-
tival" clause, qualifying a word or sentence, is introduced by a relative
pronoun or conjunction, or employs a participle; and an adverbial
clause is introduced by a conjunction, or employs a participle, or the
oblique case of a noun.
191. It is often difficult to determine whether a certain phrase
is a complement of the Subject, or of the Predicate.
Many illustrations might be given from the Epistle to the
Romans. For instance : ch. i. 17 (ii. 4), 6 bUaios €k Tn'o-rewy ^jyo-erat.
Jit. the righteous (man) from faith shall live. Are we to under-
stand the prepositional phrase ck TriVrfo)? as the complement of the
Subject o bUaios, or of the Predicate ^rjo-erai'i In other words, are
we to translate " The righteous man from faith (he that is
righteous, or justified by faith) shall live f or, " The righteous
man shall live from faith V
Again, iv. 1 : are we to attach the prepositional phrase, Kara
orapKa, accordioig to the flesh, with the word npoiraropa, forefather, in
apposition with Abraham, the Subject of the accessory clause, or to
the Predicate hath found ? — that is, does the Apostle ask, " What
shall we say that Abraham, our father as pertaining to the flesh,
188 COMPOUND SENTENCES. [§ 191.
bath found T or, " What shall we say that Abraham our lather
hath found as pertaining to the flesh ]"
The true connection of accessory clauses is also occasionally
doubtful.
For instance, in Acts iii. 21, it may be fairly discussed whether
the relative clause, which God hath spoken by the mouth of all his
holy prophets, belongs to the word times, or to all things.
Such questions of interpretation are not proposed for consideration
here ; their settlement must often depend, not only on the laws of
construction, but on the signification of individual words. Reference
is made to them only to show the necessity, to a right interpretation of
a passage, of distinctly analyzing the parts of every compound sentence,
and of assigning to each its right position. In our own language, this
is comparatively easy, as the order of the sentence in general indicates
the mutual relation of its parts ; in Greek, through the number and
variety of the inflections, the order is of little importance to the structure
of the sentence, though of much to its emphasis.
192. As hints for disentangling a compound sentence, the
following may be valuable : —
Search first for the predicate, or thing affirmed — usually, of
course, a verb — then for the subject. These once fixed, every
other verb will mark an accessory clause, which will have to
be regarded apart. The remaining words, generally in close
grouping with the Subject and Predicate, must be assigned to them
respectively as their complements, according to the usages of the
several parts of speech and forms of inflection. To these it is now
necessary to turn, in order.
§ 193.] THE ARTICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. 189
Chapter II. -THE AETICLE.
Latin, Articulus; Greek, &p0pov (a Joint). Hence, anarthrous,
" without an article."
Construction of the Article.
193. The Article, 6, ^, rh, the (see § 12), is usually em-
ployed, as in other languages, with nouns substantive. The
Second Concord applies to this relation ; the article agreeing
with its noun in gender, number, and case.
194. This general usage, however, admits of many varia-
tions, attributable to the fact that the Article was originallt/
a demonstrative pronoun.*
Its demonstrative use is clearly seen in the Apostle Paul's quotation
(Acts xvii. 28), rov yhp koX yevos iafiev, we are his offspring.
195. A remnant of the old demonstrative use is, that the
Article often stands without a noun expressed, like our this, thut ;
the sense of the phrase showing wlio or what is to be understood.
For example, the phrase 6 |i.Jv . . . 6 8^ signifies this . . . that, or
the one . . . the other.
Acts xiv. 4 : oi ^\v rjo-av avv tois 'louSaiois, oi Bl avv to'is dnoaToXois,
some were with the Jews, others with the apostles.
In Matt. xiii. 23, be is repeated : o ^\v Uarov, 6 8i i^rjKouTa, 6 Bk
rpiciKovTa, some a hundred, some sixty, some thirty.
See also Matt. xxii. 5; Mark xii. 5 ; Acts xvii. 32; Gal. iv. 22;
Eph. iv. 11; Phil. i. 16, 17 ; Heb. vii. 20, 21.
* The student may be reminded that the EngHsh article they the German
(ier^ the French le, are also original demonstratives. So in other laaguagea.
li)v) THE ARTICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. [§ 195,
When & 54 is used in narration, even without a preceding /teV, it
always implies some other person previously mentioned, as-
Matt, ii. 5 : 01 Se eliroy, and they said.
Mark xiv. 61 : ^ Se iaidnra, and he was silent.
Acts xii. 15 : ^ 5e Stto-xvpfffo, and site steadfastly asserted.
So in innumerable passages.
196. The Article, disconnected from a noun, is often followed
by a genitive.
Matt. X. 2 : 'laKw/Soy 6 tov ZepeSaiou^ James the (son) of Zebedee.
Mark xii. 17 : oTroiSore ri Kaio-apos, render the (things or rights)
of Ccesar.
Gal. V. 24 : ol rod Xpto-rov, the (servants or disciples) of the
Christ J i.e., of the Anointed one.
2 Pet. ii 22 : to ttjs aXrjdovs irapoi{i.Cas, the (saying) of the truthful
l>roverh.
The plural neuter tL is very frequently used in this construction,
as in the second of the above instances. So toL tov vojiov, the things
of the law ; toL tov IIvfivnaTos, the things of the Spirit ; toL cavTwv,
their own interests (lit. the things of themselves), and so on.
197. Similarly, the Article precedes a preposition with its
case.
Matt. V. 15 : Tots Iv t^ oIki«j, to those in the house.
Mark i. 36 : 2t/ia>j/ Kai ol |A€t' avToO, Simon and those with him.
Luke ii. 39 : to, KaTA t^v v(Jhov, the (things) according to the law.
Eph. i. 10: tA. ^ ToTs o^rpavots .. taL M Tf)s y^s, the (things) in
the heavens . . . the (things) on the earth.
Acts xiii. 13 : ol ircpl t^v IlavXov, tliose about Paul, including
himself (by a classic idiom), i.e., Paul and his associates. (See
John xi. 19, Martha and Mary with their friends.)
Any of the prepositions may follow the Article ; for their several
significance, see Chapter II. § 288, &c.
§ 198.] THE ATITICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. 19 1
198. A construction essentially similar is that of the Article
with adverbs, the noun being supplied in thought.
Instances of this are : rh vvv, t/ie (thing) now : the present
(Matt. xxiv. 21; Luke v. 10); r\ or^|j.€pov, to-day; i\ afipiov, the
•morrow (feminine, as if from ^/i€pa, day ; Matt. vi. 34; xxvii. ^2),
So, in many passages, 6 irXiio-iov, the (man who is) near, one's
neighbour; rd ava>, the (things) above; to. KaT«, the (things)
beneath ; ot l^, those without ; toL oTriVco, the (things) behind ; rd
2jjLirpoo-0€v, the (things) before, &c.
In effect, the Article with an adverb is equivalent to an Adjective.
199. The Article is frequently placed before adjectives, the
substantive being implied.
This construction belongs to all genders, and to both numbers.
Instances of its occurrence are numberless. Thus : —
Mark i. 24 : 6 d^ios, the Holy (one).
Matt. vii. 6 : rh d7iov, the holy (thing).
Matt, xxiii. 15 : ttjv g'npav, the dry (land).
Luke xvi. 25 : rd a^aGd, the good (things) .
Eph. i. 3 : iv rots lirovpaviois, in the heavenly (places).
1 Thess. iv. 16 : ot veKpol iv Xpicrrw, the dead in Christ.
Titus ii. 4 : Iva o-axfypoviCoai rds v^as, that they may school the young
(women).
Compare the ordinary English phrases, the good, the great, the wise,
with the abstracts, the true, the right, the heantiful. In Greek, however,
the usage is much more extended, and is exemplified also by anarthrous
adjectives.
200. The Article is commonly also used before pai-ticiplcs ; the
sense again supplying the noun.
Matt. i. 22 : to ^r\Uv, the (thing) spoken.
Matt. V. 4 ; oi ircvOoCvres, the (persons) mourning.
Matt. xi. 3 : 6 epxop-cvos, the coming (One).
192 THE ARTICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. [§ 200.
Matt. xiii. 3 : o (nreipwv, the (man) sowing, i.e., "a sower."
Matt, xxiii. 37 : tovs dir€<rTaXp,4vovs, the (persons) having been
sent.
2 Cor. ii. 15: eV rots or«to|i.4vois ... cV rots diroXXvjj,^vois, in the
(persons) heirig saved ... in the (persons) perishing.
It -will appear from these and other instances that the most conve-
nient way of translating the Article with the participle will often be by-
changing the phrase into a relative and finite verb. Thus, in the last
two examples, we idiomatically and accurately render, those who have
been sent, and those who are being saved ... those who are perishing.
For further details on this frequent and important construction, see
Chap. VI. § 396.
201. The Infinitive Mood in all its tenses is treated as an inde-
clinable neuter substantive, and ls often thus qualified by the
article, the phrase expressing the abstract notion of the verb
(See Chapter VI. §§ 388—390.)
Matt. XX. 23: rb KaOiVai e/c hc^mv, the sitting (lit., "the to-sit")
on my right hand.
Matt. xiii. 3 : tov cnfcfpeiv, (for the purpose) of sowing.
Matt. xiii. 4 : iv rta oirefpeiv, in the sowing.
* Mark xiv. 28 : fiera rb iyipQf[vai, after the rising.
Phil. i. 21 : rh t^v Xpiaros ,.. rh aTroOaveiv KepBos, Living (is)
Christ ... dying (is) gain.
This construction will be more fully illustrated under the head of the
Infinitive. One caution here may not be out of place. The English
form in ing may be either an adjective or a substantive. Thus we may
say, a living man, or Living is enjoyment. In the former case, the word
is a participle ; in the latter, an infinitive ; and in rendering into or
from Greek, the two must be carefully discriminated.
202. Sometimes, again, whole phrases or sentences are qualified
by a neuter Article ; especially quotations, before which some such
word as saying, proverb, comrnand, may be supplied, or expressions
of a qyLestionfh, problem, or difficulty.
§ 202.] THE ARTICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. 103
Quotations are as in Matt. xix. 18 : rh oi <J>ov€vo-€is, ov jaoixcvo-cis,
tlie (command) " thou shall not steal, thou shalt not commit adul-
tery ^
See also Luke xxii. 37 ; Eom. xiii. 9 ; Gal. iv. 25, rh ''Ayap, the (name)
Ilagar; Eph. iv. 9; Heb. xii. 27.
Expressions of the latter class are as in Luke i. 62 : rh rC dv QiXoi
KaXei<r9ai, the (question) what he would like (him) to be called.
Luke ix. 46 : to ti's &v el't] |A6it«v, the (dispute) which should be
greater.
Luke xxii. 4 : to -n-ws a-inhv irapaSw, the (scheme) how he might
betray him.
Rom. viii. 26 : rh rC Trpoo-€v|<ojji€0a, the (question) how vje should
pray.
See likewise Luke xix. 38 ; Acts xxii. 30 ; 1 Thess. iv. 1, and a few
other passages.
203. The employment of the Ai-ticle with Pronouns is reserved
for discussion in § 220.
204. Generally, an Infinitive, Participle, Adjective, or other
word or phrase, qualified by the Article, is said to be substantivizedj
i.e., made virtually a Noun, and treated similarly in the sentence.
Significance of the Article : its Insertion or Omission,
205. The Article is strictly definite ; and is used, as in other
languages, to mark a specific object of thought.
Matt. vi. 22 : 6 Xvxvos tov aafxaros eariv 6 0({>6aXp,cs, the light of
the body is the eye.
206. Hence arises the general rule, that in the simple sentence
the Subject takes the article, the Predicate omits it.
The subject is definitely before the mind, the predicate generally
denotes the class to which the subject is referred, or from which it i3
excluded, but the notion of the class is itself indeterminate.
194 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 206.
Matt. xiii. 39 : oi dipitrraX ayyAoi elaiv, the reapers are angels.
John iii. 6 : rh •<iv^€Wi\Y.ivov ck rrjs a-apKos <rdp| ecm, that which- is
born of the flesh is flesh, i.e., ''partakes of that character."
John xvii. 17:6 Xo-yos 6 o-bs dX'^Geid io-ri, thy word is truth.
John i. 1 : ©cbs I'lv 6 Xd^os, the Word was God.
1 John iv. 8 : 6 ©ebs dYdTrrj kcm, God is love.
The Copula being frequently omitted (§ 166), the presence or
absence of the Article with a nominative adjective will often decide
whether it is a Predicate or an attribute of the Subject. Thus,
iriorrbs 6 Xd-yos, 2 Tim. ii. 11, must be rendered ym^A/itZ is tlie word ;
6 nia-Tos \6yos would have been the faithful word.
Matt. V. 5 : ixaKdpioi ol irpjiicts, blessed (are) the meek.
Kom. vii. 7 : 6 vdp,os djiapria ; is the laio sin ?
From an examination of these examples, it will appear that the us©
of the Article with the Subject, and its omission with the Predicate, is
no grammatical expedient, but arises from their respective definiteness.
Had the article been employed with the predicate in the above case, the
sentences would have read thus : The reapers are the angels, the whole
host ; that which is born of the flesh is the flesh, i.e., is the part of human
nature so denominated ; Thy Word is the Truth, and nothing else can be
80 described ; the Word was the entire Godhead, and God and Love are
identical, so that in fact Love is God ; the blessed are the meek, and none
others; is the Law Sin? (see on the Article with abstracts, § 214) i.e.,
are Sin and Law the same thing ? The meaning of every proposition
would thus have been materially altered.
207. When the Article is found with the Predicate, an essen-
tial identity with the Subject is asserted.*
John i. 4 : 1^ t«^ ^v rh <|)6s ratv dvOpaTrav, the life was the light of
men, the only light.
2 Cor. iii. 17 : 6 KOpios rh irveOjid eVrtf, the Lord is the spiHt, to
which the passage relates.
* This form of sentence answers to the affirmative proposition (iu Sir
W. Hamilton's Logic), in which the Predicate is "distributed."
§ 207.] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE, 1 95
1 John iii. 4 : i\ anapriei earlu i] dvonta, sin is transgression of
law ; and conversely, all transgression of law is sin.
Personal and other prononns are very frequently the Subject when
the Predicate is thus defined. CMatt. v. 13, xvi. 16, xxvi. 26, 28;
Acts xxi. 38, &c. )
208. When a word is defined by some other ex[)ression
occurring with it, the Article may be omitted. So in English, we
may say, "The house of my father," or " My father's house," the
word father's in the latter phrase rendering Jiouse definite.
This most frequently occurs in Greek when the qualifying word,
being a substantive, omits the Article.
Matt. i. 1 : ptpXos 7€v^<r€«s, the book of the generation.
1 Thess. iv. 15 : ev \6y(f Kvplov, in the word of the Lord,
But 1 Thess. i. 8 : 6 \070s tov KvpCov, the word of the Lord.
In the four following cases, the Article, in conformity with
the general rule, marks definiteness.
209. Monadic Nouns.— Objects of which there is but one of
the kind, or only one of which is present to thought, are usually
defined by the Article.
Thus, 6 ovpavds, heaven; tj -yt], earth; tj 0dXa<rora, the sea; 6 jie'-yas
paoriXcvs, the great king.
Exceptions to this usage, and their reason, will be noted further on.
210. Individual Emphasis. — When some member of a class
is singled out as bearing a distinctive character, the Article is
employed.
Examples.— i\ KpiVis, the judgment, i.e., the final judgment, as
Matt. xii. 41, 42 ; Luke x. 14.
ifj -ypa^)^, at 7pa(}>ai, the writing, writings, ie., the Holy Scriptures,
as Matt, xxii, 29 ; John x. 35 ; Kom. iv. 3, xv. 4.
196 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 210.
^ ?pTl|Jtos, the desert, i.e., that of Judaea, Matt. xi. 7 ; or that of
Sinai, John iii. 14, vi 31 ; Acts vii. 30 ; and perhaps Matt. iv. 1.*
6 -ircipdtctfv, the tempter (participle, according to § 200), i.e., Satan.
6 €pxo|J.€vos, the coming one (participle, present), i.e., the Messiah.
Matt. xi. 3, xxi. 9, xxiii. 39 ; Heb. x. 37. Compare Rev. i. 4, 8,
iv. 8.
211. Singular for Collective. — A noun in the singular
number with the Article occasionally stands for the whole class.
Compare such English expressions as " he looked the king," "the
good man is a law to himself"
Matt. xii. 35 : 6 d-yadbs avOpuiros, tJie good man, denoting good
men generally.
Matt. xii. 29 : toO l<rxvpov, o/ the strong man, any one who pos-
sesses that attribute.
Matt. XV. 11 : tov avGpwirov, the man, whoever he may be.
Matt, xviii. 17:6 IOvikJ)? koi o tcXwvtjs, the heathen man and the
publican.
Luke x. 7 : 6 IpYdriis, the labourer, generally.
2 Cor. xii 12 : arj^iela TOV dtrooTiJXov, signs of the apostle, i.e., of
any rightful claimant of that character.
Gal. iv. 1 : 6 kXiipov<J|jios, one wlio is lieir.
James v. 6 : rbv SiKaiov, the righteous man, generally.
To this head also, perhaps, belongs John iii. 10, oh d 6 ZiidaKaXos ;
art thou the teacher? i.e., is that the position thou hast taken? Or, as
in the preceding instances, the word may mark a special emphasis,
Nicodemus having in someeminent way the character of RabbL
♦ Strong reasons have been assigned for the belief that "the wilderness"
of our Lord's temptation was the same as that through which the Israelites
journeyed to Canaan. See Mark i. 13, and compare our Lord's quotations
with their original reference. Note also the i)arallels between our Lord's
history and those of Moses and Elijah. Webster and Wilkinson on Matt
iv. 1 may be usefully consulted on these points.
§ 212.] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. ' 197
212. Renewed Mention. — A person or thing is often made
dejSnite by mention (without the Article) in a paragraph, the
Article being employed in subsequeat refereace.
Matt. ii. 1 : there came wise men, jjhIyoi. Yer. 7, Herod having
called the wise men, tovs fidYovs.
Matt. xiii. 25 : the enemy came and sowed tares, t^tavta. Ver. 26,
then appeared the tares, to, %\Xfi,via..
In like manner compare Lnke ix. 16 with ver. 13 ; John iv. 4.3 with
ver. 40 ; xx. 1 with xix. 41 ; Acts xi. 13 with x. 3, 22 ; James ii. 3 with
ver. 2; 2 Thess. ii. 11, the falsehood, referring to ver. 9 (lit.), wonders oj
(in support of) a falsehood.
Sometimes the reference is implicit, the second expression,
bearing the article, being equivalent to the former, though not
identical.
Acts XX. 13 : eVi rb irXotov, on hoard the ship, implied in ver. 6,
"we sailed away."
Heb. V. 4 : ttjv rifi^v, the honour, referring to the fii*st verse,
" that he may offer gifts and sacrifices."
1 Pet. ii. 7 : if| rip.-?! k.t,\., the preciousness is for you who
believe, i.e., that spoken of in the previous verse, "a corner-stone,
elect, precious^
213. It is a remark of great importance (Winer) that " it is
utterly impossible that the Article should be omitted where it is
decidedly necessary, or employed where it is quite superfluous or
preposterous." " It would be a revolution of the laws of thought
to express as definite that which is conceived indefinitely." Atten-
tion to this will add vividness and suggestiveness to many a
passage in which our Authorized Version has failed to reproduce
the force of the original. From a great number of texts to which
this remark applies, the following may be selected : —
Matt. i. 23 (Isa. vii. 14) : i\ irapGe'vos, the virgin, i.e., the per-
sonage so denominated.
198 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [^ i'lS.
Matt. V. 1 : TO 6pos, the mountain; the high ground" over-
looking the spot. (See also Luke vi. 12.)
Matt. V. 15 : rhv |j.(J8tov, 'rijv Xvxviav, the modiuSy the lamp-stand^
recognised articles of furniture in every house.
Matt. ix. 1, xiii. 2 : rb irXotov, the ship, belonging to the
disciples, or hired for their use. (So John xxi. 3, &c.)
Matt. XV. 2Q : tois Kwapfois, to the little dogSy i.e., belonging to
the household. (So Mark vii. 27.)
Matt. xvii. 24 : rd StSpaxjia, tlie half-shekels^ the well-known,
customary payment.
Matt, xxl 12 : tcLs iMpicrrcpas, the doveSy the accustomed offerings
of the poor.
Matt, xxiii 24 : rhv K<&v«ira, tJjv Ka|&T)\ov, the gnat, the camel, of
some popular fable or proverb.
Luke xii. 54 : t^v v€<J>^t]v, the cloud, " rising out of the west,"
of that peculiar character which foretells much rain. (1 Kings
xviii. 44, 45.)
John iv. 22 : ^ <r«TTip£a, the salvation, expected by Israel.
John xiii. 5 : rhv viirrnpa, the basin, used on such occasions.
John xvi. 1 3 : iraaav •Wjv dX^0€iav, all the truth, in reference to
this particular subject. (Compare Mark v. 33.)
John xviii. 3 : ri\v (nrctpav, tJie band, on duty at the time.
Acts xvii. 1 : i^ a-vvay<ayi\ twv *lov8aia>v, the Synagogue of the
Jews, i.e., the chief or only synagogue of that particular district.
Acts XX. 9 : €771 -riis 0vpi8os, at tlie window, or open lattice of the
apartment.
Acts xxi. 38 : tovs TerpaKicrxiX^ovs, the Jour thousand, the noto-
rious band of desperadoes.
Acts xxiv. 23 : r<f iKaTovrapxn, the centurion, i.e., the captain of
the cavalry who had sole chai-ge of the Apostle when the infantry
(xxiii. 32) had returned to Jerusalem.
1 Cor. i 21 : dia ttjs fi<opias tow KTipvYjiaros, bi/ means oj the
^ 213.] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 199
fooUsfmess of the proclamation, i.e., bj the (so-called) folly of the
preached Gospel.
1 Cor. iv. 5 : 6 2iraivos, the praise, which is due, respectively, to
each.
1 Cor. V. 9 : Iv txi l-irwrroX^, in the letter, referred to thus as
well known by the Corinthians. Whether the Apostle speaks of
the letter he is thus writing, or of some previous one, is a question
of interpretation. (Compare 2 Cor. vii. 8.)
1 Cor. X. 1 3 : tt|v ^Kpao-iv, the escape, the approjjriate means of
deliverance.
1 Cor. xiv. 16 : TO A(xi?iv, the Amen, the appointed and usual
response in Christian worship.
1 Cor. XV. 8 : cba-Trfpei tw iKxpcSjiaTi., as to the one " horn out of
due time," the one Apostle specially bearing that character.
2 Thess. ii. 3 : -q dirotrraopCa, the falling away, or apostasy, which
the Thessalonians had been taught to expect.
1 Tim. vi. 12: tov koKov ayocva ttjs xi'otcws, the good fight of the
faith, the Christian faith.
Heb. xi. 10 : ti^v tovs Oep-eXiovs exova-av iroXiv, the city ivhich hath
the foundations, i.e., the New Jerusalem.
Heb, xi. 35 : ov Trpoa-be^afifvot Tr\v airokirpoxriv, not accepting the
deliverance, proffered as the reward of apostacj.
James i. 11 : a-vv tw Kavo-wvi, with the burning wind from the
east, fatal to vegetation. (Compare Matt. xx. 12 ; Jonah iv. 8 ;
Luke xii. 55.)
Rev. ii. 10 : tov crT€<t)avov ttjs tw^js, the crown of the life, the
promised crown of the life immortal.
Kev. vii. 14 : eV ttjs 0Xt\|r6ws t7]s ftcYdXtis, out of the great tHbula-
tion (lit., the tribulation, the great one), the reference being to a
special trial.
In ascriptions of praise, also, the Article is generally found.
200 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE.
-[§ 213.
Thus, Rev. iv. 11, tJ|v 8o|av kuI t^v Ttjjiifjv, the glory and the h(y»oi/T^
V. 12, 13; vii. 12.
214. Before abstract nouns the Article denotes that the con-
ception is individualised, as an object of thought. It is often
difficult to trace the distinction, and it may even be impossible to
say in some instances whether the insertion or the omission of the
Article before abstracts would give the better sense ;* but there
are many cases in which the difference is clearly marked. For
example, the Article is employed : —
a. When the abstraction is personified.
1 Cor. xiii. 4 : i\ ayain] fiaKpo6vix€7, k.t.X., Love suffereth long, &c.
Acts xxviii. 4: : ov i\ 8ikt] ^rfv ovk etaaev, wliom Justice permitted
7iot to live.
1 Cor. xi. 14 : ovSe avrri i\ <}>v(ris BiddaKeL ; doth not Nature itself
teach ?
So when the abstract term is used for the whole mass of
individuals.
E,om. xi. 7 : ■^ Se ^kXoyt), the election, i.e., the mass of the elect.
Phil. iii. 3 : ■i\ ircpiroft^, the drcumcisiony i.e., the community of
the circumcised.
h. When the abstraction is made a separate object of thought.
1 John iv. 10 : eV to{jt<o eariv i] aya-mi, in this is love, i.e., not
merely "this is an act of love," but, herein Love in its very
essence stands revealed.
1 Cor. XV. 21 : St* dudpanov o Odvaros, by man ^came) death, the
universal fact, apart from the consideration of special instances.
Matt. V. 6 : TreipoivTes Kai dt^oivTcs ri\v SiKatoorvivTiv, hungering and
tMrsting after righteousness, as in itself a good to be obtained.
* In fact, the subtlety of this distinction has given rise to a large number
of various readings.
§ 214.] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 201
c. But where the abstract word expresses merely a quality of
some further object of thought, the article is omitted.
Matt, V. 10 : ol 8e8ia>yfjLevot eueKfv SiKaiotrvvTjs, the persecuted Jbr
righteousness' sake, such being an element in their character.
Romans v. 13 : ajiaprfa rjv iv koct/jlco, sin was in the world, i.e., as
an attribute of human conduct; illustrating the more general
assertion of verse 12, that Sin, in the abstract, rj dpiapTia, entered
into the world.
1 Cor. xiii 1 : 6,-^Lin\v firf e^fo, (If) I have not love, as a feature in
my character.
In determining the reason of the omission or the insertion of the
Article before abstract nouns in any given case, it should be considered
whether there is any grammatical rule requiring it, apart from the
meaning of the term. (See especially § 212.)
215. A definite attribute or property of an object is marked in
Greek by the Article.
Thu8, instead of saying, He has large eyes, the Greeks would say, He
has the eyes large. But when the connexion was only accidental, the
Article would be omitted ; thus, He had a deep wound would be ex-
pressed without the Article, unless the wound had been previously
mentioned, when the case would come under § 212. The Article may,
therefore, iu such sentences as the following, be rendered by the pos-
sessive pronoun.
Acts xxvi. 24 : 6 ^riaros [J-eydXrj T^ ^(avr\ e(f)r), Festus said ivith his
voice upraised, or "with a loud voice," as E. V. So ch. xiv. 10.
1 Peter iv. 8 : t-?|v els eavrovs ayiirriv €kt€vi] exovres, lit., having your
love to one another fervent.
Heb. vii. 24 : dnapd^arov e^et t^v i6pa»<rt)vT]v, he has his priestliood
unchangeable.
The Article, in effect, must often be rendered as an unemphatic
possessive ; the Greeks saying the, where we say his, her, its, their.
216. With proper names, the Article may or may not be em-
ployed. The only rule, probably, that can be safely laid down on
the subject is that a name does not take the Article on its first
202 ARTICLE WITH PROPER NAMES. ' [§ 216.
mention, unless in the case of personages well known or specially
distinguished. For the rest, the habit or taste of the writer
seems to have decided his usage.*
It may, however, be noted that indeclinable names in the oblique
cases most frequently employ the Article. Thus we find tov, t^,
Tov, 'lo-pa'qX. So also in the genealogies.
When a name is followed by some title or descriptive word, the
Article is generally inserted. So Mapia ^ Ma-ySaXTivT), Mary t/ie Mag-
dalene ; 'louSay 6 I<rKapi«TT]s, Judas the Iscariot ; ^cocrdeinjs 6 d8€X<|)os
(1 Cor. i. 1), Sosthenes the brother.
Of geographical names, those of countries, generally feminine
in a, almost always take the Article. The probable reason is that
they were originally adjectives, agreeing with 77), landj Thus,
1^ lovSaia, Jvdoea, properly "the Judaean land," or "land of the
Jews." AI'tvittos, Egypt, is always used without the Article.
Names of cities greatly vary in their use, most generally omit-
ting the Article after prepositions. 'lepovo-oXiqp, (indecL), 'IcpocrdXvfjia
(neut. plur.), Jerizsalemy is almost always anarthrous.
217. The Divine Names appear to be somewhat irregular in
their use or reiection of the Article. ^"' /^
a. We find 0€(Js, God, almost interchangeably with o 0«iJ$. It is
certain, however, that an explanation may very generally be found
in the rules already given.
Apart from these, the general distinction seems to be that the
name without the Article throws the stress rather upon the general
conception of the Divine character — " One who is Omnipotent,
All-holy, Infinite, &c."t — whereas the word with the Article (the
ordinary use) specifies the revealed Deity, the God of the New
Testament. Parts of the second and third chapters of the First
Epistle to the Corinthians may be taken by way of illustration ; —
« Thus, in the Acts, the name of Paul almost always has the Article ;
that of Peter much more seldom, but still frequently. Both in the Gospels
and the Acts, the names of the other Apostles usually omit the article.
t Compare a line of Dr. Watts's —
" This was compassion like a Ood."
§ 217 ] ARTICLE WITH THE DIVINE NAMES. 203
Chap. ii. 1 : The testimony of God, toO OcoO.
Yer. 7 : We speak the wisdom of God, 0€ov (witliout the Article),
i.e., the wisdom of an Infinite and Perfect being, as contrasted
with the world's wisdom, which God, 6 ©cos (the God revealed in
the Gospel), foreordained.
Chap. iii. 7-9 : 6 ©cos rjv^avev (our) God caused the seed to
grow ...for we are God's fellow-workers, ye are God's husbandry,
God's building. Tn these three clauses the word is used without the
Article, as though the Apostle reasoned, " It is a God for whom *
we are labouring, a God who is moulding you, training you for
himself;" resuming, then, in verse 10 with the Article, " according
to tlie grace of God, tov ©eoO, which is given me.''
Thus, again, 2 Cor. v. 18, "All things are of God, tov ©eov, our
God ... who hath given to us the ministry of reconciliation, that
God, ©€<5s — all we can understand by that Name — was in Christ...
We are ambassadors, then, as though this God, tov ©€ov, were
beseeching ... Be ye reconciled to this God, r^ ©€£>... Him who
knew not sin, He made sin on our behalf, that we might become
hiKaioa-vvT} ©€ov, God's righteousness," partakers of a Divine righteous-
ness, " in Him."
b. The name Kvpios, Lord, generally prefixes the Article. The
contrary usage, when not accounted for by ordinary rules, arises
from this word having been adopted in the Septuagint as the
Greek equivalent for the Hebrew name Jehovah. In the Gospels
it usually signifies God; in the Epistles it commonly refers to
Christ, f Instances of its occurrence without the article are (1) in
direct renderings from the Old Testament, as 1 Cor. iii. 20, Kvpios
yivQ>aK€i Tovs dioKoyto-fjiovs, k.t.X., Jehovah knows the thoughts, tkc.
So 2 Tim. ii. 19 ; Heb. vii. 21, xiii. 6. In 1 Pet. i. '2o, it is
substituted for the other Hebrew Divine name (LXX., 0€ov) ;
(2) after prepositions, as in the ordinary phrase, Iv Kvpiw; or in the
genitive case (very often) (3) preceding the appellation, 'Itio-o€s
* Or, with whom, a less probable interpretation.
t The name above every name, Phil. ii. 9, is Kvpios, Jehovah.
204 ARllCLE WITH THE DIVINE TS'AMES. [^ 217.
XpMrrrfs, Jesus Christy as in tlie superscriptions (Rom. i. 7 j 1 Cor.
i. o ; Gal. i. 3). So in Eph. vi. 23, and strikingly Phil. iii. 20.
c. The title vlbs 0eov, a or tlie Son of God (more emphatically
060V vto's, GocTs Son), is fouDd both with and without the Article.
The usual form is 6 vlbs tov ©eov, the Son of the (revealed) God
(comp. under 0e<5s). Ytbs tov 0€ov occurs, as in the Tempter's
interrogatory (Matt. iv. 3), where the supremacy of the revealed
Deity is recognised, but the exclusive relationship of our Lord
to the Father is at least left an open question ; while vlhs 0€ov
expiesses a view altogether less definite of our Lord's dignity.
Thus, in their first confession, the disciples said, " Truly thou
art ,':on of God," 0€ov vWs. But afterwards Peter acknowledges,
"Thou art the Son of the living God," 6 vibs tov 0€ov, k.t.X.
(xvi. 16). The centurion amid the miracles of Calvary expresses
a certain measure of faith : " Truly this man is Son of God,'*
0COV vto's, without an Article to either (Matt, xxvii. 5i ; Mark
XV. 39 ; compare Luke xxiii. 47). But we read of Saul, the
convert, how he preached at once in tlie synagogues of Damascus
that " this man is the Son of God," 6 vlhs tov 06ov (Acts xi. 20).*
d. The name *It]o-ovs, Jestis, when used alone, in the Gospels and
Acts, almost always has the Article. The reason undoubtedly is
that the word is strictly an appellative, being but the Greek form
of the Hebrew for "Saviour." To the disciples, therefore, and
the evangelists, the significance of the word was ever present : the
Saviour. When others employed the name, or it was used in
converse with theib, the Article might be omitted. See John
vL 24 (where for the moment the point of view taken is that of
the spectators). So viii. 59 (and, in critical edd., xi. 51, xviii. 8);
Acts v. 30, xiii. 23, 33, and a few other passages. When the
name stands in apposition with others, as Kvpios or XpwrT<Js, the
article is generally omitted. In the Epistles, this combination is
most usual. The Apostle Paul, for instance, only has 6 *Ii](ro«)s
alone four times, and 'Itjo-ovs nine ; his preference being for the
* Appareni exceptions to this course of remark occur, liuke i. Sr- ; Eom.
L 4, which may be left to the thoughtful reader.
§ 217.] ARTICLE WITH THE DIVINE NAMES. 205
appellative Xpicrrds, while his fervour adopts many variously-com-
bined titles for the Lord his Saviour.*
e. The employment of the Article with Xpwrrds, " the Anointed
One," Christ, shows a remarkable difference between the Gospels and
the Epistles. Strictly speaking, the name is a verbal appellative,
the Greek equivalent of the Hebrew word Messiah, " Anointed."
Hence in our Lord's time it was customary and natural to speak
of tJie Christ. This, accordingly, is the almost invariable form of
speech in the Gospels and the Acts. Thus, Matt. ii. 4, we should
read, " where the Christ is born ; " Matt. xi. 2, " the works of the
Christ,^' i.e., such works as attested his possession of that cha-
racter; Matt. xxii. 42, " what think ye of the Christ?" John xii. 34,
^^ the Christ abideth for ever ;" Acts xvii. 3, "that it behoved the
Christ to suffer,"
Already, however, the tendency was at work which in later
days changed this appellative into a recognised proper name.
Traces of this may be seen in Matt. i. 1 ; Mark i. 1, ix. 41 ; Acts
ii. 38 ; and in the Epistles of Paul the usage appears entirely
reversed, the omission of the Article being the rule (in the forms
Xpitrrds alone, 'Itjotovs Xpio-rds, and Xpitrrbs 'Itjo-oOs), and its reten-
tion the exception. The descriptive title, " the Anointed," has
not been wholly lost, but the personal name of Christ has laid
a yet deeper hold on the mind and heart of the Church. Some-
times, again, the Apostle employs one form in close repeated recur-
* Mr. Rose, in his edition of " Middleton on the Greek Article," gives
a list of the appellations used by St. Paul, with the number of times they
rtispectively occur. They are —
S'lriaovs
4 times.
6 Kipios 'Irjaovs...
... 10 times
'Itjcovs ...
9
>»
'ItjotoDs 6 Kvpios...
... 1 „
6 XpicrrSs
95
}i
6 K. 'I. Xpiar6s...
... 5 „
Xpi(Tr6s
122
ii
Kipiosn.X. ...
... 17 „
*l7j(Toi/s 6 XpiarSs
1
j>
d X. 'I. (5 Kipios
... 1 „
6 Xpiarhs 'Irjaovs (read-
Xpicrrhs 'I. K. ...
... J »
ings doubtful)
4
j>
'I. X. 6 K. iifiwv
... 3 „
'lr}<Tovs XpiffTos ...
39
>»
6 K. r)fiS)V 'I. X.
... 35 „
Xpiarhs 'hiaovs ...
58
>»
X. 'I. 6 K. Vfiay
... 9 *>
206 ARTICLE WITH THE DIVINE NAMES. " [§ 217.
rence, as in Col. iii. 1-4 : " If ye be risen with the Chj'ist, seek the
things that are above, where the Christ sitteth . . your life is hid
with the Christ ... when the Christ shall appear." Without the
Article, we have the name thus recurrent in Phil, l 18-23. After
speaking of those who preach the Christ out of envy and strife,
the Apostle adds, as with a more personal love, " nevertheless
ChHst is preached" ... uttering then his earnest hope "that Christ
shall be magnified ... for me to live is Christ ... yet to depart and
to be with Christ is far better."
It is not asserted that the thoughtful reader will always discern the
reason of the employment or the omission of the Article in connexion
with these sacred names. Often, however, unquestionably, most inte-
resting and valuable suggestions will arise; and the whole subject is
worth the most painstaking investigation. *
/. The name of the Holy Spirit, Ilvcvfia dyiov, requires the Article
when he is spoken of in himself; but when the reference is to his
operation, gifts, or manifestation in men, the Article is almost inva-
riably omitted. In other words, " the Spirit " regarded objectively
t^kes the Article, regarded subjectively is frequently anarthrous.
Apparent exceptions to this rule are but instances of more general
> grammatical laws, as, for instance, when the term, although definite,
follows a prei)osition or precedes a genitive.
Accordingly, when disciples of Christ are said to be Jilled with
the Spirit, to receive the Spirit, to walk in the Spirit, the Article is
omitted. See, e. g., Luke i. 15, 41, 67, ii. 25, xi. 13 ; John iii. 5,
XX. 22 ; Acts i. 5, ii. 4, iv. 8, vi 3, viii. 15, 17 (the Article in 18 is
a case of renewed mention), xi. 16 ; Romans viii. 9, ix. 1, xv. 13, 16 ;
1 Cor. ii. 4, 13, vii. 40 ; 2 Cor. iii. 3 ; Eph. v. 18, vi 18; Col. i. 8;
2 Thess. ii. 13 ; 1 Pet. i. 2 ; 2 Pet. i. 21 ; Jude 19 ; Rev. i. 10, <fec.
An instance of the force of the Article may be seen in John xiv.
17, 26, XV. 26, xvi. 13, in all of which passages we read rh Ilvevna.
But when the Spirit is imparted, the Article disappears (xx. '!^'l),
\d^eT€ nv6V|ia a-yiov, " Receive ye (tlie) Holy Ghost."
t See a striking Essay on "the Greek Testament," in the Quarterly
Review for January, 1863.
§ 218.] SIGXIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 207
218. Some monadic nouns, (see § 209) being regarded as proper
names, may be used with or without the Article. Such are ijXios,
sun; K6<r{jios, world; ovpavos, ovpavoi, heaven, or heavens ; yi], earth
or land; GlXao-o-a, sea; rjiiepa, da^; vvg; night; iKKX-rjo-ta, church, and
some others. Tlie Article, however, is most generally inserted.
219. Some prepositional phrases omit the Article ; in most
instances denoting time, place, or state. Compare the English
expressions, at home, on land, hy day, in church.
Examples. — dir' dvpov, from the country (Mark xv. 21; Luke
xxiii. '2Q) ; ds a.ypiv, into the country (Mark xvi. 12) ; ev d^pw, in
the country (Luke xv. 25).
€v dpx^, in the beginning (John i. 1, 2 ; Acts xL 15) ; dir* dpxi]S
(Matt. xix. 4, 8 ; Luke i. 2 ; John viii. 44 ; 1 John i. 1, (fee.) ;
^ ^9X^%from the beginning (John xvi. 4).
€K 8€|tft)v... €| dpioTTcpdiv, on (Ut., off) the right ... the left (Mark
X. 37 ; Luke xxiii. 33, <fec.)
els olKi'av, into the house (2 John 10).
iv €KKXr](ri(3,, in (the) church (1 Cor. xiv. 19, 28, 35).
ktrX irpdcrwirov, on tJie face (1 Cor. xiv. 25).
dirb dvaroXcov, from the East (Matt. ii. 1, xxiv. 27; ; dirb Svo-jiwv,
from the West (Luke xii. 54 ; Rev. xxi. 13; both phrases com-
bined. Matt. viii. 11; Luke xiii. 29); 'iia% Zva-^Stv, unto the West
(Matt. xxiv. 27).
€K v6Kp«v, from the dead. This phrase is of constant occurrence,
as Matt. xvii. 9, &c. Occasionally, ano is employed ; ver-y rarely
the Article is found. Perhaps the omission is intended empha-
tically to mark the condition, " from dead persons " — those, inde-
finitely speaking, who are in that state.
Other instances of this idiom "might be added. The student, however,
must be cautioned against supposing that the preposition is itself a
reason, to be appHed promiscuously, for the omission of the Article
before a term intended to be taken as definite. *
* See, for instance, Alford. on Matt. i. 18, e'/c irv^vnaTos ayiov. The Article
is omitted, not account of the preposition, but according to the distinction
iUustrated, §217,/.
208 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICL*.. ' |"§ 220.
220. N^ouns defined by the demonstrative pronouns, ovtos, this,
eKelvosj that, directly agreeing with them, take the Article, which
always immediately precedes the noun ; the pronoun being placed
indifferently, first or last. Tlius we may have 6 &vQpoyiros ovtos
(Luke ii. 25), or ovtos 6 AvOpwiros (xiv. 30), this man, but never 6 o^T-off
avdpcoTTOs or ouTOs avdpcoiros, and scarcely ever audpcjiros ovros.*
When the Article is omitted with the noun and demonstrative
pronoun, the latter implies a predicate. Thus (Rom. ix. 8), ov ...
ravro T^Kva tov Qeov, these are not the children of God.
These rules apply for the most part to proper names, as Acts
xix. 2G, 6 IlavXos OVTOS, this Pavl ; Heb. vii. 1, oiutos 6 MeXxio-eScK,
this Melchisedeh ; John vi. 42, ovx o^tos ia-nv 'Itio-ovs, Is this not
Jesus ?t OvTo^ after a name often implies contempt.
The pronoun toiovtos, Totavrrj, toiovto, such, is found with the
Article when the person or thing which is the subject of com-
parison is definitely before the writer's mind ; the omission of the
Article shows that the reference is more general, to quality or
attribute.
Matt. xix. 14 : t«v toiovtcdv, /c.t.X., of such (as these children)
is the kingdom of heaven.
2 Gor. ii. 6 : Uavov t« toiovtcj>, sufficient to such a man (as the
offender of whom I write).
Matt. ix. 6 : ^ovon'av ToiavTTjv, such (kind of) power.
John ix. 16: ToiavTa trTjueta, such (kind of) miracles.
It is observable, however, that the two forms of expression, being
separated by so slight a shade of difference, may often be used indif-
ferently. The Article is generally omitted in the Gospels, generally
inserted in the Epistles, except that to the Hebrews.
221. The distributive pronominal adjective ^Kao^os, eachy never
takes the Article in the New Testament.
* The demonstrative 35« only once occurs in the adjective construction,
and follows the same rule : James iv. 13, els T^i/5e rV v6\iv, into this city.
t The learner should be cautioned against rendering, *' Is this Jesus not
the son of Joseph ?" which would have required 6 'Irjaovs. The comma at
Jesus in the E. V. conveys the proper
§ 221.] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 209
Before too-ovtos, so much (plur, so many), the Article is not found
in the oSTew Testament, with the exception of Kev. xviii. 17,
6 ToorovTos irXovTos, the wealthy which was so great.
222. The Article prefixed to the pronoun avros gives it the
meaning of the sarne. (See § 57, d.)
2 Cor. iv. 13: to airh irvevpa, the same Spirit.
But Rom. viii. 26 : avrh rh irveOjia, the very Spirit, the Spirit
himself.
The New Testament MSS. often vary between the contracted plural
ravrd and Tavra (plur. neut. of oZros). See Luke vi. 23, vi. 26, xvii. 30 ;
1 Thess. ii. 14.
223. a. A possessive pronoun agreeing with a noun not a Pre-
dicate, invariably takes the Article.
John xvii. 10 : tcL ejid Trdvra ad iariv Ka\ rd ord i^d, all (things)
TTiine are thine, and thine are mhie.
Acts xxiv. 6 : /cara rhv r^^inpov vop-ov, according to our law.
John vii. 6 : 6 Kai'pos 6 vfi^rtpos, your opportunity.
h. The possessive sense is, however, generally given by the geni-
tive of the personal pronoun ; the article preceding the noun, as
6 TTttT^p (lov, my father ; ot -iraTc'pcs 4(t«v, your fathers.
224. a. The adjective irds, all, in the singular number, without
the Article, signifies every ; with the Article, it means the whole of
the object which it qualifies. Thus, irdo-a irdXis is every city ; iraora
y\ iroXis, or 1^ iracra irdXis,* the whole of the city. ^ ttoXis irdo-a would
have a meaning sJightly ditferent — the city, all of it — "the city in
every part." So with abstracts.
Luke iv. 13: avvreXea-as irdvTa -ircipao-iidv, (the devil) having ended
every temptation, i.e., every form of temptation.
2 Cor. iv. 2 : npos irao-av <ruv€£8T]<riv dvdpoiTrcov, to every conscience
of msn, i.e., to every variety of human conscience.
* A constniction only twice found: Acts xx. 18, rbc ircii/To -xp^vovy and
1 Tim. I 1<5.
210 SIG^'IF^CAXCE of the article. [§ 224,
Eph. iii. 15: irao-a irarpia, k.t.X , Every family in Jieaven and
tivrtk.
Some critics have questioned this translation on the authority of
ch. ii. 21, where many critics read TrStra oiKoSofxri, and render, the wliole
building. This, however, is quite contrary to usage
2 Tim. iii. 16 : Trdo-a 7pa(}>T^ QeoTrvevaros, k.t.X. ^ Every writing
(i.e., of those just mentioned, v. 14) is divinely inspired* &c., or
Every divinely inspired writing is also profitable, f &c.
Luke ii. 10 : iravrl tu Xaw, to all the people of Israel.
The phrase in ch. ii. 31 is diflfereut : ^^ before the face of all the
peoples,''^ i.e., the nations of mankind.
1 Cor. xiii. 2 : eav exa irdo-av ttjv iricrriv, k.t.X., if I have all the
faith requisite for such a task.
Col. i. 23 : eV imo-Tj rfj KTiVct, in the whole of the creation ; not
"to every creatiire," as E.V. Compare ver. 15, irdoTjs ktio-cws,
where the rendering is accurate, of every creature.
1 Tim. i. 1 6 : tt|v irdo-av jiaKpoGuniav, all the long suffering which
belongs to the Divine cliaracter.
John V. 22 : n^v Kpio-iv irdo-av, k.t.X., the judgment (of men), all
of it. The Father has committed this wholly to the Son.
With proper names, as of countries, cities, &c., the Article after
•nas may be omitted by § 216; -the signification being still the
whole. (Matt. ii. 3 ; Acts ii. 36.)
h. The plural, irdvT€s, almost always has the Article when the
substantive is expressed; almost always omits it when the sub-
stantive is implied. The few exceptions to the former are chiefly
when the noun is &v0p«irot, men.X The excei)tions to the latter
are where the idea is collective. Thus, iravra is all things, seve-
rally ; tA irdvTa, all things, as constituting a whole.
« Middleton.
t Ellicott.
X See also Acts xvii. 21, xix. 17 ; 1 Cor. x. 1 ; 1 Thess. v. 26 ; Heb. I G;
1 Pet. ii. I.
8 224.] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 211
Phil, i V. 13: iravra la-xvoD, I can do all things.
Col. i. 16: TOL iravra 8C alrov, All things are hy Rim (Christ) .
See also 1 Tim. vi. 13; Heb. ii. 8, &c.
The usual position of the plural, trivris, is before the Article and
substantive. Twice (Acts xix. 7, xxvii. 37) with a special meaning,
it stands between them: ol irdvres &vSpes, the men in all; at iracrcu
rl/vxal, the souls (persons) in all. Occasionally, employed after the
Article and substantive, it talces a strong emphasis : as John xvii. 10,
TO ifjih Ttivra ad eVrt, Mine are all thine.
225. The construction of 8\os, whole, in respect of the Article,
is similar to that of vra?. Generally the Article stands between it
and its noun, as 8Xos 6 Kdo-jjios, the whole world (Rom. i. 8). Occa-
sionally the noun and Article precede, with an added emphasis on
oKos, as 6 Koo-jjios 8Xos, the world, (yea) the whole (of it) (Matt,
xvi. 2Q).* A few times it is found without the Article, and its
force is expressed by the English indefinite, as John vii. 23, 8Xov
AvOpwirov, a wlhole man I have restored to health. The other
instances are Acts xi. 2Q, xxi. 31 (before a proper name), xxviii. 30 j
Titus i. 11.
226. The employment of the Article with the adjective pro-
nouns fiXXos, other (numerically), and ^repos, other (properly implying
some further distinction), is analogous to the English idiom. t
Singular, the other ; plural, the others (^rcpos only once so used,
Luke iv. 43).J
John XX. 3 : 6 dXXos fiadrjrfjs, the other discq^le.
John XX. 25 : ol dlXXot naBijTai, the other disciples.
■\ Matt. vi. 24 : rhv ^rcpov dyairrjaei, the otlier (master) he will love.
Luke iv. 43 : rais cWpais noXeaLv, to the other cities.
* The observant reader may trace the emphasis in the other passages
where this order is found : Matt. xxvi. 59 ; Mark i. 33, viii. 36 ; Luke ix. 25,
xi. 36; John iv. 53; Acts xix. 29, xxi. 30; Kom. xvi. 23; 1 Cor. xiv. £3;
1 John V. 19; Rev. iii. 10, xii. 9, xvi. 14.
t In classical Greek, 6 aWos means the rest of.
J Perhaps also Matt. xi. 16 (Tischendorf).
!212 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [ij 227.
227. The Article with the neuter ttoXu (" the much ") is equi-
valent to ^Hhe abundance." (See 1 Pet. i. 3.) More common,
however, is its use with the plural, iroXXoC, noWai, rroWd, many, to
which it gives the significance of the many, the generality, the whole
mass of the particular objects of thought. The onlj instances arc
the following : —
Matt. xxiv. 12 : 17 dydTTTj t«v iroXXwv, the love of the many shall
wax cold.
Luke vii. 47 : at afiapTtai ... at iroXXaC, her sins — t/ie man^', i.e.,
the whole of them — are forgiven.
Acts xxvi. 24: to, ttoXXA ypdfifiaTa, lit., the many letters; the
mass, the quantity of thy learning.
Rom. xii. 5 : 01 iroXXoi, the many of us — the whole mass — are
one body in Christ. So 1 Cor. x. 17.
1 Cor. X. 33 : rh twv iroXXwv, the (advantage) of the many.
2 Cor. ii. 17 : « ot iroXXoC, (we are not) as tlie many.
Kev. xvii. 1 : rav Iddrav r&v iroXXwv, of tlie many waters.
Rom. V. 15-19 : This most important passage, containing this idiom,
has been thus translated * : —
[We have noted by italics the Articles which the English version
omits.]
15 Howbeit not as the trespass, so also is the gift of grace. For if
by the trespass of the one tlie many died, much more did the grace of
Grod and his free gift abound imto the many by the grace of tJie one man
Jesus Christ.
16 And not as through on6 that sinned, so is the gift ; for the judg-
ment came of one unto condemnation, but the gift of grace came of
many trespasses unto justification.
17 For if by the trespass of the one death reigned through the one,
much more shall they which receive the abundance of the grace and of
the free gift of {the'f) righteousness reign in hfe through tlie one, Jesua
Christ.
* " The Epistle of St. Paul to the Eomans, after the Authorized Version,
newly compared with the original Greek, and revised. By Five Clergymen.
Second edition. Parker & Son. 1858."
t In the Greek, but not in the "Five Clergymen's" translation.
§227.1 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 21'6
18 Therefore as through one trespass, [the issue was] unto all men to
condemnation, even so through one righteous act [the issue was] unto
all even to justification of life.
19 For as through the disobedience of the one man the many were
made sinners, even so through the obedience of the one shall the many
be made righteous.
228. When the Nominative is used for the Vocative in direct
address, the Article is prefixed. For an explanation of the
idiom, see § 244.
Matt. xi. 26 : va), 6 iran^p, ^ven so. Father I
Luke viii. 54 : t| irais, eyclpov, Damsel, arise !
John xix. 3 : x"*P^ ° pao-iXevs, Hail, King 1
John XX. 28 : 6 Kvpids \xov koI 6 ©cds fiov, My Lord and my God!
Heb. i. 8 : 6 Opouos trov 6 ©eds, 27iy Throne, God ! See also
ver. 9, and x. 7.
229. The Ai'ticle is often separated from its substantive by
qualifying or explanatory words.
a. These are, generally, a preposition with its case, other
dependent words being sometimes added.
Matt. vii. 3 : t^v 6e iv ra aa 6<f>da\n^ SoKov, but the beam in
thine own eye.
Luke xvi. 10 : o iv eXaxLcrra &8tKos, the (man) unjust in the least.
1 Pet. i. 14 : rats nporepov iv rrj ayvoia vp.cov eiriGvuiais, tlie former
(lit,, formerly) lusts in your ignorance.
b. Adverbs also are often thus employed : —
2 Tim. iv. 10 : ayaTD^o-as Tov vvv alwva, having loved the 'present
(lit., now) world.
230. a. The Article is very frequently repeated after its noun,
to introduce some attributive word or phrase.
Clearly, this is a result of the original demonstrative force of the
Article.
The phrase introduced may be an adjective or participle, a preposition
with its case, oi* (rarely) an adverb.
The Article so employed gives the attributive a certain prcminence
or emphasis.
214 EMPHATIC USE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 230.
Matt. xviL 5 : 6 vlos fiov 6 d7aTnjT<Js, my beloved Son.
Titus ii. 11: fj x^P'-^ '''^^ Qeov rj <r«TVjptos, the grace of God that
hi'ingeth salvation, lit., the grace ... the salvation- bringing.
Heb. xiii. 20 : rbv iroifxiva Twv Trpo^drav rhv p.^'yav, the great
Sheplierd of the sheep. See also Matt. v. 16; Luke xx. 35;
1 Pet. i. 25 ; Rev. xi. 2.
The absence of the Article before an attributive phrase is often
significant. Thus Rom. viii. 3 : KarcKpive t^v a/iapriav iv rp aapKi, he
condemned sin in the Jiesh. The phrase depends upon KartKpivf. Had
it been T^)y iv rr, aapKl, in the Jiesh would have qualified sin.
1 Pet. i. 25 : to pijixa rh evayycXwrG^v, tlie word iltat was preacJied
lit., the word, the spoken-as-glad-tidings.
Matt: V. 16 : rbv Haripa vfioiv rhv Iv toi« o^ipavois, your Father in
the Iieavens.
Luke XX. 15 : t^s dvaardw-eas ri\s Ik vcKptov, of the resurrection .
from the dead.
Rev. xi. 2 : Tfjv aiXrjv t^v ^a)Qiv, the outer court.
h. Occasionally, this emphatic form of expression is employed
when the noun has no Article preceding.
Luke xxiii. 49 : yvvaiKcs oX omn^aKoXovO^o-ao-ai avra, (there stood)
women, those wJw had followed Him.
John xiv. 27 : elpfjinjp Tf|v l|iifjv Si'Sco/xi v/xtf, Peace (which is) mine,
J give to you.
I Tim. V. 3 : xw°^ '"'^V*' "^^^ ^vtcds x'^P*^, honour widows, those
who are widows indeed.
Rom. ix. 30 : SiKaioa-vvrjv Se t^Iv 4k itiotcws, (he obtained) righteous-
ness, yea that (which is) by faith.
James i 25 : ds vofxov rtXfiov rhv Tt]s IX<v0«p£as, (whoso looketli)
into a perfect law, that of liberty.
In passages like these, the former clause contains the general descrip-
tion ; the latter limits it to a particular case. See also Gal. ii. 20,
i'i. 21; 1 Pet. i 10, "prophets, those who prophesied;" Jude 6,
** Angels, (even) those namely that kept not their first estate."
§231.] EMPHATIC USE OF THE ARTICLE. 215
231. The defining clause being frequently participial, it may
be remarked, in anticipation of the account to be given of Parti-
ciples (§§ 393-396), that with the Article the participle qualities
the noun, as a simple ej^ithet, while without the Article it implies
a predicate. Thus, 6 Oeos o iroi^<ras t6u Koa-yLov is, God who made the
vjorld ; 6 eeos iroiTJo-as, k-t.X., would be, God having made, or when
He had made, &c. In 2 Pet. i. 18, again, we render, not "the
voice which was home from heaven," but *' the voice as it was
borne."
Sometimes it will be important to observe the force of the anarthrous
participle.
Thus, in a much- controverted passage, 1 Pet. iii. 19, 20, to?s eV <pv\aK^
■iryeu^i.a<ri.. a.irei6i](Ta(Ti ttotc, whatever be the true interpretation, the words
must be translated, not "the spirits in prison who were once disobe-
dient," but " the spirits in prison when once they disobeyed."
This usage will be further discussed in the sections on Participles.
232. In the enumeration of several persons or things, joined
by a connective particle, an Article before the first only intimates
a connexion between the whole, as forming one object of thought.
This is termed "combined enumeration." The repeated Article,
on the other hand, implies a separation, in themselves, or in the
view taken of them.
Sometimes, however, the separation seems to be chiefly grammatical,
different genders requiring the repeated Article.
a. Combined eyiumeration. — Eph. ii. 20 : eVi rc5 defxeXloi t«v
aTrooToXcoj/ Kal 7rpo<pTjTa>v, Upon the foundation of the apostles and
prophets, all together constituting but one basis.
Eph. iii. 18 : ri to irkaros Ka\ /jirJKos kol ^ddos Koi v\//-os, what (is)
the h^eadth and length and depth and height, one image of vat-t
extension being before the mind.
Col. ii. 22 : to. ivTakixara KaX hihacTKaklas twv auOpedirayv (obs. the
different genders), the commandments and tea/:hings of men, toge-
ther constituting one system.
2 Pet. i. 10 : ttiv Kk^aiv kol eKXoyrju, (your) calling and election,
each mutually implying the other.
216 THE ARTICLE IN ENUMERATIONS [§ 232
Matt. xvii. 1 : rhv Uerpov koI 'laKco^ov /cat ^ladvvrjVy Peter and
James and John^ one inseparable group.
Titus ii. 13: t^v fiaKapiav iXnida Koi eTri(f)dveiav t^s bo^rjs Tov ixeyaXov
Ocov Koi (ra>TTJpos rjfia>p ^Iijcrov Xpio-rov, the blessed hope and mani-
festation of the glory of our great God and Saviour Jesus Christ.
Here are two cases of enumeration, each with a single Article :
(1) the "manifestation" is but another expression for the "hope;" and
(2) the latter phrase may imply, on the above-stated principle, either
that God (the Father) and Jesus Christ the Saviour are so inseparably
conjoined, that the glory of each is the same ; or else, as many of the
best interpreters have it, and as Ellicott renders it in the translation
above, that God in this passage is, like Saviour ^ an epithet of Christ.
Comp. Eph. V. 5 ; 2 Thess. i. 12 ; 2 Pet. i. 1. See also the phrase, *'the
God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ" Eph. i. 3; 1 Pet. i. 3; Rom.
XV. 6 ; 2 Cor. i. 3, xi 31 (1 Cor. xv. 24) : not God, even the Father, &c.
h. Separate enumeration. — Luke xii. 1 1 : eVl toLs (rvvaya>yas Ka\
Tots dpxas Ka\ tcLs i^ovaias, to the synagogues, and tJie magistrates,
and the powers, three different classes of tribunal. The reader
may compare Mark xv. 1, wht re the elders and scribes are spoken
of as constituting but one class, i.e., in the Sanhedrim.
James iii. 1 1 : rh yKvKv koi rb Tri/epo , the sweet and tJie bitter ^
from their very nature separate.
2 Thess. i. 8 : rots pf) etSoo-t Geoj/, Ka\ rots p^ vTraKovovari, *c.r.X.,
to tJwse who know not God, and those who obey not the Gospel of
our Loi'd Jesu^s Christ ; two distinct classes, incurring different
degrees of punishment.
Heb. xi. 20 : iv\6yr](Tiv *Ia-aaK rhv 'laKcoiS Ka\ rhv *H(rav, Isaac
blessed Jacob and Esau. Both received a blessing, but not
together, and not the same.
The same enumeration may be found in different places, with and
without the separating Article. This arises from a difference in the
writer's point of view in each particular case. So in 1 Thess. i. 7, the
Apostle writes, r^ yiaK€Bovl<f koI t^ Axotqt ; but in ver, 8, t^ Mouce^opi<f
Kol Axotot. In the former verse, he seems to contemplate the di^ercnt
directions in which the influence of Thessalonian Christianity spread ;
lii the latter, the uniform spread of that influence.
Such distinctions may be slight, but they are real, and even where
they seem, as Winer says of this passage, "indifferent," should at least
be noted.
§ 233.] OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE. 2.17
233. The omission of the Article marks indefiniteness, which
in translation may be represented by our Indefinite Article in
the .singular, and by the anarthrous plural. This point, also, has
occasionally been neglected in the Authorized Version.
Matt. xii. 41, 42 : dv8p€s Nivcmrai ... pao-iXio-o-a N(5tov, men of
Nineveh ... a queen of tJie South.
Luke ii. 12: ev^rjacre pp^<}>os', ye shall find a babe, which shall be
the sign that the promise is fulfilled.
Acts i. 7 : xpovovs ^ Kaipovs, times or seasons, generally.
Acts xvii. 23 : ayvdt^m^ 0€w, to an unknown God.
Acts xx\T.. 2-7 (Tischendorf) : iyKoXovfiai viro 'Iov8a£«v, / am
accused by Jews ; that they should bring such a charge being the
wonderful feature in the case.
Rom. ii. 14 : otov yap t^vr\, k.t.X., For when Gentiles do the things
contained in the law ; not the Gentiles, as though the case were
ordinary.
1 Cor. iii. 10 : 0€ji^iov i6r]Ka, I laid a foundation.
1 Cor. xiv. 4 : ^KK\T]<rCav oiKodoixelf edifies an assembly, antithetic
to himself
2 Cor. iii. 6; ^iukovovs KaivT]s 8ia9VjKT)s, ministers of a new covenant.
Gal. iv. 31 : ovk eV/xei/ iraiSio-Kris rcKi/a, we are not children of a
bondwoTnan.
Phil. iii. 5 : *E^paxos i^ *EppaC«v, a Hebrew of Hebrews, i.e., ot
Hebrew parents.
1 Thess. iv. 16 : iv (fxovfj &pxayy(kov, amid tlie voice of an arch-
Heb. i. 2 : iXaXrja-ep fifiiv iv viw, God spahe to us by (in) a Son,
i.e., by one possessing that character, in contradistinction to the
prophets of former ages.
234. The use of the word vo|jios deserves special attention.
With the Article, it invariably denotes the Mosaic law, except
where its meaning is limited by accompanying words. Without
218 ARTICLE WITH VcJ^os, LAW. [§284-
the Article, in cases where the omission is not required by gi*am-
matical rule, the term appears to have a wider significance ; some-
times referring to the Mosaic law as the type of law in general,
and sometimes to law in the abstract, including every form of
Divine command or moral obligation.
Rom. ii. 12 : oa-oi h v6^<a rjnapTov, K.r.X., As many as sinned under
law shall be judged by law.
E,om. ii. 23 : os Iv v6^fa Kavxaa-m, K.T.X., wlio maJcest thy boast of
law, or of a law, through breaking the law, &c. (renewed mention.)
Rom. ii 26 : iav vdjiov Trpda-a-Tjs, if thou keepest law, i.e., if thou
dost obey, in general j so the verse continues, but if thou be a
breaker of law, &c.
Rom. iii. 20 : i^ epycov v6^ov, k.t.X., by deeds of law shall no flesh
be justified, for by law is the knowledge of sin. The omission of
the Article shows the truth to be universal, applicable to all men
and to every form of law. Compare ver. 28, Gal. ii. 16, iii 2, 5, 10,
in all which passages the Article is consistently omitted.
A few passages further need only be mentioned.
Rom. iii. 31 : " do we make law void ? ... yea we establish law."
Rom. v. 20 : " there came in by the way a law."
Rom. vii. 9 : ** I was once alive ivithout law."
Rom. X. 4 : ** Christ is the end of law."
Rom. xiii 10 : "love is the fulfilment of law.""
GaL ii. 19 : "I through law died to law that I might live to God."
Gal. iii 18: "for if the inheritance is of laiv, it is no more oi
promise."
James iv. 11 : "he that speaketh evil of his brother, and judgeth his
brother, speaketh evil of law and judgeth law; but if thou judgest law,
thou art not a doer of law, but a judge."
These passages, taken in connexion with the numerous instances in
which the Law is specifically spoken of, will illustrate the importance of
a constant attention to the usage of Scripture in respect to the Article.
S 2J55.J THE NUMBERS OF NOUNS. 219
Chapter III.— THE JSTOtJN STJESTANTIYE.
NUMBER.
235. The ordinary usage of the Singular and Plural needs
no detailed illustration. The following special rules must be
noted.
236. A Masculine Singular Noun, with the Article, often
represents a whole class.
Instances have Deen given already, § 211. The omission of the
Article in passages like Rom. i. 16, ii. 9, 10, 'lovdaicf re Ka\''E\\r]vi, to
both Jew and Greek, is owing to the antithetic form. (See § 233. )
237. Some words, like o-tejjia, body, Kap8£a, heart, when predi-
cated of several individuals, are occasionally employed in the
singular. The plural, however, is more common. Thus we read,
TO o-«(jia vfiwv and to, o-«naTa v/xav, your body or bodies ; r\ KapSCa or
at Kap8£ai avraiv, their heart or hearts.
The word irpScrwTTOv, face, is always singular in such phrases • as they
fell upon their face, except in the Revelation, vii. 11 (edd.), xi. 16.
238. Many abstract nouns are used in the plural, for repeated
exemplifications of the quality denoted.
Mark vii. 22 : irXcoveiiat, iroviipiat, covetousnesses, vnckednesses.
James ii, 1 : iv 'jrpoorco'iroXi]\J/£ais, in regard (regards) to persons-.
2 Pet. iii, 11 : iv aytais dvaoTpo(|)ais Kal evo-cpciais, lit., in holy
conducts and godlinesses.
239. The plural is occasionally used, like the English rhe-
torical we, by a speaker of himself. See especially the passage,
2*20 THE NUMBERS OF NOUNS. [^ 2^9.
2 Cor. ii. 14, vii. 16, where the Apostle changes incessantly from
singular to plural. The reason, however, may be that sometimes
he is conscious of speaking on behalf of himself and his associates ;
sometimes, again, for himself alone. In any case, the idiom in
question is not a common one.
240. In some instances, where only one agent or object is
actually meant, the plural is employed.
Strictly speaking, these cannot be called instances of the plural
put for the singular, but arise, either (a) from the object being
regarded in its constituent parts, or (b) from the writer having
formed the conception generally, without limitation.
a. A familiar instance of the former kind is in the plural names
of cities, as 'AGfjvai, Alliens, KoXo<r<ra£, Colossce, where the words
expressed in the first instance the several districts of the place, or
the different tribes which foi*med its population. So, in Greek,
Jerusalem is often *l€po<r<JXv|i.a (neut. plur.)
Analogous words are dvaroXaf, east ; Svo-jiaC, west;* toL S^id, the
right; to. dpwrrepd or 6v«w|j.a, the left, where some such word as
parts may be supplied. These words are also found in the singular.
Some miscellaneous terms to be explained in a similar way are —
Luke xvi. 23 : Ad^apou iv rois koKvois ahrov, Lazarus in his (Abraham's)
bosom. In ver. 22 the singular had been used.
John i. 13 : ovk i^ atudrwv, not of blood, ht., bloods — a peculiar phrase,
with a reference perhaps to both parents, f
Hebrews ix. 12, &c. : tls rck ^710, unto the Sanctuary, "the Holies,"
sometimes, as in ver. 2, &yia ayioju. Holies of holies,X suggesting that
every spot and every object there was consecrated.
Names of festivals are sometimes plural : iyKalvia, feast of dedication
* Or perhaps the plural in these words may denote repetition. The sun
rises or sets there " again and again.'
t The expression has no parallel in the Scriptures, and only one in the
classics (Winer). The plural, however, is often foimd in the Old Testament
(from the Hebrew), where violent bloodshedding is denoted.
t In this expression (not in the other), some would read 07(0, fem.^ as
referring to a noun, like x<i>pcL, place. This is, however, most imlikely.
§ 240.] THE NUMBERS OF NOUNS. 221
(John X. 22) ; a^vfia, feast of unleavened bread (Matt. xxvi. IV, &c.) j
ytrea-ia, birthday feast (Matt. xiv. 6 ; Mark vi. 21). So ydfj.oi, marriage
feast, from the various observances and festivities accompanying.
Alwves, ages, is plural, to mark the successive epochs of duration,
especially of the Divine plan ; the singular either referring to one such
epoch, or including all as one mighty whole. Hence the phrase for
ever may be represented either by els rhv aXwua (Matt. xxi. 19 ; John
vi, 51, 58 ; 1 Pet. i. 25, from Isa. xl. 8, &c.), or by ets tovs awvas (Luke
i. 33; Rom. i. 25, ix. 5; Heb. xiii. 8, &-c.) ; while the emphatic /or
ever and ever is expressed by e»s toxjs alwvas ruu ai(i>va)v, to the ages of ages
(Heb. xiii. 21 ; 1 Pet. iv. 11, v. 11 ; and Rev. often).
Ovpavoi, heavens, is found with meaning indistinguishable from ovpdvos,
heaven. The plural usage probably arose from the Hebrew, where the
word is always dual : " the two parts of the firmament." There is also
"the third heaven." Matthew almost always has the plural; Luke
almost always * the singular ; Mark most usually the singular ; John,
the singular always, except in Rev. xii. 12. The other parts of the
New Testament vary between the two almost equally.
Other plurals of this kind will be sufficiently explained in the Voca-
bulary.
h. I. In the second above-mentioned class may be included those
cases where persons are said generally to do what was really done
by one of their number. Thus, Matt, xxvi 8, " his disciples said,
To what purpose," &c. ; while in John xii. 4 we read, " one of his
disciples, Judas." Compare Mark vii. 17 with Matt. xvi. 14;
Matt. xiv. 17 and Mark vi. 38 with John vi. 8, 9 ; Matt. xxiv. 1
with Mark xiii. 1 ; Matt, xxvii. 37 with John xix. 19 ; Matt
xxvii. 48 and Mark xv. 36 with John xix. 29. So in Luke
xxii. 67, X4-yovT€s, when in all probability only one is meant. See
also the same idiom in John xi. 8 ; Luke xx. 21, 39, xxiv. 5
(clirov) ; Matt. xv. 1, Xc'-yovTcs; xv. 12, etirov.f
These instances will help to explain apparent discrepancies. Thus it
may be that only one of the crucified malefactors actually blasphemed,
notwithstanding the plural in Matt, xxvii. 44 ; and the narrative of the
cure of the bhnd men at Jericho (Matt. xx. 30-34 ; Mark x. 46-52 ;
* Perhaps always, except xii. 33, with Acts ii. 34, vii. 56 ; the other pas-
sages where the recognised text gives the plural being all doubtful : x. 20,
xi. 2, xxi. 26.
t Stuart's "New Testament Syntax."
222 THE NUMBERS OF NOUNS. [§ 240.
Luke xviii. 35-43) may possibly be harmonized in a similar way, although
the probability seems to be that two different transactions of the kind
then took place. *
2. Somewhat different from the above, yet related under the
same head, are those cases in which a general statement suffices,
although a particular one might also have been made.
John vi 45 ; Acts xiii. 40 : The propJiets is a general reference,
as when we quote from " the Bible " without specifying a parti-
cular part.
Matt. ii. 20 : redufjKaa-iv ot t'HTovvTes, K.r.X., thei/ are dead vjho seek,
&c., when Herod specifically is meant. (See Exodus iv. 19.)
Matt. ix. 8 : rbv doura e ^ova-lav toiovttjv tois dvGpwirois, who gave
such povjer to men, i.e., as instanced in the case of Christ.
Rom. i. 4 : e^ di/aoTao-ecos vcKpcov, by the resurrection of tJie dead ;
the context showing the reference to be to the one great illustration,
in the case of Christ, of this general fact. It is, however, incor-
rect to interpret 1 Cor. xv. 29, on the authority of this passage, as
referring to baptism "in the name of Him w^ho was dead, i.e.,
Christ."
Heb. ix. 23 : kpcCttoo-i Ovcriais, with better sacrifices, i.e., whatever
those sacrifices might be; the question being, as it were, left open
for a moment, although the aim was to show that in reality only
one sacrifice could avail.
For the use of singular adjectives, pronouns, &c., in agreement or
apposition with plural nouns, or the contrary, see § 317.
CASE.
The Nominative and Yocative.
241. Th3 Nominative is properly the case of the Subject ;
hence also of the Predicate after copulative Verbs.
See §§ 163-165.
* Lee on Inspiration, p. 393 j Burgon's "Inspiration and Interpretation,"
p. 67. See, however, "Bible Hand-book," Part II., § 148; Trench on the
Miracles, p. 429.
§ 242.] NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE CASE. 223
242. In some passages a Nominative is found, unconnected
with the grammatical structure of the sentence ; calling attention,
emphatically, to the thing or person spoken of. This is called a
Suspended Nominative (" nominativus pendens ").
Matt. xii. 36 : irav p^jp-a Lp'^hv...cnrobai(TOV(TL rrepl avrov "Koyov, every
idle word... they shall give account of it.
Acts vii. 40 : 6 Mwo-tjs ovTos-.-ot-K otdafxev, k.t.X.. This Moses... we
know not, &c.
Rev. ii. 26 : 6 vikwv kol 6 Trjpwv... Soxro) aura i^ova-lav, he that
overcometh, and that keepeth ...to him I will give authority. So
iii. 12, 21.
See also Matt. x. 42 ; Luke xii. 10 ; John vii. 38, &c
A "suspended Nominative" is occasionally employed in expressions
of time.
Matt. XV. 32 ; Srt, ^Stj rjnepai rpus, Trpoaixepova-l fioi, because they con-
tinue with me, noio three days. So Mark viii. 2. *
Luke ix. 28: iy€V€To...u}(ri\ Tifiipai oktu, it came to pass, about eight
days after the sayings.
Such cases may possibly be resolved into ellipsis, as, in the former
case, of the substantive verb ; in the latter, of some such word as Sida-TTjixa,
interval, the true Subject of iyfvero ; and in apposition with T]fi4pai.
Some so-called " suspended Nominatives" are really instances of appo-
sition. Thus (Mark vi. 40), Trpao-tat irpacnai, rank by rank, is in apposition
with the Subject of avfireaov. f
In ver. 39, <rvfnt6aia is in the Accusative in apposition with Travras.
243. The Nominative is sometimes elliptically used, as in the
cases following : —
a. The Nominative after the adverb tSov, behold.
Matt. iii. 17 : Ibov, <}>«vt| e/c rSav ovpavciv, heJwld (there was heard)
a voice from the heavens.
Heb. ii. 13 : tSoi» l-ycb Ka\ toL iratSCa, k.t.X., Behold (here am) /, and
the children which thou hast given me.
* In both passages the ordinary text has riixepas, the usual case in such
construction. (See § 286.) But all critical editions give the Nominative.
t See Rev. T. S. Green's "Greek Testament Grammar," p. 86.
224 NOMINAllVE AND VOCATIVE CASE. [§ 243.
5. The word ^vo^ta, introducing the name of a person or place, is
generally found in the Dative, ovd/zart, hy name. (See § 280.)
Occasionally, however, it occurs in the Nominative, with the
name as predicate and the copula omitted. So John i. 6, eyevero
AvOpcoTTos ... 6vo|jia avTov 'latdvvijs, tliere was a man ... his name (was)
John.
Luke xxiv. 13 ; its Kafirjv ...§ fivona *E/iftaous, to a village ... whose
name (was) Ummatcs.
c. A peculiar Nominative phrase is used in the Revelation as
an indeclinable noun, equivalent to the Hebrew name J ehovah
(ch. L 4), diro 6 «v Kttl 6 ^v Kal 6 kp\6]i€vos, Jrom Him who isy and
who waSf amd who com^th.
244. The use of the Nominative for the Vocative has been
already noted, § 228, where see Examples.
The usage is in fact elliptical, the true Vocative being in the
personal pronoun, <tv or v/acw, omitted : Thou ... who art 1 ot ye ...
who are 1
Matt. vii. 23 : d-rroxoipetTe . . . ol ^pyat^pcvoi ttjv dvopiaVf depart (ye
who are) the workers of iniquity I
Mark xiv. 36 : a/3/3a 6 irar^p, Ahha (Thou, who art) the Father 1
So when the Nominative adjective is in apposition with the
Vocative case.
Rom. ii. 1 : a avBpa>7rf, tras i Kpfvwv, man I (thou) who judgest,
(I mean) every one !
In Luke xii. 20, the Article is omitted, "A^pwv, and, accordingly, we
must imderstand, not a direct address, as E.V., Tlwu fool! but an
exclamation, **How foolish thou art!" A parallel instance is to be
found in Romans viL 24 : ToAai'ira'pos fycb dv6p<i>7ros, vrretched man
that I am! and xi. 33, 5 ^os -kKovtov^ the depth of the riches!
245. With the Vocative proper, the interjection « is employed,
chiefly in vehement expressions.
Matt. XV. 28 : «J Y^vewj /icydXi; crov 17 m<ms, %Dommi^ great is thy
ikithi
i§ 245.] THE VOCATIVE CASE. 225
Acts xiii. 10 : «S irX^pris ndvTos boKov, Ofidl of all deceit 1
Gal. iii. 1 : <S dv^TjTot raXdrai, foolish Gcdatians !
Sometimes, however, the interjection is employed (as in classical
Greek) where no special vehemence is intended. So Acts i. 1, xviii. 14
But in such cases & is more usually omitted (Luke xxii 57 j Acts i. 16,
xiii. 15, xxvii. 25).
The Genitive.
246. The Genitive Case (see § 11) primarily signifies
motion from, answering to our question, Whence ? From
this general meaning arise many modifications, including the
several notions expressed in English by the prepositions of
or from.
247. These modifications may be classed under the following
heads :*
1. Origin. 4. Partition.
2. Separation. 5. Object.
3. Possession. 6. Relation.
7. The Genitive Absolute.
The Genitive with Prepositions will be treated of hereafter. (See
§ 291, seq.)
I. Origin.
248. The Genitive is often used after substantives, to mark
the source or author.
1 Thess. i. 3 : fivrjfiovevovres vyLOtv rov epyov Tfjs irftrrcws Koi tou
KOTTov Tt]s d-ydirrjs icai r^? vnofjLovrjs Trjs cXirCSos, remembering your work
* These significations are again reduced, by Dr. Donaldson and others,
to three : —
1. Ablation. 2. Partition. 3. Relation.
The name of the case, y^uiKij, designates it as expressive of the genics to
which anything is referred, whether as belonging to it or classed under it
(Max Mailer) ; or, according to others, the source from which it is generated,
or su^/posed to spring.
226 THE GENITIVE OF ORIGIN. [§ 248.
of faith, and, labour of love, and endurance of hope, i.e., the work
springing from faith, the labour prompted by love, the endurance
sustained by hope.
2 Cor. xi. 26 : Kivbvvois trora^Stv Koi Xtjcttwv, in dangers of rivers
and robbers, i.e., occasioned by them.
Romans iv. 13 : bia diKaioavvrjs iriirr&as, tliroitgh the righteousness
of faith.
Romans xv. 4 : r^? TTapaKkrjo-eais T«v 7pa4>wv, the comfort of tlie
Scriptures.
Col. i. 23 : oLTTo T^ff ik7ri8os Tov eiayyeXCov, from the hope of the
Gospel.
Col. ii. 12: dia ttjs Triareas ttjs evep-ycCas rov Qeov, through tlie
faith of the mighty worhing of God, i.e., mightily wrought by him.
249. The Genitive, after many verbs expressive of sense or
mental affections of various kinds, indicates the source from which
the sensation or affection proceeds.
The full force of the Genitive is evident also in these cases. Thus,
to smell a flower, really means to receive a certain impression from the
flower. Compare the ordinary phrase, to taste of different viands. In
another use, the object of sense itself becomes subject of the verb, and
its quality is expressed by the following Genitive, as this rose smells of
musk.
Again, to recollect is to remind myself of the object of thought ; the
influence being regarded as passing from the object to the person. In
hke manner may be explained the phrases denoting other mental
affections.
»• Verbs of Sense. (1) a.Kova>, to hear:
Mark ix. 7 ; Luke ix. 35 : ovtov aKovcre, Hear him !
John X. 3 : ra irpo^ara ttjs «j>«vfis avTov aKovei, the sheep hear his
voice.
Luke XV. 25 : ^kovo-c <n)[wf)<«>v£as koI xop"**? ^^^ heard music arid
dancing.
It will be seen that this verb is construed with a Genitive either of
the person or the thing. Generally, however, the thing is in the A ecu*
§ 249.] THE GENITIVE OF ORIGIN. 227
sative, as the immediate object (especially \6yov, \iyovs, Matt. vii. 24,
xiii. 20, &c.) When both are expressed together, the thing is iu the
Accusative, and the person in the Genitive (Acts i. 4) ; sometimes with
a preposition (2 Cor. xii. 6 ; Acts x. 22). The Genitive of the thing
probably inclines to the partitive sense. Compare Acts ix. 7, where of
Saul's companions it is said, aKovovres r^is (pcavTJs, hearing the voice, with
ch. xxii. 9, tV (pav^v ovK ijKovaav, they heard not the voice. They heard
of the voice, i.e., its sound, but not what it said.
(2) yevofxai, to taste:
Luke xiv. 24 : ovbeh ... yeva-eraL fxov tov t^iirvov, no one shall taste
if my supper.
Mark ix. \ '. ov p-ri yeva-covTui Oavdrov, shall hy no means taste
death. So Luke ix. 27 j John viii. 52; Heb. ii. 9.
In Heb. vi. 4, 5, the Genitive and Accusative are used in
successive clauses, yevaafxevovs rr^s Swpeas, having tasted of the Gift ;
yevarafievovs Qeov pr]\i.a, havi7ig tasted the word of God.*
(3) dtyyavoij to toUch I
Heb. xii. 20 : kov drjpiov Olyrj tov fipovs, and even if a beast touch
the mountain. So xi. 28.
rl/'n\a<pdw, to handle, to touch . closely, governs the Accusative (Luke
xxiv. 39; Acts xvii. 27; 1 John i. 1). "The mount that might be
touched" (Heb. xii. 18), where this word is used, does not contradict
V. 20, as it simply refers to the nature of the mountain, palpable or
"material."
h. Verbs expressive of mental affections ; as desire, caring
for, despising ;
Acts XX. 33 : dpYvpCov ^ yji^vtrLov rj i(i.aTi(r)Jio{) ovbevos fTredufxTja-aj
I desired no one's silver or gold or raiment.
* Mr. Jelf (Kiihner's Greek Grammar) explains the difference simply as
a variation in the mode of expression ; the Accusative calling attention
rather to the action, the Genitive to the material, as in English, " He eats
some meat " (Gen. ) ; "He eats meat " (Ace. ). Bengel's view of this passage
is more subtle. " ' The gift,' " he says, " can be oul> oa-tiaiiy received in
this life; while 'the Word' essentially belongs to us now." But see Alford'a
note, comparing the Accusative with that in John ii. 9.
228 THE GENITIVE OF ORIGIN. [§ 249.
Titus iii 8 : tva (^povri^axri koXwv ^p^wv, that they may he zealous
of {careful to maintain, E.Y.) good works.
1 Tim. iii. 5 : ivm iKKXTjo-Cas f»eo€ (TriiifXrja-eTai, how shall he care
for the church of God )
Heb. xii. 5 : /x^ oXiywpet iraiSeCas Kvpiovy do not slight the chastise-
ment of tJie Lord.
c. Verbs of remembrance and forgetting:
Luke xvii. 32 : fivqfiovevere T-^s Y^vaiKos Aa>r, remember Lois wife.
Heb. xii. 5 : eKKiKrjo-de ttjs irapaKXTjo-cws, ye have forgotten the
exhortation.
Many grammarians prefer to class the Genitive after all these verbs
under the head of "Partition." (See § 261, seq.)
250. Verbs of accusing, condemning, &c., take a Genitive of
the charge, i.e., of the source of the accusation.
Acts xix. 40 : iyKokela-Bai <rTd<r€»s, to be accused of sedition.
The Gerutive of the person is used after KaTrj-yopeco, to accuse, lit.,
" to assert against one."
Matt. xii. 10 : tva Karrjyopfja-aa-iv ofrov, that they might accuse Him.
251. Adjectives and Verbs signifying plenty, want, fiilness,
and the like, are followed by a Genitive of that from which
another is filled, &c
John i. 14 : nXrjprjs x«ipiTos koi aXr\QtCas, full of grace and truth.
John XXL 11 : TO 81ktvov ... fiforov l\Qv<av, the net .. full of fishes.
Luke i. 53 : irfivavras evenXrjaev A-yaOwv, He filled the hungry with
good things.
John ii. 7 : yefiia-arf ras vbpias ^Saros, fill the water-pots vnth water.
Komans iii. 23 : Trdvres vartpovvrcu rfjs 8<5|t]s tov Qeov, all come
short of the glory of God.
James i. 5 : ct rts vyLotp XetVrrat <To(^las, if any of you lacketh
wisdom.
This Genitive is referred by some to the head of ** Separation ;" by
others to "Partition."
§ 252.] THE GENITIVE OF SEPARATION. 229
II. Separation J or Ablation
^0<d. V eros 01 separation, as those denoting removal, difference,
hindrance, and the like, take a Genitive as the case of their
secondary object. (See § 186.)
Prepositions, however, are more generally inserted.
Luke xvi. 4 : orav iieraa-Tada) rfjs otKOVO|JL£as, when I shall have
been displaced from my stewardship.
Acts xxvii. 43 : (KaXva-ev avrovs tov povXifi|i.aTos, he hindered them
from their purpose.
Eph. ii. 12: dnrjXXorptcofievoi tt]S iroXtrcCas tov 'lorpai^X, alienated
from the commonwealth of Israel.
1 Tim. i. 6 : uv nves a(TToxr](TavT€Si from which some having gone
vnde in aim.'*'
1 Pet. iv. 1 : ireTTavrai ajxaprCas, he hath ceasedfrom sin.
253. Under this head may be placed the important rule, that
the object of comparison is expressed by the Genitive, whether
after verbs, or, more usually, after adjectives in the comparative
degree.
See on the Comparative, § 320. This Genitive, also, is one of Sepa-
ration ; the two things compared being mentally set apart from each
other. So in Latin, the Ablative case is employed, f
When the word than is expressed in Greek (by the conjunction ^,
the things compared are put in apposition.
L Verbs:
1 Cor. XV. 41 : do-Tfjp inrripos dia({)ep€iy Star differethfrom star.
* Ellicott.
f The Hebrew language yet more clearly identihes comparison and sepa-
ration, by its use of the preposition from with the simple adjective. Thus,
" greater than he " would be expressed by the jihrase, " great from him ; "
the Hebrews "conceiving pre-eminence as a taking out, a designating from
the multitude" (Gesenius). So is Homer, e/c irdwruv, more than all. lit
modern Greek, the j^reposition a.Tr6 is used after the comparative.
^^0 THE GENITIVE OF SEPARATION. [§ 253.
The verb Siacpepo) often implies superiority.
Matt. X. 31 : iroWwv aTpovQiwv Siacpfpere v/xeis, ye are better than many
sparrows.
So vi. 26, xii. 12 ; Luke xii. 7, 24 ; Gal. iv. 1, '*is no better than a
slave."
ii. Adjectives in the Comparative degree:
John xiii. 16 : ovk ean dovKos fxei^cou tov Kvp£ov, a servant is not
greater than his master.
John xxi. 15 : ay anas fie nXehp tovtwv j lovest thou me more than
these ?
1 Tim. V. 8 : eanv dirtcTTov ^eipav, he IS worse than an unbeliever.
The subject of comparison is sometimes repeated by implication
iu the object.
Mark iv. 31 : fiiKporepos irdvrwv t«v orircpnATcov, less than all the
seeds, although itself a seed.
1 Cor. xiii. 1 3 : fxd^av tovtwv fj aydnrj, love is greater than these ;
love, nevertheless, being one of the three.
A comparative and superlative are combined in Eph. iii. 8, so that the
following Genitive may be referred to this -rule or to the partitive con-
struction : ifxoi T(p iKaxKTTOTepcfi vdvrwv twv hyiuVy to me, who am less timn
tile least of all the saints.
III. Possession.
254. The most frequent use of the Genitive is as the
Possessive Case, generally with substantives.
Here, also, the fundamental meaning of the case as denoting ichence
is very ai)parent. From the notion of origination, by an easy transition,
comes that of possession. Thus, "the sons of Zebedee" may be taken
as *' the sons begotten by Zebedee," or " the sons belonging to Zebedee ;"
"the kingdom of heaven" may mean " the kingdom set up by heavenly
powers," or "the kingdom governed by these powers." So, again, the
notion of "belonging to" attaches to the Genitive where that of
"originated by" has disappeared.*
* Compare MUller's "Lectures on the Science of Language," Vol. I.,
p. 105.
§ 254.] THE POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. 221
Mark i. 29 : tj\$ov els rrjv oWiav Stjtcovos /cat "Avhpiov, they cam,e
into the house of Simon and Andrew.
Eomans i. 1 : Uavkos hovkos 'Itio-ov XpicrroO, Paul a servant of
Jesus Christ.
255. The Genitives of the personal pronouns are mostly
employed in this sense iniitead of the possessive adjectival forms.
So 7] OvyaTTjp p.ov, my daughter; oi fiadrjToi avrov, his disciples.
(See § 333.)
256. Words denoting kindred, &c., are often omitted before a
Possessive Genitive, especially when they would stand in appo-
sition with a proper name. Sometimes the Article of the omitted
noun is inserted. (See §§ 194, 196.)
1. vi6s. Matt. iv. 21 : ^Iukco^ov t6v tov Ze^e^aiov, Jam,es the {son)
of Zehedee.
John vi. 71 : tov ^lovbav ^ifxcopos, (the) Judas (son) of Simon.
John xxi. 15, 16, 17 : llfxap *Icom, Simon (son) of Jonas.
2. iraTVip. Acts vii. 16 : *E/Li/i6p tov 'Svxe'fi, Hamor tlie (father)
of Shechem.
3. Y'^'rr\^. Luke xxiv. 10 : Mapia 'laKw^oVf Mary the (mother) of
James. So Mark xv. 47, xvi. 1.
4. a8€\<j><5s. Luke vi. 16; Acts i. 13 : 'lovSas 'laKa^ov, Judas
(the brother) of James; as expressed, Jude 1.
5. yw^. Matt. i. 6 : ck Ttjs tov Ovpiov, from the (wife) of Uriah .
So John xix. 25.
6. oVkcioi. 1 Cor. i. 11 : vtto tS^v XXorfs, hy the (kinsfolk) of
Chloe.
7. oTkos or 8«|jitt. Mark v. 35 : otto tov apxia-wayayov, from (the
house) of the ruler of the synagogue. This is clear, as the ruler
was himself with Jesus. So, perhaps, John xviii. 28.
Acts ii. 27, 31 : els abov, " thou wilt not abandon my soul" to
8
232 THE POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. [§ 256.
{the habitations) of Hades ; a classical phrase; or, "to (the power)
of the imseen world." In Ps. xvi. 10, some copies of the LXX.
read aSou, others abrjv.
In Luke ii. 49, ^v rots tov TrarpSs ij.ov have been variously read, in my
Father's business, or in my Father's house (plural, as in John xix. 27,
rh Uia). The former gives the wider significance : *' among my Father's
matters " (Alford). So all the versions of the EngUsh Hexapla, Luther,
De Wette.
257. Attribute or quality is often expressed by the Possessive
Genitive of an abstract substantive.
In such cases the person or thing is spoken of as belonging to the
virtue, vice, or other abstraction. The phrase may often be idiomatically
rendered by turning the Genitive into an adjective. Thus, Luke xvi. 8,
Thi oIk6voh.ov rris aSiKias, the steward of injustice, may be read the unjust
steward. But such renderings lose the force of the original
Rom. i. 26 : 7rd0r) an^Cas, lusts of dishonour.
Heb. ix. 10 : diKaiayfiaTu 0-ApKos, ordinances of flesh.
1 Pet. L 2 : eV ayiao-fxa irv€vp.aTos, " in sanctif cation of spirit,
" a spiritual sanctification."
James i. 25 : aKpoarfis liriXrjo-novfjs, a hearer of forgetfulness, "a
forgetful hearer."
James ii. 4 : Kptral SiaXo-yto-jiwv irovtipttv, judges of evil tJioughtSy
" evil-thinking judges."
258. To the strictly Possessive Genitive belong several phrases
which have been otherwise interpreted —
2 Cor. iv. 6 : rris yvdoaews r^s S6^i]s rod &€ov, of the knowledge of the
glory of God, i. e, the glory which belongs to God, and which He reveals
in Christ; not, certainly, "the glorious God."
Eph. L 6 : 6*5 ^TTaivov 56^ris rrjs x^p^tos ahrov, to the praise of the glory
of His grace, i.e., the glory wliich characterizes Divine grace; not
"glorious praise" or "glorious grace."
CoL i. 11 : Kara rh Kphos TTjy 5J|tjs, according to the power of His
glory ; "not 'his glorious power' (Auth., Beza, &c.), but 'the power
which is the peculiar characteristic of His glory ;* the Genitive belong-
ing to the category of the Possessive Genitive" (ElUcott).
§ 258.] THE POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. 233
Heb. i. 3 : t5 prjuan rris Buvanews avrov, by the word of His power ;
belonging to it, as its true utterance, "not," says Alford, "to be
' weakened into the comparatively unmeaning ' by His powerful word.' "
See also Ptom. vii. 24 ; Col. i. 13 ; Rev. iii. 10.
259. The Genitive is occasionally used by way of apposition,
as if with some such ellipsis as consisting of, or bearirig the name of.
Compare the English idiom, the City of Jerusalem^ where Jeru-
salem is the city.
This rule is an exception to the ordinary construction. The usual
idiom in Greek is the city, Jerusalem.
2 Pet. ii. 6 : iroXcis 2o8d}jiwv Kal ro|idppas, (the) cities of Sodom and
Gomorrah.
John ii. 21 : Trepl toO vaov tov (r<a\i.aros avrov, concerning the temple
of his body.
Rom. iv. 11 : <rri|ji€tov eXa/3e ircpiTOfiTis, he received the sign of cir-
cumcision. So Acts iv. 22.
2 Cor. v. 1 : T) olKi'a tov o-ktjvovs, the house of {owr) tabernacle.
2 Cor. v. 5 : tov dppapwva tou nv€tip.aTos, tlie earnest of the S2)irit.
So ch. i. 22. Compare Romans viii. 23.*
See also Eph. vi. 14-16 : Heb. vi. 1 ; and many other passages.
The difficult phrase, Eph. iv. 9, fls to KardiT^pa rris 77)5, has by many
interpreters been regarded as an instance of the Genitive of Apposition :
" to the lower earth," "to earth beneath," contrasted with such2)hrases
as "the height of heaven" (Isa. xiv. 14). See Bishop EUicott's note,
in which the opposite view (the descent into Hades) is maintained.
260. Position of the Genitive.
a. The Genitive is usually placed after the governing noun.
When both nouns have the Article, each. is usually preceded by its
own. In classic Greek, the Article of the governing noun usually stands
first in the ])hrase ; then the governed Article and Genitive ; and lastly,
* " The first fruits (of our inheritance) consisting of the Holy Spirit" (Dr.
Vaughan on Eom. viii. 23. So Winer.
234 THE POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. [§ 260.
the governing noun. This arrangement is very rarely followed in the
New Testament : 1 Pet. iii. 20, t] rov &eov naKpodv/xia, the long-suffering
of God; Heb. xii. 2, rlv ttjs iriVrews apxnyov, the author of t/ie faith.
Occasionally the Article of the governing noun is repeated before the
Genitive ; also a classic idiom (see § 196), 1 Cor. i. 18, 6 \6yos d rov
aravpov, Vie doctrine of the Cross.
b. But the Genitive precedes —
1. When one Genitive belongs to more than one substantive —
Acts iii. 7 : avrov at fidaeis Koi to (T<pvpd, his feet and ankle-bones.
2. "When the word in the Genitive is emphatic. The emphasis
may arise —
(a) From antithesis —
Phil. ii. 25 : tuv avtrrpaTKirTfu fiov, v/xSiv Se uirSffToKov, my fellow-
soldier, but your messenger. See also Eph. vi. 9 ; Heb. vii. 22, &c.
[b) From the Genitive containing the principal notion —
Rom. xi. 13 : idvwu air6(TTo\os, apostle of Gentiles. See also
1 Cor. iii. 9 ; Titus i. 7 ; James L 26, &c.
In Heb. vi. 2, fiavTiaixwu Sidaxns, it has been questioned which word
is the governing one, doctrine of baptisms, or, baptisms of doctrine. Winer
favours the latter (Grammar, § xxx. 3, 7iote 4).
IV. Partition.
261. Closely connected with the fundamental notion of the
Genitive is that of participation. The part is taken from the
whole.
1 Pet. i. 1 : €k\€kto2s Trapemd^ixois 8ta<nropds, to elect sojourners of
(the) dispersion.
Matt. XV. 24 : ra npo^ara ra drroXaXoTa oIkov 'lapatjXj tite lost slieep
of the hovse of Israel.
262. This Genitive is most commonly found after partitive
adjectives, the indefinite and interrogative pronouns, wdth the
numerals, and adjectives in the superlative degree.
Partitive Adjectives.
Matt. iii. 7 : iroXKovs t«v ^apwrafwv /cat 2a88ovKa£«v, many of the
riutrisees and Saddxicees.
§ 262.] THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 235
Luke xix. 8 : ra fjfiia-rj T»v virapxovTwv the half (halves) of my
goods.
Acts xvii. 12 : av8p«v ovk oXtyot, of men not a few.
Matt. XV. 37 : TO Trepia-aevov t&v K\a(r^6.r<av, the remaining (part)
of the broken pieces.
Pronouns.
Matt. ix. 3 : nves t«v 7pannaT€<i)v, some of the Scribes.
Acts V. lo : ema-Kidarj tlv\ avrwv, might overshadow any of them.
Luke X. 36 : ri? oZv tovtwv, which^ then, of these 1
Numerals— Cardinal, Ordinal, Negative.
Matt. V. 29 : ev t«v neXwv orou, one of thy members.
Acts X. 7 : (jxovrjcras ^vo t«v oIk€t«v, having called two of the
domestics.
Rev. viii. 7 : to rplrov ttjs ytjs, the third of the land. So
w. 8-18.
Mark xi. 2 : ovhcls dvOpc&irwv, lit., no one of men.
But the preposition ^k is more frequently used after numeral adjec-
tives.
Superlatives.
1 Qov. XV. 9 : 6 eXdxLOTos t«v diro<rT<JX«v, the least of the apostles.
263. Yerbs of partaking are followed by a Genitive.
1 Cor. X. 21 : rpair^Siis Kvpiov fierexetv, to partake of the table of
the Lord. Once this verb is found with e/c, ver. 17.
Heb. ii. 14 : ra Traihla KeKotvaivqKe (rapKbs kql alJ|iaTOS, the children
are partakers of flesh and blood. This verb is found also with a
Dative, Rom. xv. 27 ; 1 Tim. v. 22 ; 1 Pet. iv. 13 ; 2 John 11.
Heb. xii. 10 : fxeraka^eiv rf^s dYidTT]Tos avrov, to partake his
Iwliness.
264. So also verbs which signify to take hold of, to attain,
when a part is implied.
236 THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE. [^ 264^
Luke XX. 35 : tov alwvos cKeCvov ru;^€ti/, to attain that world.
Luke viii. 54 : KpaTrja-as Tqs x^i-P^s avTTJSf having taken hold of Iier
hand.
The strictly partitive sense is well illustrated by this verb. When
the whole is grasped, Kparfw takes an Accusative, as in Matt. xiv. 3, &c.
Some verbs of this class are followed in the Middle voice by a
partitive Genitive, whereas in the Active they would take an
Accusative.
Matt. vi. 24 : tov kvhs dvde^erai, he will cleave to the one.
Matt. xiv. 31 : eireXd^ero avrov, he took hold of him.
For the force of the Middle, see § 355. "Holding one's self by the
given object " is implied.
265. Adverbs of time are followed by a partitive Genitive.
Matt, xxviii. 1 : 6-^e Se <rappdT«v, and late upon the sabbath.
IVIark xvi. 2 : Xmi/ Trpwt ttjs jiias cra^^aToiVy very early on the first
day of the weeh.
Heb. ix. 7 : aira^ tov IviavTov, once in the year.
So Luke xvii. 4, xviii. 12. Compare the English colloquialism, hte
of an evening.
266. Certain Genitive phrases are used, in the partitive sense,
to denote time or place.
So Matt. ii. 14: wkt<Js, by night; Luke xviii. 7: T|n^pas Ka\
wKT«5s, day and night; Gal. vi. 17: tov Xoiirov, for the rest (future);
Luke V. 19 : iroias {obov) elaeveyKaaiv avrov, by wliat (way) t/tey
might bring him in.
Prepositions are, however, more generally employed to define these
relations.
267. The verb to be is often followed by a Genitive in the
partitive sense.
Heb. X. 39 : V**^ ^* o^* eVftci' <«rooToX.^s . . . aXXa ir£o-r€«s, but we
are not of a desertion (literally), but of faith.
§ 267.] THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 237
Rom. ix. 9 : lirayyeXCas yap 6 \6yos ovtqs, for this word {is) one
of promise.
The Genitive in this connexion may, however, have other signifi-
cations, as, e.g., that of Possession —
1 Cor, iii. 21 : iravra vixS>v earip, all things are yours.
] Cor. vi. 19 : ovk eVre kavrSiv, ye are not your own.
In general, the verb to he, followed by a Genitive, implies an ellipsis,
such as part, cliaracteristic, property, &c.
Y. Ohject.
268. The Genitive case is often objectively employed,* that is,
it expresses the object of 'some feeling or action, and may be
rendered by various prepositions, as below.
The fundamental meaning of the Genitive is here also very apparent,
the object of a sentiment being, in another view of it, the source or
occasion of its existence. Thus exere wlcrnu 0eou (Mark xi. 22), have
faith in {or towards) God, realty means, "have such faith as His
character excites. " Compare Col. ii. 12.
Luke vi. 12 : iv t^ irpooreuxTi tov ©eov, in prayer to God.f
John ii. 17: 6 tfjX.os tov oUkov o-ov, the zeal concerning thy house ;
compare Titus ii 14.
John xvii. 2 : Igovo-iav irdo-iis o-apK^s, power over all flesh. For
similar constructions of i^ovala, see Matt. x. 1 ; Mark vi. 7 ;
1 Cor. ix. 12.
Acts iv. 9 : evep-yecrtcj, dvOpcoirov d<r06vovs, ybr a benefit conferred on
an impotent man.
Heb. xi. ^Q '. tJ»v 6v6t8i<rp.J>v tov Xpiorrov, the reproach in con-
nexion with the Christ (as the hope of Israel).
1 Pet. ii. 19 : bi.a <rvv€£8T]o-iv 0€ov, on account of conscience toward
God.
* Compare Angus's "Handbook to the English Language," § 384.
t Some, less naturally, interpret the phrase, in the place of prayer to
God, comparing the passage with Acts xvi. 13, "where there was accus-
tomed to be prayer,'' as E.V., Alford; a place of prayer, Neander, Meyer,
Hackett, &c.
238 THE OBJECTIVE GEXTflVE. [§ 268.
Rom. X. 2 : t^i^ov 0€ov exovaivj they Iiave a zeal toward God.
2 Cor. X. 5 : els tt^v viraKo^v tov Xpwrrov, to tlie obedience ren-
dered to Christ. But viraKo-?! irCcrrews, Kom. i. 5, is obedience
springing from, faith.
Col. ii. 18: eptjo-Kcig. t«v 6.yy(K<av, ivorship paid to angels. (See
EUicott, in loc.)
269. Some phrases are susceptible of either a possessive
(attributive, subjective), or an objective signification. Thus, i^
a-ydiTTj 0€ov, tJie love of God, may mean, the love which God
possesses as His attribute, that which He bears to us, or that
which is borne towards Him. A few important passages may
be subjoined by way of illustration.
Passages with kyiTrr} and a subjective Genitive —
2 Cor. xiii. 13 : the love of God ...he with you.
Eom. viiL 35 : what shall separate us from the love of ChrUt ?
So ver. 39.
Eph. iii. 19 ; to know the love of Christ which passeth knowledge.
2 Cor. V. 14 : the love of Christ constraineth us. Not our love to
Christ, but His love to us.
In the following, the Genitive seems objectively used —
John V. 42 : ye have not the hve of God in you. So 1 John ii. 15.
1 John ii. 5 : in him is the love of God perfected.
2 Thess. iii 5 : the Lord direct your hearts into the love of God.
In Romans v. 5, "the love of God is shed abroad in our hearts," Dr.
Vaughan writes of the subjective and objective interpretations, that
the two ideas may be induded. See 1 John i v. 16, v. 3: "the two
are but opposite aspects of the same love ; the sense of God's love is
not the cause only, but the essence of ours. 1 John iv. 19."
2 Cor. V. 11 : eiSc^res tov <p6fiov rod Kvplov, knowing the fear of the
Lord, generally taken as subjective, as E.V., "the terror of the
Lord, " belonging to Him as Judge ; but everywhere else the phrase
is objective — fear, i.e., reverence towards Him. So Alford renders
here, conscious of the fear of the Lord; but doubtfully. For other
passages, see Acts ix. 31 ; Bom. iii. 18 ; 2 Cor. vii. 1 ; Eph. v. 21.
§ 270.] THE GENITIVE OF RELATION. 239
YI. Relation.
270. Closely connected with the objective use of the Genitive
are cases where a more general relation is signified ; some such
prepositional phrase as in respect of being applicable, while the
context shows the kind of relation intended.
This general way of expressing relation is often not so much
ambiguous as comprehensive. Thus, in the frequent phrase, rh
evayyeKiov rod Xpiarov, the Gospel of Christ, it is needless to ask whether
the meaning be the Gospel from Christ as its author,* about Christ as
its subject, t or in the prerogative of Christ as its administrator. J Each
of these thoughts is but one element in the analysis of the phrase.
Mark i. 4 : ^anTicrna |i,€Tavo£as, a baptism which had reference to
repentance.
John V. 29 : duda-Tacnv t«^s • . . avd<rTa<riv Kpiorcws, resurrection in
order to life ... in order to condemnation.
John vii. 35 : T-fjv diacmopav T«v 'EXXi^vwv, tlie dispersion (of the
Jews} among the Greeks (Gentiles.)
Romans v. 18 : diKaicoa-iv t.oir^'s, justification in order to life.
Romans viii. 36 : irpo^ara <r<|>a7f]s, sheep doomed to slaughter.
Rom. vii. 2 : dtrb rdv v6p.ov rov avSp6s, the law of the husband,
i.e , that which defines the relation. §
Rom. xiii. 3 : (polBos t«v ayaQav ^p^wv, a terror in respect to good
works.
Ephes. iv. 16 : Sta irda-qs d(f)TJi TT]s lirixopK^YCas, through every joint
(which is) for the purpose of the supply. See Ellicott, in loc, who
com])ares the phrase with to. a-Kevr) r^? XeirovpyUs, Heb. ix. 21, the
vessels of the ministering.
* So the Gospel of God, Rom. i. 1, &c.
t Compare the phrase. Gospel of the Kingdom, Matt. iv. 23, ix. 35.
X In the language of the Apostle Paul, my Gospel is evidently the Gospel
entrusted to and preached by me, Rom. ii. 16 ; xvi. 25; 2 Tim. ii. 8.
§ See Winer, who quotes Old Testament parallels, Lev. vii. 1 ; xiv. 2,
XV. 32; Numb. vi. 13, 21.
240, THE GENITIVE OF RELATIOX. [§ 270.
Phil. iv. 9 : 6 Geo? tt^s «ipi^vTjs, the God who bestows peace, or
perhaps a Genitive of quality.
In most of these instances, a preposition with its case -woiild be an
equally idiomatic usage.
271. The Genitive is also used after adjectives, as after nouns
(§ 256), to denote various kinds of relation. Examples of this in
the general sense are such as the following : —
Heb. V. 13 : aizcipos Xd-yov SiKaioirvvrjs, unskilled in respect of the
word of righteousness.
Heb. iii. 12 : Kaphia Trovr^ph airwrrCas, a heart wicked in respect to
unbelief (Winer).
James i. 13 : cmelpaa-Tos KttKwv, unversed in things evil (Alford).
272. Adjectives, especially, signifying worthiness, fitness, or
their opposites, take a following Genitive. So also their adverbs.
Matt. iii. 8 : Kapnbv dgiov tI]s jieravofas, yWti^ tneetfor repentance.
Matt. X. 10 : dgios 6 ipyd-njs T^s Tpo<|>fjs aiiTov, the workman is
worths/ of his maintenance.
1 Cor. vi. 2 : dvdgioC core KpiTTipCwv eXaxio-TOiv, are ye unworthy of
(incompetent for) tJie least decisions ?
Rom. xvi. 2 : d^iws t»v a7i«v, " worthily (in a manner becoming)
the holy^^ " as becometh saints," E.V.
See also Eph. iv. 1; Phil. i. 27; CoL i. lOj 1 Thess. ii. 12 j
3 John 6.
273. So, in general, price, equivalent, penalty, and the like,
are expressed by the Genitive.
Matt. X. 29 : ov^t Suo arpovdia d<ro-ap£ov TrojXeirat ; are not two
spa/rrows sold for a farthing ?
Rev. vi, 6 : xoivi^ o-irov Sr\vapCov Koi rpeis x^^^'-'^^^ KpiBoav Si^vopCov,
a measure of wheat for a denarius, and three measures of barley
for a denarius.
§ 274.] THE GENITIVE OF RELATION. 241
274. In a few instances, one noun governs two Genitives in
different relations.
Acts V. 32 : r]fxe7s iaixev avTOv fidprvpes rSov pijixdroov tovtwu, we are his
(possess.) witnesses of (remote obj.), or in respect to, these things.
2 Cor. V. 1 : ^ eviyeios tjixuv o'lKia tov ck^jvovs, our (possess.) earthly
house of the tabernacle (appos.)
Phil. ii. 30 : t5 vfiuv vcniprina t^s X^novpyias, your lack in respect of
the service.
2 Pet. iii. 2 : ttjs twv airoardXav v/xuv fVTo\rjs rod Kvpiov, the command-
ment of the Lord (orig.), given by (remote obj.) your apostles. The
ordinary reading has T]p.5}v, but even then the reading of E.V. is inad-
missible.
The two Genitives in John vi. 1, y] 9d\aaaa t^s FaXiAaias, ttjs Tifie-
pidSos, are virtually in apposition, the sea of Galilee (as the Jews call it),
of Tihei'ias (as the Gentiles), one name denoting the country, the other
the city. So we might say, "the Lake of the Four Cantons, of
Lucerne."
The dependence of successive Genitives on each other is frequent, as
many foregoing examples will show.
Yll. The Genitive Absolute,
275. A Genitive noun, in agreement with a participle expressed
or understood, often occurs in a subordinate sentence absolutely,
i.e., without immediate dependence on any other words. The noun,
in these cases, is to be translated first, without a preposition, then
the participle. In idiomatic English, a conjunction must often be
supplied.
It will be observed that the Genitive in this construction refers to
some other than the Subject of the principal sentence.
Equivalent idioms are in EngHsh the nominative absolute, in Latin
the ablative absolute.
Matt. i. 18 : ji.vT]<rTev0€i(rr]s ... Mapi'as, Mary having been betrothed.
Matt. i. 20 : ravra Se atrov lv0vjiT]0€VTos, and he havmg reflected
on these things, i.e., when he reflected.
Matt. ii. 1 : tov 'Ii]{rov -yewTjeevTos, Jesus havi7ig been horrij i.e.,
when Jesus was born.
242 THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. [§ 275.
Matt. ii. 13 : dvax«pT]o-<ivT«v de avruv, and they having departed,
i.e., when they departed.
Matt. xvii. 9 : Karapaivovrwy avrwv e'/c rod opovs, they descending
from the mountain, i.e., while they were descending.
Heb. iv. 1 : KaraXciirop^vTis lirayycXCas, a promise being (still) left.
(See Alford's note.)
The Genitive Absolute, says Dr. Donaldson, is originally causal, in
conformity with the primary notion of the case. Hence arise, by way
of analogy, its other uses as denoting accessories of time, manner, or
circumstance. The tense of the participle greatly determines the force
of the phrase. (See § 393.)
The Dative.
276. In its primary local sense (see § 11), the Dative
implies juxtaposition.* Hence the various modifications of
its meaning, which may be classed as follows : —
1. Association. 3. Reference.
2. Transmission. 4. Accessory.
The Dative in a sentence is generally an indirect complement
of the Predicate, or "remote object." (See § 186.)
I. Association.
277. a. Verbs signifying intercourse, companionship, and the
like, are often followed by a Dative.
Matt. ix. 9 : aKo\ov6fi [loi. follow me.
Luke XV. 15 : eKoXKfjdrj Ivl rav nokirav, he attached himself to one
oftlie citizens.
Acts xxiv. 26 : w/xiXet aiT<p, lie conversed vnth him.
• The Greek Dative is therefore diametrically opposed to the Genitive.
1. The latter signifies separation, the former ])roximity. 2. The latter
denotes subtraction, the former addition. 3. The latter expresses com-
parison of diflferent things, the former equality, or sameness. —Dr.
Donaldson,
§ 277.] THE DATIVE OF ASSOCIATION'. 243
Rom. vii. 2 : dvSpl deSerai, she is bound to a husband.
James iv. 8 : eyyta-are tw Q&a, koL eyyiei v[uv, draw near to God,
and he will draw near to you.
b. Likeness, fitness, equality, and their opposites, are marked by
a Dative after adjectives and verbs.
Matt, xxiii. 27 : 6/aota^er€ Td<[>ois KCKoviajUvois, ye are like unto
whited sepulchres.
Luke xiii. 18 : rivt ofMoicDaoa avrfju; to what shall I liken it ?
James i. 6 : cotKe kXvSwvi BaXdo-arjSj he is like a wave of tlie sea.
Eph. V. 3 : KaOois TTpeTrei a"yiois, as it becometh saints.
Matt. XX. 12 : laovs ■qH-tv avrovs enoirja-as, thou madest them equal
with us.
c. After a substantive verb, the Dative often denotes possession
or property.
Matt, xviii. 12 : iav yevTjral Tivi dvOptSirw eKarov 7rpo/3ara, if a Tiian
have (if there be to any man) a hundred sheep.
Acts viii. 21 : ovk eVrt crot /xepls oufie KKrjpos eV tw Xoyto tovtcoj thou
hast not (there is to thee) part nor lot in this matter.
The verb is sometimes omitted.
2 Cor. vi. 14 : rls yap p^fToxr) SiKaioo-tJvrj koI dvo[ji{a, for what
participation have righteousness and iniquity ?
II. Transmission.
278. a. Yerbs of giving, whether active or passive, are fol-
lowed by a Dative of the person.
After the active verb, the thing (Accusative) is the direct, the
person (Dative) the indirect object. (See § 186.)
Matt. vii. 6 : p.Tj dare t6 aytov Tois Kva-i, give not that which is
holy to the dogs.
Matt. vii. 7 : aire ire, koI dodrjo-cTai i»jiiv, ask, and it shall be given
unto you.
244 THE DATIVE OF TRANSMISSION. [§ 278.
Rom. i. 11 : tva n fierabo) x^apia-fia i^lv TrvcvfiariKov, that I may
impart to you some spiritual gift.
Heb. 11. 5 : ov yap dyytXois vnera^e rrjv olKovp.evqv t^v fie^ovaaPy
for he did not subject tJie world to come unto angels.
b. The Dative also indicates the receiver of information, tidings,
command.
So in the common \4y<a ^H-^v, / say unto you.
Matt. xiii. 3 : iXdXrja-ev avTois TroXKdj he spake many things to them.
1 Cor. V. 9 : 'dypa^a vjitv ev ttj emoToKfi, I wrote (or have written)
to you in my letter.
Luke iv. 18: evayyeXla-aa-dai irrcoxots, to preach glad tidings to the
poor; LXX., Isa. Ixi. 1 (also with Accusative).
Acts i. 2 : evreCkap-evos Tois dirooToXois, having given command-
ment to the apostles.
But KeXevo), to order, governs the Accusative,
c. Words denoting assistance, succour, &c., are followed by a
Dative.
Matt. iv. H : Km dirjKovow avT^, and they ininistered unto him.
Matt. XV. 25 : Kupic, /So^^ct jioi, Lord, help me 1
d. The object of a mental affection, as esteem, anger, worship,
(fee, also obedience and faith, is often expressed by a Dative.
The Genitive in a similar counexion expresses the source of the
feeling. (See § 249.)
But the construction with prepositions is generally preferred, as
giving additional i)recision and emphasis.
Matt. vi. 25 : /n) jxepinvaTf t^ ^"x^, care not for your life. So
Luke xii. 22. But with nepi, Matt. vi. 2S, Luke xii. 26 ; with
vnep, 1 Cor. xii. 25 ; with Accusative, 1 Cor. vii. 32-34.
Matt. v. 22 : 6 dpyiCopevos Tu> d8€X<{>w, he who is angry with his
brother.* With eVt, Rev. xii. 17.
* The following word ctfcJ), without a cause, should probably be omitted.
Lachmaan, Tischeudorf, &c.
§ 278.] THE DATIVE OF TRANSMISSION. 245
Gal. i. 10 : CrjTco dvOpcoirois dpeaKciv ; do I seek to please men ?
Matt. ii. 2 : rjXdoyLev TTpoaKvvria-ai avT<5, ive are come to worship
him; always with Dative in Matt., Mark, and Paul (except Matt,
iv, 10, from LXX.), in other books with Dative or Accusative.
Matt. xxi. 25 : ovk emo-Teva-aTe avTw, ye believed him not; also
with eVi (Dative), eVi (Accusative), and els.
Acts V. 36, 37 : oaoi evreiOovro avrw, as many as obeyed him.
Rom. X. 16 : ov navres vnrjKovaav t^ tvayyACto^ they did not all
obey the Gospel.
III. Reference,
279. The person or thing in respect of whom or which any-
thing is done, whether to benefit or injure,* or in any other way,
may be expressed by the Dative. This reference may generally
be expressed in English by the preposition ybr.
Matt. iii. 16 : aveiox.^r]aav avTw ol ovpavoi^ the Jieavens were opened
for him.
Matt. xvii. 4 : Troirjo-o) SSe rpels aKrjvds, o"ol plav Koi Mwiicrci fxiau
KOL 'HXCq, fxiavf let me make here three tabernacles, one for thee, and
one for Moses, and one for Julias.
'Rom. vi. 2 : oItlvcs d7r€6dvop,€v rfj in-aprCa, we who died to sin.
2 Cor, V. 13 : eiVe ydp €^e(rTr]p,€v, 0€«, ei're ac3(f)povovpev, vjiiv, for
uh ether we were beside ourselves, (it was) for God, whether we are
sober, (it is) for you,
James iii. 18 : Kapirbs ... o-TreipeTai tois iroiovo-tv^ elprjvijv, the fruit
of righteousness is sown for them that make peace.
Heb. iv. 9 : apa dTroKeiTrerai (ra^^ariapos tw Xo^ tov Geov, there
remaineth therefore a sabbath-keeping for the people of God.
Matt, xxiii. 31 : fiapTvpelre kavrols, ye bear witness against your-
selves. See also James v. 3 ; and compare 1 Cor. iv. 4.
Rom. vi. 20 : iXevdcpoi rjre rp SiKaiocrvvT), ye were free in regard
to righteousness ; not simply " from righteousness," which would
have required the Genitive.
* Latin, Dativus commodi vel incommodi.
246 THE DATI\'E OF REFERENCE. [§ 279.
To this use of the Dative may be attributed the phrase, ri efiot
Kai o-ot ; what Jiave I to do with thee ? lit., what is for me and thee 1
i.e., what have we in common 1 Mark v. 7 (Matt. viii. 29) ; John
ii 4, &c.
TV. Accessor^/ Circumstance,
280. a. The mode of an action is expressed by the Dative.
Acts XI. 23 : TrapeKoKn rravras t^ irpoQ^cei rrjs Kapdias rrpoa[X€veiv rto
Kvpiaiy lie was exhorting all to cleave to the Lord with the purpose of
the Jieart.
1 Cor. X. 30 : ft iyat x^^pirt fi€T€xa>, if I partake vnth thank-
fulness.
Phil. i. 18 : iravrl TpoirWj etrf irpo<|><i<r€i, eire aXt]6€i(j,, Xpiaros Karay-
yeXXerat, in every way^ whether in pretence or truths Christ is
preachedi
See also Acts xv. 1 j 2 Cor. iii. 18 ; Eph. v. 19, &c.
h. A modal Dative sometimes emphatically repeats the notion
of the verb. See an analogous idiom with the Accusative (§ 282),
and with the Predicate Participle (§ 394, i., 3, d.) This Dative
may have a qualifying adjective.
James v. 17 : irpo<r€vxiQ irpoariv^aTOf lie prayed loith prayer, i.e.,
he prayed earnestly.
Mark v. 42 : e^eoTtjo-av IkoptActci (trydXxi, they were astonished with
a great astonishment, i.e., were greatly astonished. See also
1 Pet. i. 8.
For other examples, see Matt. xv. 4 ; Luke xxii. 15 ; John iii 29 j
Acts iv. 17, V. 28, xxiii. 14.
For modal Datives that have become actual Adverbs, see § 400.
c. The Dative is used to denote the cause or motive.
Rom. iv. 20 : ov buKpl6rj tq dirwrrfij. aXX* fve8vvap.6}6ij tq irtorrti, he
Jhesitated not through unbelief, but was strong through faith.
Gal. vi. 12 : Iva ^^ r^ trravpip rov Xpiarrov diwKwvrai, that they may
not be persecuted for tJie cross of Christ,
§ 280.] THE DATIVE OF ACCESSORY. 247
1 Pet. iv. 12: fXT) ^eviCeade rfj iv vfilv Trvpdxrn, he not dismayed
(lit., " be not as strangers") at the conflagration (which has broken
out) among you.
d. The Dative is also the case of the Instrument.
Matt. iii. 12 : to be axopov KaruKava-ei irupl dcrP^orro), hut the chaff
he will hum with unquenchable fire.
Acts xii. 2 : avfXke be 'laKco/Soz/ . . . ftaxaCp^, and he slew James with
[the) sword.
Rora. i. 29 : TrcTrXrjpcofievovs irdo-i] a8iK£<j, iroviipCij,, irX€0V€|£a, KaK^a,
heing filled (utterly engrossed) by all iniquity, depravity, greed,
baseness. " Filled with" would have required the Genitive. (See
§ 265, and compare 2 Cor. vii. 4.)*
Eph. ii. 5, 8 : \<SLpvri eare a-fo-axrixevoi, by grace ye have been saved.
In Romans viii. 24, rfj yap IXiriSt eaoidijpcp may be rendered, ybr vje
were saved by hope (instrumental), or in hope (modal).
2 Pet. i. 3 : tov Kokicravros rjfias I8ia S6^i[\ koX apcTfj, ofi him who
called us by his own glory and virtue. The reading is that of
Lachmann and Tischendorf, but the received text gives the same
meaning. " To glory and virtue " is manifestly incorrect. (See
Alford's note.)
See further 1 Cor. xv. 10; Titxis iii. 7; 1 Pet. i. 18; Eph. i. 13; and
many other passages.
Hence the verb xpf^ofxai, to use as an iyistrument, is followed by
a Dative.
2 Cor. iii. 12 : iroXX^ ira^piio-iij ;^pw/ie^a, we employ much boldness.
So Acts XX vii. 3, 17 ; I Cor. ix. 12, 15 ; 2 Cor. i. 17 ; 1 Tim. i. 8,
V. 23. In 1 Cor. vii. 31, the best MSS. read the Accusative, tIv
KOCfiSu.
e. From denoting the instrument, the Dative sometimes appears
to take the signification of the agent, being used after Passive
♦ In Eph. iii. 19, els conveys a different notion again, ''that ye may be
JiUed up to all the fulness of God."*
248 THE DATIVE OF ACCESSORY. f§ 280.
verbs where we miglit expect the more usual vtt6 with a Genitive
(which see, § 304).
Luke xxiii. 15 : ovbev a^iov Oavdrov ea-TL neirpayfjiei/ov avrw, nothing
worthy of death has been done hy him.
2 Cor. xii. 20 : Koyo) evpcBS) v\uv, and I should be found by you.
Compare 2 Pet. iii. 14, and Rom. x. 20, from LXX. j Isa. Ixv. 1.
Luke xxiv. .35 : m eyvaxrdr) avrois, hou) he was knoum by tliem.
Compare Phil. iv. 5.
The passive Aorist of 6pda, to see {&(pQr}u, see §103, 4), is generally
construed with the Dative, as 1 Tim. iii. 16, &(peT) ayyeXois, he was seen
by angels. Here, however, the notion is rather that of appearing to,
so that the Dative is regular. And in some of the other instances a
somewhat similar explanation may be given, as in the last: "he was
made known to them."
In Matt. V. 21, (pprjOrj rots dpxaCois, the best commentators
render, it was said to the ancients^ not " by them," as E.Y.
f. That in which a quality inheres, " the sphere," is expressed by
the Dative.
Matt. V. 3 : 01 irroixol t^ irv€v|iaTi, the poor in spirit. Yer. 8 ; oi
Ka6apo\ T^ Kap8£(j,^ the pure in heart.
Acts xiv. 8 : dhxivaros Tots iro<riv, impotent in his feet.
1 Cor. vii. 34 : Iva fj ay la Ka\ o-wjiart /cat irvCTfiaTi, that she may be
holy both in body and spirit.
1 Cor. xiv. 20 : /x^ iraihia ylvcade rats <{>p€o-iv dWd t% KaKlt}. vTjmdCfTf^
be not children in understanding, but be infants in malice (Dative
of mode).
Eph. ii. 3 : rjpcv rcKva 4)v(r€t opy^s, we were in nature children of
wrath.
This use of the Dative evidently springs from its original local import.
The "local Dative" is not found in the New Testament, excepting (1)
in the phrase hy the way, or ways, bZ^, bZois, where the way is regarded
as the instrument : James ii. 25 ; 2 Pet. ii. 15 ; and (2) connected with
the figurative use of iropt^o/uot, TrepiiroTcco, to walk, as Acts ii, 31,
xiv. 16 ; 2 Cor xii. 18, &c.
§ 280.] THE DATIVE OF ACCESSORY. 249
g. Accessories of time are marked by the Dative, as —
(1) A space of time, /or.
Acts xiii. 20 : cos ina-i TcrpaKoo-iois koi irevT^KOvra cScofce Kpirds, foT
about four hundred and fifty years he gave judges.
See also Luke viii. 29 ; John ii. 20 ; Acts viii. 11 ; Rom. xvi. 25.
The Accusative is more frequently used. (See § 286 ; also under StcJ,
§299.)
(2) A point of time, at^ on, when particularized or specified.
Mark vi. 21 : *Hp&)8j/y tois ycvco-iois avrov 8eiTTvov eTTolrja-e, Herod
on his birthday made a banquet.
But where the point is not specified, the Genitive is used. (See § 266. )
Matt. XX. 19 : rfj rpLr-^ "hv-^?^ eyepdrjaerai, on the third day he
shall be raised.
Luke xiv. 3 : et t^io-Ti t« o-aPpaTO) depaTreveiv ; is it lawful to heal
on the Sabbath ?
The preposition eV is frequently inserted in this connexion. (See § 295. )
The Accusative.
281. The Accusative primarily denotes that towards which
motion is directed. Hence its use to complete the notion of
the Predicate.*
The Accusative expresses the immediate Object of a
transitive verb.
Matt. iv. 21 : elbev 6XKovs Svo d8eX<j)0vs ... koi eKoKecrev avToiis, he
saw other two brothers... and called them (transitive active).
* "The Accusative,'' says Dr. Donaldson, "has the following applications
in Greek Syntax : — It denotes (a) motion to an object ; (6) distance in space ;
(c) duration in time ; {d) the immediate object of a transitive verb ; {e) the
more remote object of any verb, whether it has another Accusative or not ;
(/) the Accusative of cognate signification, i.e., the secondary predication
by way of em])hasis of that which is already predicated by the verb itself ;
{g) an apposition to the object of the whole sentence ; (h) the subject of the
objective sentence, when this is expressed in the infinitive mood." — Greek
Ch^ammar, p. 497.
250 THE ACCUSATIVE WITH TRANSITIVE VERBS. [§ 281.
Acts i. 18 : eKTTjaaTo \<^f>(-ov, he purchased a field (transitive
deponent).
a. It should be noted tliat some verbs which in English are
intransitive, i.e., complete in themselves as predicates, and which
extend their meaning by the use of prepositions, are transitive in
Greek, and therefore require an Accusative to complete their
meaning.
Thus, English : " whosoever shall be ashamed of me and of my
works."
Greek : 6s yap iav inaiaxwdrj |X€ /eat tovs Ipovs Xo-yovs (Mark
viii. 38).
Acts xiv. 21 : fuayyeXttrd/xevoi re Tf|V iroXiv Ikcivtjv koi fxaBrjTCvaavres
iKavovs, and having preaclied the Gospel in that city and made
many disciples, lit., "having evangelized that city and discipled
many."
The two verbs in this passage, however, with some others, vary in
their use. (See Vocabulary. )
h. Generally, the employment of the same verb in different
places as transitive and neuter may be explained by change of
meaning, or a variation in emphasis.
So 1 Cor. vi. 18 : ^evyere ri\v TropviCav, fee fomicoiionf avoid it.
1 Cor. X. 14 : cfievyere airh Tfjs elStaXoXarp^ias, flee from idolatry,
make good your escape from it.
Matt. X. 28: /x^ (^o^eiaQc dirb twv &TroKT€tv<JvT«v rb aafia, /c.r.X....
(f)o^ridriT€ 8e [laXXov rbv 8vv<t|Ji.€vov, k.t.X., be not afraid of those who
kill the body .. .but fear him who is able to destroy, &c.
c. Some verbs, denoting the exercise of a faculty, may be read
either transitively or intransitively, according to the nature of the
expression. So in English we may say, " / see," or " I see you."
Matt. vi. 4 : 6 ^Xeirav iv ru Kpimr^, Jie that seeth in secret.
Matt. vii. 3 : rl 8e ^Xeneis rh K«ip«|>os ; but why seest thou the
splinter ?
Mark iv. 24 : pX^rreTe ri aKovfTt, look to (take heed) what ye hear.
§ 281.] ACCUSATIVE OF THE OBJECT. 251
In Mark viii. 15, xii. 38, jSXcTrerc diro — lit., "look away from!" —
signifies bewure of. But in Phil. iii. 2, /SXeVere tovs Kvvas, ic.r.X.,
literally signifies " look to the dogs, look to the evil-workers, look to
the concision ! " caution being implied.*
d. The immediate Object is omitted after certain verbs, which
are nevertheless strictly transitive.
So especially .rrpoa-exo}, to apply (ora. t6v vovv, tite mind), to give
heed.
Luke xvii. 3 : irpoo-excre eavroiSj give heed to yourselves.
With OTTO, to beware of, lit., to give heed (so as to turn) from.
Matt. vii. 15 : irpoo-ex^TC Se dtrb roov yjrevboTrpocfiTjTcov, but beware of
false propJiets.
For the usage of particular verbs, consult the Vocabulary or a Lexicon.
282. Any verb, whether transitive or intransitive, may extend
its meaning by a "cognate Accusative," or "internal Object."
This Accusative is always connected with the verb in signification,
often in etymology.
For a similar use of the Dative, see § 280, b ; and for the
Participle, § 394, i., 3, d.
Matt. ii. 10 : ixapr](Tav xo-po-v (te-ydXiiv, lit., they rejoiced a great
joy, i.e., "rejoiced greatly."
Luke ii. 8 : ^vKdaa-ovres <f>vXaKds ttjs wkto^, lit., watching watches
by night, i.e., keeping watch.
Col. ii. 19 : av'^ei TT]v ai5|T]criv rov Gcov, increoseth the increase of
God, i.e., yields the increase.
See also John vii. 24 ; 1 Tim. vL 12 ; I Pet. iiL 14, &c.
Eph. iv. 8 : fJxp-oKoiT^va-ev alxfiaXftxriav, he led captive a captivity^
i.e., a train of captives. Ps. Ixviii. 18.t
♦ Ellicott.
f This passage is rather an instance of a cognate external object, the
abstract noun representing a multitude (Numbers xxxi. 12, LXX., "they
brought the captivity.") So Ostervald's translation, "il a meng captive une
grande multitude de captives ;" and De Wette's, "er fiihrte Gefangene."
262 ACCUSATIVE OF DEFINITION. [§ 283.
283. An Accusative is often used by way of more exact
definition of the Predicate.*
John VI. 10 : dvenea-av oi av8pes, rhv apiO|Jibv axrel nevTaKio-xtXioif the
men sat down, in number about Jive thousand.
Phil. i. 1 1 : 7reTrXT)pa)iJ.€voi Kapirbv diKaiocrvvijs, filled with the fruit
of righteousness. So Col. i. 9. Compare under Genitive, § 251,
and Dative, § 280, d. The Accusative strictly denotes the respect
in which fulness is attained.
More generally, however, the Dative of accessory circumstance,
§ 280, is employed. In Acts xviii. 3, the approved reading is t^
T^vTI (Lachmann, Tischendorf) for the received ttiv rexvTjv, "6y
occupation they were tent-makers."
284. Many transitive verbs may have two objects, and be,
therefore followed by two Accusatives; generally of a person ("the
remoter object") and a thing ("the nearer object"). So verbs of
asking, teaching, clothing and unclothing, anointing, with many
others.
This Accusative of the thing is analogous to the "internal object"
of the verb. (See § 282.)
Matt. ^^. 9 : 8v al-nia-ei 6 vibs avrov dprov, wJwm his son shall ask
for a loaf (Occasionally the person with prepp., napd, oTrd.)
John xiv. 26 : eKciuos vp-as di8a^€i irdvra, he sJiall teach you all
things. (Once with Dative of person, Kev. il 14.)
Mark xv. 17 : eudibvaKovanv avTov 'irop<|>vipav, they clotlie him in
purple. (The preposition ev sometimes found, as Matt. xi. 8.)
Heb. i. 9 : expiore o-e . . . ^aiov dya\\idcrea)s, he anointed thee with
tJie oil of gladness, LXX. ; Ps. xlv. 7. (But the Dative of
material is sometimes used, Acts x. 38, and with dXcC<f>6) always.)
* This Accusative is often said to be governed by Kard, in respect of^
understood. "It is only a variety of the cognate Accusative. It defines
more exactly the act or state described by a verb or adjective by referring it
to a particular object, or part affected. It is the Accusative of an equXvaleani
notion — the part wherein the act or state consists." — Dr. Jacob.
§ 284.1 THE ACCUSATIVE. 253
The Passive retains the Accusative of the nearer object.
Luke xvi. 19 : eveSiSuo-KeTo -rropcpvpav koI ^vaaov, he was clotlied toith
purple and fine linen.
Acts xxviii. 20 : tV a\v(nu Ta.vTT]v irfpLKei/jai, I am hound with this
chain. (See Heb. v. 2.)
2 Thess. ii. 15 : Kparelre tos irapaSScrsis as iSiBdx97]T€, hold fast the tra-
ditions which ye were taught.
1 Tim, vi. 5: Zu<i)Qapiieva>u avQpdynayv rhv uovv, of men corrupted in mind.
The same remark applies to verbs which in the Active express the
remoter object by the Dative.
1 Cor. ix. 17 : oIkovoixIuu ireirfo-Teu/nai, / have been entrusted with a
stewardship. So Eom. iii. 2 ; Gal. ii. 7 ; 1 Thess. ii. 4 ; 2 Thess. i. 10 ;
1 Tim. i. 11.
285. The Subject of an Infinitive Verb is put in the
Accusative.
In translation, the Infinitive is generally to be rendered as a
finite verb, and the Accusative as the nominative, with the con-
junction that prefixed.
For the Infinitive, see § 387. It is really a verbal noun, and is
used to complete the predication. The Accusative thus becomes
an Accusative of definition* (§ 283).
1 Tim. ii. 8 : ^ovXo^ai ... irpo(r€vx€or0ai, " I wish for... a praying;"
^ovXoixai irpoo-evxeo-Oat tovs &v8pas, " I wish for a praying on the part
of men," / wish that men should pray.
Luke xxiv. 23 : ot Xeyovo-iv avrbv t^jv, who say that he is alive.
Acts xiv. 19 : vojxia-avTes avrbv TeOvTjKevat, thinking that he was
1 Cor. vii. 10, 11 : TrapayyeXko) ... yvvaiKa dno dvdpos fifj \<apia-Qr\vai
. . . Kal' dvSpa yvvoLKa fxr) d<J>i6vai, / enjoin that a wife should not he
separated from (her) husband^ and that a man should not desert
(his) viife.
Luke i. 75 : toi) hovvai fj^uv ... pvo-devras ... Xarpevciv avrw, to grant
unto us that we being delivered (fi(ias implied in pvaOevras) should
serve him.
* Compare Dr. Donaldson's Grammar, § 584.
254 ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE. [§ 285.
When the Subject of the Infinitive and of the principal verb is
the same, it is not repeated except for emphasis, and adjectives,
&c., in agreement with it are put in the nominative case.
Rom. XV. 24 : eXTri^o) 8tairop€v<Jp,cvos Ocdcao-Oai vfiasy I hope that
when I pass through I shall see you. See also 2 Cor. x. 2.
But Phil. iii. 13 : eyo) IjJiavrbv ov Xoyl^ofiai KaT€iXT]<j>4vai, / do not
reckon that I myself have attained. So Romans ii. 19 ; Luke
XX. 20.
When the Infinitive is substantivized (see § 201) by the Article, the
relations expressed by the Genitive after nouns are denoted by the
Accusative.
Inf. gen. Acts xxiii. 15 : vph rov ^yyia-ai avrSp, before his approach.
Inf. dat. Matt, xiii 4 : ip r^ (rveipeiv avrov, in his sovnng. So
xxvii. 12.
Inf. ace. Matt. xxvi. 32 : nerh rh iyfpdrjpai ju«, a/ier my rising again,
286. Relations of time and space are denoted by the Accu-
sative.
a. Space. — Luke XxiL 41 : amtnTaa-Or) air* avrav coQ-el \i6ov PoX^v,
he withdrew from them about a stooie's cast.
John vi. 19 : iXijXaKOTcs ovv as <rTa8£ovs €lKO<rnr4vT6 ^ rpidKovra,
having there/ore rowed about twenty-Jive or thirty stadia.
h. Time. — (1) A point of time —
Acts x. 3 : flbev . . . cbo-et cSpav Iwd-niv, he saw, about tlie ninth Iwur.
Some (Lachmann) read ncpi But see John iv. 52 ; Rev. iii. 3.
(2) Duration of time —
Luke XV. 29 : Tocavra Vn\ bovkdat aoi, so many yea/rs do I serve
thee.
See also Matt. xx. 6 ; John I 39, ii. 12, v. 5, xi. C ; Acts xiii. 21, &c
(3) Succession of time —
Matt. XX. 2 : avfx(pa>vf)o-ai ... eK brjvapiov t^v ^|i^pav, having agreed
for a denarius a day (or perhaps, rather, this is another instance
of (2) the Accusative of duration — a denarius for the day's work).
§ 287.1 THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 255
287. The Accusative is sometimes found in elliptical or
apparently irregular constructions.
Matt. iv. 15 : &Uu BdKa<y(Ti)s, the way of the sea, stands apparently
without government. The regimen is to be sought in its Old Testament
connexion, Isa. ix. 1, from which it is a citation. *
Luke xxiv. 47 : ap^dixevou iirh 'UpovaaX-l]fi, beginning at (from) Jeru-
salem, the Accusative neuter participle in apposition with the objective
sentence.
Acts xxvi. 3 : 'Yvd}aT7]v Svra ere, k.t.X. The Accusatives here seem to
stand without any dependence. A verb is probably to be understood
from ^yvf^at, in the preceding verse : especially as I regard thee as being
acquainted, &c.
Eom. viii. 3 : rh hd^/varov rov vSfjLov, the impossibility of the law. The
phrase is here probably a nominative absolute (nominativus pendens).
(See § 242.) Some, however, read' it as Accusative, "in apposition to"
the object of the sentence, f or governed by iirol-ncrev understood, "hath
wrought."
1 Tim. ii. 6 : rb fiaprvpiov KaipoTs idtois, the testimony to be set forth in
its own seasons, an Accusative, perhaps, in apposition with the preceding
sentence. +
ON THE CASES AS USED WITH PBEPOSITIONS.
288. Prepositions, as already stated, § 118, govern the
Genitive, Dative, or Accusative, and are auxiliary to the sig-
nificance of these cases.
Sometimes a preposition is simply emphatic, i.e., it is used where the
case alone would have expressed the same meaning, although with less
force. More frequently, however, it denotes a relation which the case
of itself would be insufficient to specify.
Two points must be considered in relation to the prepositions :
* We often make similar quotations almost unconsciously: e.g., " 'Christ
and Him crvicified' is the theme of the faithful minister." Him in that
sentence appears plainly ungrammatical, until we turn to the connexion,'
1 Cor. ii. 2.
f Webster.
"l EUicott. The difficulty here is that the preceding sentence is not
objective. It would seem better to take the Accusative as more directly
dependent on SoiJj.
256 PREPOSITIONS. [§ 288.
first, their own original force, and secondly, the significance of the
case or cases to which they are severally applied.
Thus, Trapd is beside, denoting, with the Genitive from (from
beside), with the Dative at or near (by the side of), with the
Accusative towards or along [to or along the side of). From these
meanings, again, others arise through the application of physical
analogies to mental relations. Some prepositions from their
meaning can govern only one case, as e/c, out of (Gen.); eV, in
(Dat.); els, into (Ace). Others may govern two, as implying
different directions of motion, but excluding the idea of rest, as
Kara, dowmvards ; with the Gen., down from; with the Ace,
down upon : others are found with all three cases.
Every preposition probably denoted at first a relation of place.
(See the scheme in § 124.) Hence by an easy transition their
reference to time, and their use for purely mental relations. It
will be seen in the following sections that most have this threefold
use.
289. Certain prepositions are very nearly allied in some of
their significations. Hence it may be a matter of indifference which
is employed, the same circumstance being regarded from slightly
different points of view. Thus it might be said of a commission
given to a servant, that the act was executed 6y him or through
him. It will be seen, however, that there exists a real distinction
in the notions, although they meet in one transaction. We could
not, for instance, infer that the words through and bi/ were
synonymous, or that one was used for, or interchanged with, the
other. Such mistakes, however, have often been made in New
Testament criticism ; and it is especially necessary, even where
tliese important parts of speech appear most nearly alike in
meaning, to observe their real distinction. (See further, § 308.)
290. No mistake is so common with learners as that of supposing
that the words of one language must correspond individually to those of
another. The fact is, that every word, as it were, fences off a particular
enclosui-e from the great domain of thought ; and each language has its
own method of division. The ways in which the English and the Greek,
S 290.] PREPOSITIONS. 257
for example, have mapped out the vast territory do not mutually corre-
spond. Perhaps, therefore, no one word of the former claims a province
that has its precise counterpart in the latter. Or, to adopt another
illustration, the words of two languages do not run in equal parallel
lines, thus : —
G.
E. —
Were it so, translation would be easy work. Eather may they be repre-
sented thus : —
G. —
E.
where in each language there are words that overlap those of the other,
sometimes containing more meaning, sometimes less j and a single word
in one often including the significance or part of the significance of
two or three in the other.
Prepositions governing the Genitive 07ily.
'AvtC, d'ir(J, Ik, irpo.
291. I. 'Am', OVER AGAINST,* Containing the notion of oppo-
sition, as an equivalent : instead of, for.
Matt. V. 38 : 6(})6a\[xbs avxl 6<}>0aXnov, eye for an eye.
Matt. XX. 28 : \vTpov avrl iroXXwv, a ransom for many.
Heb. xii. 2 : avrl tt]s TrpoKeijxevrjs avra xo-^o-s, in return for the joy
set before Mm.
John i. 16 : iXd(So[iev ... x«P*^ o-vr^ X'^P'-^os, we received grace for
grace, i.e., grace within, as correspondent with grace without, the
Divine gift being as the Divine source ; or (with most commen-
tators), one measure of grace to succeed and replace another:
" grace upon grace." t
This preposition is employed with the neuter relative plural in the
adverbial phrase, av6' wv (in return for which things) = because. (Luke
i. 20, xii. 3, xix. 44; Acts xii. 23 ; 2 Thess. ii. 10.)
* The primal significance of each preposition will be shown by small
CAPITALS.
t " Ununterbrochene, immer sich erneuernde Gnade." — Winer.
258 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE, OTTO. [§ 292.
292. II. *A7ro, FROM THE EXTERIOR.
1. Separation, the preposition expressing removal, the governed
noun the point of departure in place or time : from.
Matt. i. 21 : (raxrn ... dirJ> twv ctjiapTiftiv, Ae shall save ...from their
sins.
Matt. iii. 1 3 : dirb ti]s raXiXaias, from Galilee.
Matt. ix. 22 : airh ttjs «pas eKeivrjs, from that hour.
Matt. vi. 13 : pva-ai ^fxas o-trh tov irovTjpov, deliver US from evil, or,
the Evil one.
2. Derivation, source, descent : from, of.
Matt. vii. 16 : dirb rp 1^6X0) v o-vku^ figs from thorns.
Matt.' xi. 29 : fiddere dir' Ijiov, learn of me.
3. Hence, especially, cause, occasion : from, on account of
Matt. xiv. 2Q : dirb tov <j>(jpov cKpa^au, they cried out for fea/r.
Matt, xviii. 7 : oval . . . dxb t«v o-KdvSaXcov, Woe, on account of tite
offences !
So, according to some commentators, Heb. v. 7, fiaaKovadeU anh i^y
euXo/Selas, Jieard on account of his fear (godly fear, or piety). Others,
N ^ however, imderstand "heard (and delivered) from his fear," i.e., from
the calamity which he apprehended. *
4. This preposition is sometimes used (after transitive verbs)
elliptically, a word like some (as the real object of the verb) being
understood.
John xxi. 10 : eveyKart dirb t«v ^^^apW, bring of the fish.
Acts ii. 17 : e/cp^ew dirb Toi) IIvev|iaTos fiov, I will pour out of my
Spirit.
5. *A7ro is frequently joined with adverbs, as dirb t6t€, from then^
Matt. iv. 17, &c. ; dw dpri, henceforth, Matt, xxiii. 39, &c. ; dwi
* The verb flcruKova has a similar extended meaning in Ps. cxviii. 6, LXX.
But see Alford in loc, who cites Luke xix. 3, xxiv. 41 ; John xxi. 6; Acta
xii. 14, XX. 9, xxii. 11, as passages where inrh means on account of.
§ 292.] PREPOSITIOJNS \VITH THE GENITIVE, CLTTO, €K. 259
^aKp6Q€v, Jrom afar; arrh &v<aQiv, from above; arrh tov vvv, Jrom
now, &c. In all these cases, a substantive of place or time is
really understood.
293. III. 'E/c, e^, FKOM THE INTERIOR (opposite to eh).
1. Out of, locally.
Matt. iii. 17 : (f)couf) Ik t»v oipavwv, a voice out o/Iieaven.
Matt. viii. 28: Ik t«v hvt]|jl€i«v e^epxcfievoi, coming out of the
tombs.
To this meaning may be assigned the phrase, iK df^iwv, on the right
hand, literally, " off from the right-hand parts" (Matt. xx. 21, &e.
But iv 5e|(^ is also employed.
2. Originating in, as place, parentage, ^rom, of.
Matt. iii. 9 : Ik t«v XiOwv tovtcov, of these stones.
John iv. 7 : yvvfj Ik ttjs Sap-apeCas, a vjoman oj" Samaria.
Phil. iii. 5 : ^E^palos Ig *Eppaiwv, a Hebrew of Hebrews, i.e., of
Hebrew descent.
3. Originating in, as the source, cause, or occasion, ^rom, by.
Luke xvi. 9 : Troirja-aTe iavTols (}>iXovs Ik tov p,a|Jia)va ttjs ddiKias,
make to yourselves friends by the m^ammon of unrighteousness, i.e.,
by (the proper use of) your wealth.
Rom. V. 1 : biKaKodivres Ik ttCo-tcws, being justified by faith. So
in many passages.
1 Cor. ix. 14 : Ik tov cvayyeXiov (tjv, to live from the Gospel.
4. The material or mass from which anything is made or
taken, oJ.
Matt, xxvii. 29 : a-recfiavov l| AKavGwv, a crown ofthoriis.
5. Belonging to a class, of; often with abstract nouns.
John xviii. 37 : 6 oip Ik ttjs dX-qOcfos, he wlio is (on the side) of
the truth.
260 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITnTE, €K, [§ 293.
Rom. ii. 8 : ol k^ IpiOeCas, fliey who are of a self-seeJdng spirit.
Gal. iii. 9; Kom. iv. 12 : oi Ik tticttcws • ol Ik irepiTour)?, tliey who
are of faith — of circumcision, i.e., wlio range tliemselves under
these opposite symbols. So Rom. iv. 14, ol Ik vojjlov, they who are
of law, &c.
This meaning is closely allied with (3).
6. Springing from : of the state of mind giving occasion to any
action, yrom, out of.
2 Cor. ii. 4 : Ik iroXXiis 6\£xj/€«s typa^a, I wrote out of^ much
ajfliction.
1 Thess. ii. 3 : 17 irapdKKrja-is fjfiav ovk Ik itXAvtis, ov8e 1^ aKaOapo-Cas,
our exhortation was not from deceit nor from uncleanness.
7. Used of time, from, the future being infolded in, and
springing out of the present.
John vi. 66 : Ik tovtov, from this time.
Acts ix. 33 : l| It«v itKr&,for eight years.
294. TV. Upo, IN FRONT OF.
1. Before, in respect of place.
Acts xii. 6 : c^vkaKis re irpb ttjs Wpas, the guards before the door.
So ch. xiv. 13 ; James v. 9.
Matt. xi. 10 : irp^ irpoo-wirov trov, before thy face, from LXX.
So Mark i. 2 ; Luke i. 76, &c.
2. Before, in respect of time.
John xvii. 24 : irpb KarapoXfjs Koa-fiov, before the foundation of the
world.
1 Cor. iv. 5 : fi^ irph KaipoO ri Kpivere, judge nothing before the
time.
2 Cor. xii. 2 : vph h&v 8cKaT€or<rdp«v, fourteen years ago (lit.,
bofore fourteen years, i.e., counted backward from the present
time). See also John xii. 1.
|5 294.] PREPOSITIONS. 261
3. Before^ by way of superiority.
Only in the phrase irpb irdvTwv, he/ore, or, above all tilings.
Luke xxi. 12; Col. i. 17 ; James v. 12 ; 1 Pet. iv. 8.
Prepositions governing the Dative only.
'Ev, onuv.
295. I. 'Ej/, in, correlative with eh and Ik.
1. Of place, in ; so within, upon, at.
Matt. ii. 1 : ev BtjOXcIji. ttjs lovbaias, in Bethlehem of Judcea,
Matt. XX. 3 : Iv t^ a^op^:, m tlie market.
John XV. 4 : Iv rfi ajiir^Xo), in the vine.
Heb. i. 3 : Iv Scgig. t^s ixeyaKmcrvvrjs, on the right hand q/" tJie
Majesty.*
Rev. iii. 21 : Iv tw 6p<5v<p /lou, oti my throne.
2. Among, with plurals or collective nouns.
Matt. ii. 6 : Iv tois r^i^6fr\.v lovba, among the princes of Judah ;
LXX., Micah V. 2.
Luke xiv. 31 : Iv 8lKa xi^taoriv, among ten thousands, i.e., attended
by such a troop. See Jude 14 ; also Acts vii. 14.
A.cts ii. 29 : icrriv Iv f,|jiiv axpi r^s fjixepas tuvttjs, it (the sepulchre)
is among iis unto this day.
1 Pet, V. 1, 2 : npeo-^vrepovs tovs Iv tip.iv ... ro Iv vjjliv Troifiviov, the
elders ajnorig you ... the flock amon^ you.
3. " The €v of investiture," in or with ; as when we say, " The
general came in his sword, the peers in their robes." The Greek
of the New Testament extends this use of the preposition to accom-
paniments which do not literally invest, t
* Compare the use of e'/c (1).
+ A usage infrequent in classic Greek, and probably due to the influence
ot the Hebrew preposition 5, in, with, by, &c, for which the LXX. con-
stantly uses iy.
262 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE, iv. Pg 295.
1 Cor. iv. 21 : kv pdp8<p eXda> irpbs Ifxas ; am I to conie to you
with a rod ?
1 Cor. V. S : fifj Iv tvp-r) iraXai^ . . . aXX' h atv|iois, not in old leaven
...but in unleavened bread.
1 Tim. i. 18 : tva a-rpaTevrj Iv avrats, tliat thou mayest fight in
them (prophesyings), i.e., armed with tliem.
Heb. ix. 25 ; 6 dpxiepeiis ela-epxerai ... kv atjiari dWorpiaij the high
priest enters ... in the blood of others. Compare ch. x. 19;
xiii. 12.
So, perhaps, Eph. vi. 2 : ivrokr] npciTr) kv lirayyeXC^, tJie first
commandment in, or with promise.
To this notion of investiture that of action is sometimes superadded
(Luke i. 51). Hence *'the eV instrumentaL"
Luke xxiL 49 : et irard^ofifv iv fiaxalpa ; shall we smite vxith the sioord ?
See also Heb. xi. 37, and the Kevelation frequently, as ii. 16, vi. 8,
xiii. 10, xiv. 15. In Matt. v. 13, Mark ix. 50, 4v tIpi; may be rendered
wherewith ?
4. The sphere in which the subject is concerned, as dwelling or
acting, in.
So the phrases Iv afiaprCa, in sin ; Iv irCorrci, in fiaith ; kv a-o^U^,
in wisdom; Iv dYclinj, in love; kv nveviian, in spirit, or, in i/ie
Spirit. Matt. xxii. 43 ; E-ev. i. 10 (Rom. vii. 5).
The frequent phrase, iv Xpiar^ (so ^i' Kwp/y, &c.), means, not simply
attached to Christ as a follower, but in Christ, in the most intimate
abiding fellowship.* So "Chiist in us," GaL i. 16, &c A similar
phrase is used of the revelation of God himself.
2 Cor. V. 19; ^ehs ^v Xpia-r^, k.t.X., God in Christ was reconciling, &c
Eph. iv. 32: i &ehs iv Xpurr^ Ix^P*"'""''*' ^M*''* (^od in Christ forgave you.
See also Acts xvii. 31 : *'ina man whom he hath ordained."
5. In the power of, by.
Matt. ix. 34 : Iv t^ Apxovr* W>v daifioviav, by the prince of the
demons.
* "Nicht bios durch Ohr. heneficio Christi sondern in Chr., in gcistig,
kraftiger Gemeinschaft n^it Chr." — Winer,
§295.] PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE, h, avv. 263
Matt. V. 34 : 4v tw ovpav^ ... kv t-q y% hy heaven ...by earth. So
elsewhere in asseverations.
In Matt. iv. 4, the best copies read kv irdvri p^jJtaTi, hy every
word of God. Compare 1 Thess. iv. 15.
'Ev6|ioC, 1 Cor. ix. 15; Mark xiv. 6, must be rendered in my
case; 1 Cor. xiv. 11, in ony apprehension.
6. This preposition with its case is often equivalent to an
adverb. Compare (4) preceding. So we may render Iv 8vvdp.€i, ia
power, or powerfully ; iv 8oX«, craftily ; Iv rdxei, speedily, (fee. In
John xviii. 20, Iv KpvirTw is in secret, secretly, different from kv to*
Kpvnrw, Matt. vi. 18.
7. Of time, in, upon.
Matt. ii. 1 : Iv -^jilpais *Hpw5oi;, in the days of Herod.
Matt. X. 15 : Iv Tjiiep^ Kpiaeas, in the day ofjudgjnent; xii. 36, tkc.
Often with the infinitive treated as a noun.
Matt. xiii. 4 : Iv tw crirdpnv avrov, while he was sowing.
With the relative pronoun, iv ^, whilst, as Mark ii. 19 ; iv oTs, whilst,
as Luke xii. 1. The only difference between the singular and the plui'al
is that the latter is more general.
8. Constructio prcegnans, — This preposition seems occasionally
to include the sense of els, and so is used after verbs implying
motion : — " into, so as to be in."
Matt, xxvi 23 : 6 l)Jipd\{/as ... Iv rto rpv^Xia, he who dipped ... in
the dish.
Luke xxiii. 53 : ^6t]K€v avrh Iv ixvrjfjiaTi Xa^evra, they laid it in a
rock-hewn sepulchre.
Romans ii. 5 : Otio-avpCtcis o-eauroj 6pyj)v Iv rjpepa opy^y, thou
treasurest to thyself wrath (to be poured forth) u2:)on a day of
wrath.
296. II. 2vv, CONJUNCTION WITH (union, or co-operation).
With, together with.
Matt. xxvL 35 : <rvv o-ol airoOaviiv, to die with thee.
264 PREPOSITIONS. [§ 296.
Luke viii. 45 : UeVpos /cat oi <rvv avr^, I^eter and those with him.
Not merely co-existence, but association is generally implied (see
jxerd). Hence, avy is used of the fellowship of believers with Christ, &c.
(Rom. vi. 8 ; Col. ii. 13, 20, iii. 3 ; 1 Thess. iv. 17, v. 10). There is the
further suggestion of co-operation in such passages as 1 Cor. v. 4, xv. 10.
In Luke xxiv. 21, together with becomes nearly equal to beside; aWd
76 Kol avv vaffi roirois, Moreover, beside aU this. Compare Nehemiah
V. 18, LXX., "yet for all this," E.V.
Prepositions governing the Accusative only.
*Avd, A%.
297. 'Ava, UP TO, or, UP BY.*
This preposition is of infrequent occurrence in the New Testa-
ment, and always has a special meaning,
1. dvA n^o-ov, in the midst of. Matt. xiii. 25 ; Mark viL 31 ;
1 Cor. vi. 5; Rev. vii. 17.
2. avoL (t^pos, by turn, 1 Cor. xiv. 27.
3. With numerals or measures of quantity or value, apiece.
Matt. XX. 9, 10 ; dwL 8i]vdpiov, a denariuLS apiece. Compare
Mark vi. 40 ; Luke ix. 3, 14, x. 1 (avct 8wo, two by two) ;
John ii 6 ; Rev. iv. 8.
4. In Rev. xxi. 21, ivd, ets ?Ka<rTos, the preposition must be
rendered as an adverb, each one separately.
298. IL Ety, TO THE INTERIOE (opposite to €#c, and correlative
with €V).t
1. Of place, into ; so, figuratively, of a state.
Matt, ii 1 1 : ikOovres A% -ri^v oUCav, liaving come into the h&iise.
Matt. V. 1 : avf^T) ds rh 6pos, he went up into the mountain.
♦ In classical Greek, AvA also with a Dative.
t In Latin, the preposition in includes the notions of «ii and iv, taking
the Accusative and Ablative respectively; and tis (really 4ys), in fact, iB
only another form ot ^r, as i^ of 4k.
§ 298.] PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE, €tS. 265
Matt. vi. 13 : fxfi elaeveyKjjs fjnas €ls Treipacrfidv, lead US not into
temptation.
So with collective words.
Acts xxii. 21 : els l^vx\ e^aTrofrreXS) are, I will send thee forth into
the community of Gentiles.
2. UntOy to, where the context or the nature of the case limits
the movement to the exterior.
Matt. xvii. 27 : iropevdeh els GoXaeropav, having gone to sea.
John xi. 38 : epxerai els rh (ivi(](i€iov, he cometh to the tomb. So"
XX. 1, 3, 4 (ver. 5, "he went not in").
Matt. vi. 2Q : ifi^Xeyl^are els rd irereivd, looh to the birds.
Luke vi. 20 : endpas tovs 6(f)da\p.ov5 els Tovs |ia0T]ids, having lifted
his eyes towards his disciples.
Rev. X. 5 : ^pe tt)v x^^P^ avrov els rhv ovpav6v, he lifted Ids hand to
heaven.
3. The meaning towards is especially found in relation to
persons, marking direction of thought, speech, &e. Sometimes
this implies hostility, against; sometimes mere reference, in
regard to.
Rom. xii. 16 : t6 avro els dXX^Xovs (f)povovvTes, being of the samie
mind one towards another.
Luke xii. 10 : rras os epei \6yov els tov vibv tov duBpairov, whoever
shall say a word against the Son of man.
Acts ii. 25 : Aa/3tS yap Xeyet els avT<Jv, for David says in reference
to him.
4. Towards, with respect to a certain result, in order to, for.
Matt. viii. 4, x. 18, &c. : els naprvpiov avroh, for a testimony to
them.
Matt. xxvi. 2 : napabiboTai els rh o-TavpwO^vat, he is surrendered
to be crucified.
1 Cor. xi 24 : Troie Ire els T^v dvd|xvT]<ri.v, do it for the remembrance
of me.
266 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE, ets. [§ 298.
2 Cor. ii. 12: tkBaiv els rfjv TpoooSa, els t^ €vayyA.iov, having conie
to Troasfor (the preaching of) the Gospel.
5. Into, symbolically, as marking the entrance into a state or
sphere (see under ev, 4).
So we enter ds Xpurr^v, into Christ, actually by faith, sym-
bolically by baptism, Christians being Iv Xpiorrw, in Christ.
Hom. vi. 3, 4 : ocrot i^anTLaBTjfxev els Xpitrrbv Jr}(rovv, €ls tJ)V Odvarov
ainov i^anTLcrdijufv, as many of us as were baptized into Christ
Jesus, were baptized into his death.
Compare Matt, xxviii. 19, "into the name," &c; Acts xix. 3 ; 1 Cor.
i 13, X. 2, xii. 13 ; Gal. iii. 27. So Acts ii. 38. els ttjj' &<p(aiv anapriwu,
into the remission of sins, or, according to some interpreters, as (4).
6. This preposition is used in some important passages to denote
ecfuivalence,* and may be rendered /or, or as.
Matt. xix. 5: ecroi/rat ... els <rdpKa \iCav, tliey shall become one
flesh. So Mark x. 8j 1 Cor. vi. 16; Eph. v. 31 j from LXX.,
Gen. ii. 24.
Matt. xxi. 42 : iyev^drj ds K€<j>aX^v yavlas, it became the head of
tlie comer. So Mark xii. 10 ; Luke xx. 17 ; from LXX.,
Ps. cxviii. 22.
Compare Luke iii. 5 (from Isa. xl. 4), xiii. 19; John xvi. 20; Acta
vii. 21, xiii. 22 ; Rom. xi. 9 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 22, xv. 45 (see Gen. il 7,
LXX.); 2 Cor. vi. 18, viii. 14; Heb. i. 5; James v. 3.
Acts xix. 27 : t6 ... Upbv els ov8^v Xoyto-^^vai, the tem,ple to be
esteemed as nothing.
Rom. ii. 26 : olxi fj aKpo^va-ria avrov els irepiTOjATjv Xoyiad^atrai ;
sliall not his undrcumcision be accounted as circumcision ?
Rom. ix. 8 : Xoyi^erai els <^^•^pne^ it is accounted /or a seed.
Rom. iv. 3, 5, 9, 22 ; Gal. iii 6 : tXoylaOrj avrco els BiKau><rvvr\v, it
was accounted to him /or righteousness.
♦ This answers to a common Hebrew use of the preposition \ (equivalent
to eis) after copulative verbs.
§ 298.] PREPOSITIOXS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE, €IS\ 267
7. When referring to time, els may mark either (a) the interval
up to a certain point, during ; or (b) the point itself, regarded as
the object of some aim or purpose, up to, for.
a. Luke i. 50 : els ycveds 7ev€(Sv, to generations of generations.
Luke xxi. 19: els tov al«va, for ever, lit., " unto or during the
age;" also in the Epistles of Paul (not in the Hebrews), els tovs
alwvas, lit., "unto the ages," in the later Epistles and the Revela-
tion, els Tovs alwvas t«v altivwv, to the ages of the ages, "for ever
and ever." 2 Pet. iii. 18, eis ^fxepav alcovos, " to the day of eternity;"
all with the same meaning.
So in the adverbial phrases, fls rh fieWoy, hereafter; els rh diriveKes,
perpetually.
h. Matt. vi. 34 : fxfi ovv ^(pifivrjo-eTe €ls TT|v al'piov, be not anxiovs
for (lit., "project not your anxieties into") the morrow.
Phil. i. 10 : els %^pav Xpiarrov, unto the day of Christ. So
2 Tim. i. 12. Eph. iv. 30, is slightly different, expressing more
prominently the intent of the Spirit's " sealing."
Rev. ix. 15 : f^Toipaa-pivoL els T^v upav kcu iqn^pov kol p.t)va Ka\
ipiavTov, prepared for (or unto) the hour and day, and month and
year, i.e., for the precise time appointed.
Acts xiii. 42 : eh t^ fiera^h odfifiaTov presents a little difficulty, as
*'07i the next Sabbath" would be rendering the preposition with undue
licence. We must understand either "for the next Sabbath" — the
Gospel being regarded as a treasure reserved for that time — or during
Hie intervening week.
8. Gonstructio prcegnans. — See under ev (8). As Iv in a similar
double constmction implies the previous els, so els here implies the
following ev.
Mark xiii. 16 : 6 els rov dypov ^v, "he who is into the field," i.e.,
wlio has gone into the field and is in it. Matt. xxiv. 18 has iv.
Acts viii. 40 : ^Ikimros evpeOrj els "K^farov, Philip was found (to
have been led) to Azotus.
Acts xxi. 13 : diro0av€tv els 'lepova-aXljp, "to die into Jerusalem/'
i.e., to go into Jerusalem and die t/iere.
268 PREPOSITIONS. [§ 298.
Heb. xi. 9 : irapwKTi<r€v €ls rrjv y^v, "sojoumed into the land," i.e.,
travelled into the land and sojourned in it.
In one passage, els is apparently followed by a Genitive : Acts ii. 27, 31
(LXX., Ps. xvi. 10), its ^5ov, to Hades. The phrase contains a classical
ellipsis ; oiKiow, habitation being understood, and Hades being personified.
•' Thou wilt not abandon my soul to the realm of the Unseen."
Prepositions governing the Genitive and Accusative Cases.
Aid, Kard, fJi-erd, irtpi, inrip, dircJ.*
299. I. Aid, THROUGH, from the notion of separation, dis-
junction.
a. With the Genitive —
1. In reference to place: through, literally, i.e., "through and
from"
John iv. 4 : ebei Se avrou diepxeadai 8ioL rfjs Sajiope^as, and he must
needs go through Samaria.
John xiv. 6 : ovSeh epxerai irpos rhv irartpa ft pri 8i' Ijtofi, no one
Cometh to the Father hut through me — the Way.
1 Cor. iii. 15 : (radrja-eTat ... as 8wl Tov irvpds, he shall he saved as
(one who has passed) through the fire.
1 Cor. xiii. 12 : ^Xenopcp yap apn 8i' lo-ditrpov, for we see now
through a mirror (the image appearing on the opposite side).
2. In reference to agency : through, hy means of.
Matt. i. 22 : priBtv \mo Kvpiov Slot TOV 'irpo<})^Tov, spoken hy Jehovah
through the prophet. Here mark the distinction between xm6 and
bid, and compare vtto (a).
1 Cor. iii. 5 : didKovoi 8i* «» emoTtvaart, ministers through whom
ye helieved.
2 Thess. ii. 2 : prjre 8 id irvcvuaTos, prirc 8 id Xd-yov, pfjTt 8i*
firurToXijs, a>s 8i' ^ji«v, neither hy Spirit, nor hy word, nor hy letter
as from us (through us as the mediate authors).
* la clasaic Greek, ircpt and vit6 may take a Dative ; also /lercC in poets.
§ 299.] Atci, WITH THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 269
Eph. i. 1, &c. : 8ioL 0€\%aTos Oeov, hy tlie will of God.
Eph. ii. 8, &c. : o-eo-coo-fieuoi 8ia ttjs iri<rT€«s, saved hy faith.
2 Cor. V. 10 : to. 8ta tov a-(!>^o.ros, the things (wrought) by means
oj tlie body.
3 John 13 : ov diKa 8ia ft^avos ku KoXdjtov ypd(l)€iPf I do not wish
to write with ink and pen.
This preposition is used, especially in such phrases as 5ik 'Iriffov Xpiarov,
of Christ's mediatorial work in all its manifestations.* (Rom. ii. 16,
V. 1; 2 Cor. i. 5; Gal. i. 1; Eph. i. 5; PhiL i. 11 ; Titus iii. 6; and
perhaps 1 Peter ii. 14. )
Very rarely it seems to indicate the primary agent. 1 Cor. i. 9 :
vurrhs 6 ®ehs 5i* ov iKX-ftBrtre, k.t.X,, God is faiHiful hy whom ye were
called, &c. Yet even here the proper force of Sjo is not lost. The
Father is represented as acting on behalf of his Son, to bring Christians
into fellowship with him.
3. In reference to time, it marks the passage through an interval :
(a) during, or (6) after the lapse of.
(a) Luke v. 5 : 8i' 8Xtjs t<)s wkt<Js, all night.
Heb. ii. 15 : 8ioL irdvros tov t^v, all through his life.
The phrase 8ioL (t^s) wkto's denotes by night, i.e., during its
lapse, no particular hour or hours being specified. Acts v. 19,
xvi. 9, xvii. 10, xxiii. 31. So Acts 13; 8t* i^fiepoiv Tco-o-apdKovro,
at intervals during forty days.
(b) Matt. xxvi. 61 ; Mark xiv. 58 : 8tcL rpiwv i^jjicptav, three days
afterwards.
Gal. ii. 1 : 8ia 8€KaT€<ro-dp(i)v It«v, fourteen years after.
Compare Mark ii. 1 ; Acts xxiv. 17.
/3. "With the Accusative —
On account of: as in the frequent phrase 8iA tovto, " on this
account." So " because of," " for the sake of."
"With the Genitive, 8ta notes the instrument of an action;
with the Accusative, its ground, ratio."*
♦ Winer.
270 Ata, WITH THE AC<;usATiva, Kara. [§ 299.
Matt. X. 22, &c. : Sta rb 5vo|xd fiov^for my name^s sake.
Matt. xxiv. 12 : 8toL xh irXVjSwOrjvai rrju dvofiiavy because of the
abounding of the iniquity.
Epli. ii. 4 : Sia Tfjv ttoXX^v aYa-irriv avrov, on account of Ids great
love.
John vi. 57 : iyoi ^w 8ioL tJ>v IlaT^pa, / live because of tlie Father y
i.e., "because he liveth."
Heb. V. 12 : 8iA rhv xp°vov, on account of^ i.e., considering the
time that you have been Christians.
Rom. viii. 1 1 : StoL xh Ivoikovv ahrnv nvwfta, on account of his
indwelling Sjnrit.
The distinction between the Genitive and the Accusative should be
marked in such passages as Rom. xii. 3, xv. 15. "I say to you,"
writes the Apostle in the former, S<ek ttjj x^P^^o^y through the grace given
to me, I.e., "the favour bestowed is the power by which I write ;" but
in the latter, Zih. t))i/ x<^P^v, on account of the grace given me, ** that I
may worthily vindicate its bestowal."
An instance of a different kind is in Heb. ii. 10 : 5t' tv rh wavra koI
Si oZ t& irdvTa, for whom are all things and by whom are all things,
i. e. , for his honour and by his agency. Compare also 1 Cor. xi. 9 and 12 :
dih tV yvvaiKd, for the sake of the woman ; iih Trjs yvvaiK6s, by Hie woman,
i.e., in birth.
300. II. Kara, DOWN.
a. With the Genitive, " down from" —
1. Literally, of place, dovm.
Matt. viii. 32 : copfXTjire Kard toO KpT){i.vod, rushed down the steep.
Mark v. 13 ; Luke viii. 33.
1 Cor. xi. 4 : KarA K€4>aX{)s Zx^oavj having a covering on (depending
from) the head.
See also Mark xiv. 3 ; Acts xxvii. 14 ; 2 Cor. viii. 2.
2. Hence the more usual signification, against^ in opposition to
(the reverse of vTrep, which see).
Mark xi. 25 : ci rt «x*''« ''*''^ Tivot, if ye Iiave anything against
any one.
§ 800.] Kara, WITH THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 271
Acts xiv. 2 : inf]yeipav KaroL t«v d8€X<j>wv, they rose up against the
brethren.
3. Occasionally in asseverations, by —
Matt. xxvL 63 : i^opKiCco o-e Kara tov 0€ou, I adjure thee by God.
So Heb. vi. 13-16. 1 Cor. xv. 15, is probably to be referred to the
same rule. "We have called God to witness," though the rendering
against might be admissible. " Of God " is plainly incorrect.
4. As with the Accusative, over, throughout^ a usage confined to
Luke, and to the following passages —
, Luke iv. 14 : KaO* SXtis rfjs irtpixwpov, through all the region round
about.
Luke xxiii. 5 : Acts ix. 31, 42, x. 37.
j3. With the Accusative, down upon, or along —
1. ThrougJwut (see a, 4), with singular or plural.
Luke viii. 39 : KaO' 8Xt]v t^v iroXiv, through the whole city.
Acts viii. 1 : Kara toLs X"P<^s t^s lovbalas, throughout the regions
of Judaea.
Acts xxvi. 3 : roiv Kara 'lovSatovs e^coi/, of the customs among the
Jews.
2. Over against, locally —
Luke ii. 31 : Karol irpoo-wTrov irdvroiv Ta>v Xacov, before the face of all
the peoples.
So Acts ii. 10 ; Gal. iL 1 1, iii. 1, &c.
3. In reference to time, at or in, "correspondent with," "at the
period of" (" over against") —
Matt. i. 20, &c. : Kar 8vap, in a dream.
Acts xvi. 25 : Kara rh |i€<rovi3KTtov, at midnight.
Rom. V. 6 ; Kara Kaipbv, in due time.
4. Of place or time, distributively, from one to anotJier —
Mark xiii 8 : o-et<r/ioi Kara tcJitovs, eartJiquakes in divers places.
272 Kard, with the accusative, ixerd. [§ 300.
Luke viii. 1 : biaBeve KarA 7r6\iVf he was journeying from dty to
city.
So kot' (tos, year by year, Luke ii. 41 ; Kar* oIkov, at different houses.
Acts ii. 46, V. 42 ; Karh -kolu ca&fiarov, every Sabbath, Acts xv. 21 ; Kaff
Vfifpav, daily, Matt. xxvi. 25, &c. (and the phrase Kad' ets, or Kadels, one
by one, Mark xiv. 19; John viii. 9j Rom. xil 5.)
5. From the meaning " over against " arises that of according to,
in reference to some standard of comparison, stated or implied.
Matt. ix. 29 : Kara t^v irioTiv vfiSav y€vr}dfjTci, according to your
Jaiih let it be.
Luke ii. 39 : ra Kard T<Jv v<5|iov Kvpiov, the things according to the
law of Jehovah.
So in the phrases /cot' HvOpwirov, as a man ; Kar' ?/i6, according to my
ability or view ; Karb. x^P^^y according to favour ; Kar' i^ox^v, by way of
pre-eminence. Acts xxv. 23, &c. The phrase kotA 0e<fi/ means, in accord-
ance with the character of Ood, "divinely," as 2 Cor. vii. 9, 10, 11.
Thus also, Eom. viii. 27, He (the Spirit) divindy intercedes;* Rom.
xiv. 15, KttT* aydirriv, according to love.
Heb. xi. 13 : Karb. irianv airidavov, they died according to faith, i.e., in
a way consistent with, corresponding to the spirit of faith ; contented,
though they had not seen the blessing.
6. Phrases like the foregoing often pass into an adverbial
meaning —
Matt. xiv. 13, (fee. : Kar' I8(av, alone.
Acts xxviii. 16 : Ka0' lavr<$v, hy himself,
301. IIL Merd, IN ASSOCIATION WITH (locally), distinguished
from avv, which implies co-operation, and is not necessarily local.
a. With the Genitive, ^^with and from" or separable connexion, t
1. With, amidst, among.
Matt i 23: 'E/tfiwouijX ... jjlcO' ^jifiv 6 e«(Js, Emmanuel, God with v^.
Matt. xii. 3, kc. : ol jier' airoO, those with him, his companions.
♦ Winer here prefers the rendering before, as (2) above, but, as it seems,
without sufficient reason,
t Donaldson. Mcrd is connected with iiiaos, midst.
So of two parties to a conversation or controversy —
John iv. 27 : |A6toL ■ywaiK^s e'XaXei, he was talking with a woman.
See also Matt. xii. 41, 42, &c.
2. Of attendant circumstances, objects, states of mind (not
instnimental), together with —
Matt. XXV. 4 : ixctoL t«v XainrdSwv avroix', with their lomfvps.
Mark vi; 25 : fia-eX^ovcra nercL <nrov8fjs, coraing m with haste,
Heb. xii. 17 : (i^a SaKpvwv iK^r^rqcrasy having sought with tears-.
1 Tim. iv. 14 : ^ei eiriO^o-ews rav x^^-p^v, with (not by) the laying
on of the hands.
Matt, xxvii. 66 : jierd, rfjs Kov<rT«8Cas, together with the watch.
3. The object of a deed of love, mercy, or the like, is sometimes
spoken of, by this preposition, as associated with the agent —
Luke x. 37 : 6 Troiriaas to eXeos jicr' avTov, he who wrought the
com.passionate deed with him, i.e., " who showed mercy towards
him."
So also in Acts xiv. 27, xv. 4; 1 John iv. 17.
/3. With the Accusative, after.
Matt. XX vi. 2 : ficrd 8vo injA^pas, after two days.
Luke V. 27, &c. : nerd TaCra, after these things.
Luke xxii. 20 : (iera rh Sciirvfio-ai, after supper; 1 Cor. xi. 25.
Once only of place, beyond; to be explained, however, in the same
way, the observer arriving at the second point subsequently to the first
Heb. ix. 3 : jweret rb Seirepov KaTawiraffiJiaj beyond the second veiL
302. TV. Uepl, AROUND.
a. With the Genitive, " around and separate from."
About, concerning; chiefly as the object of thought, emotion,
knowledgie, discourse, &c.
Acts viii. 12 : ra ircpl rfjs paopiXcias tov Gfoi), the things concerning
the kingdom of God.
274 U€p[, iirip. [§ 302,
Matt. vi. 28 : ircpl evSv^taros Tt fxepifivare ; why are ye anxioiis
about raiment ?
Luke ii. 18 : ^davpaa-av irtp\ t»v XaXt^OlvTwv, they wondered about
the things that were spoken (this verb generally has eVt, "to wonder
ai").
Matt. ix. 36 : eaTrXayxvia-Brj irepl avTwv, he was compassionate
about them (also generally with eTrt, Dative or Accusative).
1 Thess. V. 25, &.c. : Trpoaevx^a-Bc irepl '^(jiwv, pray for us.
Rom. viiL 3 : 6 Gfoy rhv kavrov vlov Trep-^as ... ircpl afiaprCas, God
having sent his own Son for sin. Compare Gal. i. 4 (Tischendorf,
Laohmann, &c.) ; Heb. x. 6, 8, 18, 26 ; 1 John ii. 2, iv. 10. (See
under vTrep, a, 2.)
)3. With the Accusative, " around and towards."
1. Browne?, of place.
Matt. viii. 1 8 : Ib^v . . . ox>^ovs ircpl avrbv, seeing multitudes
around him.
Used of dress, &c., Matt. iii. 4 : ircpl t^v 6<r^vv avroO, about his
loins. So xviii. 6 ; Rev. xv. 6.
For the idiomatic expression, ot ircpl IlavXov, see § 197.
2. About, of time.
Matt. XX. 3 : ircpl rpCrr\v cSpav, about the third hour.
3. In reference to, about, of any object of thought.
Luke X. 40 : Trepieanaro irepl iroXX^v SiaKovCav, she was cumbered
about much serving (ver. 41).
1 Tim. i. 19 : ircpl -rijv irimv evavdyrja-av, tJiey made shipwreck
in reference to tJie faith.
See also Mark iv. 19 ; Acts xix. 25 ; 1 Tim. vi. 4, &c,
303. Y. *Y7rf>, OVER.
a. With the Genitive, " over and separate from."
1, On belialf of, as though bending "over" to protecf; (the
opposite of Kara). Of persons.
g 303.] ^776/3, WITH THE GENITIVE. 275
Matt. V. 44 : rrpoarevxeo-Oe inrlp t«v Suokc^vtov vfxaS) pra^/foQ'* those
who persecute you.
Mark ix. 40 : 6? yap ovk ecm kqB^ vpav vir^p vfi.wv ea-riv, he who IS
not against us is for u^. Compare Rom. viii. 31.
2 Cor. V. 14, 15 : vnrlp irdvrwv dneOaueVj he died for all. So
Rom. V. 6, 7, 8j Gal. ii. 20, iii. 10; Eph. v. 25; Heb. ii. 9;
1 Pet. ii. 21, &G.
Philemon 13 : tm virlp o-ov not diaKovfj, that he might minister to
7m for tJiee.
As a service is often rendered on behalf of another hy heing offered in
his stead, the notion of vitip may become interchangeable with that of
avri, as in the last passage. The distinction is, that virip of itself
leaves undetermined the way in which the service is performed, simply
affirming the fact; avrl, on the other hand, is definite. See Winer,
§ 47, I, n. 2.
3. Of things : for their sake, in various ways.
John xi. 4 : vir^p rfjs 8o|t]s tov Qeov, for the glory of God, i.e., to
promote it.
Rom. XV. 8 : virkp dXTjOctas Qeov, for the truth of God, i.e., " to
confirm his promises."
2 Cor. xii. 19 : iiirep Tt]s vpCiv oiKoSofi'fjs, for your edification, i.e.,
to minister to it.
Phil. ii. 13: vtrlp rfjs evSo k tas, ybr (his) good pleasure, i.e. to
accomplish it.
Acts V. 41 : vtrkp TOV ovdjittTos, on behalf of the Name of Christ,
i.e., to glorify it. Compare ix. 16 ; 3 John 7, (fee.
1 Cor. XV. 3 : an^davev vir^p t«v a(x,apTia)v T]pa}v, he died for our
sins, i.e., to take them away. Compare Heb. v. 1, tfec. ; and see
under Trepl, a.
3. About, "in reference to," simply; the notion of benefit or
service having disappeared.
2 Cor, viii. 23 : eire vtikp Titov, whether (you enquire) about Titus,
* More emphatic than jtipi in the same connexion.
276 'TTre'p, iirS. [§ 3C3.
2 Thess. ii 1 : ^ir^ rr\s irapov<r£as tov Kvpiov, with respect to the
coming of the Lord.
The passage, 1 Cor. xv. 29, fiatm^6iicvoi vvkp ruv vcKpwv, baptized foTy
or on behalf of, or in reference to the dead, possibly refers to some
observance (perhaps local) in connexion -^-ith the act of baptism, of
which the trace is lost.
/3. With the Accusative, "over and towards."
Beyondy above, used in comparison.
Matt. X. 24 : ovK eoTi fMa6r]T^s inrkp rhv StSdo-KoXov, a disciple is not
above his teacher.
2 Cor. i. 8 : e^aprjdijiiev ifrip 8vva|jiiv, we were oppressed beyond
our strength.
So occasionally after a comparative adjective to add emphasis
(Luke xvi. 8; Heb. iv. 12.)
Here, too, may be referred the use of urrep with adverbs, as 2 Cor.
xi. 5, xii. 11, 6ir€p \lav or virfpxlcw, beyond measure; also the "improper
preposition " vvepdvu (from avd), up over, governing the Genitive (Eph,
i. 21, iv. 10 ; Heb. ix. 5). See under vw6 {0, 1, note).
304. VI. 'ytto, under.
a. With the Genitive, " beneath and separate from."
This preposition marks that from which a fact, event, or action
springs, i.e., the agent; hence its meaning, 5y, especially after
passive verbs.
Matt. iv. 1 : avr^xOrj irnh toO nvcv|iaTOS TreipaaBrjvai inrh tov AiapdXow,
he wa^ led up by the Spirit to be tempted by the devil.
Matt. V. 13 : KarairaTfiaBat. virb t«v dv8p<*ir<i)v, to be trodden under-
foot by men.
Note. — The Agent is signified by vTr6.
The Indrument, by the Dative alone.
The Minister of another's will, by 8i<£, with the Oenttive.
The Motive or Cause, by iid, with tlie Accusative.
The Occasion may be signified by AwJ.
r§ ^04. 'Tito, WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 277
3. With the Accusative, "under and towards."
1. Under, locally or figuratively —
Matt. V. 15: rideaaiv avrou itrh rhv |jl($8iov, they put it under tl\A
moditts.
Kom. vi. 14 : ov yap tWe vtrh vofiov aXX* virh \6^piv,for ye are not
under law, hut under grace.
In this sense, joined with the adverb Kara (from Kara), vtto forms
the " improper preposition " viroKaTo), down under, followed always
by a Genitive, as Mark vi. 11, &c.
3. Close upon (" under," as, e.g., under a wall, hill, &c.), like
the Latin suh, applied in the New Testament to time only, and in
one passage.
Acts V. 21 : imh rhv fipOpov, close upon the dawn, "very early in
the morning."
Prepositions governing the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative.
'EirC, irapd, irpos.
305. I. 'ETTt, UPON.
a. With the Genitive, "upon, and proceeding from," as, e.g., a
pillar upon the ground.
1. On, upon, locally —
Matt. vi. 10, &c. : lirl t<]s 711s, on the earth.
Luke viii. 13 : oi 8e lirl Tfjs ircrpas, and those upon the rock.
John xix. 19 : lirl tov orravpov, upon the cross.
Acts xii. 21 : Kadiaas lirl tow pharos, sitting upon the throne (lit.,
bema, or tribunal). So xxv. 6. Compare Rev. iv. 9, 10, v. 13,
vL 16, &c. In Matt. xix. 2S, ini in this sense has both the
Genitive and the Accusative.
2. Over, of superintendence, government, &o
Acts vi. 3 : ovs KaTaa-Trja-oixev Itrl rffi \piCa^ TavTrjs, wliom We shoU
set over this business.
Rom. ix. 5 : «5 av lirl irdvrwv, who is over all things.
278 'Etti, with the genitive. [§ 305.
3. On the basis of, figuratively, upon.
John vi. 2 : ra arnxela h fVoi'et lirl twv oo-devovvTcdv, the ndracies
which he wrought upon the infirm.
Compare Gal. iiL 16, &c.
Here, too, may be referred the phrase, eV aXrjdeias, in truth (Mark
adi. 14; Luke iv. 25, &c.), i.e., "on a basis of truth."
4. In the presence of, especially before a tribunal.
1 Cor. vi. 1 : Kpii/ea-Oai lirV t»v dSCKwv koi ovxi ^^ t«v a.'^Ciav, to be
judged before the unjitst, and not before the holy.
So Acts xxiii. 30, xxiv. 19, xxv. 9, 26, xxvL 2 ; 1 Tim. vi. 13.
1 Tim. V. 19 : €irl 8vo ^ rpiwv fjiaprvpcDv, before two or three wit'
nesses. But see 2 Cor. xiii. 1 : iirl a-rS^aros, /e.r.X., upon the
testimony (mouth) where the preposition, from the LXX., deDotes
5. In the time of or under.
Luke iii. 2 : br\ dpxwpl»s "Awa, under Annas, th« high priest.
Acts xi. 28 : lirl KXavSiov, under Claudius.
Matt. L 11 : lirl ttJs jteroiKco-Cas Ba^v\a>vos, at the time of tlie
deportation to Babylon.
Romans i. 10 : lirl t«v Trpo<r€vx«v fiovy at the tirne of m/y prayers,
1 Thess. i. 2 ; Philemon 4.
1 Peter i. 20 : lir' hxyjixatv r&v xp<5va)v, in the last times, Heb. i. 2;
2 Peter iii. 3 ; Jude 18 (Tischendorf, Lachmann).
In Mark xii. 26 : M ^drov, at the Bush, means, " at the Old Testa-
ment section entitled ' The Bush.'"
6. Constructio proegnans. — This preposition with the Genitive
Boraetimes (see under iv, 8) implies the foregoing motion.
Matt. xxvi. 1 2 : PaXo{)(ra ...ro fivpov tovto lir\ tov (r<6)iaT($$ fxov,
having cast this ointment on my body.
Mark xiv. 35 : lireo-av lirl -H^s yfp, they fell upon the ground.
§ 305.] 'Etti, with the dative. 279
/3. With the Dative, " resting upon "
1. On, upon, locally ; like the Genitive, except that the point of
view is different. (See y, 1.)
Luke xix. 44 : ovk dcfirja-ovoiv . . . Xldov ktrX Xi6«, ihei/ will not leave
stone resting upon stone.
2. Over, of superintendence, &c. (See a, 2.)
Luke xii. 44 : cirl rots virdpxo-uo-t, over the goods.
3. On (at), as the groundwork of any fact or circumstance.
Matt. iv. 4 : ovk lir' dprw ^oVw ^j;o-erai, shall not live on bread
alone,
Luke V. 5 : lirl tw pifjixarC aov xo^<io-(^ to dUrvov, at thy word I
will let down tlie net.
Acts xi. 19 : r^y (^Vi^^ai^ Tr\s yfvofievrjs 6irl Sri^dva), the affliction
that arose upon Stephen.
Mark ix. 37, (tc. : IttI tw ovo^q-tL hov, in my name. (Compare
Matt, xxviii. 19, with Acts ii. 38.)
Eom. viii. 20 : eir' eXirtSt, in hope^ i.e., " resting on the basis of a
hope that," &c.
2 Cor. ix. 6 : lir' cvXo^Cais, on a groundwork of blessings, i.e.,
"bountifully."
1 Thess. iv. 7 : ov yap iKciXcorev 17/ias 6 Qeos eirl dKa0ap(rta, yb?- God
did not call us on the ground of impurity, or perhaps as (5).
So the phrase ^<p' (f, "on the condition being realized that," where-
fore, because (Rom. v. 12, &c.)
4. Over and above, in addition to ; as by one fact resting ujwn
another.
Luke xvi. 20 : lirl irdo-i tovtois, beside all these.
2 Cor. vii. 13 : hrX rfj irapaKXi^crci rjuCyv (Tischendorf, Lachmanu),
in addition to our comfort.
5. Oonstructio prcegnans.—(See a, 6.) The force of the Accu-
sative aiso is sometimes implied.
280 'ETTt, WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. [^ 305
Matt. ix. 16: ovBels 5e liripdXXci . , . Iirl i}j.aT£a> iraXaiu, no OTie
putteth ... upon an old garment.
y. With the Accusative, " upon, by direction towards."
1. Upon, with motion implied.
Matt. V. 15 : rcdeaa-iv IttX ri\v XvxvCav, they put (it) upon the
lampstand.
Matt. vii. 24 : (OKodofirja-c lirl T^v -irtTpav, he huilt upon the rock.
Matt xiv. 29 : irepieiraTrja-cv lirl to, vSara, he walked upon the waters.
Matt. xxiv. 2 : Xidos €irl XiGov. See the Dative in the same
connexion, /3, 1. The notion there is of rest, simply ; here, of
downward pressure.
So after the verb iXiri^a, to hope; iiri, with the Dat., 1 Tim. iv. 10;
with the Ace, v. 5. In the one case, the hope is said to rest upon, as
a fact ; in the other, to be i)laced upon, as an act. So after ttc'Sw,
2 Cor. i. 9, compared with ii. 3. The difference is so shght, that the
expressions are easily interchangeable.
Constructio prmgnans. — In Matt. xix. 28 ; 2 Cor. iii. 15, and
some other passages.
2. Over, of authority, superintendence.
Luke i. 33 : ^ao-ikeva-ci lirl rhv oIkov 'la/cwjS, he sludl reign over
^e house of Jacob.
Heb. ii. 7 : Karearqa-as avrov iirX toL gp-ya, /c.r.X., tIlOU didst set him
)ver iJie works of thy liands.
The three cases in this connexion seem ** interchangeable," t.e., the
notions which they respectively express are so nearly allied that any of
them may be employed without materially altering the sense. The
Dative, however, and not the Accusative, is used when the preposition
follows a verb of existence ; the Accusative, and not the Dative, when
the verb is transitive. The Examples (o, 2) show that the Grenitive
may be with either.
3. To, implying an intention (for, against).
Matt, iii 7 : (p^oftevovs hrl rh pdirrwrna airovf coming for hia
baptism^
§ oOo.] 'Ettl, with the accusative. 281
Mark v. 21 : o-wrjx^r] ox><os iroXvs cir' avrcJv, a great multitude was
gathered together to him.
Matt. xxvi. 55 : ^s kirX \-^(rr\v i^fjXderef are ye come out as
against a robber ?
.So Luke xxiii. 48.
4. Towards, the direction of thought, feeling, speech.
Luke vi. 35 : avros XPV^"^^^ iariv lirl tovs dxap£<rTovs /cat trovTjpoi&s,
lie is good to the ungrateful and wiched.
2 Cor. ii. 3 : nenoiOois €irl irdvTas vp-ds, having confidence with
regard to you all.
Mark ix. 12 : yiypanTai lirl tov vlbv tov dvdpaiirov, it is written
with regard to the Son of man.
Matt. XV. 32 : aTrXayxviCofxai eirl tov fi\Xov, I have compassion on
iJie multitude. This verb and preposition are also lound with the
Dative (see /3, 3) ; i.e., the compassion may be conceived as moving
tomardsj or as 7'esting on, the multitude.
5. Of number or quantity, up to.
Acts iv. 17 : eirl ttXciov, to a further pointy "any further."
Rev. xxi. 16 : lirl (rraSioiJs SwficKa ;i(tXtaScoi/, to twelve tlwusands of
stadia.
Matt. XXV. 40, &c. : €(}>' 5o-ov, inasmuch as. So of time, as long
as, Matt. ix. 15.
With numeral adverbs, Acts x. 16, xi. 10. So in the compound
adverb, €^a7ra|, once for all, at once (Rom. vi. 10 ; 1 Cor. xv. 6 ; Heb.
vii. 27, ix. 12, X. 10).
6. Of time, over, during on.
Luke X. 35 : eirl t-^jv aiJpiov, in the course of the morrow,
Luke xviii. 4 : ovk rjOeXija-ep €irl xpovov, he would not for a tim£.
Acts xiii. 31 : w(jidr] IttI "qixepas irXciovs, he was seen during several
days.
So in the phrase, iirl rh uvr6, at tJie same place or time, '* together"
(Luke xvii. 35 ; xYcts ii 1 ; 1 Cor. vii. 6, «&c.)
282 Uapd, WITH THE GEKITIYE. [§ 306.
306. II. Uapdj BESIDE (of juxtaposition).
a. With the Genitive : "Beside and proceeding from."
With persons only : frorrij generally with the notion of some-
thing imparted.
Matt. ii. 4 : invvQavcTo irap' avTwv, he enquired of them.
Phil. iv. 8 : bf^afxevos irap' '£j'ira<j>po8CTOV to. nap* vpoiVy having
received of Epaphroditus the things from you.
John xvi. 27 : irapSi tov 0€ov i^rjXdov, I came forth from God.
Compare John i. 14.
Matt. xxi. 42 : irapa Kvpiov eyevero avrrj, this wasfrom Jehovoh —
"his doing," from LXX., Ps. cxviii. 23.
Mark iii. 21 : ol irap' avroC, tlwse from him, i.e.y from his home
or family.
^. With the Dative, "beside and at."
1. With, near, of persons only, except John xix. 25.
John xiv. 1 7 : irap' vp.iv fieva, he remains with you.
Acts X. 6 : ^eui^erai irapd Tivi SCpwvt, lie lodges with one Simon.
John xix. 25 : irapa tw oTavpw, oiear tlie cross.
2. With, in the estimation or power of.
Matt. xix. 2Q : irapa AvOpcoirois ... dSvvaTOV, irapoL Sc 0€« navra
dvvaTa, vnth men . . . impossible ; but with God all things are possible.
Rom. ii. 13 : biKaioi irapdrtp QiM, jy^t vjith God.
Kom. xii. 1 6 ; (fjpovifiot irap' lavrots, ivise in your own esteem.
y. With the Accusative, " to or along the side of."
1 . By, near, after verbs implying motion ; also rest by an
extended object, as the sea.
Matt. xiii. 4 : (irea-e irapA ti^v 68ov, it fell by tlie wayside.
Matt. XV. 30 : eppiyj^av airrovs irapd tovs iro8as, tliCy COSt t^iCm at
his feet.
§ 306.J llapdj WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 283
Acts X. 6 : to eo-Tiv oIklu iraptt GoXao-trav, wlwse llOUSe 18 by t/ie
seaside.
2. Beside, as not coinciding with, hence contrary to.
Acts xviii. 13 : irapa v<J|iov, contrary to law.
Kom. L 26 : irapa <}>ucriv, contrary to nature.
Rom. iv. 18 : Trapa IXiriSa, contrary to expectation.
Rom. i. 2,5 : Trapa tov KTio-avra, instead of the Creator ; or
possibly, rather than, as (3).
3. Beside, with the notion of comparison, superiority, above.*
Luke xiii. 2 : aiiaprcoXol irapa irdvras, sinners above all.
Romans xiv. 5 : Kpivei fjpepav irap' i\\i.ipav, esteems day above day^
i.e., one above another.
Heb. ix. 23 : KpelrToa-i Bvalais iraptt ravras, better sacrifices than
these. So i. 4, iii. 3, xi. 4, xii. 24 ; Luke iii. 13.
4. From juxtaposition arises the notion of consequence, t in the
phrase irapa tovto, 1 Cor. xii. 15, 16, therefore.
307. III. Hpoj, TOWARDS.
a. With Genitive, "hither wards."
Belonging to the part or character of, J conducive to, vn. one
instance only —
Acts xxvii. 34 : tovto yap irpbs rfjs i)|Ji€T€'pas (rcoTT]ptas vTrdoxei, for
this is for your deliverance.
/3. With Dative, "resting in a direction towards."
Near, hard by —
Luke ix. 37 : irp^s tfj Kardpao-et, close to the descent.
• See virep. The difference is, that virip affirms superiority, irapd. institutes
comparison, and leaves the reader to infer superiority.
+ So in Latin, propter, because of, from prope, near.
J So in classical Greek, irphs kukov av5p6s. '
284 Upds, WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. [^ 307.
John xviii 16 : irpbs t^ 6vp<ji e^co, close hy the door outside.
John XX. 12 : eva irpbs Tg KC<j>aX-g koI eva irpbs tois irocriv, Olie at the
head and one at tJiefeet.
E,ev. i. 13 : irpbs rots (laarois, about the breast.
These are the only undoubted instances in the New Testament. Some
copies add Mark v. 11, John xx. 11, in the same sense.
y. With the Accusative, " hitherwards."
1 . To, of literal direction.
Matt. XL 28 : SeCrc irpiJs |J.6, come hitlier to me I
Matt, xxiii. 34 : oTrooreXXa) irpbs iijios 7rpo(firjTas, I send to you
propJiets.
Luke i. 19 : XoKriaai irpcJs o-c, to speak to thee.
1 Cor. xiii. 12 : Trpoo-taTroi' irpbs irpoo-wirov, yace to face. 2 John 12;
3 Jojin 14.
2. After the substantive verb {constructio prcegnans)^ with.
Matt. xiii. 5Q: olxi iraaai irpbs T|(jias ela-i; are they not all with us 9
John i. 1 : 6 Aoyos rjv irpbs TOV 0€bv, THE WORD WAS WITH GoD.
3. Of mental direction, towards, agai7ist.
Luke xxiii. 12 : ev ex^P9 ovres irpbs lavTovs, being in enmity
towards themselves.
1 Thess. V. 14 : naKpoBvixeiTe irpbs irdvras, be long suffering
towards all.
Acts vi. 1 : yoyyva-fibs •n-pbs tovs 'Eppaiovs, a murmuring against
tJie Hebrews,
In Heb. i. 7, simple reference is denoted ; Tphs rohs ayy4\ov5 A ^761, in
regard to tJie angels he eaith.
4. From the general notion of mental direction arises (i) that of
estimation or proportion, in consideration of.
Matt. xix. 8 : irpbs t^v o-KXripoKapSCav v/xwi/, in consideration of
His hardness of your hea/rts.
§ 307.] Ilpos, WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 285
Luke xii. 47 : trphs rh QiKr\]ia. avrov, in consideration of (in
accordance with) his vy'dl.
Kom. viii. 18 : ovk a^ta ... irpbs t^v |iiXXovo-av 8<J|av dnoKoXvipd^vaif
unworthi/ (of thought) ...in consideration of the glory that is to he
revealed.
5. Also (ii) that of intention, in order to, especially with the
Infinitive.
1 Cor. X. 11 : eypdcjiT] Be irpbs vovQi<rlav ^jxSiv, they were written
for our admonition.
Matt. vi. 1 : irpbs to OeaOfjvai avrois, in order to he seen hy them.
ON THE INTERCHANGE OP CERTAIN
PREPOSITIONS.
308. Although no two prepositions are synonymous, they
often approach one another so nearly in meaning as to be
apparently interchangeable. It is sometimes important to
notice the distinction, however subtle; at other times it
appears immaterial to the sense.
Yet it is always safer to look for a real difference in meaning. Com-
pare what has been said on the meaning of eiri in the government of the
three cases. (See also § 289.)
The subject is one which often calls for the most delicate
criticism. It must suffice here to cite some of the principal
instances of real or seeming interchange, with such brief
explanations as may indicate the general principles on which
these cases are to be judged.
309. Ata, with the Genitive, is especially subject to these
alternations of expression.
1. With iK. Rom. iii. 30 : et? 6 Geos, U BiKama-ei Trepirofifjv U
nrioTws, koL aKpo^varlav 8 id tt)s irio-rcws, God is one, who will justify
the circumcision hy faith, and tlce uncircumcision hy means of t]vi
286 INTERCHANGE OF PREPOSITIONS. [§ 309.
(same) faith. In the former case the source of the justification is
more distinctly marked ; in the latter, the means.
See also 2 Pet. iii. 5, &c.
2. With dno. Gal. i. 1 : IlavXoff dTroa-roXos ovk air' dvOpwiruv ovde
8i' dv9p(oirov, Faid an apostle neither (originally com missioned) //'om
meriy nor through (the intervention of) ani/ man; the latter
particular being added to show how absolutely independent his
designation had been even of human instrumentality. The
ordination to the ministry is dirJ) 0eov, but 8i' dvepwirwv. ^
3. With iv. 2 Cor. iii. 11 : ei yap t6 Karapyovfieuov 8id 8<J|t]S
ttoWm fidXXov TO jxeuov Iv 8c'|t], for if that which vanisheth (was) bi/
means o/ (through the intervention of) glori/ (i.e., a glorious display),
much more tliat which ahideth (is) in glory.
Other instances are in Heb, xi. 2 (compare with 39) ; Eom. iv. 11,
V. 10 ; 1 John v. 6. In 1 Cor. i. 21, the distinction is plain : in the
wisdom of God, Le., according to the wise appointment of Him who
left mankind to make the effort, the world by {Sid) its wisdom, i.e., by
the exercise of its reason, knew not God (including both fail' ire and
perversion).
4. In Romans xi. 36, the respective meaning of €k, 8id, eh (the
starting-point, the course, the goal), are finely marked : i^ airov kuI
8i' avTov Kui els avrbv to. Traira, all things are from him as their
author, through him as their controller, to him as their end,
^^ Him first, Him last, Him midst, Him without end.''
See also 2 Cor. i. 16.
Eph. iv. 6, presents a somewhat different antithesis: 6 l-irl
irdvTwv Koi 8vd irdvrwv Ka\ iv irdo-tv,* who is over all and through all
and in all. 1 Cor. xii. 8, 9, has another combination : 8id toO
nv€v|JiaTo$ ... Kttxd rh airb IlveOiJia ...^v t^ avrw XIvcvjiaTi, — "the word
of wisdom is given by tlie Spirit ; the word of knowledge according
to the same Spirit ; faith, in the same Spirit : the Spirit bestowing
the gift, in a degree commensurate with his own might and love,
while He himself becomes the element of the Christian life.
* Omit i^uv according to the best authorities, Lachmann and Tischendort
§ 310.] INTERCHANGE OF PREPOSITIONS. 287
310. 'Ek and duo may sometimes be iriterchanged witlioiit
injury to the sense.
Matt. vii. 16 : firjTi a-vkXeyovaiv dirb aKavGwv aTacfivXrjv ; surely they
do not gather grapes of thorns ?
Luke vi. 44 : ov yap €g dKav9«v (TvWeyova-t o-O/ca, /or they do not
gather figs of thorns.
Heb. vii. 2 : b(KdTT]v dirb Trdvrwv, a tithe of all. Ver. 4 : BeKa.Tr]v
...Ik twv oiKpoOiviW, a tithe of the spoils.
1 Thess. ii. 6 : ovre (t]tovvt€s I^ dvOpcSirwv 86^av, ovre d4>' vjxwv ovt€
dir' dXXwv, nor seeking glory from men, either of you or of others.
See also John xi. 1. In these passaiges it is immaterial whether the
phrase " owf o/ a thing " or "from a thing" be employed; but in the
following there is an evident distinction : —
John vii. 42 : ew rov a-irepfiaros Aaj8i'5 Kol anh Br}d\e4ix, from the seed of
David and from Bethlehem.
2 Cor. iii. 5 : ovx on iKavol iafxev a(p* lavTuv XoyhaaOai ri, &s e| eavrwu,
not that we are sufficient of ourselves to think anything, as from ourselves.
311. 'El/ is occasionally interchanged with a simple Dative.
So Col. ii. 13: vcKpol Iv rots irapairrwiJiao-i, dead in transgressions ;
Eph. ii. 1 : vcKpoi rots irapaorTttfAaa-i. So Matt. vii. 2 : €V <S |xeTp»
fX€TpfiT€, in ivhat measure ye mete; Luke vi. 38 : tw yap avrip
ji^Tpw w perpe^Tc, with the same measure with which ye mete. Again,
Luke iii. 16 : vSan ^aTrriCco, I baptize with water; so Acts i. 5,
xi. 16; but Iv vSan, in water, Matt. iii. 11 ; John i. 26, 33. The
expressions are evidently equivalent, however the act be under-
stood.
The opposites iu and e| may in some cases be even interchanged.
Thus, Matthew (xxii. 37) gives "the great commandment" as, Thou
shalt love the Lord thy God in (iv) all thy heart, &c. ; Mark (xii. 30),
out of (^1) all thy heart ; the love being regarded in one case as abiding
in the heart, in the other as manifested by it. The LXX. (Deut. vi. 5)
has i^.
312. Els may often be interchanged with other forms of
expression.
288 INTERCHANGE OF PREPOSITIONS. [§ 312.
1. With npos. Rom. iii. 25: ds ^vSci^iv ... ver. 26 : irpbs ?v8ct|iv
TTJs biKaiocrvvrjs avrov, in order to the manifestation . . . tending to the
tnanifestation of his righteousness. The former expression refers
to a completed manifestatioiij the latter to one still in progress.
Philemon 5 : " thy love and thy faith," rjv e^eis irphs rhv Kvpiov
'Itjo-ovv kol ds TrdvTas tovs a^Covs, towards the Lord Jesus and unto
all the saints.
This seems nothing more than a variation in expression, although by
some it is explained on the principle of reverted parallelism :
**thy love
and thy faith v
towards the Lord Jesus
and to all the saints,"
i.e., love to the saints, and faith towards the Lord Jesus.
2. With eVi. These instances are. very frequent, and need no
special remark.
Matt. xxiv. 16 : ^cvyiraxTav lirl to, 6'pT], let them jiee up to the
mountains. Mark xiii. 14 : (j^evyercoo-av tU to, 6pTj, let themjlee into
the mountains.*
Rom. iii. 22: hiKaiocvvq GfoO ... els irdvras Koi lirl irdvras tovs
Triarfvovras, tJie righteousness of God unto all and upon all who
believe, i.e., " so communicated to as to abide u2Jon."
3. Interchanged with a simple Dative.
Matt. V. 21, 22 : epoxos th Kp£<r6i ... evoxos eU •rijv ■y^cwav tov Trvpos,
liable to the judgment ... liable to (up to the point of) the Gehenna
of fire.
Rom. xi. 24 : evfKevrpla-drjs els KaXXiA,aiov ... eyKevrpiaOrja-ovTai rg
I8^<ii A-aC^i, thou wast grafted into a good olive tree . . . tliey sliall be
grafted on their own olive.
4. The remarkable phrase, 2 Cor. iv. 17, in which els is com-
bined with /caret in one rhetorical expression, claims a reference
* Lachmann, however, reads 6«r in the former passage ; so also Dr.
Tregelles. The similarity between diflferent prepositions has occasioned
many various readings.
§ 312.] INTERCHANGE OF PREPOSITIONS. 289
here: Ka6' vireppoX^v ds iircppoX^v, E.V., "far more exceeding,"
literally, according to abundance (on a scale of vastness) unto an
abundance (to the realization of that which is immeasurable).
5. The many instances in which els seems to be used for eV, and
vice versd, may be explained by constructio prcegnans. (See § 295, 8.)
The two prepositions are found in the same connection : Matt.
iv. 18, compared with Mark i. 16 : Mark xi. 8, with Matt. xxi. 8 ;
Mark xiii. 16, with Matt. xxiv. 18.
313. Uepi, about (with Genitive), may be substituted for a
more definite preposition, and the converse, e.g. —
1. For hia (with Accusative). John x. 32 : our Lord asks, 8toL
irotov avToiv tpyov Xidd^cre /xe ; for which work of these do ye stone
me 2 The answer is, ver. 33 : irepl KaXov ^p^ov ov Xtda^op-iv a-e aXKa
ircpl pXatr(j>Ti|iias, /or a good work we stone thee not, but for blas-
phemy.
2. For vnep. See under vnep and Trepl, §§ 302, 303.
Verbs signifying prayer, thanksgiving, &c., may be followed by
either indifferently. / pray about you, inpC, "you are the subject
of my prayers; or, / pray for you, inre'p, "j^our welfare is the
object of my prayers."
So in the many passages in respect of the death of Christ, which
theological inquirers will do well to examine. In some, as in
Gal. i. 4, the reading of good MSS. varies between virc'p and irepf.
314. A preposition governing several words in one regimen is
repeated before each of them if a distinction, severally, between
them is to be marked ; but if they are combined in one notion,
the preposition is not repeated.
This rule is analogous to that respecting the repetition of the article
* (§ 232). Yet the article is often repeated where the preposition is not.
Thus with the repeated preposition —
Matt. XXli. 37 : €V oXtj rrj Kapbla (Tov, Koi Iv 0X77 r^ ^I^'^XV ^°^i '^"'* ^^
oAp t5 bLavola (rov, with all thy heart, and with all thy soul, and
290 ' INTEllCHANGE OF PREPOSITIOI^S. [§ »314.
with all thy understanding. Compare Mark xiL 30 (e^, see § 311,
note).
For other instances, see Mark vi. 4 (eV) j Luke xxiv. 27 (cttcJ) ;
1 Thess. i. 5 (tV) ; John xx. 2 {Trp6s), &c.
"With the preposition not repeated —
John iv. 23 : Iv Truevfian Ka\ aXrjBeia^ in spirit and truth, one
state of mind, viewed under a twofold aspect. In like manner we
interpret iii. 5, ^ v8aTos kqi Uvevfiaros, of one spiritual baptism, not
of two things (as the outward and the inward). So Matt. iii. 11.
For other instances, see Luke xxi. 26 {air6) ; PhiL i. 15 {Sid) ; and
very frequently with proper names when closely connected, as Phil. i. 2
Acts vi 9, &c.
"Where the nouns after the preposition are connected by tins
disjunctive or, the preposition is always repeated; as also where
they stand in antithesis. Acts iv. 7 : ev ttolu bwafiei fj kv ttolco ovo/iaTi
€7roiT](raTe tovto v/xfls ; in what name or in luliat power did ye this ?
John vii. 22 : oi;;^ on €K tov Mcovaeas eoriV, aXX' Ik rav narepcov, not
that it is from Moses, but from the fathers. But where the anti-
thesis is formed by two adjectives agreeing with the same noun,
the preposition need not be repeated. 1 Pet. i. 23 : ov< Ik (nropas
a(f)OcipTTJs, (iXXa (f>ddpTov, not of corruptible, but of incorruptible seed.
§ 315.] ADJECTIVES—CONCORD. 291
Chapter IY.— ADJECTIVES.
315. According to the Second Concord, § 178, Adjectives, as
also Participles and Adjective Pronouns, agree with their
Substantives in Gender, Number, and Case.
An adjective may' be an Epithet or a Predicate, the rule
applying in both cases. For the adjective as predicate, see
§§ 178-180.
316. Where the reference of the Adjective is plain, the Sub-
stantive is often omitted. Compare § 199.
Matt. xi. 5 : tv<|>XoI dva^Xfirovo-i kql x^Xol TrepinaTovo-i, Xcirpol Kadar
fH^ovrai Koi K(a^o\ aKovovai, vcKpol iydpovrai Koi irT«xo^ evayyekl^ovTai^
blind (men) are restored to sight and lame (men) walk, leprous
(men) are cleansed and deaf (men) hear, the dead are raised and
destitute (men) have glad tidings brought to them.
Rom. V. 7 : poKis yap virep ZiKaiov ris dnodavfiTai, VTrep yap tov
d7a0ov rdxa ti9 Ka\ ToXpa d-KoQavdv, for scarcely for a righteous (man)
will one die, for on behalf of the good (man) one perchance even
dares to die^
1 Cor. iii. 13 : irvevnaTiKots irvcvuaTiKa a-vyKpivovre^, jyutting
together spirituals with spirituals, i.e., " attaching spiritual woixls
to spiritual things," Alford ; or, " interpreting spiritual things by
spiritual ;" or, " explaining spiritual things to spiritual men,"
Stanley; or, "adapting spiritual language to spiritual matters,"
Beza.
The last example shows how an occasional ambiguity will arise.
Such cases can only be decided by a careful study of the context and
of the words employed. In general, however, the application of tho
adjective will be perfectly plain. See further, Eph. i. 3, &c.
J Among the substantives most frequently omitted after Adjoo-
292 A»DJECTIVES — CONCORD. [§ 316.
lives, beside the words for man, woman, thing, with the three
genders respectively, are the following —
Xftpj hand, as i\ 8e|ia, " the right."
yri, land, as rj oIkovjjl^vtj, the inhabited, "the world." (Luke
ii. 1, &c.)
r}fi€pa, day, as tq ^ttiovctti, " on the morrow."
vha)p, water, as •n-oTripiov ^vxpov, " a cup of cold." (Matt. x. 42 ;
compare James iii. 11.)
Acts xix. 35, is peculiar: tov Aioirerovs, of that which fell from
Zeus : not precisely " an image," probably a great meteoric stone.
For the neuter article, especially, as substantivizing the Adjec-
tive, i.e., making it an abstract noun, see § 199.
Matt. vi. 13: pva-ai f)p.as airo tov iroviipoi), deliver us from evil.
So V. 37, 39 ; John xvii. 15. Some with less appropriateness
render "the Evil one." In 1 John ii. 13, 14, the adjective
(Accusative) is certainly masculine ; in Rom. xii. 9 (Accusative),
certainly neuter ; but as the Genitive and Dative of both genders
are alike, passages like Eph. vi. 16; 2 Thess. iii. 3; 1 John iii 12,
V. 19, can only be determined by the context.
In Matt. xix. 17, the best editors concur in the remarkable reading,
Tt /w€ epwT^s irepi rov ayadov; Why dost tJiou ash me concerning the good?
instead of Why callest thou me good? In Mark x. 18, the received
reading stands without any variation.
317. The number and gender of adjectives, participles, and
pronouns are often determined (according to Synesis, or Rational
Concord) by the sense rather than the form of their substantives.
Compare §§ 175, 179.
Acts iii. 11 : o-w^dpafie iras i Xabs ... 2K0ajipoi, all tlie people ram.
together, greatly wondering.
Acts V. IG : avvTipx€To...rh irXfj0os... <}>^povTcs, k.t.X., tlie multitude
came together, bringing, &c. So Luke xix. 37, &c.
Eph. iv. 17, 18: tA Xoina 80vij TrepiTrarcI ... lo-Korwpivot ... fivrts
§ 317.J ADJECTIVES — CONCORD. 293
dirqXXoTpiwu^vot, the rest of the Gentiles walk . . . darkened . . . heinc/
estranged.
Luke ii. 13 : 7r\rj0os o-rpaTtds ovpavlov, aivovvrwv top Qeov Kai
Xe-ydvTwv, a multitude of a heavenly host, praising God and saying.
Kev. xi. 15 : iyivovro <}>«val fieyaXai ... X^^ovTcs,* the7'e were great
voices, saying.
In Matt. xxL 42, iraph. Kvplov eyepero avrr] Koi eari Qavnaari], this
(thing) was from the Lord, and it is wonderful, the feminine gender is
to be explained by the Hebrew idiom. That language, having no
neuter, employs the feminine for abstract notions. See Ps. cxviii. 23
(LXX., cxvii.)
For Synesis with Pronouns, see §§ 335, 345.
318. An Adjective referring to two or more substantives, if an
epithet, commonly agrees with the nearest, or is repeated before
each ; if a predicate, is properly in the plural number, and follows
the rule, § 179.
Luke X. 1 : ets irao-av rrokiv koI tottov, into every city and place
(diflferent genders, agreeing with nearest).
James i. 17 : *ira<ra doais dya6r) koL irav daprjiia reXeiov, every good
and perfect gift. So Mark xiii. 1 ; Acts iv. 7 (different genders,
repeated).
Matt. ix. 35 : Qepair^voiv irdo-civ vocrov koX irao-av naXaKiau, healing
every (kind of) disease, and every (kind of) i7}firmity (same gender,
repeated).
Matt. iv. 24 : irotKiXais voaois KaX ^aaduoLs, with divers dis'Mses
and torments (same gender, not repeated).
When two adjectives stand as epithets to one substantive, a con-
junction generally stands between them. Thus, for "many other,"
the Greeks say, "many and other." This rule, however, is not inva-
riable in the New Testament.
John XX. 30 : iroKKb. ixkv ovv Ka\ &\\a arifiela, many other miracles therefore.
Acts XXV. 7 : iroXXa Ka\ ^apea otTiw/xara, many heavy charges.
See also Luke iil 18 ; Titus i. 10 ; and on the contrary. Acts xv. 35.
* Tischendorf, Lachmann.
294 ADJECTIVES — CONCORD. [§ 319.
319. An Adjective is often employed in Greek where the
English idiom requires an Adverb.
Mark iv. 28 : avTop-drr] fj yrj Kapno^opd, the earth yields fruit
spontaneously.
liuke 11. 2 : avrrj T] aTToypacj)^ irpt&Tn eyevero, k.t.X., this enrolment
was first made* (compare John xx. 4).
For the adverbial use of adjectiv^e forms, see § 399.
THE DEGREES OP COMPARISON.
The Comparative.
320. An Adjective in the Comparative degree usually
takes the object of comparison in the Genitive case. In
English the conjunction than is to be supplied.
See § 2o3, with observations and examples.
The object, as expressed by the Genitive, sometimes corre-
sponds, not with the precise subject of the comparison, but with
tlie general notion of the sentence.
Matt. V. 20 : irXctov t«v YpanjiaTlwy /eat #api<rai(DV (your righteous-
ness), lit., more than the Scribes and Pharisees.
John V. 36 : iyoa 8e €x<o Tr)v fiaprvpiau p.eit(d tov 'Iwavvov, tJie
witness which I have is greater than John.
1 Cor. i. 25 : to papov rod Qeov <ro<J>»T€pov t«v dvflpwirwv tort, /c.r.X.,
the foolishness of God is wiser tJian men, &c.
The beginner must beware of translating these genitives as possessives
governed by an understood object of the comparative: "than John's
(testimony)," "than men's (wisdom)," &c. This the construction
* Other translations have been proposed to escape the chronological diffi-
culty. Thus, the enrolment first took effect, when, &c., it having been
originated some years before ; or the enrolment tocM made before Quiriniua
was governor (compare irpSsrSs nov, John i. 15). But Dr. Zumpt has i*ecently
shown the great probability of Quirinius having been governor of Syria at
this early date, as well as a.d. 6, on the deposition of Archelaus. (See
Smith's "Dictionary of the Bible," Art. "Cyrenius").
320.] ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. 295
will not admit. The form of expressioa is one of the utmost generality :
"God's 'foolishness' is wiser," not only than men's wisdom, but "than
men " themselves, with all that they are or can do. So of the other
321. The comparative particle 7, than^ may also be employed ;
the object then being in the same case with the subject of com-
parison.
Luke ix. 13 : ovk daXu rjfuv irXetov ^ neure aproi koI IxBves Svo, we
Jmve no more than five loaves and two fishes.
1 Cor. xiv. 5 : jicC^wv Se 6 7rpo(f)i]Tevcov '!\ 6 \aka>v yXoicraaiS) greater
is he who prophesies than he who speaks with tongues.
This particle is specially employed (1) after the comparative
adverb fjLoXXov, more.
Acts iv. 19 : vfxcov oKoveiv jioXXov i^ tov Geov, to hear you rather
than God.
It may be hardly necessary to remind the learner that 0€oS is in the
Genitive, not because it is the object of comparison, but because coupled
by ^ with ujuwy. Gen. after aKov^iv, by § 249, a.
So Matt, xviii. 13; John xii. 43 (^jrep), &c. MSXAoj/ ^ may connect
two adjectives, as 2 Tim. iii. 4, where a Greek classical idiom, of which
there is no instance in the New Testament, would have admitted two
comparatives.
(2) When the object of comparison is a clause.
Rom. xiii. 1 1 : lY-ytiTcpov . . . i^ 8t€ eirwrrcvcrajjicv, nearer (our sal-
vation) than when we believed.
(3) When a Comparative governs, as an adjective, words other
than its object.
Matt. X. 15 : dvcKTOTCpov earat yfj 2o86fxa)v ^ iro'Xei ^KeCvrj, it shall
be more tolerable for the land 0/ Sodom (Dative, by § 279) than for
that city.
After irXeiwv, TrXeZoi/, m^ore, and eXdTTwv, eXuTTov, less, the particle
may be omitted before numerals.
* Winer, § xxxv. 5.
296 ADJECTIVES— COMPARISON. [^321.
Acts xxiv. 11 : ou irXeCovs elcri fxoi iqix^pat ScKaSiio, ktX, lit., there
are to me no more days (than) twelve. So iv. 22, xxiii. 13.
Matt. xxvi. 53 : irXcCovs SwScKa Xrycwvas, more than twelve legions.
In some of these passages the received text inserts ^.
A peculiar comparative is occasionally made by (ioXXov after the
positive.
Mark ix. 42 : kixXov ianv avrw (jloIXXov, k.t.X., it is better /or him.
Acts XX. 35 : iiaKdpuJv eVrt ndXXov dibouai <\ Xafx^dveiVj it is more
blessed to give than to receive.
Sometimes ^akXov is omitted.
Matt, xviii. 8, 9 : koXcJv <toi iariv ela-eXdelv ... i^ ... ^Xr]$?}vai, it is
better for thee to enter ... than ...to be cast, lit., "it is good ... rather
than." So Mark ix. 43-47. Compare also Luke xviiL 14
(rec, but the reading is probably Trap' eKeivov ; § 306, y, 3).
Hence also a comparative notion may be expressed by ^ after a
noun or verb.
Luke XV. 7 : X^^PO- ^o'tol ... enl evl ... i) eVt evvevfjKOvra Ivvea, there
shall be joy . . . over one . . . (rather) than over ninety and nine.
Luke xvii. 2 : X-uo-iTeXet) avrta ...'^ Iva a-KavbaXia-Tj, lit., it is pro-
fitable for him ... (rather) than that he should offend.
1 Cor. xiv. 19 : QiXa irevre Xoyovs But tov voos fiov XaXrjaai ... f[
fxvpiovs Xoyovs iv yXtacro-j], I would (rather) speak five words with my
understanding, than ten thousand words in a tongue.
322. For the Comparative as strengthened by the prepositions
vTTtp and napd, see §§ 303, 306.
Other emphatic modes of comparison are specified, § 47.
323. A Comparative is often found without any expressed
object of compaiison.
a. The object may be supplied by the context, as Acts xviii. 2o :
aKpip^oTTcpov avTa e^eBfVTo t^v tov Beov oHov. they expounded to htm
the way of God more perfectly^ i.e., than he had known before
§ 323.] ADJECTIVES — CX)MPARISON. 297
(ver. 25). Compare Jolin xix. 11 ; Rom. xv. 15 ; 1 Cor. xii. 31 ;
Phil. ii. 28 ; Heb. ii. 1, &c. So in correlative expressions,
Rom. ix. 12 ; Heb. i. 4.
h. The Comparative may be a familiar phrase, as ol irXeCovcs, the
majority, Acts xix. 32 ; 1 Cor. xv. 6 ; 2 Cor. ii. G (not simply
"many,"asE.Y.), &c.
c. The object is to be supplied mentally, according to the
general sense of the passage.*
Matt, xviii. 1 : n's apa \i.iitfiiv iariv ep rfj ^acriXela Ta>v ovpavav ; who
then is greater (than the rest) in the kingdom of heaven ?
So Mark ix. 34; Luke ix. 46, xxii. 24. In Matt. xi. 1], & fxiKpSrepos
may be rendered, he that is less than all others, i.e., "he that is least,"
as E.V., or he that w less than John (in fame and outward honour),
i.e., Christ himself ; the sentiment being that of 'John i. IS.f
The following examples further illustrate this usage of th€
comparative : —
John xiii. 27 : that thou doest do more quicTdy, rdxiov, ^.€., than
you seem disposed to do.
Acts xvii. 21 : ^0 tell or to hear some newer thing, n Kaivorepov,
than the last things that they had heard, "the later news."
Acts xvii. 22 : 2/e we^ of Athens, I perceive that in all things ye
are more addicted to worship, 8ewri8aifjiov€<rT^ovs, i.e., than heathen
nations generally (not merely, like them, worshipping recognised
deities, but even the " unknown.") :|:
Acts xxiv. 22 : the mailers pertaining to the way (the Christian
doctrine) more accurately, aKpip^o-rcpov, than to need detailed
information.
Acts XXV. 10'. to the Jews I have done no wrong, as also thou
* See Winer, § 35, 4.
+ This latter is the interpretation of many of the JFathei-s, but is disal-
lowed by most modern critics. (See Alford's note.)
j "Too superstitious," therefore, misses the true meaning both of the
word and the grammatical form.
298 ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. [§ 323.
hiowest better, koXXiov, than thou choosest to confess. Alford
compares our current phrase, to know better. So 2 Tim. i 18,
better even than I do.
Acts xxvii. 13 : they steered closer by Crete, a<r<rov TrapeXeyovro
Ti^v Kp^Tt]Uj i.e., than they had done before ; ver. 8.
On Eph. iv. 9, see § 259.
Phil, i. 12: rather, jidXXov, /or the furtherance of the Gospel
than for its hindrance as we feared.
1 Tim. iii. 14 : hoping to come unto thee more quickly, rdxiov,
than to make such injunctions needful. Compai'e Heb. xiii. 19, 23.
2 Tim. i. 17 : he sought me out more diligently, <nrov8ai<JT6pov,
than if I had not been in captivity.
2 Pet. i. 19 : koi exopev p€paidT€pov rou TrpotfyrjriKop \6yov, lit.,
and we have more sure tlie prophetic word, i.e., we hold that word
with a surer confidence even than before, inasmuch as we received
a confirmation of its testimony " upon the holy mount."
2 Pet. ii. 11 : angels which are greater in power a/ad might,
lAc'toves, either greater than other angels,* as the archangel, Jude 9,
or greater than these presumptuous, self-willed men.t
From the above explanations it will be seen that the Comparative in
such cases is not to be explained as "put for the Superlative," or as
expressiug the notions of "too" or "very," but retains its true and
proper force.
Th^ Sup>erlative.
324. The Superlative denotes the highest quality of any kind,
and may be u&ed when the objects of comparison are not explicitly
intimated.
2 Pet. i. 4 : ra iii-yio-ra /cat rt/zta enayye'kfxaTa, the greatest and
precious i^romises, or as E.Y. happily, "exceeding great and
j)recious."
In Luke i. 3, we read KpuTto-Tc SfocpiXe, most excellent T/i^eophUtis ;
» Huther.
t Winer, Alford, &c.
§ 324.] ADJECTIVES — THE SUPERLATIVE. 299
but in Acts xxiii. 26, xxiv. 3, the same title is applied to Felix,
and in xxvi. 25, to Festus. It was simply a designation of rank.
325. For tlie Superlative followed by a partitive Genitive, see
§ 262. An emphatic Superlative is made by the addition of
■n-dvTwv, Mark xii. 28, the first eommandment of all (not naaoiv, as
received text).
The particle as (otl), with a Superlative, means " in as great a
degree as possible." Acts xvii. 15: lua «s rdxtorra eXOcoai irpoi ai/rbv,
tJiat tliey would come to him as speedily as possible.
326. The Superlative TrpZros, fi/rst, may be used where but two
things are compared.
Acts i. 1 : Tov [xeu irpwTov Xoyoi' iiroirjadfirjv, the first (former)
treatise I made. So 1 Cor. xiv. 30 j * Heb. x. 0,
So the expression 'irp«T<Js pov, before me, John i, 15, 30; iTpSno%
vfAwv, before you, xv. 18. The Genitive is analogous to the
Genitive after the Comparative. On Luke ii. 2, see note^ § 319.
327. In Hebrew there are two principal ways of expressing
the Superlative; — (i.) by the use of the preposition in, among, after
the simple adjective, as Prov. xxv. 30, a lion, strong among beasts,
i.e., the strongest of beasts ; t (ii.) by the repetition of an adjective
or noun in the Genitive relation, as in the common appellation of
the holiest part of the Temple, the Iwly of h&lies, and Gen. ix. 25,
a servant of servants, i.e., utterly enslaved.;}:
The New Testament has instances of both these idioms, (i.)
Luke i. 42 : cvXo^tijic'vt] o-v iv ywaC^iv, blessed art tJiou am/yng women,
* Bat perhaps here tlie mental comparison might be, not simply with the
second speaker, but with the rest of the assembly.
t Compare the use of a Hebrew i)reposition to give the force of the
comparative.
X There is yet a third method, i.e., the emphatic use of the adjective with
the article, as Gen. ix. 24, his son, the young, i.e., his youngest. But perhai»8
thtre iss no example of this in the New Testament, though see liuke x. 4ii.
300 ADJECTIVES — THE SUPERLATIVE. [^ 327.
i.e.f most blessed, (ii.) Heb. ix. 3 : Hyia a-yCwv, the holy of holies.
Compare 1 Tim. vi. 15; Rev. xix. 16.
Neither of these constructions is confined to the Hebrew, although
their occurrence in the New Testament may fairly be assigned to Hebrew
influence. Other so-called Hebraisms must be rejected.* Thus, Acts
▼ii 20, acrrelos r^ 0e^, must not be rendered, as in E.V., "exceeding
fair," but beautiful before God, in his eyes. Much less must the Divine
name be taken as giving a simple superlative force in such passages as
Luke i. 15 > 2 Cor. i. 12; CoL ii. 19; Rev. xv. 2, &c.
. NUMERALS.
328. The Cardinal efy, besides its ordinary use, is employed in
the following ways.
i. As an indefinite pronoun,t nearly equal to tls.
Matt. viii. 19 : ih ypafifiuTevs eiTrev avra, a scribe said unto him.
Matt. xxvi. 69 : TrpoarjXdeu avT^ |iia naidlaKT], there came to him a
maidservant.
John vi. 9 : ian iraibapiov hf &Sc, there is a lad here.
So Matt. x\'iii. 24, xix. 16; Mark x. 17, xii. 42; Rev. viii. 13, &c.
Often with a Genitive following, as Matt. xvi. 14 ; Mark v. 22. Some-
times with ^K, as Matt. xxii. 35, xxvii. 48. Occasionally, efs ris combined,
as Luke xxii. 50.
ii. For the correlatives, one ... the other ^ eU is sometimes
employed in both clauses.
Matt. XX. 21 ; Mark x. 37 : ets «< St^tcoi/ aov^ koI cts i^ fvcavvixav
vovj one on thy right hand, and the other on thy left.
John XX. 12; 1 Cor. iv. 6; Gral. iv. 22; 1 Thess. v. 11. But «AXo5,
Jfrcpos are more frequently used in the second clause, as Matt, vi 24 ;
Rev. xviL 10.
* See Winer and others.
t The indefinite article in the European languages is but a form of the
numeral " one." We say " a or an ;" we should rather say " an or a," the
longer being the original form, and an = Scottish ane=one. So French, u»;
German, em, &c.
§ 328.] ADJECTIVES — THE NUMERALS. 301
iii. For not one (ovbeis, ftJ^Sfts), the New Testament writers,
following the Hebrew idiom, sometimes Bay one . . . not, combining
the negative with the predicate.
Matt. X. 29 : ^v e| avroiv ov neaeirai, -One of them shall not fall,
i.e., not one of them shall fall. So ch. v. 18 ; Luke xii. 6.
But the adjective iras, every, is still more frequently employed
in such expressions. Thus, ^^ everything is not..." means
"nothing is."
Luke i 37 : ovk ddwarrjo-ei napa rS Qeat irav prjfia, everything is
not-impossible with God, i.e., nothing is impossible.
So Matt. xxiv. 22 ; Mark xiii. 20 ; John iii. 15, 16, vi. 39, xii. 46 :
Rom. iii. 20 ; 1 Cor. i. 29 ; Gal. ii. 16 ; 1 John ii. 21 ; Rev. xviii. 22.
*' Forget not all his benefits^' (Ps. ciii. 2), of course means "forget not
any." But when ov is connected with iras, the meaning is simply not
all. So Matt. vii. 21, ov iras \eyuv ... ciaeKevaeTat, not every one ... shall
enter. Had the reading been tras \4yuv . . . ovk elaeKevaerai, it would have
meant "no one ... shaU enter." (See Matt. xix. 11; 1 Cor. xv. 39;
Rom. X. 16 : ov irdyres inrfjKovcrav, not all obeyed. irdvTes ovx inr-nKOvaau
would have been, " they all disobeyed. "
iv. Instead of the ordinal rr/wrof; the cardinal els is used in the
designation of the first day of the week (again a Hebraism).
Matt, xxviii. 1 : els \i-Cav orappdiTwv, lit., on the day one of the week.
So Mark xvi. 2 (but ver. 9, -irpcoTrj) ; Luke xxiv. 1 ; John xx. 1, 19 ;
Acts XX. 7 ; 1 Cor. xvi. 2. In Titus iii. 10 ; Rev. vi. 1, 3, ix. 12, we
find one and the second as correlatives.
329. The particles a»s, wo-ci, about, &c., are used with numerals
adverbially, i.e., without affecting the case. Matt. xiv. 21 ; Mark
v. 13; Rom. iv. 19, &c. So with cTrdv«, above, which in other
connexions is followed by a Genitive.
1 Cor. XV. 6 : a>(f)Or} eirdvw irevraKoo-fois d8€X<j>ois, he was seen by
above five hundred brethren. So Mark xiv. 5 (where the Genitive
is that of price).
330. .The names of measures and coins may be omitted after
numeral designations. Acts xix. 19 : dpYvpi'ov jivpidSn* "r^vr* ^five
302 ADJECTIVES — THE NUMERALS. [§ 330.
myriads), jifty thousands of silver j i.e., dpax^icov — densirn. Else-
where the plural dpyOpia (pieces of silver) is used, as Matt.
xxvi. 16, &c.
331. The Greeks used the phrase " himself third" for " he and
two others," avrbs rpCros. So avrbs TeTapros, he and three others,
&c. Sometimes avros was omitted. This idiom occura once in the
New Testament. 2 Pet. ii. 5 : S-ySoov Nwc ... ecjivXa^e, he preserved
Foah, and seven others.
The Distributive Numerals have been sufficiently explained, § 52.
§ 332.] PRONOUNS PERSONAL. 303
Chapter Y.— PRONOUNS.
The Personal Pronouns.
332. The rules respecting tlie cases of nouns, and their
employment with prepositions, for the most part apply to the
personal and other substantive Pronouns also.
For the oblique cases of the third personal pronoun, in both
numbers and all genders, forms of the adjective pronoun aiT6s are
employed.
For the other uses of avrSs, see § 335.
The Nominative of the personal pronoun, when the
subject of a verb, is omitted, except where emphasis is
required. (See § 169.)
333. The Genitive is very frequently used in a possessive
sense ; the adjective possessive pronoun being comparatively
rare. (See § 255.)
Matt. vi. 9, 10 : IIciTCp i^[i,«v 6 iv rots ovpapois, ayiaa-6f}Tai rh 6vo^&
orov, eXOeTO) r\ pa<rtXeia <rov, k.t.X., Our Father which art in heaven,
hallowed be thy name, &c.
Matt. vii. 3 : ri 5e ^Xerreis to Kdp(f>os to iv rto 6(})da\fjLa tov d8eX<|>o€
o-ov (personal pronoun), ttjv de iv t^ o-^ 6<})0aX|Aw (adjective pos-
sessive) boKov ov Karavoels \ and why seest thou the mote in the eye of
thy brother, but discernest not the beam in thine own eye ?
The only possessive for the third person in the New Testament
is the Genitive of a^rds.
Conversely, an objective genitive may be expressed by the
possessive adjective pronoun.
304 PRONOUNS PERSONAL. [§ 333.
Luke xxii. 19 ; 1 Cor. xi. 25 : tovto ttou'ltc els ri\v k\ir\v dvd|j.in](riv,
this do for my remembrance, i.e., " for remembrance of me." So
Rom. xi. 31, ^' through mercy shown to you ;"*' xv. 4 ; 1 Cor. xv. 31,
"Jy my glorying in you;'' xvi. 17, " the lack of you."
John XV. 9 : \i.dva.Te Iv t^ d-ydirg t^ k^% abide in my love, has
sometimes been taken in a similar sense ; but it seems better to
take the pronoun there as a true possessive. (Compare § 269.)
In one striking passage, Eph. iii. 18, there seems the omission
of a genitive pronoun, '''-what is the breadth f &c., i.e., "of the
love of Christ."*
334. Occasionally in a lengthened sentence, a seemingly
redundant personal pronoun is found.
Matt. viii. 1 : Kara^dvTt Se airw arro tov opovs fjKoXovdrja-au ovry
oxXoi noXkoij and when he had come down from the mountain, great
multitudes followed him.
Acts vii. 21 ; iKredevra Be avrhv dveiXero avrhv r) dvyarqp ^apad),
cmd when he was cast out, the daughter of Pharaoh took him up.
Where the object of a verb is expressed in the nominative absolutely,
for the sake of emphasis, its place in the sentence is supplied by a pro-
noun. (See § 242.)
Kev. lii. 12 : 6 vikuv rroi'fjcrco avrov arvKov, He tlmt overcometh, I will
make him a pillar.
335. As avrds properly means very, self, it is used in apposition
with nouns of both numbers and of all cases and gendei-s, as well
as with the personal pronouns of the first and second persons.
When employed in the nominative for the third person, it is
always emphatic, t i.e., not He simply, but He himself
Kom. vii. 25 : a<nhs ky<a ... 8ov\eva>, I myself serve.
John iv. 42 : ainoX yap diajKoafxev, for we ourselves have Jiea/rd.
1 Thess. iv. 9 : airrol yap tijwis BeobibaKToi e<TT€, for ye yourselves
are taught by God.
* See Ellicott t See Winer.
S 335.] PRONOUNS — avTos. 305
(1) The reflexive pronoun of the third person may be used for
that of the other pei-sons where no ambiguity would be likely to
occur.
a. Singular (never for ifiavrov).
John xviii. 34 : dcf)' lavrov crv tovto Xeyeis j say est thou this of
thyself?
So in some other passages where the reading varies ; as in quotations
of Lev. xix. 18 (Matt. xix. 19 ; Mark xii. 31 ; Luke x. 27 ; Bom. xiii. 9).
The approved reading, however, is aeavrSv.
b. Plural (more frequently).
2 Cor. iii. 1 : apxaneBa naXiv eavrovs crvvKXTaveiv ', are we beginning
again to commend ourselves ?
2 Cor. xiii. 5 : lavrovs Treipa^ere . . . lavrovs doKifid^ere, try your-
selves . . . test yourselves.
So in the frequent phrase irpoo-^erc (or ^Xenere) eavrois, take Jieed
to yourselves. Mark xiii. 9 ; Luke xii. 1, xvii. 3, xxi. 34 ; Acts
V. 35; 2 John 8. Also Eph. v. 19; Jamesii. 4: one with another.
For the use of avros with the Article, see § 222.
(2) In respect of gender and number, avros often follows the rule
of rational concord (synesis). (See § 317, and for a similar usage
with the relative pronoun, compare § 345.)
a. Gender.
Matt, xxviii. 19 : fiaBrjTevaaTe iravra ra ?0vtj, ^aTrri^ovres avrovs,
disciple all the nations, baptizing them.
Col. ii. 15 : aTreKbvo-dfxevos ras apxas kol rds ^ovcias ... dpiafi^evaas
avTovs, stripping away from himself the principalities and the
powers ... triumphing over them.
Mark v. 41 : Kparrjo-as TTJs xftpos Tov iraiSiov, Xeyei avT'g, taking the
cJdld by the hand, he saith unto her.
b. Number.
Matt. i. 21 : adxrei tov \ahv avrov dnb rav dfjiapTicov avrctv, lie shall
save his people from their sins.
306 PRONOUNS— a^ros. [§ 335.
3 John 9 : eypay^d ti ttj IkkXtjo-icj, dXX* 6 (f>t\o7rpa>Teva>v airwv
AioTfie(f)Tjs, k.tX, I wrote somewhat to the church, hut Diotrephes
who loves pre-eminence over them.
So in reference to oxkos, nX^BoSf &c.
(3) This pronoun may also refer to a substantive implied in some
previous word or phrase.
Matt. xix. 13 : ol 8e fiaBrjrai eTreTlfxija-av avTOts, hut the disciples
rebuked them, i.e., those that brought the children; Mark x. 13.
John viii. 44 : -^evcTTTji eo-rl koi 6 Trarfjp avTov, he is a liar and
the father of it, i.e., of lying.
So Matt. iv. 23; Acts viii. 5; 2 Cor. v. 19, "to them," i.e., the
inhabitants of the world. Rom. ii. 26, the concrete imphed in the
abstract, aKpo^varla ; Eph. v. 12, "by those who walk in the darkness,"
or (Ellicott) "the children of disobedience," ver. 6.
Possessive Pronouns.
336. On the possessive use of the Genitive of Personal
Pronouns, and the employment of the Possessives as equivalent to
the objective genitive, see § 333. For the Article with posses-
sive pronouns, see § 223.
The various use of the Possessives as Adjectives, epithetic and
predicative, may be exemplified by the following phrases: —
John V. 30 : f} Kplais tj i\>-^ BiKaia iariv, mi/ judgment is just.
Rom. X. 1 : ^ evSoKia TTjs i\t.i\9 Kapdias, the desire (goodwill) of my
heart.
Phil. iii. 9 : p.r\ txiav \.y.r\y 8iKaioa-vvT]v t^v eK vopov, not Jiaving a
righteousness of my own, viz., tJiatfrom law.
John xvii. 10 : tcL I|jioL Trdvra ord eWt, Ka\ tcI <rcL IjiA, all mine are
thine, and thine are mine.
The possessive adjective pronoun appears to have a greater emphasis
than the genitive of the personal. Thus (1 John ii. 2), "he is t/ie pro-
pitiation for our sins,^^ hf^v, a general declaration; but in the next clause
this is thrown into strong antithesis — not for ours alone, but, &c. ;
and here, accordingly, the adjective pronoun is employed, ov irtpi ruy
TJfltT^puV St p4voif.
§ 336.] PRONOUNS — POSSESSIVE. 307
The genitive of a noun is sometimes found in apposition with
the genitive notion in the possessive pronoun.
1 Cor. xvi. 21 : T^ Ififj ^eipl IlavXov, by my hand (that is) of Tney
Paul. Col. iv. 18; 2 Thess. iii. 17.
337. For a possessive pronoun, entirely unemphatic, the
Article is often employed (see § 215), and on the other hand an
emphatic possessive is expressed by the Adjective iStoy, own.
John i. 42 : evpicrKei ovtos Trpcoros top dbeXcfiov tov tSiov 2i/ia)i/a, this
man Jlndeth first his own brother Simon.
See also Matt. ix. 1, xxv. 15 ; Luke vi. 44 ; John iv. 44, v. 18: ''said
that God was his own father ;'^ Acts xx. 28; Gal. vi. 9 : " its own season f^
also 1 Tim. ii. 6; Titus i. 3; 2 Pet. i. 20, and many other passages.*
Demonstrative Pronouns.
338. The demonstratives ovro?, avrr), tovto, this (the nearer,
connected with the second person), and eKelvos, eKeivrj, sKelvo, that
(the more remote, connected with the third person), with the
correlatives (see § 62) j obey the laws of adjective concord).
For the use of the demonstratives with the article, see § 220. *Outos
generally precedes its substantive, iKeluos follows ; but to this rule there
are many exceptions.
Luke xviii. 14 : Kari^rj ovtos 8e8iKai(Ofxevos els tov oIkov outov t)
keivos, this man (the latter) went down justified to his house rather
than that (the former).
339. The demonstrative obe, this {" this, here," connected with
the first person), is found only Luke x. 39 ; James iv. 13 ; and in
the phrase rdSc Xeyci, thus (these things) saith. Acts xxi. 11, and
the beginnings of the letters to the seven churches; Rev. ii., iii.
"OSe marks a closer relation than ovtos. In Greek narrative generally,
eA€|e ravra is, he said this that precedes; eAc|€ raSe, he said this that
follows.
* Wilier notes the following passages as mthout emphasis (but query ?) :
Matt. xxii. o, xxv. 14 j Tifcus ii. 9; John i. 42; Eph. iv. 22; Titus ii. 5;
1 Pet. iii. I, 5.
y08 PRONOUNS — DEMONSTRATIVE. [§ 3G9.
There are a few other passages in which the received text has o5e, but
where the best editors adopt other readings, as Acts xv. 23; 2 Cor.
xii. 19 ; Luke xvi. 25, where we should read, he is comforted Jiere.
340. In some passages, ovtos seems to refer to the remoter
subject.
Acts viii. 26 : avrrj ecrrii/ eprjuos, it, tlie road, not the dt^ of
Graza, is desert.
2 John 7 : o^tos eorti/ 6 irXdvo^ Koi 6 dvTLxptcrTos, this is the deceiver
and the antichrist, i.e., he who bears the character described at the
commencement of the verse.
So €K€ivos may refer to the nearer.
John vii. 45 : koL eiTrov avrols Ik€ivoi, and they (the chief priests
and Pharisees just mentioned) said to them, the officers spoken of
before.
'E/cfTi'os is employed as an emphatic demonstrative, and sometimes on
that account seems applied to the nearer antecedent. Thus 2 Cor.
viii. 9 : " Fe hnow the grace of the Lord Jesus Christ, that for your sakes
he became poor, rich as he was, t/uit ye, through His (iKeivov) poverty might
he enriched.''^ So Titus iii. 7. Compare Acts iii. 13.
2 Tim. ii. 26 is difficult : i^wyfynfiivoL in' ai/rov, els rb iKctyov OeK-qfia.
The two pronouns can hardly refer to the same subject (compare
iii. 9) ; and it seems best to connect the clause beginning with ds with
h.vavi]>^w(Tiv, taking i^uypiqixfvoi vtt' avrov as parenthetical. Ellicott : ^^and
that they may return to soberness out of the snare of the devil {though
holden captive by him) to do His will, " i. e. , God's. For other explana-
tions, see Alford, Ellicott, &c.
341. A Demonstrative often repeats the notion already
expressed by a substantive. The pronoun thus occasionally seems
redundant, but perhaps was always intended to convey some
additional emphasis.
Matt. xiii. 20-23 : 6 Se ... (nrapeis ... ovtos ianv, that which was
Bown . . . this is he, <fec.
So X. 22, xiii. 38, xv. 11, xxvi. 23; John vi 46 j John i. 18, 33 {Uuvos),
V. 11, X. 1, &c.
1 Cor. vi. 4, Toirovs; Rom. vii. 10 : compare Acts i. 22; 1 Cor, v. 5;
2 Cor. xii. 2.
§ 341.] PRONOUNS — ^DEMONSTRATIVE. 309
The Demonstrative itself may be repeated in a sentence. John vi. 42 :
ovx oZtSs fOTTiv 'IrjcTOus 6 vihs 'lu(T'f]<p ... irws odu heyei ovros ; K.r.X., Is not
this Jesus, the son of Joseph, how then sayeth this man ? &c. (See also
Acts vii. 35-38.)
342. The Neuter Demonstrative sometimes stands as equiva-
lent to a clause.
Acts xxiv. 14 : o/ioXoyai be TovTo crot, 8ti, k.t.X., but this I confess
to thee, that, &,c.
So xxvi. 16 ; Eph. iv. 17, &c.
The neuter plural may be employed for a single object of
thought.
John XV. 17 : ravra evreWofiai vfiiu, tva d-yairaTc dXXTJXovs, this I
command you, that ye love one another.
3 John 4 : fiei^orepav tovtwv ovk e^o) x°P«'') ^ more surpassing joy
than this I have not. Compare 1 Cor. vi. 11 : Ka\ Tavrd rti/es ^re,
and such were some of you, or, " such were you in some degree."
(See § 35^, iii.)
In Heb. xi. 12, the phrase Koi ravra, K.r.X., must be rendered, and
that, too, when he was as good as dead. Compare 1 Cor. vi. 8, received
text.
In Rom. xiii. 11 ; 1 Cor. vi. 6 ; Phil. i. 28 ; 3 John, 5 (Lachmann and
Tischendorf), Ka\ rovro is similarly resumptive.
On Eph. ii. 8, rp yap x^P'''"^ ^f^"^^ a^atacnievot. ^m iricrrecas, Ka\ rovro ovk
€| ufiav, K.T.A., see § 403, d.
For the ellipsis of the Demonstrative before the Relative, see § 347.
The Relative Pronoun.
343. The Relative Pronoun agrees with its Antecedent
in gender, number, and person. This rule is termed the
Third Concord.
The clause in which the Relative stands is called the Relative Clause,
and is Adjectival (see § 190), as qualifying the Antecedent.
The Case of the Relative is determined by the structure of its
own clausa
310 PRONOUNS — RELATIVE. [§ 343.
Matt. 11. 9 : 6 darqp 8v eidov iv ttj dvarok^ irpoTJyev avTovSy the star
which they had seen in the East, guided them forward.
Rom. ii. 6 : tov eeoO, 8s airobaxrui icr.X., of God, who wUl recom-
pense, &c.
344. A clause, or clauses, may form a neuter antecedent to tlie
Relative. So with the Demonstrative (see § 342).
Acts. xi. 29, 30 : apta-av eKaaros avT&v ds SiaKovCav ir^p.^ai rois Karoi-
Kovo-iv €v T^ lovSaCc;, d86X<f>ots' 8 koi irroiTjarav, they determinedy each of
them, to send to the brethren dwelling in Jerusalem fw their relief ;
which they also did.
See also Gal. ii. 10; Col. i 29; Heb. v. 11, &c. ; and with plural
relative, Acts xxiv. 18 [iv oh), xxvi. 12 ; Col. iL 22.
345. SynesiSf or rational concord, is very frequent with the
Eelative. (See § 317.)
a. Gender.
Acts XV. 17 : navra toL IOkij I<}>* ovs, /c.t.X., all the Gentiles, upon
whom, &c. So xxvi. 17 ; Gal. iv. 19 ; 2 John 1; 2 Pet. iii. 16.
h. Number.
Phil, ii, 15 : yevia^ a-Ko\ias koI biearrpapiifvrjs, Iv ots (ftaiveaOe, k.t.X.,
of a crooked and perverted generation, among wJwm ye appear, kc.
A plural may be implied in a singular phrase; hence sometimes a
plural relative with a singular antecedent. Acts xv. 36 : Karek iraaay
ir6\iy, iv oTs, through every city, in which {cities). So 2 Peter iii. 1.
On the contrary, a singular may be impHed in a plural phrase. Acts
xxiv. 11 : Tififpai ScKaUo itxp' ^s, twelve days from tlmt on which ; Phil,
iii 20: olpayois ... i^ ol. But here i^ ov may be adverbially taken,
whence.
In John i 42, 8 agrees with 6yona, name, impHed.
346. The Relative is often drawn, or " attracted,*' out of
its proper gender or case by some other word.
Attraction is of two kinds.
a. Attraction of the Relative to the FrediccUe, — The Relative
§ 346.] PRONOUNS RELATIVE. 311
•Subject may take the gender of its own Predicate rather than that
of the Antecedent.
Mark xv. 16 : co-co Tf]s ovXfis S iori irpaiTcopiov, within the hall
which is the Prcetorium.
1 Cor. iii. 17 : 6 vabs tov Qeov ayios icTTLv, olVtvcs fare vixds, the
temple of God is holy, which (temple) ye are.
Gal. iii. 16 : Tw oTrepiiarC aov '6s ea-Ti Xpwrrds, " to thy seed"" which
is Christ.
Col. i. 27 : TOV |XV0-TT]p{0V TOVTOV . . . 8s e(TTi XpKTrbs €V V/LtTv, K.T.X.,
of this mystery ... which is Christ in yoUy &c. This text explain.s
the meaning of 1 Tim. iii. 16, provided the reading of most
modern editions be adopted. " Co7ifessedly great is the mystery of
Godliness, 8s 6<|>av€p«0T] kv <rapKC, k.t.\., who was manifested in the
flesh, i.e.y the Mystery is Christ.
h. Attraction of tlie Relative to tlie Antecedent. — A Relative
which would properly, by the rules of its own clause, be in the
Accusative case, conforms to a Genitive or Dative Antecedent.
Luke ii. 20 : eVt irdo-iv ots ^Kova-av, for all things which they heard.
Luke iii. 19 : ir^pi irdvTwv wv erroirjae rrovrjpcoVffor all the evil things
which he liad done.
John iv.'14 : ck toO vSaros ov eycb Scocro) aiVw, of the water which
I will give to him.
Acts i. 1 : nepi irdvTwv ayv rjp^aro 6 lr}aovs noieiv re Koi diddaKCLV,
concerning all things which Jesus began both to do and to teach.
Acts ii. 22 : 8vvap.€0-t koL r^pao-t koX otijicCois, ots iivoiria-e, k.t.X., by
mighty deeds and wonders, and signs which (God) wrought, «fec.
So in a great number of passages. The Relative is occasionally
"attracted" out of other cases than the Accusative. See Acts
i. 22 ; 2 Cor. i. 4.
Sometimes the Antecedent is put in the case of the Relative.
This is called inverse attraction.
In other words, the noun to which the Relative belongs is understood
in the antecedent clause, and expressed in the relative, instead of being
(as usual) expressed in the former and understood in the latter.
Z
312 PROXOUNS — RELATIVE. [§ 34b
Mark vi. 1 6 : 8v eyo) d7r€Ke(}>aXiara 'lo>6.wr\v, ovros rjyepdrj, this John
whom I beheaded arose, instead oi hv ... ovros *laidvvr)s,
Rom. vi. 17 : vTrrjKovaare ... els 8v 7rapfd6$T]T€ rvirov didaxrjs, ye
obeyed the form of doctrine into which ye were delivered, for uttt^/c ...
TO) rvTro) ... ils OP,
See also Luke xii. 48 ; Acts xxi. 16, xxvi. 7 ; 1 Cor. x. 16, &c. ; and
the repeated quotation from Ps. cxviii. 22. \ldov hu airfSoKlfMuray ... ovtos
iyevrtdT], k.t.?^, Matt, xxl 42; Mark xii. 10; Luke xx. 17; 1 Pet. ii. 7
(in this last passage Lachmann has \ldos).
347. When the Antecedent would be a demonstrative pronoun,
it is very often omitted, being implied in the Relative.
So in English, for "he gave me that which I asked for," we say " he
gSivemewhat I asked for;" the relative form "what" implying both
words. But in Greek the same form is used whether the demonstrative
antecedent is expressed or implied.
Matt. X. 27 : 8 Xeyo l/uv ep rf] aKOTia ... Koi 8 els to ovs aKovere,
what I say to you in the darkness ... and what ye hear (into, § 298)
in the ear.
The Relative and the implied Antecedent may be in different
cases.
Luke vii. 47 : ^ Se 6\iyop dcfiCerat, oXiyop dyarra, (he) to wliom
little is forgiven, loveth little.
John iv. 18 : 8v ex^is ovk eo-rt (Tov dprjp, {he) wJiom thou now hast
is not thy husband.
Heb. V. 8 : tfiadep d(j) (Sv enade rfjp vnaKofjp, hi leo/med his
obedience from those things which he suffered.
348. The pronoun avros is occasionally inserted in apposition
with the Relative, as a kind of complement to it.
This is a Hebrew idiom; the relative in that language being iadc-
clmable, and requiring to be complemented by a pronoim.
Matt. iii. 12 : ov t6 tttvov iv rg x**p'' o-vroU, whose fcm is in his
hand.
§ 348. J PRONOUNS — RELATIVE. 313
Mark vii. 25 : r]S ei^f fh dvydrpiov avTTjs TTvevna oKaQaprov, whose
little daughter had an unclean spirit
Acts XV. 17 : e(^' ous e-mKeKKrjTai ro ovofxd fxov err* avTOvs, Upon
whom my name has been called ; LXX. ; Amos ix. 12.
So also Mark i. 7 ; Luke iii. 16 ; 1 Pet. ii. 24 (not Lachmann), &c.
349. The Compound Relative, Sims, Ls strictly indefinite.
Thus iras 8s dKov€L, every one who hears, would denote " every one
who is now hearing ;" but ttos Scttis olkov^i^ as Matt. vii. 21, is
" every one, whoever he be that hears."
Matt. V. 39 : Soms paniaeL ... So-tis dyyapeva-ei, whosoever shall
»mite . . . vjhosoever sh-all impress.
Luke X. 35 : 6, n av Trpoa-daTravTjarjs, whatsoever thou shalt have
spent more, John ii. 5, xiv. 13, xv. 16, tfec*
From the indefinite meaning of oans arises a suggestion of
character, kind, reason, as marking the class to which this Relative
is applied.
For example, oans, and not os, is used in the following pas-
sages : —
Matt. vii. 15 : " beware of false prophets, who come to you,''
i.e., such as come.
Matt. vii. 24, 26 : *' a wise man who built his house upon the
rock, a foolish man who built his house upon the sand ;" in each
case the kind of man who did what is described.
Matt. XXV. 1 : " ten virgins who took their lamps and went
forth to- meet the bridegi-oom," i.e., who acted in accordance with
their function.
In this way the compound Relative acquires a kind of logical
force. Romans vi. 2 : "we who died to sin, how shall we longer
live therein," i.e., inasmuch as we died. Compare Phil. iv. 3.
* The instances of 8, rt, neuter, are very few ; and there is much varia-
tion of reading, on, conj., being often preferred (as, e.g., in 2 Cor. iv. 14).
314 PRONOUxVS RELATIVE : INTERROGATIVE. [§ 349.
With proper names, So-rts is frequently preferred to 8y. See Luke ii, 4,
ix. 30, xxiii. 19 ; John viii. 53 ; Acts viii. 15, xvi. 12 (on the attraction,
see § 346), xvii. 10, xxviii. 18 ; Rom. xvi. 6, 12 ; Gal. iv. 26 ; 2 Tim.
ii. 18. In all these passages there is an implied reference to character,
position, calling.
Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns.
350. The interrogative pronoun tis', tI; is used in various
ways.
i. Simply, with or without a Substantive —
Nominative. Matt. iii. 7 : tCs Inebet^ev v/xIj^ ; who warned you ?
Genitive. Matt. xxii. 20 : tivos fj eluibv avrrj koL rj cViyp acp/) ;
wliose is this image and superscription ?
Dative. Luke xii. 20 : a 8€ rjTolixao-as rivi earai ; the riches
vjhich thou didst amass, for whom shall they he ?
Accusative. Matt. v. 46, 47 : rCva fiiadov ex^re ; ... rl nepiaaop
TToieiTf ; what reward have ye? ... what do ye over and above ?
AYith Prepositions. Matt. v. 13 : Iv rCvi oXitrBrjcreTai ; wherevnih
shall it be salted ?
Matt. IX. 11 : SiarC {8ia ri) fxcra rmv reXcovav Ka\ afiapraiXoov eadlei j
wherefore eateth he with the publicans and sinners 1 So Matt,
xiv. 31 ; Mark xiv. 4 ; John xiii. 28.
il Elliptically, with mi, that (" that what may haj^pen ? " or
wherefore 1) —
Matt. ix. 4 : Vva ri tpdvfxelafie novrjpd ; wherefore are ye infia^ining
malignant things ?
1 Cor. X. 29 : Vva rC yap t) tXevdepia pov Kpiuerai ; for wherefore is
my liberty judged ?
In quotations from the Old Testament, written tVar^; Matt, xxvii. 40;
Acts iv. 25, vii. 26.
iii. Adverbially, neuter, tL', why ? (or as an exclamation, How !)
rl on ; /lOW (is it) l/uU ? —
§ 350.1 PRONOUNS— THE INTERROGATIVE t(s. 315
Matt. vi. 28 : Tvepl ivhviiaTos ri nepifivars ; whi/ are ye anxious
about raiinent 1
So vii. 3, viii. 26, xvi. 8, &c.
Matt. vii. 14 (Lachmann, &c.) : t£ frr^vi] t] •nvKx) ! how na/rrow is
the gate 1 But this rendering is doubtful, as well as the reading
itself.
Luke ii. 49 : t£ on e^r/relre pe ; hov) IS it tlmt ye were seeking me ?
See also Acts v. 4, 9.
iv. In alternative questions, where the classical idiom requires
TTorepos, a, ov ; whether of the two ^ the New Testament employs n'y.
Matt. ix. 5 : tC yap l(Triv evKOTruirepov, for which is easier ? (of the
two).
Matt. Xxi. 3 1 : t^s e/< rcov 8vo inoirjcre to deXrjixa rou rrarpos ', which
of the two did the will of his father ?
So xxiii. 17, 19, xxvii. 17, 21 ; 1 Cor. iv. 21 ; PhiL i. 22 (see § 382).
351. The simple interrogative, rls, tI, is also used in indirect
questions, and after verbs of knowing, thinking, &c., in objective
sentences.
See § 382. The classic Greek idiom requires cJo-rty, 6', n, though not
without exceptions.
Matt. XX. 22 : ovk otdare Tt alrelade, ye know not what ye ask.
Luke vi 47 : vTroZd^co vpXv rivt iariv opoios, I will shew you to
whom lie is like.
John XVlll. 21 : epatTrjcrov Tovs dKTjKooras Ti eXakrjaa avToiSj ask those
who have heard what I said to them.
So in many other passages.
352. The transition from the interrogative to the indefinite
pronoun can easily be traced. It comes to almost the same thing
whether we say, " What man is there among you wlio will give his
child a stone for bread?" or, "Is there any man among you who
wilir'&c.
316 PRONOUNS — THE INDEFINITE 7 IS. [§ 352.
So the only difference between the forms of the two is in accent
and the position in the sentence.
The indefinite, ns, n, may be used (i.) simply, with or without
Substantive expressed —
Nom. Matt. xii. 47 : (iKe 8e ns avray and one said unto him.
Luke i. 5 : iyivero . . . Upevs tis, there was ... a certain priest. So
very often, dtvOpwirds ns, a certain man.
Gen. Luke xxii. 35 : /^i^ nvos viTTeprjcraTe ; did ye lack anything ?
Dat. Mark viii. 26 ; iirjbe etn-ijs tivI eV r^ K<i)p.rjj nor speak to any
one in the village.
Ace. Acts iii. 5 : Trpoa-doKav n nap' avrcov Xa/3f ti/, expecting to
receive something from them.
Luke xvii. 1 2 : dcrepx^ofieuov avrov eh riva Kta/xj^i/, as he v)as entering
into a certain village.
Acts XV. 36 : fiera §e Tivas fmepas, And after certain days.
Phil. iii. 15 : koI €l ti ire pas (f>povf'iT€, and if in anything ye be
otherwise minded (for Ace, see § 283). So ppaxv ti, for some
short time, Acts v. 34 ; Heb. ii. 7 ; i^^pos n, in some part, partly,
1 Cor. xi 18.
With a Genitive following —
1 Cor. vi. 1 : mXpa ns vpi<i,v ; Dares any of you 9
Acts iv. 32 : -n tcov vTrapxovrav avra, any of his goods.
So v. 15, &c. With air6, Luke xvi 30 ; with ^»c, Heb. iii. 13.
(ii.) Emphatically ; " somebody important," " something great,*
" anything " —
Acts V. 36 : Xeyav ilvai Tiva ecuroV, saying that he was somebody.
Compare viii. 9.
Gal. vi. 3 : el yap boK(7 ns dval ti, p.rjhtv «5i/, (ftpevanara eavrop, for if
any one thinks he is anything, being fiothing, he deceives himself
See also 1 Cor. iii 7 ; Gal. ii 6 and (of tilings) 1 Cor. x. 19 ; Gal. vL 15.
Compare Heb. x. 7.
§ 352.] PRONOUNS — THE INDEFINITE TtJ. 317
(iii.) « A kind of"—
James i. 18: els to dvai rjjxas airapxh^ Tiva, tJiat we might he a kind
of first fruits.
See also Rom. i. 11, 13; and in the opinion of some interpreters,
1 Cor. vL 11, "such in some degree were you."* But see § 342.
(iv.) With numbers, " some," approximately (or perhaps simply
redundant) —
Luke vii. 19 : Trpoa-Kokecrdfievos 8vo tivoLs tcov jjiadrjTcJu, having called
some two of his disciples.
Acts xxiii. 23 : Trpoa-KaXea-dfxevos dvo Ttvds tcov €KaTovdp)((i}u, having
called some two of the centurions.
These are the only instances ; for the construction in Acts xix. 14 is
different. For eTs, one, instead of tjs, and in conjunction with it,
see § 328, i.
(v.) In alternative expressions we find both rij/es ... ni/e? and
Tis ... erepos —
Phil. i. 15 : nvh pev kol Sta (f)d6vov ... Ttv,^s 8e koI Si' evdoKiav, some
indeed even from envy ... hut otiiers also from goodwill.
Compare Luke ix. 7, 8 ; 1 Tim. v. 24.
1 Cor. iii. 4 : orav yap Xeyr] tis . . . '^T€pos Se, for when one saith . . .
and another.
(vi.) The negatives of tis are ovSeis, fj.t]8cis, no one. For their
construction, and for the Hebraistic negative, ov nas, see § 328, iii.
The compounds, otris, p-^itis, are not found in the New Testament
For interrogative p-fin, see § 370.
« Wahl.
313 THE VERB VOICE. [§ 353.
CiL^PTER YI.— THE VEEB.
VOICE.
353. The dLstinction of "voices," in respect oi form (Active,
Middle, and Passive), belongs to Etymology. The Yerb in Syntax
is considered as transitive, intransitive, reflexive, or passive.
Transitive verbs may be of Active or Middle form. A transitive
Active verb may in its middle voice retain the transitive meaning
with certain modifications, or may become intransitive or reflexive.
The passive sense is conveyed by the Passive form.
Intransitive, or " neuter " verbs, in like manner, may be Active
or Middle in form.
The Active Yoice.
354. An intransitive Active verb sometimes takes a transitive
meaning.
]\Iatt. V. 45 : Tov r\\iov aiTov dvar^XXci, he causes his sun to arise ;
dvarcXXw being properly to arise, as 2 Pet. i. 19, &c.*
Matt, xxvii. 57 : ^iiaeVJTtvore is intransitive, he was a disciple.
Some editors, however, read IjjLaOrjTruOi] ; and elsewhere the verb is
transitive, ch. xiii. 52, xxviii. 19 ; Acts xiv. 21.
Av|dv«, to grow, is generally intransitive. Matt. vi. 28 ; but in
1 Cor. iii. 6, 7, 2 Cor. ix. 10, is transitive. The English verb is
similarly used (" wheat grows;" "he grows wheat"). So of many
others.
* In this change of intransitive to transitive, we mark the influence of
the Hebrew, which language attaches to neuter verbs a causative conjugation
(Hiphil). In the LXX,, both the neuter and the Hiphil are often rendered
by the simple verb. So 1 Kings i. 4.3, i^aaihtvat, he made (Solomon) king :
although ^cuTiKeiu properly means to be a king.
§ 354.] THE VERB — ACTIVE AND MIDDLE VOICE. 319
2Tp^<}>«, to turn, generally intransitive in the Middle, but some-
times in tlie Active also. Compare Matti v. 39 with Acts vii. 42.
Some verbs vary between the transitive and intransitive meaning
according to form. Thus, torj^/xi, a regularly transitive or causative
verb, has (with some few others) an intransitive sense in the Per-
fect (with Pluperfect) and the Second Aorist. (See § 108, 3.)
di7w, to lead, has imperative, &y€, go ; subjunctive, &7«p,€v, let us go.
The intransitive imperative only occurs in the New Testament
iuterjectionally, go to I (James iv., 13, v. 1).
The verb ?x**j ^o have, becomes neuter before an adveib, through
the ellipsis of a pronominal object, " to have one's self in such
a manner;" hence "to he so," the adverb being often translated
as an adjective. Matt. iv. 24 : rovs KaK«s ^ovras (those having
themselves evilly), those who were ill ; Mark v. 23 : dvyajpiou fiov
4<rxaT«s ^x^i, my littlif daughter is at an extremity. So Acts xv. 36 :
TTcos 'ixovarx., how they do. (See also John xi. 17 ; Acts vii. 1 ;
1 Pet. iv. 5, &c.) So in the participle, to vvv ^ov, the 'present time
(that which has itself now).
For variations in other verbs, see Vocabulary.
The Middle Voice.
355. As compared with the Active Voice, the Middle gene-
rally expresses one of three things : —
1. Action upon one's self : the re^ea;!^;^ sense.
2. Action for one's self : the appropriative sense.
3. Action, as caused or permitted : the causative sense.*
1. The reflexive sense of the Middle is comparatively rare;
reflexive pronouns being generally employed with the Active.
Act. Matt. viii. 25 : i^Ycipav avTov, they aroused him.
Mid. Matt. xxvi. 46 : kyd^^a-^i, ayoa^ev, rise, let us he going.
* Dr. Donaldson, § 432. (1) May be called the Accusative middle; (2) the
Dative middle. (See 2.)
320 THE VERB ACTIVE AND MIDDLE VOICE. [§ 355,
Act. 1 Pet. iii. 10 (LXX.) : iravo-aT« Tfjv yXwaa-av dnb kukov, lei
Jmn refrain his tongue from evil.
Mid. 1 Cor. xiii. 8 : fire yXaaa-ai, iravo-ovrai, whetlier (there be)
tongues they shall cease.
See also Matt, xxvii. 5 ; Mark vii. 4 ; Luke xiii. 29 ; 1 Pet. iv. I.
In this sense the Active is transitive, the Middle intransitive.
2. As the reflexive sense is equivalent to the Active with the
immediate (Ace.) pronominal Object, so the appropriative sense
corresponds with the Active and the remote (Dab.) Object. Thus,
Luke xvi. 9, iroi^<raT6 lavrots might have been fully expressed by
the one word, iroi^<ra<r0€.
Act. John xvi. 24: ainZn koi" XrjyjreaBey ash, and ye shall
receive.
Mid. Matt. xx. 22 : ovk oTSare n' olT€i<r0€, y^ know not what ye
ask (for yourselves).
Act. Acts xxii. 20 : <f>vXd<r(ra)v ra Ifidria, watching the clothes (of
Stephen's murderers).
Mid. 2 Tim. iv. 15 : ov koX a-v 4>vX<i<r(rov, of whom do thou also
beware, i.e., watch him with a view to thy own safety.
Act. and Mid. 2 Pet. i. 10 : airovddaraTe jSejSaiai/ Ifxap rfjv kX^o-iv
Kol iickoy^v irowio-Gai * ravra yap 'irotovvT€s, k.t.X., give diligence to make
your calling and election sure for yourselves ; for if ye do these
things, (fee.
For other instances of the Middle of wofew, see Luke v. 33, xiii. 22;
Acts L 1, XX. 24, XXV. 17, xxvii. 18; Rom. i. 9, xiii. 14, xv. 26; Eph.
iv. 16 ; PhiL i. 4 ; Heb. L 3, and a few other passages.
In this sense, the Middle is transitive, retaining the direct Object
of the verb. Hence the difl&culty of always distinguishing between
the Active and the Middle signification ; as to perform an action,
and to perform it for one's self, are notions that may approach so
as almost coincide. Compare, for instance, iropctxe (Acts xvi IG)
with iropctxero (xix. 24). The same object, epyaaiav, gain, follows
in both cases. Demetrius had undoubtedly a more direct interest
in his gains than the damsel in hers.
§ 355.] THE VERB— MIDDLE VOKTR. 321
^ It is doubtM whether the Middle is ever to be taken as simply con-
veying an intensive force. Compare John i. 5, the darkness comprehended
it not (act., Karixa^ev), with Eph. iii. 18, tJiat ye may comprehend (mid.,
KaraXapeaOai) with all saints, what is the breadth, &c. The appropriative
sense is here very decided. The careful student may note the middle
verbs in Matt. xxi. 16 (LXX. ) ; John xiii. 10 (compared with the rest
of the passage) ; Matt. vi. 17 ; Luke x. 42 ; Acts ii. 39, v. 2, ix. 39
{iTTiSHKvvfjievai) ; Rom. iii. 25 ; Acts xx. 28 ; Gal. iv. 10 ; Eph. v. 16 ;
Phil. i. 22 ; 2 Thess. iii. 14, and many other passages. In 1 Tim. iii. 13,
the dative pronoun is redundant.
3. The causative Middle expresses the interest of the Subject in
the result, and yet implies a mediate agency ; " to allow a thing to
be done," " to have it done," " to provide for its being done." Here
the Middle partakes more nearly of the nature of the Passive.*
Luke ii. 5 : &.Troypa.^a<rQa.i (tvv MapiafXy to get enrolled with Mary.
So Mid., 1 Cor. x. 2 : ePaimVavTo, they got baptized. Compare
Mark vii. 4, and especially Acts xxii. 16.
Hence, too, in some words a change of signification j both, voices
taking the accusative Object. diro8i8wni, to give off, or away ; diro-
8i8ofiai, mid., to sell, i.e., give off or away for one's self, i.e., to get
money by the act. Compare Matt, xviii. 26—34 with Acts v. 8,
vii. 9. 8av€it«, to borrow ; bavei^oyLai, to lend. Matt. v. 42; Luke
vi. 34, 35.
The causative meaning in some cases becomes reciprocal : " to do
... and cause others to do."
John ix. 22 : o-uvereOcivTo ot *Iov5aiot, the Jews had agreed amongst
themselves.
See also Matt. v. 40 and 1 Cor. vi. 1 : KpiveaOat, to contend at law ,
Rom. iii. 4 : kw. vikticttis ev t^ KpiyeaBal ae, and that thou may est overcoiae
when thou comest into trial, i.e., with the children of men; the inriage
being that of two parties to a suit — not, tvhen thou judgest, as E.V.,
Ps. h. 4, nor when thou art judged, as in the New Testament quotation.
For the special meanings of different verbs, the Vocabulary must be
consulted. The threefold division now given covers most of the relations
of the Middle with the Active.
* Lat. curare; Germ., sichlassen. So Winer, xxxviii. 3.
322 THE VERB — PASSIVE VOICE. [§ 358.
The Passive Toice.
356. As in other languages, the direct Object of the Active
verb becomes the Subject of the Passive.
But in Greek, the remoter Object of the Active may t\lso
become the Subject of the Passive.
Genitive. Acts xxii. 30 : Karrj-yopeiTat ivapa tSv *Iov8aicov, he is
accused hy the Jews (for the gen. with Karrj-yopeco, see § 250).
Dative. Rom. iii. 2 : lTriorTevi0T]<rav to. Xoyia tov Gcou, thcT/ were
entrusted with the oracles of God.
So 1 Cor. ix. 17 ; Gal. ii. 7 ; 1 Thess. ii. 4, &c.
Heb. xi. 2 : lixaprvpVjO'qo-av oi rrpeo-^vTepot, tlie elders ohtairLed a
good report (lit., were attested to).
So Acts xvi. 2, xxii. 12, &j3.
Heb. viii. 5 : KadSs K€xprip.dTi(rTai Maxrrjs, according as Moses Jias
been divinely commanded.
For the dative after the Active of such verbs, see § 278.
Where the Active governs two Accusatives (person and thing),
or a Dative of the person and an Accusative of the thing, the
Passive may take also the Accusative of the thing. (See § 284. )
2 Thess. ii. 15: KpareiTe ras irapa86(r€is &S ^8i8dx0T|T€, hold fast the
traditions which ye were taught.
See also Mark xvi. 5; Acts xviii. 25, &c., for verbs of the former
class.
For verbs of the latter class, note Rom. iii 2, quoted above, with
the connected passages.
357. After Passive verbs, the agent is marked by ino with the
Genitive ; occasionally by other prepositions, as otto', eV, irapdy
TTpos ', sometimes by the Dative without a preposition. (See
§§ 280, e, 304.)
358. As many forms of the Middle and Passive are alike, it is
Bon.etimes difQcult to decide which is intended. In considering
§ 358.] THE VERB — PASSIVE VOICE. 323
this question, regard must cliiefly be had to the r.sage of the parti-
cular verbs, and to the general construction of the sentence.
The following is a selection of instances : —
Matt. xi. 5 : Trraxo). €vaYY£\£tovTai, poor men preach ilie Gospel, or
have the Gospel preached to them. The verb may be middle or
passive,* but the sense of the passage seems decisively for the latter.
Rom. iii. 9 : ri ovv ; 'irpo€x<5|J.€9a ; What then, are we superior ?
(mid.), or, are we surpassed? (pass.) The context requires the
former meaning. Some, however (see Dr. Yaughan), prefer the
passive, but render are we preferred ? a sense without authority
elsewhere. For other suggested renderings, see Alford's note.
1 Cor. i. 2 : avu iraai tols liriKaXovfievois to ovofxa rov Kvpiov, with
all who call upon the name of the Lord, or who are called by tlie
name. The usage of the word clearly pronounces for the former.
Compare Acts vii. 59, ix. 14, 21 ; Rom. x. 13 (Acts ii. 21), com-
pared with ver. 14; 1 Pet. i. 17, &c. Acts xv. 17 (from LXX.,
Amos ix. 12) is quite different.
2 Cor. ii. 10 : koli yap iya 6 K€xa.p''<r[Ji.at, ei ti K€Xapi<rnai, Bi vpas.
Some render the verb here, / have heeyi forgiven ; but ;^npt^o/iat
nowhere else means " to be forgiven," and the ordinary rendering
gives a sense harmonious with the context.
Eph. vi. 10 : tvSwap-ovo-Oc iv Kvpia. This verb is always passive
in the New Testament : "6e strengtlmied." (See Ellicott.)
THE MOODS AND TEl^SES.
359. The Indicative Mood is objective, describing tbat
wliicli is; the Subjunctive and Optative are subjective,
describing tliat which is conceived to be. Hence the various
uses of the three Moods in independent and subordinate
sentences.
* For the middle, see Luke i. 19, ii. 10, iii. 18, iv. 18, 43, and many other
passages ; for the passive (with a personal subject), Heb. iv. 2, 6. The
passive is also found, Luke xvi. 16; Gal. i. 11 ; 1 Pet. i 25, iv. 6, the subject
being that which was preached.
324 the verb — moods and tenses. [§ 359.
The Indicative.
The Indicative Llood is used in declaration, wlietlier affirmative
or negative, and in interrogation.
360. As the force of the Tenses will be best seen in the first
instance by their use in the Indicative, an account of them is here
introduced.
See the Table of Tenses, § 65. Let it be remembered that
Tense expresses both time and state. Time is present, past, and
future ; state is imperfect, perfect, and indefinite.
The Tenses to be considered are —
1. The present imperfect, or " Present."
2. The past imperfect, or " Imperfect."
3. The future indefinite, or « Future."
4. The past indefinite, or " Aorist."
5. The present perfect, or " Perfect."
6 The past perfect, or " Pluperfect."
The future imperfect, the present indefinite, and the future per-
fect, are expressed in other ways.
The three past tenses are termed " historical," the others " prin-
cipal"
The Present Tense.
361. a. The Present expresses a state or action as now exist-
ing ; as Xi-yw vfxivy I say unto you.
Matt. iii. 10 : ^ a^lvri npos ttjv piCav tup divbpcov Keirai, tlie axe is
lying at the foot of tJie trees, i.e., it is already there.
John 111. 36 : 6 iria-Tfixov fls top vIop i\t^ C^rjv alcaviov, lie t/Ult
believeth on the Son Imth life eternal.
Matt. XXV. 8 : at Xa/x7ra5es ^/i<5i/ o-p^vvwrai, our lamps are going
out ; not " are gone out," as E. V.
Gal. i 6 : Bav\ia^<ji on ovTd) Tax(a>s ^erarCQio-^ I marvel tJcat ye are
80 soon changing.
§ 361.] THE TENSES — PRESENT. 325
b. Ife is also used to denote an habitual or usual act.
Matt. vi. 2 : (oaivep ol vnoKpiToX irotovo-iv, as tJie hypocrites do.
Matt. vii. 8 : nas 6 alrcdv XanPdvei, /cut 6 ^j^tcdv eiipio-Kci, eve7'y one
who asks receives, and he who seeks finds.
c. In vivid narration, the Present is employed of past time (the
Historic Present).
Matt. iii. 1 : ev 8e rais Tjfiepais cKeiuais irapa-YivcTat ^ladvvrjs, and i7l
those days cometh John.
John i. 29 : rfj iivavpiov px^irci Tov *Ir}crovp ... Kat X^Y€t, on the next
day he seeth Jesus, and saith.
Sometimes the Historic Present is used with Aorists in the
same narration.
Mark v. 14, 15 : l<}>D'yov koI dir^ yyciXav . . . koi fjXGov ... koI '^pxovrai...
KOL 0€ci)pov<rt . , . Koi €<|>oP'<]0T]<rav, they fied, and related . . . and came . .".
and they come ... and behold ... and they feared.
Variations may here be noted in the comparison of different evan-
gehsts in the same narrative. Thus, Matt. xxi. 23, xxii. 23, we read,
ttpoa^K^ov, they came to him; Mark xi. 27, xii. 18, epxourai, they come.*
Compare also Matt. xxiv. 40 ; Luke xvii. 34.
d. The Present is employed to express certain futurity, as when
we say, " To-morrow is Sunday."
Matt. xxvi. 2: pera 8vo rjpepas to irdaxa 7iV€Tat ... Koi 6 vlos tov
dvOpcDirov irapaSiSoTai, after two days is the passover, and the Son of
inan is betrayed.
Luke XIX. 8 : to. rjpiar] pov Totv v7rap)(6vT<ov Kvpie Tois tttcoxo'is 8i8a)p,i,
the half of my goods, Lord, I give to the poor; not " I am in the
habit of giving" now ; but " I will give," immediately.
John XX. 17 : dvapafvw, I ascend. Compare xvi. 16.
John xxi. 23 : on 6 padqrfjs eKewos ovk airoQvfia-Kii, that that
disciple dieth 7iot, i.e., " is now and will be exempt from death."
* As a rule, the narrations of Mark are more ^'ivid than those of the other
evangelists.
826 THE TENSES — PRESENT. [§ 361.
1 Cor. XV. 25 : ecrxo-ros exdpos Karap-yeiTat 6 Bdvaros, death the last
enemy is destroyed, or more lit., is being destroyed. In tliis case,
and in some others, tlie notion of futuritj is perhaps associated
with that of the process now being conducted.
The verb spxo/iai, because of its meaning, carries with the present
tense a future reference. So in EngKsh, "/ am coming ^ (See Luke
xii. 54; 1 Cor. xiii. 11.) So Matt. xvii. 11 : 'HA/os epx^Tai, Elijah is coming;
and especially John xiv. 3 : iriXiv epxofiai Ka\ irapaXii^onai v/xas, I am
coming again, and will receive you. 1 Cor. xvi. 5 : Ma/ceSo^ioi' Siepxonai
must be rendered, / (am about to) pass through Macedonia, not " I am
passing through," which would be contrary to fact. The participle of
this verb, 6 epx6p.fvos, the Coming one, is a frequent title of the Messiah
(see § 210), and in the Revelation denotes the eternal self-existence of
Deity, ^^who wast, and art, and art to come,''^ lit., "who comest."
On the other hand, the verb ^Koa, in the present, has a perfect signi-
fication : / am come. Luke xv. 27 : & aSeh(p6s orov fjwet, thy,, brother is
come/ John ii. 4; Heb. x. 9 (not simply "Lo, I come," but LOj I am
come!)', 1 John v. 2",
The Imperfectt Tense.
362. a. The Imperfect expresses what was in progress at a
past time ; as iK-^pvo-o-e to eiiayyeXiov, he was preaching the gospel ;
JpatrTftovTo, they were being baptized.
h. Hence the Imperfect may refer to an action not continuous,
but statedly rej)eated ; also to anything customaiy.
Acts iii. 2 : hv It£0ovv Ka6^ w^pav, whom tliey iised to lay day by
day.
Mark xv. 6 : Kara hk eofyrfjv iir^vev avrols eva Bfo-ixiov, and at each
passover he used to release to tJiem 07ie prisoner.
See also 1 Cor. xiii 11.
c. The Imperfect should carefully be distinguished from the
Aorist, or simple Past, although our translators have generally
rendered the two tenses alike.
So Luke xxiv. 32 : " while lie was talking with u^ by the way,
and opening to us the Scriptures.^'
Matt. ii. 4 : Herod was enquiring of the priests and scribes, not
§ 362.] THE TENSES— IMPERFECT. 327
once for all, but repeatedly; and when they had replied, he
ascertained (Aorist, one act) of the Magi what they had seen.
Matt. ix. 35 : Jesus was traversing all the cities and villages :
and on one occasion, being touched, he said (ver. 36), the harvest
is great, &c.
Luke vi. 19: the whole multitude were seeking to touch him, for
power was going forth from him, and was healing all.
Luke xiv. 7 : how they were selecting the chief seats.
John V. 16 : the Jews were persecuting Jesus, and were seeldng
to kill him, because he was doing (used to do) these things.
Acts xvi. 4 : as they were going through the cities they were
delivering the decrees to the churches.
The above are but a few instances, and the reader should always note
the special force of the tense. Probably the Imperfect is never really
equivalent to the Aorist, or used for it ; though, undoubtedly, the dis-
tinction is often slight. In such cases as the following, where both
tenses are used, the difiference is very marked. The Aorist, it will be
seen, often marks a single occurrence ; the Imperfect its continuous
result.
Matt. iv. 11 : ayyeXot irpoo-TjXOov kol 8iT]Kdvow avra, angels carne
and were ministering to him.
Matt. xiii. 8 : other seed fell (^ir€<r€v) upon the good ground^ and
was yielding (ihihov) fruit.
Matt. XXV. 5 : tJiey all fell asleep (€vv<rTa|av), and were slumbering
(iKclGevSov).
Mark vii. 35 : his ears were opened (Zvr\voi\Qi\aro.v)j and the hond
of his tongue was loosed (cXv0t]), and he was speaking (cXdXei)
plainly.
Luke viii. 23 : a whirlwind came down (KaTe'Pr]), and they were
filing (o-vvc-irXiqpovvTo) and were in danger (ckivSvvcvov).
1 Cor. iii. 6 : / planted^ Apollos watered, God was giving tJie
increase. The transitory acts of human teachers are expressed by
Aorists, the continual bestowal of Divine grace by the Imperfect.
So 1 Pet. ii. 23, 24, we have three Imperfects to denote continual
a a
328 THE TENSES — IMPERFECT. [§ 362.
and repeated acts ; but an Aorist to denote an act (" he bare our
sins") once for all."*
See further, Matt. xxi. 8-11; Mark xi. 18; John vii. 14, xi. 13,
XX. 3-5 ; Acts xi. 6 ; 1 Cor. x. 3, 4, xi. 23 [the night on which he wan
being betrayed) ; Gal. ii. 12 ; James ii. 22, and many other i)assages.
In parallel passages we occasionally find different tenses (compare
Matt. xix. 13 and Mark x. 13). From the latter passage we might
gather that the incident was a repeated one. In such cases, the con-
ceptions of the two writers are slightly different : one regarding the
action as momentary, the other as continuous, f But in narrative some
common verbs, as Ae'yw, are generally used in the Imperfect rather than
in the Aorist.
d. The Imperfect sometimes denotes an inchoative act, i.e., one
begun, but not carried out.
Matt. iii. 14 : SwkwXvcv ovtov, lie was hindering him, i.e., was
doing so until checked by our Lord's words.
Luke i. 59 : koI Ik6Xow avro ... Zaxaplav, and they began to call
him Zacharias.
Luke V. 6 : Z\.^pi\yyyjTo be t6 8Utvov avrcov, and tlieir net was
breaking, began to give way.
Luke xxiv. 27 : 8iT]pii^v€V6v, began to'interpret, entered upon the
explanation, rather than "expounded" all, as E.Y.
Heb. XL 17 : t6v fiovoyevrj irpocr^<})€p6v, he was offering up his only
begotten^ when the angel's voice arrested him.;}:
e. A compound (or "resolved") Imperfect (imperf. of ft/ni, and
pres. part, of the verb) throws emphasis on the continuity of the
action.
Matt. vii. 29 : fjv yap SiSdorKwv avrov^, for he was teaching them.
Matt. xix. 22 ; Mark i. 39 ; Luke i. 10, 21, ii. 23 ; John iii. 23 ;
Acts i. 10, X. 24 ; Gal. i. 23; PhiL ii. 26, &c. (See § 394, i. 1.)
For the Imperfect in conditional expressions, see § 383.
♦ Webster.
t See Jelfs "KUhner," § 401 ; Winer, xl. 3, rf, note,
X Winer objects to the inchoative sense in this passage. The offering was
already completed in will. But had this been meant, the Aorist worJd liavo
l»ecn needed.
§ 363.] THE TENSES— FUTURE. 329
The Future Tense.
363. a. The Future expresses, in general, indefinite futurity^
as 8(o<r<a, / will give ; and is employed in prophecies, promises, A;c.
Matt. V. 5 : avrol irapaKXriGi^opovTai. So in all th« Beatitudes,
save vers. 3, 10.
Phil. iii. 21 : 6y p.€Ta(rxTijtaTCar6i to (rwna rrjs raTrfivwaears ^/xwi', ivhcf
will transform the body of our humiliation.
Rom. vi 14 : anapria yap vp-wu ov Kvptevcei, for sin shall not
have dominion over you. Not a command, but a promise.
2 John 3 : i<rra\, jxed'' Ifxcov x^P^^j grace shall be with you, as
marg., E.Y.
In Matt, xxvii. 4, 24, Acts xviii. 15, the second person future has the
force of a threat : *'you shall see to that." But compare next paragraph.
b. Commands are often expressed by the Future second person
(by the third, if speaking of the person commanded).
Matt. i. 21 : KaX^o-eis to 6vop.a avrov 'Ij/o-oOv, thou sJialt call his
name Jesus. Luke i. 13, 31.
So Matt. V. 48, xxii. 37, 39 (and parallels, as Rom. xiii. 9; GaL
V. 14) ; 1 Cor. v. 13, rec. text ; but Lachmann, Tischendorf, &c., read
imperative.
In 1 Tim. vi. 8, the expression of a resolution as to the future is
indirectly a command : Toirois apKeaerjaSfjLfea., we wUl be cotdent with these
things.
Especially in prohibitions (from Old Testament, but not only so).
Matt. vi. 5 : ovk ta-ia-^i wcnrep ol vnoKpiTai, ye shaU not be as tlie
hypocrites.
So ch. iv. 7, V. 21, 27, 33; Acts xxiii. 5; Rom. vii. 7, &c.*
c. The Future sometimes denotes what is usual, and is employed
in maxims, expressions of general truths, and the like (" ethical
future").
* The difFerence between this and the classic idiom is, that in the latter
the future, with oh, is the mildest form of prohibition. In Hebrew, and so
in New Testament Greek, it is the special language of legislative authority.
So Winer.
330 THE TENSES — FUTURE. [§ 363.
Eph. V. 31 : KaToXeixj/ei avOpatTros irarepa koL [irjrepaj K.r.X., a man
shall lea\,e fatlier and mother , &c.
Gal. vL 5 : iKaa-ros yap i8iov (fiopriov ^aarda-eif for ea>ch man shall
hear his own load.
So with a negative. Rom. iii. 20 : e| ^pyav y6fwv ov SiKcuaO^ffeTai vaaa
^^Pli ^y ^(yrks of law wiU nojiesh be jiistijied.
d. A strong negative is expressed bj the Future with the double
negative ov fxrj. The Subjunctive, however, is more generally
employed ; and the idiom will be found explained, § 377.
Instances with the Future are, Matt. xvi. 22 : this shall never
be 1 Mark xiv. 31 : 7 wiU n£ver deny thee I Luke x. 19 : nothing
shall ever harm you.
e. A Future imperfect ("resolved future") is formed by the
Future of the verb to he with the Present pai'ticiple.
Luke L 20 : ia-^ cri«Tr«v, thou shalt he silent.
So Matt. X. 22, xxiv. 9 ; Mark xiii. 25 ; Luke v. 10, xvii. 35 ;
1 Cor. xiv. 9. (See § 394, 1.)
The Future Perfect has been sufficiently explained, § 101, i.
f. Auxiliary Future Verbs are (x^XXu, to he ahout to ; and 0^«, to
will. The former, which is scarcely ever represented in the E.Y.,
gives emphasis to the notion that the thing is to happen, and
hence is often used of fixed and appointed purpose.* The reader
may study the following passages in which /xeXXw occurs —
Matt. ii. 13, xvii. 12, 2,^, xx. 22, xxiv. 6 ; Mark xiii. 4 ; Luke
viL 2 (was at the point of death), ix. 31, 44, x. 1 ; John vL 6,
xiv. 22, xviii. 32; Acts v. 35 (what are we to do?), xvii. 31;
Rom. viii. 13 (you are sure to die); 1 Thess. iii. 4; Heb. xL 8
(which lie was to receive), and many other passages, to fieXXov,
part, neut., is tJte future. Once the verb is used in the sense of
delay, rL \UKKm; why tarriest thou ? Acts xxii. 16.
Still more important is it to mark the use of Q(K<a, as implying
conscious volition. The English auxiliary, will^ ought here to be
read as emphatic.
« See EUicott on 1 Thess. iii. 4
§ 368.] THE TENSES FUTURE. 331
Matt. V. 40 {if any man wills to do so), xi. 14, xvi. 24, 25 : "if
any man wills to come after me ...for whosoever wills to save his
life will (future) lose it ... hut whosoever shall lose his life for my
sake will find it (simple futurity). So exactly Mark viii. 34, 35 ;
Luke ix. 23, 24 ; John v. 6, 40, vii. 11 -. if any man wills to do
his will, he shall know of the doctrine ; viii. 44 : the lusts of your
father ye choose to do ; Acts xvii. 18 : what does this babbler want
to say ? Rom. xiii. 3 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 35 ; if they wish to, or, as in
other passages, if they would learn anything; 1 Tim. v. 11:
they want to marry ; James ii. 20 : wiliest tJiou to knovj ?
3 John 13, &c.
The xA.ortst Tenses.
364. a. The Aorist denotes what is absolutely past, and answers
to the English Preterite, as dv^pT) els to 6pos, he went up into the
mountain.
The First and Second Aorists have precisely the same meaning, except
in the few cases specilied, §§ 100, 108, 3.
The distinction between the Aorist and the Imperfect is noted,
§ 362, c ; between the Aorist and the Perfect, § 365, b.
When the past time is not strongly marked, the English idiom often
includes a past act in a period reaching to the present time, and hence
uses the Perfect, where in Greek the Aorist is the usual tense.
Luke i. 1 : eVetS^Trfp ttoXXoI k'ie€)(€Cpi]frav ... ^8o|€ Ka[xo\, forasmuch
as many undertook, it seemed good also to me (" have undertaken,"
" it has seemed good)."
Luke i. 19 : dircorrdXTiv Xakrjaai npos <re, / (Gabriel) was sent to
speak unto thee (" have been sent").
Luke ii. 48 : tckvov, ri k-Koi-r\(ros fjfxlv ■qvtos j child, why didst thou
thus deal with us ? ("hast thou dealt").
Matt, xxiii. 2 : the Scribes and the Pharisees seated tJiemselves
in the chair of Moses (not " sit," simply). " They found the seat
virtually empty, and occupied it."*
* T. S. Green.
332 THE TENSES ^AORISTS. [§ 364.
1 John IT. 8 : he who loves not, never got a knowledge of i^yv<a)
God; experimentally, by having at any time known what love is."*
See also Luke xiv. 18, 19 ; John viii. 29, xvii. 4 ; Rom. ill. 23, all
sirmed, and so are coming short, &c. ; 1 Cor. vi. 11.
2 Cor. V. 15 : et els vnep TravToav dir^Oavcv apa ol 7rdvT€s dir^0avov, if
one died for all, then they all died. Compare 2 Tim. ii. 11.
Phil. iii. 8 : / suffered the loss of all things, i.e., at the crisis of
his life, ver. 12. James i. 11 (a vivid, descriptive delineation).
So ver. 24 (a Perfect interposed).
2 Pet. i. 14 : hnowing that I must shortly put off this my
tabernacle, even as the Lord Jesus Christ showed unto Trie. By
the hath showed me (of RV.) we lose altogether the special
allusion to an historic moment in the Apostle's life, to John xxi.
18, 19, which would at once come out if cStjXwo-^ poi had been
rendered "showed nie."t
b. In narration, an Aorist that starts from a time already past
may be translated by the Pluperfect.
Matt, xxviii 2 : treto-/i6s e-y^vero fieyas, there had been a great
earthquake.
Luke ii. 39 : as triKwav anavra, when they had accomplished all
things.
See also Matt. xiv. 3 ; John vi 22, xL 30, xviiL 24, &c.
c. The Epistolary Aorist, so called (as l-ypaxj/a), takes the reader's
point of view, in which the writing of the letter is viewed as past.
Our idiom requires us to take the writer's point of view, "/ have
written.^*
Rom. XV. 15; 1 Pet. v. 12 (referring to the whole letter);
1 Cor. ix. 15; 1 John ii. 21, and perhaps 1 Cor. v. 9, referring to
a part of it. J Gal. vi 11, referring either to the whole or to part,
according to the interpretation adopted.
• Other passages in which tfvwv has been regarded as standing for the
Present may be explained in a similar way.
t Archbishop Trench on the Authorized Version of the New Testament,
p. 146.
X See Ellicott on GaL vi 11.
§ 364.] THE TENSES AORISTS. 333
But eypa^a has, in other cases, its ordinary Aorist force, referring to
a former letter, "/ icrote," 2 Cor. ii. S, 4, 9, vii. 12 ; probably 3 John 9;
and perhaps 1 Cor. v. 9.
The word ^ircux^a also exemplifies the Epistolary Aorist, " I have
sent;' 1 Cor. iv. 17; 2 Cor. ix. 3; Eph. vi 22; Rev. xxii. 16.
d. In classical Greek, the Aorist is frequently used to describe
an act which has taken place in time past, and. may take place at
any time again. Here in English the Present is the usual tense.
Accordingly, in the New Testament there are a few passages where
the Aorist may best be translated by the Present.
Matt. iii. 17 : iv a wh6Ki]cra, in whom I am well pleased^ i.e.,
" I was, and am." So in parallel passages.
Rom. viii. 30: cKoLXeo-e . . . eSiKaiwo-e . . . cS^gaore, he calls ...justifies
... glorifies ; "he did, and does."*
e. The completeness of an act is occasionally marked by the
Aorist.
John xiii. 31 : vvv 48o|do-0T] 6 vlbs rod dv9pu}7rov, now is tJie Son of
man glorified ; the whole series of events being brought to a crisis.
1 Cor. vii. 28 : thou didst not^ she did not commit a sin.
So in several of the parables : w|jiot«0i], is likened (Matt. xiii. 24,
xviii. 23, xxii. 2), "as if the mould had already received its shape,
though the cast was yet to issue. "t
Compare Luke i. 51-53 ; John viii. 29.
The Perfect and Pluperfect Tenses.
365. a. The Perfect denotes an action or event as now com-
plete ; its point of view is, therefore, in the present, as 6 yi-^po.^a^
7l7pa<j>a, what I have written, I have written. It denotes also a
past act whose consequences remain, as yiypt.trra.i, "it has been
written, and abides ;" " it is written ":|:
* Alford interprets differently. See his note,
t T. S. Green.
X Luther, stehi geschrieben.
334 THE TENSES ^PERFECT. [§ 365.
h. The distinction between the Aorist and Perfect is thus very
marked : reOv^Kao-i (Matt, ii. 20), they are dead. iQavov (dneOapov)
would have been, they died. Compare Mark xv. 44. Even where
either tense would be suitable, the proper force must be given to
the one employed.
Matt. ix. 13 : ov yap •^X0ov Kokea-ai diKaiovs, for I came not to call
righteous persons.
Luke V. 32 : ovk IXi^XvOa KoKea-at diKatovs, I am not come, &c.
In the following passages, among many others, the distinction of
tenses is strikingly apparent : —
Mark iii. 2^ : do "^aravas o.vi(rrt\ ecf) edvrov, koI |i€|i^pi<rTat, for if
Satan rose up against himself and has become divided.
Acts xxi. 28 : he brought {A<r{\yo.yfv) Greeks into the temple, and
has profaned (kckoCvwkc) this holy place ; the single act, the abiding
result.
1 Cor. XV. 4 : Kai oti IrdcfiT), Kol oTi ^Yrj-ycpTai, and that he was
buried, and that he is risen again. So all through this chapter.
The simple historical fact is announced by the aorist, "^Y^pOi],
Matt, xxviii. 6, 7 ; Mark xvi. 6 ; Luke xxiv. 6, 34 (John xxi. 14) ;
Kom. vi. 4, &c. For the perf. part., see 2 Tim. ii. 8, compared
with the aor, part,, 2 Cor. v. 15.
Col. i. 16: OTi iv avra lKrCcr9r\ to. navra ... ra iravra St* avrov Ka\
els avTov ^KTicrrai, because in him were all things created . . . all things
have been created by him arid for him.
Col. iii. 3 : dircOdvcrc yap Ka\ 17 feoi) vfiStv K^KpvirTai ... for ye died,
and your life remains hidden.
Rev. V. 7 : ^X06 koI i0^r\^e, he came, and he hath taJcen the book
(which he still retains, as Lord of human destiny).
See also Luke iv. 18 ; John viiL 40 ; Heb. ii. 14 ; 1 John i. 1.
366. The Pluperfect, or Past Perfect, is but rarely used in the
New Testament. It denotes that which was completed at some
§ 366.] THE TENSES rERFECT. 335
past time ; as, t606(ji€\i«to eVt rfju irirpav, it had been founded on the
rack.
Acts xiv. 23 : ivaptdevTo avrovs rw Kvpito els ov iremtrrevKiicrav, they
commended them to the Lord, on whom they had believed.
367. The Perfects of many verbs are used as Presents ; and
correspondingly the Pluperfect takes a Past signification. This
arises in each case from the simple meaning of the verb, as coming
into a state ; Perf , being in (having come into) that state.
So KTdofjLai, to gain; KCKTrtfiai, to possess, which does not, however,
occur in the New Testament. See Luke xviii. 12 : iraj/To Saa KTUjxai, not
of all that I possess, but of all that I gain — the income, not the cai)ital.
So xxi. 19, "win your «OMfe."
For example, KaOiJw, Kd9T]p,at. Mark xi. 7 : cKdOiorcv, he mounted.
Luke xviii. 35, &c. : IkoLOiito, he was sitting. Koifidojiai, / fall
asleep ; K€KoCnT)p,ai, / am asleep. 1 Cor. xi. 30 : Koi|AwvTai tVavot,
many are falling asleep. John xi. 11: Aa^apo? ... K6Koi|XT]Tai,
Lazarus sleepeth. Ot8a, / have seen ; hence / know. (See § 1C3.)
"Icrnijii and its compounds especially exhibit this " Present Per-
fect." "Eo-niKa, / stand, as Acts xxvi. 6. So lv€'<rTT]K€, is im^ninent
2 Thess. ii. 2; avGeo-niKc (trans.), resisteth, Ptoni. ix. 19, xiii. 2;
l<J)^cm]K€, is at hand, 2 Tim. iv. 6. From earrjKa comes a new
Present (in trans.), om]Kci), Kom. xiv. 4, &c.
For other words used in a similar sense, see Vocabulary.
Interrogative Forms.
368. The several tenses of the Indicative are employed inter-
rogatively, each with its proper force. The interrogative may be
indicated by the appropriate pronouns or particles, or simply by
the order of the words, or the general sense of the passage.
a. With interrogative words —
Matt. XXV. 37 : irdrc a-e eiSo/xei/ ireivoavTa ; when saw we thee
hungry ?
John i. 19 : av n's 6?; who art thou ?
336 THE INDICATIVE — INTERROGATIVE FORMS. [§ 369.
John V. 47 : ir&s rois efiois pfjfjLaa-L Tricrreuo-ere j how will ye believe
my words ?
Jokn XL 34 : irov TeBeUare avrov ; where have ye laid him ?
Acts viii. 30 : apd 76 yivdxTKeis a dvaytvaaKeis, understandest thou
then what thou readest ?
Luke xviii. 8 ; Gal. ii. 17.
h. Without interrogative words —
Matt. ix. 28 : Trtorevere on dvi/afiai tovto noi^a-ai j believe ye that
I am able to do this ?
Rom. vii. 7 : 6 vofios afMaprla \ is the law sin ?
So John xiii. 6 ; Acts xxi. 37 ; Rom. ii. 21-23.
Hence arises occasional ambiguity.
1 Cor. i. 13 : fJLffxepKTTai 6 Xpiards ; is Christ divided ? Lachmann reads
this as an assertion : Christ is divided^ i.e., by your dissensions, which
rend asunder his body.
Rom. viii. 33, 34. Many critics read this as a series of questions, not
question and answer, as E.V. "Who shall lay anything to the charge
of God's elect ? Shall God who justijieth ? Who is he that condemneth ?
Is it Christ who died f " &c. (See Alford's note on the passage.)
An elliptic question is made by the use of the particle et, if^
some such phrase as, Say, or Tell us, being understood. In tliis
case the sentence is really dependent. (See § 383.)
Matt. xii. 10 : €l e^ea-n vols ad^^acri. BepaTreveip ; is it lawfvX tO
heal upon the sabbath ? (tell us if — ).
Acts xix. 2 ; cl Uvevyia "Ayiov iXd^ere TntmvaavTfs j received ye the
Holy Ghost when ye believed 1
So Acts vii. 1 ; xxi. 37 ; xxii. 25.
369. An affirmative answer is given, in three passages, by the
formula <rv X^^cis, tlwu say est, with or without addition: Matt.
XX vii 1 1 ; Luke xxii. 70 ; John xviii. 37. <rv ctiras, tlwu didst
say, is similarly used, Matt. xxvi. 25, 64.
370. Negative questions are framed according to the answer
expected.
§ 370.] THE INDICATIVE — INTERROGATIVE FORMS. 337
a. oi presumes an affirmative reply.
Matt. vii. 22 : ov tw a-co ovofian 7rpo€(fiT}T€v(raiJ.ev ; did we not pro-
phesy in thy name 1
1 Cor. ix. 1 : ovk ci/zi eXevdepos ', ovK et/il dnoarokos j /c.r.X., am I
not free 'i am I not an apostle 1 &c.
Acts xiii. 10: ov jravajj 8iaoTpe<f)a>v ', wilt thou not cease from,
perverting ? the affirmative answer being intimated as that which
ought to be given. So Mark xiv. 60 : dost thou not ansvjer
anything ?
Once ovKoOv is found. John xviii. 37 : thou art not then a king,
art thou 1
b. ji^ expects a negative answer.
Matt. vii. 9 : ^i\ \i6ov eViSaxret avT^i will he give hiin, a stone ?
Rom. ix. 14 : ji.^ dSucia itapa r&) Gew, is there unrighteousness
with God ?
c. ji^Ti suggests an emphatic negative.
Matt. vii. 16 : ii-^ti crvWeyova-iv dno aKavdcov (TTa<pvkds) *) drro
rpi^oXiov avKa ; men do not gather grape-clusters of thorns, or Jigs of
thistles, do they 2
Matt. xxvi. 2^, 25 : |ji'^ti fyeb elpi, Kvpie ; (from the disciples), \ir\ri
eyci flfxi, pa^^l ] (from Judas), it is not /, is it, Lord ? — is it, Rabbi ?
See also Mark iv. 21 ; John xviii. 35 (♦' / a Jew ! ")
It would sometimes appear as though dawning conviction would fortify
resistance by a strong negative. So Matt. xii. 23 may be understood :
/Ai/jTt oZt6s i<TTiv 6 vihs Aoj8i5 ; This is never the Son of Davids
The Imperative Mood.
371. The Imperative is used for command or entreaty.
Matt. V. 44 : ayairan rovs ix^povs vpoav, love your enemies.
Matt. viii. 25 : Kupte <r»<rov, diroWvpfda, save. Lord, we perish I
The negative with imperative forms is always pi].
John vi. 20 : eya> elpi • |Jti| 4>opcio-0€, it is /, be not afraid.
338 THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. [§ 372.
372. The form of command is sometimes employed where
simple permission is intended.*
Matt. xxvi. 45 : KaOevScTc to Xoittov koI dvairavccrOg, sleep on noWy
and take your res^.t
See also 1 Cor. vii. 15, xiv. 38. "Rev. xxii. 11 is a summons (^w^or-
derung) : 'the fate of all is as good as already determined.' " f
373. Of the Imperative tenses, the Present expresses a com-
mand generally, or implies continuance or repetition.
The Aorist implies that the action is instantaneous, or complete.
The Perfect (very rare) refers to an action complete in itself, yet
continuous in its effect. Its meaning coincides with that of the
Present in verbs where the Perfect indicative has a Present
meaning.
a. The Present,
Matt. vii. 1 : ^^ KpCvere, judge not.
1 Cor. ix. 24 : ovTa> rp^cre iva KaraXdpTjT^ so run that ye may
ohtain.
1 Thess. V. 16-22: Travrore yjxlpm, aStaXeiVrcos irpoorevxco-Qc, iv
TTavri €vxapioT6iTe, ^.r.X., rejoice evermore; pray without ceasing ;
in everything give thanks^ &c.
h. The Aorist.
Matt. vi. 6 : elVeXOc ety to TafiictSv aov /cat . . . Trp6<r€v^a\., enter into
thy clmmher ... and pray.
Matt. vi. 9-11 : in the Lord's prayer, a-yiao-0^T« ... •^fvr^^rio ...
80s . . . &<|>€S.
John xi. 44 : Xvoxitc avT^v, koI d<f>cT« avTov vndyeiVf loose hinif and
let him go.
c. Tlie Perfect.
Mark iv. 39 : (ruaira ! irc«j)C(t«<ro ! peace I he still t
* Winer, xliiL 1.
t Bengel. "Sleep, if you feel at liberty to do so;" not in irony, not
(as some) a question.
§ S7'd.] THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 339
The contrasted force of the Present and Aorist is shown where
both are used in the same passage.
John V. 8 : apov t6v Kpd^^arou aov Ka\ ircpiirATct, take up thy bed
and walk
Kom. vi, 13 : jirjSe irapwrrdvere to. iieXr) vfxoiv onXa ddiKtas t^ dfiapria,
dWa irapacTT^o-aTe favrovs tw Qea, yield not your members (as the
habit of your lives) as instruments of unrighteousness, unto sin, but
yield yourselves (a single act, once for all) unto God.
For the employment of the Future Indicative in commands and pro-
hibitions, see § 363, b.
For the similar use of the Subjunctive, especially in prohibitions,
see § 375.
The Infinitive may also be employed. (See § 392. )
In many instances, the force of the Aorist and that of the
Present seem nearly identical. The former is the more vigorous
expression, "set about it at once."
Matt. V. 16 : ovrco Xafn|/dTci> TO (f)a)s vjxav, k.t.\. Here the Present
might have been employed : — "let your light beam continuously."
The Aorist means, let your light shine forth at once.
John xiv. 15 : iav dyanaTe fxe, ras ivroXas ras efxas TT)pVjo-aT6, if ye
love me, keep my commandments: adopt this as the law of your
lives.
Komans xv. 11 : alveire t6v Kvpiov ndura to. edvr] koI iiraivio-araxrav
avTov navTcs ol Xaoi, praise the Lord, all the nations : and let all the
peoples burst into a song of praise to him.
See also John ii. 8, 16 ; 1 Cor. xv. 34.
The consideration of such examples will bring to light many subtle
beauties of expression, which no translation, perhaps, could accurately
represent.
The Subjunctive Mood.
374. The Subjunctive, strictly speaking, cannot stand in an
independent sentence. Where it appears to do so, there is in
reality an ellipsis. Thus loj/^iei/, let us go, is really a final clause
(tm understood) dependent on some implied verb or phrase. In
310 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. [8 374.
snch cases as the following, however, this distinction may be
disregarded, and the sentences taken as to all intents and purposes
independent.
The tenses in the Subjunctive and Optative are distinguished as in
§ 373. Compare also § 386. The Present implies continuity^ the
Aorist completion.
375. The Subjunctive is used as a hortatory Imperative of the
first person.
John xix. 24 : n^ <rxC<r«|i€v avrov^ aWa \6,x<a^xv, let US not rend it,
hut let us cast lots.
Rom. V. 1 (according to many) : * elpfjvrjv lx<*F^«' Trpos rov Qeov,
let us have peace with God ; and ver. 2, 3 : Kawx"K*Oa, let us glory.
So 1 Cor. XV. 32 ; 1 Thess. v. 6.
The Subjunctive Aorist is used instead of the Imperative in
prohibitions, t
Matt. i. 20 : y.^ <|>op^9iis, fear not.
Matt. V. 17 : y.^ voy.L(rx\ri, think not.
Matt. vi. 2 : p.-^ o-oXirio-xis, sound not a trumpet.
This usage also depends upon the ellipsis of some phrase Hke " see,"
*• take heed," &c., with Xva. In a few instances, a positive command is
expressed by W with the subjunctive (Mark v. 23; 2 Cor. viii. 7;
* The MS. evidence for this reading is very strong ; indeed, in any ordi-
nary case would be overwhelming. Ou internal grounds, however, Tischen-
dorf and others prefer the rec. text, we have peace. In such a case, even the
testimony of MSS. must be taken with great caution ; as it seems to have been
a practice with some ancient transcribers to make Scripture, as they thought,
more emphatic by turning a declaration or a promise into an exhortation.
It could easily be done, as nothing more was needed than to change the o of
the indicative into the a of the subjunctive. So John iv. 42, "let us
believe;" Rom. v. 10, "let us be saved;" Rom. vi. 8, "let us believe;"
1 Cor, xiv. 15, "let me pray ;" 1 Cor. xv. 49, " let us bear the image of the
heavenly" (so Lacbmann) ; Heb. vi. 3, "this let us do;" James iv. 13, "let
us go," &c., and many similar passages. (See Alford's note on Rom. v. 1.)
Mr. Westcott adopts the reading, Ix^'M*".
t This is the regular classical idiom.
§ 375.] THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 341
Eph. V. 33). For the complete phrase, see I Cor. xvi. 10 ; and with
ellipsis of %va, Matt. viii. 4
But the third person of the Aor. Imp. may be used with (li) (Matt,
vi. 3 ; Mark xiii. 16).
376. The Subjunctive is used iu questions expressive of
deliberation or doubt ; thus, ri xoia)(ji€v ; (John vi 2d)) what a/re we
to do ? but Ti iroiov|i€v ; (John xi. 47) what are we doing ? " what
are we about ]" and ri iroii^ariK ; (Matt. xxi. 40) v)hat will he do 7
Mark xii. 14 : 8»|jl€v tj fxrj Swiicv ; are we to give, or not to give ?
Matt. xxvi. 54 : irms ovv irXiipwOwo-iv al ypa(f)aL, how then should
the Scriptures be fulfilled ?
1 Cor. xi. 22 : ri el'irw vfiiv ; iiraivia-m vfias ', wlmt am I to say to
you ? Am I to praise you ?
The second of these verbs might be the fut. indie, the connexion
only showing it to be aor. subj. As the two tenses are alike in the
first pers. sing., it is often doubtful which is meant. So in the pres. of
contracted verbs, ri ttcuw ;
377. A strong denial is expressed by the Subjunctive Aorist
with ov fir), as ov \Lr\ a-e dv», ovS' ov (iifj ae cYKareiXi'ira) (Heb. xiii. 5),
/ wUl assuredly not leave thee, nor will I at all forsake thee.
This idiom arises from a combination of two phrases : jn^, with the
subjunctive elliptical, *'fear lest^^ (see § 384); preceded by ov, with
the word (understood) on which fi^ depends. ' ' There is not any fear
or possibiHty lest I sliould.^^
Matt. V. 18 : Icara €1/ rj fiia Kepaia ov ji.'fj irap^XOrj, one iota (the
smallest letter of the alphabet), or one tittle (the fragment of a
letter*) shall hy no means pass.
Matt. V. 20 : ov p,^ €icrA.0TiT6, ye shall in no wise enter.
Mark xiv. 25 : ovKen ov ix-fi iriw, never will I drink at all. t
See also Matt, xxi v. 2, xxvi, 35 ; Mark ix. 41 ; Luke vi. 37 (twice),
xviii. 17, xxii. 67, 68; John vi. 37, viii. 51, x. 28, xiii. 8; Acts
* As, for instance, that which distinguishes A from A, or in Hebrew,
n from n.
t The additional negative adds strength to the negation.
342 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. [§ 377.
xxviii. 26 (twice, from the LXX. ; so elsewhere) ; 1 Cor. viii. 13 ;
1 Thess. iv. 15 {shall by no means precede), v. 3 ; Heb. viii. 11, 12
(LXX.); 2 Pet. i. 10; Rev. xviii. 21-23; with many other passages.
The study of these emphatic negatives of Scripture is fraught with
interest.
In the following passages only (in the best MSS. and edd. ), the future
is found (see § 363, d) :- -Matt. xvi. 22, xxvi. 35 ; Mark xiv. 31 ; Luke
X. 19 ; John iv. 14, x. 5, xx. 25 (qy ?)*
For the Aorist Subjunctive in a Future-perfect sense, see
§ 383, ^.
The Optative Mood.
378. a. The Optative is used in independent sentences to
express a wish, as 2 Pet. i. 2 : x'^P'-^ ^Z^*'' '««* ci/j^i/j; irXTj9vv0€Ct|, grdce
and peace he multiplied unto you 1
As stated with regard to the Subjunctive (§ 374), the independence
of the sentence is seeming only, a verbal notion on which the Optative
depends being implied, as desire, pray. The Optative is in fact only
another form of the Subjective mood, " the Subjunctive of the historical
tenses. " But this characteristic is almost lost in the New Testament,
where the Optative is comparatively rare.
Rom. XV. 5 : 6 be Qcbs ... Swt] vixIv, now may God grant unto you !
Philemon 20 : va\, dSeX^c, ey« aov 6va£|iTiv €v Kvpla, yea, brotlier,
let me have joy of thee in the Lord !
So Acts viii. 20 ; 1 Thess. iii. 11, 12 ; 2 Thess. iii. 5, &c.
So with the negative, jjirj.
Mark xi. 14 : jirjK^Ti e'/c <tov ... nrjSels Kaprrbv <j)d7oi, let no one ever
eat fruit of thee.
2 Tim. iv. 16 : |iif| avrols \oyia-Qtlii\, may it not be laid to their
charge !
The formula p.^ •y^voiro ! may it not come to pass ! rendered in
E.V. "God forbid!" illustrates the same usage. Luke xx. 16;
Ptom. vi. 2, 15, vii. 13, &c.
* The future indie, with oh txi\ has no perceptible difference of meaning
from that of the aor. s\xh}.—Madvig, § 124, a, 3.
§ 378. J THE OPTATIVE MOOD. 343
But a wish, respecting something past is sometimes expressed by
i'pfXou (really representing an old Second Aorist of a verb, 1 ought,
and in classic Greek followed by an infinitive) used in the New Testa-
ment as a particle with the Indicative. 1 Cor. iv. 8 ; 2 Cor. xi. 1 ;
Gal. V. 12 ; Rev. iii. 15.
h. The particle &v gives a potential sense to the Optative, both
in affirmations and in questions.
Acts xxvi. 29 : cvgai'nTjv &v tw Qe^, I could wish to God.
Acts viii. 31 : ttSs yap &.v 8vvaC|n]v ; nay, for how could I ?
The Moods in Dependent Clauses.
379. A Compound Sentence (see § 187) consists of co-ordinate
clauses, or of a principal clause with subordinate ones.
Subordinate clauses may be infinitive or participial, or they may
))e connected with the principal sentence by relatives or con-
junctions.
For the Infinitive and Participle, see §§ 385-397. For the Relative,
see §§ 343-349. For the Conjunctions uniting co-ordinate clauses, see
§§ 403-407.
380. As a general rule, the moods and tenses in subordinate
clauses are iised as in principal ones.
It must be especially noted that relatives or conjunctions, Mdth
au (idu), the hypothetical particle, generally take the Subjunctive.
Matt. V. 19 : 8s lav ovu Xv<rg, whosoever there/ore shall break.
Matt. V. 20 : lav (et av) fii] Treptcro-cvorri, if it shall not surpass.
Matt. vi. 2 : Srav (ore av) iroifis e\er)jxo(Tvvr]v, luhen thou doest alms.
For oT€ with Indicative, see ch. vii. 2^.
Matt. xvi. 28 : ^<ds fl-v tSwo-i, until they shall have seen.
So with many other passages.
But the Imperfect Indicative is occasionally found when a
matter of fact is spoken of. Mark vi. 56 ; Acts ii. 45, iv. 35
1 Cor. xii. 2.
The use of the moods in object-sentences, in conditional exprea
sianSj and in intentional clauses^ demands separate consideration.
hb
344 DEPENDENT CLAUSES — OBJECTTIVE. [§ 381.
Object-Sentences.
381. When the dependent clause expresses the object of any
of the senses, or the matter of knowledge, thought, belief, &c.,* it
is often introduced by on with the Indicative; although the
Infinitive is more usual.
Luke xvii. 15 : Idau 8ti la0i], seeing that he was healed.
Matt. ix. 28 : Trioreuere 8ti 8vva|iai tovto iroirjo-ai ] believe ye that
I ain able to do this ?
Mark y. 29 : eyva> . . . Sn \!aTai, she perceived that she is Jiealed.
So John xi. 13, xx. 14.
When the verb in the principal clause is in past time, the subordinate
verb is either put in ■present time [Indicaiive), or else in the Optative.
382. a. In the New Testament, quotation is generally direct,
and is introduced without any conjunctive particle.
Matt. viii. 3 : i7\//'aro auroC, Xe'ywi/ 0A.a), Ka6apCar9t)Ti, he touched
him, saying, " I will, be tJwu clean.^^
The particle on, however, is often used to introduce the quoted
words, and is not to be translated, as it answers exactly to our
inverted commas ( " " ).
Matt. vii. 23 : o/xoXoyj^o-© avroh, 8ti ovdeTrore Zyvoav vfiaSf I will
avow unto tJiem, " / never knew you'*
Luke viii. 49 : epx^rai ns irapa rov apxta-vpayoiyov . . . Xeyap avT^f
frri TedurjKiv f) OvycLT-qp (rov, fifj aKvWe top 8i8d(rKaXop, then COmeth one
from the house of the rider of the synagogue, saying unto him,
** Thy daughter is dead, trouble not the Master."
b. In indirect quotation (oratio obliqua) the substance of the
speech is given, not the words. Here, also, the Indicative is
generally employed.
Mark iii. 21 : eXeyoi/ yap 6ti Ig^oPTTj, for they said that he was
beside himself. It is, however, possible that the verb here is a
direct quotation ( Aorist, see § 364), as E. V., they said, " he is mad."
• ** Verba sentiendi et declarandL "
§ 382.] OBJECTIVE CLAUSES INTERROGATION. 345
Of the Optative in the oratio ohliqua, so common in Greek classics,
there is no example in the New Testament excei)t in indirect inter-
rogatives, as in the following paragraph, c, y.
c. Indirect interrogations, another form of the oratio ohliqua,
may be connected with the principal clause by interrogative pro-
nouns or adverbs, or by the particle d, if, whether.
In such clauses, (a) the Indicative shows that the inquiry con-
cerns matter of fact; (3) the Subjunctive expresses objective
possibility — what may or should take place — and always has
respect to present or to future time ; (y) the Optative denotes
subjective possibility — that which may be conceived to exist — and
refers especially to the past.
a. Mark xv. 44 : idavixaaev d ^8t) ri9vr\Ki, he wondered whether Ite
were already dead.
Acts xii. 18 : ^v rdpaxos ov< oXtyos iv rols (TTpaTimTai^ rl dpa 6
Hirpos €"ye'v6To, there was no small stir among the soldiers — whatever
had become of Peter.
Acts X. 18 (Pres. after Imperf.) : liajvOdvovro d 2ifi(ov ... ev6d8^
^ivilerai, they were asking whether Simon . . . lodges here.
Luke xxiii. 6 (Pres. after Aor.) : e-rrcpwrt^o-cv el 6 avdpcoiros TaXiXalos
loTTt, lie asked if the man is a Galilean.
For the Future in the dependent clause, see Mark iii. 2 ; 1 Oor.
vii. 16 ; Phil. i. 22.
/3. Matt. vi. 25 : fxrj peptpvare ... ri 4»a'7i]T€ koI tC iriTiTe, be Qiot
anocious ... what you are to eat and what you are to drink. Com-
pare Luke xii. 22.
Luke xix. 48 : ov^ evpio-Kov rb rl itoii^tToxrKv, they found not what
they should do. Compare Mark xv. 24.
In Rom. viii. 26, the reading varies between irpoff^vicajjicOa (rec,
Lachmann) and irpoa-cv^oneGa (Tischendorf),
y. Luke i. 29 : bLiKoyi^ero iroTairbs €1't) 6 dairaapos ovtos, she was
discussing with herself qf what kind this salutation might be.
346 OBJECTIVE CLAUSES. [§ 382.
Acts xvii. 1 1 : avaKpivovres ras ypai^ds^ el 'iyj:i\. ravra ovtws, Searching
the Scriptures if these things were so.
Acts xvii. 27 : CV'^^^ ^^z/ Geoi/, d &pa -ye x|/T)\a<j)i^ar€iav avrou kol
cvpoiev, to seek Godj* if by any chance they might feel after him
and find him.
The Indicative and Optative constructions are combined in Acts
xxi. 33 : fTTvudavero Ti's Siv dr\ /cat ri cart TreiroiTjKws, he asked who he
might be, and what he had done. He must have done something,
this was clear; but who he was seemed altogether uncertain.
d. After verbs of perceiving, knowing, declaring, and the like,
both an object and an objective sentence are often found.
Luke xix. 3 : e^i^ret Ibeiv Tov 'Itio-ovv, ris coti, he wos seeking to see
Jesus, who he was (is).
1 Cor. iii. 20 : Kvpios yivaxTKei TOi»s StoXoYio-jiovs tcov o-o(pS)v Sti elo-l
(jLiiiTaioi. (LXX.), Jehovah knoweth the reasonings of the wise, that
they are vain.
See also Mark xi. 32, xii. 34 ; John iv. 35, v. 42, vii. 27 ; Acts iii. 10,
XV. 36 J 2 Cor. xii. 3, 4, xiii. 5; 1 Thess. ii. 1, &c. Compare 1 Cor. xv. 12.
A similar construction is occasionally found with "intentional"
clauses, as Col. iv. 17 ; Gal. iv. 11.
Conditional Sentences.
383. A conditional or "hypothetical" sentence contains two
clauses, often called "protasis," or condition, and "apodosis," or
consequence. The former expresses the condition ; the latter, the
thing conditioned. Of these two the protasis is really the depen-
dent sentence, though the apodosis contains the dependent /ac^.
Protasis [condition). Apodosis {consequence).
a. If he speaks, I always listen.
/3. If he speak, I will listen.
y. If he should speak, I should listen.
. j If he spoke, I would listen.
I If he had spoken, I would have listened.
* Unquestionably the true reading, not rhv Kvpioy, as rcc
§ 383.] CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 347
These four sentences illustrate four kinds of hypothesis —
a. The supposition of a fact.
^.
35
J3
of a possibility.
7-
)J
V
of uncertainty.
d.
JJ
))
of something unfulfilled.
Hence arise four distinct forms —
a. The conditional particle el, if, with the Indicative, in the
protasis, assumes the hypothesis as a fact. The apodosis may have
the Indicative or Imperative. [So the Subjunctive with ov firj,
equivalent to future Indicative j or in exhortations, equivalent to
Imperative.]
Matt. iv. 3 : €l vl6s d rov eeov, eWc, k.t.X., if thou art the Son of
God, command, &c., i.e., assuming that thou art.
Acts xix. 39 : cl Se TrepaiTepa f.inX,'r\Tilr€, iv t^ ivvopco €KK\r)aiq
liriXtiG'/jorcTai, but if ye enquire furtlier, it shall he determined in the
legal assembly.
1 Cor. XV. 16 : cl yap veKpol ovK kyiCpovrai, ov^e Xptaros €7ifJY€pTai,
for if the dead arise not, neither has Christ arisen.
Romans iv. 2 : cl A^paap e^ tpyav l8iKaiw0Tj ^ci Kavxqpa, if
Abraham v^as justified by works (assuming that he was so), he hath
a ground of boasting.
See also many other passages, e.g.. Matt. xix. 17; John vii. 4
(present, condition ; imperative, consequence) ; Rom. viii. 25 ; 1 Cor.
vi. 2 (pres. pres.) ; John v. 47 (pres. fut.) ; 2 Pet. ii. 20 (pres, perf.) :
Matt. xii. 26 (pres. aor.); Matt. xxvi. 33 (fut. fut.); Acts xvi. 15
(perf. imperf.); 2 Cor. v. 16 (perf. pres.) ; John xi. 12 j Horn. vi. 5
(perf. fut.); 2 Cor. ii. 5 (perf. perf.), vii. 14 (perf. aor.); Eom.
xi. 17, 18 (aor. imper.); 1 John iv. 11 (aor. pres.); John xv, 20
(aor. fut.) ; Rom. v. 15 (aor. aor.) [1 Cor. \nii. 13, has pres. and aor.
subj. with oh fiij ; Gal. v. 2^, pres. ind., pres, subj,]
/3. Possibility, or uncertainty with the prospect of decision, is
expressed by edv = d dv (very rarely by el alone *) with the Sub-
* See 1 Cor. xiv. 5; Phil. iii. 12 (Luke ix. 13), and a few var. readings,
as Rev. xi. 5.
348 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ 383.
junctiTe in the conditional clause, and the Indicative or Imperativa
in the apodosis.
The eondition hence refers to future time. The Subj. Aor., with idv,
may be rendered in most cases by the Future Perfect.
Matt. xvii. 20 : kav ^Tte ttiotiv hs kokkov (nvdneoi^, epeire, k.t.X., if
ye have faith as a grain of mustard-seed^ ye shall say, &c.
John iii. 3, 5 : lav ^■i\ tis •ycvvt]©^ aptoOev, ov dvvarat tScti/ rfiv
^ao-iXetav row Qeov, excepting one shall have been horn from above,
he cannot see the kingdom, of God.
2 Tim. ii. 5 : lav 8e fcat aOX-g rts, ov arf^avovTai lav ^^ i/ofii/io)?
d0X^<rn, and if any one strive in a contest, lie is not crowned except
he shall have striven according to the rules of tJie game.
y. The Optative in a conditional sentence expresses entire un-
certainty — a supposed case. Here the particle et is always used.
1 Cor. xiv. 10 : el tvxo*-, if if sJbould chance. So xv. 37.
1 Pet. iii. 14 : d koI irdo^oiTe 8ia diKmoaxivrju, fiaKapioi, if ye even
should suffer for righteousness' sake, happy (are ye). See ver. 17.
Actsxxiv. 19, xxviL 39: el Svvaivro, if{hy any possibility) they
could.
d. When the condition is spoken of as unfulfilled, the Indicative
is used in both clauses, with the particle el in the protasis, and av
in the apodosis.
1. The Imperfect (in the apodosis) with au points to present
time, "If this were so now" (which it is not).
2. The Aorist with av jwints to the past, " If this had been so
then" (which it was not). Sometimes the Pluperfect is used, more
emphatically, in the same sense.
1. Luke vii. 39 : oZros, el ^v 7rpo<pTjTrjs, fyivwcKev dv rt'y koX iroTanfi
f} yvvfj, this man, if he were a prophet, would know who and wliat
the woman is.
John V. 46 : el yap lirwrTewere Mwcrr;, lirtareOeTe Av eftoi, for if ye
believed Moses, ye would believe me.
§ 383.] CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 349
Heb. iv. 8 : tl yap avrovs *It](tovs KaTeira-oorev, ovk Av Trepi akXrjs
IXdXct, for if Joshua had given ihern rest, he would not speak of
another day.
So (with Impf. in the protasis) John viii. 42, ix. 41 ; Acts xviii. 14 ;
1 Cor. xi. 31 ; Heb. xi. 15 (with Aor. in the j^rotasis) ; Gal. iii. 21, &c.
Sometimes 6.v is omitted. See John ix. 33, xv. 22, &c.
2. John xiv. 28 : d iri^airctTe ^e, k\a.pr\Ti dv, if ye loved me, ye
would Jiave rejoiced. "Ye would rejoice" would have been
expressed by i^aipere.
So with the Impf. in protasis : Luke xii. 39 ; John xviii. 30 ; Acts
xviii. 14.
1 Cor. ii. 8 : cl yap ^Yvwcrav, ovk &v tov Kvpiov ttjs do^jjs eoTavpaxrav,
for had they known, they would not have crucified the Lord of
glory.
So with the Aor. in protasis : Matt. xi. 21 ; Mark xiii. 20 ; Romans
ix. 29 (Matt. xii. 7 has plup.)
John xi. 21 : Kupte, ct -^S hhe, ovk dv 6 a.he\(l>6s p.ov IreOvirJKei, Lord,
if thou hadst been here, my brother would not have been dead.
Mar J, ver. 32, uses the Aorist.
See 1 John ii. 19.
John xiv. 7 : el b{vd>K&.ri /ne, koX tov narepa fxov eyvtoKtiTc &v, if ye
Jiad known me, ye would have known my Father also.
Intentional Clauses.
384. Intentional clauses are those which express a purpose or
design, following the particles tva, to the end that (with emphasis
on result) ; 8irws, in order that (emphasis on method) ; ^<\, {that) not
or lest.
a. (1) In intentional clauses, the Subjunctive is employed in its
general meaning, to signify objective possibility or intention.
Matt. xix. 13: 7rpoo-r)V€)(dT]a-av ... iva ras x^'^P^^ tiriGf] avrois Ka\
•irpo<rev|TiTai, they were brought . . . that he might i^ut his hands upon
them and pray.
350 INTENTIONAL CLAUSES. [§ 384.
Luke vi. 34 : havel^avcriv tva diroXdpoxriv, they lend that they may
receive hack.
Matt. ii. 8 : aTrayyeiXarf /not, 8ir<as xayo) IkB^v irpoo-KvWjo-ft), hring
me hack word, that I also may come and worship.
Matt. vi. 16 : ac^avl^ova-L ... 8irws <|>av«<ri, they disfigure ... that
they may appear.
So in a great number of passages.
The final intentional clause -with a particle of design must be distin-
guished from the objective clause with on. So Kiyw vfuv Srt, / say to
you that, introduces the matter of the communication ; but 6?7r6 Xva
(Matt. iv. 3), say that, specifies the purpose of what is said, and there-
fore implies command. Now, after verbs expressive of desire, prayer,
and the like, where the matter is coincident with the purpose, the final
and the objective particles seem equally appropriate. As a matter of
fact, however, it will be found that while hope has '6ri, prayer has Iva,
Sirojs. 'E\irtXco on, 1 hope that, i.e., "such is the object presented to my
hope ;" fUxofiai tVo, I pray that, i.e., "such is the purpose to be secured
by my prayer" (2 Cor. i. 13 ; Philemon 22 ; Phil. i. 9 ; 2 Thess. iii. 1, &c.)
In 2 Thess. i. 11, 12, tVo marks the primary, and Sirwv the secondary
result. In 1 Cor. xiv. 13, it is not meant that the disciple is to pray
for the power to interi)ret, but that his gift of prayer is to be so exer-
cised as to involve the power of interpretation. Again, 2 Cor. xiii. 7,
the matter of the prayer is expressed by an infinitive clause ; the
intention by two clauses with ^va.
The Evangelist John often (with, occasionally, others of the New
Testament writers) seems to employ tva simply as explanatory. Thus,
eh. xvii 3: "this is life eternal, that they shoiUd know thee," &c.
So XV. 8 ; 1 John iv. 17, v. 3, &c. (often epexegetic of ovtos) ; but in
other passages the usual meaning of the particle may be taken, as
1 John iii. 1.
Compare Matt. x. 25; Luke xvii. 2; even Phil. ii. 2. ("Fill up my
joy by being of the same mind." — T. S. Green.)
(2) It has been a question with grammariang whether tva ever
means merely so that, expressing evmt without any reference to
purpose. The former presumed use of the particle has been called
its eventual (or ecbatic) sense, the latter its final (or telic*).
Most, however, now agree that the final significance is generally,
* "Iva iK^ariK^v (from iK^alyw, to issue from) ; 'iva Tf \ik6v (from reXoy, ewl).
§ 384.] INTENTIONAL CLAUSES. 351
if not always, discernible. Mr. Webster quotes 1 Thess. v. 4, as a
passage in which " the notion of finality seems lost in the eventual
sense : " Ye are not in darkness, that the day sliouid overtake you
as a thief. But it would seem appropriate enough to represent it
as the intention of darkness that those surrounded with it should
be suddenly surprised. Again, in John xii. 23, xvi. 2, 32, Meyer
justly remarks, "that which shall happen in the c5pa is regarded as
the object of its coming." On Galatians v. 17, Professor Lightfoot
says, "tvtt here seems to denote simply the result, whereas in
classical writers it always expresses the purpose." But surely
this is unnecessary. Bishop Ellicott renders, " ' to the end that ye
may not^ not *so that ye cannot,^ Auth. ; but with the usual and
proper telic force of Iva. The object and end of the to avriKelaBai
(the antagonism) on the part of each principle is to prevent a man
doing what the other principle would lead him to."
For other passages in which the final sense has been questioned, but
where Winer and most modern critics maintain it, see Luke ix. 45
(purposely hidden, as a part of the Divine plan) ; John iv. 36, vii. 23,
ix. 2, xi. 15 ; Romans ix. 11, xi. 31 ; 2 Cor. i. 9, v. 4; Eph. ii. 9, iii. 10.
In these, and in many similar texts, sound criticism seems to require
the meaning, not so that it was, but in order that it migJd be. *
The importance of the discussion is chiefly seen, in relation to
the passages which speak of a Divine purpose, in prophecy or
otherwise. For instance, the words of Old Testament prediction,
Isa. vi. 10, are quoted, Matt. xiii. 14; Mark iv. 12; Luke
A iii. 10; John xii. 40; Acts xxviii. 27 (Matt, and Acts have
from the LXX. (jL-^iroTe, the rest, Iva ... jjl^). Is the passage to be
read, in order that seeing they may not see, &c., or, so that seeing
they see not, or even, because seeing they see not ? We believe
that the former interpretation is the only one admissible. The
blindness was judicial — a punishment inflicted by God on dis-
obedience and hardness of heart.
Again, in the phrase, iva (otto)?) irXripweTi, that it (the Old
* Undoubtedly in the later forms of the language the ecbatic sense became
established. Thus, in modern Greek the Infinitive itself has become super-
seded by a form of the verb with the particle vd for 'Iva.
352 INTENTIONAL CLAUSES. [§ 384.
Testament prophecy) might he fulfilled (Matt. i. 22, il 15, 23,
iv. 14, viii. 17, xii. 17, xiii. 35, xxi 4, xxvi. 56 ; Mark xiv. 49 ;
John xiii. 18, xv. 25, xvii. 12, xviii. 9, xix. 24, 36), are we to
understand the statement to be that so the words were fulfilled^
sometimes, as it would seem, by an accommodation of their mean-
ing, or that the occurrence took place in order that they might he
fulfilled % To answer this question fully, would lead into a discus-
sion of the whole scope and meaning of prophecy. But, as a point
of grammar, there seems every reason why the usual meaning of
the telic particles should be retained. It is the expositor's business
to translate in order to interpret; not to interpret in order to
translate. In some cases, at least, the words quoted could not
•primarily have had the meaning attached to them in the New
Testament \ but in their original acceptation they fell into the
line of the "increasing purpose" which runs through the ages,
and so revealed their highest significance in Messiah's day. The
true key to the passage is not to be found in a perverted use of
the 'particle^ but in an accurate comprehension of the verh*
See, especially, the transaction recorded John xix. 28-30.
Acts iii. 19 : [xeTavorja-aTe ovv /cat fTTLarpiy^aTe^ fls to e^ak€i(f>dTJpai
Vficov ras afuiprlast 8ir«s dv IX0«<ri Kaipol dva^v^ecas, K.r.X., can only bo
translated, repent then, and he converted, tJiat your sin^ may he
hlotted out, in order that seasons of refreshment may come, &c.
The meaning when, as E.V., cannot be sustained. Whatever be
the special reference of KaipoX dvayjrv^eas, they are set forth as the
purposed result of the people's repentance, and denote in some
way the blessings of Messiah's kingdom.
(3) As a negative final particle, standing alone after verbs ex-
pressing fear, caution, anxiety, |i^ has the force of I'va ji^, Sirws |i^.
Matt, xviii 10 : Spare JJlt) KaTeu|>povViorT]T6 ivos twv pi.Kp5>v Tovrav,
see that ye do not despise one of tJiese little ones.
So 2 Cor. viii. 20 ; Gal. vi. 1 ; Heb. xil 15, 16.
* See Olshausen on Matt, i 22. Grotius, and those who have followed
hb criticisms, attach to the verb some such meaning as consummated.
§ 384.] INTENTIONAL CLAUSES. 353
After verbs of fearing, nrj may be translated lest, or that.
2 Cor. xii. 20, 21 : (f)o^ovixaL yap, \ii\ irws iX6a)v ovx otovs de\a)
evpw vfjias, k.t.\., for I fear that when I come I shall not find you
such as I desire, &c.
Acts xxiii. 10, xxvii. 17.
b. A particle of intention may be followed by an Indicative
Future (never with Snas. In Mark v. 23, read Cwv)-
The instances of this idiom are few, and most of them are
contested readings. The Future, where admitted, must be taken
as conveying the idea of duration more vividly than the Aorist
Subjunctive.
Gal. ii. 4 : tva rjfias KaTa8ovX(tf(roviriv, that they should enslave us.
Hev. xxii. 14 : [xaKaptoi oi TrXvvouTes ras crroXas avrcov, iva ^OTai rj
e^ovala avrcov, k.t.X., blessed are they who wash their robes,* that
theirs may be the access, &c. John xvii. 2 j 1 Cor. xiii. 3 ;
1 Pet. iii. 1 ; Kev. iii. 9, xiv. 13. In all these cases the received
text has Subjunctive Aorist.
|jt^ (vrore) is found with the Indicative Future, Heb. iii. 12 :
/SXeTrere, aSeXc^ot, \i.'{\ iroTC ^orrai ev rivi vfi5)V Kap8ia ivovqpa, ania-rias, take
heed, brethren, lest tliere should (shall) be in any one of you an evil
heart of unbelief .
Col. ii. 8.
The Indicative present or perfect after fi)) shows the ellipsis, not of
Iva, but of '6ti ; i.e., the sentence is not intentional, but objective. Luke
xi. 35 : "lest the light is darkness." Gal. iv. 11 : "lest I have laboured."
There are three passages in which the Indicative present seems to be
used in intentional clauses : —
1 Cor. iv. 6 : 'Iva fiij eTs tnrep evhs tpvaiovffQe Kara rov erepov, tliat ye be
not puffed up one for another against yet another.
Col. iv. 17 : 'iva outV TrXr]po7s, that thou fulfil it (the ministry).
Gal. iv. 17 : 'Iva avrohs ^TjAoure, in order that ye may zealously affect them.
It will, however, be noted that all these verbs are of the contracted
conjugation in -Sea ; and it is easier to suppose them examples of an
irregularly formed Subjunctive than of a syntax so anomalous as an
Indicative would be.
* Note here the various reading, accepted by the besif critics.
354 THE INFINITIVE.
The Infinitive.
.[§385.
385. a. The Infinitive Mood is a Verbal Substantive, and
expresses tbe abstract notion of the verb.
Like the verb in other moods, it admits the modifications of tense
and voice. It may have a subject, or may govern an object, near or
remote ; and it is qualified by adverbs. Like a substantive, it may be
the subject or object of a verb ; it is often defined by the article, and is
employed in the different cases.
h. The Negative Adverb with the Infinitive may be ov or fir].
Since ov denies as matter of fact, fii} as matter of thought, and since
the Infinitive generally depends on some verb or clause implying
thought, will, design, the latter will generally be the appropriate
particle.
Matt. ii. 1 2 : xP'?/^"'''**^^^''^^^' . . . |Aif| dvaKdp.tJ/ai npos *Upa>br)v, being
divinely warned not to return to Herod.
Matt. V. 34 : Xeya> vfxiv li'fi 6n6<rai oXtos, I enjoin you not to swear
at all.
So viiL 28, and many other passages. "Where oh is found, it may
generally be connected with the principal verb. (See John xxi. 25.)
c. The Infinitive governs the same case as the other parts of
the verb.
Matt. vii. 11 : oiSare 8(5|xaTa d^aGoL 8i8<Jvai rots t^kvois v/xcoj/, ye
know how to give good gijts unto your children.
Luke XX. 35 : ol hk Kara^ioodevres tov alaivos iKiCvov rvytlv, koi Tfjs
dvacrrdo-ews rrjs fK v€Kp«v, they wlio are deemed worthy to obtain tl^at
life and the resurrection from the dead.
Compare the rules on the use of the cases after verbs.
386. The distinction between the Tenses of the Infinitive is
analogous to that in the Imperative and Subjunctive. The
Present marks continuity; the Aorist, a single act ; the Future
(very rare in the New Testament), intention ovfutuHty ; and the
Perfect, a com,pleted act.
§ 386.] THE INFINITIVE. 355
Matt. xiv. 22: rjvayKaa-e tovs ixndrjras lp.pfjvai ... koi irpoaYciv avrov,
7te made the disciples embark (a single act), and go before him
(continuous).
Acts xxvii. 10: fieXKeiv ^orco-Oai rou TrXoyj/, that the voyage is
going to be.
Acts xxvi. 32 : diroXeXitGrOat ibvvaro 6 avdpooTros ovtos, this man
could have been set at liberty.
The Present Infinitive might more properly be called the Imperfect,
referring, like the Perfect, to state rather than to time. The time is
fixed by the principal verb.
387. The Subject of the Infinitive, when expressed, is
always in the Accusative case.
For the explanation of this rule, with examples, see § 285.
But the Subject of the Infinitive, when the same with that of
the preceding verb, is generally omitted, words agreeing with it
being in the nominative.
Rom. XV. 24 : eX7rt^a> Siairope-uojievos dfaaaa-Oai vfjias, I hope to see
you (in) passing through.
2 Cor. X. 2 : deofiat Se, TO iif) irapwv, but I pray that I may not
(when) present be bold.
388. The Infinitive, with or without the Article, may form
the Subject of a sentence.
Rom. vii. 18 : to yap OeXeiv napaKeirai poi, to Se KaTep-ydteo-Gai to
Kokov oij, for to will is present with Tne, but to accomplish the good
Is not.
Gal. vi. 14 : c/iot Se /i^ ye'yoiTo Kavxdo-0ai, but far be it from me to
glory I
Eph. V. 12: alaxpop eari koi XiyaVy even to mention ...is dis-
graceful.
A peculiar kind of extended subject is formed by the Infinitive with
iyeyero, it came to pass that... Thus, Acts ix. .3: iydvero ahrhv iyytCeiv
if AafLaaK^, it came iopass that he was approaching Damascus, lit, "His
356 THE INFINITIVE. [§ 388.
approach to Damascus occurred." So Mark ii. 23; Luke vi. 1, 6;
Acts iv. 5, xvi. 16, &c. Acts xxii. 17 has a combination of construction:
It happened to me when I had returned [ixoi vnoaTpc^avTi) to Jerusalem^
and as I was praying {irpoafvxo/ifyou fiou, gen. abs.) in the temple that
I was {yey^adai fie) in an ecstasy, &c.
- The Subject Infinitive may have its own Accusative Subject.
Matt. xvii. 4 : koKov icmv T||jias &Se civat, it is good for us to he here.
1 Cor. xi. 13 : Trpenov iari ^vvaiKa dKaTaKdXvTrrop rS Qea npoa-ev-
X^adai, it is becoming /or a woman to pray to God uncovered.
Matt, xviii. 8 : koKov aoi eoTiv eiaeXSciv els rfjv ((ofju X**^^^ ^
KvXXdv, it is good for thee to enter into life Imli or maimed^ the
pronoun vk being understood from aoi before elaekQeiv.
389. a. The Infinitive regularly stands as the Object of verbs
denoting a mental faculty, impression, or act — such as to he ahle^
to hear, see, believe, know, wish, hope, endeavour, &c. ; and an
assertion of thought or will, as to say, announce, proclaim, com-
mand, forbid, &c,*
In this connection also the Infinitive may have its own Subject, and
may take or omit the Article.
Matt. vi. 24 : ovbeXs SvvaTcu bvcrX Kvpiois SovXevciv, no man is able
to serve two masters.
Rom. i. 22 : <|»(l<rK0VT€s clvai o-oc^oi incopdvOrjcrav, professing to he
wise they became fooh.
Phil. ii. 6 : ou^ ap-iraYnbv ^Y-^o-aro rb clvai taa 0ew, lie esteemed not
his being on an equality with God a prize to be seized on.
Here the object Infinitive is defined by the article ; Icra 0- is the pre-
dicate of the Infinitive in apposition with the subject {taa is adverbial) ;
and apirayfjL6v is in predicative apposition with the Infinitive itself.
h. The Infinitive may be employed, for the expression of inten-
tion or result, as an adjunct (1) to a verbal predicate.
Matt, ii 2 : <jXOo(tcv irpoo-Kwiio-ai avra, we came to worship him.
Matt rx. 28 ; 1 Cor. i. 17 ; R«v. xvL 9, &c.
♦ "Verba sentiendi v<u declarandi," &c.
5 389.] THE INFINITIVE. 357
(2) Au Infinitive in this sense may depend upon a Substantive,
as in the frequent phrase 6 i)(oiv wra olkovciv, he that hath ears to
hear. So Acts xiv. 5 ; Heb. xi. 15, &c.
(3) It may depend upon an Adjective, as Luke xv. 19 : ovKen
(Ifil Agios KXi]0fivai vlos (ToVf I am no longer worthy to be called thy
son.
So with 8wvaT<Js, Acts ii. 24 ; 2 Tim. i. 12 ; Uavos, Mark i. 7 ;
IXevOcpos, 1 Cor. vii. 39 ; ^oi|ios, Luke xxii. 33, &c. Once with
&81KOS, Heb. vi. 10, ^^God is not unjust to forget.'"
390. The Infinitive with the oblique cases of the Article
(substantivized, §§ 201, 204) is employed as follows : —
a. Genitive.
1. Dependent upon nouns —
Luke X. 19 : bldcofii vfxlv t\v egovo-Cav tov irarciv, k.t.\., I give to
you the power of treading ^ &c.
Acts XX. 3 : eyevero Tv^K-'H "^^^ 4iro<rTp^4)€iv, he had an intention of
returning.
Acts xxvii. 20 : Traaa eXiris tov crw^ca-Oai ^/xay, all hope of Our
being saved.
Acts xiv. 9; 2 Cor. viii. 11; Phil. iii. 21, &c. So with words signi-
fying time (time for), Luke i 57, ii. 6, 21, xxi. 22 ; 1 Pet. iv. 17 ;
JElev. xiv. 15.
2. Dependent upon verbs that usually take a genitive —
Luke i. 9 : ^Xaxe tow 0v(jiido-ai, he had obtained the lot of sacri-
Jidng.
2 Cor. i. 8 : mo-tc IgairopTiOfjvai ^fias koL tov Sgv, SO that we
despaired even of life.
1 Pet. iiL 10 (LXX.) So after adjectives, Luke xxiv. 25; Acts
xxiii. 15. Especially, with verbs signifying hindrance, Luke iv. 42;
Kom. XV. 22.
3. Expressive of design, like ha with Subjunctive, or eveKa with
Genitive —
358 THE INFINITIVE. [§ S&O.
Matt. ii. 13 : /xeXXet yap 'Hpaydrjs C^T€iv to iraidlov tow diroX^(rai awro,
for Herod will seek the young child to destroy it.
So Matt. iii. 13, xxi. 32, xxiv. 45; Luke xxiv. 29; Acts xiii 47
(LXX.) ; Heb. x. 7 (LXX.), &c.
But sometimes the notion of design seems almost or entirely
lost in that of result. See also under iva (§ 384).
Acts vil. 19 : ovtos ... eKUKCoaev tovs Trarepas f]p.av toO iroicti' rA
^pecjiT} eKOera avrav, this man . . . ill-treated our fathers^ so that they
caused their babes to be exposed.
Compare Acts iii. 12 ; Rom. i. 24, viL 3.
b. Dative.
The Dative of Cause. (See § 280 c.)
2 Cor. ii. 13 : ovk eo-xqKa aveaiv ... t4> |i^ €vp€iv pe Tirov top d8e\(f>6p
aov, I had no rest through my not having found Titus my brother.
In 1 Thess. iii. 3, ry, rec. , should be t6. The above instance ia tha
only one.
c. The Genitive, Dative, or Accusative, with Prepositions.
A few illustrations of this usage will be sufficient, as the pre-
positions are taken in their ordinary meaning. (See §§ 288-307).
8id, with Genitive, "through."-
Heb. ii. 15 : 8id iravro^ tow t'Hv, through all their lifetime,
8iA, with Accusative, " on account of."
Matt. xiii. 5 : Sia Tb p,^ "k^iw ^dOos ... 8toL rh ii-?) ^civ pl^av, OTi
account of its Jtaving no depth ...on account of its having no root
So, with ace. subject, Matt. xxiv. 12; Mark v. 4; Luke ii. 4,
xi. 8, &c.
«ls, "to the end that."
Matt. XX. 19 : ds rh Ifiirailai koI \ia<my<aa-a^ kgi orawpwo-ai, to
mock and scourge and crucfy.
So Mark xiv. 55 ; Luke v. 17, with subject, &c. Both tit and irpi»
express purpose, but irpds the more emphatically.
§ 390.] THE INFINITIVE. 359
4v, "in, during," especially of time.
Matt. xiii. 25 : Iv di KaOewSciv rovs dvdpcaTrovs, and while men slept.
So also Matfc. xxvii. 12 ; Mark ii. 15 ; Luke i. 21, &c.
jierd, with Accusative, " after."
Matt. xxvi. 32 : (JtcTo, 8e rh c-yepOfjvat /*€, but after I have risen.
So Luke xii. 5, xxii. 20 ; Acts i. 3, &c.
irpo, " before," opposed to fierd.
Matt. vi. 8 : irpb tov vfxds airfjo-ai avTop, hefoi'e ye ask him.
So Luke il 21, xxii. 15 ; John i. 49, &c.
irp<Js, with Accusative, " in order to."
Matt. vi. 1 : irpbs rb 6€a6f]vai avroty, in order to he gazed at by
them.
So Matt xiiL 30, xxvi. 12 ; Mark xiii. 22, &c. Once, in reference to^
Luke xviii. 1.
Once dvrC is found, James iv. 15, instead of your saying ; and
lv€Kct, 2 Cor. vii. 12, for the sake of your zeal being made mani-
fest. 'Ews, " until," occurs with Gen. inf., Acts viii. 40, until he
came.
391. To express result, the particle coare is often prefixed to
the Infinitive. It should be noted that worrc is jproperly ecbatic, as
distinguished from telic particles. Compare § 384.
Matt. viii. 24 : creia-iios fieyas eyeVero ... «<rT6 to TrXoiov KaXi>irT6<r0ai,
there arose a great stormy so that the vessel was being covered.
Matt. xiii. 32 : ctcm eXGciv ra nerciud, so tJmt the birds came.
Luke viii. 52 : wcrre Iroip-do-ai avra, so as to make ready for him.
Acts xvi. 26 : wo-re <roX€v0fivai to. ^f/j€>ta, SO that the foundations
were shaken.
So in a great number of passages. Twice only aare is found in
this meaning with the Indicative.
John ili. 16 : ooras ydp rjydnija-fv 6 Qebs tov Koajiov ucm rov vlor
c c
ZC»0 THE INFINITIVE. [^ 391.
avTov Tov fiovoycuTj ^8»K6v, K.T.X., God so loved the world that lie gave
his ordy-hegotten Son, &c.
So also Gal. ii. 13.
The proper distinction between the Infinitive and Indicative in this
connection is, that the former expresses the result as the natural and
logical consequence of what has been previojiisly enunciated the latter
states it simply as a fact which occurs or has occurred. *
392. In Phil. iii. 16, we find the Infinitive employed for the
Imperative : ets 6 eipddo-afMevy r&J avr<5 oToixiiv, whereto we have
attained, in the same direction walk ye onward.\
The use of y^oX^wv in salutation is similar, "greeting," Acts
XT. 23, xxiii. 26 ; James i. 1 (2 John 10, 11, suggests an ellipsis
here). This habitual phrase reappears as a more decided Impera-
tive, Rom. xii. 15, with an antithetic verb : xf3X^\.\ fiera xf^i-povrayv,
KXaCciv fiera Kkaiovrayv, rejoice with the rejoicing, weep with the
weeping.
Participles.
393. The Participles " partake " the nature of Yerbs and
of Adjectives.
Like verh.% they have the modifications of Voice and Tense; and
may have an object, immediate or remote. Like adjectives, they agree
with substantives, expressed or understood ; and are subject to the
exceptional constructions of /Synesis, or "rational concord."
On these points, therefore, nothing need be added to the ndes already
given.
The tenses of the Participle conform iu meaning to those of the
Indicative. Their various use will be seen in the examples given
under the following sections.
The negatives used with Participles follow the general law.
Thus, ovK eiSoTfy, "not knowing," as a matter of fact ; ji^ ftSoVfr,
" not knowing," as a matter of supposition, such ignorance being
presumed as the ground of any further assertion respecting them.
* See Bishop EUicott on Gal. ii. 13. He adds, *' The distinction is not
always observed."
t ElUcott The rest of the verse (rec. ) is omitted by the best critics.
§ 393.] PARTICIPLES. 3t)l
Compare Gal. iv. 8, with 1 Thess. iv. 5 ; 2 Tliess. i. 8. As,
however, the Participle is generally expressive of some condition,
the negative employed is in most cases |jt^.
When a Participle has a Subject of its own in a separate clause,
the construction is the Genitive Absolute,' for which see § 27d
The following rules give the use of Participles I'eferring to th'
Subject or Object of another verb.
394. Participles are predicative or attributive. Their pre
dicative uses may be classified as follows : —
1. After the forms of the substantive verb, a Participle may be
used as a simple or "primary" predicate.
This construction is confined to tlie present and perfect Participles,
With the latter, certain parts of the verb to be make regular compound
tense-forms, as the third person phir., perf. and plup. Passive. (See
Paradigms.) The usage is extended, however, to the singular number
and to other persons. Luke iv. 16 : o§ ^v Tedpafifj-evos, whet^e he had been
brought up, John iii. 28 : cmeaTaKii4vos elfji.1, I have been sent. With
the present Participle, the substantive verb gives a continuous sense,
forming what are called the "resolved tenses." (See §§ 362, e, 363, e.)
The resolved tense must be distinguished from the use of the Parti-
ciple as secondary predicate. For example, 2 Cor. v. 19 is not to be
read, God was reconciling the world in Christ, but as E.V., God was in,
Christ reconciling, &c.
Luke xxiv. 32 : oux^ ^ Kapbla fjfxcov Kaiop.^vTj -fiv cV ^fiiv ; was not
our heart burning within us ?
Sometimes this construction appears very nearly equivalent to the
simple verb, as Mark xiii. 25 (compare Matt. xxiv. 29. ) So Acts ii, 2 :
James i. 17, iii. 15. In other cases, there is a greater stress upon the
notion of state or duration: Pres., Acts xxv. 10; Rev. i. 18; Matt.
X. 26; Luke vi. 43; 2 Cor. ix. 12; Gal. iv. 24 (not "which things
are an allegory,''^ but are allegorized, i.e., susceptible of allegorical
application; anva being used, not a, see § 349.) ; Col. ii, 23; 1 Cor.
XV. 19; 2 Cor. ii. 17; Impf., Matt. vii. 29, xix. 22; Mark i 39;
Luke i. 22, xv. 1, xxiii. 8 ; Acts xxi. 3 ; GaL i. 22, 23 ; Put., Matt. x. 22;
Luke i. 20, v. 10, xxi. 24.
In Luke iii. 23, avrhs •^j/ 6 'It}<tovs wa-el irwy rpidKovra apxSfxevos, we
must understand, Jesus himself was covimencing (his ministry) at about
the age of thirty (for gen., see § 266), not " began to be about thirt3^"
362
PREDICATIVE PARTICIPLES. [§ 394.
2. Certain verbs, expressive of perception, or the conditions of
an action, are complemented by a Participle, instead of an
Infinitive.
If the verb is neuter or passive, the Participle agrees with the Subject;
if active, with the Object.
Such verbs in the New Testament are (1) neuter; iravoixai, tcX^w
(SioXeCirft), Iykok^w), all variously signifying desistence from a thing ;
«|»a£vofiai, to be manifest, and XavOavw, to he secret^ in doing anything
(2) active ; oLkovw, •yivwo-Kw, opdw, pXcirci), &c.
Luke V. 4 : ws lirowo-aTo XaXdiv, when he ceased speaking.
Acts V. 42, vi. 13, xiii, 10, xx. 31, xxi. 32; Eph. i 16; CoL i. 9;
Heb. X. 2.
Matt vi. 18 : yifj <J>avt,s rots av6pa>iTois vti<rTeii«v, that thou appear
not to men a^s fasting ; ver. 16.
Matt. xi. 1 : ore ctA-co-cv . . , Skardo-o-wv, when he made an end of
commxinding.
Luke vii. 45 ; Gal. vi. 9 ; Matt. i. 18 (pass.)
Heb. xiii. 2 : ^XaOdv rives |€vi<ravT«s ayycXour, so'}ne unawares
entertained (were secret in entertaining) angels*
Luke iv. 23 : So-a -^Kovoraficv 'ycvd|icva eV tij KaTTfpmov/x, wliatever
things we heard of as done in Capernuum.
Mark xiv. 58; Acts ii. 11, vii. 12; 2 Thess. iii. 11, &c.
Heb. xiii. 23 : yivuxTKere jhv A8€X<|>J)v TifJioOeov diroXcXvucvov, know
that our brotlier Timothy/ has been liberated.
Acts viii. 23 ; Heb, x. 25.
Some of these verbs may also be followed by an inf. or by a
finite verb with 8ti. Thus compare 2 Thess. iii. 11, with
John xii. 18 and 34.
When the predicative Participle is used, the real Object of the verb is
in the noun. In the infinitive construction, the Infinitive contains tiie
Object, and Sri reduces the thing heard to the form of a proposition.
* A very common classic idiom.
§ 394.] PREDICATIVE PARTICIPLES. 363
So 3 John 4 : 6,Kov(a to ifih tckj/o iv o\7j0eto TrcpiiraTovuTa is / hear of
my children, that they walk in truth.
irfptvare^v would have been, "I hear of the conduct of my children,
that they walk," &c.
Srt irepiiraTovffiv would have meant. The tidings brought to me are
these, that, &c.
Again ; 1 John iv. 2 ; 6iJ.o\oyei 'IrjcroCj' Xpiarhu iv aapKi i\T]\v6oTa, con-
fessen Jesus Christ come in the flesh (not who came, which would have
required Thv i\...). fKi^Kveeuai would have signified, that Jesus Christ
has come. (Comp. 2 John 7. )
So with neuter verbs : Sircas <paPoi<Ti rots av9pdnrois v-riareiovrfs, that they
may appear unto men fasting, i.e., the fasting was real, mjcrrdeiu would
have implied that the fasting was only apparent. On the contrary,
iiraire7v ahx^^opiai, Luke xvi. 3, means / am ashamed to beg; iirairwv
would have meant, I am ashamed of begging. *
3. A Participle without the Article, and in grammatical concord
with the Subject of the verb, may stand as adjunct to the verbal
Predicate.
These adjuncts may be of various kinds, as—
a. Modal, setting forth the manner in which the given action
was performed.
Matt. V. 2 : eS/Sao-Kei/ avrovi \4yav, he tatight tlienij saying.
Matt. xix. 22 : dn^Xde XvirovjAcvos, he went away sorrovjful.
Matt. xi. 25, &c. : diroKpiGels cItt€v, lie said, having addressed
himself to reply, " he answered and said."
Matt, xxviii. 19 ; Acts iii. 8, xiii. 45 ; 1 Tim. i. 13. For the aor. Part.
marking the commencement of the action, see Acts i. 24 ; Rom. iv. 20.
h. Temporal, denoting (i) a contemporaneous, (ii) preceding, or
(iii) consequent fact.
(i) Pres. Acts v. 4 : ovxi i^^vov ao\ e/iei/e ; vjhile it remained did
it not remain thine ?
Matt. vi. 7; Acts xxi. 28; 1 Tim. i. 3, when I was on my way ;f
* See Rev. T. S. Green's "Greek Testament Grammar," p. 183.
t There is here a strong argument for an apostolic journey after Paul's
Roman imprisonment, as no part of the history in the Acts corresponds
with this mission of Timothy,
364 PREDICATIVE PARTICIPLES. [§ 394.
Heb. xi. 21 ; Rom. xv. 25 {ministering ; he had already entered on hia
errand of ministry) ; 1 Pet. i. 8, 9 {while ye see not ...yet believe ... while
(also) ye receive).
(ii) Aor. Acts ix. 39 : dvaoT-ds de Uerpos avvrjXdev avroty, and
Peter Jiaving arisen went with them^ i.e., " arose and went with
them," as E.Y.
This use of the Aor. Part, is one of the most common idioms in the
New Testament, and may be continually represented in translation by
two verbs — the action of the one (the Participle) j>receding that of the
other. Or we may render by some such preposition as aftej', upon, with
the verbal noun ; or by a temporal clause with wlien.
Acts iii. 3 : 6s I8«v , . . Tjpwra, who saw . . . and asked ; or, on
seeing . . . asked ; or, wlien he saw . . . asked.
So ver. 4, 7, 12, iv. 7, 8, 13 {while beholding (pres. ) and having ascer-
tained), 15, 18, 19, 21, 23, 36, 37, &c. In fact, there is scarcely any
usage more common in the New Testament.
(iii) Fut. Acts viii. 27 : 6s iXrjXvdei irpoo-KWi^o-wv els 'lepouo-aXj)/x,
who had come to Jentsalem to worship.
This idiom (the Fut. Part, to express a purpose) is rare in the New
Testament. (SeeActsxxiv.il.)
c. A Participle often expresses some relation of cause, condition,
&c., to the principal verb. This relation the general sense of the
passage will show.
Causal. Acts iv, 21 : airekvaav avrovs, \ir\Zkv ti)pl<rKOVT«s, /e.r.X.,
they released them, as they found nothing, &c.
Concessive. Rom. i. 32 : oItiv^s t6 diKaiafia tov Qfov iTri-yvovres . . .
avra Troiovaiv, /e.r.X., who, though made aware of tJie righteous
decree of God ...do these things, &c.
Conditional. Rom. ii. 27 : koI Kpivd rj €k (Pvaeas aKpo^varla rhu
vofiov TcXovo-a, K.r.X., and (shall not) that which naturalli/ is uncir-
cumcision, if it fulfil the law, judge thee, &c.
Matt, vi 27 (by anxious care) ; Rom. viii. 23 ; 2 Cor. v. 2
(because we desire).
d. Intensive^ a Hebraism. (Compare § 280, b.) Like the cognate
dative noun, a Participle of the same verb may be employed.
§ 394.] PREDICATIVE PARTICIPLES. 365
Jleb. vi. 14: ivkoyiav ivXoy^a-O) ae, koI ttXtiOvvwv nX-qOvvw ae,
I ,will bless thee, and multiplying I will multiply thee. (LXX. j
Gen. xxii. 17.)
iSo Matt. xiii. 14 ; Acts vii. 34.
A predicative Participle may be qualified by <os, as, as if,
declaring the alleged ground of an assertion.
Luke xvi. 1 : die&Xrjdrj ... ws SiaorKopiritwv, k.t.X., he was accused,
as though wasting, &c.
Luke xxiii. 14 : Tvpoa-qviyKare /ixoi tov avOpcdnov tovtov «s dirocTTpi-
<{>ovTa TOV Xaov, ye brought before me this man on the charge of
perverting the people.
1 Cor. vii. 25.
In like manner, the particles Kalirep, Kairoi, although, may be em-
ployed.
Heb. V. 8 : Kai-rrep wv vl6s, although he was a son.
So Heb. iv. 3, with gen. abs. ; vii. 5, i^ehrjKvdSras, in apposition with
obj. ; 2 Pet. i. 12.
395. Participles as epithets are used like adjectives.
Acts xxi. 26 : rf) IxoF^Tl 'hV'^P^i ^^ l^^ next day.
1 Tim. i. 10 : ei rt erepov ttJ v-yiatvovo-r] SiSacrKoXCi}. avrUeirai, if
anything else is opposed to the healthful teaching (of the faith).
For other instances of this participle, see vi. 3 ; 2 Tim. i. 1 3,
iv. 3 ; Titus i. 9, ii. 1.
396. With the Article, the Participle is equivalent to the
relative with the finite verb.
It may thus stand in apposition with a noun in any relation to the
sentence, or may be used alone, the substantive being understood.
Matt. i. 16 : ^Irjaovs 6 Xc^ojicvos Xpiaros, Jesus who is called
Christ.
Mark vi. 2 : ^ o-o^ta tj 8o0et<ra avrco, the wisdom which is given
unto him.
366 ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLES. f^ 396.
Luke xxi. 37 : ro opos rh KaXoujievov ^EXaicov, to the mount that is
called ^^ of Olives.'^
1 Cor. ii. 7 : XaXoO/xei/ Qeov (roc^lav . . . Tf|v diroK€Kpv)i,|i^vi]V, we speak
the wisdom of God . . . that hath been hidden.
1 Thess. iii. 15: t«v koX tov Kvpiov AiroKTcivdvTtov ... /cat rifias
€K8i«|dvT«v Koi Qea {J.^ dp€(rK<{vT«v, (of the Jews) who both slew the
Lord . . . and drove us out, and do not please God.
By a comparison of examples, the distinction between the use of the
Participle with and without the Article will be clearly seen, b SiSdaKwv
is he who teaches; 6 SiSd^as, he who taught; whereas SiddnKwu alone
would mean while he was teaching, and 5i5a|as, when he liad taught.
The Particii)le and Ai*ticle often form a substantive phrase. See
§§ 200, 204 : 6 <nre(p»v, he who sows, a sower.
In some cases the substantivized participle appears to have lost
all temporal reference.
Eph. iv. 28 : 6 kX^tttwv fxi^Ken KkfirreTcaf let him that stealeth, steal
no more. Here 6 Kke'^as, he who stole (once), would be too weak
in meaning, while 6 KXfirTrjs would be too strong.*
So Heb. xi. 28. "With an Object we find the same construction.
Gal. i. 23 : 6 SidiKup rtfjLcis trori, our former persecutor.
1 Thess. i. 10 : *Iii<tovv rlv pvofifvov tihus, Jesus our deliverer.
Winer quotes also Matt, xxvii. 40; John xii. 20; Acts iii. 2; Gal. ii. 2;
Romans v. 17 ; I Thess. v. 24 ; 1 Pet. i. 17. But in some of these pas-
sages there may well be a special reference to the time then present.
So John xiii. 11 : He knew rhu vapaSlSovra avrSv, the man tfien betraying
him, i.e., who was then at work for that purpose.
The Present may occasionally be explained according to § 361 {d}.
Matt. xxvi. 28 : tovto etrn to alpd ftov ... to nepi iro\\ci>u lKXvv<5|t«vov,
this is my blood which is being shed (i.e., to be shed) /or many. So
8i8($|jLcvov, being given, Luke xxii. 19 ; KX(&(i€vov, 1 Cor. xi. 24.
In other cases, the ordinary meaning of the Present is to be
taken. Acts ii. 47 : " the Lord was adding daily to the church,"
Toiis <ra>to|Ji^vovs, those wlu) were being savedy i.e., in the course or
• Stier, Ellicott, Alford.
^ 396.] ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLES. 367
way of salvation. 2 Cor. ii. 15 : " we are of Christ a sweet savour
unto God, in those who are being saved, and in the perishing " (rots
o-(a^o|jL6Vois Koi ev rots diroXXvii^vois). 2 Cor. iii. 1.3: "so that the
children of Israel could not look to the end of tlmt which was
vanishing awaif (tov KaTap-yovjx^vov), viz., the glory on the counte-
nance of Moses.
397. In some cases, a participle seems to stand alone, the verb
to which it is an adjunct being at a distance from it, or the con-
struction of the sentence being broken.*
Rom. V. 11 : Kavxt&p.€vot must be connected with (r<i)9'r](ro|j.60a,
ver. 9, we shall he saved — and not only that, but saved with joyful
conscioiLsness of the blessing.
1 Pet. ii. 18-iii. 7 : {iiroTa<r<r(J(i€Vot, {nroTao-<r<J|j.6vai, aYaOoiroiovo-ai,
ji,^ <|>opoi5(i€vai, <rvvoiKovvT€s, are not for imperatives, as has been
supposed, but are adjuncts to Tip-^oraTc, ii. 17 : render due honour to
all ... ye servants by subjection ...ye wives by subjection, well-doing,
fearlessness, ye husbands by dwelling vnth them, dec.
2 Pet. i. 20 : 7iv«&o-kovt6s continues the thought of irpoo-^ovrcs,
dependent on KaXws iroictre, ver. 19, ye do well in taking heed,
knowing this first. So ch. iii. 3 ; read with nvtio-Ofjvai, ver. 2.
Instances of broken structure (anacolouthon) may be found in Acts
xxiv. 5: having found this man, &c., v)ho also endeavoured to profane
the temple, whom also we laid hold of, instead of "we laid hold of him."
2 Cor. V. 6, 8 : being confident — yea, we are confident and well pleased ;
• the sentence, but for the pai-enthesis of ver. 7, being evidently intended
as "we, being confident, are well pleased." 2 Cor. vii. 5: where
e\i$6fifvoi is really in apposition with the ij/tels implied in rj aap^ rjt»MV.
Heb. viii. 10, where /cal interrupts the structure of the sentence : Eph.
iv. 1-3 ; Col. iii. 16, &c.
♦ See Winer's collection and explanation of instances, § 45, 6.
368
ADVERBS. [§ 398.
Chapter YIL— AD7EEBS.
398. Adverbs qualify verbs and adjectives as in other
languages.
The rules for the formation of derivative Adverbs, with lists of the
Adverbs most in use, are given, §§ 126-134.
The use of Adverbs with the Article is shown, § 198.
399. Adverbial phrases are very frequent in the New Testa-
ment, and are of various kinds.
a. A substantive, with or without a preposition, may be adver-
bially used. (Compare §126) The modal dative is adverbial
(§ 280, a). So sometimes the accusative, as rfjv apxi^v, John viii. 26,
essentially (Alford). Many phrases with Kara are adverbiaJ (see
§ 300, 6). Specirtl adverbial combinations are : airb p-^povs, par-
tially, Rom. xi. 25; 2 Cor. i, 14, ii. 5. iK |i^povs, individually^
1 Cor. xii. 27; partially, 1 Cor. xiii. 9, 10, 12. Ka*rel fji^povs, joar-
tictdarly, Heb. ix. 6. diri jiias (yj/to/zj/s), "with one consent,"
unanimously, Luke xiv. 18. els to iravreX^s, "in any wise," Luke
xiii. 11; "to the uttermost," Heb. vii. 25 ; utterly, kv dXi]8c£^
"in truth," truly, Matt. xxii. 16, <kc. kv 8iKaio<rvvxi, righteously,
Acts xvii 31. €v Ikt€vc{^ instantly, "in earnestness," Acts xxvi. 7.*
nr' &XT)96Cas, "of a truth," truly, Luke xxiL 59.
For the force of these and similar phrases, see under the
respective })repositions.
James iv. 5 : npoj <p66vov iTmroOfl t6 wfrfiat Kart^Kiaey (Lachniann) iv
^ rifjuv. This difficult i)assage should probably be rendered, Jealously does
t/ie Spirit which he placed in us desire (us for his own, Alford). This
adverbial force of the substantive with irp6s is common in classical
Greek, though elsewhere without parallel in the New Testament.
h. For the adjective used adverbially, see § 319.
§ 399.] - ADVERBS. 369
c. For adverbial notions conveyed by means of participles, see
§ 394, 3.
d. An adverbial phrase is sometimes formed by a combination
of two verbs. So in the Old Testament often, " He added and
spake," or, " He added to speak," for " He spake again," an idiom
copied by the LXX. from the Hebrew.
Luke XX. 11, 12: Trpoa-eOcro iri^^a.\., he added to send; where
Mark xii. 4, reads irdXiv direcrrctXe, he sent again. Acts xii. 3 :
irpoo-€0€To (TvXXaPciv, he proceeded to apprehend, or, "further appre-
hended." But Luke xix. 11, irpoo-Gfts etircv is the participial con-
struction, he added and spake.
Some expositors have unnecessarily intei-preted other verbal com-
binations as adverbial; e.g., Luke vi. 48: ea/ca^/e ko.\ ifiddwe, "he
digged deep," E. V., but rather, Jie dug and deepened, the second verb
being an advance upon the first. So Rom. x. 20 : Isaiah is very bold,
and saith, not " very boldly saith ;" Col. ii. 5 : rejoicing (over you) and
seeing, not "seeing with joy" (comp. Ellicott's note) ; James iv. 2: ye
murder and envy, not "envy murderously," or "murder enviously"
(see Alford). So in many other passages.
400. For a list of the Adverbs used as prepositions governing
cases, see § 133. These may enter into combination with other
adverbs, as Matt. xi. 12 : ^©s fipn, until now. So John ii. 10,
V. 17, &c. Matt. xvii. 17: U% irdre; how long "i lit., "until
when f So Mark ix. 19; Luke ix. 41 ; John x. 24: how long
dost thou keep our minds in suspense 2 (Alford). Matt, xviii.
21, ^'1 : 2«s lirrdKis, /c.r.X., until seven times, &c. See also Matt,
xxiv. 21 (art.), xxvii. 8 (art.) Mark xiv. 54 : ^«s 2<r«. Luke
xxiii. 5 : 2«s «8€. Acts xxi. 5 : ^«s 2g«, &c. So Rom. i 13 : dxp'-
Tov 8ei)po, until now, lit., " until the (time) hitherto," viii. 22 ;
1 Cor. iii. 14 ; Phil. i. 5.
The use of the Article with the latter Adverb, however, renders it
simply equivalent to a Substantive.
401. Repeated reference has already been made "to the distinc-
tion between the negative Adverbs ov and ^''h- Oenerally speaking,
370 ADVERBS. [§ 401.
ov denies as matter of fact, nj) as matter of thought, supposition, <fec.
The former, therefore, is the usv/d negative with the Indicative
mood, the latter the usual negative with the other parts of the
verb. Deviations from this rule are to be explained by the
primary sense of the two adverbs. Thus, John iii. 18 : 6 marevoiv
fls avTov ov KpLUfTai, he that believeth on him is not condemned {the
statement of a fact) ; o 5c |Jtf| Trio-revcoi', but lie that believeth not
(whoever he may be) ha^ already been condemned ; on (i^ nem-
o-TevKcp, K.T.X.j because he hath not believed (according to the suppo-
sition made).
The same distinction applies to the compounds of ov and /i^, as oijSe,
fi'h^e, ovKSTi, fxrjKCTi, &c.
Two, or even three, negatives in the same clause do not con-
tradict one another,* but serve to strengthen the negation.
Luke iv. 2 : o{»k t^aytv ovS^v, he ate not anything.
Luke xxiii. 53 : ol ovk rjv ovBcls o^irw Kcifxevos, where no one at all
had yet ever lain.
For special forms of strengthened neejation, see §§ 363, 377. For the
use of negatives in interrogations, see § 369.
When one of two contrasted statements is intended to qualify
the other, it is sometimes forcibly expressed as an actual denial.
Thus, in Hosea vi. 6, the Hebrew reads, " I will have mercy and
not sacrifice." The LXX. translates eXeos deXa f^ dvaiau, "I will
have mercy rather than sacrifice," so conveying the genei'al
meaning. Matt. ix. 13, in quoting the passage, returns to the
Hebrew expression, Kal oA Bvaiav. Compare Jeremiah vii. 22.
In this idiom, the negatived thought, though not absolutely contra-
dicted, is excluded from view, that its antithesis may make its full
impression. Compare Matt. x. 20 ; Mark ix. 37 ; Luke x. 20 (omit
/toAAov) ; John vii. 16, t xii. 44 ; Acts v. 4 ; 1 Thess. iv. 8, &c.
* The usage is thus directly opposed to the English and Latin, where
*• two negatives make an affirmative."
t Winer holds, as it would appear without sufficient reason, that this
passage and Matt. ix. 13 above intend absolute contradiction.
401.] ADVERBS. 371
Only the context in such cases will show whether the negative is abso-
lute or comparative. In some instances, where an exposition similar to
the above has been adopted, the meaning of particular words has been
mistaken. Thus, in John vi. 27, ipya^iaQk n^ t^u ^puxnv r^u a.iro\Kvijfvt\v,
K.T.A., "labour not lor the meat that perisheth," &c., the verb ipy. does
not mean "labour" generally, but busy yourselves^ referring to the pre-
sent excitement of the people. 1 Tim. v. 23: /iTj/ceVt w5poir<5Tet is not
"drink no longer water," but be no longer a water-drinker, the verb not
beincc precisely equal to u5wp viv€, but pointing to the regular habit. *
* Ellicott.
372 CONJUNCTIONS. [§ 402.
Chapter YIII.— CONJUNCTIONS.
402. For a classified list of the Conjunctions, see Etymology,
§136.
Conjunctions are, with respect to their place in the sentence, either
prepositive, i.e., placed at the beginning of the clause, as Kcd, aWd, 8t(,
or postpositive, i.e., placed after some other word or words, as 8e, ydp.
Words connected by Conjunctions are in the same gram-
matical regimen.
A clause connected with another by a Conjunction is either co-
ordinate or subordinate. The rules for the chief kinds of subor-
dinate clauses have been given, §§ 379-384. The following rules,
therefore, imply Co-ordination.
Conjunctions of Annexation, tcai, rt.
403. The proper copulative Conjunction, employed as in other
languages, is KaC, and.
Of the special uses of the Conjunction, the following may be
enumerated.
a. Sometimes it appears to convey a kind of rhetorical emphasis.
Matt. iii. 14 : Kal o-v epxri npos fif ; and contest thou unto me ?
Matt. vi. 2Q : Kal 6 Trar^p v/xcoj/, /C.T.X., and {yet) your heavenly
Father feedeth them I
John i. 10 : KaV <5 Kotrfxos avrov ovk eyva, and (yet) the world knew
him not.
See Bruder's Concordance, p. 453, for an interesting collection of
instances. The logical connection of the clauses being strongly a])pa-
rent in their signification, it is sufficient to place the simple copulative
between them, the reader's mind supplying the additional links.
§ 403.] CONJUNCTIONS OF ANNEXATION. 373
h. In the enumeration of particulars, both ...and may be ex-
pressed by Kal , . . KttC, by the postpositive t^ with Kal, or (rarely) Dy
T€ . . . T€.
Acts ii. 29 : Kal ereXevTrja-f Kal erdcjir], he both died and was buried.
Matt. xxii. 10 : o-wrjyayov ... TTovTjpovs T€ Kal dyadovsf they collected
. . . both bad and good.
Acts i. 1 : hv fjp^aro ^Irjaovs TToiflv T€ Kal 8i8d(rKfiVj which JeSUS
began both to do and to teach.
Acts xvii. 4 : twv T€ o-e/So/ieVcDi/ 'EXkr]va>v irk^Oos ttoKv yvvaiKcov T6
Tcov 7rpdiT<ov ovK oXiyai, both a great multitude of the devout Greeks,
and not a few of the chief women.
John iv. 11 : o^c avTkr]pa ex^ts Kal to (fipeap ecrrl jSa^u, thou both
hast nothing to draw with, and the well is deep. So 3 John 10.
The difference* between koli and re is that Koi unites things strictly co-
ordinate ; re annexes, often with implied relation or distinction. Hence it
may sometimes be read as implying "and this as well as the other," with
asceimve force, although generally it adds a less important particular.
c. The points of transition in a narrative are frequently marked
by Kai, rendered into English, for rhetorical variety, by then, now, &c.
Luke x. 29 : and ivho is my neighbour ? Luke xviii. 26 : and
who can be saved ? John ix. 36 (Tischendorf) : and who is he,
Lord, that I should believe ? KaC dramatically connects the ques-
tion with what has just been said.
Matt, viii, 8. (See Mark iii. 13-26, viii. 10-18, and many other passages. )
d. This conjunction has also an explanatory or " epexegetic" use,
repeating (in thought, or by the aid of a pronoun) something that
has been said, in order to introduce some additional particular.
Luke viii. 41 (pronoun and verb in the epexegetic clause),
xxiii. 41 ; John i. 16 (neither verb nor pronoun) ; 1 Cor. L 2,
ii. 2, vi. 8 (read tovto).
Lph. 11. o : rrj yap ^dpt-rl eare aeacoo-pevoi dia Trjs iricrTecoi Kal tovto
OVK e| vpcovf Qeoi) to dcbpov, for by grace ye are saved through faith,
* Winer, "Kot coujungit, re adjungit." — Hermann.
?574 CONJUNCTIONS OF ANNEXATION. [§ 403.
arid this not of yourselves, it (i.e., your being saved, is) the gift of
God. "You must not suppose, because your salvation was con-
ditioned by your faith, that therefore you saved yourselves." *
e. Without direct connective force, Ka£ often takes the meaning
of also, even.
Matt. V. 39 : arpeyfrov avrai Kal ttjv uXkrjv, turn to him also the
other cheek.
Mark i. 27 : Kal rols irp€v[xaa-i rots aKaddprois cVirdcro-et, he lays his
command even upon the unclean spirits.
It is evident that the emphasis in such passages arises from the tacit
connection and comparison with other objects of thought. The con-
junction, therefore, is virtually still copulative.
This use of KaC is frequent in comparisons.
Matt. vi. 10 : yemjdfjTco TO 6e\r)fxd aov «S ev ovpav^ Kal eVt yrjs, thy
will be done as in heaven so also upon earth.
John vi. 57 : Ka0cl>s dneaTeiXe fie 6 (S>p narrjp, K.T.X., as the living
Father sent me, &c. There are two following clauses with Koi,
either of which might supply the second member of comparison :
"«o / live ... and," or (as E.V.) " and I live ... so."
Gal. i. 9 : «S irpoeiprjKaixfv Kal aprt nakiv Xe'yw, as we have said
before, so now also I say again.
Hence the use of Ka\ to introduce the apodosis after hypothetical and
temporal clauses. Luke ii. 21 : then also his name was called Jesus;
2 Cor. ii. 2 : for if I grieve you, then who is he that gladdens me ? often
with tSou, then behold ! as Matt, xxviii. 9 ; Acts i. 10, &c.
In the rising climax, oi |ii6vov is generally found in the former
clause, dXXd KaC in the latter.
Acts xxi. 13 : €yai yap oit |Ji<$vov hfOrivai iXXd, Kal cmoBavdv ...
fToifias (x^f /^^ ^ ^^ ready not only to be bound, but also to die.
Horn. xiii. 5 : o4 ^6vov 5ta ttjv 6pyi)v &XXoL Kal dia ttjv avvddrjcriv,
not only on account of tlie wrath, but also on account of conscience.
For the combination Kal yip, see § 407, d.
• Some still refer tovto to wlcrrfcts (quite allowable on the score of gender,
by synesis) ; but this seems against the Apostle's argument. (See EUicott,
Eadie, Allord.)
^ 404. J CONJUNCTIONS OF ANTITHESIS. 375
Conjunctions of Antithesis, dXXd, Se.
404. i. *AXXd, hut (emphatic as coDtrasted with fie), is used to
mark opposition^ interru2Dtion, transition.
a. Opposition, simply. John xvi. 20 : v/xels fie Xvirrjaeade^ dW' r,
y^vTTT} vfjicov ds x^p^v yevqa-eriu, ye shall grieve, but your gmef shall be
tamed into joy.
Frequently after negatives —
Matt. V. 17 : ovk rjXOuv KaraXvaai, dXXtt TrXrjpaxTaif I came not to
destroy, but to fulfil.
liom. iii. 31 : fn) yevoiro ' dXXd vonov iarcoiJLev, assuredly not ; but
'loe establish law.
b. Interruption. When a train of thought is broken, by some
limitation, modification, correction.
John xii. 27 : Harep, acoaov jxe eK rrjs (opas ravriji ' dXXd fiia roiiro,
K.T.X, Father, save me from this hour I but for this cause came I
unto this hour.
Often in such connections the conjunction carries with it the force of
Nay, especially after questions (Matt. xi. 8, 9 ; Luke vii. 25).
c. Transition : the point of contrast being that the succeeding
phrase is a new subject, or the same in a different aspect ; like
our Well, the7i; Moreover; Luke vi. 27, xi. 42; Gal. ii. 14, &c.
Special uses of this conjunction are (1) to throw emphasis on
the 1 oil owing clause.
J ohn XVI. 2 : dTroawayoiyov^ ,,^j,;]aov(Tiv Ipas ' dX\' epx^Tai u>pa, k.t.X.,
they shall cast you out of the synagogues — yea, the hour cometh, &c.
So with a negative —
Luke xxiii. 15 : ovbev evpov ev tc3 dvdpdiTrco ... oXk" ovBs 'Hptt'S/??,
/ found no blame in the man ...no, nor yet Herod.
(2) In a conditional sentence, dWd may stand in the apodosLs
with the meaning, yet, nevertheless.
dd
376 CONJUNCTIONS OF ANTITHESIS. [§ 404.
1 Cor. IX. 2 : ft SXXois ovk elfii drroa-ToXos, aXXoL y^ vfilv flui, if 1
am not an apostle to others^ yet at least I am so to you. So E,om.
vi. 5, &c.
(3) After the interrogative, aXX* rf means other than, except.
1 Cor. iiL 5 : tCs ovv eort UavXos, t£s 5e 'AttoXXo)?, dXX* 9^ Sia/covot,
K.T.X., who then is Paid, and who Apollos, but ministers, (fee.
In 2 Cor. i. 13 we find the combination, &X\a... oAA' ^, other things^ —
than.
ii. A4 (postpositive) is also most properly adversative, though less
emphatic than aWa. It is to be carefully distinguished, on the
other hand, from the copulatives Kal, re, with the latter of which it
is, however, often interchanged in MSS.
Thus, the frequent phrase, k^ot Z\ \iy<a vfxiv, marks either a
contrast with what has been said before, or an addition to it ; the
antithesis lying in the thought, " the foregoing is not all, but I
add," &c.
It is generally diflSlcult to exhibit the exact advei-sative force of
this conjunction, and in translation it is often taken as a mere
adjunctive. Thus, in the English version it is very frequently
rendered and, or then (Matt. xix. 23), now (xxi. 18), so (xx. 8), or
left entirely untranslated (xxviii. 1). The "84 resumptive" is
especially, perhaps unavoidably, so treated.
A close attention to this particle in the innumerable instances of its
occurrence will repay the student, who will often by its means mark
an otherwise concealed antithesis. The following illustrations are from
Winer : —
Matt. xxi. 3 : but he will straightway send them, i.e., not ca\'il or
hesitate, but — .
Acts xxiv. 17 : but I pass on to another part of my history.
1 Cor. xiv. 1 : yet desire spiritual gifts, notwithstanding the supremacy
of love.
2 Cor. ii. 12 : but when I came to Troas; 8i resumptive, from ver. 4.
1 Cor. xi. 2 ; but I praise you, even while I exhort, as ver. 1.
Eom. iv. 3: but Abrafiam believed Ood, so far was he from being
justified by wo/ks (James iL 23).
§ 404.] CONJUNCTIONS OF ANTITHESIS. 377
Kal...8^, together imply yea ... moreover^ assuming what has
been said, and passing on to something more.*
Matt. X. 18, xvi. 18 {and not only sOy hut I say unto thee);
John vi. 51, viii. 16, 17, xv. 27 ; Acts iii. 24, xxii. 29; 2 Pet. i. 5 ;
1 John i. 3.
The full form of antithesis with jtiv and Bi is frequent in the
New Testament. t Compare § 136, b, 4,
Matt. ix. 37 : 6 |a^v depio-fxos noXvs, oi 8^ epydrai oXiyou, the harvest
is plenteous, hut the labourers are few.
Matt. xvi. 3, XX. 23, xxii. 8, xxiii. 27, 28, xxvi. 41, &c.
Sometimes \i.iv is followed by the emphatic adversative aXXd :
Mark ix. 12; Acts iv. 16; Rom. xiv. 20; also ir^v, Luke
xxii. 22 ; KaC, Acts xxvi. 4, &c.
In several passages |j.^v is found without any antithetic particle.
This is to be explained by an interrupted construction of the
sentence, or by virtual antithesis. According to Winer, these
cases may be classed in a threefold way : —
1. The suppressed parallel member of the antithesis is implied
in the clause with ^iv. Kom. x. 1 ; Col. ii. 23.
2. It is plainly indicated under another turn of expression,
Rom. xi. 13.
3. The construction is entirely broken, and th^ parallel clause i-s
to be supplied by the general sense of the sequel. Acts i. 1 ;
Rom. i 8^ iii. 2, vii. 12; 1 Cor. xi. 18, &c.
The Disjunctives.
405. The disjunctives are V^, or (after a comparative, than);
^ ...^, either ... or; iire . , . ctre, whether . . . whether. Once -firoi ...%
whether ...or (there being no other alternative), Rom, vi. 16.
Matt. V. 17 : /u?) voiilarjTe on ^\6ov Karakixrai tov vojjlov ^l tovs
7rpo<pT]Tas, think not that I came to destroy the law or the prophets.
* See AHord, Matt. x. 18.
t Far less frequent, however, thau in classic Grt^ek.
378 THE DISJUNCTIVi:S. [§ 40'J.
Matt. XU. So : f^ TrotTja-arc to dev8pov KoXbv ... i\ Troi^crare to bevdpov
(ranpov, K.r.X., eitlier make tJie tree good... or make the tree cor-
rupt^ &c.
Ijlikc XX. 2 : iv TToia i^ovaia TavTa rroieis, ^^ tIs (o-tlv 6 8ovs am ttjv
(^nva-lav Tavrrju ] in wliat authority cloest thou these things, or who if<
h,e that gave tliee this authority ? Matt. xxi. 23, has kui. Either
coiij unction evidently gives equally good sense.
1 Uor. XI. 27 : os av iaoir] tov apTov ^ irlvr] to TTOTfjpiov tov K,opiov,
whoever shall eat the bread or drink the cup of the Loi'd (whichever
he does, not by any means implying that he is not to do both).
The previous verse has Kac, which is also a var. read. here.
1 Cor. X. 31 : eire ovv iaOUTe ilri niveTe dre tl Trotetre, whether then
ye are eating or drinhing, or doing anything (at all).
The combination ^ Kat, or even^ occurs Luke xviii. 1 1 ; E,om.
ii. 15 j 2 Cor. i. 13.
The "interrogative" % so called, is no more than the disjunctive
mth the former clause understood.*
Rom. iii. 29 : ^ 'lovSaicov 6 Geo? pouou, ovxi Koi eBvcov ] or is he the
God of Jews only^ not of Gentiles also 1 Such, the Apostle sug-
gests, is the alternative of denying the statement made, ver. 28.
See Horn. vi. 3, vii. 1, &c. In 1 Cor. xiv. 36, the former ^ is not
correlative with the latter, but refers to the previous train of thought :
Or^ was it that the word of God^ &;c., as must be supposed if you deny
my authority in these matters. Dean Stanley renders, What ! went the
word f &c.
Inferential Cokjunctions.
406. The chief particles of inference are oiiv, therefore, post-
positive, and &pa, accordingly, postpositive, or, with emphasis,
[irepositive.
olv is proi)erly tlie particle of formal inference, kindred to the parti-
ciple of €i/xt, S)v, iiv {quoi cum ita sint). &pa, cognate with &p<a, to fit,
marks a correspondence in point of fact {ergo).
* Sec Viger's "Greek Idioms," and Hurl mi g, PartikeUelire, sub voc. ^.
§ 406.] INFERENTIAL CONJUNCTIONS. ^7D
Matt. iii. 8 : Troii^o-nre oiv Kupirov a^iov rrjs fxeTavo'ias, yield, there-
fore, fruit worthy of your repentance.
Gal. ii. 21 : et yap bia vofiov diKaioavvrj, &pa Xpiarbs Scopeav ajTedavev,
for if righteousness is by law, then Christ died in vain.
Both these particles, however, are often used with slighter
meaning, as in our use of the words Then, Well then, in the con-
tinuance of narrative or speech. "Apay^ (Matt. vii. *20, xvii. 2Q ;
Acts xi. 18; xvii. 27) is emphatic. The combination, dpa o5v, is
found repep.tedly in the Epistles of St. Paul, as E,ora. v. 18 : So,
therefore, the ovv marking the logical inference, and the cipa
intimating the harmony between premises and conclusion.
For apa interrogative, see 137, h.
Other inferential particles occasionally found are |i.€vovv7€, yes,
indeed, hut, Luke xi. 28; Rom. ix. 20, x. 18; Toivapovv, wherefore
then, 1 Thess. iv. 8 ; Heb. xii. 1 ; toiv-uv (surely now), therefore,
Luke XX. 25 ; 1 Cor ix. 26 ; Heb. xiii. 13.
Causal Conjunctions, especially -yAp.
407. a. The causal conjunctions are demonstrative and relative.
Of these the latter occur in subordinate clauses, the rules of which
have already been given.
The relative causal particles are on, because ; diSn, because (not in the
Evv. or Rev.) Similarly used is iirel (properly temporal, ichen), since,
with its emphatic compounds eVeiSTj, since now ; iiriitr^p (once, Rom.
iii. 30), since indeed; and cTreiSVep (only Luke i. 1), forasmuch as.
(See § 137, a.) ,
For the relative phrases, with prepositions, used as conjunctions —
e.g., i<p' (f, avd' uv—see under the Prepositions, §§ 305, 291.
h. The demonstrative causal conjunction, ^dp, always postposi-
tive, is a contraction of 7^ fipa, "verily then;" hence, in fact, and,
when the fact is given as a reason or explanation, for.
Matt. i. 21 ; ii. 2, 5, 6, 13, 20 ; iii. 2, 3, 9, 15, &c.
Generally, the explanation introduced by yap is also a direct
reason. But this need not be always the case. See Matt. i. 18 :
380 CAUSAL CONJUNCTIONS. [§ 407.
" Mary, as tJie fact was, being betrothed." Mark v. 42 : " She
arose and walked, ybr she was twelve years old; xvi. 4: "They saw-
that the stone was rolled away, /or it was very great" (an explana-
tion, not of the fact that it was rolled away, but of the necessity
for this being dione). Compare Ps. xxv. 11:" For thy name's sake,
Lord, pardon mine iniquity, ybr it is great (the reason, not why
pardon is to be hestowed^ but why it is sought).
The student must beware of translating '■^ip by such words as hut,
' althovgh, yet peradventure, &c. * Romans v. 7 reads, for scarcely on
behalf of a righteous man will one die ; for on helmlf of the good man
one even dares to die. "The second /ar," says Alford, "is exceptive, and
answers to 'I do not press this without exception,' understood." The
good man and the righteous are not contrasted as different classes of
persons, but the "good" (as the article also shows) are classed under
the "righteous."
c. In questions and answers especially, ydp is often used in refer-
ence to the words or thought of the other party.
Matt, xxvii. 23 : ri •yap kukov iirolnae ; Why, what evil hath he
done 1
John vii. 41 j Acts viii. 31, xix. 35 (Be calm I for what man
is there ? &c.)
John ix. 30 : ev tovtw •yap BavyLaarov eariv ! Why, herein is a won-
derfvl thing! In 1 Thess. ii 20, the Apostle thus answers his
own question : " Yes, ye are our glory and our joy."
d. In the combination, Kal ^dp, the true connective is generally
KcU, which resumes in thought the topic of the previous clause ;
while ydp appends the explanation or the reason (etenim).
Matt, viii 9 : Kal "yap ^yci) &v9p«ir<Js cljii, /c.t.X., and (this I say) for
1 am a man under authority, &c.
So Matt. xxvi. 73 ; Mark x. 45 ; Luke vi. 3^ 34 ; Jonn iv. 23 {and
{fhaX,) because the Father, &c.) ; Acts xix. 40 land {this advice I press,)
seeing tJiat, &c. ) ; 1 Cor. v. 7, xii. 13, 14 ; 2 Cor. v. 4, xiii. 4 ; 1 Thess.
iv. 10; 2 Thess. iiL 10; Heb. v. 12, x. 34, &c. In these cases, Ka\ ydp
must generally be rendered simply /or {or for, indeed), except when it is
desired by paraphrase to bring out its full meaning.
• See Winer, § 63, 10, 3.
§ 407.] CAUSAL CONJUNCTIONS. 381
But sometimes yip is the connective, and km belongs to the
second clause, with the sense of also, even {yap, of course, being
placed after it as a postpositive conjunction.) (See Ellicott's note
on 2 Thess. iii. 10).
Rom. xi. 1 : Kal ^ap iyw ^laparjXiTTjs elfxi, for I also am an Israelite.
Rom. XV. 3 : Kal •yap 6 Xpiaros ov^ eavrS jjpcaev, for even Christ
pleased not hiimself.
So perhaps Heb. xii, 29 : Kal ^ap 6 Qeos rjpoov nvp KaravoKiaKov,
for even our God is a consuming fire.
Asyndeton.
408. The omission of conjunctions, or asi/ndeton,* oiteji heightens
the effect of a paragraph.
a. The copidative may be omitted, as Gal. v. 22 : 6 8e Kapnbs tov
TTvevparoi iamv dyaTTTj, X"-P^^ ^'Z"?*"?) fxaKpodvpia, ;^p7if o-Tor;/?, dyadcocrvuT],
Triaris, TTpaoTTjs, iyKpareiaj But the fruit of the Spirit is love, joy,
peace, long-suffering, kindness, goodness, faith, meekness, self-control.
h. Ka£ epexegetic is sometimes dropped. Col. i. 14 : iv a exopev
TTju a.TToXvTpa>(riv, t^v a<peatv rSnv afiapricov, in whom we have the
redemption, the remission of our sins.
c. The omission of the antithetic may be marked in passages like
1 Cor. XV. 43, 44 :—
(TTreipeTai ev (poopa, iyeipcrai ev aqioapaia.
(TTreipeTat iv aTipla, eyeipfTOL iv 86^rj.
o-neLperai ev dcrOeveia, eyetperai iv bvvdpei.
(TTreipeTai (riopa yj/^vxtKOV, eyeiperai aiopa TrvevfxariKov.
d. The causal jyarticle is occasionally dropped. Rev. xxii. 10 :
fdf] o-cfipayia-T]^ tovs Xoyous Trjs irpocfyi^Telas tov /3t/3Xtov tovtov ' 6 Kaipos
eyyvs ecTTtv, Seal not the words of the prophecy of this hook ; tlie time
is near. (The rec. text supplies Sn.)
* 'AfftJrSeTOJ', from &, not, and cvvlew, to hind together.
382 PECULIARITIES OF CONSTRUCTIOX. [§ 409.
Chapter IX.— ON SOME PECULIARITIES m THE
STRUCTURE OF SENTENCES.
409. a. The Arrangement of words in a sentence indicates the
order of thought. Hence naturally, the Subject with the words
connected takes the leading place, then the Predicate with its
adjuncts. Words connected in sense are mostly kept together.
The Object usually follows the governing verb ; a Genitive or
Dative, the word on which it depends ; and an Adjective, the sub-
stantive with which it agrees.
The opposite constructions are emphatic, as (1) when the Predicate
stands first. See the Beatitudes, Matt v. 3-11 ; also Matt. vii. 13-15 ;
John i. 1, iv. 19, 24, vi. 60; Rom. viii. 18, iinv^orthy are the sufftrings .'
2 Tim. ii. 11 ; (2) the Object before the verb. Luke xvi. 11, the true
riches who will entrust to you ? Johu ix. 31 ; Rom. xiv. 1, &c. ; (o) an
oblique case before the governing noun. Rom. xi. 13, of Gentiks an
apostle; Rom. xii. 19 (Heb. x. 30); 1 Cor. iii. 9; Heb. vi. 16; 1 Pet.
iii. 21, &c. ; (4) an Adjective before its noun. Matt. vii. 13, tlirongh tlie
strait gate (the emphasis being on the narrowness) ; 1 Tim. vi. 12, 14,
where good {KaX6s) is repeatedly and strikingly emphatic ; James iii. 5.
The usual arrangement of Adverbs, Prepositions, and the Particles
generally, has already beei saflaciently illustrated.
h. Since, in an inflected language like the Greek, it is unneces-
sary to indicate the grammatical dependence of words by their
order, the arrangement of a sentence may be indefinitely varied
for purposes of emphasis ; and there is, perhaps, not a paragraph in
the New Testament in which the collocation of words does not
indicate some subtle meaning or shade of thought, scarcely to be
reproduced in the most accurate translation.
Generally speaking, the emphatic positions arc at the beginning and
the end of a clause, especially the former.
c. Constructions that apparently violate the simplicity of speech
may generally also suggest some special emphasis.
5^ 409.] PECULIARTTTES OF CONSTRUCTION-. 383
1 Cor. xiii. 1 : Jf with the tongues of men I speak . . . and of the
angels.
Heb. vii. 4 : to luhom also Ahralmm gave tithe of the sjyoils . . . the
patriarch, i.e., though he bore that sacred character.
1 Pet. ii. 7 : for you, then, is the preciousness ... v)ho believe, i.e.,
on the condition that you are believers.
See also Heb. ii. 9.
The displacement of a word or phrase, as in the above instances,
for the sake of greater effect, is sometimes termed HyjJerbaion, from
' virepPaivco.
410. Elliptical constructions are not infi-equent. Many have
already been noticed in their place ; as the ellipsis of the Copula,
§ 166 ; of the Subject, § 169 ; of Substantives, §§ 256, 316. Two
important elliptical forms of expression are the following : —
(1) Aposiopesis, or expressive pause : some look or gesture, or
the mind of the hearer, being supposed to suj)ply ihe rest.
L/uke xiii. 9 : ku^ fxev Troirjo-r] KapTTOP ...el Se fJi-rjye, k.t.\., and if it
hear fruit ... but if not, &c.
Acts xxiii. 9 : ft Se irvevfxa fXaXrjcrev avTM rj ayyeXos ..., but if a
spirit spoke to him, or an angel . . . (The following words, let us
not fight against God, are regarded by the best editors as an
interpolation.)
See also Luke xix. 42, xxii. 42 ; John vi. 62.
(2) Zeugma : a construction in which a verb is joined to two or
more different objects, though only applicable in strictness to one.
1 Cor. iii. 2 : yaXa vjias l-n-ono-a, ov ^pcofxa, I gave you milk to
drink, not meat.
See also Luke i, 64 ; Acts iv. 28 ; 1 Tim. iv. 3 (where the antithetic
verb must be understood).
h. In accordance with the primitive simplicity of language, the
links between different clauses are sometimes omitted, being left to
the reader to supply in thought.
384 PECULIARITIES OF CONSTRUCTION. [§ 410.
Thus, Eom. vi. 17 : Thanks he to God that ye were the servants
of sin, but ye obeyed, &c., i.e, " that although ye were once the
servants of sin, ye have now obeyed."
,So 1 Tim. i. 13, 14 : I obtained Tnercy, because I did it igno-
rantly in unbelief, but the grace of our Lord was exceeding abun-
dant, i.e., "I obtained mercy, because (while 1 acted thus) the
grace of the Lord abounded."
Compare also Matt. xi. 25 • John iii. 19.
411. a. Some forms of expression are apparently redundant.
In these cases, a special emphasis may generally be marked.
Instead, therefore, of assuming pleonasm, the careful student will
note the emphatic meaning. Frequent cases are the following : —
(1) Simple repetition of a phrase. Rom. viii. 15 : " ye received not the
spirit of bondage, but ye received the spirit of adoption ; " Col. i. 28 :
"warning every man, and teaching every man in all wisdom, that we
may present every man perfect in Christ Jesus;". Heb. ii. 16: "he
takeili not hold of angels, but he taJceth lioJd of the seed of Abraham."
(2) Repetition in a contrasted form. John i. 20: "he confessed, and
denied not;'" Acts xviii. 9: "Speak, and be not silent;" Rom. ix. 1
(1 Tim. il 7) : "I speak the truth in Christ, I lie not.^^ (3) The men-
tion of accompanying circumstances, as Matt. v. 2 : "he opened his mouth,
and said" (comp. Acts viii. 35); John xxi. 13: "Jesus cometh, and
taketh the bread, and giveth to them;" where "every separate act of
the wonderful occurrence is designedly specified, and, as it were, placed
before the eye."* The verbs, come, arise, take, stretch foi'th (the hand),
are frequently found in such connection.
b. An idiom to be especially noticed is that in which an Accu-
Bative object and an Object-sentence are both appended to the verb.
In this case also the double expression conveys an emphasis ; the
attention being first called to the Object, and then to that which is
said about it. For examples of this idiom, see § 382, d. Other
instances are John xL 31 ; Acts iv. 13, ix. 20, xvi. 3 ; 1 Cor. xvi. 15 ;
Gal. vi. 1.
412. Anacolouthon (avaK6kovdov) is literally a breach in the con-
tinuity of a sentence, and is a term applied to those numerous
• Winer.
§ 412.] PECULIARITIES OF CONSTRUCTION. 385
instances in which the construction is changed in the course of the
same period.
Many so-called anacolouiha are, however, to be explained by laws of
construction already laid down. The deviations from strict grammatical
construction, excepting in the book of Revelation, are comparatively
few, and are generally to be paralleled from classic authors.
The most frequent cases of anacolouthon may be classed as
follows : —
a. The transition from the indirect to the direct form of speech —
Luke V. 14 : he charged him to tell no man (fujdevX elneh), but go
and show thyself, &c. {aTtckOiiiv del^ov, k.t.X.)
See also Mark vi. 9, xi. 32 ; Acts i. 4, xvii. 3.
h. The transition from a participial construction to a finite
verb —
Eph. i. 20 : eyeipas avTov ... Ka\ eKuBiaev, having raised him ... and
he set him.
See also John v. 44 ; I Cor. vii. 37 ; 2 Cor. v. 6, 8 ; Col. i. 6, 26 ;
2 John 2.
c. The use of nominative participles in reference to substantives
of any case, standing at a distance in the sentence —
Phil. i. 29, 30 : v^xlv exapla-Br] to vrrep Xpiarov ... Ttda-x^eiv, tov avrbv
oycova ?xovt€s, to you it was granted to suffer for Christ, having the
same conflict.
Compare § 397.
d. A change of structure in the course of the sentence —
Luke xi. 11 : nW e^ vpSiV tov nuTepa aiTrjo-ei 6 vios apTov, fif) \i6ov
emdaxrei avrov ; lit., ^7*0772 which of you, the father, shall his son ask
bread . . . will lie give him a stone ?
Compare Mark ix. 20 ; John vi. 22-24 ; Acts xix. 34.
e. The non-completion of a compound sentence; the second
member of a comparison, for instance, being omitted, or only
suggested by the general sense of the passage —
386 PECITLIAIIITIES OF CONSTRUCTION. [^ 412.
1 Tim. i. 3 ; Kadcbs TrapeKoXea-d <t€ rrpoa-iiflvat ev 'Ec^eVo), OS I exhorted
thee to abide in Ephesus (where the E.Y. supplies so do at the end
of ver. 4, without anything corresponding in the original.)
Rom. V. 12 : -4s by one man sin entered into the. world. The
antithesis, Winer thinks, is completed in sense, though, not in form,
in ver. 15. Others suppose a long parenthesis from ver. 13-17,
inclusive ; the parallel being resumed and completed in ver. 18.
See also 2 Pet. ii. 4.
To this head may be referred the frequent occurrence of fi4v without
the corresponding 5e. (See § 404. )
413. An attention to sound and rhythm in the structure of
sentences is sometimes observable.
a. Paronomasia, or alliteration, was a common ornament of
speech with Oriental writers. Hence its employment in the New
Testament.
Luke xxi. 1 1 : Xijiol Ka\ Xoijiol eaovrai.
Acts xvii. 25 : t«V nai irvoT|v.
Heb. V. 8 : i^aQiv d<f Siu 'iiraQe.
Rom. i. 29 : fiearovs <j>9ovov, <|>ovov.
These are instances of alliteration proper, there being no con-
nection between the words in meaning. Where such a connection
exists, the effect of the sentence is rather in the sense than in the
sound.
Matt. xvi. 18 : av el Ile'Tpos, Kai eVt ravT?] r?/ ir^Tpiji, k.t.X.
Acts viii. 30 : apd ye 7tv«crK€is a dva-yivtoo-Keis ;
Rom. xii. 3 : prj vir€p(|)pov€iv nap' b 8(1 <j>pov€iv, dXXa <}>pov6tv els to
a-a^pove'v.
1 Tim. i. 8 : koXos 6 vo^os, edp ns aiVco VO|JiijJiO)S xpijTai.
In the Epistlo to Philemon there are probably allusions to the name
of Ouesimus, otrfiaifios, profitable. (See ver. 11, and ovaifirju, ver. 20.)
b. As the characteristic of Hebrew poetry is to run in parallel
clauses, it might naturally be expected that in passages of strong
v[413.] RHYTHM AND PARALLELISM. 387
and sustained feeling, the same peculiaritj would be found in
the New Testament.* There are some decided instances, as
1 Tim. iii. 16 :
' ecfiavepwdr] iv (xapKL ... eSiKaioiSr] <Ju Trvevfiari.
a>(f)dT] dyyeXoLS ... €Kr]pvxOr) ep edveaiv.
eTTia-Tevdr] iv Ko'cr/xo) ... dveXrjffiOr] iu 86^rj.
This passage was probably part of a rhythmical creed of the
early Church, or of a primitive Christian hymn. For true hymns,
see also Luke i. 46-55, 68-79, ii. 29-32; Eph. v. 14; Jude 24,
25 ; Eev. v. 12-14, &c.
Rom. ix. 2 : Xvirrj ixoc earl [xeyaXj],
Koi udiaXeiTTTOS odvpt] rrj Kapdia uov.
Here we have the tone of strong emotion.
For similar rhythmic constructions, see John xiv. 27 ; Rom. xi. 33 ;
1 Cor. XV. 54-57 ; Col. i. 10-12, and many other passages. The parallel
clauses often contain strong contrasts, as John iii. 20, 21 ; Rom. ii. 6-10,
where a long series occurs.
Sometimes the construction is more elaborate ; a second series of
clauses corresponding with the first, but in reverse order. This is
called " reverted parallelism," or chiasmus,'\' or epanodos (lirdvoSos).
See a simple illustration, § 312, 1. Simpler still is Matt. xii. 22 :
"the blind and dumb, both spake and saw." Compare Matt. vii. C.
So Phil. iii. 10 : " to know Him,
and the power of his resiurection,
and the fellowship of his sufferings,
being made conformable unto his death,
if by any means I might attain to the resurrection
[ilavdaraaiv) of the dead."
Other more elaborate harmonies of the kind might easily be traced.
The whole subject connects itself with the study of the influence of the
Old Testament upon the New — an important field of enquiry, as yet;
only very partially explored.
* See Jebb's "Sacred Literature," and especially the versions of the
Epistle to the Romans by the Rev. J. H. Hinton, a.m., and by the Rev.
Dr. Forbes.
t From the letter chi, X.
388 POETIC QUOTATIONS — IIHYTHM. [§ 413.
c. (1) Three quotations of Greek poetry have been found in the
New Testament, all by the Apostle Paul.
Acts xvii. 28 : tov yap koL yevos fafiev ' (the former half of a hexa-
meter), by Aratus, a native of Tarsus, b.c. 270 ; found also with
a little variation (eK <tov ydp) in Cleanthes, a poet of Troas, b.c. 300.
1 Cor. XV. 33 : (f)d€ipovcnv Tjdtj xpW^* SfiiKiai KUKaij from Menander,
an Athenian comic poet, about b.c. 320. (The measure is iambic
trimeter.)
Titus i. 12 : Kp^res del ylreva-Taif KaKo. drjpia, yaarepes dpyai (a com-
plete hexameter), by Epimenides, the Cretan bard (see ver. 5),
about B.C. 600.
(2) There are also apparently unconscious verses, such as will
sometimes occur in prose style.
Compare the anapaestic line —
"To preach the acceptable year of the Lord."
And the English hexameter —
** Husbands, love your wives, and be not bitter against them.*
Also the iambic couplet —
" Her ways are ways of pleasantness,
And all her paths are peace."
The following have been traced : —
Hexameters —
Heb. xii. 13 : koI rpoxias opdas 7roifj(TaT€ to7s noalv vpSiv.
James L 17 : ndcra 86ais dyddrj koX nav daprjfia Tfkeiov,
Iambic measure —
Acts xxiii. 5 : apxpvra tov XaoC crov ovk epus KOKois,
This last is a quotation from the LXX. (Exod. xxiL 28). It is
possible that the others may be citations also from some unknown
poetic source.
2 THESSALONIANS I. 1, 2. 389
ANALYTICAL EXERCISE ON THE SECOND
EPISTLE TO THE THESSALONIANS.
The following Exercise illustrates the application of many of the
foregoing rules to an extended portion of the New Testament.
The figures refer to the Sections, which the student is recommended
to consult.
Verbal analysis is not given, as being unnecessary at the present
stage. No word, however, should be left without its stem, declen-
sion, conjugation, &c., being accurately known. The verbs of the
Epistle have already been taken as material for an Exercise (Ex. 15,
p. 137).
The Epistle is given as in the Received Text, important cor-
rections being subjoined in the Notes. No interpretation of diffi-
cult passages is attempted. The first duty of the New Testament
student is to ascertain the plain grammatical meaning of the text :
the way to its explanation will then be open.
ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
CHAPTER I.
nATAOS KoX ^iKovavos kol Tt/xo^eos, r^ iKKXrjo-ta Qecra-a-
kovLK€0)V kv ©CO) Tiarpl rjixcdv kol KvpLca ^Irjcrov XpL(rT(^ ' ^x^P'-^
Ver. I. Paul, and. Silvanus, and Timotheus, nominatives; the
compound subject of tlie sentence of salutation, some such predicate as
"send greeting," being understood, involved in X'*?"? ^^^' *• (^^^ *^®
proper names, see 159, c, d.) to the clltirch., dat. of transmission, 278;
secondary obj. of the implied verb, of Thessalonians, extension of
secondary obj. ; gen. of material (or origin, 248) ; article omitted, 233, because
only some in Thessalonica belonged to the church, in God OUT Father,
390 ANALYTICAL EXEHCISE.
viMV Kol €LpT^vr] CLTTo Seov TTaTpos yfKJov KaC KvpCov 'It^o-oiI
XpLaTov.
^ EtyXapLo-Teiv ocpeCkopiev ro) ©ew ttclvtotc irepl vfjLo^Vj abeX^ol,
Ka6(i)s a^Lov ioTLV, OTL vi:€pav^dv€L 7/ iricTTLs VjxuiVj KoX 'nk^ovd^^i
ij dydisr] evbs kKCLO-rov -ndvTixiV vp^o^v €ts dA/\?;Aous • * coore ?}/jias
avTovs iv vpuv Kav^dadai kv ratj iKKX-qaLais rod &eov, virep rijs
viropLOVTJs vp.^v Kol TTtoTecos iv TTaari rots bicoypLoXs vp^iov kol tois
further extension of iKKX-rjaicf ; for iv, see 295, 4 ; irarpi, flat, by apposition,
177; ^/ia)»/, un emphatic possessive, 333. and the Lord Jesus Christ,
Kvpicp under the same regimen with 0€(jJ, without the article, intimating
that the union is one and the same \Adth both. See 232, and compare 217,
a, & (3), e, note.
Ver. 2. Grace unto you, and peace (the Eastern and Western
modes of sahitation), subj. of omitted verb, elVj; comp. 166. from God
our Father, extension of subj.; for air6, see 292, 2 (John, in a similar
connection, uses •Kapd, 2 Ep. ver. 3 ; ^*c is more usual), and the Lord
Jesus Christ, prep, not repeated, 3 14, to show that the source is one.
Ver. 3. We are bound, o<p. plur., as referring to the three in ver. 1
(some, less probably, vmderstand the Apostle as speaking of himself, see 239) ;
to thank God, ^^X-y ^^' ^^ i^ ordinary use, 385; tense as 386; for dat.
ee^i, see 278, d. always, adv. qualifying tvx- concerning you, for
irepi, see 302, a. brethren, voc, as is meet, &^i6u, neuter, as referring to
the substantivized clause, because your faith greatly increases
{iiTi causal, 407), explanation of the clause immediately preceding. For
vTTfp in composition, see 147, a; the verb is nowhere else found in the New
Testament, and the love of every one of you all to one an-
other abounds, ^yos eKdarov, possess, gen., 254 (comp. 269) j tram-, u/x.,
partitive gen., 261; present tenses as 361, a. For fls (dependent upon
dyairrj), see 298, 3.
Ver. 4. So that we ourselves boast in you, w<rT6, 391 j V aifr.
(emphatic), subj. of inf., 285, 387; iv, 255, 4; Lachmaun and Tischendorf
read iyKcvxaaeai. among the churches of God, for iv, see 295, 2;
for the art. with 0, 217, a. for your endurance and faith, vvfp,
303* <^f 3- For the one article with the two nouns, see 232, a ; the endurance
and faith combine to form one character, in all your persecutions,
and the afflictions, the article repeated, 232, 6. which ye endure,
cus, dat. by attraction (for Zv, as the verb governs a gen. in the New Testa-
ment, 2 Cor. xL I ; 2 Tim. iv. 3), 346, b ; avex, only middle in the New
Testament, act., "to hold up;" so mid., "to hold one's self up against,"
;:55, 1.
' 2 THESSALONIANS I. 5-8. 391
6\L\j/€(nv als avi^eaOc, ^ evbetyixa rrjs biKaias Kpta-ecus rov Qeov,
els TO Kara^icoOrjvai vfjias Trjs jSacriAetas rod 0eo{5, ^ virep rjs kol
'naayjETe ' etirep hUaiov irapa 0ea> avTairobovvaL rots OXi^ovaiv
vfxas OXiyj/LV, ^ koI vixiv rois Oki^OfiivoLs avedLV fieO' rjixutv, kv rrj
CLTTOKaXvyj/eL tov KvpCov ^lr}aov air ovpavov fxer ayyikmv bwdpieios
avTOVf ^ kv TTvpl (f)\oybs, bibovros enbUrja-LV tols /xr) cibocn 0eor,
Kol rots fJLT] viraKovova-L rw evayyeXiia tov Kvpiov rjiiGtv ^Ir}(rov
Ver. 5. (Which is) a token, nom. (pred. to an implied relative clause,
6 ia-Tiv) ; the token being the endurance and faith of the Thessalonians.
of the righteous judgment of God, genitives of origin or source,
248 ; article again employed, in order that ye may be counted
worthy, for inf., see 390, c; tense, 386; vijius, 285. The clause expresses
the intent of God's righteous judgment ; and hence its result, in proving
the fitness of the faithful for God's kingdom, of the kingdom of God,
fiacT. gen. after compound of 6|tos, 272.
Ver. 6. For the sake of which ye also suffer, for vnep, see
303, 2. The Koi combines into one the thought of the sufifering and the
being counted worthy, if truly it is righteous (as it is, implied by
'TTcp), copula omitted ; 8tK. neut., because referring to inf. with God,
for irapd (dat.), see 306, jS, 2. to repay to those who afllict you,
aflO-iction, in the verb, air6 marks the debt, avri the return ; for the aorist,
see 386. (This verb is used both in a good and a bad sense in the New
Testament : to "repay" or to "retaliate," Rom. xii. 19.) For the art. and
participle, see 395 ; dat. secondary object, and ace. primary object after the
verb, 278.
Ver. 7. And to you, the afflicted, B\ifi. is passive (not middle).
rest with us, /iero, as 301, a, I ; rjtiwv, referring to the three, ch. i. i. at
(eV, 295, 7) the revelation of the Lord Jesus from heaven, the
time when the recompense shall take place, referred to dvTair,, ver. 6 ; dVJ,
292, I ; ovpavov, singular, 240, a, note, and without article, 218. with the
angels of his power, compare 258. The angels are the ministers of
his power. The art. is unnecessary before 0177., as the following gen.
defines it, 208.
Ver. 8. In a fire of fiame, eV of investiture, dependent upon K. Itjo-.,
295, 3 (Lachm. and others read eV (pXoyl irvpSs, in a flame of fire) ; rec.
reading, <pKo'y6s', gen. of quality or attribute, 257. allotting vengeance,
Zi^ovros refers to 'Itjo-ov. (The verb in this connection is unusual.) to those
who know not God, dat., 278; art, and part., 395; /at^, the subjective
negative, see 393. and to those who obey not, for the repeated
article, see 232, h. the gospel, dat., 278, d. of our Lord Jesus,
see 270, note, Christ. (Modern editors generally omit XjptfjTou,)
e 6
392 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
yioLCTTov ' ^ otnves hiKr]v riiTovcnv, oKeOpov aldiviov airb TrpocrwTrou
Tov KvpCov, KOL aTTO ttJs b6^r]s rijs laxvos avrov, ^° orav (Xdrj
€vbo^aa07]vai kv tols ayCoLS avTOV, kol davixaaOijuai ev itaai rots
TacTT^vovcnv, on eTTLOTeudrj to fxapTvpLov 7]p.G>v €(^' v^aSy kv rrj
r)p.ipa €K€Cvrj, ^^ eiy 6 koI TTpoctevxopieda Travrore irepi vpicav, tva
{ifxas a^LuxTrj ttjs KA7j<reco9 6 0eos rjixoiVf kol TTXr]p(a(rrj iraa-av
Ver. 9. AA/JtLO, the compound relative, denoting character and suggesting
the reason, 349. shall pay (the) penalty, eternal destruction,
ace. in apposition with SiKrjv, 177. (away) from the presence of the
XiOrd, art. omitted before irpocwvov, 219. The meaning of airS is doubtful.
It may either refer to the source of the punishment, 292, 3, "inflicted by
the presence of the Lord," or to the fact of separation, 292, i, this being
itself the doom. Probably the latter meaning is to be adopted, and from
the glory of his might, the preposition repeated, to indicate a distinct
conception ; lax"os is the gen. of origin, 248. The glory is that of God's
manifested might, and exclusion from this beatific vision shall be destruction.
Ver. 10. When he shall have come, oray with su:bj., 379; fut. perf.
force of subj. aor., 383, j8 {Zrav a.^ idv). to be glorified, inf. of design,
390, 3, note; for tense, 386. in (or among, 295, 2) his saints, and to be
admired in (or amonff) all who believe (read ino-Tei'craa-ti', aor. part.,
"already believers," compare 364, e) ; probably eV here is to be taken,
not as among simply, but as showing the sphere (295, 4) in which the glory
will be displayed, and from which the admiration will spring, because
our testimony to you was believed, parenthetical expansion of
viffrUffatriv, and the one aor. helps to explain the other : then, belief will
have become a fact of the past. ^cDv is gen. of origin. For ivl, dependent
on fiapTvpiov, see 305, 7, 4. in that day, clause dependent on ivSo^. koI
eav/jL., thrown somewhat out of order, compare 409, c. For 4y, see 295, 7;
^KetVp, the emphatic demonstrative, 340, note.
Ver. II. Whereto we also pray, fis denoting direction, 298, 4;
5, rel. pron., ace. neut,, antecedent in the entire previous sentence, 344;
Kol, with reference to the general sentiment of the preceding, "we not only
indulge the hope, but also express it in prayer." always concerning
you, 313, 2. that (384, note) our God may count you worthy
of the calling, gen., as 272, and for art., see 210. The meaning of a^ictxTp
is doubtful : make worthy would appear best to suit the context, but this
sense of the verb in the New Testament is unexampled, and fulfil every
good pleasure (see 224, a; 214, c) of goodness, t.e., every voluntary
purpose that can spring from (gen. orig.) goodness; not God's goodness, for
which a'yaCwffvvT] is never used, but goodness as an element of Christian
2 THESSALONIANS I. 12; 11. 1, 2. 393
€vboKLav aya6(i}<ruvr]s koI epyov TrtVreo)? h bvvaiJ.€i ' ^^ oirws
cvbo^aorOrj to ovofxa rod Kvpiov rjixcav 'Irjcrov Xpi(TTov kv vfjuv, kol
vfji€LS €V avTi^, Kara ttjv yapLv rod &€ov rjjxoiv koI Kvpiov ^Irjaov
'KpKTTOV.
CHAPTER II.
'EPflTXlMEN 8^ vpLCLif a8eA<^ot, vircp ttjs Trapova-Cas rod KvpCov
rjpiOiV *lr](rov Xpta-rov, kol tJ/xwz; iTTLOVvayuiyrjs iir avrov, ^ els to
IXTj Ta\i(>)S a-a\€v6rjvaL vfias airb tov vobs, /urjre Opo^'iaOai, fJLi]T€
bta TTi'evjtxaro? /Lt?]re bta \6yov /xt^re bt cTrtcrroA^? cos be' rjfxoyv, 0)5
character, so corresponding with the next clause, and work (also quali-
fied by iraaav, see 318) of faith (248) in power (295, 6), qualifying
irXripdar), "powerfully fulfil."
Ver. 12. In order that the name of our Lord Jesus (Christ),
Zttws, as distinguished from Iva, seems to denote the Jiow as contrasted with
the where ; but the line cannot be very clearly drawn. Xpiarov is omitted
by most edd. may be glorified (384, a, i ; tense, 374, note) in you
(see on ver. 10), and you (understand ivZoloffBrtre) in him (or in it, i.e.,
tlie name, but less probably. See Alford, and 295, 4, note), according
to, for KaTti, see 300, )8, 5. the grace of our God and Lord Jesus
Christ (or of our God and the Lord Jesus Christ), see 232, a, note on Titus
ii. 13, where, however, the phrases are different. Kipios is so often properly
anarthrous (217, h) that the former of the above renderings is at least
doubtful. (See Ellicott here).
Ver. 1. But (Se transitional, 404; the writer's mind passing from his own
prayers to the duty of his readers) we entreat you, brethren, in
reference to, 303, a, 3 (not by, as if in adjuration. See Alf.) the
coming of our Lord Jesus Christ, and our (gen. obj., 268)
gathering together unto him, for M, see 305, 7, 3 (Mark v. 21),
not up to, although the reference is to the final gathering.
Ver. 2. That ye be not (lit., in order tJiat ye shoidd not be) soon
shaken, for els, see 298, 4. The purpose of the entreaty was to prevent
their being shaken. For t6, substantivizing the inf., see 390; for fi-fj,
385; for v/xas, 285, and note, from your mind (or conviction), airS,
as 292, I ; the article as an unemphatic possessive, 215. nor yet be
troubled, for fj.7)^4 disjunctive (not /u^re, as rec), see 405 ; epoelcrBai, pres.
inf., denoting an enduring state, the aor., aaXevO., referring to a single effect,
386. neither by spirit nor by word nor by letter, as by us,
394 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
OTL €vi(rTr}K€V rj rnxipa rod XpL(TTov. ^ MrJ rts v/xas e^airaT-qcni
Kara fjLTjbeva TpoitoV otl €av jjlt} €K6r] rj aTToa-raa-ia TTpStrov, Kal
a7roKa\v(f)6fj 6 avOpoiiros ttjs afJiaprCas, 6 vlbs ttjs aTrcoXeta?,
* 6 avTiK.€LiJi€vos Kol vTTepaipoixevos cTTt irdvTa Xeyofjievov 0€oy r/
(T^^aa-fxa, coo-re avrbv els rov vaov tov Qeov cos 0eor KaOicraif
iiTrobeLKVvvTa kavrbv otl eorl 0eos. ^ ov [jivr]ixov€V€T€ otl €tl (op
the repeated fi-fire here breaks up the negation into three parts, and connects
them. For Sid, see 299, a, 2. {Spirit no doubt refers to a pretended pro-
phecy ; word, to a pretended saying on inspired authority ; letter, therefore,
according to the parallel, should mean a pretended epistle. That the refer-
ence is not to the First Epistle, the ws seems further to indicate), as that
(2 Cor. V. 19 shows that the &s does not in itself imply deceit, but only
that the thing was so represented — "to the effect that"), the day of
the Christ (or Lord ; Kvpiov is the accepted reading, instead of Xpia-rov)
is already come (or, is imminent, immediately), not simply is at handy
for the verb always refers to the present; the part, iveards expressly
signifying the present in distinction from the future (Rom. viii. 38 ; i Cor.
iii. 22.)
Ver. 3. Let no one deceive you, ^|air., subj. in imper. sense, 375;
aor., 373, b. in (Kard, 300, fi, 5) any way, the two negatives strengthen
the denial, 401. because, unless the apostasy, definite, 213. shall
first have come (383, /3, note), and the man of sin {the sin, 214, 6)
shall have been revealed, — the Apostle does not conclude the sen-
tence, see 412, e, but passes on to describe the characteristics of the " man of
sin." the son of perdition (genitives of quality).
Ver. 4. He that withstands, and exalts himself (middle, 355, i).
Obs., the single article shows that the two participles refer to the same
subject. But avTiKtifievos cannot take ivl following ; an object must, there-
lore, be understood, Christ. On the tense, see 395. above (305, y, 2) every
one called God, observe irdvra, masc. or an object of worship,
&€6y and ffcfiaafia, accus., in apposition with vdvra after copulative verb, so
that he sits, for So-re, see 391 ; Kcudiffai, intrans. aor., "he took his seat,"
and so now is seated in — literally, into — i.e., "entered into and sits in,"
constrvctio prcegnans, 298, 8. exhibiting himself that he is God,
avotuK., ace. by abrSv preced., present, as expressing his habit. For the
object and object-sentence, see 411, b, 4<rrl is emphatic.
Ver 5. Remember ye not, interrog., 369, b. that, introducing
object-sentence, 380. when yet with you, &y, part, in apposition with
subj. of ^\fyov; for irp6s, see 307, 7, 2. I used to tell yOU thOSe
things, for imjierf., see 362, 6; vfilr, 278, 6.
2 THESSALONIANS II. 6-9. 395
TTpo^ vfjias ravra eXeyov vyXv ; ^ koX vvv to Kariyov otbare, et? to
cLTTOKaKvcpOrjvaL avTov €V rw kavTov Katpw. "^ to yap [xvoTrjpiov
■qdr} evepyelTai ttjs avojxias, fxovov 6 KaTiyjjiv apTi ecus €k [xIctov
yivqTai • ^ koI t6t€ airoKakvcfyOi^a-cTai 6 &voixos, ov 6 Kvpios
avaX(&(T€L Tw TTvevfJiaTL tov aTofxaTos avTov, koI KaTapyrjaeL
TTJ k'Ki^av^ia TTJs irapova-ias avTov • ^ ov €(ttlv rj irapovaia
KaT €vipyeiav tov ^aTava kv Trda-ri bvvdjjieL kol (rqfjieCoLS Koi
Ver. 6. And now ye know what hinders, vvv temporal (as when
with you I gave yoii the information, so now ye know), or logical, without
reference to time (Ellicott) ; t6 kut^xov, part., substantivized, in order
that he should be revealed in his own time, for els, see 390, c.
The hindrance is "in order to" the revelation being made at the right time,
as a barrier might be said to be for the proper admission of a multitude.
For iv, see 295, 7 ; for the position of eavrov, reflex, pron., 229.
Ver. 7. For, 407, explanatory of the hindrance, the mystery of the
lawlessness (or iniquity) is already at work, auofxias, definite, gen.
either of apposition, 259, "the mystery which is the iniquity;" or of quality,
257, "the mystery characterized by (the) iniquity;" ^Stj, adv. of time,
ivepy., middle present, 361, a. only, fiSvov, adv. he who hinders,
change from neut. to masc. at present, until he shall have been
taken out of the way {midst). This clause may either be read, by a
slight inversion of words, as dependent upon the former — "is at work only
until he who at present hinders be taken out of the way," the objection to
which is the unnatural position of eeoy — or by supposing an ellipsis of a
predicate, "only he who hinders (is working, iv€pye7Tai) as yet, until," &c.
In this case, the thought which ydp introduces is in the latter, not the former
clause of the verse. Compare the examples in 410, b. {For, although the
mystery is even now working, there is as yet a ^'hinderer.") For 4k fiea-ov,
see 219.
Ver. 8. And then, i.e., when the restraining power or person is taken
out of the way, rSre emphatic, shall the lawless one be revealed,
210. whom the Lord {Jesus added, as in best MSS.) will consume
by the breath {Spirit), 280, d. of his mouth, 248. and will
destroy by the manifestation of his coming, 258.
Ver. 9. Whose coming is, oS, correspondent with ov, ver. 8, relative
to &vofjL05. according to the working of Satan, Kard as 300, 5 ;
it/epy. anarthrous, "such working, in general, as Satan would perform."
For the gen., "Sar., see 20, a. in (of investiture or accompaniment, 295, 3)
all power and signs and wonders, irdari in sense belongs to all three
nouns, 318, and denotes "every kind of," 224, a. of falsehood, prob.
396 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
ripaa-L yjrevbovs, ^° kol kv irdaj] airaTTj lijs abiKias €V roh clttoX-
kuiM€VOL^, avO* &v TTjv aydirriv rrjs d\'r]Qeia<s ovk khi^avTO cis to
(TOidrjvaL avTovs ' ^^ kol bia tovto iriiJi\j/€L avrols 6 Qebs kvipyuav
irXdvrjSy ets to ina-TevaaL avTovs ro) yj/evhcL • ^^ Xva KpidSxii iravTcs
ol fxi} 7n(TT€V(ravT€S ttj akriQ^iciy a\X^ (vboKrjaavTes €V Trj dbLKia.
^^ 'H/xeis 8e ocfyeCkoixev €v\api(rT^'iv Ta> ©eo) iravTOTC ircpl vixQv,
d5eA0ot rjyoLTTriixivoL virb Kvptov, otl etAero vp.as 6 0eos dir
apxijs els (ra)Tr]pLaif kv ayLa(rp.<^ Ylvevp-aros kol iria-Tei dXrjOetas,
gen. of origin, 248 (these things being severally born of falsehood), or per-
haps gen. of quality, as E.V.
Ver. 10. And in all {every kind of, as ver. 9) doceit, parallel to the
former prepositional clause with eV, the two together explanatory of /car.
ivepy. 2aT. of iniquity (the article should be omitted), gen. of quality.
among {or for) the perishing (omit iv, with all the best modern edd.),
dat incommodi, 279. For the force of the participle, see 200 (note), and 396.
because, for avS' wv, see 291, note, they received not, aorist, viewing
their lifetime as past, the love of the truth, gen. obj., 268. in order
that they might be saved, const, as vers. 2, 6.
Ver. II. And on this account, 299, h, i.e., because they received
not, &c. God will send (or, is sending ; ire/iirej, not Trefiypei, is the ap-
proved reading), explanatory of the airoWvfievois. to them (dat. of trans-
mission) a working of delusion, parallel to iuepyetav above, gen. of
characteristic quality, 257. so that they should believe (the intent,
and so the result, of the delusion, 390, c) the falsehood, dative, 278, d;
article of *' renewed mention," 212.
Ver. 12. That they might all be judged, a second intentional
clause, 384, growing out of the preced. who believed not the truth,
395, b ; for negative, see 393. but took pleasure, the conduct viewed
as past from the point of view of their condemnation, in the iniquity,
art. as 212.
Ver. 13. But we, emphatic pron., 169. are bound to give thanks
to God always concerning you, see on ch, i. 3. brethren be-
loved by the Lord {i.e., by Christ, see 217, b), because God (for
art., see 217, a) chose you (var. read., ei'AoTo, see 97, b, note), causal sen-
tence; comi^are the on in cli. i. 3. from the beginning, 219, unto
salvation, dependent upon c'tA. ; for cty, see 298, 4. in sanctification
of the Spirit, iy denoting the sphere (295, 4) in which the salvation is
reahzed. Uufvfi. is gen. of the author, 248; for omitted article, see 217, /
and belief of truth (or, the truth), irlarti without the art., like ayianfi.^,
under the common regimen of iv, 314; see also 208. Truth is abstract, 214,
2 THESSALONIANS IT. 14-17. 397
^* et? €Kd\€(T€V vfxas bta rod evayyeXiov rjixcaVf ets iTcpnroLrjcrLV
ho^rjs Tov KvpLov 7]ix5>v 'I?7(roO Xpiorof). ^^ apa ovz^, ah€\(po\,
(TTrjK€T€, Kol KpaTelre ras TTapab6(r€is hi ebibdx^drjre, €lt€ bia
Xoyov €tre hC €Tn(TTo\r\i rjjjiutv. ^^ avrbs be 6 Kvpto? rjiioiv
*lr](Tovs Xpio-Tos, KOL 6 Oeoi KOL Trarrjp rjfxwv, 6 dyaitria-as i)p.ai
KoX bovi irapdKkrjaiv aloivCav kol eXTTiba dyaOrjv kv xdpiTi,
^7 irapaKakea-ai vp.G>v raj KapbCas, kol orrrjpL^aL v/xas €V iravTl
Xoyco KOL epyco dya6(2.
and is used in the utmost generality ; not so much the specific truth of the
Gospel, but the Gospel considered as truth ; the disposition given being that
of harmony with truth in itself, whatever it might be.
Ver. 14. Unto wllicll (state of salvation), the neuter relative referring
to the whole object of thought; compare 344. he called you, aor., as
before, of specific time, by means of, 299, a, 2. our gospel, ie.y the
Gospel as preached by us, see 270, note, for the attainment of the
glory, ets, connected with and explanatory of els arwr. ; 5o|., gen. obj.,
268. (The gloiy of Christ is regarded as in a sense the heritage of Chris-
tians ; compare John xvii. 24.) of our Lord Jesus Christ, possess,
gen., 254.
Ver. 15. Accordingly therefore, for the inferential conjunction,
see 406. brethren, stand fast (derivative of ea-TrjKa, see 106, 4), and
hold fast the instructions, ace. obj. of kjoot., compare 264. which
ye were taught, S.s, secondary object, with pass. eStSc^x- > see 284, note,
and 356. whether by word, 299, a, 2. or by our (248) epistle.
For eifre, see 405.
Ver 16. But may our Lord himself, 5e, as usual, adversative, 404;
avrSs, very emphatic, 335. Jesus Christ, and (may) our God and
Father (or, God and our Father, see Ellicott on GaL i. 4). For our God, see
ch. i. II. who loved us, referring to the last antecedent, God the Father
(aor., as referring to a single and complete act). and gave eternal
consolation and good hope, abstract, anarthrous ; better rendered
without indef. art. in grace, connected with Sovs, 295, 6 and 4.
Ver. 17. Comfort, for opt., see 378: sing., indicative of the close union
between the Father and the Son ; so the following, your hearts, plur. ,
see 237. and establish you, vfxas omitted in chief MSS. in every
good work and word (such being the order of the best authorities),
4if denotes again the element; that in which the confirmation is given.
398 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
CHAPTER III.
TO XoLTTou, TTpoaevx^o-Qe, dSeA^ot, TTcpC rjfjicov, tva 6 Xoyos
Tov Kvp[ov rpixrj kol bo^d^rjTai, /cameos koI irpbs vims, * Koi. tva
pv(r6aiiJi€V CLTTo tS>v aroTTOiv koI irovqp&v avOpcairoiV • ov yap
TTCLVTOiV rj Tlia-TlS. ^ TTLCTTOS hi k(TTlV 6 KvplOS, 6? <TTr}pL^€i Vfias
KOL (f)v\d^€L CLTTO TOV TTOVqpOV. * TTeiTOLdaflCV be €V Kvpi(0 €(f)
Vfjias, OTL h irapayyiWofJiev vpuv, kol Troietre kol TTOL-qcreTc,
Ver. I. For the rest (as to what remains to be said), neut. adj., ace. of
time (comp. 286, b, z ; see also 266, and Ellicott on Gal. vi. 17). pray,
brethren, for us, for irfpt, see on i. 1 1 ; also for 'Iva. that the word
of the Lord may have free course {run) and be glorified,
passive, not (as some) middle, even as also {it is) with you, Kai adds
in thought the Thessalonian Church to the other places where the word
achieved success. For vpSs, see 307, 7, 2.
Ver. 2. And that we may be delivered, aor. subj., showing that
a specific deliverance is desired, 374, note; the pres. subj., ver. i, suggesting
continuous success, 374, note, from the perverse and wicked men,
the article denoting a class, as the hypocrites, Matt. vi. 2, probably specifying
the Jewish party in Corinth, whence this Ep. was written, for the faith,
the Christian faith, see 213 (not faith in general, which in this connection
would hardly have been definite, does not belong to all, lit, "(is)
not of all," i.e., is not their possession, see 267, note.
Ver. 3. But (although the faith is denied by so many) faithful is the
Lord, a paronomasia with the preceding clause, 413, a, 2. who will
establish you, ref. to ampi^ai, ii 17. and guard (you) from evil,
or less appropriately (yet see Ellicott), the Evil One. Comp. the quotations
in 316, p. 292. The neuter sense is sustained by the close connection through
oTTjptf. with Ispycp in ii. 17. For awS, see 292, i.
Ver. 4. But we trust, the adversative 5^ bringing the future just ex-
pressed into antithesis with the present (so Ellicott). in the Lord, 295, 4
(not simply "in the Lord, who will bring this about by his goodness," but
being in Him, as the element of our life and hope, we trust) ; for v^TroiSa,
see 99, c, note, also 367. in reference to you, for M, see 305, 7, 4.
that what we command (you) now, as the verb, is pres. ; vfiTv (dat.
by 2^8. b) is doubtful ye both are doing, and will do, for koI...
Kai, see 405. The whole clause from Sn depends on irciroid. as an object-
sentence, 380.
2 THESSALONIANS III. 5-8. 399
^ 6 8e KvpLos Karevdvvai vfxcav tcls KapbCas €ts ttjv ayaTTr]v rod
&€0V, KOl etS VTTOIIOVrjV TOV XpL(TTOV.
^ IIapayyeWofJi€V be v[XiV, abeXcfyol, €V ovofxari tov KvpCov
r\iiGiV ^\r\(TOV 'KpLarov, crreAAecr^at Vfjias cltto iravTos ah€X(f)ov
arcLKTOos ircpiTTarovvTos, /cat jjir] Kara ttjv irapdboa-LV rjv irapiXa^e
Trap* rjfjLwv, '^ avTol yap otbarc ttcos Set fxi^^Xo-Oai rjfias ' otl ovk
rjTaKTrjaaiJLGV kv v[uv, ^ ovbe bcopeav aprov ((fydyofxev irapd tlvos»
Ver. 5. But, again slightly adversative, " though this is the case, yet as
a further blessing." may the Lord, «.e., Jesus Christ himself, 217, h.
(As Christ is separately mentioned at the close of the verse, some refer K.
here to the Holy Spirit, quoting 2 Cor. iii. 1 8 ; but the argument is very
doubtful.) direct your hearts, opt., as in ii. 17; vfxwv slightly emphatic
from position, into the love of God, for ety, see 298, i ; OeoO objective,
269. and into the patience of Christ, prep, repeated, as of a sepa-
rate object of thought, 314. Before uir., the art. riiv should undoubtedly be
inserted. Xp. is probably gen. of possession, 254, "such patience as Christ
exhibited;" or it may be gen. of author, "the patience that Christ imparts."
The objective sense given in E.V., ^'patient waiting for^''^ is not supported
by the meaning of inrofiovi}.
» Ver. 6. Now, Se, transitional (404, ii.) to the preceptive part, we
command you, brethren, for irapay., see ver. 4. in the name of
(our or the) Lord Jesus Christ [w^v, doubtful), 4v 6v6n., dependent
uponirap., 295, 5. that ye withdraw yourselves, object, inf., with
ace. subject, 285 ; areAA., only mid. in the New Testament; active, to put
together ; mid. , to draw oneh self together, 355, i ; hence to shrink from, with
ace, as in 2 Cor. viii. 20, or with airS, as here, from every brother
walking disorderly, and not, subjective neg. according to,
3C0, 5. the instruction (see^iL 15) which he (or tliey) received,
%v, obj. of 7rape\aj8., 343. The reading here is doubtful; most modern critics
preferring they received {irapf\a^ov) in reference to the implicit plural in
iravrSi, by synesis, 175. from US, ior irapd, see 306, a.
Ver. 7. For yourselves know, emphatic pron. subj. ; ydp suggests
an implied thought: "I need not enter into details, for." how ye ought
to imitate us (for the impersonal verbs, see 10 1), "a brachylogy"
(Ellicott), implying irepnraTeli/, from preced., "how ye ought to walk — in
fact, to imitate us." because we were not disorderly, '6ti gives
the reason for fii/Mela-Qai, " we propose our conduct for imitation, because."
among you, 295, 2,
Ver. 8. Nor, slightly ascensive, "nay, and we did not," 404. did WG
eat bread, 306, a, 350 (to eat bread is a quasi-proverbial phrase for "to
400 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
dAA.* iv Koiitd Kol fx6x0(o, vvKTa KOLi rjfjiipav epya^o'/xei'ot, irphs to
UTj iinfiapijcraC riva vyL5>v • ^ ov\ on ovk. e)(o/uei^ (^ova-Cav, dAA
tva kavTovs tvttov bSyfxcv v\uv et? to /xi/xeto-^at 7/jua9. ^^ /cat yap
ore ?7/:x€i; Trpos v/aas, roOro TTaprjyyikXofxev vixiv, otl et T19 Oi»
deAet kpya^eadai, p.i]h'k €(t6Ut(i). ^^ aKovofX€v yap TLva<5 ii^pL-
iraTovvTas ev viuv aTCLKrois, iMrjbev €pya^op.ivovs, aXka irepLcpya'
CoiJL€vovs. ^'^ Tols 6e TOLovTOL^ TTapayyiWofxev kol irapaKakovpicv
bia Tov KvpCov -qjx&v ^Irja-ov Xptorou, tva {jlctcl -^a-vx^^as €pyaC6iJL€V0L
make a living "). for nought, Supedv, an old ace. aa adv., 126, a; com-
pare its use in Matt. x. 8, "without an equivalent;" so in other passages,
from any one, 306, a. but in (accompaniment, 295, 3) toil and
travail (we did so) labouring night and day, 286, b, 2. Both these
clauses depend on icpdyoixcy, implied, in order not to be burden-
some, for TrpSs with inf., see 390, c. to any of you, for ace, compare
281, a; vfjiwv, partitive gen., 262.
Ver. 9. Not that, a frequent elliptical formula, correcting a possible
misapprehension, "do not suppose me to say that" (see Ellicott on PhiL
iii. 12). we have not a right (to maintenance), but (we do so) in
order that we may present ourselves, Sw/iev, aor. of one definite
determination; for kainovs, see 335, 2, 6. an example, secondary predi-
cate, in apposition with eovr. to you, to the end that, us as in ii 11,
&c. (ye) should imitate us.
Ver. 10. For even, see 407, note, when we were among you,
for vp6s, compare ii. 5. we used to enjoin this upon you, impf.,
362, h ; for irapayyfWto and its regimen, see ver. 4, 6. that, introducing
objective sentence explanatory of tovto, but thrown into a quotation form,
382, a; hence icrO. imper. "if any one wills not to work," for €t,
see 383, a; for d4\€i, 363,/. " neither let him eat," neg., 371.
Ver. 1 1 . For, introducing the reason of the command, we hear that
some are walking, predicative participle, 394. among you, iy as
ver. 7. disorderly, doing no work, but being busybodies, par-
ticiples in ap})Osition with vepiir. ; for the paronomasia, see 41 3, a, 2. The
verb irtpiepy. does not again occur in the New Testament, although the subst.
wfpiepyoi is found, i Tim. v. 13.
Ver. 12. But to such as these, pron. definite, 220. we command
and exhort, the dat. obj. belongs grammatically to irapayy., as in ver 4,
&c. ; irapaKoX. takes the ace. by (or tn, the rec. Zii is less fully supported
than iv ; see Ellicott) the Lord Jesus Christ that, working with
quietness, for /ierd, see 301, o, 2. they eat, subj. by iVo; tense, 374.
Obs. vapayy. with the inf., ver. 6; with object and obj. clause, 8t*, ver. 10
2 THESSALONIANS III. 13-17. 401
Tov kavTcav apTOV ia-Oicoa-LV, ^^ vjxtls he, abe\(l)ol, jxi] €KKaKi]a-r]T€
Ka\.OTTOLOVVT€S. ^* €t b4 TiS 0V)(^ V7TaK0V€L T(Z \6y(£> TJfJiQv blO. Tjjs
€7Ti(rToXT]S, TovTov (Tr]ix€Lov(r6€ ' Kol fXY} avvavafiiyvvcrOe avr<}, tva
evrpairfj • ^'^ nal }xr] a)S i^Opov Tjyelcrde, aXXa vovOere'LTe ws
abckipov. ^^ avTos 6e 6 Kvptos rrjs eiprjvijs hcoi] vjjllv T7]V elprjvrjv
bia iravTos iv iravrl rpoTTO). 6 Kvpcos ixera ttclvtcdv vjjlcov.
^'^ *0 acnracrixos rfj 6ju.r/ x^^P' YlavXov, o eort a-r][ieiov ev iraoi]
here with the intentional particle. The command is given in order that the
result may follow, their own bread, emphatically, not that of others.
Ver, 13. But ye, emphatic, by way of contrast to those just mentioned.
brethren, be not weary, subj., with imper. force, 375. The reading
varies between ^kk. and iyu. ; the latter (from iv) being to grow weary or
cowardly in any enterprise ; the former, to go out of it through weariness
or cowardice. But ckk. is altogether doubtful., in well-doing, pres.
part., adjunct to pred., 394, 3, h, "whilst well-doing" being implied; or
causal, as c.
Ver. 14. But if any one obeys not, 383, a. our word, 278, d.
through, conveyed by, 299, a, 2. the epistle, i.e., this epistle, note
this man, for ott?^., middle, see 355, 2, "mark for yourselves." and
keep no company with him, dat. of association, 277, a. The pres.
imper. in both cases enjoins the conduct as habitual. that he be
ashamed, the purpose, again, not simply the result,
Ver. 15. And, not adversative, but simply conjunctive; another parti-
cular of the conduct to be observed, esteem (him) not as an enemy,
Cos, a particle of apposition connecting ex^/c. with tovtov, understood from
preced. but admonish (him) as a brother,
Ver. 16. But (the antithesis being between the persons addressed by the
Apostle and those just specified, "as for you," "to return to you") may
the Lord of (the) peace, gen. of quality, himself, emphatic pron.
give (the) peace to you, S^'tj, opt. in the usual sense and the ordinary
const, of the verb. The article before elp. both times is emphatic, recognising
peace as the peculiar and well-understood Christian blessing. always,
XP^von understood with iravrds, an adverbial adjunct to S^'77. in every
way, Lachmann reads tJtt^, place. The Lord be, ctr? as i. 2. with,
301, a, I. you all.
Ver. 17. The salutation, nominative, in apposition with ver. 18, as a
kind of title : "This is the salutation." of me, Paul, with my own
hand, for const., see 336, p. 307; ^^ipt, dat. of instr., 280, d. which,
neuter rel. pron., 346, a. is the sign, pred. om. art., see 206. in every
epistle, 224, a. so I write, the other member of the comparison being
402 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
eiriaroXfi • ovtco ypdcpoi. ^^ tj xapis rov KvpCov rjixfav 'Ir/o-ou
X/otoTOv fjL€Ta TTOLVTcov vfxCiv. afjirjv,
mpos Secra-aXovLKcls bevrepa iypdcprj cltto ^ A6r]vanf.
omitted, as obvious to the orig. readers; compare examples under 412, e.
Probably the phrase alludes to some peculiarity in the handwriting. Cora-
pare Gal. vi. 1 1.
Ver. 18. The grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be, (h, as i. 2.
with (301, o, i) you all. (Amen is omitted by Tischendorf ; but see
Ellicott. )
The subscription to the Epistle, The second (epistle) to the Thessalonians was
written from Athens (see also subscription to First Epistle), is undoubtedly
spurious, and is also incorrect. It arose probably from a careless and mis-
taken interpretation of i Thess. iiL i.
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
Probably no two words in any language are precisely synonymous^
although many are interchangeable. It has already been shown
(p. 256) that words in different languages seldom, if ever, perfectly
correspond. Hence arise some of the chief difficulties of transla-
tion. It has often been unthinkingly suggested that, in the New
Testament for instance, the same Greek word should always be
rendered by the same English one. This rule would constantly
lead to glaring incorrectness : although, undoubtedly, capricious or
unnecessary variations should be avoided. The word suffer, for
instance, covers so great an extent of meaning, that we are hardly
surprised to find it employed in the Authorized Version for ten
distinct Greek words, beside various combinations of the same
roots. To provoke, again, occurs twelve times in the English
Yersion for eight different Greek words. To provide is found
eight times, representing six distinct originals. The verb ordain
occurs eighteen times : once for noieco, which Greek word has in
different places thirty-six English equivalents ; once for ylvofiai,
the various equivalents of which are almost innumerable ; twice
for optica, which is translated in four different ways ; once for
npoopiCco, which has three English equivalents ; twice for rWrjyn, a
verb translated in fifteen ways ; twice for rao-o-co, which is rendered
by five different words; thrice for biaTaao-o}, a verb with five
renderings ; thrice for Kadia-Trjixi, which we find translated in six
404 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
ways ; once for Karaa-Kevd^a}, a verb with four English equivalents ;
once for Kpivo), which is rendered in fifteen ways ; and once for
X^ipoTovecOf a word occurring twice, and in each place differently
rendered. In addition to these, we have to ordain beforey by
7rpoypu(f>a> and irpo^Toipd^a).
Such instances suggest the largeness of the field that is open to
the inquirer into the so-called Synonyms, whether of the Greek or
the English New Testament. To cover that field, in however
perfunctory a manner, would be plainly impossible in the compass
of a few pages. All that can be attempted is to point out the
main distinctions between some important words in general use, of
kindred meaning, and often translated alike in the Authorized
Version. For further detail, the English reader is referred to
Tittmann's " Remarks on the Synonyms of the New Testament,"
translated in Clark's Biblical Cabinet^ 1833-37 ; to Archbishop
Trench's " Synonyms of the New Testament ;" and to the " Syntax
and Synonyms of the New Testament," by the Kev. W.
Webster, m.a.
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
405
WORDS ILLUSTRATED.
NO.
'kryaBSs, ayaQaaivr^
. 21
Sal/xotv, Sai/xSviov . , » .
ayairdo}, aydin)
• • •
. 19
SaKpvw .
ayios, a-yp65
• . .
. 23
SfTjcris ....
ayv6r}fj.a
• . .
. 39
Set . . . .
ay opa^oi
, . .
. 43
5fi\65, deiKia
aSris .
, .
• 5^
SetaiSatfMwv, deiaidaifioyia
&S1KOS, aSiKia
. • .
. 32
SfaTr6Tr)s
a'iSios .
,
. 58
Srj/jios ....
ulvio), c^vos .
• • .
. 47
Sid5r]fMa
KtVew, atrrifia
t . .
9, 38
Sidttovos, BiuKoyia, SiaKoveco
* 3^
ald'V, aldytos .
.
. 58
5ia\4yo/xai .
dA.ei^«
.
. 18
Biduoia ....
a\r}6r]s, a\7}6eia, a
K-neivdi
. 24
Starayi] . . .
&Wos .
.
• 76
SiSdaKco, Si5a(rKaA.05
14
afiapToiva), a/xaprta
aixdpTrjiJ.a .
• 39
SiKaios, SLKUioivfT], SiKalwfjLa
21
aix(\>'iBX7](TTpov
. 70
S'lKTVOV
aydO-q/JLa, at/ddefia,
a.va9ffj.aTl((a
• 51
i6yiJLa ....
dvaKaiv6o}, avavtSw
. .
. 26
SoKew, S6^a .
*6
aviip .
.
. 62
Sov\os ....
^udpCOTTOS
.
. 62
Svyafiai, Svvafiis .
45
dvofxia .
,
• 39
Su/xa ....
dvoxh .
.
• 31
dvrlKvTpov .
.
• 43
'EBpaTos ....
kiroKvTpttXTis .
.
. 43
efiyos, e0j/77 ....
OMTTO/iaj
, .
7
eJdov, €i5os, fXdu\ov
5
dperii .
. .
21, 47
cIkuv .....
■ipxaios
. 25
elixl ....
abX-h .
,
• 72
eTiroj/, CTTOS ....
cKplrifii, &(j>f<ris
V
. 42
eAeos
"EAXriv, 'EW-nvKTTijs
Bdpos .
Be\Tiov
Bios
BXeiro}, i8A€/A)tto .
BovXoixai, BovKrj .
Bp^<pos .
•
. 68
. 21
euSvfMa . .
i^ova-ia ....
iuTo\^ .....
.
• 54
: A
' 3
. 62
iiraivecio, eTraivos . . ,
iTTLaraixai . . .
eVto-TciTTjy ....
«PX°/*«t ....
'-,-1
BwfjLds ,
•
• 37
epw .....
ipwrdd) ....
eVe^s
yUvva .
.
• 52
erepos .....
ylvo^cu.
.
I
evayyeKioy. (uayyeAiCco ..
yiydxTKtt
.
• 4
evXaB-fls, €uXaj8e<a, ^vKaB^ofxai %%,
ySnos ,
;.
. 68
iv\oyr)T6s ....
.
406
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
NO.
fiiae^-ffs, fvarefifia .
. 44
Ae7«, \6yos . . . . ,
fiXOfMu
. . . 38
\€iTovpy6s, \eiTovpy4a), Keirovpyla,
\eiTovpyiK6s . . . .
C«^ . . .
. 54
Ajjo-T^s . . . . . .
Kidos
^KW . . .
. 10
\6yo5
^TTTJfJLa
. 39
Kvrpov, XvTpSw, XvTpcoffis
Xvxvos, Kvxvia . . . .
edvaToSy BayarSw, 6yr}T6
s . . 54
Oedofiou
• 5
fjMd-nT-fjs, fiaOriTeiu
BfW .
• 3
fiaxdpios . . . . .
eeo<r€$iis, e^ocrefifia
• 44
fiaKpodvfila . . . . .
©ec^TTji, ©eidxTjs
. 34
pidvTis, ixavreiofxai.
eepdirwy, ecpairevo) .
. 60
fidraios . . , . .
Oeapew .
5
fieyaXvvw . . . . .
eiyydvw
• 7
/jL€\€i, fjLe\fTda> . . . .
eyrjrSs ...
. . . 54
/ueAAw ......
dprjcTKOS, OpiqaKela .
. 44
H^ptfivdotf fiepifiva ....
dvfjids .
. 3z
fiiTajmeXoficu .....
eipa . . .
. 71
fieravoea, nerdyoia
Bvaia, Qvaicurriipiov
. 37
f^ofxp^
Upevs .
. 37
votJs . . . .
Up6s, Up6v .
. *3, 35
vfKpos, veKp6ot ....
i^daKOfxou, IXacfiSs
. 43
V€os, yedrris .....
tfidriov.
. 66
1*^401
'lovhaios, *l(TpaT}\lTr}S
. 50
vlTno) ......
Icx^df, iffx^s.
• 57.
vot/^, p6r}fJia .....
KaQap6s
. 23
^7^05
Kaiv6sy KaivSrris
. 26
oSvp/iJs
KcupSs .
. . . 64
olSa
kokSs, Koutia.
. 22
oIkoS, OlKia, olKfTTJS
Ka\6s .
. 21
oiKOvfjLfvr] .....
Kaphia .
• 55
olKTtpfjt.6s .....
KarayytWu) .
• 15
6\6K\r]pos, 0A.0T6A.17s
Kar-nx^c
. 14
^pao), bpaiio, 5<I/oucu, £i|/is
Kt:v6s .
. 29
0P7^
KTjpvffaw, K-fipvy/ia.
• 15
So-ios ......
K\alu .
. 20
o</)«rA«, 6<pei\rjfia ....
K\4irrris . .
. 74
^X^oy
k6<Pivos. . .
. 69
K6(TfX0S . . ,
. 58
iraTy, iraiSiov, wai^eveo . . 62
KpuTos, Kpelaawv ,
. 57, 21
iraXaids .....
Kria-is .
. 49
Topd^aa-is, irapaKoii, vapdirruiJia,
KiptOS . ( .
. 59
-irapavofiia ....
irapafioKii, rrapoifJiia
XoAeo. .
8, 15
irapdBoffis . . . . •
Xa/JiTrds
. . 65
irdpeais. .....
\a6s . . . .
. 73
varpid
Xarpevot . . .
. . 36
irapopyi<r/x6s
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
4U7
Trevijs ....
TrepiTTOieofiai, irepiiroirjcris
TreVpo, irirpos
TrXr]p6w, irKiipoDiJLa
ttAww .
irvivfxa .
TTOldd} .
TToifxaluw, TroifiVT], Troifiviov
irouTjpSs, TTOvrjpia
irpdffcoo
irpoa-ei'xofJ.ai, irpoaevx^
Trpo(TKvv4a>
wpoacpopd
TTpOC^TjTTJS, irpo(t)T)TeiiOfiai .
irTux6s
irii\7], TcvKwv .
irwddvofiai .
pea), prjfia,
crdp^, (TapKiK6s
Sarai/, 'Saravas
ai^ofxai, crefidCoixai
(Tvydofiai, (ncuirdca
CKtd
airovSr) .
(TTrvpis .
NO.
30
43
75
39
13
17
55
2
6, 72
22
2
38
36
37
15
30
71
9
59
70
55
53
36
45
56
II
69
67
56
62
T6A0S, TeAe'w, rehfios, Te\ei6w
repas . . •
VfXVOS . . .
VTrdpx<o
uTTTjpeVrjs
virofiovi} , ,
(palvo/xai ,
(pav\05 .
(peyyos .
^?7^i .
<l>i\eci}, (piXavOpayirla, (pi\ade\(p>
<p6Bos, (poB4o/J.ai .
(popriov
(ppeues .
(ppoveca, (ppovTi^a .
(pvX-i) .
(pus, <pca(ni]p.
XapaKTTip, xapaTi"*
Xdpis .
X^TdllU . .
XP^TtSs, XP170-TOT7JS
Xpioo, xptffT<Js
XP^vos .
ipTj\a((>da
ipvxv, ^vxifcSs
13, 27
45
43
I
60
3^
6
22
65
8
19
33
68
55
11
6)
65
56
41
66
12
21
18
64
48
7
54, 55
408 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
First, some groups of Yerbs in ordinary use may be selected,
with their related Substantives.
1. To Be, Exist, Become.
Elfil is the ordinary verb of existence; inrdpxco implies essential or
original condition (Phil. ii. 6), and so is directly contrasted with yivofiouy to
become (James i. 22). See further, Acts xvii. 24 ; Heb. xi. 6.
2. To Do, to Make.
IT tew seems to denote more sustained effort than tr p 6. <t <t <a, whence the
frequent use of the former for well-doing, the latter for ill-doing. For other
senses of Trpcfo-o-w, see Eph. vi. 21 ; Luke iii. 13 (this last compared with
TToUw in Luke xii. 33, xix. 18).
3. To Wm, to Desire.
BovAojuai denotes the will rather on its intellectual side, **to choose;*'
Q4\co, the simple fact of volition. So the latter is used of arbitrary (Luke
iv. 6) or absolute (Rom. ix. 18) authority, the former of determinations
where the \\asdom and justice are apparent (Luke x. 22, xxii. 42). Thus
BovKi) is counsel; Q^Ktificn, will; $ov\7jua, plan (only in Acts xxvii 43;
llom. ix. 19). BoiXoixai is also used in recommendations, backed by reason
(i Tim. ii. 8, v. 14). For a striking instance of distinction between the two
verbs, compare Mark xv. 9, 12, with verse 15. So Philemon 13, 14. Mf'AAw
indicates futurity, as the result of predetermination, or of some act or
event, ** is to be," " is going to," Matt. iii. 7, xi. 14 ; Luke viL 2 ; Heb. i 14.
4. To Know.
Ol5o is properly a perfect, "I have seen," and implies the knowledge
which comes from without, objective knowledge; yiv<t)<rKQ>, "I learn," in
any way, ex])resses the knowledge as existing in the mind, subjective know-
ledge. Hence, when knowledge involves experience, yivda-Kco is always used
(Eph, iiL 19; PhiL iiL 10 ; i John ii., iii., iv. ); iir'nnafxai. (an old dialectic
form of the middle of i<pi<rT7jixi), "to set (the mind) upon," may either mean
simply to be aware of, as in the Acts, or to umUrstand (Mark xiv. 68). The
distinction between ofSo and iirltrTaiiai may be noted in Jude 10 ; that
between yivdxTKw and iviarafMi in Acts xix. 15.
5. To See.
B.VcTTw denotes the act of seeing, and is referred to the organ; 5o'*'-
i
i
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 409
(5»|/o/iof, flSov) is referred to the thing seen, whether in itself (objectively) or
in regard to its impression on the mind (subjectively). The former verb,
therefore, may be used without an expressed object (as Matt, xiii. 13).
Both verbs are applied to mental vision, the former implying greater vivid-
ness (Heb. ii. 8, 9), With /x-f), they have the sense beware; generally,
however, ^Kiirca is used, occasionally with hirS. In accordance with the
distinction above mentioned, opafia is a vision ; 0\4iJ.ixa, the exercise of the
faculty of snght ; lot. ^KeirSfiei a, the things seen (2 Cor. iv. 18), i.e., on wl ich
the faculty of immediate discernment is exercised ; rh bpar6v, the visible
(Col. i. 16), i.e., in itself considered. Tittman distinguishes bpda> and its
derivatives from elSoj/, in that the former is objective, and the latter sub-
jective, v^opiai. being a middle term. Compare '6pafia, flSos, S^/is. It is
doubtful, however, if this distinction can be maintained in the use of the
verbs, dsdofiai (referred to the subject) and dewpeco (referred to the object)
are to look at purposely, or attentively to gaze upon (Matt. vi. i, xi. 7 ;
John xii. 45 ; Acts vii. 56).
6. To Appear.
Ao/ceo? "expresses the subjective mental estimate or opinion about a
matter which men form, their 5a|a concerning it, which may be right
(Acts XV. 28 ; I Cor. iv. 9, vii. 4c), but which may be wrong, involving, as
it always does, the possibility of error (Matt. vi. 7 ; Mark vi. 49 ;
John xvi. 2; Acts xxvii. 13);" ipalyofxai "expresses how a matter
phenomenally shows and presents itself, with no necessary assumption of
any beholder at all." — Trench. This "phenomenon" may represent a
reality (Matt. ii. 7 ; Phil. ii. 15, "appear," not "shine") or a mere show
(Matt, xxiii. 27, 28).
7. To Touch.
"Airrofiai (middle of airrco, to kindle) is the usual word ; Oiyydycc denotes
a lighter touch (compare the two" in Col. ii. 21, where, as Archbishop Trench
observes, the order of our translation should be reversed ; and see
Heb. xi. 28); rpT]\a(()da} is to feel (" to feel after," Acts xvii. 27), to handle.
Vves. part., palpable, material (Heb. xii. 18).
8. To Speak, Say.
Aa\((o is simply to speak, to employ the organ of utterance ; \4yci) is
referred to the sentiment of what is spoken (compare jSAeVco and opdcc above) j
(prj/xi, p4(j), epw, ilirov, to the words; pv/xa isi a, wo?-d. in itself considered ;
X6yos, a spoken word, with reference generally to that which is in the
speaker's mind; ctos is only found (Heb. vii. 9) in the phrase as eiros eirny,
so to speak.
410 XEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
9. To Ask.
AiVeaj is to ask for something, to beg, pray ; epwTcicc, to question, to ash
in genei'al, specifically : "In that day ye shall ask me no questions ... -what-
soever ye shall pray the Father in my name." Observe, ipurdco is elsewhere
used of Christ's prayers to the Father (John xvii. 9, 15, 20), never of ours.
Compare the two in John xvi 23; and in i John v. 16. llvi/Qdvouxi, to
ask for information, to inquire.
10. To Come.
"Epxoiiai denotes the act, "I am coming;" t^/cw, the result, "I am
come." John viii. 42: "I came from God, and I am here." See also
Heb. X. 9.
11. To Care.
^poveo), (ppovrlQw, implies solicitude (Phil. iv. 10; Titus iii. 8);
jneXeracB (and impers. fi^Xei),- solicitude ex])ressed in forethought, or the
employment of means to the desired result ; ixcpifxvaw, anxious or distracting
care. So the substantive fiepifiya. See especially i Peter v. 7; airovdii
("haste") is earnestness, diligence, generally.
12. Ought.
A6i (impers.) denotes the duty or necessity as existing in the thing itself,
often used for the ougJU arising from prophecy (Luke xxiv. 26, 46) ; d<pei\at
refers to the obligation as actually imposed (John xiii. 14) ; xp^ (only once
in the New Testament, James iii. 10) is connected with xp^'-ofiai, and origi-
nally differs from Set as the rule of utility differs from that of abstract
right (Sel would express Butler's philosophy of morals ; xp^> Paley's).
13. To Accomplish, Fulfil, Perfect.
TeXos expresses the end of a course or series : so TcAew, to reach the end ;
r€\ei6w, to complete; wXTjpdo) denotes the accomplishment of a plan or
pui*pose, to fulfil ; Te\e» gives the finishing stroke (John xix. 30) ; vKupSta
adds the completing element : the former brings the topstone, the latter,
the keystone. Hence they are often interchangeable. Compare Acts xx. 24,
where the prominent thought is the completeness of the Apostle's life-work,
with 2 Tim. iv. 7, where to this is superadded the thought of its approaching
close. The fultilment of pro])hecy is expressed by tTK-r\p6(a, except John xix. 28,
which has reMiSw. UXijpwfjia is generally active, that which brings com-
pleteness, fulness, to anything (Matt. ix. i6 ; i Cor. x. 26); but may
be used passively, that which is filled (Eph. L 23), or abstractedly, /«Z?ie««
(CoL ii. 9).
NEW TESTAMENT SYXONYMS. 411
14. To Teach, Instruct.
Ai^d<TK(o is to teach generally; KaTrj-x^co, strictly to teach by ivord of
mouth (Luke i. 4; Rom. ii. 18). Hence cateche^is, catechize, of careful,
repeated oral instruction ; /xaOrjrevo} ia (actively) to make, or (intransitively)
to be a disciple, in the former sense distingiiished from ZlZirrKw in
Matt, xxviii. 19 ; -n-atSeuw involves the notion of discipline, and is often to
be rendered chasten.
15. To Preach.
KTjpvcTffco {?i to proclaim, as a herald ; K-qpvyfia, the proclamation made ;
^hayjiXiov and ehayy^Kl^oi add the further notion of cjlad tidings;
KurayyeWco refers simply to the delivery of the message. Found with
€vayye\i((a. Acts XV. 35, 36; with Krjpvcrcrca, Phil. i. 15, 16. AaXeu,
sometimes rendered preach, means simply to talk (see 8), and ^la^eyo|J.al
(Acts XX. 7, 9) implies conference; irpo^rjrevo}, to forth-tell, and irpo^rjT-ni,
are used for preachers under the New Testament (Eph. iv. 11; i Cor.
xiv. 1 ), as for the prophets of the Old, both being set to declare the Divine
will; ixdvTis, a soothsayer, is of heathen use, and not found in the New
Testament, ju.avTcvofj.ai occurring only Acts xvi. 16. See Trench.
16. To Faed (a flock).
Uotfjiaivco is in general to exercise the care of a iroifi-fjv, to tend the
flock (Acts XX. 28), hence to rule, govern (Matt. ii. 6; Rev. ii. 27) ; fida-Koj
refers to the special function of providing food, to pasture (Luke xv. 1 5).
Both are included in our Lord's charge to St. Peter (John xxi 15-17).
17. To Wash, Bathe.
n.AjJj'w is to wash things, as garments, &c. ; Xovoo, to wash the whole body^
"to bathe;" vitttcc, to wash a part of the body. See John xiii. 10; and
remarks by Archbishop Trench.
18. To Anoint.
Xplco denotes official anointing, as of a king or priest, hence Xpia-rSs:
a\(i({>(a, anointing iov festal purposes (Luke vii. 46), for health (James v. 14),
or for embalmment (Mark xvi. i).
19. Love, to Love.
^Ayairiw denotes the love of esteem or of kindness, love to character
("diligo"); aydvT], its cognate substantive, "is a word born within the
bosom of revealed religion. It occurs in the LXX., but there is no example
of its use in any heathen writer whatever ; the utmost they attained to here
412 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
was (piXavQponTr'ia and <l>i\ade\(pla, and the last, indeed, never in any
sense but as the love between brethren in blood." — Trench. Wherever we
have " charity" in the E.V., the original is ayavn, but it is more generally
and better translated "love;" ^i\4w expresses the love of the feelings,
instinctive, warm- affection ("amo"). The force of the two verbs is very
beautifully illustrated in John xxi. 15-17, on which see Trench and others.
20. To Weep.
KKaloi is the verb generally employed ; SaKpio), "to shed tears," is found
but once, John xi. 35 : "Jesus wept." In Matt. ii. 18, dprjt/os (reading
doubtful), K\av6fA.6s, dfivpfjiSs, form a climax, "lamentation, weeping, and
mourning. "
II.
Some important words, chiefly Adjectives and Substantives,
expressive of moral quality, may now be considered.
21. Good.
'A 7 000 s is good ; S'lKatos, right In the former, the notion of beneficence
prevails, in the latter that of justice. So with ayadoxrvvri, SiKatoarvvrj.
Still, the two are not opposed. In Rom. viL 12, both are predicated of the
Divine law. In Rom. v. 7, the ayados is one of the SIkcuoi (as proved by the
article and hy yap). In Matt. vi. i, seq., SiKaioaiwn* refers to almsgiving,
prayers, and reUgious fasting ; Ka\6s contains the notion of giving pleasure^
"beautiful," "fair," "honourable." It may be interchanged with aya66s
(compare, e.g., 1 Tim. i. 19, with Heb. xiii. 18), or combined with it, as
Luke viii. 15. (So in classic Greek, Ka\oK<fya66s predicates the highest
excellence in morals and manners.) Xp7)<rr6s, good, gentle (Matt. xi. 30;
I Cor. XV. 33), and xP'7""'"<iTTjj, goodness, gentleness, benignity, are connected
with xP^oM**? XP^- The New Testament comparative of 6.ya66s is usually
Kpilaffuv, Kpeirrwv really akin to Kpdros, force, and betokening the time
when strength and goodness were too closely identified. (Ct)mj>are aperii,
"virtue," really courage, found only in the New Testament, Phil. iv. 8;
I Pet. ii. 9, where see 47; 2 Pet. i. 3, 5.) BeArtoi', as an adverb, ia
found 2 Tim. i. 18.
• Undoubtedly the true reading.
NEW TESTAMENT SYAOJSYMS. 413
22. Evil, Bad.
KaK6s is bad, generically, including every form of evil, physical and
moral. So KaKia, badness, specially in its forms of meanness, cowardice,
malice, adiKos, aSiKia (opposed to Si/catos, SiKaioavvr]), lorong ; Trov7]p6s
expresses especially the more active form of evil, malignani (so 6 irovnp6s,
not 6 kukSs, for the Evil one, Satan); iroprjpla, malignity; ^avKos is
worthless, "good for nothing," like the old Eng., "naughty," from
" naught."
23. Holy.
"Otrtos is holy, intrinsically ; referred once to the Divine purposes (Acts
xiii. 34, from Isa. Iv. 3), generally to interior purity; predicated both of
God and of men ("pious"); ayios, ayv6s, are both derived from a root
denoting separation, the former, when applied to men, expressing consecra-
tion to God (see x Pet. ii. 5, 9), the latter, purity, chastity; Up6s, very
infrequently (except in its neuter substantival form, Up6v, on which see
35), is "dedicated to God," and is only used in the New Testament of
things ; Kadap6s, literally clean, free from impure admixture.
24. True.
'A\ri0^s is "ti'ue," morally, and is applied to persons or to declarations ;
&.\7}div6s is "genuine," "real." The former epithet, for instance, applied
to God, denotes His attribute of faithfulness (John iii. 33); the latter
expresses the reality of His Godhead, as distinguished from false deities
(John xvii. 3), The use of ahtj9iv6s in the Revelation is an exception to this
rule (see xix. 9, 11). The substantive aKijdeia includes the idea of both
adjectives, though generally correspondent with the former.
25. Old.
no\otos is "old," as Tiaving existed long; apxalos, "old," as having
existed formerly ; apxcuos fiadrtTT^s (Acts xxi. 16), one of the original disciples.
Compare 2 Pet. ii. 5 ; Rev. xii. 9, xx. 2. Ua\at6s sometimes connotes the
idea of decrepitude, decay (opposed to kuivos, see 26), Matt. ix. 16 ; j Cor.
V. 7, 8 ; and for the verb, Heb. viii. 1 3.
26. New.
Nfos is new in reference to time, having recently come into existence
(young); Katv6s, new (fresh) in reference to quality, different in kind. (See
Trench on the words.) So vea 5to97;K?j (Heb. xii. 24) is "a covenant recently
given;" Kaivii Siadi]KT} (Heb. ix. 15), "a covenant new in character*"
at/aye6a> (Eph. iv. 23), to renew in youth; avaKaivSco (Col. iii. 10), to rene\»
in character and spirit. So v€6rr}s, youth ; kuivStiis, newness, fi-eshness.
414 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
27. Perfect
TeXeios, "full-grown," applied to character, means that which haa
attained the moral reKos — manhood in Christ ; " however, it may be true
that having reached this, other and higher ends will open, out before him, to
have Christ formed in him more and more." — T'rench. The attainment of
their highest end is expressed by the perfect TercAefco/xa: (Phil. iii. 12).
'0\6k\7]po5 is complete in parts, no Christian grace lacking; ^AoreAijj
denotes maturity in each separate element of character (i Thess. v. 23).
28. Blessed.
Two different adjectives are translated blessed: fiandpios, happy, as in
the Beatitudes, and notably i Tim. i. 11, vi. 15; and 6i'Ao7rjT<Js, verbal
adjective of the verb to bless (Mark xiv. 61 ; Rom. i. 25).
29. Void, Vain, Futile.
K€v6s, literally empty, refers to the contents; fidraios, purposeless, to
the result. See the two in i Cor. xv. 14, 17 : "your faith is Kev-f} — there is
no substance in it — and ixaraia, leads to no happy issue." The latter
adjective is also employed (from the LXX.) iov false, as in the "lying
vanities" of heathendom (Acts xiv. 15).
30. Poor.
n^vTjs (only in 2 Cor. ix. 9) may refer to the poverty of scanty livelihood ;
TTTcax^s implies that of utter destitution. See Matt. v. 3, xi. 5.
31. Patience.
^^TTOfxovi] {virofifvti)) denotes not only the passive, but the active virtue of
endurance, and may often be rendered persistence, continuance (Luke viii. 15;
Heb. xii. i; James v. 11); fiaKpodv/Mla {fjiaKpodv/xeco) seems always to
involve the notion of tolerance, "long-suffering, bearing with," as God with
sinners; avox'h (only in Eom. ii. 4, iii. 25) is forbearance, the result and
expression of the Divine fiaKpoOv/xla.
32. Anger.
0v 1x6 s is the impulse and passion ; opy-f}, the habit and settled purpose of
wrath. Both (as in Horaans ii. 8) are appUed to the anger of God against
sinners; the latter, however, being the usual word. Both are ranked
among the sins of men (as Eph. iv. 31). Still, there may possibly be a
righteous human anger (Eph. iv. 26 ; compare Mark iii. 5), while the
exasperation and bitterness of anger, irapopyiafi^s are utterly forbidden.
(See Trench on these words. )
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 415
33. Pear.
^S^os, (po^iofxai, are words in themselves indifferent, the fear being
sinful, or reverent and holy, according to the particular reference ; but
S6iA(Js, 5ei\ia, are always bad and base, "cowardly, cowardice;" fvXd-
^eia, evXa^eofiai, denote apprehension generally (see Acts xxiii. lo), but
chieily pious fear (Heb. xii. ^S, and perhaps v. 7).
III.
As a third division, some words may be enumerated of
frequent theological or ecclesiastical use.
34. Deity.
©eioTTjs (Rom. i. 20), Deity, in an abstract sense (Gottlichheit) ; QeSrrjs
(Col. ii. 9), Deity, personally (Gottheit). See Tittmann.
35. Temple.
'lepSv, the whole sacred enclosure (Matt. xxvi. 55; John ii. 14); ya6sj
the shrine itself, the Holy place, and Holy of Holies (Matt, xxvii. 51 ;
Acts vii. 48 ; i Cor. iii. 1 6).
36. To Worship.
Upoa-Kvv 4(1) is the generic word (primarily expressive of the act, "to
fawn," from kvoov) of homage paid to God, to Christ, and (in the Revelation)
to the "dragon" and the "beast;" a-efiofj-ai {ae^d^ofxai), of the religious
feeling, "to cherish, or to pay devotion;" \arpevw, of Divine worship,
PhiL iii. 3 (idolatrous in Acts vii. 42); XeiTovpyew, of solemn, stated
observance. So Xeirovpyla, as Luke i. 23; \eiTovpyiK6s, Heb. i. 14;
\€iTovpy6s, Heb. viii. 2. But these last words may also apply to the
ministry of kindness between fellow- Christians ; as Sta/coyew, but in a more
exalted sense. See 60.
37. Altar, Sacrifice.
Qva-iaffT-fipiov is the general word, properly an adjective — that on which
sacrifices are offered; ^wfiSs, the altsiT- strucMr e {orig., "a raised place"),
is only found once, of a heathen altar. Acts xvii. 23; 0wo-^a is a sacrifice
offered by a priest ; hpeis, either expiatory, in which sense Christ alone is
priest, or eucharistic, in which all Christians are priests alike (i Pet. ii. 5) ;
TFpo(T(f>opd is any offering to God, priestly or otherwise. In Eph. v. 2,
some refer Trpoacpopdv to Christ's consecrated life, Qvcridv to his atoning death.
416 * NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
38. Prayer, to Pray.
Eux^ is a prayer (James v. 15) or a vow (Acts xviii. 18) ; eUxofiai, to
pra}'^, or to wish strongly (Rom. ix. 3); vpo<reiJxofJi.ai, vpoa-evxii, are
restricted to prayer to God, the latter denoting sometimes a })lace of prayer,
a building below the rank of a synagogue, "proseucha" (Acts xvi. 13);
54r}aris is in general the expression of tieed, any urgent request, "suppli-
cation." For oMTe'ftj, 6pcoT(£a>, see 9 ; air-rifia is any particular request; in
plur. , the individual petitions in the trpoaivxi]. See Phil. iv. 6.
39. Sin, to Sin.
"Sin," says Archbishop Trench, "may be contemplated as the missing
of a mark or aim; it is then afiaprla or afxdprrjfia (auaprdvco) : the over-
passing or transgressing of a line ; it is then vapd^aais (irapa^alvw): the
disobedience to a voice; in which case it is irapaKo^ {irapaKuvw) : the
falling where one should have stood upright; this will be irapdirrwfia:
ignorance of what one ought to have known ; this will be ayvdri/xa
(Heb. ix. 7) : diminishing of that which should have been rendered in full
measure; which is ^TTTjiia: non-observance of a law; which is avofila or
irapavofj.ia: a discord; and then it is 'ir\r]/x/x€\eia: and in other ways
almost out of number." Note also 6<p€i\rina, in the Lord's prayer (Matt,
vi. 12), debt to divine justice. Luke has afioprla (xi 4).
40. Bepentance, to Repent.
Merdvoia, fifrauoew, express a change of mind, and hence of the whole
life ; fifTaiJLeXonai, a change of feeling, "to regret." Godly sorrow is said
to work fiirdvoiav ojucTOMtA.TjToj/, "re|)entance that leads to no remorse"
(2 Cor. viL 10). Esau found no place of repentance, fxiTotvoias (Heb. xii. 17),
i.e., of changing Ms father' 8 mind with respect to the blessing. See
Dr. Campbell's Dissertation, in his "Gospels."
41. Grace, Mercy.
Xdpis is free favour, in general, specially of the Divine favour as
extended to the sinful; eAeos is mercy, to the miserable (i Tim. L 2).
The difference between cAeoy and olKTipfiSs is that, in the latter, pity is the
prominent idea ; in the former, kindness. For the verbs, see Rom. ix, 15.
42. Forgiveness.
*'A<^€o-ts, iiiplrifii, denote the "remission" of sins, forgiveness, to its full
extent, as promised in the Gosjyel ; wdpfffis, found only Rom. iiL 25,
literally, passing-by, " prmtermission " refers rather to the simple with-
holding of punishment deserved, a parallel being found Acts xviL 40
{(hrfpiSdy).
KEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 417
43. Redemption.
"^AyopdCoD, buy, as in a market-place, for a certain price {rifi-f}); \vrp6a,
effect deliverance by the payment of ransom and exertion of power ;
\vrpov is the price paid for releasing any oue from captivity, punishment,
or death (Au'w, loose); the buying back by paying the price of what had
been sold, or the redeeming what had been devoted by substituting some-
thing in its j>lace. So ayriAvrpov, with the further idea "in room of,"
denoting e:cehange, the price paid for procuring the liberation of another by
ransom or forfeit; A^rpoxris, u'iro\vTpa}(ris, the process of deliverance;
tAao-juos, i^i\a(riu.6s, are the same as KvTpov, with the leading idea of
propitiation." — W bder. See the use of iKaaKo/jLai in the publican's
prayer, Luke xviii. 13; iAao-TTjptoj/, properly an a Ijective, "propitiatory,"
of the mercy-seat in LXX. and Heb. ix. 5 ; of Christ's sacrifice, Rom.
iii. 25; irfpiiroieofiai, TTipiiroirjais, denote acquirements for one's self,
purchase, generally, Acts xx. 28 ; i Pet. ii. 9 ; Eph. i. 14.
44. Piety, Religion.
Ev(r€&i}s, ev(T4$eia, denote worship or piety rigr/i^??/ directed, in human
relations as well as divine; Qeoaefiiis, Beoffe^eia, worship directed towards
God; evAajSrjs, euAo^eio, denote the devoutness springing from godly
f&ir ; 6p^<rKos, 9p7)(TKeia (James i. 26, 27; Acts xxvi. 5; Col. ii. 18,
only), r^efer to external worship, religious service; Seio-tSotyuo;^ (Acts
xvii. 22), and deiaiSaifiovia (Acts xxv. 19), may have a favourable or
unfavourable meaning, "religious" or "superstitious," literally, "devoted
to the fear of deities."
45. Miracle, Sign, Wonder.
A^vafiis (generally in plur.), applied to Christ's miracles, is a forth-putting
of Divine power; ripas is a prodigy, a wonderful act; (njneToi/, a sign,
authenticating Christ's mission, and symbolizing heavenly truths (Acts
ii. 22).
46. Parable.
Uapa&o\v, a detailed comparison, "parable," as usually understood;
irapoifxia (literally, a wayside discourse), "a proverb," John xvi. 25, 29;
"a comparison," 2 Pet. ii. 22 ; John x. 6.
47. Praise, to Praise.
Aii/6(w, alvos {atvea-is), are used only of praise offered to God; ^iraii'ew,
eiraivos, of praise, approbation generally ; 56^a, where rendered praise
(John ix. 24, xii. 43; i Pet. iv. 11), denotes the recognition of character,
"the glory." In i Pet. ii. 9, the word is aperds, virtues; /xeyaAvvccy to
magnify^ is a yet more exalted word, Luke i. 46.
418 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
48. Psalm, Hymn.
VaXfiSs is probably used restrictively of the Psalms of the older
Scriptures; vfivos (not often used, probably from its associations -with
heathenism) is an ode of praise to God : "A psalm might be a deprofimdis;
a hymn must always be more or less of a mar/niJicaL" — Trench. <^5i^ is a
song that might be either psalm or hymn, or a yet more general expression
of Christian feeling (Eph. v. 19; CoL iii. 16).
49. Ordinance.
This word is adopted as the rendering of SSy/xa, a thing decreed
(Eph. ii. 15; Col. ii. 14. See also Col. ii. 20); St/cafw/io, that which it is
right to observe (Heb. ix. i, lo); Biarayi^, appointment (Rom. xiii. 2);
irapddocris (i Cor. xi. 2), instruction or injunction given, elsewhere trans-
lated tradition (as 2 Thess. ii. 15); and ktIo-is (creation, creature),
I Pet. ii. 13. As distinguished from BiKaidifiara, the iyroXai are moral
precepts, Luke i. 6.
50. Hebrew, Israelite, Jew, Greek, Hellenist.
'E$pa7os denotes the Hebrew-speaking Jewish community; ^EWrjvKrrijs
being a Greek- speaking Jew. The latter word is rendered " Grecian" in
the A. v., in distinction from "EAA.tji', "Greek," or Gentile (Acts vi. i,
ix. 29; in Acts xi. 20, the reading should probably be^EAATjms). 'louSalos,
Jew, originally referred to the tribe of Judah alone, had come in the New
Testament times to designate the whole people; while *lapa7j\irr]5 is
always a term of honour, "one of the chosen race."
51. Anathema.
'kviB-i)tJ-a, a thing devoted in honour of God (Luke xxi. 5); aviOtna
(originally the same word), a thing devoted to destitiction, "accursed." So
the verb avaQiiiari^o). See Acts xxiii. 14, The other occurrences of
ivddfjj.a are Rom. ix. 3 ; i Cor. xii. 3, xvi. 22 ; Gal. i. 8, 9.
52. Hell, Hades.
"AiStjs, "the unseen world," the place of the departed, generally (compare
Luke xvi. 23; Acts ii. 27); by metonymy for death and destruction
(Matt. xi. 23); once only rendered "grave," 1 Cor. xv. 55; "the gates of
hades" are the powers of destruction (Matt. xvi. 18); ydevva (from
"Valley of Hinnom") is "the abode of the lost" (Matt. v. 22, 29, 30,
X. 28, xviii. 9, xxiii. 15, 33; Mark ix. 43, 45; Luke xii. 5; James iiL 6,
only). See Dr. Campbell's Dissertation, in his "Gospels."
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 419
53. Devil, Dsemon.
The almost uniform translation of Sai/xwv, Sai(i6vioy, by "devil" is
unfortunate. The word (most usual in the New Testament in the second
or diminutive form) classically denotes a subordinate divinity, supernatural
being. There were KaKooaifioves and ayadoSai/joves. In Scripture the word
always has its evil sense, and demon would be a good rendering; 6
Sid^oKos (Heb., from 'Sarav, Saroj/as) is the one arch-spirit of evil, "the
devil." In its sense of calumniator, the word is found (plur.) i Tim. ill. ii ;
2 Tim. iii. 3 ; Titus ii. 3.
IV.
In the last place, a number of miscellaneous words, chiefly
Substantives, in ordinary use, will present some interesting
points of distinction. The list, it is plain, might be greatly
extended ; but enough is given to excite the student's inquiries.
54. Life, Death.
Zwif is life in its principle, life intrinsic; &ios, life in its manifestations,
life extrinsic. Hence the former is used especially for life spiritual and
immortal ; the latter may denote the duration or manner of life, livelihood.
"^vxri is the principle of animal life, "the soul." See the next article,
©ai'aroy is death, opposed to ^a-^ : veKpSs, dead,' 6vr]T6s, mortal. The verbs
6avar6w (Eom, viii. 13), vcKpSw (Col. iii. 5), are both translated viortify ; the
former, perhaps, referring rather to the state, "death to sin," the latter to
the deed, "slay them."
55. Soul, Mind, Spirit.
^uX'fj soul or life, is common to man with the irrational animals (Rev.
viii. 9), hence seZ/" (Matt. xvi. 25, 26), person (Rev. xviii. 13), often the
soul as the seat of passion or desire, the point of contact between man's
bodily and spiritual nature; ^^vxikSs, "natural" (1 Cor. ii. 14, xv. 44, 46;
James iii. 15 ; Jude 19, only) ; cwiia and i/zux^f are jointly elements of what
is often called adp^, the lower, fleshly nature. So aapKiKos, as i Cor.
iii. I, 3, 4. But a-wfia is sometimes used for person, Rom. xii. i, "your
bodies," i.e., the instruments or organs of your entire nature. Uvev/xa,
spirit, man's highest nature, the point of contact between the human and
the Divine; irvevfiaTucSs, spiritual, as i Cor. ii. 13, 15; (ppev^s (only in
I Cor. xiv. 20), the understandinfj ; vovs, the mind, percipient and
intelligent, the reason; KapSia, the heart, is used not only for the seat of
420 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
the emotions, but for that of the intellectual faculties, at Kop^tai, koX to
vtrfifiaTa (Phil. iv. 7), "thought at its source and in its manifestations;"
Stdtvoto, the understanding, as exercised, for good or evil, Eph. ii. 3;
Matt. xxii. 37.
56. Form, Fashion, Likeness.
E?5os is appearance^ that may or may not have a basis in reality ;
fX^wKov, a mere appearance, "an idol;" fiop^i^, the form as indicative of
the interior nature; (rxviJ-a, the form, externally regarded, "the figure,
fashion (see Phil. ii. 6, 7, 8); €lKd!)v denotes the exact representation,
"image;" ffKia, the shadowy resemblance (Heb. x. i); x^pofTrfp, the
impress, as enstamped (Heb. i. 3). Compare x<^P«7M«> "stamp, engraving."
57. Power.
Avuafiis, used also of miracles (see 45), inherent power, might ; ^|ow<r(o,
power delegated, authority; Iffx^s, strength, as an endowment (so l<rx^<^,
to be strong, prevail, more emphatic than tjipofiai) ; Kpdros, strength as
exerted, "force."
58. World.
KSfffios, the scheme of material things, the world, often in opposition to
the kingdom of heaven ; aldv has reference primarily to duration (probably
derived not from a^l &v, but from 6.-nfxi, to breathe; hence life, duration-)
adj., (udl}vio5, belonging to the al<i)v : dtSioy is from ati, and means simply
everlasting, only found Rom. i. 20; Jude 6); alUv^s (Heb. i. 2), "the
ages," or, as E.V., "the worlds," in respect to their successive ages;
oiKovfievT], the earth as inhabited, the world of men. For kSo-ixos and
oIkovix4vt} interchangeable, compare Matt. iv. 8, with Luke iv. 5.
69. Master.
K^pios expresses lordship in general; Seo-irSrijs, ownership (correlative
with SovKos); Sidda-KaXos (correlative with /xaerfri^s) is teacher. In James
iii. I, the meaning seems to be centors ; firia-TdTTjs (only in Luke), literally,
superintendent, is the Greek rendering of the Hebrew pa0$i, found in its
original form in Matt., Mark, John.
60. Servant.
AovXos, slave, is the lowest word in the scale of servitude {5ov\6oi, to
enslave; SovXiiw, to serine, as a slave); uinjpcTTjs, " uuder-rower,"
expresses in general subservience to another's will (so vthj^ctcw) ; SidKovos,
SiuKovla, SiaKov4u>, imply service, ministry, in every form; dtpdnwy is
attendant (only in Heb. iii. 5); Bepairtvco (efparrfla) have special reference
to healing ; o'lKerris, a household servant, Acts x. 7 (so iroTs, see 62).
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 421
61. Family, Tribe, House.
<i>u\r{ is a tribe, as of Israel; iraTpid, a family, in the wider sense,
descendants of a common ancestor (oaly in Luke ii. 4; Acts iii. 25; Eph.
iii. is; in E.V. different each time); oJkos, oIkIu, both mean household,
the former referring to the inmates, the latter to the building and that
which ic contains (Soj^o always in the New Testament of the building, with
eVi, "house-top.")
62. Child, Infant.
TcKvov, child by natural descent (from tIktco) ; TraTs, a hoy or girl, a
child in legal relation, also a servant (liuke xv. 26 ; Matt. xii. 18 ; Acts
iv. 27, 30); vaiSiov, a young child; $p4^os, a babe; vi^vios (from fij,
negative, and eliroj/), a child in power and character.
63. Man.
"Av dp coir OS, a man, member of the human family (homo) ; avifp, a man in
sex and age (vir).
64. Time.
XpSvos, time as duration ; KaipSs, a definite time, with reference to some
act or crisis, *' opportunit3^ "
65. Lamp, Light.
*«s, light, generally; (pwa-Ttjp, luminary (Phil. ii. 15); A.ifx»'os, a. lamp
( John V. 35), [Kv^via, a lampstand) ; \afiirds, a torch (Matt. xxv. i; Acts
XX. 8) ; </)€ 77 OS, light in its splendour, " radiance.''
66. Clothes.
'Ifxariov, raiment, generally, also an outer garment, opposed to xitc^i',
an inner vest (Matt. v. 40); ia-di^s, apparel, generally applied to what is
ornate or splendid; evdvfia, anything put on (Matt. iii. 4, vi. 28.
67. Crown.
^r4<f)avos, "a garland," a conqueror's or a festal crown {a-refifjui, a
sacrificial garland, Acts xiv. 13); SidS-qua, "a fillet," a royal crown,
Rev. xii. 3, xiii. i, xix. 12, only.
68. Burden.
Bdpos denotes the pressure of a weight, which may be relieved or trans-
ferred, Gal. vi. 2; (poprlov is specific, the "load," which each must bear
for himself," ver. 5 ; yS/xos, the lading of a ship (Acts xxi. 3); oynos, the
weight that encumbers, Heb. xii. i.
422 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
69. Basket.
KSfpivos, a travelling basket (Matt. xiv. 20); a-irvpls, a large hamper
used for storage (Matt. xv. 37; Acts ix. 25). In all the accounts of the
two miracles, the baskets used in each are distinguished.
70. Net.
AIktvov, a net, in general; a}i<pl^X-r]ffrpov, a fishing-net flung from the
hand (Matt. iv. 18; Mark i. 16); aayr^vn (Matt. xiii. 47), a large draw-
net, *' seine."
71. Gate, Door.
Qvpay a door (janua); ttuAtj, a gate (porta); wK^v^ a great gate, an outer
gate, a porch.
72. Fold, Flock.
AuAif is fold; iroinvr] (dim. iroifiviov) is flock. The promise in John
X. 16, is, that there shall be '* one flock and one shepherd."
73. People.
Four words are so translated: XaSs, people, collectively, with a general
reference to the Jews as the people of God; ^6vos, nation (plur., edut}.
Gentiles); 5^/lios, people, as a municii)ality ; ox^os, "irregularcrowd,mob-"
74. Thisf.
KKeTTT-qs, "thief," one who steals by fraud (fur); Xtjo-tt^s, "robber,'^
one who steals by violence (latro). The crucified malefactor and Barabbas
probably belonged to the hordes of banditti which then ravaged the land.
75. Stone.
n€Tpo, a rock {Uerpos, the same word, only with masc. termination to
make it a proper name), "saxum;" XlOos, a stone, detached or hewn,
"lapis."
76. Other.
"AWoi denotes numerical, ercpoj generic distinction, * * diflFerent. " See
GaL i. 6, 7, "to another (irepuv) Gospel which is not another (&AAo)."
There may be various kinds of so-called Gospels, but there is really no other
than that which the Apostle i)reached.
VOCABULARY.
99
In the following Vocabulary, the Declension of Svhstcmtives is
marked by the subjoined Genitive termination; their Gender, by
the Article.
Of Adjectives J the Feminine and Neuter forms are given; in
those of two terminations, the Neuter.
To Verbs, the Future endings, and, where necessary, other forms,
have been generally appended.
The Hyphen has been freely used, to indicate the formation, not
only of synthetic, but parathetic compounds. (See §§ 146-148.)
For further etymological details, a larger Lexicon must be
consulted.
The Scripture References are intended to illustrate the ordinary
as well as the special uses of words, and are introduced as fully as
space would permit. Nothing, however, can supersede the use of
the Greek Testament Concordance.
The Vocabulary is purposely restricted to the Received Text.
For words that occur only in MSS. or in critical editions, the
student is refeiTed to Grimm's Clavis or to Bruder's Concordance,
VOCABULARY.
A, a, &\<pa, alpha, a, the first letter.
Numerally, a'= i ; os=iooo. For
a in composition, see 147, b, c.
Fig. rh A, or rh &\<pa, the f.rst prin-
ciple of all things ; of the Father,
Rev. i. 8, xxi. 6; the Son, i. ii,
xxiL 13.
*Aapu>v, 6 (Heb.), Aaron.
'AfiaSnav, 8 (Heb., "destruction"),
Abaddon, Rev. ix. 11.
a-Paf,-f]s, c'y (cf. fidpos), loithout weight;
hence, not burdensome, unexacfmg,
2 Cor. xi. 9.
'AB^a (Heb. in Chald. form) Father!
only as an invocation, Mark xiv. 36 j
Rom. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6.
"AjSeA, b (Heb.), Abel.
'A^id, 6 (Heb.), Abljah, the king,
Matt. i. 7 ; the priest, Luke i. 5.
*A$id6ap, 5 (Heb.), Abiathar.
'A/3iAt?i'77, irjs, 7), Abilene, a district in
the E. of Anti-Libanus, named from
Abila, its chief city, Luke iii. i.
A^Lovd, 6 (Heb.), AUud.
'A^padu, 6 (Heb.), Abraham.
a.-Bv(raos, ov, 77 (originally adj. bottom-
less), abyss; generally, as Rom. x. 7 ;
specifically, Luke viii. 3 1 ; Rev.
ix. I, XX. I.
"AyaBos, ov, 6, Agabus.
ayado-epyea}, u> (or ayaOovpyeco), to do
good, I Tim. vi. 18.
ayaQo-iToieci.', &, [i) to do good, bene-
ficently ; ace. of pers., Luke vi. 33,
(2) to art wdl, generallj'^.
ayaQo-Tzoda, as, 1?, well-doing, in sense
(2) of preceding, i Vet. iv. 19.
ayaeo-TroiSs, ov, 3 (orig. adj.), well-doer.
ayad6s, -f}, 6v {Kp^larcroov, KparicrTos), good,
intrinsically or benelicially ; used of
both persons and things, rh ayaddv^
goodness; rh ayaOd, goods, wealth,
blessings.
ayadwavvK), rjs, % goodness; as virtue
or beneficence.
ayaWiaais, ecos, 7), exultation, gladness.
ayaXhiduj, w, daw, to leap for joy ;
hence, exult, rejoice; generally de-
ponent. Followed by ha. (subj.),
eVi (dat.), or 4v (dat.)
a-yanos, adj. 6, rj, unmarried, abso-
lutely, or in widowhood, i Cor. vii.
&yavaKTea), a, •ncrcojobeindignant, angry ^
or vexed. With -n-epi (gen. ) or on.
ayavaKT-qais, eais, rj, indignation.
ayairdw, S>, ■f]au>, to love. See Synonyms.
ayd-K-q, -qs, rj, love. See Synonyms.
Object with els, h, or genitive, on
which see 254, 5. ay diraL (Jude
12), love- feasts.
ayaiTTjTSs, -t), vv, beloved ; of Christ,
"the Beloved Son," and of Chris-
tians in their relation to God or to
one another.
"Ayap, 7] (Heb.), Hagar.
ayyap^vw, au (from the Persian), to
impress into the public service ;
hence, to compel.
ayyelov, dou, r6, vessel, idensil.
ayyeXia, as, t], message.
^776 A OS, ov, 6, messenger ; spec, of
God's messengei's to men, angel. So
of fallen S})irit3. "Angel of a church"
(Rev. i. 20, ii. iii.), either messenger,
or elder, or a symbolic representation
of the spirit, the genius of each church
VOCABULARY.
[&7€ — &ym
hye, adv. (see &'yai), come now, go to,
James iv. 13, v. i.
ayehj], tjs, tj, a flock or herd.
a-yeu(a-A6yT]Tos, ou, adj., of unrecorded
genealogy, Heb. vii. 3.
a-yiv-qs, 4s (cf. yiuos), low horn, ignoble,
I Cur. i. 28.
ayid^w, aw (see ayios), to set apart from
common use. Hence to luillow, or
regard with religious reverence ; to
consecrate to religious service, whe-
ther persons or things ; to cleanse
for such consecration ; so to purify,
sanctify. 01 ayia^S/xePoi, those who
are being sanctified; oi rjyiaaixivoi,
those who are sanctified.
ayiaiT/xds, ov, 6, consecration^ sanctifica-
tion.
ayios, a, ov, set apart from common use,
spec, to the service of God ; hence
/lallowed, worthy of v3neraiion, holy,
consecrated, whether persons, places,
or things, ol ayioi, '■'■ tlte Saints ;^'' Th
S.yiov, the Temple; to ay^a, the Sanc-
tuary; ayia ayiwu, the Holy of Holies.
a.yi6Tr)s, rnros, 7], holiness.
ayiioavPT), Tjy, t], holiness. The "Spirit
of holiness" (Rom. i. 4) is Christ's
Divine nature.
ayKaKi], Tjy, 7), the (curve of the) arm,
Luke ii. 28.
&yKiaTpou, ov, t6, fisJdlOok.
ayKvpa, as, r), anchor. >
a-yva<pos, ov, adj. (not fulled or dressed),
we?(;, of cloth, Matt. ix. 16; Mark ii, 21.
ay Vila, as, r], purity, ie., chastity,
I Tim. iv. 12, v. 2.
ayvl^u}, (TO), to cleanse, purify; life, as
John xi. 55 ; tig. as James iv. 8.
aypla^l6s, ov, u, cereiaonial purification.
Acts xxi. 26.
ayvoew, u>, i]<Tu) (cf. yiyv<ii(TKu>), (i) not
to know, to be ignorant {ayvouv, igno-
rant ; ayvoovfxivos, unknown person-
ally. Gal. i. 22; ignored, disesteemiid,
1 Cor. vi. 9) ; (2) not to understand,
Mark ix. 32 ; perhaps Acta xiii. 27 ;
I Cor. xiv. 38.
ayv6T]fji.a, arus, t6, a Sin of ignorance,
error, Heb, ix. 7.
ar^voia, as, t], ignorance, spec, (in X. T.)
of xuli;;iou.s subjects.
ayuSs, ^, 6v, pure, of God, as i Johu
iiL 3 ; of men, as 2 Cor. vii. 11;
spec, of female chastity, 2 Cor. ix. 2,
&c.
ayv6T-(]s, T7JT0S, tj, purity, 2 Cor. vi. 6.
a^ftaaia, as, 7}, ignorance, spec, wilful
ignorance, i Cor. xv. 34.; i Pet.
ii. 15.
6.yvoo(TToz, ou, unknown. Acts xvii. 23.
ayupd, as, 7] {aysipoi), a place of public
resort ; hence market place or open
street; spec, market, Mark vii. 4;
the forum, or place of public as-
semblies, trials, &c.» Acts xvi. 19,
xvii. 17.
ay opdXd), (r«, to purchase, buy, with
gen. of price, or 4k, once eV, Eev.
V. 9; tig. to redeem, ransom; act. of
Christ ; pass, of Christians.
ay opalos, ou, adj., belonging to the
forum; hence {7]fi4pat) court day*
Acts xix. 38 ; {6.udpu)Troi) idlers, loun-
gers, xvii. 5.
&ypa, as, 7] (hunting), fishing, Luke
V. 4; met. draught, ver. 9.
a-ypdixfxaros, ov, adj., unlearned, i.e.,
in Kabbinical lore. Acts iv. 13.
ayp-av\4(D, &, to remain in the fields^
Luke ii. 8.
ay p^vtu, (Tu> (to take in hunting), fig.,
to ensnare, Mark xii. 13.
aypi-4\aios, ov, 6, wild olive, oleaster,
Kom, xi. 17, 24.
^ypios, ia, lov, wild, of honey, Mark
i. 6; of waves, Jude 13.
* Ay piinras, a, 6, Agrippa, i.e., Herod
A grip pa Ti. See 'Hpd>^s.
&.yp6s, ov, 6, field, spec, the counU-y ;
plur., country districts, hamlets.
^ypvitviu, u) {iiirvos), "to be sleepless ;"
hence, met,, to watch, to be vigilant
"With vTt4p (gen.), Heb. xiii. 17, to
watch over; with els, Eph. vi. iS, to
give attention to.
ay pvTTula, as, 7), watching, i.e., assidtiov^
care, 2 Cor. vi. 5, xi. 27.
&y(t), ^w, ijyayov, trans., to lead, bring;
with vpds (ace. ), ews, els, of destina-
tion ; with iTri (ace), of purpose, as
Acti5 viii. 32 ; also in the sense of
b'fore, as, e.g., for trial. Hence t
spend, as of time ; to kt<p, as a paj
ii^ayii — ahr6s]
VOCABULARY.
ticular day. Fig. , io lead the inchna-
tion, induce. Intrans. (ortraus. with
reflexive pron. understood), to go,
depart; imper., dye, come! subj.,
iyuofiev, let tiH go ! the former being
used as an adverb.
ayooyf}, rjs, ^ {&y<^), "leading, guid-
ance ; " hence, manner of life, 2 Tim.
iii. 10.
o.ywv, (avo9, contest, spec, with the
notion of pain or danger; fig., of
the Christian life, as Heb. xii. i.
ayup'ia, as, r), contest; emphatically,
agony, Luke xxii. 44.
aycovi^oixai, to strive, as in the public
games ; to contend with an adver-
sary ; fig. , of Christian effort and
endurance.
'ATid/j., 6 (Heb.), Adam.
a-Sd-n-avos, ov,/ree of charge, gratuitous,
I Cor. ix. 18.
'A55t, 6, Addi, Luke iii. 28 (not men-
tioned in 0. T.)
aSeA^, Tjy, rj, a sister, (i) lit., (2) fig.
of Christian friendship.
a^e\(p6s, ov, 6, a brother, (i) lit., some-
times implied (see 256), (2) of more
general relations, a fellow- 1 sraelve.
Matt. V. 47 ; a fellow -Christian,
Matt, xxiii. 8 ; a fellow-man. Matt.
V. 22-24; also expressing the rela-
tion between Christ and believers.
Matt. XXV. 40. The "brethren
of Christ" (Matt. xiii. 55; John
\i\. 3; Acts i. 14; Gal. i. 19) are
thought by some to have been His
cousins or other near relatives.
aSeA^x^TTjs, ttjtos, t}, the brotherhood,
i.e., the Christian community.
^-StjAos, qv, not viamfest, uncertain, to
the sight, or ear, or mind.
d-S77AoTr]s, T7JT0S, 7), uncertainty.
a-'Bi]Kus, adv., uncertainly, aimlessly.
I Cor. ix. 26.
aZ-t]fjL0v4u>, w, to be sad or dejected.
aSrjs, ov, 6 (d priv. and fiS- in iSelu), t)ie
invisible world. Hades ; fig. of deep
degradation. See Synonyms. iri/Kai
q,Sov, the powers of the unseen world.
See TTL'Arj.
a-Std Kpiros, ov (James iii. 17), either
act., not distinguishing, impartial,
or pass. , not distinguishable, or dubit-
able, unambiguous, honest.
a-Sid-heiinos, ov, without intermission^
unceasing ; adv., -ws, unceasingly.
a-Sia-(f)dopia, as, rj, uncorruptness,
purity.
aSiKfO), u), iierca {&Bikos), intrans., to act
unjustly, commit a crime ; trans., to
wrong, injure ; hence to hurt, with-
out any notion of wrong, Luke
x. 19, and Rev. often; pass., to be
loronged.
dSiKrj^a, aros, r6, a crime.
aSiKia, as, r], wrong, injustice, iniquity,
absolutely, vnnghtemsness, or in the
relations of life ; in man's relation to
God, wickedness generally, opposed
to diKaiucTvuT]. In Luke xvi. 9,
" the mammon of unrighteousness "
(d5(Kias) denotes riches, which in their
nature are deceitful, transitory. See
Synonyms.
&'diKos, ov, unjust, (i) absolutely, (2)
wicked generally, opposed to SiKaios,
as Matt. V. 45, or dxn^-qs, as
2 Pet. ii. 9; adv., -ws, unjustly, un-
deservedly, I Pet. ii. 19.
a-^6KifjLos, ov (tested, but not ap-
proved), (i) reprobate, (2) ivorthless
generally.
6.-^oKos, ov, without fraud, genuine,
1 Pet. ii. 2.
*A.ZpanvTTiriv6s, 7}, 6v, of Adramyttium,
an JEoIian seaport, Acts xxvii. 2.
'ASpfas, a, 6, the Adriatic, embracing
the Ionian sea, Acts xxvii. 27.
dJporrjs, ttjtos, r}, largeness, abundance,
2 Cor. viii. 20.
a-hvvar^w, 6u, to be impossible, withdat.,
or wapd (dat. )
a-hi'varos, ov, adj., (i) of persons, act,,
powerless ; (2) of things, pass,, im-
possible.
(fSco, &iru) (contr. from deiSco), to sing,
with cognate ace, (fhiiv, a song ; with
dat., to sing (praise) to, celebrate.
aei, adv. , always ; of continuous time,
unceasingly ; of successive inter-
vals, from time to time, on every
occasion.
derJs, ov, 6, an eagle, gen. bi)-d of prey,
as Matt. xxiv. 28.
VOCABULARY.
[£Utv|j,os — at<r0Ti<ris
i-fv/tos, ov, unleavened, only in plur.,
sc. \ayava, cakes, or &pToi, loaves;
met., the paschal feast; lig., incor-
rupt, dncei'c, i Cor. v. 7, 8.
'A^c^p, 6 (Heb.), -42or, Matt. i. 13, 14;
not mentioned in O. T.
"A^coTos, ou, 7], Azotus or Ashdod, Acts
viii. 40.
a'/]p, aepos, r), the air, atmosphere; hence
the region above the earth, Eph. ii. z
(see e^ovala) ; tig., the void, as i Cor.
ix. 26, xiv. 9.
a-davuaia, as, rj (see Odvaros), immor-
tality, I Cor. XV. 53 ; 1 Tim. vi. 16.
a-di/jiiTos, ov i&^ixis, law), unlawfid,
criminal.
&-deos, ov, without God, either nega-
tively disregarding or positively
denying Him, Eph. ii. 12.
&-6i(TiJLos, ov, adj. {6e(Tfx6s, statute),
lawless.
o-eerectJ, co, -tjcTa} {6e- as in rlOrifii), to set
at nougJit, i.e., persons, to despise,
slight ; or things, to nullify, contemn.
a-64T7](TLs, ecos, i}, nulliji cation, abro-
gation, Heb. vii. 18, ix. 26.
'AflTjfat, cbv, at, Athens.
'A^Tjratos, a, ov, At/ienian.
ae\4co, w, {adKov, prize), to contend, in
the public games, 2 Tim. ii. 5.
&d\r](ns, icDS, rj, contest, as in the public
games ; fig., struggle with afflictions,
Heb. X. 32.
a-ev,u4o, a, to lose heart, despond.
Col. iii. 21.
dOwos, ov (or aB^os), undeserving of
2mniHhment, innocent. Matt, xxvii.
4 ; with air6, of the crime, ver. 24.
aXyeios, 7?, ov (aT|, goat), of ov belonging
to a goat, H'^b. xi. 37.
uiyia\6s, ov, &,' the shore, beach; in
Gospels, oi Gennesaret ; in Acts, of
the Mediterranean,
hlyinrrios, a, ov, Egyptian.
Alyvmos, ov, 7), Egypt.
achios, ov, aclj. (oet), eternal, everlasting,
Kum. i. 20 ; Jude 6.
oj5«$, 0D9, ri, modesty, i Tim. ii. 9 ;
reverence, Heb. xii. 28.
AWioy^, OTTOS, 6, an Ethiopian, Acts
viii. 27.
oTmo, oto$, r6, blood, (i) lit., especially
of blood shed, i.e., of animals, vic-
tims in sacrifice; so of man, of
Christ, connected with which latter
meaning the word is often used ;
(2) met., of the death of Christ;
(3) bloodshed, murder ; hence blood-
guiltiness, the crime or responsibility
of another's destruction ; (4) natural
life, which was believed to reside in
the blood, especially with erdp^,
1 Cor. XV. 20; so human nature
generally; hence (5) natural rela-
tionship; (6) in Acts ii. 20, &c.,
the reference is to the colour of
blood.
alfiaT-€K-xv(ria, as, rj, shedding ofblooa,
Heb. ix. 22.
aifiopf)o4w, S>, to have a flux or issue of
blood. Matt. ix. 20.
AiVeas, a, 6, jEneas, Acts ix, 33, 34.
aivicis, 6WS, Ti, praise, Heb. xiii. 15.
aiveo}, w, ecru and ^ao), to praise, only
of God. See Synonyms.
aiviyixa, aros, t6, a dark intimation, an
enigma, i Cor. xiii. 12.
alvos, ov, 6, praise, only of God.
Alvwv, ff (Heb.), ^non, John iii. 23.
a'lpeais, ews, rj {aipeofiai), cJwice, its act
or result ; hence a religious sect or
party, party spirit, dissension.
alpirl^u), aw, to choose, with preference
and love, Matt. xii. 18.
aiperiKSs, ov, 6, one who acUifrom party
spirit, a factious person, "heretic,"
Titus iii. 10.
aipew (irreg., see 103, i), to take, only
in mid. in N. T., to c/toose, prefer.
aXpoj (see 92), (1) to takeup, lift, carry,
used of carrying the cross, lit. , Matt,
xxvii. 32; lig.. Matt. xvi. 24; so of
raising the eyes, the voice, the mind;
hence to keep in suspense; (2) to take
away, authoritatively or forcibly, as
to abrogate a law, to remove by death;
imp., a?p€, S/Jov, Away with! i.e., to
execution ; (3) to take away sin, de-
scriptive of the redeeming work of
Christ, John i. 29 ; 1 John iiL 5.
aladdvofxai, t)<T66pLt)v, dep., to perceive^
comprehend, Luke ix. 45.
aXaQriffis, ecus, rj, perception, accuratt
judgment, Phil. i. 9.
olor0r|T»ipi(
ov — a-Kara
-]
VOCABULARY.
ahetjTifpiov, ov, n., organ of perception,
faculty of judgment, Heb. v. 14.
aiffxPo-K^pHs, €s, eager for disgraceful
gain, sordid ; adv., -a>s, sordidly.
alaxpo-^oyia, as, rj, fovl langvnge, scur-
rility. Col. iii. 8.
alaxp^s, d, 6v (orig. deformed, opposed
to Ka.\6%), base, disgraceful, morally
(gen.), or as contrary to usage.
al(TXP^''^VS, T7JT0S, 7), prob. obscenity,
Eph. V. 4 only.
al(rxvvrj, rjs, 7], shame, in personal feel-
ing or in the estimation of others,
disgrace, shameful conduct.
cutrxivoixai, ovfiai, mid., to feel ashamed;
pass., to be put to shame, confounded.
aireo}, w, -fjao), to ask, require, demand;
with two aces., or ace. of thing, and
air6 or irapd (gen.) of person; spec,
to pray, to desire. Acts vii. 46 ;
mid., to ask for one\s self, beg.
airrifia, aros, t6, desire, object of desire.
alria, as, 7], cause, (i) as the reason or
ground of anjrthing; (2) in Matt.
xix. 10, the state of the case; (3)
forensically, an accusation, a crime.
ahiaixa, aros, r6, accusation, charge.
Acts XXV. 7. Some read ahiM/xa.
airios, ia, lov, causative of used as
subst. masc, the cause, author;
neut., a cause, reason, espec. of
punishment ; a crime, like aWla.
aA<pviZio5, ov, adj., unexpected, sudden.
alxjj^-a\o3(Tla, as, 7], captivity; met., a
captivity, i.e., a inultitude of cap-
tives, Eph. iv. 8.
aixii*-«^«T6U(«, o-w, to make prisoners of,
to take captive, captivate, 2 Tim. iii. 6,
where some read the following.
atXM-"'^'«'T*T'"> ^^i i(^ lead captive.
alxu--d\oyTos, ov, 6, 7], a captive, Luke
iv. 18 (from Isa. Ixi. i).
aldv, -vivos, 6 (ael), continuous duration,
(i) time limited, an age, as the ages
before the Messiah (i Cor. x. u),
the ages afterwards (Eph. ii. 7), or
gen. in plural, the ages ; (2) the
world, considered under the aspect
of time, as Luke i. 70, espec. with
odros, this world, in contrast with
the world to come {6 /xeWav, 6
ipX^fievos), the world generally, Heb.
i. 2, xi. 3 ; (3) ti7ne unlimited, the
age of eternity, past, as Acts xv. 1 8,
future, 2 Pet. iii. 18, especially iu
the following phrases : els rbv al&va,
for ever, with negative adv. never ;
els Tohs aiwvas, a stronger expression,
for evermore; els rohs alwuas rwv
aldovwv, stronger still, for ever and
ever. Phrase slightly varied, Eph.
iii. 21 ; llev. xiv. 11.
al<i)vios {-ia* or -los), -lov, perpetual,
lasting, (i) of limited duration, with
XP^voi, the times of old ; (2) of un-
limited duration, spec, future, eter-
nal, everlasting. atc5i'toi/ (Philem. 15),
adverbially, in perpetuity, for ever.
a-KaOapaia, as, 7] {Kadaipo}), uncleanness,
impurity, (i) lit.. Matt, xxiii. 27; (2)
generally fig., pollution, incontinence.
a-Ka6dpT7]s, ttjtos, i], impurity. He v.
xvii. 4.
a-KdOapTos, ov, adj., unclean, impure,
(i) of ceremonial, legal or religious
defilement ; (2) of evil spirits, with
irvevfia. Gospels, Acts, E,ev. ; (3) of
human beings, impure, lewd, Eph.
V. 5-
a-Katpeofiai, ovfiai, dep., to lack oppor-
tunity, Phil. iv. 10,
a-Kuipccs, adv., unseasonably, 2 Tim.
iv. 2. See djKaipcos.
Jk-KaKos, ov, didi]., free from evil, harm-
less, Heb. vii. 26 ; unsuspecting,
Ex)m. xvi. 18.
oiKavOa, 7}s, 7], thorn, briar.
aKdvd^vos, ov, made of thorns, Mark
XV. 17 ; John xix. 5.
}i.-KapTTos, ov, unfruitful, barren, lit.,
Jude 12, generally fig.
a-Kard-'yvaxnos, ov, not to be con-
demned, irreprehensible.
a-KoTa-KdXvTTTos, ov, unveiled.
a-Kara- Kptros, ov, uncondemned.
a-Kard-Ki/Tos, ov, indissoluble.
a-KaTa-iravaTos, ov, not to be re-
strained, with gen.
a-Kara-a-Taffia, as, 7], instaMlity; hence
sedition, tumult, disorder.
a-Kard-aTaros, ov, inconstant, unstable.
* Fem. form only in z Thess. ii. 16 ; Heb.
iz. iz.
VOCABULARY.
[dKara- dtXeupow
d-KOTa-(rx6Tos, ov, unruly, untameaUe,
Jas. iii. 8.
*AKeX-Sa/j.a. (Heb. in Chald. form, ^eld
of blood), Aceldama, Acts i. 19.
Some read 'AKcX^afxax.
a-K€patos, ov (Kepdvuvjui), unmixed;
hence, fig., simple, innocent, guile-
less. Matt. X. 16; Rom. xvi. 19;
Phil. ii. 15.
a-K\ivf}9, e'y, unbending ; hence unica-
vering, stedfast, Heb. x. 23.
ujf/ictfw, (ra>, to reach the point of perfec-
tion; so, of frnit, to ripen, Rev.xiv. 1 8.
cLKuriu, ace. as adv., up to this point,
hitherto. Matt. xv. 16.
aKori], 7?s, 7) {aKoiui), hearing, (i) the sense
or faculty ; (2) espec. the organ, the
ear; (3) the act of hearing ; (4) the
thing heard, as a report, speech, doc-
trine. aKofj, dat. , qualifying aKoveiv,
"to hear with hearing," i.e., atten-
tively.
aKoXovQio), a, •fiffa, (i) to accompany,
folloio, or attend, with dat. , or fierd.
(gen.), or omaw (gen.), espec. of the
disciples of Christ; so, met., to obey
and imitate; (2) to succeed, in order
of time, or retribution.
OLKOvu}, fTca or aofiai, pf., aKi\Koa, to hear,
(i) intrans., i.e., to possess the
faculty ; (2) trans, (ace. or gen.), to
hejar, listen to, heed, understand, ot
cLKovevres, hearers or disciples. In
pass. , to become notorious.
a-Kpatria, as, i], intemperance, inconti-
nence, I Cor. vii. 5.
a-Kpar{]s, fs {KpaTos), powerless, i.e.,
over one's self, 2 Tim. iii. 3.
&-KpaTos, ov {KepdvvvfjLi), unmixed or un-
diluted ; hence intoxicating. Rev.
xiv. 10.
aKpi^na, os, i], precision, strictness.
Acts xxii. 3.
aKpi&i]s, e'y, accurate, strict ; -as, adv.,
diligently, accurately, perfectly.
aKpi^6a>, u>, dau, to enquire closely (or
ascertain exactly). Matt. ii. 7, 16.
uKpls, iBoi, 7), « locust.
anpoari^piov, iov, n. [iiKpoiofiai, to hear),
the place of hearing judicially.
itKpoaT-f]s, ov, 6, one wfio listens to, a
liearer, Rom. ii. 13 ; Jas. i. 22.
&Kpo$v(TTla, as, r), the foresJciti, uncir-
CUTUcision ; aKpo^variav exoj/res, un-
circumcised; collective ior paga^is or
uncircumcised Gentiles.
hLKpo-ywviaios, o, ov, belonging to the
foundation; with XiQos understood,
^^ foundation stone," ref. to Christ,
Eph. ii. 20 ; 1 Pet. ii. 6.
oLKpo-elviov, iov, r6, first fruits, i.e., the
best of the produce, applied (plur.)
to spoils taken in battle, Heb. vii. 4.
i.Kpos, a, ov, outermost, pointed ; neut.,
th &Kpov, the end, extremity, as of a
finger, rod, &c.
'AKvXas, ov, 6, (Latin) Aquila.
a-Kvp6a}, S), to deprive of power, set
aside, as a law.
a-KcoK^Tcos, adv., freely, without hin-
drance. Acts xxviii. 3 1.
i.K(av, ovffa, ov (d, %kuv), unwilling,
I Cor. ix. 17.
aKdPa(TTpov, ov, t6, alabaster, a vessel
for perfume, Matt. xxvi. 7 ; Mark
xiv. 3 ; Luke vii. 37.
aKa(oveia, as, rj, boasting, show, osten-
tation.
aha^wv, 6vos, 6, a swaggering, boastful
person.
a\a\d((o, daw, to raise a cry, or loud
sound, as in mourning, as Matt.
v. 38 ; of cymbals, i Cor. xiii. i.
SL-XdXrjTos, ov, not to be uttered in wordSj
Rom. viii. 36.
&-\a\os, ov, dumb, making dumb.
&\as, aros, t6, salt; fig., wisdom, pru-
dence.
oAcf^oj, yf/w, to anoint, festally, or in
homage ; also medicinally, or in
embalming the dead.
iAeKTopo-ipwvla, as, ^, the cocTc-crounng,
between midnight and dawn.
aK^KTotp, opos, &, a cock. The name
signifies sleepless.
' AXe^avSpevs, fws, &, am, Alexandrian ,
i.e. , a man of Alexandria.
*AXfiavhpiv6s, i], 6v, Alexandrian, used
of a ship, Acts xxvii. 6, xxviii. 11.
^AKilavZpos, ov, b, Alexander. Four of
this name are mentioned, Mark
XV. 21; Acts iv. 6; Acts xix. 33;
1 Tim. i. 20.
hXtvpov, ov, T«{, fine meal or flour.
dXifj0€ia — &|iaxos]
VOCABULARY.
a\-fieeia, as, tj, truth ; generally, as
Mark v. 33; espec. , ( i ) freedom
from error, exactness, as (2) The
Truth, or Word of God ; Jesus is
called the Truth, John xiv. 6 ; (3)
truthfulness, veracity, sincerity, inte-
grity, opposed to ahiKia, Rom. ii. 8 ;
I Cor. xiii. 6.
o.\7)6i]s, 6s (o, XaQ- in \av6duu), uncon-
cealed, true, valid, sure, sincere, up-
right, just. 8ee SynonvQis for com-
parison with the following. -ws,
adv., truly ; in truth, really ; in very
deed, certainly.
a\.7}eiv6s, 7], 6v, real, genuine, contrasted
with " fictitious," " pretended ; "
also with "typical," as John vi. 32;
Heb. viii. 2, ix. 24.
h.\-i\Q<xi, ■f]aa}, to grind, i. e. , with a hand-
mill.
aXievs, 4cos, 6, a fisherman.
aXievci}, (V(T(a, to fish.
axi(a}, law, to salt, sprinkle with salt.
aAiayTjfia, utos, r6, pollution, as from
eating what has been sacrificed to
idols. Acts XV. 20.
oAAa (prop. n. plur. of &\\os), but, an
adversative particle. See 404.
aKKa.(T(T(a, d^ca, to alter or exchange.
dKXax^div, adv., /rom elsewhere.
aAA-Tjyopio}, Si, to speak allegorically,
or to allegorize ; pass. part. , Gal.
iv. 24.
*A\\r]\ovia (Hebrew), Hallelujah,
Praise ye Jehovah, Rev. xix. i, 6.
aXXr}\ti)v, reciprocal pron., gen. plur.,
one another, each other.
aWo-yeviis, 4s, of another nation, a
foreigner, Luke xvii. 18.
aWofiai (dep. ), aXovfiai, rjXdfiWi to hap
up, leap; to bubble up, as water,
John iv. 14.
&?0^os, 17, 0, other, different, another ;
01 &?<Xoi, the others, the rest. See
Synonyms. -ws, adv., otherwise,
I Tim. V. 25.
aKKoTpio-eiricFKOTTOs, ov, 6, one who looks
at or busies himself in the things of
another, a busybody, 1 Pet. iv. 1 5.
iiXK6Tptos, ia, lov, belonging to another,
foreign, strange, alien ; not of one^s
cum family, hostile.
ii\\6-<pvXos, ov, aAj., foreign, ofanoGier
tribe or race. Acts x. 28.
bXodu), u), i)a<i), to beat or thresh, as
corn, I Cor. ix. 10; i Tim. v. 18.
&-\oyos, ov, (1) without .speech or reason,
irrational; (2) unreasonable, absurd.
aXori, vs, 7], the aloe, John xix. 39.
oA?, a\6s, 6, salt. See a\as.
a\vK6s, 7?,- 6v (oAs), salt, brackish,
James iii. 12.
&-\viro5, ov, free from sorrow, Phil,
ii. 28.
a\v<ris, e(os, 7), a chain or manacle.
a-\u(TiTe\r]s, 4s, without gain, unprofit-
able, hurtful.
^A\(palos, ov, 6, AlplicBus. Two of the
name are mentioned, Mark ii. 14;
Mark xv. 4 (the latter being called
KAouTTciy, John xix. 25 ; another form
of the orig. Hebrew name).
aAwj', wvos, o, T], a threshing fioor ;
met., the corn of the threshing-floor.
aXdj-Kt]^, €Kos, 7), a fox ; met. , an artfid
and mischievous person.
aXwais, (COS, t}, a taking or catching.
dfia, adv., at the same time, with or
together with (dat. ) ; a/xa irpul, with
the dawn.
a-ixadiis, 4s, unlearned, rude, 2 Pet.
iii. 16.
a-fJiapdvTivos, ov, adj. {ftapalvofiai), un-
fading, I Pet. V. 4.
a-fidpavTos, ov, adj., unfading, i Pet.
i. 4.
aixaprdvoo, t7)(t(o, to miss a mark, to err,
to sin (with cognate ace. ) ; to wander
from truth or virtue, to sin against
or offend any one (with et's).
aij.dpr7]fxa, aros, r6, a sin, error, offence.
afxapria, as, ^, (i) sin, vice, wickedness;
(2) a particular sin, as unbelief,
frau I or falseho )d; (3) the imputation
or guilt of sin, possibly sin cffering.
a-fxdprvpos, ov, without loitness, 2 Cor.
^ V. 21 (U.T.).
afiaprcoMs, ov, (i) sinful, espec. habitu-
ally and notoriously; liable to the
punishment of sin ; (2) often used
substantively, a sinner, an impious
person. The Jews used the word
iov idolaters, i.e.. Gentiles.
d-iiaxos, ov, not quarrelsome.
8
VOCABULARY.
[d}ia« — dva'YKaa-Tcos
cLfidw, da, -fia-ot, to reap, to gather, as by
harvestmen, James v. 4.
a/xedua-Tos, ou, m., an amethyst (sup-
posed to be an antidote against
drunkenness. Hence the name,
from d, fjLf6ua>).
dfieXfO}, a, i](TO), not to care for, to dis-
regard, neglect ; gen. or inf.
d-fxefiiTTos, ov, without blame, faultless.
Adv., -cos, unblameably, faultlessly.
a-nipiixvos, ov, free from solicitude or
anxiety, secure, easy.
a-ixcTa-Qeros, ov, unchangeable.
a-fxeTa-Kivr)ros, ov, adj., immoveable,
firm, I Cor. xv. 58.
a-fj.(Ta-iJ.4\r]Tos, ov, adj., not to be re-
gretted or repented <yf ; hence un-
changeable, Rom. xL 29 ; a Cor.
vii. 10.
a-iJ.€Ta-v67]Tos, ov, adj., unrepentant,
irreclaimable, Rom. ii. 5.
d-fxerpos, ov, beyond measure, immode-
rate, 2 Cor. X. 13, 15.
afiTiv, Amen, a Hebrew adjective, true,
faithful, used (i) as an adverb, at
the beginning of a sentence, verily,
truly, indeed; (2) at the end of
ascriptions of praise, &c., optatively
as ydvoiTo, so "be it; substantively,
2 Cor. i. 20; {3) as a name of Christ,
tlie Amen, tlie, faithful witness, Eev.
iii. 14.
a-iJ.y)T(op, opos, 6, ri {fiiirnp), without mother,
i.e., in the genealogies, Heb. vii. 3.
a-fiiavroi, ov [fiiaivu}), undefiled, sincere,
pure.
*Aixivadd$, 6 (Heb.), Aminadab, Matt,
i. 4; Luke iii. 33.
&IXIJ.0S, ov, 7], sand, as of the shore ; a
sandy soil.
a(xv6s, ov, 6, a lamb; fig., of Christ,
John i. 29, &c.
k^Loi^-h, ris, T] (d/i€j/3a>), requital, i Tim.
V. 4.
&lxTTeXos, ov, 71, a vine, (i) lit. ; (2) fig.,
as John xv. i ; Rev. xiv. 18.
hlxTteh-ovpyos, ov, 6, t\, a vine-dresser,
Luke xiii. 7.
afiTTfXdy, S3V0S, 6, a vineyard.
*Afnr\ias, iov, 6, Amplias, Rom. xvi. 8.
i/tuvftj, w, only in mid., N.T., to defend,
assist, Acta vii. 24.
afi(pi-fi\'r]iTTpov, ov, t6. a fishing net.
a/xcpi-evvv/jLi, 4aa>, to put on, as a gar-
ment ; to clothe, adorn.
'AficpiiroXis, ecus, rj, Amphipolis, a city
in the S. of Macedonia.
&fi(p-oZov, ov, n., a place where two ways
meet, a street.
aficpSrepoi, ai, a, both, only of two.
a.-ix'J}fji.r]Tos, ov, without blame or fault,
Phil. ii. 15; 2 Pet. iii. 14.
&fMwiLLov, ov, r6, a spice plant. Rev.
xiii. 13.
d-ficafios, ov, without spot; fig., blame-
less.
*A(xdov, 5 (Heb.), Amon, Matt. i. 10.
'Afiws, 6 (Heb.), Amos, Luke iii. 25.
&v, a particle, expressing possibility,
uncertainty, or conditionality.
avd, prep., lit., upon; in composition,
up, again. See 297 and 147, a.
ava-^aOfids, ov, 6 (/3aiVa>), steps, stairs,
means of ascent.
ava-&aiua>, B-ficrofiai, (i) to ascend, espec.
to Jerusalem, on Ijoard ship (John
xxi. 3), to heaven ; (2) to spring up,
as plants, &c. ; used of a rumour.
Acts xxi. 31; of thoughts coming
into mind, Luke xxi v. 38.
ava-$d\\<o, mid., to postpone, defer.
Acts xxiv. 22,
ava-$iBd(ci>, to drato up, as a net to
shore.
dj/a-j8Ae7r», (i) to look upwards, (2) to
recover sight, (3) to look attentively.
dvd-fi\e\\/is, fias, 7), recovery of sight,
Luke iv. 18.
ava-^odw, S>, to exclaim, cry aloud.
hva-^oKi], ris, ri, putting off or delay.
Acts XXV. 17.
dj'-a77eAAai, to tell, to declare openly, to
show forth, confess, foretell.
&va-yevvda), w, to beget again.
iva-yivwaKo, to know well, to read,
espec. aloud, to know by reading;
used chiefly in the last sense.
oLvayKd^w, daw, to force, to compel by
force or persuasion.
iivayKalos, ala, aiov, necessary, fit, ser-
viceable; also close ox near, as friends,
Acts X. 24.
avayKocTTws, adv., necessarily or by con-
straint, I Pet V. 2.
aVttYKT] — a
vaXt:<
VOCABULARY.
9
hvajKr), 77 J, ^, (i) necessity, constraint;
(2) distress, z Cor. vi. 4, xii. 10.
ava-yj/wpi^w, to make known, aor. pass.,
Acts vii. 13.
avd-yvccais, eos, rf, reading, whether
private or public.
hv-ayw, to bring, lead, or take up; to
offer up, as sacrifices; pass., to put
to sea, to set sail.
ava-deiKw/M, to shoio, as by uplifting,
to show plainly, appoint,
avd-deilis, ews, t}, a shoioing or public
appearance, Luke i. 80.
dm-Sexo/iat, dep., to receive with a
welcome, as guests. Acts xxviii. 7 ;
promises, Heb. xi. 17.
ctva-St'Sco/ii, to give up, deliver, as by
messengers, Acts xxiii. 33.
oj/a-Caco, w, to live again, revive.
h.va.-Q(\ri(ii, ia, to look or search for with
diligence.
o.va-C(iivvviJii., to gird or bind up, as a
loose dress is ffirded about the loins :
fiir.
Pet. i. 13.
a.va-^a>ivvpiu>, « (Tryp), to re-kindle or
rouse up ; fig., 2 Tim. i. 6.
a.va-6dx\u}, to thrive or flourish again,
Fhilip. iv. 10.
ava-Qifxa, aros, r6, a person or thing
a.ccursed, an execration or curse.
Later form for avdO-rj/jLa, which see.
auadefiari^w, iaco, to bind by a curse, to
declaim on pain of being an ana-
thema.
aua-OeaipfCti, w, to look at or behold atten-
tively, to consider.
avd-6riixa, aros, t6, anything consecrated
and laid by, a votive offei^ing, Luke
xxi. 5. See dvaSejua and Synonyms.
av-aiheia, as, r), importunity (shame-
lessiiess), Luke xi. 8.
avaip€<ns, eojs, r], a taking away, i.e., by
a violent death.
av-aipeco, <a (see i03, i), to take away,
to abolish, to take off, to kill; mid.,
to take up, as Pharaoh's daughter
took up Moses, Acts vii. 21.
av-airios, ov, guiltless, i.e., without
cause {alria) of condemnation, Matt,
xii. 5, 7.
i.va-KaQi^Q}, to sit up (properly trans,
with ka\n6v understood).
ava-KaiviQa, to renew, restore to a former
condition, Heb. vi. 6.
ava-Kaivuo), w, to renew, amend, to
change the life, 2 Cor. iv. 16; Col.
iii. 10.
ava-Kaivcoffis, ecas, t], a renewal or change
of heart and life, Rom. xii. 2 ; Tit.
iii. 5.
ava-KaXinrrco, to unveil, make manifest.
ava-KafiTTTw, to bend or turn back,
return.
ayd-Kei/xai, dep., (i) to be laid out, as a
dead body, Mark v. 40, rec. ; (z) to
recline, as at a meal, reclining on the
bosom of Jesus, i.e., next to Jesus at
table ; 6 avaK^ifjt.evos, one who reclines
at table, a guest.
ava-KS(t)aXai6a}, w, to gather together into
one, to sum up, under one head ; pass. ,
E.om. xiii. 9 ; mid., Eph. i. 10.
ava-Khivu), to lay down, as an infant,
Luke ii. 7; to place at table; mid.,
to recline, as at a feast, like kvd-
Keiixai.
ava-K&Kra, to hinder (lit., beat bach),
Gal. V. 7.
ava-Kpd^o), to cry out, to shout aloud.
ava-Kpiuoo, to investigate, enquire; to
judge of favourably, 1 Cor. iv. 3, 4 ;
unfavourably, i Cor. xiv. 24. Ap-
plied to proceedings in a coui-t,
Luke xxiii. 14.
avd-Kpicns, ews, rj, judicial examination,
Acts XXV. 26.
ava-Kinrrw, to raise oneself from a stoop-
ing posture ; fig. , to be elated.
ava-XafjL^duoD, to take up; pass., of
Christ's being taken up to heaven.
avd-Xri^ts, ews, 7], a being taken up, i.e.,
into heaven, Luke ix. 5 1.
av-a\i(TKa), \d!>aa, to consume, destroy,
abolish.
ava-\oyia, as, rj, proportion, analogy,
Rom. xii. 6.
ava-XoyiCoixai, to think upon, consider
attentively.
&v-a\us, ov, without saltness, insipid.
avd-Kvais, «ws, 7), a loosening, as of a
ship from her moorings ; hence de-
parture, 2 Tim. iv. 6.
ava.-\v(a, to depart from, as from life,
Phil. i. 23 ; to return, Luke xii. 36.
10
VOCABULARY.
[avandpn^Tos — dv€K-
ay-afiApTTjTos, ov, without blame, fault-
less.
ava-ij.€v<i>, to await, i Thess. i. lo.
ava-fiifivijaKb), to remind, admonish;
two aces. , or ace. and inf. ; pass. , to
remember, to call to mind; gen. or
ace.
avd-fivTims, (as, t], remembrance, a me-
morial.
aua-pedo), (a, to renew; mid., to reneio
oneself, to be renewed, Eph. iv. 23.
hva-vr]<pw, to recover soberness, 2 Tim.
ii. 26.
hvavias, a, 6 (from Heb.), Ananias.
Three of the name are mentioned,
Acts V. 1-5, ix. 10, xxiii. 2.
a.v-avTi^-pi]Tos, ov, indisputable, not to be
contradicted. Acts xix. 36. Adv.,
-o)s, without hesitation. Acts x. 29,
av-d^tns, ov, unworthy, inadequate,
I Cor. vi, 2. Adv., -cos, unworthily,
unbecomingly, i Cor. xi. 27.
avd-TTavais, coos, v, rest, refreshment;
met., place of rest.
ava-irava, to give rest or refreshment;
mid., to take rest, to abide in rest.
hva-irdido), aa), to persuade, in a bad
sense, seduce, mislead. Acts xviii. 13.
ava-ire/jLiro}, to remit, send back.
&.vdirr]pos, ov, maimed, having lost a
member.
ava-irlTTTO}, to fall doivn ; N.T., to recline,
as at table at meals.
ava-vXrfp^ca, cb, to fill up ; to fulfil, as a
prophecy ; to perform, as a precept ;
to occupy or fll a place ; to supply a
deficiency.
av-airo- KSjrjTos, ov, adj., inexcusable,
Eom. i. 20, ii. i.
hva-TTTvcrara), to unroll, as a volume.
av-dinco, to kindle, set on fire.
av-apW/j.-qTos, ov, innumerable.
ava-aelw, to move, instigate, stir up.
ava-(TKevd(a>, to pervert, unsettle, destroy .
dva-iTird(i>, to draw up or back.
dvd-aTams, eoos, r], a rising up, as op-
posed to falling, Luke ii. 34 ; rising,
as from death or the grave, resur-
rection, the future state: met., the.
Author of tfie resurrection.
dva-marSw, S>, to unset-lle, put in com-
motion.
dva-(rTavp6<o, w, to crucify afresh, Heb,
vi. 6.
dva-<TT€vdCa}, to groan or sigJi deeply^
Mark viii. 12.
dva-(TTp4<p(a, to turn up or over, John
ii. 1 5 ; to restore ; intrans. , to return
mid. (as Lat. versari), to be or to
live in a place or state, to move
amonq, to pass one!s time or be con-
versant with persons; gen., to con-
duct on^s self
dva-cTTpocjyr], ^s, t], behaviour, manner of
dva-rd(T(Toixai, to compose in order,
Luke i. r.
dva-Te\X(i>, to spring up or rise, as the
sun or a star; spoken of the Messiah,
Heb. vii. 14; trans., to cause to rise,
Matt. V. 45.
dua-Tie-qfii, mid., to place before, declare,
make known.
dvaroK-i], 7)$, t), the dawn, the east, where
the sun rises; sing, and plur., see
240, a.
dvarpfiro}, to subvert, overthrow.
dva-rp4<l>(a, to nurse, bring up, educate.
dva-<paiv<o, mid., to appear, be mani-
fested; pass., to be shown (ace. of
thing). Acts xxi. 3.
dva-<p4p(t3, oiffo), to bear or lead, to offer,
as sacrifice ; to bear, as sin.
dva-<pwviu, w, to cry out aloud, Luke i.42.
dvd-x^iffis, €a>s, ^, a pouring out ; hence
excess, i Pet. iv. 4.
dm-xcpew, S>, to depart, withdraw.
dvd--^v^is, fws, T}, refreshment. Acts
iii. 20.
dva-y^vx<i>, to invigorate, to revive, 2 Tim.
i. 16.
*Avdpfas, ov, 6, Andrew.
hvSpairodia-T'f^s, ov, 6, a man-stealer,
I Tim. i. 10.
ivSpiCo), i(T(t}, mid. , to act like a man, to
be brave, i Cor. xvi. 1 3.
*Avhp6viKos, ov, 6, Andronicus, Rom.
xvi. 7.
dv^p6-<povos, ov, S, a manslayer, mur-
df^er, I Tim. i. 9.
dv-dyKX-nTos, ov, not open to accusation,
unblameable.
dv-fK-Si-fryv^os, ov, not to be »poken, in-
expressible, 2 Cor. ix. 15.
dv€K — dvop9J«l
VOCABULARY.
11
av-eK-ActAT/Tos, unutterable, i Pet. i. 8.
av-eK-KiLirros, ov, inexhaustible.
dvfKTos, i], 6v, tolerable, supportable;
only in comp., as Matt. x. 15.
dy-€\er]fi(av, ov, without compassion,
cruel, liom. i. 31.
duefxi^ca, to agitate or drive with unnd ;
pass. , James i. 6.
&y(ilxos, ov, b, the wind; met., plur.,
the cardinal points ; fig., applied to
empty doctriaes, Eph. iv. 14.
dv-eVSe/cTos, ov, adj., impossible, Luke
xvii. I. See Matt, xviii. 7.
av-i^-^peivi]Tos, ov, adj., inscrutable,
liom. xi. 33.
dve^i-KOJcos, ov, patient of injury, 2 Tim.
ii. 24.
dv-e^-LX^^iaa-Tos, ov, that cannot be ex-
plored, incom,prehensible, Eph. iii. 8.
dv-iTr-aiax"VTos, ov, causing no shame,
irreproachable, 2 Tim. ii. 15.
dv-eiri-A-niTTos, ov, adj., never caught
doing wrong, blameless.
dv-fpxofjLai, to come or go upwards,
&v€(ns, fws, 7], relaxation, remission, as
from bonds, &c., from contribution,
from burden or trouble.
dv-€Td^(a, to examine by torture. Acts
xxii. 24, 29.
aviv, adv. as prep. , with gen. , without.
dv-ivQ^Tos, ov, inconvenient, unsuitable.
dv-evpi(TK(o, to find by searching for.
dv-4xoi, mid., (i) to bear with, to have
patience with; (2) to endure; (3) to
admit, to receive, as teachers or doc-
trines. With gen.
dvi^ios, ov, 6, a nephew.
&vr]6ov, ov, r6, anise, ddl, Matt, xxiii. 23.
durjicei, impers., it is fit or proper ; part.,
rh dvrJKov, to dvr,K0VTa, the becoming.
dv-iixepus, ov, adj., not gentle, fierce,
2 Tim. iii. 3.
dv}]p, av5p6s, 6, (i) a man, in sex and
age (Lat., vir) ; hence (2) a husband;
(3) a person of importance in any
relation ; (4) a person generally ;
plur. voc. , SvSpes, Sirs ! often in ap-
position with adjectives and nouns.
dvd-iaTTjfxi, to op)pose, witlistand, resist.
avd-ofioXoy^oixat, ov/jlcu, to confess, give
thanks, Luke ii. 38.
^vBos, ovs, t6, a flower.
dvdpaKid, cii, /], a mass or ?ieap of live
coals.
&vdpa^, CMOS, 6, a live or burning coal.
dvdpcoTT-dpea-Kos, ov, desirous of pleasing
men.
dvOpciirivos, ivq, ivov, human, belonging
to man.
dvdpuTTo-KTSvos, OV, 6, 7}, ft homicidc, a
murderer.
&vdpci}iros, ov, m., a man, one of the
humun race. Like dv}\p, joined in ap-
position with substantives, as Matt
xi. 19, xxviii. 13. See Synonyms.
avQ-vTrar^vw, to be proconsul. Acts
xviii. 12.
avd-viraTos, ov, 6, a proconsul.
av-'n)iJii, to unloose, let go, cease from;
to leave, neglect.
dj'-tAe«v, (jiv, without mercy, James ii 13.
Others read aveXios.
&-vnrTos, ov, adj., unwashed.
av-l(TT7)fii, to raise up one lying or dead ;
intrans., to rise from a recumbent
posture, to rise into existence; aor.
part., often combined with other
verbs, as " rising {avaaTas) he
went."
''Avva, T/s, 7], Anna, Luke ii. 36.
Avvas, a, 6, Annas (in Josephus, Ana-
nus), Luke iii. 2.
av6riTos, ov, foolish, thoughtless, Rom.
i. 14; Gal. iii. 1, &c.
&voia, as, 7}, folly, madness, Luke vi. 1 1 j
2 Tim. iii. 9.
avoiya, |u;, to open ; intrans. in 2 pert. ,
aviwya, to be open.
av-oiKo5ofj.4ci}, S), to build up again. Acts
XV. 16.
&voL^is, eus, 7), an opening, as the act of
opening, Eph. vi. 19.
a-vofxia, as, rj, transgression of law,
iniquity.
&-V01JLOS, ov, (i) lawless, not subject to
the law, I Cor. ix. 21; met. of Gren-
tiles; (2) impious; as subst., a male-
factor. 6 ^vofios, that wicked or
lawless one, 2 Thess. ii. 8. Adv., -us,
without law, i.e., the declared law,
Kom. ii. 12.
av-opdow, a, to make upright or straight
again, to rebuild, make strong, con-
firm.
12
VOCABULARY.
[avocr
tos — avorepos
avSaios, ov, unholy, i Tim. i. 9 ; 2 Tim.
iii. 2.
auox^, ^s, ^, forbearance, patience,
ilom. ii. 4, iii. 25.
a.vT-ayu)viCoixat, to resist, strive against,
Heb. xii, 4,
ayr-dWayfia, aros, r6, an equivalent,
price.
avT-ava-ir\r]p6(o, w, to make good by sup-
plying deficiency.
avT-aTro-Si5(ofii, to recompense, requite.
avT-aTTo-Sofia, aros, t6, a recompence,
requital.
'OLVT-airS-doais, ews, 7h a reward, recom-
pence.
avT-anro-Kpivoixai, to reply against, con-
tradict.
avT-eiirov (def.,used as aaor. of a;'TiA.e7w,
see (pTjfJii), to contradict, to gainsay.
o.vr-4x<», mid., to holdfast, to adhere to
(gen.)
avri, prep., gen., instead of, for. See
291 and 147, a.
aPTi-^dXKo), to debate, to converse, Luke
xxiv. 17.
duTi-^ia-T'iQT}iii,vaiA.,toset oneself against,
oppose.
dvTi-8iK05, ov, 6, rj (orig. adj.), an oppo-
nent at law, an adversary.
avTi-Qcffis, ews, rj, debate, opposUion,
I Tim. vi. 20.
\vTi-KaQ-i<TrriiJii, to resist, Heb. xii. 4.
dvTi-KaXeo), to call or invite in turn,
Lnke xiv. 12.
dyTi-Keifiai, to oppose, resist (dat.) ;
d auTiKfififvos, tJie adversary.
dvTiKpi, adv., over against, Actsxx. 15.
duTi-Xajx^dva, mid., to take holdoj, help,
share in (gen.)
a.vTi-\4yco, to speak against, contradict
(dat.) ; to oppose, deny (with fii)).
auTi.\7j^Ls, €«s, help; hence, concrete,
a Jcelper, 1 Cor. xii. 28.
aj/Tt-Koyla, as, rj, contradiction, conten-
tion, reproach.
avri-\oi8op4<i), to revile or reproach cu/ain,
I Pet. ii. 23.
avTiKvrpov, ou, r6, a, random-price,
I Tim. ii, i6.
avTi-pL(Tpf<a, w, to measure in return.
aj/Tt-fiiffela, OS, rj, retribution, Rom. L 27;
reward or recompence, 2 Cor. vi. 13.
'AtntSx^ta, 0,5, t}, Antioch. Two places
of the name are mentioned, Acts
xi. 26, xiii. 14.
*ApTtox^vs, ((OS, 6, a citizen of Antioch,
Acts vi. 5.
avTi-Trap-ipxofj.ai, to pass by on the other
side or without staying to notice,
Luke X. 31, 32.
*kvTliTa.s, o, 6, Antipas, Rev. ii. 13.
'AyrnraTpis, iBos, 7], Aniipatris, Acts
xxiii. 31.
ayri-irepap, adv., on the opposite side or
shore, Luke viii. 26.
avTi-irhrTO}, to fall against, resist. Acta
vii. 52.
apTi-ariKireiiofji.ai, dep., to make war
against, Rom. vii. 23.
avTi-rda-ao}, mid. , to set oneself against,
resist (dat.)
ami-TVTTos, OP, con'esponding in form,
e.g., as wax to the seal. Eng.,
antitype, Heb. ix. 24 ; i Pet.
iii. 21.
*APTi-xpi(Tros, ou, m., opposer of Christ,
Antichrist. Only in Epp. of John.
apT\e(o, S>, to draw from a vessel, John
ii. 8.
&PT\7]fji.a, aros, t6, a bucket, John
iv. 7, 15.
aPT-o<pda\iJ.€Q}, 60, to look in the face; so
to meet the wind. Acts xxvii. 1 5.
&p-v5pos, OP, without water, dry, parched.
Matt. xi. 43.
ap-xmS-Kp^iTos, ov, adj., witliout hypocrisy,
unfeigned. Rom. xii. 9.
ap-xmo-raKTos, op, not subject to rule;
of persons, i Tim. i. 9; of things,
Heb. ii. 8.
tJj/w, adv. (oi/a), up, above, upwards;
Ta dpta, heaven or heavenly things,
John viii. 33 ; Col. iii x, 2.
dvdj-yfop, OP, r6, an upper chamber,
Mark xiv. 15; Luke xxii. 12.
6.vo)8€v, adv. {^poi), of place,/roma6oye;
of time, from the first ; sometimes,
again, John iii. 4, 7 ; or, perhaps
here also, from above.
dvwT€piK6s, 71, OP, upper, higher, Acts
xix. I.
opuTepos, o, OP (comi)ar. of &pu), higher,
to a highi'r place, Luke xiv. 1 c ;
aiiove, before, Heb. x. 8.
dvw^cX^S — direpiTjXTjTOs] VOCABULARY.
13
dv-(t><l>€\-fis, h, unprofitable^ serving no
purpose.
diivri, "ns, rj, an axe, Matt. iii. 9.
6^105, ia, lou, adj., worthy, dtserving of
good or evil, suitable (gen.) Adv.,
-(OS, worthily, suitably (gen.)
d^iSco, u, to deem worthy (ace. and gen.,
or inf.), to desire, think good.
d-6paTos, adj., invisible, unseen, Rom.
i. 20 ; Col. i. 15, 16.
d7r-a77€AAftj, to report, relate, make
known, declare.
cZ7r-«£7X«, mid., to hang or strangle one-
self, Matt, xxvii. 5.
dir-dyw, to lead, carry, or take away ;
pass., to be led away to execution, to
lead or tend, as a way.
o-7ro(5euTos, ov, adj., uninstructed, inept,
2 Tim. ii. 23.
dir-aipca, pass., to be taken aioay (with
aiT6).
oTT-aiTeco, to ask back, require, reclaim
(with d-n6).
dir-a\y€(o, to be unfeeling, Eph. iv. 1 9.
ttir-oAAaa-j-w, mid., to remove oneself
from, to depart; pass., to beset free
(with drr6).
div-aXKoTpi6(a, to estrange, alienate (gen.)
diTdk6s, % 6v, tender, as a shoot of a
tree.
cLTT-avTaa, So, to meet, to encounter (dat.)
dir-di/T7](Tis, €a>y, rj, a meeting, an en-
countering ; els dirdi/TTjcriv (gen. or
dat.), to meet any one.
a-rraf, adv., of time, once, PhiL iv. 16;
once for all.
d-Tvapd-^dros, adj., not passing from one
to another, not trayisient, uncJmnge-
able, Heb. vii. 24.
a-Trapa-o-Keuao-Tos, ov, adj., unprepared,
unready, 2 Cor. ix. 4.
aTrapviofiai, ovfjuti, to deny, disown.
diT-dpTt, adv., of time, henceforth, here-
after, even now.
dTr-apTi(Tix6s, ov, 6, completion, Luke
xiv. 28.
dtr- apx^, V^, T\i the first fruits, conse-
crated to God, the first.
a-vas, aaa, av, all, all togetJier, the
whole.
aTrardca, u, ^aoff, to deceive, lead into
error.
anaTrj, rjs, rj, that which deludes or
deceives, fraud.
u-iraTup, epos, 6, t\ {irar-i]p), witJiouJ
father, i.e., in the genealogies, Heb.
vii. 3.
dir-avyoAfia, aros, t6, refiecied splendour,
effulgence, Heb. i. 3.
air-i7Sov, 2 aor. of d<popd<a, which see.
d-Trei0eia, as, r], wUful unbelief obstinacy,
disobedience.
d-iriiQ4o), 5>, to refuse belief, be disobedient,
d-ireid-ris, 4s, unbelieving, disobedient
aTrejAeco,- w, "fjaca, to threaten, forbid by
threatening, rebuke.
direiX-f], rjs, i], threatening, harshness,
severity.
&Tr-ei(xi {elfii, subst. verb), to be absent,
1 Cor. V. 3, &c.
dire7fii {dfii, to go), to go away, to depart.
Acts xvii. 10.
air-eiirot/, mid., to renounce, dviowny
2 Cor. iv. 2.
d-TTeipacrros, ov, adj., incapable of being
tempted, James L 13.
S-Treipos, ov, adj., inexperienced, un-
skilful, Heb. v. 13 (gen.)
d-ir-€K-S4xofJi.ai, to wait for, expect ear-
nestly or patiently.
dTT-eK-Svoy-at, to strip, divest, renounce.
dneKdviTis, eas, rj, a putting or stripping
off, renouncing. Col. ii. 11.
ttTT-eAaww, to drive away. Acts xviii. 16.
a.ir-eXi'yix6s, ov, 6 (^A67X«), refutation,
disgrace, disi-epute, scorn, Acts xix. 27.
dir-e\fvO(pos, ov, 6, 7], made entirely free^
I Cor. vii. 22.
'ATreAATjy, ov, 6, Apelles, Rom. xvi. 10.
dir-eAjrtX«, ffw, to despab; Luke vi. 35;
/ATjSef dTreATTi^oi'Tes, rendered, E.V.,
"hoping for nothing again;" more
probably, "not despairing," i.e.,
without anxiety about the result.
air-ivavTi, adv., gen,, over against, in
the presence of, in opposition to.
d-vepavTos, ov (irepay), interminable,
I Tim. i. 4.
d-Trepiairaa-Tws, adv. {iripi(nrdci}), loithout
distraction, 1 Cor. vii. 37.
dvepiTfiriTos, ov, uncircumcised. Acts
vii, 51 ; "hearts" so covered as not
to obey, and "ears" so covered as not
to hear.
14
VOCABULARY.
[dir-€pxo|itti — a,ir($-Kpi}xa
av-ipxofiai, to go or come from one
place to another, to go away, depart;
to go apart; to go back, to return; to
go forth as a rum jur, Matt. iv. 24.
i,n-4xco, to Jinve the whole of, as reward;
impers., aTe'xei, it is enough; mid.,
to abstain from.
aTTiaTeco, m, t > disbelieve, to be unfaith-
fxd, 2 Tim. ii. 13.
oxtCTTfa, OS, ^, unbelief, distrust, a state
of unbelief, 1 Tim. i. 4 ; renunciation
of faith, apostasy, Heb. iii. 12, 19.
i.-Tri(TTos, ov, not believing, incredulous;
hence an unbeliever or infidel, faith-
less, perfidious; also pass., incredible.
a-vK6os, ovs, Tj, ovv, simple, sound ; of
the eye, clear-sighted. Adv., -ws,
sincerely, bountifully.
air\6T7]s, T7JT0S, 71, simplicity, sincerity,
purity.
airh, prep, gen., from. See 292; and
for the force of the prep, in com-
position, 147, a.
UTro-^aivo) (for ^aiva, see 94, I., 6, d;
fut., -fi-ftcro/xai), to go or come out of,
as from a ship ; to result, befall.
oTTo-jSaAAo;, to throw away, renounce.
oTro-jSA-eTroj, to look away, i.e., from all
besides ; hence to regard with atten-
tion, Heb. xi. 26 ; with etj.
a.Tr6-^\riJos, ov, verbal adj., to be throum
away, refused, 1 Tim. iv. 4.
a.iro-Bo\-fi, vs, 7], a casting away, re-
ject on, loss.
airo-'yivoixai, to die, I Pet. ii. 24.
airo-ypa(f>i}, ^s, 7), a record, register,
enrolment, Luke ii. 2 ; Acts v. 3 7.
airo-ypdcpu, to enrol, inscribe in a register.
aTTo-SeiKi/vfii, to sfiow by proof, demon-
strate ; to set forth, designate.
&ir<J-Sei|is, (COS, r], demonstration, proof,
I Cor. ii. 4.
d7ro-5eKOT({w, «, (i) to pay the tenth or
tiViC ; [z) to levy tithes on, ace.
a-K6h(KTos, ov, verbal adj., acceptable.
a,Tro-S4xoiJ.ai, to receive wi^h pleasure, to
welcome.
iTTo-OTjAtcw, «, "to be absent from
one's own people," go abroad, Matt,
xxi. 33 ; Luke xx. 9.
iirS-STifjos, Of, "gone abroad," a so-
journer, Mark xv. 34.
aTTo-ZiSwfii, to give from one's self, as
due, or as reward or testimony ; to
yield, as fruit, Rev. xx. 2 ; to give
back, restore, retaliate ; mid. , to
sell.
aTTo-Si-opi^o), to separate off, i.e., into
parties, Jude 19.
aTro-5oKifxd(a}, to reject, as disapproved
or wortb less.
O7ro-8ox77, -qs, 7}, acceptance, approbation.
aTrS-deais, €«s, t], a putting away, i Pet.
iii. 2 1 ; 2 Pet. i. 14.
aTTo-diiKTj, 7)s, 7), ft Tcpository, granary,
storehouse.
airo-dTjaaupl^oi}, to treasure up, lay by in
store, I Tim. vi. 19,
airo-OKlBo), to press closely, Luke viii. 45.
a.Tro-dvi](TKco (oTrb intensive), to die,
spoken of the loss of human, animal,
or vegetable life ; inchoative, to be
dying, i.e., in danger of death,
I Cor. XV, 3 1 ; met. , to be utterly
alienated from, as Rom. vi. 2.
aTro-Kad-larTjfii, airoKaraariiaoa (also -Ko^i-
ardca and -dvta, see Mark ix. 12 ;
Acts i. 6), to restore, e.g., to health,
or as a state or kingdom.
aTTo-KaAuTTTw, to uncover, bring to light,
reveal ; pass., of Christ's appearance
from heaven.
aTTo-KciAv^'ty, fco9, 7), revelation, mani-
festation, enlightenment (A\wca.\ypse).
airo-Kupa-SoKla, as, v {Kapa, head), earnest
expectation, as if looking for with the
head bent forwards, Kom. viii. 19 ;
Phil. i. 20.
a-jroKai-aWdcraa, to reconcile, change
from one state of fetling to another,
Eph. ii. 16; Col. i. 20, 22.
aTru-Kara-arcuTts, eft»s, v, restitution, resto-
ration, introduction of a new and
better era. Acts iii. 21.
dirJ-/ce4/iO., to be laid away, to be reserved,
to await any one, dat.
aTro-Kf<pa\iC<i) {Kf^a\i]), to behead.
airo-K\el(a, to shui Uosi\ as a door,
Luke xiii. 25.
oTTo-KcJirTft), to smite or cut off; mid.,
Gal. V. 12, even cut off, not circum-
cised only.
i.w6-Kpt/xa, aros, r6, a judicial sentence^
a Cor. i. 9.
airo-KpCvofJiai — atro-arrpi^(aj VOCABULARY.
15
oLTo-Kpivofiai (for aor., see 100), to
answer, to take occasion to speak, to
continue the discourse.
a-no-Kpiais, €«s, tj, an answer, reply.
airo-KpvTTTO}, to hide, conceal, not to dis-
close.
aTr6-Kpv(pos, ov, concealed, laid up in
store.
airo-KTeivo), ivco, to put to death, kill;
lig., to abolish, Eph. ii. i6.
awo-Kvea}. w, to bring forth ; fig., James
i. 15, .8.
aTTo-KuAiVSftj, tVo), to roll away. Matt,
xxviii. 2 ; Mark xvi. 3 ; Luke xxiv. 2.
airo-Ka^iBdvco, to receive, as from any-
one ; to receive back, as requital ; to
receive in full, obtain ; mid., to take
aside with one's self, Mark vii. 33.
aird-Kavcns, ews, t} (Aoi'w, to enjoy), en-
joyment, I Tim. vi. 17 ; Heb. xi. 25. "
dTTo-AeiTro), to leave, to leave behind, to
desert ; pass,, to be reserved.
d7ro-A6ix<w, to lick, as a dog, Luke
xvi. 21.
kir-6Wviji.i (see 116, 2), to destroy, to
bring to nought things or persons, to
put to death ; to lose, Luke xv. 8 ;
mid. pass (and 2nd perf. ), to perish,
die ; to be lost.
'AiroWvcav, ovros, 6 (prop, part of
cLTToWvci}), Apollyon, the destroying
one. Rev. ix. 11.
'ATToWcavia, as, r], Apollonia, a city of
Macedonia, Acts xvii. 1.
'AttoAAcos, do, 6, Apollos.
a.Tio-K.o'yiSyia.i, ovfiai [Kdyos), to defend
one^ 8 self by speech, to plead.
aiTo-Xoyla, as, 7], a verbal defence,
"apology."
airo-Xovca, mid., to wash away, as sins.
Acts xxii. 16 ; I Cor. vi. 11.
aiTo-XvrpuGis, 6a>s, ^, redemption, deli-
verance, through paying a ransom,
as Eph. i. 7 ; or generally, without
ransom, Luke xxi. 8; Heb. xi. 35.
airo-Xvu), to release, let go, to send away;
spec, to divorce, to dismiss from
life; mid. and pass., to depart.
airo-uda-aa), |«, to unpe off, as dust from
the feet.
ajro-v€fiw, to assign to, to give, i Peter
iii. 7.
aTTo-viiTTw, mid., to wash (one's self),
Matt, xxvii. 24.
airo-TriTTTO), to fall from. Acts ix. 24.
ctiro-TrAoi/ctw, w, to seduce ; pass., to
wander from.
dTTo-TTAew, evaco, to sail away.
dwo-irXvvw, to wash or rinse, as nets,
Luke V. 2.
dTro-TTviyco, to suffocate, choke.
d-iropfu, S> {'ir6pos, resource), only mid.
in N.T., to be in doubt, to be 2)er-
plexed.
dTTopia, OS, 7], perplexity, disquiet, Luke
xxi. 25.
dirop-piirTta {plirToo, to cast), to th7'0W or
cast down or off. Acts xxvii. 43 ;
cavTovs understood.
dTT-opcpavl^o) (^/j(|)avos), pass., " to be
made orphans of ; " to be bereaved,
* separated from, i Thess. ii. 17,
dTro-(TKivd(ofiai, to divest one's self of.
Acts xxi. 1 5.
dTro-(rKia(T/JLfL. aros, to {aKia^o)), a shade;
met., o. slight trace, James i. 17.
diro-(rnd(o, u, daca, to draw out, un-
sheathe; to withdraw, to draw away
diro-ffTaaia, as, 7], defection, departure^
.apostasy. Acts xxi. 21 ; 2 Thess. ii. 3.
diro-ardaiov, ov, t6, desertion, repudia-
tion, divorce; met., bill of divorce.
diro-a-reyd^co {(TTeyT)), to unroof Mark
ii. 4; probably to remove the awning
of the courtyard.
diro-o-TeAAcu, to send away, to send, as
a messenger, commission, &c., spoken
of prophets, teachers, and other mes-
sengers ; to thrust forth, as a sickle
into corn, Mark iv. 29.
oTTo-cTTepecw, u3, •i)(j(a, to defraud, abs. ;
deprive ofhj fraud, ace. and gen.
dtro-iTToK-f], ^s, f., apostleship. Acts i. 25.
dir6-(TTo\os, ou, 6, (1) a messenger; {■z)an
apostle, i.e., a messenger of Christ
to the world ; used of others beside
Paul and the Twelve, Acts xiv. 4, 14 ;
I Thess. ii. 6; 2 Cor. viii. 23. Christ
himself is so called, Heb. iii. i.
oTTo-trTo/iaTiXw ((ttJjlio), to provoke to
speak, Luke xi. 53.
dTTo-(rrp4<pc»>, to turn avjay ; trans, (witli
dir6), restore, replace; mid., to deserty
reject, ace.
hh
16
VOCABULARY. [airo-arrvy^o) — ^'ApCorrapxot
caro-ffTvyica, w, to detest, to ahhor, Rom.
xii 9.
atro-avviyoiyos, ov, excluded from the
synaijogue, i.e., from the rights and
privileges of the Jewish people,
John ix. 22, xii. 42, xvi. 2.
diro'Tdaaco, f», mid., "to set one's self
apart from;" to take leave of, re-
nounce, send away, dat.
o7ro-T6Ae«, «, ccrw, to perfect, James
i. 15.
dirorierjfii, mid., to lay off or aside, to
renounce, Acts vii. 58; E-om. xiii. 12.
niro-rii-aa-aco, to sluike off, Luke ix. 5 ;
Acts xxviii. 5.
airoMvo) (or -riot), riaw, to repay,
Philemon 19.
diTo-To\fxd(i), u, to dare boldly, Rom.x. 20.
diro-TOfjLia, as, 7} {rffivoj, to cut), severity,
Rom. xi. 22.
diro-rSfxtos, adv., severely, sharply.
dno-Tpiirw, mid., to turn away from,
shun, ace, 2 Tim. iii. 5. .
dx-ovaia, os (i^Trej/ut), absence, Phil. ii. 12.
aTro<p4pw, to bear away from one place
to another, Mark xv. i.
o.Tro-<pivyco, to escape.
dTro-4>d4yyofjLai, to speak out, declare.
dvo-<l)oprl(ofi.at (tpSpros, a burden), to
unlade, Acts xxi. 3.
dir<J-xpr?(rjs, €«s, tj {airS intens.), use,
consumption. Col. ii. 22.
a7ro-x»p6a>, «, to go away, depart.
oLTro-xvpi^oi, to separate, rend away
from.
d?ro-4/uX«, "to breathe out," to faint,
as from fear, Luke xxi. 26.
"Ainrios, ov, 6, Appius. "Amriov ^6pov, the
Appian Way, a road from Rome to
Brundusium, constructed by Appius
Claudius Caesar.
a-irpSs-iTos, adj. (irpos, ftfii), not to be
approached.
a-irp6s-KOTro5, ov {k6vtu), to stumble),
( 1 ) not giving offence or causing to sin;
(2) not caused to sin, witJiout offence.
i-irponuTTo-K-frirrwi, adv., not taken by
appearance, impartially, i Pet. i. 17.
i-irrataros, ov (vToiu), to fall), without
stumbling or falling, Jude 24.
irr», y^w, to kindle^ as light or fire;
mid., to toudi^ See Synonyms.
*Air^to, OS, 71, Apphia, Philemon a;
perhaps Philemon's wife.
airwOfw, u, airdaw, mid., to repulse, to
reject.
aircoKcia, as, rj {airSWvfii), consumption,
waste, of things ; destruction, of
persons; death by violence; per-
dition.
apd, as, rj, curse, imprecation, Rom.
iii. 14.
UpOf conj., illative, tlwrefore, tlience,
since. See 406. Spo, adv. inter-
rogative, where the answer is nega-
tive.
*Apa&ia, as, v, Arabia, Gal. i 17, iv. 25.
"Apa^i, 6 (Heb.), Aram, Matt i. 3 ;
Luke iii. 33.
"Apa^, ojSoy, 6, Arabian, Acts iL 11.
dp-yew, «, to linger, to delay.
apy6s, ov (a, fpyov), "doing nothing,"
idle, inactive, unprofitable.
apyvpeos, ovs, a, ovv, made of silver.
apyipiov, lov, t6, silver, a piece of silver,
a shekel, money in general.
apyvpo-K6vos, ov, 6, one who tvorks in
silver, a silversmith.
ipyvpos, ov, 6, silver; met., anything
made of silver.
"Apfios irdyos, ov, 6, Areopagus, or Mari
hill,a.n open space on a hill in Athens,
where the supreme court was held.
Comp. "Campus Martins;" "Champ
de Mars."
^Apeovaylr-ns, ov, 6, a judge of the Areo-
pagite court.
ipeffKeia, as, rj, a pleasing, a desire of
pleasing. Col. i. 10.
apeaKco, ap4aw, to be pleasing to, to seels
to please or gratify, to accommodate
one^sselfto, dat.
ape<rr6s, i\, 6v, acceptable, pleasing to.
*Aphas, a, 6, Aretas, a king of Arabia
Petraea, 2 Cor. xi. 32.
hpcrl), rts, rj, virtue, divine ej^idencyy
excellency, perfection, courage, man-
linens.
tLpr\v, apv6s, a lamb, Luke x. 3.
dpidfjLfw, S>, to reckon by number,
apidfids, ov, 6, a number, whether defi-
nite or indefinite.
'Apifiadaia, as, rj, ArhnatJuxa,
'ApiffTopxos, ov, 6, Aristarchus,
&pi(rTdM — apxi-o^vctYw-yos] VOCABULARY.
17
api<TT<l(a, «, "fiffta (&pi<Trov), (j) to take an
early meal; (z) to dine, Luke xi. 37 ;
John xxL 12, 15.
aptorepSs, <£, 6v, t/ie left, i.e., hand,
fern. sing, (x^ip) ; neut. phir. (fiepr]).
*Api(Tr6Pov\os, ov, 6, Aristobulus.
&pi<Trov, ov, r6, a morning or early meal,
a slight refreshment. Cf. Suirvov.
apK€r6s, it, ov, sufficient.
apKfo, u, to be sufficient for; mid. or
pass., to be satisfied with,
ipxros (in some edd. &pKos), ov, 6, i],
a bear. Rev. xiii. 2.
Ap/JLO, aros, r6, a citariot, as of war;
any vehicle.
'ApfjLayeSSdu (Heb., the Mountain of
Megiddo, see Judges v. 19 ; 2 Kings
xxiiL 29), Armageddon, Rev. xvi. 16.
apfi6^o}, (Tu, "to tit together;" mid.,
to espouse, to betroth, 2 Cor. xi. 2.
apfx6s, ov, 6, a joint, i.e., of limbs in a
body, Heb. iv. 12.
iipviofiai, ovfiat, to contradict, disclaim,
disown, deny, renounce,
apvlov, ov, t6 (dimin. of apr}v), a little
lamb, John xxi. 15.
aporpioM, u, da (a, to plough, abs.
&fjoTpou, ov, t6, a plough, Luke ix. 62.
apTrayi], ^y, ri (opirct^a), (i) the act of
plundering ; (2) Hue thing plundered,
spoil.
apirayfiSs, ov, 6, "a plundering," s^^oiZ,
a7i object of eager desire, Phil. ii. 6.
o/)iro^tt>, offo) (2 aor. pass., TjpTrdynv), to
snatch, seize violently, take by force;
to carry off suddenly.
&pira^, ayos, adj., rapacious, ravelling,
extortionate.
a^f)afid!)v, uvos, 6 (from Heb. ), a pledge,
an earnest, ratifying a contract.
&^^a(pos, OP, not seaTneJd or sev>n.
&p(n]v, iv (or Upcrrjp, ev), of the male
sex.
&^pr]Tos, ov, a.dj., unspoken, unspeakable,
2, Cor. xii. 4.
&^^(i}(TTos, ov, adj. (pdivvvfjii), infirm, sick.
apaevo-Koirr]s, ov, m. {&par}v koittj), a
sodomite.
'Aprefias, a, 6, Artemos, Titus iii. 12,
'^Aprefxis, i!)os or los, 77, Artemis (by the
Latins called Diana), the heathen
deity of hunting ; also, the goddess
of the Moon. She was worshipped
at Ephesus as "the personification
of the fructifying and all- nourishing
powers of nature. "
dpre/Jiav, ovos, m. {aprdw, to suspend),
prob. the foresail), Acts xxvii. 40.
&pTi, adv. of time, now, already, lately,
well nigh; with other particles, as
6«s &pTi, till now ; air' &pTL,from now
or henceforward.
dpTi-yevvrjTos, ov, new- or recently born,
I Pet. ii. 2.
&p7ios, OV, adj., perfect, complete, want-
ing in nothing, z Tim. iiL 17.
&pTos, ov, 6, bread, loaf or cake of
bread, /00c?, necessaries of life ; fig.,
spiritual nutriment.
apTiLiQ) i&pu), to fit), to sexuon, to flavour ^
as with salt; fig.. Col. iv. 6.
*Ap^a|c£5, b (Heb.), Arphaxad.
dpx-dyy€^o9, ov, 6, an arch- or chief-
angel, I Thess. iv. 16; Jude 9.
dpxouos, a, ov, old, ancient.
'Apxe\outs, ov, 6, Archelaus, Matt. ii. 22.
dpxVj V5, f., beginning, as of time or
space ; the outermost point. Acta
X. II. So often absolutely, "the
beginning." Applied to the com-
mencement of anything. Used of
Christ, CoL i. 18; Rev. iii. 14,
xxi. 6, xxii. 13. Met., pre-eminetice^
Jude 6. 6.pxo-^, pi-, rulers; mt dpxvs,
from the beginning, i.e.,from eternity,
from the first, as to any particular
thing ; iv apx!?", Mi the beginning, i.€.,
of all things, or of the Gospel dis-
pensation ; €| apxv^, from the begin-
ning or from the first ; kot* dp^as,
at the beginning, r^v apxhv, originally.
apx-'rry^5, ov, 6 {dpxij, dya), the beginner^
i.e., author or leader, captain.
apx-tipariKSs, i], 6v, belonging to the office
of the high piriest, pontifical.
apx-i^pfvs, 4cD5, 6, ( I ) the high priest ,
so of Christ ; (2) a chief priest, i.e.^
the haad priest iu his class. See
I Chron. xxi v. 4-18.
apXi-voiixrjv, fvos, 6, the cJdef sJiepherd,
a title of Christ, i Pet. v. 4.
"Apx'TTTos, ov, 6, Archippus.
iLpXi-a-vvdyaryos, ov, 6, '/residing officer
of a synagogue.
18
VOCABULARY. [dpxt-TSKTWv — -a-o-uvGcroS
apxi-T^KTcov, ovos, 6, a head builder, an
architect, i Cor. iii. lo.
apxi-T€\(iv7}s, ov, 6, a chief farmer or
collector of taxes, a chief publican.
apxi-TpiKKivos, ov, 6, a president of a
feast.
apxo, to reign, to rule (gen.) ; mid., to
begin, often with iniin. ; also to
venture, attempt, as Mark x. 28.
ap^aixivos airS, beginning with.
&PX(^v, ovros, S, prop, particip., ruler,
chief person, prince, magistrate.
ipcDfia, aros, r6, spicery, an aromatic,
'had (Heb.), Asa, Matt. i. 7.
d-caAeuTos, 01^, unshaken, immovable.
&-a^e(TTos, ov, adj. {(r$€uvvni), not to be
quenched, inextinguisJiable.
dff€j8e*a, as, ti, impiety, ungodliness,
wickedness. See Synonyms.
aa-elSew, w, 'fjffio, to act or live impiously,
wickedly.
d-(re3^y, 4s {ad^ofuu), impious, ungodly,
wicked.
a-aeXyeia, as, ri, excess, indolence, licen-
tiousness, debauchery.
&-<r7}ixos,not remarkable, obscure, ignoble.
Acts xxi. 39.
'Aavp, 6, Asher, Luke ii. 36 ; Exjv.
vii. 6.
acrd4veta, as, % weakness, bodily infir-
mity, sickness; H^. , mental depression,
distress.
aa-deveco, S», to be weak, sick, faint ; fig. ,
to be faintliearted, 2 Cor. xi. 21.
atT64vriiJ.a, aros, t6, infirmity ; fig. ,
mental or moral weakness.
a-adfi/ris, 4s {(Td4vos, strength), "without
strength," iwmA;, infirm, sickly; fig.,
fainthearted, afflicted.
Atria, as, t], Asia, i.e., that district in
the W. of Asia Minor afterwards
called Proconsular Asia, withEphe-
sus its capital. Acts xix. 10, 22;
Rev. i. 4, II, &c.
Aatavos, ov, 6, belonging to Asia, Acts
XX. 4.
'Aaidpxv^i o"j ^» ^^ Asiarch; one of
ten appointed to preside over the
worship and celebrations in honour
of the gods. Acts xix. 3 1.
iuTiria, as, 7) (crTros, corn), abstinence, a
fastf Acts xxvii. 2 1.
&-tnTos, ov, fasting. Acts xxvii. 33.
a<TK4{a, S), -fjaa), to exercise onels self
exert diligence in. Acts xxi v. 16.
a(TK6s, ov, 6, a bottle of skin, Matt.
ix. 17; Mark ii. 22; Luke v. 37.
aa-fievoDs, adv. (from part, of ^^o/xai),
with joy, gladly. Acts xxi. 17.
&-(ro(pos, ov, not wise, Eph. v. 15.
aand^ofiai, dep., to embrace, salute;
to greet with a welcome when pre-
sent, with affection where not pre-
sent ; to take leave of, to receive with
pleasure, aa the promises of the
Gospel.
aairaaixds, ov, 6, salutation, greeting.
&-a-7ri\os, ov, ov {airlKos), without spot,
unblemished.
aairls, iSos, f], an asp, a venomous ser-
pent, Rom. iii. 13.
&-(rTrovSos, ov [airovSr]), " not to be bound
by truce, " implacable.
aaadpiov, iov, r6, a small coin equal to
the sixteenth part of a denarius,
an as. See 154, a.
aaaov, adv. (compar. of ^7xO> nearer,
very nigh, close by. Acts xxvii. 13.
"Affaos, ov, ri, Assos, Acts xx. 13.
d-<TTaT4cD, u, ^aa, to be unsettled, to have
no fixed abode.
d(TTe7os, ov (&(TTv, city), fair, beatdiful.
d(TT-i}p, 4pos, 6, a star. In Jude 13, a
meteor, or perhaps comet.
a-<TTT]piKTos, adj. (ffTrjpt^w), unsettled^
unstable, 2 Pet. ii. 14, iii. 16.
^-(xropyos, ov {(nopyh), without natural
affection, Rom. i. 31; 2 Tim. iii. 3.
a-cnox4ci>, w [ottSxos), to miss in aim^
swerve from, i Tim. i. 6, vi. 21 ;
2 Tim. ii. 18.
aarpairf], Tjs, if, lightning, vivid bright-
ness, lustre.
itarpdirTQ), to flash, as lightning, Luke
xvii, 24 ; to be lustrous, xxiv. 4.
&(TTpov, ov, t6, a constellation, star.
'AffvyKpiTos, ov, 6, Asyncritus, Rom.
xvi. 14.
a-avfxipwvos, ov, dissonant, discordant^
Acts xxviii. 25.
a-avv^ros, ov, without understanding,
foolish, impious.
a-(Tvv6eTos, ov, covenant-breaking, treach-
erous, Rom. i. 31.
do-(j>dX€ia — avx|i.iip<5s]
VOCABULARY.
19
d(T<pd\€ia, as, r), security, Acts v. 23 ;
1 Thess. V. 3 ; certainty, Luke i. 4.
6.-a<paXi)s, 4s {<T<pd.XK(a, fallo), firm, Heb.
vi. 19; confirmatory (with dat. ),
Phil, iii, 1 ; certain, truthful. Acts
XXV. 26. T^ a(r(j)a\es, the certainty.
Adv., -as, safely, certainly.
a(T<pa\l(a), a (a, to make fast, to secure.
aaxvi^ovew, w, to act improperly or un-
seemly, I Cor. xiii. 5 ; with fid
(ace), vii. 36.
aaxruji-oa-vj/r), tjs, t], lewdness, Rom. i. 27;
the shame of nakedness, Rev. xvi. 15.
d-<jXW<»v, ov {axvfji-a), uncomely, inde-
corous, I Cor. xii. 23.
a-acorla, as, t] {(rd^o}), an abandoned
course, profligacy.
a-(T(aT(as, adv., profligately, dissolutely,
Luke XV. 13.
dra/cTfO), w, to behave disorderly, 2 Thess.
iii. 7.
&-raKTos, ov (rao-o-w), irregular, disor-
derly, I Thess. V. 14. Adv., -ws, dis-
orderly, irregularly, 2 Thess. iii. 6, 1 1.
&-TeKvos, ov, 6, j] {t€kpov), childless,
Luke XX. 28, 30.
aT€i'/^a>, au, to look intently upon.
&Tep, adv., as prep, with gen., without,
in the absence of, Luke xxii. 6, 35.
ari/xd^a}, cca, to dishonour, contemn,
whether persons or things, by word
or by deed.
arifiia, as, ri, dishonour, ignominy, dis-
grace, ignoble use.
&-rlfjLos, ov (Tt(U7]), contemned, despjued.
arlix6w, S> (or -e'w, Lachmann), to dis-
honour, treat with indignity, Mark
xii. 4,
oT/iis, tSos, T], a vapour, James iv. 14 ;
of dense smoke. Acts ii, 19, from
Joel ii. 30.
&-T01XOV, ov, t6 [TCfivw), an atom of time,
1 Cor. XV. 52.
&-Toiros, ov (tSttos), misplaced, unbe-
coming, mischievous.
'ATTd\eia, as, r), Attalia, Acts xiv. 25.
avyd(a, to shine upon, to enlighten (dat.),
2 Cor. iv. 4.
avyf], ris, v, splendour, daybreak, Acts
XX. I I.
AiiyovffTos, ov, 6 (Lat.), Augustus, Luke
ii. I. Compare SeiSocrT^j.
avQd5r]s, es {avrSs, ijSo/iot), self-pleasing,
arrogant, Titus i. 7 ; 2 Pet. ii. 10.
avOaipcTos, ov [avrSs, alpiofxai), of one^s
own accord, a Cor. viii. 3, 17.
avdevTeoi, u>, to exercise authority over
(gen.), I Tim. ii. 12.
avXeea, u, "fjaca, to play on a pipe ov flute.
au\i], 7js, 7] (So), to blow), (i) an open
space, court, fold ; (2) a hall, court,
as of justice.
av\7)T)]s, ov, 6, a player on a pipe or
flvte. Matt. ix. 23 ; Rev. xviii. 22.
avKi^ofiai (to lodge in the open air), to
lodge, take up a temporary abode.
avX6s, ov, 6 {&(a), a flute, pipe, i Cor.
xiv. 7.
av^dvd), also aij^ca, av^^cro), trans., to
make to grow; pass., to arrive at
maturity; intrans., to grow, increase.
aij^r](Tis, €ws, r), growth, increase.
aijpiov, adv. {avpa, morning breeze, &a}),
to-morrow ; i] {rj(ji.4pa, sc.) aijpiov, the
morrow.
av(TTT]p6s, d, 6v, (dry) harsh, austere,
Luke xix. 21, 22.
avrdpKeia, as, 7], sufficiency, 2 Cor. ix. 8 ;
contentment, i Tim. vi. 6.
avT-dpKr]s, es (ap/cew), content, satlsfled
(sufficient to self), Phil. iv. 11.
avTo-Kard-KpiTos, ov, self- condemned,
Titus iii. 11.
avrSixcLTos, ov, spontaneous, of its own
accord, Mark iv. 28 ; Acts xii. 10.
avT-6irTr)s, ov, d, an eye-witness, Luke i. 2.
avT6s, 7], 6, pron., he, she, it. Properly
demonstrative, self, very; joined
with each of the persons, / myself
thou thyself; with the article, the
same; with a dat., indicating like-
ness. Acts xiv. I ; I Cor. xi. 5. ctti
TO avrS, Kara rh avT6, together, for
the same purpose or at the same time
or place. See 335.
avTov, 7}s, ov, pron. reflex, (contr. for
cavTov), of himself, herself, &c.
auToO, adv., of place, here, tliere.
avT6-(pci}pos, ov {<pwp, a thief), in the
very act, John viii. 4; iiri, with
neut. dat.
avTo-x^ip, adj., acting with one!& own.
hands. Acts xxvii. 19.
avx}ii]p6s, d, 6v, dark, disnial, 2 Pet. i. 19.
20
VOCABULARY.
&({>-aip€<i> — ^XP"*
a.<p-aipfos, uJ, to take away, as sin, Rom.
xi. 27, &c. ; to cut off, as the ear,
Matt. xxvi. 5T.
a-^av'qs, is {(paivoi), not appearing, hidden,
Heb. iv. 13.
a-^ayi^co, to put out of Sight, to disfigure;
pass., to vanish, perish.
a-^avia/xSs, ov, 6, a disappearing ; spec,
the abrogation of a covenant, Heb.
viii. 13.
&-<l>ainos, ov, disappearing, not seen,
Luke xxiv. 3 1.
a(j)-fbpu>y, wvos, 6, " di'augJit," latrine.
Matt. XV. 17; Mark vii. 19.
a-<f>eidia, as, 7} {<t>ei8ofiat), severity. Col.
ii. 23.
a<j)e\6T7]s, rrjTos, simplicity, sincerity.
Acts ii. 46.
&((}-e(Tis, fbts, f. {cKplrifu), deliverance,
Luke iv. 18 ; remission, pardon of
sins, Matt. xxvi. 28, &c.
a^i}, Tjs, 71 (oTTTCd, to Jit), that which con-
nects a joint, a ligature.
a-(f>6ap(Tla, as, rj, incorruption, immor-
tality, I Cor. XV. ; Rom. ii. 7 ; 2 Tim.
i. 10; perpetuity, Eph. vi. 24.
^-(pdapros, OP {(p6eipu>), incorruptible, im-
mortal, as God, Rom. L 23 ; i Tim.
i. 17; the bodies of the saints,
I Cor. XV. 52 ; unperishing, i Cor.
ix. 25, &c.
atp-irjfji.1 (see 112), to send away, as
{1) to let go, emit, dismiss, in senses
varying according to the obj. ; spec. ,
to disregard, pass by, send away,
divorce ; hence (2) to forgive, very
often ; (3) to permit, concede, abs., or
with inf., or ace. (dat., Matt. v. 40),
or ^va, subj., or subj. alone; (4) to
leave, depart from, abandon, leave
behind, as at death.
a4>iKU€ofjLai, ovfjiai {2 aor., u<f)lK6fir]v), to
reach; to go abroad, as a report,
Rom. xvi. 19.
i.-<pi\-(i-yados, ov, not loving goodness or
good men, 2 Tim. iii. 3.
a-<l>i\-dpyvpos, oy, not loving money, not
covetous, I Tim. iii. 3 ; Heb. xiiL 5.
6.(pi^is, fus, 17, "arrival;" hence depar-
ture, Acts XX. 29.
kdf-itrTruMi, a.iro(rTi]oo), trans, in pres.,
imperf., i aor., fat., to lead away.
to seduce; in trans, in perf., plup.,
2 aor., to go away, depart, avoid,
withdraw from (often with and) ;
mid., to fail, abstain from, absent
one's self.
&<pva), adv., suddenly. Acts xvi. 26.
a-<p6^us, adv., without fear.
a(p-oiJLoi6(t}, CO, to make like, in pass.,
Heb. viL 3.
a<p-opd(a. Si, to look away from others
at one (ets); to consider attentively^
Heb. xii. 2.
a(p-opi(<a, fut. tu, to separate from {^k
or diro) ; trans., to separate for a
purpose (els or inf.) ; to excommu-
nicate, Luke vi 22.
a<p-opiJ.i}, T}s, % an occasion, opportunity,
Rom. vii. 8 ; 2 Cor. xi. 12.
a<ppi^(a, to foam at tJie mouth, Mark
ix. 18, 20.
a<pp6s, ov, d, foam, froth, Luke ix. 39.
a-<j)po<TvvTi, r]s, 7], folly, boasting, levity,
&-<ppav, ovos, 6, 7) {<pp'f)v), unwise, incon-
siderate, foolish, destitute of religion.
a(p-vTrv6a), u (dirJ intensive), to sleep
soundly.
&-(puvos, ov, mute, without expression ; of
idols, I Cor. xii. 2 ; of animals, 2 Pet.
ii. 16; of the lamb. Acts viii. 32.
"AxaC <i (Heb.), Achaz, Matt. i. 9.
'Axota, as, ^, Achaia, the Roman pro-
vince of Greece, including Corinth
and its isthmus.
*Axo-'iK6s, ov, 6, AchaicuSf 1 Cor.
xvi. 17, 25-
k-xo-pK^Tos, ov, untJiankfuly Luke vi. 35;
2 Tim. iii. 2.
*Ax«'/*, i (Heb.), Achim, Matt. i. 14.
a-x^ipo-iroirjTos, ov, not made by hands.
ax^'i's, vos, 7], a thick mist, darkness,
Acts xiiL 1 1.
h-XPf'ios, ov, slothful, doing no good,
unproftable. Matt. xxv. 30, Luke
xvii. 10.
i-Xp6i(Jci>, », to become useless or corrupt.
&-Xjyn(TTos, ov, useless, unprofitable^
Philemon 11.
6.Xpi and ixP*^» ^^^- ^ prep., with
gen. , to, unto, as far as, whether of
place, time, or degree. &XP^s ov or
&XpiS alone, with the force of a con-
junction, until. See fi^xp^
&Xvpov — Bap-voipas]
TOCABULARY.
21
Sx^po^ owj T<5, cAo^, s^raw;, Matt. iii. 12 ;
Luke iii. 17.
d-i/'6u5r;s, es, free from falsehood, truth-
ful, Titus i. 2.
&<iiiivQos, ov, 7], wormwood, Rev. viii. 11.
&-\\/vxo5, ov, without life, inanimate,
I Cor. xiv. 7.
B.
B, j8, jS^To, beta, b, the second letter.
Numerally, jS'^a; )8^ = 2ooo,
B<£oA., ^, 7) (Heb., Master), Baal, chief
deity of the Phoeuicians ; the Sun,
Rom. xi. 4 (fern.), from i Kings
xix. 18.
EajSi'AoSj', (CV09, rj (Heb., confusion.
Gen. X. 7), Babylon, lit.. Matt.
i. II, &c. ; Acts vii. 43 ; and prob.
1 Pet. V. 1 3 ; mystically for Rome, as
the enemy of the Church, Rev. xiv.
^adfios, ov, d {Salvia, to step), a step or
degree in dignity, i Tim. iii. 1 3.
fiddos, ovs, t6, depth or height, lit. or
fig. ; met., of great extremity, as
2 Cor. viii. 2.
fiaOiivw, vv5), to dig deep, Luke vi. 48.
BaOvi, eia, v, deep, John iv. 11 ; of
twilight, Luke xxir. i ; "the early
dawn."
fidiov, ov, r6, branch, spec, of the palm,
John xii. 13.
BaKadfjL, 6 (Heb.), Balaam. A name
emblematic of seducing teachers,
2 Pet. ii. 15; Rev. ii. 14.
BaXdK, 6 (Heb.), Balah, Rev. ii. 14.
BdKdvriov, ov, r6, a money bag or purse.
j8cJ\Aw, Pa\w, P€0\r]Ka, (fiaXov, to throw,
cast, put (with more or less force, as
modified by the context). Pass.
reflex., as Matt. xxi. 21, cast thyself;
or (perf.) with in trans, force, as
Matt. viii. 6 ("has been cast"),
lieth. The verb is intrans., Acts
xxviL 14, rushed. In Mark xiv. 65,
the true reading is prob. ^ha^ov.
Generally trans, with ace. and dat.,
or 4iri (ace, sometimes gen.), ets,
air<J, 4k, and other prepp. or advv.
Of liquids, to pour. Matt. xxvi. 12.
^amriQu, a<a (in form a frequentative
of fidiTTu, see 144, b), (i) mid. or
pass., reflex., to bathe one's self,
Mark vii. 4; (2) of the Christian
ordinance, to baptize. The material
is expressed by dat., fls or eV;
the purpose or result by els. Pass,
or mid., to be baptised, to receive
baptism; (3) fig., of overwhelm-
ing woe, Luke xii. 50; Matt. xx.
22, 23.
fidnTia-fMa, aros, to, the rite or ceremony
of baptism ; fig. , for overwhelming
afilictions. Matt. xx. 22, 23.
fiaTrTiarfjL6s, ov, 6, the act of cleansing,
as vessels, Mark vii. 4, 8 ; of Jewish
lustrations, Heb. ix. 10. Por Heb.
vi. 2, see 260, b, 2 (b).
jBoTTTJo-TTjs, ov, 6, CMC uho baptizes; the
surname of John, Christ's fore-
runner.
fidiTTta, fid\p(a, to dip, dye or tinge, Mark
xiv. 20; Rev. xix. 13.
Bap-, an Aramaean prefix to many sur-
names, meaning Son of.
Bap-a^fias, a, 6, Barabbas. Some
ancient MSS. and other authorities
give his name as Jesus.
BapdK, 6, Barak, Heb. xi. 32.
Bap-ax'ias, ov, t], Barachias, Matt,
xxiii. 35. Some think it a surname
of Jehoiada, 2 Chron. xxiv. 20.
fidp^apos, ov, 6, properly adj., a
foreigner, i Cor. xiv. 11. So called
by the Greeks in derision of their
language, as if bar, bar I Acts
xxviii. 2, 4 ; Rom. i. 14.
fiapew, S> (cf. ^dpos), in N.T. only pass.
^apeofiai, ovfiai, to be wdghed down,
to be oppressed, as by sleep, Luke
ix. 32 ; excess or anxious care, Luke
xxi. 34 ; calamity or affliction, 2 Cor.
i. 8, V. 4; expense, i Tim. v. 16.
fiapews, adv. , heavily or with difficulty.
Matt. xiii. 15 ; Acts xxviii. 27, from
Isa. vi. 10.
Bap-6o\ofjLa7os, ov, 6, Bartholomew, sur-
name (prob.) of Nathanael.
Bap-vriaovs, ov, 6, Bav-jesus, Acts xiii. 6.
Bap-iuvas, a, b, Bar-jonas, surname of
Peter, Matt. xvi. 17.
Bap-vd^as, a, 6, Barnabas, "Son of
exhortation" or "comfort." See
Tro/Jct/cArj (Tts.
VOCABULARY.
[pdpos — jSScXvYiJia
fidpos, ovs, t6, weight, burden, as of toil,
Matt. XX. 12 ; of ceremonial require-
ment, Acts XV. 28 ; of authority,
I Thess. ii. 6 ; of abundance or ful-
ness, 2 Cor. iv. 17.
Bap-aafias, a, 6, Barsabas. Two are
mentioned, Acts i. 23, xv. 22.
Bap-Tifiaios, ov, 6, Bartimceus.
fiapvs, e7a, v (cf. )8apo$), (i) lieavy. Matt,
xxiii. 4 ; (2) important, Matt. xxiii. 23 ;
(3) grievous or oppressive, i John v. 3 ;
(^) fierce, severe. Acts xx. 29.
fiapv-TifjLos, ov, of great price. Matt.
xxvi, 7.
fiaa-aul^o) (cf. fidaavos), to examine, as
bytortur§; hence to afflict with pain,
vex, Juirass ; pass., to be tossed, as
by waves in a storm.
$aaavL(rfji6s, ov, 6, torture, sharp pain.
0a(TaviaTT}s, ov, 6, one who tortures, a
jailer, Matt, xviii. 34.
Pdaavos, ov, rj (lit., a touchstone), tor-
ture, the torment or sJuirp pain of
disease. Matt. iv. 24 ; of punish-
ment, Luke xvi. 23, 28.
^aai\da, as, 7}, a hingdom, province of
a kingdom, Matt. iv. 8 ; royal power
or dignity, reign. rj fiaaiXeia tov
66OV, rod xP^^'^o^i """^^ ovpavuv (the
last form only in Matt.), the divine,
spiritual ki7igdom, or reign of Mes-
siah, in the world, in the individual,
or in the future state. viol rrjs
fiaai\flas, sons of the kingdom, Jews,
its original possessors, Matt. viii. 12;
true believers, Matt. xiii. 38. In
Eev. i. 6, V. 10, for $a(Ti\€is Koi, the
best editors read iSao-iAe/cw, a king-
dom consisting of priests.
fiaffiAeios. of, royal, regal, i Pet. ii. 9,
from Exod, xix. 6. ra ^aaiXna, as
subst., a regal mansion, palace,
Luke vii. 25. >.
fia<Ti\fis, (tDs, 6, a leader, ruler, king,
sometimes subordinate to higher
authority, as the Herods. Applied
. to God, always with distinguishing
epithets. Matt. v. 35; i Tim. i. 17,
vi. 15; Rev. XV. 3, xvii. 14 ; to the
Messiah, John i 50, &c. ; to Chris-
tians, Rev. i. 6, v. 10 (rec, but see
on fiaal\tia).
Pa<Ti\€va>, eiao) (-cf), to have authority,
to reign, or to possess or exercise
dominion ; to be fiaaiKevs generally.
With iiri (gen. ), of the kingdom ;
4irl (ace. ), of the persons governed.
fia(Ti\iK6s, i], ov, adj., belonging to a
king, royal; as a courtier, John
iv. 46, 49 ; a territory, Acts xii. 20 ;
apparel. Acts xii, 21. Fig., James
ii. 8, of law, all-commanding.
fiaaiKiaaa, tjs, t], a queen. Matt, xii 42 ;
Acts viii. 27.
jSoffis, eas, rj {^alvw), that which supports
the steps; hence the foot. Acts iii. 7.
^aaKaivd), avoo, to bewitch, bring under
malign inHuence, ^^ fascinate," mis-
lead. Gal. iii. i.
$aaTd((o, daw, to lift, lift up; often
with the sense of bearing away.
Thus, (i) to carry, as a burden, Luke
xiv. 27; John xix. 17; sandals.
Matt. iii. 11 ; (2) to take on one^s
self, as disease or weaknesses, Rom.
XV. I ; condemnation, Gal. v. 10 ;
reproach. Gal. vi. 17; (3) to bear,
as tidings. Acts ix. 15 ; (4) to bear
ioith or endure, Rev. ii, 2 ; (5) to take
away, Matt. viiL 17 ; John xii. 6.
^d-ros, ov, 6, 7], a thorn-bush or bramble,
Luke XX. 37; Acts vii. 30, 35. "The
Bush," Mark xii. 26 ; Luke xx. 37,
denotes the section of the O.T. so
called (Ex. iii.)
fidros, ov, 6 (Heb.), a bath, or Jewish
measure for liquids containing 7^
gallons, Luke xvi. 6.
fidrpaxos, ov, 6, a frog. Rev. xvi. 13.
fiaTTo-Koyew, u (prob. from ^ar-, an
unmeaning sound ; cf . fidp^apos), to
babble, talk to no purpose. Matt. vi. 7.
fiSeXvyfia, aros, rS (cf. fiZ^Xvaaw),
something unclean and abominable,
Luke xvi. 1 5 ; spec, (as often in 0. T. )
idolatry, as accompanied by im-
purity, Rev. xvii. 4, 5, xxi. 27.
"Abomination of desolation," Matt,
xxiv. 15, from Dan. ix, 27, refers to
the pollution of the temple by some
idolatrous symbol (by Antiochua
Epiphanes, afterwards by the Ro-
mans) ; whether image, altar, or
military standard, is uncertain.
pStXvKTOS BXdffTOs]
VOCABULARY.
23
^ScKvktSs, i}, 6u, disgusting, abominable,
Titus i. i6.
j8Se>vo-(rw, |t«j, to defile, only mid, ; to
loathe, Rom. ii. 22 ; and pass. perf.
part., defiled, Rev. xxi. 8.
fie^aios, a, op, steadfast, constant, firm.
fie$ai6w, cD, to confirm, to establish, whe-
ther of persons or things.
Pe$aiw(ns, 6&>s, i], confirmation, Phil,
i. 7; Heb. vi. 16.
^efi7]\os, ov ()8o- in jSotVw, "that on
which any one may step"), common,
unsanctified, profane, of things or
persons.
$€Pr]A6(a, 60, to make common, to pro-
fane, as the Sabbath, Matt. xii. 5 ;
or the temple, Acts xxiv. 6.
BeeA-^eiSouA, d(Heb.), Beelzebul, "Lord
of dung," a contemptuous play upon
Beelzebub, " Lord of flies," the
Ekronite deity (2 Kings i. 2), ap-
plied to Satan, as the ruler of the
daemons.
BeAi'oA, 6 (Heb., perverseness, malice),
or BiXiap, "Lord of forests" or
"thickets," a name for Satan, 2 Cor.
vi. 15.
;8eAos, ovs, r6 (fidWu), a missile, such
as a javelin or dart, Eph. vi. 16.
fieXTLOiP, ov, ovos (a compar. of a-yaQos),
better. Adverbially, 2 Tim. 1. 18.
Bev-ia/xlv, 6 (Heb., ^e7i = son), Ben-
jamin.
BepyiKtj, Tjs, ^, Bernice.
Bepoia, as, Berosa.
Bepoialos, a, ov, Beroean.
B-qd-, a Hebrew prefix to many local
names, meaning House or Abode of.
Br}9-a$apd, as, rj, Bethabara, "house
of the ford," John i. 28. Some read
Bethany.
BtiQ-avia, as, % Bethany, "house of
dates." There were two places of
the name : (i) John xi., &c. ; (2) on
the Jordan (?), John i. 28. See
B7j0a/3op(£.
BTj0-eo-Sa, as, r], Bethesda, "house of
compassion," John v. 2.
Br]d-Ke4ix, 7], Bethlehem, "house of
bread."
BT}d- a a'CSd, tj, Bethsaida, "house of
hunting" or "fishing." There were
two places of the name : one in
Galilee, John xii. 21 ; the other on
the east of the Jordan, Luke ix. 10.
Brid-fayi], i], Bethphage, "house of
^figs."
firjfia, aTos, t6 {0a- in fialvco), a step; a
space, with iroSSs, for the foot. Acts
vii. 5 ; a raised space or bench, as a
tribunal, Matt, xxvii. 19; or throne.
Acts xii. 21.
)8i7pi/T\Aos, ou, 0, Tj, a beryl, a gem of
greenish hue. Rev. xxi. 20.
0ia, as, 7], force, violence.
0id(a}, to use violence; mid., to enter
forcibly, with tls, Luke xvi. 16;
pass,, to suffer violence, to be as-
saulted. Matt. xi. 12.
fiiaius, a, ov, violent, vehement. Acts
ii. 2.
fiia(TT7}s, ov, 6, one who employs force.
Matt. xi. 12; of those who were
eagerly entering Messiah's kingdom.
fii^KapiSiov, ov, a little book, Rev. x.
Pi^Klov, ov, t6 (dim. of following), (i) a
roll, book, volume, as Luke iv. 17 ;
Rev. V. I ; (2) a scroll, a billet, as
Matt. xix. 7.
0ifi\os, ov, 6, a written book, roll, or
volume. The word means the inner
bark or rind, of which ancient
books were made,
0L0pu(TK(a i^po-), perf. fiefipccKO, to eat,
John vi. 13.
Bidvvia, as, t], Bithynia.
fiios, ov, 6, (i) life, Luke viii. 14;
(2) means of life, Luke viii. 43 ;
(3) goods or property, Luke xv. 12 ;
I John iii. 17. See Synonyms.
Pl6(i), w, to pass onis life, \ Pet. iv. 2.
fiicocTis, ews, 7], manner or habit of life,
Acts xxvi. 4.
fiiaTiK6s, -i], 6v, of or belonging to 'life,
Luke xxi. 34 ; i Cor. vi. 3, 4.
P\a0€p6s, adj., hurtful, i Tim. vi. 9.
fiKd-TTTw (i8Ao)8-), 0\dtp(a, to hurt or
injure, Mark xvi. 18 ; Luke iv. 35.
^Xaardvco (or fiXaardw, Mark iv. 27),
0\aaTi)cr(a, (i) intrans., to sprout, to
spring up, as a plant or corn ; (2)
trans. , to put forth, as buds, Matt.
xiii. 26 ; Heb. ix. 4.
B\daTOi, ov, 6, Blastus, Acts xii. 20.
2i
VOCABULARY.
[pXa(r(}>T][i,Ea) — ^pa\(4a¥
fi\aff^r)fiia>, w, to speah calumniously,
as Acts xiii. 45 ; to calumniate, speak
evil of with ace. or els; often of
men or things. Spec, of God, Acts
xix. 37 ; the Holy Spirit, Luke
xii. 10 ; the Divine name or doc-
trine, I Tim. vi. I.
^\cuT<pr]ixia, as, r}, evil-speaking, reviling,
blasphemy.
fihda<p7)iJ.os, ov, slanderous, reproachful.
Subst., a reviler, i.e., one who speaks
evil of God or man.
PXefifia, aros, r6, seeing, tJie thing seen,
2 Pet. ii. 8.
/SAeTTw, j/^w, to see, to have the potoer of
seeing, to look at attentively; with
€is,io regard partially, Matt. xxii. 16;
with tva or fi-fi, to take care (once
without, Mark xiiL 9) ; with avS, to
beware of; once with Kurd (ace),
geographically, to look towards. Acts
xxvii 12.
i8A.7jT€oy, eo, eov, a verbal adj. ()8<{AAa>),
that ought to be put.
Boavepyes (Heb.), Boanerges, "Sons of
thunder," Mark iii. 17.
fiodo, 5) {$0-}}), to shout for joy, Gal.
iv. 27 ; to cry for grief. Acts viii. 7 ;
to publish openly, to cry aloud; with
vp6s (ace), to appeal to, Luke
xviii. 7, 38.
fior), rjs, 7), a loud cry, James v. 4.
fioijdeia, as, rj, help, succour, Acts
xxvii. 17; Heb. iv. 16.
Porie4w, w, to go to tlie help of, to suc-
cour (dat.)
^otidSs, ov, d, 7} (properly adj.), a helper,
Heb. xiii. 6.
fi66vvos, ov, 6, a cavity, ditch or well.
fioK-i], rts, V, a throwing ; \ldov fioXi\, a
stone^s throw, Luke xxiL 41.
/3oAfC«, fTt», to heave the lead, tofatliom.
Acts xxvii. 28, twice.
fioKis, iios, rj, a weapon thrown, as a
dart or javelin, Heb. xiL 20.
B06C 6 (Heb.), Booz or Boaz.
fiSp^opos, ov, 6, dirt, mire, filth, 2 Pet.
ii. 22.
Bo^ftas, a, 6 {Boreos, the north wind),
the North, Luke xiii. 29 ; Rev.
xxi. 13.
fi6<rKu, iiaw, to tendf to tend in feeding,
to take diligent care of. Matt. viii. 33 ;
John xxL 15, 17; mid., to feed,
graze, Mark v. 11.
Boa6p, & (Heb., Beor), Bosor, 2 Pet.
ii. 15.
fiordv-n, Vh V ()8J(r/cw), herbage, pasturage,
Heb. vi. 7.
fidrpvs, vos, 6, a cluster of grapes. Rev.
xiv. 18.
fiov\evTns, ov, S, a counsellor, a senator,
Mark xv. 43 ; Luke xxiii, 50.
$ov\ev<a, aw, to advise, N.T. mid. only;
(1) to consult, to deliberate, with et,
Luke xiv. 31; (2) to resolve on or
purpose, with inf., Acts v. 33 ; Xva,
John xii. 10; ace, 2 Cor. i. 17.
/3ouAj7, ris, r], a design, decree, purpose,
plan, Luke vii. 30 ; Acts xxvii. 42.
fiovXij/xa, aros, t6 {^ovAofiai), the thing
willed or puiposed, Acts xxvii. 43 ;
Rom. ix. 19.
fiovXofiai, 2nd pers. sing. ^ovXei for
fiovXri, aug. in tenses with i or ij,
to vnll, as (i) to be willing, to incline
to, Mark xv. 15; (2) to intend. Matt.
L 19; (3) to aim at, 1 Tim. vi 9.
Generally with inf., sometimes un-
derstood, as James i. 18; with subj.,
John xviii. 39. See Synonyms.
fiovvSs, ov, 6, a hill, rising ground, Luke
iii. 5 ; xxiii. 30.
fiovs, &065 (of-), 6, 7], an animal of the
ox kind, male or female.
fipa^fiov, ov, r6, the prize, in a conflict,
I Cor. ix. 24 J the future reuxird,
Phil. iii. 14.
$pa$e{>w (lit., to act as arbiter in the
games), to prevail or govern, CoL
iii. 15.
fipaSvvu, vSi {PpaSvs), to delay, to be
slow, I Tim. iii. 15; 2 Pet iii. 9
(gen).
BpaSv-irXo^a, ii, to saU slowly. Acts
xxvii. 7.
fipaSvs, ela, v, slow, with (Is, James i. 19 ;
fig- > of dull compreliension ; dat. of
sphere.
fipaSvrf)s, rrJTOs, rj, tardiness, 2 Pet.
iii. 9.
fipaxiof, ovos, 6, the arm; met, strength^
Luke L 51; John xii. 38; Acts
xiii. 17.
Ppax^s — vdjJLOs]
VOCABULARY.
25
^pax^s, 6?a, V, short, little; of time,
Luke xxii. 58; Acts v. 34; place,
Acts xxvii. 28 ; quantity, John vi. 7 ;
Heb. xiii. 22. Ppaxv 'n, Heb. ii. 7, 9,
Jbr a short time, or in a small degree.
$pi4>os, ovs, t6, a child unborn, Luke
i. 41, 44 ; a babe, Luke ii. 12, 16 ;
07ie in early youth, 2 Tim. iii. 15.
jSpe'xw, |«, to moisten, Luke vii. 38 ;
to rain, to send rain, Matt. v. 45 ;
impers., James v. 17 ; trans., Luke
xvii. 20.
^povri], 715, 7], thunder, John xii. 29, &c.
Ppoxfi, rjs, 7] (j8pex«), rain. Matt.
yii. 25, 27.
^poxps, ov, 6, a noose or snare, 1 Cor.
vii. 35.
$pvyij.6s, ov, 6, a grinding or gnashing.
fip^X^^f I'") io grind or gnash, as the
teeth, for rage or pain. Acts vii. 54.
0pv(o, ao), to send forth, as a fountain,
James iii. 11.
/Spwytto, aros, neut. (see ^i^pclxTKO)), food,
solid food of any kind, Matt. xiv. 15;
1 Cor. iii. 2.
fipdaifjLos, ov, eatable, Luke xxiv. 41.
fipwais, ews, 7], (i) the act of eating,
2 Cor. ix. 10 ; (2) corrosion. Matt.
vi. 19, 20; {1) food, Heb. xii. 16;
fig., John vi. 27, &c.
fivdiCd}, au, to droum ; mid. , to sink,
Luke V. 7 ; fig., i Tim. vi. 9.
fivQ6s, ov, 6, the deep, the sea, 2 Cor.
xi. '25.
fivpaevs, ecus (ef ), a shin-dresser,a tanner.
Acts ix. 43, X. 6, 32.
^vaaivos, 17, ov, made of byssus, Kev.
xviii. 16, xix. 8 twice, 14.
^{)(Taos, ov, 7), byssus, a species of flax,
and of linen manufactured from it,
highly prized for its softness, white-
ness, and delicacy.
fiufios, ov, 6, an altar. Acts xvii. 23.
r.
r, 7, yajxiia, gamma, g hard, the third
letter of the Greek alphabet. In
numeral value, 7' = 3 ; 7,= 3000.
rajS/eaea, ^ (Heb., Chald. form), Oab-
hatha ; an elevated place or tribunal,
John xix. 13. See MBSarpuTov,
Tafipi-fiK, 6 (Heb., man of God), the
archangel Gabriel, Luke i. 19, 26.
ydyypaiva, tjs, t), a gangrene, mortif ca-
tion, z Tim. ii. 17.
rcCS, 6 (Heb.), Gad, Eev. vii. 5.
Ta8apT]v6s, i), 6v, belonging to Gadara,
See TepyeaTjvSi.
yd^a, i]s, 7] (Persian), treasure, as of a
government. Acts viii. 27.
Tc^^o, us, 7] (Heb.) Gaza, a strong city
of the ancient Philistines in the W.
of Palestine, Acts viii. 26. (The
adj. epijjuos, desert, refers to 6d6s. )
ya^o-<pv\dKiov, ov, t6, a place for the
guardianship of treasure, treasury ;
a part of the temple so called, Mark
xii. 41, 43 ; Luke xxi. 1 ; John
viii. 20.
Taiov, ov, 6 (Lat.), Gaius, or Caius.
There are four of the name in N.T.,
Acts xix. 29, XX. 4 ; i Cor. i. 14 j
3 John, I.
yd\a, aKTos, r6, milk, 1 Coi*. ix. 7.
Fig., for the elements of Christian
knowledge, 1 Cor. iii. 2; of the
Word of God, i Pet. ii. 2.
TaXdT7]s, ov, 6, a Galatian, Gal. iii. i.
raAoTto, oj, 7}, Galatia, or Gallogrcecia,
a province of Asia Minor.
Ta\aTiK6s, i\, 6v, belonging to Galatia,
Acts xvi. 6.
•yaXi]V7}, tjs, ^, serenity, calm. Matt,
viii. 26 ; Mark iv. 39 ; Luke viii. 24.
TaXiXala, as, t] (from Heb.), Galilee,
the N. division of Palestine.
ra\i\aios, ala, ouov, of or belonging to
Galilee.
TaWiuv, uvos, 6, Gallio, a proconsul of
Achaia, Acts xviii.
Ta/xaXi-fiK, d (Heb.), Gamaliel, Acts
V. 34, xxii. 3.
yafi€w, S>, ij(T(a, 1st aor. iydix7i(ra and
iynixa, abs. or trans, (with ace), to
m/irry ; active properly of the man ;
pass, and mid., of the woman, with
dat., as Mark x. 12, rec. ; but in
N.T. the act. also is used of the
woman.
yafiiCo, or yafiiaKw, to give in marriage
(a dauglrter).
ydfjLos, ov, 6, mxirriage, spec, a mar-
riage feast, sing, or plur. See 240.
26
VOCABULARY.
[7(lp— Yf|
•yi.p (76 &pa), "truly then," a causal
particle or conjunction, for, intro-
ducing a reason for the thing pre-
viously said. Used in questions to
intensify the inquiry ; often with
other particles. For the special uses
of 'y&p, see 407.
yatTT-ftp, rp6s (sync), 7), (i) the womb,
Matt. i. 18; (2) the stomach, Tit.
i. 12; from Epimenides, "idle
bellies," gluttons.
y4, a particle indicating emphasis, at
least, indeed. Sometimes used alone,
as Rom. viii. 32; i Cor, iv. 8 ; some-
times in connection with other par-
ticles, as aWa, &pa, ef, ei Se fx-fiye,
stronger than et 8e /xtj, if othervdse
indeed; Kalye, and at least, and even;
Kairoiye, though indeed; fnvovvye,
yea, indeed ; fjivriye, "to say nothing
of,'''' 1 Cor. vi 3.
reSecov, it (Heb.), Gideon, Heb. xL 32.
Te-eVo, 7JS, ^(Heb., Valley of Hinnom),
met., jplace of punishment in the
future world. Matt. x. 28, &c.
Sometimes with toD ttu^c^s, as Matt.
V. 22, Compare 2 Kings xxiii. 10.
re0-(T77/iovf), or -vkx, t] (Heb., oil-press),
Getlisemane, a small field at the foot
of the Mount of Olives, over the
brook Cedron.
yeiTcov, ovos, 6, t), a neighbour, as Luke
xiv. 12, XV. 6; John ix. 8.
yeAdoi, w, daw, to laugh, to be merry,
rejoice, Luke vi. 21, 25.
yiXws, (oTos, 6, laughter^ mirth, James
iv. 9.
y^fii^a, aw, to fill, with ace. and gen.
(also aTr6 or in) ; pass, abs., to be full,
Mark iv. 37 ; Luke xiv. 23.
7e/i«, only in pres. and impf., to be
full of, with gen. {iK, Matt, xxiii. 25;
ace. Rev. xviL 3).
761'ea, as, t}, generation, as (i) offspring,
race, descent; (2) the people of any
given time; (3) a» age of tJie world'' s
duration.
y^pta-Koyew, w, to reckon a genealogy
or pedigree, pass, with 4k, Heb.
vii. 6.
7e»'6a-\o7ro, os, fern., genealogy, N.T.
plur., I Tim. i. 4; Tit. iii. 9; prob.
of Gnostic speculations on the origin
of being.
yeveala, uv, rd, the festivities of a birth-
day, a birthday. Matt. xiv. 6.
yeveais, fws, rj, extraction, genealogy,
Matt. i. I. James i. 23 : tS tr p6awwov
T^s yeveaews avrov, the countenance of
his birth, or, as E.V., "his natural
face." James iii. 6: rhv rpoxhv rris
yeveaews, the orb of the creation, the
whole of nature.
yeviri], 7JS, i), birth, John ix. 1.
yevrjixa, utos, t6. See yivtrqixa.
yivvdw, S>, •i]aw, to beget, give birth to,
produce, effect ; pass. , to be begotten,
born (often in John, of spiritual
renewal).
yevvriixa, aros, r6 (in many MSS.7e»^Ata),
(1) progeny ; (2) produce generally.
Y\g., fruit, result, as 2 Cor. ix. 10.
Tevvnaapir (Heb., in Chald. form),
Gennesareth {Chinnereth, or Chinne-
roth, in O.T.), a region of Galilee,
with village or town of the same
name. Used of the adjacent lake,
as Luke v. 1.
y4vvt)ais, €ws, rj. See yeveais.
yepyrj'r^s, -fi, 6v, verb, adj., born, brougJd
forth. Matt. xi. i r ; Luke vii. 28.
76V0S, ovs, t6, (i) offspring; {2} lineage;
(3) nation ; (4) kind or species.
Tepyeaw^Sy "h, ^v, or Ttpaa-nvos, Gerge-
sene, belonging to Gergesa or Gerasa.
The copies vary between these forms
and Tahaprjvos, Matt. viii. 28 j Mark
V. I ; Luke viii. 26, 37.
yepovala, as, t) {yepwy), an assembly of
elders, seriate.
yipwv, ovTos, t, an old man, John iii. 4.
7eT;ft>, to make to taste, only mid. iu
N.T. ; to taste, as abs., to take food.
Acts X. 10; or with obj., gen., or
ace. See 249, a (2). Fig. , to expe-
rience, as Matt. xvi. 28 ; once with
grt, 1 Pet. iL 3.
yewpyew, w, to cultivate or till the earth.
ye^pyiov, ov, r6, a tilled field. Fig.,
I Cor. iiu 9.
ytwpySs, liv, 6, one who tills the ground,
a husbandman. So a vine- dresser.
yrj, y^s, i), contr. for 7*0 or ya7a, land
or earth, as (i) tJt^ material soil,
YTJpas — Yoyyvo-fios]
VOCABULARY.
27
I Cor. XV. 47 ; (2) the producing soil ;
{3) the ground ; (4) land, as opposed
to sea; (5) earth, as opposed to
heaven, the habitable world ; (6)
region or territory.
yiipas, {(ws), cos, dat. -a or -et, r6, old
age, Luke i. 36.
yrjpdaKo}, or yi]pd(a, daw, to become old,
John xxi. 18; to be infirm, Heb.
\aii. 13.
yivojxai, for yiyvofiai. See 94, 8, a,
yeyffaonai, iyevdfirjv and €yevr}dr]v,
yiyova (with pres. force) and y^yivT]-
fiai, to become, as ( i ) to 6egri?i to be,
used of persons, to he born, John
viii. 58 ; of the works of creation,
to be made, John i. 3, 10; and of
other works, to be zorought or per-
formed. So, to pass out of one
state into another, to grow into, to
be changed into, John ii. 9 ; often
Avith €i'$, Luke xiii. 19. (2) Of ordi-
nary or extraordinary occurrences,
to happen, to take place, to be done ;
of the day, the night, Mark vi. 2;
of thunder, earthquake, calm, &c. ;
of feasts or public solemnities, to be
held or celebrated ; frequently in the
phrase koI iyevero, and it came to
pass (with Kai, or following verb, or
inf.) ; also /x^ yivoiro, let it never
happen! or God forbid! (3) With
adj. or predicative subst. , to become,
where quality, character, or con-
dition is specified; often in prohi-
bitions, 11^ yivov, fi^ yiveade, become
not, as Matt. vi. 16. (4) With the
cases of substantives and the prepo-
sitions, the verb forms many phrases,
to be interpreted according to the
meaning of the case or prep. See
Syntax. For the distinction be-
tween yivo^ai and other copulative
verbs, see Synonyms.
ylv(i)aK<a, or yiyvdocrKco (see 94, 8, b), yvd)-
(Toixai, 2nd aor. iyvdiv (imper. yvwQi),
perf. eyvuKa, {1) to become aware of
to perceive, with ace. ; (2) to know,
to perceive, understand, with ace. or
oTi, or ace. and inf. , or ri interrog. ;
with adv. of language, Acts xxi. 37 ;
to be conscious of, by experience, as
2 Cor. V. 2r ; (3) to know can
(Heb.), Matt. i. 25; Luke i. 34";
(4) specially of the fellowship be-
tween Christians and the Divine
Being, i Cor. viii. 3 ; Matt. vii. 23
(negatively) ; John xvii. 3 ; Heb.
viii. 11'; Phil. iii. 10, &c. See
Synonyms.
yhevKos, ovs, r6, sweet wine, Acts
ii. 13.
yXuKvs, em, v, sweet, James iii. 11, 12;
of water, opposed to "bitter" and
"salt," Rev. x. 9.
yXwaaa, ?jv, r), (i) the tongue: (2) a
language; (3) a nation or people dis-
tinguished by their language.
y\co(T(x6-KoiJ.ov, ou, neut., a little box or
case for money, John xii. 6, xiii. 29
(orig. from holding the "tongue-
pieces" of flutes, &c.)
yva<p€vs, e«y, d, a fuller, Mark ix. 3.
yvfjcrios, a, ov (sync, from yGvi]aios)^
legitimate, genuine, true, i Tim. i. 2 ;
Phil. iv. 3 ; T^ yvi]aiov, sincerity,
2 Cor. viii. 8. Adv., -«s, sincerely,
naturally, Phil. ii. 20.
yp6<pos, ou, 6, a dense cloud, darkness,
Heb. xii. 18.
yvdofiT), 7JS, 7) (yvo- in yivaxTKoi), opinion,
judgment, intention, 1 Cor. i. 10,
vii. 25 ; Acts XX. 3.
yvcopi^o}, iao) or iw, (i) to make known,
to declare (with ace. and dat. , or iin
or Ti interrog. ) ; (2) intraus., to know,
PhiL i. 22. ^
yvuxTLs, €0)5, 7], (i) subj., hnowledge,
with gen. of obj. (gen. subj., Kom.
xi. 33); (2) obj., science, doctrine,
wisdom, as Luke xi. 52.
yvwa-Tfis, ov, 6, one who knows. Acts
xxvi. 3.
yvaards, -i), &v, verb, adj., known. Acts
ii. 14, iv. 10; knowable, Rom. i. 19.
Emphatic in Acts iv. 1 6. ol yvaarol,
one^s acquaintance, Luke ii. 44; to
yvaxrrhv, knowledge, Rom. i. 19.
yoyyv^w, vera, to Tnurmur, i. e. , in a low
voice (John vii. 32) or discontentedly;
to grumble, i Cor. x. ic, with ace,
or TTipi, gen. , ■7rp6s, ace. , Kara, gen.
yoyyvcTfiSs, ov, 6, muttering, John vii. 12 ;
murmuring. Acts vi. i ; Phil. ii. 14.
VOCABULARY.
[■yoYyvorWjs — 8aKvo»
7077u<rT^s, ov, 6, a Tmirmurer^ corn-
plainer^ Jude 1 6.
7<^Tjs, rjTos, & {yoaw, to moan), an en-
chanter, an impostor, z Tim. iii. 13.
ToXyoeS. (Heb., in ChalA form), Gol-
gotha, "the place of a skull" (prob.
from its shape) ; Calvary. See Kpaviov.
rSfjio^^a, as, 7], and ay, rd, Gomorrha,
ySfios, ov, 6 {ytfjuu), (i) a burden, e.g.,
of a ship, Acts xxi. 3 ; (2) tvares or
merchandise, E«v. xviii. n, 12.
yovevs, «us, 6 {yev- in yiyvofjuu), a parent.
Used only in the plural, parents.
y6vv, arcs, r6, the knee ; often in plur.
after riOdvat or Kdfnrrfiv, to put or
bend the knees, to kneel, in devotion.
yovv-TTfT^o), w {iriirrw), to faU down on
one's knees, to kneel.
7/)d/4juo, aros, r6 {ypdtpoo), (i) a letter of
Hie alphabet, Luke xxiii 38; in what
large letters, perhaps noting em-
phasis, Gal; vL II ; (2) a writing,
such as a bill or an epistle,'RovcL iL 29 ;
T^ Upa ypdn/xara, 2 Tim. iii. 15, the
holy writings, or the Scriptures; (3)
plur., literature, learning generally,
John vii 1 5.
ypofifiarfis, ecus, S, (i) a clerk, secre-
tary, a scribe. Acts xix. 35 ; (2) one
of that class among the Jews who
copied and interpreted the O.T.
Scriptures (see yoiuK6s) ; (3) met., a
man of learning generally, 1 Cor.
L 20 ; Matt. xiiL 52, &c.
ypatrrSi, 4], 6v, verb, adj., written, in-
scribed, Rom. iL 15.
ypa4>i\, i?s, ^, (1) a writing ; (2) spec,
j) ypcuph or al ypcupai, the Scriptures,
writings of the O.T. ; (3) a parti-
cular passage.
ypdtpw, }li(i>, y4ypa<pa, to grave, write,
inscribe. 4ypd<prf, ydypavTcu, or y€-
ypofififvov iarl, a formula of quota-
tion, Jt is vrritten. Often with dat.
of pers. , as Mark x. 6.
ypad)hr^s, €s (ypavs, fiS-), old toomunisJi,
foolish, I Tim. iv. 7.
yprtyopew, u (from 4ypffyopa, perf. of
iydpu), to keep awake, uxitch, be vigi-
lant; met, to be alive, 1 Thess. v. 10.
'yvfivd(w, to exercise, i Tim. iv. 7 ;
be exercised or traintd.
yvfivaaia, as, ri, exercise, training
(ascetic), i Tim. iv. 8.
yv/ivr]Tev(i), or -irevw, to be naked or
poorly clad, i Cor. iv. 11.
yv/Avds, i), 6u, (1) naked, ill-clad, having
only an inner garment, John xxi. 7 ;
(2) ba7'e, Le., open or manifest, Heb.
iv. 13. ; (3) mere, 1 Cor. xv. 37.
yvfiv6TT]s, TTjToy, r], (1) nakedness; (2)
scanty clothing.
yvvaiKdpiov, ov, r6 (dim.), asHlywomatif
2 Tim. iii. 6.
yvvaiKf7os, a, ov, womanish, i Pet. iii. 7.
yvyil, yvvaiK6s, voc. yvvai, % (i) a
woman; (2) a wife. The voc. is the
form of ordinary address, often used
in reverence and honour. Compare
John iL 4 and xix. 26.
Tdiy, d, a proper name, Gog. In Ezek.
xxxviii. 5, king of Magog, i.e., of
Scandinavia ; hence, in Kev. xx. 8,
of a people far remote from Pales-
tine, probably in the N.
ywvla, as, ^, a comer. Matt, vi 5,
xxi. 42 (LXX.) ; met., a secret place,
Acts XX vi. 26.
A.
A, 5, 5f\Ta, delta, d, the fourth letter
of the Greek alphabet. As a nume-
ral, 5' = 4; 5^=4000.
Aoj8I5, also AavtS, Aai/e/S, 6 (Heb.),
David, king of Israel. 'O inhs A.,
the Son of David, an appellation of
the Messiah ; iv A., in David, ic,
in the Psalms, Heb. iv. 7.
BaipioviCofjiai (see Salfiwv), ist aor. part.,
Saifiouia-eds, to be possessed by a
demon.
iaifiSviov, lav, t6 (orig. adj. ), a demon or
evil spirit. Satfioviov ^x^iv, to have
a demon or to be a demoniac.
datfioviwSrjs, es, resembling a de7non,
dcemonian, James iii. 1 5.
Zaifuav, ovos, 6, rj, in classic Greek, any
spirit superior to man; hence often of
the inferior deities ; in N. T. always,
an evil spirit, a demon. SaifiSviov is
geuerally used. See Synonyms.
SdKvw, to bite, molest, irritate, GaL
V. 15.
SdKpv — 8c|ids]
VOCABULARY.
29
SoKpu, V05, or SdKpvov, iov, r6, a tear.
ZaKpvo), aw, to weep, John xi. 35.
SuKTvXios, ov, 6 (5a/cTuAos), a ring for
the finger, Luke xv. 22.
SdKTvAos, ov, 6, a finger, iv 5o/ctv\9>
&€ov, met., by itte power of God,
Luke xi. 20. Comp. Matt. xii. 28.
AdhfiavovBi, 77, Dalmanutha, a town or
village near Magdala, Mark viii. 10.
/ioXfiaTia, as, t), Dalmatia, a part of
Illyricum near Macedonia, 2 Tim.
iv. 10.
ZafidCao, <r«, to subdue, tame, Mark v. 4;
James iii. 7, 8.
hdfiaAis, e«s, r}, a heifer, Heb. ix. 13.
Adfiapis, i5os, r), Damdris, Acts xvii. 34.
AafjM(TK'nv6s, -f], 6v, belonging to Damascus,
2 Cor. xi. 32.
AaiJ.a(TK6s, ov, rj, Damascus, Acts ix. 2.
SafdCu, to lend, Luke vi. 34, 35 ; mid.,
to borrow. Matt. v. 42.
Sdveiov, ov, r6, a debt. Matt, xviii. 27.
SavciaT-fis, ov, 6, a lender, a creditor,
Luke vii. 41.
AaviiiK, 6 (Heb.), Daniel, Matt. xxiv. 15.
datrai'dta, &, -flaw, to spend; trans., to
bear expense. Acts xxi. 24 (with ivi) ;
2 Cor. xii. 1 5 (with wrep) ; to con-
sume in luxury, to waste, Luke xv. 14 ;
James iv. 3.
Sairdyr], tjs, tj, expense, cost, Luke xiv.28.
d4, an adversative and distinctive par-
ticle, but, now, moreover, &c. See
404, ii., and fiey.
SitftTis, eas, Vf supplication, prayer.
See Synonyms.
5e7, impers. , it ne^ds, one must, it ought,
it is rigU or proper, Matt. xvi. 21 ;
Acts iv. 12 ; Mark xiii. 14. See 101.
hiiyfia, oTos [Ze'iKwiu), an example, a
specimen, Jude 7.
SeiyfiariCo), aw, to make an example or
spectacle of (as disgrace), Col. ii. 1 5,
and Matt. i. 19 (edd.)
SeiKwui and SfiKvvw (see 114), (i) to
present to sight, to show, to teach
(ace. and dat.); (2) to prove (ace.
and (k), to show by words (Srt), Matt.
xvi. 21 ; inf., Acts x. 28.
^eiXla, as, 7], timidity, 2 Tim. i. 7.
ZuXidw, w, to shrink for fear, to be
afraid, John xiv. 27.
ZiiK6s, i], 6v, timid, cowardly. See
Synonyms.
S(7va, 6, rj, r6, Stlvos, pron., a certain
person, such a one. Matt. xxvi. 1 8.
Sejj/ws, adv. (Seiv6s, vehement), greatly,
vehemently. Matt. viii. 6 ; Luke
xi. 53.
Seiiruew, w, to take the Sairvov, to banquet,
Luke xvii. 8, xxii. 20; met., of
familiar intercourse, Eev. iii. 20.
SeiTTfov, ov, r6, the chief or evening meal,
supper. KvpiaKhv Si7irvoy, the Lord! 8
Supper, I Cor. xi. 20.
Ziiaihaifxovia, as, % religion, in a good
or bad sense. Acts xxv. 1 9.
SettriSai'/iaj', ovos, adj., religiously or
devoutly disposed. Acts xvii. 22. See
323, c. (From SetSw, to fear.)
S(Ka, ot, at, rd, ten, Matt. xx. 24, &c.
Once, for a brief period. Rev. ii. 10.
8€>co-5uo, more frequently SdoSeKo, twelve.
Acts xix. 7.
SeKa-Treme, fifteen, for vetneKaiSfKa.
AfKd-voXis, (ws, 71, Decapolis, a district
E. of Jordan comprising ten towns.
It is uncertain what they all were,
but they included Gadara, Hippo,
Pella, and Scythopolis.
SfKa-reaaapes, a, ay, fourteen.
SeKdrtj, Tjs, ij, a tenth part, the tithe^
Heb. vii. 2, 4, 8, 9.
liKoros, rj, ov, ordinal, tenth, th StKaroy,
Rev. si. 13, the tenth part.
SfKaT6w, w, to receive tithe of, ace,
Heb. vii. 6; pass., to pay tithe, Heb,
viL 9.
htKT6s, -fi, 6p (verbal adj. from 5exo/*a')»
accepted, Ojcceptdble, Phil. iv. 18 ;
Acts X. 3 5 (dat. ) ; propitious, favour-
able, Luke iv. 19 ; 2 Cor. vi. 2, from
Isa. xlix. 8.
ScA-ed^ft) (54\€ap, a bait), to take or entice,
as with a bait, James i. 14 ; 2 Pet.
ii. 14, 18.
SevSpov, ov, t6, a tree.
Se^i6'\afios, ov, 6, " holding in the
right hand;'' plur., spearmen. Acts
xxiii. 23.
5e|i(Js, d, 6v, the right, opp. to apiaTcp6s,
the left. 7} Se^id, the right hand ; rh
Se^td, the rigid-hand side ; 5e|(3tr
liUvax, to give the right Iiand, i.e., ta
30
TOCABULARY.
[Seonat — 87]}JLi-ovp-yoi
receive to friendship or fellowship.
For e/c and h with this word, see
293, a.
54oixai, istaor., eSe^flTji' (3rdpers. impf.,
cSecTo, Luke viii. 38), to have need
of (gen.), as mid. of Sew (see Se?) ; to
make request of (gen. ) ; to beseech^
pray, abs., or with et, lyo, or Sttw^,
of purpose.
Se'oj/, ovTos, r6 (particip. of 5e?, as subst. ),
tlie becoming or needful; with iffrl
= Set. Plur., I Tim. v. 13.
AepjBoios, ov, 6, belonging to Derbe,
Acts XX. 4.
Ac'pjStj, 77$, 7}, Derbe, a city of Lycaonia,
Acts xiv. 6, xvi. i.
Sepua, aros, t6 {S4pa>), an animaVs skin,
Heb. xi. 37.
Sepfidrn'os, rj, ov, made ofshiuy leatJiem,
Matt. iii. 4 ; Mark i 6.
S^pw, 1st aor., ISejpa, 2nd fut. pass.,
Sap^aofjLai, to scourge, to beat, so as
to flay off the skin. a4pa Sepwy,
see ar)p.
Secr/uevw, (r«, ^0 6md, as a prisoner,
Acts xxiL 4 ; as a bundle, Matt.
xxiii. 4.
Scafj-eca, w, to bind, Luke viii. 29.
SeafiTj, 7}s, T}, a bundle. Matt xiii. 30.
SeVjLiios, iov, b, one bound, a prisoner.
5e(T/ioy, ov, 6 (Seoj), a ligament impeding
the tongue or some other member.
Sea/xoi or (ra) Sefffid, plur., bonds or
imprisonment.
S€(rfjLo-(pv?<a^, oKoj, 6, a jailer^ Acts
xvi. 23.
Seafi(i>T-{)piov, lav, t6, a pnson.
SecTjUWTrjj, ov, o, a prisoner.
SeaircJTTjs, ov, 6, a foreign lord or prince^
a mastery 1 Tim. vi i ; apphed to
God, Luke ii. 29 ; Acts iv. 24, 29 ;
Jude 4 ; Rev. vL 10 ; to Christ,
2 Pet. iL I. See Synonyms.
SeOpo, adv., {i) oi place, here, hitJier ;
used as an imperative, com/> hitlier.
Matt. xix. 21, &c. J (2) of time,
Rom. i. 13.
SeCre, adv., as if plur. of htvpo (or
contr. from 5eCp' ire), come, come
hither. Matt. iv. 19, &c.
Sci/TepaTos, ato, atov, oil t/ie second day,
Acts xxviii. 13.
SeirrepJ-irpaTos, adj., the second-first^
Luke vi. i. See 148.
Scurepos, a, ov, ordinal, second in
number, as Matt. xxii. 26 ; in order.
Matt. xxii. 39. t^ Seurepov or Seu-
Tfpov, adverbially, the second time,
again, as 2 Cor. xiii. 2. So e/c
Sevrdpov, Mark xiv. 72 ; eV tcjJ Seure'p^;,
Acts vii. 13.
5e'xo/tat, istaor., ide^dfi-qv, dep., to to^e,.
receive, accept, as from another, Luke
ii. a8, xvi. 6, 7 ; as letters, Acts
xxii. 5 ; to receive, i.e., kindly, as
persons, Mark vi. 11; to bear with,
2 Cor. xi. 16; to approve, welcome,
as a doctrine, the kingdom of heaven,
&c., Mark x. 15 ; 2 Cor. xL 4.
Se'o), to want. See Set and 84ofiai.
Se'co, ist aor., iSrtcra ; perf., SdSfKa',
pass., 5e'5e/iiat ; ist aor. pass, inf.,
dedrjvai, to bind together, as bundles.
Acts X. II ; to swathe, as dead bodies
for burial, John xi. 44; to bind, as
persons in bondage. Matt. xxii. 13 ;
Mark vi. 17 ; to hinder from going
forth freely, 2 Tim. ii 9 ; met. , to
compel in any way, spec, to inter-
dict. Matt, xviii. 18. SeSe/^eVos t^
Tryfu/juxTi, Acts xx. 22, bound in spirity
under an irresistible impulse.
S^, a particle indicating certainty or
reality, and so augmenting the
vivacity of a clause or sentence ;
truly, indeed, by all means, tlierefore.
Used with other particles, hirKorfy
Srrn-ov, which see.
SrjKos, 7j, ov, manifest, evident; neut.
sc, 4(TTt, it is plain, with Srt, as
I Cor. XV. 27.
dri\6(a, w, to manifest, to reveal, to bring
to light ; to imply or signify, i Cor.
L 1 1 ; Heb. ix. 8, xii, 27.
ATifias, a, 6, Demas, CoL iv. 14 ;
Philem. 24; 2 Tim. iv. 10.
Srjfi-rjyopda, «, to deliver a pvJ)lic oration
OT harangue; with •Kp65, Acts xii. 21.
Arifi-(]Tptos, ov, 6, Demetrius. Two of the
name are mentioned. Acts xix. 24;
3 John 1 2.
Zi)iJii-ovpy6s, oO, i ('*a public worker"),
one wlio makes or is tlie autJior of
anything Heb. xi. 10.
Sfjuos — ^SittKoa-ioil
VOCABULARY.
31
S^fxoi, ov, 6, a peonle; a multitude
publicly convened. See Synonyms.
S'n^idffios, a, ov, public, common, Acta
V. 1 8. Dat. fern., as adv., S7//*oo-iot,
publicly. Acts xvi. 37.
trivdpiov, iov, t6, properly a Latin word
(see 154, a), denarius.
d'fi-iroTe, adv. , at any time soever, John
r. 4.
8ri-irov, adv., indeed, truly, verily, Heb.
ii. 16.
Sid, prep, (cognate with Svo, ^i«o; 5is
twice), throuyh ; ( 1 ) with gen. , through,
during, by means of; (2) with ace,
through, on account of, for the sake
of See 299. ^la- in composition
has the force of through, thorough ;
also of separation, division, between.
Sia-fiaivo), to pass through, trans., or
intrans, with irpSs (person), fls
(place).
Sia-^dWw, to accuse, Luke xvi. i.
Sia-Be^ai6(a, S>, in mid., to affirm, assert
strongly, i Tim. i. 7 ; Titus iii. 8.
Sia-^Keirw, to see through, to see clearly
(inf., of purpose), Matt. viL 5 ;
Luke vi. 42.
8idfio\os, ov, 6 {Sia^dWco, orig. adj.),
an accuser, a slanderer, an adversary,
1 Tim. iii. 1 1 ; 2 Tim. iii. 3. b Sid-
Bo\o5, the accuser, the devil. Equi-
valent to the Hebrew Satan.
5i-ayye\\a>, to tell, publish abroad,
divulge, Luke ix. 60 ; Acts xxi. 26 ;
Eom. ix. 17.
5id-y€, or Sih ye, yet, on account of,
Luke xi. 8.
5ia-yipofxai, to pass, elapse; in N.T.
only, 2nd aor. part., gen. abs.,
having elapsed, Mark xvi. i ; Acta
XXV. 13, xxvii. 9.
Sia-yivditTKw, to examine and know
thoroughly, i. e., judicially, Acts
xxiii. J 5, xxiv. 22.
dia-yvwpi(<a, to publish abroad, Luke
ii. 17.
Sid-yvcDffis, fws, 1], judicial hearing,
accurate knowledge. Acts xxv. 21.
5ia-yoyyvCu, to murmur greatly, as
through a crowd, Luke xv. 2, xix. 7.
ita-ypTtyopeo), S), to he fully or thoroughly
awake, Luke ix. 32.
di-iyw, to lead or pass, as time, life,
1 Tim. ii. 2 {$lov) ; Tit. iii. 3 {^iov
omitted).
Sia-SexofjLai, to succeed to, Acts vii. 45.
Sid-Sri/jia, uTos, r6 (Sew), a diadem, tiara,
or crown. Rev. xii. 3, xiii. i, xix. 12.
See Synonyms.
Sia-SiSufXL, (i) to distribute ; (2) to give,
bestow.
Sid-Soxos, ov, 5, 7), a successor.
dia-Cwi/vofjLi, to gird, to gird up, John
xiii. 4, 5, xxi. 7.
Sia-e-fiKT], 7JS, 7) {^laTtQtuxi), (i) a will or
testament, a disposition, as of pro-
perty, a dispensation ; (2) a compact
or covenant. Gal. iii. 15; perhaps
Heb. ix. 16, 17. The two covenants
mentioned, Gal. iv. 24. The O.T.
as containing the first, and the KT.
as containing the second, are called
each SiaQi]K7].
Si-alpcais, ews, fern., difference, diversity,
as the result of distribution, i Cor.
xii. 4, 5, 6.
St-aipew, «, to divide, distribute, Luke
XV. 12 ; I Cor. xii. 11.
Sia-Kadapl^w, f. iS>, to cleanse thorougJdy,
Matt. iii. 12; Luke iii. 17.
Sia-KaT-f\eyxop.ai, to confute entirely.
Acts xviii. 28.
SiaKoveoD, «, to serve or wait upon, espe-
cially at table ; to supply wants,
I Pet. iv. 10 ; to administer or dis-
tribute alms, &c. (dat. pers., ace.
thing; occasionally abs. ) Of prophets
and apostles who ministered the
Divine will, 1 Pet. i. 12 ; 2 Cor. iii. 3.
iioKovia, ay, ri, management, as of a
household, Luke x. 40 ; ministering
relief, or the relief ministered. Acts
xii. 25 ; 2 Cor. viii. 4 ; ministry or
service in the church of Christ, fre-
quently.
ZidKovos, ov, 6, 7}, a servant, specially at
table, Matt, xxiii. 11 ; a servant of
God, as magistrates, Rom. xiii. 4;
one who serves in the Chmxh, deacon
or deaconess, Phil. i. i ; i Tim.
iii. 8, 12; Rom. xvi i. See Syn-
onyms.
SiaKoaiQi, ai, a, card, numb., two hun-
dred.
52
VOCABULARY.
[Si-aKovci) — 8ia-o-6i(d
(Si-uKovo), to Tiear thoroughly, Acts
■sxiii. 35.
5ia-/fpjVa>, to discern, to diMinguish, Acts
xvi. 9; I Cor. xi. 29. Mid. (aor,,
pass.), (i) to doubt, to hesitate, Matt,
xxi. 21 ; James i. 6 ; {2) to separate
one^s self from, Jude 22 ; (s) to dis-
pute with, Acts xi. 2 ; Jude 9.
did-Kpiais, fcos, 7), the act of dvitinction,
discrimination, Rom. xiv. i ; i Cor.
xii. 10 ; Heb. v. 14.
dia-KccXvca, to forbid, to hinder. Matt.
iii. 14.
^ia-\a\ia), £, to discuss, Luke vi. 11 ;
to spread abroad by speaking of,
Luke i. 65.
Zia-Xiyw, in mid. , to discourse, to reason,
to dispute. Matt, ix, 34 j Acts xx. 7 ;
Jude 9, &c.
5ia-A.6i7ra>, to cease, to intermit, Luke
vii. 45.
5id-\eicT05, ov, r), speech, dialect, lan-
guage, Acts ii. 6, xxi. 40, &c.
Si-aAkddaco, to cJiange, as the dispo-
sition ; pass., to be reconciled to.
Matt. V. 24.
Sia-KoyiCofiai, to reason, to discourse,
to ponder, to reflect, to deliberate,
to debate, Mark ii. 6-8, viii. 16,
ix. 33, &c.
Zia-Xoyi(rii65, ov, 6, reflection, thought,
Luke ii 35 ; reasoning, opinion,
Rom. i. 21, xiv. i ; dispute, debate,
Phil. ii. 14 ; i Tim. ii. 8, &c.
Sia-\vca, to disperse, to break up. Acts
V. 36.
Sia-napTvpofiai, dep. mid., to testify ear-
nestly, Acts ii. 40; to enforce, Acts
viii. 25, &c.
Sia-fidxofjiai, dep. mid., to contend or
dispute warmly, Acts xxiii. 9.
Sia-fifvo), to remain, vrith. adj. or adv. ;
to persevere, with if.
Sia-fiepiCoo, (j) to divide or separate into
parts. Matt, xxvil 35, &c. ; to dis-
tribute, Luke xxii. 17 ; (2) to be at
discord with, Luke xi. 17 ; with ivi,
ace. or dat., xii. 52.
hM-fifpi(Tn6s, ov, d, dissension, Luke
xii; 51.
Zia-v4yL0), to divulge, to spread abroad.
Acts iv. 17.
Sia-veucu, to make signs, by nodding,
&c., Luke i. 22.
8iav6T]fxa, arcs, t6, a thought, imagina-
tion, device, Luke xi. 17.
Sid-voia, as, i), the mind, i.e., the. intel-
lect, or thinking faculty , Mark xii. 30 ;
the understanding, i John v. 20 ; the
mind, i.e., the feelings, disposition,
affections, Col. i. 2 1 ; plur. , tJte thoughts,
as wilful, depraved, Eph. ii. 3.
St-avoLyc0, to open fully, i. e. , the ears,
Mark vii. 34, 35 ; the eyes, Luke
xxiv. 3 1 ; the heart, making it wil-
ling to receive, Acts xvi. 14; the
Scriptures, explaining them. Acta
xvii. 3.
Sia-vvKTepevco, to pass the night through,
Luke vi. 12.
Si-av6a), to perform to the end, complete^
Acts xxi, 7.
^la-iravrSs, adv., always, continually,
Mark v. 5, &c.
Sia-nrapa-Tpifii), rjs, t], contention, fierce
dispute to no purpose, 1 Tim. vi. 5.
Sm-irepcJoj, Si, dffco, to pass, to paS8
through, to pass over. Matt. ix. i ;
Mark vi. 53, &c.
5io-7r\6«, fvau, to sail through or over,
/ Acts xxvii. 5.
Zia-irovfoo, &, mid., aor. pass., to grieve
one's self, to be indignant. Acts iv. 2,
xvi. 18.
Sta-irop6i5o)uot, to go or pass through,
Luke xiii. 22 ; Acts xvi. 4, &c.
hia-Trop4(a, d, to be in great doubt or per-
plexity, Luke ix. 7 ; Acts x. 1 7, &c.
hia-irpaytiaa-fvoiJMi, to gain by business or
trading, Luke xix. 15.
5to-7rpjft>, in pass., to be enraged, to be
greatly moved vnth anger. Acts v. 33,
vii. 54.
hi-aptrd^o}, to plunder, to spoil by rob-
bery, &c., Matt. xii. 29; Mark iii. 27.
Sux^-^ij-yuvfii and Sia^^-fiaffco, ^a, to tear,
as garments, in griet or indignation,
Acts xiv. 14 ; Matt. xxvi. 65 ; to
break asunder, as a net, Luke v. 6 ;
as bonds, Luke viii. 29.
SM-(Ta^4u>, CO, to make fully manifest, to
tell all. Matt, xviii. 3 1 (xiii. 36, MSS.)
Sia-ffciw, to treat with violence, so as to
extort anything, Luke iii. 14.
Sia-orKOpn-Ct« — SiSaorKoXCa] VOCABULARY.
33
Jiia-arKopTrl(a}, to strew or scatter, Matt.
XXV. 24, &c. ; to disperse in conquest,
Luke i. 5 1 ; to waste or squander,
Luke XV. 13, xvi. i.
dia-airdw, ist aor. pass,, Biea-irdaOT]!/, to
pull or pluck asunder or in pieces,
Mark v. 4 ; Acts xxiii. 10.
5ia-(Tireipa}, 2nd. aor. pass., SieairdpTjv, to
scatter abroad, as seed ; so of Chris-
tians dispersed by persecution, Acts
viii. I, 4, xi. 19,
tia-airopd, as, t], dispersion, state of
being dispersed. Used of the Jews
as scattered among the Gentiles,
John vii. 35; James i. i; x Pet. i. i.
dia-(TT€?\J\co, in mid., to give hi charge, to
comraand expressly ; with negative
words, to forbid, to prohibit. Matt,
xvi. 20 ; Acts XV. 24. Pass, part.,
TO hiaareKkSixivov, Heb. xii. 20, tlie
command.
hid-(TTT]fxa, aros, t6, neiit., an interval
of time, Acts v. 7.
Sia-rrroAr], rjs, r}, distinction, difference,
Rom. iii. 22, x. 12; i Cor. xiv. 7.
dM-(rTp€(()a>, to seduce, turn away, Luke
xxiii, 2 ; Acts xiii. 8 ; to pervert, to
ivrest, Acts xiii. 10. Perf. part.,
pass,, SieaTpafifievos, perverse, vicious,
Matt, xvii. 17.
diaad!>C<a, ffco, to save, to convey safe
through, 1 Pet. iii. 20 ; pass. , to reach
a place in safety, Acts xxvii. 44 ; to
heal. Matt. xiv. 36.
Sia-rq.yf}, rjs, % a disposing of, ordi-
nance, appointment, Rom. xiii. 2.
^id-rayixa, aros, r6, a mandate, a de-
cree, Heb. xi. 23.
dLa-Tapdaao}, to trouble greatly, to agitate,
Luke i. 29.
dia-Tdaa-a, to dispose, to give orders to
(dat.), arrange, constitute; mid., to
appoint, to ordain, as i Cor. vii. 17
(also with dat. pers., ace. thing) ;
to promulgate. Gal. iii. 19.
5to-TeA€c», w, to continue, to remain
through a certain time. Acts xxvii. 3 3.
Bia-T7]p4ct3, to guard or keep vnth care,
as in the heart, Luke ii. 51 ; with
kavrSv, (fee. , to guard one's self from,
to abstain (ew or aird). Acts xv. 29.
8ia-T( or Sto ri; wherefore?
Sia-TidTjfiL, only mid. in N.T., to dis-
pose, as ( I ) to commit to, Luke xxii. 29;
(2) to make an arrangement with, as
in a covenant, Heb. viii, 10; (3) to
execute a will, perhaps, Heb. ix. 16.
See Siad-f]KTt.
Sto-Tp/jSoj, to sp>end, as time. Acts
xiv. 3, 28 ; abs., to sojourn, John
xi. 54.
Sia-rpo^T}, rjs, rj, food, nourishment,
1 Tim. vi. 8.
5i-avyd((o, to shine through, to dawn,
2 Pet. i. 19.
5ia(pavr]s, es, shining through, transpa-
rent. Rev. xxi. 21. In some MSS.,
Siavy-fjs in same signif.
5to-(J)ep«, (i) to carry through, Mark
xi. 16; (2) to bear abroad, Acts
xiii. 49, xxvii. 27 ; (3) to differ from
(gen.j, I Cor. xv. 41 ; hence (4) to
he better than, to surpass. Matt,
vi. 26, &c, ; (5) impers,, Sto^epet, it
makes a difference to (dat.), matters
to. Gal. ii. 6, &c.
Zia-ipev-yoo, to escape by flight, Acta
xxvii. 42.
Sia-((>r}iiiCa}, to report, publish abroad,
divulge. Matt, ix, 31, xxviii. 15;
Mark i. 45,
dia-(f)9€lp(a, to injure thoroughly, as rust
does, Luke xii. 33 ; to destroy. Rev.
xi. 18; to decay, to peruh, 2 Cor.
iv. 16. 0pp. to avaKaivow, to reneio.
dna-^9opd, as, t}, decay, corruption,
i.e., of the grave, Acts ii. 27, 31,
xiii. 34-37 (LXX.)
5id-(f>opQs, ov, (1) diverse, of different
kinds, Rom. xii. 6 ; Heb. ix. lo ;
(2) superior to, Heb, i. 4, viii, 6.
Sia-(pv\d(T(ru), to guard carefully, protect,
defend, hnke iv. 10 (LXX.)
dia-x^ipiCca, mid. N.T,, to lay hands on,
put to death. Acts v, 30, xxvi. 21.
5ia-x«p'C<"» P^ss. N.T., "to be sepa-
rated," to leave, to depart from, (dird),
Luke ix. 33.
5iSaKTiK6s, 7}, 6p, apt at teaching, i Tim.
iii. 2 ; 2 Tim. ii. 24.
Si5aKT(5s, Ti, 6v, taught, instructed (gen.,
by), John vi. 45 ; i Cor. ii. 13.
SiSafTKaXto, as, v, teaching, i.e., (i) tJie
manner or art of teaching, Roia.
34
VOCABULARY.
[8 iSdo-KoXos — 8 CKr\
xii. 7, &c. ; or (2) tJie doctnne taught,
precept, instruction. Matt. xv. 9, &c.
5i5££(T/coA.os, ov, 6, a teacher, master;
often, "teacher of the law," Luke
ii. 49 ; a censor, James iii. i ; spe-
cially of Christ the Teacher.
iiSdcTKco, SjSo^o), to teach, to be a teacher ;
abs., to teach, with ace. of pers.,
generally also ace. of thing; also
with inf. or on.
SiSaxh, vs, 7], doctrine, teaching, i.e.,
(i) the act, (2) the mode, or (3) the
thing taught. With obj. gen., per-
haps, in Heb. vi. 2. See 260, b (6),
note.
St'-Spox^ov, ov, T(J{prop. adj., sc. vSixurfia,
coin), a double drachma, or silver
half-shekel (in LXX, th^. shekel),
Matt, xviL 24.
AiSv/tos, 1), ov, double, or twin; a, sur-
name of Thomas the apostle, John
xi. 16, &c.
SiScD/xi, to give (ace. and dat. ) Hence,
in various connections, to yield, de-
liver, supply, commit, &c. When
used in a general sense, the dat. of
pers. may be omitted, as Matt. xiii. 8.
The thing given may be expressed
by 4k or ottJ, with gen. in a parti-
tive sense instead of ace. So Matt.
XXV. 8 ; Luke xx. 10. The purpose
of a gift may be expressed by inf.,
as Matt. xiv. 16 ; John iv. 7 ; Luke
i. 73- See 107, 278.
Si-eyeipw, to wake up thoroughly, Mark
iv. 38 ; to excite, as the sea by the
wind, John vi. 18 ; fig., to arou^Cy
2 Pet. L 13.
8t-6|-oSos, ov, 71, lit., **a crossway of
exit ;" so, a meeting-place of roads,
a public spot in a city. Matt. xxii. 9.
Si-fpfiTjvevrrjs, ov, 6, an interpreter.
Zi-ep(ir)vivu, to interpret, explain, Luke
xxiv. 27 ; Acts ix. 36.
Si-epxoiJixu, to pass through, ace. or Siet
(gen.), destination expressed by «s
or €«y ; to pass over or travel, abs.,
Acts viii. 4 J to spread, as a report,
Luke V. 15.
8t-€pwTaa>, w, to find by inquiry. Acts
x. 17
II €Tr,s, h (S/y), of two years, Matt, ii, 16.
Si-eria, as, t], the sjyace of two years.
Acts xxiv. 27, XX viii. 30.
Si-rj-yeofiai, ovfxai, to lead through, to
recount perfectly, to declare tJie whole
of a matter, Luke ix. 10.
Sii)yr)a-i5, ecus, 7], narrative or history,
Luke i. I.
8i-7]veKi]s, €s, continuous, perpetual, els
rh diTjveKes, adverbial, /or* ever, Heb.
x.^ I, 14.
Si-ddXaararos, ov (5ts), washed by the sea
on two sides. Acts xxvii. 4 1.
5i-iKv4ofiai, ovficu, to pass through, as a
sword piercing, Heb. iv. 12.
8i-ia-T7)p.i, to put apart, to interpose; in
time, Luke xxii. 59 ; by space, Acts
xxvii. 28.
Si-i(rxvpl(ofiat, to affirm strongly. Acts
xii. 15.
diKcuo-Kpiffia, as, tj, just judgment, Rom.
ii. 5
SUaios, aia, ov, just, right, Mark vi. 20 ;
upright, righteous, Luke i. 6 ; impar-
tial, as a judge, 2 Tim. iv. 8 ; Tnght
with God. Applied to things, to per-
sons, to God, John xvii. 25. Adv.,
■ws, justly, deservedly. See Synonyms.
ZiKaioaivri, ijs, tj, righteousness, justice.
Acts xvii. 3 1 ; rectitude, righteous-
ness. Matt. vi. 33 ; goodness -gene-
rally, Matt. vi. I ; justification, Kom.
V. 17, 21, as ZiKaittffis.
SiKaiSu, «, *' to make just," generally in
N. T. in the declarative sense ( i Tim-
iiL 16; Rom. iii. 4, LXX. ) ; spe-
cially, to hold guiltless, to justify.
Matt. xii. 37 ; I Cor. iv. 4 ; to pro-
nounce or treat as righteous, Kom.
iii. 20, 26, 30, &c.
SiKalwfxa, aros, r6, a righteous decree or
statute, Rom. i. 32,' es])ecially a
decree of acquittal; opp. to KaraKpifxa,
condemnation, Rom. v. j 6 ; a righteous
act, Rom. v. 18 ; Rev. xix. 8.
SiKaiuffis, eus, 7}, acquittal, justification,
Rom. iv. 25, V. 18.
HiKaffT-fts, ov, d, a judge, Luke xiL 14 ;
Acts vii. 27.
SiKTj, 7JS, 7], a judicial sentence. Acts
XXV. 1 5 ; punishment, 2 Thess. i. 9 ;
vengeance, the name of a heatJien
deity. Acts xxviii 4.
8£ktuov — 8ovXtj]
VOCABULARY.
35
SIktvov, ov, to, a fishing net.
^i,-K6-yos, ov (5i$), double-tongued, deceit-
Jul, 1 Tim. iii, 8.
lio, conj. (S.ct aud o), therefore, on
which account, wherefore.
St-o5eu«, to journey or jiass through,
Luke viii. i ; Acts xvii. i.
di6-7rep, conj., for this very reason, i Cor.
viii. 13.
Aio-ireriis, e's, fallen from Zeus or Ju-
piter, Acts XIX. 35.
Zi-6pdoo(n$, €us, Tj, an amendment, re-
formation, Heb. ix. to.
Si-opva-acD, io), to dig through. Matt.
VI. 19, xxiv. 43.
Ai6(T-Kovpoi, uv, oi (children of Zeus),
Castor and Pollux, Acts xxviii. 1 1.
Si-6ti, conj. ( = Sia toOto, on), where-
fore, on this account, because, for.
ALo-rpe^ijs, ovs, d, JJiotrephes, 3 John 9.
SiirXoos, Otis, ij, ovv, double, twofold,
1 Tim. V'. 17 ; comp., dnrXdrepos with
gen., Matt, xxiii. 15.
SiTTAJo), u, to double, Kev, xviii. 6.
Sis, adv., twice.
Ais, obsolete nom. for ZeiJs, gen. Ai6s,
ace. Aia, Zeus or Jupiter.
Siff-Tctfw, <raj (Sts), to waver, to doubt,
Matt. xiv. 31.
Si-o-To/xos, ov ['^i-s), two-edged, Heb.
iv. 12.
8i(r-xtA.ioi, ot, a, num., two thousand.
St-vAtCw, to strain off, filter through a
sieve. Matt, xxiii. 24.
SixaC'", cw, to sei a^ vanawce, divide.
Matt. X. 35.
5iX<'-o'i"ao-'a, ay? V, a faction, division,
separation, 1 Cor. iii. 3.
Sixo-rofxiw, 0), to cut in two or asunder.
Ziy^do}, w, ria-a}, to thirst for, to desire
earnestly, ace.
Si^os, ovs, t6, thirst, z Cor. xi. 27.
8i-i|/vxos, ov {Sis), double-minded, James
i. 8, iv. 8.
diaiyfi6s, ov, 6, persecution.
5id!)KTr}s, ov, 6, a persecutor.
5i(tiKw, |w, (i) to pursue, persecute,
harass; {2) to press earnestly for-
ward, Phil. iii. 12; (3) to follow,
simply, Luke xvii. 23 ; (4) %, to
prosecute loith ardent desire.
Uyfxa, aros, to {Sok4w), a decree, edict.
ordinance ; as of a prince, Luke ii. 1 ;
of the Mosaic law, Eph. ii. 15; of
the Apostles, A cts x vi. 4. ' ' Dogma. "
SoyfjLaTiico, aw, to make a decree, to im-
pose an ordinance ; pass. , to submit
to ordinances. Col. ii. 20.
fio/ceo), w, 8(^4<tf, ( I ) to think, ace. and inf.
(or inf. of the same subj. as Luke
viii. 18); (2) to seem, ajjpear, be
evident; (3) 5ok€7, impers., it seems;
it seems good to or pleases, dat.
SoKi[jid(w, ao), to try, put to the proof,
to learn by experience, 2 Cor. viii. 22 ;
to discern, to distinguish, Luke xii. 56 ;
to judge Jit, i Cor. xvi. 3.
SoKi/xri, Tjs, 7], proof, knowledge acquired
by proof , experience.
doKifiLov, ov, r6, a test, a means of trying,
a criterion.
SSictfxos, ov [Sexofiai), approved, genuine,
acceptable, Kom. 2:vi. 10, xiv. 18.
SokSs, ov, 7], a beam of timber, Matt,
vii. 3; 4, 5- .
S6\ios, ia, lov, deceitful, 2 Cor. xi. 13.
So\i6u>, u, to deceive. Impf., 3rd pers.
plur., iSoMovaav, an Alexandrian
form from LXX. , Rom. iii. 1 3.
d6\o5, ov, 6, fraud, "deceit, craft, 2 Cor.
xii. 16.
Bo\6u}, &, to falsify, adulterate, 2 Cor.
iv. 2.
S<J/ia, arcs, t6 (SiSoj/it), a gift.
Z6ia, as, 7j (8oK6u>, "favourable estima-
tion"), (1) honour, glory, yielded to
God ; manifestation of character, as
of God, Kom. iii. 7 ; applause, given
to men; sple*ndour, lustre, dazzling
light, al h6^ai, dignities, on earth or
in heaven, 2 Pet. ii. 10 ; Jude 8 ;
future glory, Horn. ii. 7, 10.
So^d^o), (r«, to ascribe glory to, tohonour,
glorify.
AopKOLs, dSos, 7), Dorcas, Acts ix. 36, 39.
S6ais, ecus, t], a giving, Phil. iv. 15 ; a
gift, James i. 17.
8(^T7js, ou, 6, a giver, 2 Cor. ix. 7.
Soi/A-a7<B7€a>, u, to bring into subjection^
I Cor. ix. 27.
8ouA€ta, OS, T), slavery, bondage.
SouKevw, aa>, {i) to be a slave, absolutely;
(^) to be subject to, to obey, dat.
SouArj, T}s, 7], a handmaid, a female slojve.
36
VOCABULARY.
[8ovXos — lav
dovKos, ov, 6, (i) a slave, i.e., one of
servile condition; (2) a servant of
any one, correlative to Kvpms. See
Synonyms.
Sov\6(o, u, (ixTca, to reduce to bondage
(ace. and dat.) ; pass., to he held
subject to.
Sox^i?, ^s, 17 (56X''A*«0> "a receiving of
guests," a banquet, Luke xiv. 13.
SpaKCDv, ovTos, 6, a dragon or huge ser-
pent ; symb. for Satan, Rev. xii.
Spdcrffoficu, dep., to grasp, take, catch;
ace, I Cor. iii. 19.
SpaxfJ-'fi, V5, V, cb drachma, an Attic silver
coin equal to the Roman denarius,
or worth between sevenpence and
eightpence of our money, Luke xv. 8.
Spe/xca, obs. (see rpdxco), to run.
Zpitravov, ov, r6, a sickle or pruning-
hook, Mark iv. 29 ; Rev. xiv. 14.
TipSfios, ov, d, "a racecourse;" fig.,
course, career.
ApovaiWa, tjs, t], Drusilla, Acts xxiv.24.
dvi/aficu, dep. (see 109, b, 1 ), to be able,
abs., or with inf. (sometimes omitted)
or ace. ; to have a capacity for ; to be
strong, as i Cor. iii. 2 ; to have power
to do, whether through ability, dis-
position, permission, or opportunity.
Zivu^is, 6«s, ?7, (i) power, might, abso-
lutely or as an attribute ; (2) power
over, expressed by etj or M (ace),
ability to do; (3) axrcise of power,
miracle ; (4) forces, as of an armj'-,
spoken of the heavenly hosts, as
Matt. xxiv. 29 ; (5) force, as of a
word, i.e., significance, i Cor. xiv. 11.
See Synonyms.
Zvva4Ji6w, «, to strengthen, confirm, CoL
i. II.
5i/j^d<rTrjy, ov, 6, (i) a potentate, Luke
i. 52 ; (2) one in authority ^ Acta viii. 27.
5vvaT(0}, CO, to be powerful, to show on£s
self powerful, 2 Cor. xiii. 3.
lvvaT6s, "f), 6v, having power, mighty
{6 hvvaT65, THE Almighty-, Luke
i. 49), distinguished, for rank. Acts
XXV. 5 ; for skill, for excellence,
Luke xxiv. 19. SwutSp, possible.
iivot or SrJft), 2nd aor., eSuc, to sink ; to
set, as the sun, Mark L 32; Luke
iv. 40.
5uo, num., indecl., except dat., 8u<r(,
two.
8vs-, an inseparable prefix, implying
adverse, difficult, or grievous.
5v<r-^d(rTaKTos, ov, oppressive, difficult
to be borne. Matt, xxiii. 4.
Sva--fVTepi(t, as, ri, a dysentery, a flux.
Sva-epfi-fiveuTos, ov, hard to be explained.
5vff-Ko\os, ov (lit., "difficult about
food"), difficult, hard to accomplish.
Adv., -ws, with difficulty, hardly.
Sva-fii}, rjs, ri (generally plur., Sva-fiai),
the setting of the sun ; the west.
hva v6t]Tos, ov, hard or difficult to be
understood, 2 Pet. iii. 16.
8v(r-(f)7ifila, as, 1}, evil report, infamy.
8w5e/ca, indecl., num., twelve. oiSdSeKa,
the twelve, or the Apostles.
SoSt'/coTos, 17, ov, num., ord., twelfth.
Sa}S€Kd-<pv\ov, ov, t6, the twelve tribes,
Israel.
Swfia, aros, t6, a house, a house-top.
See Synonyms.
Sojpecf, as, r], a free gift.
Sapeav, accus. of preced., as an adv.,
freely, 2 Cor. xi. 7 ; vnthout cause,
groundlessly, John xv. 25 ; Gal. ii. 2 1 .
Supfoixai, ovfxai, to give freely, Mark
XV. 45 ; pass., 2 Pet. i. 3, 4.
SdpTina, aros, r6, a free gift, Rom. v. 16;
James i. 17.
Supov, ov, t6, a gift, Eph. ii. 8 ; an
offering or sacrifice. Matt. viii. 4;
a gift to the temple treasuryy Luke
E.
E, 6, i ^pTXov, epsilon, 2, the fifth letter.
As a numeral, €= 5 ; €^= 5000.
?o, inter j., expressing surprise or com-
plaint, oh I alas ! Mark i. 24 ; Luke
iv. 34.
idv, conj. (for ft ^v), if, usually con-
strued with subjunctive verb. See
383. Sometimes as a particle of
time, John xiL 32, when ; after the
relative, with some other words,
soever. Matt. v. 19, viii. 19; i Cor.
xvi. 6. ihv 5f KoS, and if also ; id.v fi-^,
except, unless. Matt. v. 20 ; but that,
Mark iv. 22 ; 4hv vtp, if indeed,
Heb. vi 3 ; iJof rt, if so he, whether.
lain-ou — I8paf(0)xa]
VOCABULARY.
37
eavTov, pron., reflex., 3rd pers., of one! s
self ; used also in ist (plur.) and 2nd
persons. See 335. Genitive often
for possess, pron. Ki-yeiv or 6tVe?j' iv
€avT(p, to say within one^s self, i.e., to
think ; yiveadai or ^px^cOai iv eair^,
to come to one's self, i.e., to recover
one's recollection ; irphs eavrSv, to
one^shome, John xx. 10, or privately ^
as Luke xviii. ii ; iv eavroTs, among
yourselves, i. e. ,one with another; Kad"
eavrSv, apart; irap eavrSv, at home.
idw, ft), idao) ; impf . , e'litiv ; i st aor. ,
eiaara, (\) to permit, inf. , or ace. and
inf. ; (2) to leave alone; (3) to let go,
Acts xxvii. 40.
e^Sofi-nKovra, in dec!., num., seventy,
ol i&8o(j.-fiKovTa, the seventy disciples,
Luke X. I, 17.
ifidofirfKovTaKLs, num. adv., seventy
times ; rhet. for any large number.
€$5ofji.os, T), ov, ord. num., seventh.
'E/Se'f), 6, Eher or Heher, Luke iii. 3 5.
'E^paiK6s, i],3'v, Hebrew.
'E^paios, aia, aiov, also subst., 6, r), a
Hebrew ; a Jevt' of Palestine, in dis-
tinction from ol 'E\\7)vi(rTai, or Jews
born out of Palestine, and using the
Greek language.
efipats, iSos, r], the Hebrew or Aramcean
language, vernacular in the time of
Christ and the Apostles. See 150.
kfipaXcrri, adv. , in the Hebrew language.
See preceding.
iyyiC^^, fut. att., iyyiw ; pf., ^yyiKa, to
approach, to draw near, to be near,
abs., or with dat. or €ts, or ini (ace.)
iy-ypdcpo), to inscribe, infix, z Cor. iii. 2.
eyyvos, ov, 6, ri, a surety, sponsor, Heb.
vii. 22.
€771;^, adv., near; used of both place
and time, with gen. or dat.
iyyvrepov, comp. of preceding, nearer;
used of time, Rom. xiii. 1 1.
iyeipw, iyepco, pass, perf., iy^yep/xai, to
arouse, to awaken ; to raise up, as a
Saviour ; to erect, as a building ;
mid., to rise up, as from sleep, or
from a recumbent posture, as at
table. Applied to raising the dead;
used also of rising up against, as an
adversary, or in judgment.
eyepais, ecos, 7), a waking up ; of the
resvirrection, Matt, xxvii. 53.
iy-K(i.Q-iros, ov, adj. {iyKa6ir}iJ.i), a spy,
an insidious foe.
iyKaivia, icov, rd, a dedication, John
X. 22 ; of the feast commemorating
the dedicating or purifying of the
temple, after its pollution by Anti-
ochus Epiphanes, 25 Chisleu, answer-
ing to mid-December.
iy-Kaivi^ca, to renovate, as a way, Heb.
X. 20 ; consecrate, as a covenant,
Heb. ix. 18.
iy-KoKiw, 0), eVcu, impf-, iviKaXovv, to
sum,mon to a court for trial, to indict,
pers. dat., or Kard (gen.); crime, in
gen,
iy- Kara-Xelirco, xpco, (i) to desert, to
abandon ; (2) to leave remaining,
Rom, ix. 29.
iy-KOT-oiKfO), ft), to dwell among {iv).
iy-K€vrpi^ii>, to insert, as a bud or graft;
fig., Hom. xi. 17, &c.
ey-K\r)iJLa, aros, t6, a charge or accusa-
tion.
iy-Kop.fi6o/xat, ovfiai, to clothe, as with
an outer garment tied closely with
knots, I Pet. v. 5.
iy-Koni], ris, 7], om> impediment.
iy-KSiTTw, ^(1), istaor,, eje/coi/zo, to inter-
rujyt, to hinder {a.cc., or inf. with roO).
iy-Kpdreia, as, rj, self-control, tempe-
rance, continence.
iy-KpaTivojxai, dep,, to restrain one\s self,
in sensual pleasures ; to be temperate.
iy-Kpar-fis, 4s, having power over, self-
controlled, temperate, abstinent.
iy-Kplvco, to adjudge or reckon, to a
particular rank (ace. and dat,),
2 Cor, X. 12,
iy-KpvTTTco, to hide in, to mix with, as
leaven with meal.
^y-Kvos, ov, pregnant, Luke ii. 5.
iy-Xp'^(o, to rub in, anoint, Rev. iii. 18.
iyd>, pron., pers., /; plur., ^^els, we.
See 53.
ida(pi(co, fut. (Attic), -i£>, to lay level
with the ground, to raze, Luke xix. 44.
ebacpos, ovs, t6, the ground, Acts xxii. 7.
eSpoios, aia, aiov, stedfast, firm, fixed.
fdpaicofjLa, aros, t6, a basis, stay, sup'
port, 1 Tim. iiL 15.
38
VOCABULARY.
['EtcKias — dpTjviKos
'ECeKias, ov, 5, ffezehiah, Matt. i. 9.
i0e\o-6p7jcrKela, as, 7], vMl-worshipy Col.
ii. 23 (see dprja-Kela).
4e€\(a. See 0e'A«.
idiC'jo, to accuj^tom ; pass., perf. part.,
neut., T^ eldifffMevov, the accustomed
practice, the custom.
ieydpxn^, ou, 6, a pre/net, lieutenant-
govei-nor, ethnarch, 2 Cor. xi. 32.
eeviK6s, -f), 6y, national, of Gentile race,
heathen. Adv., -ws, heathenly, after
the manner of heathens.
cdyos, 01/9, t6, the people of any country,
a nation, rh idv% the nations, the
heathen world, the Gentiles.
€005, ovs, t6, a usage, custom, manner.
ido), pf., ftuQa, to be accustomed, rh
ilwdhi ai/T^, his custom, Luke iv. 16 j
Acts xvii. 2.
€j, a conditional conjunction (see 383),
if, since, though. After verbs indi-
cating emotion, el is equivalent to
Srt, Mark xv. 44, As an interro-
gative particle, d occurs in both in-
direct and direct questions, Mark
XV. 45 ; Acts i. 6. In oaths and
solemn assertions, it may be rendered
by that... not. u firf and ei fxiin,
unless, except, d Se fi-f], but if not,
otherunse, J ohn xiv. 2. et Trtp, if so
be. el iroos, if possibly. €tT€.,.e?Te,
whether ...or.
flSos, ovs, r6, (1) outward appearance,
2 Cor. V. 7; (2) foi'm, aspect, John
V. 37 ; (3) species, kind, i Thess.
V. 22.
filw, obs. See bpda, olBa.
fl8u\€7ov, ov, t6, an idoPs temple, i Cor.
viii. 10.
tl8wK6-6vTos, ov, sacrificed to idols ; used
of meats, as Acts xv. 29.
€i5a'A.o-AaTp6ia, as, 77, idolatry.
flSwXo-XdrpTjs, ov, 6, an idolater.
eUtaXop, ov, t6, an idol, a false god
worshipped in an image.
elKtj or flicp, adv., (1) without purpose ;
Rom. xiii. 4 ; (2) in vain, i Cor.
XV. 2.
ttKoai, indec, num., twenty.
etKw, to give way, to yield. Gal. ii. 5.
«iK«, obs., whence 2nd perf. Hoiko, to
resemble; with dat., James i, 6, 23.
etKcSr, 6vos, rj, o-n image, copy, repre-
sentation, likeness.
elXiKpipeia, as, t], clearness, sincerity.
ilhiKplvi]s, 4s, sincere, pure, without spot
or blemish (perhaps from dXi,, sun-
light, and Kfjiva, tojiulge, " capable of
being judged in the light").
ftxla-aoo, to roll together, as a scroll,
Rev. vi. 14.
elfti (see 110), a verb of existence,
(i) used as a predicate, to be, to exist,
to happen, to come to pass ; with an
infin. following, iari, it is convenient,
proper, &c., as Heb. ix. 5; (2) as
the copula of subject and predicate,
simpl}' to be, or in the sense of to be
like, to represent, John vi. 35; Matt,
xxvi. 26 ; I Cor. X. 4. With parti-
ciples, it is used to form the "re-
solved tenses," as Luke i. 22, iv. 16;
Matt. xvi. 19, &c. With gen., as
predicate, it marks quality, posses-
sion, participation, &c. ; with dat,
property, possession, destination,
&c. For its force with a prep, and
its case, see Syntax of Prepositions.
The verb, when copula, is often
omitted. Participle, &v, being ; rh
6v, that which is; ol vvrts, rh ovra,
persons op things, tJiat are. This
also is often omitted.
el(xi, to go, in some copies for ei/t/, in
John vii. 34, 36.
cIvcKO, -€v, for ei/ewo, -fv.
ftirep, uirus. See in ei.
fJirov (see 103, 7), from obs. ?7r«, or
ft-KU), to say; interrogatively, to
enquire. Acts viii. 30; or in reply,
to ansv}er, Mark xv. 34. In narra-
tion, to tell. Matt. viii. 4; in pre-
dictions, to foretell, Mark xiv. 16;
in authoritative directions, to bid or
command, Luke vii. 7.
*lpr\vivfa, to have peace or to be at
peace.
flpi]vrj, r}s, fi, peace, the opposite of
dissension or war ; peace of mind,
arising from reconciliation with God;
health, prosperity, every good, tem-
poral and spiritual. Often employed
in salutations, as in Heb.
flpriviK6s, ii, 6v, (i) peaceable, James
€lpTJVO-irOll« €K-8l«K«]
VOCABULARY.
39
iii, 17 ; {z) peaceful, wholesome, Heb.
xii. 1 1.
clprjvo-iroieo}, a, to make peace, reconcile,
Col. i. 20.
flprjvo-TTotSi, ov, 6, a peacemaker, one
disposed to peace, Matt. v. 9.
fls, prep, governing ace., into, to (the
interior). See 124, 298. In cona-
position, it implies motion into or
towards.
(h, fila, fv, a card, num., one; used
distributivfilv Matt. xx. 21 ; by-
way of ^siiphasis, Mark ii. 7 ; and
\:. indefinitely, Matt. viii. 19. Conip.
^ Mark xii. 42. As an ordinal, the
first. Matt, xxviii. i ; Rev. ix. 12.
elff-aryd), 2nd aor., ^lariyayov, to bring m,
introduce.
il<T-aKovM, to listen to, to hear, so as to
obey (gen.) ; spoken of God's bear-
ing prayer, Matt. vi. 7, &c.
da-Sexofxai, to receive into favour {a.cc.),
2 Cor. vi. 17 ; from LXX.
€^(r-fi(JLt, impf., elff'piiv ; inf., eia-ievai
{flfj.i), to go in, to enter (with etj).
fla-ipXa/xai, 2nd aor., iiarjAdoi/, to come
in, to enter (chiefly with ets). etVe/)-
Xo/iot and i^epxafxai, to come and go
in anfl ovt, spoken of daily life and
intercourse. Fig., of entrance upon
a state.
(l(r-Ka\4(a, w, only mid. in N.T., to call
or invite in, Acts x. 23.
€^cr-o5os, ov, 7], an entrance, a first
coming, an admission.
eKT-irriSdo), w, to leap in, to spring in,
Acts xiv. 14, xvi. 29.
ela-TTopevofiai, dep., to go in, to enter ;
spoken of persons, Mark i. 21 ; of
things, Matt. xv. 1 7 ; to arise, as
thoughts in the mind, Mark iv. 19,
flaTTopivofmi and iKiropevofjLai, to go in
and out in daily duties. Acts ix. 28.
€t(r-rp4xca, 2nd aor., claeSpap-ou, to run
in, or into. Acts xii. 14.
fl<T-(pepco (see 103, 6), to lead into (with
els), cgf., temptation, Luke xi. 4; to
bring to the ears of, Acts xvii. 20.
ttra, adv., then, afteruxirds.
fire, conj. See et.
4k, or, before a vowel, e|, a prep. gov.
gen., from, out of (the interior).
See 293. In composition, e/c im-
plies removal, continuance, completion,
or is of intensive force.
%Kacnos, each, every one (with gen.) th
e/cao-Toj, every one soever.
kKoLOTOTe, adv., each time, every time,
always.
eKUTdu, card, num., a hundred.
kKaTovra^T-qs, es, a hundred years old.
tKaTov7aTT\acri(au, ov, a hundredfold.
€KaTOfT<ipxv^, oif, 6, captain over a hun-
dred men, a centurion, an officer in
Roman armies.
iK-$d\\co (see )8aAA« for forms), to cast
out, send out, as labourers into a
field ; to se7id away, dismiss, reject ;
to extract or take out.
eK-^a<Ti5, ((OS, 7], a way out, event, end.
iK-^oXi], Tjs, r], a casting out, as lading
from a ship, Acts xxvii. 1 8.
iK-yafiiCo, to give in marriage, i Cor.
vii. 38, &c.
iK-yafiiaKQ), the same, Luke xx. 34, 35.
^K-yovos, OV, sprung from ; neut. plur.,
descendants, 1 Tim. v. 4.
iK-SaTravdw, w, to spend entirely ; pass,
reflex. , to expend one^s energies for
(virep), 2 Cor. xii. 15.
fK-Sexofxai, to look out for, to expect
(ews), to wait for (ace.)
f/cSTjAoy, ov, quite plain, conspicuous,
manifest, 2 Tim. iii. 9.
e/c-Svj/xew, w, to be away from, absent
from, 2 Cor. v. 6-9.
€K-5iS«/it, N.T. mid., to let out to farm.
Matt. xxi. 33.
e/c-5i-7j7eojuat, ovfiaijdep. mid. , to rehearse
particularly, tell fully. Acts xiii. 41.
iK-SiK€(a, u>, to dojusti e to, avenge (ace. ) ;
to defend (ace. and a.n6), Luke xviii. 5 ;
to punish, 2 Cor. x. 6 ; to demand
requital for (ace), /rom (ex or a.ic6).
Rev. vi. 10.
iK-UK-qcTis, eojs, rj, an avenging, vindi'
cation, punishment, Luke xviii. 7 ;
Rom. xii. 19.
cK-Si/coy, ov, 6, f), an avenger, one who
adjudges a culprit (dat. ) to punish-
ment for {iTfpi) a crime, Rom. xiii 4 ;
I Thess. iv. 6.
iK-SidoKw, to persecute, to expel by perse-
cuting, Luke xi 49 ; i Thess. ii 15,
40
VOCABULARY.
[Ik-Sotos — ^K-irXT^pworis
4K-d6T05, Of, delivered up. Acts ii. 23.
iK-5oxv, vs, 7], a toaitingfor, expectation,
Heb. X. 27.
^K-Svu, to vnclcthe, to strip off (two
aces. )
iKei, adv., there, thither.
iK€7eev, adv., from that place, thence.
iKeivos, 7], 0, pron., demons., that, tliat
one there ; used antithetically, Mark
xvi 20, and by way of emphasis,
Matt. xxii. 23. See 338, 340.
^Kelcre, adv., thither, in const, prceg..
Acts xxii. 5.
iK-Cv"^^, ^i ^^ *66^ 0M« with diligence ;
to seek for, e.g., God, or to turn to
him, Rom. iii. 11 ; to require, judi-
ciaUv, Heb. xi. 6; Luke xi. 50, 51.
iK-6aiJ.^4ca, w, N.T. pass., to be amazed,
greatly astonished, Mark ix. 15.
eK-dafi^os, ov, surprised, greatly atnazed.
Acts iii. II.
eK-6cros, ov, cast out, exposed to perish.
Acts vii. 19.
iK-Kadalpw, ist aor., (leKddapa, to purge
out, to cleanse, i Cor. v. 7 ; 2 Tim. ii. 4.
iK-Kaiw (f), to burn vehemently, as with
lust, E,om. L 27.
4K-KaK€a}, w (see iyKOuceto), to faint, to
despond through fear.
iK-K€vr4o}, a>, to pierce through, to trans-
fix, John xix. 37 ; Rev. i. 7.
4K-K\dQ>, to break off as branches from
a stem.
iK-K\eico, aw, to shut out, Rom. iii. 27 ;
Gal. iv. 27.
iKKhrjaia, as, rj {eKKoXeia), an assembly,
a congregation ; legally called, Acts
xix. 39 ; or tumultuously gathered.
Acts xix. 32, 40. In a Christian
sense, the Church as a whole, or a
church in one place, i Cor. xii. 28 ;
Acts xi. 26. So often plural, as
Acts XV. 41.
iK-K\lvca, to decline, turn away from
{and).
iK-Ko\vn$dw, w, to mdm out or away.
Acts xxvii. 42.
iK-Kofii^w, to carry out to burial, liuke
vii. 12.
iK-K&mm, (1) to cut down or off, as a
tree or a branch, Luke iiL 9 ; or as
a limb, Matt. v. 30; (2) fig., to
hinder, as prayer from being effec-
tual, I Pet. iii. 7.
CK-Kpefiafiai (mid. of eKKpe/Juivvvni), to
hang upon, or to be earnestly atten-
tive to, Luke xix. 48.
eK-\a\4o), &, to speak out, to disclose
(dat. and '6ti), Acts xxiii 22.
iK-\oiiiira>, to shine out or brightly. Matt,
xiii. 43.
€K-\avddf(i), in mid., to forget entirely,
Heb. xii. 5.
iK-\fy(o, mid. in N".T., ist aor., eje-
\e^dfji.T{v, to cjioose out for one's self,
to elect.
€K-\eliru, 2nd aor., i^ekiirou, to fail, to
cease, to die, Luke 1. 6, 9 ; Heb. i. 12.
€K\eKT6s, i], 6v, (i) chosen, elect; (2)
choice, approved.
cKXay-f), 7js, T), a choice, selection. Acts
ix. 15; the chosen ones, Rom. xi. 7.
eK-Kvtt), in pass, or mid., to become weary
in body, or despondent in mind.
^K-fxdaaw, |«, to wipe, to wipe dry, John
xi. 2.
€K-fivKTT]piC(i), to deride, intensively ; to
scoff at (ace.)
eK-v€(t> (eva-co), to withdraw, John v. 13.
iK-vf)<l>(a, to awake, as from a drunken
sleep, I Cor. xv. 34.
kKovaios, ov (€/cc6v), voluntary, spon-
taneous. Adv., -CDS, willingly, of
one^s own accord.
tK-TraXoA, adv., of old, of long standing,
2 Pet. ii. 3.
^K-veipd^w, (Tw, to put to the test, to
make trial of, to tempt. Matt. iv. 7 ;
I Cor. X. 9.
4K-ir4fiira>, to send out or forth, Acts
xiiL 4.
iK-irerdi/vvfii, ist aor., i^eveToura, to
stretch forth, as the hands in suppli-
cation, Rom. X, 21 (LXX.)
eK-viTTTw, (1) to fall from (iK) ; spoken
of stars, Mark xiiL 25 ; of flowers,
James i. 11 ; of a ship falling or
driven from its course. Acts xxv-ii. 17 ;
(2) fig., of moral lapse, as Gal. v. 4
(g''^) ; (3) to fail, abs., i Cor. xiiL 8.
€Kir\4a>, fvaw, to sail out, to sail from
{an6, fls):
4K-ir\np6tt), to fulfil entirely. Acts xiiL 3*.
iK-'ir\i}pwai5, ews, ^, entire fulJilmenU
iK-irX^o-trcD — €Xa<{>p<$s]
VOCABULARY.
41
iK-TrK-fjaarw, 2nd aor. pass., i^eir\dy7]v,
to strike xoith astonishment.
iK-TTuitt), evao), to breathe out, as the
spirit ; to expire, to die.
iK-iropevofxai, dep., to go out {airh, ck,
•napd, and ets, i-Tri, irf)6s) ; to proceed
from, as from the heart; or as a
river from its source, &c.
iK-Tropv€vw, to be given, up to lewdness,
Jude 7.
iK-TTTvcD, to reject as distasteful, Gal.
iv. 14 ; to loathe.
€/c-pt^(^co, a>, to root out or root up, Matt,
xiii. 29, XV. 13 ; Luke xvii. 6 ; Jude 12.
eK-a-raais, etas, rj, "ecstasy," (1) trance.
Acts X. 10; (2) overwhelming asto-
nishment, Mark v. 42.
iK-arpeclxa, perf. pass., i^effTpafifiai, to
turn out of a place, to corrupt, to
pervert. Tit. iii, 11.
iK-Tapdacrco, ^co, to agitate greatly. Acts
xvi. 20.
^K-nivw, vS), ist aor., i^ereiva, to stretch
out, as the hand ; to throw out, as
anchors from a vessel, Luke v. 1 3 ;
Acts xxvii. 30.
e/c-TeAew, u, eaoo, to complete, Luke
xiv. 29, 30,
iK-reveia, as, v, intentness. Acts xxvi. 7.
iK-T€vy}s, 4s, intense, vehement, Jervent.
Adv., -us, intensely, earnestly. 4k-
revea-repov, comp. as adv. , more ear-
nestly, Luke xxii, 44.
€K-ridr]fxi. (see 107), (i) to put out or
expose, as was the infant Moses, Acts
vii. 21; (2) to teach fully or accu-
rately, to expound. Acts xvdii. 26.
iK-Tivdaaoj, |co, to shake off, as dust from
the leet. Matt. x. 14.
6KT0S, 7], ov, an ox'd. num., sixth.
€kt6s, adv., generally as prep., with
gen., without, besides, except, ixrhs
€t fJl, nevertheless except, i Cor.
xiv. 5, &c.
eK-rpeiroD, to turn from, to forsake,
I Tim. V. 15.
iK-Tpi(po}, (i) to nourish, sustain, Eph.
V. 29 ; (2) to educate or train up,
Eph. vi. 4.
eK-rpufia, aros, r6, an abortive birth, an
abortion, 1 Cor. xv. 8.
iK-<p€(>(a, to carry outf as to burial, Acts
V. 6 ; or as sick persons ; to produce,
spoken of the earth, Heb. vi. 8.
eK-^evyw, to flee out from, escape (abs.,
or with €«) ; to avoid (ace.)
iK-(l>o^i(o, a>, to terrify g^-eatly, 2 Cor. x, 9.
^K-(po^os, ov, frightened, Mark ix. 6 ;
Heb. xii. 21.
€K-(pv(a, 2nd aor. pass., i^e<t>vTty, to put
forth, as a tree its leaves, Matt.
xxiv. 32.
€/c-xew, also eKxvvu ; fut., ckx^w ; ist
aor., e^e'xea (see 96, c), to pour out,
as wine spilled, Luke v. 37; as
money thrown down, John ii. 15 ;
as blood shed in sacritice. Matt.
xxvi. 28 ; to kill, by pouring out the
blood. Eig. , to shed abroad, or give
largely, E,om. v. 5 ; to rush into,
Jude II.
iK-xop^o), S), to depart from, to go out,
Luke xxi. 21.
eK-\pvxo}, to expire, to die, Acts v. 5, 10,
xii. 23.
€Kwv, ovaa, 6v, willing; used adverbially,
E,om. viii. 20 ; i Cor. ix. 17.
i\aia, as, rj, an olive tree ; its fruit, the
olive. Tb opos ruv iXaiwv, the Mount
of Olives.
%Kaiov, ov, t6, olive oU.
iAaiwv, wvos, 6, an olive grove. Olivet,
Acts i. 12.
'EAo/AtTTjs, ov, 6, an Elamite, or inha-
bitant of Elam, a region of Persia,
Acts ii. 9.
kKaaaav, or -ttwv, ov, compar. of eAoxvv
for fiiKpds, less; in quality, John
ii. 10; in age, Rom. ix. 12; indig-
nity, Heb. vii. 7. ^KarTov, adv., less,
1 Tim. V. 9.
eXaTToyeca, u, to have too little, to lack,
2 Cor. viii. 1 5 (LXX. )
iXarTdcD, u, to majce lower or inferior,
Heb. ii. 7, 9 ; pass., to decrease,
John iii. 30.
iXavvw, iAdaw, i\i\\aKa, to drive, Luke
viii. 29 ; to impel, as the winds, the
clouds, James iii. 4 ; or oars, a ship;
hence to row, John vi. 1 8.
iKacppia, as, rj, levity, inconstancy, 2 Cor.
i. 17.
i\a(pp6s, o, 6v, light, as a burden easily
borne, Matt. xi. 30 ; 2 Cor. iv. 17,
42
VOCABULARY.
[iXAxwTTos — Ijiain-oi)
4\<ixi(rTos, ri, ov, adj. (superl. of iKax^s
for iJ.iKp6s), least, in number, magni-
tude, im[)ortance.
ihaxKTTSrfpos, a, ov, a double compa-
rison, less tJian the least, Epk. iii. 8.
4\da). See iKavvco.
'EAeafop, 6, Eleazar, Matt. L 15.
?A.67|ts, ews, ^, conviction, reproof.
eXeyxos, ov, 6, evident demonstration,
proof, Heb. xi. i ; 2 Tim. iii 16.
iXiyX^i i^^ to convict, reprove, rebuke,
J ohn viii. 9 ; Luke iii. ig ; to render
manifest, to demonstrate, J ohn iii. 20;
Eph. vl II, 13.
iKtei.v6s, -n. Of, pitiable, miserable, i Cor.
XV. 19.
iXeeu, a, to Jiave compassion on, suc-
cour (ace), to show mercy ; pass,, to
obtain Tnercy.
i\€T]fio<TvvT}, 7JS, 71, pity, compassion;
in N.T., alms, sometimes plur.
iXtTifjLcop, ov, full of pity, merciful, com-
passionate.
€A€os, ovs, t6 (and ov, 6, see 32, a), pity,
act of compassion, a merciful dispo-
sition. Matt. ix. 13; mercy.
iXivQepia, as, 7}, liberty, as freedom from
the Mosaic yoke, 1 Cor. x. 29 ; Gal.
ii. 4, &c. ; from worldly lusts, &c.,
James ii. 12; from all evil, Kom.
viii. 21.
iXevdfpos, a, ov, free, as opposed to the
condition of a slave ; delivered from
obligation (often with ix, air6) ; at
liberty to (inf.) Once with dat. of
reference, Rom. vi, 20.
i\evdep6a), u, to set free (generally with
ace. and a.ir6). With modal dative.
Gal. V. 1.
i\evai5, fcoi, T] {^pxofiat), a coming, an
advent, Acts vii, 52.
i\«l>oivTivos, 7), ov, made of ivory. Rev.
xviii. 12.
*E\iaK(iix, 6 (Heb.), Eliakim, Matt. L 13 j
Luke iii. 30.
*E\U(fp, 6 (Heb.), Eliezer, Luke iii. 29.
*EA.iou5, 6 (Heb.), Eliud, Matt. i. 14.
'E\ia<iBer, 7] (Heb., Elislieba), Elizabeth,
Luke i.
*E\tff(To?os, ov, 6, ElisJui, Luke iv. 27.
f^iaaw, lid), as eiKlaffw, to roll up, as a
garment, Heb. L 12.
€\Kos, ovs, t6, a wound, an ulcer, a
sore.
e\K6a), to, to make a sore; pass,, to be
full of sores, Luke xvi. 20.
e\Kva), ao), to drag, as a net ; to bring
to justice, to draw over, to persuade,
John xii, 32. The old form of the
word was eA/fcw, impf., fT\Kov, James
ii. 6 ; Acts xxi. 30.
'EWds, a5os, 7], Hellas, Greece = Axaia,
Acts XX. 2.
"EAAtji', Tjj/oy, 6, a Greek, as distinguished
(i) from B(ip$apos, barbarian, Rom.
i. 14, and (2) from 'lov5a7os, Jew,
John vii. 3 5 ; Acts xi. 20 (best edd. ),
&c. Used for Greek proselytes to
Judaism, John xii. 20 ; Acts xvii. 4.
'E\\7]vik6s, i], 6v, Grecian, Luke xxiii 38 ;
Rev. ix. II.
'EWtjvis, i8o5, a Greek or Gentile womaUy
Mark vii. 20 ; Acts xvii. 12.
'EW7]Vi(rT^s, ov (lAATjvtXctf, to Hellenize,
or adopt Greek manners and lan-
guage), a Hellenist; oue by parent-
age and religion, but born in a
Gentile countr}-^ and speaking Greek,
Acts vi. I, ix. 29.
€\\r)viorl, adv., in the Greek language,
John xix. 20 ; Acts xxL 37.
i\-\oy4<o {iv), to cliarge to, to put to
one's account, Rom. v. 1 3 ; Philem. 18,
*E\/xo)Bdfx, d, Elmodam, Luke iii. 28.
iKTri^w, att. fut., i\7riw, istaor., ffXTrjo-o,
to expect (ace. or inf., or 8t») ; to
hope for (ace.) ; to trust in (^ir/ dat. ;
iv, once dat. only) ; to direct hope
towards (cis, ivi, ace.)
i\7ris, ISos, 7], expectation, hope, secure
confidence. Used emphatically of
the Christian hope. Met., (1) the
author, {z) tlie object ofliope.
*E\vjxas, a, 6 (from Arabic), Elymas,
i.e., a magus or sorcerer. Acts xiii 8.
*E\cot, My God! Mark xv. 34. The
word is Hebrew (Ps. xxii. 2), pro-
nounced in that language Eli, and so
written, Matt, xxvii. 46 (^A.0-
ifiavrov, tjs, ov, of myself, a reflexive
pron., found only in the gen., dat.,
and accus. cases. It is frequently
joined to active verbs, denoting
spontaneous action.
IjJL-paCvw — Iv-avT^os]
VOCABULARY.
43
i/x-^aluco, 2nd aor., ivf^-qv, part., ^fi^ds,
to go up, upon, or into, as embarking.
e/x-/8aAAw, to cant into, Luke xii. 5.
ffjL-^diTTco, to dip into, Matt. xxvi. 23 ;
John xiii. 26.
ifx-fiaTivo), to enter, to intrude, to pry
into, CoL ii. 18.
4fji.-$iPi(w, to cavjie to enter, to put on
bjard. Acts xxvii. 6.
4fi-$\eir(a, to direct the eyes to anything,
to look fixedly, to consider, to know
by inspection (ace, dat., or us).
i/j.-^pifidoixai, wfiai., dep. {^piixr], an ex-
pression of anger), to be angrily or
vehemendy moved, Mark xiv. 5 (dat, ) ;
John xi. 33, 38 ; to strongly interdict.
Matt. ix. 30 ; Mark i. 43.
ifiiw, S), ist aor. inf., ifieaai, to vomit,
to spue out, Kev. iii. 1 6.
ifj.-fiaipoij.ai, to be mad against (dat.),
Acts xxvi. II.
*Efifiavovi)\, 6, Emmanuel, a Hebrew
word signifying "God with us;" a
name of Christ, Matt. i. 23.
'Efj.iJ.aovs, 71, Emmatis, a village a short
distance from Jerusalem, Luke
xxiv. 13.
ifx-fjevw, to remain or persevere in (dat.
or iv).
'Efxij6p, 6, Emmor, or Hamor, Acts
vii. 16.
i(i6s, "ft, 6v, mine, denoting possession,
power over, authorship, right, &c.
See 336.
ifj.-iraiytx6s, ov, 6, a being mocked or
derided, Heb. ii. 36.
ifj.-TraiCco, |a>, to mock, deride, scoff at
(abs. or dat.) ; to deceive, delude,
pass.. Matt. ii. 16.
ifi-TralKTi\s, ov, 6, a scoffer, deceiver,
2 Pet. iii. 13; Jude 18.
€fj.-TrfpLiraT(co, u, "fiaca, to walk about in,
to dwell among (eV), 2 Cor. vi. 16
(LXX.)
ifj.-irifj.TrXrjfii, ifjirX^a-w, 4veir\7]aa, part.
pres., ifxniirXMv (Acts xiv. 17), to fill
up, to satisfy, as with food, &c.
(gen.)
ifx-Tvlinci), to fall into or among {us) ;
tig., to incur, as condemnation or
punishment, 1 Tim. iii. 6 ; Heb. x. 3 1.
CjU-TrAeKW, 2nd aor. pass., cVeTrAcifCTjv, to
entangle, implicate, 2 Tim. ii. 4;
2 Pet. ii. 20 (dat. of thing).
ifi-TcXi)B(ji. See ifnrifnT\r]fii.
ifj.-TT\oK-i], ris, 7), a twUting or braiding,
as of hair, 1 Pet. iii. 3.
ifi-irv4w, to breathe out (gen. ), Acts ix. i.
ifi-itopevofiai, dep,, "to go about;"
he ace to trade, to traffic, abs., James
iv. 13 ; to make gain of (ace), 2 Pet.
ii. 3.
ifx-TTopia, as, r], trade, merchandise,M3i.tt.
xxii. 5.
ifi-irdpiov, ov, t6, "emporium ;" a place
for trading, John ii. 1 6.
efi-TTopos, ov, 6, a traveller, merchant,
trader. Matt. xiii. 45 ; Kev. xviii. 3,
&c.
ifj.-irpi)da}, aw, to set on fire, to bum.
Matt. xxii. 7.
<Efj--KpoaQiv, adv., before [tfiirpoaBsv koX
oTriadiv, in front and behind. Rev.
iv. 6) ; as prep, (gen.), before, in
presence of. Matt. x. 32 ; before, in
dignity, John i. 15, 27.
ffi-irrvo), acD, to spit upon (dat. or us).
ifj.-<pav7]s, is, rnanifest (dat.), Actsx. 40;
Kom. X. 20.
ifj.-(payiC(a, iata, to make manifest (ace.
and dat. ) ; to s/iow plainly (3t<, or
prepp. TTpns, irepl, &c.)
efx-<po^os, ov, terrified, afraid, Luke
xxiv. 5, 37,
ifi-(puad<a, w, to breathe upon, ace, John
XX. 22.
%fj.-<pvTos, ov, engrafted, James i. 2 1.
iv, prep. gov. dat., t^i," generally as
being or resting in ; within, among.
See 2 9 5 . iv-in composition has the
force of in, upon, into. It is changed
before 7, k, and %, into ^7-; before
B, tr, <p, and /*, into ifx- ; and before
A, into i\-. The v is, however, re-
stored before the augment in verbs.
iv-ayKoXiCofiai, to take up into one's
arms, Mark ix. 36, x. 16.
iv-dXios, ov {a\s), being or living in the
sea, marine, James iii. 7.
iv-avTi, adv., as prep, with gen., in the
presence of, before.
iv-avTios, a, ov, over against, contrary,
said of the wind, Acts X3:\di. 4; ad-
verse, IcjstUe, Acts xxvi. 9. Neut.,
44
VOCABULABY.
[Iv-dpxonai — lw€<Jt
^vavrlov, adv. as prep, "with gen., in
the presence of^ Luke xxiv. i6; Acts
vii. lo.
ip-oipxafiai, to begin, Gal. iii. 3 ; Phil. i. 6.
€v-8iT}s, es, in want, destitute, needy,
Acts iv. 34.
ev-deiyfia, aros, t6, an indication, proof,
or manifest token, 2 Thess. i. 5.
iv-SeiKw/xi, N. T. mid. , to show, to mani-
fest, Rom. ix. 17, &c.; implying
action, 2 Tim. iv. 14.
ft/Sei^is, €0)5, 7), a declaration, made
evident by deed, Rom. iii. 25 ; 2 Cor.
viii. 24; a certain dgn, Phil. i. 28.
%v8iKa, oly at, rd, eleven, ot ivSeKo, the
Eleven, i.e., apostles.
cvSe/caTos, tj, ov, eleventh.
iu-Sixofiai, dep., to admit, used imper-
sonally. ovK ivSex^Tai, it is not ad-
missible or possible, Luke xiii. 33.
iu-S-rifiea), w, to remain at home ; to stay
or dwell in any place, 2 Cor. v. 6.
iv-Si5v(TK(i), mid., to clothe one's self with,
ace. See ivSvva.
tv-SiKos, ov, agreeable to justice, right,
righteous, Rom. iii. 8 ; Heb. ii. 3.
iv-S6iJ.r](ns, €«$, r], a structure, a building.
Rev. xxi. 18.
iu-5o^d(a), au, to glorify, to honour,
2 Thess. i. 10, 12.
<eV'loi,os, ov, adorned with honour, glo-
rious ; of persons, had in honour,
I Cor. iv. 10 ; of external appear-
ance, splendid, Luke vii. 25.
^c-Su/io, aros, t6, a garment, raiment.
iv-5vvafx6(t>, S), to strengthen, to furnish
withjJower ; pass., to acquire strength.
iv-8i)v(a and ivhva, to clothe or to invest
with (two aces.) ; mid., to put on, to
clotlie 0'ne^s self with (ace, ) ; often
fig., to invest with ; to enter stealthily
into, 2 Tim. iii. 6.
f^v-8vai$, cwy, 7], a putting on or wearing
of clothes, I Pet. iii. 3.
iv-fSpa, OS, r], an ambush, a snare. Acts
xxiii. 16, XXV. 3.
iv-fdpfvw, to walch, to entrap, to lie in
ambush for (ace), Luke xi. 54; Acts
xxiii. 21.
iv-et\((», cD, ist aor., iv(i\tj<Ta, to roll up,
to ur.-ap in (ace. aud dat.), Mark
XV. 46.
ev-fifii, to be in, to have a place in, Luke
xi. 41. TO iv6vTa, such things cls are
in [tJie platter], ver. 39, or such as ye
have, i. e. , according to your ability.
For eveo-Tt impers., see eyt.
%veKa or eVe/cev, sometimes e'lvcKev, prep,
adv., gen., because of, by reason of,
on account of, Luke vi. 22 ; Matt.
V. 10; 2 Cor. vii. 12. ov '4v€K€v,
because ; rlvos 'dveKcv ; to what end 1
iv-epyeia. as, 7), energy, efficacy, effectual
operation.
iv-epy4(o, a>, to exert one's power, to work
in one, as Gal. ii. 8 ; trans., to accom-
plish, as I Cor. xii. 1 1 ; mid. , to be
effective, to be in action. Part.,
ivepyovfifVT}, James V. 16, earnest.
iv-cpyTjfia, wros, t6, working, effect; plur.
with gen., 1 Cor. xii 6, 10.
iv-epy-fjs, 4s, effectual, energetic, i Cor.
xvi. 9 ; Heb. iv. 12 ; Philem. 6.
iv-€<TTws, perf. participle of ivlarrjui.
€v-€v-\oyew, t2, to bless, to distinguish by
blessings. Acts iii. 25 ; Gal. iii. 8.
4v-4x(a, [i) to hold in, entangle, only iu
pass. (dat. ), Gal. v. i ; (z)to be angry
with (dat.), Markvi. 19; Lukexi. 53.
ivdaSe, adv., (i) hitlier, to this place;
(2) ?iere, in this place.
iv-evfifoixai, ovfiai, dep. pass., to revolve
in mind, to think upon. Matt. i. 20.
iv-dvfiTjais, (COS, i), tlunight, refection,
contrivance.
%vi, elliptical for evean, impers., there
is in, Col. iiL II ; James i. 17.
iviavrSs, ov, &, a year, Jolm xi. 49, 51 ;
any definite time, Luke iv. 19.
iv-la-TTifit, to be present, to be at Jiand;
perf. part., ^vearrj/cwj, sync, ivcards,
impending, or present, to eVefrrdiTO,
present i/tmgrs, opjwsed toTa/u€AAo»/To,
things to come, Rom. viii. 38 ; i Cor.
iii. 22. See also GaL i. 4; Heb.
ix. 9.
iv-tnxvoi, to be invigorated, Actsix. 19;
trans., to strengthen, Luke xxii. 43.
(vvaros, 7], ov (or ivaros), ninth
(vv4a, ol, ai, rd, nine, Luke xvii. 17.
(VffvTiKovTa-cvvfa, ninety-nine, Luke
XV. 4, 7.
ivvfos, ov (or 4v(6s), dumb, speec/uess,
as with amazement, Acts ix. 7,
iv-vev(a — Ig-aipo)]
VOCABULARY.
45
iy-vfico, to ash or signify by beckoning
towards any one (dat. ), Luke i. 62.
€p-voia, as, r] {vovs), "what is in the
mind," intention, purpose.
ev-vofios, ov, under law, i Cor. ix. 21;
according to law. Acts xix. 39.
iv-vvxos, ov {vi)^), in the night, neut. as
adv., Mark i. 35.
€v-0LKe<a, S), to dwell in, to inhabit (eV).
hdr-ns, TTjTos, 7) (efs), unity, concord,
Eph. iv. 3, 13.
cV-oxAea>, &, to disturb, to occasion
tumult, Heb. xii. 15.
ey-oxos, ov, bound by or in (gen.); guilty
of (gen. of the crime, or of that
which is violated) ; exposed to (dat.
of court, gen. of punishment, ets of
the place of punishment).
fv-Ta\fia, oTos, t6, a commandment, an
institute. Matt. xv. 9 ; Col. ii. 22.
iv-ra(l)id((o, to prepare for burial, as by
washing, swathing, adorning, anoint-
ing the corpse, Matt. xxvi. 12.
iv-racpiaafiSs, ov, 6, the preparation of
a corpse for burial, John xii. 7.
eV-TfAAct), in N.T. only mid. and pass.;
fut. mid., ivTeXovfjLai ; perf., ivre-
raXfiat, to charge, to command, to
commit (dat. of pers., or irptJs with
ace.)
^vT^vQ^v, adv., henjce; from this place
or cau^e, repeated John xix. 18 ; ow
this side and tJiat.
^v-T€v^is, eas, % prayer for another, or
intercession, i Tim. ii. i ; sometimes
supplication for one's self, i Tim. iv. 5.
ev-Tt>os, ov, held in renown ; so precious,
highly esteemed, Luke xiv. 8 ; 1 Pet.
ivTo\i), ris, 7), a divine precept or prohi-
bitutn ; of God's commands, 1 Cor.
vix. iq; Christ^ s precepts or teachings,
I Cor. xiv. 37 ; i Tim. vi. 14 ; tradi-
tions of the Rabbis, Tit. i. 14. al
ivToKai, the commandments, i.e., the
ten.
4v-T6Trios, ov, 6 (prop, adj.), an inha-
bitant. Acts xxi. 12.
ivT6s, adv. as prep., with gen., within,
rb ivrSs, the interior. Matt, xxiii. 26.
iv Tpewd), rpci), fut. mid. , ivrpawiiffofiai ;
2nd aor. pass., iverpdinjv, to put to
shame, i Cor. iv. 14; mid., to revei^
ence, to be in awe of. Matt. xxi. 37.
4v-Tp4^a), to nourish in (dat.) ; pass.,
fig. , 1 Tim. iv. 6 ; nurtured in.
ev-Tpo/xos, ov, terrified, trernbling through
fear, Acts vii. 32 ; Heb. xii. 21.
iv-rpoir^, 7js, r], a putting to shame, i Cor.
vi. 5, XV. 34.
iv-rpv(pa.co, w, to live luxuriously, to ban-
quel, to revel (with h), 2 Pet. ii. 13.
iv-Tvyxdvca, to come to, to address ; with
virep (gen. ), to intercede for ; with
Kard (gen. ), to accuse or complain of
iv-Tv\i<T(T(o, |a), to swathe, to wrap up,
to roll or fold together (ace. and dat.)
iv-Tvir6(o, a>, to engrave, sculpture, 2 Cor.
iii. 7.
iv-v^pi(ca, (Tci), to treat contemptuously or
in despite, Heb. x. 29.
iv-vTrvid(oiJ.ai, dep. pass., to dream (cog-
nate ace). Acts ii. 17; to conceive
wild or impure thoughts, Jude 8.
iv-virviov, ov, t6, a dream. Acts ii. 17.
ivdmiov (neut. of hdinnos, from iv uirl,
in view), as prep., with gen., before,
in sight or presence of Luke i. 17;
Rev. iii. 9. ivdnriov tov ©eov, in the
sight of God, Rom. xiv. 22 ; used in
obtestation, i Tim. v. 21. x"P'^
ivctiiriov TOV ®€ov (Acts vii. 4), favour
with God.
'Evds, 6, Enos, Luke iii. 38.
iv-wTiCofiai, dep. mid. {iv utIois, in the
ears), to listen to, Acts ii. 14.
'Ej/wX? 0, Enoch, Luke iii. 37 ; Jude 14.
e|, prep. See e/c.
el, 01, al, TO, card, num., six.
i^-ayyeWo}, to declare abroad, celebrate,
I Pet. ii. 9.
i^-ayopd^o), to buy or redeem from (ck).
Gal. iii. 13. rhv Kaip6v (Eph. v. 16),
buying bach, i.e., redeeming the
opportunity /rom being lost.
€|-a7<», 2nd aor., iii]ya'yov, to lead OUt,
to send forth, Mark viii. 23 ; Acts
vii. 40 (with e|cB, e'/c, els).
i^aipew, 0} (see 103, i), to take or pluck
out. Matt. V. 29 ; mid., to select or
separate. Acts xxiii. 27.
i^-aipa> (see 92), to take out or away;
to expel or excommunicate^ 1 Cor.
V. 13.
46
VOCABULARY.
[^-aiT^O) 6^-OpKlO-TTJS
€|-ajTea>, w, N.T., mid., to require, to
ask for, Luke xxii. 31.
i^-ai<pv7]s, adv., s-uddenly, unexpectedly,
Mark xiii. 36; Luke ii. 13.
i^-aKo\ovdea, cS, to follow, to persist in
following, to conform to (with dat. )
i^McSffitn, ai, o, six hundred.
i^-a\ei^(i), to wipe out, obliterate, E.ev.^
iii, 5 ; Acts iii. 19; to wipe away,
B.9V. vii. I -7 (uTr6 or 6/c).
i^-d?\J^ofiai, to leap forth or up. Acts iii. 8.
i^-ayd-(TTa<Tis, em, 7] (the ^ intensive
and emphatic), « resurrection, Phil.
iii. 1 1 (followed by 4k, Lchm., Ti-ch.)
i^-ava-TfWo), to spring up, to shoot forth,
^ as plants or corn, Mark iv. 5.
i^-av-l(TTT]iJii, (1) trans., to raise up, as
offspring, Luke xx. 28 ; (2) 2nd aor.
intrans., to rise up, to stand forth ^
Acts XV. 5.
i^-avardo, w, to deceive utterly, to seduce
from truth, E,om. vii. 1 1 ; 1 Cor. iii. 1 8,
i^diriva, adv. (= i^ai(pjrr}s), unexpect-
edly, Mark ix. 8.
i^-a-iropcofiai, o'lixcu, dep., to be utterly
toithout resource, to be in utmost per-
plexity, 2 Cor. i. 8, iv. 8.
i^-avo-ffTeWco, to send forth, Acts
viL iz; to send away peremptorily,
Luke XX. 10, II.
i^-aprlCa, (i) to complete. Acts xxi. 5;
(2) to furnish tJvoroughly for {vpos,
ace), 2 Tim, iii. 17.
i^-aarpdiTTa}, to glisten, as lightning;
of raiment, Luke ix. 29.
i^-avrrjs, adv. {oipas), from iliat very time,
instantly, Mark vi. 25 ; Acts x. 33.
i^-eyflpu), to raise up, as from death,
1 Cor. vi. 14 ; to cause to exist, spoken
of Pharaoh, Rom. ix. 17.
?|-€tf« {(Ipu, see 111), to go out. Acts
xiii. 4^1 xvii. 15.
f^-fifii {elfii). See (^(ffri.
i^-f\4yxo, to convict, to rebuke sternly,
to punish, Jude 15.
4^-(\K(o, to draw out from the right
way, James i. 14.
i^-fpafia, aros, t6, tlwbt which is vomited,
2 Pet. ii. 22.
i^fpfvvdw, w, to search diligently, i Pet.
i. 10.
i^-(pXOfiM (see 103, 3)» to go or to come
out of. (with gen. or 4k, aTrh, t|w,
irapd) ; to go away, to depart, to issue
or to spring from ; to descend from,
Heb. vii. 5 ; to escape from ; to go
forth, as false prophets, &c. Used
of a rumour, to be divulged or spread
abroad; to emanate, as thoughts
from the heart, healing power from
the Saviour; to go out, i.e., vanish,
as expiring hope, Acts xvi. 19.
^e<TTi, part, neut., 4^6v (impers. from
c^ez/it), it is lawful. Matt. xiv. 4 ; it
is becoming, Acts xvi. 21; it is pos-
sible. Matt. XX. 15. The part, is
used in the same sense, with or with-
out subst. verb. Matt. xii. 4 ; 2 Cor.
xii. 4 (dat. and inf.)
l|-6Ta^«, to enquire, to ask, John xxi. 12;
to examiiie strictly. Matt. ii. 8.
€|-ij76'o/ia(, ovfjuu, dep. mid., (i) to
narrate fully and accurately, Luke
xxiv. 35; (2) to expound, as a teacher,
Johni. 18.
ki^Kovra, ot, at, rd, sixty.
t^vs, adv. (ex«), in order, successively.
V Hvs (rjfiepa), t/ie day follounng.
^|-7?xe«> <^, only in pass. K.T., to he
sounded forth, propagated vridely^
1 Thess. i. 8.
€|i4, 6«s, ^ (^X'^)* habit, use, Heb. v. 14.
c{-I(rT77/it, -lardu and -larTdviD (see 107),
* ' to remove from the (natural) state, "
(1) trans., to astonish, Luke xxiv. 22;
Acts viii. 9 ; (2) 2nd aor., perf. and
mid., intrans., to be astonished, con*
founded, to be beside onels self, 2 Cor.
V. 13.
^|-t(rxy«, to be perfectly able, Eph. iii. 18.
^l-odos, ov, 7}, "exodus," a going oiUf
Heb. xi. 22 ; departure, as from life,
Luke ix. 31 ; 2 Pet. L 15.
4^-oKo6pfvu, to destroy utterly. Acts
iii. 23.
4^-ofio\oyeQ}, u, to confess fully, to make
acknowledgment of, as of sins, &c. ;
in mid. , to acknowledge benefits con-
ferred, to praise (with dat.) Once,
to promise, Luke xxii. 6.
4^-opKiCo, to adjure, pxU to oath, Matt.
XX vL 63.
i^-opKiar-fts, ov, 6, one who puts to oath
or adjureSf "exorcist," Acta xix. 13.
kt-opva<r(a — lir-av-a"y«J
VOCABULARY.
47
il-opvacu, |a>, to dig out. Gal. iv. 15;
hence, to force vp, Mark ii. 4.
i^-ovZiviu, or i^ouQivica, « (ouSe^s), to set
at nought, to treat with cordempt,
Perf. pass, part., i^ovdevT]/u.evos, con-
temned, disesteemed, i Cor. i. 28, vi. 4.
i^-ov7\ev6(i}, u), as preceding, Mark ix. 12.
i^-ovaia, as, rj (e^eo-rt), {1) power, ability,
John xix. 11; (2) liberty, licence,
privilege, right, Rom. ix. 21; (3) com-
mission, authority. Matt. xxi. 23.
(4) at i^ouaiai, the powers, i.e., rulers,
magistrates, Luke xii. 1 1 ; angels,
good and bad, E|)h. i. 21, vi. 12.
In I Cor. xi. 10, i^oualav, emblem of
power, or subjection to the power of a
husband, i. e. , the veil.
il-ovcna^w, to have right over, to exercise
authority over (gen. ) ; pass. , to he
under the power of (uttJ).
^^-oxh, Vi, V, eminence, distinction. In
the phrase /car i^oxv^, hy way of
distinction. Acts xxv. 23.
i^-vvi/i^ca, (TO), to wake from sletp, John
xi. II.
e^-vTTj/os, ov, roused out of sleep. Acts
xvi. 27.
e|w, adv., abs., or as prep, with geu.,
without, outside, ol e|a), tliose with-
out; as out of the Church, or out of the
number of Apostles, &c. Used often
after verbs of motion compounded
with e/c.
f^coflei/, adv. of place, from without, rh
e^wdiv, the outside, ol eiwdeu, those
from without, i.e., not Christians,
I Tim. iii. 7. As prep, geu., Mark
vii. 1 5 ; Kev. xi. 2.
l|-a)0€w, w, (a(Tw, to drive out, expel.
Acts vii. 45 ; ^0 propel, as a vessel,
Actb xxvii. 39.
i^wrepos, a, ov (comp. of e|«), outer, in
the phrase " outer darkness," Matt,
viii. 12.
loi/ca. See €?««,
eoprdCia, to keep or celebrate a feast,
I Cor. V. 8.
lopTT], Tjs, 7], a solemn feast or festival.
Used of Jewish feasts, John vii, 2 ;
especially of the Passover, with its
accompanying feast of unleavened
bread, Liike ii. 41, xxii. i.
iir-ayyeKla, as, rj, (i) a message, com-
mission. Acts xxiii. 21; (2) a pi'O'
mise, as 2 Cor. i. 20, generally ])lur. ;
the promises, specially, e.gr., to Abra-
ham, or those of the Gospe], 2 Tini.
i. i; (3) met., the thing ])romise.d.
Acts ii. 33; Heb. xi. 13, 33, 39, &Cf
irr-ayyeWco, mid. in N.T., except pass.,
Gal. iii. 19, (1) to promise, with dat.,
or ace. and dat., or inf., once cog-
nate ace, 1 John ii. 25 ; (2) to make
profession or avowal of (ace.), i Tim.
ii, 10, vi. 21.
iir-dyyeAfxa, aros, t6, a promise, 2 Pet.
i. 4, iii. 13.
i-K-dyoi, to bring upon, z Pet. ii, i, 5 ;
so to charge (eVi, pers. ) with and make
answerable for (ace), Acts v. 28.
iir-ayocviCofiai, to contend or strive ear-
ntstly for (dat.), Jude 3.
4Tr-aQpoi((a, pass., to gather togetlier, to
crowd, Luke xi. 29.
'ETT-aiVcTos, ov, 6, Epmnetus, Rom. xvi. 5.
iir-aiv^w, u, earca, ist aor., iir/jueaa, to
commend, to praise, Luke xvi. 8 ;
I Cor. xi. 2.
iiT-aivos, ov. 6, commendation, Rom. ii. 29 ;
praise, Eph. i. 6, 12, 14; Phil. i. 11.
itr-alpca (see 92), to raise up, as hoist-
ing a sail, Acts xxvii. 40 ; to lift up,
as the eyes, the hands in prayer, the
head in courage, the heel against, 01
in opposition ; pass., to be lifted up,
to become elated, z Cor. xi. 20. Of
the ascension of Christ, Acts i. q.
iir-currxvyofxai, to he ashamed, abs. ;
to be ashamed of (ace. or eTn', dat. )
€7r-aiTew, a, to beg, to osk alms, Luke
xvi. 3.
iir-aKo\ovQ€(i>, u>, to follow (dat.) ; fig.,
to imitate, 1 Tim. v. 24. ; i Pet. ii. 2 1 ;
to pursue, of conduct, i Tim. v. 10;
part., attendant, Mark xvi. 20.
iir-aKovo), to hearken to favourably (gen.
pers.), 2 Cor. vi. 2 (LXX.)
iv-aKpodofxai, ufiai, to hear, listen to (gen.
pers). Acts xvi. 25.
cTrdv, conj. (eVei 6.v), if after that, when.
Matt. ii. 8.
iir-diayKss, adv., of necessity, necessarily
(with art.). Acts xv. 28.
eir-ay-dyet, trans., fo put (a vessel) out
kh
48
VOCABULARY. [€ir-ava-[xt[iW]crK« — citi-PoXXm
to sea, Luke v. 4 j intrans., to return.
Matt. xxi. 18.
i'ir-aya-iJ.ifj.vi](TKa), to remind, put in re-
membrance (ace), Rom. xv. 15.
hc-ava-iravo^ai, to rest upon {iiri, ace),
Luke X. 6 ; to rdy, to trust in (dat,),
Rom. ii. 17.
iir-av-epxo/Mai, to come back, return,
Luke X. 3 5.
4rr-av-larrifii, N.T., mid., to rise up
against (eVt, ace), Matt. x. ai.
iir-av-6pGci}(jLs, cws, ^, correction, reforma-
tion, 2 Tim. iii. 1 6.
iv-dvo), adv. abs., or as prep, gen.,
above, upon ; more than, in price or
number ; sxiperior to, in authority.
iir-apK€(a, w, eaai, "to suffice for," to re-
lieve, suppo7't {(\a,t.), I Tim. v. 10, 16.
i:r-apx'^a, as, tj, o. province, division of
the Roman empire, Acts xxiii. 34.
€7r-oi;Xjs, ews, 7}, a dwelling, a habitation.
Acts i. 20 (LXX.)
i-K-avpiov, adv., on tlie morrow, rf
{vfjLepa.) iiravpiov, on the next day.
iir-a\no-(p(i)p(f. See avrS-^wpos.
*E'!ra<ppas, a, 6, Epaphras of Colossae,
Co], i. 7, iv. 12 ; Philem. 23 (contr.
irouxEpaphrodituSjhnt different from
St. Paul's companion of that name. )
iv-acpplCo, to foam up or out (ace),
Jude 13.
*ETra<pp65iT05, ou, 6, Epaphroditus, a
Macedonian, Phil. ii. 25, iv. 18.
iit-f-yiipu, to raise up, to excite against
(eTTi, ace, or kotc^, gen. ), Acts xiiL 50,
xiv. 2.
ivfi, conj., (i) of time, when, Luke
viL I (ree) only ; (2) of reason, since,
because, seeing that.
iiTfi-Si}, conj., since truly, inasmuch as.
Matt. xxi. 46 ; Phil. ii. 26, &e In
Luke vii. i, as a particle of time,
edd. for eVel Se.
iirei-bi)-iTep, conj., since verily, foras-
much as, Luke i. i.'
(TT-uSoy. See i(pop<k<a.
tw-fifii (€?Mt, 111), to come after, to
follow ; in part. , iiridav, ovaa, 6v, fol-
lowing.
ivei-irtp, conj. , Mnce indeed, Rom. iii. 30.
iir-(i(r-a-\(»'yh, r}s, v, a bnnging in, intro-
duction^ lieb. vii. 9. '
iit-iira, adv., thereupon, Uiereafler ;
marking succession of time, as Gal.
i. 1 8 ; also of order, 1 Cor. xv. 46 ;
I Thess. iv. 17.
€7r-€/c€i»/o (/Lie'pTj), adv., with gen., beyond^
as to place. Acts vii. 43.
iir-iK-Ti'ivo), in mid., to stretch forwards
to, (dat.) Phil. iii. 14.
iir-€v-5vTr]5, ov, an upper garmenty John
xxi. 7.
iir-iv-5vw, in mid., to put on, as ar
upper garment, 2 Cor. v. 2, 4.
i-jr-€pxofiai, to come upon, arrive at
{iiri, ace ) ; to m/xke an assault, Luke
xi. 22; to liappen ; part., approach-
ing, Eph. ii. 7 ; Luke xxi. 26.
iir-epwrdw, S>, {i) to interrogate, to ques-
tion (two aces., or ace and -jrepi, gen.,
or with el, rls, &c.) ; to question
judicially, John xviii. zi ; to enquire
after God, Rom. x. 20 ; (2) to request
of (a,cc. and inf.), Matt. xxi. i.
4ir-€pciT7]fm, aros, t6 (i Pet. iii. 21),
probably enquiry after God ; " the
seeking after God in a good and pure
conscience " (Alford).
iir-4xco, {1) to apply (the mind) to, dat.,
Acts iii. 5 ; (2) to hold out, to exhibit,
Phil, ii. 16; (3) "to detain (one's
self)", to tarry, Acts xix. 22.
iv-TjpedCco, to injure, to treat despite-
fully. Matt. V. 44; to traduce, to
accuse falsely (ace of charge), iPet.
iii. 16.
iiri, a preposition governing gen., dat.,
or ace General signification, upon.
For its various applications, see 305.
iiri-, in composition, signifies motion
upon, towards, or ajairist; rest on,
over, or at; addition, succession, re-
petition, renewed; and it is often
intensive.
imfiaiyo), to go upon or embark, to
mount, to come to or into {inl ace.
€ts, or simple dat. )
ivi-^dXKn, (i) trans., to cast on or over,
Mark xi. 7 ; (o put on, as a patch on
.a garment, Luke v. 36 ; (2) intrans.,
to rush violently on, Mark iv. 37 ; te
fx the mijid stedfastly on anything.
Mark xiv. 72; (3) part., ivifidWwy,
falling to, Luke xiv. 12.
ein-Papea) — lirt-XeYO)]
VOCABULARY.
49
fiTi-^apfii}, S>, to burden; fig., to he
chargeable to, -z Cor. ii. 5.
iTTL-aiBa^w, to pvt or to set upon, as on
a beast to ride, Luke x. 34.
e7rt-;SAe7rft>, to look upon with favour
(with iiri), Luke i. 48 ; James iL 3.
eVi-jSATjAio, aros, r6, a patch on a gar-
ment, Matt. ix. 16.
€7rt-)8oaa), w, to cry aloud. Acts xxv, 24.
iiri-^ovxi], Tjs, ^, a design against, a plot,
an ambush. Acts ix. 24, xx. 19 (plur.)
iTri-yaixl3p€va}, to marry by right of
affinity (ace), Matt. xxii. 24.
eTri-7eios, op, earthly, belonging to the
earth, tqi €7rt7eja, earthly things.
iTri-yluofjLai, to arise or spring up, as a
wind, Acts xxviii. 13.
iTn-yivcitiaKco, {1) to know clearly, under-
stand, discern. Matt. vii. 16, 20;
(2) to acknowledge, i Cor. xvi. 18;
(3) ^o recognise; (4) to learn (oti),
become acquainted with (ace. )
^iri-'^uunns, €»5, 7}, knowledge, acknow-
ledgment, Horn. iii. ao ; i Tim. ii. 4.
iiTL-ypacpT], 77s, 7], an inscription, a super-
scriptio7i, Luke xx. 24, xxiii. 38.
iiTi-ypdcpw, to inscribe, engrave, write
upon, Mark XV. 26; Rev. xxi. 12.
eVi-SeiKWjUt (see ]14), (i) to show, ex-
hibit; (2) to demonstrate, prove by
argument.
(Tri-Se^ofjiai, to receive kindly, 3 John 10.
iTTL-h7]fji4w, to), to sojourn, as foreigners in
a country, Acts ii. 10, xvii. 21.
iiriSia-Td(rcroiJ.ai, to superadd. Gal. iii. 15.
tTri-5toto>,ut, to deliver, to give up (ace.
and dat.), Matt. vii. 9; Acts xv. 30.
iiTL-di-opOow, to set or bring into order
(additionally), Titus i. 5.
iTTi'Svu, to set, as the sun, Eph. iv. 26.
iiri-e'iKeia, ai, i], clemency, gentleness,
Acts xxiv. 4 ; 2 Cor. x. i.
iiri-eiKijs, es, gentle, mild, kind, Phil,
iv. 5 ; I Tim. iii. 3.
iiri-C7]T4w, u, to seek earnestly or con-
tinuously (ace. of pers. or thing; also
TTipl, gen. or inf.) ; to beg earnestly,
to desire.
iTTi-davdrios, ov, appointed to death,
condemned, 1 Cor. iv. 9.
ini-deais, eoss, 7], a laying on, as of
hands, Acts viii. 18.
iTri-dvfj,€oo, £, to desire, to long for, to
covet, Eom. vii. 7 ; to lust after. Matt.
V. 28 (Luke xxii. 15; see 280, h.)
tTri-dvixriri]s, ov, 6, an eager desirer of,
I Cor. X. 6.
iTTi-Qvyiia, as, t), desire, eagerness for ;
often in a bad sense, inordinate desire,
lu^t, cupidity.
iiri-KadiCw, to seat upon or sit upon.
Matt. xxi. 7. (Trans, or intrans.,
according to the reading.)
im-icaXeiv, a, icu, to call upon, to call
by name, to invoke in prayer. Acts
vii. 59 (abs.); Eom. x. 12, 14 (ace.
or €is) ; mid., to appeal to (ace.).
Acts xxv. II ; pass,, to be called or
surnamed, Luke xxii. 3 ; Acts xv. 17.
iiri-KdAvijLfjia, aros, t6, a covering, a cloak,
a pretext, 1 Pet. ii. 16.
iTTi-KoKvirTw, to cover, of sins; to hide,
to give over to oblivion, llom. iv. 7
(LXX.)
iiti-Kardparos, ov, accursed, doomed to
punishment or destruction, John vii. 49;
Gal. iii. 13 (LXX.)
iiri-K€tfjLaL, to lie upon (dat)., John xi. 38,
xxi. 9 ; so to pr^ess upon, as the mul-
titude upon Christ, Luke v. i ; as a
tempest on a ship. Acts xxvii. 20;
fig., to be laid on, as necessity,
1 Cor. ix. 16 ; to be laid or imposed
upon, as by a law, Heb. ix. 10; to be
urgent with entreaties, Luke xxiii. 23.
'EiriKovpeioi, ov, 6, an Epicurean, a fol-
lower of Epicurus, Acts xvii. 18.
ivi-Kovpia, as, rj {Kovpos, help), assistanc<^
help, aid. Acts xxvi. 22,
iiri-Kpiv(i3, to decide, to give judgment
(ace. and inf.), Luke xxiii. 24.
iin-hafi^dvw, N.T., mid., to take hold
of (gen.), as in kindness. Acts ix. 27 ;
Heb. ii. 16; to seize, as a prisoner,
Acts xxi. 30, 33 ; met., to lay hold
of, so as to possess, i Tmh. vi. 12, 19,
iiri-Xayddt/ofiai, dep., to ^vgef {iwi.)^
Mark viii. 14 ; to neglect, Heb. vi 10
(gen. or ace. ) ; PhiL iii. 14, part. ,
perf. pass. iTri\e\r]afiiyov, forgotten,
Luke xii. 6.
e7ri-A.e'7w, in pass., tobenamed or caUed,
John V. 2; mid., to clioose, Acta
XV, 40.
50
VOCABULARY.
[Iiri-Xetirw — cirt-trroXTJ
eVj-XeiVcu, not to suffice, to fail, Heb.
xi. 32.
i7ri-\r)Tixovr], ris, '/), forgetfulness, James
i. 35. See 257.
eVt'-AoiTTos, ov, remaining, i Pet. iv. 2.
iiri-XvcLs, i(Ds, tj, solution, interpreta-
tion, 2 Pet. i. 20 ; either, " No pro-
phecy of Scripture is self-interpret-
ing," or "of exclusive interpreta-
tion," i.e., to the immediate outward
event alone. See on X^tos.
ini-Kvo), to solve, explain, interpret, Mark
iv. 34 ; to determine on, as a debated
question, Acts xix. 39.
eTTt-fiapTvpicD, w, to testify earnestly, i Pet.
V. 12.
iTri-(j.4\fia, as, v, ccire for, study, atten-
tion. Acts xxvii. 3.
iin-fieKofxai and toixai, ovfiai, to take
care of (gen.), Luke x. 34; i Tim.
iii. 5.
•irt-jU6\ws, adv., carefully, diligently,
Luke XV. 8.
itri-fiivw, {i)to remain, abide, continue;
(2) met., to he constant, ov persevering
in (dat.)
eVt-veuw, to nod, to assent by nodding,
i.e., to consent. Acts xviii. 20.
iirivoia, as, tj, tliought, device, purpose
of mind. Acts viii. 22.
i-Ti-opKeca, u, to swear falsely, Matt.
V. 33-
firi-opKos, ov, perjured, i Tim. i. 10.
ivL-ovaios, ov, adj., enough for support,
daily. Matt. vi. 11; Luke xi. 3.
fTrt-iriTTTOj, to throw oneself upon, to fall
on, to recline on (^irf, ace), rwih
upon, Mark iii. 10 (dat); fig., to
come upon (dat., or iiri, ace. or
dat.), as an emotion, &o., Luke
i. 12; Acts viii. 16.
*i-v\i}tra<i), to rebuke, to chide, i Tim.
v. I.
Jnri-irod4w, w, to deMre earnestly, to long
for or after (inf. or ace); as 2 Cor.
V. 2, to lust, abs. ; James iv. 5.
ini-'K6Hii](ns. e»s, 1), veJiement desire,
strmig affection, 2 Cor. vii. 7, 1 1.
iirL-Tr6QinTos, ov, greatly desired, lunged
for, PhiL iv. i.
ini-irodla, as, 77, like iimrSCrjais, strong
desire, 'UioPi. xv. 23.
iiri-TTopevofjLaL, dep., mid., to come to
(irpos), Luke viii. 4.
iirip-^dirTO), to sew to, or upon, Mark
ii. 21 (iiri, dat.)
iTrip-^ijTTU}, to cast, or fing upon, Luke
xix. 35 ; of care cast upon God,
I Pet. V. 7 {iiri, ace.)
iiri-(T7)pLos, ov, remarkable, distinguished,
in either a bad or good sense, Matt.
xxvii. 16; Rom. xvi. 7.
ijn-(TiTiaix6s, ov, 6, victvxds, food, pi^o-
vision, Luke ix. 12.
iiTi-a-Keirrofiai, dep., to look upon, to
visit. Acts vii. 23 ; Matt. xxv. 36,
43; of God, Acts XV. 14; to look
out, for selection, Acts vi. 3.
ini-jKr}v6(i}, w, "to tix one's tabernacle
upon," to dwell, or remain on {irrl,
ace. ), 2 Cor. xii. 9.
eTTi-ffKidCu}, to oversJiadow (ace. or
dat.). Matt. xvii. 5 ; Acts v. 15.
See Luke i. 35.
4iri-aKoir4(t), w, to act as iiriaKoiros, to
take diligent care, to superintend,
I Pet. V. 2; ix-f], lest, Heb. xii. 15.
eiri-crKOTrl}, rjs, ^, (i) office, charge, Acts
i. 20 ; LXX.; (2) t/ie office, or work,
of one who oversees a church, i Tim.
iii. I ; (3) visitation for kind and
gracious purposes, Luke xix. 44;
I Pet. ii. 12.
irrl-a-KOTTos, ov, S, (i) one who inspects,
or takes care of, 1 Pet. ii. 25 ; a
superintendent in a churcli, "bishop,"
Acts XX. 28 ; Phil, i i ; i Tim.
iii. 2 ; Titus i. 7.
iiri-airaa, a>, to become uncircumcised,
I Cor. vii. 18.
iiri-aTafjiai, dep., to know well, to under-
stand (ace), to know, with on, ws,
&c. See Synonyms.
iiri-(TTdTr]s, ov, 6, master (only in
Luke, in voc, iviardTa), addressed
to Jesus = Rabbi. See Synonyms.
iirt-(n4?J^(i), to semi by letter to, to give
directions by letter, to write. Acts
xxi. 25, XV. 20 ; Heb. xiii. 22.
iiriarrjfjLuv, ov, skilful, knowing, James
iii. 13.
4Tri-a-T7}plC<i}, to establisli, confirm. Acts
xiv. 22.
iwi-aroKij, ^s, t), an epistle, a letter.
lirt-tTTop.itw — lir-oirr-qsj
VOCABULARY.
51
cTTi-ffTOfiiCci), to put to silence, Titus i. ii.
iiri-(TTpe(pci>, (i) trans., to cause to turn
(ace. and eir»), as to God, or to the
worship of God, Acts ix. 35; (2)
intrans., to return, to turn back, as
to evil, 2 Pet. ii. 21 ; to return upon,
as a refused salutation, Matt. x. 13
(eTTt, fls, Trpds).
lwi.-aTpo(pi], ris, r}, a turning, conversion.
Acts XV. 3.
iin-(Tvy-dya), id gather together, into one
place, a5 Matt, xxiii. 37.
^TTi-crw-ayayif, r]s, rj, a gathering to-
gether, 2 Thess. ii. i ; Heb. x. 25.
4iri-(rvv-Tp^x(^, io run together, to a
place, Mark ix. 2 5.
iin-(ri)-ffTa(Tis, ecus, t], (i) a seditious
concourse, Acts xxiv. 12; {%) pres-
sure of business, 2 Cor. xi. 28.
iT7i-(T<paKi]s, 4s, "likely to fall," dan-
gerous, Acts xxvii. 9.
iir-taxvo, to urge vehemently, to strongly
demand, Luke xxiii. 5.
iin-(T(apev(a, to heap up, to obtain a
muUiiude of, 2 Tim. iv. 3.
iiri-rayf], fjs, i], a command, an injunc-
tion, ^ Cor. viii. 8 ; Titus ii. 1 5.
iiTi-Td(T(r(a, ^w, to command (abs.), en-
join upon (dat. of pers,, thing in ace.
orinf. ), Mark ix. 25.
eVi-TeAew, w, ecrw, to finish, to bring to
an end, to perform, as a service,
Heb. ix, 6 ; mid. , to come to an end,
to leave off. Gal. iii. 3 ; pass., of
sufferings, to be endured, 1 Pet. v. 9.
iTTiTijdtios, a, ov, fit, needful, James
ii. 16.
€iri-Tidr]fju, to put, place, or lay upon
(with ace. and dat., or iirl, ace. or
gen.), as the hands (to heal), as
stripes, &e. ; of gifts, to load with.
Acts xxviii. 10; mid., to rush upon
in hostility, to oppose. Acts xviii. 10.
im-Tifidw, u, (i) to rebuke (dat.); (2) to
charge strictly, or enjoin {'Iva), Matt.
xii. 1 6, to admonish, to exhort.
iTn-rifxia, OS, 17, censure, penalty, 2 Cor.
ii. 6.
iiri-Tpfirot, to allow, permit, Matt,
viii. 21 ; Heb. vi. 3.
iTt-rpoTf-f], T]s, 7], full power, Acts
xxvi. 12.
iirl-rpoTTos, ou, 6, one who is charged
with, (i) a steward. Matt. xx. 8;
(2) a tutor, Gal. iv. 2.
eTTi-rvyxa'^c}, to attain, acquire (gen. or
ace.), Kom. xi. 7; Heb. xi. 33.
iTn-(j)aii'Ci), i aor. inf., irrKpauai, 2 aor.
pass., i'rre(pa.vr]v ; (i) to appear, as
stars in the night. Acts xxvii. 20 ;
(2) to shine upon (dat. ), Luke i. 79 ;
(3) met., to be known, or manifest,
Titus ii. II.
iTri-(t>dueia, as, rj, an appearance, a
manifestation, 2 Tim. i. 10; 2 Thess.
ii. 8.
iirt-(pavfis, es, glorious, illustrious. Acts
ii. 20.
€irL-(f>av(o, or -(pavaKCt), fut. (ra>, to shine
upon, give light to (dat.), Eph. v. 14.
eiTL-^ipoi (see 103, 6), to bring to {iiri,
ace). Acts xix. 12 ; ^o superadd {to,
by dat. ), Phil. i. 16; to bring upon,
inflict, as punishment, Rom, iii. 5 ;
to bring against, as an accusation.
Acts XXV. 18.
em-cpuv^a}, w, to cry out, or aloud, to
cry against, Luke xxiii. 21.
iiri-cpdoa-Kco, to shine upon, to dawn.
Matt, xxviii, i ; Luke xxiii. 54.
iivL-x^ipiu), a>, to take in hand, under-
take, Luke i. I ; Acts xix. 13.
cTTi-xew, to pour upon, as medicaments
on wounds, Luke x. 34.
iiri-xopTiyea}, cb, to superadd, 2 Pet.
i. 5 ; to supply abundantly, z Cor.
ix. 10; Gal. iii. 5 ; pass.. Col. ii, 19;
2 Pet. i. II; to be furnished or
supplied.
iiri-xop-nyia, as, 7}, a supply, minis-
tration, Phil. i. 19 ; Eph. iv. 16.
iirt-xp'i(o, to rub, or smear up)on {iiri,
ace), John ix. 6, 11.
iir-oiKodo/Meca, «, to build upon, fig., to
edify, to incre/ise, as in knowledge,
excellence, &c., i Cor. iii. 10; Eph.
ii. 20.
iir-oKeWco, to force forward, to run (a
ship) aground. Acts xxvii. 41.
iir-ovofid^o), to name, or call by a name
of honour, pass, only, E,om. ii. 17.
eV-oTTTcuft), to be witness of, i Pet. ii. 12.
eTT-oTTTTjs, ov, 6, an eye-witness, a he*
holder, 2 Pet. i, i6.
52
VOCABULARY.
[?iros — ^pxoH-*^
fTTor, ovs, r6, a word; ws evos diruy, as
I may say, Heb. vii. 9.
ivovpdvios, iov, heavenly, celestial, of
God, Matt, xviii. 35 ; of intelligent
beings, Phil. ii. 10 ; of the starry
bodies, I Cor. xv. 40. So of king-
dom, country, &c. Neut. plur., t^
Jnovpdvia, celestial things, or places,
John iiL 12; Eph. i. 3, 20, iL 6,
iii. 10; Heb. viii. 5; ix. 23.
liTTot, ot, at, Ta, card, num., seven, "the
perfect number." So often symbol,
in Revelation, oi kvTa, the seven
deaco.'is, Acts xxi. 8.
iTTTOKty, num. adv., seven times, Matt,
xviii. 2 1 ; Luke xvii. 4.
eirra/ctax/Aioj, at, a, card, num., seven
thousand, Rom. xi. 4.
€7ra). See flTTov and 103, 7.
"Epaaros, ov, 6, Erastus, Acts xix. 22.
ipya^ofxai, aojxai, dep., perf. iXpyoffixai,
pass., (i) abs., to work, to labour ,
(2) to accomplish, bring to pass, per-
form; (3) to -practise, as virtues ; (4)
to acquire by labour, John vi. 27.
ipyaa-ia, as, v, {i) effort, diligent labour,
Luke xii. 58 ; (2) working, doing,
i.e., the practice or performance of,
t'ph. iv. 19 ; {3) work, gain l>y work.
Acts xvi. 16, 19; (4) trade, craft,
Acts xix. 25.
ipydrrjs, ov, 6, one who works, as a
labourer. Matt. ix. 37; applied to
workers in the church, 2 Tim. ii. 15;
a doer, of iniquity, Luke xiii. 27.
ipyov, ov, t6 {fepy-; so Germ., werk),
a work, a deed, an enterprise, Acts
V. 38 ; a miracle, John viL 3, 21;
act, contrasted with x6yos, speech,
Luke xxiv. 19; any action, good
or bad. Acts ix. 36; John iii. 19;
a thing wrought by God, Acts
XV. 18; by men, Acts vii. 41 ; by
the devil, i John iii. 8.
ipedl^w {epis), to provoke, to excite, to
exasperate, 2 Cor. ix. 2 ; Col. iii. 21.
ipeiSco, a (a, to stick in, to stick fa»t, Acts
xxvii. 41,
ipevyofxai, |o/4ot, to throw out of the
mouth, to utter freely. Matt xiii. 35.
iptvvaw, u, -{ffTu, to search diligently,
John V. 39 ; Rom. viii. 27; Rev. ii 23.
ipeco, obsolete. See (prjH-i, slirov, an('
103, 7.
ipTlfiia, as, tj, an uninhabited tract, a
desert.
eprifios, ov, deserted, desolate, waste,
barren, Gal. iv. 27 ; used in the
fem., as a subst., for a desert, Luke
i. 80 ; %pT]iJ.os TTis 'louSaios, Matt,
iii. I ; the wilderness of Judea, the
tract west of the JJead Sea ; ri
epTj/jLos, the desert in which the
Israelites wandered.
ipTjp.6M, u, only in pass., to be made
desolate. Matt. xii. 25 ; to be reduced
to nought, Eev. xvii. 16, xviii. 17, 19.
ipr^ficaais, ews, t), desolation, a laying
ivaste, Luke xxi. 20 ; Mark xiii. 14.
iplCo (epts), to contend, dispute. Matt,
xii. 19.
ipideia, as, t] [ipiBos, z. worker for wages,
perhaps connected with eptov), "the
spirit of a mercenary," self-seeking,
or party -spirit, Rom. ii. 8 ; Phil,
i. 16, ii. 3 ; James iii. 14, 16 ; plur.
in 2 Cor. xii. 20 ; Gal. v. 20.
epiov, ov, t6, wool, Heb. ix. 19 ; Rev.
i. 14.
epis, iSos, 71, contention, strife, quarrel,
love of contention.
epi<j)iov, ov, t6, and €pi<(>os, ov, 6, a kid,
a little kid.
'Epfjids, a, 6, Hermas (sometimes written
'Ep)U,f)s), Rom. xvi. 14,
epIJLTfiAfia, as, t], interpretation, explana-
tion, I Cor. xii. 10.
epHi]V€v<t>, to interpret, explain, translate
from one language to anotJier, John
i. 39, 43 ; Heb. vii. 2.
'Epfirji, ov, d, the Greek deity Hermes
(in Latin, Mercury), Acts xiv. 12.
'EpuLoyfvris, ovs, 6, Hermogenes, z Tim.
i. 15.
kpTTer6v, ov, rd, a creeping creature, a
reptile. Acts x. 12; R.«m. i. 23.
ipvQp6s, a, 6v, red. ipvOph daXaxraa, the
Red Sea, Acts vii. 36 ; Heb. xi. 29.
^PXOfJMi (see 103, 2), to come, to go, of
persons or oi things; 6 4px^h(fos,
the coming one, i.e., the Messiah,
Matt. xi. 3. In Rev. i. 4, 8, IJe
wIm is, vjho loas, and wh^ is to come;
to come, after, before, to, agaiust.
IptoTaco — €v-a77eXitw]
VOCABULARY.
&c., as determined b}'' the prepo-
sition which follows ; to come fortliy
as from the grave, i Cor. xv. 35 ; ?!o
come hack, as the prodigal, Luke
XV. 30.
^paidu), «, to interrogate. Matt. xxi. 24,
to ask, to request, to beseech.
«(T07]s, rJTOs, -n {eyvv/jii, 1 aor., eaO-nv), a
robe, raiment, Luke xxiii. 1 1 ; Acts
xii. 21. See Synonyms.
^adrjfTis, ecos, tj, raiiiient, Luke xxiv. 4.
iffQiw, 2nd aor., ecpayov (see 103, 3), to
eat, to partake of food, used abs. or
with ace. of food, or e'/c, a word like
some being understood; with fierd,
gen., to eat with; with dat. (as
Kom. xiv. 6), to eat to the honour
of ; met., to devour, to consume, as
rust does, James v. 3 ; or fire, Heb.
X. 27. ■
"Eaxi, 6, Esli, Luke iii. 25.
ia-oTTTpov, ov, t6, a (polished metal)
mirror, James i. 23; Si' i(T6TrTpov,
1 Cor. xiii. 12, into, lit., a mirror,
as the image appears on the opposite
side.
eairepa, as, 7 (prop. adj. with &pa),
Luke xx\r. 29 ; the evening. Acts
iv. 3, xxviii. 23.
*E(TpdoiJL, 6, Esrom, Matt. 1. 3 ; Luke
iii. 33.
effxaros, 7], ov, (i) the last, remotest, m
situation, dignity, or time, rh €<tx°--
Tov, TO ^(Txo-'''o-, as subst., the ex-
tremity, last state; (2) used predi-
catively as an adverb, Mark xii. 6,
22 ; absolutely, i Cor. xv. 8 ; (3)
the end 0/ what is spoken of, e.g.,
the feast, John vii. 37 ; the world,
John vi. 39, 40; (4) spec, of the
Christian dispensation as the last, or
latter (days), Heb. i. 2 ; (5) the last
(day), i.e., the day of judgment, (6)
the phrase 6 irpSiros kcu 6 eaxaros.
Rev. i. II, 17, ii. 8, the first and the
last, describes the eternity of God ;
adv. -COS, extremely, i.e., in extremity,
. co-xctTws ex^'» ^ "^ ^^6 last extremity,
Mark v. 23.
If aw, adv. of place, within, abs., as
Matt. xxvi. 58 ; with gen., Mark
XV. 16 J with an article preced.,
the inner; ol ecrw, those within the
Christian pale, opp. to oi e|a>.
ecroodep, adv. of place, from within; rh
eacDdev, the interior, i.e., the mind or
heart, 2 Cor. iv. 16.
iawT^pos, o, ov (comp. of eau), inner,
interior. Acts xvi. 24.
kraipos, ou, 6, a companion, an asso-
ciate, a friend ; eroTpe, voc, as in
English, my good friend. Matt.
XX. 13, xxii. 12, xxvi. 50.
eT6p6-y\6i)(T(ros, ov, 6, one of another
tongue, or language, i Cor. xiv. 21.
eTepo-didaaKoXiO), 00, to teach otherwise,
to teach a different doctrine, from that
of the apostle, i Tim. i. 3, vi. 3.
kTcpo-^vyica, (3, to be yoked unfitly, or
lieterogeneously, 2 Cor. vi. 14.
%r€pos, distrib. pron., a,nother ; inde-
finitely, any other; definitely, the
otlier, diverse, different from ; adv.
-w«, otherwise, differently.
€Ti, adv., any more, any longer, yet^
still, even-, Luke i. 15; also, Heb.
xi. 36; implying accession or addi-
tion, besides.
6Toifid((i>, dffw, to prepare, make ready,
to ordain, to appoint.
eroLfxaa-ia, as, rj, preparation, prompti-
tude.
froifios, Tj or OS, ov, prompt, prepared,
of things or persons; 4v eToifx-cp
exetf, to be in readiness, 2 Cor. x. 6 ;
adv. -wy, in readiness, with €%(»,
Acts xxi. 13; 2 Cor. xii. 14.
tros, ovs, t6, a year, Luke iv. 25 ; kcJt'
_^eTos, yearly, Luke ii. 41.
eS, adv. (old neuter, from i'vs), well;
eS TToiilv (ace), Mark xiv. 7, to do
good to; eu irpdo'crfiv, to fare v^eil,
i.e., to prosper, Acts xv. 29; used
.in commendation, well! well done!
Matt. XXV. 21. In composition, eu
retains its proper meaning.
EijcL, as, r]. Eve, 2 Cor. si. 3 ; i Tim.
6u-o77eA.i^<», (TO), i aor., fxruyyeXKra,
perf. pass., evriyyeMa-uai, (1) act., to
be a messenger of good, to bring glad
tidings to (ace. or dat.), Kev. x. 7,
xiv. 6; (2) mid., t> announce, to
publish (ace. of message), to announce
54
VOCABULARY.
[ev-a77^iov — ev-Xo^ia
the gospel (abs.), to preach to, evan-
gelize (ace. pers. ) ; pass. , to be an-
nounced, to liave glad tidings an-
nounced to one. See Matt. xi. 5 ;
Heb. iv. 2.
(v-ayy^Kiov, ov, rS, the good tidings,
the gospel. In the epistles, (i) the
announcing of the tidings, (2) the
gospel scheme, (3) the work of evan-
gelization.
ev-a77€At(TTTjs, ov, 6, a messenger of good
tidings, of the gospel, an evangeUM,
Acts xxi. 8 ; Eph. iv. 1 1 ; 2 Tim.
iv. 5.
fbapearrfw, Si, to be. wdl-pleasing to
(dat.), Heb, xi. 5, 6; pass., to be
pleased loith, Heb. xiii. 16,
fv-dpearos, ov, acceptable, well-pleasing,
Rom. xii. i ; adv. -cos, acceptably,
Heb. xii. 2^.
Ev8ov\os, ov, b, Eubalus, 2 Tim. iv. 21.
ivy^viis, 4s, well-born, noble, ingenu-
ous, generous, Luke xix. 12; Acts
xvii. II.
evSla, as, rj (from Zeis, gen. Ai6s), fair
weather, a serene sky. Matt. xvi. 2.
fv-SoKcea, 0), aca, ist aor., €v56Kr]aa and
rjuS(^K7jn-a, to think well of, to be
pleased with. Matt. xvii. 5 ; 2 Pet.
i. 17; to resolve benevolently, Luke
xii. 52.
fv-doKia, as, t], pleasure, good -will,
favour, Phil. ii. 13; 2 Thess. i. 1 1 ;
Matt. xi. 26.
fv-epyeaia, as, t], a good work done, a
benefit bestowed. Acts iv. 9, i Tim.
vi. 2.
fv-epyfrea, to do good, to confer kind-
ness. Acts X. 38.
tv-epy(Tr]s, ov, 6, one who does good to,
a benefactor, a patron, Lukexxii. 25.
({j-OeTos, ov, well placed, ft, useful,
Luke xiv. 35.
fheews, adv., immediately, soon,
speedily. Matt. xiii. 5 ; fortliwiih.
Acts xii. 10.
fvdv-Spofifa, a>, to run in a straight
course. Acts xvi. 1 1, xxi. i.
ei/ dv/xfu), a>, to be in good spirits, to be
c/ieerful. Acta xxviL 22, 25; James
V. 13.
9tf-dvuos, ov, cJieerful, having good
courage. Acts xxvii. 36 ; adv. -cos,
with alacrity, cheerfully.
fvdvvoo, vob, to make straight, John
i. 23 ; to guide, to direct, as a ship,
James iii. 4.
evQvs, fia, V, straight; met., right,
true; adv., of time, straight, i.e.,
immediately, forthwith, as evOfws,
Matt. xiii. 20.
6U0UT7JS, T-rjTos, 7], Hghtness, rectitude,
^equity, Heb. i. 8 (LXX.)
€v-Kaip4ci}, CO, to have leisure, or oppor-
tunity, Mark vi. 31; Acts xvii. 2 1 ;
I Cor. xvi. 12.
ev-Kaipia, as, v, convenient time, or
opportunity, Luke xxii. 6.
iv-Kaipos, ov, well-timed, timely, oppor-
tune, Mark vi. 21 ; adv., -cos, oppor-
tunely, Mark xiv. 1 1 ; opposed to
aKaipas, 2 Tim. iv. 2.
^fj-Koiros, ov, easy, neut. compar. only;
fvKoircaTfpov, easier. Matt. ix. 5.
ev-Xdfieia, as, r), reverence, fear of
God, piety, Heb. v. 7, xiL 28. See
Synonyms.
ev-\aB4oiuiai, ovfiai, dep., pass., to fear;
with /XT), to take precaution, Heb.xi. 7.
eu-AojSrjs, 4s, cautious. God-fearing, de-
vout, Luke ii. 25 ; Acts ii. 5.
ev-\oy4(a, S>, iiaa, to bless, speak well to,
to praise, i.e., God; to invoke bless-
ings on, i. €. , men ; to bless, or to ask
blessing on, i.e., food, Luke ix. 16.
So of the Lord's supper, Matt,
xxvi. 26; I Cor. X. 16. Used of
what God does, to bless, to distin-
guish with favour. Hence pass,
part., ev\oyr]iJ.4vos, blessed, favoured
of God, Matt. XXV. 34. See Syno-
nyms.
ev-XoyrrrSs, 6v (verbal adj. from pre-
ced. ), worthy of reverence, of bless-
ing, Mark xiv. 6 1 ; Rom. ix. 5 ;
I Pet. i. 3.
iv-\oyla, as, ^, "eulogy," commenda-
tion, in a good sense, and in a bad
Ben$,e adxdation, Rom. xvi. 18; bless-
ing, praise, to God, Rev. vii. 12 ;
benediction, Le., wishing or conferring
good upon, Heb. xii. 17 ; 2 Cor.
ix. 5 ; bounty, the blessing which the
gospd secures, i Pet. iii. 9.
6l5-{X€Td-8oTOS ci^XOP'O"''']
VOCABULARY.
55
fv-fifrd-SoTos, ov, ready to impart,
I Tim. vi. 1 8.
FA'viKri, Tjy, 7j, Eunice, z Tim. i. 5.
ev-voew, w, to he well affected to, to be
reconciled to. Matt. v. 25.
eij-voia, as, v, good-will, benevolence,
I Cor. vii. 3 ; Eph. vi. 7.
cvvovxiC^, '^«, Tst aor. pass., ^wov-
Xio-drip, to make a ennuclt o/(pass.),
to live as a eunuch. Matt. xix. 12.
ihvov-x'^s, ov, 7], a eunuch, a minister at
court. Acts viii. 27.
EvoSia, as, Euodia, Phil. iv. 2.
«?u-o5oa>, (o, pass, only, to be led in a
good way, to be made 2irosperous,
Horn. i. 1 o ; i Cor. xvi. 2 ; 3 John 2.
iv-ireiQ^s, 4s, bland, easily entreated,
compliant, James iii. 17.
fv-ireol-araros, ov, easily besetting, or
well circumstanced, of a temptation
or sin, which has every advantage
in favour of its prevailiug, Heb.
xii. I.
ev-TToita, as, 7}, doing good, beneficence,
Heb. xiii. 16.
eu-TTopeo), Sj, mid. ill N. T. , to be well to
do, to be prosperous. Acts xi. 29.
ey-TTopfo, as, ^, substance, wealth, pros-
joerity. Acts xix. 25.
ev-irpfTreia, as, rj, beauty, gracefulness,
James i. 1 1.
cv-irp6(r-SeKT05, ov, well received, accept-
able, Eom. XV. 16 ; I Pet. ii. 5.
cv-TTpocr-edpos, ov, assiduous, constantly
attending on, i Cor. vii. 3 5.
eu-TTpoo-wTrew, &, to make a fair appear-
ance, to try to please. Gal. vi. 12.
evpicTKca, fvp^ffoi), perf., fvprjKa; 2nd
aor., evpov ; ist aor. pass., evpedrjv;
(i) to find, to discover, to light upon;
(2) to ascertain, to find by computa-
tion, or by examination, as a judge ;
(3) to obtain, to get; (4) to find hoio,
to be able.; (s) to contrive ov find out
Iww, by thought and inventing ;
Luke xix. 48.
ivpo-K\vdwv, (uvos, 6 (from eZpos, the east
wind, and K\v^cav, wave), euroclydon,
a stormy wind, a hurricane, Acts
XX vii. 14. Another reading is evpa-
KvXwv, Lat. euraquilo, a north-east
gale.
€vpv-x<opos, OV, broad, spacious, Matt,
vii. 13.
cif-a-e^eia, as, rj, piety, godliness, devo-
tion. Acts iii. 12; 2 Tim. iii. 5.
See Synonyms.
€v-(T€$e(a, 5>, to exercise piety, to wor-
ship, to reverence, Acts xvii. 23 ;
I Tim. v. 4,
€v-(T€^-f)s, 4s, religious, devout, Acts
x. 2 ; 2 Pet. ii. 9 ; adv. -o)?, de-
voutly, rdigiously, 2 Tim. iii. 12 ;
Titus ii. 1 2.
eij-a-qfios, ov, significant, distinct, easy
to be understood, i Cor. xiv. 9.
e{;-(r7rAo7x»'os, ov, full of pity, tender-
hearted, Eph. iv. 32 ; I Pet. iii. 8.
eu-o-xrjjtK^j/ws, adv., honourably, becom-
ingly, gracefully, Eom. xiii. 13.
€v-axvf^o(Tvv7), Tjs, 7), dccorum, becom-
ingness, i Cor. ii. 23.
ev-axvfiuv, ov, reputable, decorous, of
high standing, Mark xv. 43.
ev-rivccs, adv., strenuously, earnestly,
Luke xxiii. 10 ; Acts xviii. 28.
eu-rpoTreAio, as, 7], jesting, frivolous and
indecent talk, Eph. v. 4.
Ei/Tuxos, ov, 6, Evtychus, Acts xx. 9.
(v-<p7)iiia, as, 7}, commendation, good
report, 2 Cor. vL 8.
eij-(p7]fjt.os, ov, praiseiDorthy, laudable, of
good report, Phil. iv. 8.
ev-(pop4(a, u>, to bear plentifully, to bring
forth largely, Luke xii. 1 6.
ev-(ppalvci>, vu>, ist aor. pass., €v^pdv67]V
and 7]u<ppdv67]v, act., to make glad;
pass., to he joyful, to rejoice, Luke
xii. 19 ; Acts ii. 26 ; Kev. xviii. 20.
EvcppaTTjs, ov, 6, the Euphrates, Kev.
IX. 14, xvi. 12.
€v(ppo(Tvv7], 77s, 7], joy, gladness, Actsii. 28.
eu-xaptcTTeci), aJ, to thank, give thanks,
acknowledge with gratitude.
cv-xapi(rria, as, r], gratitude, thanks-
giving, 2 Cor. ix. II, 12,
(v-xdpiaTos, ov, thankful, grateful, Col.
iii. 1 5.
«"x4 ^Sj V, (i) prayer, James v. 15;
(2) a vow. Acts xviii. 18, xxi. 23.
eijxofiai, imperf., 7]vx^H-W and evx^p-riv,
to pray, 2 Cor. xiii. 9 {for with vn4p
or TTfpi, gen. ) ; to earnestly desire
and long for. Acts xxvii. 29.
66
VOCABULARY.
[ciJ-xpilo^os — Zaxapfas
eij-xPVO'Tos, ov, useful, very useful,
2 Tim. iv. II.
ev-}pvxf(i), u>, to be in good spirits, to he
animated, Phil. ii. 19.
€v-wSia, OS, 71, fragrance, good odour,
2 Cor. ii. 15.
(vwvvfxos, ov, used in neut. plur.,
ivdiwixa ifieprf), the left, ie., the
hand, Acts xxi. 3 j the foot, Eev.
X. 2.
i<pdx\ofj.ai, to leap upon, iiri, ace.,
Acts xix. 16.
icp-n-r^, adv., once, at once, Rom.
VI 10.
*E^€<r7vos, ov, Ephesian, i.e., church,
Eev. ii. I.
*'E<piaios, ov, EpJiesian, belonging to
Ephesus, Acts xix. 28, xxi. 29.
*'E((>€(ros, ov, 7}, Ephesus.
i^-€up6Tr}s, ov, 6, an inventor, one who
fivids out, Kom. i. 30.
i<p-T]Hepia, as, tj, a course, a division (of
priests) for interchange of service,
Luke i. 5, 8. See i Chron. xxv. 8 ;
Nehemiah xiii. 30, &c.
i<p--i]fi€pos, ov, daily, sujffu-.ient for the
day, James ii. 1 5.
i<p-iKveoixai, dep., 2nd aor., i(piKoiJL7]v, to
come to, to arrive at, 6.xpi^ or els,
2 Cor. X. 13, 14.
i<f>-i(TTr}fxi, 2nd aor., cTreorTrjv ; perf.
part. , i<pear(i>s ; always iutrans. or
mid. in N.T., (i) to stand by, or
near, to come in, or near; {2) to
come upon, with hostile intent ; (3)
to be earnest, 2 Tim. iv. 2 ; {4) to
befall one, as evil; (5) fo 6e a< liand,
to be present, i.e., suddenly, unex-
pectedly.
itp-opdoa, w, 2nd aor., i-rrfTSov, to look
upon, Luke i. 25 ; Acts iv. 29.
E<|)potM, ^> Ephraim, John xi. 54.
i<p<l)add, a Syriac or Aramaean verb,
imperative, be opened, Mark vii. 34.
^X^pa, as, fj, enmity, GaL v. 20 ; Eph.
ii. 15, 17.
ix^p6s, d, 6v, (i) Jiated, odious to,
Rom. xi. 28, used as subst., an
enemy; 6 ix^p6s, Luke x. 19, the
enemy, i.e., iSatan.
^X'Sfo, lis, Tj, a viper, lit., Acts
xxviiL 3 ; fig., Matt. iii. 7, &c.
exo, e^», impf., eTxo''; ^nd aor.,
f(Txov; perf., ^(Tx^Ka; {1) to have, or
possess, in general, with meaning
modified by the object, as wealth,
any possession, mental character-
istic, or quality ; (2) with adverbs
elliptically, "to have (one's self) in
any manner," as KaKws ^xftv, to be
ill; eVxaTOJs exety, to be at the last
extremity ; (3) to hold, to esteem, to
have in one's power, to retain, i Tim.
iii. 9 ; (4) mid., (X^t^^-h ^^ ^^ n£ar,
or next to, Mark 1. 38 ; used of
time. Acts xxi. 26, the day coming,
or the next day ; to. ex^fuva aanri-
pias, things joined to, or pertaining
to salvation.
e«y, adv., (i) of time, till, until, used
as conj., also as prep, with gen.
eas ov, or ecus otov, until when,
Luke xiii. 8 ; (2) of place, up to, or
as far as. Matt. xxvi. 58 ; (3)
spoken of a limit or term to any-
thing, up to the point of. Matt,
xxvi. 38; Luke xxii. 51; Rom.
iii. 12; (4) with particles, 'iws &prL,
until now; eas eTrra/cis, until seven
times ; ecos &v(o, up to the brim, &c
Z.
Z, f, Z^ra, zeta, the sixth letter, orig.
of a mixed or compound sound, as
if ds, now generally pronounced 2 or
fe. As a numeral, C = 7 J C = 7000.
ZaBovKwv, 6 (Heb.), Zebulon, Matt,
iv. 13, 15 ; Rev. viL 8.
ZaKxcuos, ov, 6, Zaccliev^, Luke xix.
Zapd, (5 (Heb.), Zara or Zerah, Matt.
i- 3-
Zaxapias, ov, 6, (1) ZacJiarla.<t, the
father of John the Baptis^, ; (2)
Zechariah, the son of Jehoiada
(2 Chron. xxiv. 20), or of Barachiah
(Matt. xxiiL 35), slain in the
temple, Luke xi. 51. (The prophet
of the same name, not mentioned in
the N.T., though repeatedly quoted,
was also the sou of a Barachiah.)
I6.u>—^]
VOCABULARY,
57
Cdo), w, 0s, Cf), inf., ^Tjv; fat., CV» or
-ofjLai; ist aor., €Cv<^a; to live, as (i)
to be alive; part., d (civ, the Living
One, a description of God, as Matt,
xvi. i6 ; (2) to receive or regain life,
John iv. 50 ; (3) to spend life in any-
way, Gal. ii. 14; 2 Tim. iii. 12 ; (4)
to ^*ye, in the highest sense, to pos-
sess spiritual and eternal life; (5)
met. , as of water, living or fresh,
opposed to stagnant, as John iv. jo.
Ze/SeSaios, ov, 6, Zebedee.
^earSs, if, 6v [C^a), boiling, hot, fig.,
Rev. iii. 15, 16.
C^vyos, ovs, t6, (i) a yohe {Cevywfii, to
join), Luke xiv. 19; (2) a pair,
Luke ii. 24.
(evKT-npia, as, rj, a band, a fastening, a
chain. Acts xxvii. 40.
Zeus, Al6s, ace, Ato, Zeus (Lat.,
Jupiter), the chief of the heathen
deities, Acts xiv. 13.
Ceo), part., C^oiv, "to boil," fig., to be
fervent, ox earnest, Rom. xii. 11.
QiKos, ov, 6, {1) fervour, zeal, in a good
sense, John ii. 17; (2) heartburning,
jealousy, in a bad sense; Acts
xiii. 45; anger. Acts v. 17.
CWw, w, w(jo>, (i) to have zeal for or
against, to desire earnestly (ace),
I Cor. xii. 3 1 ; 2 Cor. xi. 2 ; {2) to
be envious or jealous. Acts vii. 9 ;
James iv. 2.
(riXwTijs, ov, (i) a 2ea?o«, one very
zealous for (obj., gen.). Acts xxi. 20;
(2) as a surname, Zelotes, Luke
vi. 15; Acts i. 13. See KavaviT-ns.
Cni^ia, as, 7\, damage, loss. Acts
xxvii. 10, 21 ; Phil. iii. 7, 8.
{Vj/xtf^o?, w, pass., to 6e endamaged, to
suffer loss (ace. of thing lost), Matt,
xvi. 26; PhiL iii. 8.
ZtjvSs, 3, Zenas, Titus iii. 13.
^TjTew, a), Tjo-ft), (i) to see^, absolutely,
as Matt. vii. 7 ; (2) to endeavour
after, to seek for (ace). Matt. vi. 33 ;
John V. 30; (3) to desire, to wish
for. Matt. xii. 46, 47 ; Col. iii. i.
(■f]Tr}iJ.a, aros, t6, a question, dispute,
controversy (gen., or irepl, gen.)
^jT-ncrts, €«s, question, debate, alterca-
tion, John iii. 25; Acts xxv. 20.
QtCoLVLOv, ov, T({(E.V., "taxes"), darnel^
a kind of bastard wheat ; Matt,
xiii. 25-40.
Zopol3d^€\, 6 (Heb.), Zerubbabel, Matt,
i. 12 ; Luke iii. 27.
C^(pos, ov, 6, darkness, thick gloom,
2 Pet. ii. 4, 17 ; Jude 6, 13.
Cvy^s, ov, 6, a yoke, (i) met., of ser-'
vitude, I Tim. vi. i ; (2) fig. , of
any imposition by authority, Matt,
xi. 29 ; Acts XV. 10; (t,) the beam of
a pair of scales. Rev. vi. 5.
Cvfif], r}s, T), leaven. Matt. xvi. 6; fig.,
corruptness, 1 Cor. v. 6, 7, 8.
CvfiSo), &, to ferment. Matt. xiii. 33 ;
Gal. V. 9.
Quypeca, S> {Co>^^, h.yp4a>), "to take
alive," to catch, take captive^ Luke
V. 10 ; 2 Tim. ii. 26.
Coi), r\s (cf. C^u>), (i) life, literal,
spiritual, eternal ; (2) living, imply-
ing duration, Luke i. 75 ; i Cor.
iii. 22 ; Rom. vi. 4 ; (3) a title of
Christ, as the source of life, John
v. 26. See Synonyms.
Cc^vr], T]s, 7}, a girdle, Acts xxi. 11 ; a
purse, for which the girdle usually
served, Mark vi. 8.
Qdiivvvfii, or -vvvw, see 114, to gird,
John xxi. 1 8.
(luo-yovi(a, w, -iiao), to preserve alive,
Luke xvii. 33 ; Acts vii. 19.
CHoov, ov, r6, a living creature^ an
animal, Heb. xiii. 11 ; Rev. iv. 6, 7.
(a)0-Troi4<a, u>, tjo-w, to make alive, to
catise to live, i Cor. xv. 45 ; to
inspire life, i.e., to invigorate, John
vi. 63 ; pass., to be quickened, made
alive, I Pet. iii. 18; i Cor. xv.
22, 36.
H.
H, Tj, "^HTa, Eta, e, the seventh letter.
As a numeral, ?j' = 8 ; fl= 8000.
ff, a particle, disjunctive, or; interro-
gative, whether (see 405) ; or com-
parative, than (see 320). With
other particles, oAA' ^, except; fi
Kal, or else; ^Trep, than at all. John
xii 43 ; ^Toi ... ^, whether ... Of' (ex-
58
VOCABULARY.
[iq7£|iOV€V(«) —
eluding any other alternative), Eom.
ri. i6 ; ff fi{]v, Heb. vL 14, fnost
r^yffjLovevco, to he governor, as proconsul,
Luke ii. 2 ; procurator, Luke iii. i.
^jyefxovia, as, t], rule, as of an emperor,
Luke iii. 1.
rjyffidov, 6vos, governor, as the head of
a district. Matt. ii. 6 ; especially
the procurator of Judaea, as Pilate,
Felix, Festus.
Tjyeofiai, ov/xai, dep. mid., (1) to be
leader, 6 riyov^i^vos, the leader, or
chief (gen.); (2) to deem, regard,
reckon (two aces., or ace. with
OJS).
^Seojs, adv. (^8us, sweet), gladly, with
good will ; superlative, ^S«rTo.
^577, adv. of time, now, already, as
Matt. iii. 10; of the immediately
future, Rom. i. 10.
7)^ov{], 7)s, 7}, pleasure, i.e., sensual;
lust, strong desire.
ijhvofffJLOV, ov, t6 {rjBvi 6(Tixri), mint.
^Oos, ovs, t6, as edos, manner, custom;
plu., ^0rj, moralsy i Cor. xv. 33.
V«, l« (perf., ^Ka, only Mark viii. 3),
to he come, to he present, see 361, d,
note.
'HAf, o (Heb.), Heli, Luke iii. 23.
H\i, a Hebrew word, my God, Matt.
xxvii. 46.
'HAio;;, «ti, 6, Elias, i.e., Elijah.
rjXiKia, as, ri, (i) stature, size^ Luke
xix. 3 ; (2) age, full age, vigour,
John ix. 21. Soi prob., ' Matt.
vi. 27.
rjKiKos, 77, oy, how great, how much,
how little.
l^Kios, ov, 6, the sun, the ligJd oftlie sun.
7)^05, ov, 6, a nail, John xx. 25.
Vfiepa, as, fi, a day, i.e., the time from
sunrise to sunset.
TjfifTf pos, a, ov, our, our own.
TjfjLiOdviis, 4s, half dead, Luke x. 30.
^tiiavs, fia, V, gen., rjfihovs, lialf ; in
neut. only, rh ^yuav, ra vfila-ri.
rjfiuipiov, ov, t6, a half-hour. Rev.
viii. 1.
fjviKa, adv., wJien, wlienever, 2 Cor.
iii. 15, r6.
fyt^p, see ^.
¥iTrios, a, ov, placid, gentle, i Thess.
ii. 7 ; 2 Tim. ii. 24.
"Hp, 6 (Heb.), Er, Luke iii. 28.
ilpfnos, ov, quiet, tranquil, i Tim.
ii. 2.
'HpcoSrjs, ov, 6, Herod. Four of the
name are mentioned : (i) Herod the
Great, Matt. ii. ; (2) Herod Antipas,
or H. the tetrarch. Matt. xiv. ; Luke
xxiii. ; (3) H. Agrippa, Acts xii. ;
(4) H. Agrippa the younger, called
only Agrippa, Acts xxv.
'UpwSiavoi, a>v, ol, Herodians, partisans
of Herod Antipas, Matt. xxii. 1 6.
'Bpoidids, dSos, T], Herodias, Matt.
xiv. 3, 6.
'HpcaUcov, u)vos, S, Herodion, Rom.
xvi. 1 1.
'Hcrdias, ov, 6, Esaias, i.e., Isaiah.
'Hf/oO, 6 (Heb.), Emu.
?j(ruxaC"> f^^f (0 ^o **65^ from work,
Luke xxiiL 56 ; (2) to cease from
altercation, to he silent, Luke xiv. 4 ;
(3) to live quietly, i Thess. iv. 11.
7](rvxia, as, ij, (i) quiet, silence. Acts
xxii. 2 ; (2) tranquillity, quiet, mo-
desty, 2 Thess. iii. 12.
r](Tvxios, ia, lov, quiet, gentle, i Tim.
ii. 2 ; I Pet. iii. 4.
iJToi, see Ij.
rjTToiofjLai, pass., (t) to he inferior (abs.),
2 Cor. xii. 13 ; (2) to he overcome by
(dat.) ; 2 Pet. ii. 19, 20.
^TTifxa, aros, r6, inferiority, diminu-
tion, Rom. xi. 12; loss, i Cor.
vi. 7.
^TTwi/ or ?i(r(ra>v, irreg., compar. of
KaK6s, inferior, neut. as adv., 2 Cor.
xiL 15 ; ih^TTov, assubst., tJie worse,
1 Cor. xi. 17.
ijX^o, ^j io sound, as the sea, Liike
xxi. 25 ; as brass, 1 Cor. xiii. i.
^Xos, ov, 6, sound, Heb. xii. 19 ; Acts
ii. 2, fame, or report, Luke iv. 37.
e.
0, d, and ^, e^To, theta, th, the eighth
letter. Numerically, ^ = 9 ; ^^ =
9000.
0aSSaios — Oeo-crTV'yiqs]
VOCABULARY.
59
©aSSatos, ov, 6, Tliaddceus, a surname
of the apostle Jade (also called
Lehhcem), Mark iii. 1 8).
Odkaaaa, rjs, ^, (i) the sea; (2) sea, as
the Mediterranean, the E.ed Sea;
(3) Hebraistically, for the lake Gen-
nesaret, Matt. viii. 24.
OdXTTco, to cherish, nourish, i Thess.
ii. 7. ^
Qdjxap, 7], Tamar, Matt. i. 3.
eaixfiew, w, to be astonished, amazed.
Acts ix. 6. So pass., Mark i. 27 ;
with iirl (dat.), Mark x. 24.
Bdjx^os, ovs, t6, astonishment.
6ai'd(TiiJ.os, ov, deadly, mortal.
dayaT7]-(p6po5, ov, death-bringing, James
iii. 8.
Qdvaros, ov, 6, death, lit. or fig., im-
minent danger of death, 2 Cor. i. 10 ;
tlte cause of death, Rom. vii. 1 3 ;
spiritual death, the second death, the
pestilence. Rev. xviii. 8.
davardca, w, daw, to put to death, pass. ,
to be in danger of death, Rom.
viii. 36 ; fig., to mortify, subdue, as
evil passions, Rom. viii. 13 ; pass.,
to be dead to (dat.), Rom. vii. 4.
QdiTTO}, rpco, 2nd aor., eracpov, to bury.
&dpa, 6, Terah, Luke iii. 34.
Bappiw, a, -fjaa, to be of good cheer, to
have confidence in, els or iv. In
imperative, forms from Oapafco are
used, 6dp(Tii, dapaelre, take courage,
ddpaos, ovs, TO, courage, Actsxxviii. 15.
davfjLa, oTos, r6, wonder, amazement.
Rev. xvii. 6,
Qavixd^Q), cro), or aofiai, to wonder, abs. ,
with ^id, ace. ; eVi, dat.; iie/jt, gen.,
or on, et ; to wonder at, admire,
ace. ; pass., to be admired, or
Ivonoured.
Qavjxdaios, ia, lov, wonderful. Matt.
xxi. 15.
Bavnaaros, 17, 6v, wonderful, marvellous,
Mark xii. 11, &c.
06a, as, 7), a goddess. Acts xix. 27.
dedofxcu, ufxai, dep., ist aor., iOeaad/xTjv,
and with x^^^s. sig,, ididdr]v, to
behold, to contemplate earnestly, to
see, to visit.
fifaT/ji^w, to make a spectacle of so to
expose to contempt, Heb. x. 33.
dearpov, ov, to, (i) a place for public
shows, a theatre, Acts xix. 29 ; (2)
spectacle, 1 Cor. iv. 9.
df^os, e/a, elov, divine, 2 Pet. i. 3, 4 ;
T^ Buov, the Deity, Acts xvii. 29.
Oe'iov, ov, r6, sulphur (from the pre-
ceding, "a magic fume"), Luke
xvii. 29.
BeioTTjs, TTjTos, 7], godhcad, deity, Rom.
i. 20.
deiu)57]s, €s, sulphureous. Rev. ix. 17.
6e\rj/jui, OTOS, t6, will, desire, an object
of pleasure, tJie faculty of willing, a
decree or decision, lust, sensual in-
stinct.
64\r]ais, ecus, 7), will, pleasure, Heb. ii. 4.
ee'Aw, impf., ijeeXov; ist aor., eQihrqaa;
to wiih, delight in, prefer, to will, in
the sense of assent, requirement, or
determination. See Synonyms.
d€ixe\ios, ov, fundamental. Hence
masc. (\l9os), a foundation, or t^
BefieKiov (Luke), in the same sense.
Fig. for the elements of sound doc-
trine.
6€lj.e\i6(i},' S>, diXTca, to lay a foundation,
to found; fig., pass., to be firm and
stable.
Oeo-diSaicTos, ov, taught of God, i Thess,
iv. 9.
6e6-\o'Yos, ov, 6, tlie divine, or tJie
theologian, of the apostle John in
the title to Rev.
Oeo-fxaxeoo, w, to fight against God,
Acts xxiii. 9.
0€o-/idx«s, ov, 6, a fighter against God,
Acts V. 39.
Oio-TTvevaTos, ov (Trvew), God-breathed,
inspired by God, 2 Tim. iii. 16.
&e6s, ov, 6, voc, once 0ee, Matt.
XX vii. 46; (i) God; 6 @e6s, the
revealed God, John i. i ; Acts
xvii. 24, &c.; (2) a. god, generically.
Acts vii. 43, xii. 22 ; 2 Cor. iv. 4 ;
Phil. iii. 19 ; John x. 34 (quoted
fromLXX.).
0eo-(re/8eta, as, 7], piety, towards God,
I Tim. ii. 10.
eeo-o-e$i]s, 4s, God-worshipping, devout,
John ix. 31.
Qeo(rrvj7]s, is, God-7iatin{r, or God-
hated, Rom. L 30.
60
VOCABULARY.
[0€OTT]S OvYttTTJp
BeSTTjs, T7JT0S, ^, deity, godhead, the
divine nature, CoL ii. 9.
&6d-<pL\o5, ou, 6, Theophitus, Luke i. 3 ;
Acts i. 1.
Ocpairela, as, v, {i) service and (abs. for
concrete) servants; (2) fiealing, as
the service whicJh brings health and
cure.
flepoTreww, evffoo, (i) to serve, minister
to; (2) to heal; ace. of pers., and
a.Tr6 or ace. of disease.
depdtTiou, ovros, by a servant, Heb.
iii. 5.
Qipiiw, iffoe, to reap, or gather, as corn;
tig., to realize tlie results of labour.
ftepi(Tp.6s, ov, 6, harvest, the gathering-
time, lit. or fig.
6epi(rrr)s, ov, 6, a reaper.
Bipfxaiva, ava>, only mid in N.T., to
warm oneself.
QepixTt], 7JS, T), heat, burning. Acts
xxviii 3.
Oipos, ovs, TO, summer, Jiarvest-time.
&io-<xa\opiKevs, ews, 6, a Thessalonian.
&€cr(ra\oviKr], rjs, 6, TItessalonica.
0€i;5a9, a, 6, Theudas, Acts v. 36.
Qtwpea, w, to behold; abs., to see, to
be a spectator of, to know by seeing,
to experience.
Bewpla, as, 7], a sight, a spectacle,
Luke xxiii. 48.
e^KTj, T)s, 7] (ridrjixi), a receptacle, as a
scabbard, John xviii. 1 1.
BrjKd^M, (i) to give suck. Matt. xxiv. 19;
(2) to suck, at the breast, Matt.
xxi. 16.
0^\vs, eto, V, female (fern., Rom. L 26;
ueut., Matt. xix. 4).
Bripa, as, rj, hunting, hence a snare,
Kom. XL 9.
6if}pevoo, ffu), to hunt, to catch, Luke
xi. 54.
d-npio-fiax^oi, w, to fight with wild
bmsts, I Cor. xv. 32.
Orjpiop, ou, 76, a wid beast. Acts
X. 12.
e-ncravpi^o, <rw, to lay up, as treasure ;
ace. (for any one, dat.), to re-
serve.
Qrja-avpSs, ov, 6, treasure, wealth, stores
of miiul and heart, Matt. vi. 19 ;
Luke vi. 45, &c.
di-yyavu, 2nd aor., %Qiyov, to touch,
Jtandle, abs., as Col. ii. 21; or
gen., as Heb. xii. 20; to hurt
(gen.), Heb. xi. 28,
6\lB<o, r/zw, to press, to throng, Mark
iii. 9; fig., to afflict, press witli
trouble, 2 Cor. i. 6 ; pass, perf
part., TteXiiMfjLevos, contracted, nar-
row. Matt. vii. 14.
6\7\pis, €0)5, r], pressure, affliction. Matt,
xiii. 21.
Qvi](TK(a, 2nd aor., edavov, to die; perf.,
redvTjKa, to be dead.
BvtjtSs, ii, 6v, mortal, dying, Rom.
viii. II, &c.
6opv^4(o, w, to disturb, Acts xvii. 5 ;
pass., to make a noise, as of
lamentation over the dead, Matt,
ix. 23,
BSpv&os, ou, 6, noise, uproar, Mark xiv. 2.
epavo), ff(a, to break, bruise, Lukeiv. 18.
Qpefijxa, aros, t6 (rpe'^w), the young of
cattle, sheep, &c., John iv. iz.
6pT]v4o), S), (\) to wail, lament, to raise
a funeral cry, John xvi. 20 ; (2) to
bewail, ace, Luke xxiii. 27.
Qprivos, ou, 6, a wailing, Matt. ii. 18.
epr}arK(ia, as, i], external woi'ship, re-
ligious homage. Col. ii. 18 ; James
i. 26, 27.
BpTjaKos, ov (prop, adj.), a devotee,
religious person, James i. 26.
Bpiafxfieiia, ffw, to triumph, to lead in
triumph, to cause to triumph, CoL
ii. 15; 2 Cor. iL 14.
dpi^, rpixds, dat. plur. , Bpi^i, rj, a hair,
the human hair, or that of animals,
Bpofo), u, to disturb, terrify by clamour.
Matt. xxiv. 6 ; 2 These, ti. 2.
dp6fA0os, ou, 6, a clot, large drop, as of
blood. Luke xxii 44.
dp6pos, ov, 6, a seat, as of judgment.
Matt. xix. 28 ; a throne, or seat of
power, Rev. iii. 21 ; met., of do-
minioti. Rev. xiii. 2 ; concrete, of
the ruler, or occupant of the throne,
Col. i. 16.
Qvdxftpa, tav, rd, Thyatira.
dvydrrtp, rp6s, v, a daxiglUer, a female
descendant, Luke xiii. 16; met., of
the inhabitants of a place, col-
lectively, Matt xxi. 5.
Qvyarpiov — 'le^ap-qX]
VOCABULARY.
61
OiryoLTpiov, ov, t6 (dim. of BvydT-qp), a
little daughter, Mark v. 23.
dveWa, 71$, 7], a tempest, whirhoind,
Heb. xii. 18.
66'ivos, 17, ov, made of the thyine-tree, a
strongly aromatic and hard-wooded
tree of Africa, Rev. xviii. 12.
Bvixla/xa, aros, r6, incense, Luke i. 10 ;
Eev. V. 8.
0vfj.iaT-f}piou, ov, t6, the censer, or vessel
in which the materials of incense
were burned, the altar on which the
incense was placed to burn, Heb. ix. 4.
Ovixidb), a>, to hum incense, Luke i. 9.
dvfjLOfMax^c, w, to be in great rage with
(dat. ), Acts xii. 20.
6vfx6s, ov, 6, passion, or violent commo-
tion of mind, great anger.
Qvix6oD, u>, to pi'ovoke to great anger;
j)ass., to be greatly angry with,
Matt. ii. 16.
6vpa, as, 7], a door, means of access,
Luke xi. 7 ; Matt, xxvii. 60 ; met. ,
John X. 7, 9.
6vp€6s, ov, 6, a (door-shaped) shield,
Eph. vi. 16.
dvpii, tSos, 7), an> opening, used for a
window or wicket, Acts xx. 9 ;
2 Cor. xi. 33.
6vpcup6s, ov, 6, 7], a door-keeper, porter,
John X. 3.
6vc ia, as, ^, ( i ) the act of sacrificing ;
(2) the victim sacrificed ; (3) religious
service, generally, Phil. iv. 18.
QviTiaariipLov, ov, t6, an altar, for sacri-
fices, for burnt offerings, Matt.
V. 23, 24 ; Heb. xiii. 10,
dvo), (TO}, (i) to slay in sacrifice. Acts
xiv. 13; (2) to hill animals, for
feasting. Matt. xxii. 4 ; (3) to slay,
generally, John x. 10.
Gw^as, o (from Heb. = SiSuftos),
Thomas.
Qwpal, aKos, masc. , a breast-plate, Eph.
vi. 14 ; I Thess. v. 8.
I, I, 'IwTo, Iota, the ninth letter. As
a numeral, f ^= 10 ; ^i 10,000.
*ia.iipo5, ov, d, Jairm.
*laKdl>P, b (Heb.), Jacob, (1) the patri-
arch; (2) the father-in-law of Mary,
Matt. i. 15.
'laKco^os, ov, 6, Greek form of preced.,
James, (i) the son of Zebedee; (2)
the son of Alphseus ; (3) the Lord's
brother. Some identify (2) and (3).
iafxa, aros, ^6 healing, cure, plur.,
1 Cor. xii. 9, 28, 30.
'lan^pris, ov, 6, Jambres, with 'Icwtjs,
2 Tim. iii. 8.
'lavvd, 6 (Heb.), Janna, Luke iii. 24.
'lavuris, ov, 6. See *lafi0prjs.
idofiai, wfiai, Idirofiai, dep., mid. aor.,
but passive in aor., perf. and fut.,
to heal, to restore to health, of body
or mind ; with clttS, of malady.
'lapeS, 6 (Heb.), Jared, Luke iii. 37.
laais, i(as, tj, a cure, healing. Acts
iv. 22, 30.
m«T7r<s, i^os, 7), jasper, a precious stone,
Rev. iv. 3, xxi. u, 18.
'Idawv, ovos, 6, Jason, Acts xvii. 5 ;
Rom. xvi. 2 1 ; perhaps two persons.
\arp6s, ov, 6, a physician.
XBe, or tSe {cihov), imper. as interj.,
behold! often followed by nomi-
native.
ISe'tt, OS, 7], form, aspect. Matt.
X xviii. 3.
tSios, la, ov, (i) one's own, denoting
ownership. Matt, xxiL 5 ; John
X. 12 ; also what is peculiar to.
Acts i. 19. Hence, tcc tSia, one's
own possessions — home — nation or
people — business or duty; ol Uioi,
one's own family, friends, com-
panions ; (2) that whic/i specially
pertains to, and is proper for, as
I Cor. iii. 8 ; Gal. vi. 9 ; (3) adver-
bially, Kar ibiay, privately; I8ic^,
individually.
i5id)T7]s, ov, 6, a private person, one of
the vulgar, an unlettered one.
iduv (comp. ^Se), lo! behold! calling
attention to what may be seen,
heard, or apprehended in any way.
'iSovfxaia, as, 7], Idumea, the O.T.
Edom, Mark iii. 8.
iSpcis, wTos, 6, sweat, Luke xxii. 44.
'U(aB-f]\, 7} (Heb.), Jezebel, symbolically*
used, Rev. ii. 20.
62
VOCABULARY.
Plcpd-iroXis — 'lopSdvTjs
'Upd-iroMs, €cas, f), Hlerajyolts, in
Phrygia, CoL iv. 13.
Uparela, as, 7], the Office of a priest,
priesthood, Luke L 9 ; Heb. vii. 5.
UpoLT^vna, aros, r6, tlie assemhln or
society of priests, a titlfe applied to
Christiaos, i Pet. ii. 5, 9.
Uparivo), <r», to officiate as a priest, to
perform Hie priesCs office, Luke
i. 8.
'Upcfxias, lov, 6, Jeremiah. (In Matt.
xxvii. 9, the name should probably
be Zechariah.)
Upevs, ecus, a priest, sometimes the
High Priest, of Christ, Heb. v. 6
(Ps. ex. 4) ; of Christians generally,
Rev. i. 6, V. 10.
*Upixd}, Tj (Heb.), Jericho.
Up6v, ov (prop. neut. of iepSs), a place
consecrated to God^ a fane or temple,
used of a heathen temple, as Acts
xix. 27 ; of the temple at Jerusalem,
as Matt. xxiv. i ; and of parts of
the temple, as Matt. xiL 5. See
Synonyms.
iepo-TrptTT^s, ovs, adj., becoming, or suit-
able to a sacred character, Titus
ii. 3.
iep6s, d, 6v, consecrated, holy, of the
Scriptures, z Tim. iii. 1 5 ; ri Upa,
sacred services, i Cor. ix. 13.
'UpoarSXvfia, wv, ra. See 'UpovcaXiifi.
'le^)0(ToXv(xirr]5, ov, 6, one of Jerusalem,
John vii. 25.
Upo-(Tv\fci), a, to commit sacrilege, to
rob God of the honour due to Him,
Rom. ii. 22.
Up6-<Tv\os, ov, robbing temples, sacri-
legious. Acts xix. 37.
Upovp-yia, w {lepou, (pyov), to minister
in holy things, Rom. xv. 1 6.
*l€pov<TaKi]ix, T) (Heb.), (for form, see
156), Jerusalem, (i) the city; (2)
the inhabitants; (3) the Jewish
state, or religious dispensation ; (4)
tig., of the Christian dispen-sation.
UpwavvTi, T)s, 71, the priestly office, Heb.
vii. 1 1.
'Ua-ffai, 6 (Heb,), Jesse.
*U<p6d€, 6 (Heb.), Jep/dhah.
'Uxoyias, ov, 6, J^cJionias, or JeJtma-
c/tin.
'Itjo-ous, ov (see 25), (i) Jesus, the
Saviour ; (2) Joshua, Acts vii. 45 ;
Heb. iv. 8 ; (3) a fellow-labourer of
Paul, so named. Col. iv. 11; (4)
Barabbas is so named in some early
MSS., Matt, xxvii. 16.
iKav6s, 7], 6v, (i) sufficient, competent
to; inf., irpds (ace.) or Iva; (2)
many, much, of numl^er or time.
iKav6T7is, 71T0S, 7], sufficiency, ability,
2 Cor. iii, 5.
iKav6oo, w, to make sufficient, or com-
petent to (two aces., or ace. and us).
iKerripia, as, 7), supplication, Heb. v. 7.
iKpids, aSoj, i], moisture, Luke viii. 6.
*Ik6vlov, ov, t6, Iconium.
i\ap6s, a, 6v, joyous, cheerful, "hila-
rious," 2 Cor. ix. 7.
iKapoTTis, -77)705, 7), chccrfulncss, alac-
rity, Kom. xii. 8.
IkdcKOixai, dao/xai, 1st aor., i\d(rd7)v,
(i) to be propitious to, dat., Luke
xviii. 13; (z) to make propitiation,
or atonement for, ace, Heb. ii 17.
l\aa-/j.6s, ov, 6, a propitiation, atoning
sacrifice, i John ii. 2.
i\a<Tri\pios, ia, ov, atoning, neut. (^iri-
de/xa, covering), the mercy -seat, Heb.
ix. 5 {6vfm, sacrifice); propitiation,
Rom. iii. 25.
'/Ae«9, (av (Attic form), propitious,
favourable, merciful, dat. ; tA.e«s 001 !
(God be) merciful to thee ! Matt,
xvd. 22, Godfwhid!
'lWvpiK6v, ov, r6, Illyricum, Rom.
XV. ly.
i/icts, dvTos, 6, a thong. Acts xxii. 25 ;
Luke iii. 16.
ifiaTi(a>, perf., pass,, part,, Ifiantrfievos,
to clothe.
Ifmnov, lov, t6 (dim of Tfia = fl/jia, from
^vvvfii), (i) clothing; (2) the outer
garment, disting. from x»'»'<«Ji'.
ifiarifflX6s, ov, 6, dothes, raiment.
ifxiipofMi, to luxve a strong affection for,
to love earnestly, i Thess. ii. 8.
ij/o, conj., (i) tJkat, to the end tlutt ;
'iva fii], that not, lest; (2) after words
of time, wfien that. (See 384.)
ivaTl; or Iva Ti; conj., to what end f
'li^TTirrj, 77s, 7), Joppa.
'lopSdvrjs, ov, 6, t/te Jordan.
tos — 'Iwpdp,]
VOCABULARY.
65
Jfos, ov, 6, (i) poison, Rom. iii. 13 ;
(2) rust, James v. 3.
louSoio, OS, 71 (really adj., fem., sc.
yrj), Judea.
lovSai^u}, to conform to Jewish prac-
tice, to " Judaize," in life or ritual,
Gal. ii, 14.
'lov^a'iK6s, T?, 6v, Jeioish, or Judaical,
Tit. i. 14; -ws, adv., Jewishly, in
Jewish style, Gal. ii. 14.
louSoIos, aia, ov, belonging to Judah,
Jewish. Often with subst. under-
stood, as aviip, a Jew, &c.
'lovZdiffyios, ov, 6, Judaism, the Jewish
system. Gal. i. 13, 14.
'Iou5o9, a, b, J-.idah, (i) Son of Jacob;
(2, 3) other ancestors of Christ,
Luke iii. 26, 30 ; (4) Jude, the
Apostle; (5) Judas Iscariot; (6)
Judas Barsabas, Acts xv. 22 ; (7) a
Jew living in Damascus, Acts ix. 11;
(8) a leader of sedition, Acts v. 37 ;
(9) a brother of our Lord, Matt,
xiii. 55 ; perhaps identical with (4).
See 'IdKcujSos.
'louAia, as, r), Julia, E,om. xvi. 15.
*lov\ios, ov, 6, Juliu^y Acts xxvii.
'lovv'ias, a, 6, Junias, Rom. xvi. 7.
'lovaros, ov, 6, Justus. Three of the
name are mentioned. Acts i. 23,
xviii. 7 ; Col. iv. 11.
iirivfvs, ecus, b, a horse- soldier, Acts
xxiii, 23.
lir-KiK6v (prop. neut. adj.), cavalry.
Rev. ix. 16.
?7r7ros, ov, b, a horse.
Ipis, ipiSos, T}, the rainhoio. Rev. iv. 3.
'WadK, b (Heb.), Isaac.
l<T-dyye\os, ov, like or equal to angels,
Luke XX. 36.
'laaxdp and 'la-atrxoip (Heb.), Jssa-
char.
"Lcr-n/xi, plur. ta/xiv, ^'ffre, Xffaffi, to know.
Acts xxvi. 4; Heb. xii. 17,
'la-Kapiwrr]s, ov, b, Iscariot, i.e., a man
of Karioth. (See Joshua xv. 25. )
taos, 7], ov (or Jcros, like, equal (dat.),
alike, consistent, as truthful wit-
nesses, Mark xiv. 56, 59 ; tcra, ad-
verbially, on an equality, Phil. ii. 6 ;
tffws, adv., perhaps, Luke xx. 1 3.
l(r6T7]s, r7}Tos, Vt (i) equality, in pro-
portion, 2 Cor. viii. 13; (2) equity,
Col. iv. I.
IffS-Tlfxos, ov, prized equally, of like
value, 2 Pet. i. i.
l(r6-\l/vxos, ov, like-minded, Phil. ii. 20.
'lapoirjA, b (Heb.) Israel, met., for the
whole nation of the Israelites. See
Synonyms.
'ItrpoTjAiTTjs, ov, 6, an Israelite.
IcTTrifjii (see 107), trans, in pres., im-
perf., fut., ist aor. ; so pass. ; to set
up, to place, to fix, as a time, to
confirm, to put in the balance, to
weigh; intrans. in perf., plup., and
2nd aor., to stand still or fir'in, to
endure, to be confirmed or establislied ,
to come to a stand or stop, to cease.
Iffropeca, S) {'[(XTcap, from 'l<T7\ixi), to know,
ascertain by examination. Gal. i. 1 8.
laX^P^^i «5 ^v, strong, mighty, powerful,
veJiement, as wind, honourable, in
station or office, well established.
l(rx^% vos, 7], strength, might,, power,
ability.
Iffxvoo, vo-Wy to he strong, sound, whole,
to avail, to gain influence, Acts
XIX. 20 (ets) ; to be able (inf. ) ; to
have ability for (ace).
'IraXia, as, Italy.
'iraAi/c/is, 7], 6v, Italian.
'Irovpaia, as, ^, Iturea.
IxdvSiou, ov, t6 (dim. of tx^h), a little
^ fish.
j'x^ws, ios, b, a fish.
IxvQs, ovs, tS, a footstep, fig., Rom.
iv. 12; 2 Cor. xii. 18 ; i Pet. ii. ai.
'iwiSajw, o (Heb.), Jotluim.
'Iwa^fo, 7JS, 7], Joanna.
""Itaavvas, a, b, Joannas, Luke iii. 27.
^IwoLvvris, ov, b, John, (i) the Baptist;
(2) the Apostle; (3) a member of
the Sanhedrim, Acts iv. 6; (4) John
Mark, Acts xii. 12.
'Iw3, b (Heb. ), Job, the patriarch.
'I&)V7\, b (Heb.), Joel, the prophet.
'Icoj/av, o (Heb.), Jonan, Luke iii. 30.
''loams, a, b, Jonas, or Jonah, (i) the
prophet. Matt. xii. 39-41; the
father of Peter, John i. 42.
'JcopdfA, & (Heb.), Joram, or Jehoram^
son of Jehoshaphat.
II
64
VOCABULARY.
['IwpcCji. — Ka0-oirXft«»
'Iwpelfi, 6 (Heb. ), Jorim, Luke iii. 29.
*Ia>aa<pdT, 6 (Heb.), Jeboshaphat.
*I«(rf]s, 7), Joses. Four are mentioned,
(i) Luke iii. 29; (2) Mark vi. 3;
(3) Matt. xiii. 55; (4) Acts iv. 36.
Some think (2) and (3) identical.
•Iu)<rfj<^, 6 (Heb.), Joseph, (i) the patri-
arch, (2, 3, 4) three among the
ancestors of Jesus, Luke iii. 24, 26,
30 ; (5) Mary's husband; (6) Joseph
of Arimathaea; (7) Joseph, called
also Barsabas, Acts L 23.
'Uealtts, ov, 6, Josiah.
wra, t6, iota, yod, the smallest letter
of the Hebrew alphabet, the smallest
iMng^ Mait. v, 1-8.
K.
K, K, Kdmra, kappa, k, the tenth ktter.
As a numeral, 1^ = 20; yc = 20,000.
Kayd) {KOLfjiol, Kct/ie), contr. for koI Jyd
(«ol ifioi, Koi ifjLi), and /, / also,
even I.
K*,9d, adv., contr. fr. ko0* S, according
as, Matt. xxviL 10.
KaO-uipeffis, ews, r), demolition, destruc-
tion (opp. to oiKo5o;u^, which see).
Ka9-xiifie(t), KadcKoi, KaQiiKov, [\) to take
down, or away. Acts xiii. 29; (2)
demolish, destroy, lit. (Luke xii 1 8),
or fig., 2 Cor. X. 5.
KoS-aipfc, apu), to cleanse, to clear by
pruning, John xy. 2; to purify, i.e.y
from sin by expiation, Heb. x. 2,
KaO-dvep, adv., even as, truly as.
Kad-diTTM, d\pa, to fasten upon, as a
serpent. Acts xxviii. 3 (gen.).
KaBapi^u), att. f ut. , KadapLu (as KaOalpco),
to cleanse, e.g., a leper, by healing
his disease. Matt. viii. 2, 3 ; from
moral pollution, Heb. ix. 22, 23 ; to
declare clean, i.e., from ceremonial
pollution, Acts X. 15.
Ka6apiaiJ.6s, uv, i, clea.nsmg, by wash-
ing, John ii. 6 ; by enjoined rites,
Luke ii. 22 ; by healing disease,
Mark i. 44; by expiation, 2 Pet.
i. 9.
KaBapSs, d, 6p, clean, pure, (i) phy-
sically, as water, gold, or the body;
(2) ceremonially, as Titus i. 15 ; (3)
ethically, as the heart, the con-
science, or the worship. Matt. v. 8j
1 Tim. iii. 9 ; James i. 27.
KaQap6n]s, vros, 7}, purity, «.«., cere-
monial, Heb. ix. 13.
Kad-eSpa, as, ri, (i) a seat, lit.; (2)
met., a chair, of authority, as
Matt, xxiii. 2.
KaOeCofiai, to sit dovm, Luke ii. 46 ;
J ohn iv. 6 ; iv or iirl, dat.
/ca0-e?s, adv. (see 300, /3, 4), one by
one.
Kae-e^rjs, adv. (see 126, d), in orderly
manner, in succession, sometimes
with art. preced.
Kad-eiSu, to sleep, to be asleep; fig.,
to be slothful, 1 Thess. v. 6.
KadrjyrjTiis, ov, 6, a leader, teacher.
Kad-iiKca, used only impers., it is ft, it
becomes (ace, inf.); rh KoSriKoy, Uie
becoming, duty.
Kdd-'nixai, Kddri for Kderjffai, imper.,
Kddov (see 367), to sit down, to sit,
to be settled, to abide, with ds, iy,
iiri (gen., dat., ace), vapd, &c., or
adverbs.
Ka9-i)pi.4pav, adv. , day by day.
KaO-TjiJLepivds, -i], 6v, daily, Acts vi i.
icaQi^a), law, (i) trans., to cause to sit
down; {z) to seat one's self, preps.,
&c. , as Kddr)fjuu ; (3) to 6e sitting (mid.
in Matt. xix. 28 ; Luke xxii. 30).
Ka94^^i, ist aor., KadrJKa (comp. 112),
to let down, Luke v. 1 9 ; Acts ix. 25.
Ka6-i<TTrifti (and KaQiffTdco, or -ayco), to
appoint, Luke xii. 14 ; to set over,
or make cliief of and over. Matt,
xxiv. 45; to constitute or make, ^om.
V. 19; to conduct, Acts xvii. 15.
Kad-6, adv. (for ko0* 0), as, according
as, 2 Cor. viii. 12 ; i Pet. iv. 13.
Ka6o\iK6s, i], iv, general, universal,
"Catholic," found in the inscrip-
tions of seven Epistles (wrongly m
the case of 2 and 3 John).
Ka9-6\ov, adv., entirely; Ka66\ov fx^,
Acts iv. 18, not at all.
Ka6-oTr\i^(o, in pass., to be fully armed,
Luke xi. 21.
KaO-opdci) — KoXo-StSdo-KoXos] VOCABULARY.
65
KaO-opdo}, a>, in pass. , to he seen clearly,
E,om. i. 20.
KOd-oTi, adv., as, according as, Acts
ii. 45 J because iJiut, fovy Luke
xix. 9.
Kad-ds, adv., according as, John vi. 58;
even as, i Cor. i. 6; when. Acts
vii. 17.
Kal, conj., cop., aw(Z, also, even. For
the various uses of this conjunction,
see 403.
Kdiacpas, a, 6, Caiaphas.
Kai-ye, conj., and indeed, certainly,
truly.
Kdiv, 6 (Heb.), Cain.
Kouudv, 6 (Heb.), Cainan. Two are
mentioned, Luke iii. 36, 37.
Kouu6s, 17, 6v, new, (i) materially, as a
garment, Luke v. 36 ; (2) in reve-
lation, &c., as Acts xvii. 19; Mark
xvi. 17. See Synonyms.
Kaivorrjs, rjros, rj, newness, renovation,
(moral and spiritual), Kom. vi. 4,
vii 6,
Kai-irep, conj., although.
KaipSs, ov, 6, time, season, opportunity,
Gal. vi. 10 ; a particular season,
Gal. iv. 10 ; an allotted time, John
V. 4 ; Acts xvii. 26 ; a year (in
prophetic style). Rev. xiL 14. See
Synonyms.
Ka7(rap, apos, 6, Ccesar, applied to
Koman Emperors after Julius, Luke
ii. I, XX. 22; Acts xi. 28; PhiL
iv. 22.
Kaiaapfia, as, % Ccesarea. Two cities
of Palestine, one in Galilee [Ccesarea
Philippi), Matt. xvi. 13 ; the other
on the coast of the Mediterranean,
Acts viii. 40, &c.
Kot-Toi, conj., nevertheless, though in-
deed.
fcot'w (of), pf., pass., KiKavfmt, to hum,
to kindle ; pass. , to he on fire ; fig. ,
to be moved ivith ardour, Luke
xxiv. 32.
Kofcet (koi and ewei), and there.
KaKeldev [koL and iKeidev), and thence,
and from that.
KMilvos, Tj, (koI and iKelvos), and he,
she, it.
Kcucia, OS, 7], badness, (i) of character,
wickedness, Acts viii. 22 ; (2) of
disposition, malice, ill-will, i Cor.
V. 8 ; (3) of condition, ajfiiction,
calamity, Matt. vi. 34.
KOKo-rjdeia, as, r], malevolence, Rom.
i. 29.
/ccuto-\o7€«, w, to revile, to speak evil of
(ace. ).
Kaxo-tToiQiia, as, rj, a suffering of evil or
affliction, James v. jo.
KaKo-iraOeo), u, to suffer evil, to endure
affliction, 2 Tim. ii. 3, 9 ; James
V. 13.^
KOKo-iroUa}, w, abs., to do injury, as
Mark iii. 4 ; to commit crimes, as
I Pet. iii 17.
KOKo-TToiSs, 6v, as subst., an evildoer,
malefactor, John xviii. 30 ; i Pet.
ii 12.
KaK6s, -f], 6v, evil, wicked, malignant;
rh KUKhv, wickedness. Matt, xxvii. 23 ;
also, calamity, affliction. See Syno-
nyms. Adv., -ws, wickedly; kokws
€X€iv, to he ill, or in trouble.
KOK-ovpyos, ov, as subst., an evil-
worker, malefactor, Luke xxiii 32.
KOK-ovxfOi, «, only in i)ass,, part.,
treated ill, harassed, Heb. xi. 37,
xiii. 3.
KaK6co, «, dffo), to ill-treat, Acts vii. 6,
19 ; to exasperate, Acts xiv. 2.
KaKcoa-ts, €ws, t}, evil condition, affliction,
ill-treatment, Acts vii. 34.
KoKdiJLT), rjs, T]. stubble, i Cor. iii 12.
KoKafios, ov, 6, a stalk, as (i) a reed,
growing. Matt. xi. 7 ; (2) a reed, as
a mock sceptre. Matt, xxvii. 29; (3)
a pen, 3 John 13; (4) a measuring-
rod. Rev. xxi 15.
KoXiO), a, 4aw, KiKKtiKa, to call, hence
{\) to summon, Luke xix. 13 ; (2) to
name. Matt, i 21, x. 25 ; (3) to
invite, John ii. 2 ; (4) to appoint, or
select, for an office, Heb. v. 4; (5)
pass., to be called, or accounted,
ie., to be. Matt. v. 9, 19; James
ii. 23.
KoKKi-^Kaios, ov, 7), a good olive tree.
KaXK'uau (compar. of Ka\6s), better;
adv., KdwTov, Acts xxv. 10.
KoAo-SiSao-KaAos, ot/, b, 7], a teacher of
what is good, Titus ii. 3.
66
VOCABULARY.
[KaXol — Kar-a-yycXevs
KaA.ol At/ueVes, Fair havens. A place
of good harbourage iu the island of
Crete, Acts xxvii. 8.
KoXo-iroteo), w, to act well, or honour-
ably, 2 Thess. iii. 13.
KaK6s, 7], 6v, fair, hence (i) physically
beautiful, of good quality ; (2)
morally good, honourable, noble;
(3) excellent, advantageous; adv.,
-S)S, well, fairly.
KdXvfifia, aros, t6, a covering, veil,
2 Cor. iii. 13.
KaXvTTTa), xpco, to cover, Luke viii. 16 ;
1 Pet. iv, 8 ; to hide, as for protec-
tion, Luke xxiii. 30.
Kdfxt)\os, ov, 6, rj, a camel.
Kafilvos, ov, 71, a furnace. Rev. i. 15.
Kafi-fivu {Kara, and ju.ua)), to shut, close,
e.g., the eye-;, Matt. xiiL 15; Acts
XX viii. 27.
Kciixvci), Kaixa, pf., K(Kixt]KOL, to be weary,
faint, to be sick, Heb. xiL 3 ; James
V. 15.
K^iioi, Ka/xe (see Korydo).
KdfjLvra}, t|/a>, to bend, as the knee, Rom,
xiv. 1 1 ; Phil. ii. 10.
K&u (Kal i&v), and if, even if, but, at
least, although, Matt. xxvi. 35 ;
John viii. 14.
Kava, T] (Heb.), Cana.
KcwoviTrjs, ov, 6, a Cananite (from the
Hebrew, meaning the same as Ze-
lotes), Matt. x. ^4 ; Mark iii. 18.
Some read Kayowa^os.
KcwStJ/cTj, Tjs, 71, Candace, Acts viii.
27. ^ •
KooftAiv, ouos, 5, (i) a rule of conduct;
(2) a limit or sphere of duty, z Cor.
X. 1-5 ; "canon."
Kairf/)-i.oou)U,, or Ka<p(tp-v<xovuL, 7] (Heb.),
Capeivmam.
jcoiryjAeuo), to make gain by adulterating,
as wines, &(;. Used of God's word,
2 Cor. ii. 17.
KaTrv6s, ov, 6, a smoke, a vapour, a
cloud. Rev. XV. 8.
KairiroSoKia, as, t], Cappadoda.
KopZia, as, 7), the heart, met., as the
Seat of the afiFections, but chiefly of
the unde; standing. See Synonyms.
Fig., for the middle of a thing, as
Matt. xii. 40.
Kap^L0-yv(t)ar7)s, ov, 6, one who knows i/ie
heart.
KopTTos, ov, S, fruit, produce, Luke
xiL 17; met., for children. Acts
ii. 30 ; deeds, conduct, the fruit of
the hands. Matt. iii. 8 ; effect, result,
.emolument, Rom. vi. 21. Praise is
called die fruit of the lips, Heb.
xiii. 15.
Kopiroy, ow, &, Carpus, 2 Tim. iv. 13.
Kopiro-^opeo), w, iiffoj, to bring forUi, as
the earth its fruits, Mark iv. 28 ;
mid., to bear fruit to oneself, to in-
crease. Col. i. 6.
KapTro-(p6pos, ov, bringing forth fruit,
fruitful.
KopTipias, w, "fiffco, to endure, persevere,
to persist with courage, Heb. xi. 27.
Kop^os, ovs, r6, a mote, a splinter, or
light film in the eye. Matt. vii. 3.
/caret, prep., gov. the gen. and accus,
cases, down, hence gen., down from,
against, &c. Ace, according to,
against, &c. (see 124, 147, a). In
composition, koto may import de-
scent, subjection, opposition, distribu-
tion, and with certain verbs (as of
destruction, diminution, and the
like) is intensive = "utterly."
Kara-Baivu, fir\<ro(xai, Be$7]Ka, 2nd aor.,
KareBTiv, to go or come down, spoken
of persons and of things. Acts
viii. 26 ; of gifts from heaven, of the
clouds, storms, lightnings; also of
anything that falls ; Luke xxii. 44.
Kara-fidWw, 1st aor., pass., KaTffi\7id7}y,
to cast down (ace.) ; mid., to lay, as
as a foundation, Heb. vi. i.
KaTa-Bap€(a, w, to weigh down, to op-
press, 2 Cor. xii. 16.
KOTo/Boo-is, €6Ds, 7], dcsccut, decUvity,
Luke xix. 37.
Kara-BiBdCcD, to bring down, cast down.
Matt. xL 23.
KaTa-Bo\7), Tis, 7], a founding, laying
the foundation of, Matt. xiii. 35.
So Heb. xi. u, "for the fouudation
of a posterity. "
KaTa-Bpa$evw, to deprive of due reward,
to circumvent. Col. ii. 1 8.
Kar-a-yyiXivs, e«y, <5, a proclaimer, a
heraldf Acts xvii. 18.
Kar-ayy(k\(o — Kar-aXXdo-o-w] VOCABULARY.
67
KaT-ayyeWa, to declare openly, to
preach; pass., to he celeh'ated, or
publicly 2»'oclaimed and spoken of,
Rom. i. 8.
KaTa-ye\dai, a, to laugh at, deride,
Mark v. 40.
Kara-ytudoaKw, to co7idemn, blamc, gen.
of pers.
KaT-dyvufjLi, to break in pieces, to break
down. Matt. xii. 20.
KaT-ay(jo, to conduct down, Acts ix. 30 ;
to bring down to land, as a ship,
Luke V. II. Hence, pass., to come
to land. Acts xxi. 3, xxvii. 3.
Kar-aycovlCofiat, dep. , to contend against,
suhdue (ace), Heb. xi. 33.
KaraSeu}, w, to bind, as wounds, Luke
X. 34-
Kard-b7]Xos, ov, quite evident, Heb.
vii. 15.
KaTa-5i/ca^a>, to condemn, to pronounce
sentence against. Matt. xii. 7 ; Luke
vi. 37.
Kara-^wKoj, to follow closely, to pursue
intently, Mark i. 36.
Ka.Ta-hovK6(a, So, doaoo, to reduce to
slavery, 2 Cor. xi. 20 ; Gal. ii. 4.
KaTa-5wa>TTfv(a, to exercise power over,
to oppress. Acts x. 38 ; James ii. 6.
KaT-aicTxvvca, to dishonour, i Cor. xi. 4;
to put to sliame, i Cor. i. 27 ; to
shame, as with disappointed ex-
pectation, I Pet. ii. 6 ; pass., to be
ashamed, Luke xiii. 1 7.
Kara-Kaib) {af), avtrto, to burn up, to
consume entirely. Matt. iii. 12; Heb.
xiii. II.
KaTa-Ka\vTrTCi), in mid., to wear a veil,
I Cor. xi. 6, 7.
Kara-Kavxdofiai, cD/iai, to glory, to re-
joice against, to glory over (gen.),
Kom. xi. 18; James ii. 13.
Kard-Keifxai, to recline, as the sick,
Mark i. 30; as at table, Mark
xiv. 3.
KaTa-K\dco, «, to break tfc pieces, Mark
vi. 41 ; Luke ix. 16.
Kara-KXeiu, to shut up, confine, Luke
iii. 20; Acts xxvL 10.
Kara- Khripo-doT 4(0, w, to give by lot, to
distribute an inheritance by lot. Acts
]dii. 19.
KaraKXlvco, v'2, to cause to lie doum, or
recline; mid., to recline, as at table,
Luke ix. 14.
Kara-K\v((a, crw, to inundate, deluge,
pass., 2 Pet. iii. 6.
KaTaK\v(rfjL6s, ov, 6, a deluge, flood,
1 Pet ii. 5.
Kar-aKoKovOea, w, to follow closely
(abs. or dat. ), Luke xxiii. 5 5 ; Acts
xvi. 17.
KaTa-KOTTTO), ^co, to wound, Mark v. 5.
Kara KprjfjLvi^co, aw, to cast down head-
long, Luke iv. 29.
Kard-Kpifia, aros, r6, condemnation,
E,om. viii. 1.
KaTa-Kpifcd, vS), to give judgment against,
to adjudge worthy of punishment
(gen. and dat.), to condemn, Matt.
XX. 18; Rom. ii. i, viii. 3.
Kard-Kpicris, f a>s, i], the act of condemna-
tion.
Kara-Kvpiivta, to exercise auihoHty over.
Matt. XX. 25 ; to get the mastery of,
Acts xix. 16 (gen.).
K!zra-Xa\eoo, 5>, to speak against (gen.),
James iv. 11; i Pet. iii. 1 6.
Kara-KaXla, as, fem., evil speaking,
obloquy, reproach.
KardkaXos, ov, 6, rj, a calumniator,
detractor.
KaTa-kafi&dvca, Xri^ojjLai, to seize or lay
hold of, John viii. ^, ^ ; to grasp,
as the prize in public games, Phil,
iii. 12 ; mid., to comprehend, i.e.,
to hold, with the mind ; to perceive,
to apprehend, on, or ace. and inf.,
Eph. iii. 18.
Kara-Kiyw, in pass., to be reckoned
among, i Tim. v. 9.
Kard-K^i^ixa, aros, t6, a remnant, a
residue.
Kaja-Xdiroi, i//cd, to leave utterly, as ( 1 )
to depart from, to forsake ; (2) to re-
serve, or leave remaining, Kom. xi. 4.
KaraXiddQM, aoa, to stone, to destroy by
stoning, Luke xx. 6.
KUT-aWay^, rjs, % reconciliation, Rom.
V. 1 1, xi. 15.
Kar-aWda<T(a, ^a>, to reconcile, ace. and
dat., 2 Cor. v. 18, 19; pass., to be,
or to become reconciled, i Cur.
vii. 1 1 ; 2 Cor. v. 20.
BS
VOCABULARY . [KaTa-Xoiiros — KaTa-<rK€vdt«
^card-Xoiiros, ov, plur., the rest, the
residue. Acts xv. 17.
Kord-T^fia, aros, r6, a lodffing-place, a
caravanserai, Luke iL 7 ; a guest-
chamber, Luke xxii. 1 1.
Kora-hMa, Hctu, to loosen down, (i) lit.
of a building, to destroy, Mark
xiv. 58; (2) fig.,* of law or com-
mand, to render void. Matt. v. 17 ;
(3) met., of beasts of burden, to
unbind. Hence to Jialt, to lodge,
Luke ix. 12.
Kara-fiavOdva}, 2nd aor., Kareixadov, to
consider, to note accurately. Matt,
vi. 28.
Kara-fiaprvpfco, u, to bear testimony
(ace.) against any one (gen.), Matt,
xxvi. 62.
Kara-iJ.4v(o, to remain, abide. Acts i, 1 3.
Kara-iJ.6vas, adv., separately, by one-
self, privately.
Kur-avd-defia, aros, r6, curse, Eev.
xxii. 3.
Kar-ava-QeixaTi^ai, to curse, devote to
destruction. Matt, xxvi, 74.
KaT-av-aXlcTKU), to consume, to devour,
as fire, Heb. xii. 29.
KaravapKao), u, i](Ta>, to be idle, or idly
burdensome to (gen.), 2 Cor. xi. 8.
Kara-V€va>, to nod, to make signs to,
dat., Luke v. 7.
Kwra-voiU), S>, {i) to observe carefully,
remark, consider; (2) to have reject
to, to regard (aec. ).
Kar-avrda), &, to come to, to arrive at,
to attain, with «s, Acts xvi. 1 ;
Phil. iii. 1 1.
Kard-vv^is, «»s, ^, stupor, deep sleep,
Rom. xi. 8.
Kara-vicraci), {», 2nd aor. pass., icaT€-
virynu, pass., to be pricked through,
to be greatly moved. Acts li. 37.
KaT-a^iSa, w, doaw, pass., to be counted
tvorthy, or Jit for (gen.), Luke
XX. 35 ; 2 Thess. i. 5.
KaTo-iraTcw, w, to trample on, to tread
underfoot (ace), Luke viii. 5.
KaTd-Travffis, fos, v, rest, place of rest,
Heb. iv. I, 3, 10, II ; Acts vii. 49.
Kara iravw, (i) trans., to hold back, or
restrain, ace. (also toQ /i^, and inf.),
Acts xiv. 18 ; to give rest, or to cav^e
to rest, Heb. iv. 8 ; (2) iutrans. , to
rest, or cease from, airh, Heb.
iv. 4.
Kara-ir^TcuTixa {Trerdyvv/jLi), aros, t6, a
veil, or curtain, Luke xxiii. 45.
KaTa-irivw, 2nd aor., /coTeVtov ; ist aor.
pass., KarevSOTiv ; to drink up, or
swallow completely. Matt, xxiii. 24 ;
fig., to overwhelm, Heb. xi. 29; to
destroy, i Cor. xv. 54,
KaTa-viTTrw, and aor., Kar4ire(rou, to
fall down prostrate, or dead. Acts
xxvi. 14, xxviil 6.
*caTo-TrA.€cw (ef), cvaofiou, ist aor, kotc-
ir\evaa, to sail to, Luke viii. 26.
KOTo-iroj/ew, w, in pass., to be worn down,
as by affliction, 2 Pet. ii. 7 ; to be
oppressed. Acts vii. 24.
Kara-Trovri(iu, to sink down, to be
drowned. Matt. xiv. 30, xviii. 6.
Kardpa, as, rj, cursing, James iii. 10;
curse, of the law, Gal. iiL 10.
Karapdofiai, ufiai, to imprecate, to devote
to destruction, to wish evil to, Mark
xi. 21; Matt. V. 44; pass., i>erf.,
part., accursed. Matt. xxv. 41.
KaT-apyeco, w, i\(T(a, to render useless, to
make vain, or to no purpose, Luke
xiii. 7 ; Rom. iii. 3 ; ^o bring to an
end, to cease from, i Cor. vi. 13,
XV. 24 ; to cease to be connected with,
to apostatize. Gal. v. 4.
KaT-apidfi4<i), St, to number among. Acts
i. 17.
KaT-apriCoi, i<T(o, to reft, to repair.
Matt. iv. 21 ; to perfect, to complete,
1 Thess. iiL 10 ; i Pet. v. 10 ; to be
thoroughly united, 1 Cor. L 10; to
reclaim, from error or sin, Gal.
vi. I.
Kar-dpTiais, eus, r], restoration, a being
made perfect, 2 Cor. xiii. 9.
KUT-apT iff 1x6s, ov, 6, confirmation, Eph.
iv. 12.
Kara-<relco, aw, to wave the hand, to
beckon, Acts xii. 17.
KaTa-cKdiTToo, ipoo, to demolish, by
digging under, to overthrow, to raae^
Acts XV. 1 6.
Kartk-aKwd^w, daw, to prepare fully, to
build, to adjust. Matt. xi. 10 ; Luke
i. 17; Heb. iii. 3, 4.
KaTa-(rKt]V($ci) — Kar-i^-C(rrt\^\.^ VOCABULARY.
69
Kara-ffKrivSa), u, doffw, to dwelly as birds
on trees, &c,, Matt. xiii. 32; to
remain, Acts ii. 26.
KaTa-ffK^pcoffis, (US, r), a
place, a haunt, as of birds, Matt.
viii. 20.
KaTa-(TKidCo>, era), to overshadow, Heb.
ix. 5.
KaTa-a-KOTrecD, «, to inspect narrowly ^ to
plot against, Gal. ii. 4.
Kara-arKOTrSt, a scovt, a spy.
Kara-aofl^ofxai, aofjiai, to deal deceitfully
vjith, to employ craft against. Acts
vii. 19.
Kara-GT^hXa), \S>, ist aor., KareVretAa,
to ajypease, restrain. Acts xix.
35, 36.
KaTd-aTrjfia, aros, t6, behaviour, con-
duct, Tit. ii. 3.
Kwra-ffToXi], ri$, rj, raiment, outer cloth-
ing, I Tim. ii. 9.
KaTa-ffTpfcpa, ?|/a>, to overthrow, Matt.
xxi, 1 2 ; Mark xi. 1 5.
Kara-ffTpriVLda), w, dffw, to grow wanton
against (gen. ), i Tim. v. 1 1.
KaTa-(TTpo(pi], ■ Tjs, ri, an overthrow,
"catastrophe," 2 Tim. ii 14; 2 Pet.
ii. 6.
Kara-ffTpctivvvfii, ffrpdiffa), to strew down,
or about, i Cor. x. 5.
Kara-crvpo}, to drag, to trail along,
Luke xii. 58.
KaTa-a<i>dC(», |ft), to slay, to slaughter,
Luke xix. 27.
Kara-trcppayl^a), aa, to close, to seal up,
as a book, Kev. v. i.
KaTa-axeffis, eus, rj, a possession. Acts
vii. 5, 45.
KaTa-riO-qfii, 6^aw, ist aor., KUTedr^Ka,
to deposit, as a body in a tomb,
Mark xv. 46 (mid.); to exhibit, or
to shoio to, ace, (x^ptv) and dat.,
Acts xxiv. 27, XXV. 9, "to lay up
kindness for one's self."
KOTa-To^Tj, ^s, 7], paronomasia with
irepnofir}, mutilation, Phil. iii. 2.
Karo-To^euo), to transfix, Heb. xii. 20.
KOTo-Tpex*^? ^'^^ aor., KareSpafiov, to
run down (eVt, ace), Acts xxi. 32.
Ka.-Ta-<pd-^w, see Kareardta.
Kara-ipepci), KaToiau, ist aor., Kar-i]veyKa,
pass., KaTi}v4xQv*, to throw down,
as an adverse vote. Acts xxvi. 10 ;
pass., to be borne, or throuni down,
to fall. Acts XX. 9.
KaTa-(pevyu, 2nd aor., Karetpvyoy, tojlee
for refuge, with ets. Acts xiv. 6;
with inf., Heb. vi. 18.
KaTa-(p6elp(o, pass., \>eTi., KaT€(p6apij.at;
2nd aor., KaT€<pddpr}j/, {i) to corrupt
utterly, 2 Tim. iii. 8 ; (2) to destroy,
2 Pet. ii. 12.
KaTa-<f)i\4o, 5), to kiss affectionately, or
repeatedly (ace), Matt. xxvi. 49;
Luke vii. 45 ; Acts xx. 37.
Kara-(()pou€(a, w, to think lightly of.
Matt, xviii. 10; to neglect, or to
care nothing for, Matt. vi. 24
(gen.).
KaTa-(ppoy7}T'fis, ou, 6, a despiser, a
scorner. Acts xiii. 41.
KOTo-xe« (ff), euffw, ist aor., KaTe'xeo ;
to pour doujn upon. Matt. xxvi. 7.
KaTaxQ6vios, ov, subterranean, Phil.
ii. 10.
KaTa-xpaofxai, Sofiai, to use overmuch, to
abuse, i Cor. vii. 31, ix. 18 (dat.).
Kara-jivxoo, to cool, to refresh, Luke
xvi. 24.
Kar-eiSwAoy, ov, full of idols. Acts
xvii. 16.
KUT-evavTi, adv., or as prep, with gen.,
over against, before, in presence, or
in sight of
Kar-evunriov, adv., in the very presence
o/(gen.).
Kar-e^ovaid^o), to exercise authority
against, or over (gen.), Matt. xx. 25.
KUT-epydCofjLai, d-TOfxai, with mid. and
pass., aor. (augm., d-), to work out,
to do fully, to produce, Eom. iv. 15;
to make an end of, Ex)h. vi 13; to
work, to practise.
Kar-4pxopiai, 2nd aor., KarTiKQov, to
descend, come down to.
KonaQita, fut. KareSofxai ; 2nd aor.,
KaT€(payov, to eat up, to devour
entirely, lit. or tig., Matt. xiii. 4;
John ii 17; Gal. v. 15.
Kar-evdvuco, vw, to direct well, to guide
successfully, i Thess. iii 11.
KaT-i(p-i(TrT}iAi, 2nd aor., KareirfcrTTjp,
to make an assault upon. Acta
xviii 12.
70
VOCABULARY.
[kot ^ft> — K€vo-8ogia
Kar-ex^i Karacrxvo't'}, to seize on, to hold
fasty to retain, possess, to prevent,
from doing a thing {rod, p.-i), with
inf.), to repress, K,om. i. 18; rh
Kar^xov, the hindrance, z Thess. ii.
6, 7 ; Karelx^^ **^ "^^^ alyiakSv, they
held for the shore. Acts xxvii. 40.
KaTT}yop€j>, (a, r)<Tu, to accuse, to speah
against, abs., or with person in
gen. ; charge in gen. alone or after
TTfpi or Kara ; pass. , to be accused ;
with vttS or irapd, of the accuser.
KUT-Tj-yopia, as, 7}, an accusation, a
charge, pers. in gen. alone, or after
KOTa, charge also in gen.
Kar-'nyopos, ou, S, an accuser, John
viii. 10.
KaT-f]<peia, ay, rj, dejection, sorrow,
James iv. 9.
KOTTjxf"? (■^, 'h(^<^, perf., pass., Karij-
XTj/aat (^x^^)' ^^ instruct orally, to
teach, "catechize;" pass., to be in-
formed of, Luke i. 4.
kot' iSioj/, separately, privately, by one-
self [see iSios).
Kar-iSo), a> {16s), to consume by rust,
James v. 3.
KaT-iaxva, to prevail against, to get the
upper hand of (gen. ), Matt. xvi. 1 8 ;
Luke xxiii. 23.
KOT-ot/ce'w, w, ( I ) intrans. , to dwell., with
h, ils (const, praeg.), iirl, gen. or
adverbs of place; (2) trans., to dwell
in, to inhabit, ace. ; fig. , of qualities
or attributes, as abiding (spoken of
Christ, dwelling in his saints, Eph.
iii. 17). ^
Kar-oiKf](ns, cws, 7], a dwelling, luibita-
tion, Mark v. 3.
Kar-oiKrjTijpiov, ov, no, a dwelXing-plxice,
Eph. ii. 22 ; Rev. xviii. z.
Kar-oiKia, as, rj, « dwelling, a habita-
tion. Acts xvii. 26.
KaT-oTrTpl((a, mid., to behold, as in a
mirror, 2 Cor. iii. 18,
Ko.T.6p8ttiixa, aros, r6, an honourable act
well performed, Acts xxiv. 3.
/cciro), adv., doiouicards, down. Matt,
iv, 6 ; the lower part, Mark xiv. 66 ;
with relation to time, under, Matt,
ii. 16; couiparat., kotwtc/jw, yet
louKr.
KUTUTepos, a, ov (/fciTw), loioer, Eph.
iv. 9 (on which see 259).
Kavfia, arSs, t6 (koiw), heat, scorching
heat, burning. Rev. vii. 16, xvi. 9.
KavixaTi^o), CO), to scorch, burn, torture
by fire. Matt. xiii. 6 ; Mark iv. 6.
Kavais, 6WS, 7}, a burning, burning up,
Heb. vi. 8.
KavaSo), a, to set on fire, pass., to be
burned, 2 Pet. iii. ic, 12.
Kavacou, wvos, ^, ( i ) scorching /teat ; (2)
perh. an arid wind, from the E.,
James i. 11 (see Hos. xii. i, &c.).
Ka\nr\piaQa, to brand, or sear, as with
a hot iron ; fig., pass., i Tim. iv. 2.
Kauxdo/xai, upLai, 2nd pers., Kavxaaai ;
fut,, i](rofj.ai, to glory, to boast, to
exult, both in a good sense and in
a bad, i Cor. i. 29 ; Eph. ii. 9 ;
followed with prep., iv, rrepl, gen.,
inrep, gen., iiri, dat.
KavxVH^ (i^os, t6, (i) glorying, boast-
ing; (2) the object, or ground of
boasting, Rom. iv. 2.
Kavxvo'^s, cws, 71, the act of boasting,
gtorying.
Kacpapvaovfi (see Katrepvaovfi), Caper-
naum.
Key XPfai, Mv, at, Cenchrece, the port
of Corinth, Acts xviii. 18 ; Rom.
xvi. I.
Kedpos, ov, 71, a cedar, John xviii. i ;
proiiably a mistaken reading for
following.
KeSpdov, 6 (Heb., dark, or turbid),
Cedron, a turbid brook between the
Mount of Olives and Jerusalem.
Kel/xai, aai, rai; impf., iKeifxrjv, cto, to;
to lie, to recline, to be laid, Luke
xxiii. 53 ; i John v. 19; met., to be
given, as laws, i Tim. i. 9.
Keipia, as, r}, a band, or a roller, of
linen, John xi. 44.
Kclpci}, Kfpw, to shear, as sheep, to cut
off, as the hair; mid., to shave.
Acts viii. 32, xviiL 18; i Cor.
xi. 6.
Ke\fv<rpM, aros, r6, a shout, a crying
out, I Thess. iv. 16.
K6\eu», (TO), to command, to direct.
Kevo-Zo^ia, as, tj, vain-gloiy, inoniinaU
desire for praise, PIuL ii. 3.
K€Vo-8o|os — kCvSvvos]
VOCABULARY.
71
KsvS-So^os, ov, vain-glorious, covetous of
commendation.
Kfv6s, 7], 6v, empty, hence destitute,
Mark xii. 3 ; fruitless. Acts iv. 25 ;
fallacious, Eph. v. 6; foolish, James
ii. 20; adv., -ws, in vain, to no
purpose.
Ksvo (pcavia, a?, tj, vain, empty dis-
puting, useless babbling, 1 Tim.
vi. 20 ; 2 Tim. ii. 16.
Kei/(ia), a>, ^(TU), to empty oneself, or divest
oneself of r).ghtful dignity, Phil.
li. 7; to render useless, i Cor. i. ij ;
to falsfy, as ground of boasting.
Kevrpou, ov, t6, a goad, a spike, a sting,
as of a scorpion, i Cor. xv. 55, 56 ;
Acts ix. 5.
K^vTvpiwu, covos, S, Latin (see 154, c),
a centurion, the commander of a
hundx-ed foot soldiers.
Kepaia, as, rj, a horn, a point, a flourish
at the extremity of a letter ; met. ,
tlie minutest part. Matt. v. 18 ;
Luke xvi. 17.
KepafiGvs, ewy, 6, a potter.
KepafjLiKSs, i], 6v, 'made of potter's clay,
earthen, Eev. ii. 27.
Kepd/jLiov, iov, t6, an earthen vessel, a
pitcher, Mark xiv. 1 3.
Kipa/jLos, ov, 6, a tile, of potter's clay,
Luke V. 19.
KepdvvvfjLi (see 113, 114), to mix, to
prepare a draught, to fill one! 8 cup.
Rev. xiv. 10, xviii. 6.
Kcpas, oTos, T<{, a horn, as Rev. v. 6,
&c. ; fig., for strength, Luke i. 69;
a projecting point, Rev. ix. 13.
Kepdriov, lou, r6, a pod, a kind of
sweet broad bean, Luke xv. 1 6.
Kepdaiva, avw, ist aor., iKdp^rjaa, to
gain by trading, to obtain, to par-
take of to win over^ to gain, to
Christ, to virtue, to religion, Mark
viii. 36; I Cor. ix. 19-22.
Kep^Sos, ovs, t6, gain, profit, Phil. i. 21,
iii. 7 ; Tit. i, 1 1.
Kepfia, aros, r6 [Kelpco), a small piece of
money, John ii. 1 5.
KepixartcTTifs, ov, 6, a money-changer.
K^(pd\aiou, aiov, t6, {1) a sum of money.
Acts XX. 28 ; (2) a sum, summary
recapitulation.
K«pa\ai6u, S), diffca, to smite on the.
head, Mark xii. 4.
Ki<paKi], Tis, T), the head, of human
beings or animals, for the whole
person, Acts xviii. 6 ; the summit,
or copestone, of a building, Luke
XX. 17; met., implying authority,
haad, lord, i Cor. xi. 3 ; Eph. i. 22.
KfipaXis, iSos, 7], the top of anything,
the top or knob of the roll on which
Hebrew manuscripts were rolled;
hence, the roll itself, Heb. x. 7.
KTivaos, ov, 6, Latin (154, d), a tax, a
poll-tax, Matt. xvii. 25.
KTiTTos, ov, 6, a garden, Luke xiii. 19;
John xviii. i, 26.
K-ntrovpSs, ov, 6, a gardener, John
XX. 15.
Kfipiou, ov, r6, a honey-comb, Luke
xxiv. 42.
Kiipvyjxa, aros, t6, a proclaiming,
preaching, as Jonah's, Matt. xii. 41;
that of Christ and his apostles,
2 Tim. iv. 17; the gospel preached
(gen. obj.), Rom. xvi. 25; i Cor.
i. 21.
Ki]pvl, vKos, 6, a herald, a preacher,
as the prophets, Christ, and his
apostles.
KTipvaaca, |ft>, (i) to proclaim, to pub-
lish, Mark vii. 36 ; (2) specially, to
preach, the Gospel, abs., or ace.
and dat.
KrjTos, ovs, t6, a large fish, a tohale, a
sea monster. Matt. xii. 40.
K77^as, a, 6 (from Aramaic), Cephas,
or Peter, a rock, or stone.
Ki^wTos, ov, 71, a hollow vessel, an ark,
both of Noah, or of the ark of the
covenant.
Kiddpa, as, 7), a harp, a lyre, "guitar."
KidafjlCo}, to play upon a harp, or
lyre.
Kidapa)^6s, ov, 6, a harper, lyrist, singer
to the harp.
KiAiKia, as, t], Cilicia.
Kivd/jLODfiov, ov, t6, cinnamon, Eev.
xviii. 13.
KivSvpevw, aw, to be in danger, Luke
viii. 23.
Kiv^vvos, ov, 6, danger, peril, 2 Cor.
xi. 26.
72
VOCABULARY.
[kiV^O) KoSpdvTTJS
Kivew, u, ^crw, to move, to stir, to shake,
as the head, in mockery, Matt.
xxviL 39 ; to remove, to excite ;
pass., to he excited, to he put into
commotion.
Kivriffis, em, rj, motion, commotion,
John V. 3.
Kis, 6 (Heb.), Kish, father of Saul,
Acts xiii. 21.
KKdSos, ov, d, a hranch; met., Rom.
xi. 16- 19, posterity.
K\aio) (of), avaw, (i) abs., to wail, to
lament; (2) trans, (ace), to weep
for.
K\d.<Tt5, eats, ri, a breaking. Acts ii. 42.
K\d(rixa, aros, r6, a piece hroken off, a
fragment. Matt. xiv. 20.
KAouStj, tjs, v, Clauda, or Claude, a
small island otf Crete, ActsxxviL 16.
K\au5io, as, tj, Claudia, 2 Tim. iv. 21.
KA-ovSios, ov, 6, Claudius, the Em-
peror, Acts xi. 28 ; a military
tribune (Lysias), Acts xxiii. 26.
K\avdiJ.65, ov, 6 (KXaiw), weeping, lamen-
tation, Matt. ii. 18.
KKdcD, daw, only with &pToy, to break
bread, in the ordinary meal. Matt.
xiv. 19 ; or in the Lord's supper,
xxvi. 26; fig., of the body of
Christ, I Cor. xi 24.
K\els, KketdSs, rj, a key, the emblem of
power, Matt. xvi. 19; Rev. iii. 7;
met., the means of access to (gen.),
Luke xi. 52.
K\da>, <r«, to shut, shut up, close,
K\4fifia, aros, r6 (/(XeirTw) tJieft.
K\e6Tras, a, 6, Cleopas, Luke xxiv. 18.
K\(os, ovs, r6, good report, 1 Pet.
ii, 20.
KAf'iTTrjs, ov, 6, a thief. Matt, vi 19,
&c. ; met., of false teachers, John
X. 8.
KXeirrw, t^co, to steal, abs.. Matt.
xix. 18; or trans, (ace). Matt.
xxvii. 64.
KXrifm, aros, r6 {K\dto), a hranch, a
shoot, a tendril, of a vine, &c., John
XV. 2, 4, 5.
KX-hfj-rts, fvros, 6, Clement, PhiL iv. 3.
K\rjpoyofi.4(a, «, -fiav, to obtain by in-
her dance, to inherit, GaL iv. 30; to
obtain, generally.
KK7\povoixia, as, 7], an inheritance.
KKTtpovSfios, {1) an heir, one who obtains
an inheritance; (2) Jieir or Lord,
applied to Christ, Heb. i. 2; (3)
one who obtains in any way, Heb.
xi. 7.
K\ripos, ov, 6, (i) rt. lot. Matt. xxviL 35;
hence (2) a portion. Acts viii. 21 ;
(3) an office, Acts i. 17, 25 ; (4)
plur., persons assigned to one^s care^
\ Pet. V. 3.
KKt\p6a>, S), in mid., to obtain by lot,
Eph. i. II.
K\r}(ris, €«s, fi, a calling, i.e., God's
call to godhness and spiritual bless-
ings, Rom. xi. 29 ; Eph. iv. 4.
kXtjtSs, 6v, verbal adj. (KoAfw), called^
invited. Matt. xx. 16, xxii. 14; of
Christians, the. called, Rom. i. 6, 7,
viii. 28 ; of the apostolic vocation,
Rom. i I ; I Cor. i. i.
KXi&avos, ov, 6, an oven, a furnaxx^
Matt. vi. 30.
K\ifia, aros, r6, a climate, a tract of
country, a region.
kKivri, 7}s, tj, a portable bed, a couch
for reclining a^ meals. Matt. ix. 2, 6 ;
Luke xvii. 34.
KXivlSiov, ov, t6 (dim.), a little bed, or
couch, Luke v. 19, 24.
kKivw, vS), perf., K^KKina, trans., (i) to
bow, in reverence, Luke xxiv. 5;
in death, John xix. 30; (2) to lay
dorrni, as the head, to rest. Matt.
viii 20 ; (3) to turn to flight, Heb.
xi 34; intrans., to decline, as the
day, Luke ix. 12.
K\i(Tla, as, fj, a table party, a company,
Luke ix. 14.
KKowf}, Tjs, v, theft. Matt. xv. 19.
KXiSav, uvos, 6, the raging, of the sea ;
a wave, a surge, Luke viii 24;
James i. 6.
K\vSuvi(ofjt.ai, to be tossed, as waves, by
the -wind, Eph. iv. 14.
KAwTTuj, a, 6, Clopas, John xix. 25.
Ky-hdeo, to tickle; pass., to he tickled, to
itch, 2 Tim. iv. 3.
KviSos, ov, ri, Cnidus, Acts xxvii. 7.
KoSpavTTjs, ov, b, Lat. (see 154, a),
a farUdng, tiie smallest coin in
use.
KOiXCa — Koiros]
VOCABULARY.
73
KoiXla, as, v, (i) t^^ belly f Matt.
XV. 17 ; (2) the stomach, Matt,
xii. 40; (3) the womb, Matt. xix. 12;
(4) fig., the inner man, as the heart,
&c., John vii. 38.
KOI flaw, u), in mid., to fall asleep, Luke
xxii. 45 ; pass., to be asleep, to be
asleep in death, John xi. 12.
Kol(xr)(Ti5, 6«s, ■T], sleep, repose, John
xi. 13.
K9iv6s, ii, 6v^ common^ i.e., shared by
all, Acts iv. 32 ; unclean, cere-
monially. Acts X. 15 J unconse-
crated, Heb. x. 29.
KoivSw, w, <i)(T(a, to maJce common, or
unclean. Matt. xv. 11; to profane,
to desecrate. Acts xxi. 28.
Koivotvew, &, "ffffoo, to have common
share in, to partake in, Rom.
XV. 27 ; to share with, Gal. vi. 6.
Koivoiuia, as, tj, participation, com-
munion, fellowship, gen. obj. ; col-
lection, as of ^ms, 2 Cor. viii. 4 ;
Heb. xiii. 16.
koivwvi.k6s, i], 6v, ready to communicate,
liberal, i Tim. vi. 18.
Koiva>v6s, "fi, 6v, as subst., a partner, a
sliarer with, gen. obj.
/coiTTj, 17s, fj, a bed, Luke xi. 7 ; met. ,
marriage bed, Heb. xiii. 4; sexual
intercourse (as illicit), Rom. xiii. 13;
Koirtju ex^iv, to conceive, Rom. ix. 10.
KoiTdov, wvos, 6, a bed-chamber, Acts
xii. 20.
k6kkivos, rj, Of, dyed from the kSkkos,
crimson,
KOKKos, ov, 6, a kernel, a grain, or
seed.
Ko\d(o}, aw, mid. , to chastise, to punish.
Acts iv. 21 ; pass., 2 Pet. ii. 9.
Ko\aK€La, as, t], flattery, adulation,
1 Thess. ii. 5.
nSXacTis, ecus, rj, punishment, Matt.
XXV. 46.
KoAatraai, wv, al (see KoXocrcrat).
Ko\a(pi(w, aw, to strike with the fist, to
bujfet, to maUreat, Mark xiv. 65.
KoWdw, w, i\aw, mid. and pass., to
cleave to, to be joined with, to
adhere.
KoXKovpiov, or KoKKvpiov, tov, t6, eye-
salve, " colly rium," Rev. iii. i8.
KoWvBKTT-fis, OV, 6 {kSwv^os, Small
coin), a money-changer, John ii,
KoKo&dw, daw, to cut of, to shorten, as
days of trouble, Mark xiii. 20.
KoXoaaaevs, ews, plur., KoKoaaaeTSf
Golossians, only in the subscription
to the Epistle.
Ko\oaaai, wv, at, or KoXdaaai, Colossce,
KdAiros, ov, 6, the bosom, the chest, (i)
of the body, John xiii. 23 ; in the
bosom of Abraham, i.e., next to
him at the heavenly banquet, Luke
xvi. 22, 23 ; (2) of the dress, used
as a bag or pocket, Luke vi. 38 ; (3)
a bay, a gulf, an inlet of the aea^
Acts XX vii. 39.
Ko\v/x&dw, w, ijaw, to swim, Acts
xxvii. 43.
KoXv/xfiTjOpa, as, rj, a pool, a swimming-
place, a bath.
KoXdvia, as, 7], or KoXwvia, a colony,
Philippi is so called, Acts xvi. 12.
KOfxdw, w, to nourish the hair, to wear
the hair long, i Cor. xi. 14, 15.
k6ij.7], 7]s, v, hair of the head.
KofiiCw, aw, mid. fut., Kofxlconai or
KOfiiovfiai, to bear, to bring, Luke
vii. 37; mid., to bring to oneself
ie., to acquire, to obtain, as a recom-
pense, Heb. X. 36 ; to receive again,
to recover, Heb. xi. 19.
KOfM^STcpov (comp. of k6iv^os), better,
of convalescence, adverbially, John
iv. 52.
Kovidw, to white-wash. Matt, xxiii. 27 ;
pass.. Acts xxiii. 3.
Kovi-opr6s, ov, 6 {upwixi), dust. Matt.
X. 14; Acts xiii. 51, &c.
Koird^w, aw, to be quieted, to rest, as
the wind lulling, Mark iv. 39.
Koireros, oD, 6 {kStttw), vehement lamen-
tation. Acts viii. 2.
KOTrf), rjs, f)., smiting, slaughter, Heb.
vii. I.
Koiridw, w, daw, to toil, Luke v. 5 ; to
be fatigued, or spent, with labour,
Matt. xi. 28; to labour, in the
gospel, Rom. xvi. 6, 12 ; i Cor.
XV. 10.
k/itos, ov, 6, labour, toil, trouble, un-
easiness.
74
VOCABULARY.
[Koirpia — Kpeio-cruy
Koirpia, as, t], filth, a dunghill, Luke
xiv. 35.
Kdirpiov, ov, t6, dung, manure, in some
. MSS. ; Lukexiii. 8.
KSirrco, mid. fut., KSipofiai, to cut down,
as branclies, trees, &c. ; mid., to
beat, or cut oneself in grief, to
bewail. Matt. xi. 17.
K6pa^, aKos, 6, a raven, Luke xii. 24.
Kopdaiov, lov, TO (dim. from K6p7)), a
girl, a damsel, Mark vi. 22, 28.
*w8Sj/ (indecl.) and Kop^avas, a, 6
(from Heb.), (i) a gift, something
offered to God, Mark vii. 11; (2)
tJie sacred treasury. Matt, xxvii. 6.
Kope, 6 (Heb.), Korah, Jude 11.
Kopevvvfj.1, 4(Tu, pass, perf., KeKSpeafiai,
to satiate ; pass. , to be full, 1 Cor.
iv. 8.
KopivGios, lov, Corinthian, a Corinthian,
Acts xviii. 8.
Kopivdos, ov, 7], Corinth.
Kopvf]\ios, iov, 6, Cornelius.
Kopos, ov, 6 (from Heb.), a cor, the
largest dry measure, equal to ten
fidroi, or nearly fifteen English
bushels, Luke xvi, 7.
Koafieco, «, ■f](Tia, to set in order, to gar-
nish, Matt, xxiii. 29 ; i Tim. ii. 9 ;
to trim, as lamps. Matt. xxv. 7 ;
met., to adorn, with honour, Tit.
ii. jo; I Pet. iii. 5.
ko(tixik6s, i], 6v, (i) terrestrial, opp. to
iirovpdvios, Heb. ix. i ; (2) worldly,
i.e., vicious, Titus ii. 12.
kSctuios, ov, orderly, decorous, i Tim.
iL 9, iii 2.
Kofffio-Kp&Twp, opos, 6, prince of the
world, appl. to evil spirits, Eph.
vi. 12 ; or (?) to worldly rulers, as
supporters of heathenism.
KSfffjLos, ov, 6, {j) ornament, decoration,
I Pet. iii. 3 ; hence (2) the material
universe, Luke xi. 50, as well ordered
and beautiful; (3) tlie loorld, John
xi. 9 ; the world, in opposition to
the heavenly and the good, John
viii. 23 ; (4) tlie inJtabitants of the
world, I Cor. iv. 9; ($) the present
life, as distinguished from life
eternal ; (6) a vast collection, of
anything, James iii. 6 ; 2 Pet. ii. 5.
Kovdpros, ov, 6 (Latin, see 159),
Quartus, Rom. xvi. 23.
Kovixi (a Hebrew imperative, in Greek
form). Arise.
Kovarwdia, as, 7], (Latin, see 154, 0),
custodia, a guard. Matt, xxvii. 65.
Kov<pi(w, to lighten, as a sliip, Acts
xxvii. 38.
k6<Pivos, ov, &, a basket, a travelling
basket. Matt. xiv. 20.
KpdP^aTos, ov, 6, a couch, a light bed^
Mark ii. 12.
Kpd^w, ^ccj, to cry out, hoarsely, or
urgently, or in anguish.
KpancdKt}, ijs, surfeiting, Luke xxi. 34.
Kpaviov, ov r6 (lit., skull), Greek for
FoXyoOd, which see. Matt, xxvii. 33.
Lat., Calvaria, whence our Calvary.
Kpdaire^oy, ov, t6, the fringe, border^
e.g., of a garment. Matt, xxiii. 5.
KparaiSs, d, 6v, strong, mighty, 1 Pet
V. 6.
KpaTai6oi}, u, in pass, only, to be strong,
to grow strong, Luke i. 80 ; Eph.
iii. 16.
KpaTew, u, •fjtrw, to lay strong hold on,
to detain, ace. or gen., or ace. and
gen. (see 264); to attain to, Heb.
iv. 14 ; Matt. ix. 25 ; to have power
over. Matt. xiv. 3 ; to be master of,
Eev. ii. 1 ; Acts ii. 24 ; to cleave to.
Acts iii. 11; Mark vii. 3 ; to retain,
of sins, John xx. 23.
KpdrKTTos, Tj, ov (properly superl. of
Kparvs, see Kpdros), most excellent^
most noble, a title of honour. Acts
xxiii. 26, xxiv. 3.
Kpdros, ovs, r6, strength, power, do-
minion, I Pet. iv. II ; Heb. ii. 14;
Kara Kpdros, Acts xix. 20, greatly,
mightily.
KpavydCw, aw, to cry out, to clamour^
Matt. xii. 19.
Kpavyi], Tjy, rj, a cry, clamour, Heb.
y. 7.
Kpeas {aros, a'>s, contr., Kpdots), r6, pi.,
Kptara, Kpia, fiesh, flesh-meat, Kom.
xiv. 21 ; I Cor. viii. 13.
Kpeia<ra)v, ov, rrJov, ovos, adj. (properly
compar. of Kparvs, see Kpdros),
atroiujer, more powerful, better, Heb.
vii. 7, xii 24.
Kp€{JLdvVV[Jll KvXXds]
VOCABULARY.
75
Kpe/jLavwui or Kpe/xdai, w, fut., daco, to
hang, trans. , Acts v. 30 ; mid. , to
be suspended, to depend, Matt.
xxii. 40 ; Acts xxviii. 4.
Kpriixv6s, ov, 6 {Kp^jMavvvixi), a precipice,
from its overhanging, Mark v. 13.
Kp^s, tirSs, 6, a Cretan, Acts ii. 11 ;
Titus i. 12.
KpTi(TK7)s, iVTos, 6 (Latin), Crescens,
2 Tim. iv. 10.
Kp-fjTTj, 7)s, 71, Crete, now Candia.
KptdT], ^s, fern., barley. Rev. vi. 6.
Kpidivos, 7j, ov, made of barley ; &pToi
KpiQivoi, barley-loaves, John vi. 9,
Kpifjui, aros, r6, a judgment, a sentence,
condemnation, a contention at law,
1 Cor. vi. 7.
Kpivov, OV, t6, a lily, Matt. vi. 28.
Kpivw, vS), KeKpiKa. 1st aor., pass.,
eKpidfjv, (i) to judge, to deem, to
determine, Acts xiii. 46, xv. 19;
Rom. xiv. 5 ; (z) to form or express
an opinion of, usually unfavourable,
Rom. ii. I, 3 ; (3) ^o try, to sit in
judgment on, John xviii. 31 ; pass.,
to be on trial, to be judged; mid.,
to appeal to trial, i.e., to have a
law-suit, I Cor. vi. 6.
Kplais, ius, 7], (1) opinion, formed and
expressed; {z) judgment, the act or
result of; {'i) condemnation ; (4) a
tribunal. Matt. v. 21, 22 ; {^) justice,
Matt, xxiii. 23 ; (6) the divine law,
Matt. xii. 18, 20.
Kpiairos, ov, 6, Crispus, Acts xviii. 8 ;
I Cor, i. 14.
Kpiriipiov, ov, r6, (i) a tribunal, a
cou7-t of justice, i Cor. vi. 2 ; James
ii. 6; (2) a cause, or suit, i Cor.
vi. 4.
KpiT^s, ov, t6, a judge, a chief, or
mler. Acts xiii. 20.
KpiTiKSs, -f}, 6v, apt at judging, quick to
d'iscern, gen. obj., Heb. iv. 12.
Kpovw, <rco, to knock, e.g., at a door
for entrance, Luke xiii. 25.
Kpinrrt], 7)9, t), an underground cell, a
vault, Luke xi. 33, '"crypt."
Kpvinos, v, 6u, verbal adj. (/cpuTrrw),
hkldeiK -secret, unknown, Matt. x. 26;
Rom. ii. 16.
KpvTcro), ^03, 2nd aor. pass., eKpv07jv, to
hide, conceal, to lay up, to reserve^
Col. iii. 3.
KpvffToXKiCo), to be clear, like crystal,
Rev. xxi. 1 1.
Kp^cTTaXkos, ov, 6, crystal, Rev. iv. 6.
Hpv<py, adv., in secret, secretly, Eph.
V. 12.
KToSfiai, wfiai, fut., ^(To/iot, e/cTTjCct/iTjr,
dep., to acquire, procure (price,
gen., or e/c), (see 273), Luke
xxi. 19; Acts viii. 20; i Thess.
iv. 4.
KTrifxa, aros, r6, anything acquired, a
possession, Mark x. 22.
KTrtvos, ovs, t6, a beast of burden (as
representing property), Luke x. 34 ;
Acts xxiii. 24.
KTi]Ta}p, opos, 6, a possessor, an oumer^
Acts iv. 34.
KTi^co, (TO}, perf., pass., iKTiCfiai, to
create, form, compose, physically or
spiritually, Eph. ii. 10, &c.
KTicTis, ews, 7], creation, (i) the act,
Rom. i. 20 ; (2) the things created,
Rom. i. 25; (3) creation, generally,
waw, human creatures, Rom. viii.
19-22; (4) met., institution, i Pet.
ii. 13.
KTiffixa, aros, t6, a thing created, a
creature, 1 Tim. iv. 4.
KTi(TT'{}s, ov, 6, one who makes, or
founds, The Creator, i Pet. iv. 19.
Kv$€ia, as, 7], gambling, fraud, Eph.
iv. 14.
KvPepurja-is, (as, n, governing, direction,
1 Cor. xii. 28.
Kv^fpvi)T7]s, ov, 6, a steersman, a pilots
A cts xxvii. 1 1 ; Rev. xviii. 1 7.
KVK\6d(v, adv. [kvkXos), from around,
round about, gen., Rev. iv. 3, 8.
kvkXos, ov, 6, a circle. Only in dat.,
KiiKXtp, as adv., abs., or with gen.,
round about, around.
KVK\6(o, a), to encircle, surround, besiege-,
John X. 24; Luke xxi. 20.
KvMafM, aros, t6, a place for wallow-
ing, 2 Pet. ii. 22.
KvKio) (for Ku\ipda>), to wallow, or roll,
Mark ix. 20.
KvwSs, 71, 6v, crippled, lame, especially
iu the hands, Matt. xv. 30, 31.
76
VOCABULARY.
[Kvfia — Xa{i.pdvc*
icD/ua, aros, neut., a wave, a billow,
Matt. viii. 24 ; Acts xxvii. 41.
icifi^aKov, Oil, r6 {kv/jl^os, hollow), a
cymbal.
K6iiivov, ov, r6 (from Heb.), cumin.
Kvvapiov, ov, t6 (dim. of kvwv), a little
dog, a cur. Matt. xv. 26.
Kiirpios, ov, 6, a Cyprian, or Cypriot.
KjJirpos, ov, 7], Cyprus.
tciirTw, \J/«, to bend, to stoop down,
Mark i. 7 ; John viii. 6. 8.
Kvfnjvaios, ov, 6, a Cyrenian.
Kvpjtvn, -qs, v, a prop, name, Gyrene, a
city of Africa.
Kvpiivios, ov, d, a prop, name, Cyreniv^
or Quirinus.
Kvpia, as, r}, Cyria (a proper name),
z John I, 5.
KvpiaK6s, ii, 6v, of, or pertaining to the
Lord, Christ, as the supper, 1 Cor.
xi. 20 ; the day, Rev. i. 10.
Kvpifvw, evarw, to have authority, aha.,
to ride over, Luke xxii. 25 ; i Tim.
vL 15.
Kvpios, iov, 6, (i) a lord, possessor of,
and having power over, a title of
honour, Sir, i Pet. iii. 6 ; (2) The
Lord (Heb., Jehovah); (3) 2'he
Lord (employed in the Epp. con-
stantly of Christ (see 217, b).
Kvpi6T7js, TITOS, ri, lordship, dominion;
plur. concr., lords, princes, Eph.
i. 21 J 2 Pet. ii 10.
KvpSw, u>, to confirm, ratify, GaL
iii. 15; 2 Cor. ii. 8.
Ki(t}u, Kvv6s, 6, V, o, dog, Luke xvi. 2 r ;
fig'j 0/ shameless persons, Phil.
iii. 2.
Kw\ov, ov, r6, in plur. only; rcfc KuKa,
Heb. iii. 17, <Ae carcases.
KuXvoo, ao), to restrain, hinder, vnth-
hold, Mark ix. 38.
KcifiT], r]s, 7j, a village, un walled, or
lying open, Matt. ix. 3 5.
Ku)p.6-'KQ\is, eccs, rj, a large, city-like
village, without walls, Mark i,
38.
KUip-os, OV, 6, a feasting, a revelling,
among the heathen, in honour of
Bacchus, Rom. xiii. 13.
Kfavo)^, ayiros, d, a gnat, Mcatt. xxiiL 24.
Kus, u, rj, Cos, Acts xxi. i.
Kwadp., 6 (Heb.), Cosam, Luke iii 28.
KU(p6s, -f], 6v, dumb. Matt. ix. 32, 33 •
(leaf. Matt, xi 5.
A, \, Aci/i)85o, Lambda, I, the eleventli
letter. As a numeral, \' = 30 ;
/. = 30,000.
\a7xtii'cw, 2nd aor., ^Kaxov, (i) trans.,
to obtain by lot, to obtain, generallj'^,
ace. or gen. ; (2) to cast lots, to draw
lots, irepi, gen.
Ad^apos, OV, 6, Lazarus, (i) of Bethany,
(2) in the parable, Luke xvi.
Xdiipa, or \6.6p(f {Kavddvo)), secretly.
\cuKw\>, awos, 71, a whirlwind, a violent .
storm.
Aa/few and XrjKeu, to burst with a loud
report. Acts i. 1 8.
Aa/cTifcw (Ao|, adv., with the Jied), to
kick, Acts ix." 5, xxvi. 14.
AoAe'tw, u, Tja-o), (i) to speak, absolutely;
(2) to speak, to talk, generally, with
ace. of thing spoken, also with
modal dat. and dat. of person
addressed. Hence, according to
the nature of the case, met,, to
declare, by other methods than
vivd voce, Rom. vii i, &c. ; to
preach, to publish, to announce.
See Synon)rms.
XaKid, as, t}, (1) speecJi, talk, John
viii 43 ; hence (2) report, John
iv. 42 ; (3) manner of speech, dialect,
Matt, xxvi 73.
Kaixd, or Kafxiui. (Heb.), why. Matt,
xxvii 46; Mark xv. 34 (Ps.
xxii. i).
\ap.B6.vu, \r}\popai (\r]iuL\l>opMt in MSS.),
€l\r}(pa, €\aBou, (i) to take, as in the
hand. Matt. xiv. 19; hence, (z) to
receive, obtain, of things material or
spiritual, to accept, "take up,"
Matt. X. 38 ; (3) to take by force,
seize, Matt. xxi. 35; (4) to take away,
violently or fraudulently. Matt.
V. 40; (5) to choose. Acts xv. 14;
{6) to receive, or accept, as a friend,
and as a teacher ; (7) in certain
Ad|j.€X — X^<i)v]
VOCABULARY.
77
paraphrastic expressions, to "take
a beginning, i.e., to begin, so, "to
take" remembrance, forgetfulness,
experience, &c. ; with irpoffamov,
•'to accept the person,'' i.e., ^^to he
partial. " * ' From, " after this verb,
is expressed by iK, airS, irapd {vir6,
z Cor. xi. 24).
AdfifXi ^ (Heb.), Lantech, Luke
iii. 36.
XafMirds, ados, 7}, « lamp, a torch.
Kafxirp6s, d, 6v, resplendent, shining,
gorgeous ; adv. , -ws, gorgeovsly,
sumptuously, Luke xvi. 19.
\aiJ.Trp6Tt\s, Ti]Tos, Tf, splendoury bright-
ness,
xdfiirw, i|/cD, to give light to, to shine.
Matt. V. 15, xvii. 2.
Koj/ddvco, 2nd aor., e\a9ov, (i) to be
concealed, abs., Mark vii. 24; (2)
to be concealed from, unknown to
(ace), Acts xxvi. 26; (3) for par-
ticip., constr. (see 394, 2).
\a-ievT6s, T), 6v, hewn out of a rock,
Luke xxiii. 53.
AaoSiKeio, as, t], Laodicea.
AaoBiKevs, 4(os, 6, a Laodicean.
\a6s, ov, 6, (i) a people, spec, of tJie
people of God; (2) the common
people. See Synonyms.
Kapvy^, vyy OS, 6, the throat, "larynx."
Aaaaia, as, or Aowreo, i], Lascea, Acts
XX vii. 8.
\a-T0fi4wi w, to hew stones, to cut stone.
Matt, ocxvii. 60.
KaTpiia, as, rj, worship, service ren-
dered to God, John xvi 2 j Eom.
ix. 4.
Xarpevw, aa, (i) to worship, to serve;
(2) to officiate as a priest. See
Synonyms.
Kdxo-vov, ov, r6, an herb, a garden
plant, Matt. xiii. 32.
AePfia'tos, ov, 6, Lebbceus. See 0o5-
8cuos.
Kiyediv, wvos, d (Lat., see 154, c), a
legion, Mark v. 9, &c, ; in N. T.
times containing 6826 men.
Xiya, only pres. and impf. in N.T.
(see Synonyms), (i) to speak, used
also of writings, as John xix. 37;
(2) to say, to discourse; (3) to relate,
to tell, Luke ix. 31, xviii. i ; (4)
to call, pass. , to be called, or named ;
(5) pass., to be chosen, or appointed.
Dat. of persons addressed.
\t7fifjut, uTos, t6 (Xfivu), a remnant,
Rom. xi. 5.
\f7os, e/o, €ioy, smooth, plain, level,
Luke iii. 5 ; from LXX.
\«h(c, i|/«, to leave, mid., to be wanting,
Luke xviii. 22; pass., to be left, to
be destitute of, James i. 5.
Keirovpyeu, u, {i) to serve publicly in
sacred things, Heb. x. 11; {2) to
minister to, pecuniarily, Rom.
XV. 27. See Synonyms.
XeiTovpyia, as, v, (i) a public ministra-
tion, or service, Luke i. 23 ; PhiL
ii. 17; (2) a friendly service, as
rendering aid or alms to, Phil,
ii. 17 ; 2 Cor. ix. 12.
\eirovpyiK6s, i], 6v, rendering service to,
Heb. i. 14.
\t.irovpy6s, ov, 6, a minister, or servant
to, gen. obj., £x)m. xv. 16 ; Phil,
ii. 25.
\4vTiov, ov, r6 (Lat., see 154, e), a
napkin, or towel, John xiii. 4.
\evis, iSos, 7], a scale, or crust. Acta
ix. 18.
Xcirpo, OS, 7], the leprosy.
\(xp6s, ov, 6, a leper.
Kiirr6v, ov, prop. verb. adj. {vofxlafjia),
from \4ir(D (to strip off, pare down),
a mite, one- eighth of an a«, the
smallest Jewish coin.
Aei/t or Acufs, 6, Levi. Four are men-
tioned: (i) son of Jacob, ancestor of
the priestly tribe; (2, 3) ancestors
of Jesus, Luke iii. 24, 29 ; (4) the
apostle, also called Matthew.
Aevirris, ov, 6, a Levite.
AivtriKos, Tj, 6u, Levitical, pertaining to
the Levites.
XfVKaivo), avSo, ist aor., eXeiJ/caj/a, to
make white, Mark ix. 3 ; Kev.
vii. 14.
KivK6s, i], 6v, (i) bright, as Matt,
xvii. 2 ; f 2) white, as Matt. v. 36 ;
John iv. 3 5.
Aewj/, ovTos, 6, a lion, fig., for a tyrant,
2 Tim. iv. 17; used for Christ,
E,ev. V. 5.
78
VOCABULARY.
[\r\Qr\ — XoYOt
\7)6v, lis, 7), forget/vlnesSf z Pet. i. 9.
\t)p6s, ov, 6, 7}, a wine-press, Matt.
xxi. 33; fig, in Rev. xiv. 20.
Xrjpos, ov, 6, idle talk, Luke xxiv. 1 1.
Xriffrris, ov, 6, a robber^ Mark xi. 17;
John X. I, 8.
Kti^ls, coos, t) {\afjiBdva>)t a receivinQy
Phil. iv. 15.
Xiav, adv., very mucJi, with adj., very.
Matt. iv. 8.
\i^avo5, ov, 6, frankincense^ Matt.
ii. II ; Rev. xviii. 13.
\i^av(ji}T6s, ov, 6, a censer for burning
frankincense. Rev. viiL 3, 5.
Xififprlvo^, ov, 6 (Lat.), a freed -man.
Acts vi. 9. Probably Jews who
had been slaves at Rome, after-
wards freed.
Ai&v-n, 7JS, 7), Libya, Acts ii. to,
\i9dC(o, cw, to sionej to execute by
stoning.
\ieiyos, 7], ov, made of stone, John
ii. 6 ; 2 Cor. iiL 3 ; Rev. ix. 20.
\i6o-^o\f(o, S>, Tiffw, to throw stones at,
so as to wound or kill, Matt.
xxiii. 37; Mark xii. 4,
\i6os, ou, 6, a stone, i.e., (i) loose and
lying about, Matt. iv. 3, 6 ; (2)
buiU into a wall, &c., Mark xiiL 2 ;
(4) a precious stone. Rev. iv. 3 ; (5)
a statue, or idol of stone. Acts
xvii. 29.
\i66-(TrpwTou, ov, r6 (prop, adj., strewed
witk slane-s), tfie pavement, part of a
Roman court of justice.
XiKfidd), 0), TJao, to scatter, as corn in
winnowing, to reduce to particles,
that may be scattered, Luke xx.
18.
Xi/i^v, ivos, 6, harbour^ Jiaven, Acts
xxvii. 12.
\ifiin/), rjy, tj, a lake, e.g., Gennesareth,
l^uke V. I.
KifJLos, ov, 6, (i) hunger, 2 Cor. xL 27;
(2) a famine. Matt. xxiv. 7.
hivuv, ou, t6, Jiax, linen made of flax.
Rev. XV. 6 ; a lamp- wick. Matt.
xiL 20.
hlpos, or Aivos, ov, 6, Linus, 2 Tim.
iv. 21.
Mirap^s, d, 6v, sumptuous, precious,
delicate, Rev. xviii. 14,
Klrpa, as, tj, « pound weight, John
xii. 3.
\iyp, \i&6s, 8, the S. W. wind. Acts
xxvii. 12. (To look ^^ down the
S.W.," is to look toward the north-
east.)
\oyia, as, tj, a collection, t.e., of money,
1 Cor. xvi. I. 2.
\oyl(ofiat, (Tofxat, dep. with mid. and
pass, aor., (1) to reckon; (2) to place
to the account of, to charge vntA,
ace. and dat., or with cli (see
298, 6); (3) to reason, argue, to
infer, conclude, compute, from rea-
soning; (4) to think, suppose.
\oyiK6s, 7}, 6v, rational, i.e., belonging
to the sphere of the reason, Rom.
xii. I ; I Pet. ii. 2.
\6yiov, ov, t6, something spoken, in
N.T., of divine communicatiorts, e.g.,
the Old Testament, Acts vii. 38 ;
Rom. iii. 2 ; and the doctrines of
Christ, Heb. v. 1 2 ; i Pet. iv. 1 1.
\6yioi, ov, eloquent. Acts xviii. 24.
Koyia-fi6s, ov, 6, (i) reasoning, tJiought,
2 Cor. X. 5 ; (2) counsel, the result
of thought, Rom. ii. 15.
\oyo-fiax^cD, w, to strive about words^
2 Tim. ii. 14.
\oyofjLaxla, as, ^, contention about
words, "logomachy," 1 Tim. vi. 4.
\6yos, ov, 6, (1) a speaking, a saying,
a word, i.e., the uttering of the
word. Matt. viii. 8 ; (2) the thing
spoken, Matt. vii. 24, 26 ; whether
doctrine, i Tim. iv. 6 ; prophecy,
2 Pet. i. 1 9 ; question. Matt. xxi. 24 ;
a common saying, or proverb, John
iv. 37 ; a precept, a command, John
viii. 55; tlie truth, Mark viii. 38;
conversation, Luke xxiv. 17; teach-
ing, I Cor. iL 4; a narrative. Acts
i. I ; a public rumour. Matt,
xxviii. 15; an argument. Acts
ii. 40 ; rt cluxrge, or accusation. Acts
xix. 38; (i) recbson. Acts xviiL 14;
(4) account, reckoning, Heb. iv. 13;
Acts XX. 24; Matt. xviiL 23; Acts
X. 29. l\.6yos is used by John as a
name of Christ, the word of God,
%.€., the expression or manifestation
of his thoughts to man, John i. i, &c.
Xo'YX'n — |ia0T]Tev w]
VOCABULARY.
79
X6yx'n, vs, v> G, latice, a spear, John
xix. 34.
XotSopectf, cD, to revile, to rail at, to re-
proach, John ix. 28; Acts xxiiL 4.
\oiSopia, as, 17, reproach, reviling,
1 Tim. V. 14 ; i Pet. iii. 9.
XoiSopos, ov, 6, one who rails at, a
reviler, i Cor. v. 11, vi. 10.
A6iju«^s, ov, 6, a plague, pestilence, Panl
so called, Acts xxiv. 5.
\oiir6s, i\, 6v, remaining, the rest.
Matt. XXV. II ; adv., rh Konr6v, as
for the rest, i Cor. i. 1 6 ; rov Kontov,
from henceforth, Gal. vi. 17.
AovKas, a, b (from l\.ovKav6s, see 159,
d), Luke.
AovKios, iov, 6 (Latin), Lucius.
\ovTp6v, ov, t6, a hath, a washing,
Eph. V. 26 ; Tit. iii. 5.
\ov(o, a (JO, to bathe, to wash. Acts
ix. 37; xvi. 33, to cleanse, to purify,
E,ev. i. 5.
AvdSa, rj$, ri, Lydda, Acts ix. 32, 53.
AuSi'a, OS, T], Lydia, Acts xvi. 14, 40.
AvKaovia, as, r}, Lycaonia, Acts xiv. 6.
AvKaouia-Ti, adv., in the. speech of
Lycaonia.
AvKia, as, 7}, Lycia, Acts xxvii. 5.
AiJkos, ov, 6, a wolf; fig., Acts xx. 29.
Kvixaivoixai, to ravage, Acts viii. 3.
AuTrew, w, to grieve; pass., to be
grieved, saddened, to he aggrieved,
or offtnded, Matt. xiv. 9 ; Eom.
xiv. 15.
Kvin], r]s, 7], gi/^^f sorrow, aversion,
■z Cor. ix. 7 ; cause of grief, 1 Pet.
ii. 19.
Avadvias, ov, 6, Lysanias, Luke iii. i.
Avcxias, ov, b, Lysias.
Averts, ews, 7], a loosening, divorce,
I Cor. vii. 27.
Au<n-T6Aea), w (lit., to pay taxes), im-
pers., -eX, it is profitable, or prefer-
able (dat. and ¥i), Luke xvii. a,
Av<TTpa, as, rj, or coy, to., Lydra.
KvTpop, ov, tS, a ransom, price. Matt.
XX. 28 ; Mark x. 45.
XvTpnu. doffoo, in N.T. only, mid. and
pass., to ranson, to deliver, by pay-
. ing a rausom, Tit. ii. 14 ; i Pet.
i 18 (ace, pers. ; dat., price^ and
diro or ik).
Kvrpotcris, cws, 7], deliverance, r(
Hon, Luke i. 68, ii. 38 ; Heb.
ix. 12.
\vTpcoT-f)s, ov, 6, a redeemer, a deliverer.
Acts vii. 3 5.
Xvxvia, as, v, a lamp-stand, Matt.
V. 15; fig., of a church, Rev.
ii. I, 5 ; of a christian teacher,
Rev. xi. 4.
\vxvos, ov, 6, a lamp, or light, Matt.
V. 15, vi. 22. Used of John the
Baptist, John v. 35; of Christ, Rev.
xxi. 23.
\va>, (TOO, to loosen, as (i) lit., to unbind,
Mark i. 7 ; Rev. v. 2 ; (2) to set at
liberty; {i)to pronounce not binding,
e.g., a law. Matt, xviii. 18 ; (4)
to disobey, or nullify, the Divine
word, John vii. 23, x. 35; (5) to
destroy, e.g., the temj^le, John ii. 19 ;
(6) to dismvis, i.e., an assembly,
Acts xiii. 43.
Aots, I'Sos, 7), Lois, 2 Tim. i. 5.
AdoT, 6 (Heb.), Lot, Luke xvii. 28.
M.
M, [I, Mv, Mu, m, the twelfth letter.
As a numeral, u' = ^o; jx= ^0,000.
Maa0, 6 (Heb.), Maath, Luke iii.
26.
Mtt7Sa\c{, ^ (Heb., Chald.), in MSS.,
Ulaya^tdv, Magdala, Matt. xv. 39.
MaydahTiuTj, tjs, tj, Magdalene, i.e., a
woman of Magdala.
fiayeia, as, 7], magic, plur. . magic arts.
Acts viii. II.
ixayevw, (TOO, to practise magical arts^
Acts viii. 9.
Mdyos, ov, 6, (1) magus, Persian
astrologer, Matt. ii. i ; (2) a cod-
juror, Acts viii. 9.
Ma7w7, b (Heb.), Magog (see Vdy).
Madidv, or MadidfjL, b (Heb.), MadiaUy
or Midian, Acts vii. 29.
fia67]Tivco, ato, (i) trans., to make a
disciple of (ace), to instruct, Matt.
xxviii. 19; Acts xiv. 21; (2) in-
trans.,. to he a disciple. Matt.
xxvii 57.
m m
8C
VOCABULARY.
[na0i]Ti^S — |i.apTvp4«
/*a0TjT^s, ov, 6 {ficwOdvu), a disciple.
Matt. X. 24, xxii. 16, ix. 14; ol
fiadrjTai, specially, the twelve. Matt.
ix. 19.
Had-r^Tpia, as, rj, a female disciple, Acts
ix. 36.
MadouffdXa, 6 (Heb.), Methmelah,
Luke iii. 37.
Ula'ivdv, 6 (Heb.), Mainan, Luke
iii. 31.
uaivofjLcu, dep., to be mad, to rave,
John X. 20 ; Acts xxvi. 24, 25.
HaKapi((a, f ut. , iw, to pronounce happy,
congratulate, Luke i. 48 ; James
V. II.
fjuzKapios, ia, lov, happy, blessed, Luke
i. 45, vi. 20; fiaKapiwTfpos, compar.,
Tnore happy, i Cor. vii. 40.
naKapia-fMSs, ov, 6, congratulation, a
pronouncing happy, Rom. iv. 6, 9.
MaKidovia, as, ij, Macedonia.
Maii€d(t>v, 6vos, 6, a Macedonian.
HOLKiXKov, ov, r6, a slaughter-house,
shambles, i Cor. x. 25.
fiaKpdy, adv. (ace. of ixaKp6s, so. 656v),
afar, fis preced.. Acts ii. 39 ; a.n6
folL, Acts xvii. 27.
fianpSdey, adv., from afar, Mark
viii. 3; with aTr6, as Matt. xxvi. 58.
fiaKpo-dvfieco, w, ^<t«, to suffer long, to
have patience, to be forbearing, i Cor.
xiii. 4 ; to delay, Luke xviiL 7 ; to
wait patiently, Heb. vL 15; els or
ivi, dat.
naKpo-Ovfiia, as, rj, forbearance, long-
suffering, patience.
fioKpo-eifius, adv., patiently, induU
fioKpds, a, 6v, long, of place; distant,
oitvaie, prolix. Matt, xxiii. 13.
fi.aKpo-x9^viOs, ov, long-lived, Eph. vi. 3.
4iaAaKto, as, r], "softness," weakness,
infirmity.
mXcbcSs, -hy 6v, soft, of garments ;
• Matt. xi. 8 ; disgracefully effemi-
nate, I Cor. vi. 10.
Ma\f\eii\, & (Heb.), Maleleel, or
Mahalaleel, Luke iii. 37.
lidXiara, adv. (superl. of /*aXo, very),
viost of all, especially.
fiaWov, adv. (comp. of fid\a), more,
ratlter ; iro\\(f ^aWoy, much tnore,
Matt. vi. 30 ; rrSaq} jttaAAoy, how
much more. Matt. vii. 11 ; naWoy
^, more than. Matt, xviii. 13.
MaAAov is often of intensive force,
e.g., Matt, xxvii. 24; Rom. viii. 34.
Md\xos, ov, 6, Malchus, John xviii. 10.
fid/jLfMii, VSj V, ^ grandmother, 2 Tim.
i. 5.
/xafjuovas, nafifxcavas, a, 6, mammx>n,
gain, wealth (from Chald.).
MavaTjj/, 6 (Heb.), Manaen), Acts
xiii. I.
Uavaffaris, gen. and ace, tj, b. Ma-
nasseh.
ixauddvo), jxad-fiarofiai, 2nd aor., cfiaOov ;
perf., /xefiddriKa, to learn, to under-
stand, to know, to be informed, to
comprehend. Used abs., or with
ace. (air6, Tropci (gen.), with the
teacher, iu with example, i Cor.
iv. 6.)
fiayia, as, rj, madness, insanity. Acts
xxvi. 24.
fidpya, t6 (Heb.) manna (Heb., What
is this ?), the food of the Israelites
in the desert.
fiavTevofjLai, dep., to utter responses,
propfiecy, Acts'xvi. 16.
fiapalya, avu>, fut. pass., fjuipav6-f}<rofiat,
to wither, to fade away, James i. 1 1.
(xapdv ded (two Syro-Chaldaic words),
the Lord will come ! i Cor. xvi. 22.
fiapyaplrr]s, ov, 6, a pearl, Matt,
xiii. 45, 46.
yiapdd, rjs, T], Martha.
Mapla, as, oi' mapidfi (indecl., Heb.,
Miriam), fj, Mary. Six of the name
are mentioned : ( i) the mother of
Jesus; (2) the Magdalen; (3) the
sister of Martha and Lazarus ; (4)
the wife of Cleopas; (5) the mother
of John Mark; (6) a Christian
woman in Rome, Rom. xvL 6.
MdpKos, ov, 6, Mark.
fidpfjLapos, ov, 6, 7], marble, Rev.
xviii. 12.
(lapTvpeu, S), ^<r«, to be a witness, abs.,
to testify (irep/, gen.), to give tes-
timony (to, dat., of pers. or thing),
to commend (i Thess. iL 11, should
prob. be ftaprvpSfieyoi) ; pass. , to be
attested, i.e., honourably.
|xapTvp£a — p-c0il]
VOCABULARY.
81
fiaprvpia, os, 7], testimony borne, i.e.,
judicially, Mark xiv. 56, 59, or
generally, honourable attestation,
John V. 34. With obj. gen., as
Kev. xix, 10.
fiaprvpiov, ov, rS, testimony, Matt,
viii. 4 {to, dat., against, iirl, ace).
fx.apTvpo(iai, dep., to call to witness.
Acts XX. 26 ; Gal. V. 3; to exhort
solemnly, Eph. iv. 17 (i Thess.
ii. II).
fidpTvs, vpos, dat. plur., ndprvcri, 6,
a witness, i.e., judicially, Matt,
xviii. 16; one who testifies from
wliat he has seen and knovm, i Thess.
ii. 10 ; Luke xxiv. 48. A " mar-
tyr," witnessing by his death, Acts
xxii. 20.
fiaa-rrdoixai, wfiai, to bite, to gnaw, Rev.
xvi, 10.
fiacrTiySw, S), (affu, to scourge. Matt.
X. 17; to affiict, Heb, xii. 6.
/ittTTi^w, to scourge. Acts xxii. 25.
Ixd'TTi^, lyos, 7], a whip, a scourge, Acts
. xxii. 24 ; sharp pain, disease, afflic-
tion, Mark v. 29, 34; Luke vii. 21.
fxaarSs, ov, 6, the breast, the paps,
Luke xi. 27 ; Rev. i. 13.
jxaraio-Xoyia, as, v, vain talk, empty,
fruitless conversation, i Tim. i. 6.
(xaraio-\6yos, ov, 6, a vain, empty
talker. Tit. i. 10.
fidraios, (am), aiov, vain, fruitless,
empty, i Cor. xv. 17 ; James i. 26 ;
. ra ixdraia, vanities, spec, of heathen
deities, Acts xiv. 15 (and O.T.).
fiaraidrris, TrjTos, 7], (i) vanity, 2 Pet.
ii. 18; {%) p)erverseness, Eph. iv. 17;
[t,) frailty, Rom. viii. 20.
liaiQ.i6(a, w, to render vain, or foolish,
to deprave.
uAtt\v, adv., in vain, fruitlessly. Matt.
XV. 9.
'yiarSaios, ov, or Ma90aTos, 6, Matthew,
the apostle and evangelist; also
Aevt.
MarQdv, 6 (Heb.), or MaQOdu, Matthan,
Matt. i. 1 5.
Margc^T, 6 (Heb.), or Ma00c£O, Matthat,
Luke iii. 24, 29.
Ulardias, a (6), or Ma00:as, Matthias,
Acts i, 23, 26.
MoTTa0c£, b (Heb.), Mattaiha, Luke
iii. 31.
MaTTa0ioy, ov, 6, Mattathias, Luke
iii. 25, 26.
fidxai-pa, as and ijs, tj, a sword, met.
for strife. Matt. x. 34 ; fig. , of spiri-
tual weapons, Eph. vi. 17.
/*aX'7' 'J^j V, contention, strife, dispute,
2 Tim. ii. 23 ; James iv. i.
fidxotJ-ai, to fight, Acts vii. 26 ; ^0 con-
tend, to dispute, 2 Tim. ii. 24.
fii-yaX-avx^oi, &, to boast great things,
to be arrogant, James iii. 5.
fjceyaXe'ios, eia, c7ov, grand, magnifi-
cent, wondrous, Luke i. 49 ; Acts
ii. II.
{x€ya\ei6Trjs, ttjtos, f], greatness, ma-
jesty, magnificence, Luke ix. 43 ;
Acts xix. 27; 2 Pet. i. 16.
fieyaXo-Trpeir-fis, 4s, gen., ovs, fitting for
a great man, magnificent, eoccellent,
2 Pet. i. 17.
fi^yaKvvci), via, (i) to enlarge., Matt,
xxiii. 5 ; (2) to magnify, extol, cele-
brate with praise, Luke i. 58 ; Acts
V. 13.
fieydXws, adv., greatly, Phil. iv. 10.
fieyaXcoa-vvT}, tjs, t), magnificence, ma-
jesty, Heb. i. 3 ; Jude 25,
fieyas, [xeydXrj, fieya (see 39), comp.
fiei^uv, sup. , iiiyiffTos, great, in size,
full-grown, intense. Matt. ii. 10,
xxviii. 8 ; wonderful, 2 Cor. xi. 15;
noble, of high rank. Rev. xi. 18,
xiii. 1 6 ; applied to age, b jx^iCov,
the elder, Rom. ix. 12. Meyas in-
dicates the size of things, their
measure, number, cost, and estima-
tion ; (xe-idhr) rjfiepa, a high day,
John xix. 3 1.
/x4y€6os, ovs, rS, greatness, vastness,
immensity, Eph. i. 19.
li^yiarav^s, dvccv, ol, princes, great men
(sing., fiejiardv, only in LXX. ;
Sirach iv. 7), lords, Mark vi. 21 j
Rev. vi. 15, xviii. 23.
/te0-ep)U.Tjj'euco, to translate, to interpret,
pass, only, Mark v. 4j ; John
i. 42.
jLie07j, rjs, 7}, drunkenness, drunken
frolic, or i-i&t, Luke xxi. 34; Rom.
xiii. 13 ; GaL v. 21.
82
VOCABULARY.
r(i€0-i<rTi]|xi — |J.epos
l^eQ-iffTnfxi, fic7ouTTr]cru, ist aor. pass.,
H^nardQ-qv^ (i) to remove, as a
mountain, i Cor. xiii. 2 ; {2) to
seduce, or draw over^ Acts xix. 26 ;
(3) to remove from office, e.g., a king.
Acts xiii. 22 ; or a steward, Luke
xvi. 4.
Hed-oSela, as, tj, fraudulent artifice, a
trick, a stratagem, Eph. iv. 14,
vi. II.
lj.ed-6pios, bordering on; rh, fxedSpia,
borders, confines, Mark vii. 24.
fieBva-Ko), to make drunk; pass., to be
drunk. Luke xii. 45 ; i Thess. v. 7.
n4dvaos, ou, 6 (prop, adj.), a drunkard,
I Cor. V. II, vi. 10.
ixedvu, to be drunken. Matt. xxiv. 49 ;
Acts ii. 15 ; met., Rev. xvii. 6.
fiei^Qij/, comp. of fieyas, which see. It
has itself a comparat., (xei^oi epos,
3 John 4 (see 47).
txe\ca/, avos, t6 (/xeAas), ink, 2 Cor.
iii. 3.
ui\as, aiva, av, black.
M(\eas, a, 6, Melea, Luke iii. 3 1.
fi4\iL, impers. (see 101), it concerns,
dat. of pers. and obj. gen.
fifXfTdcc, w, iiaco, to think upon, to
revolve in mind, to premeditate,
Mark xiii. 11 ; Acts iv. 25.
/ie'A.t, iros, TO, honey. Matt. iii. 4.
/j.i\iacrws, a, ov, made of honey, Luke
xxiv. 42.
MeAiTT?, Tjy, 7j, Melita, now Malta,
Acts xxviii. i.
fAfWu}, 7}ff(a, to be about to do, to be on
die point of doing, with infin., cor-
responding nearly to our auxiliaries,
will, shall, must, &c., particip. form
indicating simple futurity, as ret
IxiWovTa, things to come, Rom.
viii. 38; to delay. Acts xxii. 16.
See Synonyms
n4\oi, out, TO, a member of tJw body, a
limb. Matt. v. 29, 30 ; Rom. xii. 4 ;
fig., I Cor. vi. 15, &c.
MeAx^, & (Heb.), Mtkhi. Two are
mentioned, Luke iii. 24, 28.
McAx'CeSc'/f, 6 (Heb., king of righteous-
ness), Melchizedek, Heb. v. 6, &c.
fiefi^pdua, rjs, if, parcJimentj 2 Tim.
iv. 13.
fi4fi<pofjLai, ^ofiai, dep., to complain, to
censure, Rom. ix. 19; abs. or dat.,
Heb. viii. 8 (Lachm., ace).
Hefiypi-fioipos, ov, adj., discontented, com-
plain ng, Jude 1 6.
/i4v, antithetic particle, truly, indeed
(see 136).
fiev-ovv, conj., moreover, therefore, but.
fiev-ovv-ye, conj., yea rather, yea truly,
nay but, Luke xi. 28 ; Rom. ix. 20.
fAfv-Toi, conj. , yet truly, certainly,
nevertheless, however, John iv. 27.
fi4yu, iJievSi, e/j-eiva, (i) intrans., to
remain, to abide. So (a) of place,
to dwell. Matt. x. 11 ; to lodge,
Luke xix. 5 ; (6) of state, as Acts
V. 4 ; to continue firm, and constant
in, John xv. 4 ; to endure, to last, to
be permanent, i Cor. iii. 14; (2)
trans. , to wait for^ to expect. Acts
XX. 5.
pLeplQw, a<a, (i) to divide, separate,
mid., to share (fierd, gen.), Luke
xii. 13 ; pass., to be divided, to be at
variance. Matt. xii. 25, 26 ; i Cor.
i. 13; (2) to distinguish, pass., to
differ, i Cor. vii. 34 ; (3) to dis-
tribute, Mark vi. 41 ; ace. and dat.
fiepi/Mva, 7}s, ?7, care, anxiety, as divid-
ing, distracting the mind, Matt,
xiii. 22 ; Luke viii. 14.
fiepifipdo), w, to be anxious, distracted,
aijs. with dat. or irepi, gen. or ace.
{(is. Matt. vi. 34), to be anxious
about, or careful for, ace, i Cor.
vii. 32-34.
fifpis, ISos, 7], a part, or division, of a
country. Acts xvi. 12; a share,
portion, Luke x. 42 ; Acts viii. 2 1 ;
Col. i. 12,
fi€pi(rij.6s, ov, 6, a dividing, the axit of
dividing, Heb. iv. 12; distribxdiony
gifts distributed, Heb. iL 4.
Htpiorr-ns, ov, 6, a divider, an arbiter^
Luke xii. 14.
p.4pos, ovs, r6, a part, hence (i) a part,
as assigned, s/iare. Rev. xxii. 19;
felloivship, John xiii. 8 ; a business,
or calling, Acts xix. 27 ; (2) a part,
as the result of division, John
xix. 23. In adverbi.d phrases, fifpos
ri, partly, in some part ; ayh fi4pos.
|Ji6<rTi|JiPpia — {Ji£Ta-OPTp^<|>»] VOCABULARY.
as
alternately, one after another ; airS
liepovs, partly ; Ik fiepovs, indivi-
dually, of persons, partially, imper-
fectly, of things ; KaTo, f^^pos, par-
ticularly, in detail, Heb. ix. 5.
aea-w^p'^a, as, rj, midday, noon, the
south. Acts viii. 26, xxii. 6.
Ix^aiTivo), (TO), to mediate, to he a
mediator, to compose a difference,
to intervene, to interpose, Heb. vi.
17.
^ietrtTT/y, ov, 6, a mediator, a legate, an
interpreter of the will of another,
Gal. iii. 19; Heb. xii. 24.; one who
interposes between parties and recon-
ciles them, I Tim. ii. 5.
jjLfao-vvKrioy, lov, t6, midnight, Luke
xi. 5.
Meo-o-TTOTa/ifa, os, 7), a proper name,
Mesopotamia, the region between
the Euphrates and the Tigris.
fieiros, t], ov, middle, of time or place,
in the midst of (gen.), John i. 26 ;
neut., rb fiicrov, the middle part;
adverbial phrases, with prepositions
(art. generally om. ), e/c ix4aov, from
among, away. So iu fi^orcf, ava
fxecrou, &c. (See preps.)
u€a6-Toixov, ov, r6, a middle wall, a
separation, Eph. ii. 14.
fi^a--ovpdv7]ixa, aros, t6, mid-heaven,
Eev. viii, 13, xiv. 6, xix. 17.
fj.€(r6co, w, to he in tlie middle, or midst,
John vii. 14.
Me(r<riay, ov (from Heb., anointed),
Messiah, the same as Gr. Xpi<Tr6s,
John i. 42, iv. 25.
u^cnos, i], ov, fall, filled with, gen.
u€(rT6ci}, a>, to fill; pass., to he full of,
gen., Acts iL 13.
fierd (akin to fj-earos), prep,, gov. the
gen. and accus. Gen., with, among;
ace, after (see 301). With ace,
fxtTo. indicates motion, succession. In
composition, jttera denotes partici-
pation, change, or succession, heing
near to ; often like the Latin prefix
tra7is, as in the words transfer,
translate.
fiera-^aivo), to go, or pass over, to pass
away, to remove, Luke x. 7 ; Matt.
xi. i
/i(Ta-Pd\\ci), in mid., to change on£t
mind. Acts xxviii. 6.
(ler-ayw, to move, or turn about, as
horses, ships, James iii. 3, 4.
/xeTa-SiSu'^t, to impart, to communicate,
Eph. iv. 28 ; & fierayiSovs, a dis-
tributor of alms, e.g., of the church,
Rom. xii. 8.
/xerd-Oeffis, fas, 7), (i) a removal, a
translation, Heb. xi. 5 ; (2) a change,
or substitution, Heb. vii. 12.
jx^T-aipb), to remove, intrans., to depart.
Matt. xiii. 53.
juera- KoAeoj, w, in mid., to call, or send
for, to invite to oneself. Acts vii. 14.
fiera-Kiveco, u, to move away, pass., to
be removed. Col. i. 23.
fiera-kafifidyw, to take a share of. Acts
ii. 46; partake, gen., 2 Tim. ii. 6;
to obtain (ace). Acts xxiv. 25.
fifrd-Xiqyf/is, eas, rj, participation (pass.),
1 Tim. iv. 3.
(lir-aKKdaaw, to clmnge, to put one thing
for another, Kom. i. 25, 26 (eV, els).
[x^Ta-fxcXopiai, fJ.f\ri<rofiai, ist aor., nere-
liiT^-hOriv, dep., pass., to change one's
mind. Matt. xxi. 29, 32 ; to repent,
to feel sorrow for. Matt, xxvii 3 i
2 Cor. \'ii. 8. See Synonyms.
lx€Ta.-ixop(p6fa, a, to change the form,
mid. , to alter one!s form, or aspect.
Matt. xvii. 2 ; fig., to be changed in
mind, " metamorphose," Rom. xii. 2.
fxera-vo4<a, a>, ii<r<a, to change one's
views and purpose, to repent, i. e. , to
change one^s habit of feeling and con-
duct, Matt. iii. 2 ; Acts viii. 22, &c.
See Synonyms.
fieTd-voia, as, 7], change of mind, re-
pentance, Heb. xii, 17 ; Matt. iii. 8.
ixera-^v {aiv or |uv), adv., of time,
meatiwhile, John iv. 31; afterwards,
perh.. Acts xiii. 42. As prep.,
with gen. of place, between. Matt,
xxiii. 55.
fieTa-ireixTTQ), to send for, pass., Acta
X. 29; in mid., to send fen' to oneself,
to invite. Acts x. 5, xi. 13.
lx€Ta-<TTp€(j)co (with 2nd fut. and 2nd
aor. pass.), to turn, to change, James
iv. 9 ; Acts ii. 20 ; to pervert, to
corrupt, Gal. i. 7.
84
VOCABULARY. [{JLera-<rxTj|jiaTitw — p.^Tt]p
ucTo-a-xijjWOTf^w, Lffo), to transform,
Phil. iii. 21 ; mid., to assume the
appearance of anyone, z Cor. xi. 13,
14; fig,, to transfer, i.e., to speak by
way of accommodation, i Cor. iv. 6,
fieTa-TidTjfxi, to transpose, Acts vii. 16 ;
to transfer, to translate, Heb. vii. 12,
xi. 5; mid., to transfer oneself, i.e.,
to go over, or to fall away, Gal. i. 6;
to pervert, Jude 4.
fjLfT-eirena, adv., afterwards, Heb.
xii. 17.
fitT-exdi, /i€Tacr;x^(r«, 2nd aor., /iere-
- o'xo*', to 6e partaker of, to share in,
to enjoy, i Cor. ix. 10, x. 17.
/ierewpiXw, in mid., to Je m suspense,
to be of doubtful mind, Luke xii. 29.
fieT-oiK€ffia, as, ri, change of abode,
migration (of the Babylonian exile).
Matt. i. II, xii. 17.
fier-oiKiCia, to change one's habitation,
to migrate. Acts vii. 4, 43.
ueroxri, vs, v, <* partaking, a consort-
ing vjith, communion, 2 Cor. vi. 14.
Ix4toxos, ov, 6, 71, a partner, a com-
panion, an associate, Heb. i. 9 ;
Luke V. 7 ; a partaker^ Heb. iii.
I, 14.
fjLfTpeco, u, to measure. Matt. vii. 2 ;
met., to estimate, to judge of, 2 Cor.
X. 12.
/x€TprjT7js, OV, 6, "a measurer," metre-
tes, a measure {72 sextarii) contain-
ing nearly eight and a half English
gallons, John ii. 6.
fieTpcoirad^o), u, to treat with gentleness,
to be indulgent to, Heb. v. 2.
uerpiwy, adv., moderately, a little.
Acts XX. 12.
uirpov, ov, t6, a measure, of capacity,
Mark iv. 24 ; and of length, Kev.
XXL 1 5 ; measure assigned. Matt.
xxiii. 32 ; adv. phrase, iK /xeVpoi*, by
measure, sparingly, John iii. 34.
ufT-atirov, ov, t6 (^i//), the forehead.
Rev. vii. 3, 7.
ttc'xpt, or Me'xP'*. ^f^^., as prep, with
fen., unto, time. Matt. xiii. 30;
lark xiii. 30 ; place, Rom. xv. 19 ;
degree, 2 Tim. ii. 9 ; Heb. xii. 4.
As conj., untU,, Eph. iv. 13. See
Synonyma.
/t^, a negat. particle, not. For dis-
tinction between /at?, ov, see 401;
elliptically, lest, see 3 84 ; interro-
gatively, see 369. For the com-
bination ov fxri, see 377.
fi-ft-ye, in the phrase et Se fi^ye, but if
not, emphatic.
uridofuos, adv., by no means. Acts
X. 14, xi. 8.
/zTjSe, compare ou5e, and see 401 ; (i)
neither ... nor ; (2) not even. *
firjheis, ^TjSe/iio, firjSdv (ets), compare
ovdds, not one, no one, no person, or ■
thing, nothing. Matt. viii. 4 ; Mark
V. 26 ; Gal. vi. 3.
fi-n^^-nore, adv., never, 2 Tim. iii. 7,
fi-nSe-irw, adv., not yet, Heb. xi. 7.
MrjSos, ov, 6, a Mede, Acts ii. 9.
firjKeri, adv. (eri), no more, no longer,
lest further.
fj.rjKo's, ovs, t6, length, Rev. xxi. 16.
fjLTiKvva, to make long ; mid., to grow
up, as plants, Mark iv. 27.
IxrjXuTT], ^s, 7j, a fleece, a sheep's skin,
Heb. xi. 37.
{i-hv, a part, of strong affirmation,
N.T., only in the combination, ^
ii-i]v, assuredly, certainly.
ix-i]v, ixriv6s, 6 {i) a month, Acts vii. 20,
&c. ; (2) the new moon, as a festival,
Gal. iv. 10.
fiTjuvco, to indicate, to declare, i Cor.
X. 28.
)U7) ov, an interrogative formula, ex-
pecting the answer " yes," Rom.
X. 18.
fiij-'irore, adv., no longer, Heb. ix. 17.
As conj., lest ever, lest perhaps,
whether indeed, if so be, Luke iiL 15;
John vii. 26.
fx-fl-irco, adv., not as yet, not yet, Rom.
ix. 1 1 ; Heb. ix. 8.
fiilKm, conj., lest in any way, per-
adventure, that in no way, Acta
xxvii. 29; whether perhaps, i Thesa.
iii. 5.
fivpos, ov, 6, the thigh, Rev. xix.
16.
/x^T6, conj., neither ... nor, continuing
a negation, not even, Mark iii. 20.
/u^TT/p, rpSs, r}, a motlier, met., a
motlie)' city, Gal. iv. 26.
H^Tt — ^6yis]
VOCABULARY.
85
U7ITI, adv., interrogatively used, is
it? expecting a negative answer,
fjL-fiTiye ; not to say then 1 i Cor.
vi. 3.
jw^Tif, pron. interrog., has, or is any-
one ? John iv. 33 (better fxT\ ns).
firiTpa, as, rj, the womb.
/MTjTp-aXcfias, ov, <5, a matricide, i Tim.
i 9.
fxia, fern, of efs, owe.
(xiSvea, avS), perf. pass., fx^fxiafffiai, to
stain, to pollute, Jude 8; pass., to
he defiled, John xviii. 28.
fiiaaixa, aros, t6, pollution, defilement,
2 Pet. ii. 20 ; "miasma."
fiiatTixos, ov, 6, pollution, defilement,
2 Pet. ii. 10.
fiiyfia, aros, r6, a mixture, John
xix. 39.
fxiyvvfxi, ixi^co, e)ut|o, perf. pass., fiffiiy-
fxai, to mix, to mingle, Matt, xxvii.
34 ; Rev. viii. 7.
fiiKp6s, a, 6u, little, small, i.e., in size,
Matt. xiii. 32 ; quantity, i Cor.
v. 6 ; number, Luke xii. 32 ; time,
John vii. 33 ; dignity, Matt. x. 42.
MiAtjtos, ou, t], Miletus.
lxi?^ov, iou, t6 (Latin, mille passuum,
1000 paces), a mile (about So yards
less than our mile).
fiifieofxai, ovfiai, dep. mid., to imitate,
to follow the example of, 2 Thess.
iii. 7.
fj.inr]TT]s, ov, 9, an imitator, a follower,
I Cor. iv. 16,
(jLinvr^aKca iiJ-va-), mid. (perf. (xifxvTipi.ai,
and fut. in pass, from fii/iqa'dTjaoixai),
to call to mind, to remember. Matt.
xxvi. 75 ; pass., to be remembered,
to be had in mind, Acts x. 3 1 ; Rev.
xvi. 19.
fxurita, S), i]<T<a, to hate, to detest, to
abhor. Used in antith. with 0170-
irdco, to love less, not to love, to slight,
Matt. vi. 24 ; John xii. 25.
Ixiad-airo-Socria, as, i], recompense, as
(i) reward, Heb. x. 35, xi. 26 ; (2)
punishment, Heb. ii. 2.
jiti<j-e-a7ro-5(^T7js, ov, 6, a rewarder, Heb.
xi. 6.
uia-dLos, ov, hired, as subst., a hired
servant, a hireling, Luke xv. 17, 19.
/x.ffdSs, ov, 6, hire, wages, recompensCj
requital. Matt. xx. 8. Used for
reward. Matt. v. 1 2, 46 ; for punish-
ment, 2 Pet. ii. 13.
madow, w, cixroi), to hire out, to hire, to
engage to labour for wages. Matt.
XX. I, 7.
IxiTdafxa, aros, t6, hire, rent; met.,
anything rented, as a house, Acts
XX viii. 30.
fA.i(rQ(i3T6s, ov, 6, a hired servant, one
who serves for wages, Mark i. 20 ;
John X. 12, 13.
MLTv?\.r}vr], 7]s, 7), Mitylene, the capital
of Lesbos, Acts xx. 14.
MixttT^A-> ^ (Heb., wlw (is) like God?),
Michael, an archangel, Jude 9 ;
Rev. xii. 7.
fxva, as, Ti, a mina, silver money =100
Spax^tat, or about 3Z. 1 5s. ; of ac-
count, Luke xix. 13, 16.
fivdoixai (see {xi^ivricrKw).
mvicrwv, uvos, 6, Mnason, Acts xxi.
16.
fivela, as, rj, remembrance, recollection,
Phil. i. 3 ; I Thess. iii. 6 ; ixveiav
TTomffdai, to mention, to hear in mind,
Rom. i. 9.
IxyrjfjLa, aros, t6, a memorial, a monu-
ment, a tomb, Mark v. 5; Luke
xxiii. 53.
nvfiixelov, ov, t6, a tomb, a grave.
Matt. viii. 28 ; John xi. 31.
(xviifXT), 7]s, 7], remembrance, mention;
IJLvhmv iroLeia-Qai, to make mention,
2 Pet. i. 15.
pivnixovevoi, to remember (Srt), recollect,
call to mind (gen. or ace), Matt,
xvi. 9 ; Acts XX. 31; to be mind-
ful of Heb. xi. 15; to make men-
tion of (gen., or irepi, gen.), Heb.
xi. 22.
pivi]!x6(Tvvov, ov, t6, a memorial, honour-
able remembrance, fame. Matt. xxvi.
1 3 ; Mark xiv. 9.
lxv7](TTev{a, to ask in marriage; mid.,
to woo ; pass. , to be betrothed. Matt.
i. 18.
fjioyi-KdXos, ov, one who can scarcely
speak, a stammerer, Mark vii. 32.
fjL6yi5, adv. (like ix6\is), with difficulty
scarcely, hardly, Luke ix, 39.
86
VOCABULARY.
[|Ji,<$8 lOS — pLupoS
u6dios, ov, 6, a dry measure (16 sex-
tarii), containing about a peck; a
modins, Matt. v. 15; Mark iv. a i ;
Luke xi. 33.
fioixa^ls, ISos, 7], an adulteress, Eom.
vii. 3 ; fig. for departure from God,
Matt. xvi. 4 ; James iv. 4.
fioixdofiai, wnat, to commit adultery,
to be guilty of adultery. Matt.
V. 32.
fioixeia, oj, 71, adultery. Matt. xv. 19.
fioixevo), <T(o, to commit adultery, abs.,
to Jiave adulterous intercourse with,
to debauch, ace. ; fig. , of forsaking
God, Rev. ii. az.
It-oix^s, ov, 6, an adulterer, Luke
xviii. 1 1 ; I Cor. vi. 9 ; Heb. xiii. 4.
n6\is, adv. (like fiSyis), with difficulty,
scarcely, hardly. Acts xiv. 18;
Rom. V. 7 ; I Pet. iv. 18.
Mo\6x, 6 (Heb.) Moloch, Acts vii. 43 ;
LXX.
HoKvva, vvu, to pollute, to defile, i Cor.
viii. 7 ; Rev. iii. 4, xiv. 4.
fioXv(Tfi6s, ov, 6, pollution, defilement,
2 Cor. viL I.
nofitpii, Tis, V, complaint, cause or
ground of complaint. Col. iii. 13.
/JLovi}, ris, 7], a place of abode, a dwell-
ing-place, John xiv. 2, 23.
fiovo-yivfis, 4s, gen. , ovs, only begotten,
Luke vii. 12; Heb. xi. 1 7. Often
of Christ, as John i. 14, iii. 16.
fji6vos, 7], ov, only, alone, single, Luke
xxiv. 12, 18 ; solitary, witlwut com-
pany, or help, Mark vi. 47 ; for-
saken, desolate, John viii. 29 ; adv.,
n6vov, only.
tiov-6<peaXixos, having but one eye. Matt
xviii. 9.
iiov6o}, w, to leave alone ; pass, , to be
left alone, or desolate, i Tim. v. 5.
fLop<pi}, Tjs, 7], outward appearance,
form, shape, Mark xvL 12; PhiL
ii. 6, 7. See Synonyms.
fiop<p6u, S), (t!(ru, to form, to fashion,
Gal. iv. 19.
/j.6p(pa)(rt5, «DS, 7), formation, external
appearance, 2 Tim. iii. 5 ; form,
rule, system, Rom. ii. ao.
fioaxo-voieo), S>, to form tlie image of
a calf. Acts vii. 41.
IxScrxos, ov, 6, Tj, a calf, a young
bullock, Luke xv. 23 j Heb. ix.
12, 19.
fiovffiKSs, "ii, 6v, skilled in wiAsic, a
musician. Rev. xviii. 22.
1x6x^0%, ov, 6, wearisome labour, toil,
with pain and sorrow, 2 Cor. xi 27;
I Thess. ii. 9 ; 2 Thess. iii, 8.
fxv€\6s, ov, 6, the marrow, Heb. iv.
12.
juve'o), «, to instruct, to initiate intOf
Phil. iv. 12.
IxvOos, ov, 6, a word, hence a tale^
fable, or figment, 1 Tim. iv. 7,
"myth."
fivKaofxai, ufxai, to low, to bellow, as a
bull, to roar, as a lion, Rev. x. 3.
fivKT7]plC(o, to contract the nostrils in
contempt, to mock, sneer, or deride.
Gal. vi. 7.
(ivKikSs, it, 6v, pertaining to a mill,
Mark ix. 42.
IxvXos, ov, d, a millstone. Matt.
xviii. 6.
fivKcov, S>vo5, 6, a mill-house, the place
where corn was ground, Matt.
xxiv. 41.
/xvpids, dSos, 71, cb myriad, ten thousand,
a vast multitude (gen.), indefinite,
Luke xii. i ; Acts xxi. 20.
fivpi^o), a-co, to anoint, for burial, Mark
xiv. 8.
fxvpioi, at, a, ten thousand. Matt.
xviii. 24 ; fivploi, iai, *Ia, innume-
rable.
fivpov, ov, r6, a perfumed ointment^
Matt. xxvi. 7.
Mi'o-fa, OS, 7], Mysia, Acts xvi, 7.
/jLVffriipiov, iov, t6, a mystei'y, anything
hidden, a secret. Matt. xiii. 11 ;
Rom. xi. 25. Often in N.T. of the
truths of the Gospel as mysteries
revealed, i Tim. iii. 16.
/iuwTrci^co, to wink, to be dim-sighted,
2 Pet. i. 9.
/««>A«t|/, wttos, 6, the mark of a stripe;
met., pain, anguish, i Pet. ii. 24.
fxwfiao^iai, ufxai, dep., aor., raid, and
pass., to blame, to find fault witfi,
2 Cor. viii. 20.
fxufios, ov, 6, a spot, a blemish; met.,
disgrace, 2 Pet. ii. 13.
|Jl6)paiV0i) V€4)€Xt|]
VOCABULARY.
87
ficopaivw, avu, to infatuate, to mahe
foolvih, I Cor. i. zo; pass., to he-
come foolish, Eom. i. 22 ; to become
insipid, tasteless, like spoiled salt,
Matt. V. 13.
jxwpia, OS, 7}, folly, absurdity, con-
temptihleness, i Cor. i. 18, 21, 23.
fiMpo-Aoyla, as, 7), foolish talking,
babble, Eph. v. 4.
Ii.(»p6s, a, 6v, stupid, foolish. Matt,
vii. 26, xxiii. 17, 19; as subst., a
wicked, graceless, abandoned person.
Matt. V. 22 ; rh fiaphv, foolish-
ness. But see 153, ii.
Moxr^s, or Ma)j>o-7js, ecoy, dat., u, or y)
ace. irji' (once e'a, Luke xvi. 29), d,
Moses, met., the books of Moses,
thePento^eztc/i, Lukexvi. 29; 2 Cor.
iii. 15, &c.
N.
N, r, yv, nu, n, the thirteenth letter.
As a numeral, 1/ = 5c ; ^x/ = 50, 000.
Haaacrdov, 6 (Heb.), Naasson, Matt,
i. 4; Luke iii. 31.
Na77ai, 6 (Heb.), Naggce, Luke iii. 25.
"Na^apeO, or Na^apeV, ^, Nazareth.
I^a(ap7tv6s, ov, 6, a Nazarene, as Mark
i. 24.^
Na^ctjparos, ow, b, a Nazarene, an ap-
pellation of Christ. Christians are
called 01 Na^ccpaloi, Acts xxiv. 5.
Na0av, 6 (Heb. ), Natlian, Luke iii. 3 1.
tia^apaiiX, 6, Nathanael, probably the
same as Bartholomew.
vai, adv., affirming, yes, Matt. ix. 28;
even so, Matt. xi. 26 ; Luke x. 21 ;
Kev. xxii, 20 ; yea, strongly affirm-
ing, Luke vii. 26.
NaiV, 17, Nain, Luke vii. 1 1.
vaos, ov, 6 [vaica), a temple, a shrine,
or small model of a temple, the
abode of deity, pretended. Acts
xix. 24; the temple. Matt, xxiii. 16;
used of Jesus Christ, John ii. 19,
20 ; of Christians generally, i Cor.
iii. 16; 2 Cor. vi. 1 6. See Syno-
nyms.
tiaovfx., 6 (Heb.), Nahum, Luke iii. 25
(not the prophet).
vdpdos, ov, 7], nard, spikenard, a costly
ointment, Mark xiv. 3 ; John xii. 3.
NapKiaaos, ov, 6, Narcissus, Rom.
xvi. 1 1.
yav-ayeoo, u {&yvvfxi), to make ship-
wreck, to be shipwrecked, 2 Cor.
xi. 25; fig., I Tim. i. 19.
vav-K\7]po9, ov, 6, a ship-muster, or
owner. Acts xxvii. 11.
vavs, j/ecos, acc. vavv, rj, a ship. Acts
xxvii. 41.
vavTrjs, ov, 6, a sailor. Acts xxvii.
27, 30.
'iiax(^p, 6 (Heb.), Nahor, Luke iii. 34.
vtavias, ov, 6, a young man, a youthy
Acts XX. 9 ; one in the prime of lifey
Acts vii. 58.
veaviaKOi, ov, 6, a young man, Matt,
xix. 20 ; plur., of soldiers, Mark
xiv. 51; of the middle stage in the
divine life, i John ii. 13, 14.
NectTToAty, ewy, rj, Neapolis.
Neefxdu, 6 (Heb.), Naaman, Luke
iv. 27.
veKp6s, d, 6v, dead, (i) lit., as Matt,
xi. 5 ; 01 veKpol, the dead generally ;
(2) fig., dead, spiritually, Eph. ii. i;
inactive, inoperative, Rom. vii. 8 ;
unaffected by, or utterly indifferent
to (dat.), Rom. vi. ii.
v€Kp6w, w, to put to death — so, to
"mortify" — to deprive of power, to
render weak, and impotent, Rom.
iv. 19; Col. iii. 5; Heb. xi. 12.
viKpcaa-is, ecas, t], death, a being put to
death, 2 Cor. iv. 10 ; deadness, im-
potency, Rom. iv. 19.
vios, a, ov, (i) new, fresh. Matt,
ix. 17 ; new, in disposition and cha-
racter; (2) young, of persons, Titus
ii. 4. Compar,, vedorepoT, younger,
Luke XV. 12, 13. See Synonyms.
viO(Ta6s, ov, 6, the young of birds, a
youngling, a chicken, Luke ii. 24.
ve6T7]s, rjTos, 7], youth, youthfulness,
Luke xviii. 21 ; i Tim. iv. 12.
vc6-^vTos, ov, newly -planted ; fig., a
recent convert, "neophyte," i Tim.
iii. 6.
yeuw, <r», to nod — so, to beckon — to sig-
nify, John xiii. 24 ; Acts xxiv. lo.
v€<f>i\ri, Tjs, 7), a clovd.
88
VOCABULARF.
[Ne<}>9(xX€f)i. — v<$p.ur|ia
f^efeaXdfjL, 6 (Heb.), Naphthali, Matt.
iv. 14; Rev. vii. 6.
vf(t>os, ovs, t6, a cloud; met., a mul-
titude, a great company, Heb. xii. i.
vf<pp6s, ov, 6, tlie kidney y plur., the
reins, put (as Heb.) for the secret
thoughts, desires, and afifections,
Rev. ii. 23.
V€w-K6pos, ov, 6, T) {va65 and Kopeu), to
sweep, "temple- 8 weeper," a temple-
keeper, a designation of the people
of Ephesus, Acts xix. 3 5.
yewreplKos, -fj, 6v, youthful, juvenile,
% Tim. ii. 22.
yedrepos, a, ov (comp. of veos, which
see), younger, inferior in rank, more
humble, Luke xxii. 26.
vif, adv., of aflBrmative swearing, by,
with ace, I Cor. xv. 31.
vijdco, to spin, Matt. vi. 28.
j/TjTrm^w, to be like a child, i Cor.
xiv. 20.
vfrJTios, ia, lov, infantile; as subst., an
infant, a babe, a child. Matt.
xxi. 16; I Cor. xiii. 1 1 ; used of
an age below manliood, Gal. iv. i ;
fig., oi unlearned, unenlightened per- j
sons. Matt. xi. 25 ; Rom. ii. 20.
Nrjpeus, €«s, 6, Nereus, Rom. xvi. 15.
NTjpi, & (Heb.), Neri, Luke iii. 27.
in\(Tiov, ov, t6 (dim. of vnaros), a small
island, an islet. Acts xxvii. j 6.
vricros, ov, t) (j/ew, to swim), an island.
i/TjcTTfia, as, 71, fasting^ a fast. Matt.
xvii. 21 ; Acts xiv. 23; the day of
atonement, tJie chief Jewish fast-day.
Acts xxvii. 9.
i/ijffTcuw, ffw, to abstain from food, to
fast, Matt. vi. j6-i8.
v^ffTis, los, plur., vr}<rT€is, 6, t}, fasting.
Matt. XV. 32.
vT}(pd\ios, or -A.60S, oy, sober-minded,
iemjjerate; 1 Tim. iii. 2; Tit.
ii. 2.
vi)<fM0, t^m, to be sober, temperate, fig.,
I Thess. V. 6, 8.
Ulyep, 6 (Lat.), Niger, Acts xiii. i.
HiKavoip, opos, 6, Nicanor, Acts vi. 5.
yiKCLw, w, Tjo-w, to prevail, abs.. Rev.
iii. 21; to conquer (ace. ), Luke
xi. 22 ; John xvi. 33.
Ahti, tjs, Tj, victory, i John v. 4,
Nt/c<J-5r;jtios, ov, S, Nicodemus, John
iii. I.
NiKoKatr-ns, ov, 6, a follower of Nico-
lavs (probably a Greek equivalent
ioT Balaam), Rev. vi. 15.
UiK6-Kaos, ov, 6, Nicolaus, Acts vi. 5
(not to be confounded with pre-
ced.).
Nt/c(J-7roA.ts, €ws, ^, Nicopolbi, Titus
iii. 12. Several cities of the name
existed ; this was prob. in Mace-
donia.
vIkos, ovs, t6, victory; tls vlkos, from
O.T., to a victorious consummation,
utterly. Matt. xii. 20; i Cor. xv.
54, 55, 57.
Niveuf, Ti (Heb.), Nineveh, Luke xi. 32.
NiyeutTTjs, ov, 6, a Ninevite, Matt.
xii. 41.
yLTTT-fjp, vpos, 6, a basin, or eiver, for
washing hands or feet, John xiii. 5.
vItttco, ;^«, to wash (ace), mid,, to
wash oJie^s self, ace. of part, as
Mark vii. 3. See Synonyms.
voeci), '2, i]aci}, to understand, to per-
ceive, abs., or with ace, or on.
v6if]fia, aros, r6, (i) a design, counsel,
purpose, 2 Cor. ii. 11, x. 5; Phil.
iv. 7 ; (2) the mind, i.e., the under-
standing, or intellect, 2 Cor. xi. 3.
v66os, % ov, bastard, spurious, Heb.
xii 8.
voii-f], ris, 7) {vefiot, to apportion, as
l)asture to cattle), (i) pasturage,
John X. 9; (2) met., a feeding,
spreading, as of a gangrene, 2 Tim.
ii. 17.
vofil((i), (Tu (vSfjios), (i) to be wont, to
do hy custom.. Acts xvi. 13; {z) to
think, to reckon, to expect, as the
result of thinking. Matt. v. 17,
XX. 10.
vofxiKds, "fi, 6v, pertaining to law, legal,
Titus iii. 9; as subst., a person
skilled in law, Titus iii. 13 ; a
teacher of tlie Mosa.ic law, Matt,
xxii. 35, &c.
yonlfjuas, adv., lawfully, agreeably to
rule, I Tim. i. 8 ; 2 Tim. ii. 5.
v6fj,i<rfxa, aros, t6, money, coin, whose
value is settled by law, Matt.'
xxiL 19.
vojio-SiSdo-KaXos — vwtos]
VOCABULARY.
8^
vofio-SiddcrKaXos, ov, 6, a teacher or
interpreter of the law.
vofjLo-dearia, as, rj, legislation, the laws
given, i.e., the Mosaic law, Rom.
ix. 4.
vofio-deT^a, CO, to sanction, to establish
for a law, Heb. viii. 6; pass., to
have a law established, Heb. vii.
II.
uofio-deTrjs, ov, 6 {TiOrjfii), a I'aw-giver,
legislator, James iv. 12.
v6^os, ov, 6 {vffJLO), to apportion), a lata,
an edict, a decree, a statute, Luke
ii, 22 ; a staridard of acting, or
judging, Rom. iii. 27 ; a written
law, Rom. ii. 14 ; the Mosaic eco-
nomy. Matt. V. 1 8 ; Rom. x. 4 ; tlie
Christian dispensation, or doctrines.
Gal. vi. 2; Rom. xiii. 8; met., for
the books containing the Mosaic
law, i.e., the five books of Moses,
Matt. xii. 5 ; and for the Old
Testament generally, John x. 34.
v6os {vovs, which see).
voffia, CO, to be sick; fig., to have a
diseased appetite, or craving for,
irept (ace. ), i Tim. vi. 4.
vSa-TjfjLa, aros, t6, a disease, a sickness,
John V. 4.
v6ffos, ov, 6, a sickness, a disease, a
distemper. Matt, iv. 23, 24.
vocraid, as, t], a brood of young birds,
Luke xiii. 34.
vo(T(tLov, ov, t6, a young bird, Matt,
xxiii, 37.
voffcros (see veocrcrSs).
vo<r<piC<a, in mid., to secrete for oneh
self, to purloin, Acts v. 2, 3 ; Titus
ii. 10.
v6tos, ou, 6, the south wind, Luke
xii. 55; the southern quarter, Luke
xi. 31.
vov-Oeaia, as, 7], a warning, admonition,
counsel.
vov-dfTeci), S>, to warn, to admonish, to
counsel. Acts xx. 31.
vov-firimC', ots, Ti, the new moon, or
month, as a festival. Col. ii. 1 6.
vovv-exci>s, SudiV., under standingly, wisely,
judiciously. Matt. xii. 34.
vovs, or vo6s, vov, vol, vovv, 6, the
mind, i.e., the understanding, or in-
tellect, Luke xxiv. 45 ; Rom. xii. 2 ;
Phil. iv. 7. Hence, any affection of
the mind — as modes of thought —
inclinations, or dispositions, Rom.
xiv. 5; 1 Cor. i. 10; presence of
mind, 2 Thess. ii. 2 ; more widely,
the rational soul, with its powers
and affections, Rom. vii. 25.
Nvfji.(l>as, a, 6, Nymphas, Col. iv. 15.
vvfKprj, 7JS, Tj, a bride. Rev. xviii. 23 ;
a daughter-in-law. Matt. x. 3 5.
vvfKpios, ov, 6, a bridegroom, John
iii. 29.
vvfxcpdou, uvos, 5, a bridal chamber ;
viol rod vvfx<pS}Vos, Matt. ix. 15,
sons of the bridal chamber, brides-
men.
vvv and vwi, adv., (i) of time, now,
i. e. , the actually present ; now, in
relation to time just past ; just now,
even now, now, in relation to future
time ; ju^t at hand, even now, imme-
diately ; 6, 71, rh, vvv, the present,
with sub. or (neut.) without ; (2) of
logical connexion, now, i.e., "see-
ing that things are so," 2 Cor.
vii. 9; now then, i.e., implying the
rise of one thing from another,
1 Cor. xiv. 6. (3) In commands
and appeals, vvv is emphatic. Matt,
xxvii. 42; James iv. 13, at this
instant.
vv^, vvktSs, 7}, the night, night-time,
lit. ; often fig. , a time of darkness
and ignorance, Rom. xiii. 12;
I Thess. V. 5.
vvffffb), |co, to stab, to pierce, John
xix. 34.
vva-rdCco, •!&>, to nod, as asleep, to be
drowsy. Matt. xxv. 5; fig., to de-
lay, 2 Pet. ii. 3.
vvxd-r}ix€pov, ov, t6, a day and a nighty
twenty-four hours, 2 Cor. xi 25.
NcSe, 6 (Heb.), Noah.
vo)Qp6s, a, 6v, slow, dull, stupid, Heb.
V. II, vi. 12.
VWTOS, ov, 6, the back of men or
animals, Rom. xi. 10.
90
VOCABULARY.
[a-60(Jn
E, {, Is xi, X, or gs, the fourteenth
letter. As numeral, I' = 60 ; ^ =
60,000.
^tvia, asy r], hospit.ality, entertainment,
a lodging, Acta xxviii 3 ; Philem.
az.
{6>/iX«, trw, (i) to receive as a guest
(ace); pass., to he. entertairmi, to
lodge as a guest witli, Acts x. 6,
xxi. 16; (2) to appear strange to.
Acts xvii. 20 ; pass., to think
strangely of, to he surprised at
(datj, I Pet. iv. 12.
{ero-Soxfw, «, to entertain guests, to
practise hospitality, i Tim. v. 10.
IcVos, ?7, oj/, strange, foreign. Acts
xvii. 18; 1 Pet. iv. iz ; with
gen., Eph. ii. 12; as subst., a
stranger, a guest, a host, Kom,
xvi. 23.
^4arrji, ov, 6 (the Latin sextarius), a
measure, about a pint and a half
English ; met. , a cup, or pUcher, of
any size, Mark vii. 4, 8.
Itipcdvo), avS>, ist aor., i^-fipava, perf.
pass., i^-fipafifiai, to dry, to make dry,
to wither, James i. 11 ; pass., to be
or hecome dry, wiHiered, Matt,
xiii. 6 ; to he dried up. Rev. xvi. 12 ;
to 6e ripened, as corn, Rev. xiv. 1 5 ;
to pine away, Mark ix. 18.
^'r]p6s, d, 6v, dry, withered, as a tree,
Luke xxiii. 3 i ; as a diseased and
useless limb, Matt. xii. 10 ; Luke
vi. 6, 8.
^vMvos, ivf], ivov, wooden, 2 Tim.
ii. 20.
IvKov, ov, t6, wood, e.g., timber in
building, i Cor. iii. 12; or for burn-
ing ; anything made of wood, e.g.,
Hie stocks. Acts xvL 24; a staff,
Matt xxvi. 47, 55; « cross, or
gibbet, Acts xiii. 29; Gal. iii. 13;
a living tree. Rev. il 7.
^vpdot, w, i]vw, perf. pass., i^^prjfMu, to
shear, or shawe, e.g., the locks and
the beard, Acts xxL 24; i Cor.
XL 5, 6.
O.
O, 0, hfiiKpSv, omlcron, short o, the
fifteenth letter. As a numeral,
0' = 70 ; ^0 = 70, 000.
6, ^, T<J, the definite article, the,
originally demonstrative. For its
uses, see Part III,, Chap. II.
oySoijKovTa, num. indecl., eighty.
6jSoos, T}, ov, ord., eightJi, For 2 Pet.
ii. 5, see 331.
hyKQs, ov, 6, a weigJU, an impediment,
Heb. xii. i.
8Se, ^5e, rSSe, demon, pron., this, that
(here), (see 339), such and such,
certain, James iv. 13.
65eva), to pass along a way, to journey,
Luke X. 33.
i5-7j7ew, «, riaw, to lead along a way,
to conduct, to instruct. Matt. xv. 14 ;
John xvi. 1 3.
55-7770S, ov, 6, a leader, Acts i. 16;
fig., of instructors, Matt. xv. 14.
dSo-i-vopeot, u. to travel, to pursue a
way. Acts x. 9.
65o-i-irop'ia, as, rj, a journey, a journey-
ing, John iv. 6.
6d6s, ov, Vt (i) ft toay, a road, a high-
way. Matt. ii. 12; (2) a going, a
progress, Mark vi. 8; (3) a journey,
a day's, or a Sabbath day's, Luke
ii. 44; Acts i. 12; (4) fig., manner
of action, metliod of proceeding.
Acts xiii. 10; Matt. xxi. 32; espec.
(5) the Christian way. Acts ix. 2 ;
a Pet. ii. 2 ; (6) used of Christ
himself, John xiv. 6.
oSous, ^6in-os, 6, a tooth, Matt. v. 38.
oZvvdw, CO, in mid. and pass., to be in
an agony, to be tormented, to he
greatly grieved or d'lstressed, Luke
ii. 48 ; Acts XX. 38.
h^vvfi, Tjy, 71, pain, distress, of body or
mind, Rom. ix. 2 ; i Tim. vL 10.
ohvpfi6s, ov, 6, lamentation, wailing.
Mat. ii. 18.
*0^o5, ov, Uzziah, Matt. i. 8.
i>(o), intr^ns., to emit an odour j John
xi. 39.
'6Qev, adv. , whence, of place or source.
oQ6ini, rjy, v, « linen cloth, hence, a
sfieet. Acts x. 1 1.
SBoviov — oXi-yiJ-tf/vxos]
VOCABULARY.
91.
o66viov, ov, r6 (dim. of oddvrj), a linen
swathe, a bandage, Luke xxiv. 12.
oUa (fi5-), / know (see 103, 4).
otKeitt/co's (see 01/cio/cJs).
otKctoy, o, ov, domestic, pertaining to a
family, Eph. ii. 19; associated with,
geu., Gal. vi. 10.
ot/ceVrjj, ov, 6, one living in the house
with, a domestic, a servant.
oi/ceo), cD, i](TO), to inhabit, to dwell in,
Rom. viii. 9; i Tim. vi. 16.
oXKTjfxa, aros, t6, a dwelling, used of a
prison. Acts xii. 7.
oiK-nTrjpiov, ov, t6, a domicile, of the
spiritual body as the habitation of
the soul, 2 Cor. v. 2.
oiKia, as, 7], (i) a house; (2) met., a
household, a family, goods, i.e., a
house and what is in it.
olKiaKSs, ov, 6, otie of a family, whether
child, relative, or servant, Matt.
X. 36.
oiKo-deffiroTfo}, w, to govern a house-
Iwld, 1 Tim. V. 14.
otKo-Seo-TrJrTjs, ov, 6, a householder, a
head of a family, Matt. x. 25.
olKo-dofx4o}, w, to erect a building, Luke |
xiv. 30; to rebuild, to found, to
establish ; fig. , of increase in know-
ledge and piety, i Cor. x. 23; to
encourage, to embolden, 1 Cor. viii.
10.
olKo-SofiT}, 71$, 7] {Se/Mco), « buHding,
structure, of the spiritual body,
2 Cor. V. I ; of the church, Eph.
ii. 21 ; met., edification, spiritual
advancement, E.om. xv. 2.
oi/co-5o/x.ia, as, t], edification, 1 Tim.
i. 4, rec. (prob. olKovoixiav).
olKovQjx'ia, as, management of family
affairs, stewardship, an "economy,"
or dispensation.
olKo-vSfios, OV {v€fj.(a), a house manager,
a steward, an administrator of funds
for another ; often of the Christian
stewardship.
sSkos, ov, 6, a house, a building, for
any purpose (gen. ) ; met. , a family
resident in one house, a family per-
petuated by succession, the house of
God, i.e., the temple; the family of
God, i.e., the church.
otKovfxevT}, 7JS, pres., part., pass., fem.
(-7^) of oIkcw, the inhabited land, or
world, of (i) tlie Roman empire;
(2) prob. the Syrian province, Luke
ii. i; (3) the world at large; {%)
met., the inhabitants of the tvorld ;
(5) a state, or economy, Heb. ii. 5.
olK-ovp6s, ov, 6, 71 {odpos, keeper), a
house-manager, Titus ii. 5.
oiKreipoa, riaw, to pity, to have com-
passion, Rom. ix. 15; LXX.
olKTip(x6s, ov, 6, kindness in relieving
sorrow. Col. iii. 1 2 ; favour, benignity,
compassion, Rom. xii. i.
oiKripfiuv, ovos, 6, 7], pitiful, compas-
sionate, merciful.
olfxai (see olofiai).
oivo-ir6r7is, ov, 6, a wine-bibber, one who
drinks to excess. Matt. xi. 19.
ohos, ov, 6, wine, Mark ii. 22, &c. ;
met., the vine. Rev. vi. 6; fig., of
that which excites or inflames, Rev.
xiv. ic, xvii. 2.
olvo-cpXvyia, as, Tf {tpxia), to be hot), the
state of being heated with wine,
oXofiai and o?/iai, to think, to suppose,
ace. and inf., or '6ti.
oXos, a, ov, rel. pron. correl. to roiov'
ros, of what kind, or sort,
olco (see <pipw).
oKvioo, a>, iiffw, to be slothful, to delay,
to be loth. Acts ix. 38.
0KV7]p6s, d, 6v, slothful, indolent,
tedious, Rom. xii. 11 ; Phil. iii. i.
oKTa-7](xepos, ov, 6, 7), of or belonging to
the eighth day, Phil. iii. 5.
oKTcij, num. indecl., eight.
o\e6pos, ov, 6, destruction, perdition.
misery, i Cor. v. 5.
oXiyo-TciffTos, ov, 6, 7], of little faith.
Matt. vi. 30.
oKlyos, 7], ov, (i) little, small, brief,
(2) in plur., few, sometimes with
gen.; (3) neut. as adv., bxiyov, of
time, soon; of space, a little way ;
(3) with prepositions preced. in
various phrases, as eV oxlycp, in st
short time, or with little trouble.
Acts xxvi. 28.
o\i'y6-y^vxos, adv., small-souled, faint-
Jiearted, 1 Thess. v. 14,
92
VOCABULARY. [6Xi7-»pl« — ^*OvTi(ri-4>opoS
oXiy-wpiai, w, to make little of, to
despise (gen. ), Heb. xii. 5 ; LXX.
oKodpevrrjs, ov, 6, a destroyer, i Cor.
x- 10.
oXoQpevo}, to destroy, caiise to perish,
Heb, xi. 28.
dKo-KavTWfm, aros, t6 (fcofw), a burnt
offering, the whole being consumed,
"holocaust," Mark xii. 33.
d\o-K\7]pia, as, i], perfect soundness.
Acts iiL 16.
6\6-K\rjpos, ov, whole in every part,
sound, perfect, i Thess. v. 23 ;
James i. 4.
o\o\v(fi), as from the cry, oK-o\ ! to
howl, to yell, to lament aloud, James
V. I.
oKos, 77, ov, all, the whole (see 225 ;
adv., -us, wivolly, altogether ; with
ueg.^xeGedi.,notataIl.
6\o-T€h.r]s, 4s, perfect, complete, i Thess.
V. 13.
'OAvfj-TTcis, a, &, Olympas, Kom. xvi. 1 5.
8\vvdo5, ov, 6, an unseasonable fig, one
which, not ripening in due time,
hangs till nearly "ynnter, Rev.
vi. 13.
ofiPpos, ov, 6, a heavy rain, Luke
xii. 54.
hfiiKiO), a, ri<Tw, to be in company with,
to associate with (dat.), to talk with
(irpos, ace).
bfxiKia, as, f], intercourse, converse, dis-
course, I Cor. XV. 33, "homily."
vfifia, aros, r6, an eye.
ofjivvfii and ofivvw, o/jiSffot (see 116, 3),
to swear, to take an oath, Mark
xiv. 71 ; to promise with an oath,
Mark vi. 23.
6fio-dvixd56v, adv., with one mind,
unanimously, altogether, Rom. xv.
6 ; Acts vii. 57.
6iJLoidCw, aw, to be like, Mark xiv. 70.
6fji.oi>j-ira9i)s, ovs, d, t], being affected
like another (dat.), having like pas-
sions, or fedings. Acta xiv. 15 ;
James v. 1 7.
o^oios, oia, oiov, like, similar to, re-
sembling (dat.), ofequcd rank. Matt,
xxii. 39. Once with gen., John
viii. 55. Adv., -as, in like munner,
likewise
6fjLoi6Tr]s, 7JT0S, 7], likeness, similitude,
Heb. iv. 15.
6fxoi6a), u, {i) to render like. Matt,
vi. 8 ; pass. , to be like, or to re-
semble, Matt. xiii. 24 ; (2) to liken,
to compare. Matt. vii. 24 ; Mark
iv. 30 ; with ace. and dat.
dfiolu/jLo, arcs, r6, likeness, similitude,
Phil. ii. 7 ; Eev. ix. 7 ; Rom.
V. 14. See Synonyms.
Sju-oicoais, eus, t], likeness, reaemblancCf
James iii. 9.
vfjLo-\oy4(a, S), -flaw, ist aor., &fji.o\6-
Atjco, to speak (he same thing,
hence, (i) to confess, in the sense of
conceding or admitting, generally
with on; (2) to profess, or acknow-
ledge openly, ace, once with iv,
Matt. X. 32; (3) as i^ofioKoyea), to
praise, to give thanks (dat.), Heb.
xiii. 15.
d/xoXoyia, as, r], a profession, either
the act of professing (Heb. iii. i),
or (generally) the truth professed,
Heb. iv. 14.
SfxoXoyovfxevws, adv., by consent of
all, confessedly, without controversy, .
I Tim. iii. 16.
^^J-T€x»'os, ov, of the same art, or craft,
Acts xviii. 3.
Sfiov, adv., together, at the same place
or time.
bjx6-<ppwv, ovos {<ppiv), of the same
mind, concurrent, i Pet. Iii f
bfxoM (see ofiwfii).
d/jLws, adv., yet, nevertheless, i Cor.
xiv. 7 ; Gal. iii. 15; with fievroi,
notwitl islanding, John xii. 42.
ovoLp, t6, indecl,, a dream ; kut uvap,
in a dream, Matt. i. 20, ii. 12, 13,
XX vii. 19.
ovdpiov, lov, t6 (dim. of 6vos), a young
ass, an ass^s colt, John xii. 14.
oveiSiCw, ffa, to reproach, revile, up-
braid. Matt. XL 20; Mark xvi.
14.
oveidiafjiSs, ov, 6, reproach, reviling,
contumely, i Tim. iii. 7 ; Heb.
X. 33-
ovei^os, ovs, t6, reproach^ Luke i. 25.
'OvfjoiijLos, ov (profitable), Onesimu*.
'Ovrjai-tpopos, ov, 6, Onesiphoru*.
6viK<Js — 6p0os]
VOCABULARY.
93
ovikSs, n, Sv, pertaining to an ass;
IxvM'S SviKos, a millstone turned hy
an ass, Matt, xviii. 6, i.e., the
large upper millstone.
hvivTiixi, mid. aor., opt., omifiriv, may
1 have advantage or pleasure from !
Philem. 20.
tvo[xa, aros, r6, a name, i.e., that by
which anyone is known, a charac-
ter', as described by the name. Matt.
X. 41, 42; Rev. iii. i; fame, re-
putation, often implying dignity,
authority, Eph. i. 21 ; Phil. ii. 9.
ouofid^d), (Tci), to give a name to, Luke
vi. 13, 14 ; to mention, Eph. v. 3 ;
to call upon, or pro/ess the name of,
2 Tim. ii. 19,
ovos, ov, 6, ri, an ass.
ovras, adv. {6v, neut. part of elfii),
really, in very deed.
3|os, ovs, t6, vinegar, in N.T. , a poor
wine, mixed with water, a common
drink of Roman soldiers.
o^vs, i'la, <}, (j) sharp, as a weapon,
Rev. i. 16; (2) swift, eager, Rom.
iii. 15.
OTTTj, ris, 7], an opening, a cavern,
James iii. 11.
tiria-dfu, adv., behind, after, at the
back of.
oTrlacD, adv., behind, of place, .Luke
vii. 38; of time, Matt. iii. 11; abs.,
or with gen.
6Tr\i(a>, (TO), N.T., mid., to arm one-
self with, ace, fig., I Pet. iv. i.
UttXov, ov, t6, an instrument. Hence
plur., (i) arms, armour, John xviii.
3 ; (2) instruments, Rom. vi. 13.
biToios, oia, oiov, relat. pron., of what
kind, or manner, i Cor. iii. 13 ;
correL to ruiovros, Acts xxvi. 29.
6ir6T€, part, of time, when, Luke
vi. 3.
tJTTou, adv. of place, where, whither;
where, referring to state, Col.
iii. 1 1 ; whereas, i Cor. iii 3.
oTTToivo}, in pass. , to appear (see opaco).
OTTTaa-ia.^ as, 7], a vision, a supernatural
appearance, Luke i. 22, xxiv. 23 ;
2 Cor. xii. I.
oirT6s, r], 6v, roasted, broiled, Luke
xxiv. 42.
oTTTo/xai (see Spaa).
OTT-dopa, as, 7) (perh., ottSs, juice), the
autumn, autumnal fruits. Rev.
xviii 14.
'6irus, rel. adv., how, Luke xxiv. 20.
As conj., in such manner that, to
the end that, so that ; with av. Acts
iii. 19 (see 384, 2). After verbs
of beseeching, and the like, with
demonstrative force, that. Matt. ix.
38 ; Mark iii. 6.
Upcifxa, aros, r6, (i) a spectacle, Acts
vii. 31; (2) a vision. Acts ix.
10, 12.
dpd<Tis, ecos, 7}, appearance, aspect,
Acts ii. 17; Rev. iv. 3.
dparSs, 7], 6v, vibible, seen, plur., neut.,
Col. i. 16.
6pao3, w, (jy^ofiai, kiipaKa, etSov (see
103, 4), to see, generally; (2) to
look upon, or contemplate; (3) to
know, experimentally, to attain to,
to enjoy; (4) to take heed, Heb.
viii. 5 ; Matt. viii. 4 ; with fii) or
equiv., to beware. Matt. xvi. 6 ; (5)
pass., to be seen, to appear to,
present one's self to (dat.).
opyi], 7}s, 7}, irascibleness, anger, indig-
nation. Often of the wrath of God,
and its manifestation. See Syno-
nyms.
opyi^b}, crw, to irritate; pass., to be
angry; abs., to be enraged with,
dat., or iTTi, dat.
opyiXos, 7], ov, prone to anger, Titus
i- 7.
opyvia, as, t], the length from finger's
end to finger's end with both arms
stretched outwards, a fathom. Acts
xxvii. 28.
opeyo), to stretch out; mid., to reach
after, to desire, or long eagerly for,
gen., I Tim. vi. 10; Heb. xi. 16.
6peiv6s, -f], 6v, mountainous, hilly.
ope^is, ews, 7], strong desire, lust, con-
cupiscence.
opdo-iroSea), «, to walk in a straight
course, to walk uprightly, fig., Gal.
ii. 14.
6pd6s, "i], 6v, upright. Acts xiv. 10 ;
straight, Heb. xii. 13; adv., -wy,
rightly, Mark vii. 35.
94
VOCABULARY.
[opSo-Tonco) — ov
opBo-TOfiiw, w [Te/xva), to cut straigJif,
or rightly, to manage or administer
rightly, 2 Tim. iL 15.
opBpiC(a, to rise early, to do anything in
early morning, Lulce xxi. 38.
opdpivSs, i], 6v, belonging to early
morning, JRev. xxii. 16.
opdpios, ia^ lov, adj., early in the
morning, Luke xxi v. 22.
6p6pos, ov, masc, morning twilight,
early dawn, daybreak, Luke xxiv. i.
bpi^u), a<a, comp. "horizon," to ap-
point, to decree, Acts xvii. 26 ; to
mark out determinately, Rom. i. 4;
pass., perf., part., wpifffxhos, de-
creed, Acts ii. 23 ; neut., decree,
Luke xxii. 22.
Zpiov, iov, t6, plur., the borders of a
place, hence, districts, territory.
^pKi'^o, to adjure by, to charge solemnly
by, with double ace.
SpKos, ov, 6, an oath, Matt. xiv. 7, 9,
&c. ; a promise with an oathy Matt.
SpK-toaoffla, as, r), an oath, Heb. vii.
20, 21, 28.
Spfiaot, S), aw, N.T., intrans., to rush.
Matt. viii. 32 j Acts vii. 57 (cjs, or
eTTt, ace).
bplii], r)s, 71, a rush, a violent assault.
Acts xiv. 5 ; James iii. 4.
Spixrjua, aros, t6, a rushing on, violence,
Kev. xviii. 21.
Spveov, ov, rS, a bird of prey, a fowl,
Kev. xviii. 2, xix. 17, 21.
opvis, idos. 6, 77, a fowl. Matt, xxiii. 37;
Luke xiii. 34.
dpo-0€(ria, as, t], a setting hounds, or
limits. Acts xvii. 26.
tpos, ovs, t6, ])hir., 6prj, op4wv, a
mountain, Jiighland.
opvcrffw, |w, to dig, to dig out. Matt.
xxi. 33 ; Mark xiL 1.
dp<pav6s, ii, ov, bereaved, "orphan," as
subst., James i. 27 ; John xiv.
18.
opx^o/xai, ovfiat, riaofuu, dep., mid., to
leapf to dance.
2s, ifj, 0, relative pronoun, w^io, which
(see 58). Aft demonst. in the
phrase, 5s fiiv . . . oi 5/, that one . . .
thit aitty 1 Coi ii. 16.
SaaKis, rel. adv., how many timeSy as
often as, 1 Cor. xi. 25, 26.
oaios (la), lov, holy, both of human
beings and of God, t^ '6ffia, tiit Itoly
promises. Acts xiii. 34; adv., -«s,
holily, X Thess. ii. 10.
So-iSttis, tjtos, t], holiness, godliness,
Luke i. 75; Eph. v. 24.
ba-fji-fi, 77s, 7], an odour, lit., as John
xii. 3 ; fig. , as Eph. v. 2. In 2 Cor.
ii. 14, the allusion is to the odours
which arose in triumphal proces-
sions.
Zffos, T), ov, relat. pron., Iww much,
how great, { i ) of time, how long, as
long as, Rom. vii. i. Repeated,
the meaning is intensified, Heb.
X. 37 : eTTt fxiKphv '6aov '6aov, yet a
little, a very, vei-y little; (2) of
quantity, of number, how much,
plur., how many, John vi. ii;
Mark iii. 8 ; A«ts ix. 13; as many
as, Matt. xiv. 36; (3) of measure,
degree, Heb. vii. 20.
'Sa-irep, 7)-irt/), o-irep, whosoever, wlmt-
soever.
tar4ov, contr., oarovv, ov, t6, a bone^
John xix. 36.
Sff-Tis, ^-Tjs, '6ti, compoxmd relat., who-
which-whatsoever (see 58, c).
bffrpdKivos, i\, ov, made of earthy
fragile, 2 Cor. iv. 7.
6a(f>prj(Tis, fas, the sense of smelling, the
organ of smelling, i Cor. xii. 17.
6a<pvs, vos, T), the loins. Matt. iii. 4 ;
Acts ii. 30. For "the loins" to be
"girded," was to have the robes
gathered up so as to be ready for
work, Luke xii. 35; fig.^ i Pet.
i. 13.
6toi/ (8t6, &v), rel. adv., when, when-
soever, so long as.
ire, rel. adv., when,
3ti, conj., (i) tJiat, after verbs of
declaring, &c., introducing the ob-
ject-sentence, sometimes as a mere
quotation mark. Matt. ii. 23 ; (2)
because (see 136, 6).
Stov (gen. of 8<rTt$), ews Brov, uniUy
whilst.
ov, adv. (gen. of 8$), where, whitliery
00 f&v, whitliersoever.
-8<j>€Xos]
VOCABULARY.
95
ov {ovK before a vowel, ovx if the
vowel is aspirated), no, not (see
134, 401).
ova, inter j., ah/ aha I derisive, Mark
XV. 29.
ovai, inter j., wo! alas! uttered in
^rief or indignation, i Cor. ix. 16;
Matt. xi. 21 ; r] ovai, as subst., Kev.
ix. 12, a woe, a calamity.
So/icSs, adv., by no means, not in
anywise.
ov-5h, conj., disj. neg., neither, nor,
not, not even (see 401).
oifS-ils, ovSefiia, ouSeV, neg. adj., not
one, no one, none, nothing, of no
moment, of no value, vain.
ovde-TTOTc, adv., not ever, never, 1 Cor.
xiii. 8, Matt. vii. 23.
ouSe'-TTO), adv., not ever yet, not yet,
never, Luke xxiii. 53.
ovK-iTi, adv., 710 furtlier, no more, no
longer.
ovK-ovv ; adv. , not so then ? interrog. ,
or oijKovy, ironical, John xviii. 37,
art thou not then a king ?
01J fx-f], an emphatic negative (see
.377).
odu, conj., therefore, then, Matt,
xii. 12. Employed espec. (i) in
arguing, i Cor. iv. 16 ; (2) in ex-
hortation, Matt. xxii. 9, 17, 21 ;
(3) in interrogation, Matt. xiii. 27 ;
Gal. iii. 19, 21 ; (4) to resume an
interrupted subject, Mai'k iii. 31 ;
and (5) to indicate mere transition
from one point to another, most
frequently in John, as viii. 13.
oij-ircD, adv. , not yet, Matt. xv. 1 7.
oypd, a$, T], the tail of an animal.
ovpdvios, ov, heavenly, celestial, in, or
pertaining to heaven, Luke ii. 13;
Acts XX vi. 19.
ovpav6dev, adv. , from heaven.
ovpay6s, ov, b, heaven, (i) of the visible
heavens (both sing, and plur.),
through their whole extent, the
atmosphere, the sky, the starry
Jieavens ; (2) the spiritual heavens,
the abode of G od and holy beings,
? Matt. vi. 10 ; 2 Cor. xii. 2; "the
third heaven," above the atmo-
spheric and the sidereal; met., for
the inhabitants of heaven. Rev,
xviii. 20 ; especially for God, Luke
XV. 18.
Ovp^av6s, ov, 6, Urban, E.om. xvi. 9.
Ovpias, ov, 6, Uriah, Matt. i. 6.
ovs, u)r6$, t6, (i) the ear. Matt. x. 27;
(2) met., the faculty of apprelcen-
sion. Matt. xi. 15.
ovffia, as, 7) i&p), substance, wealth,
Luke XV. 12, 13.
ot-Te, conj., not even, Mark v. 3 ; nor,
with a negative preced.
ouTos, aiJTTj, TovTo, dcmoustr. pron. ,
this (near), appl. to })ersons and
things, sometimes emphatic, Matt.
V. 19; sometimes contemptuous,
this fellow. Matt. xiii. 55 (see 338
— 342 ; also eKs7vos and oSe).
ovTws (and before a consonant in some
edd., ovTCti), adv., thus, in this wis^
so, (i) in reference to anteceden
or following statement ; (2) corre
lative with ws or Kaddas, so ... as,
(3) qualifying adjectives, adverbs,
or verbs, so, Heb. xii. 21 ; Matt,
ix. 33 ; ovTtas ... ovtws, I Cor. vii. 7,
in this manner and that.
ovxi, adv., (i) an intensive form ot
ov, John xiii. 10, by no means, no,
nay ; (2) interrog., as Matt. v. 46,
expecting an undoubtedly affirma-
tive answer.
o^eiXeTTjs, ov, a debtor. Matt, xviii. 24;
one who owes morally, i.e., to the
law, e.g., obedience. Gal. v. 3 ; a
delinquent. Matt. vi. 12.
(xpeiX-f], ^s, V, a debt, a duty, Matt,
xviii. 32 ; Rom. xiii. 7.
6(peiXriixa, aros, r6, a debt, what is
justly due, Rom. iv. 4 ; fig., an
offence, a fault, a failure in duty.
Matt. vi. ,12.
6(j>€i\<o (i) to owe (ace. and dat.).
Matt, xviii. 28 ; rh o<pitX6p.ivov, the
due; (2) to be under obligation.
Matt, xxiii. 16. So, to sin against,
Luke xi. 4.
t<l>i\ov (see 378), interj., thai!
I wish ! would that ! i Cor. iv. 8 ;
Gal. V. 12.
otpeXos, ov-s, t6 (o</)eAA«, to increase),
projit, utiUcy, 1 Cor. xv. 32.
n n
96
VOCABULARY. [6<})0aX(i.o-8ovX6ia — iraf«
b<pdaXfj.o-dov\eLa, as, rj, eye-service^ Eph.
vi. 6 ; Col. iii. 22.
o<p0aXii6s, ov, 6, an eye. Used of dis-
positions and tendencies expressed
by the eyes, as Matt. vi. 23 (comp.
Mark vii. 22; Matt. xx. 15); fig.,
the eye of the mind, i.e., the under-
standing, Acts xxvi. 18.
Z<pis, ews, 6, a serpent, Matt. vii. 10;
an emblem of wisdom, Matt. x. 1 6 ;
of cunning. Matt, xxiii. 33; used
symbol, for Satan, 2 Cor. xi. 3.
ixppvs, v6s, 7], the eyebrow; used for
the brow of a mountain or hill,
Luke IV. 29.
ox^-ew, (*>, to disturb, to vex, only in
pass., Luke vi. 18.
oxA-o-TTOiew, CO, to gather a crowd, Acts
xviL 5.
SxAos, ov, 6, a crowd, the common
people, the multitude, plur., crowds.
dx-'poiiJ-a, aros, r6, a fortress, a strong
place of defence, 2 Cor. x. 4.
oT^idpiov, ov, t6 (a relish with bread), a
little fish, John vi. 9.
oi^e, adv., late in the evening, Mark
xi. 19; at the end of, after, gen.,
Matt, xxviii. i.
l^ifios, ov, latter, of the raiu, James
V. 7.
i^^ios, la, lov, late, Mark xL 11; as
subst., ^ 6\l/ia, evening, i.e., the
former of the two evenings reckoned
among the Jews, Matt. viii. 16 ;
the latter evening is mentioned,
Matt. xiv. 23 ; comp. ver. 15.
i^is, (COS, 7], the aspect, the countenance,
John xi. 44; external appearance,
John vii. 24.
o^civiov, ov, r6 ("relish, sauce"), like
6yf/dpiou), (i) plur., the rations of
soldiers, their wages, Luke iii. 14 ;
1 Cor. ix. 7. Hence, (2) recom-
pense, generally, Horn. vi. 23 ;
2 Cor. XI. 8.
IT. IT, nl, pi, p, the sixteenth letter.
As a numeral, tt' = 80 ; pr = 80, 000.
7ro7tS6i;c«), (ru, to ensnare, to lie in wait
for, fig.. Matt. xxii. 15.
Ka-y'is, Idas, r), a snare, a trap, Luke
xxi. 35 ; a device of Satan, 1 Tim.
iii. 7 ; cause of evil, or destruction,
Rom. xi. 9.
Trdd-niMt, aros, t6, {1) suffering, ojjliction,
(2) affection of mind, passion, Rom.
vii. 5 ; Gal. v. 24.
ira077T<Js, irj, 6v, destined to suffer. Acts
xxvi. 23.
irdOos, ovs, t6, suffering, emotion, in
N.T. of an evil kind, concupiscence,
Rom. i, 26j I Thess. iv. 5; Col. iii. 5.
•naiB-a'yai'ySs, ov, 6, a boy^s leader, or
guardian, a slave who had the
charge of the boys of a family
during their nonage, i Cor. iv. 15;
Gal. iii. 24.
TraiZdpiov, lov, t6 (dim. of va7s), a boy^
a lad, John vi. ix.
iratSeio, as, rj, training, of children and
youth, Eph. vi. 4. So (i) instruc-
tion, 2 Tim. iii. 16; chastisement,
correction, Heb. xii. 5.
iraidevT'fjs, ov, 6, {i) an instnictor, a
preceptor, Rom. ii. 20; (2) a cor-
rector, a chastiser, Heb. xii. 9.
iraiSeva, a<a, to train a child. Hence,
{i) to instruct, to admonish; (2) to
correct, to cluisten.
iraidiSOev, adv., from childliood, Mark
i:<- 21.
iraiUov, iov, r6 (dim. of xa?s), a little
child, an infant. Matt. ii. 8 ; a child
more advanced. Matt. xiv. 21 ; fig.,
1 Cor. xiv. 20.
iraiSiafcn, ijs, tj (dim. of r} vcus), a yotmg
girl, a female slave, a bond-maid.
irai((i}, ^ofxai, to ploy, as a child, to
dance, as in idolatrous worship,
1 Cor. X. 7.
irals, iraidSs, 6, rj, (i) a child, a boy
or girl; (2) a servant, a slave, an
attendant on a king; S ttoTs rod
Qeov, the servant of God, used of
any servant, Luke i. 69 ; of the Mes-
siah, Matt. xii. 18.
iraiu, <ro), to strike, to smite, \vith the
tut, Matt. xxvi. 68 ; with a sword,
Mark xiv. 47; as a scorpion with
its sting, Rev. ix. 5.
rdXat — "jrapa- poX"^]
VOCABULARY.
97
rrdxai, adv., of old, formerly, long
ago, Heb, i. i.
iraAatos, a, 6v, (i) old, former, ancient;
iraKaihs &vdp(airo5, the old, or former
man, i.e., man in his old, iin-
reuewed nature, Kom. vi. 6 ; (2)
wo7-n out, as a garment, Matt,
ix. 16; corrupt, vitiated.
Trd\ai6T7]s, TjTos, rj, age, oldness, Eom.
vii. 6.
TTa\ai6(a, Si, wcrco, to maJce old; pass.,
to grow old, to become obsolete, Heb.
viii. 13.
TToXf], 7)s, 7), a ivrestling, a struggle,
Eph. vi. 12.
iraKiy-ycueTia, as, 7], a new birth, re-
novation, regeneration, JMatt. xix.
28 ; Titus iii. 5.
trdXiv, adv. , again, back, used of place
or of time ; a pai-ticle of continua-
tion, again, once more, further;
and of antithesis, as 2 Cor. x. 7, on
the other hand.
trafjL-Tr\7)dd, adv., all at once, the whole
crowd together, Luke xxiii. 18.
vdfJL-TToAus, ira/Ji.ir6WTi, TrdfiTroKv, very
great, vast, Mark viii. i.
UaficpuXla, as, t], Pamphylia.
r-au-Sox^^ov, ov, t6, a klcan, a caravan-
serai, or Eastern inn.
Trai'- Sox evs, ^^^i ^ (Sexo/*"*)) ^^ keeper
of a khan,' or caravanserai, a host,
Luke X. 35.
Trav-ijyvpis, iSos, 7] {ayelpca), a general
assembly, a public convocation, Heb,
xii. 23.
TTav-oLKL, adv., with one!s whole house-
hold, ov family. Acts xvi. 34.
iravoTrXla, as, r], complete armour,
' ' panoply, " Luke xi. 22 ; Eph. vi.
11-13.
irav-ovpyla, as, 7], shrewdness, skill;
lience, cunning, craftiness, Luke
XX. 23; I Cor. iii. 19; Eph. iv.
iray-ovpyos, ov {epyov, fepy-), doing
everything, cunning, crafty, 2 Cor.
xii. 16.
TravTax^Sev, adv., froTn all sides, Mark
i, 45.
vavraxov, adv., in every place, evcry-
wJiere.
j TravTf\-r,s, 4s, gen., ovs, complete; eij
! TO iraureXis, perfectly, to tJie utmost,
I Luke xiii. 11; Heb. vii. 25.
TrdvTT], adv., in every way. Acta
xxiv. 3.
irdvToQiv, adv. , from every place, Luke
xix. 43 ; Heb. ix. 4.
Uavro-KpaTwp, opos, 6, the Almighty.
irauTdre, adv., always, at all times,
ever, Matt. xxvi. 11.
irdyTus, adv., wholly, entirely, 1 Cor.
V. 10; ill every way, by all means,
Horn. iii. 9 ; assuredly, certainly.
Acts xviii. 2 T.
Ttapd, prep., gov. the gen., the dat.,
and accus., beside. With a gen.
(of person), it indicates source, or
origin; with a dat., it denotes
presence with; with an accus., it
indicates motion toivards, or along-
side, and is employed in com-
parisons, beyond. For details, see
306. In composition, vapd re-
ti^ins its general meaning, besides,
sometimes denoting" wearness, some-
times motion by or pcbst, so as to
miss or tail ; occasionally also steai-
thiness [by the way), as in Trapei-
trdyw.
7rapa-0aipci}, 2nd aor., Trape^Tjv, to go
aside from, to desert. Acts i. 25 ;
to transgress, Matt. xv. 2, 3.
Tzapa-BdWoj, "to place side by side,"
(i) to compare, Mark iv. 30; (2)
to betake oneself any ivhither. Acts
XX. 1 5.
irapd-^aa-is, ews, t], a transgression,
Rom. ii. 23.
'Kapa&dT7]s, ov, 6, a trangressor, E-om,
ii. 25 ; James ii. 11.
Tcapa^id^ofjLai, to constrain by persua-
sion, Luke xxiv. 29; Acts xvi. 15.
Trapa-Po\€voiJ.ai, to expose one^s self to
peril, to be regardless of life, in best
MSS. of Phil. ii. 30.
irapa-^oA-fi, tjs, tj, "a placing side by
side," (1) a comparison, Heb. ix. 9;
(2) a parable, often of those uttered
by our Lord; (3) a proverb, an,
adage, Luke iv. 23 ; (4) perhaps in
Heb. xi. 19 : a crisis of danger (see
7rapaj3o?veiJoMaty.
98
VOCABULARY. [irap-ayyeXia — irapa-KtlTrTW
irap-a-yyiKia, os, t], a command, a
charge, from authority, Acts v. 28 ;
1 Thess. iv. 2.
irap-ayy^Wo), to notify, to command, to
charge, Luke ix. zi ; 2 Thess. iii. ,4;
dat. of pars., ace. of thing, or on,
iVa or inf., i Tim. vi. 13.
irapa-ylvofiai, (i) to be, or come near,
John iii. 23; (2) to com-e ujyon, or
against {trpos, iirl), Luke xxii. 52 ;
(3) to come forth, to ajypear, Luke
xii. 51 ; Heb. ix. 11.
irap-dyo>, in mid. , to pass along, by, or
aioay, 1 John ii. 8 ; to disappear,
1 John ii. 17; I Cor. vii. 31.
■fropo-5€i7/40TiXw, to make a public ex-
ample of, to expose to ignominy.
Matt. i. 19; Heb. vi. 6.
UapaZiiffos, ov, 6 (a Persian word,
"garden," "park"). Paradise, Luice
xxiii, 43 ; 2 Cor. xii. 4 ; Rev. ii. 7.
iropo-Sexo^ot, dep., mid., to receive,
admit, approve, Mark iv. 20 ; Acts
xvi. 2 1 ; Heb. xii. 6.
irapa-ha-Tpi&ii, r^s, r}, useless occupation,
or agitation about trifles, 1 Tim.
vi. 5.
irapa-Uhcani, acc. and dat., (i) to de-
liver over, as to prison, judgment,
or jmnishment. Matt. iv. 12; spec,
of the betrayal by Judas ; (z) to
hand over, entrust, as the talents,
&c. ; (3) to surrender, abandon one's
self, Eph. iv. 19; (4) to commend
to kindness, Acts xiv. 26 ; (5) to
recount, tell, Luke i. 2 ; to insti-uct.
Acts xvi. 4; (6) to give, or prescribe,
as laws, &c.. Acts vi. 14 ; (7) prob.
to permit, in Mark iv. 29, wlitn the
frmt jyei'mits, or allows.
Trapi-Zolos, ov, strange, wonderful, Luke
V. 26 ("paradox").
■jrapd-So(ri5, €ws, i], an instruction, or
tradition. Matt. xv. 2 ; 1 Cor. xi. 2;
2 Thess. ii. 1 5, iii. 6.
xapo-^7jA(Ja>, w, to ezcite to emidafion,
Uom. xi. II, 14; to jealousy, Kom.
x. 19 ; to anger, 1 Cor. x. 22.
irapa-eoKdaaios, by the seaside, Matt.
iv. 13.
7rapa-6fupf(D, w, to overlook, neglect,
Acts vi. I.
irapa-drjK'n, 77s, ^, a deposit, anything
committed to one's charge, i Tim.
vi. 20 ; 2 Tim. i. 12, 14.
Tco.p-a.iViu>, w, to exiiort, admonish. Acts
xxvii. 9, 22.
irap-aireofiai, ovfiai, dep., mid., (i) to
deprecate, to beg off; (2) to decline,
to endeavour to avoid. Acts xxv. 1 1 ;
Heb. xii. 19 ; (3) to refuse, to reject;
(4) to excuse oneself, Luke xiv.
18, 19.
irapa-KadiCco, intrans., to sit by the side
of, Luke x. 39.
TTopa-KotAew, w, etrw, (i) to send for, in-
vite. Acts xxviii. 20 ; (2) to beseech,
entreat, Mark i. 40; (3) to exhoi-t,
admonish. Acts xv. 32 ; i Tim.
vi. 2 ; (4) to comfort, 2 Cor. i. 4 ;
pass., to be glad, to rejoice, Luke
xvi. 25.
TTapa-KaKviTTca, to veil, to hide, Luke
ix. 45.
irapa-KaTa-O-fjKT], r]s, 7], a trust, a de-
posit, I Tim. vi. 20 ; 2 Tim. i. 14.
Trapa-KeLfiai, to be at hand, Rom.
vii. J 8.
vapd-KXrja-is, €ws, tj, a calling for, "a
summons to one's side." Hence,
(i) exiwrtation, Heb. xii. 5 ; (2) en-
treaty, 2 Cor. viii. 4; (3) encourage-
ment, Phil. ii. I ; (4) consolation,
Rom. XV. 4 ; met., of the Consoler,
Luke ii. 25; {5) generally, of the
power of imparting all these, Acts
iv. 36.
irapd-K\7]Tos, ou, 6, (i) an advocate,
Intercessor, 1 John ii. i ; (2) a
consoler, comforter, helper, John
xiv. 16; "paraclete."
irap-aKOT], i)s, rj, disobedience, Rom.
V. 19 ; 2 Cor. X. 6.
vap-aKo\ov64w, S>, i)(T(a, (i) to follow
closely, to accompany (dat.), Mark
xvi. 17; (2) to follow so as to trace
oujt, to examine, Luke i. 3 ; to adhere
to, I Tim. iv. 6 ; to imitate, z Tim.
iii. 10.
nap-uKovu, to hear negligently, to dis-
regard. Matt, xviii. 17.
irapa-KvTTTu, »|/«, to stoop down to
(fis); fig., to search into, James
i. 25.
rapa-Xa|xpdv&> — irdpSaXis] VOCABULARY.
99
irapa-Ka.jj.&ava, K'i\i^oixai, (i) to take to
oneself, to take with one, to assume,
obtain; (2) to take upon oneself, to
engage in; fig., to receive intel-
lectually, to learn, Mark vii. 4 ; to
assent to, to acknowledge, to seize, to
take, to carry captive.
Trapa-Atjca, N.T., in mid,, to Jay one's
course near, in sailing, Acts xxvii. 8.
Trap-akios, ov, adjacent to the sea, on
the coast, Luke vi. 17.
Tap-aXKayi], tjs, t], change, vicissitude,
James i. 17.
Trapa-Xoyi^ofjiai, dep., to impose upon,
to delude, ace. , Col. ii. 4.
irapa-KvriK6s, ^, 6v, palsied, "para-
lytic," in the whole or a part of
the body.
irapa-Xvo), t) relax, to enfeeble, only
perf., part., pass., TrapaX^Kvpiivos,
enfeebled, ' ' paralyzed. "
■jrapa-piSua), pt-^vS), to remain [by, dat. or
TTpos, ace), to abide; fig., to remain
constant in, James i. 25.
irapa-pivdeopLai, ov/xai, dep. mid., to
speak kindly to, to cheer, to en-
courage.
Trapa-pLvdia, as, v, encouragement, com-
fort, I Cor. xiv. 3.
Trapa-p.vdiov, lov, t6, comfort, Phil. ii. i.
TTapa-vopLiw, So, abs., to act contrary to
law, Acts xxiii. 3.
Trapa-vopLia, as, 7], violation of law,
transgression, 2 Pet. ii. 16.
■jrapa-iriKpaivw, auSi, ist aor., irapevi-
Kpdva, to provoke {God) to anger;
so, to rebel, Heb, iii. 16.
Trapa-'jriKpa(rpL6s, ov, 6, provocation (of
God) J so, rebellion, Heb. iii. 8, 15.
irapa-iriirTd), 2nd aor., Trapeneffou, to
fall away from, Heb. vi. 6.
irapa-irXia, S) (f), eiaopLai, to sail past,
ace. Acts XX. 16.
TTapaTrK-fjo-iov, adv., near to (gen.), Phil,
ii. 27.
TrapaTrXrjffioos, adv., likewise, in like
manner.
■jrapa-TTopevopLai, dep. mid., to pass by,
to pass along by.
irapd-TTTcopLa, aros, r6 {ttItttci)), a falling
awayj or aside, a transgression. See
Synonyms.
irapa^-pica, (f), ^ivaopLai, 2nd aor. pass.,
Trapeppvrju, pass., to be borne away
from, to lose, Heb. ii. i.
irapd-oTjpi.os, ov, marked on the side
{with, dat.). Acts xxviii. 11.
■Kixpa fFKeva^b}, cru), perf., mid., irape-
ffKevaa-pLai, to prepare, to make ready.
Acts X. ic; mid., to prepare one-
self I Cor. xiv. 8 ; to be in readinesSy
2 Cor. ix. 2.
Trapa-CKfUTj, rjs, r], a preparation, i.e.
the time immediately before a Sab-
bath or other festival, the eve. Matt,
xxvii. 62.
Trapa-reivw, to extend, to prolong. Acts
XX. 7.
Trapa-TTjpeco, S), ■i]a<a, {i) to observe nar-
rowly, Mark iii. 2 ; (2) to observe
.scrupulously and super siitiously, Gal.
iv. 10.
Trapa-T-hpTiffiS, ews, r], a close watching,
observation, Luke xvii. 20.
irapa-ridrjpLL ('see 107), (i) to place
near, or by the side of, as food,
Luke xi. 6 ; {z) to set, or lay before,
as iiistruction, spec, to propound, to
deliver, as a parable. Matt. xiii. 24 ;
mid., to give in charge to, to entrust,
Luke xii. 48; to commend, to re-
commend (ace. and dat., or ets),
Acts xiv. 23.
irapa-TiryxdvM, to fall in with, chance to
meet, Acts xvii. 17.
irap-avTiKo, adv., instantly, imme-
diately, with art., the momentary,
2 Cor. iv. 17.
Trapa-<p4p(i} (see 103, 6), to remove (ace.
and eiTr^), Mark xiv. 36 ; Luke
xxii. 42 ; pass. , to be driven about,
agitated.
irapa-cppoveo}, So, to be Reside oneself,
z Cor xi. 23.
irapa-(ppopia, as, rj, being beside oneself,
madness, folly, 2 Pet. ii. 16.
Trapa-x^ipLaCw, dixco, to winter, to spend
the winter. Acts xxvii. 12.
Trapa-x^tpLaaia, as, rj, a wintering, a
sptnding the winter.
irapa-xpwo; adv., in the very thing,
instantly, immediately.
irdpSaXis, ews, i], a leopard, a panther^
Hev. xiii. 2.
100
VOCABULARY.
[irdp-cijJLi — irapo|aiVft>
irap-6ijtii, to he near by, to he present, to
licive come; part., irapciv, present;
rh irapSv, the present time; to
■sapSvra, pi^esent things, e.g., pos-
sessions, Heb. xiii. 5.
Tap-etcr-d^w, |a, to introduce, to bring
in clandestinely, 2 Pet. ii. i.
Trap-dff-oKTos, ov, brought in clajides-
tinely, surreptitious. Gal. ii. 4.
vap-^KT-hvb}, or -vva, v(Tu>, to come in by
stealth, to enter secretly, Jude 4.
■rap-ucr-fpxo/JLai (see 103, 2), (0 to
enter clandestinely, Gal. ii. 4; (2) to
come in addition, to be sui>eradded,
Ivora. V. 20,
vap-fi(r-(p4pci}, to bnng in besides, super-
raduce, z Pet. i. 5.
Trao-eKT6s, adv., on the outside, besides;
TO irapeKTSs, things in addition.
With a gen. following, except,
Matt. V. 32.
xap-€fjL-&oXrj, Tjs, tj (^SoAAw), (i) a camp,
Heb. xiii. 11, 13; (2) soldiers^
quarters, Acts xxi. 34, 37 ; (3) the
encam]yments of Israel in the wilder-
ness, Heb. xiii. 1 1 ; (4) an army in
an-ay, Heb. xi. 34.
7rop-€i/-oxA.e«, S>, to cau^e disturbance
to, to disquiet (dat.), Acts xv. 19.
irap-€irl-^7]fji.os, ov, residing in a strange
counti-y ; as subst., a stranger,
foreigner, Heb. xi. 13.
vap-epxo/Jiai (see 103, 2), (i) to pass
by, with ace. of pei*s. or place; (2)
to pass, elapse, as time ; (3) <o pass
away, or perisJi, become nugatory;
^4) to pass from anyone ; (s) to pass
carelessly, i.e., to disregard, neglect,
transgress.
irdp-€(ri5, fws, 17 (tr^MO? passing over,
prcBter-missiwi, Rom. iii. 25. See
Synonyms.
irap-ex«, €'|«, 2nd aor., trdpeaxov (dat.
and ace), (i) to exhibit, to present,
afford, Luke vi. 29 ; Acts xxii. 2 ;
(2) to be the cause, or occasion of,
Majrt. XX vi. 10; (3) in mid., to pre-
sent, manifest, Titus iL 7; to bestow,
Cdl. iv. I.
vap-riyopia, oj, v, solace. Col. iv. 11.
wapOevia, oj, t}, virginity^ Luke ii.
36.
irapQivos, ov, 7], a virgin, a maid; so,
one who is chaste, pure, uncon-
taminated. In Rev. xiv. 4, applied
to the male sex,
TlapQos, ov, 6, a Parthian, Acts ii. 9.
irap-'njfjt.i, to pass by, ov over, to relax;
pass., perf., part., vapeifieyos, weary,
Pleb. xii. 12.
irap-iffTTjfii, or irap-KTravu (see 107)»
trans, in act., pres., imp., fut., and
ist aor., (i) to place near, or at
hand, to have in readiness, provide.
Acts xxiii. 24; (2) to present, to
offer, specially, to dedicate, conse-
crate, devote, Luke ii. 22; (3) to
cause to appear, to demonstrate.
Acts xxiv. 13. Intrans., perf.,
plup., 2nd aor., and mid., to recom-
mend, to attend, to toa.it, as for
orders, Luke xix. 24 ; to have come
(of time in Mark iv. 29), to stand
hy, i.e., for aid or support, Rom.
xvi. 2.
Uappiivus, u, d, Parmenas, Acts vi.
5-
Trdp-oSos, ov, 71, a passing by, or
through, i Cor. xvi. 7.
nrap-oiKiw, w, to dwell in {iv or els,
const, prseg.) as a stranger, Luke
xxiv. 1 8 ; Heb. xi. 9.
irap-oiKia, as, ri, a sojourning, a tem-
porary dwelling. Acts xiii. 1 7 ;
1 Pet. i. 17.
irdp-oiKos, ov, sojownfiing, temporarily
resident, Eph. ii. 19; generally as
subst.
irap-oifiia, as, v {ol/xos, a way), {i) a
common or trite saying, a proverb,
2 Pet. ii. 25 ; (2) an obscure saying,
an enigma, John xvi. 25 ; (3) a
parable, a comparative discourse,
John X. 6.
trdp-oivos, ov, given to wine, intem-
perate, I Tim. iii. 3.
irap-oixofiai, to pass auxiy, of time,
Acts xiv. 16.
Trap-opiOidCu), to resernbU, Matt, xxiii.
27.
Trap-SfjLoios, ov, similar. Matt. vii.
8,13.
irap-o^ouof, to stir up, to irritate, in
pass., Acts xviL 16; i Cor. xiii. 5.
irap-o|v(r[Ji<Js — irciG-apx^w] VOCABULARY.
101
irap-ofva-fiSs, ov, 6, {i) incitement, Heb.
X. 24 ; (2) sharp contention, Acts
XV. 39, "paroxysm."
irap-opyi^ca, lu, to provoke greatly, ex-
asperate, Eom. X. 19; Eph. vi. 4.
■jrap-opyi<Tfj.6s, ov, 6, exasperation, wrath,
Eph. iv. 26.
irap-oTpvva}, to stir up, to instigate,
Acts xiii. 50.
irap-ovaia, as, t] {^IfJ-i), (i) presence,
I Cor. xvi, 17 ; {2) a coming, an
arrival, advent, often of the second
coming of Christ.
vap-o^is, iSos, 7], a dish for food or
sauce, Matt, xxiii. 25, 26.
Tra^-pTjo-ia, as, 7}, freedom, openness,
especially in speaking, boldness,
confidence; iv TrappT](ri(} (or fierd,
gen.), boldly, openly.
irap-pr]<ndCofJLai, dep., mid., 1st aor.,
iirapp7i<na(T(ifiit]v, to speak freely,
boldly, plainly, to be confident.
Tcas, Ttacra, irav (see 37), Cbll, the
whole, every kind of. (See 224, and
for negative in phrases, 328, iii.)
Adverbial phrases are ^lairavrSs,
always; iv TTavri, iv iraaiu, in
everything ; and irdvra (ace, neut.,
plur.), altogether.
irdarxa, r6 (Heb., in Chald. form), the
paschal lamb, the passover feast;
appl. to Christ, i Cor. v. 7.
7ra<rxco {ira9-, see 94, i. 7), to be
affected with anything, good or bad ;
so, to enjoy good. Gal. iii. 4 ; more
generally, to endure suffering, Matt,
xvii. 15 ; to suffer (ace. of that
suffered, d-n-o or i/izS, gen., of persons
inflicting).
Tldrapa, dpwv, rd, Patara, Acts xxi. i.
TraTacrcw, |a>, to smite, to strike, to
smite to death, to afflict, Acts
xii. 23.
vario), w, i\<T(t), to tread, to trample on,
Luke X. 19 ; to press by treading, as
grapes, Rev. xiv. 20 ; to reduce to
entire subjection. Rev. xi, 2.
rcariip, rp6s, 6 (see 30, ii.), a fatJier,
sjwken of God as the Father of
men, Matt. v. 16, 45 ; or of the Lord
Jesus Christ, Matt. vii. 2 1 ; as the
Fii-st Person in the Trinity, Matt.
xxviii. 19 ; as the Source of mani-
fold blessings, 2 Cor. i. 3, &c.
Secondarily, (i) a remote progenitor,
the founder of a race, an elder ; (2)
a senior, a father in age, i John
ii 13, 14; (2) the author, or cause,
or source of anything, John viii. 44;
Heb. xii. 9; (4) a spiritual father,
or means of converting anyone to
Christ ; (5) one to whom resemblance
is borne.
Udrixos, ov, 7], Patmos, Eev. i, 9.
irarp-aXcfas, ov, 6, a parricide, i Tins,
i 9.
iraTptd, as, rj, a family (in O.T.,
mediate between the tribe and the
household), Luke ii. 4; Acts iii. 25 ;
Eph. iii. 15 (on which see 224).
iraTpt-dpxns, ov, 6, head, or founder of
a family, "patriarch."
TrarpiKSs, i], 6v, paternal, ancestral.
Gal. i. 14.
irarpls, Idos, 7], onels native place^
father-land. Matt. xiii. 54; Heb.
xi. 14.
UarpS^as, a, 6, Patrdbas, Rom. xvi. 14.
TraTpo-irapd-SoTos, ov, handed down, ob'
tained by tradition fror.i ancestors,
I Pet. i. 18.
iraTpr^os, a, ov, paternal, hereditary,
Acts xxii. 3, xxiv. 14.
Uav\os, ov, 6, Paid, (i) Sergius Paulus,
Acts xiii. 7 ; (2) the Apostle of the
Gentiles. (See 159, c.)
iraia, au, to cause to cease, to restrain,
I Pet. iii. I o ; generally mid. , to cease^
desist, refrain, Luke v. 4, viii. 24.
Ud<pos, ov, 7], Paphos, Acts xiii. 6.
iraxvvco (ttoxus), to fatten, to make
gross, pass. ; fig., to become gross, or
j stupid. Matt. xiii. 15.
I ire'STj, 7}s, 7], a shackle, a fetter for the
[ feet, Mark v. 4.
i Tr(:Tiiv6s, 7j, ov, level, open, Luke vL 17.
i Tre^ero) (Tre^Js) to travel on foot, or on
I land. Acts xx. 13.
I 7r€0, adv., on foot, or by land, Mark
vi. 33.
ireid-apx^f}, Si, (i) to obey a ruler, or
, one in authority. Acts v. 29, 32 ; (2)
to obey, or conform to advice. Acta
xxvii. 21.
102
VOCABULARY.
[ireiGos — "Tcp i-d-yw
T6t0os, -fi, 6y, persuasive, winning,
I Cor. ii. 4.
irfiOo}, TreiVo), to persuade ; so, to en-
deavour to convince, Acts xviii. 4;
to influence by persuasion, Matt,
xxvii. 20 ; to incite, to instigate. Acts
xiv, 29; to appease, to render tran-
quil, I John iii, 1^ ; to conciliate, to
aspire to the favour of, Gal. i. 10 ;
pass., to be confident of, to yield to
persuasion, to absent, to listen to, to
obey, to follow, Acts v. 36, 37 ; 2nd
perl, iriiToiQa, to be confident of, to
trust, to rely on, to place hope in.
Matt, xxvii. 43 ; Rom. ii. 19.
■nnvao), S), daca, inf., ireivav, (i) to be
hungry ; hence, (2) to be needy ; (3)
to desire earnestly, to long for, ace,
"to pine."
TTfTpa, as, T), trial, experiment; with
Aa/jL^dvoa, to make trial of, attempt,
Heb. xi. 29, 36.
jretpa^w, (xw, (i) to attempt, inf.; {2) to
make trial of to prove; (3) to tempt
to sin; 6 ireipdCcav, the tempter, i.e.,
the devil; (4) to put to proof, as
God by unbelief, &c.. Acts xv. 10.
ireipa(Tyi.6s, ov, 6, a trying, proving,
I Pet. iv. 12; a tempting to sin.
Matt. vi. 13 ; calamity, sore afiiic-
tion, i.e., trying us, Acts xx. 19;
man's trying God by distrust or
disobedience, Heb. iii. 8.
jreipdoi, S), only in mid., to attempt,
essay. Acts ix. 26, xxvi. 21.
TTCicr/ioi/Tj, rj?, Ti, a persuasion, a con-
viction, Gal. V. 8.
iTfKayos, ovs, t6, the sea, tlie deep).
Matt, xviii. 6.
vcXtKiCo) (ireAc/cys, an oxe), to behead.
Rev. XX. 4.
irifitTTos, "h, 6v, num. ord., the fifth.
neixirw, ^w, (i) to send, of pei'sons, to
despatch on a message, spoken of
ieacJiers, as John Baptist, John
i, 33 ; of Jesus, John iv. 34 ; of tjie
Spirit, John xiv. 26 ; of apostles,
John xiii. 20 ; (2) to send, of
things; to transmit, Rev. xi. 10;
to send among, or upon, 2 Thess.
ii. II ; to thrust in, e.g., the sickle,
Rev. xiv. 15, 18.
Trej'Tjs, 7JT0S, 6, 7}, poor, needy, 2 Cor.
ix. 9.
TTii/depd, as, ^, a mother-in-law, i.e., a
wife's mother.
■K(v6ep6s, ov, 6, a father-in-law, i.e., a
wife's father.
ireudfo}, w, -fiffo), (i) to mourn, intrans.;
(2) to grieve, trans., 2 Cor. xii. 21.
iTfvdos, ovs, t6, mourning, sorrow,
James iv. 9.
ir(vixp6s, d, 6v, poor, needy.
irevrdKis, adv. , num. , five times.
iriVTaKicr-xi^ioi, ai, a, num. , five tJioU'
sand.
ireuTaKSaioi, ai, a, num. , five hundred.
irevre, num., indecl., ^ye.
■KtvTc-Kai-SeKaTos, num., ord., fifteenth.
Trei/Tif/coj/To, num., indecl., fifty.
U^vrriKoaTi], tjj, r] (lit., fiftieth), Pen-
tecost, the feast beginning the
fiftieth day after the second day
of the Passover, i.e., from the six-
teenth da}'- of the month Nisan.
■jreTroidrta-is, etas, i], trust, confidence,
with 6ty or eV.
TTfp, an enclit. partic, cognate with
irept, only found joined to pronouns
or particles for intensity of mean-
ing, as idvirep, (lirep, if indeed;
iirelTrep, since indeed, &c. ; Kaivep,
and really ; oa-n-ep, wliosoever.
TTfpav, adv., over, on the other side,
beyond, with art. prefixed or genit.
following.
vfpas, aros, ro, a limit, the extremity,
in space, as Matt. xii. 42 ; or time,
Heb. vi. 16.
Uepyafios, ov, 7], Pergamus, or Per-
■ gamum. Rev. ii. 12.
Ufpyn, rjs, 71, a prop, name, Perga,
Acts xiii. 13.
irepl, a prep., governing the gen. and
accus. With gen., about, i.^.,
concerning or respecting a thin^;
gov. the accus., about, around, in
reference to (see 302). In com-
position, Trepi denotes round about,
on account of, above, beyond.
trepi-dyw, trans., to lead, or take about,
I Cor. ix. 5 ; intrans., to go about
(ace. , or irepl, ace. ), Acts xiii. 1 1 ;
Matt. iv. 23.
TTtpi-aipioi — Trepto-crcva)]
VOCABULARY.
103
Trepi-aipeca, u (see 103, 2), to take from
around, or eMirely aivay, lit., 2 Cor.
iii. 16; Acts xxvii. 40 ; Heb. x. 11 ;
fig., of the expiation of sin.
TrepL-aa-Tpdinoi}, to lighten around, to
Jiash around (ace. , or ircpi, aoc. ).
TrepL-^dWo), 0a\u, jSe'/SATj/ca, to cast
around (ace. and dat.), Luke xix.
43; to clothe. Matt, xxv, 36; for
const., see 284; mid., to clothe
one's self, to be clothed, Matt. vi. 29.
irepi-^KeTTO), N.T., in mid., to look
around, abs. ; to look round upon,
ace.
7r€pi-^6\aiov, ou, r6, (i) clothing, ves-
ture, Heb. i. 12 ; (2) a veil, i Cor.
xi. 15.
TTtpi-Sew, to bind round about, pass.,
pi up., John xi, 44.
TrfpL-Spefxca (see irepirpexca).
irfpL-fpyd^Ofiai, to overdo, to be a bv^y-
l>ody, 2 Thess. iii. 11.
irepi-epyos, ov, act., overdoing, inter-
meddling, 1 Tim. V. 1 3 ; pass. , over-
wrought, curious. Acts xix. 19.
TTcpi-epxofjiai (see 103, 2), to go about,
Acts xix. 13 ; Heb. xi. 37; to tack,
as a ship. Acts xxviii. 1 3.
trepi-^xo, to encompass ; so, to contain,
as a writiag. Acts xxiii. 25 ; in-
trans., to 5e contained, 1 Pet. ii. 6;
to seiae, as astonishment, Luke v. 9.
irepi-^ctiuyu/xi (see 114), to griro? oneself
around, pass., perf., part., ^ir^,
Luke xii. 35.
ireoi-dea-Ls, ews, ^, a putting around,
i.e., ornaments, i Pet. iii. 3.
TTtpi-iffT-nfii, (see 107), in intrans.
tenses of act., to stand around;
mid., to stand aloof from (ace),
2 Tim. ii. 16 ; Titus iii. 9.
irepi-Kdeapfia, aros, t6, refuse, offscour-
ing, I Cor. iv. 13.
■jrepi-KaXviTTOi), to cover round about, to
cover, as the face.
irepi-Kitfj-ai, to lie about, surround, dat.,
or irepi, acc. ; to be encompassed, or
surrounded with, acc.
Trepi-Kf(pa\cda, as, 7], a helmet, 1 Thess.
V. 8.
Tr€pi-KpaT-f)5, es, being entire master of,
Acts xxvii. 16.
Trepi-KpvTrrco, to hide entirely, Luke i. 24.
Trepi-KuK\6(a, u, to encircle, surround.
TTcpi-KafxTTU}, to shine around.
•jrept-AetTTftj, to leave; pass., to survive,
I Thess. iv. 15, 17.
ire/i-XvTTos, ov, greatly sorrowful.
TT^pL-jxevo), to await (acc), Acts i. 4.
Tre^r^, adv., 7'ound about; with art.,
circumjacent. Acts v. 1 6.
Trepi-oiKeo), u, to dwell around, to be
neighbouring to (aoc).
Trepl-oiKos, ov, neighbouring, Luke i. 58.
irepiovo-ios, ov, svperabundant, peculiar,
Titus ii. 14 (LXX.). ^
irepi-ox'h, VS, V (see Trepte'xw), a section,
or passage, of Scripture, Acts
viii. 32.
irepi-iraTeo}, cc, i]eca, to walk, to walk
about, to roam, as animals for prey;
fig., as Heb., to pass one^s life, to
conduct oneself [adv. or nom. pred.),
to live according to {iv, dat. ; koto,
acc. ).
wepi-Treipu}, to piei'ce through, transfix,
fig., I Tim. vi. JO.
TrepL-ir'nrTO}, to fall into the midst of
(dat.), as robbers, Luke x. 30; and
temptations, James i. 2.
irepi-irot4(o, w, N.T., in raid., to get for
oneself, i Tim. iii. 1 3 ; to reserve, to
Xmrchase.
irepi-TTolria-is, eas, tj, (i) an acquisition,
I Thess. V. 9 ; (2) a preservation,
Heb. X. 39 ; (3) a possession pur-
chased, Eph. i. 14; I Pet. ii. 9.
TTspi^-^yvvfii, to tear off, as garments,
Acts xvi. 22.
irept-airdo), w, "to drag around f
hence, fig., pass., to be distracted
in mind, Luke x. 40.
irepicrada, as, rj, abundance, super-
fluity ; ih irepicrffeiav, as adv.
irepi(r<revij.a, oroy, t6, more than enough,
overflowing abundance, affluence,
abundantly, 2 Cor. viii. 13, 14.
irepLcraivb}, (1) to be more than enough,
to be left over, to abound richly ; rh
Trepiffa-evov, Matt. xiv. 20, the residue;
{z} to redound to, els, 2 Cor. viii. 2 ;
pass., to be in abundance, to be
augmented. Matt. xiii. 12 ; 2 Cor.
iv. 15.
104
VOCABULARY.
[ircpwrcrcJs — ttkJttjs
irepia-aSs^ -fj, 6v, abundant, remaining
over and above; rh irepiffaov, excel-
lence, pre-eminence, Rom. iii. i ;
adv., -coi, exceedingly, vehemenily.
mpiffffoTipuis, adv., more abundantly,
more earnestly, more vehemently.
TTtpKTTfpa, as, 7], a dove, a pigeon.
TrepL-Tefivu), to cut around, to circum-
cise ; mid., to undergo circumcision,
to cause oneself to be circumcised.
irepi-Tldrjiii, to place, or put about, or
around (dat. and ace); fig., to
bestow, to attribute, i Cor. xii. 23.
vepi-To/x-f}, 7JS, ri, circuincision, i.e., the
act, the custom, or state; with art.,
tlie circumcision, i.e., the Jews; fig.,
for spiritual purity, E,ora. ii. 28, 29 ;
Col. ii. II.
irepi-Tp^TTu, to turn about, to convert to
{els) a state. Acts xxvi. 24.
trepi-i p4x<», 2nd aor. , irfpieSpa/xoif, to
run around (ace), Mark vi. 55.
irepi-<p4pM, to bear, cr carry around, to
carry about in oneself; pass., to be
agitated, Eph. iv. 14.
vepi-(j>pov€co, CO, to look down upon, to
contemn, to despise.
nepi-xopos, ov, circumjaxent ; as subst.
{t)), the country round about, the
inhabitants of such a country. Matt,
iii. 5.
Trept-if/Tjjiia, aTos, t6, scrapings, scum.
-jrepTTfpevoixa.1, dep., in trans., to vaunt,
1 Cor. xiii. 4.
Uepa-Ls, idos, r], Persi% Rom. xvi. 12.
vepviTi, adv., during the year just
passed, a year ago.
vtraonai, ufxai, or viTOfJLui, to fly, as
a bird.
'iTeriiv6v, ov, t6, a bird, a fowl; only
in plur., the birds.
ireVo/xo* (see veTaofjLai).
irerpa, as, 7], a rock, with art., the
rocky substratum of the soil, other-
wise, any large block of stone ; met.
for caverns. Rev. vL 15; fig. ,
Rom. ix. 33. See also Matt. xvi.
18.
Uirpos, ov, 6, Peter, Greek for the
Heb. (Chald.) kepha, rock. Same
with trhpa, but with the termina-
tion of a masc. name.
ireTpwdris, (s, rocky, stony. Matt,
xiii. 5 ; Mark iv. 5.
■jr-fiyauoy, ov, t6, rue, Luke xi. 42.
■rrr}yf}, rjs, r}, a fountain, source, well;
fig. of "the water of life," ajiow,
of blood, Mark v. 29.
'irfiyvuixt, 7n^|w, to fix, as a tent, Heb.
viii. 2.
Ttri^a.Xiov, iov, r6, the rudder of a ship.
Acts xxvii. 40.
TTT/Aj/coy, 7j, ov, how great, Heb. vii. 4 ;
how large, Gal. vi. 7 (see ypafifia).
TTTjA-Js, ov, b, clay, mire, mortar, John
ix. 6 ; Rom. ix. 21.
ir-Zipa, as, r}, a bag, wallet, for carrying
provisions.
irrjxvs, fas, o, a cubit, the length from
the elbow to the tip of the middle
finger.
TTLoiCco, <T(a, to lay liold of. Acts iii. 7 ;
to take, as to catch fish, or in
hunting, to arrest, John vii. 3 c.
irU^w, to press down, as in a measure,
Luke vi. 38.
inBavo-Koyia, as, rjy persuasive or plau-
sible speech. Col. ii. 4.
iriKpalvo), avu, to render bitter, lit.,
Rev. X. 9, 10; to embitter, fig.,
Col. iii. 19.
mKpla, as, t}, bitterness, fig.. Acta
viii. 23 ; Eph. iv. 31.
TTiKpSs, a, 6v, bitter, acrid, malignant,
James iii. 11, 14; adv., -us, bit-
terly, spoken of weeping, Matt,
xxvi. 75.
UiKaros, ov, 6 (oririXoTos, Lat., pikUuSf
"armed with javelin"), Pilate.
tt^/uttAtjjUi (ttAc-), see irKt^dM.
TrifnrpT]fit {irpa-), pass., inf., trlixTpourOai,
to be infiamed, to swell, Acts
xxviii. 6.
irivaKi^iov, iov, t6 (dim. of iriva^), a
tablet for writing, Luke i. 63.
Triva^, aKos, 6, a plate, platter, dish.
ttIvu, fut., Triofxai, -eaai, -frai; ])erf.,
TreVwKa; 2nd aor., %-kiov ; to drink,
abs., or with ace. of thing drunk
(sometimes ^/c or air6), to imbibe, as
the earth imbibes rain ; fig. , to
receive into tlie soul, to partake of.
Tri6Tt\s, rriTos, t], fatness, richness, as
of the olive, Rom. xi. 17.
irwrpacTKc
-itXtIV^]
VOCABULARY.
105
viirpdcTKCi} {irpa-}, perf., TreirpaKa; ist
aor. pass. , iirpiOrji/ ; perf. pass. ,
ireirpaixai ; to sell, Matt. xiii. 46 ;
pass,, with xm6, to he sold under,
to he a skive to.
iriTTTco (Trer-, see 94, i. 8, d), (1) to
fall (whence, by dirJ or 4k; whither,
by i-rri or els, ace.); hence, {2) to
fall prostrate, as of persons, to die,
to perish ; of structures, to fall in
ruins; of institutions, to fail; (3)
to fall to, as a lot ; (4) to fall into,
or under, as condemnation.
Tlicridia, as, rj, Pisidia, Acts xiv. 24.
vuTTevo} (see 74), to believe, he per-
suaded of a thing (ace. or '6ri), to
give credit to, dat. ; to have con-
fidence in, dat., els, eV, iiri (dat.) or
iiri (ace. ). Often of Christian faith,
in God, in Christ; pass., to he en-
trusted with (ace).
TriffTiKSs, {], 6v, genuine, pure, of oint-
ment, Mark xiv. 3 ; John xii. 3.
ma-TLS, (MS, 7], (i) faith, generally, as
Heb. xi. I ; 2 Thess. ii. 13 ; "faith
in" is expressed by obj. gen., by
els, ev, Trpds (ace); {z) fidelity, good
faith, Rom. iii. 3 ; 2 Tim. ■ ii. 22 ;
i-^) a pledge, a promise given, 2 Tim.
iv. 7 ; (4) met., for the whole of the
Christian character, and (generall}'-
with art.) for the Christian re-
ligion.
iriffr6s, i], 6v, (i) trustworthy, faithful,
in any relation or to any promise,
of things or (generally) persons ; (2)
helieving, abs, , as oi iriaroi, the fol-
lowers of Christ, or with dat.
irL<TT6(o, S>, only N.T., in pass., to he
assured of, 2 Tim. iii. 14.
irXavdco, cD, ija-co, to lead astray, to cause
to wander; fig., to deceive; pass.,
to he misled, to err, to mistake.
■trXdvTf], 77s, 7], wandering, fig., deceit,
delusion, error.
ir\av^T7]s, ov, 6, wandering; tt.<TT-(]p
'K\avi}rris, a wandering star, Jude 1 3
("planet").
■nXdvos, ov, causing to wander, deceit-
ful; as subst., an impostor.
■KKd^, aK6s, 7}, a tahlet, to write on,
2 Cor. iii. 3 ; Heb. ix, 4.
irXdcrfia, aros, t6, a thing formed or
fashioned, as a vessel.
irXdaaw, dcrco, to form, fashion, mould,
as a potter his clay.
TrXaarSs, 17, 6v, formed, moulded; fig.,
deceitful, 2 Pet. ii. 3.
vXareTa, as, 7) (fem. of irKarvs, hroad,
so. 686s), a wide street^ a broad
way.
irXdros, ovs, r6, breadth.
TrXarvvo}, via, to make hroad, to en-
large ; pass., fig., to he enlarged, in
mind or heart.
irKaTvs, ela, v, broad, Matt. vii. 13.
TrXeyfia, aros, r6 {irXeKco), anything
interwoven, a braiding, as of hair,
1 Tim. ii. 9.
TrAeTcTTos, 77, ov, superl. of iroXis, the
greatest, the onost, very great; rb
irXelffTov, adv., mostly, at most.
trXeioov, elov, compar. of iroXvs, more,
greater, in number — magnitude —
comparison ; ol irXeloves, ot TrXeiovs,
the more, the most, the many,
majority, 2 Cor. ii. 6 ; TrXelov or
TrXeov, as adv., more, John xxi. 15 ;
eirl irXelov, further, longer.
irXeKco, ^(a, to weave together, to plait,
Mark xv. 17.
irXeov (see in irXelav).
TrXeovd((o, aa>, intrans., to have more
than enough, to superahound; trans.,
to increase, to cause to abound.
TrXeov-eKTeca, u> (ex«), to have more
than another, to desire to have more,
so, to defraud ; pass., to he deluded,
2 Cor. ii. 1 1.
irXfov-eKr7]s, ov, 6, a covetous or
avaricious perscm, one devoted to
carnal lusts, a libertine, Eph. v. 5.
TrXeov-eiia, as, 7], covetousness, avarice,
inordinate lust, Eph, iv. 19.
■TrXevpd, as, tj, the side of the Jiuman
body, John xix. 34.
irAew (see irX7]d(i}).
TtXeco (f), impf., eTrXeov ; fut., irXeiao-
fiat ; to sail, with ace. of direction,
Acts xxvii. 2.
TrXTjyft, Tjs, 7} {7rX7}(T(TU}), a stroke, a
stripe, a wound. Acts xvi. 33 ;
Eev. xiii. 14; an affiiction. Rev,
ix. 20.
106
VOCABULARY.
[•7rXfj0o
vX^dos, ovs, t6, (i) a multitude, crowd,
throng; (2) population, Acts xiv. 4;
(3) a quantity, Acts xxviii. 3.
vXrfdvuw, vS>, (1) intrans., to increase;
(2) trans., to multiply, augment;
pass. , to he increased.
ttAtjOco (or TriixirXruii), irX-i]aw ; ist aor.
pass., iirKriad-qv, (i) to fill {with,
gen.); fig., of emotions, as Luke
iv. 28 ; or of the Holy Spirit, Acts
ii. 4; (2) pass., to he fulfilled, as
time, Luke i. 23.
TrArJ/cTTjs, ov, 6, a striker, a conten-
tious person, 1 Tim. iii. 3 ; Titus
i- 7-
TrXrujLfjLvpa, as, tj, afiood, an inundation,
Luke vi. 48.
irXi/iu, adv. (akin to 7r\eW), besides,
moreover, except; as prep, with
gen., besides, excepting.
TTA^prjy, €s, {i)full, abs., Mark iv. 28;
{z)full of (gen.), abounding in.
Tr\7ipo-(popeco, w ((pcpa), (i) to h'ing to
completion, hence, to perform per-
fectly, 2 Tim. iv. 5 ; or to bring to a
close, perh. Luke i. i ; (2) to fill
with conviction, hence, pass , to he
fully persuaded, E,om. iv. 21.
vX-npo-fpopia, as, t), fulness, entire pos-
session, full conviction or assurance.
vXripSo}, w, d!)cr(i), to fill (material, by
gen. ), to fill up, to pervade, to com-
plete, either time or number; to
bestow abundantly, to furnish libe-
rally, Phil. iv. 18 ; Eph. iii. 19 ;
to accomplish, to perform fully, as
prophecies, &c. ; pass., to be full of,
2 Oor. xdi. 4 ; Eph. v. 18; to be
made full, complete, or perfect, John
iii. 29 ; Col. iv. 12.
rrXT^pwfjLa, otos, t6, fulness, plenitude,
i.e., that which fills, '1 Cor. x.
26, 28 ; so, the full number, Kom.
xi. 25; the completion, i.e., that
which makes full. Matt. ix. 16;
the fulness of time. Gal. iv. 4, is the
com})letion of an era ; the fulness of
Chrut, Eph. i. 23, that which is
filled by Christ ; Hie fulness of the
Godhead, all Divine attributes.
nX-naiov, adv., near, near by; with
the ai-t., b vXrjffiov, a neighbour.
irXriffixoin^, ^s, t], the full satisfying,
Col. ii. 23.
irXija-a-o}, |w, 2nd aor. pass., iirXifiy-qv,
to smite, Rev. viii. 12.
irXotdpLOV, iov, t6 (dim. of irXotov), a
small boat, as the fishing boats on
the lake of Galilee.
irXolov, ov, t6, a ship, a vessel, a bark,
large or small.
irx6os, ovs, gen., ov, or 06s, navigation,
voyage. Acts xxi. 7 ; xxvii. 9.
nXovcrios, la, lov, rich, abounding in
{iv); adv., -ws, richly, abundantly.
Col. iii. 16.
nXovTcw, u, T^ffca, to become rich, to be
rich, to abound in.
irXovTi^co, to make rich, to enrich, to
cause to abound in.
ttXovtos, ov, 6 (see 32, a), riches,
wealth, abundance; spiritually, en-
richment, Rom. xi. 12.
TtXvpoo, vSi, to wash, as garments, Eev.
vii. 14 (xxii. 14).
Ttvevfj.a, arcs, t6, (i) properly, the wind,
or the air in motion, John iii. 8 ;
hence, (2) the human spirit, dist.
from arUfMa and ^vxii, 1 Thess v. 23 ;
(3) a temper or disposition of the
soul, Luke ix. 55; Rom. viii. 15;
(4) any intelligent, incorporeal being,
as (a) the human spirit, separated
from the body, the undying soul ;
{b) angels, good and bad ; (c) God,
the immaterial One, John iv. 24;
{d) THE Holy Ghost (see 217, /).
Used of the infiuence of whidi tJie
Holy Ghost is tlie author, in respect
of Jesus, Luke iv. i ; Acts x. 38,
in respect of prophets and apostles ;
and in respect of saints generally,
Eph. i. 17.
irvfVfiaTiKSs, 7f, 6v, spiritual, (1) relating
to the mind, not corporeal; (2) to
the disposition or gifts imparted by
the Holy Spirit, i Cor. ii. 13, 15;
TO vvevfiaTtKo, spiritual gifts, i Cor.
xiL I ; adv., -ws, spiritually, i.e.,
(i) mystically. Rev. xi. 8; (2) by
the aid of the Holy Spirit, i Cor.
ii. 14.
wft'co (f), fvacD, to blow, as the wind,
to breathe.
trvi-yw — ir<5|j.a]
VOCABULARY.
107
TTvlyo), to choke, to seize by the throat.
Try I KT 6s, 17, 6v, strangled.
TTj/oTj, 7]s, T), (i) breath. Acts xvii. 25;
(2) a breeze, or blast, Acts ii. 2.
iroSr^pTjy, es, reaching to the feet; as
subst., a long robe, Rev, i. 13.
Todiv, adv., interrog., whence, of place
— as, from what quarter ? Matt.
XV. 33 — from what cause; how?
Matt. xiii. 27. Indicating surprise,
admiration, &c., Luke i. 43 ; also
strong negation, Mark xii. 37.
iroia, as, 7], grass, herbage, James
iv. 14 (or fern, of ttolos, wltat!).
Ttoiica, w, r^aco, (i) to make, i.e., to
foi^m, to bring about, to cause;
spoken of religious festivals, &c. , to
observe, to celebrate; of trees and
plants, to germinate, to produce ; to
cause to be, or to become. Matt,
xxi. 13 ; to declare to be, John
viii. 53 ; to assume, Matt, xii, 33 ;
(2) to do, generally, to do, i.e.,
habitually, to perform, to execute,
to exercise, to practise, i.e., to pursue
a course of action, to be active, to
work, to spend, to pass, i.e., time,
or life, Acts xv. 33.
trolrifia, aros, r6, a thing made, work-
manship.
TToirjffis, ews, t], doing, James i. 25.
TToi-nTrjs, ov, 6, {i) a maker, doer (Rom.
ii. 13); (2) a poet. Acts xvii. 28.
TToiKiXos, 71, OV, various, of different
colours, diverse,
iroifiaivu, avS), (i) to feed a flock, Luke
xviL 7 ; hence, (2) to tend, to
nourish, cherish, Jude 12 ; of pas-
tors. Acts XX. 28 ; {i) to rule. Matt,
ii. 6 ; Rev. ii. 27.
Troiixi]v, evos, 6, (i) a shepherd; (2)
tig. , a pastor. Used of Christ and
of his ministers.
■noifxvT), Tf\s, 7], (i) a flock of sheep; (2)
a band of Christ's discijyles.
TToifxviov, iov, t6 (dim. of Troifj.v7}), (1) a
little flock; (3) Christ's flock, i.e.,
discipl&i.
volos, TToia, iro7ov, a correl. pron. cor-
responding with ohs and ro7os,
wliat ? of what kind, sort, species ?
wfuzt one ? which ?
I 7rti\ejuew, £, 7](T(i3, to make war, to con-
tend (/JLerd, gen.), to quarrel.
TrShe/jLos, ov, b, (1) war, a .war ; (2) a
battle; (3) strife.
7t6Kis, eojy, t], a city, a availed town;
met., the inhabitants of a city ; with
art. , the city Jerusalem, the heavenly
city, of 'which Jerusalem was a
symbol.
7ro\iT-a.pxy\s, ov, 6, the ruler of a city,
a city magistrate, ' ' politarch, " Acts
xvii. 6, 8.
TToKiTcia, as,' 71, (i) citizenship. Acts
xxii. 28 ; (2) a state, or common-
wealth, Eph. ii. 12.
TToXirev/jLa, aros, r6, a community, as
of a city, a commonwealth, Phil,
iii. 20.
TToXiTfia), in mid., to be a citizen;
hence, to live, i.e., to order one's
life. Acts xxiii. i ; Phil. i. 27.
iroAiTTjj, ov, 6, a citizen, an inhabitant
of a city. Acts xxi. 39; with gen.,
aiiTov, a fellow- citizen.
TToXkcLKis, adv., many times, often.
TToWa-irXaaiwv, ov, gen., ovos, mani-
fold, many times more.
7ro\v-Aoyia, as, % much speaking,
loquacity. Matt. vi. 7.
iroXv-fiepccs, adv., in many parts, in
manifold ways, Heb. i. 1.
ttoXv-ttoIkiXos, ov, very varied, mani-
fold, Eph. iii. 10.
TToKvs, TtoKKT], TToKv (sec 39, 2), mary^
numerous; ttoKv, much, greatly, as
adv. ; TToWoi, many, often with par-
titive genitive, or e/c ; 01 iroAAoi, the
many (see 227); ttoAAo, in like
manner, Tnuch, very much, ofttn,
many times; 7roAA<j5, by much, joined
with comparatives; in\ ttoAv, for
a great while. Acts xxviii. 6 ; iv
TToWco, altogether. Acts xxvi. 29.
7ro\v-<nr\ayxvos, ov, very compassionate,
of great mei'cy, James v. 1 1.
TToXv-reXris, 4s, very costly, Mark xiv. 3 ;
very precious, i Pet. iii. 4.
TroXv-Tifios, ov, 6, 7], of great value,
very costly, John xii. 3.
iroXv-TpoTTws, adv., in variouB ways,
! Heb. i. i.
I vojxa, aros, t6, drink.
108
VOCABULARY.
[irovT]pia — irpdKTup
vovnpla, as, ii, evil disposition, wicked-
ness; plur., malignant passions,
iniquities.
irovT]p6s, a, 6v (7r<Jj/os), evil, had, of
things or persons; wicked, depraved,
spec, malignant, opp. to h.'ya.96% (see
Synonyms); b iroyrjpSs, the Wicked
One, i.e., Satan; rh Tropnp6v, evil.
Tr6vo^, ov, 6, {i) labour; (2) in Kev,,
sorrow, anguish.
UoptikSs, ij, 6v, belonging to Pontus,
Acts xviii. 2.
Il6vTios, [ov, 6, Pontius, the prseuomen
of Pilate.
USi/Tos, OV, 6, Pontus, Acts ii. 9 ;
I Pet. i. I.
TISttXios, ov, 6, PvhliuSf Acts xxviii. 7.
Tcopda, as, 7], a way, a journey, Luke
xiiL 22; way OT course of life, J amea
i. II.
vopevofxai, (Tofiai, dep., with pass, aor.,
diropeve-nu, to go, to go away, to
. depart, to journey, to travel, often
(as Heb. ) to take a course in life.
rrupOew, rjau, to lay waste, harass, per-
secute. Acts ix. 21 ; Gal. i. 13, 23.
iropi(T/M6s, ov, 6, gain, i Tim. vi. 5, 6.
UopKios, ov, 6, Porcius, the praenomen
of Festus.
wopveia, as, rj, fornication, lewdness;
iig. in llev., idolatry,
iropveiju), (TO), to commit fomicaiion ;
fig. in Rev., to worship idols.
v6pv'n, Vh V> o> harlot, a prostitute;
fig. in Rev., an idolatrous com-
munity.
vSpyos, ov, 6, one who prostitutes him-
self, an impure person.
v6^p<a, adv., far, far off; comp. •jto/J-
pwrepci) or -repov.
ifdpfxaQfv, adv., further, from afar, far
off, Luke xvii. 12.
vop<pvpa, as, 7], a purple or crimson
garment, indicating wealth or rank.
Luke xvi. 19; Mark xv. 17, 20.
vop<pvoeos, ovs, S, ovv, purple or crim-
son, John xix. 2, 5.
vop<pvp6-ir(D\is, (US, T], a seller of purple
or crimson cloth. Acts xvi. 14,
voffdKis, adv., interrog., how muny
times ? how often ?
v6(Tis, ews, T}, drink. i
vSffos, 7], ov, how much, how great ;
-aSffCf), as adv. with comparatives,
by how much; plur., Jiow many.
iroTafM6s, ov, 6, a river, torrent, food.
iroTaiu.o-(p6pr]Tos, ov, carried away by d
flood.
TTOTairos, 17, 6v, of what kind ? of what
manner ? how great !
irSre, adv., interrog., when? at what
time? till when? how long? vore,
enclitic, at some time, at one time or
otlier (see 129).
■7r6Tfpov, prop. neut. of TrSrepos, wJiether,
correlating with f}, or.
iroTT^piov, iov, t6, a drinking-cup, the
contents of the cup ; fig., the portion
which God allots, whether of good
or ill, commonly of the latter.
irori^u, (Tw, to cause to drink (two
aces.); to give drink to (ace); fig.,
to minister to, generally, i Cor.
iii. 2 ; to water, or irrigate, as
plants, &c., I Cor. iii. 6-8.
XloTtoA-ot, uiv, ol, Puteoli, Acts xxviii.
'3.
ttStos, ov, 6 (see irlvu), a drinking bout,
di-unkenness, 1 Pet. iv. 3.
TTov, adv., interrog., where? whitJier ?
Matt. ii. 4; John vii. 35.
TToy, enclitic, an indef. particle of
place or degree, somewhere, some-
where about, Heb. ii. 6 ; Rom.
iv. 19 (see 129).
Tiovhris, hivros, b, Pud ens, 2 Tim.
iv. 21.
irov$, 1:650$, b, the foot ; met., for the
person journeying, Luke i. 79 ; virh
Tovs -jrdSas, under the feet, i.e., en-
tirely subdued, as Rom. xvi. 20.
trpa-yixa, aros, r6, a thing done, a fact,
a thing, a business, a suit, as at law.
vpayimTiia, os, ^, a business^ an affair^
2 Tim. ii. 4.
irpayfiaTevofiai, co/iai, dep., to transact
business, to trade, Luke xix. 13.
TTpaiTwpioy, iov, t6 (from Lat. , praitor)^
a court-house, a judgment-hall. Matt,
xxvii. 27 ; the quarters of the p/rcs-
torian army in Rome, Phtil. i. 1 3.
vpiKTup, opos, b, an officer employed
to execute judicial sentences, Luke
xiL 58.
irpalis — TTpo-SiStojxi]
VOCABULARY.
109
irpa^is, ews, r), (i) action, mode of
action, plur., deeds, "acts;" (2)
function, Rom. xii. 4.
irp^os, a, OP, and irpavs, ela, v (see 39),
meek, mild, kind, benevolent. Matt.
V. 5, xii. 29.
TTpa6r7)s, or -ai/TTjs, ttjtos, t], meehiess,
clemency, i Cor. iv. 21 ; benevolence,
2 Cor. X. I.
irpanla, as, rj, a company formed into
square, Mark vi. 40. Por constr.,
see 242.
Trpdaroru, or -tt&> (Acts xvii. 7), |«, pf.,
neirpaxa, iriirpayfiai, (i) to do, per-
form, accomplish, with ace. ; (2) to
be in any condition, i.e., to fare.
Acts XV. 29; Eph. vi. 21; (3) to
exact, to require, e.g., money lent,
or tribute, Luke iii. 13; xix. 23.
irpavs, -vTt]s (see irpS-os, -6t7]s).
TT/jeVet, impers. (see 101), it becomes,
it is fitting to, dat.
irpea-^eia, as, 7}, an embassy, ambas-
sadors.
irpeaBevu, aco (lit., to be aged, elder
men being chosen for the office), to
act as ambassador, 2 Cor. v. 20.
Trpea-^vTfpLou, iov, to, an assembly of
elders, the Sanhedrim, Luke xxii.
66 ; officers of the church assembled,
I Tim. iv. 14.
irpiaBvrepos, repa, repov (compar. of
Trpea^vs, old), elder, (i) in age,
Acts ii. 17 ; i Tim. v. i ; plur.,
often, ancestors, as Heb. xi. 2 ; (2)
in dignity and office, whether of the
Jewish community (Matt. xvi. 21);
or the Christian (Acts xx. 17),
" Presbyter."
■jrpea^vTTjs, ov, 6, an old man, Luke
i. 18.
irp«T&vTi5, idos, 7], an aged woman,
Titus ii. 3 .
vprjvfjs, es, prone, falling headlong.
Acts i. 18.
irpi^co, or TTpicj, ist aor. pass., ^irpiTSriv,
to saw, to kaw asunder, Heb. xi. 37.
TTpiv, adv., of time, before, as conj, in
N.T,, with or without ^, sooner
than; generally with ace. and inf.,
also with subj. aor. (as fut. perf.),
Lulie ii 26 ; opt. in Act3 xxv. 16.
lipiaKa, rjs, tj, and dim. npta-«iAAa, as,
a prop, name, Prisca, or Priscilla.
irpS, prep., gov. the gen., before, i.e.,
of place, time, or superiority (see
294). In composition, it retains
the same meaning.
TTpo-dyco, to go before, to lead the way,
to precede, in place. Matt. ii. 9 ; in
time, Mark vi. 45; part., irpodywv,
preceding, jirevious, 1 Tim. i. 18;
Heb. vii. 18.
irpo-aipeca, «, N.T., in mid., to pi'opose
to oneself, resolve, 2 Cor. ix. 7.
irpo-aiTidofjLai, wfiai, to allege, or prove
beforehand, Rom. iii. 9.
irpo-aKovb), to hear before. Col. i. 5.
irpo-afiapTavco, to sin before, 2 Cor.
xii. 21, xiii. 2.
TTpo-avKiov, ov, t6, the court before a
building, tJie vestibule, Mark xiv. 68.
TTpo-^aivca, to go forward. Matt. iv. 21 ;
pf. part., nrpoQefirjKd^s, advanced in
life, Luke i. 7.
irpo-BdXXoa, to put forth, as trees their
leaves, Luke xxi. 30 ; to thrust for-
ward. Acts xix. 33.
irpo^aTiKSs, % 6v, pertaining to sheep,
John V. 2.
Trp6$arov, ov, t6 {-npo^alva)), a sheep;
fig., a follower of Christ.
irpo-^ifidQa, au, to put forward, Acts
xix, 3 3 ; to instigate. Matt. xiv. 8.
irpo-^xdwca, N.T., in mid., to provide,
Heb. xi. 40.
irpo-ylvofxai, to be, or be done before,
Rom. iii. 25.
irpo-yiv'JxTKw, to know beforeliand. Acta
xxvi. 5 ; of the Divine foreknow-
ledge, Rom. viii. 29 ; i Pet. i. 20.
rrpS-yvwais, ecos, 7], foreknowledge, Acts
ii. 23 ; I Pet. i. 2.
Tcpii-youos, ou, 6, a progenitor, plur.,
ancestors, i Tim. v. 4 ; 2 Tim. i. 3.
Trpo-ypdipo}, \p(a, to write before, in time,
Eph. iii. 3 ; to write up, exhibii
before any one. Gal. iii. i ; to pre-
ordain, Jude 4.
vpo-lTjXos, ov, manifest to all, con-
spicuous.
TTpo-diSafii, (i) to give before, Rom,
xi. 35; {2) to betray. See following
word.
110
VOCABULARY.
[irpo-8(5Ti]s — irpos
irpo-BoTTjs, ov, 6, a betrayer, Lxike
vi. i6; Acts vii, 52; 2 Tim.
iii. 4.
itp6-dpoiJ.os, ov, 6, i] (see Trporpexaj),
a precursor, forerunnei', Heb. vi.
20.
irpo-etSor, 2nd aor. of nrpoopau}.
-irpo-elirov, 2nd aor. of Trp6(pr]fii, perf.,
TrpoeipTjKO.
•jrpo-eATriXco, to hope before, Eph. i. 12.
irpo-€u-dpxoiJ.ai, to begin be/ore, 2 Cor.
viii. 6, 10.
Trpo-iTT-ayyfKXo), in mid., to promise
before, Eom. i. 2.
irpo-4pxoiJ.ai (see 103. 2), (i) to go
forward, advance; (2) to go befwe,
precede, in time or place (gen. or
ace. ) .
Trpo-eroifidCco, (ra), to appoint before-
hand, to predestine, E,om. ix. 23.
■n-po-ev-ayyeAl^ofiai, to foretell glad
tidings. Gal. iii. 8.
irpo-e'xw, in mid., to hold before one-
self to be superior, Rom. iii. 9
(see 358). ^
7rp()-7j7€o/xat, ovytiot, to take the lead, to
lead onward by example, Rom.
xii. 10.
vp6-Q€(Tis, ecus, 1) {rLe-f]/xi), (i) a setting
before ; ol &pToi rrjs irpodeaews, the
loaves of the presentation, or th^
show bread, compare Heb. ix. 2 ; (2)
a 2^^^dete)vnination, purpose. Acta
xi. 23.
TTpo-Oeafnos, ia, tov, set beforehand,
ajypointed before. Gal. iv. 2.
irpo-dufjLia, as, t], alacrity, willingness.
rrp6-dvfji.os, ov, predisposed, ready,
willing. Matt. xxvi. 41 ; rb ■jrp6-
dvfiov, alacrity, Horn. i. 15; adv.,
-us, readily, with alacrity^ 1 Pet.
V. 2.
vpo-ta-Tijfii, act., 2nd aor. and perf.,
and mid., (i) to preside over, to
govern, gen. ; (2) to care for, prac-
ti.se, gen. , Titus iii. 8.
irpo-KoAeoj, w, in mid., to ^jrovo^e,
stimulate. Gal. v. 26.
7rpo-/caT-o77cAAa), to announce before-
hand, to promise.
Trpo-KUT-apTlCw, to make ready before-
hand.
iTp6-Kfi/xai, to lie, or be placed before, to
be proposed, as duty, example, re-
ward, &c., Heb. vi. 18; to be at
hand, to be present, 2 Cor. viii. 12.
irpn-ia]pv(r<ra}, |a>, to announce, or preach
beforehand. Acts iii. 20.
irpo-Koin^, 77s, rj, urging forward, fur'
therance, advance, Phil. i. 12, 25.
irpo-KSTTTC}, to make progress in (dat. or
iv); to advance to (ivl, ace); of
time, Rom. xiii. 12; to be advanced,
or far spent.
irpd-Kpifia, aros, t6, a forejudging, pre-
judice, I Tim, V. 21.
irpo-Kupoo), w, to establish, or ratify
before. Gal. iii. 17.
irpo-XafjL^dvci), to take before, anticipate;
pass., to be ovei'taken, or caught.
Gal. vi. I.
7rpo-A€7a), to tell beforehand, forewarn.
Trpo-fjLapTvpoiJLai, to testify beforeJiand, to
predict, 1 Pet. i. 11.
vpo-fieXerda, w, to care for beforehand,
to jrremeditate, JjVLke xxi. 14.
irpo-fiepifxvda), St, to be anxious, or
solicitous beforehand, Mark xiii. 11.
irpo-voiu, S), to perceive beforehand, to
provide for, gen. ; in mid. , to pro-
vide for oneself, to practise, ace.
irpS-voia, as, i], providence. Acts xxiv. 3 ;
care for (gen.), Rom. xiii. 14.
TTpo-opdo), u), 2nd aor., vpoelSov, to see
beforeJiand, Actsxxi. 29; Gal. iii. 8;
mid., to have befoi'e one's eyes. Acts
ii. 2<; (LXX.).
7rpo-opiC«j io predetermine, to pre-
ordain. Acts iv. 28 ; Rom. viii. 29 ;
I Cor. ii. 7 ; Eph. i. 5, 11.
TTpo-Trdcxw, to suffer beforehand, 1 Thess.
ii. 2.
irpo-irifx-KO), to send forward, to accom-
pany, to bring one on his way.
irpo-TreTi^s, e'j {Triirra)), precipitate, head-
long, rash,
irpo-iropevoixai, aofxai, in mid., to pre-
cede, to pass on before (gen.), Luke
i. 76.
vpSs (see 307), prep., gov. gen., dat,
and accus. cases, general signif.,
towards. In composition, it de-
notes motion, direction, reference,
nearness, addition.
irpo-o-aPparov — Trpo(r-Kvv6«] VOCABULARY.
in
vpo-ad^PaTov, ov, t6, the day before the
Sabbath, Mark xv. 42.
vpoa-ayopevaf, to address by name, to
designate, Heb. v. 10.
vpoff-dyot, (i) trans., to bring to, to
bring near ; (2) in trans., to come to,
or toivards, to approach.
vpoa-ayuyi], ^s, 7), approach, access,
Kom. V. 2 J Eph. ii. 18, iii. iz {ds,
irpSs, acc).
irpofr-aireco, Si, to beg, to ask earnestly.
irpoff-a'iTijs, ov, 6, a beggar, a mendicant.
irpoff-ava-^aivo), to go up to (a more
honourable place), Luke xiv. 1 o.
TTpoff-avaKiffKu, to consume over and
above, to spend further.
vpo(r-ava-ir\r]p6(a, u, to f II up by adding
to, to supply abundantly (acc).
vpo<T-ava-Ti6r]fxi, to lay up over and
above; in mid., (i) to communicate,
or impart in addition (acc. and
dat.), Gal. ii. i ; (2) to confer with
(dat.), Gal. i. 16.
irpo(r-a7reiAc&j, So, to utter additional
threats, Acts iv. 21.
irpoff-Sairavdo}, So, "fiau, to expend besides,
Luke X. 35.
irpo(T-5€o/Mai, to want more, to stand in
need of {gen.), Acts xvii. 25.
trpoa-Sexof^aL, dep. mid., (i) to receive to
one^s company; (2) to admit, allow,
tolerate (with oh, to reject, Heb.
xi. 35 ; (3) to await, to expect (acc).
irpo(T-5oKda, So, to look for, expect, an-
ticipate, whether with hope or fear.
ir/jo(r-8»Kia, as, t], a looking for, ex-
pectation, anticipation.
Trpo(r-€da>, a>, to permit, or suffer furtJier,
Acts xxvii. 7.
Trpocr-eyyiCco, to approach, to come near
to (dat. ), Mark ii. 4.
vpoa-eSpivoo, to wait upon, to minister
to, dat., I Cor. ix. 13.
irpocr-epydCofjLai, dep. mid., to gain by
labour in addition, Luke xix. 16.
vpoa-4pxop.ai (see 103, 2), (i) gene-
rally, to come, or to go to, abs., or
dat. of place or person, to visit, to
liuve intercourse with; (2) specially,
to approach, to draw near to, God
or Christ, Heb. vii.. 25 ; (3) to
assent to, concur in, i Tim. vi. 3.
irpoar-euxf), rjs, V, (0 prayer to God;
(2) a place where prayer is offered^
an oratory, "proseucha," Acts xvi.
13. 16.
vpu<r-evxo(xai, dep. mid., to pray to
God, to offer prayer, to pray for
(acc. of thing, {nr4p or irepl, of
person, 'Iva (inrcos), of object, occa-
sionally inf.).
Trpoff-exw, to apply, with vovv ex-
pressed or understood, to apply the
mind, to attend to, dat., with aw^,
to beivare of, also inf. with fi-fi.
7rpo(T-rjX6co, So, to affix with lUlUs, Col
ii. 14.
irpoa-iiXDTQS, ort, 6, rj {epxofjiai), a "pro-
selyte," a convert to Judaism.
■irpSff-Kaipos, ov, temporary, transient.
vpoff-KaKeto, w, N.T., mid., to call to
oneself, to call for, to summon ; fig. ,
to call to an office, to call to the
Christian fa ith.
irpo(r-KapT(peoo, So, to persevere in, to
continue stedfast in, dat.
iTpo(r-KapTepit](Tis, ecus, r}, perseverance,
Eph. vi. 18.
irpo(T-Ke(pd\aiou, ov, a cushion for the
head, a pillow, Mark iv. 58.
vpocr-KXrjpoio, So, to adjoin by lot, or
choice; pass., to consort with, dat.,
Acts xvii. 4.
vpSff-KXiffis, fcos, 7] (kXiuco), a leaning
towards, partiality, i Tim. v. 21.
irpoff-KoKXdo}, So, 7\(to), to join oneself to
(dat.), as a companion, Acts v. 36;
to cleave to {irpds^ acc), as a hu?
band. Matt. xix. 5.
irpSa-Kofx/xa, ros, to, a stumbling-block,
an occasion of falling, a cause of
sinning, E,om. xiv. 13.
irpocr-KoirT], rjy, t], offence, an occasion of
offence, or stumbling, 2 Cor. vi. 3.
irpoff-Koirrw, to strike the foot against,
so, to stumble, to take offence,
I Pet. ii. 8.
irpoff-KvXiw, to roll to, or upon {iiri, .
acc), Matt, xxvii. 60; Mark xv.
46.
Trpoar-Kweo}, to bow down, or to pros-
trate oneself to, to worship, God or
inferior beings, to adore (dat. or
acc). See Synonyms.
112
VOCABULARY . [irpocr-KvvqT^s — •Trpo-4>^p»
'irfHKT-Kvvt]TT]s, ov, 6, tt worsIiippeT, John
iv. 23.
irpoa-'KaXiu, 5>, to speak to, to converse
with, Acts xiii. 43.
irpoff-\a/j.pduco, N, T., mid., to take
to oneself, i.e., food, companions,
to receive to fellowship, Rom.
xiv. I.
Trp6a-\7)il/is, €0)5, 7), an assuming, a,
taking to oneself, a reception, E,om.
xi. 15.
TTpoff-fieva, to continue with or in, to
adhere to (dat.), to stay in (iv) a
place.
'po<r-opiJ,iC(i) [Spfios), to come to anchor,
to draw to shore.
Kpo(j-o(pii\<a, to owe besides, or in ad-
dition, Philem, 19.
Trpotr-ox^tf" (oX^f''*')> io he grieved, or
offended with (dat.), Heb. iii 10, 17
(LXX.).
•KpSff-ireLvos, ov (Treiva), very hungry),
irpoa-irfryvvfxi, to affix, to fasten, applied
to Christ's beiug fastened to the
cross, Acts ii. 23.
■jrpo(r-vi'jrTa), (i) to fall doivn before
(dat. or vp6s, ace); (2) to rush
against (dat.). Matt. vii. 25.
vpoff-voifU), w, in mid., to fashion one's
self to; hence, to pretend (inf.),
Luke xxiv. 28.
vpoff-iropeiofMi, to come to, approach
(dat.).
TrpoT-priyvvfii, to dash against, as waves,
Luke vi. 48.
irpo(r-rd(Taa), |(», abs. or ace, and inf.,
to enjoin (ace.) upon (dat.); pass.,
perf., part., constituted.
vpo-ffTdTis, L^os, 7], a patroness, Rom.
xvi. 2.
vpoff-rierifit, to place near, or by the
side of to add to (dat. or ini, dat.
or ace); mid., with inf., to go on
to do a thing, i.e., to do again,
Acts xii. 3 ; Luke xix. 11. So ist
aor., pass., part., Luke xix. 11 (see
399, d).
vpo(T-Tp4x<^, 2nd aor., irpoaeSpafiov, to
run to, Mark x. 1 7.
vpo(T-(pd'ywv, ov, r6, anything eaten
with bread, as fish, meat, &c.,
John XXL 5.
Trp6-a<paros, ov (from a-(pd(<a, to slaugh-
ter, "just slain"), recent, new, Heb.
X. 20. The allusion is sacrificiaL
Adv., -ws, recently, Acts xviii 2.
irpoa-<p4p(o, to bring to, dat. ; to offer,
to present, as money, Acts viii. 18 ;
specially, to offer sacrifice; mid., to
bear oneself towards, to deal with,
Heb. xii. 7.
irpo(T-<pi.\i\s, €s, friendly, amiable, PhiL
iv. 8.
irpoff-ipopd, as, 7], an offering, a sacri-
fice, an oblation.
tr po(T-<pu)v4w, w, to call to (dat.), to cry
aloud, to call to oneself (SiCC.).
Trp6<T-xu<ns, iws, 7] {x^oi), an affasion, a
sprinkling, Heb. xi. 28.
irpoff-T^ava>, to touch lightly, Luke
xi. 46.
vpo<rwTro-X.r]VT€w, w, to accept the person
I of any one, to show partiality, James
ii. 9.
I 'irpo(Tamo-\'i]irr7)s, ov, 6, a respecter of
persons, a partial one. Acts x. 34,
Trpoa-uTTo-TiTirpla, as, 7], respect of per-
sons, partiality.
7rp6(Tciyirov, ov, t6 {&^), (i) t?ie face,
the countenance; in antithesis with
KapBia, mere appearance; (z) t/ie sur-
face, as of the earth, Luke xxi. 35;
of the heaven, Matt. xvL 3.
Trpo-rdaffci}, |w, to apjJoint before. Acts
xvii. 26.
TTpo-Tflvo}, to stretch out, as one bound
for castigation, Acts xxii. 25.
vpSrepos, epa, epov (comparative of
7Tp6), former, Eph. iv. 22 ; t6 irpd-
T€pov, as adv., before, formerly.
irpo-Tie7jfii, N.T., mid., (\) to set forth,
Rom. lii. 25 ; ^0 purpose, to deMgn
beforelmnd, Rom. i. 12.
irpo-rpeirw, in mid., to exhort, Acta
xviii. 27.
7rpo-Tplx<^, 2nd aor., rpoeSpa/jLov, to run
before.
irpo-ihrdpxo, to be formerly, with
particip., Luke xxiii. 12; Acts
viii. 9.
TrpS-Kjxuris, 60)?, 7], a pretext, an excuse;
dat., adverbially, in appearance,
pretence.
Koo<f>fp{t>, to bring forUi, Luke vL a*?. .
irp<5-4)T) |ii — in>KV<$s]
VOCABULARY.
113
•Kp6-(priixi, perf., irpoeipijKa ; 2nd aor.,
irpoe7TTov; to say before, i.e., at an
earlier time, Gal. i. 9 ; in an earlier
part of the discourse, 2 Cor. vii. 3 ;
or prophetically, Mark xiii. 23.
Trpo-cpTiTcia, as, r/, ( i) the gift of pro-
phecy ; (2) the exercise of the gift.
So piur., prophecies.
vpo-^riTivo), acD, to be a prophet, to
prophesy, to foretell, to forth-tell, or
speak of Divine things ; of false
prophets, Matt. vii. 22 ; to divine,
used in mockery, Matt, xxvi 68.
vpo-<p-nTr]s, ov, 6, (i) a prophet, a
teacher inspired and sent by God :
plur., the prophetic books of the
0. T. ; (2) a poet, a minstrel, Titus
i. 12.
'irpo-<f}'nTiK6s, i], 6v, prophetic, uttered by
prophets,
irpo-<l>riris, ihos, rj, a prophetess, Luke
ii. 36 ; used of a pretended pro-
phetess. Rev. ii. 20.
■jrpo-<p6dva), to anticipate, to be before-
hand, with particip., Matt. xvii. 25.
vpo-x^tpiCop-ai, to appoint, to choose, to
destine, Acts xxii. 14, xxvi. 16.
rcpo-x^ipo-Tovi(a, w, to fore-appoint, to
choose beforehand, Acts x. 41.
Up6xopos, ov, 6, Prochdrus, Acts vi. 5.
irpvfjiva, as, rj, the hindmost part of a
ship, the stern. Acts xxviL 41.
-irpccfi, adv., the very early morning, the
dawn.
irpcoifios, Tj, ov, early, of the early rain,
James v. 7.
irp(A)'iv6s, adj., belonging to the morning,
of the morning star, Rev. ii. 28.
Trpu'tos, ia, ov, of the morning, fern.
i&pa). Matt, xxvii. i.
irpdcpa, as, r], the forward part of a
ship, the prow, Acts xxvii. 4 r.
irpuTevco, to have pre-eminence, to be
chief, Col. i. 18.
irpooTo-Kad-eSpia, as, t], a chief OT upper-
most seat.
TTpoDTo-KXiaia, as, rj, the chief place at a
banquet.
TTpcoTos, 71, ov (superlative of irpS), first,
in place, time, or order; Trparov, as
adverb, frst, Mark iv. 28 ; rh
vpuToVf at tJie first, John x. 4c.
irpwro-ardTTjs, ov, 6, a leader, a ring'
leader. Acts xxiv. 5.
nptoTo-TSKia, iav, rd, the rights of the
first-born, the birthright, Heb. xii. 16.
■Kpu)r6-roKos, ov, first-bom, chief; 6 rcpoo-
tStokos, specially a title of Christ.
Plur., the first-born, Heb. xii. 23,
of saints who died before Christ's
coming.
irraiw, ato, intrans. , to stumble, to fall^
to err, Rom. xL 1 1 ; James iii. 2.
■Ktepva, as, t], the heel, John xiii. 1 8.
TTTepv-yiov, ov, to (dim. iTTepul), tJie
extremity, as a battlement, or para-
pet. Matt. iv. 5.
inepu^, vyos, 7], awing, a pinion.
TrTTjvos, 7], 6v {ireToixai), winged, ri
TTTTjvd, birds, fowls.
TTTOfco, S), in pass., to be alarmed,
1 Pet. iii. 6.
7rT(^7?(ris, €«s, 7), consternation, i Pet.
iii. 6.
UToKefiats, iSos, 7], Ptolemais, Acts
xxi. 7.
iTTvov, ov, t6, a fan, a winnowing-
shovel. Matt. iii. 12.
TTTvpo), in pass., to be in constemationy
Phil. i. 28.
TTTva-fxa, arus, t6, spittle, saliva, John
ix. 6.
TTTixrara, |c«j, to fold, to roll up^ as a
scroll, Luke iv. 20.
irTvco, (Tw, to spit, John ix. 6.
TTTooixa, aros, r6 (tt/tttw), a body fallen
in death, a carcase. Matt. xxiv. 28.
TTToxris, €ws, 7], u fall, lit. or fig. , Matt.
vii. 27 ; Luke ii. 34.
irTw;^eia, as, ^, poverty, want.
TTTwx^vw, aw, to be in poverty, 2 Cor.
viii. 9. ,
TTTwxos, if, 6v, reduced to beggary, poor,
destitute, spiritually poor, in a good
sense, Matt. v. 3 ; in a bad sense,
Rev. iii. 17. See Synonyms.
Trvyp.il, 71$, 7] (irul), the fist.
UvOwv, wvos, 6, Python, a divining
demon; called after a name of the
heathen deity Apollo, Acts xvi. 16.
7rvKv6s, i), 6v, frequent, i Tim. v. 23 ;
neut. plur. , TrvKvd, as adverb, often,
Luke V. 33 ; so irvKvoT^pov,
frequently, Acts xxiv. 26.
114
VOCABUI^RY.
[irvKTcvo) — ^'Paiia
irvKTtvoa (irv|), to hox, strike, i Cor.
ix. 26.
vvXt), Tfjs, 1], a door or gate; irvAat
aSov, the gates of Hade^, i.e., the
powers of the unseen world, Matt.
xvi. 18.
wKwv, avos, 6, the entrance to a house,
Acts X. 17; a gateway, . porch,
Matt. xxvi. 71.
rvvBdvofiai, 2nd aor., iirvdofiriv, (i) to
ask, to enquire (interrog. particle,
with indie, or opt., or ace. ; from
by irapd) ; (2) to ascertain by enquiry.
Acts xxiii. ';4.
vvp, TTvpSs, t6, fire generally : of the
heat of the sun. Rev. xvi. 8; of light-
ning, Luke ix. 54 ; God is so called,
Heb. xii. 29 ; fig. for strife, Luke
xii. 49; trials, 1 Cor. iii. 13. So
the infernal fire, or future punish-
ment, Matt, xviii. 8. In Heb. x. 27,
trvphs (ijXos stands for ardour, vehe-
mence.
wpd, OS, ff, a heap of fuel burning,
Acts xxviii. 2, 3.
rvpyos, ov, 6, a tower, a lofty building,
a fortress (comp. burgh).
iripirccTw, to be sick of a fever, Matt,
viii. 14.
irvperSs, ov, 6, a fever.
vvpivus, 7j, ov, fiei'y, glittering. Rev.
ix. 17.
irvp6(i), «, N.T. pass., to be set on fire,
to bum, to be inflamed, to glow with
heat, as metal in a furnace, to be
tried with fire.
7rv^^d(w, to be fire-coloured, to be red,
Matt. xvi. 2.
irvppSs, d, 6v, fiery-red, fire-coloured,
Rev. vi. 4.
vipooffts, eus, r}, a burning, a confla-
gration. Rev. xviii. 9, 18 ; stvei'e
trial, as by fire, i Pet. iv. 1 2.
voo, an enclitic particle, even, yet,
used only in composition, fM-niro},
/UTjScVo), &c.
ira>\4», £>, iiau, to seU, to trade, Matt.
xxi. 12.
vwXos, ov, 6, a youngling, a foal, or
colt, as Matt. xxL 2.
ira-TOTf, adv. , used only after a nega-
tive, not yet even, not ai any time.
vwpSu, w, ffw, to harden, to render
cullous, fig.
vdpwais, «a>s, rj, hardness, of heart,
callousness.
TTus, an enclitic particle, in a manner,
by any means.
vus, adv., interrog., how? in what
manner ? by what means ? Also
in exclamations, as Luke xii. 50;
John xi. 36 ; with subj. or opt.
{dv), implying a strong negative,
Matt. xxvi. 54; Acts viii. 31.
Often (N.T.) in indirect interro-
gations (classical, oTroas) Matt. vi.
28, &c.
P.
P, p, ftu>, rho, r, and as an initial,
p, rh, the seventeenth letter. As
a numeral, p' = 100 ; fi= 100,000.
'Pa<£)8, or 'Vaxd&, rj (Heb.), Bahab.
'Pa$^l, 6 (Heb.), "Rabbi," my master,
a title of respect in Jewish schools
of learning.
pafi^ovi, or ^aMowl, 6 (Heb.), like
pafffil, but of higher honour, my
great master.
fiafiSiCo, iffco, to scourge, to beat with
rods, Acts xvi. 22 ; 2 Cor. xi. 2 5.
pdfiSos, ov, 7), a wand, rod, staff. Rev.
xi. I ; I Cor. iv. 21 ; Matt. x. 10;
a rod of authority, a sceptre, Heb.
i. 8.
pa^Z-ovxos, ov, 6 (ex^). ^^ liolder of
the rods, a Roman officer, lictor,
Acfs xvi. 35, 38,
'Pa7aD, 6 (Heb.), Ragau, Luke iiL 35.
fxf.di-ovp'yijiJ.a, oToy, r6 (pdStos, easy, and
ipyov, " an easy or careless deed"),
a7i act of villainy, Acts xviii. 14.
Pa^i-ovp-yia, as, i], craftiness, villainy.
Acts xiiL 10.
'Pa/cd (Heb., Chald. form), JRaca f a
term of contempt. Matt. v. 22 (see
153, ii.).
puKos, 0V5, t6 {priyvvui), a remnant torn
off, apiece, Matt. ix. 16.
'Pofia, 7] (Heb.), dat, -^ Rama, Matt
ii. 18.
pavrLlta — p(ovvv|i,i]
VOCABULARY.
115
pavTiCo}, (aa), to sprinkle, to cleanse
ceremonially (ace.) by sprinkling, to
purify from {aTr6).
pavTia^ils, ou, 6, sprinkling, purifica-
tion.
j5o7r/^a>, iaco, to smite with the hand,
distinguished from pa^UCa).
pAiTKTixa, aros, t6, a blow with the open
hand, a slap.
pa<pis, i^os, T), a needle.
'Paxd$, see 'Pt£ai8.
'PoxT^A, 7] (Heb.), Rachel, Matt, il
i8.
'PefieKKa, rjs, i], Rebekah, Rom. ix. lo.
pila, or ^eSrj, ?js, t}, a chariot, Rev.
xviii. 13.
'Pefji.<pdi/, or 'Ve<pav, S, a Coptic word,
Remphan, the Saturn of later my-
thology, Acts vii. 43 (Heb., Chiun,
Amos V. 26).
piw (f), peiaw, to flow, John vii. 38.
pea (see <pr\iJii, elirov). From this obs.
root, to say, are derived; act. perf.,
elprjKa; pass., efprj/iai; istaor. pass.,
ippedrjv or 4ppr]67)v ; part., prjdeis.
'P-qyiov, ov, r6, Rhegium, now Rheggio,
Acts xxviii. 13.
prjyua, aros, t6 (priyvv/jLi), wJtat is
broken, a crash, a ruin, Luke
vi. 49.
piyuvfxi, p-ftlo) (or pr,(T(Ta, as Mark
ii. 22), to break, to rend, to burst,
to dash against the ground, to break
forth, as into praise, Gal. iv. 27.
priixoL, aros, t6, a thing spoken; (i) a
word or saying of any kind, as com-
mand, report, promise; (2) a thing,
a matter, a business.
'Pria-d, 6 (Heb.), Rhesa, Luke iii. 27.
pi]a(Tw, see p^tyuvfii.
pilTccp, opos, 6, an orator, Acts xxiv. 1.
priTus, adv., expressly, in so many
words, I Tim. iv. i.
pi(a, 7JS, ^, (i) a root of a tree, or a
plant; met., the origin, or source
of anything ; fig., constancy, per-
severance; (2) that which comes
from the root, a descendant, Rom.
XV. 12.
piC^a, «, (ixToa, to root; perf., pass.,
part., eppi^wfievos, firmly rooted;
fig., Eph. iii. 18; Col. ii. 7.
pLiri], ris, -f] {ptiTTco), a Jerk, a twinkle,
as of the eye, i Cor. xv. 52.
pnri(w, i<rw, to move, as waves by the
wind, James i. 6.
pnrreco, u, rf/w, ist aor., ippi'^a; part.,
p'r^as ; to throw up, to cast off, or
away. Acts xxii. 23.
piirTu, \</oo, to throw, throw apart. Matt.
ix. 36; to jerk, Luke i v. 35; Matt,
xxvii. 5 ; to throw out, as anchors
from a ship, Acts xxvii. 29 ; to lay
doum, to expose. Matt. xv. 30.
'Poffodfi, 6 (Heb.), Rehoboam, Matt.
i. 7.
'P6h-i], 7\s, 71 (Rose), Rhoda, Acts
xii. 13.
'p65os, ov, fi, Rhodes, Acts xxi. 2.
poi^ri^6v, adv. [po'i^os, roaring, as of
waves), udth a noise, or sound,
2 Pet. iii. 10.
pojM^aia, as, rj, a sword, as Rev. i. 16 ;
fig., piercing grief, Luke ii. 35.
'PoujStjj', 6 (Heb.), Reuben, Rev. vii. 5.
'Povd, 7) (Heb.), Rvih, Mark i 5.
'PoiKpos, ov (Lat.), Rufus, (i) Mark
XV. 21 ; (2) Rom. xvi. 13. Perhaps
the same person.
pifiT], 7]s, 7], a narrow street, a lane,
pvofiai, a-o/jiai, dep. mid., istaor., pass.,
ippv(rd7]v, to draw, or snatch from
danger, to deliver; 6 pv6fievos, the
Deliverer,
pvirapia, as, 7], filth, pollution, James
i. 21.
pvTrapSs, d, 6v, sordid, filthy, defiled,
James ii. 2.
pimos, ov, 6, filth, fiXthiness, i Pet.
iii. 21.
pvTrSo), &, to be filthy. Rev. xxii. 11.
priais, eus, 7] {p4{f)w), afiux.
pi^Tis, idos, 7], a vrrinkle ; fig., a
spiritual defect, Eph v. 27.
'PoofjuiiKSs, i], 6v, Roman, Luke xxiii.
38.
'Pw/taTos, ov, &, a Roman, a citizen of
Rome.
'PcD/xaioTTl, adv., in the Roman, or
Latin tongue, John xix. 10.
'PdifxT], 7]s, 7), Rome.
pcii/vv/xi, pdxro), to strengthen; perf.,
pass., imper., eppwffo, ^ppuade, fare*
well, Acts XV. 29, xxiii. 30,
116
VOCABULARY.
[S-o-dpl
2, e, final s, aiyfia, sigma, 8, the
eighteenth letter. As a numeral,
a' = 200 ; ^<T = 200,000.
>Ta$ax6avi (Chald.), sabachtham, thou
hast, or hast thou forsaken me ?
Matt, xxvii 46 ; Mark xv. 34 ;
from the Chaldee rendering of Ps.
xxii. I.
<ro/3aco0 (Heb.), sabaoth, hosts, armies;
in the phrase, the Lord (Jehovah)
of hosts, Horn. ix. 29; James t. 4.
a-a^$aTi<Tix6s, ov, 6, a keeping of sab-
bath, Heb. iv. 9.
ad^^uToy, ov, t6 (from Heb.), dat.,
plur., ad&^aai{v), (i) the sabbath;
(2) a period of seven days, a week.
In both senses the plural is some-
times used.
ffayi}vn, 7JS, i}, a drag-net.
2a5Sow/catos, ov, 6, a Sadducee. Plur.,
of the sect in general. Prob. de-
rived from the Heb. word for just,
righteous.
'ZaSwK, 6 (Heb.), Sadohy Matt. i. 13.
aaivoi, to move, disturb, pass., i Thess.
iii. 3.
adKKos, ov, 6, a sack, sackcloth.
SoAci, 6 (Heb.), Sala, Luke iii. 35.
:Za\adiT}\ 6 (Heb.), Salaihiel, Matt.
i. 12.
laXafils, Ivos, r), Salamis, Acts xiii. 5.
2aA.€t)n, Vi Salim, John iii. 23.
coAeuw, ffo), to shake, to cause to
sliake; so, to excite, as the popu-
lace. Acts xvii. 13 ; fig., to disturb
in mind, 2 Thess. ii. 2.
2oA.li/i, T] (Heb.), Salem, Heb. vii. i.
1,aKyLwv, 6 (Heb.), Salmon^ Matt.
i. 4.
'S.dKfiwvq, Tfs, r), Salmone, Acts xxvii. 7.
(rd\o5, ov, d, the rolling of Uie sea in a
tempest, Luke xxi. 25.
adXtriyi, 17709, 7i, a trumpet.
0-oA.irtXa, iau (class, t7|w), to sound a
trumpet. For impers. use, i Cor.
XV. 52 (see 171).
traKiriaTiis, ov, b (class, -lyKT-fjs), a
trumpeter.
"iaXciixri, 7)5, Vi Salome, wife of Zebe-
dee, Mark xv. 40, xvL 1.
'S.aixdpeia, as, r], Samaria, either (i) the
district, or (2) the city, afterwards
called Sebaste.
2afiopeiT7js, ov, 6, a Samaritan.
2,afiape7Tis, i5os, tj, a Samaritan
woman.
:^afj.o-dp(}Kr}, ris, fj, Samothrace, Acts
xvi II.
'S.dfios, ov, 7), Samos, Acts xx. 15.
'SofjLovhx, & (Heb.), Samuel.
2a)Li4'aJj/, 6 (Heb. ), Samson, Heb. xi. 32.
o-oi/SoAiov, ov, t6, a sandal.
aayis, tSos, ^, a plank, a board, Acts
xxvii. 44.
2oouA, 6 (Heb.), Saul, (i) the king of
Israel ; (2) the apostle, only in
direct address (see 2ai)Aos).
aairpos, d, 6v, rotten, hence useless;
fig., impure.
2a7r<^eip7j, rjs, rj, Sapphira, Acts v. i.
'S,dTr<piipos, ov, 6, a sapphire. Rev.
xxi. 19.
capydvrj, rjs, tJ, a basket, generally of
twisted cords, 2 Cor. xi. 33.
2opS€Js, o>K dat., *(Tt{y), at, Sardis,
Rev. L II.
adpSivos, ov, 6, see next word.
adpZiov, lav, r6, a sardine stone, blood
or fresh coloured ; or carnelian.
<Tap5-6vv^, vxos, Tj, a sardonyx, a pre-
cious stone, white streaked with
red.
^dpewra, wv, rd, Sarepta, Luke iv. 26.
aapKiKds, ii, 6v, fleshly, whether ( 1 ) sub-
ject to carnal lu^ts and infirmities;
or (2) relating to Uie external con-
dition.
adpKivos, rj, ov, fleshy, constituted of
flesh, opp. to Xidivos, 2 Cor. iii. 3.
adp^, aapKds, 1), flesh, the human body,
man, human nature; vaara ardp^,
every man, all men; Kurd adpKa, as
a man; (rdp^ koI aJfia, flesh and
blood, i.e., man in his weak and
corrupt state; C^v ... irfpiirarely Kari,
adpKo, to live, to uxilk after flesh,
denoting a carnal, worldly life.
The word denotes com;anguinity,
natural relation, or descent. Mosaic
rites, the external or ceremonial opp.
to the internal and spiiitual, GaL
iii. 3.
Sopovx — Sip,«v]
VOCABULARY.
117
Sopoux, ^ (Heb.), or SepoiJx, Saruch,
or Struck (Serug), Luke iii. 35.
ffap6a}, a, (oaw, to sweep, to cleanse with
a bro mi.
tdppa, as, 7}, Sarah.
:Sdp'jjv, U3V0S, 6, Saron, Acts ix. 35.
^arav, 6 (Heb.), and :S.aTavas, a, the
Adversary, Satan, the Heb. prop,
name for the Devil, Sic£;8oAo$ ; met.,
for one who would do (consciously
or unconsciously) the work of Satan,
Matt. xvi. 23.
adrov, ov, t6 (see fx.65ios), a seah, a
measure equal to a modius and a
half. Matt. xiii. 33 ; Luke xiii. 21.
l,avXos, ou, 6, Saul, the apostle, gene-
rally in this form (see SaovA).
<r)8eWujLti, c^iaoo, (i) to extinguish, to
quench ; (2) fig., to restrain.
(rearou, rjs, ov (only masc. in N.T. ),
a reflex, pron., of thyself; dat.,
o-eauTo?, to thyself; ace, ffeavrSv,
thyself.
ffc^d^o^ai, dep., pass., to stand in awe
of, to worship religiously.
c40aaij.a, aros, t6, an obiect of religious
worship, 2 Thess. ii. 4 ; anything
regarded as sacred, as altars,
images, &c., Acts xvii. 23.
o-eSaoTi^y, ^, 6v, venerated, august,
a title of the Caesars, Augustus,
Acts XXV. 21. Hence, secondarily,
Augustan, imperial. Acts xxvii. i,
ffi^ofiai, 'dep. , to reverence, to worship
God, Mark vii. 7 ; ol ar^^oixevoi, the
devout, " proselytes of the gate. "
ffeipd, as, 71, a chain, 1 Pet. ii. 4.
<TiLcrfjL6s, ov, 6, a shaking, as an earth-
quake. Matt. xxiv. 7 J a storm at
sea. Matt. viii. 24.
(Teicu, (Tco, to shake; fig., to agitate.
2eKoi)j/5os, ov, 6 (Lat.), Secundus, Acts
XX. 4.
SeAevKfcia, a?, ?j, Seleucia, Acts xiii. 4.
(TcAi^i'Tj, 7]?, 7), the moon.
(TiX'nvid^oixa.i, to be lunatic, to suffer
from periodical disease, as epilepsy.
'S.ijj.fi, 6 (Heb.), Shimei, Luke iii. 26.
o-e/iiSaAis, (COS, 7}, Jlour, Rev. xviii. 1 3.
(Tffiv6s, i], 6v, ( I ) venerable, serious, of
men ; (2) honourable, of acts.
<refiv6Tris, rrjros, 1), dignity, seriousness.
'l,4pyios, ov, 6, Sergiv^, Acts xiii. 7.
2f)0, 6 (Heb.), Seth, Luke iii. 38.
2r?/A, ^ (Heb.), *S'/iem, Luke iii. 36.
(rrjuaivca, avw, ist aor., iaT^fidva, to
signify, intimate.
ffriuelov, ov, t6, a sign, that by which
a thing is knovm, a token, an in-
dication, of Divine presence and
power, I Cor. xiv. 22 ; Luke xxi.
7, 1 1. Hence, especially, a miracle,
whether real or unreal.
(rr]fjL€i6a, u, in mid., to mark for one-
self, to note, 2 Thess. iii. 14.
a-nfxepov, adv., to-day, at this time,
now; 7] {rjfxepa) ffijficpov, this very
day. Acts xix. 40.
a-fjiro}, to make rotten, 2nd perf.,
ffe(T7}Tra, to become rotten, perish,
James v. 2.
(ttjpikSs, i], 6v, adj., silken, neut. as
subst., dlk, Rev. xviii. 12.
ffiis, c7]t6s, 6, a moth.
(T7]T6-^puros, ov, moth-eaten.
adevSco, w, to strengthen, to confirm.
ariaydiv, 6yos, 7], the cheek, or jawbone.
a-iydct), a>, irjcw, to keep silence, to keep
a secret, Luke ix. 36; pass., to be
concealed, Rom. xvi. 25.
(Tiyv, 7)s, ^, silence.
aiSijpeos, 4a, €ov, contr., ovs, d, oHv,
madeofi7'on, Acts xii. 10.
aiS7]pos, ov, 6, iron. Rev. xviii. 12.
2i8c6j/, S)vos, 7), Sidon.
2iSaij'iys, la, 6v, Sidonian, inhabitant of
Sidon.
aiKdpios, iov, 6 (Lat.), an assassin.
Acts xxi. 38.
a'lKepa, t6 (Heb. Chald. form), strong,
intoxicating drink, Luke i. 15.
XiXas, dat. o, ace. av, d, Silas, contr.
from Silvanus.
"SiiXnvavSs, ov, 6, Silvanus.
'^.tXcudfji., 6, Siloam, or Siloah, Luke
xiii. 4 ; John ix. 11.
aifiLKii/dLov, iov, t6 (Lat., semicinctium),
an apron, worn by artizans.
Xijxav, avos, 6, Simon. Nine persona
of the name appear to be men-
tioned, (i) the Apostle Peter; (2)
the Apostle Zelotes ; (3) brother of
Jesus, Mark vi. 3 ; (4) Simon of
Cyrene; (5) father of Judas Iscariot^
118
VOCABULARY.
[Siva — (TKopirfos
(6) a "certain Pharisee," Luke
vii. 40 ; (7) Simon, the leper, Matt.
xxvi. 6 ; (8) Simon Magus, Acts
viii. 9 ; (9) Simon, the tanner. Acts
ix. 43. Possibly (2) and (3) were
identical ; see also (6) and (7).
Iiva, t6 (Heb.), Sinai.
ffivoKi, 6&>s, t6, mustard, mustard-seed.
(TivS^v, 6vos, 17, a linen cloth, a sheet
or wrapper of linen.
ffmdCca, to sift, as corn, to prove by
trials and ajlictions, Luke xxii. 31.
ffirevrSs, i], 6v, fed with corn, fatted.
c mar 6s, rf, 6v, fed, nourished; ta
ffiTiffTd, Matt. xxii. 4, fallings.
oriTo-ficTpiov, iov, t6, a corn-ration,
Luke xii. 42.
cTiTos, ov, 6, wheat, corn ; rh alra,
grain.
'Sixdp, see ^vxdp.
liictiu, b or t6, Sion, the mountain ;
met. (fem. ), for the city Jerusalem ;
and fig., for tlie church, the spiritual
Jerusalem.
cittiiTiju, cD, if<ra>, to he silent, whether
voluntarily or from dumbness ; to
become still, as the sea, Mark iv. 39.
rKavSakiCd), iffw, to cau^e to stumble,
pervert, to grieve (ace); pass., to
stumble, to be provoked, to be in-
dignant.
ffKdvSaKov, ov, t6, a snare, a stumbling-
block; fig., a cause of offence, or
perversion.
CKaTTTO), ypw, to dig.
<TKd(pri, rjs, r}, a boat, a skiff (as exca-
vated from a tree).
<rK€\oi, ovs, r6, the leg.
<rK€ira(Tfia, arSs, r6, clothing, 1 Tim.
vi. 8.
Ikcuus. a, 6, Sceva, Acts xix. 14.
oKivri, f)j, 7], furniture, fittings. Acts
xxvii. 19.
oKivos, ovs, r6, (i) a vessel, or utensil,
to contain a liquid, or for any other
pur[)0se ; fig. , of recipients gene-
rally, as of mercy, of wrath, Kom.
ix. 13, 32 ; (2) an instrument, by
which anything is done ; domestic,
Matt, xil 29; of a ship, "the
gear," Acts xxvii. 17 ; fig., of God's
servants, Acts ix. 15 ; 2 Cor. iv. 7.
(TKr]yf}, r}5, r], a tent, an abode, or
dioelling, the tabernacle reared in
tJie wilderness, an idolatrous taber-
nacle.
ffKTivo-iniyia, as, f}, the fixing, or (met.)
tlie feast, of tabernacles, John vii. 2.
(TKrivos, ovs, r6, a tent; fig., of the
human body, 2 Cor. v. i, 4.
aKTivo-irot6s, ov, 6, a tent-maker, Acts
xviii. 3.
cTKTivSw, w, (txrcD, to frame or spread a
tent. Rev. vii. 15; met., to dwell,
John i 14; Rev. xii 12, xiii. 6,
xxi. 3.
(TKi)V(ofia, aros, r6, a tent pitched, a
dwelling. Acts vii. 46 ; tig., of the
body, 2 Pet. i. 13, 14.
CKia, as, f}, ( I ) a shadow, a thick dark-
ness. Matt. iv. 16 (LXX.); (2) a
faint delineation. Col. ii. 17.
ffKiprdca, u, -fiaco, to leap, for joy,
exidt.
cK\T}po-Kap5la, as, ^, hardness of heart,
perverseness.
<TK\vp6s, d, 6v, hard, violent, as the
wind, James iii. 4; fig., grievous,
painful. Acts ix. 5 ; stern, severe,
Matt. XXV. 24.
(TkKtipSttjs, rriTos, fj, fig., Iiardness, of
heart, obstinacy.
(TKXripo-rpdxv^os, ov, hard, or stiff-
necked ; fig. , perverse. Acts vii. 5 1.
ffK\f\pvvtt), WW, fig., to make hard, to
harden, as the heart; mid., to
harden oneself, to become obdurate.
Acts xix. 9.
ffKoKi6s, d, 6v, crooked; fig., perverse,
morose.
crK6\o\f/, OTTOS, S, a thorn ; fig., a sliarp
infliction, 2 Cor. xii. 7.
ffKowew, w, (1) to look at, to regard
attentively; (2) to take lieed (ace),
beware [fii]).
aKoirSs, ov, 6, the mark aimed at;
/caret <TKox6y, in accordance with the
mark, i.e., aiming straight at it,
PhU. iii. 14.
(TKoprrlCw, ow, to disperse, to scatter
abroad, as frightened sheep, John
X. 12 ; to distribute alms, a Cor.
ix. 9.
aKopwioSf lav, d, a scorpion.
<rK0T6iV(Js — onrXaYXV^toH-o-''] VOCABULARY.
119
(TKOTeivSs, -fi, 6v, darh, darhsome.
CKOTia, ay, ^, darkness, privacy, Matt.
X. 27; fig., spiritual darkness, or
ignorance.
ffKOTi^o), era, in pass., to be darkened,
as the sun, Matt, xiii. 24; fig., as
the mind, Rom. i. 21.
crKdros, ovs, rS (and ov, 6 ; see 32, a),
darkness, physical. Matt, xxvii. 45;
moral, John iii. 19.
(TkotSco, w, pass, only, to he darkened,
E.ev. xvi. 10.
oKv^oKov, ov, r6 (perhaps from kv&I
pdweiv, to cast to the dogs), re/use,
dregs, Phil. iii. 8.
2/cu0rjs, ov, 6, a Scythian; met., for
the uncivilized. Col. iii. 11.
ffKvep-wjrSs, 6v, sad countenanced, stem,
grim. Matt. vi. i6; Luke xxiv.
17.
aKvXKa, \S>, pass., perf., earKvX/xai, to
trouble, harass, tire.
CKvXov, ov, t6, spoil taken from a foe,
Luke xi. 22.
ffK(i)\r]K6-fipMTos, ov, eaten by worms,
Acts xii. 23.
(T/cccAtjI, 7]kos, 6, a gnawing worm;
fig., torture.
ffnapdySivos, Ivrj, ivov, made of emerald.
ff/xdpayBus, ov, 6, an emerald,
fffivpva, 17 s, 7], myrrh.
'SfM'upj/a, Tjs, 71, Smyrna.
'2fjt.vpva7os, ov, 6, i], one of Smyrna, a
SmyrwBan.
ffiJLvpvl^co, to mingle with myrrh, Mark
XV. 23.
:S,6SofJLa, tt>y, rd, Sodom.
^oXoficav, or -fiwv, uvTos, or wvos,
Solomon.
aopos, ov, 6, a bier, an open coffin.
a6s, ffi], (t6v, a poss. pron., thy, thine
(see 56).
(Tovddpiov, lov, t6 (Lat.), a napkin,
handkerchief.
'Zowdvva, Tjs, 7], Susanna, Luke viii.
3-
ffo(f)ta, as, 7), wisdom, insight, skill,
human, Luke xi. 31; or divine,
I Cor. i. 21, 24.
ffo(^i^(a, la-o), to make wise, to enlighten;
pass., to be devised skilfully, 2 Pet.
i. 16.
<To^6s, 4], 6v, wise, either (i) in action,
(2) in acquirement, learned, skilfulf
able; (3) in philosophy, profouiid.
Siroyjo, as, 7), Spain, Rom. xv. 24.
ffirapdaffo}, |w, to tear, to convulse, to
throw into spasms, Luke ix. 39.
ffTrapyav6(t}, w, uxrco, perf., pass., part.,
iffirapyavwfjievos, to swathe, to wrap
in swaddling clothes.
triraToKdw, w, i]a(o, to live extravagantly,
or luxuriously, i Tim. v. 6.
<nrda>, 5}, data, to draw, to draw out, as
a sword.
ffire'ipa, 7]s, v, (1) a band or cohort of
soldiers, the tenth part of a legion,
Acts X. I J (2) a military guard,
John xviii. 3, 12.
(TTTetpw, (TTrepS, ist aor., etTTreipa; perf.,
pass., icrirappLai; 2nd aor., pass.,
iffTrdpTjy, to sow, or scatter, as seed;
to spread, or scatter, as the word
of God. AppKed to giving alms,
a Cor. ix. 6 ; to burial, 1 Cor.
XV. 42, 43 ; and to spiritual eflfort
generally. Gal. vi. 8.
ffireKovKdroop, opos, 6 (Lat.), a body
guardsman, a soldier in attendance
upon royalty, Mark vi. 27.
orTreySo), to pour out, as a drink offer-
ing, to offer in sacrifice.
(nr4p/jLa, aros, ro, a seed, produce.
Matt. xiii. 38 ; children, offspring,
posterity, John vii. 42 ; a remnant.
airepfio-\6yos, ov, 6, t}, a trifler. Acta
xvii. 18; i.e., one who picks up
trifles, as birds do seed.
(TTreuSw, <Tw, (x) to hasten, intrans.,
often adding to another verb the
notion of speed, Luke xix. 5, 6 ;
(2) to wish earnestly for (ace),
2 Pet. iii. 12.
<nri]Kaiov, ov, r6, a cave, a den.
ffTTiXds, dhos, r], a rock, occasioning ship-
wreck ; of false teachers, Jude 12.
(nr7\os, ov, a spot; fig., a blot, Eph.
V. 27 ; 2 Pet. ii. 13.
(nri\6(o, 5), to stain, to contaminate.
CTrXayxvKoi>-ai, dep., with ist aor,
pass., iaTTKayxv'^<^Hv, to feel com'
passion, to have pity on (gen., or
iiri, dat. or ace, once irept, Matt,
ix. 36).
120
VOCABULARY.
[cirXa-yxva — crroixcia
flrirAe{7x»'o, av, ra, bowels; the inward
parts, " the heart," t/te gentler
emotions, Philem. 12.
air6yyos, ov, 6, a sponge.
(TTro^Ss, ov, 7], ashes.
(Tiropd, as, 7], seed, 1 Pet. i. 23.
ariropifMos, 6v, sown, neut. plur. ; to
airdpLfia, corn-fields, Matt. xii. 1.
arirSfjos, ov, 6, seed for sowing.
a-7rovddCa>, daw, to hasten, to give dili-
gence, to be in earnest (with iuf.).
ffTTov^aios, aia, alov, diligent, forward ;
adv., -cos, earnestly: neut. corapar.,
also as adv., 2 Tim. i. 17; -«s,
PhU. ii. 28.
airovhi], 7JS, Tf, (i) speed, haste; (2)
diligence, earnestness.
airvpis, iSos, ri, a hand-basket.
ffrdSiov, ov, t6, pliir., ffTaSioi, at, (1)
a stadium, the eighth part of a
E-mail mile, John xi. 18 ; (2) a
race-course or circus, for public
games, i Cor. ix. 24.
ardfivos, ov, 6, f), an urn, or vase, for
the manna, Heb. ix. 4.
a-rdais, €«s, r} (tVTTjjut)? ^ standing up;
hence, (i) continuance, Heb. ix. 8 ;
(2) an uproar, Mark xv. 7; (3) a
contention, a violent controversy, Acts
XV. 2.
(TTariip, 4pos, masc, a stater, a silver
coin, equal to the SlBpaxfJ-ov, which
see ; Matt. xvii. 27.
(TTavpSs, ov, 6, a cross ; met. , often of
Christ's death.
cTavp6w, So, wao), to fix to the cross, to
crucify; fig., to mortify, destroy,
the corrupt nature.
<TTa<f>v\-n, 7JS, v, a grape, a clustery or
bunch of grapes,
ardxvs, vos, 6, an ear of corn,
2T(ixus, vos, d, Stachys, Kom. xvi. 9.
<rTe77?, 77 J, V, a cover, a fiat i-oof of a
house, Mark iL 4.
ffTeyu, to cover, to conceal, to bear
loith, I Cor. ix. 12, xiii. 7.
areipos, a, 6v, barren, not bearing
children.
VjiKKw, to set, in mid., to care or
provide Jor, 2 Cor. viii. 20 ; to
witMraw from {^v6), 2 Thess.
iii. 6.
(rrefifia, aros, r6, a crown, a garland.
Acts xiv. 13.
(TTevayfiSs, ov, 6, a groaning, Acts
vii. 34; an aspiration in silent
prayer, Eom. viii. 26.
arfvd(co, |a>, to groan, expressing grief,
anger (/cora), or desire.
anvds, i}, ov, narrow, Matt. vii. 13;
Luke xiii. 24.
a-revo-xcp^oj, Qj, in pass., tobestraitenedf
to be distressed, 2 Cor. iv. 8.
a-T€vo-xcpia, as, tj, great distress or
straits, 2 Cor. vi. 4.
a-repe6s, a, 6v, solid, as food, Heb.
V. 12; ^g., firm, stedfast, i Pet.
V. 9.
ffTepeoo), «, (aacD, to Strengthen, con-
firm, establish. Acts ii. 16, xvL 5.
aT€p4ti)ixa, aros, t6, firmness, constancy.
^T€(pauas, a, 6, Stephanas,
crriipavos, ov, 6, a crown, a garland, of
royalty, of victory in the games, of
festal joy ; often used fig.
'2,T4<papos, ov, 6, Stephen, Acts vi. , vii.
aT€<pav6w, «, (ixrw, to crown, to adoni^
to decorate.
(TTrjdos, ovs, t6, the breast.
ffrilKoi {JmrjfjLi, tcrij/ca), to stand in the
attitude of prayer, Mark xi. 25 ;
to stand firmly to, Rom. xiv. 4;
to stand fast and strong in. Gal.
V. I.
ffTtipiyfiSs, ov, b, firmness, fixedness^
2 Pet. iii. 17.
a-rrtpi^o), /|«, or Iffw, pass., perl,
effT-npiyfjLai, (i) to fix, to set firmly ;
(2) to strengtiien, to confirm, to
support,
ariyna, aros, r6, a mark or brand,
Gal. vi. 17 ; of the tokens of the
Apostle's sufferings for Christ.
ffTiyixi), ris, rj, a point of time, an
instant, Luke iv. 5.
ott/a/So), to shine, to glisten, to be re-
splendent, Mark ix. 3.
(TTod, fij, 7], a colonnade, a portico, a
porch.
<rroi$ds, o5os, r) (or (rnfids), a bought
a branch of a tree, Mark xi. 8.
(TTotxe'tt, ov, rd, elements, of nature,
of knowledge, of the world, GaL
iv. 3, 9; Col ii 8, 20.
(TTOixew — (n>7-KaTa-ij/T]<j>Lt«] VOCABULARY.
121
(TTOLx^w, CO, r](rci), to walk, to behave
oneself {according to, by dat.).
(TToXi]^ Tjy, 7), a robe, a long garment,
a mark of distinction, Luke xv. 22.
(TTOixa, oTos, t6, (1) the mouth, gene-
rally; hence, (2) speech, speaking;
used for testimony, Matt, xviii. 1 6 ;
eloquence, or puwer in speaking,
Luke xxi. 15 ; (3) applied to an
opening in the parched earth, Rev.
xii. 16; (4) the edge, or point, e.g.,
of a sword, Luke xxi. 24.
(rT6^iaxos, ov, 6, the stomach, i Tim.
V. 23.
(TTpaTeia, as, r], warfare, military ser-
vice; of Christian warfare, 2 Cor.
X. 4; I Tim. i. 18.
ffTpdnvfia, aros, r6, (i) an army;
(2) a detachment of troops. Acts
xxiii. 10, 27; plur., Luke xxiii, ii.
(rrparevoixai, ffojxai, dep. mid., to wage
war, as lusts against the soul,
James iv. i ; to serve as a soldier,
of Christian work, 2 Tim. ii. 4 ;
1 Tim. i. 18.
ffTpar-rjySs, ov, 6 (^7«), (1) a leader of
an army ; (2) a magistrate, or ruler.
Acts xvi. 20 ; (3) the captain of the
temple, Acts iv. 1 .
(TTpaTid, as, T], an army ; met., a host,
of angels, Luke ii. 13; the host of
heaven. Acts vii. 42.
(TTpaTidoTTis, ov, 6, a soldier, as Matt,
viii. 9 ; fig. of Christian teachers,
I Tim. ii. 3.
o'rpaTO-Xoyea}, w, -fjaa, to collect, or levy
an army, to enlist troops, 2 Tim. ii, 4.
(TTpaToir^d-dpxv^i 0^, ^1 the prefect, or
commander of the emperor's guards.
Acts xxviii. 16.
(TT par 6iTi^ov, ov, r6, an encamped
army, a host, Luke xxi. 20.
(TTpe^\6w, w, to rack, to pervert, to
wrest, as words from their proper
meaning, 2 Pet. iii. 16.
aTp4(poi}, \pa}, 2nd aor. pass., iarpdcpriv,
to turn, trans. (Matt. v. 39) or
intrans. (Acts vii, 42), to change
into [els); pass., to turn one's self,
John XX. 14; to be converted, to be
changed in mind and conduct, Matt.
xviii 3.
ffrpiqvidio, w, dffw, to live voluptuously,
Rev. xviii. 7, 9.
arprivos, ovs, t6, profligate luxury,
voluptuousness, revel, riot,
crrpoudlov, iov, 76 (dim. of (rrpovOSs), a
small bird, a sparrow. Matt. x. 29, 3 1.
ffTpwvvixa, or -vwixi, (TTpwaoo, pass.,
perf., effTpwfxai, to strew, to make a
bed ; pass. , to be strewed, or covered,
with carpets over the couches.
(rTiryrjTds, 6v, hateful, odious.
(TTvyvd^w, daw, to become gloomy, or
lowering, as the sky, Matt. xvi. 3.
(TTvKos, or (TTvKos, ov, 6, a pillar, any
firm support. Gal. ii. 9 ; i Tim.
iii. 15.
(TTw'iKos, -fi, 6v, stoic, plur., the Stoics,
Acts xvii. 18.
ffv, ffov, (Toi, 0-6, plur., vfius, thou, ye,
the pers. pron. of second person
(see 53).
(Tvy-'y4viia, as, rj, kindred, family,
Luke i. 61.
ffuy-yeuiis, 4s, akin, as subst., a kins-
man, relative, a fellow-countryman,
Rom. ix. 3.
a-vy-yvdofiT], tjs, t], permission, leave,
I Cor. vii. 6.
crvy-KdO-TjfjLat, to sit down with (dat. or
^i^Td, gen.).
(Tvy-Kadi^a, aoi, [i) to cause to Sit doivn
with, Eph. ii. 6; (2) to sit doion
with, Luke xxii. 55.
avy-KaKo-iraBeco, w, to suffer evil or
affliction Jointly (with dat. com-
mod. , for, 2 Tim. i. 8.
(Tvy-KaKeca, w, eVw, to call together;
mid. , to call together to oneself.
(Tuy-KoAinrTci), rpw, to conceal closely, to
hide wh'lly, Luke xii. 2.
avy-Kdinrroi, \l/(a, to bow down wholly,
to oppress, Rom. xi. 10 (LXX.).
arvy-Kara-^aiva, to go down with any
one, as from Jerusalem to Csesarea,
Acts XXV. 5.
(rvy-Kard-deffis, ews, v, consent, agree-
ment, 2 Cor. vi. 16.
a-vy-KaTa-Tidrifit, in mid,, to give a vote
with, to assent to (dat), Luke
xxiii. 51.
(Tvy-KaTa-^r](l)i^(a, in pass., to be voted
or classed with (/terci), Acts L a6.
122
VOCABULARY. [<rvY-K€p(iwv|ti — or\Jn-PiPat«
ciry-Kepdyyvfii, d(ra>, ist aor., crvpcKe-
pcura; pass., perf., ffvyK€Kpafiai ; to
mix with, to temper, i Cor. xii. 24;
pass. , to he mixed with, Heb. iv. 2.
avy-Kivew, w, -f](r(o, to move together, to
put into commotion. Acts vi 12.
(rvy-K\elci), <T(a, to indose, to shut in, as
fishes in a net; to give up one to
the power of another, to Tnahe sub-
ject to, Rom. xi. 32; Gal. iii. 22, 22.
atry-K\7ipov6fMos, ov, 6, a joint-heir, i.e.,
a joint possessor or co-partner, Rom.
viii. 17 ; Heb. xi. 9.
ffvy-Koivavia, w, to he a joint partaker
with, Eph. V. 1 1 ; Phil. iv. 14.
avy-Koiv<i)v6s, ov, 6, r}, a partaker with,
a co-partner, an associate.
(rvy-Ko/xl((o, to hear away togetlier, as
in burying a corpse, Acts viii. 2.
avy-Kplvu, ivw, to place together in
order to judge of, to compare (ace,
dat ), to estimate, or explain hy com-
parison, I Cor. ii. 13.
avy-Kvirra>, to he howed together, or hent
double, Luke xiii. 11.
(TvyKvpia, as, v> « coincidence, a con-
curroice ; Karh avyKvpiav, by chance,
Luke X. 3 1.
trvy-xa'po, 2nd aor. in pass, form,
ffwex^priv, to rejoice with, to rejoice
together in, 1 Cor. xiii. 6 ; to con-
gratulate, Luke i. 58 ; PhiL iu
17, 18 (dat.).
<rvy-x€«(f), also trvyxixa and exryxvvu,
perf., pass,, avyK^xvpai, to confound,
i.e., (1) to startle, amaze. Acts
iL 6 ; {z) to throw into confusion.
Acts xix. 32 ; (3) to confute in
argument. Acts ix. 22.
ffvy-xpdojxou, wfiai, to have fellowship or
association with (dat.), John iv. 9.
ffOy-xvoi^, e«s, ^, confusion, comTnotUm,
uproar. Acts xix. 29.
ffv-QtjM, «, -iiffo}, to live together with,
dat.
av-^fvyvvpLi, ist aor., avviC^vla, to con-
join (ace), to unite, as man and
wife.
avCnTtu, &, i\<ru), to ask one another, to
discuss, dispute, dat., or irp6s, ace.
cw-C^Tjo-iy, (US, ri, questioning, dispu-
tation.
I o-u-CnTfiT-fjs, ov, 6, a disputer, as the
Greek sophists, i Cor. i. 20.
<rv-(xiyos, ov, 6, 17, a yoke-fellow, a
coadjutor, Phil. iv. 3 ; perhaps a
proper name, Syzygus.
crv-C(oo-Troi€w, to, ist aor., ffweCwa-
■jToirjaa, to make alive witli, to quicken
together with, Eph. ii. 5 ; Coloss.
ii. 13.
<TvK6.fj.ivos, ov, 71, a sycamore-tree.
ffvKTj, ris, 7} (contr. from -4a), a Jig-tree.
(rvKo-ficcpaia, as, 7} (or -co), a sycamore-
tree.
avKov, ov, t6, a fig.
<rvKo-<pavT4a), w, iiarw, to accuse falsely,
to defraud, Luke iii. 14, xix. 8
(gen. pers., ace. thing).
(TvX-aywyeu), u>, to plunder, to make a
prey of, Col. ii. 8.
avxdco, S), -hffu), to rob, to plunder,
2 Cor. xi. 8.
crvX-KaXiw, ist aor., <TvviXd\T]aa, to
converse with, dat, /iero (gen.),
Tp6s (ace).
(Tv\-\aix$dvw, ffvWijrponat, a-vj/ei\7i^a,
avveXafiov, (1) to take together, to
catch, to seize; (2) to conceive, as a
female; (3) odd., apprehend (ace),
to help (dat.).
(rv\-\4yca, |«, to collect, to gather.
ffvX-Koyi^opxu, aofiai, to reckon to-
gether, to deliberate.
ffv\-\vTT4op.ai, ovfiai, pass. , to he greatly
grieved {ivi, dat.), Mark iii. 5.
ffvn-&alv<a, -fiiiaofiai, 2nd aor., avv4$7iv;
perf. , part. , rh ffvp.fic&7iK6s ; an event,
to happen, to befall, to occur.
<rvfi-$d\\a), 2nd aor., <rvve&a\ov, to put
togetJier and compare, Luke iL 19;
Acts XX. 14; to dispute with. Acts
xvii. 18 (dat. or npSs, ace); to come
up with, to encounter (dat.); mid.,
to confer, consult with. Acts i v. 15;
to contribute, help to (dat.). Acts
xviiL 27.
<rvfi-fia<n\ev(it, ffot, to reign with; tig.,
to enjoy happiness with, 1 Cor. iv. 8.
ffvfjk-fiifidCco, offw, {%) to unite, or knit
together. Col. iL 2, 19 ; [z) to prtt
togetlier in reasoning, and so, to con-
clude, prove. Acts ix. 22 ; (3) to
teach, instruct, i Cor. iL 16.
orvji-PovXevo) — orv|Ji\j/vxos] VOCABULARY.
123
ffvfi-$ovK€v<i>, to advise (dat.); mid., to
take counsel together (tVo or inf. ).
ffvfi-fioiXiov, iov, t6, (i) mutual con-
sultation, united counsel; (2) a coun-
cil, a gathering of counsellors.
ffifx-hovKos, ov, 6, a counsellor, Eom.
xi. 34(LXX.).
^v/xedv, 6 (Heb.), Simeon, or Simon
(see S/uwj/). The apostle Peter is
so called, Acts xv. 14 ; 2 Pet. i. i ;
and four others are mentioned, (i)
Luke ii. 25; (2) Luke iii. 30 j (3)
Acts xiii. I ; (4) E,ev. vii. 7.
<rvfi-fia67}Tf}s, ov, &, a fellow -disciple.
(TVfi.-napTvp€(o, CO, to bear witness to-
gether with, to testify along with.
av(M-fjL€plC(a, in mid., to divide vnth,
partake unth (dat.), i Cor. ix.
13.
(rvfi-ficToxos, ov, jointly partaking,
Eph. iii. 6, v. 7.
ffvu-fxifjLriT-fjs, ov, 6, a joint-imitator, a
CO follower, Phil, iii. 17.
(rvfi-fiopcpos, ov, conformed to, gen.,
E,om. viii. 29 ; dat. , Phil. iii.
21.
(rvix-ixop(p6ca, So, to conform to (dat.),
Phil. iii. 10.
ffvfi-iradeco. So, i]<ra), to sympathize with,
to have compassion on, dat.
avfi-TraQ-fis, es, sympathizing, compas-
sionate, T Pet. iii. 8.
a-vfi-Trapa-yivofiai, to come together {to,
iiri, ace), Luke xxiii. 48 ; to stand
by one, to support (dat.), 2 Tim.
iv. 16.
crv[jt.-Trapa-Ka\€co, So, in pass., to be com-
fo7-ted together, Eom. i. 12.
a-vfi-irapa-Xafi^dvco, 2nd aor., arvfiirape-
Ka&ov, to take up with, to take (ace. )
with one^s self, as companion. Acts
xii. 25 ; Gal, ii. i.
avfi-irapa-iJ.&co, to remain, or continue
zvith, Phil. i. 25.
av/x-Trdp-eifii, to be present with, Acts
xxv. 24.
(Tufi-TTciax^^, to suffer together vnth,
E,om. viii. 17.
a-vfi-TTeiJLiru}, to send with, 2 Cor. viii.
18, 22.
(Tvp.-TV€pL-\an&dv(i}, to comprehend to-
I gether, to embrace, Acts xx, 10,
ffvfi-Trlvco, 2nd aor., tfvvimov, to drink
with. Acts X. 41.
avix-irXripow, So, /o fill, to fill up, to fill
fully, Luke viii. 23 ; pass., to be
at hand, to have fully come, Luke
ix. 51; Acts ii. I.
trvfi-wiyco, to choke, as weeds do
plants, Mark iv. 7 ; to throng, to
suffocate by crotvding, to throng upon
(ace. ), Luke viii. 42.
avfi-TroXiTrjs, ov, 6, a fellow-citizen,
Eph. ii. 19.
cvfi-iropevofxai, (i) to accompany, to go
go with (dat.), Luke vii. 11 ; (2)
intrans., to come together, to as-
semble, Mark x. i.
avfi-irSffiov, ov, t6 {irivco), a table party,
a festive company, a feast, Mark
vi. 39.
avfi-irpea-^vrepos, ov, 6, a fellow-eldeTf
1. Pet. V. I.
ffvii-tpdyco, see a-vveadlco.
(rvfjL-<pepoo, ist aor., <Tvv7]veyKa, to bring
together, to collect. Acts xix. 19 ; to
contribute, to conduce to, to be pro-
fitable to, 2 Cor. xii. i ; i Cor.
X. 23; part., t5 avfMcpepov, good,
profit, advantage, i Cor. vii. 35.
aifi-^rjui, to assent to, to expi^ess agree-
ment with, Horn. vii. 16.
(rvjx-(pux4Tr}s, ov, 6, one of the sam^
tribe, a fellow -citizen, i Thess. ii.
14.
a-ifji.-(pvTos, ov, grown together, 2^lantedi
together, conjoined with, E.om. vi. 5.
ffvfi-ipia), pass., 2nd aor., part., ffvu-
(pvels, pass., to grow at the same
time, Luke viii. 7.
(Tvp.-<pa3v^u>, So, i](x<a, to agree with (dat.
or ixeTd, gen.). Matt, xviii. 19 j
Acts XV. 15; to be congruous to,
Luke V. 36.
avyi.-(pu}V7](ns, ews, tj, accord, unison,
2 Cor. vi. 15.
a-vfjL-^wvla, as, 7], a concert, or sym-
phony, of instruments, music.
ai6fji-(l>ciovos, ov, luirmonious, agreeing
with ; e/c avn<(>d^vov, by agreement.
orviJL-\pr]^l(co, to compute, reckon up.
Acts xix. 19.
o-ifjL-ipvxos, adj., like minded, Phil<
ii. 2.
124
yOCABULART.
[<rvv — (rvv-€i|Jii
(Tvv^ a prep. gov. dative, vnth (see
296). In composition, aiv denotes
association with. The final con-
sonant changes to 7, x> ^j or M» or
is dropped, according to the initial
letter of the word with which it is
compounded (see 4, d, 5).
avtf-dyco, a|<», {1) to bring together, to
assemble; pass., to be assembled, to
come together; (2) to receive hos-
pitably, Matt. XXV. 35.
cvvaywy-f}, r}s, rj, an assembly, a con-
gregation, synagogue, either the
place, or the people gathered in
the place. See Synonyms.
(rvv-ay(i>ui^oiJ.ai, aopxti, to exert oneself
witli anotJier, to aid (dat.), Rom.
XV. 30.
ffvy-adKew, u, "hcrw, to strive together
for (dat. of thing), Phil. i. 27 ; or
with (dat. of pers. ), Phil. iv. 3.
evv-aOpoiCo), ffoo, to gather, or collect
together, Acts xix. 25 ; pass., to
throng together, Luke xxiv. 33.
a-w-odpco, to reckon together, to take
account with, Matt, xviii, 23, 24.
avv-ai-xp-dXcDTos, ov, d, a fellow -cajptive,
OT prisoner, Rom. xvi. 7.
avy-axoXovBeoo, a, iiffta, to foUow with,
to accompany, Luke xxiii. 49.
avv-aXi^o), in pass., to be assembled
together with (dat.). Acts i. 4.
ffvv-ava-^aivw, to go up with (dat.),
Mark xv. 41 ; Acts xiii. 31.
(rvv-avd-K6ifmi, to recline with, as at a
meal, to sup with (dat.); part., ol
trvvavaKeifjLevoi, the guests, Mark vi.
22, 26.
aw-ava-filyvufii, pass., to mingle to-
getJier with, to keep (dat.), 2 Thess.
iiL 14,
(Tw-ava-iravofiai, trofiai, to be refreshed
together with (dat.), Rom. xv. 32.
avv-avTOLiji, a, ^<r«, {i) to meet with, to
encounter (dat.), Luke ix. 37; (2)
of things, to Jiappen to, to befall.
Acts XX. 22.
<rvv-dvT7}(Tis, fas, rjf « meeting with, an
encountering. Matt. viii. 34,
irvv-avTi-\aiJLPdvu), mid., to Jielp to-
getlier with, to assist (dat.), Rom.
viii 26 ; Luke x. 40.
(Tw-aTr-dya, in pass., to be led, or
carried away in mind. Gal. iL 13;
mid., to join oneself to, Rom. xii.
16.
avv-atro-QvixTKa), to die together with
(dat. ), Mark xiv. 3152 Tim. ii. i x.
(rw-aTr-Swufii, in mid., to perish vnth
(dat,), Heb. xi. 31.
<Tvv airo-ffr4xxa), to send together (ace),
2 Cor. xii. 18.
avv-apfxo-Xoyeu, a>, in pass., to be joined
fitly or Jiarmoniously together, Eph.
ii. 21, iv. 16.
<Tvv-apTrd(fa, aw, to seize, or drag by
force (dat.), Luke viii. 29; Acts
vi 12, xxvii 15.
(Tvv-av^dva>, in mid. , to grow together.
(jvv-hf(Tfios, ov, 6, a knot, a band;
met., a bond.
avv-Uw, in pass., to be bound with any
one, as fellow- prisoners, Heb, xiii 3.
<rvf-5o|a^a>, d(Ta>, in pass., to be glo-
rified with {(Tvv), or togetlier, Rom.
viii 17.
ffvv-hovXos, ov, d, a fellow-slave, a fel-
loiv-se'>'vant ; of ministers, the fel-
low-servants of Christ, a colleague,
Col. i 7.
(Tvv-Spofi-f), ris, f), a running together, a
concourse. Acts xxi 30.
(Tw-eyiipci), fp'2, 1st aor., (Tvvi\y€ipa\
pass., <rvvr]y4pdT)v ; to raise together,
to raise with.
'S.vv-eSpiov, ov, t6, a council, a tribunal.
Matt. X. 17; specially, tJie Sanhe-
drim, the Jewish council of seventy
members, presided over by the
High Priest ; the council hall, where
the Sanhedrim met. Acts iv. 15.
<ruj'-€75oj', 2nd aor. of obs,, present, to
be conscious or atoare of. Acts
xiv. 6; perf., a-vvoiSa, part., arwei-
Sds, to be privy to a design. Acts
V. 2 ; to be conscious to one's self
(dat.) of guilt (ace), i Cor, iv. 4.
(Tw-ciS'qa'is, ewy, tj, the conscience,
Rom. ii 15; I Pet. ii 19; the
sentence pronounced by the con-
science, 2 Cor. iv. 2, v. II.
avvfifii, to be with (dat.).
avv-fifxi («?/*')» part., trwlwy, to go or
come with, to assemble.
cruv-€iop-^pxonai — <rvv-T€X4«] VOCABULARY.
125
(rw-€i<r-^pXouai, to go in, or come tw,
with any one (dat.), John xviii. 15 ;
to embark with, John vi. Z2.
(Tvv-eK-SrjfjLos, ov, 6, rj, a fellow-travellerf
Acts xix. 29 ; 2 Cor. viii. 19.
ffvv-fKXeKT6s, S], 6v, ftUow • elected^
I Pet. V. 13.
ffvu-fKaivo), -€\d<r(o, to compel, to per-
suade (ace. and els). Acts vii. 26.
ffW'eiri-fj.apTvpecD, u, to bear joint wit-
ness, Heb. ii. 4.
a-vv-eTTOfxai, to attend, to accompany
(dat.).
cvv-epyea, <a, to co-operate with (dat.),
to work together, i Cor. xvi. 16;
Rom. viii. 28.
avv-epyos, 6v, co-working, helping ; as
a subst. , a joint-helper, a co-worker,
gen. of person, obj. with ets, or
dat., or (met.), gen., 2 Cor. i. 24.
<Tvv-epxofJt.cu (see 103, 2), to come, or
go with, to accompany, to come
together, to assemble; used of con-
jugal intercourse, to come, or live
together.
(Tw-eadici}, 2nd aor., awe^ayot/, to eat
Uoith, to live in familiar intercourse
with (dat. , or /tera, gen. ) .
crvp-eais, ews i'lvH-^)} <^ putting together,
in mind, hence discernment; met.,
the understanding, the source of
discernment.
o-w-eT<{s, -i], 6v (trjjLti), intelligent, pru-
dent, wise.
o-i/y-eu-So/cew, u, to approve together
(dat.), to be also willing (inf.),
I Cor. vii. 12, 13.
<Tvv-ev(axeo}, u, in pass., to feast with,
to revel with.
avv-e((>-i(TTrifjLi, to rise together against
(Kara), to attack, Acts xvi. 22.
(rw-4xo, |«, (i) to press together, con-
strain; (2) to hold fast, as a pri-
soner, to stop, as the ears, the
mouth; (3) to hem in, Luke viii. 45;
(4) pass., to be straitened, or re-
pressed, as by an unaccomplished
purpose, to he pained, Luke xii. 50 ;
(5) to he pressed or occupied with a
work. Acts xviii. 5.
Vw-'^So/iat, to delight in (dat.), Rom.
vii. 22.
<rvv-^Geta, as, rj, a custom, a usage.
<Tvv-T\\iKi(aTt]s, ov, 6, one of the same
age. Gal. i. 14.
(Tvv-edirrco, »|/ctf, 2nd aor., pass., avve-
Ta.(p-t\v, in pass., to he buried withy
Rom. vi. 4; Col. ii. 12.
ffvy-exdo), u, fut., pass., avvQKaffQ-f]-
cofKu, to break, to break in pieces,
Matt. xxi. 44; Luke XX. 18.
(rw-d\lfi(o, to throtig, to press closely
upon, Mark v. 24, 31.
(rvv-OpviTTw, to break down; fig., with
KapSiav, to take away one^s fortitude,
Acts xxi. 13.
(rvv-irjij.1, inf., cvvUvai, part., (rvviwv or
(Tvviels ; fut., ffvvi](T(i} ; 1st aor.,
ffvvriKa', to put together, in mind;
hence, to attend to {iirl, dat.), to
consider, understand (ace), to he
aware (^ti), to he wise.
(rvviTTrifii, also crvvKTrduM and ffvuiffrdw,
to place together, constitute; perf.
and 2nd aor., in trans., to stand
together ; to commend to esteem and
confidence, Rom. xvi. i ; to declare,
to show, to make knoum, 2 Cor.
vi 4.
ffvv-oSf{i(i}, to journey with, to accom-
pany (dat. ), Acts ix. 7.
(Tvv-oSia, as, ^, a company travelling
together, a caravan, Luke ii. 44.
<tvvoik4(i}, S), iiaoa, to dwell together, as
in marriage, 1 Pet. iii. 7.
ffw-oiKo-Sofxeoo, in pass., to he built up
together, Eph. ii. 22.
(rvv-ofii\€co, w, to talk with (dat. ), Acts
X. 27.
(Tvy-ofiopeo}, u>, to adjoin (dat.). Acts
xviii. 7.
<Tvj/-ox'fi, ^s, Vf constraint, of mind ;
hence, distress, disquiet, Luke xxi.
<rvv-rd(Ta'a), |a), to arrange with, to
charge, command. Matt. xxvi. 19,
XX vii. 10.
<rvv-T4\€ia, as, rj, a finishing, a con-
summation, an end.
<rvvTf\€Q}, S>, da-oo, (i) to bring to an
end, Luke iv. 13; (2) to fulfil, to
accomplish, Rom. ix. 28 ; Mark
xiii. 4; (3) to conclude, ratify, Heb.
yiii. 8.
126
VOCABULARY.
[<ruv-W|iv« — o-<j>pa'y^t^
trvv-Ti/jLvcD, to cut short, to bring to
svnft fulfilment, Rom. ix. 28.
<rvi/-Tr]p4a), w, (i) to preserve safely, to
guard anxiously from ha-rm, Mark
vi. 20 ; {%) to lay up in mind, Luke
ii, 19.
<rvv-rl6rjfji.i, in mid., to set or place to-
gethery as in agreement between
two or more persons, Luke xxii. 5 ;
to assent, Acts xxiv. 9.
<rvy-r6fj.ws, adv., concisely, briefly. Acts
xxiv. 4.
cvv-Tp4x<^, 2nd aor., crvveBpafiov, to
run togetJier, as a multitude, Mark
vi. 33; Acts iii. 11; fig., 1 Pet.
iv. 4.
cvv-Tp'So], i//«, 2nd aor. pass., crwe-
Tpi^7]v, tx) break, to break in pieces,
by crushing, Luke ix. 39 ; Eom.
xvi. 20 ; pass., perf., pait., awre-
rpifxix4vos, bruised. Matt. xii. 20.
arvv-rpififMo, aros, t6, crushing ; fig. ,
destruction, Rom. iii. 16 (LXX.).
<Tvv-Tpo(pos, ov, 6, brought, up, or
educated with, a comrade. Acts
xiii. I.
aw-^vyxavw, 2nd aor., cvvirvxov, to
fall in with (dat.), Luke viii. 19.
'SiivTvxv, vs, V, Syntyche, Phil. iv. 2.
(Tw-mro-Kpivofiai, dep., ist aor., avvvne-
KpiOT}u, to dissemble, or feign together
with. Gal. ii. 13,
ffvv-vTr-ovpyeco, w, to help togetJier vnth,
z Cor. i. 1 1.
a-vv (cdivco, to be in pain together, Rom.
viii. 22.
ffvv-tapLoa-ia, as, rj, a conspiracy by oath
together, Acts xxiii. 13.
"ZvpaKovaai, cov, at, Syracuse, Acts
xxviii. 12.
Supi'a, as, V, Syria,
^vpos, ov, 6, a Syrian, Luke iv. 27.
2,vpo-(puLvi(r(ra, or 'Xvpo-poiv'tKKTaa, ay,
7}, an ai>])ellative, a Syrophenician
looman, Mark vii. 26.
'S.ipTis, etws, ace. iv, fj, a quicksand, the
Syrtii major. Acts xxvii, 17.
ffvf)(i}, to draw, to drag.
eru-aTrapd(Ta(o, fw, to convulsc violently
(ace. ), Luke ix. 42.
aia-ffrniov, ov, t6, a concerted signal, a
token agreed upon, Mark xiv. 44.
ffva-ffcDiJLOs, ov, united in the same body,
\ tig., of Jews and Gentiles, in one
church, Eph. iii. 6.
ffv-arTaffiaffr-fjs, ov, 6, a feUow-insurgent,
Mark xv. 7.
(Tv-ffraTiKds, ^, 6v, commendatory ^
2 Cor. iii i.
ffv-aravpSd), u>, to crucify together with
(ace. and dat.); lit., as Matt.
xxvii. 44; fig., as Gal. ii. 19.
ffv-trreWu, (i) to swathe, as a dead
body. Acts v. 6 ; (2) to contract,
perf., pass., part., contracted, slwrt,
I Cor. vii. 29.
ffv-aTivd^oa, to groan together, Rom.
viii. 22.
ffv-ffToix^o), «, to be correspondent vnth
(dat.). Gal iv. 25.
<rv-arpaTia>7T]s, ov, 6, a fellow -soldier,
i.e., in the Christian service, Phil.
ii. 25 ; Philemon 2.
ffv-ffrpe^ci), \l/a>, to roll or gather together ^
Acts xxviiL 3.
<Tv-arpo<pi], 9)$, 7}, a gathering together^
a concourse. Acts xix. 40 ; a gather-
ing of conspirators. Acts xxiii. 12.
crv-ffxviJ'aTlCa}, in pass. , to conform one-
self, or to be assimilated to (dat.),
Rom. xii. 2 ; i Pet. i. 14.
2ux"P or ^ix'^p, V, Sydiar.
^vx^iJ., (i) ^, Shechem, the prince,
Acts vii. 16; (2) 7), Shechem, the
city. Acts viii. 19.
(r<payf], ^s, tj, (i) slaughter. Acts
viii. 32; Rom. viii. 36 (LXX.);
(2) met., a feast, or feasting, James
^- 5-
e<pdyiov, ov, t6, a slaughtered victim in
sacrifice. Acts viL 42.
<T<p(i(a), |a, pass., perf., €<r(payfJLcu ; and
aor., 4a(l>dy7iv ; (i) to kill by violence,
to slay in sacrifice. Rev. v. 6, 9 ;
(2) to wound mortally, Rev. xiiL 3.
(r<p65pa, adv., exceedingly, greatly,
veJiemently, as Matt. ii. 10.
(r<poBpa>s, adv., veJiemently, Acts xxviL
18.
<T<ppayi^<j», iffca, to seal, to set a seal
upon, (i) for security. Matt, xxvii.
, 66 ; (2) for secrecy. Rev. xxii. 10 ;
j (3) for designation, Eph. i. 13; or
I (4) for confirmation, R^m. xv. a8.
(r<j>pa'y 's — TaXanrwpew]
VOCABULARY.
127
ffipoayis, TSos, ^, (i) a seal, the instru-
ment, Rev. vii. 2 ; ^Ae impi-ession,
whether for security and secrecy, as
■ Kev. V. I ; or for designation, Rev.
ix. 4; (3) the motto of a seal, 2 Tim.
ii. 19 ; (4) that which the seal attests,
the proof, i Cor. ix. 2.
<T<pvp6v, ov, r6, the ankle-bone.
(rxeSt^y, adv., nearly, almost.
o-xVH-^ o-T^os, r6, fashion, habit ; i Cor.
vii. 31 ; form, appearan/ie, Phil,
ii. 8. See Synonyms.
(rxK<^, ((TO), to rend, to divide asunder,
i.e., rocks. Matt, xxvii. 51; pass.,
to be divided into parties. Acts xiv. 4.
<rX»V/ia, aros, to, a rent, as in a gar-
ment, Mark ii. 21 ; a division, a
dissension, "schism," i Cor. i. 10.
See Synonyms.
(Txoiviou, ov, r6 [(Txolvos, a rush), a
cord, a rope, John ii. 15; Acts
xxvii. 32.
(TxoAa^a;, dcTo), to be at leisure, to be
empty, or unoccupied. Matt. xii. 44.
(rxo^v, vh V (leisure), a school. Acts
xix. 9.
(TwCco, ffdoffcu, perf., aeffccKa; pass.,
(reawa/xai ; ist aor. pass., i(rd!>drjv ;
(1) to save, from evil or danger,
Matt. viii. 25, xvi. 25 ; (2) to heal.
Matt. ix. 21, 22; (3) to save, i.e.,
from eternal death, i Tim. i. 15;
part., pass., 01 ffcu^Sfj-eyoi, those who
are being saved. Acts ii. 47, i.e.,
who are in the way of salvation.
flrcSjuo, aros, to, a body, i.e., (1) any
material body, plants, sun, moon,
&c. ; (2) the living body of a man,
as I Cor. xii. 12, or animal, James
iii. 3 ; the glorified body, the body
of Christ; aci^fxara. Rev. xviii. 13,
slaves ; (3) a dead body, a corpse.
Acts ix. 40; (4.) fig., a community,
the church, the mystic body of
Christ, CoL i. 24; {5) met., for t/te.
entire man, the self, Hom. xii. i ;
(6) substance, opp. to shadow, Col.
ii. 17.
(TwfmTiKos, i], 6u, of or pertaining to
the body, i Tim. iv. 8 ; bodily, cor-
r>oreal, Luke iii. 22; adv., -cos,
corporeally, Col^ ii. 9.
Sc^Trorpos, ov, 6, Sopater, or Sosipater,
Acts XX. 4 (Rom. xvi. 21).
(TwpevcD, aw, to heap up, to load, Rom.
xii. 20 ; 2 Tim. iii. 1 6.
'2ua66jn}5, ov, 6, Sosthenes, Acts xviii.
17; 1 Cor. i. 1. It is uncertain
whether the same person is in-
tended in both.
^(ixrlTrarpos, ou, 6, Sosipater or Sopater^
Rom. xvi. 21 (Acts xx. 4).
(ra}T-r]p, rjpos, 6, a deliverer, preserver,
a Saviour, specially of Christ.
ffuTTfpia, as, rj, welfare, prosperity,
deliverance, preservation, from tem-
poral evils, Acts xxvii. 34 ; Heb.
xi. 7; Acts vii. 25; 2 Pet. iii. 15;
specially salvation, from spiritual
and eternal evils, Luke xix. 9.
ff(t)Tr]pio^, 01, saving, healthful; neut.,
rh acDT-f^piou, salvation, Luke iii. 6;
Eph. vi. 17.
(rQ}<ppov€<o, u, iiaoD, (i) to be of sound
mind, Mark v. 15; (2) to be sober-
minded, Rom. xii. 3 ; Titus ii. 6.
ffcofpovi^M, to make sober-minded, to
teach, to instruct. Tit. ii. 4.
cu)(ppovi(rfi6s, ov, 6, soundness of mind,
sobriety, 2 Tim. i. 7.
(rw<pp6v<as, adv. , soberly, urith prudence,
moderation, Titus ii. 12.
aa^poavvt], r)s, rj, soundness of mind,
sobriety, moderation, discretion.
(rd!}-<ppci)v, OP {ados, am {sound), and
fPpvv), of sound mind, discreet,
modest, i Tim. iiL 2 : Titus i. 2.
T.
T, T, ToD, tau, t, the nineteenth letter.
As a numeral, t' = 300; ^r — 300,000.
ToBfpvai, bjv, at (Lat.), taverns; Acts
XX viii. 15, the three Taverns.
TaMd, 7} (Chald.), Tabitha, Actsix. 36.
Tayfjia, aros, to, an order, or series, a
regular method, i Cor. xv. 23.
toktos, -f), 6v, appointed, set, Acts
xii. 21.
raKanrwpeu), cD, ^aca, to be distre--<sed^
to be in offiiction, to be miserabiet
James iv. 9.
PP
128
VOCABULARY.
[roXaiirttpfa — tcXckJttjs
TaXaiirwpia, as, 7), affliction^ distress,
misery, Rom. iii. i6.
ra\a'nTci}po5, ov, distressed, miserable.
ra\avTia7os, aid, aiov, of a talent weight,
Rev. xvi. 2 J.
rdkavTov, ov, t6, a talent, of silver or
gold. The Jewish talent weighed
3,ooo shekels, Ex. xxxviii. 25, 26;
the shekel being about 4 oz. avoir-
dupois.
TaXiOd, 7] (Chald.), a damsel, Mark
V. 41.
rafxeloy, ov, t6, a storehouse, a secret
chambei\
Tcwvv, adv. (to vvv, tJie things that
now ore), now, or in present cir-
cumstances, according to present
necessity.
rd^is, 6C0S, ij, (i) order, regular
arrangement. Col. ii. 5 ; (2) ap-
pointed succession, Luke i. 8 ; (3)
rank, Heb. v. 6.
j'uireivSs, -fi, 6v (down-trodden), humble,
in condition or in spirit, generally
in a good sense.
ruTreivo-cppoavvT], rjs, rj, lowliness of
mind, humility, real, as Phil. ii. 3 j
or aifected, as Col, ii. 18.
rairfivio}, xa, daaw, to make or bring low^
Luke iii. 5 ; to humble, to lower in
esteem, 2 Cor. xii. 21 ; pass., to be
humbled, Luke xviii. 14 ; to humble
0716' s self, James iv. 10.
raireiywaris, iws, r), humiliation, in cir-
cumstances, Luke i. 48 ; in spirit,
James i. 10.
rapdcrcTQ), |a), to agitate, as water in a
pool, John V. 4, 7 ; to stir up, to
disturb in mind, with fear, grief,
anxiety, doubt.
rapaxv, ^s, V, « stirring, John v. 4 ;
a commotion, or tumult, Mark
xiii. 8.
rdpaxos, ov, 6, a disturbance. Acts
xix. 23; consternation. Acts xii. 18.
TapcTivs, ews, 6. one of Tarsus.
Tct/xTos, ov, 7), Tarsus.
Taprapda, a>, (ixru, to thrust doum to
Tartarus, the classic name for
Hell, 2 Pet. ii. 4,
rda-trw, ^w, (i) to constitute, arrange;
{z) to determine: mid., to appoint.
ravpos, ov, 6, a bull, a bullock.
ravrd, by crasis for ra avrd, the same
things.
Ta^Tj, 7JJ, ^ {edTrro)), a burial, a sepul-
ture, Matt, xxvii. 7.
Td<pos, ov, 6, a burial-place, a sepulchre,
as Matt, xxiii. 27,
rdxa, adv. (quickly), perhaps, E-om.
v. 7.
Taxews, adv. (raxvs), soon, shortly,
Gal. i. 6; hastily, Luke xiv. 21.
rax^vos, ii, 6v, swift, shortly to happen,
2 Pet. i. 14.
rdxos, ovs, r6 (only in the phrase iv
rdxei), quickness, speed.
raxvs, 6?o, i, quick, swift; raxv,
rdxiov, rdxicrra, adverbially, swiftly;
more, most, speedily.
re, conj. of annexation, and, both
(see 403).
T€ixos, OVS, t6, a wall of a city, Acts
ix. 25.
TiKfjuhpLov, ov, t6, a sign, a certain
proof, Acts i. 3.
TCKviov, ov, t6 (dim. of riKvov), a little
child, I John ii. i, 12, 28.
TCKvo-youio), a, to bear children, to be
the mother of a family, i Tim.
V. 14,
TCKvo-yopia, ay, t], child-bearing, i Tim.
ii. 15. For the iuterj)retation of
this difficult passage, see " Anno-
tated Paragraph Bible."
TiKvov, ov, r6 (riKTO)), a child, a
descendayit; tig., a pupil, a fol-
lower, an inhabitant, a partaker of
any given character (gen.), wortiiy
of (gen. of punishment).
TeKvo-rpo(p€CD, w, to bring up children,
I Tim. V. 10.
t4ktcov, ovos (compare t^x*^)> ^^
artificer, a carpenter or smith.
rdXfios, fla, elou perfect, as (1)
complete, in all its parts ; (z)
full grown, of full age ; (3) spe-
cially of the completeness of
Christian character, mature; adv.,
-ois, perfectly, to the end, i Pet.
i. 13.
TeA€j({T7js, TTjTos, ^, perfectuess. Chris-
tian maturity, CoL iii. 14; Heb.
vi. I.
TcXciOO) Tl Wo)]
VOCABULARY.
129
i
Ti\ei6(i>, u, <t)a(i>, (i) to complete, to
finish, as a course, a race, or the
like ; (2) to accomplish, as time,
or prediction, Luke ii. 43 ; John
xix. 28 ; (3) to make complete, to
expiate perfectly, Heb. vii. 19;
pass., to die, Luke xiii. 32 ; <o reach
the perfect state, Phil. iii. 1 2.
TiKtiuais, eMs, Tj, completion, fulfilment,
Luke i. 45 ; perfect expiation, Heb.
viL II.
T€Aeta>TT]s, ov, b, one who makes per-
fect, a finisher, Heb. xii. 2 ; coinp.
Heb. ii. 10.
T€\((T-<j)op4w, 00, to bring to maturity,
as grain, Luke viii. 14.
TiXivrdw, S>, to end, to finish, e.g.,
life ; so, to die. Matt. ix. 18; to be
pvt to death, Mark vii. 10.
TiXivri], ris, tj, end of life, death.
TtXeo), u>, eaoD, rereAtKa, t^t eXeafiai,
ireXeadr^v, (1) ^^ end, to finish ; {2)
to fulfil, to accomplish, to go through;
(3) to pay off in full.
TtAos, ovs, t6, (i) an end; (2) an
accomplishment. Luke xxii. 37; (3)
event or issue. Matt. xxvi. 58 ; (4)
the sum,, tlie principal end, or scope ;
{5) an impost or tax. Matt. xvii. 25.
TiXwuris, ov, 6, a toll-gatherer, a col-
lector of customs, one who farms
taxes, a *^ publican."
reXuv.ov, ov, r6, a toll-house, a col-
lector's office.
T6pas, arus, to, plur. only, wonders,
portents, with atj/xe'ia, signs and
wonders. Acts vii. 36; John iv. 48.
See Synonyms.
TcpTios, vv, 6 (Lat.), Tertius, Kom.
xvi. 22.
T^prvXKus, ov, 6, Tertullus, Acts
xxiv. I.
T(.(Toap6.KovTa, forty.
TtacrapaK'VTa erijs, €s, of forty years,
age or time.
ttaoapes, reaaapa, gen., (01/, four.
Tiaaapis-Kai-teKUTos, ord. num., four-
teenth.
TerapToios, ala, aiov, of the fourth
(day), John xi. 39.
T€TapTos, T], ou, ord. nvim. , fourth.
TiTpd-'iwvos, ov, four-cornered.
rerpadiov, lov, r6, a quaternion, or
guard of four soldiers.
r('rpaKia--x''X:oi, ai, a, four thousand.
TfrpaKoaioi, ai, a, four hundred.
Tirpd-nTji/us, uv, of four months, i.e., a
lapse (xpJj/os) of that period, John
iv. 35-
T€rpa-Tr\6os, ots, rj, ovv, fourfold, Luke
xix. 8.
TCT/jd-TTtius, ovy, oBos, four-footed. Acta
X. 12 ; Jriom. i. 23.
T€Tp-opxeaj, <a, to rule over, as a
tetrarch (gen.), Luke iii. i.
Terp-dpxvs, ov, 6, a ruler over a fourth
jjai't of a kingdom, a tetraixh,
applied to rulers over any part,
Luke xiv. i.
T€y;^a), see TvyxoLVca.
re(pp6ci), ca, doow {recppa, ashes), to reduce
to ashes, 2 Pet. iL 6.
r^xvY], r}s, ^, (1) a7-t, skill; (2) an art,
craft, a trade.
TfxviVrjs, ov, 6, an artificer, crafts-
man. Acts xix. 24; of the Divine
artificer, Heb. xi. 10.
TiKco, in pass., to be melted, 2 Pet.
iii. 13.
rrjX-avyus, adv. (ttjAc, afa?'), far-
shining, brilliantly, Mark viii, 25.
TrjXiKovTus, avTTi, ovto, dem. pron., so
great.
rr^pe-jt), a, -flaw, (i) to watch carefidly,
witJi good or evil design ; (2) to
guard; (3) to keep or reserve; (4)
to observe, as enactments or ordi-
nances.
rr,pri<rLs, eccy, rj, (i) a place of ward, a
prison. Acts iv. 3 ; (2) observance,
as of precepts, i Cor. vii. 19.
TiPcp.ds, ddus, T], I'lberias, John vi. i,
xxi. !.
TtjSepios, ov, b, Tiberius, Luke iii. i.
Ti67][ii (see 107), i^) to place, set, put
forth, down, away, aside, &c.;
mid. , to cause to put, or to put for
one's self; (2) to constitute, to make,
to render; mid., to assign, deter-
mine.
j TLKTw, Tf^oixai, 2nd aor., ^n^Kcv ; ist
! aor. pass., hix^i]v; to bear, t9
bring forth, as females, the earth.
! riAAo), to pluck, to pluck otf
130
VOCABULARY.
[Tifxatos — Tp€ts
Tificuos, ov, 6, Timceus, Mark x. 4 6.
Tifidw, a>, ■^cro), (1) to estimate, to value
at a price. Matt, xxvii. 9 ; {z) to
honour, to reverence.
71IMT}, 7JS, 7], (i) a price, value, pre-
ciousness, i.e., great value, i Pet.
ii. 7 ; (2) ho7iour, a state of honoiir,
Eom. ix. 21 ; an honourable office,
Heb. V. 4 ; an honourable use,
2 Tim, ii. 20, 21.
rifuos, ia, toy, of great price, precious,
honoured.
ri/ju6Tr]5, TijTos, 7), preciou,8ness, costli-
ness.
Tiu6-6eo<i, ov, 6, Timotheus or Timothy.
Ti/xwi', wvos, Timo7i, Acts vi. 5.
rifjLtofjew, ia, to punish (acc).
rificcpia, as, ij, punishment, retribution,
Heb. X. 29.
Tivco, see in t/w.
Tis, T4, gen., Tivos (enclitic), indef.
pron., any one (see 352).
*'*» ''■*; geii-» TiVos; an interrogative
pron., who ? which ? what ? (see
350).
t(tAos, ov, b (Lat.), tiUe, superscrip-
tion, John xix. 19, 20.
Titos, ov, 6, Titus.
rid) or TiVco, rlao), to pay, to honour,
to pai/juMice,i.e., to suffer punish-
ment, 2 Thess. i. 9.
Tot, an enelit part., truly, indeed.
Toi-'yap-ovv, consequently, therefore,
I Thess. iv. 8 ; Heb. xii. i.
T0/-76, although (in /cotVoQe).
roi-wv, indeed now, Hierefore, Luke
XX. 25; I Cor. ix. 26; Heb. xiii. 13;
James ii. 24.
T0i<J(r-15e, Totcr'56, roif>vl^, demonst. pron. ,
of this kind, such, 2 Pet. i. 17.
TOioinos, TOJOwTTj, tojoDto, demonst.
pron., (i) such as, sometimes with
olos precedent, i Cor, xv. 48; as...
such as, (2) such, i.e., so great, in a
good sense, 2 Cor. xii. 2, 3, 5 ; in
a bad sense, Acts xxii. 22. With
art., see 22.0.
roixot, ov, 6, a wall, of a house, Acts
xxiii. 3 ; (listing, from Ti^xos, a
wall of (I city.
r6Kos. oj, 6 (a bringing forth), interest,
usury, Matt. xxv. ^^,
ToAjiictw, S), i}(T(a, (i) to dare, to venture
(inf. ) ; (2) to have courage.
ro\ixrjp6Tipov (comp. of roX/xrjpws, adv. ,
boldly), the more boldly, Rom.
XV. IS.
ToAftTjT^s, OV, 6, a daring one, one over
bold, audacious, or presumptuous,
2 Pet. ii. 10.
Tofx6s, 7?, 6v, in comp., TOfidmpos,
sharper, keener, Heb. iv. 12.
T<J^oj/, ov, t6, a bow. Rev. vi. 2.
TOTra^iov, iov, 16, the topaz. Rev.
xxi. 20.
r&TTos, ov, 6, [i) a place, i.e , a district,
or region, or a particular spot in a
region ; (2) the place one occupies,
the room, an abode, a seat, a slieath
for a sword; (3) a passage in a
book; {^) state, condition; {$) oppor-
tunity, possibdity.
ToffovTos, TocrouTTj, TOffovTo, dcmoust.
pron., .90 great, so much, so long;
phi., so many.
t6t€, demonst. adv., then.
rovvavTiov, for rh iyavriov, on the COU-
trary. Gal. ii. 7.
Toijyofia, for rh tvona, by name. Matt.
xxvii, 57.
TowTeVrt, for tout' ^ffri, that is ;
"i.e.," Acts i. 19.
toCto, neut. of o7nos, which see.
Tpd-yos, ov, 6, a he-goat.
rpdireCa, rjy, v, 0, table (i) for food and
banqueting ; (2) for money-cJuxngers,
or business.
rpairi^Ti/js, ov, 6, a money-changer, a
banker. Matt. xxv. 27.
rpwfxa, uTos, t6, a wound.
rpai'/xariCo, l<r(c, to wound, Lulce xx.
12 ; Acts xix. 16.
Tpax^jAt'Cw. 'k^'o, in pas<*., to be laid
bare, to be laid open, Heb. iv. 13.
Tpdxv^os, ov, 6, tlie neck, as Luke
XV. 20 ; met., for life, Rom.
xvi. 14.
Tpax''>s, e*o, V, rough, uneven, as ways,
Luke iii. 5 ; as rocks in the sea,
Acts xxvii. 29.
Tpoxw^iTts, iSoi, T}, Trachonitis, the
N, E. of the territory beyond
Jordan.
rpds, rpia, three*
rpi^o) — Tvpos]
VOCABULARY.
131
Tpe/jLco, to tremble, to he afraid.
Tpecpd), dpeypca, perf., pass., Tedpafiixai,
to feed, to nourish, to sustain. Matt.
vi. 26; to pamper, James v. 5.
Tpe'xo), 2nd aor., eSpafiov, (i) to run,
in a race, i Cor. ix. 24 ; {z) to run,
making an effort, Rom. ix. 16 ; (3)
to run, or spread, as a rumour,
2 Thess, iii, i.
TpidKovra, indecl., thirty.
TpiaK6(Tioi, at, o, three hundred.
rpi^oXos, ov, 6, a triple- thorned shrub,
a thistle. Matt. vii. 16.
rpi^os, ou, 7), a path worn, a road, a
beaten way.
rpL-eria, as, tj, « space of three years,
Acts XX. 31.
Tpi(oo, to grate, to gnash, as the teeth,
in severe pain, Mark ix. 18.
7pi-fir]uos, ov, three montlis, neut. as
subst., Heb. xi. 23.
Tpis, num. adv., thrice.
Tpi-ffreyos, ov, having three floors,
neut. , the third floor or story, Acts
XX. 9.
Tpi(T-x'^\ioi, ai, a, three thousand,
rpiros, 77, ov, ord. num., third; neut.,
rh rpirov, the third part. Rev.
viii. 7 ; the third time, Mark xiv. 41.
Tpi'xes, plur. of 6p;|, which see.
rpixtvos, rj, ov, made of hair, Rev.
vi. 12.
rp6iios, ov, h, a trembling, e.g., from
fear; self-disU'ust, Phil. ii. 12.
TpoTTT], ris, ri, a turning, a change.
TpojTos, ov, 6, (i) manner; hv rpSirov,
as. Matt, xxiii. 37, &c. ; (2) course
of life, disposition, Heb. xiii. 5.
Tpoiro-<pop4co, a, riffw, to bear with the
disposition or character of others,
Acts xiii. 18, where perhaps the
true reading is iTpo(l)o<p6pr]a-€v, he
bare them as a nurse.
rpo(f)ii, 7]s, 7}, food, nourishment, main-
tenance.
Tp6<piiios, ov, 6, Trophimus.
Tpo(p6s, ov, f], a nurse, i Thess. ii. 7.
Tpoxm, ay, i], the track of a wheel, a
path, fig., Heb. xii. 13.
rpox^s, ov, S, a track of a wheel, a
circle, a course, James iii. 6.
rpvfiXiov, iov, r6, a dish, a platter.
rpvydu), w, ■fia-ea, to gather, as in the
vintage, Luke vi. 44 ; Rev. xiv,
18, 19.
rpvyccv, 6vos, r) (rpu^w), a turtle-dove.
TpvfMaXid, us, 7], the eye of a needle,
Mark x. 25.
TpvTnjfia, oTos, r6, a hole, the eye of a
needle. Matt. xix. 24.
Tpv<paiva, ijy, rj, Tryphcena, Rom.
xvi. 12,
rpv^'m, <a, ijffcc, to live luxuriously, to
take one^s fill of pleasure, James
V. 5.
Tpu(pw<Ta, 7]5, 7), Tryphosa, Rom.
xvi. 12.
Tpcods, dSos, 7], Troas. a city of Mysia,
properly Alexandria Troas.
TpayvWiOv, ov, r6, Trogyllium, Acts
XX. 15.
rpa^yo), to eat. Matt. xxiv. 38 {feasting
and revelling).
Tvyxp-Vbi {tvx- or r€vx-), fut., rev^ofxeu;
2nd aor., €tvxov ; perf., r4rvxa;
( 1 ) to attain, to get possession of
(gen. ), Luke xx. 3 5 ; Acts xxiv. 3 ;
(2) to fall out, to happen, to happen
to be, Luke x. 30 ; e* rvxoi, if it
may be so, perchance, i Cor. xiv. 10;
2nd aor. part., 'rvx<^v, ordinary,
commonplace, A cts xix. 1 1 ; neut.,
rvx6v, what may be, perlmps, i Cor.
xvi. 6.
TvfnraviCo, (o'a>, to beat or scourge to
death when stretched on a ivhed,
Heb. xi. 35.
rvTTos, ov, 6, (i) a mark, an impression^
produced Ijy a blow ; (z) the figure
of a thing, a pattern, "type;" (3)
an emblem, an example; (4) the form
or contents of a letter; (5) a rule,
a form of doctrine.
TiiTTTw, \^ft>, to beat, to strike, as the
breast in grief, Luke xviii. 13 ; to
inflict punishment, Acts xxiii. 3 ;
to wound or offend the conscience,
I Cor. viii. 12.
Tvpavvos, ov, 6, Tyrannus, Acts
xix. 9.
TvpB'i-Co}, to agitate, or, disturb in mind,
Luke X. 41.
Tvpios, ov, of Tyre, Tyrian.
Tvpos, ov, 7], Tyre, a city of Pheniciau
132
VOCABULARY.
[TV(|>Xds — vir-av8poj
rv<l)\6s, -f], 6vy Uind, (i) physically,
(2) mentally, i.e., ignorant, stupid,
dull of apprehension.
rv<px6a)^ S}, dxTta, fig., to make blind, or
dull of apprehension, John xii. 40 ;
2 Cor. iv. 4.
rv(p6ci>, «, (cffo), to raise a smoJce; pass.,
lig. , to he proud, to be arrogant and
conceited, i Tim. iii. 6.
rv(pa}, in pass., part., smoking, dimly
burning. Matt. xii. 20.
rv(pa)viK6s, i], 6v, violent, tempestuous,
like a whirlwind. Acts xxvii. 14.
Ti'xiKos, ovj 6 (or Tvxik6s), Tychi-
chus.
Tvx6v, see rvyx^-vca.
r.
T, V, v^lKov, upsilon, u, the twentieth
letter. As a numeral, v = 400 ;
.V = 400,000. At the commence-
ment of a word, v is always
aspirated.
vaKLvQivos, rj, ov, "hyacin thine," of the
colour of the hyacinth, dark purple.
Rev. ix. 17.
v6.KivQos, ov, 6, "hyacinth," a purple
gem, "jacinth," Rev. xxL 20.
vd\ivo^, T}, ov, glassy, transparent.
Rev. iv. 6.
vaXos, ov, ri, a pellucid stone, like glass,
crystal. Rev. xxi. 21.
vBptC<^, <Tw, to treat with insolence or
contumely, to abuse,
v^pis, eojs, 7], (i) insolence, contumely,
2 Cor. xii. 10; (2) damage, loss,
Acts xxvii. 10.
v^piffT-fis, ov, <S, an insolent, injurious
Tnnn.
vyiaivoD, to he well, to he in health,
Luke V. 31; fig. , to he sound, in
{iv) faith, doctrine, &c.. Tit. i. 13;
part., vyiaivwv, healthful, wholesome,
of instruction, i Tim. i. 10.
l^i-hs, «?, (i) souiul, whole, in health;
(2) tig., wholesome,' of teaching,
Tit. ii. 8.
6yp6s, d, 6v, moist, of a tree; green,
i.e., full of sap, Luke xxiii. 31.
v5/»fa, OS, Tj, a uxiter-pot, John ii. 6.
vSpo-TTOTeo), w, to be a water-drinker,
I Tim. V. 23.
vSpu}TriK6s, 7}, 6v, dropsical, Luke
xiv. 2.
JfSwp, vhaTos, TO, water ; vSara, water»^
streams, also a body of water, as
Matt. xiv. 28 ; y'Swp ^iiv, living or
running water; tig., of spiritual
truth, John iv. 14.
veT6s, ov, 6 (vo), to rain), rain.
vlo-dea-ia, o?, 7), adoption, sonship, Ib
the Divine family here and here*
after, Rom. ix. 4, viiL 15, 23.
vi6s, ov, 6, a son, a child. Matt,
xvii. 25 ; a descendant; the offspring
or young of an animal. Matt. xxi. 5 ;
an adopted son, Heb. xi. 24; a
disciple or follower. Matt. xii. 27 ;
one who resembles (gen.). Matt.
V. 45 ; one who partakes of any
quality or character, Luke x. 6 ;
John xii. 36 ; 6 vlbs rov avdpSTrov,
Son of man (once only without
art., John v. 27) very often used
by our Lord of himself (only once
by another of him. Acts vii. 56);
in reference to Dan. vii. 13 {sons
of men denote me)i generally in
Mark iil 28 ; Eph. iii. 5, only)
For vihs 06OU, Son of God, see
217, c.
vArj, T}s, T}, wood, fuel, James iii. 5.
iffxeh, plur. of (TV, which see.
*Tfi€vatos, ov, 6, Hymeiioeus.
vfxirepos, possess, pron., your, as be-
longing to, or as proceeding from.
v/Mveu, a>, -fja-o), (i) to Sing, or recite
hymns to, ace. ; {z) to sing praise.
ijfivos, ov, d, a hymn, a saa-ed song.
vTr-dyo), to go away, to take oneself
away ; imperat., sometimes an ex-
pression of aversion, begone. Matt,
iv. 10; sometimes a farewell only,
Matt. viii. 13, 32; to die, Matt,
xxvi. 24.
inr-aKoi], r^s, 7], obedience. Rum. vi. 16.
inr-aKoixa, <T(i>, (i) to liaten, as at a
door, to tind who seeks admission,
Acts xii. 13; (2) to liearken to, so
as to obey (dat. ).
vTT-avopos, ov, under a husband,
married, Rom. vii. 2.
vir-avTaci)-
VOCABULARY.
isa
vK-avTOLO}, w, 7)<roi}, to meet (dat.).
inr-dvTr]<ris, ecos, i], a Tneeting, John
xii. 13. I
vTTap^is, ecos, rj, goods, substance, pro-
perty. Acts ii. 45 ; Heb. x. 34.
inr-dpxco, (i) to subsist; (2) to be
originally ; (3) to be, Luke viii. 41 ;
with dat. of pers., to have, to pos-
sess; part., neut., pi., t^ virdpxovra,
things which one possesses, goods,
property. Matt. xix. 21.
vTr-eiKw, to yield, to submit to autho-
rity.
inr-evaurlos, la, iov, opposite to, adverse.
Col. ii. 14; as subst., an adversary,
Heb. X. 27.
vTTfp. prep. , gov. gen. and accus.
With gen., over, for, on belmlf of;
•with accus., above, supei^ior to (see
303). Adverbially, above, 7/iore,
2 Cor. xi. 23. In composition, inr\p
denotes superiority (above), or aid
(on behalf of).
(nrep-alpa), in mid., to lift tip oneself,
to exalt oneself, to be arrogant,
2 Cor. xii. 7 ; 2 Thess. ii. 4.
virep-aKfMos, ov, past the acme or flower
of life, I Cor. vii. 36.
virep-dvo), adv. (gen.), above.
virsp-av^dvu), to increase exceedingly,
2 Thess. i. 3.
virep-^aivoi}, to go beyond, to over-reach,
1 'I'hess. iv. 6.
vTr€p-&a\\6uTcos, adv., greatly beyond
measure, 2 Cor. xi. 23.
virep-^dXXw, part., pres., inrep^dWwv,
surpassing, super-eminent.
virep-fioX-f), tjs, t], excess, exuberance,
surpassing excellence, pre-eminence;
Kad' vTreo^oXrju, as adv., exceedingly,
Rom. vii. 1 3 ; 2 Cor. i. 8.
virep-eihov (see Moj/), to overlook, to
wink at, to bear with. Acts xvii. 30.
vTTfp-eKeipa, adv., beyond, farther,
2 Cor. X. 16.
virep-eK-TrepLfftTov, adv., beyond all
measure, in the highest possible
degree, Eph. iii. 20.
virep-iK-T(ivu>, to stretch out overmuch,
2 Cor. X. 14.
vTrep-eK-xvvofji.ai, to be poured out over,
to overjiow, Luke vL 38.
vTrep-ev-rvyxduw, to intercede for, Eom.
viii. 26.
iirep-exo, to excel, to surpass (gen.),
to be supreme, 1 Pet. ii. 13 ; })art.,
rb vTrepexov, excellency, super-
eminence, Phil, ii 8.
vTrep-7](pauia, as, 7), pride, an'oqance,
Mark vii. 22.
xnrep-i\<pavos, ov {(paivw, 1) connective),
arrogant, haughty, James iv. 6.
uirep-\iav, adv., very much, pre-
eminently, 2 Cor. xi. 5, xii. 11.
vTrep-viKdci), w, to be more than con-
queror, Jiom. viii. 37.
vTTcp-oyKos, tumid, boastful, as lan-
guage, 2 Pet. ii. 18.
inrep-oxv, V^, V, eminence, superiority,
authority, i Cor. ii. i ; 1 Tim. ii. 2.
virep-Trepia-ffevco, to superabound ; Rom.
v. 20 ; pass., to be very abundant in
(dat.), 2 Cor. vii. 4.
uTrfp-Trepio-ffws, adv., superabundantly ^
above measure, Mark vii. 37.
virep-irKeovdCo}, to superabound, i Tim.
i. 14.
vitep-v^6(a, 5), to highly exalt, to place
in dignity and authority over all,
Phil. li. 9.
vTr€p-<ppove(a, w, to think over-highly of
oneself, Horn. xii. 3.
inreptiov, ov, t6, the upper part of
a house, an upper chamber, Acts
i. 13.
vTc-4x<>^, to submit to, to undergo (ace).
inr-'f]Koos, ov, listening to, obedient to
(dat.), submissive.
inr-7)peT4co, a>, to minister to, to serve
(dat.).
inr-rjpeTTjS, ov, 6 (eperrjs, a rower), a
servant, attendant, specially {)} an
officer, a lictor ; (2) an attendant in
a synagogue; (3) a minister of the
Gospel.
virvos, ov, 6, sleep ; fig. , spiritual sleep,
or slothfulness.
vir6, prep., gov. gen. and accus.,
under. With gen., by, generally
signifying the agent; with accus.,
under, beneath, of place, of time,
or of subjection to authority (see
304). In composition, inr6 denotes
subjection^ diminution, secrecy.
134
VOCABULARY. [^o-pdWo) — viro-xop^
wjTo-jSdXAw, to put under, to suborn.
inro-ypafji.fjLds, ov, 6, a pattern, an
example, i Pet. ii. 21.
tnr6 Seijiia, aros, r6, (i) an example
ior imitation, or for warning ; (2) a
typical representation, Heb. viii. 5,
ix. 23.
inro-SeiKPvfii, to show plainly, as by-
placing under the eyes, to teach
(dat.).
inro-dexofiat, to receive as a guest, to
entertain (ace. ).
vTro-S4w, u), -nao), in mid,, to hind on
one's sandals, Eph. vL 15: ^^san-
dalled as to the fee f
inrS-Sifjixa, aros, t6, a sandal.
vKoSiKos, OP, convicted, pronounced
guilty, lit., "under penalty to"
(dat.), Rom. iii. 19.
inro (vjiov, ou, t6, an animal under
yoke, an ass.
inro-(d!)vi/vfii, to undergird, as a ship
for strength against the waves,
Acts xxvii, 1 7.
inro-Kdria, adv., underneath (as prep.
with gen. ).
vTro-Kplvofiai, dep., to act under a
mask, to personate, to pretend (ace,
inf.).
fnr6-Kpi<ns, ecus, i), "stage playing,"
hypocrisy, dissembling, 1 Tim.
iv. 2.
{nro-Kpiris, ov, 6 ("a stage player"),
a hypocrite, a dissemblej'. Matt.
xvL 3.
vTro-\afiBdua}, 2nd aor., vireXaBov, (i)
to take up, to receive up, Acts i. 9 ;
(z) to take up a discourse, to answer;
(3) to think, to judge, to suppose,
Luke vii. 43.
inro-KelTrw, in pass., to be left beJiind,
Rom. xL 3.
viro-Krviov, ov, r6 {Xt]v6s), tite
cavity forming Oie wine-vat, Mark
xii. I.
inro-Kitiirdvoe, to leave, to leave behind,
I Pet. ii. 21.
inrofihu), (i) to bear up under, to
endure (ace); (2) to persevere, to
remain constant. Matt. x. 22 ; (3)
to remain, or stay behind, Luke
ii 43.
vTro-nifitrfiffKO), vTroixvi](ra), ist aor. pass.,
vTrffxvr,<r6r]v, to remind (ace. of pers.),
John xiv. 26 ; pass., to call to mind,
to remember, Luke xxii. 61.
vTr6-fivii)(Tis, ews, ^, (i) remembrance,
recollection, 2 Tim. i. 5 ; (2) a
putting in mind, 2 Pet. i. 13.
vTTo-fjLoirf], Tjs, rj, a bearing up under,
endtirance, perseverance, patient
UKiiting for (gen.).
inro-voeu, a, to conjecture, to suspect.
Acts XXV. 18.
inrS-voia, as, 7], suspicion, i Tim. vi. 4.
UTTO -TrAew (f), ist aor., VTr4rr\evcra, to
sail under shelter of (ace). Acts
xxvii. 4, 7.
viro-irveo) (f), ist aor., VTreirvevaa, to
blow gently, of the wind, Acts
xxvii. 13.
inro-Tr6Biov, ov, t6, a footstool.
inr6-(TTa(rts, (cos, fi, (i) a basis or
foundation; (2) firm confidence,
assured expectation, Heb. xi. 1 ; (3)
substance, reality, essential nature,
^ HeK i. 3.
u7ro-<rTeAAa>, eAcS, ist aor,, virfa-rciXa,
to draw back. Gal. ii. 12 ; mid., to
shrink, to draw one's self back, Heb.
X. 38 (from, by rov /«?, with inf.,
Acts XX. 27).
inro-a-ToK^, r)s, t), a shrinking, a draw-
ing back, Heb. x. 39.
vTro-<rrp4<pci), \|/ci>, to turn back, to return,
intraus.
viroffrpwvvvixi, or -wpvvu, to strew under ,
Luke xix. 36.
viro-Toyi], ris, v, subjection, submission.
Gal. ii. 5.
uiro-To<r<ra>, fa>, 2nd aor. pass., {nre-
rd-y-qv, to place under, to subject;
mid., to submit oneself , to he obedient.
vvo-ridTifjLi, to set or put under; mid.,
to suggest, to counsel, to advise.
VKo-Tpexc, 2nd aor. , inredpafiop, to run
under lee or shelter of, Acts xxvii.
16. ^ .
inro-rinruffis, e«s, rj, pattern, example,
I Tim. i. 16; 2 Tim. i. 13.
viro-<p4po), ist aor., inr-nvcyKa, to bear
up under, to sustain, to endure.
uiro-x«p€«, w, vo'oi, to withdraw
quietly, to retire, Luke ix. lo.
{iir-a>Tridt» — 4>ap^sJ
VOCABULARY.
135
vir-anridCw, to strike under tite eye;
hence, (i) to subject to Ivardship,
1 Cor. ix. 27 ; {z) to weary out, by
repeated application, Luke xviii. 5.
£s, uo$, 6, T}, a hog, hoar, or sow^
2 Pet. ii. 2z.
vffaooTTos, ov, T\. hyssop, a stalk or stem
of hyssop, John xix. 29 ; a bunch of
hyssop for sprinkling, Heb. ix. 1 9.
ucrepeco, w, iiffw, to he heliind, to fall
short, John ii. 3 ; to come short of,
gen., Rom. iii. 23; to fail of attain-
ing {a.Tr6), to he inferior to (gen.),
I Cor. viii. 8 ; pass. , to suffer need,
Luke XV. 14.
\)(Trep7]^ia, fiaros, t6, (i) that which is
lacking, or wanting to (gen.). Col.
i. 24 ; 1 Thess. iii. 10 ; (2) need,
poverty.
va-Teprjaris, €w?, rj, poverty, penury,
Mark xii. 44.
v(TT€pos, a, ov, compar., latter, 1 Tim.
iv. I ; neut. as an adv., last, after-
wards, with gen.. Matt, xxii, 27 ;
Luke XX. 32.
v(pauT6s, 7j, 6p {u(palv(i}, to weave),
woven, John xix. 23.
i^7}\6s, if, 6v, (i) high, elevated: (2)
distinguished, pre-eminent.
v\pT]\o-((>pou€Ci), S>, to be high-minded,
pi'oud, assuming, Rom. xi. 20 ;
I Tim. vi. 17.
lirj/iffTos, 7j, ou (superlat. of S^t, highly),
highest, most elevated; neut., plur.,
the highest places, the heights, i.e.,
the heavens ; 6 {Ji/zio-tos, the Most
High, i.e., God, as dwelling in the
heavens.
v^os, ovs, t6, Jieight, opp. to ^dOos,
Eph. iii. 18; e| ii\]/ous, from on
high, i.e., from God. So els liil/os,
to God, Eph. iv. 8 ; fig., elevation,
dignity, James i. 9.
vxl/oco, a>, uxrca, (i) to raise on high, to
elevate, as the brazen serpent, and
Jesus on the cross ; (2) to exalt, to
set on high. Acts ii. 33; (3) to
elevate, i.e., to raise from a lowly
to a dignified condition ; (4) to exalt
in estimation, Matt, xxiii. 12.
vxlxajbLo, cToy, tJ, height, Rom. viiL 39 ;
citadel, fig., 2 Cor. x. 5. .
*, <p, ^7, phi, ph, the twenty-first
letter. As a numeral, ((>' = 500 ;
^^ = 500,000.
Matt. xi.
(payos, ov, d, a
19.
(pdyw, see i<r6lof.
<paiK6vr]s, ov, 6 (or <pe\6inis), a cloak,
or perhaps a portmanteau, or case
for hooks, &c., 2 Tim. iv. 13. (Lat.,
pcenuln, \ and v interchanged. )
<f)aivu, (pavu, 2nd aor., pass., i<pdv7]v,
to shine, to give light, 2 Pet. i. 19;
pass,, to be conspicuous, to appear,
to seem to he thought ; Tk (\>aivou.iva^
things seen, "phenomena," Heb.
xi. 3 ; mid. , to appear in judgmenty
I Pet iv. 18.
*oA.e/c, 6 (Heb.), Phaleg, Luke iii.
35-
<pavep6s, d, 6v, apparent, Tnanifest;
iv Tcp (pavepcf, as adv., manifestly.
Matt. vi. 4, 6 ; externally, out-
wardly, Eom. ii. 28. Adv., -cos,
clearly, Acts x. 3 ; publicly, Mark
i. 4S.
^avep6<a, w, (ixrw, to make apparent,
to manifest, to disclose ; pass. , to be
manifested, m/ide manifest, i Tim.
iii. 16 ; 2 Cor. v. 11.
^av4pu(ris, €«y, r), a manifestation
(gen. obj.), 2 Cor. iv. 2 ; i Cor.
xii. 7.
<pav6s, ov, 6, a torch, a lantern, John
xviii. 3.
^avovr}\, 6 (Heb.), Fhanuel, Luke
ii. 36.
(pavTa^co, to cause to appear; pass.,
part., rh ^avTa^6fj.evov, the spectacle,
Heb. xii. 21.
(pavTaaia, as, rj, show, pomp, Acta
XXV. 23.
<pdvTa(Tfia, aros, t6, a phantom, an
apparition. Matt. xiv. 26; Mark
vi. 49.
^dpay^, 0770s, 71, a valley, dell, or
gorge, Luke iii. 5.
^apcua, 6, Pharaoh, the title of ancient
Egyptian kiugs.
i'aph, 6 (Heb. ), Phares, Matt. i. 3 ;
Luke iii. 33.
136
VOCABULARY.
[<j>api(raios — 4*^^*
<l>api(ra7os, ov, 6 (from the Heb. verb,
to separate), a pharisee, one of the
Jewish sect so called.
^ap/jLUKeia, as, ^, magic, art, sorcery,
enckantment, Gal. v. 20.
(papfxaKevs, ecos, 6, a magician, sorcerer,
enchanter. Rev. xxi. 8.
(papfjLaK6s, ov, 6, 7}, as (pap/xaKeis, Rev.
xxii. 15.
(pdiris, €005, 7], report, information.
Acts xxi. 3 1.
(pdffKco (freq. of ^"nfii), to assert, to
affirm, to boast, Rom. i. 22.
^oTKTj, 7JS, V, a manger, a crib, Luke
ii. 7 ; a stable, Luke xiii. 1 5.
(pavAos, 7], ov, vile, wicked, base, opp,
to ayaQ6s.
<p4yyos, ovs, rS, brightness, splendcjr,
of the light of the moon, Mark
xiii. 24; of a lamp, Luke xi.
33-
<peiSofjLai, flffofiai, dep., (i) to spare
(gen.), Acts XX. 29; {z) to Jorbear
{mi.), 2 Cor. xii. 6.
<p€idofx€V(os, adv., sparingly, parsi-
moni usly, 2 Cor. ix. 6.
<p4poi, otcTw, ^veyKa, r]U€xd7]v (see 103),
to bear, as (i) to prodvce irait ; (2)
to carry, as a burden ; (3) to bring ;
(4) to endure, to bear vnth, Rom.
ix. 22 ; (5) to bring forward, as
charges, John xviii. 29; (6) to
uphold, Heb. i. 3 ; (7) mid., to
rush (bear itself on). Acts ii. 2 ;
to go on or advance, in learning,
Heb. vi. I.
itpivyw, ^o/xai, ^(pvyov, to flee, to escape,
to shun (ace. or ottJ).
*^\j^, iKos, d, Felix.
<p7]ii% ris, fi, a rumour, fame. Matt.
ix. 26 ; Luke iv. 14.
(prjixi, imi)f., e<pr}v (for other tenses,
see elirov, ipeu), to say, with Sn,
dat. of pers., irphi (ace), with pers.,
ace. of thing (once ace, inf., Rom.
iii. 8).
*fj(rTos, ov, 6, Festus.
<pdavu>, (pdda-eo, perf., %<p9aKa, (i) to be
before, to precede, 1 Thess. iv. 15;
to come sooner than expected, Matt.
xii. 28 ; (2) to arrive, attain (els.
(pOaprSs, -f], 6v {^0elpu)), corruptible,
perisliable, i Cor. xv. 53, 54.
(pdey-yofiai, y^oficu, dep., to speak aloud,
to utter. Acts iv. 18.
(pdeipcc, (pQcpw, 2nd aor. pass., icpddprjy,
to corrupt, physically or morally, to
spoil, to destroy.
(pQivQ-irapivos, decaying, as fruit and
leaves in autumn, Jude 12.
<p66yyos, ov, 6 {(pdeyy o/xai), a sound,
as of a musical instrument, i Cor.
xiv. 7; the voice, Rom. x. 18.
(pQoviw, u>, i]crw, to envy (dat.), GaL
V. 26.
<p66vos, ov, 6, envy.
(pdopd, as, ri {<p6eip(o), corruption,
destru/ition, physical or spiritual,
2 Pet. ii 12.
(pidXt), 7]s, ri, a bowl, a basin (not
"phial"), Rev., often.
<l>i\-dyaBos. ov, loving goodness, or good
men, Titus i. 8.
^iX-aTiix^eia, as, 7], Philadelphia, Rev.
i. II.
(pi\-a?€\<pia, as, 7], brotherly love, love
of Christian brethren.
(piX-dB€\<pos, ov, 6, 71, loving one's
brethren, loving Christians.
<piX-av7ipos, ov, 71, loving one^s hus-
band.
(piX-avdpanria, as, v, love of man, bene-
volence, "philanthropy."
<piX-avQp(li)TT<t3s, adv., humanely, kindly.
(piX-apyvpia, as, v, love of money,
covetowmess, 1 Tim. vi. 10.
<piX-dpyvpos, ov, money -loving, covetous.
<plX-avros, ov, self-loving, selfish.
(piXeo), u, ija-a), (i) to love ; (2) to be
accustomed to do. Matt. vi. 5 ; (3)
to kiss. Matt. xxvi. 48. See
Synonyms.
<piX7j, 7)s, 7j, a female friend (see
(piXos), L\ike XV. 9.
(piX'-nBovos, ov, pleasure - loving ; as
subst., 2 Tim. iii. 4.
^IXrifia, aros, r6, a, kiss, Luke vii. 45 ;
Rom. xvi. 16, &c.
^iX-fj/xav, ovos, 6, Philemon.
^iX7iTos (or ^iX7]t6s), Philetus, 2 Tim.
ii. 17.
(piXia, as, 71, friendship, love, Jamef
iv. 4 (gen. obj.).
#i\iinriqo-ios — 4>pa-Y€'XXiov] VOCABULARY.
137
^i\nr-n"fi(Tios, ov, 6, a Philippian, Phil.
IV. 15.
4>iA.i7r7rot, coj/, ol, Philippi.
^i\nnros, ov, 6, Philip. Four of the
name are mentioned: (i) John i.
44-47; {2) Acts vi. 5; (3) Luke
iii. 1 ; (4) Matt. xiv. 3.
<pt\6-eeos, ov, 6, 7], a lover of God,
2 Tim. iii. 4.
^i\6 \oyos, ov, 0, PhUologus, E.om.
xvi. 15.
<pi\o-veiKla, as, 7), love of dispute, con-
tention, strife, Lnke xxii. 24.
(pi\6-vfiKos, OV, strife-loving, contentious,
I Cor. xi. 16.
^tAo-^ej/ia, as, t], hospitality, love of
strangers, Eom. xii. 13 ; Heb.
xiii. 2.
<piK6-^evos, ov, 6, hospitable, 1 Tim.
iii. 2.
tptXo -TTpcioTeva}, to love the first place, to
affect pre-eminence, 3 John 9.
<pi\os, rj, ov, loving, or dear; in
N.T. as subst., a friend, a loved
companion, or associate (gen. or
dat.).
<piXo-(To(pia, as, 7], philosophy, in N.T.
of the Jewish traditional theology,
Col. ii. 8.
<piX6-ffo<pos, ov, 6 (prop, adj.), wisdom-
loving, in N.T. of Greek philoso-
phers. Acts xvii. 18.
(piXS-a-Topyos, ov, tenderly loving, kindly
affectionate to (ets), Rom. xii. 10.
<pi\6-T€Kvos, ov, child-loving, affec-
tionate, as a parent.
<j)iXo-rifjL€oiJLai, ovfxai, dep., to mahe a
thing on<is ambition, to desire very
strongly (inf. ), Rom. xv. 20 ; 2 Cor.
V. 9 ; I Thess. iv. 11.
(piXo-cppovcos, adv., in a friendly or
hospitable manner. Acts xxviii. 7.
^i\6-(ppo)v, cv, friendly -minded, hos-
pitable, I Pet. iii. 8.
(pi/j-Sw, u>, (iffco, to muzzle, i Cor. ix. 9 ;
to reduce to silence. Matt. xxii. 34;
pass., to be silent. Matt. xxii. 12 ;
of a storm, Mark iv. 39.
^Xeywv, ovos, 6, Phlegon, Rom. xvi.
14.
<p\oyi(a), to inflame, to fire with pas-
sion^ James iiL 6.
d)\J|, (pXoyos, 7], a fame, Luke xvi.
24. ^
<pXvap4o}, CO, to prate, to talk idly
against any one (ace), 3 John 10.
(pXvapos, ov, prating; as subst., an
idle talker, i Tim. v. 13.
<po^€p6s, a, 6v, fearful, dreadful.
(poBeco, S), itffco, in N.T. only passive,
to be afraid, to be terrified, some-
times with cognate ace, Mark
iv. 41; to fear (ace). Matt. x. 26;
to reverence, Mark vi. 20; met., to
cherish piety towards (ace), Luke
i. 50.
^607]Tpov, ov, r6, a terrible sight, a
portent, Luke xxi. 1 1.
(p6$os, ov, 6, (i) fear, terror, alarm.
Matt. xiv. 26 ; (2) the object, or
cause of fear, Rom. xiii. 3 ; (3)
reverence, awe, respect ; (4) met.
for piety, Rom. iii. 18; i Pet.
i. T7.
<J>oi)877, 7)5, 7], Phoebe, Rom. xvi. r.
^oLviKT), 71 s, 7}, Phenice, or Phenicia.
(poivi^, iKos, 6, a palm-tree, a palm
branch, John xii. 1 3 ; Rev. vii. 9.
*oiVi|, iKos, 7], a prop, name, Phenice,
a city of Crete, Acts xxvii. 12.
(povevs, €cos, 6, a murderer, a man-
slayer.
^ovevca, aco, to murder, to kill.
(f)6vos, ov, 6, murder, bloodthirstiness.
(popio), a, effo), to bear about, to wear,
Rom. xiii. 4 ; John xix. 5.
<p6pov, ov, TO, (Latin), the forum (see
"hTTTTios), Acts xxviii. 1 5.
(p6pos, ov, 6 {(pepoo), a tax, on persons,
distinguished from r4Xos, a tax on
merchandize.
(popri^ca, pass., perf., part., ire^oprto--
fxdvos, to load, to burden, to afflict.
(popriov, ov, t6, a burden, as (1) the
freight, or lading of a ship ; (2) the
burden of ceremonial observances,
Luke xi. 46 ; (3) the burden of
responsibility. Gal. vi. 5.
(pSpTos, ov, 6, load, a ship's cargo.
Acts xxvii. 10.
^opTovvdros, ov (Lat.), Fortunatus,
I Cor. xvi. 17.
(ppayeXXiov, lov, t6 (Lat.), a scourge, a
whip, John ii. 1 5.
138
VOCABULARY.
[<f>paY<XX<$(i) — (}>a>v£«»
<ppayeXX6a, w, to flagellate, to scourge
loith whips, Matt, xxvii. 26.
(ppayfiSs, ov, 6, a hedge, a place en-
closed by hedges, Luke xiv. 23.
iPpdCco, da-o), to tell, explain, interpret.
Matt. xiii. 36, xv. 15.
ippiffffo), |a), 2nd. aor. pass., i(ppa.y'i)v,
to stop, as the mouth of lions,
Heb. xi. 33 ; to put to silence, Rom.
iiL 19.
*f>p4ap, (ppeuTos, r6, a pit, a well.
(ppev-aTTaTdot), w, to deceive the mind, to
impose upon (ace. ), Gal. vi. 3.
(ppev-aTraTTis, ov, 6, a deceiver, impostor^
Titus i. 10.
^priv, (ppcvSs, 7} (lit., diaphragm),
plur., al (pp^yes, the intellect, i Cor.
xiv. 20.
tpplffa-o}, ^a>, to shudder, to quake from
fear or aversion, James ii. 19. >
(ppoveco, a, i\(T(a (<pp^v), (i) to mind,
to think (abs.); (2) to think, judge
(ace); (3) to set the mind and affec-
tions on (ace ) ; (4) to observe, a
time as sacred, Rom. xiv. 6 ; (5)
with inrip, to care for, Phil. iv. 10.
^p6v7]fia, aros, ro, thought, regard, care
for, Rom. viii. 6, vii. 27.
<pp6v7j<rts, ectfs, v, mind, understanding,
Luke i. 17 ; Eph. i. 8.
<pp6vifios, ov, intelligent, wise, prudent;
adv., -us, prudently, Luke xvL 8.
(ppovriCo), to take care, to be anxious,
inf., Tit. iii 8.
^povpfd), w, to watch, to keep, as by a
military guard, lit., a Cor. xi. 32;
fig., GaL iii. 23 (as if in custody);
Phil iv. 7 (in security); i Pet. 1. 5
(in reserve).
ppvaffffca, |«, to rage, as in a tumult,
Actsiv. 25 (LXX.).
ppvyauov, ov, t6, a dry stick, a faggot
stick, for burning. Acts xxviii. 3.
tpvyla, as, v, Phrygia.
^tryfWos, ov, d, Phygellus, 2 Tim.
i. 15.
ipvy-i], ris, fj, flight, Matt. xxiv. 20.
pvXoK-h, vs, 7], (i) a keeping guard, a
uKitching ; {%) the guard, or men on
guard; (3) a prison, imprisonment,
2 Cor. vi. 5 ; a watch in Uie night,
Luke xii. 38.
<pv\aKi(<a, to imprison, to deliver into
custody. Acts xxii. 19,
<pvKaKr-{]pia, wv, rd (plur. of adj.), a
safeguard, amulet, or charm^ a
phylactery, or slip of parchment,
with Scripture words thereon, and
worn by some of the Jews as pro-
tective.
<|)uAa|, aKos, 6, a keeper, sentinel.
pvXdffffd), |ft>, (i) to keep guard, or
watch over ; (2) to keep in safety;
(3) to observe, as a precept ; (4)
mid., to keep oneself from (ace or
airS), Luke xii. 15 ; Acts xxi. 25.
pvKi], ris, 7), (1) a tribe, of Israel; (2)
race, or people.
<f>vWov, ov, t6, a leaf.
ipvpa/xa, aros, t6, a mass, kneaded into
consistency, a lump, as of dough,
I Cor. V. 6; or clay, Rom. xi.
16.
Pv(tik6s, V, 6v, natural, as {i) according
to nature; (2) animal; adv., -ws,
physically, naturally.
<pv(Tt6o>, 60, to inflate, to puff^ up ;
pass., to be insolent, or arro-
gant.
(pva-is, €ft)s, 7], generally, nature ; spe-
cially, (i) 7iatural birth. Gal. ii. 15 ;
(2) natural disposition, instinct, pro-
pensity, Eph. ii. 3 ; (3) long-esta-
blishtd custom, i Cor. xi. 14; (4)
native qualities, or properties. Gal.
iv. 8.
pvff'mais, eus, ri, elation of mind,
boasting, 2 Cor. xii. 20.
0uT6ja, OS, 7], a plant. Matt. xv.
13-
<pvTevw, aw, to plant, to set, abs., or
with ace. ; fig., of introducing the
gospel, 1 Cor. iii. 6, 8.
pvo), arw, 2nd aor. pass., ipiTiv;
part., (pvfis; to spring up, intrans.,
Heb. xii. 15; pass., to grow, Luke
viii. 6.
pw\e6s, ov, 6, a burrow, a hok. Matt.
xiii. 20.
<poDyea>, «, ■f)<To), (i) to sound, to utter a
sound or cry ; (2) to a-y, or caU to,
to invite (ace); (3) to name, to
denominate, ace. (nouL of title),
John xiii. 13.
lj>»VTJ XO'P''S]
VOCABULARY.
139
<l>avfi, 7JS, V, (i) a sound, musical or
otherwise; (2) an articulate sound,
a voice, " voices of the prophets,"
Acts xiii. 27 ; (pa cry, as of pain,
a language, dialect, i Cor. xiv.
10.
4>ws, <po»T6i, rS, contr. from (pdos
(<^o-, to show, whence (paiua), ^rj/it),
light; hence, that which causes light,
Mark xiv. 54; lightning, Acts ix. 3;
l)lur. , torches, the lights of heaven ;
iv (jjcoTi, in the light, i.e., in public :
fig., light, spiritual, John viii. 12;
Eph. V. 8 ; the gospel, which gives
light. Matt. iv. 16 ; Jesu^ Christ,
the source and giver of spiritual
light, John i. 4, 5 ; perfect purity
of God, I John i, 5.
fpuffT-fjp, rjpos, 6, (i) a luminary, Phil,
ii. 15; (2) brightness, splendour,
Rev. xxi. 1 1.
<pa)(r-(p6pos, ov, light-hearing, radiant,
the name of the morning star,
"Lucifer," 2 Pet. i. 19.
<P(CTiiv6i, ii, 6v, bright, luminous. Matt,
xvii. 5 ; spiritually enlightened, Luke
xi. 34, 36.
(pwri^o), i(T(a, pass., perf., ir€<f)(iTicrfiai;
ist aor., icpcoTiffd-nu ; (i) to enlighten,
to shed light upon (ace, but em in
Eev. xxii. 5); (z) to bring to light;
(3) fig., to instruct, to make to
understand, Eph. iii. 9.
((xaTifffiSs, ov, 6, light, lustre, illumina-
tion.
X, X> X^ chi, ch, guttural, the twenty-
second letter. As a numeral, x' =
^00 ') ,X — 600,000.
Xo-ip<^, x«P^<''Oi"a', 2.nd aor., ^x'i-priv, to
rejoice, to he joyful; imp., x«"p^>
Xaip^re, hail / farewell ! inf., xo'V^"'>
greeting. Acts xv. 23:
Xd\a(a, as, 7], hail.
Xa^-dct), Si, dau), ist aor., pass., e'xaAoJ-
(tO-^v, to loosen, Mark ii. 4 ; to let
down, Acts ix. 2 <?.
Xa\5at'os, ov, 6, a ChaldcBan,
XaA67r{J$, -f], 6v, (i) hard, difficult; (2)
harsh, violent. Matt. viii. 28.
XaA.i;/-o7a>7ew, S), to bridle, to re-
strain.
XaXIu6s, ov, 6, a bit, a curb, James
,'"• 3- , . .
Xa\K€os, ovs, rj, ovv, made of brass, or
copper. Rev. ix. 20.
Xa\Kevs, 4(1)5, 6, a worker in brass, or
copper, a coppersmith.
Xo.\KTjddou, 6ms, 6, a gem, including
several varieties, a chalcedony.
Xa^KLov, ov, t6, a brazen vessel.
Xa^Ko-\iPavov, ov, r6, fine brass, white
(from lahan, Heb. for white), or
shining brass. Rev. i. 1 5, ii. 8 ; or
frankincense (\i$avos) of a gold
colour, distinguished from silver-
coloured.
XoXkSs, ov, 6, copper, brass, money.
Xoi-iJ-ai, adv. , on, or to the ground,
Xavadv, r], Canaan.
Xavavaios, ai'a, alov, Canaanitish ; ol
XavavoLOi, the Canaanites.
Xapd, as, 7}, joy, cause of joy, bliss,
Matt. XXV. 21, 23.
xdpayfia, aros, t6, sculpture, Acts
xvii. 29 ; engraving, a stamp, a
sign.
XapaKrijp, 'qpos, 6, an impress, a per-
fect likeness, Heb. i. 3.
Xci/'ol, a.Kos, 6, a palisade, a mound
for besieging, Luke xix. 43.
XapiC^fji-ai, l<rofiai, dep., mid., pass,
fut,, x°P"^^''3<^<'i"**» (i) ^0 9"'^6, to
grant, to bestow freely, Luke vii. 2 1 ;
(2) to show favour to (dat.), Gal.
iii. 18; (3) to forgive (dat., pers.,
ace. thing), 2 Cor. xii. 10 ; Eph.
iv. 32 ; Col. ii. 13.
Xapts, iTos, ^, (1) agreedbleness, accept-
ahleness, Luke iv. 22 ; (2) favour,
kindness, grace, especially God's ;
(3) liberality, a benefaction, a gift;
(4) met., the doctrines and blessings
of salvation. Acts xiii. 43 ; Heb.
xiii. 9 ; (5) specially the grace, or
gift of the apostleship, Rom. xii. 3 ;
xdpiv exeij', to return thanks; X'^'*'
(X^iv irp6s, to be in favour with;
Xdpiv, adverbially used, with gen.,
for Uie sake of, on account of.
140
VOCABULARY,
[Xdpi<r}ia— xpiitw
XapifflJ-ct, oTos, t6, a gift, a benefit,
ue., God's ; used also for miraculous
gift% 1 Cor. xii. 4, 9.
XapnSco, So, to make acceptable; pass.,
to he favoured, Luke l 28,
Xappiv, 7] (Heb.), Charran, or
Haran.
Xa'pTTjs, ov, b (Lat.), paper, 2 John
12.
Xc{<r/ia, arcs, T«i, a gap, a gulf,
"chasm," Luke xvi. 26.
Xerxos, ouj, r6, a lip ; plur., language,
dialect, i Cor. xiv. 21 ; fig., shore,
Heb. xi. 12.
Xeifid^o), in pass., <o 5e storm-heaten,
or tempest-tossed. Acts xxvii. 1 8.
X^ifio^hh ov, 6, a storm-brook, a
wintry torrent, John xviii. i.
Xetjuciy, wj/os, 6, (i) a storm, a tempest,
foul weather. Acts xxvii. 20 ; (2)
winter, tlie rainy season. Matt.
xxiv. 20.
XP^p, <J5, m C' hand; met., for any
exertion of power. Used for the
power of God, tJie power of the
Lord for help, Acts iv. 30, xi. 21 ;
for punishment, Heb. x. 31.
X^^p-ayuyeca, u>, to lead by the Jiand,
Acts Ix. 8, xxii. 1 1.
Xetp-ayoy^s, ov, 6, one who leads by
the hand. Acts xiii. 1 1.
Xfip^-ypo-<pov, ov, t6, a hand-writing, a
promissory note ; fig. , of the Mosaic
law. Col. ii. 14.
X^ipo-voiriTos, ov, made vnth hands,
external.
Xfipo-Tov4ct), S) (T€ij/a>), to elect by lifting
up the hand, to choose by vote, to
appoint. Acts xiv. 23 ; 2 Cor.
viii. 19.
Xeipojv, ov, compar. of kukSs, worse.
Matt. xii. 45 ; worse, severer, Heb.
X. 29.
Xfpov&'fi (Hebrew plural of cherub),
the cherubim, the golden figures on
the mercy-seat, Heb. ix. 5.
xV«> «5, rj, a widow.
X^^es, adv., yesterday.
Xi^i-ifX^^j o"i ^1 « commander of a
thousand men, a military tribune.
Xt^tas, 080$, 7), a thousand (subst.).
X^'Atot, at, a, a thousand (adj.).
Xios, ov, T], Chios, Acts xx. 1 5.
X^Tuv, 03V05, 6, a vest, an inner gar-
ment.
X^^v, 6vos, rt, snow.
X^ol/jlvs, vdos, 7], a Roman officer's
cloak, most frequently scarlet,
Matt, xxvii, 28, 31.
X^€vd((a, to mock, scoffi (ahs.).
X^ap6s, d, /)v, warm, lukewarm.
X\6tj, rjs, Chloe, i Cor. i. 11.
X^(t}p6i, d, 6v, (i) green, verdant; (2)
pale or sallow, Rev. vi. 8.
Xfr', six hundred and sixty-six. Rev.
xiii. 18.
XoikSs, {}, 6v, earthy, made of earth,
earthly, i Cor. xv. 47-49.
X0'^»''|, iKos, 7), a choenix, measure con-
taining two sextarii (see ^e'o-TTjs).
Xo-pos, ov, d, a pig ; plur., swine.
Xo^doo, a, to be angry, to be incensed at
(dat.).
X0A.T7, rjs, (i) gad, fig., Acts viiL 23;
(2) bitter herbs, such as wormwood^
&c.. Matt, xxvii. 34.
X^os, see xows.
XopaCiv, or XopaCeiv, tj, CJtorazin.
Xop-7jjea), to [&-yco), Gk. to SU])ply or
furnish a chorus for the games :
hence, to funiish, to supply, to give,
2 Cor. ix. 10; I Pet. iv. 11.
Xop^s, ov, 6, a dance with singing^
"chorus," plur., Luke xv. 25.
Xoprd^o), to feedf to satisfy {wiiJi, by
gen. or air6).
Xoprda-jxa, aro^, t6, food, sustenance.
X^pTos, ov, 6, grass, Jierbage, Matt.
vL 30 ; springing grain. Matt xiii.
26.
Xoi/^s, 5, 6, Chuza, Luke viii. 3.
Xoi's, 06s, ace. xo^^y dust.
Xpdo,uai, Cafxai, xP^lO'dai, dep. (prop.
mitL of xP'^^)f ^^ ^^^ (dat.), to make
use of, to treat. Acts xxvii. 3 ;
2 Cor. xiii. 10 (dat. om.).
Xpa«, or Kixpriiii. XP^iO'(»> to lend.
XJP^la,, as, 71, (i) u^e, necessity, need,
l»lur., necessities; (2) business, Acts
^n. 3.
Xpe (i)<pfi\^T7j5, ov, 6, a debtor.
Xph, im[)ers., it needs, it behoves, (ace
and iuf.), James iii. 10.
XpH^* to /lave need of, to need (gen.).
Xp^na— x|/aXjios]
VOCABULARY.
141
XPW'^, aros, t6, "a thing of use,"
money. Acts iv. 37; plur., riches,
wealth.
XpTj^uor/^co, Iffo}, to transact business;
hence, {i) to bear or take a name, to
be called, Acts xi. 26 ; Rom. vii. 3 ;
(2) to consult an oracle; pass., to
receive a Divine response or moni-
tion. Matt. ii. 12'; Heb. viii. 5, &c. ;
hence act., to announce the Divine
will, Heb. xii. 25.
XPV/f-aTKr/xos, ov, 6, an oracle, Rom.
xi. 4.
Xpvo-ifios, rj, ov, useful, profitable.
Xp^crts, eas, tj, use, manner of using.
Xpt]o'T€voixai, dep., to be hind to,
willing to aid, i Cor. xiii. 4.
XPVf^To-Xoyia, as, t}, a kind address;
in a bad sense, for a speech of
pretended kindness, Rom. xvi. 1 8.
Xp'n<Tr6s, i\, 6v, useful, good, gentle,
kind ; rb xpil^Tov, goodness, kind-
ness. See Synonyms.
Xpiio"roT'r]s, T7JT0S, 7], (i) goodness,
generally, Rom. iii. 12 ; (2) spe-
cially, benignity, gentleness.
Xpi(Tfia, aros, rS, an anointing, an
unction, 1 John ii. 20, 27.
XpiffTiavos, ov, 6, a Christian, Acts
xi. 26, XX vi. 28 ; a follower of
Christ, I Pet. iv. 16.
XpurrSs, ov, 6 (prop, verbal adj. from
Xpico), the Anointed, the Messiah,
THE Christ (see 217, e).
Xpiw, crw, to anoint, to consecrate by
anointing, as Jesus, the Christ, Luke
iv. 1 8 ; applied also to Christians,
2 Cor, i. 21.
XpoviCo}, to delay, to defer, to tarry.
Xpovos, ov, (i) time, generally; (2) a
particular time, or season. Matt,
ii. 7 ; Acts i. 7. See Synonyms.
Xpovo-rpi^ew, u, to spend time, to wear
away time. Acts xx. 16.
XpiKTeos, ovs, rj, ovv, golden.
Xpva-iov, ov, gold, a golden ornament.
Xpv(To-SaKrv\ios, ov, gold-ringed on the
fingers, James ii. 2.
Xpv<T6-\i6os, ov, 6, a golden stone, a
gem of a bright yellow colour,
"a chrysolite," or topaz, Rev. xxi.
20.
XpvaS-irpaaros, ov, 6, a gem, of a
i greenish, golden colour, "a chryso-
prase," Rev. xxi. 20.
Xpv<r6s, ov, 6, gold, anything made of
gold, gold coin, or money.
Xpv(r6co, ft), to deck with gold, to gild.
XP(^s, xpo^'^^s, 6, the skin; met., tJie
body. Acts xix. 12.
Xo\6s, i\, 6v, lame, crippled in the
feet.
X^'Pf"; aJj T)-, (i) ct country, or region ;
(2) the land opposed to the sea; (3)
the country, dist. from town ; (4)
plur. , fields, John iv. 3 5.
X&»p6ft), w, (i) to go, go forward, John
viii. 37 ; [z) to give place for, to
contain, John ii. 6, xxi. 25; fig.,
to admit, to comprehend. Matt.
xix. 1 1 ; 2 Cor. vii. 2.
X«ptC<") ^<^<^i io put apart, to separate.
Matt, xix. 6 ; mid. (ist aor. pass.),
to separate oneself, to depart, to
go away {air6 or e/c), Acts L 4,
xviii. I.
Xopiov, ov, TO, a field, a farm, a
possession; plur., possessions. Acts
iv. 34.
X«p's, adv., separately, by itself, John .
XX. 7 ; as prep. gov. gen. , apart
from, without, John xv. 5 ; Rom.
iii. 21 ; besides^ exclusive of. Matt.
xiv. 21.
Xwpos, OV, 6 (Latin, **caurus"), tJie
N. W. wind ; met., of that quarter
of the heavens, Acts xxvii. 12.
"V, ^, ^1, psi, ps, the twenty-third
letter. As a numeral, ^ = 700 ;
^1^ = 700,000.
^oLKK(a, il'oA.cD, to sing, to chant, accom-
panied with instruments, to sing
psalms.
}\iaAix6s, OV, a psalm, a song of praise ;
plur., the book of Psalms in the
Old Testament, the Hagiographa^
or division of the Scriptures in
which this book stands first, Luke
xxiv. 44.
142
VOCABULARY.
[t}/€v8 d8EX(f>os — a>ptio|JLai
\|/6v5-cJ5€\0os, ou, 6. a false brother, a \
pretended Christian. I
}^evS-air ffToXos, ov, 6, a false or pi'e- 1
tended apostle. \
i\/€vir)s, 4s, false, deceiving, lying.
i|/eu8o-5t5a(rKaA.os, ou, a false teacher, a
teacher of false doctrines.
rpev^o-Xoyos, ov, false-speaking.
\psv5ofjiai, dep., <rofiai, ist aor., i\p€v-
<riixr}u, to deceive, to lie, to speak
falsely, to lie to (ace), Acts v. 3.
^fvSo-fidpTvp, or -vs, vpos, 6, a false
witness.
^IfivBo-fiapTvpfa}, to, to hear false wit-
ness.
}f/€vSofMapTvpia, as, f], false testimony.
\l)eu5o-irf)o0r]T7}s, ov, 6, a false prophet,
one who in God's name teaches false
things.
i^evdos, ovs, r6, falsehood, lying, a lie,
falseho >d towards God, Rev. xxi.
27 ; idolatry, Rom. i. 25
t|/£u5(J-xp'o-Tos, ov, 6, a pretended Mes-
siah, Matt. xxiv. z\.
^€v8-(i)vuixi)s, ov, falsely named, falsely
called, I Tim. vi. zb.
ipev(riJi.a, aros, r6, falsehood, perfidy,
Rom. iii. 7.
^^xxTTtis, ov, 6, a deceiver, liar, a per-
fidious person.
i^y]\a^a<a, a>, to touch, to feel, to handle
(ace), Heb. xii. 18; to feel after,
as persons blind, or in the dark,
ficf., Acts xvii. 27.
rl>r]<piCw, i<ra, to reckon, to compute,
Luke xiv. 28 ; Rev. xiii. 18.
^?l<pos, ov, ^, a smcdl stone, a pebble,
used as a counter, and for voting.
Hence, a vote. Acts xxvi. 10; a
die, a token. Rev. ii. 17.
\^iBvpi(T(x6s, ov, 6, a whispering, a
detraction, 2 Cor. xii. 20.
^iQupi<rri\s, ov, &, a whisperer, a slan-
derer, a detractor, Rom. i. 30.
^iX^ov, ov, T(J, a crumb.
^uxh, ris, 71, (i) the vital breath, the
animal life; (2) the human soul, as
distinpiished from the body ; (3)
the soul as the seat of the affections,
the will, &c. ; (4) tJie self (like
Heb.), Matt. x. 39; (5) a human
person, tu» individual.
^vxik6s, "ft, i)V, animal, sensual.
^vxo%, ovs, r6, cold, frosty.
\l/uxp6s, (L, 6v, cold, cool; fig., cold-
liearted. Rev. iii. 15.
i|/ux«, 2nd fut. pass., }\>vyn<rofmt, to
cool; pass., to be cooled, to grow
cold, Matt, xxiv, 12.
i|/«)ttiX«, to feed by morsels, to spend
in feeding, Rom, xii 20 ; i Cor.
xiii. 3.
^(ofiiov, lov, a bit, a morsel, a mouth-
fid.
ipc^X"* ^ *^^> ^ break in pieces, as
ears of corn, Luke vi i.
Cl, w, S) fieya, omega, 6, the twenty-
fourth letter. As a numeral, «' =
800; ^co = 800,000. 0/n€£/a is put
for the last, as Alpha for the first,
Rev. i. 8, II, xxi. 6, 13.
S, interj., used before the vocative
where the apj^eal is emphatic :
sometimes in simple address, and
once in admiration, Rom. xi. 33.
'fDSyjS, 6 (Heb.), Obed, Matt i. 5.
w8f, adv., of place, hither, here. So
in this life, Heb. xiii. 14 ; herein,
in this matter. Rev. xiii. 10. ; o>5e
^ 556, here or there. Matt. xxiv.
(fi^ij, vs, T], an ode, a song, a Jiymiu
u8iv, ivos, 71, the pain of childbirth,
acute pain, severe calamity.
wSlvoa, ivw, to he in the throes, or pain,
of childbirth ; fig., Gal. iv. 19.
2:ix(»s, ov, 6, a shoidder.
wviofiau, ov/xat, Tforoficu, to buy (gen. of
price).
w6v, ov, t6, an egg, Luke xii. 1 2.
S}pa, OS. 7), (i) a definite space, or time,
■ a season; (2) an liour ; (3) the
particular time for anything, Luke
xiv. 17; Matt. xxvi. 4H.
wpaios, oio, aiiiv. fair, comely, beauti-
ful. Matt, xxiii. 27 ; Acts iii. 2.
wpvofjLcu, dep., mid., to roar, to Jtowl^
as a beast, i Pet. v. 8.
«S — m4>^i|i.os1
VOCABULARY.
U3
us, an adv. of comparison, as, like
as, about, as it were, according as,
2 Pet. i. 3 ; to wit, z Cor. v. 19;
how! Rom. x. 15; as particle of
time, when, whilst, as soon as; as
intentional particle, so tJiat (inf.),
Acts XX. 24 ; ws ^iros thr^lv, so to
speak, Heb. vii. 9.
*il(rcu/v6,y interj., Hosanna! (Heb.,
Ps. cxviii. 25) Save now ! a word of
joyful acclamation. Matt. xxi. 9.
uff-avTus, adv., in the same way, in
like manner as, likewise.
&<r-ei, adv., as if, as though, as, about.
'n<rrie, 6, Hosea, Rom. ix. 25.
li)iT-TTip, adv. , wholly as, just as, Matt.
xii. 40 ; I Cor. viii 5.
&<r-'irep-il, adv., just as if , as it were^
I Cor. XV. 8.
5(r-T6, eonj., so that (ini), (see 391),
therefore.
iorlov, iov, r6 (dim. of oh, the ear), an
ear.
u}<p4\eia, oy, 7], profit, advoMtage, gain,
Rom. iii. i, Jude j6.
d)(pe\€ct), a, ii<ru, to profit, to benefit, to
help (ace, also ace. of definition);
pass. , to be profited, to have advan-
tage. Matt, xvi 26.
«0eA.(|Uos, oy, profitable, beneficial,
dat. of pers., Tit. iii. 8 ; irp6s
(ace), of obj., I Tim. iv. 8 ; 2 Tim.
iiL 16.
9Q
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
[The references are to the Pages, not to the Sections.
For convenience, each letter in Greek is placed under the coiTesponding one in English.
K and X are under C; *, % with n, under P ; and e, with T, under 2".]
Ablation, by the genitive . .229
Abstract nouns, in connection with the
article, 200 ; iu the plural number,
219; in the genitive, to express
quality 232
A-Ccents, the, 8. Accentuation of the
several classes of words, and of the
forms of declension and conjugation,
under the proper sections.
Accessory clauses . . .186
Accessory circumstance, by dative, 246 ;
by participle . . . • 363
Accusative, like nominative in neuter
nouns, 17; its general senses, 249;
case of the object, 1 6, 249 ; subject of
the infinitive verb, 253, 355 ; double
accusative (nearer and remoter ob-
ject), 252; accusative with passive
verbs, 322 ; cognate accusative, 251 ;
accusative of definition, 252 ; ad-
verbial, 144; in elliptical construc-
tions, 255; accusative of the infini-
tive verb, 358, For other uses of the
case, see 249, seq., and under Prepo-
sitions.
'• Accusative middle " . . -319
Active voice, the, 58, 318 ; not always
distinguishable in sense from the
middle 320
Adjectives, in three forms, 36 ; of two
terminations, 37 ; comparison of, 42 ;
classes of, 157; agreement of with
substantive, 29 1 ; usually placed after
substantives, 382; with omitted sub-
stantive, 291; with several substan-
tives, 293 J adjective with article,
191, 292; of plenty, &c., with geni-
tive, 228 ; of worthiness, &c., with
genitive,240 ; adjective vdth genitive
of relation, 240 ; with infinitive, 357 ;
adverbially^ used, 294 ; comparative
with genitive .... 230
Adverbs, the cases of nouns as, 144;
derivative, 146 ; negative, 148, 369 ;
in composition, 162 ; preceded by
article, 191 ; of time, with genitive,
236 ; used as prepositions, 147, 369 ;
adverbs after ex«, 319; adverbial
phrases and combinations, 263, 272,
294, 368
Adversative conjunction, Se . . 376
Afl&rmative answers . . • 336
Agent, after passive verbs, 322 ; by
vTr6, 276 ; apparently expressed by
dative 247
Alexander's conquests, their effect on
language 167
Alexandrian, or compound aorist . 106
Alexandrian version of Old Testa-
ment 168
Alford, Dean, 207, 227, 238, 297, 298,
3^3, 333» 340, 369* 377, 380
Alliteration . . . .386
Alphabet, the Greek, i ; meaning of
the word 2,
Also, even, by /cai . . .374
Alternative expressions, 317 ; ques-
tions . . . . •315
Angus's "Handbook of the English
Language," 58, 237 ; *' Bible Hand-
book" 223
Anacolouthon . . . 367, 384
146
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
Annexation, conjunctions of .372
Antecedent, attraction of the, 311;
omission of the . . . 347
Antithesis, conjunctions of, 375 ;
omitted 381
Aorist, the first and second generally
identical in meaoing, 89 ; first, act.
and mid., 106; first and second,
pass., 108; second, 89, 103; aorists
of deponent verbs, no; force of the
aorist, 331; distinguished from im-
perfect, 326; distinguished from pei'-
fect, 334; aorist imperative, 338;
subjunctive (and optative), 333, 340,
341; as future perfect, 348; infinitive,
354; participle, 360; indicative, with
&v, in conditional sentences . 348
Apiece, how expressed in Greek . 264
AixK?alypse, grammatical anomalies
in 168, 385
Apodosis 346
Aposiopesis 383
Apostrophe, the .... 4
Apposition, 184; by genitive . 233
Appropriative middle . . .320
Aramaean dialect, 167; words in the
New Testament . . .169
Aratus (or Cleanthes), quoted by St.
Paul 388
Arrangement of words . .382
Article, the, 16; decHned, 17; syntax
of the, 189, sq.; originally a demon-
strative pronoun, 189 ; always signi-
ficant, 193 ; often neglected in E. V.,
197 ; with the Divine names, 202 ;
position of article, 213; repetition of
the, 213; article in enumerations,
ai5; omission of the, 217; article
with infinitive, 357 ; with parti-
6iples 365
Aspirate, the .... 3
Association, by dative . . 242
Asyndeton 381
Attic Greek contrasted with that of
the New Testament . .168
Attic augment . . . 103, 106
Attic future . . . .105
Attraction, of the relative to the pre-
dicate, 310; to the antecedent,
311; of the antecedent to the rela-
tive 311
Attributive use of participles, 361, 365
Augment, 62 ; Attic or double, 103,
ic6 ; irregularities in . .108
Augustus, in Latin and Greek . 176
Author or source, by genitive . 225
A- declension, the (first) . . 20
a-, intensive in composition . .163
a-, negative in composition . . 163
a-, together in composition . .162
ayadSs, comparison of . . .44
aydm], with genitive in different rela-
tions 238
a776'AA&), conjugated . . . 96
&ye, 6.yci}fj.ey, intransitive . .319
S-yvvfii, augment of . . . 106
&yu, conjugated . . . 86, 103
otSeA^Js, ellipsis of . . .231
aSrjj {aSov, with els) . . . Z.'^l
&5iKos, with infinitive . . .357
-a^«, verbs in . . . .159
ttt5ws, declined . . . .30
aJfia, plural 20
-a:vw, verbs in . , . .159
atpe'co, defective . . . . iia
a'tpw, conjugated . . . •96
al(Txp6s, comparison of . . 43
alcif, declined . . . .26
alwvis, plural use of . . .221
aKovoj, future of, 106; perfect, 109;
with genitive .... 226
a\ridi)s, €s, declined . > A-^
oAAa 375
&AAOS and erepoj, 56; with article .211
afiaprdyti) . . . . .102
&u, potential with optative, 343 ; with
relatives or conjunctions, requires
subjunctive, 343 ; in conditional
sentences, with indicative . 348
&vd 264
avoTcAXw, transitive use of . .318
avr}p, declined . . . .3'
&t/dpa>iros, declined . . .19
iwd' &y .... 257, 379
&,yoiyu, augment of . . .109
avTi, 257 ; with infinitive . '359
&|toj, with genitive, 240; with infini-
tive 357
iirJ, 258 ; and Sid, 286 ; and ^>e, 287 j
adverbial phrases with . . 368
i7ro5tSw,ui, active and middle . 320
AnoWws, declined . . . *5
&pa and ipoj and oil . . •378
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
14-
&paryf ....
. 379
''Apa\p, declined .
. 30
dp/cew, future of .
. 104
&pvas ....
. 34
apTL-, in composition .
. 162
&PXvy, adverbial .
. 368
av^dvco, transitive use of
. 318
avrSi, r], 6, declined, 51 ; used for third
personal pronoun, 303 ;
emphatic
nominative, 179 ; meaning self, 304 j
with article, the same, 209
; comple-
mentary to the relative,
312; avrhs
rpitos
. 302
avTov and avrov .
. 53
a.<pir]fj.i, conjugated
. 128
a.<piKviQixai .
. 102
a^opi^co, future of
. 105
-dw, verbs in
• 159
B.
Benefit or injury, by dative . 245
Bengel, Dr. J. A. . . . 227
J?oiA ... awcZ, how expressed . . 373
Breathings, the .... 3
Burgon, Kev. J. W., "Inspiration and
Interpretation" . . .222
Ba'vw
102, 103
fidwo}, transposition of stem-letters
in ..... . 107
jSoTTTiXco, future of . . .105
^aaiAevs, declined . . • 3^
PaaiAevco, transitive in the Old Testa-
ment
. 31:
^ovKevw, why not chosen as a para-
digm 69
fiovKofiai, augment of . . .106
j8oi)s, declined . . . • 3^
jSpe'xet (called impersonal), true subject
of 180
" Ganaanite," surname of Simon . 175
Cardinal numbers, the . .46
Cases of nouns, 16, 256; as used with
prepositions, 140, 255; cases of the
infinitive, 357; case-endings, old,
with adverbial force . . 144
Causal conjunctions, 379 ; omitted, 381
Causal use of participles . .364
Causal middle . . . .321
Causative verbs . . . -159
Cause or motive by dative . . 246
Chiasmus .... 288, 387
Cities, plural names of. . .203
Cleanthes (or Aratus), quoted by St.
Paul 388
Climax, the rising . . .374
Coins, Latin names of . . '171
Coins, measures, &c., with numerals, 301
Collective nouns, with plural adjective,
185; with plural verb . .182
Combination of consonants . . 6
Commands by future tense . . 329
Common gender . . . .18
Comparative in -av, paradigm, 43 ;
comparative with genitive, 229, 294;
elliptical, 296 ; emphatic compara-
tive, 44, 296; comparative notion, by
prepositions . . . .296
Comparison of adjectives . . 42
Comparisons, ko.' in . . -374
Complements of the simple sentence, 186
Completeness, marked by aorist . 333
Compound imperfect, 328 ; future, 330 ;
perfect and pluperfect . .361
Compound relative . . • 55
Compound sentences . . 186, 188
Compound words . . .161
Concessive use of participles . 364
Concord, the first, 181; the second,
184, 291; the third . . . 309
Concord, rational. See Synesis.
Conditional sentences . . 346, 375
Conditional use of participles . 364
Conjugations of verbs, the, 61 ; the
second conjugation . . .114
Conjunctions, or pronominal adverbs,
146 ; the conjunctions classified, 150 ;
with ^v followed by subjunctive,
343 ; syntax of the . . . 37^
Consonants, division of, 5 ; changes in,
6, 7 ; changes in mute verbs . 82
Constructio ad sensum. See Synesis.
Constructio prsegnans, 263, 267, 278,
279, 280, 289
Constructions, unusual, for emphasis,
383
Contracted substantives, 24; adjec-
tives, 37 ; pure verbs . 79, sq.
148
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
Contraction of vowels ... 3
Contrast, emphatic, by negative . 370
Copula, the, 178 ; omission of .178
Copulative verbs . . . .185
Coronis, the . . . 5, 44
Correlative pronouns, 57; adverbs, 146
Crasis . . . .* . .5
Creeds, rhythmical, in the early
church 387
Customary actions by imperfect tense,
326
•K-, in the first aorist . . .1^4
K.T.A. . . . . . .11
Ka9apl(ci}, future . . . .105
Kadrifxai . . . . .125
Ka9' u7rep/8oAV ets v'irt:p^o\i]V . .289
Kcd, 372; with T€, 373; with 86, 377;
Kat 7a/), 380; Ktti omitted. . 381
Kalaap, Cffisar, to whom applied in the
New Testament . . .176
Kaiw, stem and future . . .105
k-okJs, comparison of . . -44
KoKew, future of, 104 ; transposition of
stem-letters . . . .108
Ka\6s, comparison of . . .43
KOLfivco, stem and second aorist . 10 1
Kara, 270, sq. ; sometimes supposed
with accusative of definition, 252;
adverbial combinations with . 368
KaTrjyopeco, with genitive . . 228
Kariirepa .... 44, 233
KeTfA-ai . . . . . .125
Kepavvufxi . . . . '135
Kfpas, Kpeas, stems and declension of, 33
Kepdaivco, future and first aorist of, 106
K^/>u|, declined . . . '3°
K\aia), stem and future . .105
K\d(i}, future .... 104
KOfJLiCo), future
. 105
tcopeifuu/xi ....
. 135
Kpe/xanai . . . .
. 125
Kpivw, conjugated, 96 ; its root,
deri-
vatives, and compounds .
. 164
KplvojMi, middle force of
. 320
Kvpios, with the article
. 203
Kvoiv, irregular
. 33
Xalpeiv, as imperative . . .360
Xa\du>, future . . . .104
Xfip, omitted with adjective . 292
X€'», stem, future, and aorist . 105
■XpAoixai, future of, 104; governg
dative 247
XP-h m
XpLffrSs, with article . . . 205
Xpvaovs (eos), rj, ovv, declined . 37
D.
Dative case, the (singular always in -*,
17); its general senses, 16, 242;
obsolete forms of, as adverbs, 144;
dative of association, 242 ; of trans-
mission, 243; of reference. 245; of
accessory, 246 ; of time, 249 ; may
be interchanged with eV (dat.), 287';
with €is (ace), 288; usually placed
after governing word . .382
"Dative middle" . . .320
Dativus commodi vel incommodi . 245
Death of Christ, prepositions respect-
ing 275, 289
Declensions of substantives, the three,
1 6 ; similarity of the first and second,
20 ; nouns of variable . . 34
Defective verbs . . . . n i
Deliberative subjunctive . .341
Demonstrative pronouns, 53, 307; with
the article, 208 ; as equivalent to a
clause . . . . .309
Dependent clauses . . . 343
Deponent verbs . . 83, note, no
Design, expressed by genitive of infini-
tive, 358 ; by infinitive with its, irpSs,
358. See Intentional.
Derivation 159
De Wette, Dr 251
Diaeresis 4
Difficulties of interpretation, 187, 238
Digamma, the, 46 ; in substantives,
29 ; in verbs, 105. See under V.
Diminutives . . . .18
Diphthongs, 2 ; regularly long, but
often counted short for accentua-
tion . . . 21, 24, 107
Disjunctives, the . . .377
Distributive numerals, 49 ; pronouns, 56
Divine names, with the article . 202
Donaldson, Dr. . 225, 242, 249, 253
Double names of persons . .174
Dress, Latin names of in the 'New
Testament . . . .171
Dual number, the . . .16
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
U9
Mkvco, stem
. 101
SaveiCw, active and middle .
. 321
5e, conjunction ot antithesis
. 376
Se?, impersonal . . ,
. Ill
SeiKj/ufiL, conjugated
. 130
d^vrepSirpwTOS
. 164
Sr}\6ci}, conjugated
. 80
5ia, 268 ; and e/c, 285 ; and 6Ji-
286;
and a-rrS, 286 ; ^nd iv, 286 ; an
d trepi,
289 ; with genitive and accusative
distinguished .
. 270
SiMa-KO), future .
. 102
SiSufxi, conjugated
. 116
SiKaios, aia, aiov, declined .
. 36
AioTrerrjs ....
. 292
Ai6s, Aia ....
. 34
810TJ, relative causal particle
• 379
doK^l, impersonal .
. Ill
SoKeoD. future of .
. 102
56^a, declined
. 20
Swafiai ....
. 125
Swards, with infinitive
• 357
Svuco, stem and second aorist
. 103
5vo, declined
. 47
Sua--, in composition .
. 163
S(adeKd<pv\oy
. 164
5«/xa (or oIkos, oIk'm), ellipsis of
. 231
E.
Echatic and final particles . 350,359
Elision of vowels ... 4
EUicott, Bishop, 210, 216, 229, 239,
^5h 255» 304. 323, 332, 351, 360,
371, 381
Ellipsis, with nominative, 223 ; with
accusative, 255; of words of kin-
dred before genitive, 231 ; of sub-
stantives, with adjective, 291 ; of
measures and coins, with numerals,
301 ; of the antecedent, with rela-
tive, 312; with the subjunctive,
339 ; with the optative, 342; before
iva ...... 340
Elliptical questions, 336; construc-
tions 383
Emphasis, by particles, 151 ; by inser-
tion of pronominal subject, 179 ; by
the article, 195 ; by the order of
words, 382 ; by repetition or ple-
onasm 384
Emphatic comparison of adjectives,
44; verbs, 159; indefinite pronoun,
316 ; negatives, 330, 341; future, 331
Enclitics ..... 9
English rendering of Greek letters, 10
Enumerations, with article, 215; by
Ka\ ... T€ 373
Epauodos ..... 387
Epexegetic, Kal, 373 ; omitted . 374
Epiccene gender . . . .18
Epimenides, quoted by St. Paul . 388
Epistolary aorist, the . . .332
Ethical future, the . . .329
Even, also, by Kai . . .374
Exhortations, substituted for state-
ments by New Testament tran-
scribers 340
eav, for &v, 343 ; for et 6.v
eavTov, -7}s, declined
idea, future of
iyevero
eypaxl/a, epistolary aorist
iyca, rjfiiTs, declined
347
52
104
355
332
51
ei, in conditional sentences, 347 ; inter
rogative use of . . . .336
-eia and -fia, terminations of nouns, 1 54
dfii, conjugated, 126; as copula, 178;
as predicate, 179; with genitive,
^236; with dative . . . 243
eljii, to go 127
diroy . . . . . .112
els, 264; compared with iv and 8id,
286, 289 ; with irpSs, 288 ; with iirt,
288 ; with simi^le dative, 288 ; with
infinitive, 358 ; adverbial combina-
tions 368
els, fiia, tv, declined, 46 ; as indefinite
pronoun, 300 ; for irparos . . 300
iK, i^, 259; compared with did, 285;
with airS, 287 ; adverbial combina-
tions 368
etre ... (Kre ..... 377
e/catTTos, anarthrous . . . 208
iKelvos, with article, 208 ; refers to
remoter antecedent, 307 ; may refer
to the nearer, 308 ; the emphatic
demonstrative . . . .308
cK(t)U, kKovffa, ckSv, declined . , 39
ihavvco, stem and future . . 102
i\axiarT6T€pos, double comparative, 45
eAeos, of variable declension , 34
150
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
iXeidepos, with dative, 245 ; with infini-
tive 357
fATTiXftr, future of . . . .105
ifiavTov, -iffs, declined . . .52
eV, 261 ; compared with ei?, 5id, 286,
289 ; interchanged with dative, 287;
adverbial combinations, 368 ; with
infinitive 389
ivyv/jLi . . . . . • 135
€^eari, impersonal . . .111
•(OS, -ovs, adjectives in , .157
iiraiyew, future of . . .104
iirei, temporal or cansal . .379
' iveiSr) ...... 379
iviiS'fiirfp . . . , .379
iireiirfp ..... 379
ivl, 277 ; compared with ds, 288 ; in
adverbial combinations . .368
iiri<TTanat. . . . . • ^^5
epXofJLai^ 112; and V» • • 3"^^
iardia 112
fo-Tc&s, w(ra, <«>s, participle for Io-ttj/cc^s,
declined 40
Irepos and SAAos . . . 56,211
€TOi/*os, with mfinitive . '357
€u-, as prefix, 162; how augmented, 106
ivpicTKoo, stem .... 102
-6US, substantives in . . .155
-euw. verbs in . . . .159
^«^'l 379
ex«, alternative stem, 102 ; construc-
tion of, with adverbs . •319
-4(1}, verbs in . . . • ^59
ews, in combination with other adverbs,
j6 9 ; with infinitive . •359
¥1, particle of comparison, 295 ; inter-
changed with Ka\ ov, 370 ; disjunc-
tive, 377 ; interrogative . .378
9lKto and epxofj-o-t . . • .3^6
^/xot 125
riixepa, declined, 20 ; ellipsis of . 292
^/ut-, in composition . . .163
.^y, -4s, adjectives in . . . 158
Festivals, names of, in plural . 220
Final, or intentional clauses . 349
First declension, paradigms . 20
Five clergymen, the, on the Epistle to
the Komans . . . .212
Forbes, Rev. Dr., on the Romans, 387
Foreign elements in New Testament
Greek 167
Forgetting, verbs of, with genitive, 228
Frequentative verbs . . •159
Fulness, want, &c., by genitive, 228 ;
by dative or els . . . 247
Future time, tenses expressing . 60
Future tense, its characteristic, 63; in
liquid verbs, 95 ; in pure verbs, 104 ;
Attic future, 105 ; second future, 93 ;
future imperfect, 330 ; future per-
fect (paulo-post future), 87, no;
see also 348 ; force of the future,
329, sq. ; with ov ixrj, 330; indica-
tive, with iVct, 353 ; infinitive, 354;
participle, 364 ; future auxiliary
verbs 330
Futurity, certain, by present . 325
G.
Galilee, or Tiberias, the Lake of . 241
Gender of nouns, 16 ; rules for deter-
mining, 18 ; variable in some sub-
stantives 34
General for particular statements . 222
Genitive case, the (plural always in
•coy), 17 ; exhibits the stem in the
third declension, 26 ; adverbially
used, 144 ; of personal pronouns for
possessive, 303 ; genitive after the
article, 1 90 ; different uses of the,
225, sq. ; usual position of the, 233,
382 ; genitives in differeot relations
with the same noun, 241 ; genitive
absolute, the, 241, 361; prepositions
governing the genitive, 257 ; geni-
tive after Sid, compared with accu-
sative, 269 ; objective genitive, by
possessive pronoun, 303 ; genitive in
apposition with possessive pronpun,
307; genitive of infinitive, 357; ex-
pressing design or result . .358
Gospel, with genitive in different
senses 239
Greek in Palestine . . .167
Greek names in the New Testament, 1 7 5
Greek poetry, quoted by St. Paul, 388
Green, Rev. T. S. . 223, 333, 350
Grotius on fulfilment of prophecy, 332
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
151
ydp . , . , , 379, sq.
y^ypdirrcu . . . . • 333
7€Aaw, future of . . . .104
yevos, declined . . . .32
yevofiai, with genitive or accusative, 227
77?, ellipsis of ... . 292
7i'i'0;itat, stem and forms . 102, 110
yipwaKw, stem and forms . .103
ySyu, irregular substantive . .33
ypriyopeca . . . . .159
yvj/'f], irregular substantive, 3 ; ellipsis
of 231, 292
H.
Hackett, Dr., on the Acts . .237
Hamilton, Sir W., "Logic" . 194
Hebraisms, so called, often to be re-
jected 300
Hebraistic use of plural of blood, 220 ;
superlative, 299 ; use of els, 301 ; of
relative and outJs, 312 ; causal sense
in intransitive verbs, 318; use of
participles, 364 ; combination of
verbs 369
Hebrew, as spoken in Palestine, 167;
words, 35; names in the New Tes-
tament, 173; poetry, parallelism, 386
Hendiadys (eV Sia Svulu, one idea in two
words), unnecessary. 232 (§258), 369
Hiatus 4
Hinton, Rev. J. H., on the Romans, 387
Historic present, the . . -3^5
Historical and principal tenses, 60, 324
Hymns in the New Testament . 387
Hyperbaton . . . .383
Hypothesis, fourfold form of . 347
Imparisyllabic declension, the . 20
Imperative mood, the, 58, 337 ; tenses
in, 338 ; subjunctive used for, 340 ;
infinitive, 360 ; future indicative in
prohibitions . . . .329
Imperfect tense, the, 103, 326 ; distin-
guished from aorist, 326; in con-
ditional sentences, with &v . 348
Imperfect tenses, properly so called, 60
Impersonal verbs, iii j singular and
plural, 1 80 ; often improperly so
called 180
Improper prepositions, the . 147, 277
Inchoative acts, by imperfect . 328
Inchoative or inceptive verbs, 102, 159
Indeclinable proper names . . 34
Indefinite article, the . . . 300
Indefinite pronouns, the . 56, 315, 313
Indefinite tenses, the . . .60
Indefiniteness by omission of article, 2 1 7
Indicative mood, 58 ; the objective part
of the verb, 323 ; in indirect inter-
rogation, 345 ; interchanged with
optative, 346; in conditional sen-
tences, 348 ; apparent in intentional
clauses, 353 ; with So-rf, 359; com-
pared with infinitive . .360
Indirect form changed to direct . 385
Indirect interrogation . . -345
Indirect quotation . . .344
I nd i vidual acts in pi ural expressions, 221
Inferential conjunctions . .378
Infiaitive mood, the, 59 ; a verbal
substantive, 354 ; with article, 192 ;
with accusative subject, 253 ; as sub-
ject, 355; as object, 356; expressing
result, 356; oblique oases of, 357;
with SffTe, 359; for imperative, 3 bo;
in modern Greek . . .351
Inseparable declensions, the . 20
Instrument, by dative . . 247,276
Instrumental, iu .
Intensive use of participles
Intentional or final clauses,
tides ...
Interjections
Interrogative, its sign, 1 1 ;
55) 3H> particles, 149, 11
335; ^, 378; ydp .
Interrupted statements, by oAAa
Investiture, by eV
Irregular substantives .
Irregular comparisons .
-^a, substantives in . . .154
idofiai, future of . . . .104
'UpoffuKofia, or 'lepovaoK'fifi . '34
-tC«, verbs in . . , .159
'iTflfii, conjugated (in a<pir]fji.i) . .128
'It](tovs, declined, 25 ; with article, 204
'iKavos, with infinitive . . .357
-t/cdj, -iKT}, -iKov, adjectives in . 157
262
. 364
349 ; par-
351, 352
pronouns,
I J forms,
380
375
. 261
23, 33
. 44
152
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
-ifios, -ov, adjectives in . .158
Hva, with subjunctive for imperative,
340; intentional, 350; explanatory,
350 ; is it ever ecbatic ? 351 ; distin-
guished from oTi, 350 ; from '6nus, 349
z'ro TL ; or IvutI ; . . . .314
tva irXrjpcadt] . . . . • 3 5 1
•ivos, -iu7), -luov, adjectives in . 157
-lov {-dpiov, -i5iov), substantives in . 155
-los, -ia, -lov, adjectives in . .157
-icTKos (-iV/cr/), substantives in . 155
'iffT-qfjii, conjugated, 116; its two aorists,
124 ; transitive and intransitive
tenses, 319; its compounds . 335
Ix&vs, decHued . . . .30
J.
Jacob, Rev. Dr. .... 252
J ebb's "Sacred Literature" . 387
Jehovah, equivalent of the term in
the Apocalypse . . . 224
Judicial words, Latin, in the New
Testament . . . .171
K.
Kuhner's "Greek Grammar," ed. by
Jelf .328
Lachmann . . 40, 180, 244, 340
Languages of Palestine . .167
Languages not verbally coincident, 256
Latin intluences on New Testament
Greek, 168 ; words in the New Tes-
tament, 171; names in the New
Testament . . . .176
Lee, Dr., on "Inspiration" . 222
Letters, names of the, neuter, 35 ; as
numeral signs . . . .46
Lightfoot, Professor . . .351
Likeness, unlikeness,&c., by dative, 243
Linus, possibly a Briton . .176
Liquid verbs, 94, sq. ; change of short
vowel in the stem . . .108
Local genitive, 236 ; dative, 24"8 ; ac-
cusative 254
Luther's version of the New Testa-
ment ... . 333
Xa/i)8eii'<», stem and present, 102; future,
105 ; perfect .... 109
\av6dv(a, with participle . •363
AeiTTOj, second aorist of . . 92
Aef/caiVco, future and first aorist of, 106
Kiuiv, declined . . . .30
Auw, why not chosen as paradigm . 69
M.
Mad vig's "Greek Syntax" . . 342
Measures, coins, &c., with numerals, 301
Mediation, expressed by 8»c£ . 269
Meuander, quoted by St. Paul . 388
Mental affection, verbs of, with gen-
tive, 227 ; with dative . . 244
Meyer, Dr. .... 237, 351
Middle voice, the, 58 ; its meaning,
319, sq. ; not always distinguishable
in sense from active, 320; often
indistinguishable in form from pas-
sive 323
Middleton, on the article mth names
of Christ, 205 ; on 2 Tim. iii, i6, 210
Military terms, Latin, in the New
Testament . . . '171
Minister of another's will, by 5to, 276
Modal dative, 246 ; participle . 363
Monadic substantives . . 195,207
Moods, the . . 58, 64, 323
"Most highest," corresponding idiom
to 45
Motive or cause, by 5m{, with accu-
sative 276
Mutes, the, classified ... 6
Mulier, Max, Professor, 63, 225, 230
-fio (-/iOT-), substantives in . .156
juo977Tevft>,transitiveandintransitive,3 1 8
fjLaOtjTijs, declined ... 22
fiiiWov, in comparisons . 44, 296
fiafxfiuivas . . . . .169
fMwijdpo), stem of . . . .102
fxdprvs, irregular in declension . 3 3
fidyas, declined, 40 ; comparison of, 43
fxeiCwy, comparative, declined, 43 ;
double comparative from . . 45
fi€\fi, impersonal . . .111
^fAAw, auxiliary future verb . 330
/LcfV and 5^, 377 ; without 5€ . 379
fi(yovyy€ ..... 379
/A^vw, stems and forms of . . loz
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
153
Mecrcfas . . . . .169
jUeTci, 272, sq. ; distinguished from (Tvj/,
272 ; with infinitive (accusativ^e),359
^■f] and ov, 148 ; fi-f) in questions, 14.9,
337; with imperative, 337; with
optative, 342 ; negative intentional
particle, 352; after verbs of fear-
.ing 353
/u^ yeyoiTo ! . . . . • 34^
/u-^rrjp, ellipsis of . . . .231
fi-qTi, interrogative . . '337
-fMi, verbs in . . . .114
fjiiyvvfii . . . . • 134
fjLiKpSs, d, 6v, declined, 3 6 ; comparison
of . . . . . .44
fiifivriffKoixai, stem of . . .103
-jxSs, substantives in . . •154
-ficDv, -fioy, adjectives in . .158
Mwarjs, declined .... 34
fivffT-fjpiov, predicated of Christ . 311
K
Names, proper, in the New Testament,
of various languages, 173; use of
the article with . . .201
Neander on irpoa-euxh . . • ^37
Negative adverbs, 148, 369 ; joined to
predicate, 301 ; emphatic, 330, 341;
with infinitive, 3 54 ; with participle,
360; followed by aWd, 375; com-
bination of negatives . '370
Negative indefinite pronoun . 317
Negative questions . . • 336
Neuter, forms alike in, 17; plural sub-
ject, with singular verb, 181 ; pre-
dicate, with masculine or feminine
subjunctive . . . .185
Neuter verbs, 58. See Intransitive.
Nominative, the case of the subject,
180, 222; of personal pronouns
omitted, 303 ; predicate after copu-
lative verbs, 185; for vocative, with
article, 213, 224; suspended, 223 ;
elliptic 223
Number of nouns, 16, 219 ; of verbs, 61
Numbers, comjiound and distribu-
tive ...... 49
Numerals, the, 46, 300 ; with geni-
tive, 235; adverbs . . .130
V i(pi?<Kva'TlK6v .... 4
I', inserted in stems . .102,115
ud, in the modern Greek infinitive, 351
veavias, declined . . . .22
j/({yiios, with and without article . 217
vovs, declined, 25 ; irregularities in, 34
0.
Object of verbs, direct (or nearer, pri-
mary), indirect (or remoter, second-
ary), by different cases, 243, 252;
direct object of a transitive verb in
accusative, 249 ; may be omitted,
251 ; "internal," 251 ; object (direct
or indirect) of active the subject of
passive, 322; object usually placed
after governing verb . -382
Object of comparison in genitive,
229, 294; or by ^, 295; may be
omitted 296
Object- sentences, 344, sq. ; sometimes
found with accusative object, 346, 384
Objective genitive . . zij,sq.
Oblique cases, why so called . 1 6
Occasion, the, sometimes by airJ, 258,
276
Old Testament, its influence on the
New, 387. See Hebrew, Hebraistic.
Olshausen on fulfilment of prophecy, 352
Omission of article in defined phrases,
195; to mark indefiniteness, 217;
of logical links between clauses, 384.
See Ellipsis.
Opposition, by aXXd . . -375
Optative mood, the, 59 ; subjective,
323 ; in independent sentences, 342;
in indirect interrogation, 345 ; opta-
tive and indicative comb
in conditional sentences
Oratio obliqua .
Ordinal numbers, the, 47
used for .
Origin, by genitive
Ostervald's version quoted
Oxytone words .
ned, 346 ;
. 348
• 344
cardinal
• 300
• 251
• 9
'O, Ti, t6. See Article.
O- declension, the (second) . . 20
oSe . . . • 53> 208, 307
oijcetot, ellipsis of . . . .231
oTkos, ellipsis of (or otKio) . .231
6\Kv/jLi . J . . . 1 34
154
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
o\os, with article . . .211
ofivvfii 134
ovivrj/M . . , . .124
ovofia, use of . . . .224
o|ys, -e7a, -v, declined . . -38
Uttoos and 'iua, distinction of . -349
6pdo3, defective, 112; augment of, 103
Ss, ^, 0, declined, 54. See Relative.
-05, neuter (stem, -es), substantives
in 156
o<rT(eov), ovu, declined . . -25
oaris, ^Tis, 2,Ti, declined, 54, 313. See
Compound Relative.
•oaivn, substantives in . • 1 54-
Stj, particle introducing object-sen-
tences, 344 ; relative causal par-
ticle 379
ov, the objective negative particle, in
questions, 337; distinguished from
tx{], 148,^ 369 ; ov fi-f], 330, 341 ; ov
fiovov . . . oAAo KOI . . • 3 74-
oZv&nd&pa 378
ohpavoi, plural . . . .221
oStos, declined, 53 ; with article, 208 ;
demonstrative force, 307 ; may refer
to the more distant antecedent, 308
ovTos ...'Iva . . . . •350
6(p€\ov, as particle . . . 343
'Sec, verbs in . . . .159
5, interjection, with vocative . 224
&s, a particle of comparison, with pre-
dicative participles . . -365
wcei . . . . . .301
Zare, ecbatic, with infinitive, 359;
with indicative . . '359
Parallelism, Hebrew . . .386
Parathetic compoimds . .161
Parisyllabic declension . . 20
Paronomasia . . . .386
Paroxytone .... 9
Partaking, verbs of, with genitive, 235
Participial constructions changed for
the finite verb. . . -385
Participles, the, <;9 ; in -wv, declension
of, 39 ; in -ws, 38 ; tenses of, 59,
366; with article, 191 ; as relative
and finite verb, 192, 215, 365;
general use of, 360, sq. ; predicative,
361; adjunct to predicate, 363;
attributive, 365 ; adverbial, 363 ; in
broken constructions . 367, 368
Particles, the, 150 ; emphatic suffixes,
55; separable in composition, 162;
inseparable, 163. >S'ee Conjunctions.
Partitive genitive . . 234, *g.
Partitive plural . . . .220
Parts ot speech . . . • 1 5
Passive voice, the, 58, 322 ; sometimes
difficult to distinguish from the
middle . . . . .322
Past time, tenses expressing . 60
Paul a,nd Saul . . 174, 175, 176
Paul, St. , his name, with the article, 202
Perfect state, tenses expressing . 60
Perfect tense, the, 108 ; of liquid
verbs, 95; second perfect, 93, 109;
third person plural in -av, 109 ; per-
fect passive, 109 ; force of the per-
fect, 338 ; distinguished from aorist,
334; aorist may sometimes be ren-
dered by, 331; "present-perfect,"
335 > perfect imperative . -338
Perispomenon .... 9
Permission, by imperative . •338
Person, in verbs . . . .61
Personal endings, in verbs, origin
of 63
Personal pronouns, 51, 303; nomina-
tive subject when unemphatic, omit-
ted, 303 ; genitive of, for possessive
pronoun, 231, 303 ; pleonastic use,
304 ; avrSs for third person . 304
Peter,St.,his name, with the article,202
Place, by genitive, 236 ; by dative,
248; by accusative . . . 254
Pluperfect tense, the, 109, 334; its
notion expressed by aorist . 332
Plural verb in general expressions,
180; neuter nominative with sin-
gular verb, 181; verb with collective
subject, 182 ; with several subjects,
183 ; of substantives, how used,
2 1 9, sq. ; plural forms with singular
force
Political terms, Latin, in the New Tes-
tament 171
Possessive genitive . . 230, 57.
Possessive pronouns, the, 52, 306 ;
unemphatic, by article, 201 ; with
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
155
the article, 209 ; for objective geni-
tive 303
Postpositive particles . . -372
Prayer, its object, hyxepi or inrep, 289;
by 'iva . . . . '35°
Predicate, the, 177; anarthrous, 193;
with article, 193 ; participles with,
X. ,. . , 361, sq.
Predicative verbs . . .178
Prepositions, use of, 140, 255 ; with
genitive, 140, 257 ; with dative,
141, 261 ; with accusative, 141,
264; with genitive and accusative,
141, 268 ; with genitive, dative,
and accusative, 142, 277; table of,
142; in composition, 162; combined,
163 ; preposition and case, after
article, 190; adverbially used, 144,
368; interchange of prepositions,
256, 285, sq. ; governing several
words, 289; with infinitive, 358;
corresponding adverbs, 147; adverbs
as " improper prepositions " . 147
Prepositional phrases, without article,
207
Present time, tenses expressing . 60
Present tense, its stem, as modified,
90, 95, 10 1 ; force of the tense,
324, sq. ; aorist rendered by, 330;
present-perfect, 335 ; present and
aorist distinguished in imperative,
338 ; in subjunctive, 340 ; in infini-
tive 354
Price, equivalent, &c. , by genitive, 240
Principal and historical tenses, 60, 324
Proclitics, the .... 9
Prohibitions, by future indicative, with
ou, 329; by subjunctive aorist, with
fiv . . . . . . 340
Pronominal subject, its omission and
insertion . . . • i79> 303
Pronouns, the, ci, 303 ; personal, 51,
303 ; possessive, 52, 306 ; demon-
strative, 307 ; relative, 309 ; inter-
rogative, 314; indefinite, 17, 314;
distributive pronouns, with geni-
tive 235
Proparoxytone .... 9
Proper names, with article . zoi, sq.
Properispomenon ... 9
Prophecy, Old Testament . .352
Punctuation . . . .11
Pure verbs, uncontracted, 78 ; con-
tracted
79
iroTy, declined . . . .19
7ro\i»'-, in composition . . .162
Topti . . . . . 282, sq.
iras, declined, 39 ; its use with article,
209 ; in Hebraistic negative, 301 ;
irai'- in composition . . .162
irar-fp, declined, 31; ellipsis of . 231
iravofiui, perfect passive of, no; with
participle . . . .362
ire^eco, conjugated . . .86
ireiuda}, future of . . . .104
irctpaofxai, future of . . .104
Trep/, 273; compared with Sid, 289;
with inr4p . . . .289
TTrJxvs, genitive TplaTSi\ vrix^y • 39
trifxvpDixi 124
■nlvw, present and second aorist of, joi ;
future, 105 ; first aorist passive, 108
virrTO), stem of, and second aorist, 103
viareio), conjugated . , .69
irKiO}, stem of, and future . .105
irh-na-arw, second aorist passive . xo8
irKovTus, of variable declension . 34
Uverixa aytov, with article . . 206
irvfco, stem of, and future . .105
iToiixr,v, declined . . . 'Si
Tr6Xis, declined . . . • 30
iroKx)s, declined, 40 j comparison of,
44 ; with article . . .212
ir6Tepos . . . . •315
vpaa-ffw, second perfect of . '93
vpaiis, or irpaos (or o) . . .40
irptirei, impersonal . . .111
"TpS, 260; with infinitive . '3 59
Trpos, 283, sq. ; compared with ds, 288;
with infinitive (accusative) . 359
Trphs <t>66yoy, adverbial . . '359
7rpo(r€i/,i(77, si)ecial sense of . -237
irpoffixd}, elliptical use of . .251
irpo<pTjTeva), augment of . .106
irvA77, declined , . . •19
<f>alifofmi, with participle
(pepu, defective .
<l)iiiyei}, future of .
<PVfii ....
<f>6duci), stem of .
<l>i\4w, conjugated
362
112
105
124
lOI
80
156
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
<fiop4co, future of .
104
227
0-
"Quarterly Review," the, January,
1863 206
Quirinius, governor of S3rria . 294
Quotations, with article prehxed. 193
Quotation, direct and indirect . 344
Rational Concord. See Synesis.
Reciprocal force of middle . .320
Redundancy, apparent, 304, 308, 384
Reduplicated stems, 102 ; of verbs in
-/**.. IIS
Reduplication, 62 j varieties of . 108
Reflexive middle . . • 3 1 9
Reflexive pronouns , . 52, 305
Regimen, combined . . .289
Relation, by genitive . . -239
Relative pronoun, the, 54; compound
or in definite, 313; relative and ante-
cedent, 309; case of relative, how
determined, 309 ; relative in appo-
sition with a clause, 310; relative
and iv , . . , . 343
Remembrance, verbs of, with geni-
tive 228
Renewed mention, by article . 197
Repetition for emphasis . '384
Revelation, the Book of, anomalous
forms and constructions in, 168, 385
Resolved tenses . . 328, 330, 361
Result, by genitive of infinitive, 358 j
by SxTTf . . . . • 359
Rhetorical t<;e . . , .219
Rhythm in sentences . . .387
Roberts, Dr., "Discussions on the
Gospels" 167
Romans, Epistle to the, expounded by
parallelism . . . •387
^^C0, stem and future . . .105
p^vvfii 134
^VfM, declined . . . .26
-pos, -pa, -poy, adjectives in . . 157
^iofiai, augment of . . 103, 107
Pi&vvvui . . • . • 135
S.
Said &nd Paul . . 174, 175, 176
Second declension, paradigms, 23, sq.
Second tenses, the, 91. See Aorist,
Future, Perfect.
Sentences, simple and compound, 177,
186 ; how to analyse, 188 ; quahfied
by article, 192; objective, 344;
conditional, 346 ; intentional, 349 ;
changed structure in, 385 ; non-
completion of compoimd . '385
Separable declension . . .20
Separation, verbs of, with genitive,
229
Septuagint version of the Old Testa-
ment . . . . .168
Shakespeare . . . -45
Singular number, the, 219 ; singular
verb, with neuter plural nominative,
181; singular for collective, by
article 196
Smith's "Dictionary of the Bible," 294
Source or author, by genitive . 225
Space, by accusative . . • 254
Speaker using the plural of himself,
219
"Sphere," the, by dative, 248; by
iv ..... . 262
Stem, the, 15 ; verbal, 61 ; modifica-
tions of . 90, loi, 115, 153, 154
Stier, Dr. 366
Stuart, Dr. M., "New Testament
Syntax" 221
Subject, the (nominative), 177; with
article, 193 ; of the infinitive (ac-
cusative), 253, 355 ; of passive
verbs ..... 322
Subjunctive mood, the, 59 ; anomalous,
from verbs in -601, 353; strictly sub-
jective, 323, in independent clauses,
339; after relatives or particles with
ijf, 343 ; in indirect interrogations,
345 ; aorist as future perfect, 348 ;
in conditional sentences, 347; in
intentional clauses . . . 349
Substantives, genders of, classified,
I C4 ; declensions of, 18, sq. ; syntax
of, 2 1 9, sq. ; number, 219; case,
222; with prei)ositions, 255; fol-
lowed by infinitive, 357 ; adverbially
used 368
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
157
Substantive verb, the, as copula, 178 ;
as predicate, 179; with genitive,
236; with dative . . . 243
Substantivized phrases . 193, 366
Superlative degree, the, 42 ; with
genitive, 235 ; use of, 298 ; Hebra-
istic 299
Synesis, or Rational Concord {con-
structio ad ssTisum), in verbs, 182;
in adjectives, 185, 292; in avrds,
305; in the relative . .310
Synthetic compounds . . 161, 163
Syio-Chaldaic dialect . . .167
-5, appended to ovno, {Jt-^XP'-^ ^XP' • 4
(Toifi^aTov, of variable declension . 34
o-aAirtXcf, future of, 105 ; elliptical use
of 180
adpKivos and <rapKiK6s . . '157
(TeovToi), 7JS, declined, 52 ; eouroC used
for 305
ffrifmlvo), first aorist of . . .106
-ffis, substantives in . . • 1 5 5
(TKia, declined . . . .21
aK6T05, of variable declension . 34
air d pa, stem and forms . 103, 106
<XTi]Kca . . . . 124, 159, 335
aTpecpco, transitive and intransitive, 319
(TTpwvvvfii . . . . • 135
<rii, vixe'is, declined . . -Si
ah Ae7€ts, formula of affirmation, 336
ffvv, 263 ; distinguished from /iera, 264
ad^cof tirst aorist and perfect passive
of 107
adlxppuv, declined. . . .42
T.
"Taxing," the, in Luke ii. 2 '294
Telic and ecbatic particles . 350,359
Temporal augment, the . .62
Temporal use of participles . '363
Tenses, scheme of, 60; principal and
historical, 60; characteristic letters,
6 3 ; expressive of time and state, 3 24 ;
tenses of the indicative, 324, aq. ;
of the imperative, 338; of the sub-
jimctive, 340 ; of the infinitive,
354; of the participles . .360
Terminations of the verb, table, 65, sg.
Than, by genitive after comparative,
229, 294; hy ij , . ,195
Third declension, paradigms, 26, sq. ;
terminations of nominatives . 27
Time, by genitive, 236; by dative,
249 ; by accusative . . -254
Tischendorf . 211, 217, 244, 340
Transition, particles of . 373, 375
Trench, Archbishop . . 222, 332
ravrd and ravra . . , 54, 209
rax^s, comparison of . . .43
T€, with /cot, ascensive . '373
Te\ea, future of, 104; with parti-
ciples . . . . .362
T4pas . . . . . '33
Tccrcrapes, -a, declined . . -47
Ti7A.e-, in composition . . .162
-riip and -rwp, substantives in .155
-TTjs, -TTjTos, substantives in '155
-TTjs, -Tov, substantives in . .154
riOrifjLi, conjugated . . . ji6
rifxdoD, conjugated . . .80
Tifj-ri, declined . . . .21
ris ; ri; interrogative. . '314
Tts, Ti, indefinite . . . .316
roiyapovy . , . , '379
Toivuy . . . . , .379
TocrovTOS ..... 209
Tpets, rpia, declined . . -47
rpecpu, perfect, active and passive, no
Tp€x«, defective . . . .112
rpiha), conjugated . . .86
-Tpou, substantives in . . '155
TiJiTTw, second aorist forms . .92
0au(Ua^«, future of . . .105
0eA&>, how augmented, 102 ; emphatic
future 330
QeSs, with and without article . 202
Oiyyayw, with genitive . .227
ev7}aK(t), stem. And iorma . .102
0pava>, perfect passive . . .110
U.
Unconscious versification . .388
SSwp, declension of, 33; omitted after
certain adjectives . , .292
vlSs, ellipsis of . , , , a3i
'Tibs &eov, with article , 404
-iJi'w, verbs in . • • • '59
158
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
^fp, 274, sq. ; distinguished from avrt,
275; from irepi . . • 289
{nr6 176, sq.
V.
Vaughaii, Dr. C.J. . • 233> 323
Verb, the, 58, 318 ; verhal stem, the,
61 ; denominative verbs, 159 ; classes
of verbs, 159; verbal predicate, 178;
concord of, 181, sq.; transitive, with
accusative object, 249 ; some verbs
both transitive and intransitive, 250;
verbs with modal dative, 246 ; with
cognate accusative, 251; with double
accusative object, 252 ; verbs with
genitive of secondary object, 226,
sq., 235; with dative, 242, sq. ;
complemented by participles, 362 ;
followed by infinitive, 356; com-
bined with adverbial force, 369 ;
verbal forms as adverbs . .147
Verbal adjectives in r6s, rios . 69
Vocative case, the . . .224
Voice, the distinction of . 58,318
Vowels, the .... 2
Vowel aorist, the . . .103
Vau, V, a lost letter of the Greek
alphabet, called, from its shape, f,
Digamma, [ being an old form of
the gamma • • . .46
f, as influencing the declension of
nouns, 29 J the conjugation ot
verbs 105
W.
Want, fulness, &c., by genitive . 228
Watts, Dr. . . . .202
Webster, Kev. W. . 255, 328, 35*
Webster and Wilkinson's "New Tes-
tament" 196
Wilderness of the temptation . 196
Winer's "New Testament Grammar,"
197, 203, 216, 220, 239, 257, 269,
272, 295, 297, 298, 304, 321, 328,
3^9' 370, 377» 380, 384
Wish, expressed by optative . 342
Words, formation of . . .153
Words of one language not precisely
coincident with those of another, 256
Z.
Zeugma 3^3
Zumpt, Dr. A. W., on Quirinius, 294
Cda>, infinitive ; C^^, future . .105
Zfvy, genitive, Ai6s . . .34
^(iyvu/itf conjugated . . .130
INDEX OF SCEIPTTJEE PASSAGES.
[The letter s prefixed denotes the number of the paragraph in the chapter on Synonyms.]
I.— OLD TESTAMENT, CHIEFLY THE SEPTUAGINT.
CH. VER.
2. 7
24
9. 24
25
22. 17
Exodvs.
4. 19
IG. 15
22. 28
Leviticus.
7. 1
14. 2
15. 32
19. 18
PAGE
266
266
2997*
299
365
222
170
388
2397*
23971
23971
Numbers.
6. 13 . . . 239W
21 , . . 23971
3L 12 . . . 251W.
Deuteronomy.
6. 5 ... 287
Kings.
Joshua.
15. 25
175
CH. VER.
1. 43 ...
18. 44 . . .
45 . . .
PAQK
318/
198
198
2 Kings.
1. 2 . . .
3 . . .
23. 10 . . .
169
169
169
I Chronicles.
23. 31 . . .
Nehemiah.
5. 18 . . .
34
264
Psalms.
Proverbs.
9. 2
16. 10
22. 1
25. 11
45. 1
5L 4
68. 18
103. 2
118. 5
22
23
25
• 45
232, 268
170
380
248
321
301
258/1
266, 312
282, 293
. 171
CH. VER.
25. 30
Isaiah.
6. 10
7. 14
9. 1
14. 14
30. 33
40. 4
8
6L 1
65. 1
PA.OE
299
351
197
^55
233
169
266
221
244
248
Jeremiah.
7. 22 ... 37c
31 . . . 169
Hosea.
6. 6 ... 370
Amos.
5. 26 ... 170
9. 12 . . 313, 323
Jonah.
4. 8 ... 199
Micah.
5. 2 ... 261
r r
160
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
II.— NEW TESTAMENT.
M
atthew.
Matthew. \
MaUhew.
CH. VER.
PAGE
OH. VEB.
PAGE
CH. VKB,
PAOB
1. 1 .
195, 205
3. 15 .
... 379
6. 26 .
. . . 171
6 .
... 231
16 .
... 245
27 .
... 329
11 .
... 278
17 .
. 106, 223,
28 .
... 179
16 .
... 365
259, 333
29 .
. «S2, 235
17 .
... 48
4. 1 .
. 196^, 276
30 .
... 552
18 .
. 207, 241,
3 .
204, 347, 350
32 .
... 179
362, 379
4 .
. 263, 279
33 .
... 329
20 .
241,271,338
7 .
... 329
34 .
• 263, 354
21 .
• 179, 258,
8 .
... .58
37 .
... 292
3°5, 329, 379
10 .
... 245
38 .
... 257
22 .
. 191, 268,
11 .
. 244, 327
39 .
. 179, 292,
352W
14 .
... 352
313, 319, 374
23 .
. 197, 272
15 .
... 255
40
s66, 321, 331
2. 1 .
. 197,. 207,
17 .
... 258
41 .
... 172
241, 261, 263
18 .
. S70, 289
42 .
... 321
2 .
245, 356, 379
21 .
. 231, 249
44 .
179, 275, 337
3 .
34, 1737?., 210
23 .
. 239W, 306
45 .
... 3^8
4 .
205, 282, 326
24 .
. 293, 319
46 .
... 314
5 .
. 190, 379
5. 1-16
... 13
47 .
... 314
6 .
261, 379, S16
1 .
198, 264
48 .
... 329
7 .
197, s6
2 .
. 363, 384
6. Is5
521,285, 359
8 .
... 350
3 .
530,248, 329
2 .
325, 340, 343
9 .
... 310
3-U
... 382
3 .
. . .341
10 .
... 251
4-8
... 179
4 .
... 250
11 .
. . . 264
4 .
. . .191
5 .
... 329
12 .
... 354
5 .
40, 178,
6 .
... 338
13 .
. 242, 330,
194, 329
7 .
. . 56, 363
358, 379
6 .
. . . 200
8 .
• . . 359
14 .
... 236
8 .
... 248
9 .
... 303
15 .
... 352
9 .
... 185
9-11
... 338
18 .
. . . S20
10 .
. 201, 329
10 .
277, 303, 374
20 .
222, 334, 379
11 .
... 180
12 .
. . . «39
23 .
... 352
13 .
195, 262, 276
13 .
. 258, 265,
3 1 .
. . . 3Z5
15 .
• 172, 190,
292, 3H
2 .
... 379
198, 277, 280
16 .
. 350, 362
3 .
... 379
16 .
. 214, 338
17 .
... 321
4 .
s66, 274
J7 .
340, 375, 377
18 .
263, 362
5 .
. . . 17"?^
18 .
. 35, 179,
301, 341
22 .
. . 193
. 169, 211,
7 .
S3, 234, 280,
24 .
314, «6
19 .
... 343
236, 300, 356
8 .
. 240, 379
20 .
. 179, 294,
25 .
. 244, 345
9 .
. 259, 379
341, 343
26 .
230, 265, 372
10 .
... 324
21 .
. 179, 248,
27 .
... 364
11 .
. 287, 290
288, 329
28
s66, 244, 274,
12 .
. 247, 3»2
22
«52, 170, 179,
315, 318
13 .
. 258, 358
244, 288
30 .
... 136
14 .
. 3^8, 372
25 .
... 55
34 .
. 191, 267
IKDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES
161
Matthew.
Matthew.
Matt/iew.
CH. VEE.
PAGE
CH. VER.
PAGE
OH. VER.
PAGt
7. I . .
. . 338
9. 16 . «i3
s%5, 280
12. 21 . .
. . 230
2
. . 287
17 . .
. . 136
13 . .
. . 108
3 ". '.
213, 250,
22 . .
. . 158
17 . .
• . 352
303, 315
28 . .
336, 344
18 . .
. . 86z
6 . 19
h 243, 387
29 . .
. . 272
20 . .
. . 106
7 . .
• . 243
34 . .
. . 262
22 . .
. . 387
8 . .
. . 325
35 . . 2
39W» 293,
23 . .
• . 337
9 . .
252, 337
327
24 . .
. . 169
11 . .
• . 354
36 . .
274, 327
26 . .
• 347
13 . .
. . 382
37 . .
. . 377
29 . .
. 196
13-15 .
. . 382
10. 1 . .
. . 237
33 . .
. 378
14 . .
. . 315
2 . .
. . 190
35 . .
. 196
15 . .
251, 313
3 . .
. . 174
36 . .
223, 263
16 . 25
8, 287, 337
4 . .
• 175
41,42 .
195, 217,
20 . .
. . 379
10 . .
. . 240
273
21 . .
301, 313
15 . .
263, 295
47 . .
. 316
22 . .
. . 337
Ifi ' "'5.
377, 377»
13. 2 . .
. 198
23 . .
224, 334
20 . .
. 370
3 . .
192, 244
24 . 22-
7, 280, 313
21 . .
. 181
4 . .
192, 254,
25 . .
. . 109
22 . 270,
308, 330
263, 282
26 . .
• . 313
24 . .
. 276
5 . .
. 358
28 . .
• • 343
25 . .
. 350
8 . .
• 327
29 . .
184, 328
26 . .
. 361
13 . .
• ^5
8. 1 . .
• • 304
27 . .
. . 312
14 . .
351, 365
«> .
. . 344
28 . .
«52, 250
20 . .
. 227
4 . .
265, 340
29 . 171,
240, 301
20-23 .
. 308
8 . .
• • 373
31 . .
. . 230
23 . .
. 189
9 . .
• . 380
42 . .
223, 292
24 . .
• 333
10 . .
. . 179
11. 1 . .
. 362
25 . 197,
264, 359
11 . .
179, 207
2
. . 205
25-40 .
. 171
16 . .
. . 180
3 .* .'
191, 196
26 . .
. 197
17 . .
. • 352
5 . S30,
291, 323
29 . .
. 148
18 . .
• . 274
7 . .
. 55, 196
30 . .
• 359
19 . .
. . 300
8 . 136,
252, 375
31 . .
. 184
24 . .
• . 359
9 . .
. 375
32 . .
• 359
25 . .
319, 337
10 . .
, . 260
35 . .
. 352
26 . .
• • 315
11 . .
. . 297
38 . .
178, 308
28 . .
259> 354
12 . .
• 369
39 . .
• 194
29 . .
. . 246
14 . .
•53, 331
47 . .
. 570
32 . .
. . 270
16 . .
. ziin
52 . .
. 318
9. 1 . .
198, 307
21 . .
• • 349
56 . .
. 284
3 . .
. . 235
23 . .
• 552
14. 3 . .
236, 332
4 . .
• . 314
25 . .
363, 384
6 . .
. 221
5 . .
• . 315
26 . .
. . 213
13 . .
. 272
6 . .
. . 208
28 . .
. . 284
17 . .
. 221
8 . .
. 222
29 . .
40, 258
21 . .
. 301
9 . .
. . 242
30 . .
. 521
22 . .
• 355
11 . .
. . 314
12. 3 . .
183, 272
26 . .
. 258
13 . 3^
^, 334, 37on
7 . .
• 349
27 . . .
. 179
16 . .
. . 281
10 . .
228, 336
29 . .
. 280
162
INDEX OF SCKIPTURE PASSAGE i:^.
Ma'thew.
Matthew.
PAOK
CH. TKR.
PAOK
CH. TER.
PAOK
• 236 314
18. 26-34 .
. . 311
22 10 . .
. . 373
. . . 221
28 . .
, . 17J
16 . .
. . 368
. . . 246
19 4 . .
. . 207
17 . .
. . 171
08, 196, 308
5 . .
180, 266
20 . .
. . 314
. . . 221
8 . .
207, 284
23 . .
. . 325
. . . 144
11 . .
. . 301
29 . .
. . 195
. . . 234
13 . 3c
)6, 328, 349
35 . .
. . 300
. . . 244
14 . .
. . 208
37 . .
555, 287,
. . . 198
16 . .
. . 300
289, 329
. . . 224
17 . .
29^, 347
39 . .
. . 329
. . . 282
18 . .
. . 193
42 . .
. . 205
. 223, 281
19 . .
• • 305
43 . .
. . 262
. . . 235
22 . .
328, 363
23. 2 . .
. . 331
• . . 377
23 . .
. . 376
7 . .
. . 170
. . . 315
26 . .
. . 282
15 . .
«52, 191
. 221, 300
28 . I
62, 277, 280
17 . .
. . 315
. 195, 204
20. 2 . .
. . ^54
19 . .
• • 3'5
. 552, 178,
3 . .
261, 274
24 . .
. . 198
377, 386
6 . .
. . 254
27 . 6
6, ^45, 377
. . . 30
8 . .
. . 376
28 . .
. s6, 377
• 330, 342
9 . .
. 264
31 . .
. . 245
• . • 331
10 . .
. . 264
33 . .
. . S5»
. S55, 331
12 . .
199, 243
34 . .
. . 284
. 555, 2"
19 . .
. . 249
37 .
, . 192
. • . 343
20 . .
• . 315
39 . .
196, 258
216, 326
21 . .
259, 300
24. 1 . .
. . 221
. 245, 356
22 . .
320, 330
2 . .
280, 341
. . . 214
23 . .
192, 377
6 . .
• . 330
. 242, 207
28 . .
2^57, 356
9 . .
. . 330
. • . 330
30-34 .
. . 221
12 . 2
12, 270, 358
. . . 369
21. 3 . .
. . 376
16 . .
. . 288
. . . 348
4 .
. . 352
18 . .
267, 289
. . . 330
5 .
. . 40
21 . .
191, 369
. . . 198
8 .
J82, 289
22 . .
. . 301
. . . 171
8-11
. . 3^8
27 .
. . 207
• . • 379
9 .
171, 196
29 .
. . 361
. . . 26s
12 .
. . 198
40 .
. . 325
. . . 297
16 .
. . . 321
45 .
. . 358
. . . Z74
18 .
. . . 376
25. 1 .
«65, 313
. . . 258
19 .
. . . 221
4 .
. . 273
. 296, 356
23 .
. 325, 378
5 .
. . 3^7
. «52, 296
25 .
. . . 245
8 .
. . 3^4
•••35^
31 .
14 .
. . 307^
• . 49. 243
32 .
. . . 358
15 .
. . . 307
. . . 295
40 .
. . . 340
37 .
. . . 335
. . . 196
42 .
. 266, 282,
40 .
. . 281
. . . 369
293, 312
26. 2 . 2
65, i73. 3^5
• 147, 369
22. 2 .
. • . 333
8 .
. . . 221
. . . 333
5 .
, 189, 3o7n
12 .
. 278, 359
... 300
8 .
. . . 377
16 .
. . . 30a
Matihe%e,
INDEX OP^ SCIIIPTURE PASSAGES.
163
Matthe\
PAGE
. 22i
. 337
263, 308
72, 336, 337
11611, 195
195, 366
254, 359
. . 347
63, 341, 342
• 377
. 338
• 319
171, 296
• 341
S35, 281
. 352
. xiin
. 269
. 271
. 300
168, 380
. 329
. 320
. 170
• 369
. 336
254, 359
• 3»5
• 315
. 380
. 329
. 17X
. 171
. 259
. 170
. 221
. 366
. 221
170, 314
221, 300
. 535
. 204
•S5, 3'^
. 191
. 171
171, 2^73,
148, 236,
301, 376
. . 332
. • 334
Matthew.
Mark.
CH. VER.
PAGE
CH. VER.
PAGE
28. 7 ... . 334
5 29 . .
. 344
9 .... 374
33 . .
. 198
11 . . . . 171
35 . .
. 231
19 . . S19, 266,
41 . .
171, 305
i79>305, 318,363
42 . .
246, 380
6. 2 . .
. 365
Marh
4 . .
• • 290
6 . .
. . 270
1. ] .... 20s
7 . .
49. ^37
2 .
. . . 260
9 . .
. . 385
4 .
. . . 239
11 . .
. . 277
7 .
. 3U» 357
16 . .
. . 3'i
13 .
. . . 196/^
21 . .
221, 249
16 .
570, 289
25 . .
. . 273
23 .
. . . 353
27 . .
. . 171
24 .
152, 191
38 . .
. . 221
27 .
. • . 374
40 . .
223, 264
29 .
. . 231
45 . .
. . 179
33 .
. . . 211»
49 . .
. . sS
30 .
. . . 190
50 . .
■ . 179
39 .
. . 328
56 . .
. 343
2. 1 .
. 269
7. 4 . 172,
320, 321
4 .
. . . 171
11 . .
. 170
15 .
. • 359
17 . .
. 221
19 .
. . 263
22 . .
. 219
23 .
. . 356
25 . .
. 313
3. 2 .
• • 345
27 . .
. 198
5 .
. . S32
31 . .
. 264
13-26
• • 373
34 . .
. 170
17 .
. . 169
35 . .
. 327
IS .
. . 175
36 . .
. 44
21 .
282, 344
8. 2 . .
. 223
26 .
. . 344
10-18 .
. 373
4. 12 .
• . 351
15 . .
. 251
19 .
. . 274
25 . .
. 162
21 .
• . 337
26 . .
. 316
24 .
. . 250
34 . .
• 331
28. .
... 294
35 . .
• 33»
31 .
. . 230
36 . .
. 21 If}
39 .
. . 338
38 . .
. 250
6. 4 .
. . 358
9. 1 . .
. 227
7 .
. . 246
7 . .
. 226
9 .
. 171, 184
12 . .
281, 377
11 .
. . 284
19 . .
• 369
13 .
270, 301
20 . . .
. 385
14 .
. . 32s
21 . . .
• 144
15 .
171, 325
34 . .
. 297
21 . .
. . 281
37 . .
279. 370
22 . .
. . 300
40 . . .
. 275
23 . .
319* 340
41 . .
205, 341
164
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
Mark.
Mark.
OH. TBB.
FaUK
CH. VER.
PAQH
CH. VER. PAOS
9. 42 . .
. 44, 296
14. 19 .
49, 149, ^72
1 15 . . 35, 170,
43 .
. . S52
25 .
. . 341
206, 30c
43-47
. . 296
28 .
. . 192
19 .284,323», 331
45 .
, , . ss^
31 .
330, 34*
20 . . 257, 330
50 .
. . . 262
35 .
. . 278
21 . . 328, 359
10. 8 .
. . 8, 266
36 .
170, 224
23 . . . . S36
13 . I
80, 306, 328
49 .
. . . 35a
29 .... 345
17 .
. . . 300
54 .
. . . 369
31 ... . 329
18 .
. . . 292
55 .
. . . 358
33 . . 221, 280
37 .
. 207, 300
68 .
. 269, 362
35 ... . 204?!
45 .
. . . 380
60 .
. . • 337
37 .... 301
46-52
. . . 221
61 .
S28, 190
41 .... 206
51 .
. . . 170
68 .
. . . 54
42 .... 299
11. 2 .
. . . 23s
71 .
. . . 136
46 . . . . *47
7 .
• • • 335
15. 1 .
. . . 216
46-55 ... 387
8 .
. . . 289
6 .
. . 55» 326
50 .... 267
9 .
. . . 171
9 .
. . . «3
51 . . 262, 333
10 .
. . . 171
12 .
. . . 53
53 . . 228, 333
14 .
. . . 342
15 .
. . S3, 171
57 357
18 .
. . . 3^8
16 .
. . . 311
59 .... 328
22 .
. . .237
17 .
. . . 252
62 .... 193
25 .
. . . 270
21 .
. . . 207
64 .... 383
27 .
. • . 325
22 .
. . . 170
67 .... 206
32 .
. 346, 385
24 .
. . • 345
68-79 . . . 387
12. 4 .
. . . 369
29 .
. . . 152
75 .... 253
5 .
. . . 189
34 .
. . . 170
76 .... 260
10 .
266, 312
36 .
. . . 221
79 .... 106
14 .
. 278, 341
39 .
. 171, 204
2. 1 . . 176, 292
17 .
. . 190
44 . I
71, 334, 345
2 . . 294, 299
18 .
. . . 325
45 .
. . 171
4 . «6i, 314, 358
26 .
. . 278
47 .
. . . 231
6 .... 321
28 .
. . 299
16. 1 .
518, 231
6 . » . . 357
30 .
287, 290
2 .
236, 301
8 .... 251
31 .
. . 305
4 .
. . 380
10 , . 210, 323n
34 .
. . 346
5 .
. 322
12 .... 217
38 .
. . 251
6 .
. . 334
13 .... 293
42 .
. 171, 300
9 .
. 50, 301
18 .... 274
13. 1 .
221, 293
12 .
. . . 207
20 .... 311
4 .
• . 330
21 . 357,359,374
8 .
. . 271
L\
ike.
23 . . . .328
9 .
• • 30s
25 .... 206
14 .
. . 288
1. 1 . 1
51, 331 379
29-32 ... 387
16 . 2
67, 289, 341
2 .
. . 207
31 . . 210, 271
20 . .
30 ». 349
3 . .
. . 298
35 .... 208
22 . .
. . 359
4 . .
. . ei4
37 ... . 49
25 . .
330, 361
6 . .
. . 3'6
39 . 190, 272, 332
14. 3 . .
. . 270
6 . .
. . «49
41 .... 272
4 . .
. . 314
9 . .
• . 357
48 . . 108, 331
6 . .
. . 301
10 . .
. . 328
49 . . 232, 315
6 . .
. . 263
13 . .
. . 329
3. 1 .... 176
Luke.
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
165
Luke.
PAGE
. 278
. 266
S2, 283
287, 312
293, 323W
• 311
. 106
• 370
. S58
• S3
. 209
. 271
. 361
110, 224,
323W, 334
• 362
. 278
. 357
211, 323%
. 178
, 362
269, 279
. 328
191, 330
. 385
. 358
. 236
. 273
. 334
320
356
356
6871
64,
. 175
. 231
. 3^7
. 265
. 209
. 105
. 209
. 375
. 380
21,350,380
281, 321
. . 341
. . 287
. . 361
287, 307
Luke.
6. 47
48
7. 2
19
25
39
45
46
47
48
8. 1
6
8
10
13
15
23
29
30
33
39
41
45
49
52
54
9. 3
7
8
13
14
16
23
24
25
27
28
30
31
34
35
37
41
45
46
10. 1
8
7
14
97
• 315
. 369
S2, 330
• 317
136, 375
. 348
. 362
. 312
. 272
. 108
. 108
. 351
. 277
«2I, S3I
. 327
. 249
182
270
271
373
264
344
359
236
264
• 317
. 317
295, 347^
. 264
. 197
• 331
. 33^
. 2 1 171
171,
213,
. 227
. 223
. 314
• 330
. 330
. 226
. 283
• 369
• 351
193, 297
49, 264,
293, 330
• 34
. 196
. 195
CH. VER.
10. 19
20
22
23
24
27
29
31
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
11. 2
4
8
11
12
13
28
35
36
42
12. 1
5
6
7
10
11
20
22
24
26
28
30
33
39
44
47
48
54
65
2
4
9
11
16
Luke.
PAGE
330, 342, 357
22 iw, 370
^•3
179
179
305
373
313
281
235
273
307
63, 247
247
321
22I7»
299W,
'98,
13.
«39
358
385
237
206
379
353
2iin
375
263, 305
. . 257
«52, 359
171, 301
. . 230
223, 265
. . 216
224, 314
244, 345
. 230
. 244
. 136
. 320
S2, 22 in
• 349
. 279
. 285
. 312
207, 326
. 199
. 283
. 48
. 383
. 368
. 49
166
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
Luke,
CH. VER.
13. 18
12
22
29
32
14. 3
6
7
17
18
19
24
30
31
15. 4
7
15
19
25
26
27
29
16. 1
3
4
8
9
10
11
13
16
19
22
23
25
26
30
17. 2
3
4
8
12
15
23
30
32
34
35
18. 1
4
PAGE
. 243
. 266
. 320
. 207
. i8»
- 249
. 165
. 327
. 184
33a, 368
. 332
. 227
. 208
. 261
. 49
. 296
S16, 242
. 357
207, 226
. s6z
. 326
. 254
. 365
. 363
. 229
232, 276
69, 259, 320
. 213
169, 382
. 169
. 323W
• 453
. 220
«23, 220
191, 308
. 279
. 316
269, 350
^5', 305
. 236
. 105
. 316
. 344
. 180
. 209
. 228
345
330
359
281
Luke
28]
CH. VER.
18. 7 .
8 .
11 .
12 .
13 .
14 .
17 .
26 .
35-43
35 .
19. 3 .
8 .
11 .
18 .
20 .
37 •.
38 .
40 .
42 .
44 .
48 .
20. 2 .
11 .
12 .
16 .
17 .
19 .
20 .
21 .
25 .
35 .
39 .
21. 5 .
11 .
12 .
19 .
22 .
24 .
26 .
34 .
37 .
22. 4 .
14 .
15 .
19 .
20 .
22 .
24 .
33 .
35 .
87,
PAGE
• 236
151, 336
. 378
236, 335
. 549
296, 307
. 341
• 373
. 222
• 335
,5871, 346
235» 325
• 369
. S18
. 171
182, 292
193
no
. 383
257, 279
• 345
. 378
• 369
. 369
342
. 312
. 358
165, 254
. 221
• 379
236, 354
. 221
. 551
. 386
. 26X
267, 335
. 357
. 178
22in, 290
• 305
. 366
• 193
. 183
246, 359
304, 366
273, 359
. . 377
- . 297
■ • 357
, . 3»6
Luke.
266,
23.
CH. VER.
22. 37 .
41 .
42 .
49 .
50 .
57 .
59 .
67 .
68 .
70 .
5 .
6 .
12 .
14 .
15 .
19 .
24 .
26 .
33 .
47 .
49 .
53 .
1 .
5 .
6 .
10 .
11 .
13 .
18 .
21 .
23 .
25 .
26 .
27 .
29 .
32 .
34 .
35 .
39 .
41 .
46 .
47 .
24.
1. 1
2
4
6
John.
194, 207,
284, 382
. . 207
. . 194
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
167
John.
John.
John.
PAOE
CH. VEB.
PAQE
CH. VER.
PAGE
... 224
4. 11 .
. 184, 373
6. 42 . 208
, 287, 309
... 372
14 .
. 311, 342
45 . .
. . 222
. 220
18 .
. . . 312
46 . .
. . 308
185,2x8,282
19 .
. . . 382
49 . .
. . 170
294W, 297, 299
22 .
. . . 198
51 . .
221, 377
• a57» 373
23 .
290, 380
57 . .
270, 374
... 308
25 .
. . . 169
58 . .
170, 221
... 335
27 .
...^73
60 . .
. . 382
... 384
35 .
. . . 346
62 . .
. . 383
... 287
36 .
• . • 351
66 . .
. . 260
... 325
40 .
. . . 197
71 . .
. . 231
... 299
42 .
304, 340W
7. 4 . .
. . 347
. 287, 308
43 .
. . 197
6 . .
. . 209
... 254
44 .
• . 307
14 . .
. . 328
. . . 169
52 .
. . 254
16 . .
■ . 370
307, 307W, 310
53 .
183, 2im
17 . .
. . 331
... 359
5. 4 .
• • 55
22 . .
. . 290
... 183
5 .
. . 254
23 . .
2", 351
. 246, 326
6 .
. . 331
24 . .
. . 251
. . . 3'3
8 . .
. . 339
27 . .
. 346
. . . 264
11 .
. . . 308
34 . .
. i27n
... 228
13 . .
. . 56
35 . .
. 239
... 339
16 . .
. . 327
36 . .
. 127?*
. . . 227W
17 .
. . 369
38 . .
. 223
... 369
18 . .
. .307
41 . .
. 3«o
. 183, 254
22 . .
. . 210
45 . .
. 308
. . . «35
29 . .
. . 239
49 . .
. 185
... 171
30 . .
. . 306
8. 4 . .
. 108
• . • 339
35 .
. . sSs
9 . .
49, 272
... 237
36 . .
. . 294
16 . .
. 377
. . 49, 249
40 .
. . 331
17 . .
. 377
... 233
42 . .
238, 346
25 . .
. 368
... 348
44 . .
. . 385
29 . .
332, 333
206, 290, 348
46 . .
. . 348
40 . .
• 334
... 194
47 . .
336, 347
42 . .
sio, 349
. . . 196
6. 1 . .
. . 241
44 . 207,
306, 331
. . . 196
2 . .
182, 278
51 . . .
. 341
... 301
6 . .
. . 330
52 . .
183, 227
. 30J, 359
8 . .
. . 221
53 . . .
• 314
... 370
9 . I
6w, 221, 300
58 . . .
. 179
... 384
10 . .
. . 252
59 . . .
. 204
... 387
19 . .
. . 254
9. 2 . . .
. 351
... 387
20 . .
179. 337
3 . . .
. 181
... 3=^8
22 . .
332, 3^5
16 . . .
. 208
... 361
24 . .
204, 385
22 . . .
. 321
... 246
27 . .
. . 371
24 . . .
. S47
. . . S24
28 . .
• . 341
30 . . .
. 380
... 3^4
31 . .
170, 196
31 . . .
. 382
... 268
37 . .
. . 341
33 . . .
. 349
... 259
39 . .
. . 301
36 . . .
. 373
168
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
John.
CH. VEK.
9 40
41
10. 1
3
4
5
6
16
22
24
27
28
30
32
33
35
11. 1
4
6
8
11
12
13
15
17
18
19
21
30
31
32
34
35
38
44
47
61
12. 1
4
13
18
20
23
27
34
40
43
44
45
46
PAGE
II
349
308
226
182
342
S46
«72
221
369
182
341
183
289
289
195
287
275
254
221
335
347
328, 334
351
319
48
190
349
332
384
349
336
S20
265
338
341
204
260
221
171
362
366
351
375
205, 362
35»
«47, 295
370
«5
301
John,
14
15.
OH. VER.
13. 4 .
5 .
6 .
8 .
10 .
11 .
14 .
16 .
18 .
27 .
28 .
31 .
3 .
6 .
7 .
13 .
15 .
16 .
17 .
22 .
26 .
27 .
28 .
1 .
4 .
6 .
8 .
9 .
16 .
17 .
18 .
20 *
22 .
25 .
26 .
27 .
2 .
4 .
13 .
16 .
20 .
23 .
24 .
25 .
27 .
29 .
32 .
2 .
3 .
4 .
16.
17,
171,
PAOE
171
198
336
. 341
«i7, 321
. 366
. «I2
. 230
. 352
. 297
. 314
• 333
. 326
. 268
. 349
. Zl^
• 339
. i63»
. 206
• 330
163W, 206, 252
214, 387
. 349
. 184
. 261
. 180
• 350
• 304
. 313
. 309
• ^99
. 347
. 349
. 352
, 206
. 377
35ii 375
. 207
198, 206
. 3^5
266, 375
. «9
. 320
. «46
. 282
. «46
. 351
iw, 237, 353
«24, 350
. . 33»
John.
CH.
17.
18.
19.
20.
7 .
9 .
10 .
12 .
15 .
17 .
20 .
24 .
3 .
6 .
6 .
8 .
9 .
15 .
16 .
20 .
21 .
24 .
28 .
30 .
32 .
34 .
35 .
37 .
3 .
11 .
13 .
17 .
19 .
20 .
24 .
25 .
27 .
28 .
28-«0
29 .
30 .
31 .
32 .
36 .
38 .
41 .
1 .
3-5
4 .
209,
. 109
. S9
ill, 306
. 35^
59, 292
• 194
. 59
. 260
. 198
. 179
. 179
179, 204
352
183
284
263
315
332
231
349
330
305
. 337
336, 337
. 213
. 297
. 169
. 170
[72, 221, 227
. . 172
34o» 35*
142, 174,
^59i
23]
«i3i
.83
282
232
«i3
35^
221
106
181
106
35*
193
197
5o» 197.
265, 301
180, 290
,211,265
. . 328
43W, 145.
265, 294
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
169
John.
Acta.
AzU,
VEB.
PAGE
CH. VER.
PAGE
CH. VEB.
PAGII
5 .... 265
2. 21 .
. . . 323
4. 37 .
. . . 364
11 .
. . . 284
22 .
. «45, 311
5. 1 .
. . . 23
12 .
. 284, 30c
24 .
. • . 357
2 .
. . . 321
14 .
. . . 344
25 .
. . . 265
4 . 3
15, 363, 370
16 .
. . . 170
27 . 8
52, 231, 268
8 .
. . . 3^1
17 .
. . . 3^5
29 .
. i6i, 373
9 .
. . • 315
19 .
. . . 301
31 .
. 231, 268
15 .
. 235, 316
22 .
. . . 206
34 .
. . . 221
16 .
. . . 292
25 .
211, 342
36 .
. . . 210
19 .
. . . 269
28 .
. . 213
38 . 2
05, 266, 279
21 .
. 141, 277
30 .
. . 293
39 .
. . . 321
28 .
. . . 246
3 .
. . 108
45 .
. . . 343
30 .
. . . 204
6 .
. . 258/1
46 .
. . . 272
32 .
. . . 241
8 .
. . 39
47 .
. . 366
34 .
. . . 316
10 .
. . 258
.3. 1 .
. . . 183
35 .
. 305» 330
11 .
49, 228
2 .
Ii6w, 180,
36 . I
74, 245, 316
13 .
. . 384
326, 366
37 .
. . . 245
14 .
• • 334
3 .
. . . 364
41 .
. . .' 275
15 .
230, 231
4 .
. . 364
42 .
272, 362
15-17
S16, S19
5 .
. . 316
6. 1 .
S50, 284
16 .
. . 231
7 .
234, 364
3 .
206, 277
17 .
. . 231
8 .
. . . 363
5 .
. . 175
18 .
• . 33=^
10 .
. . 346
9 .
171, 290
19 .
• • 33^
11 .
. . 292
13 .
. . 362
23 .
• . 3^5
12 .
358, 364
7. 1 .
3i9» 336
25 . .
. . 3i4
13 .
. . . 308
9 .
. . 3^1
■
J9 .
. • 352
12 . .
. . 362
Acta.
24 .
. . 377
14 .
. . 261
25
. . «6x
16 . .
. . 231
1 . 225,299,311,
4. 6 .
. . 356
19 . .
. . 358
3^o, 373» 377
7 . 2
90, 293, 364
20 . .
. . 300
2 .... 244
8 . .
206, 364
21 . .
266, 304
3 .
269, 359
9 . .
. . 237
26 . .
. • 314
4 .
227, 385
13 . .
364, 384
30 . .
. . 196
.
206, 287
15 . .
. . 364
34 .
. . 365
7 .
. . 217
16 . .
. . 377
35-38 .
• . 309
10 . .
3^8, 374
17 . .
246, 281
40 . .
. . 223
13 .
175, 231
18 . .
. . 364
42 . .
536, 319
16 .
. . 225
19 . .
295, 364
43 . .
. . 170
18 .
181, 250
20 . .
. . 179
48 . .
. . S35
19 .
. 169
21 . .
. . 364
56 . .
. «5, 221
22 .
308, 311
22 . .
233, 296
59 . .
. . 323
24 .
. . 263
23 . .
. . 364
8. 1 . .
. . 271
1-13 .
. . II
25 . .
• • 3H
5 . .
. . 3c6
1 .
. . 281
27 . .
. . 562
9 . .
. . 316
2 . .
. . 361
28 . .
• . 383
11 . .
. . 249
4 .
. . 206
30 . .
. . «62
12 . .
. • -^73
10 .
. . 271
32 . .
. . 316
15 . .
206, 314
U .
. . 362
35 . .
. . 342
17 . .
., . 206
17 .
105, 258
36 . .
. . 364
18 . .
. . 206
170
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
Acts.
Acts.
CH. VER.
PAGE
CH. VER. PAGE
CH. VER.
PAQI
8. 20 .
. . . 342
12. 21 ... . 277
16. 25 .
. . . 271
21 .
. . . 243
23 .... 257
26 .
. . . 359
23 .
. . . 362
13. 7-12 ... 175
31 .
. . . 183
26 .
. . . 308
9 . . . . T75
17. 1 .
. . . 198
27 .
. . . 364
10 . 225, 337, 362
3 .
. 205, 385
30 . I
52, 336, 386
13 .... 190
4 .
. . • 373
31 .
343> 3^0
15 .... 225
10 .
. 269, 314
35 .
. . . 334
20 .... 249
11 .
. . . 346
40 .
. 267, 359
21 . . 173^. 254
12 .
• • • ^35
9 3 .
. • • 355
22 ... . 266
15 .
. 145, 299
7 .
. . . 227
23 .... 204
18 .
. . . 331
14 .
. . 323,
31 .... 281
21 .
. 21071, 297
16 .
. . 275
33 .... 204
22 .
. 544, 297
20 .
. . . 3^4
34 . . . . S23
23 .
. «37, *'7
21 .
• • 3-3
40 .... 222
25 .
. . . 386
29 .
. .550
42 .... 267
27 . 6
7, 68n, 227,
31 . 2
3I, 248, 271
45 .... 363
3f ' 3^9
33 .
. . 260
47 .... 358
28 .
. 189, 388
39 .
321, 364
14. 2 ... . 271
30 .
. . . «42
10. ] .
. . 23
4 . . . . 189
31 . 2
62, 330, 368
3 .
197, 254
.... 357
IS. 3 .
. . 252
6 .
. . 283
8 .... 248
9 .
. . . 3H
7 . .
s6o, 235
9 .... 357
13 .
. . .\ 283
16 . .
. . 281
10 .... 201
14 .
. 225, 349
18 .
. . 345
12 ... . 34
15 .
. . . 329
22 .
197, 227
13 . S67, 34, 260
18 .
. . 538
24 .
. . 3^8
16 .... 248
25 .
297, 322
32 .
. . 185
19 .... 253
26 .
. . 296
37 .
. . 271
21 . . 250, 318
19. 2 .
. . 336
38 . .
. . 251
23 .... 335
3 .
. . 206
11. 6 .
. . 3^8
27 .... 273
7 .
. 48, 211
10 . .
. . 281
15. 1 ... . 246
12 .
. . 171
13 . .
. . 197
4 .... 273
14 . .
. . 317
15 .
. . 207
12 .... 182
15 . .
. S4, »78
16 . .
zo6, 287
14 .... 174
17 . .
. . 2ion
18 . .
. . 379
17 . 310, 313, 323
19 . .
. . 301
19 .
. . 279 '
21 . . . . 27i
24 . .
. . 320
20 . .
SCO, 204
23 . . 3"8, 360
25 . .
. . 274
23 . .
. . 246
28 ... . «6
26 . .
. . 208
26 . .
. . 211
35 . . S15, 293
27 . .
. . 266
28 . .
176, 278
36 . S15, 310, 316,
29 . .
. . 21 IW
29 . .
. . 310
3i9> 346
32 . .
. . 297
30 . .
. . 310
16. 2 ... . 3"
34 . .
. . 385
12. 2 . .
. . ^47
3 . . 185, 384
35 . .
292, 380
3 . .
. . 369
4 .... 3^7
39 . .
. . 347
6 .
. . 200
9 .... 269
40 . .
228, 380
7 . .
. . inn
12 . . 171, 3'4
20. 3 . .
. . 357
14 . .
. . 258W
13 . . «38, 237»
4 . .
. . 175
15 . .
. . 190
15 .... 347
6 . .
. . 197
18 . .
. . 345
16 . SJS, 320. 356
7 . .
SIS, 30*
Acts.
CH. VER.
20. 8
9
13
18
24
28
I ' 31
33
35
21. 3
5
11
13
16
26
28
30
31
32
37
38
22 2
9
11
12
16
17
20
21
25
29
30
23. 5
6
9
10
13
14
15
23
26
30
31
32
24. 3
5
6
11
14
cts.
PAGE
. • .
565
15, 198,
25871
.
197
. . .
2C9/1
. 513,
320
. *i6,
H9,
307,
321
362
. .
227
. . .
296
. .
s68
. . .
369
. .
307
. 267,
374
• 8ZS,
312
365
' 334,
363
. .
ziin
.
211
. 346,
362
336
171, 195
198
167
. .
227
. .
258/i
. . .
322
. 321,
330
356
. .
320
• .
265
. .
336
. .
377
. 193
322
• 3^9
388
178
. . .
383
. S33
353
296
. 551
246
. 254, 357 1
. . .
3'7
. 299
360
278
. .
269
. . .
198
. 144
299
367
. . .
209
296, 310
,364
. . .
309
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
Acts.
CH. VER.
24. 17
25.
26.
18 .
19 .
20 .
22 .
23 .
26 .
6 .
7 .
8 .
9 .
10 .
17 .
19 .
21 .
23 .
25 .
26 .
27 .
2-7
2 .
3 .
4 .
5 .
6 .
7 .
12 .
14 .
16 .
17 .
24 .
25 .
29 .
SO .
32 .
27. 3
8
9
10
13
14
16
17
20
25
34
37
38
39
43
64,
PAGE
269, 376
. . 310
278, 348
. 107
• 297
. 198
. 242
• 277
• 293
. 176
. 278
297, 361
. 320
• S44
. 176
272
. 176
165, 278
. 106
. 217
. 278
255, 271
• 377
. «44
• 335
312, 368
310
167
309
310
212
299
343
183
355
247
298
34
355
298
. 270
247, 353
. 320
. 357
. 225
142, 283
. 21 I
. 136
• 348
S3, 229
145,
Acts.
28.
4 .
6 .
15 .
16 .
18 .
20 .
26 .
27 .
30 .
171
PAGE
200
124
172
272
314
253
342
351
211
Romans.
1. 1 .
2 .
4 .
5 .
7 .
8 .
9 .
10 .
11 .
13 .
16 .
17 .
20 .
22 .
24 .
25 . t.
26 .
29 .
32 .
2. 1 .
2 .
4 .
. 5 .
6 .
8 .
9 .
10 .
12 .
13 .
14 .
15 .
16 .
18 .
19 .
21-23
23 .
25 .
26 .
«345
231
239M
204W, 222
. 238
. 204
211, 377
. 320
. 278
244, 317
317, 369
. 219
. 187
S58
356
258
!, 221, 283
232, 283
247, 386
. . 364
. . 224
. . 240
187
263
310, 387
S32, 260
. 219
. 387
. 218
. 282
. 217
. 378
2397*, 269
. «i4
. 254
. 336
. 21S
. 2l8
a66, 306
531,
172
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
Romans.
Romans.
Romans.
•H. VER. PAQK
CH. VEB.
PAGE
CH. VER.
2. 27 .... 364
6. 2 . 245,
313, 242
9. 8 . .
2
3. 2 . 253, 322, 377
3 . .
266, 378
9 . .
4 .... 321
4 . .
266, 334
11 . .
9 .... 323
5 . .
347, 376
12 . .
18 .... 238
8 . .
264, 340W
14 . .
20 . 218, 301, 330
10 . . .
. 281
15 . .
22 .... 288
13 . . .
• 339
18 . .
23 . . 228, 332
14 . .
277, 329
19 . .
25 . . 842, S49,
15 . . .
. 342
20 . .
J
288, 321
16 . .
• 377
29 . .
1
26 . . S31, 288
17 . .
312, 384
30 . .
.
28 . . 218, 379
20 . .
. 245
10. 1 . .
',
29 .... 378
7. 1 . .
. 378
2 . .
.
30 . . 285, 379
2 . .
239» ^3
4 . .
.
31 . ii6w, 218, 375
3 . .
. 358
13 . .
,
4. 1-16 ... 12
5 . .
. 262
14 .
,
1 .... 187
7 . 194,
329, 336
16 .
J
2 .... 347
9 . .
. . 218
18 .
,
3 . . 180, 19s,
10 . .
. . 308
20 .
5
266, 376
12 . .
«2I, 377
11. 1 .
.
5 .... 266
13 . .
. . 342
7 .
9 .... 266
14 . .
. . 157
9 .
,
11 . . 233, 286
18 . .
. . 355
13 . 2
34,
12 .... 260
24 . .
224, 233
17 .
13 .... 226
25 . .
• 34, 304
18 .
,
14 .... 260
8. 3 . 214
255, 2174
24 .
, ,
18 .... 283
9 . .
. . 206
25 .
, .
19 .... 301
11 . .
. . 270
31 .
20 . . 246, 363
13 . .
«54, 330
33 .
22 .... 266
15 . .
170, 384
36 .
,
6. 1 . . a59, 269,
18 . .
285, 382
12. 1 .
.
340, 340»
20 . .
. . 279
3 .
2 .... 340
22 . .
. . 369
5 .
3 .... 340
23 . 5^,
233W, 364
9 .
.
5 .... 238
24 . .
. . 247
15 .
,
6 . . 271, 27s
25 . .
. . 347
16 .
7 . . S2I, 275,
26 . .
163, 193,
19 .
. .
291, 380
209, 345
13. 2 .
8 .... 27s
27 . .
. . 272
3 .
9 . . 185, 367
31 . .
. . 275
5 .
.
10 . . 286, 34on
32 . .
. . 55
9 . 1
93,
11 .... 367
33 . .
. . 336
10 .
12 . 201, 279, 386
34 . .
. . 336
11 .
13 ... , 201
35 . .
. . 238
14 .
, ,
13-17 . . . 386
36 . .
. . 239
14 1 .
,
15-19 . 212, 347,
39 . .
. . 238
4 .
, ,
386
9. 1 . .
206, 384
6 .
, .
17 .... 366
2 . .
. . 387
15 .
, .
18 . 239, 379, 386
3 . .
«38, «5i
20 .
.
20 . . 163, 218
6 . .
221, 277
16. 3 .
. .
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
173
Romans.
I Corinthians.
1 Corinthians.
CH. VER. PAGE
OH. VER. PAGE
OH. VBR.
PAOK
15. 4 . 195, 226, 304
3. 6 . . 318, 327
8. 13 .
• 34^, 347
5 . . . . 242
7-9.
. . . 203
9. 1 .
• • • 337
6 .... 216
7 .
. 316, 318
2 .
. . . 376
8 .... 275
9 .
. 234, 382
6 .
. . . 183
11 .... 339
10 .
. 203, 217
10 .
. . . 318
13 .... 206
13 .
. . . 291
12 .
• 2137, 247
15 . 270, 297, 332
15 .
. . . 268
14 .
. . . 259
16 .... 206
16 .
. . . 635
15 . 2
47, 263, -^32
22 .... 357
17 .
. . . 3"
17 .
. 253, 322
24 . . 254, 355
20 .
. 203, 346
24 .
. . . 338
25 .... 364
21 .
. . . 237
26 .
• • • 379
26 .... 320
4. 4 .
. . . 245
10. 1 .
. . . 21 on
27 .... 235
5 .
199, 260
2 .
. 266, 321
16. 6 ... . 314
6 .
. 300, 353
3 .
. . . 3^8
9 . . . . 176/1
8 .
. 136, 343
4 .
. . . 328
12 .... 314
9 .
. . . s6
11 .
182, 285
14 .... 175
17 .
. • . 333
13 .
. . . 199
15 .... 175
21 .
. 262, 315
14 .
. . . 250
21 .... 175
5. 4 .
. . . 264
16 .
. . . 312
23 ... . 211W
5 .
. . . 308
17 .
• 212, 235
25 . . 239W, 249
7 .
525, 380
19 .
. . . 316
8 .
. . . 262
21 .
. . . 235
I Corinthians.
9 .
. 199, M4,
25 .
. . . 17a
332, 333
26 .
. . . «i3
I. 1 ... . 202
13 .
. . . 329
29 .
• • 314
2 . .. 323, 373
6. 1 . 2
78, 316, 321
31 .
. . . 378
3 . . . . 204
2 .
• 24o» 347
33 .
. . 212
9 .... 269
4 .
. . . 308
11. 1 .
. . 376
10 ... . 34
5 .
. . . 264
2 .
«49, 376
11 .... 231
6 .
. . . 309
4 .
141, 270
13 . . 266, 336
8 .
. 309, 373
9 .
. . 270
17 .... 356
11 .
. 185, 309,
12 .
. . 270
18 .... 234
317, 33^
13 .
• . 356
19 ... . 136%
16 .
. 180, 266
14 .
. . 200
21 . . 198, 286
18 .
. . . 250
18 .
316, 377
25 .... 294
19 .
. . 237
22 .
. . 341
29 . . . . 301
7. 5 .
. 281
23 .
. . 328
2. 1 . . 179, 203
10 .
. 253
24 . .
265, 366
2 . . 255«, 273
11 .
. • 253
25 . J
47, 273, 304
3 .... 179
15 .
• 338
26 .
• • 147
4 .... 206
16 .
. 345
27 . .
. . 378
7 . . 203, 366
19 .
. 185
30 . .
246, 335
8 .... 349
25 .
. 365
31 . .
• • 349
13 . . 5 55, 206
28 .
• 333
12. 2 . .
• . 343
14 . . . . S55
31 .
. 247
3 . .
. . 551
15 . . . . S55
32-34 .
. 244
8 . .
. . 286
3. 1 . S55, 157, 179
34 . .
. 248
9 . .
. . 286
2 .... 383
37 . .
. 385
13 . .
266, 380
4 . . S5S, 317
39 .
• 357
14 . .
. . 380
6 . . 268, 376
40 . .
s6, 206
15 . .
. . 283
174
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
I CorintJiiam. |
I Corinthians.
2 Corinihians.
tH. VER,
PAGE
OH. VER.
PAGE
CH. VER. PAGE
12. 16 . .
. . 283
15. 25 .
. . . 326
2. 13 ... . 358
18 . .
. . 248
27 .
. . . 180
14 . .
. . 220
20 . .
. . 248
29 .
. 222, 276
15 . .
192, 367
25 . .
. . 244
30 .
. . . 179
17 . .
212, 361
27 . .
. . 368
31 .
... 304
3. 1 . .
. . 305
31 . .
. . 297
32 .
... 340
3 . I
57, 184, 206
13. 1 . .
201, 383
33 .
5, *2I, 388
5 . .
. . 287
2 . .
. . 210
34 .
• . . 339
6 . .
. . 217
3 . .
• . 353
37 .
... 348
11 . .
. . 286
4 . .
. 200
39 .
. . . 301
12 . .
. . 247
8 . .
. . 320
41 .
. . . 229
13 . .
ii6», 367
9 . .
. . 368
43 .
. . . 381
14 . .
. . 369
10 . .
. . 368
44 .
. sss, 381
15 . .
. . 280
11 . .
. . 326
45 .
... 266
17 . ,
. . 194
12 . 2
68, 284, 368
46 .
. . . sss
18 . .
. . 246
13 . .
. . 230
49 .
. . . 34071
4 2 .
. . 209
14. 1 .
SIS, 376
50 .
... 183
6 . .
. . 23^
4 . .
. . 217
52 .
... 180
14 . .
. . 3i3»
5 .
^95. 347»
54-57
... 387
17 .
. . 288
9 .
. . 330
55 .
... 552
18 .
. . «5
10 .
. . 348
16. 2 .
... 301
5. 1 .
233, 241
11 .
. . 263
5 .
... 326
2 .
. . 364
13 .
. . 350
10 .
... 341
4 .
351, 380
15 .
. 34, 340W
15 .
... 384
6 .
169, 233
16 .
• • 199
17 .
... 304
6 .
367, 385
19 .
34, 207, 296
21 .
... 307
8 .
367, 385
20 '.
sss, 248
22 .
. «5i, 170
10 .
. . 269
22 f.
. . 266
11 .
. . 238
23 .
. . 2im
2 Corinthians.
13 .
. . 245
25 .
. . 2C7
14 .
238, 275
27 .
. 141, 264
I. 3 .
... 216
15 . 2
75, 33^, 334
28 .
. . 207
4 .
... 3"
16 .
. • 347
30 .
. . 299
5 .
. . . 269
18 .
. . . 203
35 .
. 407, 331
8 .
. 276, 357
19 . 2
62, 306, 361
36 .
. . . 378
9 .
165, 280, 351
6. 2 .
. . . 180
38 .
. . . 338
10 .
... 54
14 .
. . . 243
5 3 .
. . . 275
12 .
... 300
18 .
. . . 266
4 .
• • • 334
13 .
350, 376, 378
7. 1 .
. . . 238
6 . 2
81, 2Q7, 301
14 .
. 184, 368
4 .
. . . 247
8 .
. . . 199
16 .
... 286
5 .
. . . 367
9 .
. . . 235
17 .
... 247
8 .
. . . 199
10 .
. 247, 264
22 .
. 169. 233
9 .
. . . 27a
12 .
. . . 346
2. 2 .
... 374
10 .
. «40, 272
14 .
. . . 829
3 .
280,281,333
11 .
. , . 272
15 .
. . . 271
4 .
. 260, 333
12 .
. 333, 359
16 .
. . . 347
5 .
. 347, 368
13 .
. . . 279
17 .
. . . «29
6 .
. 208, 297
14 .
. . . 347
19 .
. . . 361
9 .
... 333
16 .
. . . 220
21 .
. . . 200
10 .
... 3^3
8. 2 .
. . . 270
24 .
. . . 216''
12 .
. 266,376
7 .
. . . 340
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
175
2 Corinthians.
Galatians. \
Oaiatiam.
CH. VER. PAGE
OH. VER.
PAGE
OH. VER. PAGE
8. 9 .... 308
2, 1 . .
. . 269
6. 14 ... . 355
10 . .
. . 144
2 . .
. . 366
15 .... 316
11 . .
• . 357
4 . .
. . 353
17 . . 144, 236
14 . .
. . 266
6 . ,
. . 316
20 . .
23 . .
. . 352
. . 275
7 . .
10 . .
253, 322
. . 310
Efheskms.
9. 2 . .
. . 144
11 . .
. . 271
1. 1 .... 269
3 . .
• . 333
12 . .
. . 328
3 . . 191, 216
6 . ,
. . 279
13 . .
165, 360W
5 . . . . 269
9 . .
. . S30
14 . .
159. 375
6 . . .
. 232
12 . .
. . 361
16 . .
218, 301
10 . , .
. 190
10. 2 .
254, 355
17 .
152, 336
13 . . .
. 247
5 . .
. . 238
19 .
. . 218
14 . , .
. «49
10 . .
. . 180
20 .
214, 275
16 . . .
. 262
12 .
. . 165
21 .
. . 379
20 . . .
. 385
16 . .
. . 148
3. 1 .
225, 271
21 . .
. 276
11. 1 . ,
• . 343
2 .
. . . 218
23 . .
. «i3
5 .
. . 276
5 .
. . 218
2. 3 . .
«55, 248
23 .
. . 147
6 .
. . 266
4 . .
. 270
26 .
. . 226
9 .
. . 260
5 . .
. 247
31 .
. . 216
10 .
. 218, 275
8 . . 247, 269,
33 .
. . 107
16 . I
80,278,311
309, 374
12. 2 .
260, 308
18 .
. . 218
9 .... 351
3 .
. . 346
21 .
214, 349
12 . .
. . 229
4 .
. . 340
27 .
. . . 266
15 . .
• «49
6 .
. . 227
4 1 .
. 196, 230
20 . .
. 215
11 .
. . 276
6 .
. . . 170
21 . .
. . 210
12 .
. . 196
8 .
. . 361
3. 8 . .
. 45, 230
19 .
, 275, 308
10 .
. . . 321
9 . .
. S4
20 .
• • 353
11 .
346, 353
10 . .
. . 351
21 .
• ■ • 353
17 .
. . • 353
15 . . s6i, 210
13. 1 .
. . . 278
19 .
. . . 310
18 . 215, 304, 321
4 .
. . . 380
22 .
. 189, 300
19 . . 238, 247»
5 .
305* 346
24 .
. . . 361
4. 1 ... . 240
7 .
• 185, 350
25 .
• . • 193
1-3 .. . 367
13 .
. . . 238
26 .
. . . 314
6 .... 286
31 .
. . . 217
8 . . 180, 251
Galatians.
5. 12 .
14 .
. . . 343
. . . 329
9 . 193, 233, 298
10 .... 276
1. 1 . . 269, 286
17 .
. . . 351
11 . . S15, 189
4 .
. 274, 289
22 .
. . . 381
16 . . 239, 320
6 .
. 576, 324
24 .
, . . 190
17 . . 292, 309
7 .
. . . S76
25 .
. . . 347
18 .... 292
8 .
. . . 551
6. 1 .
. 352, 384
22 . .
. . 307W
9 .
. «5i> 374
2 .
. . . 568
23 . .
. . «26
10 .
. . . 245
3 .
. . . 316
26 . .
. . S32
11 .
. . . 323^
5 .
. 568, 330
28 . .
. . 366
16 .
. . . 262
9 .
. 2P7, 362
30 . .
. . 267
22 .
. . . 361
11 .
56, 332, 332n
31 . .
. . «32
23 .
J28, 361, 366
12 .
. . , 246
32 . .
. . 262
176
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
Ephesians.
Philippians.
Colossians.
CH. VER. PAQK
CH. VEEC
PARE
CH. VEB. PAGB
6. 2 . . . . «37
2. 13 .
. . . 275
2. 5 ... . 369
3 .... 243
15 .
. «6, «65,^
8 .
. . . 353
5 . . . . 2i6
148, 310
9 .
. «i3, S34
12 . . 306, 355
25 .
. . . 234
12 .
. 226, 237
14 ... . 117W
26 .
. . . 3^8
13 .
. 264, 287
16 . . 178, 321
27 .
. . . 148
14 .
. . . «49
18 .... 206
28 .
. . . 297
15 .
. . . . 305
19 . «43, 246, 305
30 .
. . . 241
18 .
. «44, 238
21 .... 238
3. 2 .
. . . 251
19 .
. 251* S-^o
25 .... 275
3 . s
36, 178, 200
20 .
. S49, 264
51 . . 266, 330
5 .
. 217, 259
21 .
. . . «7
.33 ... . 341
8 .
..•33^
22 .
. ai5, 310
6. 2 .... 262
9 .
. . . 306
23 .
. 361, 377
9 .... 234
10 .
. . 54, 387
3. 1-4
. . . 206
10 .... 3-3
12 . S27, 332, 347W
3 .
. 264, 334
14^16 . . .233
13 .
. . . 254
5 .
. . . «54
16 .... 292
15 .
. . . 316
16 .
. S43, 367
18 .... 206
16 .
. . . 360
4. 1 .
. . . 240
21 ... . sz
20 .
. 204, 310
10 .
. . . 526
22 .... 333
21 .
. 3^9* 357
12 .
. . . 175
23 .... 204
4. 2 .
. . . 175
15 .
. . . 175
5 .
. . . 248
17 .
. 346, 353
Philipp/ins.
6 .
7 .
. . . 538
. . . «55
18 .
. . . 307
1. 2 .... 290
8 .
. . . 282
I Thessalonians.
4 . . . . 320
9 .
. . . 240
6 .... 369
10 .
. . . 811
1. 2 ... . 27
9 . . . . 350
13 .
. . . 211
5 .
. . 290
10 . . 166, 267
22 .
. . . 176
7 .
. . 216
11 . . 252, 269
8 .
195, 216
12 .... 298
13 .... 171
Colossiara.
10 .
2. 1 .
. . 366
. . 346
15 . «i5, 290, 317
1. 6 .
. . . 385
3 .
. . 360
16 . . «i5, 189
7 .
. . . 175
4 . .
253. 322
17 .... 189
8 .
. . . 206
6 . .
. . 287
18-23 ... 206
9 .
. 252, 362
12 . .
. . 240
18 .... 246
10 .
. . . 240
14 . .
. . 209
21 ... . 192
10-12
. . . 387
20 . .
. . 380
22 . 315, 321, 345
11 .
. . . 232
3. 3 . .
. . 358
23 ... . 44
13 .
. . ^33
4 . .
. . 330»
27 .... 240
14 .
. . . 381
11 . .
. . 342
28 .... 309
15 .
. . 210
12 . .
. . 342
29 .... 385
16 .
85. *", 334
15 . .
. . 366
30 .... 385
17 .
. . 261
4. 1 . .
. . 193
2. 2 .... 350
23 .
210, 226
5 . .
. . 361
4 . . . . 57
26 .
. . 385
7 . .
. . 279
6 . «i, «56, 356
27 . ,
. . 3"
8 . .
370, 379
7 . . . . «56
28 . .
. . 384
9 . .
. . 304
8 . . . . «56
29 . .
. . 310
10 . .
. . 380
12 ... . 52
2. 1 . .
. . 55
15 . IS
>5, 263, 342
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
177
I Thcssahnians.
]
Timothy.
2 Timothy.
CH. VER.
PAGE
CH
VER.
PAGK
CH
. VER
PAGE
4. 16 .
191, 217
2.
7
. ... 384
4.
15
320
17 .
. . 264
8
. . .S3, 253
16
342
5. 3 .
. . . 342
3.
5
. ... 228
17
107
4 .
• . 351
11
. . . . «53
19
176
6 .
• 340
13
. ... 3^1
21
176
10 .
. . . 264
14
. ... 298
11 .
. . . 300
16
. 248,311,387
Titus
14 .
. . 284
4.
3
. ... 383
1.
3
307
16-22
. . 338
10
. ... 280
7
234
23 .
. . S27
14
.... 273
9
365
24 .
. .366
5.
3
. ... 214
10
293
25 .
. . 274
5
. ... 280
11
211
26 .
. . zion
8
. ... 230
12
388
11
. ... 331
2.
1
365
a Thess
alonians.
14
. . . . «3
3
«53
1. 8 .
10 .
11 .
12 .
2. 1 .
2 .
3 .
9 .
10 .
11 .
13 .
216, 361
. . 253
216, 350
. . 276
268, 335
6.
21
22
23
24
3
4
5
. ... 165
. ... 23s
. . 247, 371
. ... 317
. ... 365
. . 183, 274
. ... 253
3.
4
5
9
11
13
14
5
34>
191
307^*
307
214
216
237
162
• • 199
. . 197
. . 257
. . 197
. . 206
12
13
14
15
. 199, ^51, 382
. . 211, 278
. ... 382
. . S28, 300
6
7
8
10
247,
SIJ,
308
228
301
15 . 8.
3. 1 . .
3 . .
5 . .
10 . .
11 . .
14 . .
17 . .
I Til
^9. ^53. 3"
. . 350
. . 292
238, 342
380, 381
. . 362
. . 321
. . 307
nothij.
1.
2.
2
12
13
17
18
5
8
11
Timothy.
• ' 267, 357
. ... 365
. ... 298
. . 145, 298
. ... 348
. . 239W, 334
. • 178, 194,
332, 382
. . . .314
1.
11 . . .
12 . . .
13 . . .
Philemc
2 . . .
4 . . .
5 . . .
11 . . .
13 . . .
m.
166
175
175
158
278
288
386
^75
1. 3 . .
363, 386
18
20
22
23
. 124,
342,
386
2 . .
. . S41
19
. . . . 203
. .
•
350
4 . .
. . 386
26
. ... 308
. . .
.
183
6 . .
. . 229
3.
3
.... J
. . . . S53
24
• •
176,
183
8 . .
10 . .
247, 386
. • 365
4
9
. . 183, 274
. ... 308
Hehreu
8.
11 . .
*i8, 253
14
. . . . 210
1.
2
. ssS,
217,
278
13 . .
363, 384
16
. . . . 210
3
53,
556,
14 . .
. . 384
4.
3
. ... 365
233,
261,
320
16 . .
. . 20971
6
. ... 335
4
283,
297
18 . .
. . 262
7
. . . . S13
5
. .
266
19 . .
521, 274
10
. ... 213
6
. . .
,
zicn
2. 6 . .
^55. 307
13
. ... 172
7
. . .
.
284
178
INDEX OP SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
Hebrews.
Hebrews.
Hebrews.
CH. VER.
PAGB
CH. VER.
PAGE
CH. VER. PAGE
1. 8 . .
. . 213
7. 21 . .
189, 203
11. 21 ... . 364
9 .
ai3, 252
22 . .
. 234
26 .... 237
14 .
. S3, «36
24 . .
. 201
28 . 87, 227, 366
2. 1 .
. . 297
25 . .
. 368
35 .... 199
3 .
• . 54
27 . .
. 281
37 .... 262
5 .
. . 244
8. 2 . .
. 836
39 . . . . 286
7 .
280, 316
5 . .
180, 322
12. 1 . 831, 868, 379
8 .
. . 55, 211
8 . .
. . 112
2 . . 234, 257
9 .
85, 227,
10 . .
. . 367
5 .... 228
275, 383
11 . .
. . 342
10 .... 235
10 .
. . 270
12 . .
. . 34*
13 . ... 388
13 .
. . 222
13 . .
. 525
15 .... 352
14 .
235, 334
9. 1 . .
. . 849
16- ... . 352
15 .
269, 358
2 . .
. 220
17 . . 840, 273
16 .
. . 384
3 . .
273, 300
18 . . . 34, 227
3. 3 .
. . 283
4 . .
. 170
20 .... 227
5 .
. 860
5 . .
849, 170,
24 . . 826, 283
12 .
i40» 353
276, 368
27 .... 193
13 .
. . . 316
7 . .
839, 236
28 . . . 87, 833
4. 1 .
. . 242
10 . .
849, 232
29 .... 381
2 .
. . 323n
12 . .
107, 281
13. 2 ... . 362
3 .
. . 365
15 . .
. 826
5 .... 341
4 .
. . 180
21 . .
• 239
6 .... 203
6 .
. . 323W
23 . .
222, 283
8 . . 178, 221
8 .
• • 349
25 . .
. 262
12 .... 262
9 .
. . 245
10. 1 . .
. 856
13 .... 379
12 .
165, 276
2 . .
. 362
18 .... 821
16 .
. • 34
6 . .
. 274
19 .... 298
5. 2 .
• • 253
7 . 213,
316, 358
20 .... 214
4 .
. . 197
8 . .
. 274
21 .... 221
7 .
833, 258
9 . 810,
299, 326
23 . . 298, 362
8 . 3
12, 365, 386
10 . .
. 281
11 .
. . 310
18 . .
. ^74
James.
12 .
270, 380
19 . .
. 262
13 .
. . 240
25 . .
. 362
1. 1 .... 360
6. 1 .
• • 233
26 . .
. 274
5 .... 228
2 .
. . 234
30 . .
. 382
6 .... 243
3 .
. . 34on
34 . .
. 380
11 . . 199, 332
4 .
. . 227
37 . .
. 196
13 .... 240
5 .
. . 227
39 . .
. 236
17 . 293, 361, 388
10 .
. • . 357
11. 2 . .
286, 322
18 .... 317
13-16
. . 271
4 . .
. 283
22 ... . 81
14 .
. . 365
8 . .
. 330
24 .... 332
16 .
. . . 38z
9 . .
. 268
25 . . 214, 232
7. 1 .
. . . 208
10 . .
• 199
26 . . 844, 234
2 .
. . 287
12 . .
. 309
27 .... 844
4 .
56, 287, 383
13 . .
. 272
2. 1 .... 219
5 .
. . 365
15 . .
349, 357
2 .... 197
9 .
. . . «8
17 . .
. 3^8
3 .... 197
20 .
. . . 189
20 . . .
. ai6
4 . . 232, 305
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
179
James.
PAGE
. i8i
. 3^8
• 376
. 246
. 559
. 54
55, 3^^
. 552
512, 125
216, 292
«55, 361
165
245
369
368
243
218
147, 2o8w,
307, 319* 340W
■ . 359
. 246
147, 319
245, 266
170
196
260
. S31
, 261
. «i8
. 538
. 180
I Peter.
. . 234
206, 232
212, 216
246, 364
. . 364
. . 214
. . 213
323, 366
. . 247
. . 278
. 290
203, 214,
22), 32371
. . 2IO/1
. . 162
CH. VER.
2. 5
7
9
13
14
17
18
19
21
23
24
3. 1
4
5
7
10
14
17
19
20
21
4. 1
5
10
11
12
13
17
5. 1
2
7
11
12
1. 1
2
3
4
5
10
12
14
18
19
20
21
I Peter.
PAGE
. . 523,537
. 197, 312, 383
• SZ2, 547j S49
• 549
. 269
. 367
. 367
■ 237
. 275
. 327
313* 327
307W, 353
. . 40
. . 307W
. . 367
320, 357
a Peter.
25
348
. 348
• 215
2i5» 234
. 382
229, 320
. 319
. 323W
201, 261
no
547, 221
• 247
. 235
. 357
. 261
261
511
221
332
2 Peter.
. . 174, 216
., . . . 342
. ... 247
. ... 298
• • • • 377
.215, 320, 342
. ... 365
. ... 332
. ... 215
• 298, 318, 367
. • 307, 367
. . . . 206
CH. VEB.
2. 1
4
5
6
11
15
20
22
3. 1
2
3
5
11
14
16
18
PAGE
. . 163
. . 386
525, 302
■ • 233
. . 298
. . 248
181, 347
546, 190
166, 310
241, 367
278, 367
. 286
. 219
. 248
. 310
. 267
I John.
1. 1 . 207, 227, 334
3 .
• . 377
2. 1 .
. . 163W
2 .
274, 3o6«
4 .
. . 54
5 .
. . 238
13 .
. . 292
i4 .
. . 292
15 .
. . 238
19 .
. . 349
21 .
301, 332
3. 1 .
• . 350
3 .
• . . 53
4 .
. . 54, 195
10 .
. . 182
12 .
. . . 292
4. 2 .
. . . 363
4 .
. . 54
8 .
• 194, 332
10 .
. 200, 274
11 .
. . . 347
16 .
. . . 238
17 .
. 273, 350
19 .
. . . 238
5. 3 . I
84, 238, 350
6 .
. . . 286
19 .
21171, 292
20 .
. . . 3«6
2 John.
310
180
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
a John.
Revelation.
Revelation.
CH. VER. PAQK
CH. VER.
PAGE
CH.
VER.
2 .... 385
2. 2t> . .
. 223
12.
17 . . .
3 .
. . . 329
27 . .
. si6
13.
1 . .
7 .
. . . 308
3. 3 . .
. 254
5 . .
8 .
. . . 305
9 . .
• 353
10 . .
10 .
. . . 207
10 . . 2
-im, 233
16 . .
11 .
. . . 235
12 . .
223, 304
18 . .
12 . 106, 172, 284
15 . .
. 343
14.
10 . .
21 . .
223, 261
13 . .
3 John.
4. 1 . .
4 . .
. . 109
. • 49
15.
15 . .
2 . .
262
2 . . . . 141
8 . .
196, 264
6 . .
4 .
. . 45. 309
9 . .
. . 277
16.
9 . .
5 .
. . . 309
10 . .
. 277
14 . .
6 .
. . 240
11 . .
. 200
18 . .
7 .
. . . 275
5. 2 . .
. 200
17.
1 . .
9 .
. 306, 333
7 . .
. 324
10 . .
13 .
269, 331
12-14 .
. 387
18.
4 . .
14 .
. . . 284
13 . .
200, 277
6 . .
6. 1 . .
. 301
9 . .
Jiide.
3 . .
. 301
13 . .
S5.
6 . .
. 240
17 . .
1 .... 231
8 . .
. 262
21-23 .
6 .
S58, 214
11 . .
. 57
22 . .
9 .
. . 298
16 . .
. 277
19.
1 . .
10 .
. . 54
7. 11 . .
. 219
3 . .
14 .
. . 261
12 . . .
. 200
4 . .
18 .
. . 278
14 . .
184, 199
6 . .
19 .
«55, 206
17 . .
. 264
9 . .
24 .
. . 387
8. 3 . . .
. izm
11 . .
25 .
. . 387
7 . . .
. 235
12 . .
8-18 .
. 235
16 . .
Revelation.
9 . . .
. «55
20.
2 . .
13 . .
. 300
12 . .
1. 4 . . 196, 224
9. 12 . .
. 301
21.
1 . .
8 .
• 35, 196
15 . .
. 267
13 . .
10 .
206, 262
10. 5 . . .
. 265
16 . .
13 .
• . 284
11. 2 . .
49, ii4
17 . .
18 .
. 30, 361
5 . .
. 347W
21 . .
2. 10 .
. . 199
15 . .
. 293
22.
10 . .
14 .
. . . 252
16 . .
. 219
11 . .
16 .
. . 262
12. 3 . . .
. .67
14 . .
17 .
. . 170
9 . .
S25, 21 m
16 . .
20 .
. . 128»
12 . . .
. 221
PARDON & SON^ PRINTERS, PATERN03TBR ROW, LON»ON.
By the same Author.
Bible Sketches and their Teachings. For Young People. By
£he Rev. Samuel G. Green, b.a. Fcap. 8vo, each 2s. 6d. cloth
boards.
.First Series. — From the Creation to the Exodus of the Children of
Israel.
Second Series. — From the Israelites' Entrance into Canaan to the
end of the Old Testament.
Third Series. — The Life of Christ
Paragraph Bible with Emendations. — The Holy Bible,
according to the Authorized Versions, in Paragraphs and Sections ;
with Emendations of the Text ; also Maps, Chronological Tables
and Marginal References. Royal quarto, large type. Complete in
one volume. Cloth boards, 35s.
• Vol. I. — Genesis to Esther, 16s.
Vol. II. — Job to Malachi, IBs.
Vol. III. — The New Testament, 10s. 6d.
The Annotated Paragraph Bible. — The Old and New Tes-
taments, according to the Authorized Versions, arranged in Para-
graphs and Parallelisms ; with Explanatory Notes, Prefaces, and New
Selection of References. Maps and Engravings. Super-royal 8vo.
Old Testament, boards, 14s.
New Testament, ditto, 7s.
Old and New Testaments, complete in 1 vol. , ditto, 20s.
Old and New Testaments, in 3 vols., boards, 22s.
Large Paper Edition, 1 vol., 28s.
{May he also had in calf and morocco binding, plain and elegant)
Pocket Paragraph Bible; with Maps. 3s. cloth boards;
4s. roan gilt ; 5s. French morocco ; 6s. Turkey morocco ; 7s. ditto,
flexible back ; 8s. best morocco limp, with flaps ; 9s. with gilt clasp.
A Handbook of the English Tongue. By Joseph Angus,
D.D., F.R.A.S., Examiner of English History and Literature to the
London University. 12mo. 5s. cloth boards.
A Handbook of English Literature. By Joseph Angus,
D.D., Examiner of English Literature, etc., at the London Univer-
sity. 12mo. 5s. boards ; 6s. 6d. extra boards.
A Handbook of Specimens of English Literature^ By
J. Angus, i>.d. 12mo. 58. 6d, cloth boards.
luWkatbtts of t§^ lldtgmus Crart Somfg,
A Neiv Introduction to the Study of the Bible. By E. P.
Bareows, D.D., Professor of Biblical Literature, New York. With
Fac-similes of ancient MSS. 8ve. 6s. cloth boards.
The JSistory of England to the Tear 1852. By T. Milner,
A.M., F. E.G. s. 12mo. Two Maps. 5s. cloth boards.
The Elements of English History, By J. C. Curtis, b.a.
For Schools and Families. Is. limp cloth ; Is. 6d. half-bound.
The History of Greece. By the Eev. F. Arnold, b.a.
With Maps and Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 6s. cloth boards.
The History of Rome. By T. Milner, a.m., f.r.g.s. 12mo,
Three Maps. 3s. cloth boards.
Elements of the History of Rome. By J. 0. Curtis, b.a.
24mo. Is. cloth ; Is. 6d, half-bound.
The Elements of Moral Science. By F. Wayland, d.d.,
Professor of Moral Philosophy. Notes and Analysis by Joseph
Angus, d.d. 12mo. 3s. cloth.
A Universal Geography : Historical, Mathematical, Physical,
and Political. By T. Milner, a.m. Maps. 12mo. 5s. boards.
Raley'^s Horce Raulince. With Notes and Supplementary
Treatise, entitled HOE^ APOSTOLIC^. By the Rev. Can©n
BiKKS, M.A., Professor of Moral Philosophy in the University of
Cambridge. With a Map. 12mo. 3s, boards.
Paley^s Evidences of Christianity. Introduction, Notes, and
Supplement. By the Rev. Canon Birks. 12mo. 3s. cloth boards.
The Analogy of Religion. Also Fifteen Sermons. By Joseph
Butler, ll.d. With a Life of the Author, Analysis, etc. By
J. Angus, d.d. 3s; 6d. boards.
The New Biblical Atlas, and Scripture Gazetteer. Twelve
superior Maps and Plans, with descriptive Letterpress. Super-royal
8vo. 2s. 6d. plain ; 4s. outlines coloured j 6s. 6d. on imperial
drawing paper, full coloured, and bound in boards.
56, PATERNOSTER ROW; 65, ST. PAUL'S CHURCHYARD;
AND 164, PICCADILLY.
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
BERKELEY
Return to desk from which borrowed.
This book is DUE on the last date stamped below.
29Apr'49AP
r9Feb55Vl^
f ta 7 19.5g
» —
^TERLIBRARy LOAN
10ADr'58TS
re:c'd l^
APR 1 7 1986
RECORD
»JUL5 1972 4:
J[- OF CALIF.. BERK.
'OGct's^ji^
REC'D LD M3
79 -m AM 7 /)
REC'D LD
JNTERLIBR/S
RY LOAN
OCT 9 1952
AUG 16
1976
UNIV. OF CA
LIF., BERK.
LD 21-100ot-9,'48(B399s16)476
^^•JfjQO
325
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY